BALKANMINE 2013 - Eproceedings (FULL)

This page intentionally left blank.
5th JUBILEE BALKAN MINING CONGRESS
BALKANMINE 2013
Ohrid, Republic of Macedonia
PROCEEDINGS
5th JUBILEE
BALKAN MINING CONGRESS
PROCEEDINGS
18th-21st September 2013

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS
Macedonia, Ohrid, 2013
INTERNATIONAL BALKANMINE CONGRESS COORDINATION COMMITTEE

Msc. Sasho JOVCHEVSKI - Macedonia
Msc. Marjan HUDEJ - Slovenia
Prof. Dr. Slobodan VUJI - Serbia
Dr. Doru CIOCLEA - Romania
Dr. Miodrag GOMILANOVI - Montenegro
Grad. Eng. Emmanouel FROGOUDAKIS - Greece
Dr. Tzolo VOUTOV - Bulgaria
Grad. Eng. Tomo BENOVI - Bosnia and Herzegovina
Prof. Dr. Jani BAKALLBASHI - Albania
Prof. Dr. Tevfik GYAGLER - Turkey
BALKANMINE HONORARY COMMITTEE
Dejan BOSHKOVSKI, President
Jasna IVANOVA-DAVIDOVIC, Vice President
Zoran PANOV
Sonja LEPITKOVA
BALKANMINE CONGRESS ORGANIZING COMMITTEE
Sasho JOVCHEVSKI - AD ELEM
Blagoj GJORGIEVSKI - AD ELEM
Ljupcho TRAJKOVSKI - ZRGIM
Pece MURTANOVSKI - AD ELEM
Trifun MILEVSKI - AD ELEM
Maja JOVANOVA - AD ELEM
Zivko KALEVSKI - AD ELEM
Blagoja MITREVSKI - AD ELEM
Stefan CHETELEV - AD ELEM
Nikolajcho NIKOLOV - Bucim Radovish
Zlatko ILIJOVSKI - GIM
Ljubisha KOSTADINOV - GEING
Andrej KEPESKI-USJE
Goran POPOVSKI - Mermeren kombinat PP
Dragan DIMITROVSKI - Ministry of economy
Kosta JOVANOV - Ministry of economy
Gjorgi SOTIROVSKI - Inspektorat
Radmila KARANAKOVA-STEFANOVSKA - UGD Shtip
Nikolina DONEVA - UGD Shtip
Zoran KOSTOVSKI - Marmo Bjanko PP
Mile STEFANOVSKI - Banjani
Goran STOJKOVSKI - Larin Mramor PP
Lazar PONEV - Masinokop-Kavadarci
Borce GOCEVSKI - Rudnik Sasa
Biljana CRVENKOVSKA-JOVANOSKA - Zletovo i Toranica
Gorgi DIMOV - UGD Shtip
O R G A N I Z A T I O N
BALKANMINE CONGRESS SCIENTIFIC REVIEWERS

Prof. Dr. Zoran PANOV
Prof. Dr. Zoran DESPODOV
Prof. Dr. Risto DAMBOV
Prof. Dr. Dejan MIRAKOVSKI
Prof. Dr. Boris KRSTEV
Prof. Dr. Blagoj GOLOMEOV
Prof. Dr. Mirjana GOLOMEOVA
Prof. Dr. Todor DELIPETROV
Prof. Dr. Milorad JOVANOVSKI
Doc. Dr. Nikolinka DONEVA
Doc. Dr. Goran TASEV
Doc. Dr. Milan MEDVED, Slovenia
Prof. Dr. Milivoj VULIC, Slovenia
Prof. Dr. Jakob LIKAR, Slovenia
Prof. Dr. Vladimir PAVLOVIC, Serbia
Prof. Dr. Vojin COKORILO, Serbia
Prof. Dr. Slobodan TRAJKOVIC, Serbia
Dr. Doru CIOCLEA, Romania
Dr. Miodrag GOMILANOVIC, Montenegro
Eng. Emmanouel FROGOUDAKIS, Greece
Dr. Tzolo VOUTOV, Bulgaria
Dr. Kremena DEDELYANOVA, Bulgaria
Grad. Eng. Tomo BENOVIC, Bosnia and Herzegovina
Prof. Dr. Jani BAKALLBASHI, Albania
Prof. Dr. Tevfik GOYAGLILER, Turkey
Grad. Eng. Mehmet TORUN, Turkey
www.balkanmine.mk
contact@balkanmine.mk
The authors names, surnames,
their titles and affiliations are written
as given by the authors.
Authors have all rights and responsibilities
for the published papers.
No part of this book may be reproduced,
copied, adjusted or changed in any form
or by any means without the permission
by the authors or the publisher.
Photos on the title-page:
Track-type loader excavator at work
- Dmitry Kalinovsky
Miner in a pit
- NTRES Reuters Srdjan Zivulovic
ISBN 978-608-65530-2-9
Preface
Dear Colleagues,
It is my pleasure to wish you a warm welcome in Ohrid, the host city of the fifth Balkan Congress of mining BALKANMINE 2013. It is a privilege that Republic of Macedonia was chosen to be the organizer of the first anniversary
of this eminent scientific event.
Regarding this year's congress, over 300 participants, experts in the field of mining from 14 countries will present
130 scientific papers representing the perspectives of mining in the wider region, and the application of the latest
technologies in the economic activity of crucial importance for the future of energy in the Balkans.
Welcome to Ohrid, I wish you a pleasant stay and a successful business.
Good Luck!
President of the BALKANMINE

Honorary Committee
Preface
Dear Colleagues,
During the past two years we worked with great pride and enthusiasm on the organization of the Fifth Balkan Congress of Mining in order to leave a mark in the history of the Balkan Mining.
We tried to include experts from the mining industry to elaborate 130 papers received from 14 countries and to
make the Fifth richest Jubilee Congress in terms of incoming papers.
At the same time, a lot of companies which are included in the area of mining in Macedonia and abroad decided to
present their products and services at the exhibition which is organized along with the Congress.
Macedonian pearl, Ohrid, is a place which could provide ideal conditions for working on the Congress and to welcome all the participants with its beautiful natural environment.
We are grateful to all board members, all participants and all companies which contributed to organizing of this
Congress and leaving a mark in ten years work of Balkan Committee and BALKANMINE.
We wish a lot of happiness, health and success to all participants and others involved in the operation of the mining
industry in our country and in the world.
Good Luck!
M.Sc. Sasho JOVCHEVSKI

Chairman of the International BALKANMINE
Congress Coordination Committee
MINE SURVEY ........................................................................................................................ 27

MINING AND SAFETY ............................................................................................................ 171
EXPLOITATION .................................................................................................................... 204
GEOPHYSICS IN MINING ..................................................................................................... 258
COMPUTER INTEGRATED SYSTEMS ........................................................................................ 290
ROCK MECHANICS, MASSIF CONTROL AND SLOPE STABILITY .................................................... 318
BALKAN MINERAL INDUSTRY................................................................................................. 415
SYSTEM ENGINEERING ......................................................................................................... 431
MANAGEMENT AND MINING ECONOMICS ................................................................................ 438
MINERAL PROCESSING ......................................................................................................... 521
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING ............................................................................................ 572
RESTRUCTURING AND REENGINEERING .................................................................................. 659
LEGISLATION, NORMS AND EDUCATION ................................................................................. 672
EXPLOITATION OF SOLID MINERAL RESOURCES ...................................................................... 685
MINERAL RESOURCES AND MINE GEOLOGY ............................................................................ 740
HISTORY AND MINE EDUCATION ............................................................................................ 794
Slobodan VUJI, Marjan HUDEJ, Igor MILJANOVI

MULTI-VARIABLE ASSESSMENT OF RISK IN SELECTION OF LOCATION
AND THE WAY OF OPEN PIT MINES OPENING.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Dr. Milan MEDVED, mag. Ludvik GOLOB
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT OF VELENJE MINING METHOD AND ITS GLOBAL USE ................................................................................................................... 7
Prof. Dr. Tzolo VOUTOV, Prof. Dr. Petar DASKALOV
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT OF BULGARIAN MINING INDUSTRY ............................................................................................................................................... 19
MINE SURVEY..................................................................................................................... 27
Aleksandar ERISILO, Nenad RADOSAVLJEVI, Marko PAVLOVI
EXAMINATION OF EXPLOSIVE AND FLAMMABLE PROPERTIES
OF COAL FROM THE IVOJNO DEPOSIT, REPUBLIC OF MACEDONIA......................................................................................................................................... 28
Milan PETROV, Ljubia ANDRI, ivko SEKULI, Zoran BARTULOVI,
Vladimir JOVANOVI, Branislav IVOEVI, Slavica MIHAJLOVI
ENERGY CONVERSION OF MINERAL MATERIALS EXPOSED MECHANICAL ACTIVATION ............................................................................................................. 32
Dimitar ANASTASOV , Atanas MARINSKI, Kiril KUTSAROV
MAIN DEPENDENCIES BETWEEN PILLARS PARAMETERS
WHEN MINING OF RESERVES FROM METASOMATIC DEPOSITS IN LUCKY INVEST jsC ................................................................................................................. 38
Doru CIOCLEA, Ion TOTH, Ion GHERGHE, Cristian TOMESCU, Vlad Mihai PSCULESCU
ANALYSIS OF AN UNDERGROUND EXPLOSION EFFECTS UPON THE VENTILATION NETWORKS ............................................................................................... 44
Metin OZDOGAN
DRAG ENERGY CONSUMPTION PERCENTAGE (DECP) CONCEPT
AS A TOOL FOR COMPARISON OF DIGGING DIFFICULTY (DD) AT DRAGLINE STRIPPING PANELS .............................................................................................. 51
Miodrag ARSI, Sran BONJAK, Vencislav GRABULOV, Meri BURZI, Zoran SAVI
RELIABILITY FOR WELDED STRUCTURES OF BUCKET WHEEL EXCAVATORS
BASED ON THE COMPARISON OF OPERATIONAL AND CRITICAL STRESSES ................................................................................................................................ 57
Ivana JOVANOVI, Igor MILJANOVI, Vladan MILOEVI, Dejan TODOROVI, Ljubia ANDRI, Zoran BARTULOVI
INFLUENCE OF SIPX AND AP5500 COLLECTORS
ON THE RECOVERY OF COPPER AND PRECIOUS METALS FROM ORE DEPOSIT TENKA-3 .......................................................................................................... 64
Svetomir MAKSIMOVI, Igor MILJANOVI, Ivana IVOJINOVI MILJANOVI, Milena JOSIPOVI PEJOVI, Aleksandar PETROVSKI
DETERMINING INDIRECT DEPENDENCY OF PRODUCTION SEGMENTS
WITHIN THERMAL POWER PLANT OPEN PIT MINES KOSTOLAC BY MULTISECTORAL MODELS .............................................................................................. 68
Neboja MAKSIMOVI, Sran KNEEVI, Simeun MARIJANAC
CONCEPTUAL SOLUTIONS OF THE MAIN MINING PROJECT OF THE OPEN PIT MINE
UGLJEVIK ISTOK, MINE AND THERMAL PLANT UGLJEVIK REPUBLIC OF SRPSKA ......................................................................................................................... 74
Nenad RADOSAVLJEVI, Aleksandar ERISILO, Zlatko PETROVI
EXAMINATION OF GAS-BEARING QUALITIES OF COAL AND ACCESSORY
ROCKS IN THE IVOJNO BASIN, REPUBLIC OF MACEDONIA ....................................................................................................................................................... 82
Nenad RADOSAVLJEVI, Aleksandar ERISILO, Milinko RADOSAVLJEVI
METHANE INFLUENCE ON COAL DUST EXPLOSIVITY FROM THE MARIOVO DEPOSIT .............................................................................................................. 88
Nenad POPOVI
NEW PERSPECTIVE OPEN PIT MINES IN KOLUBARA LIGNITE BASIN IN SERBIA ............................................................................................................................ 91
Joe PEZDI, Ana R. MEDVED, Edi BURI, Antonija LESAR, Janja ULA SKORNEK,
Lucija PETRINJAK, Tine PEZDI, Robert MORAVEC, Gaper TAVAR, Simon ZAVEK
IMPROVEMENTS IN HIGH PRESSURE SORPTION INVESTIGATIONS OF COAL:
CASE STUDY OF THE VELENJE LIGNITE ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 98
Drago POTONIK, Janez ROER, Milivoj VULI
MONITORING AND PREDICTING SURFACE MOVEMENTS IN THE VELENJE COAL MINE AREA ...................................................................................................105
IX

PROCEEDINGS - CONTENTS
Vujadin ALEKSIC, Srdjan BULATOVIC, Ljubica MILOVIC

NDT IN FUNCTION PREVENTION OF LOSS INTEGRITY OF STRUCTURES LARGE DIMENSIONS ................................................................................................. 112
Naim BAFTIU
STORAGE AND PARAMETERS FRESH GRACE RECLAMATION POWER PLANTS KOSOVO .......................................................................................................... 119
Prof. Stoyan CHRISTOV, dipl. eng. Delcho NIKOLOV
STRATEGY AND TACTICS AT DESIGNING AND EXPLOITATION OF DEEP OPENCAST MINES .................................................................................................... 128
Stojance MIJALKOVSKI, Zoran DESPODOV, Dejan MIRAKOVSKI, Marija HADZI-NIKOLOVA, Nikolinka DONEVA, Borce GOCEVSKI
MINING METHOD SELECTION FOR DEEPER PARTS OF SVINJA REKA ORE DEPOSIT - SASA MINE ..................................................................................... 133
Snezana VUKOVIC, Nenad VUSOVIC, Dejan PETROVIC, Andja SPASIC, Radoje PANTOVIC
THERMOVISION MONITORING OF THE PRODUCTION PROCESS IN FIRE PREVENTION ............................................................................................................. 137
Vladan KASIC, Zivko SEKULIC, Slavica MIHAJLOVIC, Vladimir JOVANOVIC, Radule TOSOVIC
ANALYSIS OF UP-TO-DATE RESEARCH OF GOLD-BEARING ALLUVIUM DEPOSITS
FROM THE RIVER PEK-EAST SERBIA ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 143
Violeta OLAKOVI, Vladan ANOVI
CHOICE OF OBJECTS FOR PROTECTION OF FLYING ASH AND BOTTOM ASH DEPOSITS FROM WATER ................................................................................ 148
ivko SEKULI, Vladimir JOVANOVI, Slavica MIHAJLOVI, Vladan KAI, Dragan RADULOVI, Branislav IVOEVI
TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESS OF VALORIZATION OF CALCIUM CARBONATE
RAW MATERIAL FROM KRALJEVA GORA DEPOSIT ..................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Risto DAMBOV, Todor DELIPETROV, Marjan DELIPETROV, Ilija DAMBOV
ANALYSIS OF THE OBTAINED STATISTICAL MEASUREMENT VALUES OF SEISMICAL BLASTING TREMORS ........................................................................... 158
Saa MITI, Dragan MILOJEVI, Nenad MAKAR, Jovica NIKOLI
UNDERGROUND PIT EXPLORATION IN THE RAJIEVA GORA NEAR BRUS, REPUBLIC OF SERBIA ........................................................................................ 165
MINING AND SAFETY ....................................................................................................... 171

Branko LEKOVI, Vesna KAROVI MARII, Duan DANILOVI
DRILLING FLUIDS AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................................................ 172
Ion TOTH, Constantin LUPU, Doru CIOCLEA, Cristian TOMESCU, Ion GHERGHE
INCREASING THE SAFETY LEVEL IN HARD COAL EXPLOITATION THROUGH INNOVATIVE RESEARCH ................................................................................... 177
Marija KUZMANOVI, Aleksandar MILUTINOVI, Mirko VUJOEVI, Biljana PANI
EVALUATION OF THE EXTERNAL RISKS IN THE COAL MINING COMPANY KOSTOLAC, SERBIA................................................................................................ 182
Slobodan TRAJKOVI, Suzana LUTOVAC, Marina RAVILI, Nikolinka DONEVA
ASSESSMENT OF BLAST EFFECT OPEN PIT ,,RANCI OF SHOCK WAVES
ON CONSTRUCTED FACILITIES AND ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................................................................................... 189
Dejan MIRAKOVSKI, Marija HADZI-NIKOLOVA, Nikolinka DONEVA, Stojance MIJALKOVSKI, Gorgi VEZENKOVSKI
MINERS` EXPOSURE TO GASEOUS CONTAMINATES CURRENT SITUATION AND LEGISLATION ............................................................................................... 200
EXPLOITATION................................................................................................................. 204
Simon ZAVEK, Sergej JAMNIKAR, Jerneja LAZAR, Ludvik GOLOB
CLEAN COAL TECHNOLOGIES AT PREMOGOVNIK VELENJE ........................................................................................................................................................ 205
MSc Trajche BOSHEVSKI, Prof. D-r Risto R. DAMBOV
USAGE OF EMULSION EXPLOSIVES ON SURFACE MINE ZELENIKOVEC - SKOPJE .................................................................................................................. 211
Diana TASHEVA, Zdravko ILIEV
ANALYSIS OF OSCILLATIONS IN THE SLEWABLE SUPERSTRUCTURE
OF THE Sch Rs 1200M BUCKET WHEEL EXCAVATOR .................................................................................................................................................................... 216
Dr. Stefan HINTERHOLZER
THE WORLDS LARGEST COMPACT BUCKET WHEEL EXCAVATOR BY SANDVIK ........................................................................................................................ 223
Shaip LATIFI, Ahmet TMAVA, Ibush JONUZI
PHENOMENON OF STONE THROWING IN OPEN CAST MINING AND QUARRIES ........................................................................................................................ 228
Ivana SIMOVI, Neboja KOSTOVI, Mirko SAVI, Dijana VLAJI
FGD GYPSUM TRANSPORT AND DISPOSAL ALTERNATIVES AT SERBIAN THERMAL POWER PLANTS ..................................................................................... 232
Misad BEI, Rua ELIKOVI
SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF MINING MECHANIZATION DELAYS
IN SURFACE MINE DEPARTMENT OF BLACK COAL MINE BANOVICI ............................................................................................................................................ 237
Duan IMEK, mag. Ludvik GOLOB, mag. Bojan LAJLAR
SHAFT SINKING AT VELENJE COAL MINE ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 245
Maan TRIFUNOVI, Momilo MOMILOVI, Milan PAVLOVI
EXCAVATION OF OVERBURDEN IN THE WATERED WORKING AREA
ABOVE THE ROOF OF COAL IN EASTERN PART OF OPEN PIT DRMNO .................................................................................................................................... 251

GEOPHYSICS IN MINING .................................................................................................. 258

Blagica DONEVA, Marjan DELIPETREV, Todor DELIPETROV, Zoran PANOV
USING SEISMIC METHODS FOR DEFINING OPTIMAL PARAMETERS FOR BLASTING ...................................................................................................................259
Marjan DELIPETREV, Sanja POSTOLOVA, Blagica DONEVA, Gorgi DIMOV, Todor DELIPETROV
APPLYING GEOMAGNETIC RESEARCH METHOD IN ALLUVIAL DEPOSITS OF GOLD ...................................................................................................................262
Zoran PANOV, Risto POPOVSKI, Radmila KARANAKOVA STEFANOVSKA
APPLICATION OF GEOELECTRICAL RESEARCH IN WORKING ENVIRONMENT
FOR SLOPE STABILITY IN SURFACE MINES ASSESSMENT ............................................................................................................................................................267
Munever ERGI, Hamid HUSI, Rasim KOVAEVI, Amira JALMANOVI, Elvedina NUMANOVI
RESPONSE OF STRUCTURES TO SEISMIC EFFECTS OF BLASTING
IN THE VICINITY OF SURFACE MINING RMU BANOVICI ..............................................................................................................................................................270
Vladimir MANEVSKI, Todor DELIPETROV, Blagica DONEVA, Marjan DELIPETROV, Gorgi DIMOV
GEO-ELECTRICAL MODELS BASED ON DATA GAINED FROM THE COAL MINE SUVODOL ......................................................................................................279
Todor DELIPETROV, Krsto Blazev, Blagica DONEVA, Marjan DELIPETREV, Gorgi DIMOV
APPLICATION OF GEOPHYSICAL METHODS IN EXPLORATION
AND EXPLOITATION OF MINERAL RAW MATERIALS ......................................................................................................................................................................284
COMPUTER INTEGRATED SYSTEMS ................................................................................ 290

Aleksandar KRSTEV, Boris KRSTEV, Blagoj GOLOMEOV, Mirjana GOLOMEOVA, Afrodita ZENDELSKA, Zivko GOCEV, Jordan ZIVANOVIK
THE KINETIC MODELING FROM DOMESTIC ORES USING SOFTWARE TOOLS .............................................................................................................................291
T. PENZOV, H. NONCHEV, I. LALOV
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZATION
OF ORE-GRINDING PROCESS IN SEMIAUTOGENOUS MILL ...........................................................................................................................................................294
V. F. SKOROKHODOV, M. S. KHOKHULYA, A. S. OPALEV, V. V. BIRUKOV, R. M. NIKITIN
COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS AS THE RESEARCH TOOL FOR MINERALS SEPARATION PROCESSES ...........................................................................299
Elena GELOVA, Aleksandar KRSTEV, Jordan ZIVANOVIK, Aleksandra STOJANOVA
THE CONVEX PROGRAMMING .........................................................................................................................................................................................................305
Yordanka ANASTASOVA, Nikolay YANEV, Kantcho IVANOV
APPLICATIONS OF MS PROJECT FOR CREATION AND MANAGEMENT SCHEDULES OF MINING ACTIVITIES ...........................................................................310
ROCK MECHANICS, MASSIF CONTROL AND SLOPE STABILITY ...................................... 318

Prof. Georgi MIHAYLOV, Assoc. Proc. Georgi TRAPOV, Mariana TRIFONOVA
ANALYSIS OF STATE OF STRESS AND DEFORMATION OF THE MASSIF
TAKING INTO CONSIDERATION PROBABILISTIC NATURE OF MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS ..............................................................................................319
MSC, Ing. Ylli KOTEMELO, dr. Edmond GOSKOLLI, Ing. Arjo LULE
THE FALL OF THE EMBANKMENT IN BEJAR GEOLOGICAL PHENOMENA ANALYSIS (Case Study) .............................................................................................327
Gorgi DIMOV, Blagica DONEVA, Marjan DELIPETROV, Todor DELIPETROV
CORRELATION BETWEEN SEISMIC VELOCITIES AND GEOTECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF CARBONATE DEPOSITS .................................................................334
Dragan M. MILOEVI, eljko PRATALO, Simeun MARIJANAC, Zoran MILANOVI
FUNCTIONAL REHABILITATION OF THE DISRUPTED NORTHERN SLOPE

OF THE OPEN PIT MINE IRIKOVAC IN THE COAL BASIN OF KOSTOLAC, REPUBLIC OF SERBIA ..............................................................................................338
Huseyin ANKARA, Mehmet AKSOY, Suheyla YEREL, Yasar KESER, Zeynep CICEKCI
DETERMINATION OF SLAKE DURABILITY INDEX ON SATURATED SPHERICAL SAMPLES ..........................................................................................................346
KOZYREV A. A., SEMENOVA I.E., RYBIN V.V., AVETISYAN I.M.
RESULTS OF RESEARCH OF STRESS STRAIN STATE WITHIN DEEP OPEN PITS UNDER TECTONIC STRESSES ........................................................................351
A. A. KOZYREV, V. V. RYBIN, K. N. KONSTANTINOV
FIELD-SCALE INVESTIGATIONS OF THE STRESS FIELD
AND THE EXCAVATION DAMAGED ZONE EXTENT, THE KOLA PENINSULA, RUSSIA ..................................................................................................................359
Sladjana KRSTIC, Vesna LJUBOJEV, Milenko LJUBOJEV, Dusan TASIC, Ivana JOVANOVIC
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS IN THE DAM 2 FLOTATION TAILINGS VELIKI KRIVELJ (SERBIA)............................................................................................366
Vladimir VUTOV, Ventsislav IVANOV
METHODOLOGY FOR GEOMECHANICAL LOGISTICS OF DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
OF A TRANSPORT TUNNEL AT ELATZITE COOPER MINE, BULGARIA .......................................................................................................................................371
Ljupcho DIMITRIEVSKI, Darko ILIEVSKI, Ljubisha KOSTADINOV, Ljube IVANOVSKI, Dragan MILENKOVSKI
GEOMECHANICAL STABILITY MONITORING IN THE REK BITOLA MINES......................................................................................................................................378
Slavica MIHAJLOVI, Duica VUINI, ivko SEKULI, Vladimir JOVANOVI, Dragan RADULOVI
PHYSICAL-CHEMISTRY CHARACTERIZATION OF THE MODIFIED LIMESTONE ............................................................................................................................386
XI

Ing. Petr TOMEK

SLIDING PARTS WEAR INFLUENCE TO DRIVE UNIT LOADING OF LONGWALL SHEARERS......................................................................................................... 392
Ljupce KULAKOV, Zoran GJORGIEVSKI, Zlatko ILIJOVSKI
WORKING AND FINAL SLOPES STABILITY ANALYSIS IN SURFACE EXCAVATION MINE R'ZANOVO .......................................................................................... 397
Vladimir JOVANOVI, ivko SEKULI, Branislav IVOEVI, Slavica MIHAJLOVI, Milan PETROV, Dragan RADULOVI, Vladan KAI
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF LIMESTONE BRIQUETTES WITH BENTONITE FOR CALCIFICATION OF ACID SOIL ................................................................. 404
Sair KAHRAMAN, M. Suat DELIBALTA, Ramazan COMAKLI
EVALUATING THE NOISE FROM BLOCK CUTTING MACHINES
USING THE PHYSICO-MECHANICAL ROCK PROPERTIES .............................................................................................................................................................. 409
BALKAN MINERAL INDUSTRY .......................................................................................... 415

Dragan S. RADULOVI, Slavica R. MIHAJLOVI, Vladimir D. JOVANOVI, Duica R. VUINI
POSSIBILITY OF USING LIMESTONE FROM VOLUJICA- ULCINJ DEPOSIT
AS FILLER IN VARIOUS INDUSTRY BRANCHES .............................................................................................................................................................................. 416
Ass.prof. eljko VUKELI, Marijan KRALJI, Ass.prof. Evgen DERVARI
LENDAVA - THE FIRST GEOTHERMAL CITY IN SLOVENIA ............................................................................................................................................................. 422
SYSTEM ENGINEERING .................................................................................................... 431

Bozica SANDIC, Jelena MILOSEVIC, Radmilo GLISIC
GREEN ENERGY FROM THE NIKOLA TESLA THERMAL POWER PLANTS
IN OBRENOVAC (Cooling Water System Hydropower Plant) ......................................................................................................................................................... 432
MANAGEMENT AND MINING ECONOMICS ...................................................................... 438

Milena POPOVI, Marija KUZMANOVI, Mirko VUJOEVI, Aleksandar MILUTINOVI
MINIMIZATION OF BUSINESS RISKS IN MINING COMPANIES
THROUGH LOADERS-TRUCK EQUIPMENT SELECTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 439
Eng. Lachezar TSOTSORKOV PhD, Eng. Delcho NIKOLOV, Eng. Michail MICHAILOV
CYCLIC FLOW CONVEYOR SYSTEMS - PRESENT AND FUTURE
AT THE ASSAREL MINE OPERATIONS, ASSAREL-MEDET SC - BULGARIA .................................................................................................................................... 445
Prof. Dushan NIKOLOVSKI Ph.D.
METHODOLOGY FOR INVESTMENT DECISIONS IN ACTIVE MINES ............................................................................................................................................... 453
Dr. Ari ARTINYAN, Luben DIMOV
ON-LINE ASH-ANALYZERS AND SCALES IN OPEN COAL MINES - Coal Quality Management System ...................................................................................... 457
Daniela MLADENOVSKA, Ana M. LAZAREVSKA
DETERMINING RELEVANT ATTRIBUTES AND CORRESPONDING INDICATORS
IN A DECISION MAKING CONCEPT FOR SITE-SELECTION OF COAL FIRED THERMAL POWER PLANTS ................................................................................... 464
Ahmet BYTYI, Edmond GOSKOLLI, Idaver HISEINI, Nexhmi KRASNIQI
COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS IN LIMESTONE DEPOSIT, REPUBLIC OF KOSOVO .............................................................................................................................. 470
Marko BABOVIC, M.Sc., Branislav BABIC, B.B.A.
TECHNICAL-ECONOMIC FEASIBILITY OF THE EXECUTED GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS
FOR THE NIKOLA TESLA B UNIT 3 AND SMALL HYDROPOWER PLANT CONSTRUCTION IN OBRENOVAC .............................................................................. 476
Sneana KIRIN, Aleksandar SEDMAK, Tamara SEDMAK, Vesna DAMNJANOVI
MODERN MINING INDUSTRY MANAGEMENT - SYNERGY OF QUALITY AND RISK BASED APPROACH ...................................................................................... 482
Svetomir MAKSIMOVI, Igor MILJANOVI
PHASES AND FIRST RESULTS OF SHAREHOLDING AND PRIVATISATION
IN PRODUCTION ENTERPRISES OF THE COAL INDUSTRY - EXPERIENCES OF OTHER COUNTRIES ......................................................................................... 490
Krastu DERMENDJIEV, George STOYANCHEV
THE MINING INDUSTRY FUTURE ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 496
Zoran PANOV, Radmila KARANAKOVA STEFANOVSKA, Risto POPOVSKI, Kirco MINOV, Blagica DONEVA
ANALYSIS OF THE TRANSPORT DISTANCES
IN DEFINING THE EXPLOITATION COSTS OF DEPTH OPEN PITS OF METALS ............................................................................................................................ 501
Prof. As. Dr. Skender LIPO, Dr. Arben BAKIU
MANAGEMENTS OF MINING RECOVERY......................................................................................................................................................................................... 507
Prof Dr Shyqri KELMENDI, Fehmi AZEMI, Qazim JASHARI, Faton KELMENDI
IMPORTANT ECONOMICAL INDICATORS OF MODERN MINING PRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 513
XII

MINERAL PROCESSING.................................................................................................... 521

Boris KRSTEV, Aleksandar KRSTEV, Mirjana GOLOMEOVA, Zivko GOCEV
THE PRESENTATION OF LEACHING AND BIO-LEACHING FROM DIFFERENT ORES USING SIMPLEX EVOP ..............................................................................522
Boris KRSTEV, Aleksandar KRSTEV, Mirjana GOLOMEOVA, Afrodita ZENDELSKA, Zivko GOCEV
THE OPTIMIZATION AND MATHEMATICAL MODELLING
- THE PRECONDITION FOR INCREASING OF RECOVERIES FROM DOMESTIC MINES ..................................................................................................................527
Milena DANOVSKA, Mirjana GOLOMEOVA, Dejan KARANFILOV, Afrodita ZENDELSKA
TREATMENT OF Fe(III) IONS FROM LEACHING SOLUTIONS WITH NEUTRALISATION AND PRECIPITATION .............................................................................533
Dragan S. RADULOVI, Velimir ANTANASKOVI, Slavica R. MIHAJLOVI, Branislav IVOEVI, Vladimir JOVANOVI
CONCEPT OF SECONDARY AND TERTIARY CRUSHING PLANT FOR PROCESSING LIMESTONE
AND PRODUCTION OF ROCK AGREGATES FROM SUVO DO JOINT-STOCK COMPANY - JELEN DO DEPOSITS .....................................................................539
Ivana JOVANOVI, Srana MAGDALINOVI, Daniela UROEVI, Igor MILJANOVI, Sanja BUGARINOVI, Dragan MILANOVI
POSSIBILITY OF BARITE CONCENTRATION FROM POLYMETALIC SULPHIDE-BARITE ORE
USING GRAVITY AND FLOTATION CONCENTRATION METHODS ..................................................................................................................................................545
Miomir MIKI, Daniel KRANOVI, Milenko LJUBOJEV, Radmilo RAJKOVI
AUSCULTATION OF FLOTATION TAILINGS VELIKI KRIVELJ
WITH EMPHASIS ON THE CURRENT STATE OF KRIVELJS RIVER COLLECTOR, SERBIA .............................................................................................................551
Shyqri KELMENDI, Halil QELA, Bajram MUSTAFA
MINING PRODUCTION OF CONCENTRATES AND BASE METALS IN THE REGION .......................................................................................................................558
Violeta STEFANOVA, Vojo MIRCOVSKI, Violeta STOJANOVA, Gose PETROV, Zoran PANOV
GOLD GRAIN MORPHOLOGY AND COMPOSITION IN SOME LOCALITY IN R. MACEDONIA .........................................................................................................566
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING .................................................................................... 572

Angelica DRGHICI, Gheorghe GHEIE, Lorand TOTH, Marius KOVACS, Cosmin ILIE
IMPACT OF THE WORKFLOW FROM QUARRYS
ON THE SURROUNDING ENVIRONMENT CASE STUDY - SC CUPRUMIN S.A. ABRUD ..................................................................................................................573
Neboja ATANACKOVI, Veselin DRAGII, Vladimir IVANOVI, Jana STOJKOVI, Marina UK, Petar PAPI
ARSENIC IN MINE WATERS FROM ABANDONED BASE-METAL AND GOLD MINING SITES IN SERBIA ........................................................................................581
Orce SPASOVSKI, Daniel SPASOVSKI
HEAVY AND TOXIC METALS AND NUTRIENTS IN SEPARATE PLACES
IN THE RIVER BREGALNICA (EASTERN MACEDONIA) .....................................................................................................................................................................586
Dragoljub UROSEVIC, Branimir ANDELIC, Uros UROSEVIC, Rasa DJUROVIC
CONTRIBUTION TO CONSTRUCTION, REMEDIATION AND RECULTIVATION
OF SECONDARY MINING AND ENERGY FACILITIES IN ORDER TO ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION..........................................................................................590
Dragan DRAOVI, Pavle STJEPANOVI, Klara KONC-JANKOVI, Jasmina NEGROJEVI
THE SEMI-INDUSTRIAL TEST OF THE EXPERIMENTAL SYSTEM
FOR RESEARCH OF THE FLYING ASH AND BOTTOM ASH HYDRO-TRANSPORT .........................................................................................................................597
Dijana VLAJI, Mirko SAVI, Ivana SIMOVI, Lazar ANELI, eljko PRATALO
CONCEPTUAL SOLUTION FOR THE PERMANENT CLOSURE
OF FLY AND BOTTOM ASH DISPOSAL SITE AT TPP KOSTLAC A AND B .......................................................................................................................................600
Daniel KRANOVI, Zoran VADUVESKOVI, Nenad VUOVI, Miomir MIKI, Miodrag IKI
CONCEPTUAL SOLUTION OF DISPOSAL THE OPEN PIT WASTE ROCK AND DEWATERING SYSTEM
IN A FUNCTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION IN EXPLOITATION THE COPPER DEPOSITS
KRAKU BUGARESKU - CEMENTACIJA AND CEROVO SERBIA ..................................................................................................................................................608
Msc Aleksandar LAZAROV
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ACCORDING BEST AVAILABLE
TECHNIQUES FROM IMPACT AT TAILING DAM TORANICA ............................................................................................................................................................611
Orce SPASOVSKI, Daniel SPASOVSKI
GEOCHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND SIGNIFICANCE OF TAILING DUMP
FROM POLYMETALLIC Pb - Zn DEPOSIT ZLETOVO (REPUBLIC OF MACEDONIA) ........................................................................................................................615
Ion GHERGHE, Doru CIOCLEA, Constantin LUPU, Corneliu BOANT, Florin RDOI, Vlad Mihai PSCULESCU
GENERAL VENTILATION FANS USED FOR THE AERATION OF HARD COAL MINES IN JIU VALLEY COAL FIELD .......................................................................622
Milinko RADOSAVLJEVI, Sinia STOJKOVI, Mihajlo GIGOV
PROBLEMS OF STUDY PREPARATIONS ON EVALUATION OF INFLUENCES
ON THE ENVIRONMENT FROM THE LEGAL REGULATIONS PERSPECTIVE...................................................................................................................................629
Grozdana NEI, Miodrag IKI, Saa STOJADINOVI, Sneana VUKOVI, Nenad VUOVI, Radoje PANTOVI
SPECIFICITIES OF OPEN PIT TAMNAVA - WEST FIELD REMEDIATION ..........................................................................................................................................634
Afrodita ZENDELSKA, Mirjana GOLOMEOVA, Boris KRSTEV, Blagoj GOLOMEOV, Aleksandar KRSTEV
THE IMPACT OF THE TAILING DAM OF THE SASA MINE ON SOILS IN THE KOCANI VALLEY ......................................................................................................639
XIII

eljko PRATALO, Simeun MARIJANAC, Dragan M. MILOEVI, Branka JOVANOVI

TECHNICAL RECLAMATION OF THE FLYING ASH AND BOTTOM ASH DEPOT IN THE COAL BASIN KOSTOLAC ...................................................................... 646
Tena SIJAKOVA-IVANOVA, Zoran PANOV, Vojo MIRCOVSKI
OPPORTUNITIES FOR UTILIZATION OF FLY ASH FROM THERMAL POWER PLANT, REPUBLIC OF MACEDONIA.. 653
RESTRUCTURING AND REENGINEERING ........................................................................ 659

Gafur MUKA, Thoma KORINI, Vasil JORGJI, Ramiz BALLA
A CRITICAL REVIEW OF PROBLEMS ASSOCIATED
WITH THE REACTIVATION OF ABANDONED AREAS OF BULQIZA CHROME MINE ...................................................................................................................... 660
Marko RANZINGER, Marjan HUDEJ
REENGINEERING OF OLD RAILWAY TUNNELS LEEKI,
JURGOVSKI AND KRIIKI ON THE MAIN RAILWAY LJUBLJANA-KOPER ...................................................................................................................................... 666
LEGISLATION, NORMS AND EDUCATION ........................................................................ 672

Msc. Jorgaq THANAS, Eng. Bardhyl SHUSHKU
MINING WASTES IN ALBANIA - LEGISLATIVE FRAME AND THEIR STATE ..................................................................................................................................... 673
Nevzat KAVAKLI Ph.D., Sadi CIVELEKOLU, Serdar ULHA M.Sc., kr AFAK M.Sc.
FEATURES OF TURKISH MINING LAW AND ITS IMPLEMENTATION .............................................................................................................................................. 680
EXPLOITATION OF SOLID MINERAL RESOURCES ........................................................... 685

Prof. d-r Risto DAMBOV, Goran STOJKOSKI, Dimitar HRISTOV, Nikola RZANIKOSKI
TECHNO-ECONOMICAL ANALYSES OF THE METHODS FOR PRODUCING OF DIMENSION STONE BLOCKS............................................................................ 686
Goran BLAZESKI, Vladimir DILEVSKI
AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR THE WELL DRAINAGE SYSTEM AT COAL MINE
UNDERLYING SEAM SUVODOL, MINING POWER COMPLEX BITOLA ......................................................................................................................................... 694
anka JOVANOVI, Miodrag PRIBIEVI, eljko PRATALO, Simeun MARIJANAC
LIMESTONE EXCAVATION TECHNOLOGY OF LIEBHERR R 984 C EXCAVATOR AT THE SURFACE MINE MUTALJ.................................................................... 702
Dragica STOJILJKOVIC, Snezana KOMATINA-PETROVIC, Biserka DIMISKOVSKA, Jelena STETIC, Jelena NINIC-TODOROVIC
ARRANGEMENT OF SURFACE EXCAVATIONS OF NON-METAL MINERAL RAW MATERIAL ........................................................................................................ 706
Roman ROER, Marjan HUDEJ, Marko RANZINGER
EXPLOITATION OF SOLID MINERAL RESOURCES IN PAKA QUARRY ........................................................................................................................................... 710
Wolfgang SCHROTH
HIGH UNDERGROUND COAL PRODUCTION,
BY MEANS OF POWERFUL AND HIGH PERFORMANCE SHEARER LOADERS .............................................................................................................................. 715
Nikolinka DONEVA, Marija HADZI-NIKOLOVA, Dejan MIRAKOVSKI, Stojane MIJALKOVSKI
CONSTRUCTION OF HORIZONTAL MINING FACILITIES THROUGH SCHIST`S MASSIVE ............................................................................................................. 721
Pece MURTANOVSKI, m-r Bojan LAJLAR, m-r Janez MAYER, pegel BOO, Marijan LENART
NEW UNDERGROUND COAL MINE MARIOVO ............................................................................................................................................................................. 726
Zoran ILIC, Rajko STOJAKOVIC, Zvonko BELACEVIC
MINING BASIN KOLUBARA - A VARIANT OF THE OPENING OF THE NEW OPEN PIT MINE ......................................................................................................... 731
Zoran DESPODOV, Dejan MIRAKOVSKI, Stojance MIJALKOVSKI, Adjiski VANCHO, Borce GOCEVSKI
OPPORTUNITIES FOR REPAIRING THE UNLOADING BUNKER ON SHAFT GOLEMA REKA - SASA MINE ................ 735
MINERAL RESOURCES AND MINE GEOLOGY .................................................................. 740

Miodrag BANJEEVI, Duncan LARGE
THE TIMOK COPPER-GOLD PROJECT
- GEOLOGY AND MINERALIZATION (TIMOK MAGMATIC COMPLEX - EASTERN SERBIA) ............................................................................................................. 741
Vojislav MRDJA
CONTRIBUTION TO THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE METALLOGENY IN ORE FIELD KOSMAJ-BABE ................................................................................................. 743
Msc Rade STANKOVSKI
GEOLOGY CHARACTERISTICS AT TORANICA DEPOSIT ................................................................................................................................................................ 745
Krsto BLAZEV, Blagica DONEVA, Marjan DELIPETREV, Gorgi DIMOV
QUARTZ RAW MATERIALS IN THE REPUBLIC OF MACEDONIA .................................................................................................................................................... 751
Violeta STOJANOVA, Goe PETROV, Violeta STEFANOVA, Blazo BOEV
GEOLOGICAL AND CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF DIATOMACEOUS EARTH
FROM THE DEPOSIT VESHJE NEAR NEGOTINO - R. MACEDONIA ................................................................................................................................................ 754
XIV

Msc Zlatko ILIJOVSKI, Stojan MIHAILOVSKI, Dragan NASEVSKI, Ljupce PETREVSKI, Blagoj GJORGIEVSKI, Mirjana TRPCEVSKI
DRAINAGE WELLS CONSTRUCTION AS PART OF S.E.M. SUVODOL, REK BITOLA .......................................................................................................................759
Laste IVANOVSKI, Zlatko ILIOVSKI, Elizabeta RALEVA
RESULTS FROM THE MOST RECENT GEOLOGIC INVESTIGATIONS OF THE COAL MINE MARIOVO ...........................................................................................766
Elizabeta RALEVA, Zlatko ILIJOVSKI, Laste IVANOVSKI, Trifun MILEVSKI
RESULTS FROM NEWEST GEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS OF COAL DEPOSIT ZIVOJNO ........................................................................................................772
Rudolf TOMANEC, Predrag LAZI, Radmila GAINA, Sanja BAJI
ORE MICROSCOPY ANALYSIS METHODS IN MINERAL CONCENTRATION PROCESSES..............................................................................................................779
Vojo MIRCOVSKI, Violeta STEFANOVA, Tena SIJAKOVA-IVANOVA, Gorgi DIMOV, Vasko MIRCOVSKI
UTILIZING GABBRO OF SITES PANTELEJ AS CONSTRUCTION-TECHNICAL STONE....................................................................................................................786
HISTORY AND MINE EDUCATION .................................................................................... 794

Jovica NIKOLI, Nenad MAKAR, Dragan MILOJEVI, Saa MITI
CONCEPT OF THE MINING MUSEUM IN KOSTOLAC, REPUBLIC OF SERBIA ................................................................................................................................795
Valentina MANEVSKA, Roze ARSOVSKA
REFORMING THE EDUCATIONAL SYSTEM - BUILDING QUALITY WORKFORCE ...........................................................................................................................802
XV

XIV

PROCEEDINGS
MULTI-VARIABLE ASSESSMENT OF RISK IN SELECTION

OF LOCATION AND THE WAY OF OPEN PIT MINES OPENING
ABSTRACT
Slobodan VUJI1
Marjan HUDEJ2
Igor MILJANOVI3
Mining Institute,
Belgrade, Serbia
slobodan.vujic@ribeograd.ac.rs
2
RGP, Velenje, Slovenia
marjan.hudej@rlv.si
3
University of Belgrade, Faculty
of Mining and Geology, Serbia
imiljan@rgf.bg.ac.rs
The paper is focused on the problem of selecting the most suitable location
and the way of opening the open pit mines, based on the multicriteria risk
assessment. In the introductory section, a presentation of demands regarding the problem of location selection and the way of opening the open pit
mines is given, as well as the risks inherited and generated by the structure,
mutual relationship and spatial and temporal variations of the influential
factors such as geological, hydrogeological, hydrological, geotechnical,
technical, technological, communication, ecological, urbanism, businesseconomics, market, investment and other factors.
The idiosyncrasy in decision making process regarding the selection of location and the way of opening the open pit mines in the design phase reflects
in the presence of uncertainty in defining the causal-consequential relations
and changes of influential factors. In this ambience, the condition of securing the adequate and efficient decision making regarding the location and
the way of opening the open pit mine is to provide a reliable, multicriteria
assessment of the uncertainty and risk for each of the possible alternative
solutions. Accordingly, the paper continues with commented review of
mathematical models potentially applicable in solving mining engineering
designers tasks of this class.
The example of the coal open pit mine Coal series floor layer at the Mining
and Energy Combine Bitola, with seven possible ways of opening the open
pit mine, served as a presentation tool for the purpose of displaying the benefits of the multicriteria Promethee model in risk assessment of selection of
the most suitable opening variant. Discussed, in the conclusions, are the advantages and shortages of the multicriteria analysis, and it is concluded that,
in seeking the most suitable solution, the overall analysis is necessary, together with structuring all of the influential factors.
Keywords
Opencast Mining, Open Pit Mine, Opening Cut,
Risk Assessment, Multi-Variable Analysis
1. INTRODUCTION
Selecting the location and the way of open pit mine opening is not a simple task in Mine design, since the analysis
should embrace a number of factors, limitations and conditions such as geological, hydrogeological, hydrological,
geotechnical, technical, technological, communicational, ecological, urban, business-economy related, market related, investment related, etc. In the practice of design, the easier solution for the problem is usually found after
the simplification by taking only the most significant factors into account. This approach bears two important deficiencies: one is related with the high risk of an error in selecting the most important conditions, limitations and
influential elements, i.e. the high risk of an error in selection of factors (which one is more important and which one
is less important?). The second deficiency is related to the threats to the process of selecting the most favourable
alternative due to the over-simplified image of the real problem [3, 5].
Therefore, the problem of designing the opening cuts at open pit mines is placing before the decision maker - the
design engineer - the high demanding task at the very beginning of the process, i.e. to take into account simultaneous goals when selecting the location and the way of opening. The complexity and the phenomenology of the prob-

PROCEEDINGS
lem single out the conclusion that operations research with its multicriteria decision-making (MDM) methods as a
mathematical-modelling tool, suitable for solving this type of tasks can aid in solving it. The MDM methods branch,
in an accelerated development since the 70s consists of methods such as ELECTRE, PROMETHEE, AHP, etc. It is
common for these methods that analysis starts from the comparison of possible alternative solutions in pairs by
providing the criteria values for each pair, and the level of importance for each criterion for the decision maker. It is
typical for the MDM problems in general that some of their criteria are partially or fully conflicted [3, 4]. This means
that MDM problems are loosely structured, and that the final solution cannot be reached without the active assistance from the decision maker (the designing engineer).
The following are the basic principles of the PROMETHEE II method. The method was applied in solving the task of
selecting the location and the way of opening the Underlying coal series Open pit mine of the coal deposit Suvodol, a part of the Mining and Energy Combine Bitola, Republic of Macedonia. This solution served as an explanatory example, presented in the third section of the paper.
2. PROMETHEE METHOD PRINCIPLES

The PROMETHE method (Preference Ranking Organization METHods for Enrichment Evaluation) is a multicriteria
optimisation method for alternatives ranking. There are four alternatives of the method: the PROMETHEE I give the
partial, PROMETHEE II complete, PROMETHEE III the interval, while PROMETHEE IV presents an extension of the
PROMETHEE III for the continuous sets. Due to the limited paper space and the fact that the PROMETHEE methods
are well-described in numerous operations research books, we will present here only the mathematical-modelling
foundation of the PROMETHEE II method, applied in solving the task of selecting the location and the way of opening the Underlying coal series coal Open pit mine, shown in the following section.
Table 1. PROMETHE method function preferences
Criterion
Simple
Quasi
Preference function
0, if d 0
P(a, b)
1, if d 0
0, if d q
P(a, b)
1, if d q
0,
Linear preference
if d 0
Criterion
Level
Preference function
0,
if d 0
P(a, b) 1/2, if q d p
1
if d 0
Linear preference for the indifference area
Gaussian
P(a, b) d/p, if q d p
1
if d 0
if d 0
0,
P(a, b) (d - q)/(p - q), if q d p
1
if d 0
if d 0
0,
P(a, b)
2
2
1 - exp(d /2 ), if d 0
The PROMETHEE method introduces the preference function P(a,b) for alternatives a and b, valued by the criteria
functions f. The alternative a is better than the alternative b, according to the criterion f if f(a) > f(b), and the preference function is defined as [5]:
if f(a) f(b)
0,
P(a,b)
P(f(a) f(b)), if f(a) f(b)
Within the method, six types of preference function, shown in Table 1. In a shorter form, we introduce d = f(a) - f(b).
For the purpose of multicriteria analysis, the PROMETHEE method introduces preference flows
J
Positive flow: (a )
(a j , am )
j
j
m 1
Negative flow: (a ) J
(am , a j )
j
j
m 1
As a measure of the multicriteria ranking, the PROMETHEE II method introduces the net flow
j (a j ) j (a j ) j (a j ); j 1, , J
,
where: number of alternatives, = 1,,
The alternative is better in a multicriteria sense from k if j k.

PROCEEDINGS
3. AN EXAMPLE OF MULTICRITERIA SELECTION OF OPEN PIT MINE OPENING LOCATION

The example that follows is aimed to illustrate the process of multicriteria selection of the location and the way of
opening the open pit mines. Focus of attention is the actual mining structure with an outstanding problem of the
selection of location and the way of opening. This is the open pit mine Underlying coal series of the Mining and
Energy Combine Bitola, Republic of Macedonia. The peculiarity of problem is that open pit mine Underlying coal
series is opened within the contour of the existing coal open pit mine Suvodol, which is being closed. The new
open pit mine is aimed for excavation of the deeper coal layers that could not be excavated with previous operations [1,2].
The properties of the underlying portion of the deposit are as follows: two coal layers developed in a synclinal depression, at the depth of more than 200 m, complex composition and deposit tectonics, division of coal layers,
presence of underground waters, and difficult geomechanical conditions. Apart from these features, the following
conditions and limitations have the immediate influence:
Manner in which the coal layers are embedded, and the paleo-relief of the underlying coal series;
Waste disposal location in the northern area of the Underlying coal series deposit;
Position of the existing external waste disposal locations for the waste from the opening cut and the outline
of the Underlying coal series open pit mine;
Position of the industrial water accumulation above the north-east boundary of the open pit mine;
Landslides on the slope to the northeast of the open pit mine contour;
Position of the mining operations front at the existing open pit mine Suvodol and the concept of gradual
closure of operations at this open pit mine;
Inevitability of the parallel operations of the existing open pit mine Suvodol and the open pit mine Underlying coal series for seven years;
Connecting the coal transport systems for the open pit mines Suvodol and Underlying coal series;
Synchronisation of cessation of involving the equipment at the Suvodol open pit mine with the continuing
involvement of the equipment at the open pit mine Underlying coal series.
The analysis shows that, in general, two possible ways of opening the open pit mine Underlying coal series exist.
One is the combination of the external and the internal opening cut, while the other is the combination of the external, the internal opening cut and the notch. Several opening alternatives were analysed. The alternatives from
the north, northeast and the west side of the open pit mine were disregarded as the non-favourable due to great
depth of the deposit in these areas, high risks due to extremely unfavourable geomechanical conditions, position of
the northern deposition place and the high running overburden coefficient. The analysis shows that opening the
underlying coal series from within the zone of current mining operations at the existing open pit mine Suvodol is
not feasible. However, the opening from the central eastern, south-eastern and south-western side is feasible, and
seven alternatives of opening the Underlying coal series were defined [1, 2].
The alternatives were processed at the same feasibility level in order to complete the side-by-side multicriteria
analysis and the selection of the most favourable option. Figure 1 shows the situation map with the boundary of
the exploitation extent of the Underlying coal series, position of the considered alternatives of the opening cuts
and the condition of operations at the Suvodol open pit mine.
The parallel multicriteria analysis of the opening alternatives [OC1, OC2, , OC7] for the open pit mine was completed with the PROMETHEE II method. The following factors were taken as the criteria: [1, 2]:
3
K1[min] - Quantity of material to be excavated in the opening cut (m );
K2[min] - Quantity of the pre-production overburden (m3);
K3[max] - Rate of reaching the designed coal production capacity;
K4[min] - Length of transport in the phase of opening and the beginning of open pit mine operation;
K5[max] - Geomechanical conditions (slope stability) in the opening cut operational environment;
K6[max] - Position of the opening cut with respect to the external disposal location.
The table 2 shows quantified values or verbal assessments for each of the seven criteria serving as the input in the
mathematical model PROMETHEE II. Based on the parameters presented in table 2, and the topology of tasks, an
initial matrix (table 3) of the multicriteria analysis in selecting the most favourable alternative of the Underlying

PROCEEDINGS
coal series open pit mine was created with the PROMETHEE II method. Table 4 presents the evaluation flow of the
mathematical-modelling processing, and table 5 the matrix of the analysed alternatives ranking.
Table 2. Criterion values and estimations
Criterion
Opening cut alternative

OC1
OC2
OC3
OC4
OC5
OC6
OC7
K1 (m )
23,812,920
17,637,256
11,430,706
19,596,956
20,986,200
13,411,056
17,723,860
K2 (m3)
7,635,300
4,309,506
8,509,506
4,309,506
4,244,700
4,309,506
13,610,300
3.0
3.0
1.3
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.3
12,764
9,192
7,312
6,989
7,545
8,247
8,997
K5
Favourable
Favourable
Favourable
Favourable
Favourable
Favourable
Favourable
K6
Favourable
Favourable
Favourable
Favourable
Less favourable
Less favourable
Less favourable
K3 (10 t)
K4 (m)
Table 3. Initial matrix
Criteria
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
min
min
max
min
max
max
0.85
0.75
0.65
0.60
23,812,920
7,635,300
3.00
12,764
Min/Max:
Type:
Weight:
Opening
cut alternative
OC1
OC2
17,637,256
4,309,506
3.00
9,192
OC3
11,430,706
8,509,506
1.30
7,319
OC4
19,596,956
4,309,506
3.00
6,989
OC5
20,986,200
4,244,700
3.00
7,545
mp
OC6
13,411,056
4,309,506
3.00
8,247
OC7
17,723,860
13,610,300
1.30
8,997
mp
Phi+
Phi-
Phi
Table 4. Evaluation flow
Opening cut
alternative
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
min
min
max
min
max
max
OC1
23,812,920
7,635,300
3.00
12,764
0.13
0.53
-0.40
OC2
17,637,256
4,309,506
3.00
9,192
0.33
0.27
0.07
OC3
11,430,706
8,509,506
1.30
7,319
0.38
0.38
-0.00
OC4
19,596,956
4,309,506
3.00
6,989
0.39
0.21
0.19
OC5
20,986,200
4,244,700
3.00
7,545
0.37
0.36
0.01
OC6
13,411,056
4,309,506
3.00
8,247
0.42
0.18
0.24
OC7
17,723,860
13,610,300
1.30
8,997
0.36
0.46
-0.09
Table 5. PROMETHEE ranking
Phi+
Rank
Phi-
Rank
Phi
Rank
OC1
0.134
7.0
0.533
7.0
-0.399
7.0
OC2
0.339
6.0
0.266
3.0
0.065
3.0
OC3
0.367
3.0
0.378
5.0
-0.002
5.0
OC4
0.392
2.0
0.206
2.0
0.186
2.0
OC5
0.368
4.0
0.361
4.0
0.007
4.0
OC6
0.418
1.0
0.180
1.0
0.237
1.0
OC7
0.361
5.0
0.455
6.0
-0.095
6.0
Opening cut
alternative
Table 5 shows that the lowest rank holds the alternative OC1 with the ranking coefficient of [0.399]. The highest rank holds the OC6 alternative
with the ranking coefficient of [0.237]. Ranging
from OC1 to OC6 are: OC7 [-0.095], OC3 [-0.002],
OC5 [0.007], OC2 [0.065] and OC4 [0.186].
The common feature of opening cut alternatives
OC2, OC3, OC4 and OC6 is location of opening in
the southeast section of the open pit mine, and
the only slight difference, by construction ele5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS
PROCEEDINGS
ments of the opening cut. According to the PROMETHEE II method, the multicriteria analysis is positioning these
alternatives with ranks 1 through 4, which is expected, and at the same time distinguishes the OC6 alternative, with
significant advantages over alternatives OC2, OC3 and OC4. This notion is focusing the attention to the high sensitivity of the PROMETHEE II method, as a very important feature for the parallel multicriteria analysis and minimisation of risk from the wrongful assessments and conclusions. In this case, without the assistance of the multicriteria
analysis, the designer would have a difficult task to objectively rank and determine advantage of one of the four
alternatives.
Figure 1. Positions of considered alternatives for opening the Underlying coal series open pit mine

PROCEEDINGS
4. CONCLUSION
The paper presents an example of the multicriteria selection of the opening location for the Underlying coal series at the coal deposit Suvodol of the Mining and Energy Combine Bitola, Republic of Macedonia. Our experience shows that any other open pit mine could have been taken as an example, and that it would not diverge the
assessment that multicriteria analysis is an efficient mathematical-modelling tool in design, decision-making and
solving other numerous optimisation problems in mining. The assumption to the successful approach in solving
problems focused in this paper and all the other similar problems as well is the right selection and quantification of
the starting parameters and the set-up of an adequate initial model. Basic difficulties in mathematical modelling
and solving the multicriteria problems are a consequence of the fact that some of the criteria are opposed to each
other. This means that multicriteria problems are generally loosely structured, and that the final solution cannot be
defined without the active participation of the decision maker.
REFERENCES
[1]
Vuji, S., et al. Main Mining Project of Opening and exploitation of coal from the underlying coal series Suvodol Mine, General
Concept of Opening, Development and exploitation, Book I, Rudproekt Skopje, 2008, (252 p.), (in Macedonian)
[2]
Vuji S., et al., Main Mining Project of Opening and coal exploitation of the coal from the underlying coal series Suvodol Mine,
Technical Project of the Opening Cut, Book II/1, Rudproekt Skopje, Macedonia, 2009, (135 p.), (in Macedonian)
[3]
Vujosevic M, Operative Management quantitative methods, Society of Operations researchers of Yugoslavia, Belgrade, 1997,
(262. p.), (in Serbian).
[4]
Nikoli I., Borovi S., Multicriteria optimisation, Centre of the Army of Yugoslavia Military Schools, 1996, (378 p.), (in Serbian)
[5]
Opricovi S., Multicriteria optimisation in civil construction, Civil Engineering Faculty, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, 1998,
(202 p.), (in Serbian).

PROCEEDINGS
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
OF VELENJE MINING METHOD AND ITS GLOBAL USE
ABSTRACT
Dr. Milan MEDVED1
mag. Ludvik GOLOB2
Premogovnik Velenje d. d., Velenje,

Slovenia
1
milan.medved@rlv.si
2
ludvik.golob@rlv.si
The Velenje Coal Mine (VCM) is company with more than 137-year tradition
of lignite mining, solid in the present time and energetically directed towards future. Highly technological developed mining equipment, qualified
employers who manage it putt Velenje Coal Mine in group of the most modern coalmines in the world.
The entire process is based on the consideration of natural characteristics,
provision of adequate safety and the prediction of impacts on the environment. The Velenje mining method, which is being performed by caving the
hanging wall layers is used in one of the thickest lignite seams in the world.
The first beginnings of longwall faces appeared in 1947, while an extensive
introduction of longwall faces began in 1952.
The basic approach of mining using the Velenje mining method (VMM) is that
we extend the coal extraction area also above the protected area at the face
(the tunnel part protected by hydraulic support system). This includes exploitation of natural forces for breaking and crushing the seam. The Velenje mining method is an internationally protected patent that has been proven to
be the most effective method for extracting thick coal seams.
Velenje Coal Mine continues to develop and tries to improve the mining
method. Namely, in 2008 Velenje Coal Mine started mining in the 210-m long
face. This was done for the first time in the history of Velenje Coal Mine, and
the face was also successfully mined. This was performed with the use of
modern mining equipment, especially the new hydraulic support system and
advanced chain conveyor.
In future, the concept of developing the pits of Velenje Coal Mine will be
based on a lower number of faces (in average two), which will, however, be
wider (more than 200 m). Thus, the economic effects for 4 million tons of
annual production may be considerable. It will not be necessary to build as
many roadways and auxiliary facilities, less surveillance will be required, etc.
Such a concept of coal mining must be adequately scientifically studied,
professionally planned and executed using the state-of-the-art technology.
In scope of development strategy number of employees in Velenje Coal Mine
is reducing were number of employees in affiliate companies is increasing.
This will assure working places in future than coalmining will stop.
The paper discusses the existing business cooperation as well as the Velenje
Coal Mine Group transfer of know-how to the companies (mines) from east
south European countries. Recently Velenje Coal Mine is also working more
globally. Establishment of international joint venture company in Asiapacific region happened where some projects are already going on. Beside
that Velenje Coal Mine is cooperating in many research projects which are
oriented in to clean coal technologies. Namely development of modern high
efficiency coal-fired power plants and alternative coal use is future.
Keywords
Coal Mining, Mining Methods, Mining Equipment, Mining Engineering,
Business Cooperation, Research, Clean Coal Technologies

PROCEEDINGS
1. PRESENTATION OF VELENJE COAL MINE

Velenje Coal Mine (VCM) is a technologically highly-developed company were basic activity is coal extraction. It is an
affiliated company of Holding of Slovenian Power Plants (HSE). It is renowned for its outstanding sense of social
responsibility from the viewpoint of solving environmental issues, as well as the ensuring of sustainable development and preservation of jobs for life of aleka valley and broader region. With its more than 137-year tradition of
coal mining (domestic lignite), it is strongly integrated in the Slovenian energy industry. The annual output of Velenje Coal Mine is approximately 4 million tons of lignite coal, which is almost entirely used by the otanj Thermal
Power Plant (TE) for the production of electricity and heat. At the current rate of extraction and with substitute
TE 600 MW unit 6, which has been building, the reserves of Velenje lignite are sufficient till year 2054 (till end of
power plant TE operation) (Termoelektrarna otanj, 2013).
Figure 1. Ground plan view of Velenje Coal Mine objects
Coalmining as a process of underground

coal extraction is often regarded as an
environment-unfriendly process. Since
the economic and social benefits of its
results are significant, environment is
being sacrificed in many areas containing
the reserves of this important energy
resource. Not so long ago, aleka valley
was environmentally ruined and scarred
due to mining and energy industry. When
the company realized that this cannot go
on any longer, it started to remedy the
environment with systematic work and
investments by the TE and VCM. The
remediation of environment has taken
place, and still takes place, without any
special legislation and budgetary funds.
All environmental expenses are already
included in the price of coal.
Since the Velenje Coal Mine strives towards the coalmining in accordance with the principles of sustainable development, it has considerably reduced the unfriendly attitude to the environment. With numerous projects and activities, the company wants to restore a pleasant image of the environment that will be attractive to visitors, tourists
and guests. The company also constantly monitors the environmental impact and promptly eliminates the negative
impact on the environment. It systematically builds the relations with local community which represents one of the
key public target groups. Today, aleka valley no longer shows an image of mining landscape, it is increasingly becoming worthy of modern man and life. This can be noticed when taking walks on cycling and walking trails along
the landscaped shores of the lake, in the sports and cultural facilities built with the assistance of Velenje Coal Mine,
in various possibilities for involvement of employees in the company, the possibilities for education and employment of children, the activities of Sports Society and Retirees Club operating within the Velenje Coal Mine.
The development work at Velenje Coal Mine is taking place in several fields:
Health and safety at work.
Construction of mine facilities, coal extraction and transportation.
Ecology of working environment.
Optimization and automation of coal transportation, transportation and logistics.
Mine drilling.
Energy-efficient company.
Clean coal technologies (CCT).
The largest development projects include the construction of a new production shaft NOP II., the modernization of
work in the construction of roadways, optimization of face line an increase of the overall dimensions of faces and
an energy-efficient company. Investments in to production process modernization and new development projects

PROCEEDINGS
are VCM long-term task. That is why they in past few years intensify preparation of projects for EU and Slovenia cofinancing calls.
Through project Development center energy (Slo. Razvojni center energija), which is co-founded by Slovenian
ministry of economy and ERDF - European Regional Development Fund, VCM research and development work covers three areas: Fixation of CO2 on power plant fly ash, underground coal gasification (UCG) and eco-wind turbines.
They were also successful at projects which are co-founded from Research Fund for Coal and Steel (RFCS). Projects
which are currently performing are COGASOUT (prediction and combating of gas outbursts, draining and degasification of lignite etc.), LOWCARB (optimization of ventilation, water pumping and energy use) and OPTI-MINE (use of
novel information and communication technologies for higher underground mine safety and efficiency). This year
project M-SMARTGRID, which will develop and implement new approach involving mine smart grid system, will
start. VCM is partner in project. We are also part of 7th framework program ongoing project: GHG2E Use of coal
mining gases and its conversion to energy.
At Velenje Coal Mine, the care for employees starts with the provision of adequate conditions for work and continues with the development of technology, work procedures, protective equipment as well as the health and safety at
work as one of the companys strategic objectives. The companies within the Velenje Coal Mine Group support the
development of programs for efficient use of energy and environment-friendly technologies.
Coal seam in the aleka valley basin
The wide area geographically known as the aleka valley can be classified geologically as a tectonic depression
that had been sinking between the otanj, Velenje and Smrekovec faults. The valley was shaped to its current dimensions by sinking and simultaneous accretion of sediments, part of the mass locked in it being the coal seam.
The coal called lignite is relatively young. The origin of Velenje lignite dates back to the period of late Tertiary, early
Pliocene, which took place 2.5 million years ago. The process of lignite mining is accompanied by intensive drainage
of water bearing layers. In the hanging wall above the coal seam, the Pliocene sands are drained, while the drainage
of Triassic substratum and Lithotamnion limestone is conducted in the footwall. Currently, 0.7 m3 of water is
drained per one tonne of extracted coal in order to provide for a safe and undisturbed operation of the Coal Mine.
Figure 2. Longitudinal section of the coal seam and the sequence of extraction
The coal seam under the aleka valley stretches 8.3 km long and up to 2.5 km wide, at a depth between 200 m and
500 m. Its average thickness is 60 m, with maximum values reaching up to 170 m. Velenje Coal Mine gathers these
data by drilling exploration drill holes. There are already more than 620 drill holes, which translate as 210 km of
geological data.
The deposit is closest to the surface on the edges and deepest in the middle. From the geomechanical point of
view, the strength and rigidity of the lignite layer is much higher than the materials in the hanging wall and in the
footwall of the deposit. This fact is important, both for planning excavations as well as for designing the most suitable excavation method, which needs to be adapted to the natural geological and geomechanical conditions. Also,
the caving-in of the materials in the adjacent hanging wall is different from the subsiding hanging-wall layers lying
above, where clay and silt layers are first plastically reshaped, while the layers situated higher up are bent and subsided to the surface, where large depression lakes have been formed as a consequence of the mining activities.

PROCEEDINGS
2. DEVELOPMENT OF VELENJE MINING METHOD AND EQUIPMENT

Velenje mining method
One of the thickest coal seams in the world has spurred the development of innovative mining methods. Velenje
Coal Mine had strived to develop a mining method that would exploit the great thickness of the seam in order to
achieve the highest rate of extraction possible. It is also necessary to take into account that in the beginning of the
development of mining methods the work was performed manually, the explosive use was expensive and the workforce was cheap.
Figure 3. Mining panel and mining direction
The entire longwall excavation process is based on the

consideration of natural characteristics, provision of
adequate safety and the prediction of impacts on the
environment. The basic approach of mining using the
Velenje mining method is that we extend the coal extraction area also above the protected area at the face.
This includes exploitation of natural forces for breaking
and crushing the seam. With the use of modern mining
equipment, especially the hydraulic support system and
advanced chain conveyors, the concept of developing
the pits of Velenje Coal Mine will be based on a lower
number of wider longwall faces.
Figure 4. Excavation scheme of semi mechanized VMM in use 1950 1988
According to Velenje mining method a coal face is divided in the footline section and the hanging wall section. The footline section is 4 to 5
m high and secured by the hydraulic support system which allows mechanized exploitation by using excavation machines - shearer loaders and
the conveyance of coal by using efficient chain conveyers. The hanging
wall section, measuring 5 to 17 m in height, is exposed to dynamic stress
conditions which cause the crumbling of the coal layer; the crushed coal
is then poured onto the conveyor and promptly transported to the surface (Velenje Coal Mine presentation brochure, 2012).
Figure 5. Excavation scheme of VMM in use

till 1991 (left) and state of art excavation
scheme of VMM (right)
10

PROCEEDINGS
The allowed face height at the longwall depends on the thickness of clay insulating layers in the hanging wall, which
protect the face from the inrush of running sand and water. Following the criteria of Safe mining below water
bearing strata at Velenje Coal Mine (RLV RP-36/95 LM, 1995) the allowed working height is calculated according to
preliminary stated variants.
The layer of clay and coal which break in the gob and in loose up the excavated, depending on the depth and the
speed of face retreat. The greatest height of caving-in occurs close behind the face. The working height is determined by the analytical working of mass volume of the caved material, and is confirmed by in situ researches.
Today, the Velenje Mining Method is renowned in the world and referenced in many scientific and technical publications. It is also an internationally protected patent that has been proven to be the most effective method for
extracting thick coal seams.
VMM had strived to highest productivity regarding VCM thick coal seam and natural characteristics. Todays VMM is
also result of intense equipment development were significant part was done by VCM engineers in cooperation with
international equipment producers. In next chapters we represent longwall faces and roof supports development.
Longwall faces excavation process development
In the past years, the development of faces was mainly focused on the coal extraction from lower and upper section, since only highly-efficient and capable faces can ensure the maintenance of competitive ability of coal from
aleka valley. In 2003, mining started in the north wing of Preloge pit (G area), where mining is, due to thin insulation layers, limited to lower face heights and he coal extraction only from lower section.
The mining according to the horizontal concentration system is considerably more expensive, since up to three
times more facilities have to be built for the same amount of extraction. That is why the development has been
oriented in the optimization of mining with coal cutting only. This, above all, demanded the modifications of mining equipment and the optimization of technological process for faces with lengths of more than 200 m. The first
level of the north wing of Preloge pit was mined using four faces with lengths around 140 m. The mining of the first
face (G2/B) with length of 210 m started in 2008, while the third level will be mined using two faces with lengths up
to 220 m.
With the placement of the 210 m face, it was, already on the second level, necessary to build 1,600 m less level
roadways. Thus, the level of roadway construction was reduced from 3.85 m/1000 t to 2.89 m/1000 t of extracted
coal. Less required roadways also means a possibility to optimize the preparation sites (Kolenc, 2007).
With mining works, the coal seam was first opened in the eastern section, closer to the present-day city of Velenje.
The currently active section of the Velenje Coal Mine is situated in the southeast part of aleka valley, closer to
the town of otanj.
Figure 6. Development of mining at Velenje Coal Mine
11

PROCEEDINGS
Currently, the pit of Velenje Coal Mine is opened by five mine shafts and two dipping drifts. With the development
of mining equipment, faces have become increasingly more capable. That is evident from the following tables and
image.
Table 1. Performance measures of mining development at Velenje Coal Mine
YEAR
1970
1980
1985
1990
2000
2010
2011
2012
26.9
12.9
12.3
8.4
2.7
1.89
2.06
1.99
1,326
895.9
1,063
717.6
302.3
322.7
273.1
276.3
0.94
1.14
1.19
1.33
3.53
3.74
3.64
3.79
3,461
4,702
5,106
4,210
3,743
4,011
4,066
3,976
37,182
44,174
47,894
41,283
37,932
44,671
45,005
42,385
Average number of faces per day

Average length of face line (m)
Average daily progress (m)
Total excavated tonnage (000 ton)
Total excavated energy (TJ)
In last years, the annual production stabilized at 4 million tones, which has been achieved with three active faces in
average. Mining has been taking place in three areas, by gradual completion of mining at an individual face. This
was followed by the disassembly and overhaul of equipment, which was then relocated to the newly-prepared face.
In addition, due to the dynamic impacts of mining, certain mine facilities for the new face had to be constructed
after the completion of mining at an individual area.
The increase of capabilities of mining equipment has enabled the increase of face lengths and achieved daily progress. Today, the length of faces is from 140 to 230 m, while the daily progress is between 4 and 9 m. The average
daily production at such a face is between 6,000 and 15,000 t/day. The productivity is from 43 to 60 t/m/day. The
lower table presents the values of daily production, daily progress of faces and other for individual faces which
were operating in 2010, 2011 and 2012.
Table 2. Mine faces production datas for year 2010
Faces
k. -120/B
Number of workdays
Average daily production in 2010 [t/day]
Average daily progress in 2010 [m/day]
Maximum daily production [t/day]
k. -50/B
G2/C
88
202
117
8,338
9,989
8,056
3.63
2.85
5.60
13,019
13,813
10,192
5.3
4.7
8.6
Maximum daily progress [m/day]

Faces 2011
Number of workdays
k. -130/C
k. -50/C
G2/C
k. -5/A
G3/B
185,33
169
21
78,67
41
7,283
9,791
3,854
7,675
4,932
3.52
3,51
2,51
3,21
6,11
12,860
12,657
7,185
11,640
7,298
5.8
5,25
4,9
4,65
8,5
Faces 2012
Number of workdays
k. -5/A
G3/B
k. -65/A
k. -130/B
k. -65/F
G3/C
81
110.67
152
126.33
40
4,525
6,517
8,936
9,201
3,743
4,053
2.76
4.67
2.42
5.38
3.45
4.08
10,351
10,450
12,610
11,009
5,347
6,731
6.6
8.6
4.8
6.4
5.4
6.8
In 2010, mine face k.-50/B was operating for more than one year were more than two million tons of coal was extracted. This was the highest production from one mine face ever in VCM history.
With the mining at Face G2/C, VCM started realizing the project of simultaneous mining of coal at two faces only,
which was set out in 2009. The project does not concern the coal mining only, but also all the projects of coal ex-
12

PROCEEDINGS
traction rationalization and the plans for future years for all support services, which are planning the mining. For
example, they mined at Face k.120/B in the south wing of Preloge pit and Face k.50/B in Pesje pit in 2009 and
2010. At this two faces, mining were up to the heights of 15 meters. Both faces yielded exceptionally good results
in average 18,500 tons of coal per day. In May 2010, VCM completed mining at Face k.120/B and without any interruption, started mining at Face G2/C. The length and placement of faces in the north wing of Preloge pit are limited with overall dimensions of the seam, which will, in the next level, enable the face lengths of up to 250 meters.
Mining at such a length is enabled by the state-of-the-art mining equipment that was already installed at Face G2/C
and represents a result of numerous improvements suggested by the users of equipment and other experts at the
company. It includes the use of modern mining equipment, especially the new hydraulic support system and advanced chain conveyor.
Other modern mine face is mine face k.-50/C which operation started in November 2010. This mine face was completely equipped with latest state-of-the-art hydraulic roof supports and represents one of the major VCM
achievements. In first six months new equipment performed successfully where higher productivity at assured safeth
ty was achieved. On date, 4 of April 2011, on mine face k.-130/A, biggest historical coal production in one single
shift of 5,830 ton and exploitation efficiency rate of 239 ton/man shift was achieved.
The weakness of coal extraction at two faces only is in the standstills. Namely, if one face ceases to operate, this
means a 50-percent loss of production. From this viewpoint, it is very important that the faces and mine facilities
are well-prepared, that the highly-capable equipment at the faces operates without faults, as well as that everyone,
who can contribute, provide for an undisturbed operation. Simultaneous mining at two faces throughout the entire
year means great progress towards the understanding of rationalization and economic viability of mining the Velenje lignite. With the mining concept, VCM resolved the peak loads of main coal transports from the pit and the
lack of workers at faces, as well as reduced the openness of the pit with the required facilities for one face. In addition, the time of consolidating the area, where the mining had taken place beforehand, has been extended. Namely,
VCM intervene in the area alternately and with a delay, which has positive impacts on the improvement of stability
of mine facilities and the mining process. In addition, they need one third less mining equipment, for which they
can, throughout the entire year, plan the installation and construction as well as time scheduled overhauls. We also
have enough time for a quality assembly and disassembly. The facilities may be built without any rush and with
quality. In addition, the required number of maintenance personnel and mining services was reduced. And, what is
most important with two faces, the costs of coal extraction were also lower, which is of key importance for the
realization of Development Plan or the reduction of price of end product electricity generated from VCM coal
(Rudar, May 2010).
Technical and technological parameters of the Velenje Mining Method
By using the Velenje mining method, coal excavation can be fully mechanized; certain phases can even be automated. If natural factors of crumbling of coal in the hanging wall section are successfully integrated, the method
provides a base for high productivity. Parameters and average results of exploitation using the Velenje mining
method are:
face length: more than 200 m
face height: 5 -17 m
face advance: up to 9 m/day
daily production from one face: more than 16,000 t/day
longwall face productivity: up to 70 t/m/day
longwall face efficiency: up to 160 t/working day
annual production: 4 million ton/year (max. 5.1 million ton in the year 1985).
Some best production results of VCM are:
th
33,000 ton - Largest daily production from coal faces (11 September 1997)
23 sections/day - The highest number of sections dismantled in one day from one coal face (23th June 2005)
16,800 ton - Largest daily production from one coal face/sublevel method (28th July 2005)
8.6 m - Highest daily advance with shearer cutting method (31st May 2010)
10,192 ton - Largest daily production from one coal face, advanced with shearer cutting method (06th July
2010)
2,320,514 ton - Record production from one coal face (the face operated for 236 days).
13

PROCEEDINGS
5,830 ton Record coal production from one mine face in one single shift and best exploitation efficiency
rate of 239 ton/man (4th April 2011).
Hydraulic roof support system and mine longwall faces

The Velenje mining method was developed on classical coal faces equipped with friction legs and iron beams. Low
performance, strenuous physical work and high production costs required an accelerated development of mining
equipment and technology. At the beginning of the 1970s, Velenje Coal Mine began an intensive development of
the equipment for mechanized work at longwall faces. A number of hydraulic support systems were tested. Initially,
load-carrying hydraulic support systems were mainly tested. Due to their properties, the results were not very satisfactory.
Therefore a big part of VMM development lays on roof supports system which development has been oriented in
the direction of mechanization of faces for coal extraction from the lower and upper excavation section the ceiling section.
A true revolution in the support system development was represented by the hydraulic support system with a conveyor sitting on a base, lemniscate-guided shield, an option of total control (prevention) of caving-in in the foot-line
section and electro-hydraulic control system.
Figure 7. Development of hydraulic roof support system
For these purposes, VCM tested different hydraulic roof support systems. The faces were up to 60 m long and up to
10 m high. In addition, two mining chain conveyor were used (one for lower excavation section and one for ceiling
section), as well as a shearer with lateral loading. The hydraulic support system had an open hydraulic system with
the use of emulsion.
The mining technology consisted of the following: extraction in the lower excavation section by blasting and loading of coal on the lower conveyor using the shearer, as well as coal extraction from the ceiling section of the face
by gradual blasting (entry in the unsupported ceiling section) and pouring on the ceiling conveyor. The equipment
had several deficiencies: instability of the hydraulic support system, impossibility of gripping the face wall, poor
covering of ceiling surface, poor working conditions due to the open hydraulic system and high consumption of
emulsion. In addition, lengths of faces were short.
The hydraulic support system was soon replaced by a self-advancing hydraulic support system. The equipment of
faces with such a hydraulic support system included the use of a conveyor in the lower excavation section, a shearer and ceiling conveyors. The faces were 100 m long. The technology of extraction consisted of the following: extraction of coal in the lower excavation section by cutting and loading on the lower section conveyor using the
shearer, as well as the extraction of coal from the ceiling section of the face by gradual blasting (entry in the unsupported ceiling section) and pouring on the ceiling conveyor. With the use of such equipment, VCM achieved
higher efficiency, reduction of costs due to lower consumption of emulsion and higher stability of the hydraulic
support system.
In year 1977 VCM construct hydraulic support system in Slovenian factory with cooperation of English company.
Different types of these hydraulic support systems were used and upgrading for more than 15 years. However, the
equipment still had a few deficiencies. The hydraulic support system was not sufficiently stable and did not enable
the gripping of face wall. There were also frequent defects on joints and the shifting element as well as on the sys-
14

PROCEEDINGS
tem for the adjustment of frames. Ceiling surface was poorly covered by ceiling joists, while the capacity of ceiling
conveyors was low (Medved, Peovnik, 1999).
Coal exploitation from upper excavation area is know and used method also in some other world coalmines. Our
VMM is unique in point that coal is excavated in front of mine face at hanging wall. Some world mines have chain
conveyers behind roof supports on which coal is poured through flap. Such mining method is used in China, Australia and in Poland. VCM also used such method in past.
Last development was hydraulic shield roof support were chain conveyer is on support base and with lemniscat
shield leading and electro-hydraulic management. At roof support development VCM always stare to stability, caring capacity, safety against coal crushing and maximum processes mechanization. Specialty of VCM section regarding mining method from upper excavation area is that main telescopic hydraulic legs connect shield and base and
not canopy and base (Rudar, September 2010).
Figure 8. Scheme of VCM state-of-the-art hydraulic support system (section)
In year 2010 VCM purchased new modified and improved hydraulic roof supports. Its development was result of
close cooperation and engineering work of VCM and equipment supplier Bucyrus Europe Gmbh experts. Main goal
at roof support development was to achieve bigger carrying. All suggested improvements which came as from production, design and maintenance departments were analyzed and considered at development. Special attention
was devoted also to equipment mounting and un-mounting process in mine which is often very demanding due to
limited space and harsh conditions in mine. New generation of roof supports is heavier and more robust and is
made of very quality materials and completely designed for VMM use. Because of larger clear surfaces air flow
through mine face is improved. That gives us better working conditions at mine faces.
Beside roof supports high pressure emulsion pumping station which supplies hydraulic emulsion for roof supports
powering was also subject of development. VCM installed automatic one way pressure filter which is made of two
filter sets equipped with manometers and pressure control. Filter is capable of self-cleaning without closing power
supply pressure line.
3. VELENJE COAL MINE GLOBAL BUSINESS COOPERATION

In addition to its basic activity of coal extraction, the Velenje Coal Mine Group, which consists of HTZ Velenje, RGP,
PV Invest and Gost, has also developed many other programmes and products, through which the entire group is
expanding its business operation. Thus, they realise their long-term strategy of reducing their dependence from
coal and develop new programmes and innovative business activities, which are increasingly more market-oriented
and provide jobs outside the coal extraction business.
Velenje Coal Mine projects and prospects in Europe
Velenje Coal Mine has recognised great possibilities for the penetration of Slovenian mining know-how in the area
of Southeast Europe. Due to the constantly increasing needs for electricity, coal will also in the future represent an
important element in the supply of electrical power. This is also the case in Southeast Europe, where practically all
the countries are trying to modernise the existing Coal Mines, while some of them are also considering the opening
of new mine fields.
15

PROCEEDINGS
Thus, Velenje Coal Mine is making great progress in concluding business deals in the region of Southeast Europe,
where the company has, after the successful completion of Mramor project in Tuzla, Bosnia and Herzegovina (BiH),
also established good business relations on Macedonian energy market, while the possibilities for new business
deals are again opening in Bosnia and Herzegovina, Montenegro and in Serbia. Mentioned project Maramor in BiH
was worth almost 4 million EUR and represents first such modernised undergrund mine in country that gived all
previous records. Additionaly we are discussing about bussiness cooperation with mine Kakanj, where subject is
equipment sell and building of mine objects.
Velenje Coal Mine has signed a contract with Macedonian Power Plants (ELEM) for the design of the main mining
project for the opening of Marijevo Coal Mine near Prilep in Macedonia. Till today Velenje Coal Mine completed
technical documentation and prepared everything necessary for the start of production in the above-mentioned
Coal Mine. The documentation included the technological characteristics as well as the design of required equipment, ventilation, transportation, power supply, impacts on the environment and local community, etc. Another
project in Macedonia was for the mine ivojno where our experts cooperate at techno economic survey.
Turks came to us with offer to cooperate at mines modernization on base of biggest world mining equipment producers initiative and advice. We are cooperating at modernization of coal mines in Soma region. In 2012 and 2013
we shipped 80 pieces of used and completely renewed hydraulic roof supports to the Turkish Coal mine Soma
Komur. At the moment they are discussing about some more equipment sale.
This is not the only field were we cooperate with European coalmines. In 2012 we rent our road header machine,
GPK-PV to Slovakian coalmine Hornonitrianske Bane Prievidza. They were very satisfied they bought machine when
rent period was expired. Devices, equipment, and tools, which are part of the machine for the construction of mine
facilities, are licensed for use in underground mines endangered by methane and/or hazardous coal dust. High quality hydraulic and electrical equipment made by European manufacturers is installed on the machine, which allows
low maintenance costs. Machine has standard equipment which fully meets the requirements of ATEX standards for
the equipment group I and category M2, has small mass and small specific pressure on the floor and can make cor2
ridors of various shapes from 7,5 to 22 m in stone or coal.
Of course at all these projects here is not only VCM unselfish mining help but mostly sale of know-how and services.
This is going to be also our future strategy and vision at prospecting on foreign markets.
Velenje Coal Mine projects and prospects in Asia-Pacific region
Beside project in South East Europe, VCM is lately oriented even more globally. In 2010 VCM started cooperation
with Indian company Fairwood Welbeck Natural Resources (FWNR).
In scope of Slovenian government delegation which was on state visit in India 14th June 2011, VCM signed agreement in Delhi with Fairwood Company about joint cooperation and acting on Indian market. At agreement signing
also Slovenian Prime Minister Borut Pahor was present.
In April 2012 we established together with partners joint venture Company in Singapore. Through it VCM would
cover different project in Asia-Pacific region.
VCM is preparing to cooperate in one of the worlds biggest underground coalmines modernization in India. India is
currently among the top three fastest growing economies of the world. As a natural corollary India's energy needs
too are fast expanding with its increased industrialization and capacity addition in Power generation. This is where
'Coal' steps in. In India yearly production of coal is cca 557 million tons and also India has one of the largest known
world coal reserves. Last year they additionally imported more than 80 million tons of coal. At same time they already face deficit of electricity supply (Ministry of Coal, Government of India, 2013). That is why they set very ambitious plan. They will practically double installed electricity power capacities till year 2020 from which 60% will be
coal fired power plants. Majority of them will use domestic coal. They already seek international help for technology development and modernization of mines. In next 20 years they plan to modernize existing coalmines and to
build some new coal mines were they already recognizes that more coal will have to be produced from underground coal mines.
Foreign partners recognized VMM as one of the most productive and environmentally friendly method for thick coal
layers exploitation. This recognition additionally represents approval of VCM engineering knowledge and knowhow. Cooperation in all international projects will be big opportunity for domestic knowledge promotion as for
VCM and for country Slovenia.
16

PROCEEDINGS
4. CONCLUSIONS
Velenje Coal Mine is a technologically highly-developed company, strongly integrated in the Slovenian energy industry and environment with its more than 137-year tradition of lignite mining. One of the thickest lignite seams in
the world has spurred the development of innovative mining methods. The first beginnings of longwall faces appeared in 1947, while an extensive introduction of longwall faces began in 1952. The basic approach of mining using the Velenje mining method (VMM) is that we extend the coal extraction area also above the protected area at
the face. By continuous research this method has undergone various technological improvements. With the purpose of optimizing the face line, the Velenje Mining Method is still being developed and improved in the technological and organizational sense, namely by increasing the production at a single face, the efficiency of seam, safety of
employees, humanization of labor and economy.
Huge steps were done in development of longwall faces equipment were hydraulic roof supports (sections) played
major role. A number of different hydraulic supports were tested were focus was on the coal extraction from lower
and upper excavation area. In year 2010 we started to use newly developed hydraulic roof supports which are heavier, robust, made of quality materials, have bigger carrying and are completely designed for VMM use. Despite fact
that also some other world coal mines are excavating coal from upper excavating area VMM is unique in point that
coal is excavated in front of mine face at hanging wall. Namely production results measured on specific mine face
area are in world top class. Big contribution to that has VCM know-how in VMM and state-of-the art roof support.
VMM is an internationally protected patent that has been proven to be the most effective method for extracting
thick coal seams. In 2007, Velenje Coal Mine received a special reward from the Slovenian Chamber of Engineers for
the innovative approach to engineering. Today, the method is producing enviable results, placing the coalmine in
the global forefront of underground coalmining.
VCM is trying to find the optimal overall dimensions of faces (length, height, width) with regard to the mining area.
This is the reason that they decided to include only two faces in the production at the same time. In 2008, they successfully start to mine the longest face in the history of Velenje Coal Mine - 210 meters.
Other development projects of Velenje Coal Mine are conducted in the area of clean coal technologies (CCT), information technologies and information system, in the field of safety and health at work, energy efficiency etc. In
the field of CCT, we have studied the degasification of lignite (CBM), the capture, transportation and storage of CO2
(CCS) and underground gasification of coal (UCG).
Looking globally world coal consumption is still growing despite global economic crisis. Global trends show that
coal prices will rise. In that point domestic coal production and electricity production are guaranty for security of
supply, electricity prices and economic stability. In addition to basic activity of coal extraction VCM business group
is performing many activities and projects at European and global markets. They are making great progress in the
area of Southeast Europe with offering complete mine management, design, engineering and operational services
with a strong emphasis on safety and enhanced productivity. VCM successfuly completed project of coalmine
Mramor in Tuzla, Bosnia and Herzegovina (BiH) and also established good business relations on Macedonian energy
market, while the possibilities for new business deals are again opening in Bosnia and Herzegovina, Montenegro and
in Serbia. Turks came to VCM with offer to cooperate at coal mines modernization on base of biggest world mining
equipment producers initiative and advice.
Beside projects in South East Europe VCM is lately oriented even more globally. In 2010 they started their cooperation with Indian company Fairwood Welbeck Natural Resources (FWNR). They established joint venture company
which will cover different project in Asia-Pacific region, where biggest focus is on India.
Foreign partners recognized VMM as one of the most productive and environmental friendly method for thick coal
layers exploitation. This recognition additionally represents approval of VCM engineering knowledge, know-how
and modern approach to work. It has to remain like that, since this is indispensable if they want to compete on the
international market ruled by harsh competitive conditions that we can best adapt by trying to work as good as
possible.
REFERENCES
[1]
Golob, Ludvik; Kolenc, Marjan; Kodri, Toma: Dolg odkop tudi v Velenju (Long face in Velenje as well). Velenje: Velenje Coal
Mine, 2007.
[2]
Index mundi, http://www.indexmundi.com, 2013.
17

PROCEEDINGS
[3]
Kolenc, Marjan: Odkop doline 220 m je postal realnost tudi v Velenju, Posvetovanje rudarskih in geotehnolokih strokovnjakov
ob 40. Skoku ez koo (220-m face a reality in Velenje as well, Consultation of mining and geotechnical experts upon the 40th
Jump over the Skin event), Ljubljana, 2007.
[4]
Medved, Milan et al.: Premog in njegova vloga v EU ter na podroju JV Evrope. Prihodnost energije. Ljubljana: Planet GV, 2008.
[5]
Medved, Milan et al.: Strategic aspects of electricity power supply in central and south - eastern Europe - The role of coal and
coal technologies evaluation. RMZ - Materials and Geoenvironment, Vol. 55, No. 2, DD. 277-295. 2008.
[6]
Medved, Milan: Premog - pomemben energent tudi v prihodnosti. Energetika bo risala prihodnost gospodarstev. En.konferenca,
Energetika, marec 2008.
[7]
Medved, Milan; Golob, Ludvik: Sustainable development of Velenje mining method and its global use. International Conference:
progressive technologies of exploration, extraction and beneficiation of mineral deposits, and enviroment protection
Demnovska dolina, Slovakia. November 2012.
[8]
Medved, Milan; Golob, Ludvik: Sustainable development of Velenje mining method and safety & technology information system.
nd
22 World mining congress, Istanbul, Turkey. September 2011.
[9]
Medved, Milan; Peovnik, Ivan: Razvoj tehnologije odkopavanja in odkopnega podporja na Premogovniku Velenje v obdobju od
leta 1875 do leta 1999 (Development of mining technology and mining support at Velenje Coal Mine from 1875 to 1999). Velenje: Velenje Coal Mine, 1999.
[10]
Ministry of Coal. Government of India. http://www.coal.nic.in/welcome.html. 2013
[11]
Premogovnik Velenje. www.rlv.si, 2013.
[12]
RLV RP-36/95 LM: Velenjska odkopna metoda (Velenje mining method). Velenje: Velenje Coal Mine, 1996.
[13]
Rudar. Internal newspaper of Premogovnik Velenje. May 2010.
[14]
Rudar. Internal newspaper of Premogovnik Velenje. November 2010.
[15]
Rudar. Internal newspaper of Premogovnik Velenje. September 2010.
[16]
Seher, Anton et al.: 100 let rudnika lignita Velenje (100 years of lignite mine in Velenje). Velenje: REK, 1975.
[17]
Seher, Anton: Zgodovina Premogovnika Velenje (History of Velenje Coal Mine), Volume 1 and 2. Velenje: Velenje Coal Mine, 1995.
[18]
Statistical Review of World Energy 2013 BP. www.bp.com/statisticalreview. 2013.
[19]
Termoelektrarna otanj. http://www.te-sostanj.si/si/. 2013.
[20]
Velenje Coal Mine presentation brochure: ut za prihodnost (The feeling for the future). Velenje: Velenje Coal Mine, 2007.
[21]
Velenje Coal Mine presentation brochure: The Velenje mining method. 2012.
[22]
Velenje Coal Mine: Razvojni nart Premogovnika Velenje za obdobje 20092018 (The 2009-2018 development plan of Velenje
Coal Mine). Velenje: Velenje Coal Mine, 2009.
18

PROCEEDINGS
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
OF BULGARIAN MINING INDUSTRY
ABSTRACT
Prof. Dr. Tzolo VOUTOV
Prof. Dr. Petar DASKALOV
Scientific and Technical Union

of Mining, Geology and Metallurgy,
Sofia, Bulgaria
mdgm@fnts-bg.org
There are 658 registered deposits with 40.5 billion tons of mineral reserves,
constituting the mineral and raw material resource base of Bulgaria.
For the year 2012 Bulgarian mining industry has produced: energy raw materials - 33.5 mln. tons, metal ores - 30.7 mln. tons, industrial minerals - 10.2
mln. tons, building materials - 23.6 mln. tons. The average annual production
for the period 2000 - 2012 amounts to 89.1 mln. tons or 12.1 tons/person
and 803 tons/sq.km. of the territory of Bulgaria.
Bulgarian mining production disposes of mineral reserves (at annual capacity
of 100 mln. tons) in the coal mining sector - for the coming 66 years; the ore
mining sector is provided for the next 17 years; extraction of industrial raw
materials is guaranteed within a period of 193 years and building materials within 125 years time.
According to the Constitution of the Republic of Bulgaria, all mineral deposits are exclusive public property. The legal framework for managing the Bulgarian mining industry mainly includes: 145 laws; ordinances, regulations and
instructions; methodologies and guidelines, standards and norms related to
mining production and geological surveys; strategies, concepts, national
programmes, European directives and world-wide criteria.
Numerous people are involved in the Bulgarian mining industry: 25-30 thousand production workmen; 120 - 130 thousand employees participating in
mining production; the mining sector contributes 4-5% of the countrys
Gross Domestic Product; the total value of annual mining production
amounts to 2.8 - 3.0 billion Bulgarian levs.
Bulgaria is a mining country and it has been a member of the World Mining
Congress (since 1965), of the European Association of Mining Industries
(since 1991) and of the Association of Mining Experts in the Balkan region BALKANMINE (since 2004).
Keywords
Mineral Reserves, Mining Production, Sustainable Development
1. INTRODUCTION
According to the Constitution of the Republic of Bulgaria dated 1991, Art. 18: All underground natural resources,
beaches, republican roads, as well as waters, forests and parks of national significance, natural and archaeological
reserves specified as such by law are exclusive public property.
The terms and procedure under which the state grants concessions and licenses for prospecting and exploration of
mineral resources are regulated by law. They are managed and controlled for the benefit of the Bulgarian citizens
and society.
As a member of the European Union, Bulgaria strictly complies with the European directives for development of
mining industry at the beginning of the XXI century, namely:
1. Directive 2006/21/EC of the European Parliament on the management of waste from extractive industries.
2. Directive 94/22/EC of the European Parliament on the conditions for granting and using authorisations for the
prospection, exploration and production of hydrocarbons.
19

PROCEEDINGS
3. Development of European mining industry for non-energy purposes (2008). Opinion of the European Economic
and Social Committee.
4. Directive 2009/31/EC of the European Parliament on the storage of carbon dioxide in geological formations.
5. Directive 2008/1/EC concerning integrated pollution prevention and control over the environmental contamination caused by industrial sources.
6. Madrid Raw Materials Declaration 2010 on the future demand for minerals in Europe.
7. EC Guidance on undertaking new nonenergy extractive activities in accordance with Natura 2000 requirements
(2010).
8. Roadmap to a Resource Efficient Europe (European Commission, 2011) for enhancing Europes sustainable development by 2050.
9. Competitiveness of the mining industry by creating a significant contribution to meet the demand of natural
resources and the needs of the national economy and society.
10. Raw Materials Initiative launched by the EU Strategy 2020 for annual planning over the next five years aiming to
foster sustainable supply of raw materials from European sources.
11. European strategic objectives for sustainable development of mining industry by ensuring balanced economic,
social and environmentally responsible approach to the exploration, extraction and processing of mineral resources.
12. Updating and making amendments in the legislative regulations such as the Territory Structure Act, State
Property Act, Municipal Property Act, Waters Act, Waste Management Act, Recultivation of technogenic damaged
terrains, Forestry Act and Law on Protection of Agricultural Lands, etc.
13. Preparation of a national sustainable development strategy for the Bulgarian mining industry by 2030 (ready
project 2013).
2. BULGARIA IS A MINING COUNTRY

According to the classification of the World Mining Congress, the Bulgarian mining industry disposes of mineral
reserves and production of:
. Ores of ferrous, non-ferrous and precious metals: iron, chromium, cobalt, manganese, molybdenum, tantalum,
titanium, tungsten, vanadium, arsenic, bismuth, cadmium, copper, gallium, germanium, lead, tellurium, zinc, gold,
silver, platinum.
B. Industrial mineral resources: asbestos, barite, bentonite, feldspar, fluorite, graphite, gypsum, kaolin, magnesite,
perlite, phosphate, clays, potash, zeolite, salt, talcum, vermiculite, dolomite, refractory earth, kieselguhr, chalk,
ochre.
C. Energy mineral resources: coal, lignite, natural gas, oil, uranium, anthracite, peat, oil shales, shale gas.
D. Building materials: limestone, marl, clays, quartz, marble, trass, sands, gravel, breccia, conglomerate, granite,
syenite, gabbro, travertine, monzonite, gneiss, basalt, andesite, amphibolite, shales, rhyolite.
E. Natural stone-lining materials: for production of blocks, curbs, tiles, paving stones, marbled flooring, rock flour,
Venetian mosaics, souvenirs.
F. Geothermal waters: available at a depth of 500 m. to 3500 m. throughout an area of approximately 50 thousand
sq.km., temperature range from 40C to 120C, flow rate of 15-20 cub.m/s., recoverable energy - up to 2000 MWt.
The Bulgarian geological data base has registered 658 mineral deposits, containing 40.5 billion tons of reserves. For
the purposes of mining production, 350 mines and quarries are being exploited on the territory of 209 deposits
comprising 25.6 billion tons of mineral reserves.
The annual mining production in Bulgaria for the year 2012 includes: energy raw materials and solid fuels - 33.5
mln. tons, metalliferous ores - 30.7 mln. tons, industrial minerals - 10.2 mln. tons, building and natural stone-lining
materials - 23.6 mln. tons or average annual output of 98.0 mln. tons.
20

PROCEEDINGS
Table 1. Production of mineral resources under conditions of market economy, sustainable development and world recession, mln.tons
No.
Mineral
resources
Products
Year
1990
1.
Solid fuels
Coal, lignite, anthracite,

schists, peat, uranium
32.5
27.1
24.7
28.7
27.28
29.5
37.26
33.50
2.
Metalliferous
ores
Copper, lead, zinc, gold,

silver, manganese, iron,
molybdenum
18.6
24.7
26.5
29.4
28.70
29.2
30.46
30.75
3.
Industrial
minerals
Kaolin, clays, bentonite,

gypsum, limestone, barite,
quartz, salt, perlite,
zeolite, etc.
7.2
7.5
8.9
8.8
6.64
9.0
9.98
10.18
4.
Building
materials
Limestone, marl, clays,

marble, trass, granite,
sand, gravel, etc.
15.0
19.4
27.1
38.9
23.59
21.3
25.16
23.30
5.
Natural stonelining materials
Limestone, marble,
breccias, granite, gabbro,
rhyolite, basalt, tuffs,
travertine, gneiss, etc.
0.21
0.31
0.28
0.40
0.365
0.28
0.283
0.314
73.5
79.0
87.5
106.2
86.58
89.30
103.16
98.04
Total
Year
2000
Year
2005
Year
2008
Year
2009
Year
2010
Year
2011
Year
2012*
*Industrial production of these minerals has been ceased: placer gold, anthracite, peat, uranium, iron, tungsten, baryte, chalk, dolomite, quartz,
tuffs, travertine, basalt.
The mineral deposits which are included in the National Balance of Reserves and Resources at the Bulgarian
National Geofund are as follows: 79 energy mineral deposits containing 3.0 billion tons of reserves; 200
metalliferous ore-fields with 654 mln. tons of reserves; 80 quarries for industrial raw materials containing 31 billion
tons of reserves, 300 deposits for building materials with 5.3 billion tons of reserves.
Bulgarian mining production, at a capacity of 100 mln. tons/year, is provided for 66 years in coal mining industry; in
ore mining sector it has resources for the next 17 years; production of industrial raw materials is guaranteed for the
next 193 years, and of building materials - for the coming 125 years.
3. MINERAL POLICY OF THE REPUBLIC OF BULGARIA

In accordance with the national sustainable development strategy in the mining sector and in compliance with the
Bulgarian mining laws, 194 prospecting and exploration licences as well as 483 extraction concessions were
granted by the end of 2012 (Table 2).
Table 2. Licenses and concessions for the Bulgarian mining industry by the end of 2012
No.
Natural mineral resources in Bulgaria
Prospecting and exploration licenses, pcs.
Extraction concessions, pcs.
1.
Metalliferous mineral resources
24
21
20
2.
Solid fuels
3.
Industrial mineral resources
37
71
4.
Building materials
52
298
5.
Natural stone-lining materials
61
57
6.
Oil and gas
12
15
7.
Mining waste materials
Total
194
483
Licenses and permits. In accordance with the Concessions Act and Rules on Its Implementation (after 2006), during
the period from 2000 to 2012 more than 1,000 licenses were issued for prospecting and exploration of mineral
resources, including 75 permits for ore fields, 22 permits for coal fields, 99 permits for non-metallic deposits, 30
exploration permits for oil and natural gas; 513 permits for building materials, 249 permits for natural stone-lining
materials; 15 permits for technogenic (mining waste) deposits.
21

PROCEEDINGS
Concessions. In compliance with the Concessions Act and Rules on Its Implementation, 283 concessions were issued
during the period 2000 - 2012, including 17 extraction concessions for metalliferous ores; 19 concessions for solid
fuels; 53 concessions for industrial minerals; 11 concessions for extraction of oil and natural gas; 150 - for building
materials; 32 for stone-lining materials; 1 concession for development of technogenic (mining waste) deposits.
231 concessions (or 81.6%) out of totally 283 have been granted for opencast extraction.
The revenues collected from prospecting and exploration licenses and extraction concessions for the mining
industry in Bulgaria for the year 2012 totalled up to 185.78 mln. Bulgarian levs, including 34.55 mln. Bulgarian levs
that were given for municipal budgets.
In the year 2012, 164 inspections were performed to check the implementation of the Concessions Act within the
operating licenses and granted concessions. On the basis of 402 presented reports, 17 statements for established
violations were drawn up and 14 penal decisions were issued. As a result of that, fines and property sanctions
amounting to 950 thousand Bulgarian levs were imposed.
4. SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT OF THE BULGARIAN MINING INDUSTRY

The development of Bulgarian mining industry during the period 2000 - 2012 goes through the following stages
(Figure 1):
Period from 2000 to 2008 production growth from 79 mln. tons 106 mln. tons;
Period from 2008 to 2010 recession from 106 mln. tons to 86 mln. tons;
Period from 2010 to 2012 growth in mining output from 86 mln. tons to 103 mln. tons.
Average annual production - 89.06 mln. tons
The recession and respective decline in mining production is mainly due to reduced annual production of building
materials from 39 mln. tons to 23 mln. tons.
Figure 1. Sustainable development of the Bulgarian mining industry during the period 2000-2013 and the recession after the year 2008
The production share of mineral raw materials in the Bulgarian mining industry during the period 2000-2012 is as
follows:
1. Solid fuels - 24 37 mln.tons
2. Metalliferous mineral resources 24 30 mln.tons
3. Industrial minerals 8 10 mln.tons
4. Building materials 20 39 mln.tons
5. Natural stone-lining materials 0.3 0.4 mln.tons
6. Liquid fuels, natural gas 25 thousand tons and 300 mln.cub.m.
The main positions held in the Bulgarian mining production (Figure 2) are those of coal mining sector - 34% and ore
mining sector - 31%. They provide annually 2.3 billion Bulgarian levs or 82% of the total mining output.
22

PROCEEDINGS
Bulgaria annually imports mineral resources to the amount of 30-35 billion USD and it exports mineral raw
materials amounting to 25-30 billion USD.
Figure 2. Participation share of mineral raw materials in the Bulgarian mining production for the year 2012
REFERENCES
Ministry of Economy, Energy and Tourism, Ministry of Environment and Waters, Bulgarian Chamber of Mining and Geology, University of Mining
and Geology St. Ivan Rilski, Scientific and Technical Union of Mining, Geology and Metallurgy, Minstroy Holding, Geotechmin OOD, EvrotestControl AD.
1. Ellatzite-Med AD is a private joint-stock company dealing with extraction and processing of copper and goldcontaining ores. It has been operating Ellatzite open-pit mine located on the territory of the copper porphyry
deposit Ellatzite. The main ore-forming minerals are: chalcopyrite, pyrite, bornite, molybdenite and quartz, from
which copper, gold, silver, molybdenum and other by-products are extracted. The company comprises two main
production units an open-pit mine complex near the town of Etropole and a flotation plant near the village of
Mirkovo.
23

PROCEEDINGS
2. Assarel-Medet JSC Mining and Processing Complex is a leading Bulgarian company for opencast mining and
processing of copper ores. Assarel mine strips out the deposit by driving a spiral trench, 25 m. wide and at a
gradient of 5-8. The designed output capacity of the mine is 14 mln. tons, while the actual production and
processing amounts to around 13 mln. tons/year. The cyclic-flow technology for transportation of overburden has a
capacity of 5,000 tons/hour. In 2012, more than 30 million Bulgarian levs were invested for modernization of
technological equipment, 5.3 million Bulgarian levs were contributed to the corporate environmental programme
and 3.3 million Bulgarian levs were funded in the sphere of occupational safety.
3. Mini Maritsa Iztok EAD has been exploiting the largest lignite coal basin in Bulgaria. The mine complex operates
three open-pit mines throughout an area 240 sq.km. and produces more than 30 mln. tons/year to supply the needs
of three thermal power plants. They provide 40% of the countrys electricity. The existing coal reserves exceed 2
billion tons. For the year 2015 the production programme has foreseen to achieve mining output of more than 32
mln. tons of coal and over 103 mln. tons of overburden.
24

PROCEEDINGS
4. Chelopech Mining EAD. Chelopech mine has been operating the gold-copper-pyrite deposit Chelopech. The
orefield has been opened up by 4 vertical shafts and an inclined spiral working. While cutting out the orebodies,
sublevel caving is mainly applied as well as chamber-and-pillar mining with subsequent filling - hydraulic stowing
and paste-hardening fill with flotation tailings. The main components of the extracted ore mass are: copper, gold,
silver, selenium, tellurium and arsenic. Besides these main metals, some other elements are also found in the
produced concentrates: antimony, bismuth, indium, gallium, thallium, germanium, cadmium, cobalt, palladium,
platinum, molybdenum, vanadium. Chelopech deposit is unique. The mine produces more than 1.5 mln. tons/year
with designed output capacity of 2-3 mln. tons.
5. University of Mining and Geology St. Ivan Rilski

It was established 60 years ago as the Bulgarian Mining University. It consists of four faculties: Mining-Technological
Faculty, Mining-Electromechanical Faculty, Faculty of Geological Exploration and Department of Humanities. The
University of Mining and Geology is renowned for its highly qualified professional staff who have made significant
contributions to the mining science and practice. In 2013 the university obtained institutional accreditation with
assessment rating of 8.72. More than 21,000 mining and geological specialists from Bulgaria and 40 countries in
Europe, Asia, Africa and America have graduated from the University of Mining and Geology.
25

PROCEEDINGS
6. Geotechmin OOD
Geotechmin OOD was established in 1990. The first company activities included rendering engineering and
consulting services for mining industry. Since then the company has gradually expanded its scope of activities in
other industrial sectors and today it successfully operates in the following spheres: mining industry, construction,
infrastructure, environment, real estate and investment projects, trade and vocational training. GEOTECHMIN
Group consists of 21 companies with more than 4,200 employees. Extensive experience in project implementation
under conditions of ongoing production, considerable human and technical resources, good reputation and
partnerships with many companies, financial stability these are among the main company advantages.
26

PROCEEDINGS
MINE SURVEY
27

PROCEEDINGS
EXAMINATION OF EXPLOSIVE AND

FLAMMABLE PROPERTIES OF COAL FROM THE
IVOJNO DEPOSIT, REPUBLIC OF MACEDONIA
ABSTRACT
Aleksandar ERISILO1
Nenad RADOSAVLJEVI2
Marko PAVLOVI3
Mining institute, Belgrade, Serbia
1
aleksandar.djerisilo@ribeograd.ac.rs
2
nenad.radosavljevic@ribeograd.ac.rs
3
marko.pavlovic@ribeograd.ac.rs
The dust created during the mining of coal poses a safety problem during
operations in a mine. The dust is created in all phases of operations, from
excavation, loading, transport and processing to the utilization of coal. It
poses a permanent self-inflammation, burning and explosion hazard. This
paper presents results of the tests on the flammable and explosive
properties of the coal dust originated from the ivojno deposit, Republic of
Macedonia.
Keywords
Coal, Coal Dust, Explosive Properties, Flammability, ivojno
1. INTRODUCTION
The explosion of coal dust is defined as rapid combustion of the dust/air mixture within a limited or partially
limited space, where heat is generated faster than it is being dissipated. This occurs with great amounts of heat
being released, a rapid increase in volume, and development of great pressure. The conditions under which this
quality is expressed are dependent on the explosive qualities, particle size and quantity of coal dust. The most
unfavorable circumstance is if the burning dust has explosive qualities, which in cases of incorrect fire suppression
can create a dust cloud which, in right dust-air concentrations, explodes. These cases are usually followed by not
just material damages but human casualties as well.
2. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Research was conducted according to the following methodologies:
Quality of accumulated dust
- Moisture content according to SRPS B.H8.311:1984
- Ash contents according to SRPS 8.3/0 B.H8.312:1984
- Contents of volatile substances according to IEC 61241-2-1: 1994 (item 5)
Determination of disperse contents through sieve analysis, dry sifting with sieves with numbers from 0.025
to 0.071 by fractions
Determining coal dust explosiveness according to IEC 61241-2-1: 1994 (item 4)
Self-ignition capability of coal dust using the "Olpinski" method DM-004.
Sample treatment
Coal from the "ivojno" basin was extracted through deep mining. 33 coal samples were delivered to the mining
institute of Belgrade for examination of explosive and combustion qualities. Upon arrival to the institute, all of the
samples were dried at room temperature until the moisture levels were equal in all samples. After the drying
process the samples were crushed using a jaw crusher, and after, a vibrating mill upon which the samples were
turned to dust.
Each dust sample was sifted through a sieve of 71m. Coal dust samples were treated using sieve analysis, with
sieve diameters of 63m, 40m and 32m, to determine their median value, which for these examinations amounts
to 183 m.
28

PROCEEDINGS
3. EXAMINATION RESULTS
Determining the natural self-ignition index
Determining the self-ignition qualities of coal was conducted using the Olpinski method. The Olpinski method is
based on the rate of temperature change of coal at the moment of adiabatic oxidation according to Mayers. The
measurement of heat alteration rates in coal (dTdt-1) min-1 is conducted in an increased temperature - the
boiling point of quinoline (232 ). Coal self ignition values are displayed in table 1.
Table 1. Coal self-ignition index values from drill holes
Sample code
Moisture
Wu(%)
Ash
Aw (%)
Volatiles
Vw (%)
EZ 22/11(B 45/34)
11,01
69,22
14,72
31
34
EZ 24/11(B 69/28)
18,52
14,69
38,58
137
168
EZ 25/11 (B 49/34)
16,82
16,70
39,68
150
163
EZ 26/11 (B 47/28)
17,79
19,72
36,22
154
187
EZ 27/11 (B 47/28)
13,07
44,35
25,97
127
146
EZ 28/11 (B 41/34)
16,00
15,45
40,07
115
137
EZ 29/11 (B 41/34)
9,64
58,71
19,88
127
140
EZ 30/11 (B 61/30)
11,31
49,48
24,91
40
45
SIa
(C/min)
Sib
(C/min)
Ignition temperature of coal dust in dust-air mixture

The method of determining the ignition temperatures of samples in the coal dust - air mixtures according to the
Godbert - Greenwald method was used to determine the degree of flammable qualities. This type of testing is
considered today to be the standard for determining the ignition temperature of coal dust. The principle of the
testing consists of determining the lowest temperature at which first signs of ignition appear, i.e. at what
temperature the danger of dust ignition exists. The experiment is conducted by dispersing 0.25 g - 1 g of dust in an
air current, after which the resulting mixture is conducted through a homogenous, clearly defined temperature
zone. Through varying the temperature of the device the ignition temperature of the coal dust is determined, as
displayed in table 2.
Table 2. Ignition temperatures of dust clouds by samples
Sample code
Does not ignite

t (oC)
Ignition temperature
t (oC)
EZ 22/11(B 45/34)
640
650
EZ 24/11(B 69/28)
470
480
EZ 25/11 (B 49/34)
470
480
EZ 26/11 (B 47/28)
440
450
EZ 27/11 (B 47/28)
510
520
EZ 28/11 (B 41/34)
480
490
EZ 29/11 (B 41/34)
530
540
EZ 30/11 (B 61/30)
540
550
Smoldering temperature of coal dust

In layers thicker than 5mm coal dust acts as a heat insulator because it prevents heat conduction which is being
developed due to operation of devices and installation on which it has accumulated. Poor heat conduction
increases the temperature on the surface of devices which leads to oxidation and appearance of a molten core in
the accumulated layer. When a molten core is formed the process of combustion is slowly taking place in the
accumulated dust layer, and crosses into open flame when it comes into contact with other flammable substances.
Smoldering of coal dust cannot be seen in daylight or artificial light until the ember temperature crosses over
500 . The lowest values in which the dust begins to ember are displayed in table 3.
29

PROCEEDINGS
Table 3. Smoldering temperatures

Sample code
Smoldering temperature Tt(C)

220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
3'57"
Time until a smoldering core appears(min,sec)

EZ 22/11
(B 45/34)
No
Smoldering
No
smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
EZ 24/11
(B 69/28)
66.20-70.50
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
7'30"
EZ 25/11
(B 49/34)
105.90-110.00
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
5'43"
EZ 26/11
(B 47/28)
58.90-63.00
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
5'05"
EZ 27/11
(B 47/28)
63.00-67.50
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
EZ 28/11
(B 41/34)
37.00-42.00
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
7'25"
EZ 29/11
(B 41/34)
42.00-45.45
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
9'00"
EZ 30/11
(B 61/30)
46.90-50.00
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
No
Smoldering
9'30"
4'15"
Examination of explosive characteristics

Examination was conducted according to the rulebook of SRPS B.Z1.065 from 1990 in an explosive chamber with a
volume of 40 l. The chamber contains an electric lighter and a vortex jet, through which a mixture of dust and air is
injected. After the mixture is injected, the electric lighter is activated and releases 5 KJ through combustion. The
dust saturation within the testing area of the chamber is within the range of 50 g/m3 to 1500 g/m3. Reading of the
explosion parameters is conducted with electronic devices.
Figure 1 displays the curve of explosive overpressure, which is used to discern the explosion parameters.
Figure 1. Curve of the explosion overpressure
curve of pressure increase within a steel chamber (the curve of explosion overpressure)
the value of explosive maximum overpressure Pmax (bar)
duration of the explosion (millisecond)
time required to achieve maximum overpressure increment dt (millisecond)
Explosiveness examination of all of the samples is displayed in table 4.
30

PROCEEDINGS
Table 4. Display of explosive qualities of coal sorted according to drill holes
Drill site
Average particle size

(m)
EZ 22/11(B 45/34)
22
EZ 24/11(B 69/28)
21
EZ 25/11 (B 49/34)
20
EZ 26/11 (B 47/28)
19
EZ 27/11 (B 47/28)
18
EZ 28/11 (B 41/34)
22
EZ 29/11 (B 41/34)
18
EZ 30/11 (B 61/30)
20
Highest value of
explosive qualities Ek
(bar/s)
Maximum explosion
pressure Pmax(bar)
3,505
1,366
151
208,809
8,235
144
201,094
8,160
156
199,767
8,449
337
117,896
6,985
169
200,506
7,847
41,065
4,873
6,130
2,216
Lower explosiveness
limit Cmin (g/m3)
4. ANALYSIS OF THE EXAMINATION RESULTS

Examination of explosive qualities of coal dust from the site "ivojno" - Macedonia showed the following results:
Out of 33 test samples, 25 displayed explosive qualities
Maximum explosion pressure is Pmax = 8,501 bar
Lower limit for coal sample explosiveness is Cmin = 144 g/m3
The highest value of the explosive quality is Ek = 226,599 bar/s
5. CONCLUSION
According to the laboratory test results, the coal from the "ivojno" - Macedonia site, has shown explosive qualities,
with the lower explosiveness limit being 144 g/m3. The airborne coal dust can be ignited at temperatures of 390
and smoulders at the temperatures of 230 . Based on the conducted tests on the coal samples it can be
concluded that the coal from the "ivojno" basin belongs to the group of highly flammable and explosive coals.
REFERENCES
[1]
N. Radosavljevi, A. erisilo: Report on gas-bearing capacity for the coal at the ivojno deposit, 2012 (in Macedonian)
31

PROCEEDINGS
ENERGY CONVERSION OF MINERAL MATERIALS

EXPOSED MECHANICAL ACTIVATION
ABSTRACT
1
Milan PETROV
Ljubia ANDRI
ivko SEKULI
Zoran BARTULOVI
Vladimir JOVANOVI
Branislav IVOEVI
Slavica MIHAJLOVI
Institute for Technology of Nuclear

and Other Mineral Raw Materials,
Belgrade, Serbia
1
m.petrov@itnms.ac.rs
Most of the reactions and processes are getting more rapidly at higher
temperatures. Temperature dependence of the chemical reaction progress
at best approximates Arrhenius law. The reaction rate may also depend on
the concentration of reactants. We note that the Arrhenius equation (1) in
the exponent has the following units: activation energy (Ea), the molar gas
constant (R) and temperature (T).
k Ae
Ea
RT
Equation 1
The activation energy is actually required specific energy of chemical

reactions, and through the Arrhenius equation also the measure of progress
the chemical reactions. By the analysis of equation 1, we can see that the
following statement is true activation energy and temperature are inversely
proportional units. In the work are made the experiments of
mechanochemical treatment of minerals with a polar organic reagents. On
that way in the ball mill is made its lining. In the above experiments it was
observed that there is a temperature dependence of the progress
mechanochemical reaction or coating process. The idea that made us the
law that applies to chemical changes applied to the adsorption changes that
are essentially physical nature araise when we noticed that there is
connection between the temperature and time of coating mineral materia.
Specifically, we found that with increasing temperature the mineral on ma
decreases the time required to carry grain paneling. As a measure of
progress mechanochemical reaction we used a modified Arrhenius equation.
Adopted activation energy in mechanochemical treatment is complete
impregnation mixture of mineral grains.
Keywords
Activation Energy, Mechanochemical Treatment,
Coating Temperature, Mineral Materia
1. INSTRUCTIONS
In this, paper, the results obtained by investigation coating of precipitated calcium carbonate grain mixture (the
average granulation equal 5 m) by stearic acid are presented. Coated product consisting of hydrophobic grains of
micronic dimensions is widely applicable in production of some chemical, rubber and pharmaceutical products. The
aim of this investigation was to perform of mineral grains coating in cylindric ball mill. Dependence of the coating
process rate constant (k) on temperature was followed. The temperature dependence of reactions involving
chemical changes is best described by the Arrhenius Law [1]. Reaction rate also depends on concetration of
reactants, presence of catalysts and granulation of solid substances. As can be seen, exponent of the Arrhenius
equation (1) involves the values such as activation energy (Ea), molar gas constant (R) and temperature (T), relating
to the specific chemical reaction,
Ea
k A e RT
(1)
32

PROCEEDINGS
The idea to use the law applying to chemical changes for adsorptive changes (essentially physical in its nature) was
born when the relationship between temperature and time of mineral grain mixture coating in ball mill was
noticed. It was noticed that time required for coating of mineral grain mixture decreases with increase of
temperature. In equation (2) adjusted to coating process, mechanical reaction in ball mill should be considered
similar to chemical reaction described by the Arrhenius equation. Besides, in the Arrhenius equation adjusted to
coating process, it is necessary to consider molar gas constant (R) as specific heat capacity, cPsr. According to the
table of specific heats for solid bodies, the value of cPsr at 500C, cPsr=0.21 kcal/kp0. i.e. in the correspondinf unit
system, cPsr=0.05 kJ/kgK. The Arrhenius equation adjusted to coating process has the following form:
k Ae
where
EA
cPsr T
EA
A
cPsr
T
(2)
is activation energy of coating process

is preexponential factorArrhenius constant
is the mean specific heat for chalk at 500C (0.05 kJkg-1K-1, the literature data)
is temperature
Figure 1. Distribution of molecules with the lowest activation energy, at two temperatures
Activation energy of coating of mineral grain mixture in ball mill was also followeed by the grain counter
determined, providing the data about net energy consuption of the mill, according to experimental, models 1 and
2. Activation energy of the coating process (U) was equal to specific energy brought by the device, U, and change
of absolute potentials, S, specified at defined temperature T. In this way a part of energy accumulated in the
mineral grain mixture ana manifestea as a change of internal specific energy, U can be calculaten according to
the following expression:
U W T S
(3)
Experimentally determined internal energy (U) is activation energy of the coating process (EA):
U E A
2.
(4)
THERMOKINETICS OF CHEMICAL CHANGES: THEORETICAL ASPECT
The reason why chemical reactions temperature dependence is quite simple. The fact that two components have
come to a mutual contact is not sufficient for their chemical reaction: theis contact should also have enough
energy for their disintegration and building of new bonds. This law is applicable to the gaseous phase; not only that
two molecules should collide, but they should collide at such energy that atomic rearrangement is made possible.
The key for understanding the Arrhenius Law is Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution of molecular moving rates.
In Fig.1. the main information about the law of thermokinetics appling to the chemical changes are shown. With
the temperature increase, the ratio of the particles with high moving rates i.e. high kinetic energies increases. In
fig.1., the molecules whose kinetic energy equals at least Ea correspond to shaded surface. It is obvious that a their
number is higher if the temperature is higher.
33

PROCEEDINGS
Matematical representation of the temperature dependence is given by the following expression:

Ea
moleculs whose energy equals at least Ea, at the temperature T
e RT
Adjusted equation (2) enables one to discribe mechanism of coating in ball mill by the laws applying to
thermokinetics of chemical changes (Eq.1) [2].
Since coating rate is proportional to the first degree of A (Eq.2) it means that rate equation is equation of the
pseudo first order. Coating rate can be expressed as follows:
Goating rate 1(since the concentracion is constant )

elapsed time
3. MATERIALS
For investigation of thermokinetics of coating process the following materials were used: precipitated calcium
carbonate, granulated calcium carbonate, talcum, zeolite, and sodium carbonate. As coating substance, stearic
acid was used. In this paper, the results on precipitated calcium carbonate coating are presented.
4. METHODS
Thermokinetics of mineral grains coating was investigated in cylindric ball mill with 19 l balls. For heat transfer
onto the mill body, working elements and mineral powder, electric dryer was used.
The rate of power consumption by the mill engine was measured by the Philips digital counter. The data about net
power required for movement of the grain mixture in order to perform its coating were obtained by establishing
two experimental models:
model 1 for measuring the power required to run cylindric mill charged with mineral powder and grinding
bodies;
model 2 for measuring the power required to run cylindric mill charged with mineral powder and grinding
bodies only.
Measurement of the coating degree was based on a simple method of submerging hydrophobic grains mixture in
water. The mixture of hydrophobic grains is considered coated if, after on our in water, with ocassional stirring, no
more then 2% is dissolved. Reaction rate constant was measured on the basis of time, required to attain defined
degree of coating in mill. The rate coefficient is reciprocal to the time required for full adsorption of stearic acid on
the grain surface during coating. Dimension of rate constant of mechanical coating is (s-1). It was possible to
determine the rate constant in described way due to the fact that concentration, i.e. bulk mass as its equivalent for
mineral grain mixture, was more less constant throughout the whole experiment [3].
Figure 2. Layout of the ball mill used for coating experiments
34

PROCEEDINGS
5. RESULTS
It should be emphasized here that coating reaction can not proceed without mechanical energy of the ball mill. As
alredy said, the majority of reactinos proceed faster at higher temperatures. Reaction rate constant (k) is usually
expressed by equation (2), in practice, it is measured after the end of the coating process is reached.
Therefore, Eq.2 adjusted to mechanical coating in logarithmic form is:
E
ln k ln A A
c Psr
(5)
In the coordinate system (l/T, lnk), Eq.5 is represented by the straight line-therefore, we shall try to present our
experimental results in the same way. Measuring of the reaction rate constant was carried out at the temperatures
of 290, 323 and 363K. Obtained results relating temperature dependence of the mineral grains coating are given in
Tab.1, [4, 5]. Coating times were 90, 60 and 18 min.
which means that the (k) values were: 1/5400s= 0.000185; 1/3600s=0.000277; 1/2160s=0.000463.
Table 1. The values of the reaction rate coefficients measured for mineral grains coating
Temperature
290
323
363
Reaction rate coefficient, k(s-1)
0.000185
0.000277
0.000463
Dependence of the rate constant on temperature is given in both tabular and graphic form, in order to notice its
A
Psr . According to the
straght line form, as shown in Fig.2. The slope of experimentally obtained line is
values read from this graph, the value of the slope is 1321,34. On semilogarithmic diagram, a linear equation is
represented, with its free member, lnA. The value of preexponential factor of adjusted Arrhenius equation, is A=58s1
.
Figure 3. Depandence of the rate constant on temperature
7.67786 8.59415
1321.34
0.00275 0.00345
(6)
E
A Slope
c
Psr
In this case, activation energy is
(7)
Slope
35

PROCEEDINGS
EA = slopecPsr = 1321,340.05 = 66,07 kJ/kg
(8)
By connecting experimentally obtained points in in the cordinate system (1/T, lnk), a straight line is obtained.
Physical characterization performed by grain counter
Generally speaking, minerals of the same weight and the same type should behave in the field of active forces in a
similar way. Automatic grain counter is a device with continuous flow of the two-phase system consisting of liquid
electrolyte and solid substance in the form of mineral grain mass transport. In automatic grain counter in case of
monomineral raw material is weight controlled. In accordance with its operating principle, automatic grain counter
should separate in the pump force field the grains of the same mass, if their diameter, volume, specific surface and
passing frequency through the measuring probe are the same. However, in certain materials, if some mechanical
change (such as adsorption) occurres, no identical values of the changing parameters (diameter, volume, specific
surface area, frequency or measurement would be obtained. In such situation, at least two measurings tests should
be performed. The data obtained by such measuring are presented in Tab.2.
Table 2. Physical characterization of grains performed automatic grain counter
Energy condition of
mineral grain mixture
Average grain
diameter, d50 (m)
Grain volume,
V (m3x106)
Specific surface
area, SSA (m2g-1)
Number of
grains, N
Measurement
time, t (s)
Unactivated mixture
4.197
7.843
0.285
95264
25.54
Activated (coated) mixture
4.676
10.240
0.263
106499
25.22
According to the data presented in Tab.2, the difference in the value of the specific surfaces, i.e. potentials, is
about 32%.
Coating and energies
As can be noticed from the above calculations, enough data required for determination of the activation energy,
EA, was available-therefore, it was not necessary to measure this energy some other way. Yet, during coating of the
mineral grain mixture, net power consumption was also measured in accordance with experimental models 1 and 2.
Obtained results on power consuption and calculation of energy spent on coating in ball mill (W) are given in
Tab.3. In the energy balance brought heat energy (S) used for heating of the given mass of mineral grains is very
significant. This data was obtained from the literature, in accordance with the following expression:
S cP1 cP 2 , were cP1 and cP 2 are specific heat capacitiees chalk at 363K and 273K, respectively.
Table 3. Net power (measured in accordance with experimental models) and coating energies
Measured
power
Expression used for

calculation of specific
energy
Coating time, t
(s) at T=290K
Coating time, t
(s) at T=323K
Coating time, t
(s) at T=363K
Experimental model 1
250
5400
3600
2160
Experimental model 2
220
5400
3600
2160
Weight of the mineral

grains in mill M (kg)
Work or energy of
coating in mill, W (kJkg)
W=Pt/M
54
36
21.60
The data about heat energy brought to the mineral grain mixture, obtained from different sources, are presented in
Tab.4. In the same table, specific energies obtained by adjusted equation (2) and energies obtained experimentally
in accordance with expression U W T S , are presented.
Table 4. The values of specific energies given by the phases of mineral grain mixture coating
Time,
t (s)
Energy recorded by mineral grains,

originating from ball work
W/kJkg-1
Activation energy
calculated according to
adjusted Eq.3
EAkJkg-1
5400
54
66.07
3600
36
36
Specific heat brought

between 273 and 363K
S/kJkg-1
Experimentally determined
internal energy U/kJkg-1
0.005
55.36
0.005
37.66

PROCEEDINGS
2160
21.6
0.005
23.41
It should be emphasized here that the results about energy consumption can be checked in grain mixture
characterization by automatic grain counter.
Analysis of results
Experiment was conceived in the way enabling that specific energies, whose effects are recorded on grain
mixture, i.e. specific work spent on mixing mineral grains in ball mill and specific work spent on heating mineral
grain mixture are registered. It was experimentally confirmed that mechanical reaction of the stearic acid
adsorption does not proceed in the absence of katalytic influence of mill balls.
Specific energy provided by balls, spent on coating (W) was measured by electric counter (experimental models 1
and 2) in different time points. Brought specific heat (ST) is calculated by a specific heat capacity ( cP2 cP1 S ,
characteristic for the given temperature) and temperature.
6. CONCLUSION
It can be concluded that adjusted equation (3) is physically sensible and can be used to calculate time necessary for
coating in a ball mill. It is also worth noticing that specific coating energies are lower if the temperature is higher.
In fact, activation energy is reduced due to katalytic influence of temperature.
REFERENCES
[1]
Atkins P.W., Clugston M.J., Principles of Physical Chemistry, Lincoln Colege, Oxford, (1982).
[2]
Anciferov M.S. Spravocnik masinostroitels, Masgiz, Moskva (1963).
[3]
Heinicke G., "Tribochemistry", Academie - Verlag, Berlin, (1984).
[4]
ivko Sekuli, Milan Petrov, Deana ivanovi: Mechanical activation of various cements, International Journal of Mineral
Processing, Vol.74, (2004.), pp 355-363.
[5]
Petrov M. et. al.:Development of technical-technological solution for fillers coating (in Serbian), ITNMS, Belgrade, 1993.
37

PROCEEDINGS
MAIN DEPENDENCIES BETWEEN PILLARS PARAMETERS

WHEN MINING OF RESERVES FROM METASOMATIC DEPOSITS
IN LUCKY INVEST jsC
ABSTRACT
Dimitar ANASTASOV1
Atanas MARINSKI 2
Kiril KUTSAROV3
University of Mining and Geology

St. Ivan Rilski, Sofia, Bulgaria,
danast@mgu.bg
2
Lucky Invest JSC, Lucky, Bulgaria,
atanas.marinski@abv.bg
3
St. Ivan Rilski, Sofia, Bulgaria,
kbkutsarov@gmail.com
Metasomatic ore mineralizations are significant part of the metal-rich

reserves for mining of lead and zinc ores in Lucky Invest JSC. So far the
company has developed 12 metasomatic ore bodies with different sizes of
the chambers and the pillars. The aggregate contents of lead and zinc in
them are in the range of 15% to 25%, and silver content in the mined ore
ranges from 150 to 200 g/t.
In this article are examined dependencies and regression models are built of
the pillars area and the areas supported by them. The mathematical
relationships between the supported areas and the hydraulic radii of the
pillars are analyzed.
The summarized dependency between the pillars parameter and the
coefficient of stress concentration is approximated.
The significantly higher values of the ore allowed the company to make
investments into modernization of production, as it has purchased mobile
diesel equipment, including electro-hydraulic carriages, front-end loader and
underground dump trucks from midrange class.
The examined mathematical models allow to be optimized the sizes of the
chambers and the pillars in room-pillar system of exploitation in order to
achieve optimal usage of the mobile diesel equipment during the mining of
the reserves of layer-shaped metasomatic ore mineralizations.
Keywords
Coefficient Of Stress Concentration, Metasomatic Ore, Pillars, Regression Models
1. INTRODUCTION
The main mining of lead and zinc ores at Lucky Invest JSC is done from the veins of Djurkovo and Druzhba deposits
where the width of the ore veins is 2 5 m. Simultaneously with the mining, the mineralizations in the marble
layers (metasomatic deposits) which have high content of lead and zinc (from 15% to 25% aggregate content) are
interrupted.
The mining of reserves from the metasomatic ore bodies is done via room-and-pillar system of exploitation with
different parameters of the pillars and chambers.
The use of heavy duty equipment drill carriages, front-end loaders and underground dump trucks requires study of
the parameters of pillars and chambers, which ensure the free movement of mobile equipment.
The article studies the parameters of two typical representatives of metasomatic ore bodies - No 46 horizon 1034
from Druzhba mine and No 26 27 horizon 572 from Djurkovo mine.
38

PROCEEDINGS
2. METHODOLOGY OF THE TESTS

The main situations of the geomechanical indicators are analyzed and studied area of the pillar
Sa
, hydraulic
S
radius HR [1], coefficient of the stress concentration k [2], pillar perimeter P, area supported by the pillar p .
The coefficient k itself represents an aggregate of parameters included in the equation of the hypothesis TurnerShevyakov [3], i.e.:
0 ,15h
press 1,15
Sa
a
Sp
0 ,001.n .y .H .k cos 2 v . sin 2
Where:
press
(1)
- ultimate strength of material from the pillar, MPa;
h height of the pillar, m;

a width of the pillar, m; at h 1 3 k 1,15 0,15h ; at other values k h - according to Cern;
f
f
a
n coefficient of the reserve strength of the pillar, n = 2 3 with protecting the chamber during the mining works; n
= 3 5 when the chamber is protected for indefinite long period of time;
y density of the top rocks, kN/m3;
H depth of exploitation, m;
k coefficient considering the ratio between the width of the undermined area B and the depth of exploitation H,
m;
When B 0,8 1
H
k 1,0 ; when
k 0,5 0,6 .
k 0,7 ; when in the ore field there are weak layers, then
B
0,8 1
H
B
0,7
H
k - coefficient considering the angle of dip of the deposit,

k cos 2 . sin 2 , with - angle of dip in
degrees and - coefficient, considering the lateral rock pressure.
The relations between the parameters of pillars and chambers and the applications of the rock mass classifications
Q, RQD, RMR, MRMR [4, 5], for which additional measurements and tests are necessary, can be both studied on this
basis.
3. RESULTS FROM THE TESTS

The main part of the tests is related to defining and fixing the parameters of chambers and pillars of the mining
layers. In our case we study 2 metasomatic ore bodies.
A typical example for exploitation of metosomatic deposit is No 46 of horizon 1034 at Druzhba mine. The data is
shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Metasomatic deposit 46 horizon 1034 Druzhba mine
No
Pillars area,
Sp ,
m2
Supported area from

one pillar,
S a . , m2;
1.
64=24
10x8=80
2.
8x2=16
3.
3x3=9
4.
4x4=16
5.
5x8=40
6.
3x8=24
8x10=80
7.
4x2=8
5x6=30
8.
6x2=12
5x9=45
Coefficient of stress
concentration,
k =
Pillars perimeter,
P, m
Sp
Sa
Hydraulic Radius,
HR
Sp
P
,m
80/24=3,33
20
24/20=1,2
6x8=80
48/6=3,0
20
16/20=0,8
6x7=42
42/9=4,66
11
9/11=0,82
7x8=56
56/16=3,5
16
16/16=1,0
11x9=99
99/40=2,48
38
40/38=1,05
80/24=3,33
23
24/23=1,04
30/8=3,75
12
8/12=0,66
45/12=3,75
16
12/16=0,75
39

PROCEEDINGS
9.
4x2=8
8x6=48
48/8=6,0
11
8/11=0,73
10.
10x4=40
8x13=104
104/40=2,6
28
40/28=1,43
11.
10x3=30
14x7=98
98/30=3,27
16
30/16=1,88
12.
12x8=96
12x18=216
216/96=2,25
41
96/41=2,34
13.
11x3=33
14x8=112
112/33=3,39
26
33/26=1,27
14.
(8x4)/2=16
15x7=105
105/16=6,56
20
16/20=0,8
15.
5x3=15
10x5=50
50/15=3,33
16
15/16=0,94
16.
5,4x3,6=19,4
8x6=48
48/19,4=2,47
18
19,4/16=1,07
17.
4x4=16
7x7=49
49/16=3,06
16
16/16=1,0
18.
4,2x4=16,8
3x7=21
21/16,8=1,25
15,4
16,8/15,4=1,09
19.
3x3=15
8x5=40
40/15=2,66
15
15/15=1,0
20.
11,4x5=57
14x7=98
98/57=1,72
32
32/57=0,56
21.
6x5=30
8x8=64
64/30=2,13
21
30/21=1,43
22.
6x5=30
8x9=72
72/30=2,4
25
30/25=1,20
On the basis of the data in Table 1 regression models which show the relationship between the different
geomechanical indicators are constructed.
Figure 1 shows the dependency between the pillars area S p and the area supported by one pillar S a .
The pillars area varies from 9,0 m2 to 96 m2 with an average value of 25,96 m2.
The area supported by one pillar changes from 30 m2 and reaches up to 216 m2, with an average value of 72,95 m2.
There is strong relation between the two parameters which is proven by the value of the correlation coefficient
r 0,897 .
Figure 1. Dependency between the pillars area S p and the area supported by
the pillar
Sa ; metasomatic deposit 46, horizon 1034, Druzhba mine
Another important dependency is that between the hydraulic radius and the area supported by one pillar (Fig. 2).
Figure 2. Dependency between the hydraulic radius HR and the area supported
by one pillar
40
Sa ; metasomatic deposit 46, horizon 1034, Druzhba mine

PROCEEDINGS
The hydraulic radius varies from 0,66 to 2,34 with an average value of 1,09.
The existing strong relation between the two parameters is confirmed by the calculated correlation coefficient
r 0,705 .
Figure 3 shows the dependency between the coefficient of stress concentration and the pillars perimeter.
Figure 3. Dependency between the coefficient of stress concentration and the

pillars perimeter, metasomatic deposit 46, horizon 1034, Druzhba mine
This coefficient has values from 1,25 to 6,56, with an average value of 3,22.
The pillars perimeter varies from 11 m to 41 m with an average value of 20,74 m.
Because of the high dispersion of data, the correlation coefficient is r 0,385 , which shows that there is a
weak relation between the two parameters.
Another typical example is metasomatic deposit No 26 and 27 horizon 572 west 2 at Djurkovo mine. The data about
the pillars is shown in Table 2.
Table 2. Metasomatic deposit 26 and 27 horizon 572 Djurkovo mine
No
Pillars area,
2
Sp, m
Supported area,
2
Sa , m ;
Coefficient of stress
concentration,
k
1.
4x5=20
2.
4x4=16
3.
4x5=20
4.
6x5=30
5.
6.
7.
8.
8x10=80
Pillars perimeter,
P, m
Sp
Sa
Hydraulic Radius,
HR
Sp
P
,m
80/20=4,0
18
20/18=1,1
9x10=90
90/16=5,6
16
16/16=1,0
10x12=120
120/20=6,0
16
20/16=1,2
10x12=120
120/30=4,0
20
30/20=1,5
2x4=8
8x10=80
80/8=10,0
16
8,0/16=0,5
5x6=30
9x10=90
90/30=3,0
24
30/24=1,25
9x3=27
11x15=165
165/27=6,11
22
27/22=1,23
6x3=18
9x11=99
99/18=5,5
18
18/18=1,0
9.
7x5=35
14x14=196
196/35=5,6
22
35/22=1,54
10.
5x5=25
12x12=144
144/25=5,8
21
25/11=1,19
11.
6x3=18
6x9=54
54/18=3,0
14
18/14=1,29
12.
4x6=24
12x6=96
96/24=4,0
18
24/18=1,33
16/19=0,84
13.
8x2=16
14x6=84
84/16=5,3
19
14.
6x6=36
16x12=192
192/36=5,33
20
36/20=1,8
15.
6x6=30
14x12=168
168/30=5,6
22
30/22=1,36
16.
9x4=36
12x8=96
96/36=2,67
26
36/26=1,38
41

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4 shows the dependency between the pillars area S p and the area supported by one pillar
Sa .
Figure 4. Dependency between the pillars area S and the area supported by
p
the pillar S a ; metasomatic deposit 26 and 27, horizon 572, Djurkovo mine
The data about the pillars area show a change from 8 m2 to 36 m2 with an average value of 24,31 m2.
The supported area varies from 54 m2 to 192 m2 with an average value of 117,12 m2.
The dependency is of the type S a 3,45S p 33,28 with correlation coefficient r 0,65 , which confirms the strong
relation between the two parameters.
The study of the change in the area supported by one pillar which depends on the change of the hydraulic radius of
the pillars is especially important (Figure 5).
Figure 5. Dependency between the hydraulic radius HR and the area supported
by the pillar S a ; metasomatic deposit 26 and 27, horizon 572, Djurkovo mine
The hydraulic radius varies from 0,5 to 1,8 with an average value of 1,14.
The calculated correlation coefficient is r 0,727 , which shows the strong relation between the two studied
parameters,
The approximated function is of the type S a 63,9 HR 44,3 .
The summarized dependency between the coefficients of stress concentration and the pillars perimeter is shown
on Figure 6. Further down follows the data from the metasomatic deposits in Djurkovo mine:
etasomatic deposit 27;
Metasomatic deposit 4;
Metasomatic deposit 26 and 27.
42

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 6. Summarised dependency between the pillars perimeter (P) and the
coefficient of stress concentration.
The approximated function is of the type P 56,19 6,5k .

The stability of relation is shown by the value of correlation
coefficient which is r 0,61 .
4. CONCLUSION
On the basis of the existing information and the tests made the following conclusions can be drawn:
1. The approximated functions allow design of different parameters of the chambers and pillars in certain
parts of the concession area.
2. When the pillars area is given, the size of the area supported by it can be defined.
3. When the hydraulic radius of the pillar is given, we obtain the acceptable supported area.
4. When the coefficient of stress concentration is calculated, the pillars perimeter can be defined.
REFERENCES
[1]
Anastasov, D., A. Marinski, K. Kutsharov, Z. Eftimov, Some Aspect for Volumetric Cores of Tension and Hydraulic Radiuses of
Pillars in Metasomatic Deposits, Proceedings of Third National Scientific and Technical Conference with International
Participation, ISSN 1314-7056, Devin, Bulgaria, 2012, pp. 126-131.
[2]
Stefanov, D., Back Analysis of Large-Scale Destruction of Pillars and Graphical Method for Determining the Pillar Stability,
Proceeding of the IV-th International Geomechanics Conference Theory and Practice of Geomechanics for Effectiveness the
Mining Production and the Construction, ISBN 978-954-92219-8-5, Varna, Bulgaria, 2010, pp. 541-550.
[3]
Lomonosov, G. G., Production processes of underground exploitation of ore deposits, ISBN 978-5-98672-258-0, Moscow, 2011
[4]
Bieniawski, Z.T., Engineering Classification of Jointed Rock Masses, Trans South African Institute Civil Engineering, 15, 1973
[5]
Barton, N.R., R. Lien, I. Lunde, Engineering Classification of Tunnel Supports, Rock Mechanics, 6, 4, 1974
43

PROCEEDINGS
ANALYSIS OF AN UNDERGROUND EXPLOSION EFFECTS

UPON THE VENTILATION NETWORKS
ABSTRACT
Doru CIOCLEA1
Ion TOTH2
Ion GHERGHE3
Cristian TOMESCU4
Vlad Mihai PSCULESCU5
INCD INSEMEX, Petrosani, Romania

1
doru.cioclea@insemex.ro
2
ion.toth@insemex.ro
3
ion.gherghe@insemex.ro
4
cristian.tomescu@insemex.ro
5
vlad.pasculescu@insemex.ro
Ventilation networks are complex opening, preparation and exploitation

works which are extended horizontally and vertically, having a cumulative
length of tens of kilometers.
When an explosion type phenomena occurs, there is formed on one hand the
dynamic wave which develops an overpressure of 1-8 bar in case of methane
and 1-11 bar in case of coal dust, and on the other hand the flame front
which generates temperatures over 2500C.
Due to high pressure generated by explosion in underground mine workings,
there occur high forces which action upon all obstacles encountered on the
propagation direction of the dynamic wave.
These forces exceed by far the resistance breaking to compression, shearing
strength, the tensile strength, resistance to buckling or torsion specific to
materials encountered on the dynamic wave propagation direction.
Therefore, in case of an underground explosion occurrence major
disturbances of the ventilation network occur which are generated by:
partial destruction of regulator doors; partial destruction of insulation doors;
complete destruction of regulator doors; complete destruction of insulation
doors; destruction of insulation constructions; cavings which occur on the
mine workings adjacent to the epicenter of the explosion.
Keywords
Dynamic Effects, Explosion, Network, Ventilation
1. GENERALITIES
Underground hard coal exploitation involves the performance of a complex of opening, preparation and
exploitation workings in order to extract and transport to the surface the useful mineral substance and in order to
achieve the ventilation which may reach lengths of tens of kilometers.
During the carbonization in anaerobic conditions process, there have been formed accompanying gases like
gaseous hydrocarbons, of which the most important one is represented by methane CH4.
During the execution of mine workings, respectively during coal exploitation, accompanying gases enter the
atmosphere of mine workings. At the same time, following the oxidation of coal process there occur toxic and
asphyxiating gases la carbon oxide CO or carbon dioxide CO2, which also enter the atmosphere of mine workings.
In addition, during the rock movement process, there are formed coal particles of various dimensions. The heaviest
ones are deposited gravitationally in the formation area or over the alignment of the transport systems, and the
easiest ones are transported by the air currents over high distances.
Through the time and space overlay of certain conditions there may occur various phenomena with devastating
effects, like the explosions.
The main measure for preventing explosions is the achievement of a proper ventilation which shall dilute the
explosive gases.
The ventilation of mine workings aims to reach the following three main objectives:
To ensure the oxygen concentration required by the staff operating underground;
44

PROCEEDINGS
To dilute explosive and/or toxic gases which may occur in the network of mine workings;
To exhaust the heat resulted from the human activity respectively the geo-thermal gradient released in the
mine workings network.
The explosion type event occurring underground produces a dynamic shockwave which is radially propagated on
the path of the mine workings both towards the main ventilation station and of the mine workings for fresh air
entrance. On the path of the dynamic shockwave occur severe perturbations in the ventilation network, generated
by the compression of air from before it. An explosion occurred underground generates effects both at the level of
the underground mine workings structure and at the level of the main ventilation station.
2. UNDERGROUND EXPLOSIONS
At the level of the underground mine workings [1;2], depending on the flammable substance, there may occur the
following types of explosions: methane, coal respectively methane and coal dust explosions.
Methane explosions: Methane gas in mixture with oxygen from the air forms systems which in certain conditions
are able to generate spontaneous reactions with release of large energy quantities, according to Equation 1:
(1)
CH 4 2O 2 CO 2 2H 2 O 799,634 Kj/mol
The explosion of the methane-air mixture takes place if the gas concentration ranges between the lower and higher
explosivity limits, namely between 4, 5 15 % vol.
The increase of the explosive mixture temperature, of the mixtures pressure and of the ignition energy may
enlarge the explosivity range.
The ignition temperature of methane-air explosive mixture ranges between 650C-750 C.
The stoichiometric concentration for the methane-air explosive mixture is 9, 46 % vol.
The pressure developed by the explosion of the methane-air mixture ranges between 1 and 8 bar.
Following the initiation of the explosive mixture, the current caused by the thermal expansion of the gas due to the
tubular shape of the mine workings reaches very high velocities and produces a wrinkling of the combustion wave
surface. By returning, this generates an even higher turbulence and a more pronounced wrinkling of the surface of
the combustion wave, leading to its acceleration.
Coal dust explosions: In underground mine workings, coal dust and air generate dispersed atmospheres. The
ignition and explosion mechanism of the coal dust air mixture is developed as follows: under the action of an
effective ignition source upon the explosive mixture, the coal dust particles in suspension are heated up, which
leads to the release of gases like hydrogen, methane, other hydrocarbons, carbon oxide, carbon acid and water
vapours. The combustible gases resulting from the heating of the particles, form along with the air explosive
mixtures which are ignited and heat up the next layer of coal dust-air mixture, generating another flammable gases
release. The phenomenon is self-sustained, developing accelerated and continuing until the depletion of the coal
dust-air mixture.
3
3
The minimum explosive concentration ranges between 5gr/m and 50gr/m and is influenced by the petrographic
components of coal. Coal from Jiu Valley coal field has a minimum explosive concentration of 40gr/m3.
The temperature of the flame generated by the explosion of coal dust-air mixtures can reach values ranging
between 2500 K and 2800 K.
Pressure developed by the explosion of the coal dust-air mixture ranges between 1 and 11 bars.
The explosion propagation velocity of the coal dust-air mixture in stoichiometric proportions can reach values up
to 1000 m/s.
Methane and coal dust explosions: In underground hard coal mining, there occur simultaneously methane and coal
dust. When an explosion occurs, it involves the participation both of methane and of coal dust. In these cases, the
intensity and effects of explosions are amplified. Due to the participation of the elements, there may occur
successive explosions of high extent and with devastating effects.
45

PROCEEDINGS
3. UNDERGROUND EXPLOSIONS EFFECTS

The high temperature of the flame generated by the explosion and by the burning gases brings changes to the
structure and composition of exposed materials.
Usually, in underground there are used the following materials: wood, wires of the electrical detonators, rubber
from conveyor belts or flexible cables, textiles, PVC materials, wool, paper, etc.
Explosion type events generate the following types of effects upon the materials exposed to the shockwave:
dynamic, thermal and chemical effects.
Dynamic effects: Dynamic waves produced by methane and coal dust explosions generate mechanical deformation
and destructive effects over all propagation paths. The dynamic effects are proportional with the explosion
pressure, which at its turn depends mainly on the concentration of the explosive mixture, on the explosive mixture
type, respectively on the type of the ignition source and its activation energy value. Also, the presence of the
explosive support depending on the shape, dimensions and concentration of the combustible substance, highly
influences the intensity and extent of the explosion type event.
Mine workings are sustained in metal, wood, concrete bricks or rammed concrete. The lagging is made of metal or
wood. Also, over the path of mine workings there are placed or deposited the following: metallic transport
machinery, transport machinery with rubber belts, transport wagons, metallic support pillars, wood support pillars,
ventilation constructions, electrical cables, electrical equipment. The main element effect exposed to the
destructive effect of explosions is represented by the human factor.
As the dynamic wave moves with subsonic or supersonic speed, it develops dynamic pressures between 1 and 1 atm.
which action upon all obstacles encountered on the propagation paths [6].
Thermal effects: In case of a methane or coal dust explosion occurrence, besides the dynamic wave there is also
formed the flame front which may develop temperatures of minimum 2000 2300 K and up to 2800 K. The contact
time between the explosion flame and the obstacles encountered on the propagation direction is generally
comprised between 0, 1 s and 0, 6 s.
Additionally, high temperature burning gases migrate with high velocities over the propagation directions.
Due to high temperatures, any obstacle encountered over the propagation directions undergoes thermal effects.
Depending on the explosion intensity and on the contact time there may be distinguished thermal effects classified
into minor and major ones, over several intensity degrees.
Chemical effects: In case of methane and coal dust explosions there occur some chemical effects resulting in ashes
depositing over various surfaces, crusts and coke pearls, water condensations and gaseous products resulting from
the burning.
Ash is formed through the thermal dissociation of methane, respectively through the burning of coal dust. In the
laboratory, there has been observed that methane dissociation occurs at concentrations between 9 10 % vol., but
the resulting hydrogen quantities generated by burning reactions of methane up to 15 % vol. are much reduced.
Coke crusts are formed only in case of explosions which involve coal dust, where the oxygen quantity is insufficient
for burning the entire dust quantity, and the heat favors the coking of unburned dust.
In coal dust explosions, coke granules are generated in all cases, namely under the minimum explosive
concentration, at the minimum explosive concentration and beyond it.
Coke pearls are formed over solid surfaces, both on the propagation direction of the explosion, as well as on the
opposite part. The difference between them is that the ones deposited over the propagation direction are much
smaller and rounder.
The presence of a high percentage of coked granules indicates their formation nearby the ignition place.
4. UNDERGROUND EXPLOSIONS EFFECTS UPON THE VENTILATION NETWORKS

Underground explosion type phenomena occur with high probability in blind workings and with low probability in
long walls, and in other mine workings the probability of occurrence is very low.
When an explosion type phenomena occurs, there is formed on one hand the dynamic wave which develops an
overpressure of 1-8 bar in case of methane and 1-11 bar in case of coal dust, and on the other hand the flame front
which generates temperatures over 2500 C.
46

PROCEEDINGS
The dynamic wave produces the piston effect over the air volume circulated in the ventilation network under the
depression generated by fans from within the main ventilation stations. The depression developed by general
ventilation fans ranges between 1000 and 2000 Pa, 0, 01 0, 02 bar. The pressure developed by the explosion is two
or three times higher than the depression developed by the main ventilation fan therefore easily beating it.
The flame front generates a high quantity of burning gases having an extremely high temperature, which leads to
their rapid expansion. The expansion of hot gases takes place during less than a second, after that takes place the
phenomenon of burning gases contraction due to their fast cooling in contact with the walls of the mine workings.
Depending on the volume and concentration of the explosive mixture, there may take place distensions up to 10
times higher than the initial volume in case in which coal dusts also participates.
Over the entire length of the mine workings where the gas distensions occur, the workers subject to the event are
exposed, beside the dynamic effect, to high temperatures and high concentrations of toxic and asphyxiating gases,
respectively to the drastic decrease of oxygen concentrations, atmosphere which is incompatible with life.
Due to these aspects, a violent perturbation of the air flowing regime in the ventilation network occurs, as follows:
Upstream the explosion occurrence location, there occurs an air compression resulting in the decrease of
the circulation velocity down to 0 m/s, after which the circulation direction is inversed. From this moment
on the air circulation velocity increases fast and results in air exhausting in the form of a powerful blast, on
the vertical shafts which normally supply fresh air. In the next stage takes place the reestablishment of the
air circulation direction, both under the effect of burning gases contraction and due to the disappearance of
the dynamic effect generated by the explosion and the entering into normal operation of the fan from
within the main ventilation station.
Downstream the explosion occurrence location, there occurs an air compression resulting in in a fast
increase of the air circulation velocity which is exhausted in the form of powerful blasts on the ventilation
shafts or risings. In the next phase takes place a decrease of the air circulation velocity and even a reversal
of its circulation direction, generated by the burning gases contraction effect. After the disappearance of
the dynamic wave and of the burning gases contraction effect, the circulation direction is re-established due
to the entering in normal operation of the main ventilation fan.
Due to high pressure generated by explosion in underground mine workings, there occur high forces which action
upon all obstacles encountered on the propagation direction of the dynamic wave.
These forces exceed by far the resistance breaking to compression, shearing strength, tensile strength, resistance
to buckling or torsion specific to materials encountered on the dynamic wave propagation direction.
The least resistant obstacles encountered by the dynamic wave are ventilation constructions regulator doors,
insulation doors, insulation dams.
Therefore, in case of an underground explosion occurrence major disturbances of the ventilation network occur
which are generated by: partial destruction of regulator doors; partial destruction of insulation doors; complete
destruction of regulator doors; complete destruction of insulation doors; destruction of insulation constructions;
cavings which occur on the mine workings adjacent to the epicentre of the explosion. [3;7;8;9;11]
Due to these situations, the following effects can occur:
Maintaining the air flowing direction with the
- decrease of air flow on some branches;
- increase if air flow on some branches;
reversal of air flowing on some branches;
intensification of existent spontaneous combustion phenomena:
occurrence of new spontaneous combustions;
increase of carbon oxide concentrations (up to 2-3% vol.);
decrease of oxygen content (up to 3-7 % vol.).
In order to highlight the changes produced in the ventilation network after the occurrence of an explosion, there
has been chosen the ventilation network of Vulcan mining unit presented in Figure 1 and Figure 2, this network
being modeled using the 3D CANVENT software [10].
47

PROCEEDINGS
Figiure 1. Vulcan mining unit ventilation network
Figiure 2. Characteristic curve of the fan
Using the ventilation network of Vulcan mining unit, there has been achieved a simulation of the effects of an
explosions in case the phenomenon occurs at the level if the undermined coal bed no. 1-4, layer no. 3, block VIII
[4;5].
For the simulation of the updated ventilation network of Vulcan mining unit, there have been introduced 204
nodes, of which 6 are new, respectively 256 branches, of which 7 are new branches. Following the explosion type
phenomena simulation, in Figure 3 and 4 there are presented the changes which occur in the undermined coal bed
no. 1-4, layer 3, block VIII, changes which occurred being the following:
Total destruction of 8 ventilation constructions;
Partial destruction or opening of ventilation constructions due to the reversal of the ventilation following
the explosion: 6 ventilation constructions;
Reversal of air flow over 12 mine workings, respectively ventilation circuits.
In comparison with the previous situation, the following effects have resulted:
Air flow over the fresh air supply circuit at the level of horizon 360, has decreased by 33,19 %.
Air flow at the level of the undermined coal bed no. 2, layer 3, bl. VI has increased by 21, 57 %.
Air flow over the inclined ventilation plane no 360-315, has drastically decreased by 66,38 %.
Air flow at the level of the undermined coal bed no.1, layer 3, bl. VII, has decreased by 66, 66%.
Air flow at the level of the coal face no.1, layer 3, bl. VIII, has drastically decreased by 80, 36 %.
Air flow at the level of coal face no. 1-4, layer 3, bl. VIII, has drastically decreased by 89,78 %.
48

PROCEEDINGS
Over the exhaust circuit of return air related to coal face no.2, layer 3, block VI, at the level of horizon 480,
air flow has decreased by 36,89 %.
Over the exhaust circuit of return air related to coal face no.1 W, layer 3, block VII, at the level of horizon
360, air flow has decreased by 46,13 %.
Over the exhaust circuit of return air related to coal face no.1, layer 3, block VIII, air flow has decreased by
30,26 %.
Over the exhaust circuit of return air related to coal face no.1-4, layer 3, block VIII, air flow has decreased by
50,77 %.
Over the coast gallery from elevation 657, the air flow has fulminating increased by 940,47 %.
At the level of the main ventilation station, air flow has increased by 15,035 %.
Figure 3. Effects of the explosion upon the ventilation network
The most dangerous aspects from the occupational health and safety point of view are represented by the reversal
of air currents over certain branches and ventilation circuits, as well as by the drastic decrease of air flows
circulated at the level of coal faces. These aspects lead on one hand to the increase of toxic and/or asphyxiating
gases concentrations where the reversal of air currents takes place, and on the other hand to the increase of
explosive gases where the drastic decrease of air flows takes place.
Figure 4. Characteristic curve of the fan after the event
49

PROCEEDINGS
5. CONCLUSIONS
During the coal hoisting process, large quantities of flammable gases and coal dust are released, which in
proper conditions may lead to the occurrence of explosion type phenomena.
With regard to the flammable substance, in mine workings may occur methane, coal dust and methane-coal
dust explosions.
Explosion type phenomena produce dynamic, thermal and chemical effects upon the materials exposed to
the dynamic shockwave.
Major disturbances of the ventilation network occur after the occurrence of an explosion.
Following the simulation of the explosion type phenomena occurred at the level of the undermined coal bed
no. 1-4, layer 3, bl. VIII, the ventilation network suffered severe changes.
In comparison with the previous situation, there has resulted a variation of air flows at the level of the
ventilation network ranging between 15% and 90%.
REFERENCES
[1]
Bana F.: Study on the explosion mechanism of flammable atmosphere constituted of methane and/or coal dust in mixture with
air, in order to establish the characteristic effects, (in Romanian), C.C.S.M. Study, Petrosani, Romania, 1985
[2]
Bardocz V.: Establishing the characteristic effects of mining faults generated by the ignition or explosion of a flammable
environment, in order to reproduce the conditions in which it occurred, (in Romanian), S.C.S.M. Study, Petrosani, Romania, 1973
[3]
Baltaretu R., Teodorescu C.: Ventilation and occupational safety in mines, (in Romanian), Didactical and Pedagogical Publishing
House, Bucharest, Romania, 1971
[4]
Cioclea D.: Solving the ventilation network based on pressure measurements, on aerodynamic resistances over the workplaces,
in order to put into operation the new ventilation station VOD 2,1 from shaft no. 10 V Valea Arsului, (in Romanian), INSEMEX
study, Petrosani, Romania, 2006
[5]
Gherghe I.: Streamlining the ventilation networks of Jiu Valley mines in the case of their restructuring following the closure of
inactive areas, (in Romanian), INSEMEX Study, Petrosani, Romania, 2004
[6]
Hindoreanu E.: Establishing the characteristic effects of mining faults generated by the ignition or explosion of a flammable
environment, in order to reproduce the conditions in which it occurred, (in Romanian), S.C.S.M Study, Petrosani, Romania, 1972
[7]
Matei I., Moraru R., a.s.o.: Environmental engineering and underground ventilation, Didactical and Pedagogical Publishing
House, Bucharest, Romania, 2000
[8]
Patterson A.M.: The Mine Ventilation Practitioners Data Book, M.V.S. of South Africa, 1992
[9]
Teodorescu C., Gontean Z., Neag I.: Mining ventilation, (in Romanian), Didactical and Pedagogical Publishing House, Bucharest,
Romania, 1980
[10]
CANMET: Mining and Minerals Sciences Laboratories Underground Mine Environment and Ventilation User manual Software
3D CANVENT 2K
50

PROCEEDINGS
DRAG ENERGY CONSUMPTION PERCENTAGE (DECP) CONCEPT AS A TOOL FOR

COMPARISON OF DIGGING DIFFICULTY (DD) AT DRAGLINE STRIPPING PANELS
ABSTRACT
Metin OZDOGAN
Ideal Machinery and Consultancy Ltd.,

Ankara, Turkey
dr.mozdogan@gmail.com
Drag Energy Consumption Percentage (DECP) concept for stripping draglines

is a new concept proposed by the author. Full work cycle of walking draglines
(WD) consist of dragging-in, hoisting, swinging, dumping, swinging back and
lowering segments. This comparison criterion proposed is independent of
size, model and make of the equipment (equipment specifications). It is
inclusive of digging effort of WD in other words breakout and bucket fill
segments. Therefore, it can be used as a measure of the digging difficulty
encountered by the draglines operating at different surface mine sites. The
criterion indicates the diggability of the overburden in question and/or
indicates the degree of blasting performance (how well the overburden
formation is loosened), in addition to the other concepts proposed as
specific drag-in energy (SDIE) and specific bucket fill energy (SBFE). The
paper discusses percentages (DECP) measured at five different mine sites
and WDs and compares DECP with the diggability difficulty observed and
with the powder factors being used; and proposes a diggability classification
for WDs foperating at lignite measure rocks being stripped based on the
findings of the survey. It's accordance with other classification criteria
proposed for WD benches of the survey is also discussed. Prime mover and
DC motor specifications and operational specification s of the WDs are also
given. Brief rock properties of the benches are also cited. Energy
consumption is measured by a laboratory type monitor from the control
frames of control cabinets of the equipment. The draglines are equipped
with control cabinets that house a series of control frames for each DC
motor. Proper test points on each control frame provide a clean plus minus
15 VDC signal for both armature voltage and current.
Keywords
Drag Energy Consumption Percentage, Equipment Diggability Classification,
Specific Drag-In Energy, Specific Bucket Fill Energy, Walking Draglines
1. INTRODUCTION
Digging difficulty encountered by an electrical earthmoving equipment can be observed by monitoring the level of
energy consumed during digging. The higher the energy consumed, the harder the rock material being excavated. If
the benches are blasted ones, it indicates degree of rock material looseness, in other words performance of drill
geometry and blasting practices applied.
Most of the up-to-date walking draglines and electric mining shovels are equipped with devices which monitor
various performance parameters of the equipment operating. Some of these parameters are energy consumption,
cycle time, swing angle, payload, production etc. Having an energy consumption meter on board of an electrical
excavating equipment means that digging effort being spent is continuously trailed.
In the survey, four mine sites and five walking draglines (WD) were surveyed. Mine sites, equipment models and
make, bucket sizes, and some technical and operational specifications are as follows: At Tuncbilek site a P&H736
with 15 m3 bucket (WD15TB) and a M7820 with 31 m3 bucket (WD31TB), at Yenikoy site a P&H752 with 25 m3 bucket
(WD25YK), at Eskihisar site a M8050 with 50 m3 bucket (WD50ES), and finally at Seyitomer site a M8050 with 54 m3
bucket (WD54SY) were the equipment surveyed. All the dragline benches surveyed were lignite measure marl
formations and blasted prior to dragline stripping. Dragline bucket capacities varied from 15 m3 to 54 m3. Three of
51

PROCEEDINGS
them were commissioned, one unit of P&H 752 and two units of M8050s in 1987, whereas P&H 736 and M7820 were
commissioned in 1971 and 1977 respectively.
Some power related technical specifications of the draglines surveyed are as follows: P&H736 (WD15TB) ; M-G set
power, 1500 HP, drag motor power, 1300 HP, hoist motor power, 1300 HP, swing motor power, 750 HP, equipment
sturdiness ratio, 65 tonne/ m3. P&H752 (WD25YK) ; M-G set power, 3000 HP, drag motor power, 2600 HP, equipment
sturdiness ratio, tonne/ m3. M7820 (WD31TB) ; M-G set power, 3000 HP, drag motor power, 2600 HP, hoist motor
power, 2600 HP, swing motor power, 1500 HP, equipment sturdiness ratio, 56 tonne/ m3. M8050 (WD50ES) ; M-G set
power, 5000 HP, drag motor power, 4180 HP, hoist motor power, 4180 HP, swing motor power, 2560 HP, equipment
sturdiness ratio, 54 tonne/ m3. M8050 (WD54SY) ; M-G set power, 6000 HP, drag motor power, 5200 HP, hoist motor
power, 5200 HP, swing motor power, 3200 HP, equipment sturdiness ratio, 62 tonne/ m3.
Some operational specifications of the equipment surveyed are as follows: P&H736 (WD15TB) ; operating weight,
1000 tonne, max allowable load, 42 tonne, MUF factor, 918 m x m3, normalized MUF factor, 0,92 m x m3/tonne, K
factor, 2520 tonne x m. P&H752 (WD25YK) ; operating weight, 2000 tonne, max allowable load, 79 tonne, MUF
factor, 2056 m x m3, normalized MUF factor, 1,03 m x m3/tonne, K factor, 6636 tonne x m. M7820 (WD31TB) ;
operating weight, 1700 Tonne, max allowable load, 86 tonne, MUF factor, 2142 m x m3, normalized MUF factor,
1,26 m x m3/tonne, K factor, 6020 tonne x m. M8050 (WD50ES) ; operating weight, 2700 tonne, max allowable load,
131 tonne, MUF factor, 4376 m x m3, normalized MUF factor, 1,62 m x m3/tonne, K factor, 11528 tonne x m. M8050
(WD54SY) ; operating weight, 2900 tonne, max allowable load, 137 tonne, MUF factor, 4498 m x m3, normalized
MUF factor, 1,55 m x m3/tonne, K factor, 11508 tonne x m.
All the benches consisted of fresh coal measure sedimentary marls of Neogene age located at various locations of
Aegean Turkey which may be classified as weak and very weak rocks [2]. Rock parameters and powder factors of the
benches were as follows: Bench for equipment WD15TB; fresh marl, unit weight, UW, 23 kN/m3 , uniaxial
compressive strength, UCS, 46 Mpa, Brasilian tensile strength, BTS, 8 Mpa, powder factor, PF, 0,17 kg/m3 . Bench for
equipment WD25YK; fresh marl, unit weight, UW, 20 kN/m3 , uniaxial compressive strength, UCS, 18 Mpa, Brasilian
tensile strength, BTS, 1 Mpa, powder factor, PF, 0,10 kg/m3 . Bench for equipment WD31TB; fresh marl, unit weight,
UW, 22 kN/m3 , uniaxial compressive strength, UCS, 31 Mpa, Brasilian tensile strength, BTS, 3 Mpa, powder factor,
PF, 0,14 kg/m3 . Bench for equipment WD50ES; fresh marl, unit weight, UW, 18 kN/m3 , uniaxial compressive
strength, UCS, 4 Mpa, Brasilian tensile strength, BTS, 1 Mpa, powder factor, PF, 0,09 kg/m3 . Bench for equipment
WD54SY; fresh marl, unit weight, UW, 19 kN/m3 , uniaxial compressive strength, UCS, 13 Mpa, Brasilian tensile
strength, BTS, 2 Mpa, powder factor, PF, 0,11 kg/m3 [3]
If it is a single walking dragline operating at a site, it is comparatively easier to trail the digging effort being spent; a
number of parameters such as full cycle energy, kWh, full cycle energy per second, kWh/s, drag energy, kWh, even
the cycle time and/or drag-in time, s, excavating rate, m3/s, may be used. However, if multiple draglines operating
at the same site and/or multiple mine sites, the evaluation and comparison of the digging efforts of equipment
becomes more complex. Then, energy consumption per cycle has to be compensated for the bucket size, kWh/m3,
which is called specific energy consumption; furthermore, it has to be normalized for the cycle time, kWh/ m3/s [6].
2. ENERGY CONSUMPTION MEASURING TECHNIQUE USED

Unfortunately none of the draglines surveyed had an on-board performance monitor. Therefore, a laboratory type
monitor was used as data acquisition device. In order to monitor excavating energy consumption of electrical
surface mining equipment voltage and current feedback signal readings of each relevant D.C. motors has to be
monitored and recorded while digging according to the electrical walking dragline manufacturers. The voltage and
current signals reflect the interaction of the equipment with the earth being excavated best. According to the
original equipment manufacturers, armature voltage reading of a D.C. motor is synonymous to speed; and armature
current reading is synonymous to force (torque) [1]. This is how the electrical mining equipment manufacturers
draw digging performance curves of their equipment. As a matter of fact the equipment service engineers take
periodical records from these points in order to check the functions of each motion motor for adjusting,
maintaining and servicing of the draglines. The commercially available dragline monitors make use of the same
principle of sensing voltage and current signals of each motion motor of the equipment.
The walking draglines monitored are equipped with control cabinets that house a series of control frames for each
work-motion motors, in other words drag, hoist, swing and walk motors. Proper test points on each control frame
provide a clean 15 VDC signal for both armature voltage and current [4].
In the measurements a digital 16 channel digital instrumentation were used in monitoring energy consumption
(performance) of their equipment at the control cabinets of the draglines. D.C. Motors' power and energy
52

PROCEEDINGS
calculation procedure and fomulae are as follows briefly: using recorded armature current and voltage signals
versus time, average values of real current and voltage are calculated calculating and/or measuring the areas under
the current and voltage signal curves and making use of the stall test and signal specifications of each motor given
by original equipment manufacturers. Once the armature feedback current (Iafb), Amperes, and armature feedback
voltage (Vafb), Volts, are known power (P) consumption of DC motor can be calculated which is the multiplication of
these two parameters unit being Watts, dividing it by 1K (one thousand), kW is obtained. As mentioned above time,
(t), seconds, is also recorded together with armature feedback signals. Power figure is multiplied by time parameter
and divided by 3600 seconds and the figure obtained is energy E unit being, kiloWatthours, kWh.
The software of the monitoring device may calculate power of DC motor at any instantaneous time by multiplying
the instantaneous armature current and armature voltage values. Energy consumption of a DC motor within a time
interval may be calculated by integrating the power according to time for that time interval ie starting time to
ending time. By the sum of these instantaneous energy consumption figures in the time interval in question the
total energy consumption of DC motor is obtained [5] .
3. RESULTS AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPERATIVE BENCH DIGGING EFFORT OF MULTIPLE

DRAGLINES OPERATING AT MULTIPLE SITES
The results of the five equipment surveyed are as follows: For equipment WD15TB : Cycle time, CT, 67,633,74 s,
Energy consumption per cycle, ECPC, 10,160,07 kWh, drag motor energy consumption per cycle, DMEC, 5,250,52
kWh, full cycle specific energy, SE, 0,660,04 kWh/m3, drag motor specific energy, DMSE, 0,340,03 kWh/m3. For
equipment WD25YK : Cycle time, CT, 61,9712,35 s, energy consumption per cycle, ECPC, 21,435,50 kWh, drag
motor energy consumption per cycle, DMEC, 10,482,81 kWh, full cycle specific energy, SE, 0,870,2 kWh/m3, drag
motor specific energy, DMSE, 0,430,12 kWh/m3. Table 1. depicts bucket fill related energy consumption figures of
bucket fill time (BFT), bucket fill energy (BFE), speciific buclket fill energy (SBFE), drag-in energy (DIE), specific dragin energy (SDIE), and Drag energy consumption percent (DECP). The results cited are inclusive of normal bench
digging only and excludes digging mode cases like key-cut, chopping etc.
Table 1. Bucket Fill related energy consumption figures of the draglines surveyed
WD
Bucket Size & Site
BFT
s
BFE
kWh
SBFE
kWh/m3
DIE
kWh
SDIE
kWh/m3
DECP
%
WD15TB
15,64
4,34
2,86
1,17
0,19
0,08
2,38
0,77
0,15
0,05
51,48
1,82
WD25YK
14,13
7,95
3,96
2,51
0,16
0,10
3,11
1,84
0,13
0,08
49,19
2,93
WD31TB
19,88
6,55
5,85
1,35
0,19
0,04
4,97
1,08
0,16
0,04
47,83
5,93
WD50ES
9,64
1,75
4,49
1,17
0,09
0,02
2,62
0,63
0,05
0,01
40,60
2,48
WD54SY
16,41
0,20
6,86
2,16
0,13
0,04
4,57
2,71
0,09
0,05
46,67
1,92
Source: (Ozdogan 2002)
For equipment WD31TB : Cycle time, CT, 76,2110,14 s, energy consumption per cycle, ECPC, 22,274,65 kWh, drag
motor energy consumption per cycle, DMEC, 10,501,71 kWh, full cycle specific energy, SE, 0,730,15 kWh/m3, drag
motor specific energy, DMSE, 0,340,06 kWh/m3. For equipment WD50ES : Cycle time, CT, 55,8110,80 s, energy
consumption per cycle, ECPC, 23,011,51 kWh, drag motor energy consumption per cycle, DMEC, 9,350,73 kWh,
full cycle specific energy, SE, 0,460,03 kWh/m3, drag motor specific energy, DMSE, 0,190,02 kWh/m3. For
equipment WD54SY : Cycle time, CT, 64,502,12 s, energy consumption per cycle, ECPC, 34,032,15 kWh, drag
motor energy consumption per cycle time, DMEC, 15,940,30 kWh, full cycle time specific energy, SE, 0,460,03
kWh/m3, drag motor specific energy, DMSE, 0,300,01 kWh/m3.
As it is seen in Table 1., bucket fill energy (BFE) is slightly higher than that of drag-in energy (DIE). Drag-in energy
consumption which represents breakout segment of excavation comprises of 0,740,01 of the bucket fill energy
consumption per full equipment cycle. The reason for this discrepancy is that bucket filling action inherits a slight
53

PROCEEDINGS
hoisting motion as the bucket is dragged-in upwards ie the vertical component of the motion and lifting the bucket
rigging at the final stages of bucket fill motion in order to prevent spilling of the filled material in the bucket, and a
tiny swinging movement of bucket from the vertical plane. Drag-in energy consumption (DIE) corresponds to
0.360,09 of drag motor energy consumption (DMEC) per equipment cycle. Whereas, bucket fill energy
consumption represents 0,480,01 of drag motor energy consumption (DMEC) per full cycle energy consumption of
walking draglines.
Please note that bucket fill involves some small incremental hoisting and swinging motions in addition to the major
drag-in motion; for example in a monitored series of 11 consecutive cycles drag-in energy consumption forms
87,204,60 % of the total bucket fill energy whereas hoist energy consumption percent, in bucket filling, of total
BFE is 12,704.60 % and swinging of bucket during dragging is almost negligible the value being 0,100,10 % in
bucket fill energy consumption [3].
Table 2. WD digging effort criteria proposed for normal bench digging at lignite measure rocks
WD
Drag-in Effort Interval
DECP
Criterion
%
SDIE
Criterion
3
kWh/m
SBFE
Criterion
3
kWh/m
Bench Mass Looseness

(BML) Observed
Easy Digging Effort
< 42
< 0,08
< 0,10
Very loose
WD50ES matches
Easy to Medium Digging Effort
42- 46
0,08-0,012
0,10-0,13
Pretty loose
WD54SY matches
Medium Digging Effort
47- 51
0,13-0,17
0,14-0,19
Moderately loose
WD31TB & WD15TB match
Medium to Hard Digging Effort
> 51
> 0,17
> 0,19
WD Matching to
Criterion
Moderate to poorly
loose
WD25YK & WD15TB match (DECP)
Drag energy related equipment digging ease comparison criteria given above are based on the measurements
taken, field observations and evaluations made by the author. If the details of the digging phase such as drag-in,
bucket fill are measured and distinguished, specific drag-in and bucket fill energies seems to be representing the
digging ease encountered of the dragline bench much better according to the author. However, drag energy
consumption percent seems to match the bench excavation conditions of the walking draglines well enough, too.
Because of the fact that, drag motor specific energy corresponds to 0.470.04 of full cycle specific energy, see
Table 1. Specific bucket fill energy (SBFE) represents 0.480.01 of drag motor specific energy (DMSE).
Table 2. depicts digging difficulty criteria proposed for the walking draglines surveyed which are based on drag
energy percent, specific drag-in energy and bucket fill energy concepts. Equipment digging effort intervals and
bench mass looseness observed and equipment matching to the proposed criterion.
Table 3. Digging effort sequence of surveyed WDs from easier to harder at normal bench digging
WD
Bucket Size & Site
DECP
(%)
Drag-in Effort Observed
UW
kN/m3
UCS
MPa
PF
kN/m3
WD50ES
40,60 2,48
Easy to Medium (closer to easy)
18
0,9
WD31TB
47,83 5,93
Medium
22
31
1,4
WD54SY
46,67 1,92
Medium
19
13
1,1
WD15TB
51,48 1,82
Medium to Hard
23
46
1,7
WD25YK
49,19 2,93
Medium to Hard
20
18
Source: (Ozdogan, 2002 modified)
Table 3. shows the walking draglines in sequence from easier to harder digging conditions based on DECP and
depicts some rock and PF figures of the marl benches.
54

PROCEEDINGS
4. DISCUSSIONS
In order to trace effort spend in digging the bench, monitoring to drag motor is sufficient. 0.480.01 of the drag
motor's energy is consumed in breaking out of the material and filling the bucket; the balance of drag energy is
used in keeping the bucket in balance during hoisting, swinging, dumping motions in other words keeping the drag
rope tight. If DECP concept is utilized, EC of the full cycle, EC of drag, hoist and swing motors to be monitored. If
drag-in and/or bucket fill EC concepts are used hoist and swing motors do not have to be kept track of; monitoring
drag-in segment merely will be sufficient.
If the aim is to determine comparative equipment digging effort at the bench, one does not have to use the
parameter of full cycle equipment specific energy, kW/m3, and/or cycle time compensated parameter full cycle
equipment specific energy, kW/m3/s. Drag motor energy consumption parameters like bucket fill energy and
specific bucket fill energy, and bucket drag-in energy and specific drag-in energy are better be preferred.
Naturally, the proposed criteria and equipment digging effort classifications have to be improved with further
observations from other walking draglines operating at other coal mining sites. However, the proposed criteria and
walking dragline digging effort classifications seem to be in concordance with the observations. Eventhough, such
classifications are based on measurements, it reflects the personal experience and comprehension of the
researcher. Another research worker may have a slightly different criterion and a classification proposed. However,
the main aim of the concepts cited are to give an idea on comparative walking dragline digging effort facts and
figures of multiple equipment operating at multiple mine sites.
Comparing the energy consumption figures of multiple draglines is extremely difficult. The parameters have to be
compensated for multiple bucket sizes and multiple cycle times in order to have meaningful comparisons and
evaluations. Thus, the effect of varying bucket sizes, geometry, specifications, cycle times, motor powers etc. are
minimized to a certain degree.
Since drag-in represent the breakout force in dragline operation, the author believes that drag motor's energy
consumption parameters to be used in evaluating the digging effort being spent at the bench. Drag-in energy per
dig cycle, kWh, bucket fill energy per cycle, kWh, total drag motor consumption per cycle, kWh, parameters
3
compensated for bucket volume and cyle time are specific drag-in energy, kWh/m , specific bucket fill energy,
3
3
kWh/m , Time compensated specific drag-in energy, kWh/ m /s.
Equipment digging effort concepts proposed which are based on drag motor energy consumption parameters at
the stage of breaking out (drag-in) and bucket fill phases serve the purpose.
5. CONCLUSIONS
As far as walking draglines are concerned digging action in other words breakout force is represented by drag-in
motion of the bucket. Therefore, drag motor's energy consumption during full work cycle embraces digging. That is
why drag motor and its' energy consumption deserve attention in trailing the digging ease and hardship
encountered at the digging bench. This is inclusive of drag-in and bucket fill segments, as well. The reason why the
author proposes drag energy consumption percentage (DECP) concept is that the parameter is independent of
equipment size, configuration and bench geometry. The digging difficulty encountered of multiple draglines and
sites may be judged since it represents breakout effort of the equipment. The other drag energy related specific
drag-in energy (SDIE) and specific bucket fill energy (SBFE) concepts proposed seem to be in conformity with DECP
concept and representing the observed digging ease conditions even better.
However, the proposed walking dragline bench digging effort sequences (class) should only be considered merely as
a clue (guide) because of the fact that they include personal observations, experience and interpretation of the
author. On the other hand, having a more reliable classification more data is needed from other coal fields. The
author is confident that the mining operators of stripping mines having equipment equipped with onboard
performance monitors have abundant long term monitored data and results, but not shared in the literature due to
commercial concerns.
REFERENCES
[1]
Klink D.: Personal communications, 2012, P&H Mining Equipment UK ltd., Wigan, England
[2]
Ozdogan M.: Determination of elastic constants of rock and classification of intact and in-situ rock (in Turkish), Madencilik, June
1985, Vol.24, No.2, Ankara, Turkey
55

PROCEEDINGS
[3]
Ozdogan M.: Interactive Energy Consumption Parameters of Walking Draglines at Turkish Coal mines, PhD. Dissertation, 2002,
METU, Ankara, Turkey
[4]
Ozdogan M., Ozgenoglu, A.: Payload estimation of a walking dragline-a case study, 3 Balkan Mining Congress, BALKANMINE
2009, zmir, Turkey, pp. 171-175.
[5]
Ozdogan M.: Variation of digging energy and digging rate with bench dig depth for walking draglines- A case study (in Turkish),
Madencilik, December 2010, Vol.49, No.4, pp.27-36, Ankara, Turkey
[6]
Young R.P., Hill J.J.: Seismic characterisation of rock masses before and after blasting, 26 U.S. Symposium on Rock Mechanics,
Rapid City, U.S.A., 1985, pp 1151-1158.
rd
th
56

PROCEEDINGS
RELIABILITY FOR WELDED STRUCTURES OF BUCKET

WHEEL EXCAVATORS BASED ON THE COMPARISON
OF OPERATIONAL AND CRITICAL STRESSES
ABSTRACT
Miodrag ARSI1
Sran BONJAK2
Vencislav GRABULOV3
Meri BURZI4
Zoran SAVI5
Institute for materials testing,

Belgrade, Serbia,
miodrag.arsi@institutims.rs
2
Faculty of Mechanical Engineering,
Belgrade, Serbia,
sbosnjak@mas.bg.ac.rs
3
Belgrade, Serbia,
vencislav.grabulov@institutims.rs
4
Innovation center of the faculty of
mechanical engineering, Belgrade,
Serbia, mburzic@mas.bg.ac.rs
5
Belgrade, Serbia,
zoran.savi@institutims.rs
Bucket wheel excavator consists of a number of elements and assemblies, as

well as relations between them and their characteristics structured in a way
that ensures performing of predicted actions during operation and carrying
out of necessary functions in time and conditions of exploitation.
Behaviour of the bucket wheel excavator under real conditions of
exploitation can not be predicted by engineering methods during the design
phase, employing of methods of probability theory is necessary as well.
Taking that into account, reliability of mechanical components is a
probability that the system will successfully perform its work function within
the allowable deviation range, projected service period and given conditions
of exploitation.
Therefore, only tests performed on structures of the bucket wheel excavator
in operating conditions and databases enable the complete assessment of
their state. Thats how the necessary data for the comparison of quality and
assessment of machines and structures, for the assessment of spatial
operation of certain components and elements regarding the load-carrying
capacity, as well as for the defining of joint operation of drive devices and
structures.
Development of reliability concept is fundamentally based on the
comparison of certain values which characterise functions of work capacity.
System reliability assessment is based on time parameters, operational state
- system operationally capable or state of failure - system operationally
incapable, as well as on the reliability assessment based on comparison of
operating and critical stresses.
This paper contains the probabilistic reliability calculation for supporting
welded structures of the bucket wheel, based on parameters of Weibull law
of distribution of random variable values of operational and critical stresses,
determined by tensometric measurement of deformations on the bucket
wheel excavator under exploitational conditions. The bucket wheel
excavator, type SchRs 650/5x2, has been produced by Thyssen Krupp,
Germany.

Keywords
Bucket-Wheel Excavator, Welded Structure,
Experimental Tests, Weibull Distribution, Reliability
1. INTRODUCTION
Premature damaging and fractures of components, assemblies and structures of bucket wheel excavators on
excavation sites often occur, which is being explained by inadequate designing, properties of material and welded
joints and oversights in component production technology [1,2]. Examples of fractures that occurred on bucket
wheel excavators have been recorded on practically every excavation site in Europe. Performed fracture and failure
analyses showed that the bucket wheel and bucket wheel boom are the most endangered structural groups on
57

PROCEEDINGS
bucket wheel excavators [3,4]. It should be noted that, aside from direct damage caused by damage and fractures, a
disturbance in the production of electricity could cause significant indirect damage.
Behaviour of bucket wheel excavators in real conditions of exploitation and their reliability can not be solely
predicted by engineering methods, but the probability theory methods have to be employed as well [5,6,7,8,9],
because during the operation all components of the bucket wheel excavators are subjected to variable amplitude
loading stochastic loads, which are being caused by work conditions, own low-frequency oscillations and
simultaneous effect of a large number of technological, metallurgical and structural factors [2,4]. Taking into
account all of the above mentioned, it can be concluded that only tests performed on structures of the bucket
wheel excavator enable the accurate assessment of their condition and reliability and obtainment of necessary
data for the quality comparison and assessment of machines and structures, as well as assessment of the spatial
operation of particular components and elements regarding the load-carrying capacity and assessment of
cooperation of drive devices and structures [1,2,3,4,8].
This paper presents the results of experimental tests performed in order to determine the stress state of supporting
welded structures of the bucket wheel. According to the statistics, bucket wheel excavator is being used
approximately 5.000 hours per year, with the average stress frequency of its components fpr = 1,67/s (as a double
stress amplitude).
Basic technical and technological properties of the excavator Sch Rs 650/5 x 24, which operates at the largest
Kosovo excavation site Dobro Selo near Obilic, presented in figure 1, are as follows:
- theoretical capacity of the bucket wheel excavator
- volume of buckets, taking into account the empty space
- maximum depth of the cut
- maximum height of the cut
- bucket wheel drive power [2x450 kW]
- diameter of the bucket wheel
- number of buckets
- number of bucket shakeouts
- specific excavation resistance per bucket knife length
- overall coefficient of drive utilization
- velocity of cutting
Qt = 4212 [m3/h]
Wbuc = 650 [l]
L = 5 [m]
H = 24 [m]
N = 900 [kW]
Db = 10.2 [m]
z = 21
-1
ns = 36 [min ]
kL = 109.6 [kN/m]
= 0.935
vc = 2.78 [m/s]
Figure 1. Bucket wheel excav ator Sch Rs 650/5 x 24
Assessment of reliability of supporting welded structures of the bucket wheel depends on the assessment of welded
joints of various shapes and dimensions, due to their heterogeneous structure (base metal, heat affected zone, weld
metal), figure 2. The stress concentration occurs at riveted and welded structures, not only due to the change of
the geometrical shape of the structure, but also due to flaws in welded joints that occur during the fabrication and
cracks that occur in welded joints and base material during the service of the bucket wheel excavator, figure 3.
58

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Supporting structure of the bucket wheel boom
Figure 3. Examples of cracks in critical areas of base material and welded joints
2. THEORETICAL ASSUMPTIONS
Reliability of mechanical components, assemblies and subsystems is a probability that the bucket wheel excavator
as a system will successfuly perform its work function within the limits of allowable deviations and projected
exploitation period. Development of reliability concept is based on comparison of specific values that characterize
the operational capability functions [8,9].
There are two main approaches for the system reliability assessment:
Reliability assessment based on time parameters
59

PROCEEDINGS
- operational state - system operationally capable,

- state of failure - system operationally incapable.
Reliability assessment based on comparison of operating and critical stresses.
The reliability assessment of welded structures of the bucket wheel excavator based on the comparison of
operating and critical stresses is presented in this paper.
Reliability Assessment Based On Comparison of Operating and Critical Stresses
When it comes to supporting structures of the bucket wheel excavator, their reliability primarily relies on
probability of correct operation under predicted conditions and service life. Factor of safety (S), which represents
the ratio between allowable stress (all) or reliability (R) and nominal stress (), is being used as a proof of reliability:
S = all / = R /
(1)
This is the usual deterministic method, which utilizes fixed values for the factor of safety and other influential
values, figure 4a. It is impossible to fully eliminate the failures, but the significant reduction is possible if adequate
stress distribution functions are taken into account, or to put it differently if the probabilistic calculation is utilized,
figure 4b. In that case the factor of safety should no longer be discussed, but only the probability that the reliability
is R > , or R > 0.
a) deterministic model
b) probabilistic model
Figure 4. Schematic appearance of the deterministic and probabilistic model of reliability calculation
Reliability, or failure probability of supporting structures of the bucket wheel excavator, in terms of probability
depends on:
spectrum of operating stress distribution during the service life under specific operating conditions,
values of fatigue strength, dispersion failure probability for adequate stress states,
experimentally determined values of operating strength, under specific operating conditions and
probabilities of failure,
values of dispersion of operating stresses and probability of occurrence of critical stresses under predicted
operating conditions.
All of the above mentioned elements are needed in order to determine the reliability (probability of failure), if
highest operating stresses are larger than the lowest critical stress in any part of their spectrum. Overlapping of
these stresses could occur, not only due to unpredictable operating conditions and incorrect bucket wheel
excavator manipulation, and is being used as an initial assumption when it comes to calculation of strength of
responsible components of supporting structures, taking into account that requests for easier structural solutions
are a priority.
3. EXPERIMENTAL TESTS
Reliability of supporting welded structures, based on the comparison of operating and critical stresses, could be
predicted only with support of experimental tensometric measurements of deformations in various environments,
through the use of probability theory methods.
60

PROCEEDINGS
Measurement of Deformations and Determination of Operating Stresses

Taking into account the static calculation and the theoretical analyses carried out for the elements of supporting
structures of the bucket wheel boom, as well as knowledge regarding the most common locations where cracks and
fractures occur, three zones with four measurement locations each were selected. Measurement zones are located
in the area of welded joints, and therefore test results could be used for the analysis of behaviour of welded joints
subjected to variable loading. In this paper only the results of stresses calculated on the basis of measured
deformations and probabilistic calculation of reliability for the supporting structure of the bucket wheel in zone 3
are presented, due to the fact that measurement results showed that highest stresses occur in that zone, figure 1.
It was concluded that, taking into account the character of loading and principle of action of strain gauges and
measurement equipment, it would be best to use the equipment which structure is presented in figure 5 for testing.
Figure 5. Appearance of the structure of measurement equipment and its connection with strain gauges
During the testing the four-channel magnetic tape recorder HP-3964-A was used, set to record and reproduce the
taken record under the dynamic conditions of service. Visual monitoring of the deformation state during the
testing was performed, in order to prevent the overstepping of standardized values. It was carried out through the
use of one-channel oscilloscope. For the drawing of records suitable for analysis the graphic tape recorder was used
that can amplificate the signal in the range from 1 [V] do 500 [V] and stretch the signal in the range from 1 [cm/h]
do 60 [cm/min], which enables the obtainment of records suitable for analysis and presentation.
Testing Methodology and Selection of Measurement Locations

Service conditions for a bucket wheel excavator are various and depend on a large number of deterministic and
random parameters. In order to determine true stress state, or to put it differently changing through time at the
welded structure of the bucket wheel excavator, the measurements of deformation in various environments barren
soil and coal were performed.
Tensometric deformation measurements were performed at the supporting welded structure of the bucket wheel
through the use of strain gauges (HBM XY31). Thanks to the properties of the measuring equipment, deformation
measurements were carried out through multiple repetitions of operating regimes.
4. PROBABILISTIC CALCULATION OF RELIABILITY

Overlapping of distribution functions of highest operating stresses and critical stresses in zone 3 at the supporting
structure of the bucket wheel boom, according to table 1, is shown in figure 7.
Table 7. Parameters of Weibull distribution of stress for the supporting welded structure

f ( r ) o

exp o ;

f ( cr ) cr

exp cr

Stress state of the supporting welded structure [MPa]
Front of the bucket wheel boom
d - test
During the movement of the bucket wheel excavator
41
3.6
36.9
0.089<0.102
During the excavation of loose rock mass
65
3.6
58.5
0.122<0.127
During the excavation of hard rock mass, full cut
81
3.7
73.1
0.076<0.114
112
7.0
106.7
0.092<0.109
Parameters of Weibull distribution
During the excavation of petrified rock mass
61

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 6. Overlapping of critical and operating stresses for given distribution functions
Relative frequency of operating stresses in figure 7 is presented in the continuous form of the probability density
function f(p), while critical stress is presented in the form of the probability density function f(cp). Failure
probability or reliability of the critical welded joint (Rwj) is being obtained from the following equation:
Rwj 1 e y e

cr cr y cr
o o

cr o
o o
*
dx y cr cr
cr cr
cr
(5)
where: f(o) probability density of operating stresses

f(cr) probability density of critical stresses
Rwj reliability of the welded joint
cr scale parameter
cr shape parameter
cr location parameter
By inserting the experimentally determined parameters of two-parameter Weibull distribution for the critical crosssection (table 7), the following probability density functions for operating and critical stresses are being obtained:
3, 7 o
f ( o )
81 81
f ( cr )
3,7 1
7, 0 cr
112 112

o
81
3,7
(6)
7,0 1

cr
112
7 ,0
(7)
reliability
Rwj 1 e
0
112 1
x 7 ,0
81
3,7

dx y cr
cr
,
cr
(8)
By calculating the integral (8) using the method of numerical integration, it was obtained that reliability of the
critical welded joint is Rwj = 1 0,3704 = 0.6296. On the basis of long term failure analyses and indicators of
endangerment of critical welded joint at the supporting structure of the bucket wheel, determined reliability for
one of responsible welded joints could be considered real.
62

PROCEEDINGS
Taking the principle that all magnitudes for which the reliability (failure probability) is being determined have their
own probability of occurrence as a starting point, it can be concluded that reliability should be looked upon in
specific areas of overlapping for various probabilities of highest operating stresses and critical stresses. That is the
way to get a clearer picture of certain influences on reliability in wide areas of their value, which could in this case
be presented by a Gaussian probability density function (normal distribution), with the normal distribution factor of
2.9, as shown in figure 7. General form of normal distribution is represented by equation (9). Determined probability
density function for the failure probability of the supporting welded structure of the bucket wheel, with normal
distribution parameters, is represented by equation (10).
1
f ( )
e
D 2

2D
(9)
where is the mean value of stress, while D is the dispersion of mean value.
f ()
1
11.8 2
1 91.4

2 11.8
(10)
5. CONCLUSION
On the basis of long term failure analyses and indicators of endangerment of critical welded joint at the supporting
structure of the bucket wheel, determined reliability for supporting welded structure of the bucket wheel could be
considered real.
For the evaluation of service life of supporting welded structures, taking into account the reliability based on the
comparison of operating and critical stresses, it is necessary to define the spectra of variable stresses in various
conditions of exploitation of the bucket wheel excavator for measured deformations and calculated stresses.
6. ACKNOWLEDGMENT
This work is a contribution to the Project TR 35006, funded by the Ministry of education, science and technological
development of Serbia.
REFERENCES
[1]
Miodrag A., Stojan S., Vujadin A. : Experimental and Numerical Evaluation of Cumulative Fatigue Damage of Welded Structure,
Proceedings of the Conference Fatigue Damage, Seville, 2003, pp. 143-147.
[2]
Miodrag A., Vujadin A., Zoran A. : The analysis of supporting structure of planetary gear box satelite, Proceedings of the 16th
European Conference of Fracture of Nano and Engineering Materials and Structures, Alexandroupolis, Greece, 2006, Files on the CD
(The paper is 8 pages long).
[3]
Sran B., Miodrag A., Nenad Z., Marko R., Milorad P.: Bucket wheel excavator: Integrity assessment of the bucket wheel boom tierod welded joint, Engineering Failure Analysis, 2011, Vol.18, pp. 212-222.
[4]
Miodrag A., Sran B., Nenad Z., Aleksandar S., Neboja. G. : Bucket wheel failure caused by residual stresses in welded joints,
Engineering Failure Analysis, 2011, Vol.18, pp.700-712.
[5]
Limnios N., Oprisan G.: Semi-Markov Processes and Reliability, Statistics for Industry and Technology, A Birkhuser book, 2001.
[6]
Gottvald J., Krsa J., Helebrant F., Fries F., Kraus V.: FT-TA4/018 Modern Trends in Incre-FT-TA4/018 Modern Trends in Increasing
Equipment Reliability for the Open-Cast Mining of Utility Minerals, Part 6b.: In-Situ Verification of Methods and a Proposal for Their
Application-Draft Methodology for Measuring. Research Report, 2009.
[7]
Ljubia P., Milorad P.: Implementation Methodology for Risk Minimization into Maintenance Process of Produc-tion System at Coal
Mines, Report of Contract No. 4617, DQM Research Center-Kolubara Metal, Prijevor-Vreoci, Serbia, 2009, pp. 468.
[8]
Miodrag A., Mladen M., Alesandar V., Marko R., Zoran R.: Reliability of Critical Welded Joints in Responsible Support Structures of
Bucket Wheel Excavator, XIX International Conference on Material handling, constructions and logistics -MHCL 09, Belgrade,
Serbia, 2009, pp. 133-138.
[9]
Miodrag A., Sran B., Marko R., Zoran O., Zoran S. : Reliability Assessment of the Gearbox of the Bucket-Wheel Excavator
th
Excavation Subsystem Based on Failure Analysis, Papers Book of the 4 Balkan Mining Congress, Ljubljana, Slovenia, 2011, pp.
103-111.
63

PROCEEDINGS
INFLUENCE OF SIPX AND AP5500 COLLECTORS

ON THE RECOVERY OF COPPER AND PRECIOUS METALS
FROM ORE DEPOSIT TENKA-3
ABSTRACT
Ivana JOVANOVI1
Igor MILJANOVI2
Vladan MILOEVI3
Dejan TODOROVI3
Ljubia ANDRI3
Zoran BARTULOVI3
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor,

Serbia, ivajo7@gmail.com
2
University of Belgrade, Faculty of
Mining and Geology, Belgrade, Serbia
3
and other Mineral Raw Materials,
Belgrade, Serbia
The Tenka deposits (which include Tenka 1, Tenka 2, and Tenka 3 deposits,
located in eastern Serbia) belong to polymetallic deposits and besides the
copper they contain lead and zinc minerals in a certain content. From this
perspective, defining optimal ore processing conditions (due to complex ore
characteristics) and obtaining commercial product with satisfactory
technological properties, represents complex task and requires serious
research and examinations.
This paper presents a part of technological investigations performed to
determine the possibility of copper and precious metals valorization from
the ore deposit Tenka 3, using a flotation concentration method. During the
experimental procedure, ethoxycarbonyl thiourea based collector (AERO
5500 promoter) and sodium isopropyl xanthate were used, while the pH
value of flotation pulp varied from 9.9 to 11.6. The results shown that this
combination of reagents affects relatively low recovery of copper and
precious metals (regardless to pH value of pulp).
Keywords
Flotation, Copper, Precious Metals, Recovery
1. INTRODUCTION
Polymetallic deposit Tenka is located in the northern part of the "Severni revir" of porphyric copper deposite
"Majdanpek". Analysis has shown that the deposit Tenka consists from several ore bodies, different in shape from
ore veins and pipes with clearly distinguished steep decline to lenticular and isometric ore bodies. Such
morphological diversity of ore bodies is a consequence of the character and contacts of andesites and limestones,
as well as multiphase intrusions and complex tectonic movements. Generally speaking, three ore bodies can be
isolated: Tenka 1 (north ore body), Tenka 2 (south ore body), and Tenka 3 which is located in the eastern part of the
productive zone [1]. In terms of mineral composition, ore body Tenka 3 is agglomerate composed of massive pyrite
bodies (pyrite content is 60-90%), magnetite ore bodies in skarns and copper vein-impregnated mineralization in
andesites [1,2]. The subject of this work is related to the valorization possibilities of useful components (copper and
precious metals) from the complex raw material originated from the ore body Tenka 3. It is important that this
sample has high content of pyrite besides the relatively high content of useful components. Structural and textural
properties, clay content, mineralogical composition, degree of intergrowth of useful and gangue minerals are
similar in the tested sample as in the ore body Tenka 3 [3,4].
2. EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE
Raw materials
The initial material used in this study was formed as a composite sample prepared of three components from
different locations of deposit Tenka 3 (locations 1, 2, and 3). Chemical composition of the composite sample is
shown in Table 1.
64

PROCEEDINGS
Table 1. Chemical composition of the composite sample from the Tenka 3 deposit
Sample
name
Pb, %
Zn, %
Cu, %
Cusulph, %
Cuox, %]
S, %
Au, g/t
Ag, g/t
Composite
1-3
0.073
0.016
0.473
0.453
0.021
21.853
0.520
5.567
Qualitative mineralogical analysis was performed by the polarizing microscope with reflected light in the air. These
tests showed that the sample contained the following major minerals: pyrite, chalcopyrite, limonite, quartz,
silicates and carbonates. Figure 1 presents galena, sphalerite and chalcopyrite grains, while Figure 2 shows
aggregate of carbonates with bornite inclusions.
Figure 1. Grains of chalcopyrite, galena

and sphalerite from ore deposit Tenka 3
Figure 2. Aggregate of carbonates with bornite inclusions
For the purposes of the flotation concentration tests, it was necessary to grind raw material to a suitable fineness
(60% -0,074mm). Particle size composition of the grinded sample is shown in the Figure 3.
100
90
80
70
M, %
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0
100
Size distribution curve
200
300
400
Cumulative oversize dist.curve
500
600
700
800
Size, m
Figure 3. Grain-size distribution of the grinded sample
Test procedure
Laboratory testing of copper minerals flotation concentration is carried out according to the following conditions:
pulp density in grinding processes was 70% of solid phase in all experiments
65

PROCEEDINGS
grinding fineness was 60% -0.074 mm (grain size that achieves an optimal degree of useful minerals release,
according to the mineralogical analysis)
pulp density in flotation processes was 30% of solid phase in all experiments
pH values of pulp in flotation process were 9.9, 10.5, 11.1 and 11.6 (from the first to the fourth experiment,
respectively)
Sodium isopropyl xanthate and AERO 5500 Promoter (ethoxycarbonyl thiourea based reagent) were applied
as the collectors. Mass ratio of these collectors was NaIPX : AP5500 = 60 : 40. Overall consumption of the
collectors was 50 g/t in all experiments. The collector dose is based on the content of sulphide minerals
including very high content of pyrite(over 30%) in the ore.
AEROFROTH 76A was used as a frother in all experiments, with the dosage recommended by the
manufacturer.
3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Technological results of the examination and material balances of the experiments are shown in the Tables 2, 3, 4,
and 5.
Table 2. Experiment 1 - Technological results of the examination
Product
M, %
Cu, %
S, %
Au, g/t
Ag, g/t
RCu, %
RS, %
RAu, %
RAg, %
F*
100.00
0.47
21.8
0.520
5.567
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
RCCu
10.25
3.08
26.2
1.926
10.569
67.17
12.32
37.96
19.46
SCCu
2.96
0.31
16.0
1.778
16.043
1.95
2.17
10.12
8.53
86.79
0.17
21.5
0.311
4.619
30.88
85.51
51.92
72.01
Product
M, %
Cu, %
S, %
Au, g/t
Ag, g/t
RCu, %
RS, %
RAu, %
RAg, %
100.00
0.47
21.8
0.520
5.567
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
RCCu
10.40
2.96
24.9
1.811
11.979
65.50
11.88
36.22
22.38
SCCu
1.84
0.98
41.3
2.758
28.622
3.84
3.49
9.76
9.46
87.76
0.16
21.0
0.319
4.324
30.66
84.63
54.02
68.16
Product
M, %
Cu, %
S, %
Au, g/t
Ag, g/t
RCu, %
RS, %
RAu, %
RAg, %
100.00
0.47
21.8
0.520
5.567
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
RCCu
9.40
3.34
24.4
2.125
9.790
66.80
10.52
38.41
16.53
SCCu
3.29
0.34
23.0
1.293
7.039
2.38
3.47
8.18
4.16
87.31
0.17
21.5
0.318
5.056
30.82
86.01
53.41
79.31
Product
M, %
Cu, %
S, %
Au, g/t
Ag, g/t
RCu, %
RS, %
RAu, %
RAg, %
100.00
0.47
21.8
0.520
5.567
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
RCCu
7.31
4.22
29.4
2.620
9.100
65.63
9.86
36.83
11.95
SCCu
1.81
0.44
32.6
3.150
6.400
1.69
2.71
10.96
2.08
90.88
0.17
21.0
0.299
5.266
32.68
87.43
52.21
85.97
*F feed, RCCu rough copper concentrate, SCCu scavenger copper concentrate, T - tailings
Metal recovery in the rough copper concentrate is shown in the Figure 4, while Figure 5 shows metal content in the
rough copper concentrate.
66

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4. Metal recovery in the

rough copper concentrate
Figure 5. Metal content in the

rough copper concentrate
As it can be seen from the Tables 2-5, the highest recovery of copper (67.17 %) in the rough concentrate was
achieved in the first experiment. Otherwise, the highest recoveries of gold (38.41 %) and silver (22.38 %) were
obtained in the third and the second experiment, respectively.
The highest copper and gold contents in the rough concentrate (4.22 % and 2.620 g/t, respectively) were achieved
in the fourth experiment (Table 5), while the highest content of silver (11,979 g/t) was achieved in the second
experiment (Table 3).
Generally, it can be concluded that the best technological results were obtained in the fourth experiment, where
the pH value of the flotation pulp was 11.6.
As it can be seen from the Figure 5, copper and gold contents in the rough copper concentrate slightly increase and
silver content decreases with the increasing pH value of the flotation pulp.
Dependence of the copper and gold recoveries in the rough copper concentrate on pH value of the flotation pulp is
not clearly observed. Silver recovery decreases with the increasing pH value of the pulp (Figure 3).
Generally, it can be concluded that obtained recoveries of Cu, Au and Ag are quite a low (under 70%, 40% and 30%
respectivelly). Therefore, this combination of reagents is not suitable for application in the flotation processing of
this ore.
4. CONCLUSION
These testing has shown that combination of the collectors SIPX and AERO 5500 Promoter is not suitable for
flotation concentration of copper as well as precious metals from ore body Tenka 3. This is especially related with
low copper recovery (under 70%) in the rough flotation concentrate. Individual application of this reagents gave
better results than their combination [3].
5. ACKNOWLEDGMENT
These investigations were conducted under the Project 33007: Implementation of sophisticated technical,
technological and ecological solutions in the existing production systems of Copper Mines Bor and Copper Mine
Majdanpek, funded by the Ministry of Education, Science and Technological Development of the Republic of Serbia.
REFERENCES
[1]
S.Vuji, M.Gruji, D.Salati, S.Radivojevi and R.Jelenkovi: Rudnik bakra Majdanpek, razvoj, stanje, budunost, Rudarskogeoloki fakultet, Beograd, 2005, p.167 (In Serbian)
[2]
I Jovanovi, D. Todorovi, Lj. Andri: The effect of different collectors on recovery of copper and precious metals of the ore
body Tenka 3 (Uticaj razliitih kolektora na iskorienje bakra i plemenitih metala rudnog tela Tenka 3), Rudarski radovi 3/2012,
2012, pp. 223-234
[3]
V.Miloevi et al.: Izvetaj Istraivanja za izbor optimalnih parametara tehnolokog procesa za dobijanje najpovoljnijeg
iskorienja i kvaliteta koncentrata bakra iz uzorka Tenka 3 Severni revir, arhiva ITNMS, Beograd, 2011, p.63 (In Serbian)
[4]
S.Miloevi: Flotacijska koncentracija Teorijske osnove flotiranja, Tehniki fakultet u Boru, Univerzitet u Beogradu, Bor, 1992,
p.211 (In Serbian)
67

PROCEEDINGS
DETERMINING INDIRECT DEPENDENCY OF PRODUCTION SEGMENTS

WITHIN THERMAL POWER PLANT OPEN PIT
MINES KOSTOLAC BY MULTISECTORAL MODELS
ABSTRACT
Svetomir MAKSIMOVI1
Igor MILJANOVI2
Ivana IVOJINOVI MILJANOVI1
Milena JOSIPOVI PEJOVI2
Aleksandar PETROVSKI2
Electric Power Industry of Serbia, Belgrade,

Serbia, svetomir.maksimovic@eps.rs
2
University of Belgrade, Faculty of Mining and
Geology, Belgrade, Serbia, imiljan@rgf.bg.ac.rs
Application of multisectoral models in our country as well as worldwide has so far been mostly related with the macroeconomic
systems, i.e. the business system of a country. Multisectoral models
were mostly used in economy, only to some extent in the mining
industry, without much interest of engineering staff.
The area of multisectoral models utilization in business public
enterprises and business companies has not sufficiently been
explored. Results obtained following the example of Kolubara, TENT
and Kostolac show the potential of a realistic review of mutually
extremely complex production-related direct and indirect
dependencies and influences within commercial entities.
Keywords
Multisectoral Models, Electric Power Industry, Company, Coal Sector
1. INTRODUCTION
In many countries worldwide, multisectoral analyses are used for keeping national and regional economies. The
economy structure of the national coal industry can be treated similar to the national economy. Each sector needs
input of goods and services in the form of work force, repro-material. In order to be useful for the system, each
sector has to increase the value of accepted input. The sum of added values of all sectors in the coal industry is
called GNP (Gross National Product), an important parameter for describing coal industry economy [1,2].
Multisectoral analysis is still not present enough in the mining engineering and has still not been applied in the
mining industry. Today, in the times of restructuring mining industry in Serbia, there are prominent requests for
increasing coal and electric power production, within strict ecological, social, urban, technological, market and
other limitations and requests. Researches that have been conducted by the School of Mining and Geological
Engineering, Department for Application of Computers and Systemic Engineering, under mentorship of Prof Dr
Slobodan Vujic, show that multisectoral analysis can be an efficient tool in management, especially in management
of large, complex economic systems [4,5,6].
In this connection, starting from methodological basics of multisectoral analysis of production systems, within coal
industry of Serbia, numerous questions arise, such as forming of multisectoral production system matrices, defining
their resulting information contents and analytical potential, determination of possibilities and ways of their actual
use in the production system, etc [3, 7].
Researches have been conducted upon examples of companies for production of coal and thermo-electric power,
Business Association (BA) Electric Power industry of Serbia. The results of these researches show that multisectoral
analysis provides numerous significant pieces of information on: direct and mutual production connectivity of
entities in the system, mutual dependency of the system and the environment, that is, information on natural and
intensity of systematic dependency on the environment, establishment and division of production tasks per entity,
their value structure, scope and spending structure, level of influence of their changes to the system production,
cost structure, prices of realized production, etc.
68

PROCEEDINGS
2. MULTISECTORAL MODELS
Multisectoral models based on application of multisectoral analysis serve for discovering one of the possible
solutions in the area of production, export exchange, allocation and final spending, and especially, for
implementation of the current economic policy.
Usefulness of multisectoral tables is seen in the following:
a) Improvement of harmonization of mutual relations between economic sectors in production, allocation,
exchange and spending (through implementation of changes in use and increase of existing capacities,
with or without inclusion of the technological process);
b) Establishment of direct and indirect productive dependency of local economic sectors and needs for its
change;
c) Determining the level of import dependency of the local economy on the global economic system and
possibility of substitution of expert by local production;
d) Acquiring quantitative basis for examining effects of application of multisectoral relations on each sample
separately (prices, customs, taxes, contributions, devaluation, inflation, etc.);
e) Presenting the status and possibilities of application of economic position of economic sectors in
accumulation;
f) Finding elements for directing the pace of economic development and improving production structure, by
making an optimal allocation of production resources;
g) Improvement of production of macroeconomic models for establishing optimal economic development,
using the Operational Research method.
Multisectoral analysis has been pronounced the most important revelation in the 20th-century economy and it is
attributed to the Nobel Prize winner, American Economist born in Russia, Wassily Leontief [2,3].
3. MULTISECTORAL TABLES (INPUT-OUTPUT TABLES) OF THERMO-ELECTRIC POWER PLANT,

KOSTOLAC
Sector connectivity in BA TE-KO Kostolac is shown in Figure 1 [8].
Figure 1. Schematic presentation of interconnectivity of the production system TE-KO Kostolac. OPM Drmno Open pit mine Drmno, OPM
Cirikovac Open pit mine Cirikovac.
The basic input-output table BA TE-KO Kostolac is given in the continuation of the text.
69

PROCEEDINGS
Table 1. The basic input-output table BA TE-KO Kostolac (for 2007), (10 RSD)
Segment
OPM
Drmno
OPM
Cirikovac
TE-A
TE-B
Total
Fin. spend.
TOTAL
OPM Drmno
2.500
568.400
4.753.500
5.324.400
537.780
5.862.180
OPM Cirikovac
640
704.800
705.440
527.300*
1.232.740
TE-A
47.300
37.100
84.400
2.115.700
2.200.100
TE-B
153.100
102.000
255.100
9.140.980
9.396.080
12.321.760
18.691.100
Total
155.600
47.940
1.310.300
4.855.500
6.369.340
Total mat. costs (TMC)
2.145.000
265.550
1.470.550
5.161.900
9.043.000
Amortization (AM)
1.221.100
105.940
125.000
2.132.300
3.584.340
Net earnings (NE)
613.800
387.600
275.000
266.180
1.542.580
Product. surplus (PS)
1.882.280
473.650
329.550
1.835.700
4.521.180
Domest. prod. (DP)
3.717.180
967.190
729.550
4.234.180
9.648.100
Production (P)
5.862.180
1.232.740
2.200.100
9.396.080
18.691.100
Reduction of res. (Z)
Import by origin (I)
Avail. funds (AF)
5.862.180
1.232.740
2.200.100
9.396.080
18.691.100
4. FORMS OF MULTISECTORAL DEPENDENCY

According to table 1, technical coefficients or production norms have been calculated, and they present direct
production dependency between each pair of production segments in execution of their activities in BA TE-KO
Kostolac.
According to the direction of action in the reproduction process, it can have the characteristics of direct and
indirect dependency.
The value of economic sector production in a company during a given period can be established by using the matrix
[I - A]-1. This particular matrix shows, apart from the direct the indirect dependency between economic sectors
during a reproduction process. The matrix [I - A]-1 represents an inverse matrix that consists of a singular matrix
with the mark (I) and technical coefficient matrix (A). Further on, this matrix can be presented as the following
equation:
I - A-1 I A As
s2
Where s denotes the exponent of a degree [9,10].

The elements of the matrix [I - A]-1 include the value of the production of an economic sector i, that has to be
realized in order to avail functioning of a reproductive process, and to provide the production unit of the economic
sector j for the final spending. Its elements are interpreted only per column [11].
5. ESTABLISHING INDIRECT DEPENDENCY ON THE EXAMPLE OF PRODUCTIVE SEGMENTS BA TE-KO

KOSTOLAC FOR THE PLANNED PRODUCTION IN 2007
Establishing indirect dependency can relate to productive or import dependency. In the given example, it relates to
the productive dependency.
The matrix of coefficients that show indirect connection between segments and that confirm multiphase
functioning of a reproductive process has the following form:
0,01357 0,00100 0,01165 0,01310
A
s2
0
0,01248 0,00965 0
0
0,00163 0,01314 0
0,00088 0
0,00700 0,01414
70

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2. TE-KO Kostolac, matrix [I - A]
Segment
OPM Drmno
OPM Cirikovac
TE-A
TE-B
Total
-1
Segment
OPM Drmno
OPM Cirikovac
TE-A
TE-B
DIR
1.00043
0.25835
0.50590
IND
0.01357
0.01000
0.01165
0.01310
1.01400
0.01000
0.27000
0.51900
DIR
1.00052
0.32035
IND
0.01248
0.00965
1.01300
0.33000
DIR
0.03837
1.01686
IND
0.00163
0.01314
0.04000
1.03000
DIR
0.02612
1.01086
IND
0.00088
0.00700
0.01414
0.02700
0.00700
1.02500
DIR
1.02655
1.03889
1.59556
1.51676
IND
0.01445
0.02411
0.04144
0.02724
1.04100
1.06300
1.63700
1.54400
Incessant functioning of a reproductive process that is provided by, for instance, OPM Drmno, to produce the
production unit (of coal) in the value of 100 (RSD), requires, in the form of indirect production dependency, to
additionally produce in OPM Drmno another 1.36 (RSD) and in TE-B another 0.09 (RSD) see table 2. If not, the
multiphase reproductive process could not function. For the TE-A segment, additional conditioned production in
the form of indirect productive dependency would have to be done: OPM Drmno for 1.17 (RSD), OPM Cirikovac
for 0.97 (RSD), TE-A for 1.31 (RSD) and segment TE-B for 0.7 (RSD).
The segment structure shown in Table 3 points towards a relative significance of direct and indirect productive
dependency of segments.
Thus, for instance, the segment producing coal in OPM Drmno is directly dependent on the supply of electric
energy from TE-B for 96.74 (%), and slightly depends with 3.26 (%) on functioning of the reproductive flow from TEB.
Segment for production of electric power TE-B directly depends on delivery of coal from OPM Drmno with 97.48
(%), and somewhat depends, with 2.52 (%), on functioning of the reproductive process based on production of coal
in the segment Drmno.
Table 4 contains data on direct and indirect productive dependency between the given processing segment and the
given production segment, reduced to the unit of final spending. In order to have, for example, segment for coal
production OPM Drmno provide production for satisfying needs of the final spending, it would have to provide,
immediately from the producer, in this case from the producer of electric power TE-B, electric power for 2.51(%)
and its own coal for 96.10 (%), which makes total dependency of 98.61 (%). This is not possible to realize if the
reproductive system would not have production at the level of 1.39 (%) of the value of the used coal and electric
power in the segment for production of coal OPM Drmno.
71

PROCEEDINGS
Table 3. TE-KO Kostolac, segment structure
Segment
OPM Drmno
OPM Cirikovac
TE-A
TE-B
Total
Table 4. Structure of matrix [I - A]
OPM Cirikovac
TE-A
TE-B
Total
OPM Cirikovac
TE-A
TE-B
DIR
98.66
95.69
97.48
IND
1.34
100.00
4.31
2.52
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
DIR
98.77
97.08
IND
1.23
2.92
100.00
100.00
DIR
95.93
98.72
IND
4.07
1.28
100.00
100.00
0
98.62
DIR
96.74
IND
3.26
100.00
1.38
100.00
100.00
100.00
DIR
98.61
97.73
97.47
98.24
IND
1.39
2.27
2.53
1.76
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
-1
Segment
OPM Drmno
Segment
OPM Drmno
Segment
OPM Drmno
OPM Cirikovac
TE-A
TE-B
32.77
DIR
96.10
15.78
IND
1.31
0.94
0.71
0.85
97.41
0.94
16.49
33.62
DIR
94.12
19.57
IND
1.17
0.59
95.29
20.16
DIR
3.61
62.12
IND
0.16
0.80
3.77
62.92
DIR
2.51
65.47
IND
0.08
0.43
0.91
2.59
0.43
66.38
98.24
DIR
98.61
97.73
97.47
IND
1.39
2.27
2.53
1.76
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
6. CONCLUSION
The area of application of the multisectoral analysis in companies has not been well researched. The results
obtained by application of some models of multisectoral analysis on the example of production companies in the
Electric Power Company of Serbia point to the possibility of a more realistic analysis of mutual, very complex
dependencies and influences within companies. Apart from this, the conducted researches in production
companies within Electric Power Company of Serbia point to the following: one should continue with future
researches and application of these models in economic companies; these models represent a significant
improvement of existing methodologies of analysis and planning that now exist in economic companies; further
development and application of these models in economic companies should be based primarily on dynamic
multisectoral models.
72

PROCEEDINGS
REFERENCES
[1]
Stanojevi R., (2001), Optimization macroeconomy models, Velarta, Belgrade, (512 p.), (in Serbian).
[2]
Stanojevi R., (2004), Dynamical programming, Institute of Economy, Belgrade (958 p.), (in Serbian).
[3]
Vuji S., I. Miljanovi, S.Maksimovic, A.Milutinovic, T.Benovic, M.Hudej, B.Dimitrijevic, V.Cebasek and G.Gajic, Optimal dynamic
management of exploitation life of the mining machinery: models with undefined interval, Jornla of Mining Science, Springer
New York, DOI: 10.1007/s10913-01-0053-2, Volume 46, Number 4, 2010, (425-430).
[4]
Vuji S., MAP: A method of multiattributive prognostication of mineral resources, Yugoslav journal of operations research, YU
th
ISSN 0354-0243, Volume 11, Number 2, 2001. (211-220); 29 International Symposium on Application of Computers and
Operations Research in the Mineral Industry, APCOM 2001, Section 2: Exploration, China University of Mining and Technology
(CUMT), Bejing, China.
[5]
Vuji S., Miljanovi I., Maksimovi S., et al., (2010), Optimal dynamic management of exploitation life of the mining machinery
with undefined interval, Journal of Mining Science, Vol. 46, No. 4. 2010.
[6]
Popovi S., Nei V., Petrovi J., (1977), Application of input-output analysis in a complex business organization for the example
of Kolubara, SYM-OP-IS 77, Herceg Novi, (pp. 439-460), (in Serbian).
[7]
Maksimovi S. (2009), Application of intersectoral analysis in business association of the Electric Power Industry of Serbia
thermoenergetic sector, Elektroprivreda Vol.1, Beograd, (pp. 85-92), (in Serbian).
[8]
Maksimovi S., Milanovi Z., Miljanovi I., Boevski S., Hudej M., Benovi T., (2009), Application of Input-Output Analysis in
rd
Corporate Enerprises of EPIS Thermal Power Sector, 3 Balkan Mining Congress, Izmir-Turkey.
[9]
Maksimovi S., Miljanovi I., (2011), Application of structure models in planning the development of EPIS production sectors,
IMCET 2011, Ankara-Turkey.
[10]
Maksimovi S., Milinovi Z., et al., (2009), Application of an input-output analysis in the companies of thermoenergetic sector of
EPIS, SYM-OP-IS 2009, (pp. 587-590), (in Serbian).
73

PROCEEDINGS
CONCEPTUAL SOLUTIONS OF THE MAIN MINING PROJECT

OF THE OPEN PIT MINE UGLJEVIK ISTOK, MINE
AND THERMAL PLANT UGLJEVIK REPUBLIC OF SRPSKA
ABSTRACT
The brown coal open pit mine Ugljevik-istok is operating within the Mine
and Thermal Power plant Ugljevik in the Republic of Srpska, and providing
the thermal power plant with 300 MW of power with coal. Since the now
operative project documentation is expiring, a new Main Mining Project for
the Ugljevik Istok was assembled. The paper presents the concept of the
new project, with particular emphasis on the new and specific solutions.
Neboja MAKSIMOVI1
Sran KNEEVI
Simeun MARIJANAC
Mining Institute, Belgrade, Serbia

1
n_maksimovic@ikom.rs
Keywords
Open Pit Mine, Ugljevik, Brown Coal, Mining Project
1. INTRODUCTION
According to the approved, project documentation, coal exploitation at the open mine pit "Bogutovo selo" will be
terminated in the year 2014. However, certain deviations can be expected. A situation like this is the basic reason
for projection of a new open mine pit which would be exploited for the needs of the existing thermal plant block
Ugljevik, of 300MW.
Proved coal reserves, analyzed variants as well as the proposed solutions point to the "Ugljevik-istok" basin.
The brown coal basin "Ugljevik-istok" has a surface of 300 ha. The south border of this deposit is represented by the
coppice zone of the floor (main) coal layer, west, pit "east", but the northern and the eastern are represented by the
finishing contours of the projected pit. The eastern border goes through the valley of the Ugljevik stream. The
excavation direction is from east to west.
Exploitation coal reserves of the "Ugljevik-istok" calculated through several methods were defined with a total of
51.3 x 106 t with 300,400,000 m3 sm (solid mass) of waste rock for a period of twenty nine years starting from 20132041. Out of twenty nine years in total, only during the first two coal exploitation of coal will be lesser than the
planned 1,850,000t while the lacking capacity will be compensated from the open pit "Bogutovo selo". After the
first two years coal production will be stabilized and based on the project will be absolutely sustainable.
The excavation dynamics of waste rock varies from the starting 3,500,000 m3sm to the maximum of 13,500,000
m3sm. In the period of the last five years the excavation dynamics drops again and from 13,500,000 in the last year
remains at 2,000,000 m3sm. Table 1 displays the waste rock and coal exploitation dynamics.
Table 1.
Overburden m3 sm
Year
Coal, t
2011
Preparation works
1st year
2012
Preparation works
2013
3,500,000
3,500,000
350,000
350,000
2014
4,500,000
8,000,000
1,000,000
1,350,000
2015
5,500,000
13,500,000
1,850,000
3,200,000
2016
7,500,000
21,000,000
1,850,000
5,050,000
2017
11,000,000
32,000,000
1,850,000
6,900,000
5th year
74

PROCEEDINGS
2018
11,000,000
43,000,000
1,850,000
8,750,000
2019
11,000,000
54,000,000
1,850,000
10,600,000
2020
11,000,000
65,000,000
1,850,000
12,450,000
2021
11,000,000
76,000,000
1,850,000
14,300,000
2022
11,000,000
87,000,000
1,850,000
16,150,000
2023
11,500,000
98,500,000
1,850,000
18,000,000
2024
12,100,000
110,600,000
1,850,000
19,850,000
2025
12,100,000
122,700,000
1,850,000
21,700,000
2026
12,100,000
134,800,000
1,850,000
23,550,000
2027
12,100,000
146,900,000
1,850,000
25,400,000
2028
12,500,000
159,400,000
1,850,000
27,250,000
2029
12,500,000
171,900,000
1,850,000
29,100,000
2030
12,500,000
184,400,000
1,850,000
30,950,000
2031
12,500,000
196,900,000
1,850,000
32,800,000
2032
13,500,000
210,400,000
1,850,000
34,650,000
2033
13,500,000
223,900,000
1,850,000
36,500,000
2034
13,500,000
237,400,000
1,850,000
38,350,000
2035
13,500,000
250,900,000
1,850,000
40,200,000
2036
13,500,000
264,400,000
1,850,000
42,050,000
2037
13,500,000
277,900,000
1,850,000
43,900,000
2038
10,000,000
287,900,000
1,850,000
45,750,000
2039
6,000,000
293,900,000
1,850,000
47,600,000
2040
4,500,000
298,400,000
1,850,000
49,450,000
2041
2,000,000
300,400,000
1,850,000
51,300,000
300,400,000
10th year
15th year
19th year
24th year
29th year
51,300,000
2. PROJECT SOULUTIONS
Considering that the project was done in two variants it is very important to mention that the exploitation method,
excavation, transport and disposal are the same in both variants from the first to the tenth year, which means:
Excavation of waste rock and coal with excavators/ hydraulic excavators.
Transport of the waste rock with trucks to the external depository, and coal to the stationary crushing
facility (primary crushing)
Coal transport towards the thermal plant is done by transporters with a rubber track with the width of B=
1,200 mm, v= 1.31 m/s
Excavation and loading of waste rock, is done with hydraulic spoon excavators with a height spoon of 12 to
15 m3 in volume, with blasting being substituted with ripping. The excavation of waste rock is done by an
excavator from bottom to top in a block 11 to 15 m wide in cuts to 1m thick in a circular swath and directly
loaded into trucks with a 120 t capacity. The minimum floor width is 35m, the general slope of the work
floor systems at the waste rock is = 11, work floors are 48 m wide, which creates the possibility of
excavation two blocks at the same floor before moving to the next. The projected floor height at the waste
rock is 10 m. Five excavators will work on three floors, with one working on five floors the whole time.
Before the end of the tenth year of exploitation, the conditions necessary for disposal at the internal depot are
achieved. In the first year of depositing, around 3.62x106 m3 sm which would the loosening coefficient/ disposal
through trucks alone/ of 1.25 t amount to 4.52 x106m3rm (raw mass) of waste rock. Masses are deposited through
trucks and bulldozers, which define the first position of the disposal transporter as well as a place of placement for
the operation disposer according to the E-T-C-CB-D variant.
It is clear that the tenth year will be the turning point and that this is the moment when the continuous equipment
can be introduced to the production process. In the figures 1 and 1a, the condition of the pit is displayed at the end
of the tenth year of exploitation according to the ET variant and in figures 2 and 2a according to the CCBD
75

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Situation map with work status at the end of the tenth year
at the open pit "Ugljevik Istok", truck disposal (T).
Figure 1a. Situation map of the external depot at the end of the tenth
year at the open pit "Ugljevik Istok", truck disposal (T)
Figure 2. Situation map with the work status at the end of the tenth
year at the open pit "Ugljevik istok" Combined disposal (CCBD-T)
Figure 2a. Situation map of the external depot at the end of the tenth
year at the open pit "Ugljevik Istok", combined disposal (DTO-K)
In the period since the opening to the end of the tenth year 49,980,936m3 sm of waste rock will be excavated. The
tailings masses are transported in trucks to the external depot: 46,363,956 m3 sm, i.e. it is disposed with the
looseness coefficient of 1.25 57,954,945 m3 rm in total. At the internal depot, tailings masses will be deposited
with the same looseness coefficient 3,616,980 m3 i.e. 4,521,225 m3 rm.
In the aforementioned period a total of 8,046,434t of coal will be mined.
The project went in two directions with the solutions:
E-T variant (excavator-truck)
E-T-C-CB-D variant (excavator-truck-crusher-conveyor belt-disposer)
76

PROCEEDINGS
E-T Variant
The mining continuation for X-XV years, in a technological sense brings no change. The established excavation
technology is used for the tailings as well as for coal. The front progress is the same, with its length reaching the
maximum 1950 m. The front is divided in 18 excavation floors with the height of 10 m. The lowest floor excavated
is the 90th and the highest 280th. All tailings masses are deposited at the internal depot. Depositing is done from
the lowest to the highest elevations starting from the 130th i.e. 140th vertical alignment. It is deposited at the
depth work with floor formation of ten meters. The depositing areas are completed at the excavation floors while
the alignments are synchronized. During this period 60,867,645m3 sm of waste rock will be mined with the
looseness coefficient of 1.25 amounts to 76,084,556 m3 rm. A total of 8,604,217 t of coal.
At the end of the aforementioned period of exploitation, from XV-XIX year, the total length of the front is about
1,750 m, and is excavated to the altitude of 100 m amsl (above medium sea level), with the highest elevation of the
floor being at the altitude of 280 m, waste rock is deposited at the internal depot by trucks through already formed
depositing floors.
In the south part of the internal depot it is deposited from the 180th roadway to the 260th, in the middle section
from 140th roadway. These differences in the disposal height are a consequence of the spread of the coal layer,
rifts, as well as the barren areas. Having in mind all of the limitations which appear in this period of exploitation, it
is impossible for all of the excavated waste masses to be deposited at the internal depot. After a detailed analysis,
based on the situation map and the calculation profiles, both longitudinal and cross-sectional, it is concluded that
the deposition must take place at the external deposition location. It will firstly be deposited along the 244th
alignment and the 250th alignment will be formed. After this, the 260th will be formed as well as a part of the
3
3
270th. In total, 43,891,083 m sm of waste rock will be excavated which is 54,863,855 m rm /1.25/. At the internal
3
3
depot 35,795,076 m rm was deposited while 19,068,779 m rm was deposited at the external depot. In this period,
a total of 7,045,184 t of coal was mined.
Exploitation period from XIX to XXIV follows in which the mining front will be shortened at the length of about
1100 m during which the highest floor will be at the altitude of 230 m in the central zone, at the most northern part
the highest floor is at the 300th alignment and crosses in to the northern finishing floor, with the lowest being at
the altitude of 90 m amsl. In general, the front has progressed for 450 m. Waste rock masses are again, and all,
deposited at the internal depot starting from the 100th floor up to the 260th. In total, 74,920,911 m3 sm of waste
rock was excavated, which is about 93,651,138 m3 rm. /1.25/. In the aforementioned period a total of 9,914,731 t of
coal was mined.
The final excavation period from XXIV to XXIX year is defined by the front moving for about 620 m, the highest
excavated floor is at the altitude of 180 m amsl, and the lowest is at the altitude of 100 m amsl. The lowest deposit
altitude is at 110 m amsl, seven depositing floors follow in heights of 10 m with berms wide from 35 m which form
the final angle of 11.56 for the total length of around 390 m. A plateau follows at the altitude of 180 m amsl
around 230 m long. After this, a level at 190 m amsl in which deposits were made along the length of around 980 m
which fits into a floor at an altitude of 200 m amsl which was formed in the previous stage.
Disposal like this functions in the dynamic of excavation front movement in direction and width, through the
designers efforts to leave the smallest depression possible in the area of the final excavation, as well as leave the
flattest surfaces possible for land reclamation and subsequent disposal works. This approach is considered to be
absolutely justified considering that there are noted basins which will probably be exploited, so this depot will
probably be of use. 35,665,810 m3 sm of waste rock was excavated in total, which with a coeficient of 1.25 makes
44,582,262 m3rm. All waste rock masses are deposited at the internal depot. In the aforementioned period a total
of 9,935,700 t of coal was mined.
3. VARIANT ANALYSIS
Excavation and depositing are in sync, a continuous deposition at the internal depot is possible in the period from
XV to XIX year. Transport of waste rock and coal will be done by trucks. Based on the detailed account 48 trucks will
be required with the already existing logistics. Coal transport is done with trucks of a 90 t loading capacity with the
maximum number of trucks required being 6. According to this variant a total of 301,621,795 m3 sm of waste rock
and 51,644,608 t of coal were mined.
At the external depot 97,927,122 m3 sm of waste rock was deposited which with the looseness coefficient amounts
to 122,408,406 m3 rm.
In the internal depot 203,707,406 m3 sm was deposited or about 254,634,257 m3 rm.
77

PROCEEDINGS
Figures 3 and 3a show the status of the mining area with the internal depot as well as the status of the external
depot.
Figure 3. Situation map with the mining status at the end of year 29
at the open mine pit "Ugljevik Istok". Deposition by trucks
Figure 3.a. Situation map of the external depot at the end of year 29
at the open mine pit "Ugljevik Istok". Truck deposition
Variant B-T-C-CB-D
Deposition technology according to the B-T-C-CB-D variant in quite different in comparison to the previous. Out of
the planned waste rock masses necessary to be deposited in the internal depot, 65% is deposited by a disposer, and
around 35% by trucks. The looseness coefficient for these two deposition methods is different and for the masses
deposited by a disposer, and were previously crushed is 1,40 while for the masses directly loaded onto trucks
amounts to 1,25. Truck deposition at the internal depot in this variant is practically pre-deposition of the waste
rock being deposited by the disposer. The amount of deposited waste rock by trucks in the internal depot by the
end of the 10th year of exploitation is enough for filling the deepest, excavated floors on one side as well as to form
a route for establishing a connecting conveyor belt as well as a plateau for installing and fitting the disposer.
In the deep mine, a height of 20 m is being deposited, and in the height mine 15 m. By changing the altitudes i.e. by
depositing from two conveyor belts it is possible to deposit a total height of 70 m.
The floor transporter is installed at the 210 th floor of the base length of 1,432 m. On it two semi mobile crushers
are located marked D1 and D2. The drive and return station of the transporter are defined by positions marked with
points and coordinates of those dots: A.1 and A.2.
At the south finish slope, a route is formed for the first position of the connecting conveyor belt, partially in the
mound and partially in the stretch. The route of the connecting conveyor belt is formed from the 210 m amsl, with
a drop of 5% towards the eastern border of the pit and the altitude of 175 m amsl The connected conveyor belt's
first position is defined by points A.2. and A.3, with the starting length being 1067m. This route serves for
installation of the connected conveyor belt and for the transport of the disposer to the deposition starting
location. A disposer is added to the connected conveyor belt, drive stations at the altitude of 170 m amsl, while the
return station is at the altitude of 175 m amsl, which means that this transporter is in a small drop from the return
to the drive station.
A disposing conveyor belt is defined by points A.3. and A.4. and is 428 m in starting length.
All three transporters are marked as ET-1, VT-1 and OT-1 and displayed in the figure.
Transport of the disposer from the industrial circle, as a place to be assembled, to the fitting location on the
disposing conveyor belt is precisely defined in the project. After the disposer is transported, fitted and tested, the
system is ready for operation.
3
Up to the X year of exploitation, a total of 49,980,936 m sm of waste rock was excavated, masses were transported
by trucks to the external depot where a grade line at 244 m amsl, while 3,616,980 m3 sm i.e. 4,521,225 m3 rm was
deposited in the internal depot and used for the described preparation works.
The exploitation period from X to the XV year, is defined with deposition at the internal depot in function of
technical-technological characteristics of the disposer, free space as well as conditions of geo-mechanical stability.
78

PROCEEDINGS
It is deposited through the height as well as depth work of the disposer, the disposal conveyor belt is moved and
extended. It is necessary to introduce another disposal conveyor belt in the process of deposition, in order to ease
the disposal process and work continuity during which, long term moving of the transporter from one to the other
grade line is to be avoided. Because it is necessary to maintain the finishing angle of the slope of 12, part of the
waste rock masses must be deposited by trucks at the external depot. Exit to the external depot is necessary,
during which the formation of a grade line at 250 m amsl will begin. In this period at the internal depot, 74,000,402
m3 rm will be deposited while at the external, 8,083,505 m3 rm of waste rock will be deposited. Coal mining
dynamics is synchronized.
The period from XV to XIX year of exploitation is characterized by the necessary coal mining dynamics as well as
relatively small excavation front progress which influences the depositing space. Excavation is done to the grade
line at 100 m amsl, with the highest floor being at the grade line of 280 m amsl. The mined coal is transported by
trucks to the crushing installation, and after crushing the coal is transported by conveyor belts to the secondary
crusher. Waste rock is deposited by trucks through already formed depositing floors as well as roads on finishing
slopes, in the internal depot. Considering the relatively small excavation front movement in the zone of the north
area of the open pit it is possible to deposit a little of waste rock considering the geo-mechanical stability
requirements. Most of the waste rock masses is deposited in the middle and south part of the excavated zone of
the open pit mine. In the south part it is deposited from the 160th to the 180th grade line, and a part is deposited
and filled at the grade line of 210 m amsl. In the middle part of the excavated area of the open pit mine it is
deposited starting from the 140th grade line to the 170 grade line.
Deposition by a disposer is continued practically from the half of the front and only in the middle and south area. It
is deposited along two differently located disposal conveyor belts during which, grade lines at 200 and 215 m amsl
are formed while in the height work, a grade line of 235 m amsl is formed. Deposition in the deep block, by a
disposer, a grade line at 200 m amsl is formed and in the height block, a grade line at 215 m amsl. The final phase of
deposition in this period is the disposer entering the grade line at 235 m amsl and deposition in the most southern
zone of the mining area.
After a detailed analysis, based on the situation map, account, longitudinal and cross profiles, as well as account
profiles of the external depot, it follows that in this period it should be deposited at the external depot at the
altitude of 250 m amsl.
Review of the deposited masses is:
3
In the aforementioned period: 43,878,350 m sm of the waste rock was mined, and around 8,604,217 t of coal.
It is necessary to do the depositing through the CTD system of 65% of the total amount which is 28,520,927 m3 sm
x 1.40=39,929,298m3 rm of waste rock, and through the T system, 35% which is around 15,357,422 m3 sm x1.25=
19,196,778 m3 rm of waste rock.
In total it is necessary to do the depositing at the internal depot of 59,126,076 m3 rm of waste rock.
It is possible to dispose it in a technologically correct and geo-mechanically verified manner at the internal depot:
CCBD system 27,701,714 m3 rm of waste rock, and through the T system around 7,712,333 m3 rm of waste rock.
In total it is possible to deposit at the internal depot: 35,414,047 m3 rm.
The rest is not deposited: 23,712,029 m3 rm.
If all of the non-deposited waste rock masses are treated as masses deposited by trucks the full amount would be
smaller considering the looseness coefficient, so the non-deposited amount would be around: 22,401,930 m3 rm.
The front of the mining works from XIX to XXIV years of exploitation, is firstly narrowed, and then expanded which
is a consequence of going around the waster rock zone as well as the formation the stable south finish slope. Waste
rock masses which were deposited by trucks as a pre-depot are sorted on depositing floors starting from the 100th
to the 170th. Along the 170th, a plateau 540 m long was formed. The formation of this plateau is necessary
considering the deposition technology by a disposer on one side, as well as the necessary depositing area for the
deposition of the total waste rock masses. A large part of the masses deposited by trucks must be deposited at the
external depot. Depositing by a disposer is continued by forming a depth block along the entire width of the
excavated space of the open mine pit, precisely in the north-south direction. It is deposited along two transporters
placed at the grade line of 200 m amsl, and two at the grade line of 235 m amsl. The finishing grade line of
deposition is 253 m amsl. Transporters are moved radially and parallel in technology function. The lack of space in
the internal depot requires additional deposition at the external and end of deposition at the grade line of 250m
amsl.
3
It follows that the waste rock mined is 74,920,911 m sm and coal 9,914,731 t.
79

PROCEEDINGS
CCBD 65% of the total amount = = 48,698,592 m3 sm x 1.40=68,178,029 m3 rm of waste rock, and K 35% of the
total amount = 26.222 319 m3 sm x 1.25= 32,777,898 m3 rm of waste rock.
The total amount required to deposit at the internal depot: CCBD: 48,953,538 m3 rm, and T: 19,648,140 m3 rm of
waste rock, it follows that it is possible to deposit at the internal depot: 68,601,678 m3 rm. The rest is not
deposited: 32,354,249m3 rm i.e. 30,503,806 m3 rm.
The final exploitation period from XXIV to XXIX year is defined by the constant truck pre-deposition from the 100th
to the 140th grade line, plateau formation at the 140th grade line 650 m long, followed by the entrance at the
grade line of 150 m amsl, and a plateau on the same around 600 m after which a depositing floor is formed with a
grade line of 160 m amsl. Distances between floors are in function of deposition technology as well as familiar geomechanical stability conditions.
Deposition in a technological sense, means a depth bloc of 20 m, height of 15 m, moving of the transporters to the
lower grade lines, radial movements, extensions and shortening, to sum up, very complex technology.
During this period a total of 35,665,810 m3 sm of waste rock and 9,235,700t of coal were mined. The deposited
amount in the internal depot:
CCBD 65% of the total amount = 23,182,776 m3 sm x 1.40=32,455,806 m3 rm of waste rock.
K 35% of the total amount = 12,483,033 m3 sm x1,25= 15,603,792 m3 rm of waste rock from which follows that a
total amount deposited is 48,180,989 m3 rm.
Figures 4 and 4a display the situation at the mine pit and external depot.
Figure 4. Situation map with the work status at the end of the 29th
year at the open pit mine "Ugljevik Istok". Combined deposition
(CCBD-T)
Figure 4a. The situation map of the external depot at the end of the
29th year at the open pit mine "Ugljevik Istok". Combined deposition
(CCB-K)
In the previous and in this variation the total amount of waste rock mined is 301,621,795 m3 sm and 51,644,608 t of
coal.
In the external depot 89,138,902 m3 sm x 1.25 = 111,423,628 m3 rm of waste rock is deposited.
In the internal depot: 230,718,350m3 rm of waste rock is deposited, and of that: by trucks: 65,607,292 m3 rm,
conveyor belt: 165,111,058 m3 rm.
It is necessary to find additional room for: in a period from XV to XIX year 22,401,930 m3 rm, and from XIX to XXIV
year 30,503,806 m3 rm, in total 52,905,736 m3 rm. Depositing area can be found in the expansion and heightening
of the external depot to the altitude 310 m amsl, but even that space is not enough and additional locations must
be found. According to this variant 48 trucks are necessary, after which the number will be decreased to 22.
Disposer purchases are necessary, conveyor belt systems with all the necessary technical equipment and logistics
which will not solve the problem of continuous transport and depositing of waste rock in one location. The required
amount of trucks is the same as for the previous variant (6 trucks with a load capacity of 90t)
80

PROCEEDINGS
4. CONCLUSION
Considering the very complex and difficult layer conditions, introducing the CCBD exploitation systems would
additionally complicate an already complicated technology, foremost at the deposition. Introduction of a disposer
in a technological process would not justify expectations in a relatively long period from XV to XXIV year,
considering that it would have to be deposited also by trucks at the external depot. Besides the superelevation to
the altitude of 310 m amsl, as well as the expansion, the depositing area would not be enough so it is necessary to
look for additional locations. Technical-technological conduction of this complex and highly demanding process,
would pose an additional load and risk to the successful application of this system.
After a detailed analysis of both possible mining variants, transport and deposition at the open pit mine "Ugljevik
Istok" the B-T variant posed as the most probable and acceptable from a "mostly technological aspect, although
the other analyzed elements point to the same conclusion. The idea about electrifying a part of the truck roads
seems to be far more acceptable and cost efficient than the CCBD variant and is therefore, worthy of elaborating.
This article was extracted from a detailed project, and additional elaboration and finally, implantation of one of the
project solutions will probably depend on the expertise and business policy of relevant factors.
REFERENCES
[1]
The Main Mining Project of the Open pit mine Ugljevik istok, Mining Institute, Tuzla, 1991. (in Serbian)
[2]
An innovated investment program of the Ugljevik istok open pit mine development Ruding princs son doo, Nevesinje, 2010.
(in Serbian).
[3]
An innovated case study on the selection of main equipment and an optimal direction of front development, Ruding princs son
doo, Nevesinje, 2010. (in Serbian)
[4]
An innovated case study on the selection of potential location for the deposition of overburden from the open pit mine
Ugljevik - istok, Ruding princs son doo, Nevesinje, 2010. (in Serbian).
81

PROCEEDINGS
EXAMINATION OF GAS-BEARING QUALITIES OF COAL

AND ACCESSORY ROCKS IN THE IVOJNO BASIN, REPUBLIC OF MACEDONIA
ABSTRACT
1
Nenad RADOSAVLJEVI
Aleksandar ERISILO2
Zlatko PETROVI3
1
Mining Institute, Belgrade, Serbia,

nendad.radosavljevic@ribeograd.ac.rs
2
Mining Institute, Belgrade, Serbia, aleksandar.djerisilo@ribeograd.ac.rs
3
JPP Mines of Aleksinac, Aleksinac, Serbia, zlatko.petrovic@jppeu.rs
This paper presents results of research of the gasbearing potential of the Zivojno deposit, Republic
of Macedonia, i.e. the parameters depicting the
gas-bearing potential and the described
methodology of approach for testing the methane
content and other gases in samples of coal and
accessory rocks of the operating environment.
Keywords
Coal, Gas-Bearing, Methane, Sorption, Zivojno
1. INTRODUCTION
Testing of gas-bearing qualities of coal and accessory rocks in the "Zivojno" basin was conducted in order to remove
potential dangers while mining operations are in process as well as to introduce safe excavation technologies and
proper venting for the future mine. In order to determine the gas-bearing potential of coal and accessory rocks, a
core immediately extracted from the core tube was used. Samples from the roof, bottom and the main coal layer
were used. This paper points to the parameters which characterize gas-bearing potentials, and describes in short,
the methodology of determination of gas-bearing qualities, in order to more easily evaluate the results of the
research.
2. EXAMINATION METHODOLOGY
Gas-bearing parameters
Gas-bearing qualities are determined using the following parameters (rc raw coal, cc cleaned coal, dc dried
coal):
Free gas capacity - (m3/trc)1 and (m3/t cc)2, i.e.
Gas contents (methane, carbon-dioxide and
(m3/t dc)3
nitrogen) - (%)
Total gas capacity - (m3/trc)1 and (m3/t cc)2, i.e.
Remaining gas-bearing qualities - (m3/trc)1 and
3
2
3
3
(m /t cc) , i.e. (m /t dc)
(m3/t dc)3
3
1
3
2
Porosity - (%),(%), (m /trc) and (m /t cc) , i.e.
Moisture contents (%)
(m3/t dc)3
Ash contents (%)
Sorption gas capacity - (m3/trc)1 and (m3/t cc)2,
i.e. (m3/t dc)3
Gas zonality
In order to determine gas zonality i.e. the criteria to classify layers according to the degree of methane danger, the
SRPS B.Z1.070 standard was used. This standard categorizes gas-bearing qualities as methane and non-methane
categories.
Gas capacity prognosis
In order to determine the gas capacity of deeper or unopened areas of the deposit, data on sorption isotherm,
porosity, moisture and ash contents are being used.
82

PROCEEDINGS
3. EXAMANATION RESULTS
The results of the analysis necessary to work according to the applied methodology, which consists from
determining the free and the absorbed gasses in the coal substance and the saturation pressures in the coal layers
are displayed in this chapter.
Moisture and ash contents
Sorption as well as free gas capacity, depends mostly on moisture and ash, whose concentrations are, therefore
necessary to know in order to review these results. Aside from that, recalculation of the gas-bearing parameters
also requires knowing ash and moisture contents.
According to the data in table 1, moisture and ash values are displayed:
Table 1. Moisture and ash contents in the samples
Drillhole
Interval
Material
Moisture (%)
Ash (%)
B-45/34
79,7-79,85
Roof
1,49
13,42
81,85-82,0
Coal
6,67
18,82
89,2-89,3
Floor
0,70
87,64
49,7-49,8
Roof
2,62
73,58
52,0-52,1
Coal
5,49
24,67
56,0-56,1
Floor
0,41
96,81
66,1-66,2
Roof
3,63
51,26
67,6-67,7
Coal
5,94
10,63
70,5-70,6
Floor
1,49
34,92
B-59/24
B-69/28
Porosity
Coal and accessory rocks porosity is an important quality for determining total gas-bearing qualities of the coal
layer. Pores are free gas bearers, whose determination is key in determining the free gas capacity, i.e. how much
gas is contained in the pores.
Drill site gas contents
Coal and accessory rock samples have being produced through coring from the drill site. Upon core extraction, a
sample is taken and placed in a hermetically sealed container and shipped to the laboratory. In the laboratory it
undergoes grinding in an adapted container on a vibro-mill an after that it is being heated and degassed. The
extracted gas is injected in a container of a known volume.
After degassing, the container is opened after the gas state has been measured and the gas is analyzed. A certain
amount of gas is being placed in a degassing container which is conducted until the manometer shows that the gas
separation is complete.
The extracted amount of gas is recalculated to normal conditions and the sample weight unit for a gas extracted
through desorption, vacuuming and total gas mixture.
The gas mixture contained in the sample is determined through a gas mixture which is extracted through:
desorption from the moment of sample placement in the container up until the container is opened
Vacuuming according to the described procedure
Gas mixture content was determined with a "Varian" chromatograph and the results are displayed on table 2.
83

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2. Gas mixture contents

Sample
Drill hole
Interval
Material
Moisture
Ash
Desorption
CO2
CH4
Vacuuming
N2
CO2
CH4
Total
N2
CO2
CH4
N2
Participation in percent
79,7-79,85
Roof
1,49
13,42
4,3
0,010
83,99
8,5
0,018
78,78
93,88
0,00
6,11
B-45/34
81,85-82,0
Coal
6,67
11,82
0,7
0,008
84,49
1,1
0,024
83,67
21,96
0,00
78,04
89,2-89,3
Floor
0,70
87,64
3,8
0,030
83,57
4,9
0,020
79,98
96,19
0,00
18,52
59,22
49,7-49,8
Roof
2,68
73,58
2,3
0,014
85,28
1,2
0,010
89,79
40,77
0,00
B-59/24
52,0-52,1
Coal
5,49
24,67
0,4
0,024
83,87
0,6
0,015
85,18
8,60
0,00
91,40
56,0-56,1
Floor
0,41
96,81
0,8
0,011
87,59
1,2
0,024
89,77
9,40
0,00
90,60
66,1-66,2
Roof
3,63
51,26
0,4
0,015
74,80
0,5
0,023
79,57
9,52
0,53
8,99
B-69/28
67,6-67,7
Coal
5,94
10,63
0,6
0,018
73,90
4,20
0,020
81,98
53,79
0,49
46,27
70,5-70,6
Floor
1,49
84,92
5,0
0,026
80,17
5,10
0,20
79,98
84,66
0,57
14,77
Sorption characteristics in a work environment and isotherm sorption

The quantity of gas in m3/t is determined through sorption characteristics of a work environment, which can in
certain thermodynamic conditions be absorbed by the work environment.
Sorption capability is determined through isotherm of sorption which displays the relation of gas capacity and gas
pressure in a deposit.
Determination of sorption capacity is conducted for pressures up to 20.100 kPa and separately for pressures below
and above 100kPa.
In both instances testing is reduced to determining the gas volume that coal is capable to absorb under certain
thermodynamic conditions. Sorption is conducted until a balanced state is achieved.
For sorption gas capacity up to 100kPa the quantity of absorbed gas can be determined from the difference
between the amount of added and total gas at the end of the experiment.
An example of isothermal sorption for methane is displayed in picture 1 for drill site B-45/34. Isotherms for clear
coal substance i.e. dry samples are displayed besides those for samples from the massive.
20
14
18
16
m CH4/ tru i tsu
10
8
14
12
10
8
m CH4/ tru i tsu
12
6
4
2
0
0
0
10
15
20
25
10
15
20
25
P(100 kPa)
P(100 kPa)
14
10
8
............
sorption isotherm of methane for clear coal substance i.e.
dry samples
m CH4/ tru i tsu
12
_______
sorption isotherm of methane for the deposit samples
0
0
10
15
20
25
P(100 kPa)
Figure 1. Drill site B-45/34
84

PROCEEDINGS
Under pressure of 20.100 kPa the sorption gas capacity is:

For samples in the deposit at:
Floor from 0.674 to 2,011 m3/trc
Total coal from 0.876 to 4,744 m3/trc
Roof from 0.621 to 2,241 m3/trc
For clean coal substance i.e. all samples at:

Floor from 0.703 to 2,214 m3/tdc
Total coal from 0.944 to 4,926 m3/tdc
Roof from 0.672 to 2,408 m3/tdc
Remaining gas-bearing potential

The remaining gas-bearing potential of a layer represents the quantity of gas contained by the weight unit of the
coal extracted from the layer without undertaking any kind of gas-bearing preservation at the pressure and
temperature of the deposit.
Testing results for carbon-dioxide, methane and nitrogen, i.e. total gas content in m3/trc are displayed in table 3.
Table 3. Remaining gas-bearing potential
Sample
Drill
hole
Interval
Material
Moisture
Ash
Desorption
CO2
CH4
Vacuuming
N2
CO2
CH4
Total
N2
CO2
CH4
N2
m /t cc
79,779,85
Roof
1,49
13,42
0,003
0,00
0,007
0,212
0,00
0,007
0,215
0,00
0,014
81,8582,0
Coal
6,67
11,82
0,008
0,00
0,065
0,030
0,00
0,110
0,038
0,00
0,175
89,2-89,3
Floor
0,70
87,64
0,008
0,00
0,010
0,136
0,01
0,025
0,144
0,01
0,035
49,7-49,8
Roof
2,62
73,58
0,012
0,00
0,032
0,030
0,00
0,029
0,042
0,00
0,061
4
5
B45/24
B59/24
6
7
8
9
B69/28
52,0-52,1
Coal
5,49
24,67
0,002
0,00
0,021
0,014
0,00
0,149
0,016
0,00
0,170
56,0-56,1
Floor
0,41
96,81
0,003
0,00
0,028
0,030
0,00
0,290
0,033
0,00
0,318
66,1-66,2
Roof
3,63
51,26
0,001
0,00
0,004
0,017
0,01
0,013
0,018
0,001
0,017
67,6-67,7
Coal
5,94
10,63
0,002
0,00
0,019
0,106
0,01
0,074
0,108
0,001
0,093
70,5-70,6
Floor
1,49
84,92
0,006
0,00
0,001
0,143
0,01
0,025
0,149
0,001
0,026
Determining the gas-bearing potential prognosis

The gas-bearing potential prognosis of lithological items (gs), represents the gas quantities (m3) that is contained by
the mass unit of the tested sample (t) under the gas pressure measured at the sampling location that can be
released in the work environment during exploatation.
The gas-bearing potential prognosis is determined from the relation:
gs=x-x1 (m3/t)
where:
X - is the total (natural - potential gas-bearing quality) - the sum of the gas-bearing potentials of all ingredients
(m3/t) for the measured value of the gas pressure in the massive,
X1 - total remaining gas-bearing potential - the sum of the remaining gas-bearing qualities of all ingredients (m3/t)
The prognosis for the gas-bearing potential has been calculated for coal and accessory layers. Results are displayed
for a sample as it was when delivered and for a clean coal substance i.e. dry sample. It was already stipulated that
the values for the samples that were delivered correspond to those in the massive while other values are borderline.
Results are also displayed by gas mixture composition.
Values for the remaining gas-bearing potential were obtained (x1) - tables for total gas-bearing potential according
to methane, (xVCH4) - isotherm sorption.
For gas mixture pressures close to those of the atmospheric pressure, can be calculated only based on the data of
the remaining gas-bearing potential which has in this case, been done. Based on the fact that the time it takes to
take a sample by core borehole in order to test the remaining gas-bearing potential until placement in containers is
very short and therefore no significant exchange of gasses between the sample and air could not take place i.e.
desorption. Values of the gas-bearing potential prognosis are displayed in table 5 and sorted according to drill sites
for coal, floor and roof. The maximum values of the gas-bearing potential prognosis can be seen in table 4.
85

PROCEEDINGS
Table 4. as-bearing potential prognosis

Sample
Drill
hole
Interval
Material
CO2
CH4
N2
CH4
CO2
m trc
m t cc
79,7-79,85
Roof
0,215
0,00
0,014
0,229
0,218
0,00
0,014
0,232
81,85-82,0
Coal
0,038
0,01
0,175
0,173
0,040
0,00
0,187
0,228
89,2-89,3
Floor
0,144
0,01
0,035
0,189
0,145
0,00
0,035
0,190
0,106
B-45/34
N2
49,7-79,8
Roof
0,042
0,00
0,061
0,103
0,043
0,00
0,063
52,0-52,1
Coal
0,016
0,00
0,170
0,186
0,017
0,00
0,180
0,197
56,0-56,1
Floor
0,033
0,00
0,318
0,351
0,033
0,00
0,319
0,352
B-59/24
66,1-66,2
Roof
0,018
0,001
0,017
0,189
0,018
0,001
0,017
0,196
67,6-67,7
Coal
0,108
0,001
0,093
0,201
0,115
0,001
0,099
0,214
70,5-70,6
Roof
0,149
0,001
0,026
0,176
0,151
0,001
0,026
0,179
B-69/28
Relative gas abundance

Gas abundance of the work environment is expressed as m3/tru and is determined from the relation of the gasbearing potential prognosis of all the lithological elements in which the exploitation of the median daily production
is conducted.
In order the calculate the gas-bearing potential prognosis of the lithological elements on the locations of the test
drill sites a pillar of 1m2 in diameter and a height that corresponds to the thickness of the coal layer being
excavated in one move and is 6,0m was taken. It is also taken into account that the floor encompassed is 1,5' and
the roof 3,0'.
In this pillar, based on the seemingly relative density of the sample of coal, floor and roof and their presence, their
saturation in weight units was determined (t).
The assumption that the entire gas-bearing potential prognosis of the tested layers gs(m3/trc) during exploitation
of coal is released in the work environment was adopted. In this manner the gas-bearing potential of the elements
in the aforementioned pillar for all tested drill sites has been determined.
After that the resulting gas abundance at the drill site has been calculated to the weight unit of coal as a useful
ore.
The calculated relative gas abundances according to the aforementioned procedure are displayed in table 5
according to drill sites, in total and according to the composition of the gas mixture, and as was stipulated earlier
relate to the pressure of the gas mixture in the layers of 100 kPa.
Table 5. Relative gas abundance
Drill site
Relative gas-bearing potential m3/tru

CO2
CH4
N2
B-45/34
0.059
0.00
0.248
0.362
B-59/24
0.241
0.00
0.181
0.431
B-69/28
0.186
0.002
0.005
0.411
4. TEST RESULTS ANALYSIS

Based on the 75 (seventy five) samples and the 9 (nine) samples displayed in this paper, it can be concluded:
that the moisture saturation ranges from 1,26%-13,96%
that the ash saturation ranges from 5,03%-56,21%
that the methane saturation ranges from 0,00%-0,73%
that the remaining methane-bearing potential ranges from 0,00m3/tru -0,002 m3/tru
that the remaining methane abundance ranges from 0,01m3/tru -0,012 m3/tru
that the absolute methane abundance ranges from 0,004m3/min -0,044 m3/min
86

PROCEEDINGS
5. CONCLUSION
Based on the obtained minimal values of the relative and absolute methane abundance it can be concluded that
methane will not cause difficulties in the site excavation stage, because due to a proper ventilation regime the
methane quantity can be reduced to normal values.
Presence of pressure has been discovered in certain drill sites during the drilling process, which in a certain way
indicates that there is free gas in the "ivojno" deposit as well as that areas with a higher methane concentration
can be expected to be found than those determined in this paper.
REFERENCES
[1]
87

PROCEEDINGS
METHANE INFLUENCE ON COAL DUST EXPLOSIVITY

FROM THE MARIOVO DEPOSIT
ABSTRACT
Nenad RADOSAVLJEVI1
Aleksandar ERISILO2
Milinko RADOSAVLJEVI3
Mining institute, Belgrade, Serbia
nenad.radosavljevic@ribeograd.ac.rs 2
aleksandar.djerisilo@ribeograd.ac.rs 3
zastita@ribeograd.ac.rs
It is generally known that coal dust explosions can occur in the underground
coal mines even without the presence of methane. However, according to
the statistical data, methane explosion is the most common cause of coal
dust explosions. This paper presents results of the tests of methane
influence on the explosion related properties of the coal dust from the
Mariovo deposit in the Republic of Macedonia.
Keywords
Coal, Dust, Explosion, Methane
1. INTRODUCTION
It is known that explosions of coal dust happen in coal mines with underground exploitation even without methane
presence. Still, methane explosion is the leading cause of coal dust explosions. Methane concentration in pit air,
according to regulations in the Republic of Serbia, can go as high as 1,5%, and in extreme cases up to 2%. This was
the reason to conduct testing of the coal dust explosiveness from the "Mariovo" deposit and the influence of
methane in concentrations of 2%.
Methane not only causes coal dust explosions, but significantly increases the power of the explosion depending on
the concentration of methane in the air. There are types of coal dust that even when exposed to ignition sources
cannot explode but are explosive in the presence of methane. If methane is present in the dust-air mixture, the gas
and dust will explode. This is evident from accidents in coal mines.
The process of explosion begins when methane is ignited, because it has a lower ignition point, then creates an
explosion pressure wave which precedes the flame, which lifts and swirls the accumulated dust along pit chambers,
which leads to the creation of dust-air mixture. Movement of the flame wave not only causes the creation of dustair mixture in front of it, but also heats and ignites the dust, during which a pressure which increases combustion
rates and intensity of the explosion is created.
If there is an excess of air, methane and dust combust. If there is not enough air then only methane combusts while
the dust only partially combusts or not at all.
Methane presence in an air current, even below the lower explosiveness limit, increases the likelihood of ignition
and explosion of the coal dust. During methane combustion the following reaction occurs:
CH4 + 202 = C02 + 2H2O + 803 kJ
During which a large amount of heat is being released.
2. TESTING METHODOLOGY
Explosive characteristics of coal with and without methane from drill site B 32/11 are displayed in tables 1 and 2, as
well as figures 1, 2, 3 and 4.
88

PROCEEDINGS
Table 1. Explosive characteristics of coal dust without methane
EZ 04/10-(B32/11)
Measurement
Concetration
[g/m3]
Pmax
[bar]
Pmax/t
[bar/sec]
dp/dt
[bar/sec]
Ek
[bar/sec]
Measurement 1.1
125
4,589
25,215
40,509
31,960
Measurement 2.1
250
6,244
81,094
135,031
104,643
Measurement 3.1
375
7,772
87,326
226,659
140,688
Measurement 4.1
500
7,859
88,301
193,866
130,838
Measurement 5.1
750
7,737
89,968
209,298
137,223
Measurement 6.1
1.000
6,821
68,542
98,702
82,251
Figure 1. Graphical display of pressure increase
Figure 2. Graphical display of change in the explosive characteristic,

3
Kex=190 g/m
Table 2. Explosive characteristics of coal dust with methane presence of 2%
EZ- 04/10-(B 32/11) sa 2% CH4

Measurement:
Concetration
[g/m3]
Pmax
[bar]
Pmax/t
[bar/sec]
dp/dt
[bar/sec]
Ek
[bar/sec]
Measurement 1.1
75
3,924
23,495
65,586
39,255
Measurement 2.1
125
5,712
54,921
102,238
74,933
Measurement 3.1
250
7,459
86,738
196,759
130,639
Measurement 4.1
375
7,899
111,258
244,020
164,770
Measurement 5.1
500
7,917
102,814
283,565
170,747
Measurement 6.1
750
7,452
85,113
221,265
137,231
Figure 3. Graphical display of pressure increase
89
Figure 4. Graphical display of the explosive characteristic change

3
Kex=119 g/m

PROCEEDINGS
3. TEST RESULTS ANALYSIS

Testing has showed that the presence of methane of 2% influences the increase of the explosive indicator and with
it the power of the explosion. With an increase of the explosive indicator the lower explosiveness limit is lowered.
Without methane present it is 190 g/m3, and with 2% of methane present it is 119 g/m3.
4. CONCLUSION
These test results indicate a problem in the future mine, whose basin has been declared as a methane basin based
on the presence of methane. Coal dust has also displayed explosive properties, which is also the reason the deposit
was declared as methane.
The designers and managers of the future mine should take into consideration these indicators which relate to coal
dust and methane, during projections and coal exploatation.
REFERENCES
[1]
90

PROCEEDINGS
NEW PERSPECTIVE OPEN PIT MINES

IN KOLUBARA LIGNITE BASIN IN SERBIA
ABSTRACT
Nenad POPOVI
Electric Power Industry of Serbia,

Belgrade, Serbia
nenad.popovic@eps.rs
In 2012, EPS produced a total of 37.6 million tons of lignite in mines located
in the Kolubara and Kostolac basins. The lignite, extracted by the Corporate
Enterprise Mining Basin Kolubara, was used to generate 46.2% of the total
electricity produced by EPS, whilst the lignite mined by TPPs-OCMs
KOSTOLAC fuelled 14.4% of EPS power generation.
Lignite output in both the Kolubara and Kostolac basins is expected to
increase, since the Serbian energy development strategy includes the
construction of new thermal power plant. Investments are therefore needed
at existing lignite mines and for development of new lignite deposits.
Priority is given to joint projects with strategic partners of EPS, including
projects to construct two new 350 MW lignite-based units near the Kolubara
mine at TPP Kolubara B and the new unit, Nikola Tesla B3 with a capacity of
700 MW.At the same time, existing lignite fields will be extended and new
deposits will be accessed.
Mining basin Kolubara operates four opencast mines, namely Field B in C,
Field D, Veliki Crljeni and Tamnava West Field.The lignite is used to generate
heat and power at the Kolubara thermo power plant (TPP), TPP Nikola Tesla
A and B and TPP Morava.
Since the future opencast mine Field E will not capable solely to satisfy fuel
supply to existing TPP capacities, EPS needs to open up new lignite fields at
Radljevo,for field D substitute field E and Field G at Southfields deposit. In
accordance with this mining development strategy, the main issue is to
improve resource utilisation and search for possibilities to maximize lignite
extraction, to examine different investigate output scenarios and finaly
sustanable operational costs.
The opencast operation use modern mining equipment, including bucketwheel excavaters, belt conveyors and spreaders with an average capacity of
4000 - 6000 cbm/h. This technology allows continuous extraction and
thereby ensures a steady flow of the fuel to the power stations.
Keywords
Deposits, Lignite, Perspective, Production, Sustainable
1. MINING DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY

In 2012, a total of 37.6 million tonns of coal were produced at open-cast coal mines in Serbia operated by EPS
(Kolubara and Kostolac basins).The lignite extracted by the corporate enterprise Mining Basin Kolubara, was used to
generate 46.2% of total electricity produced by EPS, whilst the lignite mined by TPPs-OCMs Kostolac fuelled 14.4%
of EPS power generation.The ratio of excavated overburden lignite was 2.19 : 1 cubic metres per tonne in Kolubara
mining basin and 4.00 : 1 cubic metres per tonn in Kostolac.
Mining in the very populated Kolubara basin is rather costly, as many compulsory land purchases must made before
mining activities can start.
91

PROCEEDINGS
Mining basin Kolubara operates four opencast mines, namely Field B,Field D,Veliki Crljeni and Tamnava West
Field.The lignite is used to generate heat and power at the Kolubara thermo power plant (TPP), TPP Nikola Tesla A
and B, and TPP Morava.
The new open-cast coal mine in MB Kolubara-V.Crljani started operation in the last quarter of 2009.High quality
coal at this open-cast mine should ensure the quality required for the operation of thermal power plants as well as
the mining of lower-quality parts of the coal deposit, which could not be utilised without blending coal.
Owing to years-long problems with the relocation of the community of Vreoci and inability to mine-out the coal
resources, overburden removal and mining of the coal seam top at Field E, adjacent to Field D, was started.As
regards the land expropriation process, there were problems in all EPS open-cast mines, which resulted in
underperformance in overburden removal in comparison with the realistic possibilities.
Overburden removal in 2009 was marked by land expropriation problems, low bearing capacity of the soil and
difficulties in the operation of the eastern dump site of field D.In this zone, excavation is conducted with four of
the six available excavator-conveyor-stacker (ECS) system in order to provide prerequisites for the opening of the
future open-cast mine Field E, which will be the largest and depeast open-cast mine in EPS.
Since the future opencast mine Field E will not capable solely to satisfy fuel supply to existing TPP capacities and
to ensure the supply for the new TPP capacities, EPS needs to open up new lignite fields at Radljevo and/or
Southfields deposits.In accordance with this mining development strategy, the main issue is to improve resource
utilisation and search for possibilities to maximize lignite extraction, to examine different mine development
scenarios, consider lignite quality fluctations over lifetime of new mines and finaly investigate different output
scenarios and finaly sustainable operational costs.
2. POTENTIAL SUPPLEMENTARY FIELDS AND DIFERENT MINE SCENARIOS

In the furher years, several Kolubara basin open-cast mines will be exhausted.The annual lignite output from the
present fields will decrease up to 2020 from about 30 million tonns to 11 million tonns annualy.In the same period
of time, the power plants demand will increase to approximately 36 million tonns annualy.
Figure 1. Active and replacement Kolubara opencast mines
Field E opencast mine

The changeover from Field D the largest lignite field in Kolubara coal basin with lignite output of 12 million tonns
annualy. Field E is planned from the year 2015.Launching the Field E will be from the east boundary or from the
existing Field D mine opening cut. Production developing mining direction will be from the east to the west,
approximately 150 m annualy.
Field E deposit consisting of three mine-able lignite seams, but more than 250 m deep.
Results of floor seam coal quality exploration in next five years show relatively favorable heating values in the
range from 6366 kJ/kg up to 8516 kJ/kg.Main coal seam heating values range from 6000 kJ/kg up to 8173 kJ/kg.In
92

PROCEEDINGS
the next 28 year average coal heating value will be about 8474 kJ/kg without additional blending.With the 6% of
blending level, coal quality could be decrease to 7966 kJ/kg.
Table 1. Field E coal quality forecast
Floor seam coal

Field E
Main seam coal

Field E
Main seam coal

Field D
Total
DTE kJ/kg
DTE kJ/kg
DTE kJ/kg
DTE kJ/kg
2012
6366
6000
9381
7851
2013
6873
7927
8815
9296
Years
2014
8516
8173
9609
7619
2015
7172
7814
8557
7369
2016
7306
7780
2012/2016
7224
7860
9128
7946
Considering deep seam coal bedding of Field E, mining work will be carrying out on many benches (even less 10)
with ECS sistems from Field D when it finish the excavation. Futher investments in excavation machinery
revitalization and modernization is certain and significant.
One of the most significant achievements that should be carried out is Pestan river relocation, local road and
railroad relocation. Therefore the related opencast fields capabilities such as Southfild and/or Radljevo will be take
into consideration more detailed.
Southfield and Radljevo Field
Remaining annual missing capacity of approximately 13 million tonns annualy.This missing demand is intended to
cover with mining fields of Southfield and/or Radljevo.There are actualy assumed different variants.
The first variant would be opening-up of two new mines with a capacity of 6 7 million tonns annualy Southfield
and Radljevo Field.
The second variant is opening-up of one new mine with a capacity of less than 13 million tonns/a and developing
the capacity of existing mines.
The third variant is opening-up of one completely new mine with capacity of 13 million tonns annualy. This final
decision is the matter of lignite quality, expected lifetime and economical aspects.
Geological Conditions
The coal seam is deposited mainly flat, slightly dipping into western and southern direction.The seam complex,
consisting of 6 minerable seams, is about 60 m thick. The single seam have a thickness of up to 8 m each and are
separated by cohesive intercalations. Lens shaped sandy inclusions are embedded in this these intercalations.
Tertiary and quarternary sand, gravel, and clay with a total thickness of about 25 m are deposit above the seam
complex. In general the deposit condition and the material properties are comparable to the adjacent Tamnava
West mine.
Hydrogeological Conditions
In the mining area there can be proved three compact groundwater layers. The top grounwater layer has essentialy
no influence to the mining operation. The intermidiate groundwater layers occurs within the seam complex. The
thickness varies and can reach up to 30 m.The bottom groundwater layer formed by an up to 130 m thick series of
fine-to-midle grained quartz sands is located under the seam complex. This groundwater layer is the most
homogenous as per granulometric and lithological structure.
Opencast mine Southfield
The potencial opencast mine takes the largest part of Field F about 70% of area, the west part of Field G oabout
60% of area, and north part of Field opi obout 45% of area.
93

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Disposition and geological cross section of Southfield opencast mine
Field F coal deposit

Field F coal deposit belongs to a central part of Kolubara's basin. Coal series with an average depth of over 250 m,
in deeper parts more than 300 m, are made of lignite which forms three coal layers clearly developed as top, main
and bottom coal seam, stratificated with sandy and clay sediments of basin.
Table 2. Field F geological reserves
Coal Seam
Category of Reserves
Total [t]
B+C1 [t]
B [t]
C1[t]
Top
92,417,310
28,926,517
121,343,827
Main
249,978,909
113,941,684
363,920,593
Bottom
122,849,981
38,732,260
161,582,241
Total
465,246,200
181,600,461
646,846,661
The main coal seam at the Field F as well at the other fields
of the East part of the Kolubara basin are the most important
seams from the point of view of economic due to thickness
and quality.The thickness of the main seam is up to 40 m,
mostly 25 to 30 m, while at the west part thickness is
considerably lower.The main coal seam at the Field F area has
a shape of irregular asymetric synclinale and depth is
between 100 and 130 m at the south and up to 70-100 m at
the north, to over 200-225 m in the central field parts.
Field G coal deposit

Field G coal deposit is located in the east part of Kolubara's basin, between Field F at the south and Field D at the
east and Tamnava-East at the west.Borders of the Field G are articifial, extent toward the north where the coal is
influenced by erosion.The coal seam is sub-horizontal generaly dipping direction from west to east.It is shaped like
a flat asymetric synclinale.One interburden layer is spread continually almost over the entire area of Field G with a
thickness of 0.5 to 5 m.The average thickness of the coal seam in the deposit is 30.3 m.
Table 3. Field G geological reserves
Field Sopic is spread over the south area of central Kolubara

basin part.Field size is over 40 km2, while the area under the coal
B [t]
C1[t]
B+C1 [t]
is only 14.5 km2, and the rest part of the field is unproductive.
58,077,013
49,105,386
107,182,399
Main
Thickness of coal seam productivity amounts over 200 meters as
Total 58,077,013 49,105,386 107,182,399
the middle value, considering its increasing from south with the
value of 90 m toward the north to a thickness of more than 275
m.
The top coal seam is located at boundaries of exploration Fields F and Sopic.The seam thickness is approximately
30 m.Results of coal quality exploration, as per borehole, show low heating value in the range from 2800 kJ/kg to
9700 kJ/kg and average value of 6040 kJ/kg.Ash content, as per boreholes, is in the range from 5% up to 42.1% and
average value of 17.5%.Moisture content amounts to 33.7% up to 66.8% and as average 51,93%.
The main coal seam is located at boundaries of exploration fields Field G, Field F and exploration Field Sopic.Main
coal seam complex has thicknes up to 75.6 m, and middle thickness amounts 26.8 m.Interburden occurs within the
main coal seam and localy achieves a thickness of up to 70 m.Average thickness amounts to 6 m.
Coal Seam
Category of Reserves
Total [t]
94

PROCEEDINGS
Results of coal quality exploration show low heating values in the range from 3000 kJ/kg up to 13000 kJ/kg with an
average value of 7370 kJ/kg.Ash content is in the range from 5.2% up to 49.1% with average value of
22.24%.Moisture content amounts from 28.4% to 61.3% and as average 42.98%.
The bottom coal seam is located at the boundaries of exploration fields Field G, Field F and exploration Field
Sopic.Complex bottom coal seam thickness is up to 36.2 m, average 17.3 m.Within the botton coal seams there
appears to a small extent interburden, localy achieving a thickness up to 19 m.
Results of coal quality exploration show low heating values in the range from 2700 kJ/kg up to 12700 kJ/kg with an
average value of 9400 kJ/kg.Ash content amounts from 28.1% to 60.5%, in the average 41.9%.
For the Southfield mine performed a quality analysis appeared two variant of mine advance directions:parallel mine
advance direction and combination of parallel and radial development.For both variants there was considered an
opencast mine with the same boundaries.
Total coal reserves outlined by opencast mine amount to 386 mt with average low heating value of 7346
kJ/kg.Minimal average low heating value of 6500 kJ/kg for thermal power plant supply has been provided by EPS.
Within the parallel variant of mine advance direction available reserves in the quntity of 275.2 mt with average low
heating value of 7900 kJ/kg are available for thermal power plant supply.A coal quantity of 110.6 mt with average
lower heating value of 5953 kJ/kg remains.
Radljevo Field opencast mine
Radljevo field lies in the western area of the Kolubara basin and is less than 100 m deep and compared to
Southfield shallow and less compact.It is characterises by the appearance of six lignite seams the quality and
thickness of which is generaly deteriorating from north-east towards the boundaries in western and southern
direction.
Figure 3. Spread of coal seam Radljevo and geological cross section
3. COAL RESERVES AND QUALITY

In the Radljevo field there were find out 6 coal seams. Quality fluctations in Radljevo are larger than in Southfield.
The oldest seam seam 1 reaches thickness of few centimetres up to 5 m and has a minable thickness in the
western and northern part of the area.The seam is dipping into north-eastern directioon.
Coal seam 1 heating values is between 6500 and 8500 kJ/kg.The ash content is varying strongly.For single drillholes
it was measured at about 26%, whereby the mean value was about 16.21%.The water content of the bottom seam
is approximately 50%.
Coal seam 2 was found in the whole central, northern, southern and eastern area of the future field.The floor of
seam 2 dips from about 115 m in the south-west to 15 m in the east and southeast of the field.Thickness of the
formation varies between 1 m and 2.5 m.The determinated heating values range from 4000 to 8500 kJ/kg within
the whole area of extension.
Coal seam 3 has been explored within the whole Radljevo field, except in the two extension areas in the west.
The heating value reach a maximum value of up to 9000 kJ/kg.Howeever, the heating values fall to 5200 kJ/kg in
the south of the area and in the northern part there are small areas with low values of approximately 6000
kJ/kg.The average ash content is 15.1%.In the northern part of the field ash conatents are lower up to 20% than in
the south up to 30%.
95

PROCEEDINGS
Coal seam 4 was found in the whole central, northern, southern and eastern area of the future field.The thickness
of the formation varies between 2 m and 4 m in the western part of the area of exstension, and 3 m to 6 m in northeast and east.The determined heating values range from 4000 to 8500 kJ/kg within the whole area of extension.The
average ash content is 15.1%.In the northern part of the field ash contents are lower up to 20% than in the south
up to 34%.
Figure 3. Forecast of coal average heating
value assuming 13 mt/a output
Coal seam 5 was found in the

central, northern and eastern area
of the future field.The thickness of
the formation varies between 2 m
end 5 m in the whole area.The
determined heating values range
from 2500 kJ/kg to 8000 kJ/kg within the whole area of extension.Actualy, the heating values fall to 2500 kJ/kg in
the southeast of the area and in the northern and eastern part there are small areas with low values of
approximately 6000 kJ/kg.The ash content is clearly higher in the southeast 35% than in the other area of
extension 15%.
Coal seam 6 was only explored in the west of the area.The thickness of the formation varies between 1 m and 5
m.In the southeast the heating value of the coal is very low with values between 3000 kJ/kg 6000kJ/kg.These
values rise to average 7500 kJ/kg in the central and northern area, but values above 8000 kJ/kg are rarely
reached.The ash content is clearly higher in the south 25 to 40%, than in the other area of extension 10 to 20%.
Coal reserves and quality on behalf of mining variants
The total coal reserves amount to approximately 396 million tons.Power plants has calculated a minimum average
heating value of approximately 6500 kJ/kg for the supply.Therefore one of the variants variant 2 represents the
maximum minnig variant.The boundaries follow the spread of the coal base on the existing stripping ratio and
approximately 340 mt of coal with a mean heating value of 6955 kJ/kg are available in this variant.The maximum
average value is about 7700 kJ/kg and the minimal value is at 6300 kJ/kg.
At the end of lifetime of the opencast mine, there will be available another 55 mt with an average heating value of
5330 kJ/kg.
Southfield
Radljevo-variant 2
Radljevo-variant 3
Minerable reserves [Mt]
385,8
341,4
294,8
Total Waste [Mbcm]
1430,9
1179,6
1048,9
Striping ratio W : L
3.71 : 1
3.46 : 1
3.56 : 1
Average heating value [GJ/t]
7362
6890
6820
Table 4. Minerable reserves, ratios

and average coal quality for
selected variants
The variant 3 of the

technological development
5332
Average heating value [GJ/t]
was prepared to minimaze
necessary
resettlement
measures. In the northern field area, mine boundary were reduced. The total coal reserves amount to
approximately 350 million tonns.EPS has calculated a minimal average heating value of approximately 6500 kJ/kg
for the supply to the power plants. Therefore, approximately 295 mt of coal with mean heating value of 6880 kJ/kg
are available in this variant. The maximum average value is about 7500 kJ/kg and minimal value is at 6300 kJ/kg.
At the end of the lifetime of the opencast mine, there will be available another 55 mt with an average heating value
of 5330 kJ/kg. The reserve losses by reducing resettlement measures amount to approximately 45 mt.The mean
heating value due to losses is approximately 7200 kJ/kg.
54,8
Additional low heating value [Mt]
96

PROCEEDINGS
4. CONCLUSION
Considering the depletion of the coal reserves in the mines Field D and Field B toward fuel demand of existing and
planned new power capacities, a future annual deficit of approximately 13 million tonns of coal will be cover by
opening up the new Field E, Radljevo an/or Southfield mines.
Southfield mine requires less overburden removal in the initial years. Few years later output capacity constrains will
occur during the transfer from sub-field G into sub-field F where the coal seam is strongly dipping downwards into
southern directions.
The expected maximal output capacity of Southfield can be achieved only rather late after 10 years of operation
when mine reached the 250 m deep bottom seam and the lower benches are establish.
Radljevo mine can rich a countinuous and stable annual output of 13 mt rather fast within three years from
opening up coal. Radljevo mine can maintain the 13 mt output level over the full lifetime without capacity
constrains.
Resettlement and relocation measures are inevitable in both fields.While settlement is concetrated the eastern
deposit area in the Southfield, it is spread over the entire field in Radljevo.Therefore the Radljevo field will get
priority for development. Compared with Southfield it requires lower total investments and requires lower
opertional costs.
As supplementary coal production capacity for field D is predicted the new opencast mine Field E, which should
be operational during the 2015.But as far as the new capacity rich full production range, the coal from Field C need
to be excavate.Serious coal production shortage at Field D is caused by as follows reasons:recenty moved on
cementary at Vreoci village for the purpose of normal production enlargement toward village, therefore the lignite
reserves are decreased by 40 million tonns.The further reason: Increasing coal demand for the purpose of
combustion in the TPP Nikola Tesla which units has been improved since 2001 in order to produce more energy.
Future coal supply from MB Kolubara to existing and new TPP will likely be a mix of coal from different mines.
Long term development plan of EPS anticipate the strategy that the lignite further remains main energy resources
for power generation in Serbia.
REFERENCES
[1]
Preliminary project and feasibility study of opening and excavation of Field E,

EPS, 2006
[2]
Study on selection of limitation and opening of opencast mines Southfield and Radljevo with comparative overview of coal
mining for the selection of priority coal supplier of CHP Kolubara B, EPS,RGF,Vattenfall Europe Mining AG, 2009
[3]
Popovi.N.,Coal supply in next decade derived from EPS supplementary opencast mining facilities, IMCET Congres, Ankara 2011
97

PROCEEDINGS
IMPROVEMENTS IN HIGH PRESSURE SORPTION INVESTIGATIONS OF COAL:

CASE STUDY OF THE VELENJE LIGNITE
ABSTRACT
Joe PEZDI1
Ana R. MEDVED1
Edi BURI1
Antonija LESAR1
Janja ULA SKORNEK2
Lucija PETRINJAK3
Tine PEZDI1
Robert MORAVEC4
Gaper TAVAR4
Simon ZAVEK12
1
RO GEORIS, Radovljica, Slovenia

Velenje Coal Mine, Velenje, Slovenia
3
RCE, Velenje, Slovenia
4
Jozef Stefan Institute, Ljubljana,
Slovenia
Corresponding Author's E-mail:
joze.pezdic@georis.si
2
The knowledge about characteristics of coal gases is of great importance,

especially during mining. The sources of gas, its transport and accumulation
are included. This study focuses on lignite seam in the Velenje Coal Mine and
different sorption capacities of particular types (lithotypes) of lignite. The
progress in laboratory high pressure sorption studies is presented (up to 100
bar).
The measurements were performed on an updated instrument according to
the improved volumetric gas sampling method. The gas was sampled from
the reaction cell during the sorption simulation. The data quality has been
positively affected by the updated instruments. The performed three sets of
measurements led to results that were crucial for further research. In the
experiment, the amount of adsorbed and desorbed gas was calculated from
the pressure difference in the known cell volume.
The obtained amounts of gas could permit the risk assessment of possible
coal dust and gas outbursts. The performed tests shall enable a more exact
determination and understanding of gas effects, possibly add some new
knowledge to understanding of the dangerous phenomena, possibly also
their prediction, and lead to better safety in mining.
Keywords
Coal Gases, Coal Mine Velenje, High Pressure Sorption, Lignite, Methodology
1. INTRODUCTION
The main purpose of the research is determining the sorption properties of coal gas from the Velenje lignite coal
mine at high (critical) pressures. The studies were initially involved in the research project of the Velenje coal mine,
addressing an additional and extensive research of sorption properties of gases in the coal layer [1], [2], [3], [4]. Over
the past two years, an ongoing research has been held under the project named ''Methodology of CO2 fixation on
coal ash'' where new technologies were developed and the sorption properties of gases were investigated in full
detail [5].
Various lithotypes (macroscopically distinguishable lignite/coal varieties) of the Velenje lignite differ considerably
by their porosity structure (as e.g. observed microscopically [6]) and the cleat pattern in which coal-bed gas may
occur in a more or less compressed form at normal geothermal gradients. The Velenje basin is an area of a regular
heat flow, which is between 50 and 60 mW/m2 since at least the late Miocene times.
98

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Schematic geological map of Velenje basin,

after Brezigar (1987) [7]
Figure 2. Mine works with borehole locations
A gas mixture accumulated in a coal, named the coal-bed gas, can be of various origins and this is also an
outstanding fact in the case of the Velenje lignite [6], [8], [9]. The coal-bed gas occurs in pores and cleats of coal
under lithostatic pressure of rocks above the coal seam and under the gas pore pressure. Gases can be accumulated
in the void volumes (pores, joints, crushed zones, chambers) of various sizes, both adsorbed on the surface and
dissolved in water. As pressure decreases, the gas is released from the coal, and can migrate inside a seam.
Migration of gas is enhanced in tectonized zones along faulty systems and especially during mining activities.
2. METHODS
Equipment
The methods employed in the experiments are able to provide valuable results. The two pressure vessels with the
volumes of 93 ml and 375 ml were available for the use at high pressures with a good seal. The vessels are designed
in a way that permits the investigation of samples of different sizes (large pieces of coal, core diameter up to 45
mm) and the measuring the temperature inside the vessel and at the housing. A system for the gas capturing from
the desorption has also been established. Thus, the reliable data on a total desorption can be collected.
Figure 3. Sorption system (2012)
We started with the sorption experiments in 1994

First paper was published in First software was done in 2002
New autoclave with new trends was designed and constructed in 2010/11
In 2012/13 new methodology for total adsorption and desorption determination was developed
1998
99

PROCEEDINGS
Sampling
It is important to use proper sampling for each analytical process. This is especially true for samples from large
systems, like the one from the lignite layer in the Velenje coal mine. All samples for this study were taken from
cores of research boreholes prior the exploitation. Systematics of the withdrawal is given in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Schematical protocol of sampling. Appropriate sampling is essential

for all further stages of investigation.
Calculations
The amount of adsorbed gas was determined according to the sorption method described in the article by Pezdi
[2]. For measuring the adsorption-desorption properties of various lignite lithotypes at high pressures (up to almost
100 bars) the volumetric method was applied. The theoretical bases for the calculations of the amount of adsorbed
gas were also presented in the previous works [2], [3] and they are here summarized briefly.
The volume of the adsorbed gas Va is calculated according to equation (1):
(P0 - Pt) Vfree = Va Pa

(1)
where P0 is the initial pressure, Pt is the pressure determined after a time period t, Pa represents the pressure of
1.013 bar and Vfree the free volume in the autoclave. The amount of the gas absorbed on coal is computed from
equation (2):
Vadsorb = Va / mmaterial (l/ kg)
(2)
The ideal gas equation
PV = nRT
(3)
describes the PVT behaviour of real gases only to the first approximation. While the experiments were conducted at
high pressure, the non-ideal behaviour of the gasses should be taken into account. To calculate the adsorption
capacity, the the measured pressure is corrected with the compressibility factor Z of CO2 gas for the system
temperature. Thus, the real pressure Pireal of CO2 into the autoclave is related to the measured pressure Pi through
equation (4):
Pireal = Pi /Z
(4)
The Z factor describes the deviation from ideality. For our experimental conditions we have determined it in our
lab.
Finally, the extrapolation of initial pressure to the zero time of adsorption was introduced to ensure the more
reliable pressure of adsorption at the beginning of the process, which our data acquisition system (software) did not
detect. An added value for determining the maximum desorption was also the capturing of complete desorption
gas and subsequent weighing it, through which we approach to the total amount of desorption gas.
3. RESULTS
We have measured the changes of the pressure in the adsorption of CO2 on coal from the lignite layer of the
Velenje coal mine as well as the changes of pressure in the reverse process (desorption). The selected results of CO2
sorption on detrite are illustrated in Figure 5, while those with addition of N2 are given in Figure 6. Figure 7
presents the sorption of CO2 on xylite.
100

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 5. A demonstration of sorption on a detrite sample, grain size 2-4 mm, with 3-times the CO2 adsorption and 3-times desorption (chart A).
Chart B further shows the 3-fold desorption from chart A in detail.
Figure 6. A demonstration of sorption on a detrite coal sample, grain size 2-4 mm, with 3-times the CO2 adsorption with the addition of N2 (chart
A), and a detailed view of the 3-fold desorption on chart B.
Figure 7. A demonstration of sorption on a xylite core sample, with 2-times the CO2 adsorption (chart A) and a more detailed chart (chart B),
where CO2 was exctracted after every stage of desorption for use of gravimetric determination of the total desorption.
4. DISCUSSION
The purpose and focus of the research
We investigate the sorption at the partial pressure of CO2 (~ 60 bar at 25 0C) in order to come closer to the realistic
conditions in a mine (in the Velenje coal mine, the lignite layer is up to 500 m deep). The lithostatic pressures there
are over 100 bars and a part of the CO2 is in a condensed state. Due to excavations a part of the lignite layer is
depressurized, which causes the structure of coal to degrade. This especially happens just at the main dig site,
where it causes shear stress (up to 200 bar) to occur first and then follows a rapid relaxation of pressure to 1 bar.
The aggregate state of CO2 is changing rapidly and is one of the main reasons for outbreaks during an excavation.
101

PROCEEDINGS
The transition from previous research to new conditions

In relation to the latest publications of previous researches [3], [4] we significantly improved the methodology of
sorption analysis with the use of a new reaction vessel (autoclave). For comparison and verification, we used during
this period both the old autoclave (93 ml) and the new one (375 ml), of which the latter has additional equipment
for measuring temperature in the same reaction volume and enables the use of larger patterns which includes
cores with diameters of 45 mm. All the data measured with the old autoclave is comparable with the
measurements from the new one (Table 1).
Table 1. The comparison of sorption results obtained in the old and the new autoclave under the same conditions of process control (time,
pressure, temperature, sample type).
Fine detrite
P0 = 60 bar
New (V = 375 ml)

[gCO2/kgcoal]
Old (V = 93 ml)
[gCO2/kgcoal]
Adsorption with extrapolation
16.37
17.61
2 staged desorption
18.83
17.77
Ratio Ads. : Des.
1 : 1.15
1 : 1.01
Through the additional parameters provided by the experiments in the new autoclave we significantly improved the
possibility of the sorption process recognition.
Corrections of the initial pressure and the pressure due to the non-ideality of CO2
First, we calculated the sorption properties [gCO2/kgcoal] directly from the measured pressures at the constant
temperature as we have done in previous studies [3], [4]. New experimental equipment in the actual study allowed
us to resolve the basic principle of sorption a high level of reversibility of the process (the equal molar ratio of
adsorbed and desorbed gas from the same experiment). The total desorption of CO2 was determined with direct
pressure measurements in several stages (charts B on Figures 5, 6 and 7) or with gravimetric method (chart B on
Figure 7). Achieving the reliable data for the total desorption required an optimization of the gas induction time
into the reaction vessel, since the adsorption rate is very fast at the beginning, but the gas induction time lasts for
a few seconds (extrapolation based on time and starting pressure).
In separate experiment we determined the factor of compressibility (Z) for CO2 at room temperature for the
pressure range from 10 bar up to 60 bar. Figure 8 present the results of CO2 adsorption on coal with Z-corrected
values (green line) and without correction (red line). It is evident from the figure that the non-ideal behavior of CO2
significantly increases with the increased pressure and it is essential to ensure a reliable sorption results. Just to
mention, the uncorrected values (red line) resulted in an apparent decrease of adsorption capacity at high
pressures.
Figure 8. The adsorption of CO2 on coal [gCO2/kgcoal] at different pressures with

Z-corrected values (green line) and without correction (red line).
On a sample of fine-grained detrite JPK 66/13-1, grain size of 4

mm, we performed a two-staged pressure desorption and also
we weighed the extracted gas. Thus we achieved the total
desorption. With the adsorption, we only measured the
difference of pressures during the procedure. The amount of
adsorbed CO2 was calculated: a) after two dosages directly
from the measured pressure drop and then using extrapolation
based on the beginning of dosing; b) taking the compressibility
factor (Z) into account total adsorption. The corresponding
resulted are summarized in the Table 2.
102

PROCEEDINGS
With improved equipment and two types of additional corrections described above, we significantly improved our
understanding of the sorption, in particular, the initial adsorption at the partial pressure of CO2. Due to the
determination of the total desorption with several stages and mostly with the weighing of the total sorbed gas, we
were able to carry out the real corrections with the adsorption, while there was no possibility to check it by
weighing the CO2 gas.
Table 2. Sorption of the fine-grained detrite (sample JPK 66/131, parallel 4) with the initial pressure of CO2 at 59 bar, without (a) and with (b) the
compressibility (factor Z) corrections.
DESORPTION of CO2
ADSORPTION of CO2
sample
Fine detrite
P0 = 59 bar
P (Des)
[bar]
Des. directly
from P (a)
[gCO2/kgcoal]
Tot. des. with Z (b)

[gCO2/kgcoal]
1. step
9,4
15,7
2. step
3,3
5,5
Sum
P (Ads)
[bar]
Ads. directly
from P (a)
[gCO2/kgcoal]
Tot. ads. with Z (b)

[gCO2/kgcoal]
19,8
12,3
13,3
17,4
6,6
2,6
6,3
8,0
21,2
19,6
TOTAL
26,4
25,4
Ads. vs. Des.
1,04
1,00
According to the previous methodology and corrections (Table 1), the adsorption capacity is approximately 17.5
gCO2/kgcoal. Using the extrapolation at the beginning of the CO2 induction, where the dosing or adsorption is rapid in
the opposite direction, we received both strain values of around 20 gCO2/kgcoal (Table 2). When also the factor of
compressibility (Z) is taken into account and the use of a multi-staged procedure including weighing of the
extracted CO2 for desorption, we obtained the total sorption capacity of lignite at around 26 gCO2/kgcoal (Table 2).
The total desorption only differs from the corrected adsorption by less than 4 %.
Similar studies were carried out in the years 2010-12 at the Imperial College of Science in London [10]. There the
methodology was somewhat different, but they used the same samples (Velenje lignite and high pressures). One of
our co-authors (S. Zavek) was also involved in those studies.
5. CONCLUSIONS AND APPLICATION GOALS

The sorptive characteristics of different lignite lithotypes have been investigated and the main conclusions are the
following:
We have developed a methodology for sorption (adsorption and desorption) on lignite coal and applied it to
various lithotypes of lignite samples. We are using improved equipment (150 bar, 160 0C), with which we
digitally measure pressure in the reaction cell as well as the temperature on the periphery of autoclave and
in the surroundings. In addition, we collect the data of additional parameters (humidity, speed of dosing).
For desorption we also weigh the released CO2. Modern software enables a more accurate data collection
from the process, which is especially important in the first minutes, when both processes are very fast.
Optimization of total adsorption and desorption achievement is based on the assumption that they are in
the ratio of 1:1. The main problems are the non-ideal characteristics of CO2, the technology for gas dosing
and sufficiently reliable data recording. According to basic knowledge and technical capabilities in the
previous research [1], [4] this could not yet be achieved. Current conditions and knowledge allow us to
achieve the required criteria well.
Taking into account all the described parameters, the total sorption capacity for fine detrite is about 26
gCO2/kgcoal.
Sorption is dependent upon lithotype of lignite, moisture and temperature. Samples which have a lot of
detrite (fD) components and micropores in the coal structure are the most suitable for sorption. Processes
and quantitative adsorption capacities are very important case for pre-evaluation of gas outburst risk during
exploitation.
The sorption methodology still remains in the development phase. The principal future research trends will
be aimed at collecting new data on coal petrology [6] and so find most relevant samples for detecting the
range of sorption diversity. Results from sorption tests will be used to verify and fit the mathematical model
103

PROCEEDINGS
which is being developed last few years in order to examine the influence of various stress states and
amount of coal gasses to the structural and petrographical changes of lignite and so its characteristics for
excavation which is presently a case study for the Velenje coal mine.
REFERENCES
[1]
Pezdi J., Marki M., Leti M., Popovi A., Zavek S.: Laboratory simulation of adsorption desorption processes on different
lignite lithotypes from Velenje lignite mine, 1999
[2]
Pezdi J., Zavek S., ula J.: High pressure sorption of CO2 on lignite coal, 20 NZGG Conference, Dunedin, New Zealand, 2007
[3]
ula J., Pezdi J., Zavek S., Buri E.: Adsorption-Desorption Propreties of the Velenje Lignite. 4 BALKANMINE CONGRESS,
Slovenia, Ljubljana, 301314, 2011
[4]
ula J., Pezdi J., Zavek S., Buri E.: Adsorption capacity of the Velenje lignite:methodology and equipment, RMZ Materials
and Geoenvironment, Vol. 58, No. 2, 193216, 2011
[5]
Pezdi J., Zavek S., ula J., Skapin T., Moravec R., Tavar G., Buri, E., Pezdi T., Petrinjak L., Medved A.R.: Annual
report:SORPTION RR project RCE, 44 p. 2012
[6]
Marki M.: Petrology and genesis of the Velenje lignite, Ph.D. thesis, University of Ljubljana, 208 p. 2009
[7]
Brezigar A., Ogorelec B., Rijavec L., Mio P.: Geologic setting of the Pre-Pliocene basement of the Velenje depression and its
surroundings, Geologija 30, 31-65, 1987
[8]
Kandu T., Pezdi J.: Origin and distribution of coalbed gases from the Velenje basin, Slovenia. - Geochemical Journal, Vol. 39,
397409, 2005.
[9]
Zavek S: Model for research of structural and petrographical changes of the Velenje lignite depending on various stress states
and presence of gasses, Ph.D. thesis, University of Ljubljana, 151 p. 2004
[10]
Durucan S., Korre A., Sinayuc C., Jozefowicz R., Brenkley D., Zavek S., Golob L., Jamnikar S., Morillo P., Beckmann K., Rodriguez
J.L., Arias B., Abraham K., Beckmann K., Baltz R., Mutke G., Lurka A.: Development of Novel Technologies for Predicting and
Combating Gas Outbursts and Undercontrolled Emissions in Thich Seam Coal Mining, CoGasOUT tehnical report 2, Imperial
College of Science, London, 2012
th
th
104

PROCEEDINGS
MONITORING AND PREDICTING SURFACE MOVEMENTS

IN THE VELENJE COAL MINE AREA
ABSTRACT
Drago POTONIK1
Janez ROER2
Milivoj VULI3
PV Invest d.o.o., Velenje, Slovenia,

drago.potocnik@pvinvest.si
2
PV Invest d.o.o., Velenje, Slovenia,
janez.roser@pvinvest.si
3
University of Ljubljana, Faculty of
Natural Sciences and Engineering,
Ljubljana, Slovenia,
milivoj.vulic@guest.arnes.si
The impact of underground mining excavation in Velenje Coal Mine reflects

as surface subsidence soon after excavation and reaches 90% of its final
value of approximately three months after the excavation is finished. In this
paper an extensive surface subsidence monitoring and computer modelling
for predicting the movements on the surface will be introduced. On the
surface of the mining area the measurements of observation networks are
performed for more decades. Before 1990 the measurements of the
networks were made only by a combination of triangulation and trilateration
for planar networks and geometric leveling for the orthometric heights. With
the development of satellite technology and the emergence of GPS system
the Velenje Coal Mine began to consider establishing a monitoring network
based on GPS measurements. In 1996 GPS observation network with 18
measurement points was established. Nowadays, all together over 300
measurement points in the entire Velenje Coal Mine surface area is observed
at least once per year. Due to surface subsidence three lakes emerge in the
aleka Valley. Surface subsidence monitoring includes a measurement of
those lakes bottom once a year, which gives us also an insight into the
modifications of the terrain under the lakes.
Further, for predicting the movements of the surface a computer model is
used. The basis of this complex model is consolidation model and statistical
analysis of measured subsidence. Analyses and predictions of surface
movements over mining areas on the basis of geodetic networks
observations results and computer subsidence modelling have proven to be
reliable and coincide with subsequent verification based on measured data.
Furthermore, acquired information enables timely and appropriate respond
and preparations to ensure safety, future land works, surface remediation
and reclamation for any defined periods until the end of the planned coal
extraction.
Keywords
Coal Mine, Monitoring, Movements, Surface Subsidence, Underground Mining
1. INTRODUCTION
Velenje Coal Mine (VCM) is one of the largest and most modern deep coal mining sites in Europe. The thickness of
the coal deposit ranges from 20 m to 160 m. The coal layer is 100 m thick at the depth of 400 m and the greatest
amount of the coal can be found at the depth of 290 m. The mining method used is known as Velenje Mining
Method (VMM) and is unique in world mining technology [1]. The VMM is characterized by continuous caving-in of
the hanging wall layers and the length of longwalls amounts from 80 m to 210 m and the length of panels vary from
600 m to 800 m (Figure 1). Underground coal mining excavation leads to surface subsidence.
105

PROCEEDINGS
Figure1. Typical VMM longwall face equipment
The impact of mining excavation reflects on the surface soon after excavation and reaches 90% of its final value of
approximately three months after the excavation is finished. Measurements to determine the movements of
grounds cover geodetic measurements of planar and height networks. In the VCM more longwall panels are active
at the same time and after the extraction one of them is finished, already starts extraction of another. Therefore it
is difficult to talk about the impact of individual longwall coal panel on the surface. While the subsidence at the
surface does not occur suddenly but develops progressively as the coal is extracted within the area of influence of
the extracted coal panel, a point on the surface will be affected by the extraction of several adjacent panels [2].
Since surface subsidence measurements are carried out in the spring months, the impact of mining on surface
corresponds to the extracted panels in the year prior the measurements were taken. Furthermore, for the purposes
of planning, timely and appropriate preparations of future land works, surface remediation and reclamation, a
computer modelling for predicting surface movements is used. The measurements of observation networks on the
surface of the mining area are performed for more decades [3, 4, 5, 6, 7] and in this paper a synthesis of these
studies is presented.
2. METHODS FOR MONITORING OF MOVEMENTS AND DEFORMATIONS

Movements and deformations monitoring of the wider VCM area consists of measuring observation networks and
measuring the lakes depths.
Surveying networks
In the wider area of VCM over 300 observation points on the surface, which are part of several observation
networks, are monitored. In 1996 GPS observation network called Small Geodynamic Network of Velenje Coal Mine
(SGNVCM) with 18 measurement points was established (Figure 2). 15 points are located inside the coal mine
subsidence area and three points are stabilized outside the area of mine excavation influence [8]. The red polyline
on figure 2 and 3 corresponds to VCM area.
Figure 2. Small Geodynamic Network of

Velenje Coal Mine (SGNVCM)
consisting from 18 observation points (red
polyline corresponds to VCM area)
Each minor mining observation

network consists of at least one
base point that is part of SGNVCM
(starting points of light blue lines on
figure 2) and more additional points
(Figure 2). On figure 2 five minor
observation networks are shown:
otanj, Gaberke, kale, Pesje and
NOP, which are schematically
represents by magenta polylines.
106

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 3. Minor observation networks

in the VCM area
To eliminate errors in setting up monitoring equipment on observation points, the stabilization of observation
points is fabricated from concrete pillars (Figure 4). All concrete points are further equipped with a metal pedestal
on which during the measurement measuring equipment is placed. Point displacements are determined from at
least two epochs based on the positions of the points set out in identical coordinate system.
Figure 4. (left) GNSS measurements on concrete pillar observation point,

(middle) terrestrial measurements on concrete pillar observation point, (right) geometric levelling
Observation of points in observational networks are performed with classical terrestrial surveying methods, which
result in three-dimensional coordinates (Y, X, H) in the national Gauss-Krger coordinate system. For a more
accurate determination of point elevation the method of geometric levelling is used (Figure 4 - right).
Measurements of observation networks are generally performed at least once a year, in some cases, even several
times per month.
On the basis of measured and analysed observation networks from different epochs, movements of observation
points are calculated. The horizontal and vertical movements of observed points are published in tabular and
graphical form for individual and cumulative years, as well as in contour plot with movements iso-lines (Figure 5).
107

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 5. The contour map of vertical movements made on the basis of the results
of the two epochs, and the graphical representation of the movement of individual points
Bathymetry
As a consequence of the mining activities that results in subsided surface three large depression lakes have been
formed in aleka Valley. Measuring the lakes depth is performed to observe and track the impact of coal
excavation on the terrain under the lakes, i.e. lakes bottoms, and is performed once a year. First bathymetry of
Lake Velenje goes back in 1960. From 1975 onwards every year all three lakes are measured. Since 2010 the sonar
Reason NaviSound 110, which is automatically connected to GNSS device, is used and the obtained point data
consists of coordinates Y, X, Z and depth. The measuring process includes determination of position in a square grid
with the cell size approximately 25 meters through GNSS Real Time Kinematics method and the depth
measurements with sonar on every 5 meters are carried out. At the same time measurements of water temperature
at different depths are performed. During data processing also sound velocity corrections are made. Finally, from
point data Y, X, Z and depth the lakes bottom is modelled. Knowing depth data is essential for monitoring
subsidence terrain under the lakes. Comparison between different years models provide an insight into the changes
that have occurred within one or more years [9]. Figure 6 shows field work (left), 3D model based on bathymetric
measurements (middle) and the final bathymetric map of Lake otanj (right).
Figure 6. Field work on the lake with all equipment (left), 3D model
based on bathymetric measurements (middle) and the bathymetric map of Lake otanj (right)
108

PROCEEDINGS
3. SURFACE SUBSIDENCE PREDICTIONS

Predictions of mining operations impact on surface are an integral part of any underground mining project. For the
purpose of predicting the movements of the surface as a result of coal mining excavation a computerized model
called "Pogrez", which was created in collaboration with the Institute for Mining, Geotechnology and Environment,
and Faculty of Natural Sciences and Engineering, University of Ljubljana, is used [10]. The basis of this complex
model is geomechanical consolidation model and statistical analysis of measured subsidence.
Computer program calculates the horizontal and vertical displacements of the ground for each observation point
that forms a relief model of mining area. The input data for the calculation of the movement of the terrain consists
of surface point data, longwall panel geometry and geomechanical characteristics of the materials that are part of
mining projects [11, 12]. In Figure 7 the graphical interface of the computer program is shown, including input
parameters, longitudinal and transverse profiles through the panel surface area and the subsidence development
with time.
Figure 7. GUI of the computer program Pogrez, including input parameters,

longitudinal and transverse profiles through the panel surface area and the subsidence development with time
As surface data we use the national digital terrain model from 2006 [13] that include the points in square grid of 25
x 25 meters (Figure 8). Every year on the basis of field measurements this digital terrain model is updated. On the
left side of figure 8 the black lines represents geometry of all of the excavation panels that we want to include in
the model and in the right side of figure 8 iso-lines of subsidence and colour contour map are shown.
Figure 8. Surface elevation points with planned excavation panels (left) and resulting subsidence colour contour map (right)
109

PROCEEDINGS
Based on the results of field measurements and computer modelling the movement predictions of the surface for
any defined periods until the end of the planned coal extraction are prepared. That enables timely and appropriate
response for necessary land works, remediation of degraded areas and reclamation. Figure 9 shows predicted
subsidence in the VCM mining area until the year 2023. Maximal vertical displacements up to 50 meters are
predicted at the location between otanj and Velenje lakes.
Figure 9. Colour contour map of predicted subsidence in the VCM area until the year 2023
Since the subsided area between lakes is constantly strewed by material, the height of the terrain at this location
does not change. Therefore there is no merger of the two lakes. Figure 10 (left side) shows an analysis from the
2010, which indicates the expansion of the lakes in 2013, 2017 and 2023. Prognosis has resulted in a creation of a
small lake north of the existing one in the next three years. On the right side of figure 10 the actual status of the
area in April 2013, which confirms the correctness of the analysis in 2010, is shown.
Figure 10. Lakes extending prognosis from the 2010 analysis (left) and the actual photography of the area in the April 2013 (right)
Analyses and predictions of surface movements over mining areas on the basis of geodetic networks observations
results and computer subsidence modelling have proven to be reliable and coincide with subsequent verification
based on measured data, both in predicting the maximal subsidence as well their locations. However, the model is
110

PROCEEDINGS
constantly updated with new measurements and observations. Based on the comparison between actual measured
movements in monitoring networks and predicted movements the difference is minimal and acceptable.
4. DISCUSSION
The consequences of mining activities in the aleka valley reflect on the surface by forming subsided surface,
which was filled by water and three lakes arose. In order to manage events in the Velenje Coal Mine area continuous
observation of the surface movements including depth of the lakes is performed. The monitoring movement system
includes observation network with more than 300 points on the surface. Based on these observations, we calculate
changes in the position of the observed points of the surface and the bottom of the lakes in the desired time
period. Monitoring movement system of Velenje Coal Mine is constantly expanding with new measurements and
upgrades with new methods and most modern equipment.
For the purposes of planning, timely preparation of deprived areas and the rehabilitation of degraded areas the
movement of the surface with computer models prediction is used. In this way the required information about the
location and extent of subsidence, the maximum size of the movements and the time evolution of the surface
subsidence are obtained. Thus the mining impact on the environment and the safety of VCM area is controlled and
further the smooth operation, safety and related good public opinion is assured.
REFERENCES
th
[1]
Medved M., Golob L.: Sustainable development of Velenje Mining Method and its global use, 4 Balkanmine congress, Slovenia,
Ljubljana, 2011
[2]
Mine Subsidence Engineering Consultants: Introduction to Longwall Mining and Subsidence, New South Wales, Australia, 2007
[3]
JGS: Poroilo programa Jamomerstvo in geodetske storitve za obdobje 1996 2012, Premogovnik Velenje, 2012
[4]
Rajter T., Slatinek J., Roer J.: Analiza premikov terena na severnem delu kalskega jezera in prognoza premikov do konca
odkopavanja, t.j. leta 2054, PV Invest, Velenje, 2013
[5]
JGS: Poroilo o opazovalni mrei Pesje za obdobje 2000 2013, PV Invest, 2013
[6]
JGS: Poroilo o opazovalni mrei kale za obdobje 2000 2013, PV Invest, 2013
JGS: Poroilo o opazovalni mrei Pesje za obdobje 2000 2013, PV Invest, 2013
[7]
Vuli M., Potonik D.: Zasnova in iritev opazovalne mree za spremljanje dinamike povrja na obmoju mesta otanj do naselja
Ravne, raziskovalna naloga, 2010
[8]
Stopar B., Sterle O.: Obdelave opazovanj GNSS od leta 1996 do leta 2011 v Mali geodinamini mrei Premogovnika Velenje
(poroilo za leto 2011). Fakulteta za gradbenitvo in geodezijo, Ljubljana, 2012
[9]
Roer J., Potonik D.: Aktivnosti pri spremljanju stanja alekih jezer in deponije premoga, Rudar razvojni doseki Skupine
Premogovnik Velenje, 2011
[10]
Medved M., Koar S., Jamek Z.: Pogrez 2002 (Visual Basic), Ljubljana 2002
[11]
Rudarski projekt RP-54/91. Plan odkopavanja v jami Preloge jug do zakljuka odkopavanja, Premogovnik Velenje 1991.
[12]
Rudarski projekt RP-325/2007TK. Odkopavanje jame Pesje od k.-40 do dna kadunje ter stebra CD, Premogovnik Velenje 2007.
[13]
Podobnikar T.: Digitalni model terena iz razlinih podatkov, ivljenje in tehnika, 2006, pp 20-27.
111

PROCEEDINGS
NDT IN FUNCTION PREVENTION OF LOSS

INTEGRITY OF STRUCTURES LARGE DIMENSIONS
ABSTRACT
Vujadin ALEKSIC1
Srdjan BULATOVIC2
Ljubica MILOVIC3
Institute for testing materials-IMS

Institute, Belgrade, Serbia,
vujadin.aleksic@institutims.rs
2
Yugoslav River Shipping, Belgrade,
Serbia, srdjan.bulatovic@yahoo.com
3
Faculty of Technology and Metallurgy,
Belgrade, Serbia, acibulj@tmf.bg.ac.rs
The paper presents examples of the loss of structural integrity due to large
induced defects in welded joints occurred during the time of preparation of
construction or during operation, which are not detected in time or not at
the time repaired, and can be attributed to inadequate prevention in system
maintenance.
Daily visual inspection should be provided in order to monitor the behavior
of structures in exploitation, and if necessary, NTD method of testing the
most loaded parts of the structure should be applied. This approach may be
applied to other types of similar construction, and its application in
preventive maintenance would help extend the life of structures of large
dimensions.
Keywords
NTD, Prevention, Integrity Loss, Large-Scale Structures
1. INTRODUCTION
Large-scale structures, such as various types of excavators and reloading bridges, which are used in the production
processes of abstraction, transport and disposal of coal, ash and slag or open cast mines and power plants require
specially organized monitoring of behavior of structure during operation and maintenance. Continuous mining in
very harsh environmental conditions can lead to relatively frequent failures of these structures. During the
exploitation of large-scale structures under the effect of variable amplitude loading leads to unexpected failures.
These failures other than direct material damage, could jeopardize the safety of personnel. In addition,
unanticipated delays in exploitation cause the damage, which is often much higher than the direct damage. High
place among the causes of these failure takes inadequate exploitation and maintenance.
2. EXAMPLES OF INTEGRITY LOSS

Dragline excavators that are used in our open cast mines are mainly produced in Russia and work on loading the
slag in bunker. Dragline excavators are working on our open pit mines are mostly made in Russia and working on
loading overburden into the bunker ECS (Excavator-Conveyor-Stacker) system. The whole construction is exposed
to low cycle dynamic loading. This load caused fatigue failure on observed excavator. The fatigue failure was
spotted on one of the welded joints and emergence of a large number of initial cracks on the other welded joints of
pipe and excavator, fig.1.
112

PROCEEDINGS
fracture of girder
fracture of girder
repaired cracks
crack on the girder
Figure 1. Fatigue fracture of girder and appearance of a large number of initial crack pipe boom of dragline excavator caused a loss of integrity
During the exploitation of bucket wheel excavator under the effect of variable amplitude loading, which is the
result of operating conditions and its own low-frequency oscillation occurs unforeseen failure,damage and fracture
of its components. Combined fracture, fatigue, stable crack with shear lips and final brute breaking, upper part of
lug and brittle fracture down part of lugs on counterweight holder rotary escavator [1], in which could see region of
initial fracture shown in fig. 2.
Unloading bridge structures is exposed to low cycle dynamic loading. This load caused fatigue failure at the
supports of observed unloading bridge, figure 3, which was confirmed by visual examination [2,3].
These examples show that ISO 9000 standards haven't been respected, ISO 3834, EN 287 and EN 288 standards
weren't properly applied and also independent accredited laboratory for testing of NDT methods did not confirm
the results of NDT testing. Problems shown in these examples can be reduced considerably in similar constructions
if we pay attention to: irregularity in the design, manufacture and operation, final quality control before operation,
properly defined control and testing, maintenance and repair during operation, qualification and certification of
welding personnel who participates in the production, and later in the repair of damages of large-scale structures.
113

PROCEEDINGS
undamaged lugs
cover of plate about lugs
damaged upper part of lug
damaged lugs
start of initiation of damage [1]
Figure 2. Fatigue fracture of lugs on counterweight caused a loss of integrity of the excavator
cracks
cracks
cracks
cracks
Figure 3. Fatigue failure at the supports of observed unloading bridge caused integrity loss
3. CAUSES AND CONSEQUENCES OF INTEGRITY LOSS

The majority of the mechanisms and consequences of metal damage can be predicted on the basis of operational
conditions [4]. However, some of them are hard to detect and can cause serious damage in a short time, fig.2.
According to frequency of damage creation, causes are fatigue, ductile fracture and corrosion of materials. Such
phenomena are based on errors in calculation, design and construction, errors in production and assembly,
unexpected operating conditions and working environment.
114

PROCEEDINGS
After professional analysis of the results of inspection and testing damaged parts of large-scale structures, the
appropriate conclusions about the causes of failure and damage of large-scale structures could be performed.
4. TECHNICAL DIAGNOSTICS OF INTEGRITY LOSS

During the operation period of large-scale structures in comes to fatigue of its components. Degradation of
material properties and deformation of elements can be accelerated due to the exploitation and repair errors,
that's why periodic or continuous diagnostic measurements are needed. In this way, processes that could lead to
the creation of system damage are under systematic control, what are also the legal obligations imposed by the
regulations, directives and harmonized standards.
Properly conducted technical diagnostics protects parts of large-scale structures from accident, and also ensures
safer conditions for employees as well as rational techno-economic exploitation and maintenance.
Technical diagnostic of large-scale structures must be based on three basic principles:
volume of tests and measurements shall be in accordance with the program of research and an expert
knowledge of structure and working conditions;
tests and measurements must be performed in accordance with special procedures, using appropriate
equipment and qualified personnel;
test results should be presented in such way that the conclusions include large-scale structures operating
conditions, the availability of the test team and staff with appropriate experience and knowledge in the field
of design, construction, installation, operation, maintenance, reliability, fracture mechanics and others.
5. INTEGRITY LOSS PREVENTION PROGRAM

Creating a integrity loss prevention program requires expertise and in-depth analysis of:
legal regulations for this type of structure;
calculation, design and structural documentation of the object with license for usage;
documentation on the installation, reliable process scheme and technological description of the device, as
well as data regarding exploitation (instruction manual, maintanance, periodic diagnostics, delays, damages,
recoveries etc.);
established plan of inspection and testing (range, critical areas, sampling places ...);
methods of non-destructive testing (NDT), (selection procedures and techniques, supervision, equipment,
personnel, documentation);
sizing damage found
characterization of defects(metallurgical testing);
previous reconstructions and used technology
monitoring of behavior of damage/damages in the exploitation
Dealing with the problem described above requires interdisciplinary knowledge from different fields - chemistry,
engineering, physics, metallurgy and tribology. Only well organized and systematic approach as well as teamwork
can lead to satisfactory results and reliable answers in order to prevent integrity loss. Program of inspection and
testing of construction parts is defined based on the integrity loss prevention program determining the cause of
failure of large-scale structures.
6. CONTROL AND NDT TESTING

Organization of the maintenance of such structures depends primarily on their size, shape, structure, number of
employees and their professional experience in system maintenance and adequate database, both technological
and diagnostic [5, 6, 7]. On the basis of the obtained parameters, specific activities on the large dimension
constructions are defined.
In order to minimize the potential loss of integrity of these structures, it is necessary to constantly monitor the
situation and structural behavior through the control center system for monitoring, updating, detection and
analysis of the measured characteristic parameters.
115

PROCEEDINGS
Failure analysis in [1, 2, 3, 8, 9] and the conclusions are not sufficient to completely avoid manufacturing
imperfections and ensure the integrity of welded large-scale structures in exploitation. Directives, standards and
recommendations for production of welded structures significantly contribute to solving the problem, but it
cannot be completely eliminated because of its complexity and the large number of influencing factors.
The damages could be identified during regular and special NDT testing with use of information technology
standards [7], or by measuring the deformation at the macro or micro level [10, 11]. For the purpose of prevention
of integrity loss it is necessary to make 100% visual inspection, MT, PT, UT, in order to determine the material
degradation and damages of components and structural parts of construction.
Other tests like penetrant testing (PT), radiographic testing (RT), and if necessary, control of hardness (HT) of
welded joints and evaluation of microstructure by replica method (REP) can be used in order to get a reliable and
useful results for determining the degree of integrity of large-scale structures and qualitative level of material
degradation over the lifetime.
Visually optical control (VT)
VT is used to detect defects that are visible on the surface of large-scale structures, if the structure is made of
closed profiles. It applies regardless the method to be applied after it, because it is possible to detect errors, such
as in our case, and avoid the use of other, more costly methods of NDT. It is often used for the selection of critical
areas of the construction for the application of other NDT testing methods. At the same objects it may be
performed multiple times (eg, before and after cleaning, or before and after the execution of corrosion protection,
etc.).
Control of the inside of the closed profiles (endoscopy) allows optical access to the interior of profiles. It is
performed using an endoscope, and as a result we get control of video or photograph controlled inner surface.
Magnetic particle testing (MT)
The method is based on emphasizing the stray magnetic flux caused by the presence of surface or subsurface
defects like cracks, notches, inclusions and other types of sharp or planar defects. Advantage of the methodis that
it requires a moderate cost, and if done correctly, you get a very good sensitivity for the detection of surface
defects. The disadvantages of this method is that it could only be appllied to ferromagnetic materials as well as the
potential need for degaussing after completing the testing. The method is commonly used for the detection of
cracks and other defects in weld joints, castings and forgings. It is compatible with the PT method.
Ultrasonic testing (UT)
The method is based on detecting changes in acoustic resistance due to the presence of cracks, voids, inclusions,
and general physical separation in the material. The advantage of the method is that is also applicable to the
thicker material, it is excellent for detecting and locating cracks and other defects, and it is suitable for
automation. The biggest disadvantages are the need for a medium on the surface to be tested (or complete
immersion of testing item in contact medium), as well as the request that surface on which the probe is moving is
relatively smooth (ie cleaning needs, grinding the metallic shine).The most common application is to detect and
precisely determine the position of defects in plate, welded joints (and butt and fillet) steel castings and forgings (if
their geometric configuration allows). Application of this method for testing materials with high attenuation of
ultra sound energy (for example, high alloyed austenitic steels, cast bronze...) is difficult and can be done only under
special circumstances. It is compatible with the RT method.
7. DATA BASE AND CONTROL CALCULATION

Reliable assessment of the integrity of the observed elements, could be made only after creation of adequate data
base and the basis for the development of computer programs [7, 12]. Load data, the characteristics of the base
material and its welded joints, technology development, technical and physical characteristics reported fractures
data and preventive measures provided for damage and destructionare obtained from the databases.
Also, the data base should include data collected during previous investigations of the structure of supporting
constructions. Database of implemented testing and research [13, 14, 15, 16] on the appropriate structures allows
us to analyze the behavior of supporting elements of large-scale structures in order to determine changes in
mechanical properties of materials. We analyzed the damaged parts of of large-scale structures, to determine the
cause of the problem, which is a process that requires a systematic approach. Test results of NDT methods
contribute to the integrity loss prevention, and if damages appear, allow us to determine the cause of large-scale
structures failure. Based on the research of failure and causes of failure of certain components of construction
116

PROCEEDINGS
using method FMEA and reliability parameters obtained from the analysis of the data collected in real operating
conditions, a system of continuous diagnosis could be established. Stress analysis, analysis of damage and fractures
of welded joints [17, 18, 19, 20], and construction elements provide important directives for the development of
design methods and construction elements of large-scale structures to improve the properties of existing materials
and their processing technologies. Also,by analyzing fractures, the development of new technical solutions and
methods of testing [10, 11] is enabled in the prototype stage. It is necessary to take into account the risk analysis
and structural integrity [21, 22], as a new approach to the assessment of structural integrity. Based on data
collected from control, testing and analysis of damaged elements, control calculation of the critical parts of the
constructionis made. Tipical calculation, should be illustrated with the calculation of static and dynamic stress
analysis using the finite element method, FEM, to see the stress distribution due to the impact of the load in the
present conditions. Control calculations confirm the existence or loss of structural integrity, and provides guidance
for further action. Supporting software packages would allow more efficient use oft he database, the analysis of
some influencing factors, and the search of alternative solutions in all phases of design and development of
construction.
8. CONCLUSION
Inadequate maintenance of large-scale structures in terms of protection entails a costly repair, and it is necessary
to determine preventive measures and very thoroughly research issues of protection, durability and maintenance,
especially critical parts of large-scale structures.
In relation to above stated, assessment of the state of the parts of large-scale structures affected by outside
influence is required. This should be followed by the NDT testing, in order to determine the actual extent of
damage, and if necessary, appropriate measures of rehabilitating critical damages and material degradation should
be taken.
Only by testing the large-scale structures under working conditions make it possible to assess their condition
completely. During examination period, the necessary data are obtained to determine the quality and structural
integrity assessment and evaluation of the impact of the elements on the capacity and is given the necessary data
to establish the joint work of equimpent and structure.
In case of breakdown of large-scale structures systematic testing, control, analysis and calculations are required.
Then, on the basis of a program to determine the cause and consequence of damage, make the appropriate
conclusions in order to obtain new information for the following reliable design and construct large-scale
structures.
REFERENCES
[1]
Sedmak S., Grabulov V., Momcilovic D.: Chronology of lost structural integrity initiated from manufacturing defects in
welded structures, Structural integrity and life, Vol.9, No1, 2009, pp. 39-50, UDC 620.17:62-112.81.
[2]
Aleksi V., Milovi Lj., Kovaevi Z.: The failures of a supporting structure of a coal-reloading bridge and methodological
th
approach to recovery of the damages, The 7 International Symposium KOD 2012, Balatonfred, Hungary, 24.-26.05.2012,
pp. 105-108.
[3]
Aleksi V., M. Ljubica, Kovaevi Z.: Recovery of the damages of a welded steel structure of a coal-reloading bridge:
Methodological Approach, Machine design, The Journal of Faculty of Technical Sciences, Vol.4(2012), No.4, pp. 237-242.
[4]
Luki B., uri S., urii M.: Zavarene konstrukcije pouzdanost, sigurnost i otkazi, Zavarivanje i zavarene konstrukcije,
vol.54, br.2, 2009, str. 69-75.
[5]
Jovani P., Ignjatovi D.: Proactive monitoring system for main mining mechanization at open cast mines, Structural
integrity and life, Vol.10, No1, 2010, pp. 11-19, UDC 622.2-7 622.6-7.
[6]
Glii B., Inaudi D.: Integrity monitoring of fracture critical bridges, Structural integrity and life, Vol.10, No2, 2010, pp. 135141, UDC 624.21.04.
[7]
Kiri M., Gruji B.: Application of information technology standards for nondestructive testing of bridges, Structural integrity
and life, Vol.7, No3, 2007, pp. 177-185, UDC 007: [620.179: 624.21]: 004.
[8]
Maneski T., Ignjatovi D.: Repair and reconstruction of bucket wheel excavators, Structural integrity and life, Vol.4, No1,
2004, pp. 9-28, UDC 620.17:621.879.48.
[9]
Maneski T., Ignjatovi D.: Repair and reconstruction of belt wagons and stackers, Structural integrity and life, Vol.4, No1,
2004, pp. 29-38, UDC 620.17:621.86/.87.
[10]
Lozani J.: Application of stereometric strain measurement at macro and micro level, Structural integrity and life, Vol.7,
No3, 2007, pp. 201-208, UDC 629.5.018.
[11]
Gubeljak N.: Application of stereometric measurement on structural integrity, Structural integrity and life, Vol.6, No1-2,
117

PROCEEDINGS
2006, pp. 65-74, UDC 620.169.1.

[12]
Kiri M.: Metode kontrole i ispitivanja mostova bez razaranja sa primenom savremene baze podataka, Zavarivanje i zavarene
konstrukcije, vol.53, br.1, 2008, str. 27-34.
[13]
Bonjak, S.; Gai, V.; Petkovi, Z. (2005). Determination of resistances to coal reclaiming at bridge - type stacker reclaimer
with bucket chain booms, FME Transactions, Vol. 33, No 2, pp 79 88.
[14]
Bonjak, S.; Petkovi, Z.; Gai, V.; Zrni, N. (2006). Unloading bridges with reclaimers Part I: Identification of loadings,
structural calculus and skewing (in Serbian), Tehnika - Mainstvo, Vol. 55, No 6, pp 1-8.
[15]
Bonjak, S.; Petkovi, Z.; Gai, V.; Zrni, N. (2007). Unloading bridges with reclaimers Part II: Structural solution, technology
and calculus of structural reengineering (in Serbian), Tehnika - Mainstvo, Vol. 56, No 1, pp 7-13.
[16]
Maneski T., Miloevi-Miti V.: Numerical and experimental diagnostics of structural strength, Structural integrity and life,
Vol.10, No1, 2010, pp. 3-10, UDC 620.17:669 539.4.012.
[17]
Bonjak, S. (2010). Some of the problems on dynamics and strength of the high -performance machines (in Serbian), IIPP, Vol.
8, No 1, pp. 1-12.
[18]
Sedmak S., Radakovi Z., Milovi Lj., Svetel I.: Significance and applicability of structural integrity assessment, Structural
integrity and life, Vol.12, No1, 2012, pp. 3-30, UDC 620.172.24, 620.169.1, 539.42.
[19]
Sonsino C. M.: Spectrum loading effects on structural durability of components, Structural integrity and life, Vol.11, No3,
2011, pp. 157-171, UDC 539.43.012.
[20]
Bonjak, S.; Petkovi, Z.; Zrni, N. (2011). Improvements of the Conveying Machinery in Thermal Power Plants Case Studies;
Machine Design, Vol.3(2011) No 1, ISSN 1821-1259; pp. 55-60.

[21]
orevi P., Kirin S., Sedmak A., Dindo E.: Risk analysis in structural integrity, Structural integrity and life, Vol.11, No2, 2011,
pp. 135-138, UDK 65.012.32.
[22]
Kirin S., Jovanovi A., Stanojevi P., Sedmak A., Dindo E.: Risk analysis in structural integrity application to a large
company, Structural integrity and life, Vol.11, No3, 2011, pp. 209-212, UDK 65.012.32.
Acknowledgement
The paper was done within the project TR 35011, "The integrity of the pressure equipment with the simultaneous
action of fatigue load and temperature," founded by the Ministry of Education, Science and Technological
Development of the Republic of Serbia.
118

PROCEEDINGS
STORAGE AND PARAMETERS FRESH GRACE

RECLAMATION POWER PLANTS KOSOVO
ABSTRACT
Naim BAFTIU
Pristine, Kosovo
n.baftiu@hotmail.com
The location of the ash dump outside Dardhishte found in the extreme east
distance 1000m (1km) from the TPP Kosovo A. Ash dump is created from
the ashes released from the coal combustion process for electricity
generation and transported to the landfill.
This site covers an area of 243 hectares and has horizontal and vertical
folding is used for ash and overburden (external folding overburden
Dardhishte). While ash is stored (folded) in this area since the beginning of
the work of TPP Kosovo A since 1962, began folding to overburden in
1987 and ended in the mid 90s. Folding exterior Dardhishte was created by
transported overburden measures from the process of coal mine detection
surface Mirash.
Dog overburden originally planned to cover the ash reclamation purposes,
but is not implemented practically, so that overburden is deposited in the
south west and south-west wing and part of the overburden folding covered
with ashes. The total volume of measures stored in this location is about 50
3
million ash m .
Keywords
Landfill, Fresh Ash, Power Plants, Surface
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING SITUATION IN LANDFILL

Landfill as a whole has the following dimensions;
Extreme north-south length is 2600m
Average width is 1230m east-west
High level of landfill area is 668m east
Circumference 8152 m
The total surface area of the ash dump and folding exterior of overburden is 243 ha.
Currently dry ash free of TPP "Kosovo" Do transported by rubber bands belt with two lines, line "A" and the line "B"
and stored in two folds in the central location of the landfill and dump both sides, east and west .
Operates on the east side of the folded type "ZGOT" - 500 "A" scale bar "A" with 800 mm width and length 375m.
This operates to flatten average with 642 m height and performs work in 648m level.
On the west side of the folded type operates "ZGOT" -500 "B" and tape scale "B" with 800 mm width and length
222m. folding operates to 640m with average height and performs work on 650m level. Both folds operate without
technology designed.
The landfill is divided into four main constituent parts.
Hydraulic dump (northern)
Central Landfill dry ash
Landfill semi hydro (southern part) and
overburden Dog
119

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. The outline of the ash disposal with associated facilities
Hydraulic dump
Northern-located about 1km near TPP "Kosovo" and has a 20 ha area with average height 28m and 590m lower
level (quota field) and high level of quota 618m. The surface of the landfill is technically designed flat surface
coverage by layers of clay but not reclaimed. The slopes of the landfill are stable with a significant slope at 350 and
the average angle formed by two levels stable. In the northern part of the landfill in the first escalation level quota
613m north west there are metal tubes that industrial disposing of "Kosovo coal" and through the canal crosses the
northern landfill waste deposited in artificial reservoir created in the landfill. In conversation with competent
company "Kosovo coal" This action continues until May September 2013. After this period terminated the dumping
of industrial waste and sent to a special tank at the company complex "Kosovo coal". Landfill slopes are re-green by
nature.
This part of the landfill area 20 ha, although the overall contours of the landfill not treated with this project for the
design, and the reclamation process is treated along with the entire landfill. Near the north landfill extreme
distance exceeds 10m Shkabaj River which flows into the river Sitnica, while in the north - east and west are
generated lower levels of these ash disposal.
120

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Ash landfill designed
Central Landfill - dry ash

Hydraulic dump south central part of the landfill is ash created by the dry ash. The dry ash is through folding fold.
Structures of folding technology and the surface is covered with natural plants. Shaping - surface design is not
done.
Mother the central part of the landfill is built cemented tunnel through which water passes Shkabaj channel.
Figure 3. Central part of the ash landfill
121

PROCEEDINGS
This part of the landfill is active and both sides (east and west) realized dry ash disposal to fold. In the centre of the
landfill are two conveyor mounted ash from TPP "Kosovo" A dump share in two parts, east and west by the grace
tuck in the two arms.
Figure 4. Active dump the west central line "B" Photo by 03/04/2013
Eastward to landfill disposal due to high technology and without regular ash disposal measures flow in the east of
the landfill and created huge natural angle. The height of the landfill in this section is 48m.
Figure 5. Active landfill central eastern flank, line "A" Photo 04/03/2013
122

PROCEEDINGS
Semi hydro Landfill

This landfill in the area is 20 hectares of reclaimed plan and the grass surface semi hydro method. But at the same
time the design of the project was agreed between KEK and the company "Bechtel & Enka" that this part of the
landfill in 30 ha area covered with clay from measures of highway which is under construction near landfill.
Overburden Dog: The outline of the ash disposal is carried out in the south west of overburden folding "Dardhisht"
from the mine "Mirash" of the use of coal. This tuck is currently about 82 ha area and ended in the 90's. Configuration of the regular tuck is free, so DPRT by cleaning program and the land re-designed in 2008 a part of the Final
Report of the tuck is plan and prepared for re-cultivation. On the part of the design without the tuck planned excavation and transport of overburden measures amount to 1 million m3 of ash landfill cover.
2. THE SAFETY FACTOR

Taking into account the above criteria, a geotechnical safety, taking into account the economic aspect of the implementation of mining operations without consequences and without interference criteria must be met for the
safety factor are given in table.
Figure 6. fresh angles ash
As seen in this picture phenomenon, where the ash derived measures have taken the form of language. With these
partial slope geometry (1.6) safety factor Fs earned 1.00, which means that such a slope formed by the long-term
stability geometry there, from that in the two profiles, partial slopes formed have slope angle 39.0 .
So to stabilize slopes of the landfill anyway should intervene with heights down slopes or mitigate the slope angle,
especially the initial slopes are partial to scroll and deposited flow measures.
Technical planning of landfill
In the technical planning of landfill foreseen to realize these activities;
Planning for disposal of ash in amounts up to 200 000 tone in July 2013 under the tenure of the EPD approved by competent and INKOS the meeting held on 16.04.2013
Designing the central landfill ash,
Excavation of overburden folding exterior "Dardhishte"
Filling and design of the central landfill ash with clay for re-cultivation
The technical part of the central landfill design work is based on geodetic survey of the landfill and stability parameters of geo ash. Technical execution of the design of the landfill is planned for the device which has DPRT.
For central landfill ash, are working maps of the situation with the state planning designed to separate annexes,
and maps of the excavation and the folding design "Dardhishte".
In this variant is designed geometry of the slope with a height h = 40.0 m general slope angle = 11.0 . Accomplished in such a way that the higher parts of the slopes where measures are stored fresh ash, the ash should bulldozer extended in the direction of the slope collapse by reducing the height and angle of slope tame generals to
= 11.0 .
Technology work in this version is based only on working excavators and has a lower cost than in the first variation
and easily implemented in the field. Schematically shown in profiling.
123

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 7. Presentations of stairs for re-cultivation
Filling the space between the two wings

The full design of the central landfill realized with ash deposited measures.The main purpose of design is to create
conditions landfill lighter refills Technical clay layer in the thickness of 1m and re-cultivation.
Across central ash landfill based on the situation, location - are currently active valley where two conveyor belts of
grace is location more complex design.
The design on this site should be realized in stable parameters after the dump and full of ash disposal on both sides
of the landfill.
To remove the ash was first drafted by implementing measures ash excavated from higher positions through truck.
Design excavator and transport of scales is presented in different profiles. At ground level 644m quota starts digging formation of ash and first degree level 641.2m 2.5m height scale. Formation of successive steps and done it
from top to bottom.Throughout the exploitation rate in the sector formed the eastern 644m, 640m, 635 and 630m
and 643m west side, 635m and 630m.
These levels are functional connection between them, namely the existing transport routes between the ash dump
and location where the excavation of overburden.Front stairs is progress towards north - south and vice versa.
Digging excavator measures is undertaken in parallel with grace in both arms of the front storage with advancement of scale north-south. While transporting the ash measures from the trucks filling up the shelves (profiles between 24-24 'and 26-26') which also made their emptying. Filling the space with grace measures implemented up to
a certain level as shown in the mapping project. When filling in this form does not scale space geometry but certain
measures we drive space remaining after removal of belt conveyors
Defined contour filling with clay from the company "Bechtel & Enka" on the east side does not preclude the possibility of postponing measures to grace this side of the valley filling.In the following chart we are working levels and
grades shown in the ash dump and filling levels.
124

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 8. Eastern and western side of the ash landfill
The quantity of ash for the design of

The basis for calculating the volume is the position of the slopes of the active folding map of the situation presented in the March 22, 2013. Data available for quotes terrain and therefore geological model does not meet the requirements for an accurate calculation of the measures. A more precise calculation of the final position should be
prepared if more detailed information about the design. Technological development will proceed as described in
chapter activities in the east and west (reduction of working, and folding concentrated in the east). Calculation of
grace to design measures was conducted by the method of profiles. We both folding wings that grace is necessary
levelling of ash layers and these measures pushed through excavators. Calculation of measures to be levelled are
presented in the following tables and calculated according to the method profiles.
Final state of the folding design "Dardhishte" in the first

location
Figure 9. The location of the second final state of design
125

PROCEEDINGS
3. RECLAMATION
Figure 10. Situation after reclamation position of the main channel in the centre of landfill
Planting grass
In these areas will be planting grass mixtures. Plants that will be used for re-cultivation have fibrous roots that form
a dense layer, connected to the ground. These layers prevents soil erosion, creates good plant cover and protect
soil from erosion, fast growing and renewed good fit wet climate and irrigation needs, suitable for alkaline soils.
Figure 11. Development of grass dumpsites TPP "Kosovo A" method semi hydro
Designation scientific (Latin)
English
Acer platanoides
sharp sheet
Acer pseudoplatanus
Mountain maple
Alnus incana
white / wild
Fraxinus excelsior
Ash / black
Pinus mugo
Pine Mountain
Pinus nigra
Black Pine
Pinus sylvestris
Hardin
Populus spec.
poplar
Pseudotsuga menziesii
Douglas
Quercus spec.
Oak / Oak
Quercus robur
Bung
Quercus rubra
Red oaks
Robinia pseudoacacia
Robins
Salix alba
White willow
Tilia platyphylla
Broad leaf linden
126

PROCEEDINGS
4. CONCLUSION
Planting is done by hand with the help of container planting. For one hectare planted approximately 50 kg of grass.
Before she became planting grass on the substrate should be placed humus 300 kg / ha, 200 kg and 200 kg of compost fertilizer NPK bait. After that, the planting of grass made through the use of rake.
In order to create a green ribbon around the ash landfill should be made to plant trees. Planting of trees should be
done in the fall because the optimal amount of moisture, the distance between plants should be 2 m. Seedlings
should be two years old and with a length of 30 to 50 cm are most suitable. Planting is done by making holes (holes)
help shallow with the hoe. Seedlings inserted into this hole and compacted down through the right leg. NPK fertilizer will be used in the third year after forestation. Then, each sapling forced by three poles and protected with
mesh fabric. Stakes must have a length of 2:40 m and 1.80 extensions from the ground. They burrow into the
ground by the hammers of wood pickets insistence of high-type "Rammkatze". These trees should be checked regularly. A person must walk along the entire length of the trail once a week. Injuries of wire cloth or fall of pickets
should be repaired immediately. The landfill perimeter is 8152 m and 4076 seedlings have perimeter are necessary.
REFERENCES
[1]
Naim BAFTIU, Final Report For cleaning and land re-Additional design ash dump TPP "Kosovo" A, Institute INKOS Obiliq, Kosovo 2013.
[2]
Thomas Suhr, Stephan Peters, Uwe Schmidt, Joachim ten Thoren Field Research, Technical Planning / Organizing and Determination
of Environmental Impact Assessment and Preparation of Environmental Management Plans Vattenfall Europe Mining AG Kosovo,
2008.
[3]
Naim BAFTIU plans for 2013-2017 medium-terms the mine to Sibovci South Western Kosovo, Obiliq 2012.
127

PROCEEDINGS
STRATEGY AND TACTICS AT DESIGNING

AND EXPLOITATION OF DEEP OPENCAST MINES
ABSTRACT
At designing and development of deep opencast mines it is feasible
the main strategical and tactical tasks to be defined and solved.
The authors solve one of the strategic task in details in this report,
i.e. defining of the boundaries of opencast mine, based on the example for deep Assarel and Elatzite mines, under ensuring the
slope stability. A probability statistical method is used in defining
the boundaries of the mine.
Prof. Stoyan CHRISTOV

dipl. eng. Delcho NIKOLOV
University of Mining and Geology, Sofia, Bulgaria
Assarel Medet JSC, town of Panagyurishte, Bulgaria
1. INTRODUCTION
a)
At designing and development of opencast mines many tasks need to be solved for defining of their parameters and indexes. They are divided by strategical and tactical tasks. Defining of the final mine boundaries refer to the first one, as well as the method of uncovering of the mining field, development of the
mining activities both in plan and profile, productivity of the mine based on the mineral resources and volumes of mining mass. The angle of the work face, bench height, width of the working and unworkable areas, length of the working face and block, etc. are referred to the tactical ones. However, many of the strategical and tactical tasks are interrelated and their separate solving is impossible. Some of these tasks are
presented in our and foreign publications [1, 2]. Because many of the tasks are very much comprehensive
and it is difficult to be presented in one report, we shall get restricted only to defining of the boundaries of
a deep opencast mine from the type of Assarel and Elatzite. The alteration of the mine boundaries in
plan and profile have an influence mainly on the volumes of overburden which has to be mined within the
mine contour. The mine efficiency depends to a great extend on the correct solving of this task. By increasing the depth of the opencast mine the volumes of overburden are increased quickly compared to
the volumes of mineral. The costs for uncovering activities in the contemporary mines represent no less
than half of the cost price of the mineral. That is why, the main provision for ensuring of optimum boundaries and operational safety is to build a stable construction of the unworkable faces.
b) Defining the boundaries of opencast mines
Due to the probable character of the output data at designing of an opencast mine, there is some risk in taking of
the final decision for mine boundaries. A method for defining of the mine boundaries is proposed in the present
report based on probability - statistical solutions.
One of the important strategical problems in designing and construction of opencast mines is the determination of
their boundaries in plan and profile. The efficient work of the mines depends to a great extend on the correct solving of this problem. As the initial design information of an opencast mine has a probability character, there is a
certain risk in taking of the final decision about its boundaries. When defining the mine boundaries and the reliability estimation of the taken decision it is necessary probability methods to be applied. The present paper suggests a
method for defining the mine boundaries on the basis of probability statistical solutions (Christov, 1994).
The probability character of the values of the strength parameters of rocks brings to uncertainty in determining
the final situation of the slope. The permissible interval of its change depends on the changing scope of the relative
error of the calculated strength rock characteristics. It will bring to changing of the mine boundaries - from 1 to 2
at depth H (Figure 1). In our case 1 changes from 30 to 50, while the depth is H=150 m.
128

PROCEEDINGS
Figure1. Dependence of the boundaries of an opencast mine exploiting steeplyinclined deposits considering the probability character of the angle of the unworkable slope
For a selected direction for development of the mining works and angle of the working slope max = 15 the stage
volumes of the overburden and the mineral have been consequently defined (Figure 1). On the basis of these data
the increasing values of overburden and mineral P have been calculated from the exploitation H and the cumulative graphs V = f (P), P = f (H) and V = f (H).
On the basis of the method of I.A. Arsenov (Arsenov, 19/4,) from the cumulative schedule the values of the average
overburden ratio ncp, the initial overburden ratio n0, the most unfavorable exploitation overburden ratio ni, the irregularity coefficient of the overburden removal operation.
(1)
and the portion of the overburden during the construction period

(2)
have been defined. The values of these parameters at slope angle of the unworkable slope 30, 40 and 50 are
shown in Table 1.
From the cumula schedules in Figure 2 it can be seen that the increase of the production with P and the dependence of mining works with h correspond to a respective certain increase of the overburden volumes. For example,
at H = 150m, P = 1.0 million m3, h = 20 m and angles of the unworkable slope 30, 40 and 50 these increases are
respectively V30 = 7.8 million m3, V40 = 4.40 million m3 and V50 = 2.73 million m3. The Figure 2 shows the curves V = f
(H) for = 30 at an average overburden ratio. From this diagram the volumes of overburden which are additionally
mined or reserved in separate stages can be defined.
The studies carried out by the author and other specialists show that the strength rock parameters have a distribution close to the normal one. Therefore, we can use the low rate of normal distribution of error in the strength rock
parameters, while the error in the calculation of the average overburden ratio will be proportional to the error of
calculation of the slope stability.
At a respective possible error of the calculated strength rock parameters =0.36 the root-mean square =0.12 and
a possible deviation E = 0.674 =0.08 the degree of risk in various slope angles can be defined (Christov, 1994;
Christov, 1989).
129

PROCEEDINGS
tg0=tgm(1-3)=0.576
30
tg1=tgm(1-2)=0.680
3410
2.3
tg2=tgm(l-) =0.790
3810
15.9
tg3=tgm(1-E) =0.827
3950
25.01
tgm=tg0 =0.827
42
50.01-3e
tg4=tgm(1+E) =0.970
44
75.00
where m is the mathematical expectation of the slope angle.

Table 1. Parameters of the mine with slope height 150 and 100 m and various angles of the unworkable slope
Angle of the slope
Height of the slope, m

H = 150 m
1
ncp
3
m /m
m /m
n1
3
m /m
m /m
H = 100 m
ncpa
3
m /m
ncp
3
m /m
n1
3
m /m
m /m
1
3
m /m
ncpa
m /m3
30
7.55
0.055
13.20
1.85
2.80
5.63
0.125
7.83
1.58
3.33
40
5.32
0.081
7.20
1.47
3.52
3.90
0.179
4.33
1.53
3.89
50
3.85
0.112
2.34
1.30
5.17
2.86
0.245
2.67
1.24
4.25
The diagrams of the relationship between the average overburden ratio and degree of risk created by the angle
increase of the unworkable slope are given on Figure 3.a. The same figure shows the production change of the mine
at various slope angles.
Defining the boundaries of the opencast mine is done by the method of the admissible average overburden ratio
(Arsenov, 1970)
(3)
Figure 2. Graph schedule of the regime of mining activities in a mine at H = 150 m

1 - before making the overburden ratio average,
2 - after making the overburden ratio average
where n b is the boundary overburden ratio (in
3
3
our case nb is accepted 5m /m ).
130

PROCEEDINGS
In Table 1 the obtained results in the calculation of ncpd are given. The crossing point in Figure 3.a. satisfies the
equation ncp = ncpd..The slope angle is =44, the production of mining mass AMMg = 7.0 million m3, while the risk degree is R=75%, which is practically unacceptable for normal work in the mine. Similar conclusions were made at
H=100 m. The obtained results are given in Table 1, Figure 3. and Figure 4.
At H=100 m the condition ncp = ncpd is fulfilled for point B1 (Figure 3.). In this case the mine is formed under the
slope angle of the unworkable slope =40 AMMg = 6.5 million m3 and risk R=25%.
Thus, at H= 125 m and =42 the risk degree is R=50%. (Figure 5).
The reverse problem can also be solved at a given risk degree to define the boundary depth of the opencast mine.
Considering the possible negative and positive error when defining the strength rock parameters, the boundaries of
the opencast mine in designing should be calculated at two values of its depth - the first one with a risk bellow 50%,
i.e. H<125 m and the second one with R>50 %, H>125 m. At the final decision on the boundaries of the opencast
mine it is necessary to have in mind as well the financial factors with the help of the function of efficiency (Christov, 1989).
The suggested method allows to use the probability method for defining the boundaries of the opencast mine and
calculating the risk degree estimating the angle of the unworkable slope. The method allows to obtain more real
optimal boundaries of the mine. It can be applied in designing and exploiting of steep running depositions of the
type "Medet", "Elatzite", "Asarel", "Burdze", etc.
Figure 3. Diagrams of the

relationships between the
average overburden ratio
ncp, the addmissible overburden ratio ncpd, the
production power of the
g
mine AMM and the pit
slope angle considering
the risk degree R. a) at
mine depth H=100 m; b) at
mine depth H=100 m
Figure 4. Graph schedule

of mining works in an
opencast mine at H = 100
m
Figure 5. Defining the limit
depth of an opencast mine
at a definite risk degree
131

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 6. Integral curves V = f (p) for values of the stability factor = 1,0; = 1,2; = 1,2 for the conditions in Trayanovo-Sever Mine
2. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

The analysis of the obtained results from determination of the probable mine boundaries show that there are big
reserves for the effective utilization of the mining mass at rational binding of the mine boundaries, slope stability
factor and development of the mining activities. That is why we recommend for each mine contour the integral
curves V = f (P), VP = f (T) and So = f (To) to be used (where, V volumes of overburden, P volumes of mineral, T
time, So resistance forces, To forces of rock sliding). The common use of these curves (Fig.6) give the possibility
for a complete analysis and assessment of the effective development of mining activities over the whole period of
the mine life. The problem at selection of rational boundaries for management of the mining activities development is getting complicated at simultaneous development of deposits of group of mines (for example mines
Buchim, Vrashtnik, Bunardjik in Republic of Macedonia). It is like this because each mining field is characterized by different geological conditions, power of lithological variety, different volumes of mining mass, quality of
mineral, relief configuration, direction of the mining activities development and transport activities.
In addition, the obligatory securing of the slope with a normative stability factor has a significant impact on the
volumes of overburden, which have to be mined.
Mining of irregular volumes of overburden over the time has a significant impact on the organization of operations
in the mine, the main technical-economical parameters are getting worse, and in some cases they are a prerequisite for violation of the design parameters. On the other hand, the irregular mining of overburden in the adjacent
mines might be effectively used if the slope stability and their calendar volume over the time and space are simultaneously considered.
Therefore, the management of the slope stability, designing of the regime and calendar plan of the mining activities, productivity and boundaries of group of mines is feasible to be performed in close interaction, i.e. a complex
assessment is required for their operation.
REFERENCES
[1]
Arseniev, A.I. 1970. Defining the productivity and the boundaries of the opencast mines, M.Nedra
[2]
Christov, S.G. 1994, Relationship between the development of mining works and the slope stability of the opencast mines. S.Christov
[3]
Christov, S.G. 1989, Technological problems in the development of mining works in opencast mines. Abstract of the D.Sc. Disertatation S.Christov
132

PROCEEDINGS
MINING METHOD SELECTION FOR DEEPER PARTS

OF SVINJA REKA ORE DEPOSIT - SASA MINE
ABSTRACT
1
Stojance MIJALKOVSKI
Zoran DESPODOV1
Dejan MIRAKOVSKI1
Marija HADZI-NIKOLOVA1
Nikolinka DONEVA1
Borce GOCEVSKI2
1
Faculty of Natural and Technical Sciences,

University Goce Delcev Stip, Republic of Macedonia
2
SASA Mine, Makedonska Kamenica, Republic of Macedonia
The paper presents a scientific approach in mining

method selection for deeper parts of Svinja Reka ore
deposit. Rational mining method selection include in
depth analysis of the all important montan-geologycal
parameters of ore deposit, as much as technical and
economical indicators. As a decision support tool for
optimal method selection, a multi-criteria evaluation
techniques are used.
Keywords
Mining Method, Rational Choice, Multi-Criteria Decision
1. INTRODUCTION
Mining method selection for underground mine presents essential problem, especially considering that mining
method should to provide safe and healthy working conditions. Also, should constantly bearing in mind the fact
that the excavation costs occupy the largest part of the total mine operating costs, and therefore the adequate
mining method selection is essential for positive financial effects of mine working.
The purpose of this paper is contribute to establishing the methodology for preliminary method selection for deeper parts of "Svinja Reka" ore deposit in the underground metalic
mine "Sasa" in M. Kamenica, including depth analysis of more
mining-geological, technical and
economic factors.
2. MINING METHOD SELECTION FOR DEEPER PARTS

OF "SVINJA REKA" ORE
DEPOSIT
The procedure for mining method
selection can be divided into two
parts:
Rational mining method
selection
Optimal mining method
selection.
Basic concept of the proposed
methodology for optimal mining
method selection of Svinja Reka
ore deposit is shown on flowchart
below:
133

PROCEEDINGS
Rational mining method selection

First we perform rational choice or mining methods selection according to geological factors that influence on the
mining method selection. This includes: the geometry and the prevalence of ore bodies (shape of mineral bodies,
the power of mineral bodies, the overlap angle of ore bodies, overlap depth of ore bodies, the prevalence of ore
bodies) and physical-mechanical characteristics of the ore and adjacent rocks (strength of the rock mass, the distance between the cracks, the number of cracks / m ', RQD and RMR index, the strength of the shear cracks).
There are several procedures for mining methods selection by geological factors. The most important are:
Boshkov`s and Wright`s procedure (1973);
Laubscher`s procedure (1981 1990);
Hartman`s procedure (1987);
Morrison`s procedure (1976);
Nicholas`s procedure (1981);
UBC procedure (1995).
For rational mining method selection commonly used UBC procedure.
This procedure is a modified version of the Nicholas`s approach and was
proposed by the University of British Columbia - Canada. Mining methods
selection by UBC procedure (Miller - Tait L., Pakalnis R. and Poulin R., 1995
g.) presents a numerically ranking for mining method selection or group of
mining methods, which are suitable for excavation of given ore deposit.
Based on the mentioned input parameters for the ore body mining methods selection by UBC procedure was performed. After the calculation according to this methodology following sequence of mining methods was
obtained:
ble 1. Ranking mining methods by UBC
MINING METHOD
Sublevel Caving Mining Method
Sublevel Stoping Mining Method
Shrinkage Stoping Mining Method
Cut and fill stoping Mining Method
Room and Pillar Mining Method
Block Caving Mining Method
Top slicing mining Method
Square Set Stoping Mining Method
For further mining methods selection the first four methods will be used.
Optimal method selection using a multi-criteria evaluation techniques
After rational mining methods selection and separation the most acceptable mining methods according to geological factors (top four highest ranked mining methods), follows optimal choice, ie selecting the separated mining
methods according to technical-economic and organizational factors that influence when choosing mining method. This includes: the value of excavated ore, occupational safety and health conditions, the cost of one ton ore,
utilizing of the excavated ore, coefficient of depletion of ore substance,
coefficient of preparation works, effect of excavation, degradation of ble 2.
terrain and other environmental impacts.
No.
Alternative Mark
For optimal mining methods selection by technical-economic and organi1
Sublevel Caving Method
1
zational factors are used multi-criteria optimization methods. In this pa2
Sublevel Stoping Method
2
per PROMETHEE, AHP and AHP-PROMETHEE integrated methodology are
3 Shrinkage Stoping Method
3
developed. Three multi-criteria optimization methods to compare outcomes were used and so will choose the optimal mining method.
4 Cut and fill stoping Method
4
Multi-criteria model consists of four alternatives,
ble 3.
including (Table 2).
No
Criteria Mark
After identifying the problem, and its detailed
analysis, were selected and identified eight cri1
Value of excavated ore
1
teria that have the greatest impact on solving
2
Occupational safety and health conditions
2
the model given in Table 3.
3
Coefficient of preparation works
3
Each of these criteria has impact on alternative
4
Utilizing of the excavated ore
4
solutions. To define the impact of criteria func5
Coefficient of depletion of ore substance
5
tion to the alternative solutions :
6
Cost
of
one
ton
ore
(1
t)
6
analysis of technical and economic pa7
Effect of excavation
7
rameters and other technical information;
8 Degradation of terrain and other environmental impacts
8
consultations and surveys of experts in

the field of underground mining;
Calculation of average values on the impacts obtained from the above procedures were made.
134

PROCEEDINGS
Based on the theory and equations of PROMETHEE method as well as on our assessment, were selected certain
types of generalized criteria.
After analysis for evaluation of individual criteria for each alternative solution, this multi-criteria model was obtained (table 4):
Table 4. Input model
Alternatives
Criteria features
Criteria
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
Aim
max.
max.
min.
max.
min.
min.
max.
min.
A1
94,3
2,56
75
22
30
A2
81,6
23,9
80
18
22
A3
88,2
17,55
85
12
10
A4
93,3
8,65
94
15
Impacts
0,19
0,12
0,115
0,14
0,09
0,185
0,0975
0,0625
Type
III
IV
III
II
IV
IV
III
IV
4,3
6,09
Table 5 compares the results obtained with multi-criteria optimization ie, results obtained by applying the PROMETHEE II, AHP and AHP-PROMETHEE integrated methodology.
The results from the PROMETHEE II, AHP and AHPPROMETHEE integrated method application suggest
Table 5. Different multi-criteria ranking methods
that the solution is uniquely and identical.
Alternatives
PROMETHEE II
AHP
AHP- PROMETHEE
So, the final ranking of alternatives is: 1 4 3 2.

From the above table can be concluded that the most
acceptable alternative is A * = A1, because it has the
highest value according three methods. Hence it follows
that the most acceptable alternative mining method is
Sublevel Caving Method.
3. CONCLUSION
Mining method selection presents the biggest problem for each designer during design a new underground mine or
developing an existing one. When making the decision about which mining method will apply should take into account many factors that influence on the mining method selection. Selected mining method will be more suited to
specific mining and geological conditions if a number of relevant factors are included.
Very important indicators for exploitation of a ore deposit depends of the selected mining method, such as: working effect, costs of mining, losses and depletion of ore and finally financial effects which are exercised thereby.
Providing safety working conditions, utilization of ore deposit and depletion of ore can also be among the influential factors on the mining method selection, which also have a significant impact on the financial effects that are
achieved with the use of mining method to a given ore deposit.
Numerous studies and researches indicate that the underground mining method selection depends of a number of
relevant factors, that can be grouped into three basic groups: geological factors, technical and economic factors
and organizational factors.
The problem of underground mining method selection, because of its importance was studied by many authors. As
a common stage of the proceedings which the individual authors was proposed, in order to select the underground
mining method can be distinguished two stages: a rational mining method selection and optimal mining method
selection.
First a rational mining method selection was performed with selection a group of methods suitable for the application, and then optimal mining method selection was performed based on the technical-economic and organizational factors, in addition multi-criteria optimization can be used.
135

PROCEEDINGS
In the begining a rational mining method selection was performed with separation a group of methods suitable for
the application, and then optimal mining method selection was performed based on the technical-economic and
organizational factors, in addition multi-criteria optimization can be used.
REFERENCES
[1]
.: ( ), - , , 2000;
[2]
.:
, (), , ,
2013;
[3]
.: , ,
9, , , 2008;
[4]
., ., .: , V, 5
, , , , 2011;
[5]
.:
, (), ,
, 2009;
[6]
.: , (), ,
, , 2008;
[7]
.: , (), ,
, , 2009;
[8]
Miller-Tait L., Pakalnis R., Poulin R., University of British Columbia, Vancouver, B. C., Canada: UBC mining method selection, Mine
Planning and Equipment Selection 1995, Singhal et al. (eds) 1995 Balkema, Rotterdam, 1995;
[9]
., .: ( ), , , 1997;
nd
[10] Howard L. Hartman: SME Mining Engineering Handbook, 2 Edition, Volume 2, Society for Mining, Metallyrgy and Exploration;
[11] Clayton Cameron, Input and Knowledge from: Dr. Pakalnis Rimas, Dr. Meech John: The mining method selection (MMS) system, An Expert System for the Selection of a Mining Method, Based on: The UBC Mine Method Selection Algorithm, Version 5.13 (Run-time),
Copyright 1986-1993 Comdale Technologies Inc., 2001
136

PROCEEDINGS
THERMOVISION MONITORING
OF THE PRODUCTION PROCESS IN FIRE PREVENTION
ABSTRACT
Snezana VUKOVIC1
Nenad VUSOVIC2
Dejan PETROVIC3
Andja SPASIC4
Radoje PANTOVIC5
RB Kolubara, L1RB Kolubara, Lazarevac, Serbia, snezana.vukovic@rbkolubara.rs

2
University of Belgrade, Technical
Faculty in Bor, Serbia, nvusovic@tf.bor.ac.rs
3
Faculty in Bor, Serbia, dpetrovic@tf.bor.ac.rs
4
RB Kolubara, L1RB Kolubara, Lazarevac, Serbia,
andja.spasic@rbkolubara.rs
5
Faculty in Bor, Serbia, pan@tf.bor.ac.rs
Larger mining systems require the engagement of a significant amount of

material resources as well as human engagement for element, device and
equipment maintenance.
The cycle maintenance that goes on 24 hours a day, 365 days a year is of
special importance; it is a hard and expensive task, and the continuity of
electrical energy supplies depends on this tasks efficient solution.
This paper shows thermovision as an efficient means of tracking the state of
a production system, whose shortcomings, functional errors and problems
cause the system to come to a stop, or in some cases accidents related to
property damaging or geoperdising peoples safety and health.
The monitoring system in technical system diagnosis can be fully accomplished by the application of software-enabled thermovision cameras of the
newer generation; the monitoring system which would contribute to timely
spotting of a systems weak link, without interrupting the production process at any cost.
The idea is to extend the scale of preventive maintenance by recording and
monitoring the entire production process with a thermovision camera, with a
special attention to distinct places for which it has been determined that
they are potentially prone to catching fire, all in order to react in a timely
manner when maintaing a technical system and dealing with fire prevention.
Keywords
Fire, Fire Prevention, Thermography
1. INTRODUCTION
The object of the research is monitoring, recording and processing of the data collecting using the most up-to-date
methods of recording with thermovision cameras, with the goal of fire prevention and it is related to all the indoor
and outdoor premises of the PDRB Kolubara. The application of thermovision in technical diagnostics has been
present over the past decades, but this equipment has been used for periodical preventive scans of indoor
premises, electric facilities of both high and low voltage. These periodical scans have shown to be completely
justified regarding the number of possible sources of fire.
PDRB Kolubara possesses the equipment and tools that use high voltage sources, which are independently
monitored and maintained. The criteria for regular, daily, weekly and periodical maintenance of the electric power
system and equipment, which includes thermovision inspection are determined by standards and rule books. It is
necessary to expand these inspections to all points of high risk of fire, in order to achieve higher security and fewer
visual control visit.
2. RESEARCH METHODS
Biblographic sources of scientific knowledge are the basis of these logical considerations, that could bring a quality
conclusion on the application of thermovision when diagnosing failure of technical systems, as well as its use when
preventing fire, reducing the risk to zero. Research relies party, especially the part with thermography and its use,
137

PROCEEDINGS
on the biblographic sources of preventive machine, tools and equipment maintenance, as well as the coal digging
equipment, in addition to the literature about the application of devices for monitoring and thermography.
The other source of information consists of the measuring done in order to keep the accuracy of electric power
system facilities, tools and equipment. The knowledge and awareness of constructive characteristics and the
principle of functioning of track transporters, monitoring and remote control of this transmission, as the
potentially most dangerous part of the coal transportation systems, were used during the course of the research.
The relevant documentation on fire history was used, which is (and must) be in RB Kolubara according to the law
and rule books. This consists of date about the causes, sources, time and place of all beginning, medium and big
fires. Based on this experience, it can be claimed that a significant number of fires are caused by errors,
malfunctions and mis-synchronization of electrical and machine installations and the exploitation equipment.
Beside these analyses, this paper uses the data collected from yearly reports of the fire prevention department of
Kolubara. Statistic method results has shown a significant drop in the impact of the malfunction of electric power
systems on the possiblity of fire, regarding the applied diagnostic using the periodic thermovision monitoring.
The dangerous stops that should be constanly monitored and examined were determined, from the aspect of fire
prevention. The use of manufacturer's data on technical and working characteristics of infrared and thermovision
cameras have been extensively used.
3. EXPECTED SCIENTIFIC CONTRIBUTION

The connection of scientific methods and numeric models is a synthesis of modern and traditional approach to the
problem of fire prediction, as a significant factor of risk in surface coal mining and as a modern approach of
proactive maintenance of machine, electric and mining tools and equipment. The suggested model defines the
methodology of setting and solving the problem of implementation of the modern monitoring system in fire
protection, the importance of which lies in both prevention and post-accidental forensic analysis, which has the
goal to keep the production system running without accidents and with minimal human/material resources.
Long-term monitoring of fire causes and sources and analysis with available methods make us notice that this
tradition of thermovision inspection has brought a significant reduction in fires caused by electric power
installations. It was also concluded that a significant cause of fire was the rolling mechanism of the track
transporter.
From an engineering point of view, the problem of thermovision monitoring can be reduces to answering the
following questions:
What scale of preventive measures should be taken constant monitoring or periodic examinations, when
servicing equipment?
Should the conditions for permanent data collection should be set, in order to prevent any damaging event
from hapenning?
How to determine the border line at which the next activity is to be taken, i.e. to constitute an intevention
plan
Is there an economic benefit of the suggested activities?
These questions cannot be answered completely accurately at the moment, at least not without seriously
conducted research in real time, with observatuib and recording temperature characteristics of exploitation tools
and equipment.
4. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF COAL PRODUCTION SYSTEM

RB Kolubara's main activity are lignite exploitation, mining equipment maintenance, coal and mullock transport, as
well as other jobs that are connected directly to the company's primary activity. The lignate excavation has lasted
for about half a century and the yearly production is currently at 30 million tons a years. At the same time, about
70 million tons of solid mullock has to be dug out, in order to exploit a layer of coal.
The coal is exploited in for pits, called Pit C, Pit D, Tamnava-west pit and Veliki Crljeni. These four digs make a
production and technological whole. Strip and coal production, depending on conditions are done with rotary
dredges/baggers, discontinued mechanization or combined. Mullock systems consist out of three functional
segments BLD (bagger-rolling transportation lane-disposer), and contain excavation machines, baggers, transport
tools transportaters with a rolling lane and disposal devices-machines disposal baggers. Mullock is then
138

PROCEEDINGS
transported to the selected place. The coal systems send the coal from the excavation point to the load/unloading
spot with treadmill transporters.
Coal production systems contain a bagger and a transporter. Coal is transported for further processing (coal
procession dry-wet separation) or preparation (The coal preparation crumbling facility) where coal is crumbled
and crushed for the power plant or landfills. The biggest amounts of the excavated lignite are transported by rail to
power plants Kolubara A in Veliki Crljeni and Nikola Tesla in Obrenovac and Morava in Svilajnac, while another
part is delivered to costumers as retail.
Transportation of mullock and coal, depending whether the system is BLD (bagger-transportation lane-disposer),
BLC (bagger-transportation lane-crushing facility) or BLL (bagger-transportation lane-loading/unloading spot), is
performed with a system of treadmill transporters with remote control, which can send this material to a distance
of a couple kilometers. The common characteristic of all the systems mentioned is the need for continuity. [2].
5. THERMOVISION MONITORING SYSTEM

Thermovision devices have been introduced because of the need to increase efficiency when monitoring in the
night and in the conditions of reduced daylight visibility or bad weather conditions.
These systems work as they detect the reflected source radiation of low intensity. The radiation of the ground in
the IR spectre depends on the temperature of objects and the background, type and physical consistency of objects
and the surroundings, as well as the sun radiation. IR sensors that work on the principle of line scanning usually
have 2 ranges: (3-5)um (lower) and (8-14)um (higher). Using these two ranges is not accidental at all these are so
called atmosphere windows in which the permeability is greater for IR rays.
Thermovision recording represents a non-contact method which can registed emitted heat or IR ray in one second
bit. Thermovision photos show realistically the state of emitted heat, but only after they have been processed can
there be reliable conclusions. Every thermogram is a picture of its own, because it owns its own color pallette. Two
thermograms cannot be color compared, even when it is about the same object. Therefore, every thermogram has
to have a scale of colors, which connects colors and temperatures.
To precisely determine temperatures, thermovision camera makes a thermovision diagram which shows the
changes of temperature on objects. The more equally colored the object is, the more equal the heat emission (and
vice versa). Lighter colors (yellow, red) display heat and dark and cold colors like (blue and purple) show colder
places.
When they expand and go through the atmosphere, the electromagnetic waves react selectively. The reception
optics has a role in collecting the electromagnetic energy and in sending it to the detector.
The heat transmission through electromagnetic waves is called radiation. The heat transmitted through radiation
from the object to the camera lense is recorded on the thermogram. [3]
The amount of this heat energy E depends on the object temperature T and emissiveness its surface, is defined by
Stefan-Bolzmann law E=T4 in which sigma is Stefan-Bolzmann constant: 5.67x10-8W/m2K4, epsilon-the
emissiveness coefficient, the ability of a body to emit, which depends on the type of the material and the state of
the surface, dirtiness and oxidization. Based on this equation, we can calculate the temperature of the object that
we recorded. The exit radiation of the object is the radiation that is given off the object's surface which consists
out of two components: emitted, which is the heat of the very object E and the reflected Er, which comes from
the heat of surrounding objects, where E=, E+Er,, where the coefficient represents reflexivity and + =1.
The exit radiation should be seen in the photo, and the reflected radiation is useless.
Equipment
The photo made with a thermovision system represents objects and scenes in which the picture contrast is a result
of radiation and emissiveness of the body at different temperatures of the object and background. The very process
of making the thermal picture is different from the way of forming picture in the visible part of the spectre.
Thermal picture has more information than the standard picture in the visible part of the spectre, which was taken
with the process of radiation reflection out of the very objects.
All the existing thermovision sensors can be divided into two basic group based on their working principles [4]:
Thermovision systems with line scanning (IRLS)
Thermovision systems with detectors in focus plane (FPA)
The basic part of the equipment is the infrared camera that consists of the following:
139

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Infrared camera scheme

0-Object that emits radiation
1-Lens collects radiation
2-Filter permeates radiation of a specific wave length
3-Detector-reads radiation and turns it into an electronic form
4-Monitor electronic set that shows thermogram as a picture
Cameras are now available in different forms for different purposes. There are a variety of different cameras, which
can be remotely controlled and run software to function as fire alarm systems. Network Sxx thermal imager, which
can be found by different manufacturers, with a rather low price, is best suited for the monitoring of automated
processes: conveyors, crushers, hoppers, load/unload spots, coal deposits. This camera comes with software for
remote control. Sxx camera is compact, durable and lightweight, designed to work in harsh conditions of dust (IP67
protection system) and its small size allows accommodation in a confined space. [5]
Ethernet and video interfaces allow remote-controlled monitoring and transfer images and capture infrared images
in real time using a computer. Once set with different parameters using the software for remote control, the
camera can be disconnected from the computer and act as a stand-alone unit for monitoring. It can display thermal
and visual image at request, it is possible to program the camera to monitor independently, wirelessly send an
alarm signal to the network. In order to achieve this function it is necessary to adjust the measurement parameters,
set the alarm, record data of thermal and visual images (simultaneous recording only immutable image). The stored
data can be displayed as a thermal / visual recording, or used for temperature analysis. These cameras can also be
used in stand more units, a maximum of 15, with a network connection. Remote software allows users to remotely
control the camera via Ethernet, and the display, recording and storage of data recording and playback on your
computer. This software allows the user to setup and measure parameters (Level / Sense) and alarm parameters.
Once the parameters are set, the camera can raskaiti the computer to run as an independent monitoring unit. The
data saved in the software can be displayed as a thermal / visual or used in the temperature analysis. [6]
Another way of collecting data is omnidirectional method, which involves the use of infrared cameras with high
resolution and high-quality features placed on a stand, with the possibility of monitoring large areas with large
distances, moving in a wide angle, which could be used for monitoring coal depots, with sufficient height or
reclaimed land area covered by coniferous forests. [7]
The measurement results
The EPS and Kolubara, since the seventies, there is a tradition of use of thermography in the field of preventive
maintenance of power plants. All power facilities in operation are visited twice a year, and the results are sent to
the responsible persons unit, with the recommendation of the period in which the deficiency must be remedied. If
there is a discrepancy, defect or error is sent to the image and the thermal part of the plant with clear guidelines
for further treatment. The report presents technical information about the tested object, place, date and time, test
methods, equipment used and its characteristics, as well as the ambient test conditions, air temperature, load level
and the emissivity of the material. [8]
3 ,
.
Figure 2 .Examples of measurements from workshops in Kolubara
140

PROCEEDINGS
Comment 1: Elevated temperature at RM 002 feeder terminals in the switch cabinet machine shop. Defect to be
rectified within 30 days.
This is an example where the defect where the results are received with the comparison of the thermal images. If
the other jacks that are at the facility in equivalent conditions do not show elevated temperature, that means that
there is a bad, damaged contact. Temperature conductive parts should be equal (about 25 C) at all inlet ports and
an increase in temperature to (35 40) shows the fault of current connection component, which increases
operating temperature transmitted to the cable thus increasing the risk of failure. Based on empirical parameters,
it is estimated that the observed element is partially damaged, but that does not jeopardize the safety of the
installation and it will not come to a sudden strain because it is a low danger and that is why the deadline for
fixing is 30 days.
Comment 2: Elevated temperatures in the main bulldoser closet fusebox, the fuse of 500A, marked in Fig. Urgent
repair the defect.
This is an example of the perceived defect that shows the three phase fuse 500A, of which only one is over-heated
up to the temperature of 81.849 C. Temperatures over 50 C require an immediate response and intervention,
except for the elements, which normally operate at that heat. If the fuse should not be allowed such a rise in
temperature, it must be checked and phase strain, as well, in order to avoid the same defect.
Using thermography altered states of devices and equipment in service can be determined, without invasive effects
in any of the equipment, without disturbing the production process, providing the optic visibitily of the observed
elements. [9 The temperature limit can be set with the monidoring of the element, depending on the kind, type,
function, and strategic importance of the observed part of the device or equipment. In accordance with certain
limits, cooling devices, alarm systems, or devices for remote signaling can be set, a plan of intervention for each
monitored device can be made separately or comprehensively. [10]
In the cases of the illustrated measurement, thermal imaging monitoring is not only a diagnostic tool, but there
was a reaction to the irregularity, which resulted in reduced operating temperatures element and eliminating the
cause of the fire.
Interpretation of results
Based on the results these hypotheses can be accepted:
Physical observation of the belt conveyor route a change in temperature would be noticed, before the temperature reaches a critical point of rubber ignition.
Physical monitoring other working parts of excavator and power stations can promptly detect a dangerous
place.
Thermal imaging device status and equipment in the course of their normal work activities without interrupting the production cycle can be improved by the process of mechanical and electrical maintenance, by
removing perceived faults and mistakes during maintenance.
Periodic monitoring of coal space in the landfill, under conditions that might be on the verge of problematic, looking from the standpoint of fire protection, the critical point of higher temperatures can be detected
before ignition occurs.
Monitoring reclaimed surface can be enhanced by monitoring and preventing forest fires. In the built watchtowers, increasing supervision in the summer by using thermal vision, rather than just the visual camera
should be done
The use of thermography in industrial maintenance to reduce direct maintenance costs, reduce losses due
to downtime and outages in the production cycle, which enables the development of effective preventive
maintenance plan.
6. CONCLUSION
Tracking changes temperature thermal imaging camera on the equipment and facilities, as a result of the
appearance of stress due to difficult working conditions or the occurrence of any defect, is important in the
prevention of fires, given that a good deal of prevention activities in the area are based on visual inspection of
devices and equipment. Regular visual inspection is no way to assess the state of the devices, so this type of control
is essential. Advantages of thermal imaging observations are:
141

PROCEEDINGS
The temperature is recorded as the temperature distribution in real time, which is displayed as a visual information, which allows comparison of certain points and areas, contributing to seeing the big picture
The possibility of measuring the temperature of a moving object and those with complex geometric shapes,
or objects that are physically inaccessible for security reasons or for other reasons
The possibility of temperature measurement of microscopic objects without affecting the course and outcome measurement
Ability to measure the temperature of objects whose temperature is changing drastically or phenomena
that occur at short intervals.
The basic strategy in the application of infrared technology is based on the technique of comparative
thermography, a simple comparison of similar components or samples, which are under similar conditions.
A variation of comparative thermography technique is thermal mapping. Temperature distribution on the surface
to the observed sample is compared with the corresponding pre-captured images, which is the thermal signature of
the sample. Many thermographic recording techniques are based on the difference in conductivity materials, heat
capacity and diffusivity. The marked differences in different materials or the same material differences in the relief
surface, cracks or other discontinuities become apparent in the thermal image.
REFERENCES
[1]
Blagojevic M, Petkovic D.: Detecting fire in early stage-a new approach, Faculty of Occupational Safety, Nis, UDC 614.842.4
[2]
Jefteni B., Ristic L., Babic M., And others.: Realization of belt conveyor system with remote control, UDK / UDC 621.867.2-52,
2010th
[3]
Mandic G.: Basic principles of infrared thermography, UDK / UDC 620.179.13 2006
[4]
Blagojevic V., Stojiljkovic M., Jankovic M.: Possibility of infrared thermography in industrial systems, Mechanical Engineering,
Ni, project EE-232016
[5]
Examples of application of thermal imagers, NEC-Avio, 2012
[6]
Petrovic D., Damnjanovi Z., And others.: Application of modern computing devices and tools to reduce accidents in the
mining systems through mining No.2, 2010
[7]
Topisirovi D., Nikolovski D., Stevic Z.: Application of new technology in the protection of natural resources, Infotech Jahorina
V.10-2011
[8]
ikari Lj.: Application of thermography in the diagnosis of thermal condition of power transformers, Elektr.institut "Nikola
Tesla", UDC 621.311.1:722.96
[9]
Stojanovi, ., Toplievi M., Ristic S.: Application of thermography in the diagnosis of thermal condition of mechanical
systems, technical diagnostics No.4, 2011,
[10]
Senani M., ikari Lj., Simic N.: Thermographic surveys in power plants and electric power industry of Serbia Elektr.institut
"Nikola Tesla", UDC 621.311.1:722.96
142

PROCEEDINGS
ANALYSIS OF UP-TO-DATE RESEARCH OF GOLD-BEARING

ALLUVIUM DEPOSITS FROM THE RIVER PEK-EAST SERBIA
ABSTRACT
Vladan KASIC1
Zivko SEKULIC1
Slavica MIHAJLOVIC1
Vladimir JOVANOVIC1
Radule TOSOVIC2
1
Institute for Technology of Nuclear and Other Mineral Raw Materials,

86 Franshet d Esperey St., 11000 Belgrade, Serbia, v.kasic@itnms.ac.rs
1
86 Franshet d Esperey St., 11000 Belgrade, Serbia, z.sekulic@itnms.ac.rs
1
86 Franshet d Esperey St., 11000 Belgrade, Serbia, s.mihajlovic @itnms.ac.rs
1
86 Franshet d Esperey St., 11000 Belgrade, Serbia, v.jovanovic@itnms.ac.rs
2
Faculty of Mining and Geology - University of Belgrade, 7 uina St.,
11000 Belgrade, Serbia, rtosovic@rgf.bg.ac.rs
One of the basic metallogenic characteristics of East Serbia are numerous occurrences and deposits of alluvium gold.
According to recent results of the research (Volujski Klju-1989 and 1997) of
gold bearing alluviums from the Pek river, the gold content is as two times
higher as it was reported earlier (1907,
and 1947-1952).
The Volujski Kljuc locality, with an aver3
age gold content of 0.25 gr/m is economically interesting, more exactly it
could be profitable for exploitation.
Keywords
Gold Bearing Alluviums,
The River Pek, East Serbia
1. INTRODUCTION
The first written research data of the river Pek alluviums were published in 1892. by Hofman and 1899. by Antula
(Simic, 1970). The exploitation of gold of The Pek alluviums lasted from1903. to 1941. Exploration of the Pek
alluviums by drilling machines began in 1906. and 1907., and detailed exploration continued from 1947. to 1952.
The research was resumed from 1980. to 1989., using drill holes with considerably larger diameter, which
contributed the better reliability and accuracy of obtained results. The Volujski Kljuc and Ujevac are distinguished
as localities with higher gold concentration. The newest publications (1997) point out that application of the stateof-the-art devices for concentration could provide more reliable data, and therefore correct results obtained so far,
(Velikovi S. et al.,: Report about the geology investigations in alluvium of the river Pek in 1989., Fond of the
professional documentation(FSD) Institute for copper, Bor, 1990, 51p; Jankovi S.,et al.: Criteria of the prospection
and researching gold in Serbia, Desk for economy geology , Mining-geology faculty, Belgrade, 1992, 166-170p; Kai
V.,: Comparative analysis of the researches since today of the gold-bearing detritus of Pek and suggestions for their
optimization , Paper for magisterium, Mining-geology faculty, Belgrade, 1995. 80p; Radosavljevic S. et al. 8th International Congress on Applied Mineralogy, ISBN: 85-98656-01-X, Brazil, (2004), 931-934 p; Kai V. et al.: 39th International October Conference on Mining and Metallurgy, Soko Banja, 7-10 October 2007, pp. 27-33; Radosavljevic S. et
al.: 9th International Congress for Applied Mineralogy, Brisbane, Australia, 8.-10. September 2008,, 195-197p).
2. GEOLOGICAL SETTINGS
Territory of the river Pek basin is characterized by complex geological structure. The bedrock rocks consist of
metamorphic Proterozoic rocks, mostly chlorite, chlorite-epidote, and quartz sericite schists with small
occurrences of amphibolites, marbles, and quartzites. Upper rocks represent Cambrian volcanic-intrusive
complexes metamorphised up to chlorite facies. They are mainly represented with chlorite, sericite, and
amphibolite schists, sandstones with minor occurrence of limestones, quartzites, and quartz conglomerates. Both
schist series were penetrated by Cambrian gabbroides, and granite, followed with pegmatites, quartz-diorites,
quartz-diorite-porphyries, and quartz-porphyries. In the contact area schists from chlorite series, and gabbroides
were progressively metamorphised into biotite schists. Beside intrusive rocks in the east part of terrain, great mass
143

PROCEEDINGS
of hydrothermally altered volcanic rocks of dacite-andezite composition also occur. These rocks are of great
importance for gold-bearing alluvium deposits because they represent the main source of gold in alluvium deposits.
The Upper Cretaceous sediments characterize wider area in southern, and Neogene products in western part of
terrain (sands, clays, conglomerates). Territory from Debeli Lug to the river Danube is reached by exploration of
primary and alluvium deposits. It is characterized by multiphase tectonic structure, where Proterozoic schists are
the oldest, and Neogene and Quaternary sediments the youngest. The most noticeable rupture of this area is the
Blagojev Kamen dislocation,
separates
gneisses,
leptinolites, and plagioclasemicrocline gneisses on the
East from quartz-sericitechlorite schists on the West.
There are numerous igneous
rocks (peridotite-gabbro and
granite-aplite) around the
dislocation. Peridotites have
altered to serpentinites, while
granites, aplite-granites, and
aplites permeate surrounding
rocks. The dislocation extends
from Grabova Reka over Pek
and Brodica to V. Jasencar.
There are series of goldbearing quartz veins within
the narrow zone of chlorite
schists accompanying the
Blagojev Kamen dislocation
from Debeli Lug over Grabova
Reka and Brodica to the river
Danube. Great deal of gold of
the river Pek alluviums
originates from these goldbearing quartz veins.
Figure 1. Alluvial gold deposit of the

Volujski Kljuc:
A) Geological map; B) Geological
cross section; C) Gold distribution; D)
Bore hole; E) Cross section-detail,
(Dinic M., 1962, modified by Jankovic
S., 1990)
3. ORIGIN OF GOLD OF THE RIVER PEK ALLUVIUMS

The river Pek with its tributaries drains vast area with numerous extensive and intensive gold mineralizations of
different genetic types. Alluviums of upper flow of the river Pek from Vlaove over Debeli Lug to Gravova Reka
contain gold, which mainly originates from porphyry copper deposits of the Timok Magmatic Complex (TMC). This
part of terrain is spatially connected to hydrothermally altered zones, which regularly contain certain quantities of
gold. Besides, the TMC is well-known for "Zlace" type gold-bearing quartz veins, as well as polymetallic Pb-Zn-Cu
mineralization with gold. Decomposing of these deposits and mineralizations liberated gold via water flows in the
river Pek, while the other part of gold was deposited in deluvial and alluvial deposits. Having in mind the dimension
of the TMC, which is drained by the river Pek, it is considered that the greatest amount of gold in the river Pek
144

PROCEEDINGS
deposits originates from the TMC. Downstream from Grabova Reka and Blagojev Kamen from Volujski Kljuc and
Neresnica, the river Pek drains areas with gold-bearing quartz veins and carries gold to alluvial deposits. It is
difficult, due to numerous tributaries, to give detailed origin of gold. However, it is undoubted that gold from the
river Pek alluviums originates from two basic sources: gold-bearing quartz veins and the TMC copper
mineralization, which contains low contents, but in total high quantities of gold.
The river Pek alluvium characteristics
Previous prospects and exploitation work before and after II World War were performed on alluviums of upper and
middle flow of the river Pek, among which Volujski Kljuc and Debeli Lug (Ujevac) are the most explored. Alluvium
deposits of Volujski Kljuc are characterized with quite extended length (some 5 km), width (some 400 m), and an
average thickness of 4.6 m (Fig. 1). The riverbed was shaped in the alluvium, only several meters above the bedrock,
so it belongs to the type called flooded valley. Particle size analysis yielded the following results on 15 boreholes
(diameter 800 mm): up to 6 mm is 66; from 6 to 8 mm is 9; from 8 to 10 mm is 7; from 10 to 12 mm is 6; over 12 mm
is 12 % (=100 %) (S. Velikovi, et al., 1990).
Mineralogically and petrologically, alluvium deposits of Volujski Kljuc are very heterogeneous with distinct features
of bedrock from upper flow. Decomposition degree in alluvium is in function of transport, petrological composition,
and breakdown of bedrock. Gneisses, gabbros, and amphibolites, are among most common rocks in alluviums. Since
most part of granite is intensively decomposed, it is predominantly represented by granite grus. Dacite-andesite
rocks from around the city of Majdanpek are represented by well-rounded pebbles.
Besides quartz, which is the most abundant in alluvium sand, zircon, tourmaline, garnets, and micas are most
common minerals. Clays are fairly uncommon and usually occur in tiny grey lenses and layers with rare round
pebbles of surrounding rocks. Widely observed, alluvium base consists of gneisses and chlorite schists in upper and
middle flow, while Tertiary sediments are most abundant in lower flow of the river Pek. An average thickness of
humus cover ranges around 1 m, beneath humus is gravel of low mineralization grade, mixed with sand, average
thickness of 3.5 m (Fig.1). Underneath gravel is gold-bearing layer of coarse-grained and middle-grained sand with
an average thickness of 2 m. The highest content of gold occurs in the bedrock, whether it is consisted of schists or
Tertiary sandy clays.
Results of previous research of the Volujski Kljuc locality
Research of the Volujski Kljuc locality from 1989. were conducted in order to confirm the results obtained in a
period from 1947 to1952, and in 1984 (S. Velikovi et al., 1990). According to these results, the territory with the
highest difference was chosen for the new survey. New drilling profiles (drilling net 180x40 m) were overlapped with
previous drilling, and the profile overlapping was required for comparison of the results. Corresponding drilling
analyses were given in Table 1 (Velikovi S. et al.,: Report about the geology investigations in alluvium of the river
Pek in 1989., Fond of the professional documentation(FSD) Institute for copper, Bor, 1990, 51p).
According to average gold contents of drillings from 1947-52 and 1989., the ratio is as 0.06110 : 0.13485 = 1 : 2.2.
Therefore, the gold contents obtained in 1989. are 2.2 times higher from those obtained in 1947-52. If the
correction factor was implemented for the whole Volujski Kljuc, the gold contents would be 0.246 g/m3
(0.123gr/m3-gold contents obtained from all drillholes in 1947-1952 increased two times), or around 0.4 g/m3 for its
east part.
In addition, 30 drillholes with average gold contents of 0.330 g/m3 were drilled in the east part of Volujski Kljuc
(Brodice locality) in 1988 (drill diameter 800 mm, drilling net 100x20 m). Although, due to different drilling net the
comparison is not possible, these results can be compared to those obtained by a 30x25 m drilling net, and average
gold contents of 0.2 g/m3. Thus, the correction factor for gold contents was close to 2 (1.75). Very similar values of
correction factors from 1988. and 1989. point out the reliability of these data.
The results of drillings, carried out with BANKA boring machine, cannot be considered reliable because of the time,
research technology, small drill diameter (165 mm), and particularly ongoing exploitation work. A commercial
exploitation, performed by relatively primitive techniques for decades, is a well-known fact. Overall recovery of
gold, according to a study from 1984., was 60 %. It is most probably that the gold contents of 0.123 gr/m3, obtained
using BANKA boring machine, could not be commercially exploited even though the so called correction factor for
such results looks more realistic. Naturally, this statement should be confirmed, and if it was true Volujski Kljuc,
with average gold contents of some 0.25 gr/m3 (0.123x2), could be considered as economically interested.
145

PROCEEDINGS
Table 1. Comparatively results of boring on Volujski Kljuc(S. Velickovic and the others 1990 )
Serial
number
Boreholes 1989
Boreholes 1947-52.
Au
(g/m3)
Serial
number
Boreh.
Num.
Au
(g/m3)
Boreh.
Num.
I-S1
0,0501
458
0,0826
36.
S2
0,0565
457
0,0500
37.
S3
0,0312
456
0,0225
S4
0,0244
S5
0,0395
455
S6
0,0551
S7
0,2571
Boreholes
Boreh.
Num.
Boreholes1947-52.
Au
(g/m3)
Boreh.
Num.
Au
(g/m3)
IV-S6
0,1129
530
0,0572
S7
0,1308
529
0,0527
38.
S8
0,1632
528
0,0258
39.
S9
0,1833
527
0,0900
0,0760
40.
S10
0,4827
454
0,0167
41.
S11
0,1381
526
0,0041
453
0,0763
42.
S12
0,1308
525
0,0459
S8
0,5467
43.
V-S2
0,0367
562
S9
0,2417
452
0,0551
44.
S3
0,0310
561
0,0380
S10
0,1149
451
0,2002
45.
S4
0,0416
46.
S5
0,1176
560
0,0161
47.
S6
0,0901
559
0,0231
S11
0,5978
II-S4
0,0445
S5
0,0582
48.
S7
0,0286
558
0,0062
S6
0,0486
478
0,0160
49.
S8
0,0582
557
0,0042
S7
0,1007
477
0,0668
50.
S9
1,1483
S8
0,0279
476
0,0252
51.
S10
0,1005
556
0,2700
S9
0,4567
475
0,0692
52.
S11
0,0580
555
0,3606
479
S10
0,1144
53.
S12
0,0834
554
0,0834
S11
0,2675
474
0,0217
54.
VI-S1
0,0481
593
0,0094
III-S1
0,0103
504
0,0267
55.
S2
0,0199
592
0,0142
S2
0,0372
503
0,0077
56.
S3
0,0735
591
0,0101
S3
0,1589
502
0,1284
57.
S4
0,0173
590
0,0082
S4
0,0298
501
58.
S5
0,0511
S5
0,0870
59.
S6
0,0719
589
0,0211
S6
0,0805
500
0,0581
60.
S7
0,2346
588
0,0097
S7
0,3362
499
0,0127
61.
S8
0,0628
587
0,0032
S8
0,0887
498
0,0983
62.
S9
0,0675
586
0,0013
S9
0,1350
497
0,2206
63.
S10
0,0220
S10
0,1554
496
0,0200
64.
S11
0,0514
585
0,0211
S11
0,1046
65.
S12
0,0747
584
0,0097
S12
0,0639
495
0,5770
66.
VII-S1
0,0299
609
0,0032
IV-S2
0,1081
533
0,0086
67.
S2
0,2248
608
0,0013
S3
0,1222
532
0,0510
68.
S3
0,1000
607
0,0980
S4
0,1360
69.
S4
0,1336
606
0,0842
S5
0,1855
70.
S5
0,0479
605
0,0300
531
0,0911
average 0,1348 0,0611
A maximum effort in the present circumstances has been done in order to provide reliable research results.
Drillings, using the minimal drill diameter of 600 mm, is directed by regulations of the Republic of Serbia. In this
case, drillings were performed by drill diameter of 800 mm. Special dump trucks, which do not allow the loss of
material, were used for transport of samples from drillholes to the gold pan. Permanent expert control of all
research phases was also provided. State-of-the-art equipment was used for gravity concentration, extraction, and
amalgamation of gold.
146

PROCEEDINGS
The latest research of the river Pek alluviums

The latest research of the river Pek alluviums was carried out in 1997. by the Copper Institute in the form of
experimental separation of gravel, sand, and gold from the Blagojev Kamen locality. Experimental work on gold
concentration from alluvium deposits was performed with and without gold pan, and with application of KNELSON
concentrator in the final phase. A significant increase of gold content was obtained only by using centrifugal
gravity concentration apparatus. Particularly interesting results were obtained for -0.2 mm fraction. Lower limit of
particle size was 0.054 mm for KNELSON concentartor, and 0.098 from gold pan (M. Petkovi, et al., 39th International October Conference on Mining and Metallurgy, Donji Milanovac, October 2000, 44-49p). Results of
experimental determination of gold contents are shown in Table 2 (Kai V. et al.: 39th International October Conference on Mining and Metallurgy, Soko Banja, 7-10 October 2007, pp. 27-33p).
Table 2. Results of experimental determination of gold contents.
3
Volume (m )
Procedure (separation)
fraction 0.2-0.0 mm
fraction 2.0-0.2 mm
Particle size
Average gold contents
Sample 1
Sample 2
4
KNELSON concentrator
3
total 0.0564 gr Au, contents 14 mg/m Au
3
54450, average 250
3
151 mg/m
8
gold panKNELSON concentrator
3
3
98430, average 200-324
3
58 mg/m
On the basis of the experimental results, regardless they were obtained only on two samples, can be concluded that
KNELSON concentrator yielded exceptional effects. The loss of overall gold using gold pan with bars amounts
nearly 60 %, in 0.2 fraction even 86 %.
4. CONCLUSION
Analyzing the researches of gold bearing alluviums of the river Pek until now, especially the Volujski Kljuc locality, we came to the conclusion that the middle content of gold is about 0,25g/m3. This particularity
changes the picture of potentiality of the Volujski Kljuc alluviums and shows that the mentioned deposits
could be payable explored.
The results of gold content obtained from the newest researches (since 1997), by using KNELSON
concentrator, are even bigger from those obtained in 1988 and 1989, especially in fine fractions (+0.020.00mm).
The latest researches of alluviums of the river Pek gave the unquestionably positive results, which approved
the money invested in it, and relegates on further researches of these deposits.
Acknowledgment
This paper is the result of research on the Project TR 034013 titled " Development of technological processes for
obtaining of ecological materials based on nonmetallic minerals", and the Project TR033007, funded by the Ministry
of Education, Science and Technological Development of the Republic of Serbia for the period 2011-2014.
REFERENCES
[1]
Velikovi S. et al.,: Report about the geology investigations in alluvium of the river Pek in 1989., Fond of the professional
documentation(FSD) Institute for copper, Bor, 1990, 51p
[2]
Jankovi S., Milovanovi D., Putnik S., Jelenkovi R., Hrkovi K., Velikovi S., Grujii B.,: Criteria of the prospection and researching
gold in Serbia, Desk for economy geology , Mining-geology faculty, Belgrade, 1992, 166-170p
[3]
Kai V.,: Comparative analysis of the researches since today of the gold-bearing detritus of Pek and suggestions for their
optimization , Paper for magisterium, Mining-geology faculty, Belgrade, 1995. 80p
[4]
Radosavljevic S, Stojanovic J., and Kasic V.: 8 International Congress on Applied Mineralogy, ISBN: 85-98656-01-X, Brazil, (2004), 931934 p
[5]
Kai V., S. Radosavljevic, R. Toovi, M. Vukadinovic: 39 International October Conference on Mining and Metallurgy, Soko Banja, 710 October 2007, pp. 27-33
[6]
Radosavljevic S., Kasic V., Stojanovic J.: 9th International Congress for Applied Mineralogy, Brisbane, Australia, 8.-10. September
2008, 195-197p.
[7]
Petkovi M., Romi K., Bugarin M., Kondulovi R.,:, 32 International October Conference on Mining and Metallurgy, Donji Milanovac,
October, 2000, 44-49p.
th
th
th
147

PROCEEDINGS
CHOICE OF OBJECTS FOR PROTECTION OF FLYING ASH

AND BOTTOM ASH DEPOSITS FROM WATER
ABSTRACT
Violeta OLAKOVI1
Vladan ANOVI

1
violeta.colakovic@ribeograd.ac.rs
This paper deals with the problem of choosing the objects of drainage whose
work would secure proper conditions in order to set the ground for the future flying ash and bottom ash deposit.
The location of the future flying ash and bottom ash deposit will be the
space of the internal deposit of the surface dig site irikovac which is characterized by adverse hydro-geological conditions from drainage perspective.
The objects required for the protection of the deposit from the surface and
underground waters are meant to secure the necessary stability of all objects built on the deposit, while simultaneously preventing the negative influence of the deposit on the environment.
Keywords
irikovac, Flying Ash and Bottom Ash Deposit, Drainage
1. INTRODUCTION
While choosing the location for the future flying ash and coal deposit, it was necessary to fulfill the terms regulated
by the law, which relates to the protection of the environment (distance of the deposit from buildings, health and
recreational institutions, infrastructure, river beds and accumulated water, water springs, culture monuments and
protected nature sites).
The geological and hydro-geological conditions of the environment have been considered in detail, the required
protection levels of underground and surface waters and the possible influence on the environment, while taking
into consideration the potential problems and requirements in terms of protecting the environment from pollution.
When all these accounts are taken into consideration, the most appropriate location to form a deposit of flying ash
and bottom ash was the dug up site of the surface dig irikovac. With all the adequate measures on isolation and
conservation of the deposited flying ash being conducted, all of the necessary requirements for the stability of the
installation and for prevention of a possible negative influence on the environment in the deposit would be provided.
Figure 1. Area of the internal deposit of the surface

dig site "irikovac"
148

PROCEEDINGS
2. HYDRO-GEOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS
In the "irikovac" coal deposit, starting from the terrain surface, onto the floor or the coal layer, the work environment consists from the following lithological elements: loess, clays, from dusty to sandy clay, sand of different
granulations (medium grain to dusty), clay sand, coal ( first, second and third coal layer, which are layered in three
banks ), coal clay, dust, marly clay and clay marl, as well as quaternary sandy-gravel layer (found in the alluvial plains
of Mlava and Velika Morava).
The division of the lithological elements present was conducted according the hydro-geological properties into:
hydro-geological collectors and
hydro-geological isolators
Permeable rocks made out of sandy deposits, appear in hypsometrically different levels, individually separated by
hydro-geological isolators. Sandy deposits are mainly characterized by an alternating thickness, limited span and
frequent litho facial changes which condition the changeability of the hydro-geological parameters.
In the "irikovac" coal deposit the following hydro-geological collectors are important:
loess which represents the "conductor" collector which releases the surface water in lower areas
Sand types under the loess deposits
Ia sand (sand directly in the floor of loess deposits)
Ib sand accumulated between I and its equivalent coal layer
IIa sand in the upper roof of II coal layer
IIb sand in the immediate roof II of the coal layer
IIc sand accumulated between II and its equivalent of the coal layer
III sand accumulated II and I bank i II and III bank of the coal layer
IV and V sand accumulated between the I and II bank and II and III bank of the coal layer
alluvium of the Velika Morava and
alluvium of the Mlava river
The function of hydro-geological insulators in the "irikovac" site have: loess clays, clays of different lithological
compositions (dusty, sandy, coal), coal, silicified sands and sandy limestones. Depending on whether they are under
or above sands, impermeable rocks have properties of roof or floor insulators.
3. TECHNICAL SOLUTION FOR PROTECTION OF THE DEPOSIT FROM ONCOMING UNDERGROUND WATERS
The study on geo-mechanical and hydro-geological research (RI-2007.) has confirmed the assumptions that the
masses that make up the internal deposit, have adverse hydro-geological characteristics, because of the predominant clay materials saturated with water which cannot be removed from the deposit by classical means of drainage
like wells.
With the goal of securing stability of the base of the future flying ash and bottom ash deposit, construction of the
following drainage installations is envisioned:
drainage carpet with built in perforated tubes and granulate and
drainage canals with built in perforated tubes and granulate
Waters collected by means of underground drainage will be gravitationally drained to the pumping station of underground water CS-1 from where they will be drained away by means of a deep pump and thrust pipeline into the
main water collector MWC. The main water collector MWC will have a pumping unit of 90kW which will lead the
gathered water through a 200 mm pipeline to a gravitation pipeline of 400 mm through which it will go to Mlava.
The following figures display the cross sections of projected installations for underground water protection.
149

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Cross section of a drainage carpet
Figure 2. Drainage canals
4. TECHNICAL SOLUTION FOR DEPOSIT PROTECION FROM SURFACE WATERS

In order to protect the projected deposit of flying ash from surface waters the following constructions are predicted:
Rim canal RC-1 which will gather the surface waters which pour from the south and east rim area of the
open pit mine and lead them to the Mlava River.
Rim canal RC-2 will gather the surface waters which pour from the west side of the flying ash deposit and
will lead it in to the main water collector MWC and partially to a water collector.
Level canal SC will gather water which pour from the north drainage area and lead it to the main water collector MWC.
Rim canal RC-3 will gather waters which will pour from the inside of the flying ash deposit space and drain it
to the west to the water collector WC from which the waters will be pumped in to the main water collector
MWC which will protect the foil from the surface waters and deposits.
The following figure displays a model canal which will gather and drain the surface water, and dimensions are given
for construction of each canal individually.
Figure 3. Cross section of a canal
150

PROCEEDINGS
5. PROJECT REALIZATION
The drainage carpet is the first object of underground drainage which should be constructed and with a function of
a collector-conductor of underground waters drained from the base of the flying ash deposit. All of the collected
underground water from the drainage carpet and the drainage canals will be drained to SC-1 from where it will be
pumped through a deep pump into the main water collector MWC.
The cross section of the drainage carpet is of a trapeze profile with a bottom width of 2 m, depth 2 m and side tilt
of 45. A sheet of sand 0.15m thick is placed at the bottom of the dug canal, after which the installation of geotextile began. Drainage pipes 250 mm in diameter were placed over the geo-textile at a distance of 0.5 m. A layer
of uberlauf 0.5m thick is then installed, and over it a layer of crushed rock 150 mm in diameter and height of 0.5 m.
Up to the level of the terrain the canal is filled with larger crushed rock. After the drainage is installed, overlapping
and suturing of the geo-textile is conducted.
Figure 4. Construction of a drainage carpet, installation of drainage pipes, granulates and geo-textile
For collection of water from the body of the internal deposit, i.e. the body of the future site, a network of drainage
canals is constructed before foil installation. In a canal 1m in depth and width, over the placed geo-textile a drainage of 160 mm pipe is placed and a granulate over it. After geo-textile suturing in the canal, the dug materials
are placed back until the terrain is leveled.
Figure 5 displays the drainage canal construction, and figure 6 displays the drainage canal in the foot of the west
slope.
Figure 5. Drainage canal
Figure 6. West drainage canal
During mining excavation on the arranging of the base, especially on the work slopes, a frequent flooding occurred
from the waters filtered from the higher floors. Drainage canals were constructed for collection of these waters
considering that they proved as very efficient through fast results of their work. All of the drainage canals constructed are usually directly introduced into the drainage carpet. All of the waters gathered from the drainage car-
151

PROCEEDINGS
pet are diverted to the drainage station CS-1 from which they are expelled in to a water collector through a submersible pump.
Figure 7. Drainage station
Figure 8. Main water collector
For water drainage outside of the deposit area, a thrust pipeline is installed, which will lead water to the gravity
canal, and then to the Mlava river.
Figure 9. Thrust pipelines which lead in to the Mlava
Figure 10. Gravity canal for water drainage to the Mlava
152

PROCEEDINGS
With the goal of flying ash and bottom flying ash deposit protection from the surface waters, floor canals, permanent and temporary rim canals are constructed. Soon after construction of all the listed installations, the effects of
their work are visible, goal accomplished, the base of the future deposit is dried and stabilized and installation of
HDP foil has begun.
Figure 11. Active flying ash and bottom ash deposit
6. CONCLUSION
Considering the adverse hydro-geological characteristics of the future deposit (non-selective deposit of the tailings
masses, loess mixture, clay, sandy clays and dusty sand) it was not simple to decide to implement the drainage installations which are not typical hydro-geological objects, which have never been implemented in such a wide area
as the "irikovac" surface dig site. Justification for the chosen solution has been showed immediately after realization of all the projected installations for drainage through whose work has created the conditions necessary for
further operation of the mining and construction mechanization in the process of planning and implementation of
impermeable foil, which was the only assignment of the designers.
REFERENCES
[1]
Supplemental Mining Project of the pipeline route for a dense hydromixture and the deposition of flying ash and bottom ash of
the TPP Kostolac B into the excavated area of the OPM irikovac Technical Project of the flying ash and bottom ash deposition location from surface and underground waters and their evacuation Mining Institute, 2010. god (in Serbian).
153

PROCEEDINGS
TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESS OF VALORIZATION OF CALCIUM

CARBONATE RAW MATERIAL FROM KRALJEVA GORA DEPOSIT
ABSTRACT
ivko SEKULI1
Vladimir JOVANOVI2
Slavica MIHAJLOVI3
Vladan KAI4
Dragan RADULOVI5
Branislav IVOEVI6

86 Frane d'Eperea St., 11000 Belgrade, Serbia
1
z.sekulic@itnms.ac.rs 2 v.jovanovic@itnms.ac.rs 3
s.mihajlovic@itnms.ac.rs 4 v.kasic@itnms.ac.rs
5
d.radulovic@itnms.ac.rs 6 b.ivosevic@itnms.ac.rs
The possibility of application of products obtained

from Kraljeva gora carbonate raw materials was
investigated in the Institute for Technology of Nuclear and Other Mineral Raw Materials. Results of the
investigations imply that two commercial products
can be obtained from this raw material in preparation of mineral raw materials: limestone for calcification of acid agricultural soils (size class 100% -2 + 0
mm), and carbonate dust - a filler for production of
asphalt concrete (size class 100% - 0.71 mm). This
paper presents description of technological operations of valorization and a proposal for a technological process of valorization of calcium carbonate raw
material from Kraljeva Gora deposits.
Keywords
Carbonate Raw Material, Kraljeva Gora Deposits, Technological Processes, Technological Scheme
1. INTRODUCTION
On calcium carbonate raw material from the deposit "Kings Mountain" were conducted laboratory tests to
ascertain the possible enhancement of these raw materials. The results of the testing of new given in the
Preliminary technological project (. Sekuli et al. , 2005) which was developed at the Institute for Technology of
Nuclear and Other Mineral Raw Materials, Belgrade. According to geological exploration works, bearing calcium
carbonate raw material Kraljeva Gora consists of a compact mass of tuff and the second part of the crushed mass
(M. Todorovic, 2005) .Exploitation of deposits was carried out from time to time. This paper proposes a
technological procedures and technological schemes for the valorisation of these materials. In developing a
technological scheme starts with the availability of an established two commercial products, ie. Class -2.0 +0 mm
and -0.7 +0 mm class. This option is determined by comparing the results of tests and quality requirements
prescribed standards (Official journal 60/2000, SRPS B B3 100).
2. TEST RESULTS
Liming material for acid soil
Liming material for acid soils (-2.0 +0 mm) for grain-size composition of which is shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Particle size range for assortment for liming acid soils liming acid soils
154
M%
M,%
21.42
21.42
100.00
11.35
32.77
78.58
-0.71 +0.50
6.85
39.62
67.23
-0.50 +0.00
60.38
100.00
60.38
TOTAL:
100.00
Size class, mm
M,%
-2.00 +1.00
-1.00 +0.71

PROCEEDINGS
According to information on the quality of some parts of bearings can be expected that the quality of this range is
suitable for quality raw materials. Raw material quality in service and the quality of the finished product should be
monitored on a daily basis in order to properly use affect the uniformity of the quality of this product range.
Filler for asphalt mixtures
The main application of filler for asphalt mixtures is for the production of asphalt concrete. Components for
production of asphalt concrete (which are produced by hot and cold process) are:
Hydrocarbon binder - bitumen, whose share in the total volume of asphalt concrete is 5 - 12%
Mineral filler - filler with an aggregate particles below 0.09 mm. The amount of filler in the total mass of
mixture for making asphalt concrete ranges in a wide range of 5 - 20%. It is believed that 5% is the minimum
value. The maximum content of filler in asphalt concrete depends on other sized aggregates.
Sand - mineral material passing through the sieve openings 2 mm, and remains at 0.09 mm sieve. It can be
natural or crushed. Its grain-size composition must comply with the prescribed conditions. Must be clean,
without clay and organic impurities. Must not contain particles less than 0.02 mm. If the sand is created by
crushing must have a compressive strength greater than 120 MPa, it has low water absorption and is resistant to frost.
The results of tests on a sample obtained from the starting materials bearing the Kraljeva Gora with the purpose
of asphalt mixtures are given in Table 2
Table 2. Characteristics of the sample to be used for asphalt mixtures
Property
The obtained value
Allowed
2661
Content lumps or impurities
None
Not allowed
Density, kg / m
Plasticity index
Not plastic
Max 4
Cavity fillers in dry compressed condition by Ridgen,% (v / v /)
34.5
Moisture content,% (m / m)
0.4
Index hardening of bitumen
1.95
1,8-2,4
Based on the results given in Table 2, compared with the conditions defined by the standard can be concluded that
the sample meets the quality requirements and can be applied for the production of asphalt mixtures.
Principle scheme of technological process
Keeping in mind the requirement of reference to the raw material-150 mm get two products of different particle
size distribution, was elected principal scheme of technological process is shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1. Selection of principal scheme of technological process
The scheme of technological process

Explanation dilemma about whether to drying or not to bring the final judgment about the possibility of not drying
process it is proposed that a sample mass of 30 t of crude industrial raw materials do tests that would include the
delivery of raw materials to crude raw circle separation of quartz sand in Milici , unloading at the landfill and
covered to stay there 5 - 6 days, After that to do industrial crushing test. Technological scheme is designed on the
basis of the data on the feedstock and the availability of an established range of -2 +0 +0 mm and -0.7 mm. The
proposed scheme of technological process will allow obtaining products -2 + 0 mm. Asortment asphalt (Class 0 + -
155

PROCEEDINGS
0.7 mm), which are required to be 100% dry, it could be expected in the very favorable climatic conditions. And who
market demand increases significantly afterwards to upgrade the rotary kiln for this range. Technological scheme
of production materials for liming acid soils and asphalt filler is shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2. Technological scheme of production materials for liming acid soils and asphalt filler
Description scheme of technological process: Crude materials ("stalactites sand"), class size was -150 + 0 mm, with
open pit brings to the circle separating trucks and unloaded in covered dump (D).The landfill (D) Crude materials for
about 5 days to naturally moisture content in the feed decreased from 25% of the moisture that allows smooth
grinding and sieving. From the landfill (D) using the loader, Crude raw materials are transferred to the existing
reception hopper (Item 1.) Above the bunker with a grid size of the opening is 50 x 50 mm. Booker volume V = 40 m
3.To the bunkers are installed "air gun" for discharging bunker in case of "arching" material in it. From the reception
bunker material by shaking (eccentric) feeder (item 2), added to the ribbed tape transport (Item 3), which is
transported to the plant material separation. With the conveyor belt (Item 3), which is at an angle of 22 0, the
material goes to the gravitational lattice vibration (Item 4) hole size of 20 mm. Sieved material from vibrating grate
(Item 4) class size was 150 + 20 mm gravity moved to impact crusher (item 5). Impact crusher product (item 5) is
combined with sifted material vibrating grate (item 4) on the conveyor belt (Item 6. Conveyor (item 6) material
transported to vibrating screen (item 7). Screen mesh size is 2 mm. sieved material vibratory sieves (item 7), class
size was -20 2 mm, falling into the impact crusher (Item 8), which produces a 100% class -3 + 0 mm. Impact
crusher product (item 8) using elevators (Item 9) returns to the vibration sieve (item 7) of screening. sifted material
vibratory sieves (item 7), class size was -2 + 0 mm, using a conveyor belt (item 10) and elevators (item 11) is sent to
the receiving hopper (item 12). From the reception bunker (item 12) material, the class size was -2 + 0 mm, using
bars directed to the bunker for the finished product (item 15). From the bunker on the finished product (item 15),
class size was -2 + 0 mm using a feeder - scale (item 16) and reversible conveyor belt (item 17) is sent to the packing
unit for packing (item 22) or in carrying bunker with a telescope (item 18) from which the full trucks. In case you
need a production class -0.7 + 0 mm, which is used as a filler (filler) for asphalt mixture, then the reception bunker
(item 12) material, the class size was -2 + 0 mm, with bars (S) focuses on electromagnetic sieve (item 13). Sieved
material of electromagnetic screen (item 13), the class size was 0.7 mm -2 + goes to the electromagnetic screen
(item 14), where it performs an additional screening. sieved material electromagnetic screen (item 14) class -2 + 0.7
mm is sent using screw conveyors (item 19) in the bunker for the finished product (item 15) where it is mixed with
class 0 + -2 mm. Sifted material electromagnetic screen (item 13) and electromagnetic sieves (item 14) separately
156

PROCEEDINGS
gravitationed sent to the bunker (item 20). From the bunker on the finished product (item 20) class size was -0.7 + 0
mm using a feeder - scale (item 21) and reversible conveyor belt (item 17) is sent to the packing unit for packing
(item 22), or in carrying bunker with a telescope (item 18) from which the full trucks. Packaged products using
conveyor belts which is part of a device for packing (item 22) to the pallet and shipped them packing.
3. CONCLUSION
The investigation of calcium carbonate raw material from the deposit Kraljeva Gora established the technological
process of preparing for valorisation these materials, namely: three levels of sieving and two-stage crushing. Drying
Crude raw materials would take place at the landfill, in the case of production-class -0.7 +0 mm (filler for asphalt)
must be kiln drying of suitable capacity. Defined h after the cooking is defined and described technological flows
which could be valorised these materials.
Acknowledgements
This work is the result of the project TR 34013 financed by the Ministry of Education, Science and Technological
Development of Republic of Serbia in 2011-2014.
REFERENCES
[1]
Sekulic . at al.: Preliminary technological project to build a plant for the production of materials for liming acid soils and fillers for
asphalt mixtures based on material from the deposit "Kraljeva Gora" near Milici ITNMS, Belgrade, 2005.
[2]
Todorovic M.: Study on classification, categorization and calculation of tuf sand and tuf of deposit at the Kraljeva Gora near Milici
on 30.06.2005. year, AD"BOKSIT"-Milici, 2005.
[3]
Official journal 60/2000
[4]
SRPS B B3 100
157

PROCEEDINGS
ANALYSIS OF THE OBTAINED STATISTICAL MEASUREMENT

VALUES OF SEISMICAL BLASTING TREMORS
ABSTRACT
Risto DAMBOV1
Todor DELIPETROV2
Marjan DELIPETROV3
Ilija DAMBOV4
Prof. d-r, University Goce Delcev,

FNTS, Insitute of Mining, Stip,
R. Macedonia
2
Prof. d-r, University Goce Delcev,
FNTS, Insitute of Geology, Stip,
R. Macedonia
3
Ass.prof., University Goce Delcev,
FNTS, Insitute of Geology, Stip,
R. Macedonia
4
MSc., Bucim Mine, Radovis, dambov2007@yahoo.com
The paper provided some measurements carried out by seismic shocks

caused when carrying out primary mining and appropriate parameters in
terms of safety of the surrounding buildings. In this paper one of the goals is
to analyze and define the criteria for assessment of shocks in terms of appropriate application for methods of mining, safety distances, especially for
different mining conditions.
With statistical analyses of the values we can determine the criteria for soil
oscillation law depending on reduced distance, seismic intensity of the protected facilities etc.
This gets a final conclusion on the assessment of shocks depending of the
parameters of mining, safety distances when performing the various methods of blasting and the formation of tabular presentation of evaluation criteria for the shocks and safety distances.
The calculation or dimensioning of parameters blasting are the step in setting the technique of drilling and blasting which later, in local conditions,
can be modified and yield the best possible results.
Keywords
Seismic Tremors, Criterion, Blasting, Safe Distance
1. INTRODUCTION
With the tightening of environmental requirements for environmental protection and respect for private property,
the application of blasting is limited in the strict framework of regulations.
Therefore there is a need for control, measurement and regulation (as possible) the oscillations of the ground and
seismic shocks caused by these oscillations occurred as the effect of sapping the blast.
In order to evaluate and control the effects of seismic blasting, it is necessary to determine the soil oscillation law
in direction and ground distance to the appropriate place or object that are to be protected.
One of the most commonly used theories and equations given by Professor Sadovski that define the law to change
the speed of soil particles, depending on distance, quantity and tipe of explosives, blasting conditions and
structural - geological characteristics of the surrounding rocks.
While determining the soil oscillation law depending on reduced distance, it is necessary, previously, to establish to
what level of seismic intensity the protected facilities can be exposed, taking into account their dimensions and
quality of material, construction value, the level of resistance to seismic shock wave effects etc. to prevent their
damaging on that occasion.
Seismic and other effects that are caused by the detonation of a quantity of explosives are dependent on many
factors, of which the most important among them are: the method of blasting, the distance from the place, the
quantity of explosives, the type of explosives, the method of initiating of series, explosives construction in the
drillholes, physical-mechanical characteristics of rocks, structural features of rocks etc.
158

PROCEEDINGS
2. ANALYSIS CRITERIA
Law oscillation of the ground
The analysis and correlation between the size of the seismic tremors i.e. the speed of oscillation and the basic
parameters that have the greatest impact on the effects of seismic tremors. In the world are used and developed
several mathematical models.
The most commonly used model is the theory of prof. Sadovski which is expressed through a mathematical formula
(1) that reflects the speed of oscillation depending on the distance, the amount of explosives and the manner of
execution of blasting.
The dependence of the speed of oscillation of the ground is obtained based on the calculated peak velocities of
oscillations of the particles of soil (Vmax), distance from the blasting location of the measuring instrument (r), and
the amount of explosive that is used in blasting series. This speed is expressed in the following form:
V K v R n , [mm/s]
[1]
where is:
V speed of oscillation of the ground , mm/s

Kv coefficient which is dependent of the characteristics of the rocks and blasting conditions and are determined
by field measurements
n exponent which is dependent on the characteristics of the rocks and mining conditions and are determined by
field measurements
R reduced distance, R r , [m]
3
where is:
r - distance from the blasting site to the site of measurement, [m]
Q - amount of explosives used, [kg]
In the equation (1) appear two parameters (Kv) and (n), which should determine the specific work environment and
conditions of blasting. For their definition are used method of least squares which equation (1) gets the following
form:(with logarithm)
log v log K v n log R
[2]
With the introduction of substitute: v = y; Kv = a; R = x; n = b;

gets:
log a b log x log y
[3]
The system of equations for the parameters (a) and (b) in this case is:
N
n log a b log xi log yi

i 1
[4]
i 1
i 1
i 1
i 1
(log a) log xi b (log xi ) 2 log xi log yi
where is: N number of measurement (measuring points).

Important properties of the law of oscillation of the ground depending on Reduced slow distance that the change
of reduced distance (R), with reducing or by its increase by only 1%, the value for the speed of oscillation in proportion to the ground opposite applies i.e. increases or decreases by n%.
In brief, the aforementioned formula prof. Sadovski means the total amount of explosive that is used in the blasting
series.
The analysis of this parameter used provisions of the "Law for the Protection of blastings substances" (Official Gazette br.4/78) and "Regulation of technical norms for handling explosives and blasting in mining" (Official Gazette
of SFRY no. 26/88).
159

PROCEEDINGS
In this regulation in Article 110 stated that under both individually considered initiating ignition of a quantity of
explosives which initiated simultaneously or during deceleration (retardation detonation) between intervals starting at millisecond initiation is no greater than 100ms (milliseconds).
In measuring these oscillations (in such initiation) the appropriate measurement points, the obtained velosigrams
(curves) of instruments, it is impossible to determine which pick the curve that shows the components of the oscillation corresponds to some interval or slowing in the certain amount of explosives given slowing because existing
modern instruments those individual pulses (for now) cannot separate.
For these reasons the calculations of oscillations and distances sapping adopted as values total quantity of explosives as it is initiated simultaneously.
This calculation method however keep in mind that the amount of explosives is separated by intervals and the values obtained are quite reliable and strict with the possibility of their (unintentionally) and increase reliability in
terms of security and safety distances to surrounding objects.
Defining the statistical criteria
Assessment and definition of criteria for the level of security when establishing correlation equations and ratios are
used mathematical- statistical methods. The assessment of the degree of reliability of these relations are calculated based on the results obtained by examining i.e. practical field measurements of certain blasting series. These
mathematical methods for processing the results depending on the data, the method of interpretation and the
required accuracy and reliability, allow defining the changes induced in the ground and the general law of behavior
change investigated.
Some of the basic statistical parameters used to analyze and define the individual criteria are:
- Arithmetic mean x
which is expressed as:
x1 x2 x3 ... x N xi
N
N
[5]
Where is: x1, x2...xN - values of the results of certain measurements (trials)
N - number of results (sample)
Intermediate arithmetic deviation 0
x x
[6]
Where is:
xi x - absolute magnitude of the deviation

-
Variance 2
2
1 2
xi x
N
[7]
Criteria for checking mathematical dependencies

To eliminate subjective decisions and impacts analysis of the dependencies and the resulting mathematical shape
of the curve y = y (x), which is approximated values obtained in the survey, use the linear correlation coefficient:
xi x yi y
11
,
2
2
x y
xi x yi y
[8]
160

PROCEEDINGS
This route is used if the question assumed a linear functional relationship between xi and yi , as assessment of the
degree of linear relationship between two dependencies. If dependence between xi and yi , is with curves are used
relation for the index of this curve line dependence:
yi yxi
yi y
[9]
The assessment of the degree of association between two variables is given by the following relations given
descriptive:
0,0 < <0,2, no connection or very weak
0,2 < <0,4, weak links,
0,4 < <0,7, significant connection,
0,7 < <1,0, strong or very strong interconnection,
These relations also apply to the absolute value of the coefficient of linear correlation k.
To assess the degree of certainty (reliability) of the selected curve in mathematical statistics are used criterion
called 3S :
12 22 32 ... N2
[10]
Where is:
e1, e2, ..... squares of the difference between the measurement results and calculated by the method of
least squares to established addictions xi yi.
According to this criterion for assessing the degree of certainty or reliability of the resulting functional
dependency, use and apply the following ratios:
if |max| > 3S, the resulting functional dependency is rejected as unfavorable
if |max| < 3S, functional dependency (connection) is accepted as good.
This criterion is used in cases when the number of measurements is N 10th
Results of measurement
Measurements of ground oscillations are performed on Open Pit Bucim, the mine accident defense series,
preparation and blasted by standard procedures. When it is used 7 measuring instruments placed at different
distances from Blasting series S-35. Values read the parameters and derived values are presented in Table 1 and it is
used in the form [1].
161

PROCEEDINGS
Table 1. Calculated values of maximum speeds of oscillation ground and reduced distances for separate measuring points
Blasting
series
S-35
Maximum speed of the

oscillation components,
mm/s
VV
VL
VT
Maximum
resultant speed
of oscillation,
mm/s
95
27,66
19,37
8,414
34,809
5,63
MM-2/
660,42
165
10,06
12,23
9,465
18,455
9,78
MM-3/
659,71
245
5,026
5,576
3,070
8,110
14,52
MM-4/
659,30
297
2,778
2,403
2,088
4,225
17,6
MM-5/
658,88
452
1,178
1,956
2,277
3,224
26,80
MM-6/
641,05
637
0,539
1,251
1,230
1,835
37,76
MM-7/
640,25
665
0,503
0,709
1,244
1,517
39,42
Measuring points,
MM / elevation of
the ground
Distance from
blasting series to
measuring point , m
MM-1/
659,43
Calculated
reduced
distance, R, m
Statistical analysis of the obtained values

The processing of the data obtained through field trials are used methods of mathematical statistics.
Their application and calculation allows defining the changes and laws - relations that are used in the calculations
and their behavior in terms of theoretical parameters.
Table 2. Parameters obtained from measurements and calculated derived values
Number of the measuring point
Reduced distance
R, (m)
Registered speeds
of oscillations, Vr,
(cm/s)
Calculated speed of oscillations,

Vpr, (cm/s)
Vr - Vpr
(Vr Vpr)2
5,63
28,57
34,8
-6,23
38,81
9,78
13,32
18,45
-5,13
26,32
14,52
6,7
8,1
-1,4
1,96
17,6
3,2
4,2
-1
26,8
2,8
3,2
-0,4
0,16
37,76
1,69
1,8
-0,11
0,0121
39,42
1,33
1,5
-0,17
0,0289
Rsr=21,64
=57,61
y = 10,29
14,44
sr
In Table 2 are obtained the following values for the parameters which are analyzed statistically:
- - Arithmetic mean x :
x
x1 x 2 x3 ... x N xi = 57,61 = 8,23
7
N
N
[11]
162

PROCEEDINGS
- Intermediate arithmetic deviation: 0
- variance :
= 345,66 49,38
7
[12]
2
1
xi2 x = 17067,7
N
[13]
- Criterion "3S":
12 22 32 ... N2
38,812 26,32 2 1,96 12 0,16 2 0,01212 0,0289 2

7
N
S = 17,74 3S = 3 17,74 = 53,23
[14]
|max| = 38,81
In this case are given relation:
38,81 < 53,23
The resulting relationship that reflects the functional relationship between the dependent - changing can be
accepted as good.
- Index of curve line dependence:
yi y xi = = 0, 875
1
2
yi y
2
[15]
Based on the obtained value can be concluded that the two variables, reduced distance and speed of the
oscillations of the ground, there is a very close relationship and strong relationship and this value has a high
practical relevance (according to the empirical rule to evaluate the strength of ties, 0, 7 < <1,0, which means
strong or very strong interconnection).
Also, analyzing the criteria for blasting with statistical analysis, derived values are express level of connections and
correlations between predefined parameters which are analyzed and their interdependencies.
3. CONCLUSION
Based on these practical and scientific research and calculations derived directly or combined, it can be concluded
that the performance of massive blasting of any surface blasting, the application of the oscillation of the ground,
and application interdependencies and correlations obtained, practically allows the derivation of mass blasting
reduce negative effects primarily in terms of seismic impacts.
In this way you can increase the efficiency of blasting, to protect the surrounding accompanying buildings from
these impacts and in particular, to predict and pre-ensure all the surrounding buildings, machinery and people with
regard to the action of seismic waves and tremors caused from blasting.
163

PROCEEDINGS
REFERENCES
[1]
Dambov R., (1995), Primena Nonel-sistema iniciranja na PK "Bucim", I Jugoslovenski simpozium "Buenje i miniranje", Zbornik radova,
Beograd, SRJ.
[2]
Dambov R., (1996), Metoda na miniranje vo funkcija na bezbednost na okolnite objekti na PK "Bucim", XXVIII Oktobarsko savetovanje
rudara i metalurga, Zbornik radova , Tehnicki fakultet Bor, SRJ.
[3]
R. Dambov, (2011), Mining Methods, textbook, UGD, FPTN, Institute of Mining, Stip.
[4]
Dambov I., (2011), Analiza na kriteriumite za ocenka potresi i bezbednosni rastojanija pri miniranje, Magisterski trud, UGD, FPTN, Stip.
[5]
Olofsson O. S., (1990), Applied explosives technology for construction and mining, monographic book, APPLEX , RLA, Sweden.
[6]
Rzhevsky V.V., (1985), Opencast mining unit operation, English translation, Mir Publishers, Moscow, SSSR.
[7]
., (2000), , , , , , .
[8]
Slimak, ., (1996), Inzenjerska geofizika, Ucebnik, RGF Beograd, Srbija.
164

PROCEEDINGS
UNDERGROUND PIT EXPLORATION IN THE

RAJIEVA GORA NEAR BRUS, REPUBLIC OF SERBIA
ABSTRACT
Saa MITI
Dragan MILOJEVI
Nenad MAKAR
Jovica NIKOLI

podzemna@ribeograd.ac.rs
Detailed polymetallicexploration of Pb, Zn, and Sb ores, and trace elements

Ag, Fe and Ni at the Rajievagora area near Brus in the Republic of Serbia,
are being conducted in order to update the geological data about the basin.
Underground exploration operations allow immediate access to the basin,
more reliable geological sampling, more trustworthy prospection, sampling
for technological research etc.
Planned underground exploration operations encompass cleaning and rehabilitation of the existing and construction of new underground research areas. This paper contains a short display of the exploration well, rehabilitation
methodology of underground areas and construction methodology of the
new ones.
Keywords
Rajieva Gora, Poly-Metallic Ore, Underground Exploration Operations
1. INTRODUCTION
This paper displays pit exploration works which are predicted for research requirements, i.e. sampling for technological tests from the "Rajieva Gora" deposit. Detailed geological exploration is the result of objective needs to
continue exploration from the previous period, with the subject area explored in order for the Farmakom concern
MB and AD "Zajaa" to gain an important base for the production of antimony, lead and zinc. Technically, it is necessary to continue the exploration in the Rajieva Gora pit from the previous years, especially those terminated in
1988, and continued in the period from 2008 to 2011 in order to prepare the database for confirmation of ore reserves of Pb, Zn and Sb and complete the information on the mineral characteristics of the ores in order to project
the optimal production and processing capacities.
Sampling will be done with the purpose of geological research and testing which will be realized by the concern
"Farmakom MB" abac and Mines and the AD "Zajaa" smelter from Loznica. This company is the bearer of geological and mining exploration as well as the exploitation of antimony, lead, zinc and trace materials at the area i.e. at
the entire explored area.
In order to realize the exploration in the Rajieva Gora pit according to the plan, it is necessary to redefine the pit
exploration works in accordance with the present degree of exploration and estimated future prospects. The exploration will be conducted:
in the Rajieva Gora pit at the area north and southeast from the main transport drift 1175 m by exploration
wells (new level 1135m);
at the level 1205 by exploration wells, with the goal of connecting to the horizon 1,220 per drop of the mine
structure;
at the horizon 1220 and level 1240 by exploration wells with the goal of connecting to the level 1240 i.e.
horizon 1280 per drop of the mine structure;
Before the beginning of construction of the exploration pit objects, the existing pit objects must be rehabilitated,
and the pit must be made functional.
165

PROCEEDINGS
The base goal and purpose of exploration is to define the continuation of the mining structure through the projected pit exploration wells at a depth below the horizon 1175 and re-categorize the mining reserves, from the C2
category reserves into C1 and B reserve category.
At the 1220 horizon, work will additionally define ore abundance and quality per drop of the ore structure in relation to the 1240 level, all for the purpose of re-categorizing the ore reserves of the C1 category to ore reserves of B
category.
Exploration at the 1205 level and 1240 level have the purpose of connecting these levels with horizons 1220 and
1280, with simultaneous quality tracking of ore abundance in the zone between serpentinite and quartz-latite.
The conceptual and methodological approach of the research is adjusted to the metal-genetic characteristics of
the area, taking into account all important factors for locating the ore. During the writing of this paper, all of the
results from research so far have been taken into account as well as experiences gained from the operations so far
in the pit Rajieva Gora [1 5].
The aforementioned area encompasses the north area of the mine field Kopori-Jelakce at the eastern slopes of
Kopaonik and stretches northeast from the Ravno Osoje, Rajieva Gora, to ardak in the south (figure 1).
By physical-mechanical qualities, silicon-carbonate rock, serpentite and quartz-latite present favorable environments for pit construction. The adverse environment is the so called "red series", tectonic zones, schistose zones in
the serpentite and hydro-thermal changes of quartz-latite and serpentite. Physical-mechanical qualities of the ore
depend on environment properties in which the ore is deposited. The total geological reserves of the "Rajieva Gora" deposit, ranging B+C1 categories, are 1,109,186 tons of lead-zinc ore, with the contents of Pb=3,20%, Zn=0,83%
and Ag=22,40 g/t [3], (table 1)
Table 1. Total ore reserves of the Rajieva Gora basin
Reserve category
Ore category
Q(t)
Metallic contents
Pb(%)
Zn(%)
Metallic quantities
Ag(g/t)
Pb(t)
Zn(t)
Ag(kg)
916.865
3,20
0,79
21,26
29.339,68
7.243,23
19.492,55
C1
192.321
3,18
1,03
27,81
6.115,81
1.980,91
5.348,45
1.109.186
3,20
0,83
22,40
35.455,49
9.224,14
24.840,00
B+C1
Based on the exploration degree, geological and metallic-genetic characteristics, and foremost the need for faster
realization, in order to restore the mining areas and increasing of ore reserves, the following research methods will
be applied:
Recovery and rehabilitation of the existing pit areas in the Pb-Zn-Sb basin of Rajieva Gora, in total length
of about 3.450m and
Construction of the new exploration wells in the Pb-Zn-Sb basin of Rajieva Gora in total length of about
1.930m.
Figure 1. Geographical position of the Rajieva Gora deposit
166

PROCEEDINGS
2. PROJECTED EXPLORATION WELLS

The projected exploration works will be conducted in the basin of "Rajieva Gora", and are displayed according to
the horizons and levels:
1. Horizon 1175 with expansion and opening of the exploration level 1135,
2. Level 1205,
3. Horizon 1220
4. Level 1240 - alternative works,
5. Horizon 1280.
Cross sections of exploration rooms with timber support are displayed in figures 2 and 3 [4], longitudinal cross section through IN-1 in figure 4.
The reasons for projection of the exploration wells in the pit "Rajieva Gora" are as follows:
High degree of the conducted mining research works as a basis for confirmation of the ore reserves and a
need of continuity in exploring,
The requirement of the concern for opening the Pb-Zn-Sb ore mine, foremost of lead and zinc, from which
came the need to increase the existing ore reserves,
Contents of Pb, Zn, and Sb in the ore occurrences outside of the Rajieva Gora basin whose exploitation is
not economically justified
The necessity of increasing the ore reserves of higher categories,
The need to additionally explore and prepare the basin for full exploitation in the shortest time possible
3. REHABILITATION-RECOVERY OF THE EXISTING PIT AREAS

The condition to conduct the projected exploration wells is to rehabilitate and recover the existing underground
rooms, on all horizons and levels (level 1240 alternatively) in quantities of about 3.450 m:
3.245 m of recovery of transport and exploration rooms and,
205 m of recovering the exploitation sites
The predicted construction of new pit areas:
1. Circular drift (CD) collecting station
2. The winch chamber (WC),
3. Transient-ventilation exploitation raises (TVES),
4. Exploration dip heading EDH 1175 - 1135,
5. Exploration drifts
6. Directional exploration drifts (DEC)
7. Crossing exploration drifts (CEC)
8. Exploration raises (EES)
9. Connection drift 1(CC-1)
10. Ore pass (OP)
11. Waste rock pass (WRP)
12. Sump with an accumulator (SCA)
13. Pumping chamber (PC)
14. Loading chamber (LC)
15. Auxiliary raise (AR)
167

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Cross section of the horizontal underground room supported by the timber support
Construction of the exploration pit areas (corridors, exploitation sites, and inclines) for sampling for technological
trials, will be done through drilling-mining works technology, which encompasses the following work operations:
Drilling and blasting,
Ventilation,
Loading and transport of blasted materials,
Support construction
The total recovery of about 3.450 m encompasses the rehabilitation of 3.245 m of horizontal pit areas and recovery
of 205 m of vertical rooms-raises (blind shafts of different purposes). assumed based on experience, that out of
3.245 m, 3.045 m of lighter recovery is necessary with occasional sidewise support and cleaning and about 200 m of
recovery of completely collapsed underground rooms [1,4].
Total lengths of the underground rooms predicted for rehabilitation of horizons and levels are displayed in table 2.
Table 2. Total lengths of the underground rooms
Name
Horizontal drifts (m)
Vertical rooms (m)
Horizon 1175
1.010
107
Level 1205
670
15
Horizon 1220
880
20
Level 1240
210
48
Horizon 1280
475
15
Total:
3.245
205
168

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Cross section of the timber supported exploration raise (IU) and drift (IH)
Figure 3. Longitudinal cross section through the incline IN-1
Review of the new exploration romos which are necessary to construct is calculated according to the horizons and
levels and is displayed in table 3.
Table 3. Recapitulation of the underground exploration rooms in the "Rajieva Gora" mine
Br.
Horizons and levels
Horizontal(m)
Sloped(m)
Vertical(m)
1.
Horizon 1175/1135
770,10
258,00
61,60
2.
Horizon 1175
3.
Level 1205
120,00
70,00
4.
Horizon 1220
130,00
70,00
5.
Level 1240
100,00
150,00
6.
Horizon 1280/level 1292
100,00
TOTAL (1-6)
1.220,10
169
100,00
648,00
61,60

PROCEEDINGS
As can be seen from the table 3, in the pit "Rajieva Gora", according to plan, it is necessary to construct a total of
1.929,70 m, rounded up 1.930 m of underground exploration rooms. Out of those, 1.220 m of horizontal rooms (directional and cross research drifts), 648 m of sloped rooms (research incline, research exploitation sites) and about
62 m of vertical rooms (transient-ventilation exploitation site, ore and waste rock rose hip, auxiliary exploitation
site). In total it is necessary to construct 1.829,7 m of exploration rooms.
4. CONCLUSION
In exploration of the ores at the "Rajieva Gora" area near Brus, extensive research operations are planned, which
would prove the familiar and new ore reserves. In the goal of realization of this research, it is necessary to construct
numerous exploration pit areas, which will later serve as rooms, openings, developments, and mining preparations.
Considering the amount of pit exploration works, this paper accents the necessity of their construction in the goal
of research realization.
Acknowledgement
This paper is produced from the Project No. 33029 which is funded by means of the Ministry of Education, Science
and Technological Development of the Republic of Serbia.
REFERENCES
[1]
Project of detailed geological research of Pb-Zn-Sb ores and trace elements (Ag, Fe, Ni) at the Rajieva Gora area near Brus, for
the period 2012 - 2014 mines and smelter "Zajaa", 2012.
[2]
Main mining project of the first opening phase and exploitation of the antimony deposit "Rajieva Gora" - Kopaonik, Mining
institute, Belgrade 1976.
[3]
Paper on the lead and zinc reserves in the basin "Rajieva Gora" near Brus (status on the 31.12.2012.) - VK Mineral d.o.o. - Prijepolje, 2012.
[4]
Mining project on the research of Pb-Zn-Sb ores and trace elements (Ag, Fe, Ni) at the "Rajieva Gora" area near Brus, Mining
institute d.o.o. - Belgrade, 2013.
[5]
Existing technical documentation of the "Zajaa" mine
170

PROCEEDINGS
171
MINING AND SAFETY

PROCEEDINGS
DRILLING FLUIDS AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
ABSTRACT
Branko LEKOVI1
Vesna KAROVI MARII2
Duan DANILOVI3
Rudarsko-geoloki fakultet, uina 7,

Beograd, Srbija
1
blekovic@rgf.bg.ac.rs 2
vesnakm@rgf.bg.ac.rs 3 danilovic@rgf.bg.ac.rs
The effects of human actions on the environment become more important, and Petroleum companies are joining with government officials
in finding ways to provide for us oil and gas without damaging the environment. The choices are not always easy ones, especially for oilfield
drilling and production. Diesel-based drilling muds are hazardous to the
environment and water based muds are not compatible with some formations.
Many years the best systems to cure wellbore instability have been oilbase muds because they provide superior shale inhibition characteristics
and lubricity. But synthetic drilling fluid give the right balance of environmental safety and performance - even under the toughest drilling
conditions. Since first-generation of drilling fluid known simply as synthetic or pseudo oil-based muds was introduced these products have
offered high performance, low-toxicity alternatives to diesel in oilfield
drilling applications.
Through the years, constant research and field testing lead to the introduction of synthetic muds - with even higher levels of environmental
safety and performance. This product has been successfully used
troughout the world as the preferred replacement for diesel and mineral
oils in drilling fluids applications.
Keywords
Drilling fluids, Environment, Synthetic muds, Toxicity
1. FUNCTION OF DRILLING FLUIDS

Drilling fluids are an essential part of the drilling operation. The composition of drilling fluids ranges from
simple Water-Based Muds (WBM) to complex non-aqueous-based muds. Geography, geology, and economics are
major considerations in selecting the fluid type used for any particular well. Additional factors considered
include drilling performance, anticipated well conditions, worker safety, fluid cost, and waste disposal costs.
While WBMs are usually the mud of choice, some situations require use of other systems to provide acceptable
drilling performance. Drilling fluid is an important component in the drilling process. A fluid is required in the
wellbore to:
Remove the rock fragments, or drill cuttings, from the drilling area and transport them to the surface,
Counterbalance formation pressure to prevent formation fluids (such as oil, gas, and water) from entering the well prematurely (which can lead to a blowout),
Reducing friction in the hole,
Sealing permeable formations,
Prevent the open (uncased) wellbore from caving in, and
Cooling the drill bit and drill-string.
Drilling fluids are formulated to minimize problems associated with geological formations, well chemistry,
depth, and other factors. A major challenge facing mud engineers is to stabilize and control mud properties to
optimize drilling performance as cost-effectively as possible.
A diverse array of mud additives is available to respond to most problems or significant changes in down-hole
conditions. Some mud additives, however, may increase mud toxicity; substantial research has yielded less
toxic alternatives.
172

PROCEEDINGS
Drilling Fluid Types

There are several types of drilling fluids used depending on the drilling conditions encountered:
Water-based muds are used most frequently. The base may be either:
- fresh water, or
- salt water.
Oil-based muds.
Synthetic materials. The oil and gas extraction industry has developed many new oil-like base materials
from which to formulate high-performance drilling fluids.
Air and foam fluids may be used in drilling wells.
- These fluids are less dense than drilling muds.
2. WATER-BASED MUDS AND OIL-BASED MUDS

Water-Based Muds (WBM) are by far the most commonly used muds, These muds generally consist of more than
90% water by volume, with added amounts of barite, clays, lignosulfonate, lignite, caustic soda, and other
special additives for specific well conditions.
The performance of WBMs is deficient for some applications, and oil-based muds (OBM) have been developed
and refined to overcome these deficiencies. OBMs have traditionally been used to improve lubricity, minimize
problems associated with water-sensitive formations, and deal with other site-specific conditions (such as high
temperature) for which WBMs are not suited. OBMs are used where WBMs are dangerous, technically
impossible, or uneconomical to use. These muds generally consist of a base oil (usually diesel or mineral oil),
barite, clays, emulsifiers, water, calcium chloride, lignite, lime, and other additives.
Oil-based muds have been the drilling fluid of choice for a range of special situations, including high
temperatures, hydratable shales, high-angle, extended-reach wells, highdensity mud, and drilling through salt.
Because of their enhanced lubricity, oil-based "spotting fluids" (which may be chemically different from OBMs)
are also used as "spotting pills" during drilling operations with WBMs when the drill pipe becomes stuck in the
hole.
The inability of WBMs to effectively suppress the hydrational tendencies of some water-sensitive formations
can result in hole enlargement or collapse. This problem frequently can be controlled only with OBMs or
synthetic-based muds (SBM), which do not hydrate the shale and thus maintain hole stability.
Wells drilled with OBMs normally produce lower waste volumes than those drilled with WBMs because very little
slumping or caving in of the walls of the hole occurs, and the mud is reconditioned and reused rather than
discharged. In some cases, WBMs augmented with costly synthetic-based additives are also recycled, but most
WBMs are discharged along with the drill cuttings.
3. SYNTHETIC DRILLING FLUIDS

The range of synthetic drilling fluids has been expanded to help operators meet the variety of environmental
regulations found worlwide and hold down offshore drilling costs. Local knowledge improves fluids selection
and use.
The first synthetic drilling fluids developed for off-shore application were based on esters and polyalphaolefins
(PAOs), introduced in early 90. Esters and PAOs were first used in the Nort Sea as the external phase of invert
emulsion muds in response to ever-tightening restrictions on mineral oil-based fluids. PAOs came shortly
thereafter to the Gulf of Mexico and were first used to allow cuttings to be discharged, instead of reinjected or
hauled off for disposal at approved onshore sites.
These first synthetics went on to set drilling and performance records in both the North Sea and Gulf of
Mexico. They were quickly recognized and accepted as a viable category of drilling fluids, known simply as
synthetics, or pseudo oil-based muds.
Although a huge step forward on the environmental compliance side they usually met the most strict
environmental regulations the original esters and PAOs both had their drawbacks when compared to oilbased mud (OBM), including cost. Esters remain the most expensive synthetic-based fluid, which is a major
173

PROCEEDINGS
consideration if lost circulation should occur. The technical limitations of esters include high viscosity, a low
tolerance for highly alkaline environments, and instability in temperatures over 150 C.
POAs, although somewhat less costly then esters, are still in the high-cost category. They also are similar in
viscosity to esters, and have high mud viscosities when compared to mineral oil fluids. However, they have a
greater tolerance than esters for highly alkaline environments and high temperatures.
The performance of synthetics excels in comparison to water-based fluids. Many wells have now been driiled
using synthetics due to their enhanced lubricity, hole cleaning characteristics and improved rate of penetration
(ROP). The increased ROP attributed to synthetic fluids is directly related to their enhanced lubricity and hole
cleaning characteristics, as well as overall system stability and lack of reaction with water-sensitive shales. For
example, in many cases, using synthetics has led to better hole cleaning and lubricity, which resulted in smaller
bit wear and fewer bit changes. In fact, both PAOs and esters have set North Sea drilling records.
In terms of downhole performance, synthetics have proven performance similar to that of conventional oilbased muds, and even better in extended reach and horizontal applications. They meet environmental
requirements better and may damage productive formations less than OBMs.
The environmental aspect is a key positive point. The alternative is to re-injected traditional oil mud into the
formation or transport the cuttings to shore. Compared to hauling or injecting OBM waste, sinthetics, reduce
air pollution and the potentional for oil spills associated with hauling and eliminate associated toxic organic
compounds.
As environmetal regulations proliferate around the globe, and each country create its own unique set of rules, a
need has arisen for more specially formulated synthetics. These new synthetic formulas allow operators to
choose the most cost-effective synthetic that meets a particular countrys environmental protocol and
provides excellent technical performance. Note that the same fluid may not pass the protocols of every
country.
With a broader spectrum of synthetic fluids to choose from, the decision making process for each well is now
expanded to include the following sequence of fluid-relate questions.
Which fluids meet the technical requirements of this well?
Of these, which meet the local environmental protocol?
And of these, which is most cost-effective?
The second generation of synthetics has been developed primarily from the olefin chemistry originally used in
the first generation PAO fluids. These are either linear alphaolefins (LAOs) or internal or isomerized olefins (IO),
which are very similar in chemistry and structure. IOs have o lower pour point and may biodegrade more rapidly
than LAOs. Both LAOs and IOs biodegrade more rapidly than PAOs.
Biodegradation rates are a key element in the various environmental protocols being dealt with by operators
today. Understanding these unique distinctions between the olefin-based synthetics can improve the selection
process.
Components Of Synthetic-Based Fluids
Synthetic-based fluids are manufactured by various chemical processes that synthesize larger molecules from
basic building blocks of relatively pure materials. The synthesis takes place within very controlled temperature
and pressure ranges and produces very uniform products. By varying the basic building blocks and
manufacturing conditions, manufacturers can create different synthetic fluids that exibit varyng rheological
properties and environmental performance parameters.
Olefins
Ethilene is the basic building block for the olefin-based synthetic fluids that include linear alpha olefins (LAO),
internal olefins (IO) and polyalphaolefins (PAO). LAOs are straight-chain moleculs formed from ethylene with a
double bond in each molecule at the end position. IOs are similar to LAOs with the double bond moved to an
internal position. PAOs are long, branched-chain molecules formed from oligermerization of LAOs with one
double bond distributed throughout each molecule. The double bond within PAOs can be saturated or
unsaturated.
Esters
Fatty acids and alcohols are the basic building blocks for esters. Vegetable oils are the source for fatty acid
building blocks used for drilling fluids. Esters are manufactured through a variety of chemical processes that
174

PROCEEDINGS
are controlled to ensure end product purity. Properties of the ester are related to the chain lenght on either
side of the ester functionality.
Ethers
Alcohols are the basic building blocks for ethers. Ethers are manufactured from a combination of two organic
alcohols.
What is a Synthetic?
In basic terms, "synthetic" applies to the process by which the end product was manufactured, where the
ending molecules of the process are not normally found in nature. Fluids from chemical processes are defined
as being "synthetic", while fluids extracted from refinery streams are generally defined as being "oil-based."
In order to define "synthetic", as it applies to drilling fluids, there is list of the non-aqueous drilling fluid (NADF)
offshore disposal regulations as legislated in several parts of the world. This included NADF regulations from
Europe (OSPAR, 2000), the United States (USEPA, 2001), Canada (CNOSP, 2002), and Australia (DoIR, 1999). Also
is included a review of NADF by the International Association of Oil and Gas Producers (OGP, 2003).
Table 1. Non-aqueous drilling fluid (NADF) as legislated in several parts of the world.
Base Oil
Process
Europe
(2000)
Canada
(2002)
US
(2001)
Australia
(1999)
OGP
(2003)
Diesel
Refinery extraction
OBF1
OBF
OBF
OBF
OBF
Mineral
oils/paraffins
Refinery extraction
OBF
OBF
OBF
OBF
OBF
Mineral oils/ paraffins
Refinery extraction and severe hydrotreatment
SBF2
EMOBF3
EMOBF
NA4
EMOBF
Synthesised paraffins
Fischer - Tropsch or LAO hydroformylation
SBF
SBF
SBF
NA
SBF
Linear alpha olefins
Ethylene oligomerisation
SBF
SBF
SBF
SBF
SBF
Internal olefins
LAO isomerisation
SBF
SBF
SBF
SBF
SBF
Esters
Condensation of fatty acids and alcohol
SBF
SBF
SBF
SBF
SBF
Source: http://www.shell.com
OBF = oil base fluid;
SBF = synthetic base fluid;
EMOBF = enchanced mineral oil base fluid;
NA = not addressed
As the table 1 shows, all the regulatory bodies and organisations agree that diesel, mineral oil and paraffins
extracted from refineries are oil base fluids (OBF). They also agree that synthetic base fluids (SBF) include
paraffins produced via Fischer Tropsch (gas to liquids) or linear alpha olefin hydroformylation processes, linear
alpha olefins, internal olefins, and esters.
Controversy, however, continues over fluids extracted from refinery streams that are severely hydrotreated.
Hydrotreatment is a processing step used to convert aromatics in fluids to paraffins. In the process, some minor
chemical reactions occur as the aromatics are treated.
Europe's OSPAR classifies such fluids as "synthetic". The US EPA, CNOSP and OGP classify these products as
neither an SBF nor an OBF, but instead create an entirely new category known as
enhanced mineral oil base fluid (EMOBF).
There are differences between products labelled SBF, OBF, and EMOBF.
Even within a certain class of compounds (eg paraffins), some products may have less environmental impact
than others.
4. CONCLUSION
Sinthetic drilling fluids incorporate all of the drilling performance benefits of an oil-based mud (OBM) without
the environmental disadventages. Sinthetics do not contain the complex hydrocarbons and toxic compounds
that remain in even highly refined mineral oils.
175

PROCEEDINGS
SBMs have a high cost compared to oil-based systems and this investment must be protected by evironmental
testing and an in-depth understanding of likely system contaminants.
Most offshore areas today allow discharge of cuttings from synthetic fluids. Not all types of SBMs can be
discharged in every offshore area.
The ability to discharge cuttings provides major cost savings and environmental benefits compared to oil-based
cuttings, which must be ground up and reinjected into disposal wells or transported back to shore for
treatment and disposal.
A thorough knowledge of worldwide environmental regulations and the variations in testing protocol from
country to country is necessary to ensure compliance.
After all, the key to use of synthetic drilling fluids is the proof of evironmental acceptability before the well
stars. Next comes the continued proof of noncontamination during and after the well is drilled.
Well-researched drilling fluids, back up by environmental support functions and onsite engineering, can provide
the operator with the tools and resources required to drill a successful, cost-efficient well.
Acknowledgments
This paper is the result of the project financed by the Ministry of Science and Technological Development in
Serbia (Project No 33001).
REFERENCES
[1]
Darley, H.C.H. and Gray, G.R.: Composition and Properties of Drilling and Completion Fluids. Fifth Edition. Gulf Publishing Co.,
Houston, TX. 1988.
[2]
Environmental Protection Agency: Guidelines and Standards of Synthetic-Based Drilling Fluids and Other Non-Aqueous Drilling
Fluids in the Oil and Gas Extraction, Office of Water, Washington, DC. 1999.
[3]
Kenny, P.: Ester-based muds show promise for replacing some oil-based muds, Oil Gas J. November 8, 1993, pp 88-91.
[4]
U.S. Department of the Interior, Minerals Management Service: Environmental Impacts of Synthetic Based Drilling Fluids, OCS
Study, New Orleans, 2000.
[5]
http://www.osha.gov
[6]
http://www.shell.com/chemicals/products-services/our-products/alpha-olefins-detergent-alcohols/neoflo/synthetic-drillingfluids-defined.html
176

PROCEEDINGS
INCREASING THE SAFETY LEVEL IN HARD

COAL EXPLOITATION THROUGH INNOVATIVE RESEARCH
ABSTRACT
Ion TOTH1
Constantin LUPU2
Doru CIOCLEA3
Cristian TOMESCU4
Ion GHERGHE5

1
ion.toth @insemex.ro 2 constantin.lupu@insemex.ro 3
doru.cioclea@insemex.ro
4
cristian.tomescu@insemex.ro 5
ion.gherghe@insemex.ro
Following the atomic disaster from Fukushima-Japan, the energy strategies worldwide have changed.This change of strategy has also been
achieved in our country. Fossil raw materials like coal will still remain the
main energy source. For the efficient use of these raw materials, there
have been formed at country level the Oltenia and the Hunedoara energy complexes which are using lignite from the Oltenia coal field and hard
coal from the jiu Valley coal field.
The profitability of hard coal exploitation in Jiu Valley has been achieved
by dividing the National Hard Coal Company into two companies: National Hard Coal Society Petrosani (SNH) and the National Society for
Mine Closure Jiu Valley (SNIMVJ).
The SNH comprises Lonea, Livezeni, Vulcan and Lupeni mining units and
SNIMVJ comprises Petrila, Paroseni and Uricani mining units. For increasing the safety level in hard coal exploitation, there are applied for both
companies a series of methods for preventing/combating spontaneous
combustions, measures resulting from the research activities carried out
by a team from INCD INSEMEX Petrosani. Of these research activities,
the prevention of spontaneous combustion using inorganic inhibitors of
zinc chloride type has been patented, having the patent no. 126308, and
the framework methods for preventing/fighting against spontaneous
combustions and endogenous fires is pending a patent, having the patent request no. 2011-00357. The methods from the two patents/patent
requests have been implemented in the two companies.
Keywords
Coal, Spontaneous Combustion, Prevention, Combating, Technology
1. INTRODUCTION
Mineral resources sector in Romania can be a particularly important segment designed to actively support the
country's economic development by providing a wide range of mineral products, used as raw materials, to reduce dependence on imports, to ensure energy security. "Strategy of the Mining Industry for the period 20122035, is a document that takes into account the new mutations in the evolution of this field. Mineral resources
such as energy raw materials (coal, uranium, geothermal) represents a great challenge for the future economic
development of Europe, on energy security. Regarding the long-term role of coal, most independent experts
believe, however, that coal-based energy can ensure security of supply that is available and sustainable, as an
engine of economic growth which cannot be sidelined. It is estimated that the EU energy mix will still very
much be based on fossil fuels, including coal, and for the countries of Central and Eastern Europe, coal will be
the main pillar in energy security by 2035. European companies can rely on coal and lignite in their energy mix
for decades to come due to large resources. Domestic production (EU) of coal demonstrates best practices
worldwide operation, environmental protection and occupational safety. Fossil fuel security and access to resources must therefore remain a priority for future EU energy policy [7].
177

PROCEEDINGS
2. RISKS DERIVED FROM THE EXPLOITATION OF COAL

Risk analysis of the level of exploitations of coal shows that the major risk is represented by: explosive mixture
in the active and inactive mine workings and appearance of endogenous fires due to spontaneous combustion
of coal mass [1]. To mitigate the risks caused by spontaneous combustion the specialists at INCD INSEMEX have
developed a number of devices and technologies that have been implemented in the extraction of coal.
Below are presented the innovative actions.
Preventive engineering method with inhibiting type sprayed particles
Description of the installation used to produce the inhibiting sprayed substance

The prevention of endogenous fires during hard coal mining relies on very fine (micron sized particles) of the
inhibiting solution spread all through the goaf and at the working face, depending on the location of the installation and in compliance with the air flow.[3]
The installation used to produce sprayed particles (figure 1) is made of a 200 ml tank (1), an air-water spraying
device (2) and the connection hoses (3) to the compressed air mains at the working place and to the tank with
the inhibiting substance (5). A tap (4) is mounted on the compressed air hose of the spraying device.[6]
The spraying device for spraying the inhibiting substance has got the following parameters:
the working pressure: 0,3 0,6 MPa;
consumption of compressed air: 0,8 1,05 m3/min;
consumption of inhibiting solution: 0,8 1 l/min;
sprayed solution ratio: 90 100 %.
Figure 1. The installation used to produce sprayed particles
Treatment method with sprayed particles of inhibiting substance

Due to the inhibiting characteristics displayed by the phosphate during the coal oxidation and self-ignition process, coal oxidation and self-ignition process, a suitable treatment with sprayed particles from the phosphate
group shall diminish the risk of spontaneous combustions.[5]
To treat adequately a goaf, this spraying device shall be located in the cross drift of the blasted pre-crushing
raise. The sprayed device shall also be mounted in front of the holes in goafs where high concentrations of CO
were previously detected (over 0,1 % vol).
The spraying device shall be placed at a height of 1 -1,5 m from the mine floor, being orientated towards the
area that is to be treated with the help of sprayed particles and shall operate in every point for approximately
one hour.
Results
The experiment was carried out between April May 2003.
The effects of the sprayed particles of substance were multiple and they consisted mainly in the following aspects:
178

PROCEEDINGS
the sprayed particles conveyed inside goafs and covered the coal left in goafs;
the coal dust in suspension from the cross drift adhered the sprayed particles; accordingly the air from
inside the working area cleared up within minutes from the spraying of the substance;
when spraying the inhibiting substance during blastings or immediately after blasting operations, the resulting gases and especially the toxic ones adhered to these inhibiting particles within minutes. This
might be one way to diminish the ventilation period necessary after performing a blasting.
During its formation, the sprayed particle shall cool the area and thus it shall dissipate the heat that comes up
during spontaneous combustions.
Engineering method to prevent the occurrence of spontaneous combustion with the help of chemical foam
and inhibiting substances
The mixture of chemical substances used for the treatment of goofs is made of phosphate mixted with a Foaming agent with a large expansion rates. [2] These substances are mixted with water and are injected into goafs
with the help of the installation shown in figure 2.
Description of the installation used for the treatment of goafs

The installation shown in Figure 2 is made of the following parts:
water supply network;
line mixer;
100 l tank for the mixture;
foam generating pipe;
device for the chemical foam ASC-3; it is made up of a 15 kW electric motor, air-driven motor and a
SADU type centrifugal pump.
Figure 2. Installation used for the treatment of goafs
Operating principle of the installation

Before the commissioning of this installation, it is necessary to mount the installation shown in fig. 2 and to
connect the whole installation to the mine water supply network or to the mudding networking.
To connect the sub-assemblies among them, there shall be used B and C type connecters used by firemen and
type C hoses with a diameter of 50 mm.
When the supply valve is turned on, water goes into the line mixer (3). During this stage, water shall also cross
an ejection convergent-divergent nozzle and shall absorb the mixture that was previously formed in the tank
(4), this making a suitable dosing between the amount of water and the mixture made of the chemical
substance and a foaming agent.
Then, this mixture crosses the foam generating pipe (2) under pressure. Here a large amount of air is being
absorbed and this foam gets an expansion rate of around 10. Due to the fact that this mixture displays a low
pressure when it leaves the foam generating pipe so that this mixture is thrown up to 6 8 m distance, it is
necessary to use ASC-3 (6) device for injection into drill holes. This one vacuums the foam from the pipe and
discharges it at high pressure inside the pipe located in the goaf.
The foam jet is driven towards goaf by pipes of 50 mm in diameter. Foam shall be introduced in the caved rock
by interspersing ASC-3 connected to the holes dirlled toward (see Fig. 2).
His operation shall go on until the whole amount of foam is introduced inside the goaf.
The treatment can be carried out in several stages.
179

PROCEEDINGS
Effects of the goaf treatment with chemical substances

The chemical substances (the foaming agent together with the inhibiting substance sent to the goaf) have
allowed the carrying on of mining operations with no underground fires by reactivation. The mining of the
deposit with SCRI shall create the prerequisite to go with the mining of the Power sub-level by longwall mining
with undermined bed.
The use of chemical substances in goafs have led to:
a cooling of the influence area that has been covered by mixture of chemical substances;;
a diminished tendency to oxidation of the coal left in goafs, thus reducing the possibility of occurrence
of spontaneous combustions;
a diminution in the carbon dioxide concentration that exists as a result of a previous underground fire.
Spraying devices
General
The air-driven spraying device is intended either for producing sprayed particles of liquids, or for spraying of
powder substances. It can be used both in the mining industry (to fight against spontaneous combustions and
coal dust) and in other industries.[4]
The spraying device is made up of two levels, supplied separately with compressed air. The first level comprises
two coaxial bodies connected by a screw, so that their screwing shall change the size of the first interstice
through which the compressed air, come from the first coupling, penetrates the primary expansion chamber;
the interstice shall be determined by the blocking nut; the first level is screwed on the second level and
between the two levels there is an intermediate expansion chamber that can also be adjusted. This one has
several circular orifices for ventilation purpose. The second level is also made up of two screwed bodies that are
being fastened by a blocking nut so as to adjust the size of a second interstice through which the compressed
air, come from the second coupling, penetrates the intermediate expansion chamber and from here the final
expansion chamber. From here on, the sprayed particles are exhausted into the surrounding environment.
This spraying device can use both watery substances and powder substances from open tanks and can create
sprayed particles or powder jet of long action range. Another advantage is the fact that it can provide a large
adjusting range; so, it can increase or decrease the sprayed particles flow rate and it can adjust the size of
sprayed particles. This device has a relatively simple construction that can be done with relatively low costs.
Description
The spraying device has one 1st level that performs the depression necessary to absorb the watery solutions or
the powder substances and one 2nd level that transforms the air-water mixture (1st level) into sprayed particles
(Figure 3).
1st level is made of two separate bodies (3 and 4) which, by screwing on, they can vary an interstice a; thus, it is
produced the depression necessary by the expansion of compressed air introduced through a supply coupling 5
into a primary expansion chamber b where there is being produced the water-air mixture during the 1st stage
(water arrives by coupling 6). In order to settle the interstice a to a determined value, there shall be used a
blocking nut 7.
2nd level is made of two distinct bodies (8 and 9) which, by screwing on, they can vary a second interstice c;
thus, it is produced the depression necessary both to increase the depression created by the 1st level and to
introduce additional air by circular orifices d. This operation is being accomplished by the depression of the
compressed air that penetrates through the 2nd supply coupling 10 into the intermediate expansion chamber
e.
In order to determine the interstice c, there shall be used a blocking nut.
The 1st level is common body with the 2nd level by screwing means between bodies 3 and 8. By this operation,
the volume of the intermediate expansion chamber e can vary in relation to the needs.
During the last stage, the sprayed particles are made by mixing the air and the liquid in an expansion chamber
f. From here on, these sprayed particles are discharged into the air.
The watery solution or the powder can penetrate the spraying device, for example, through a flexible pipe that
shall be attached to the coupling 6. The depression created by the expansion of the compressed air, suppressed
through the interstice a, in the primary expansion chamber b, as well the depression created by the expansion
of compressed air, suppressed through the interstice c, shall produce the admission and the movement of the
liquid or of the powder substance inside the flexible pipe up to the interior of the device.
180

PROCEEDINGS
The 2nd stage expansion of the compressed air and the possibility to adjust the size of interstices a and c and
the intermediate expansion chamber e, this device can provide a large adjustment range with direct results
over the flow rate and the size of the sprayed particles
Figure 3. Spraying device
Use of device
The spraying device represents the basic component part of the installation used during the prevention of
spontaneous combustion, method applied during the mining of self-oxidizing useful mineral substances. It has
to be underlined the fact that the above-mentioned method is being used by all hard coal mines in the Jiu Valley. Consequently, there have been recorded lesser underground fires at the National Hard Coal Company in
Petrosani.
3. CONCLUSIONS
Coal shall remain the dominant source for power generation worldwide.
One of the most important risk factors in the coal mining are the spontaneous combustions;
The researches that have been carried out during the last 5 years have materialized into patents and in
pending applications for patent.
Patent no. 120531 B1 refers to the spraying device which is the basic element of the installation used to
prevent the spontaneous combustion with inhibiting sprayed particles.
Patent no. 121710 / 2007 refers to the method for the prevention of spontaneous combustion with the
help of chemical substances injected into goafs.
Patent no. 126308 Method for preventing the spontaneous combustion of coal
Application for patent a 2003 / 01009 refers to the method for the prevention of spontaneous combustion on self-oxidizing mineral substance with the help of inhibiting sprayed particles.
Application for patent a 2005 / 0003 refers to the method for additional sealing of mine daws.
The large scale implementation of the patents in CNH Petrosani has diminished the underground fires,
with an increment of the safety during mining operations.
REFERENCES
[1]
Matei, I., Toth, I., Cioclea, D., Purcaru, S.I., Vochioiu, H - Combustia spontan n minele de crbune, editura PRINTEVEREST Deva, 2003.
[2]
Matei, I., Cioclea, D., Toth, I., Gligor, C., Purcaru, S.I., Voinoiu, N. - Prevenirea combustiilor spontane la extragerea crbunilor prin
metoda de exploatare cu banc subminat, editura AGORA, Clrai, 2004.
[3]
Toth, I. - Tehnologie de prevenire a combustiilor spontane la extragerea crbunelui prin metode de exploatare cu banc subminat, Program MENER, 2002 2004.
[4]
Brevet de invenie nr. 120533 B1.
[5]
Brevet de invenie nr. 121710 / 2007.
[6]
Brevet de inventie nr. 126308/2012.
[7]
Iosif Andras Resurse Minerale si dezvoltarea durabila, Buletin CENTIREM nr. 6/2012
181

PROCEEDINGS
EVALUATION OF THE EXTERNAL RISKS

IN THE COAL MINING COMPANY KOSTOLAC, SERBIA
ABSTRACT
Marija KUZMANOVI1
Aleksandar MILUTINOVI2
Mirko VUJOEVI1
Biljana PANI1

Organizational Sciences, Serbia,
marija.kuzmanovic@fon.bg.ac.rs
2
Mining and Geology, Belgrade, Serbia
Majority of contemporary companies operate in a turbulent environment

and plenty of their decision problems involving risk and uncertainty. This
particularly applies to the mining companies. Namely, mining project
managers frequently face important decisions regarding the best allocation of limited resources among mining projects that are characterized
by substantial financial risk and uncertainty. Thus, the challenge of sustainable development requires the mining industry to adopt proactive
risk management approaches that recognize, integrate and implement
the three pillars of social, environmental and economic sustainability.
This paper deals with analysis of external risks in the Serbian mining
company Kostolac, which deals with surface mining of coal. Kostolac is a
part of the state power utilities system with the function of supplying
power plants with the required fuel.
Since Kostolac is mining company of national interest, the external risks
have been identified as economic, financial, market, regulatory, risks
with regards to expropriation, geopolitical, social and environmental
risks. Based on the preliminary list of potential hazards, risk assessment
is carried out using method known as Failure Mode and Effects Analysis
(FMEA). FMEA is a tool originally developed for risk and reliability analysis
of various technical systems, and there is relatively little research on
how it can be applied to non-technical areas. Risk analysis is performed
based on current conditions for few potential scenarios that predict different types of changes in the analyzed period.
Keywords
External Risks, Evaluation, FMEA, Coal Mining, Kostolac
1. INTRODUCTION
Mining operations represent an activity with plenty of decision problems involving risk and uncertainty. Mining
project managers frequently face important decisions regarding the best allocation of scarce resources among
mining ventures that are characterized by substantial financial risk and uncertainty. The challenge of
sustainable development requires the mining industry to adopt proactive risk management approaches that
recognize, integrate and implement the three pillars of social, environmental and economic sustainability.
Regardless of the project importance (national, economic, etc.), minerals industry requires great investments in
most cases, which according to the amount and importance fall into the domain of critical business decisionmaking. Before investing in such projects, an analysis should be conducted and main and alternative sources of
financing should be selected, as well as the method of financing and the scheduled start and financing dynamics.
This paper deals with analysis of external risks in the Serbian mining company Kostolac, which deals with surface mining of coal. Kostolac is a part of the state power utilities system with the function of supplying power
plants with the required fuel. Since Kostolac is mining company of national interest, the external risks have
182

PROCEEDINGS
been identified as economic, financial, market, regulatory, risks with regards to expropriation, geopolitical,
social and environmental risks.
To manage risk effectively, uncertainty and unpredictability must be recognized and, where possible, key information gaps need to be filled to reduce uncertainty. Many techniques, ranging from simple qualitative
methods to advanced quantitative methods, are available to help identify and analyze hazards.
In this paper risk assessment is carried out using method known as Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (FMEA).
FMEA is a very powerful and effective analytical tool which is widely used in engineering projects to examine
possible failure modes and eliminate potential failure during system designs. In particular, it provides design
engineers with quantitative or qualitative measures necessary to guide the implementation of corrective actions by focusing on the main failure modes and its impact on the products (Chen, 2007). FMEA has been widely
adopted by reliability practitioners and has become standard practice in worldwide manufacturing companies
(Chen, 2007; Hung, 1999). The main objective of FMEA is to prioritize potential failures according to their risk
and drives actions to eliminate or reduce their likelihood of occurrence. FMEA was successfully applied in many
areas such as automobiles, electronics, consumer products, power plants, and telecommunications. It has proven to be effective especially in higher-risk industries such as nuclear power. A FMEA, extended with the fuzzy
identification of failure modes, was performed to determine the affects of the aging process to the overall nuclear plant (Guimaraes and Lapa, 2007). Tsuru et al. (2008) show another use of FMEA in the nuclear power industry to identify the event sequences that need to be evaluated for safety purposes. In contrast to the extensive study of technical systems and processes, there is relatively little research on how FMEA can be applied to
non-technical areas. Functional FMEA, which involves human factors in evaluation of different automation alternatives, has been used to highlight the potential risks in automation technologies (Almannai et al., 2008).
Makajic-Nikolic et al. (2011) used FMEA to perform qualitative risk assessment of the public enterprise, Electric
Power Industry of Serbia.
2. METHOD
FMEA Methodology
The FMEA process is a way to identify the failures, effects, and risks within a process or product, and then, eliminate or reduce them. The main idea of FMEA is to generate a risk priority number (RPN) for each failure mode.
In the RPN methodology the parameters used to determine the criticality of an item failure mode are, the
severity of its failure effects, its frequency of occurrence, and the probability of the failure being detected before the impact of the effect is realized. Tables 1, 2 and 3 show the adopted qualitative scales used for the severity (S), the occurrence (O) and the detectability (D) indexes (Makajic-Nikolic et al., 2011). The changes were
made to the category criteria definitions to emphasis their implications for a managers decision making process.
The severity rating is the importance of the risk on end-user requirements. It is driven by risk effects and criticality and applies only to the effect. The occurrence rating of a risk is the frequency with which a given risk
occurs during the observed period. It refers to the average probability that the risk cause will occur. The detection rating is a measure of the capability of current controls. A detection rating indicates the ability to detect
or predict the risk before causing effect.
Table 1. Severity rating evaluation criteria
Severity
Rating
Description
Minor
1-2
Risk is of such minor nature that the management will probably not detect risk.
Low
3-4
Risk will result in slight management annoyance and concernment.
Moderate
5-6
Risk will result in management dissatisfaction and concernment.
High
7-8
Risk will result in high degree of dissatisfaction and cause serious concernment.
Extreme
9-10
Risk will result in major management dissatisfaction and serious concernment.
183

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2. Occurrence rating criteria
Occurrence
Rating
Description
Minor
1-2
No risk ever associated with almost identical situations.
Low
3-4
Only isolated risk associated with almost identical situations.
Moderate
5-6
Generally associated with similar situations that have experienced occasional risk, but not in major
proportions.
High
7-8
Generally associated with similar situations that have often had the same risk; decision is not in
control.
Extreme
9-10
Risk is almost inevitable during the observed period.
Table 3. Detection rating criteria
Detection
Rating
Description
Very high
1-2
Very high probability that the risk will be detected/predicted during the observed period. Verification
or controls will almost certainly detect the existence of risk.
High
3-4
Verification or controls have a good chance of detecting the existence of risk.
Moderate
5-6
Verification or controls are likely to detect the existence of risk.
Low
7-8
Verification or controls not likely to detect the existence of risk.
Very low
9-10
Verification or controls will not or cannot detect the existence of risk.
The RPN is a mathematical product of the severity, the occurrence and the detection (Figure 1). The number is
used to identify the most critical failure mode, leading to corrective action. The higher the risk number, the
more serious the failure could be. A rule of thumb is to take a serious look at RPNs greater than 125 (Ayyub,
2003).
Figure 1. Process of Failure Mode and Effect Analysis FMEA (FMEA Cycle)
The list of items that are considered critical for reliable and/or safe operation of the system (Critical item list CIL) is further generated based on FMEA RPN. When the critical components have been identified and ranked, a
concerted effort can be placed on reducing the criticality of the most critical components in the system. Corrective actions should first be directed at the highest ranking concerns and critical items where causes are not
well understood. The purpose is to reduce the RPN by applying two types of corrective actions (Puente et al.,
2002): eliminate or control the source of the failure; or reduce the ratings of severity, occurrence, and detection.
Those corrective actions will, in many cases, result in changes in the criticality of individual components. For
this reason, a FMEA must be accomplished each time a component or subsystem change is executed. The critically ranking list is to be correspondingly revised to reflect changes in component criticality (Kececioglu, 2002)
Therefore, FMEA can be observed as a two-stage technique; the first phase is to identify the potential risks,
decide the value of Severity, Occurrence, Detection and calculate RPN. In the second phase, recommendations
for correct actions should be made, and the RPN needs to be re-calculated after correct actions (see Figure 1).
184

PROCEEDINGS
A list of identified external risks in the coal mining company Kostolac

Kostolac is mining company of national interest and it is a part of the state power utilities system with the
function of supplying power plants with the required energy substance. External risks which have a primary
influence on mines of national importance are: economic, financial, market, regulatory, risks with regards to
expropriation, geopolitical, social and environmental risks. Further, we briefly described each of the identified
external risks with particular reference to the situation in the mining company Kostolac. Table 4 provides classifications and risk evaluation results, as well as results obtained using FMEA methodology.
The economic and financial risk analysis is mostly based on assumptions and estimates, such as costs, prices,
demand etc., and risk assessment requires an analysis of capital investments made in the past period of at least
10 years.
Financial risks refer to economic conditions in Serbia, which indirectly influence mining business. The major
financial risk is faced with is decrease of capital inflow and fall in foreign loans, which can be explained by the
global financial crisis and significantly low rating due to the ruling of the International Court of Justice and anti
corruption laws (Makajic et al. 2011). Although the mining Company Kostolac has its own resources (accumulated net income) for the planned project to increase production from 9 to 12 million tons of coal annually, additional resources must be provided either from state funds or by taking loans from the banks. Therefore, particularly significant are investment, inflation and interest rate risks.
Investment risks are characteristic for developing countries, and are defined by political and financial instability. Management of these risks requires help from the Government of the country where the project is being
implemented. In Kostolac, this risk is associated with commitment and determination of the Government to
create a favorable investment climate, or to invest in the Company that is strategically important to the State.
The Government is making certain attempts in that direction, however, consequences of the economic crisis
have reflected upon decrease of foreign capital influx into Serbia. The presence of this risk is moderate, but
easily predicted through monitoring of legal regulations, economic analyses and reports.
In the past inflation was a serious problem in Serbia. The net inflow of foreign capital and domestic savings can
increase investments and growth, trigger monetary expansion and increased competition and may trigger inflation (EBRD, 2008). The inflation rate can be predicted and controlled by certain economic policies and
measures. The likelihood of the inflation rate increasing is low, easily predicted, and the severity is moderate.
Until the end of 2008, the loan market operated normally and the financial sector developed fast. The progressive loan growth, however, was characterized by unfavorable interest rates, while bond transactions and loans
to Serbia subsided with the global crisis becoming deeper and more severe. The reduction of loans led to the
reduction in investments, while an overvalued exchange rate of the dinar largely contributed to the fall in exports. Interest rate risk can be regulated by certain economic measures. The likelihood of an interest rate increase is low, possibility of its detection is very high, while the severity rate is moderate.
With regards to the economic aspect, according to financial reports, the Company has in recent years had a
favorable ratio of operating income compared to operating expenses. However, the amount of capital is not
consistent with the amount of the capital reported with the registrar of the Serbian Business Registers Agency.
There are significant uncertainties influencing financial reports, financial position and operations, including the
future development and outcome of issues related to significant amounts of liabilities arising from loans from
foreign creditors and domestic banks. Since the Company had greater short-term liabilities than current assets
in the previous period, it is questionable whether the Company will in future be able to settle current liabilities
due to suppliers, creditors and lenders. However, the likelihood of lack of liquidity is high, possibility of its detection is very high, while the severity rate is moderate.
Market risk analyzes refer to assessment of the price of natural resources, market competition, variability of
the prices of raw material, the expenses of placing raw material, etc.
The main consumers of coal exploited in open pits are Kostolac power plants; therefore market risks such as
mode of market supply, changes in prices of mineral raw materials in the market, placing materials of other
producers, changes in demand, the differences in the quality of raw materials, etc. are irrelevant in this case. A
minor part of the mined coal (coal pieces) is used for the consumer population in the immediate and wider region, which is not of great importance for the business of the Company.
When assessing legal and regulatory risks, an analysis of various documentations is conducted (related to the
legal regulations and Contracts on concessions, technical documentations, permits and agreements, safety of
employees and property, etc).
185

PROCEEDINGS
The management of the Company is constantly improving its own integrated system of management by respecting the laws, standards and other regulations governing mining and power production, especially activities of general interest in accordance with the European Union regulations and other international legal documents in the field of mining, energy, environmental protection, energy efficiency and standards of health and
safety.
Risks with regards to expropriation are connected with legal and regulatory risks in the segment of the Law
referring to the purchase or lease of land.
On the basis of the Law on Expropriation and the Law on Administrative Procedure, as proposed by "Power
Plants and Mines Kostolac, the Government of the Republic of Serbia adopted a resolution establishing the
public interest for expropriation. In accordance with the Regulation on the establishment of the Spatial Plan of
the Special Purpose Area of Kostolac coal basin on property in cadastre municipalities Klievac and Kostolac
village, located in the city of Pozarevac, this resolution specifies public interest for the administrative transfer
of property - land and facilities on the land, which by law may be subject to expropriation, or administrative
transfer of property with the aim of expanding the Surface mine "Drmno". Severity and likelihood of this risk
are low, while detection possibility is high.
Another risk to consider is environment protection risk. Besides founding new regulatory institutions, Serbia
built a set of legal frameworks for environment protection. In this area, Serbia is about 40 years behind the
developed countries of the European Union. About 30% of all activities that need to be done in order for Serbia
to be integrated into the European Union are associated with introduction and implementation of ecological
regulations and standards. The Law on Environmental Protection, which was put into effect at the end of 2004,
obliges companies to harmonize their operations with their stipulations by 2015, as well as with EU regulations.
That requires significant financial means which Kostolac should provide from its own resources, through
donations and international institutions. However,
During the last decade, the company has invested significantly in facilities for environmental protection, and
has participated in the construction of important infrastructure in Kostolac and surrounding villages, which
further reduces environmental pollution and increases the standard of living of the local population. One of
those projects is the construction of heating network in the village Drmno (near the power plant "Kostolac B")
and renovation of network in Kostolac. Severity and likelihood of this risk are moderate, and detection
possibility is high.
Geopolitical risks are in most of the literature divided into four categories. The first category is defined in
terms of the political risks of political events (the change or fall of the government, adverse government actions, etc). The second category comprises the political constraints influencing the mining industry (expropriation or nationalization, arbitrary restrictions, taxation and competition from the public sector). The third category includes political risks arising from both the business and political environment (damage due to civil unrest, internal or external war damages, revocation or disrespect of the contract, the losses arising from the
process of deterioration). The fourth category considers political risk in the context of the overall environment
without a detailed search for the definition of the concept of political risk.
Geopolitical risks in terms of foreign influence and destabilization of coal production do not directly jeopardize
the Company, considering that the service life is forecast to approximately 2040, which is not a strategic interest of economically, politically and militarily developed countries in Europe and worldwide. Civil unrest, adverse
governmental actions, internal and external war damage are also negligible potential risks with regard to the
socio-political situation, domestic and foreign policy.
Regional risk analysis is mainly carried out for mines which are of importance to a particular region or area
within a country. The state may or may not support the development of minerals industry of local interest. In
most cases, support is gained on the basis of the regional projects capital, and the funds are provided through
placement of resources in a given region.
The significance of surface mines and power plants "Kostolac" and their geographic location, offers great
possibilities for the development of the entire region through regional economic cooperation and
implementation of the preliminary project "Danube Strategies". From the perspective of regional development
with regards to coal mining and survival of the Company, the risks are minimal and observable.
Social risks arise mainly due to environmental degradation, loss of resources, threats to the health and safety
of workers and the population living in the vicinity of the mine, the increased influx of foreigners in the area of
mining, misuse of resources, loss of land, uneven distribution of benefits, changes in values, unequal participation in decision-making, etc. The above causes can lead to opposite views on industrial minerals, difficulties in
186

PROCEEDINGS
financing mining operations, share price decline, the erosion of credibility, creation of a negative image for the
mining company, etc.
The Company supports projects in the fields of science, education, culture, health, humanitarian activities, religious organizations and sports through various forms of sponsorship and donations. Since the "Kostolac" Company is the only major company in Kostolac and the wider area, a large number of people and organizations
have been involved in coal mining and electricity production for a number of years. The open pit mining field
"Drmno" is the location of the well-known archaeological site "Viminacium" and its rapid development during
recent years is connected with the significant technical and financial assistance from the Company, including
the harmonization of mutual actions in order to simultaneously preserve the cultural heritage and enable the
uninterrupted production of coal and electricity.
Natural risks are impossible to predict or prevent. However, the mining field of Kostolac mines is located in an
area which is not jeopardized in terms of natural disasters such as earthquakes, volcanoes, stormy winds and
floods. The geological structure and geomorphology of the area is set out in the geological elaborates that
preceded the exploitation of coal, therefore adverse occurrences are not expected in this aspect. While severity
of this risk is high, likelihood of occurrence is minor and detection possibility is moderate.
3. RESULTS
The results of FMEA are shown in Table 4. Column RPN is the product of the values in columns O, D and C, while
the column Rank ranks failure modes. It is obvious that the most critical failure mode is Mass strikes of employees, because it is estimated that they can have severe impact on performance, and Occurrence is estimated to
be relatively high (from moderate to high). The second place is occupied by the financial risks which are estimated to have a moderate impact on performance but low Occurrence and Detectability. They are followed by
economic risks that are more likely to occur and have a moderate impact, but are easier to note. Market risks
are in last place, as expected, since Kostolac mining company is of national interest and has no competition,
therefore changes in the market have little impact.
Table 4.Extarnal risks in the coal mining company Kostolac, Serbia
Possible
effects
Failure mode
Possible mode of detection
Local
System
Yes
No
Economic analyses. A priori business predictions
RPN
Rank
70
Economic
Liquidity risks
Financial
Inflation risks
Yes
No
Macroeconomics predictions
96
Interest rate risks
Yes
No
Macroeconomics predictions
96
Investment risks
Yes
No
Monitoring of legal regulations. Macroeconomics

predictions
96
market price risk
No
No
Monitoring of local/regional market conditions
10
competition risk
No
No
12
demand changes
Yes
No
11
Regulatory
No
No
European standards implementation
18
Expropriation
Yes
No
Contact with local communities and analysis of

social and demographic causes and consequences
Environmental
Yes
No
Monitoring of legal regulations
48
Geopolitical
No
No
Monitoring of political environment
50
opposite attitudes
about the project
No
No
Monitoring of public opinion and stakeholders

attitudes
12
mass strikes of employees
Yes
Yes
European standards implementation
144
Natural
No
Yes
30
Market risks
Social
187

PROCEEDINGS
4. DISCUSSION
An assessment of external risks was done according to the scenario of current events in terms of economic and
socio-political situation in the country and the region. For the open pit "Kostolac", external risks are easy to
identify and verify and on this grounds carry out assessment of both current risks and risks that would pose a
potential threat in the future. The gathered information and assessment provide the basis for developing a risk
control plan and management responses to certain scenarios that are not shown here.
The applied FMEA method for risk assessment in a non-technical field proved to be applicable in both qualitative and the quantitative aspects. Risk severity assessment, event probability and risk detection are sufficient
parameters for a relevant assessment of external risks.
According to the results of the analysis, Table 4, the occurence of external risks would cause adverse events
that could in part endanger the exploitation of the lignite open pit "Kostolac". Risks can generally be assessed
as medium, and such an assessment is contributed to by the difficult economic and financial situation in the
country which could lead to unplanned production stoppages or dissatisfaction with the social situation and
the standard of employees. On the other hand, the open pit "Kostolac" belongs to the state power system
which is one of the generators of external risks, in addtition to the natural ones, and it is expected that the
state itself will in the future minimize these risks. The decrease in the level of external risks will certainly be
influenced by the global economic and political situation in the region and in Europe.
REFERENCES
[1]
Chen J.K.: Utility priority number evaluation for FMEA. J Fail Anal Prev 2007, 7(5), pp 321328.
[2]
Hung G.Q., Nie M., Mar K.L.: Web-based failure mode and effect analysis (FMEA). Comput Ind Eng, 1999, 37(12), pp 177180.
[3]
Guimaraes, A.C.F., Lapa, C.M.F.: Fuzzy inference to risk assessment on nuclear engineering systems, Applied Soft Computing, 7,
2007, pp 1728.
[4]
Tsuru, D., Enoeda, M., Akiba, M.: Recent progress in safety assessments of Japanese water-cooled solid breeder test blanket
module, Fusion Engineering and Design, 83, 2008, pp 17471752.
[5]
Almannai, B., Greenough, R., Kay, J.: A decision support tool based on QFD and FMEA for the selection of manufacturing automation technologies. Robotics and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing, 24, 2008, 501507.
[6]
Makajic-Nikolic D., Jednak S., Benkovic S., Poznanic V.: Project finance risk evaluation of the Electric power industry of Serbia,
Energy Policy, 39(10), 2011, pp 6168-6177
[7]
Ayyub, B.M.: Risk Analysis in Engineering and Economics, Chapman and Hall/CRC, 2003.
[8]
Puente, J., Pino, R., Priore, P., Fuente, D.: A decision support system for applying failure mode and effects analysis, International
Journal of Quality & Reliability Management, 19(2), 2002, pp 137150.
[9]
Kececioglu, D.B.: Reliability Engineering Handbook. DEStech Publications Inc, 2002.
[10]
EBRD, Transition Report 2008: Growth in Transition. EBRD, London, 2008.
188

PROCEEDINGS
ASSESSMENT OF BLAST EFFECT OPEN PIT,,RANCI OF SHOCK

WAVES ON CONSTRUCTED FACILITIES AND ENVIRONMENT
ABSTRACT
Slobodan TRAJKOVI1
Suzana LUTOVAC1
Marina RAVILI1
Nikolinka DONEVA2

of Mining and Geology, Belgrade,
R. Serbia
2
University Goce Delev, Faculty
of Natural and Technical Sciences,
Mining Institute, tip, R. Macedonia
The blast effect problem of shock waves is growing in the area surrounding blasting activities. In addition to damage shock waves may cause on
buildings and mining site facilities, they also impact badly human force
there, namely the environment. Lately considerable research in the
world has been dedicated to the examination and numeric modelling of
this phenomenon. Specific standards have been established defining the
blast effect margin level of shock waves on facilities and human force
there.
Numerous numerical and empirical models have been developed to predict and monitor them. In Serbia, there are no standards for the assessment of blast effect of shock waves. This paper deals with the assessment of blast effect of an open pit mine and specific conclusions that
have been drawn.
Keywords
Blasting, Shock wave, Measurement, Assessment, Margin level, Standard
1. INTRODUCTION
While carrying out mass blasts or blasting in urban environments where there are at the same time activated
explosive amounts from several to several thousand kilograms, adverse effects of blasting can occur. At a particular moment those adverse effects can be a problem for safe and secure blasting operations, especially if
people, varied constructed facilities, both on the surface and underground, are in the vicinity. Adverse effects
occurring while blasting are shock waves, seismic effects, fumes, flyrock, etc. [1]
Needs for the growing production of mineral raw materials have conditioned the use of a large quantity of explosives, which leads to the improvement of technical-economical indicators and, on the other hand, to the
increase of adverse effects accompanying blasting activities. Growing presence of blasting techniques in mining results from the fact that single blasting can replace the work of a large number of workers and machines
for a several month period.[1]
By carrying out blasting activities potential explosive energy is transferred into mechanical work. That energy
destroys and crushes a rock mass in the vicinity of a blast site further causing fractures and permanent
deformations in a rock mass, and, even further, is transferred into elastic deformations. Seismic waves
spreading through a rock mass cause the oscillation of soil and facilities, impact on the environment, etc.[1]
2. EFFECTS OF BLASTING ON CONSTRUCTED FACILITIES

The intensity assessment of shock waves induced by blast work breaking a rock mass and its impact on
construction facilities and an environment will be carried out on the basis of the following criteria: [3]
A. Effects of blasting on constructed and mine facilities
a) Criterion according to the Institute of Physics of the Earth, Russian Academy of Sciences (IPERAS) scale
b) Criterion according to the standard DIN- 4150 and
B. Effects of blasting on environment
a) Criterion according to the standard DIN- 4150. [3]
189

PROCEEDINGS

* The criterion according to the IPERAS scale. One of the most commonly used criteria with us for the
assessment of shock wave intensity induced by blasting has been established by the Institute of Physics of the
Earth, Russian Academy of Sciences. The Russian scale (Table 1.) is of a descriptive type related to the
ocsillation velocity of soil particles and the degree of seismic intensity and is given in the form of 12 seismic
degrees. [3]
Table 1. IPERAS scale
Oscillation
Velocity v
[mm/s]
Level of
seismic
intensity
DESCRIPTION OF ACTIONS
To 2.0
Action is revealed only by instruments
2.0 4.0
II
Action is felt only in some cases when there is a complete silence
4.0 8.0
III
Action is felt by very few people or only those who are expecting it
8.0 15.0
IV
Action is felt by many people, the clink of the windowpane is heard
15.0 30.0
Plaster fall, damage on buildings in poor condition
15.0 30.0
Plaster fall, damage on buildings in poor condition
30.0 60.0
VI
Air cracks in plaster, damage, damage to buildings that already have developed
deformations
60.0 120.0
VII
Damage to buildings in good condition, cracks in plaster, parts of the plaster fall
down, air cracks in walls, cracks in tile stoves, chimney wrecking
120.0 40.0
VIII
Considerable deformations on buildings, cracks in bearing structure and walls,

bigger cracks in partition walls, wrecking of factory chimneys, fall of the ceiling
240.0 480.0
IX
Wrecking of buildings, bigger cracks in walls, exfoliation of walls, collapse of some

parts of the walls
Bigger than
480.0
X - XII
Bigger destruction, collapse of complete structures etc.
Deformations on the facilities, as it can be seen in Table 1., occur if oscillation velocity owing to blasting
exceeds the fourth degree of the seismic scale. The state of the facilities, soil charscteristics, as well as the
number and kinds of blasting activities should be taken into account for the assessment of blasting seismic
effects on buildings and other constructed facilities. [3]
* Criterion according to standard DIN-4150 In the Federal Republicof Germany, maximal tolerable limits for
the values of soil oscillation velocity are regulated in dependence on the significance and the state of facilities
for the frequency span from 5 to 100 Hz. Tolerable limits for the values of the soil oscillation velocity according
to DIN- 4150 are presented in Table 2. [3]
Table 2. Standard DIN-4150
Approximate values of
vibration velocity (v) mm/s
Row
Top floor
ceilings
Foundation
Type of the structure
Frequency, HZ
10
10-50
50-100
All
frequencies
Structures used for craftsmanship, industrial and similar structural structures
20
2040
4050
40
Dwelling buildings and structures similar in construction or function.
515
1520
15
Structures that because of their particular sensitivity to vibrations

do not fall into groups 1 and 2 and are essential for conservation
(for inst. as cultural-historical monuments)
38
810
190

PROCEEDINGS

* Effects on people in constructed facilities (buildings) according to DIN criteria data on vibration assessment
in the frequency span from 1 to 80 Hz are given by this standard. It is possible to evaluate any periodical and aperiodical oscillations by the assessment procedure. In the standard, there are stated requirements and approximate stress values of people in flats and rooms used for similar purposes. [3]
Jeopardizing of people by shock waves depends on the following factors: shock wave intensity (strength), frequency, duration of shock waves, frequent recurrence and the period of a day when they occur, the sort and
way of work of a shock wave source, individual characteristics and situational circumstances, health state
(physical psychical), activity during shock wave stress, the level of becoming used to them.
The assessment procedure of vibrations is taken on the basis of unweighted signals expressed by the vibration
intensity KBF. During assessment the maximal weighted vibration intensity KBFmax, is determined and if necessary the vibration intensity during assessment KBFTr which are compared with approximate values.
An unweighted vibration signal is a signal limited by the span and proportional to the vibration velocity in the
operating frequency range from 1 to 80 Hz.
A frequently weighted signal of vibrations is obtained from an unweighted vibration signal by filtration. The
obtained signal is weighted by the calculating procedure according to the relation:
HKB (f )
1
f
1 0
f
(1)
where there is: f frequency in Hz; f0 = 5.6 Hz (threshold frequency of high permeability filter).
On the basis of the obtained weighted signal, the KB value with time constant = 125 ms is calculated based on
the relation:
t
KB (t)
1
e
0
KB2 d
(2)
While determining weighted KB values, as experience shows, the aberration of 15% occurs.
The measurement of oscillation values must be carried out in the vertical direction (z) with two horizontal directions being at the right angle (x and y).
The assessment of obtained results according to DIN 4150 is carried out on the basis of two KB values:
KBFmax - maximal weighted vibration intensity (maximal KBt value),
KBFTr - maximal effective value in time interval.
The effective value of maximal values in time intervals KBFTr is determined via the relation:
KBFTm
1
N
KB
FTr
i 1
(3)
Both values (KBFmax, and KBFTr) are determined separately for all three components in x, y (horizontal) and z (vertical) directions. The assessment is carried out on the basis of that component which is the highest.
Values for assessment should be compared with approximate values: Au- lower margin, Ao-upper margin and ARresulting value, in Table 3. under the following conditions:
Table 3. Approximate values
Day
Night
Row
Workplace
Au
Ao
Ar
Au
Ao
Ar
A workplace where, in the vicinity, there are only industrial plants and
possibly flats for owners, managers and monitorial staff and workers on
duty (see industrial regions Article 9 Bau NVO, (Land Use Ordinance).
0,40
6,0
0,20
0,30
0,60
0,15
A workplace where, in the vicinity, there are predominantly located handicraft facilities (see craft fields Article 8. Bau NVO-(Land Use Ordinance).
0,30
6,0
0,15
0,20
0,40
0,10
191

PROCEEDINGS
A workplace where, in the vicinity, there are neither predominantly located industrial plants nor flats (see central areas Article 6. Bau NVO, rural
areas Article 5. Bau NVO- Land Use Ordinance).
0,20
5,0
0,10
0,15
0,30
0,07
A workplace where, in the vicinity, there are predominantly or exclusively

residential areas (see pure residential areas Article 3 Bau NVO, general
residential areas Article 4. Bau NVO, small settlement areas Article.2. Bau
NVO).
0,15
3,0
0,07
0,10
0,20
0,05
A workplace work requiring special protection, for example in hospitals,

spa resorts, as well as special areas denoted for that purpose.
0,10
3,0
0,05
0,10
0,15
0,05
* if KBFmax value is lower than (upper) approximate value Ao or the same, then requirements according to this standard are met.
* if KBFmax is higher than (upper) approximate value Ao then requirements according to this standard are not met.
* for momentary activities which rarely occur, the requirement according to the standard is met if KBFmax is lower than Ao.
* for more frequent activities, where KBFmax is higher than Au but lower than Ao, another step of investigation is required in special cases,
namely the determination of the vibration intensity for the assessment of KBFTr. If KBFTr. is not higher than the approximate value Ar, according to the Table 3., then the requirements according to the standard are also met.
* the criterion Ar serves for the assessment of highly variable or only momentarily acting variations whose value KBFmax is higher than Au, but
lower than Ao.
3. CONDITIONS OF BLASTING AND MEASUREMENT CONDUCTING

The deposit location - The Ranci limestone deposit is situated on the farthest east slopes of the Suvobor
mountain massif. The deposit is situated northeast of the town of Gornji Milanovac and south of the town of
Ljig. The study area belongs administratively to the municipality of Gornji Milanovac and the land registry of
the village of Boljkovci. [2]
Geological setting - The deposit belongs to the group of exogenetic deposits. According to the genetic classification, the deposit belongs to a sedimentary type. The form of the ore body according to inner contours, defined by the research work is generally parallelepiped where the parallelepiped length along the NE-SW strike is
for about 210.0 m greater than the width along the NW-SE strike and about 22 times greater than the average
thickness of the productive deposit series.
On the basis of laboratory analyses of dolomite from the open pit Ranci- in the vicinity of the town of Ljig, the
following values of the most essential physico-mechanical properties have been determined:
* Comprehensive strength (mean values)
- in dry state
- in water saturated state
156 MPa
135 MPa
* Volume mass with interstices
2.82 g/cm3
* Volume mass without interstices
2.85 g/cm3
* water suction
0.217 %
* Velocity of longitudinal waves
5633,2
* Velocity of transversal waves
2659,2
The measuring of seismic effects, namely the oscillation velocity of soil particles (v) induced by blasting was
carried out by a measuring device of Vibralok type, a product of the Swedish Company ABEM. Basic characteristics of the seismograph Vibraloc are the following: [3]
- Manufacturer
- Measurement possibilities
- Number of components
- Frequency range
- Sampling
- Trigger levels
- Trigger levels of the canal A (air)
- Recording length
- Site location possibilities
- Data transfer and analysis
ABEM, Sweden
velocity, acceleration, motion and air impacts
lateral, vertical, longitudinal
2 - 250 Hz
1000; 2000 or 4000 Hz
0.1 200 mm/s
2 150 Pa
1 100 s or automatic length
flat floors, plates, foundations, soil etc.
UVSZ software; UVSZA software
192

PROCEEDINGS
Measurement points were located at the following locations:

- Measurement point MM-1
constructed facility a house
Data on conducted blasting and measuring No. I

Data on blasting: - The following means were used for this blasting: [1]
- Overall number of boreholes
Nuk
= 11
- Overall depth of boreholes
Luk
= 135,0 m
- Amount of explosive Riogel 60/1785
Q1
= 98,17 kg
- Amount of explosive Anfo-J
Q2
= 186,0 kg
- Overall amount of explosive
Quk
= 284,17 kg
- Max. amount of explosive per one interval
Qi
= 25,92 kg
- Length of intermediary stemming
Lms
= 1,0 1,2 m
- Length of stemming
Ls
= 3,6 4,2 m
- Rudnel detonators, 25/4500 ms
Nu
= 22 piece
- Amount of slow-burning fuse
Lsf
= 1,0 m
- Delay action cap, DK-8
NDK
= 1 piece
Instrumental observations The recording of seismic waves was carried out with four to five instruments. In Table 4. there are presented results of measuring for each measurement point. [1]
Table 4. Instrumental observations
Dist. from
blasting
field to
measuring
point, m
Max.
quantity
per one
inter. kg.
MM-1
321,0
25,92
MM-2
282,0
25,92
MM-3
200,0
MM-4
342,0
Measu
ring
poi.
M.P.
Overall
quantity
of exp. in
kg.
Max. oscillation velocity per comp. mm/s
VV
VT
VL
284,17
2,013
2,759
1,839
284,17
2,999
2,971
2,227
25,92
284,17
4,411
7,192
2,697
25,92
284,17
1,528
1,485
1,348
Max.
oscilla.
velocity
per
comp. vr,
mm/s
3,879
4,773
8,857
2,521
Real result. max.

oscilla.
velocity
Evaluation
of measurement
results Hz
vst, mm/s
3,120
3,630
7,390
1,990
30,2
22,3
31,2
48,8
52,8
55,8
37,9
37,5
40,0
44,1
48,1
40,0
Data on conducted blasting and measuring No. II
Nuk
= 24
Luk
= 292,0 m
Q1
= 208,84 kg
Q2
= 384,00 kg
Quk
= 592,84 kg
Qi
Lms
= 1,0 1,2 m
= 26,71 kg
Ls
= 3,5 4,5 m
Nu
= 48 piece
Lsf
= 1,0 m
NDK
= 1 piece
193

PROCEEDINGS
Instrumental observations The recording of seismic waves was carried out with four to five
instruments. In Table 5. there are presented results of measuring for each measurement point. [1]
Dist. from
blastin field
to
measuring
point, m
Max.
quantity
per one
inter. kg.
MM-1
330,0
26,71
MM-2
290,0
26,71
MM-3
210,0
MM-4
331,0
Measu
ring
poi.
M.P.
Max. oscilation
velocity per comp.
Overall
quantity
of exp. in
kg.
mm/s
VV
VT
VL
592,84
1,425
1,501
1,570
592,84
1,250
1,131
1,035
26,71
592,84
2,602
6,177
2,233
26,71
592,84
1,638
1,395
0,840
Max.
oscila.
velocity
per comp.
vr, mm/s
2,597
1,978
7,065
2,309
Real
result.
max.
oscilla.
velocity
vst, mm/s
1,920
1,550
6,600
1,950
Evaluation
of measurement
results Hz
27,5
19,0
30,2
50,6
50,2
57,7
37,4
35,9
27,7
48,5
37,5
47,7
Data on conducted blasting and measuring No. III

Nuk
Luk
= 28
= 285,0 m
Q1
= 282,03 kg
Q2
= 560,00 kg
Quk
= 842,03 kg
Qi
Lms
= 1,0 1,2 m
= 30,71 kg
Ls
= 3,5 4,5 m
Nu
= 56 piece
Lsf
= 1,0 m
NDK
= 1 piece
instruments. In Table 6. there are presented results of measuring for each measurement point.
Table 6. Instrumental observations [1]
Measu
ring
poi.
M.P.
Dist. from
blastin field
to
measuring
point, m
Max.
quantity
per one
inter. kg.
346,0
30,71
Max. oscilation
velocity per comp.
Overall
quantity
of exp. in
kg.
mm/s
VV
VT
VL
1,741
2,384
1,727
Max.
oscila.
velocity
per
comp. vr,
Real
result.
max.
oscilla.
velocity
vst, mm/s
2,530
2,240
6,140
1,870
MM-2
307,0
30,71
842,03
1,908
1,286
1,372
MM-3
225,0
30,71
842,03
3,948
5,559
2,918
mm/s
3,420
2,679
7,416
MM-4
320,0
30,71
842,03
1,233
1,522
1,009
2,203
MM-1
842,03
Evaluation
of measurement
results Hz
23,9
18,7
39,1
17,4
17,7
21,9
19,4
34,9
20,9
40,0
41,0
37,0
Data on conducted blasting and measuring No. IV

Nuk
= 36
Luk
= 420,0 m
Q1
= 374,85 kg
Q2
= 720,00 kg
194

PROCEEDINGS
Quk
Qi
Lms
= 1.094,85 kg
= 32,49 kg
= 1,0 1,2 m
Ls
= 3,5 4,5 m
Nu
= 74 piece
Lsf
NDK
= 1,0 m
= 1 piece
Measu
ring
poi.
M.P.
Dist. from
blastin field
to
measuring
point, m
Max.
quantity
per one
inter. kg.
360,0
32,49
Max. oscilation
velocity per comp.
Overall
quantity
of exp. in
kg.
mm/s
VV
VT
VL
2,148
4,083
2,355
Max.
oscila.
velocity
per comp.
vr, mm/s
MM-2
320,0
32,49
1.094,85
1,727
1,596
2,340
MM-3
238,0
32,49
1.094,85
4,543
5,758
3,714
5,179
3,317
8,221
MM-4
306,0
32,49
1.094,85
1,616
3,960
1,525
4,540
MM-1
1.094,85
Real
result.
max.
oscilla.
velocity
vst, mm/s
4,210
2,480
5,830
4,020
Evaluation of
measurement
results Hz
28,9
23,7
27,4
22,2
26,1
54,2
31,6
41,8
30,8
39,1
37,7
33,8
Data on conducted blasting and measuring No. V
Nuk
= 43
Luk
= 480,0 m
Q1
= 399,84 kg
Q2
= 1.075,00 kg
Quk
= 1.474,84 kg
Qi
Lms
= 1,0 1,2 m
Ls
= 3,5 4,5 m
Nu
= 86 piece
Lsf
= 1,0 m
NDK
= 33,92 kg
= 1 piece
Measu
ring
poi.
M.P.
Max.
quantity
per one
inter. kg.
370,0
33,92
Max. oscilation
velocity per comp.
Overall
quantity
of exp. in
kg.
mm/s
VV
VT
VL
0,927
2,075
1,211
Max.
oscila.
velocity
per
comp. vr,
Real
result.
max.
oscilla.
velocity
vst, mm/s
2,080
1,860
4,160
6,580
MM-2
332,0
33,92
1.474,84
1,091
1,354
1,430
MM-3
250,0
33,92
1.474,84
2,249
4,037
2,476
mm/s
2,575
2,251
5,242
MM-4
292,0
33,92
1.474,84
3,564
6,165
3,867
8,103
MM-1
Dist. from
blastin field
to
measuring
point, m
1.474,84
195
Evaluation of
measurement
results Hz
29,0
13,1
17,0
13,6
18,3
18,7
29,3
14,0
32,6
50,2
41,5
42,1

PROCEEDINGS
Data on conducted blasting and measuring No. VI
Nuk
= 66
Luk
= 515,0 m
Q1
= 487,30 kg
Q2
= 1.950,00 kg
= 2.437,30 kg
Quk
Qi
Lms
= 1,0 1,2 m
Ls
= 3,0 4,0 m
Nu
= 132 piece
Lsf
NDK
= 38,92 kg
= 1,0 m
= 1 piece
Instrumental observations The recording of seismic waves was carried out with four to five instruments. In Table 9. there are presented results of measuring for each measurement point. [1]
Max.
oscila.
velocity
per comp.
Real result. max.

oscilla.
velocity
1,901
vr, mm/s
2,732
1,865
4,549
4,066
9,633
vst, mm/s
2,110
1,370
3,930
7,270
Measu
ring
poi.
M.P.
Dist. from
blastin field
to measuring point, m
Max.
quantity
per one
inter. kg.
Overall
quantity
of exp. in
kg.
Max. oscilation velocity per comp. mm/s
VV
VT
VL
MM-1
384,0
38,92
2.437,30
1,402
1,920
1,346
MM-2
346,0
38,92
2.437,30
1,114
1,128
0,983
MM-3
263,0
38,92
2.437,30
1,786
3,728
MM-4
278,0
38,92
2.437,30
5,977
6,367
Evaluation of
measurement results Hz
31,6
26,6
26,5
20,6
41,5
21,4
30,0
11,2
16,5
53,7
37,9
44,2
4. ASSESMENT OF MEASUREMENT RESULTS

The assesment of intensity of shock waves induced by blasting on breaking rock mass and its impact on
surrounding facilities and environment, will be conducted on the basis of the following criteria:
A. Effects of blasting on constructed and mine facilities:
a) Criterion according to Institute of Physics of the Earth, Russian Academy of Sciences (IPERAS) scale.
b) Criterion according to the standard DIN-4150
a) Criterion according to the standard DIN-4150.
In order to conduct the assessment of induced shock waves by these three criteria, in Table 10., there have
been given recorded values of velocity by components, resulting maximal oscillation velocity, frequency by
components, as well as the KB calculated value whose values will be compared with the values presented in
Tables 1. 2. and 3.
To assess the shock wave intensity the following marks were used to fill in Table 10.:
The criterion according to the IPERAS scale (facilities of the third class according to Table 1. taken into
account)
A it meets requirements within thresholds of oscillation velocity

B it does not meet requirements, above thresholds of oscillation velocity
The criterion according to DIN 4150 standard (facilities of the second class according to Table 2. taken
into account)
196

PROCEEDINGS
C it meets requirements within thresholds of oscillation velocity

D it does not meet requirements, above thresholds of oscillation velocity
B. Effects of blasting on environment according to DIN standard (Table 3.)
E it meets requirements within threshold values

F it does not meet requirements, above threshold values
In Figure 1 4. there is shown the value of wave component as well as the KBfm. value.
Figure 1. Velosity shot for blasting No. I, measurement point MM-1
2.5
KBfm = 2.6947
1.5
-2
-4
0.5
-6
-8
Figure 2. Value of the vertical component Vv and KBfm. Blasting number II, measuring MM-3
197

PROCEEDINGS
1.5
0.7
0.6
KBfm = 0.58843
0.5
0.5
0.4
0
0.3
-0.5
0.2
-1
-1.5
0.1
0.5
1.5
2.5
0.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
Figure 3. Value of the vertical component Vv and KBfm. Blasting number III, measuring MM-4
1
KBfm = 0.87224
0.8
0.6
-1
0.4
-2
0.2
-3
0.5
1.5
2.5
0.5
1.5
Figure 4. Value of the vertical component Vv and KBfm. Blasting number V, measuring MM-1
Table 10. Results of blasting and measuring conducted at the open pit ,,Ranci in the vicinity of the town of Ljiga.
Blasting
No.
II
III
IV
Max.
quantity
per one
inter. kg.
MM-1
321,0
25,92
284,17
2,013
2,759
MM-2
282,0
25,92
284,17
2,999
2,971
MM-3
200,0
25,92
284,17
4,411
7,192
Measuring
point M.P.
Overall
quantity
of exp. in
kg.
Maximum oscilation
velocity per comp.
mm/s
Dist. from
blastin field
to measuring point
VV
VT
Frequency per components,

Hz
Res. max.
oscilation
velocity
mm/s
KBfm
1,839
3,879
1,139
30,2
22,3
31,2
2,227
4,773
0,971
48,8
52,8
55,8
2,697
8,857
0,830
37,9
37,5
VL
Evaluation of measurement results

By
DIN
By
DIN
(KBfm
)
40,0
By
IFZA
MM-4
342,0
25,92
284,17
1,528
1,485
1,348
2,521
0,583
44,1
48,1
40,0
MM-1
330,0
26,71
592,84
1,425
1,501
1,570
2,597
0,499
27,5
19,0
30,2
MM-2
290,0
26,71
592,84
1,250
1,131
1,035
1,978
0,445
50,6
50,2
57,7
MM-3
210,0
26,71
592,84
2,602
6,177
2,233
7,065
2,694
37,4
35,9
27,7
MM-4
331,0
26,71
592,84
1,638
1,395
0,840
2,309
0,316
48,5
37,5
47,7
MM-1
346,0
30,71
842,03
1,741
2,384
1,727
3,420
0,805
23,9
18,7
39,1
MM-2
302,0
30,71
842,03
1,908
1,286
1,372
2,679
0,579
17,4
17,7
21,9
MM-3
225,0
30,71
842,03
3,948
5,559
2,918
7,416
0,912
19,4
34,9
20,9
MM-4
320,0
30,71
842,03
1,233
1,522
1,009
2,203
0,588
40,0
41,0
37,0
MM-1
360,0
32,49
1.094,85
2,148
4,083
2,355
5,179
1,062
28,9
23,7
27,4
MM-2
320,0
32,49
1.094,85
1,727
1,596
2,340
3,317
0,608
22,2
26,1
54,2
MM-3
238,0
32,49
1.094,85
4,543
5,758
3,714
8,221
1,886
31,6
41,8
30,8
MM-4
306,0
32,49
1.094,85
1,616
3,960
1,525
4,540
1,424
39,1
37,7
33,8
MM-1
370,0
33,92
1.474,84
0,927
2,075
1,211
2,575
0,872
29,0
13,1
17,0
MM-2
332,0
33,92
1.474,84
1,091
1,354
1,430
2,251
0,446
13,6
18,3
18,7
198

PROCEEDINGS
VI
MM-3
250,0
33,92
1.474,84
2,249
4,037
2,476
5,242
1,589
29,3
14,0
32,6
MM-4
292,0
33,92
1.474,84
3,564
6,165
3,867
8,103
2,143
50,2
41,5
42,1
MM-1
384,0
38,92
2.437,30
1,402
1,920
1,346
2,732
0,784
31,6
26,6
26,5
MM-2
346,0
38,92
2.437,30
1,114
1,128
0,983
1,865
0,407
20,6
41,5
21,4
MM-3
263,0
38,92
2.437,30
1,786
3,728
1,901
4,549
1,511
30,0
11,2
16,5
MM-4
278,0
38,92
2.437,30
5,977
6,367
4,066
9,633
2,502
53,7
37,9
44,2
5. CONCLUSION
The estimate of shock wave effects on constructed facilities and the environment, while carrying out blasting
activities at the open pit Ranci, was made at surrounding constructed facilities according to the criteria of IPERAS, Russian standards for mine facilities and DIN-4150. On the basis of the carried out measurements it can
be concluded:
the recorded values of oscillation velocity in the vicinity of the mine (the measurement points: MM-1,
MM-2; MM-3 and MM-4), meet requirements within threshold values, thus do not affect constructed facil-
ities.
predominant frequencies range from 25,5 35,5 Hz, thus do not affect people in the surrounding facilities.
for more detailed perception of blasting effects on constructed facilities, it is necessary to establish the
state of constructed facilities (the way of constructing, the resistance of facilities, the age of facilities,
etc.), as well as to monitor occasionally shock waves in the vicinity of the mine.
in addition to determining of blasting effects on constructed facilities, the KBfm values, namely the impact of rock mass oscillation velocity on environment, were also determined. The KBfm values according
to the results presented in Table 10. with constructed facilities where measurements were conducted do
not exceed threshold values according to.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
This paper is produced from the Project No.33029 which is funded by means of the Ministry of Education and
Science of the Republic of Serbia, realized by Faculty for Mining and Geology, Belgrade.
REFERENCES
[1]
Marina R.: Analiza uticaja miniranja na ivotnu sredinu i graevinske objekte, Master rad, RGF Beograd, 2012
[2]
Slobodan T., Suzana L., Marina R.: Studija seizmikih uticaja na okolne graevinske objekte kao posledica izvoenja miniranja na
PK ,,RANCI kod Ljiga, RGF Beograd, 2012
[3]
Slobodan T., Slimak, ., Suzana L.: Tehnika miniranja i potresi, Knjiga, RGF Beograd, 2005 4 Medvedev S.V.: Seizmika gornih
vzrivov, Nedra, Moskva, 1964
[4]
Fokin V.A., Tarasov G.E., Togunov M.B., Danilkin A.A., itov Y.A.: Soverenstvovanie tehnologii burovzrwvnwh rabot na predelxnom konture karxerov, Apatitw: Izd-vo Kolxskogo naunogo centra RAN, Moskva, 2008
[5]
Slobodan T.: Oblast primene zakona brzine oscilovanja stenske mase izazvane miniranjem sa posebnim osvrtom na rudarske radove, Doktorska disertacija, RGF Beograd, 1993
[6]
Milenko S.: miniranje na povrinskim kopovima, Monografija, RTB Bor Institut za bakar Bor, Indok centar, Bor, 2000
[7]
Slimak .: Inenjerska geofizika , RGF Beograd, 1996
[8]
adeev A.B.: drobee i sejsmieskoe deistvie vzrwvov na karqerah, Nedra - Moskva, 1972
[9]
Langefors U., Kichistrom B.: The modern tehnique of rock blasting, 1967
[10] Aleksandar R.: Seizmika miniranja, Drutvo inenjera i tehniara, NIS Naftagas, Novi Sad, 2005.
199

PROCEEDINGS
MINERS` EXPOSURE TO GASEOUS CONTAMINATES

CURRENT SITUATION AND LEGISLATION
ABSTRACT
Dejan MIRAKOVSKI1
Marija HADZI-NIKOLOVA1
Nikolinka DONEVA1
Stojance MIJALKOVSKI1
Gorgi VEZENKOVSKI2
1
Faculty of Natural and Technical Sciences, University Goce Delcev Stip,

Republic of Macedonia
2
SASA Mine, Makedonska Kamenica,
In a light of ever increasing public sensitivity to professional illnesses and

accidents, regulators start to strength TLVs for most of gaseous contaminants present especially in mining industry. This face new challenges for operators, now forced to implement better control, as much as to
seek new tools and means in order to achieve the strengthened limits.
This paper gives overview of current industry best practices and regulations, concerning workplace exposure limits to gaseous pollutants and
also presents some experiences about current level of miners exposure
in some Macedonian mines. Also a brief description of exposure assessment and control techniques are given.
Keywords
Exposure, Gaseous Pollutants, Regulations, Control
1. INTRODUCTION
Environment created by dynamic modern mining industry and due to an ever increasing intensity of production
processes, including more powerful diesel equipment and increased blasting frequency and power, significantly
increased risk of miners` exposure to potentially harmful gases such as CO, CO2, NO and NO2. Taking this into
account, and the lack of specific data that would reflect the actual exposure of miners to these contaminants,
determination of miners exposure and better workplace control is a challenging task.
Diesel equipment and blasting are the most significant sources of gaseous contaminants in underground as well
as surface mines. The type and quantity of gases evolved from mining are directly dependent of the type and
amount of explosives that used, while the type, quantity and characteristics of exhaust gases and particulate
matters from diesel equipment primarily depend on the fuel quality, oxygen content in working atmosphere,
vehicles quality and equipment for filtration (catalysts).
The best method for dealing with gaseous contaminants in mines is a quality ventilation system that will provide enough oxygen and freshness, dilute gases and their removal from workplaces. The efficiency of underground ventilation system plays a significant role in miners`exposure to gaseous contaminants.
2. OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE LIMITS

Indicative Occupational Exposure Limit Values (IOELVs) are health-based limits set under the Chemical Agents
Directive (98/24/EC). The Scientific Committee on Occupational Exposure Limits (SCOEL) advise the European
Commission on limits. This committee evaluates the scientific information available on hazardous substances
and makes recommendations for the establishment of an IOELV.
IOELVs are listed in Directives which Member States are obliged to implement by introducing national limits for
the substances listed.
IOELV Directives require Member States to establish national occupational exposure limits for the chemical
agents in question, taking into account the European values. In Republic of Macedonia as a candidate Member
States on EU occupational exposure limits are identical, or very close to the IOELV.
Occupational exposure limits (OEL) are set in order to help protect the health of workers. OELs are concentrations of hazardous substances in the air, averaged over a specified period of time, referred to as a timeweighted average (TWA). Two time periods are used:
200

PROCEEDINGS
Long-term exposure limit (8-hours TWA reference)

Short-term exposure limit (STEL) (15 minutes)
Effects of exposure to substances hazardous to health vary considerably depending on the nature of the substance and the pattern of exposure. Some effects require prolonged or accumulated exposure.
The long-term (8-hour TWA) exposure limit is intended to control such effects by restricting the total intake by
inhalation over one or more workshifts, depending on the length of the shift. Other effects may be seen after
brief exposures.
Short-term exposure limits (usually 15 minutes) may be applied to control these effects. For those substances
for which no short-term limit is specified, it is recommended that a figure of three times the long-term limit be
used as a guideline for controlling short-term peaks in exposure. Some workplace activities give rise to frequent
short (less than 15 minutes) periods of high exposure which, if averaged over time, do not exceed either an 8hour TWA or a 15-minute TWA. Such exposures have the potential to cause harm and should be subject to reasonably practicable means of control unless a suitable and sufficient risk assessment shows no risk to health
from such exposures.
Short-term exposure limits (STELs) are set to help prevent effects such as eye irritation, which may occur following exposure for a few minutes.
Occupational exposure limits on gases commonly occur in underground mines such as CO2, CO, NO2, and NO
according to Recommendations of the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) and
the US National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), European (EOEL) and Macedonian occupational exposure limits (MOEL) are given in Table 1.
Table 1. OEL on mining gases according to Recommendations of the ACGIH and NIOSH, EOEL and MOEL
Substance
Carbon
dioxide
(CO2)
Density
at 20C
and 100
kPA
[kg/m3]
1.805
Carbon
monoxide
(CO)
1.149
Nitrous
monoxide
(NO)
1.231
Nitrous
dioxide
(NO2)
1.888
Occupational exposure limits (ppm)

Relative
density
of dry air
Main sources
in mines
1.519
Oxidation of
carbon, fires,
explosions,
diesel engines,
detonations
0.967
Fires, explosions, diesel

engines, not
complete
combustion of
explosives
No
Diesel engines,
blasting,
welding
Acidic
smell and
taste
Diesel engines,
blasting,
welding
Reddishbrown,
acidic
smell and
taste
1.036
1.588
Odor,
color,
taste
No
Hazards
Rapid
breathing
ACGIH and
NIOSH
EOEL
MOEL
Methods of
detection
TWA
STEL
TWA
STEL
TWA
STEL
5000
30000
5000
15000
5000
Optical,
infrared,
colorimetric
50
200
30
200
30
Electro chemical, catalytic

oxidation,
infrared,
colorimetric
Rapidly
oxidized to
NO2
25
25
Electro chemical, infrared,

colorimetric
Very toxic,
lungs and
throat
irritation,
lung infections
Electro chemical,
colorimetric
Highly
toxic,
explosive
3. METHODS OF PERSONAL EXPOSURE DETECTION

Due to the specific conditions that exist in underground mines determination of personal exposure to gaseous
contaminants presents very complex procedure. One of the possible methods that proved as a relatively good
and practical is colorimetric measurement with GASTEC dosimetric tubes because of following reasons:
Ease of use;
Resistant to mining environment impact (humidity, dust, temperature, etc.);
No additional equipment for use (chargers, batteries, laboratory tests) is required;
No calibration is required.
Colorimetric measurements with GASTEC dosimetric tubes, were used for determination of miners` exposure to
CO and NO2 in largest national mining companies as a joint effort of MMA - Macedonian Mining Association in
201

PROCEEDINGS
collaboration with Mining Engineering Department at Faculty of Natural and Technical Sciences University
Goce Delcev in Stip. The measurement campaign includes two hard rock metallic mines, one underground
operation (A) with 750.000 tons per year output and surface mine (B) with more than 8.000.000 tons per year
total output. In mine A (underground operation with 6 active production areas) indicated group of exposed
workers involved operators of diesel powered equipment, blasting specialist and production supervisors. Due to
a difference of working conditions and suspected level of exposure two sub-groups where formed, workers from
production areas under the general ventilation system and workers from development areas where auxiliary
ventilation is usually applied. The group of workers from production areas included two 2 diesel loader drivers,
2 drill jumbo operators and 2 blasting specialists, while group of workers from underground construction areas
was consisted of 1 diesel loader driver, 1 jumbo drill operator and 1 blasting specialist. Supervisor of each of
the groups was also included in the assessment.
Compiled assessment data including 36 readings for each pollutant from Mine A, are given in the Table 2.
Table 2. 8 hours TWA exposure in Mine A
Shift I
Working position
CO ppm
Shift II
NO2 ppm
CO ppm
NO2 ppm
Shift III
CO ppm
NO2 ppm
Production Group
LHD driver 1
11,85
1,325
15,5
1,425
13,25
1,55
LHD driver 2
9,75
1,075
12,25
1,05
11,53
0,95
Drilling operator 1
10,55
0,75
9,25
0,75
8,51
0,25
Drilling operator 2
7,50
0,25
8,50
0,50
6,52
0,25
Blasting operator 1
8,20
0,55
8,75
0,95
11,25
2,15
Blasting operator 2
4,50
0,25
7,325
0,75
9,75
1,85
Supervisor 1
10,25
0,87
7,85
0,25
7,85
0,50
Supervisor 2
9,25
0,55
5,25
0,25
5,55
0,25
Development group
22,5
2,50
25,80
2,25
19,85
1,55
Drilling operator
16,37
1,85
14,75
2,15
12,25
1,25
Blasting operator
11,25
1,55
10,05
1,85
11,85
2,05
Supervisor
12,50
1,25
12,5
1,50
9,85
1,15
LHD driver
Average exposure of working positions in different groups are given in Table 3.

Table 3. Average exposure of working positions in different groups
Average exposure (8 hours TWA)

Production Group
Development Group
Working position
CO ppm
NO2 ppm
CO ppm
NO2 ppm
LHD drivers
12,41
1,23
15,84
1,52
Drilling operator
8,47
0,46
10,47
0,89
Blasting operator
8,30
1,08
9,21
1,33
Supervisor
7,67
0,45
8,98
0,73
Average exposures of different working positions obtained in Macedonian study are generally higher, compared
to data from the extensive study in German potash mines (Dahman, Monz, Snksen 2007) as shown on Figure 1.
Although the results obtained are below the regulation limits and atmosphere could be regarded as safe, this
data indicates that more effort on workplace atmosphere control should take place.
This study also concluded that efficiency of ventilation underground play a significant role in overall exposures,
which is clearly indicated for all working positions in development group usually operating under local exhaust
ventilation systems. Workers in development group are in average 10 to 48 % more exposed compared to corresponding positions in production group.
202

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Average exposure of LHD drivers
4. CONCLUSION
The strengthened TLVs for most of gaseous contaminants present especially in mining industry, put a new challenges for operators, now forced to implement better control, as much as to seek new tools and means in order
to achieve the strengthened limits. Control measures are focused to determine miners exposure to gaseous
contaminants, aiming to provide solid exposure data for risk assessment, as much as to develop efficient, cost
efficient and easily applicable assessment programs and recommend additional protection/control measures as
needed.
REFERENCES
[1]
Coble, J. B., Stewart, P. A., Vermeulen, R., Yerebm, D., Stanevich, R., Blair, A., Silverman, D. T., Attfield, M.: The Diesel Exhaust in
Miners Study: II. Exposure monitoring surveys and development of exposure groups.The Annals of Occupational Hygiene, 54
(7):747-61, 2010
[2]
Dahmann, D., Monz, C., Snksen, H.: Exposure assessment in German potash mining International Archives of Occupational and
Environmental Health, 81(1):95-107, 2007
[3]
Dahmann, D., Morfeld, P., Monz, C., Noll, B., Gast, F.: Exposure assessment for nitrogen oxides and carbon monoxide in German
hard coal mining. International Archives of Occupational and Environmental Health: 82(10):1267-79, 2009
[4]
EH40/2005 Workplace exposure limits, Health and Safety Executive, Second Edition, 2011
[5]
Gastec Environmental Analysis Technology Handbook (12th ed.). Japan: Gastec Corporation, 2012
[6]
Macedonian Regulation of minimum requirements for Occupational Safety and Health of employees from risks associated with
exposure of chemical substances, Official Gazette of Republic of Macedonia, No.46/2010
[7]
Stewart, P. A., Coble, J. B., Vermeulen, R., Schleiff, P., Blair, A., Lubin, J., Attfield, M., Silverman, D. T.: The diesel exhaust in miners study: I. Overview of the exposure assessment process. The Annals of Occupational Hygiene: 54 (7): 728-46, 2010
[8]
Stewart P.A, Vermeulen R, Coble JB et al. The diesel exhaust in miners study: V. Evaluation of the exposure assessment methods.
The Annals of Occuptional Hygene: 56: 389400, 2012
203

PROCEEDINGS
EXPLOITATION
204

PROCEEDINGS
CLEAN COAL TECHNOLOGIES AT PREMOGOVNIK VELENJE

ABSTRACT
Simon ZAVEK1
Sergej JAMNIKAR2
Jerneja LAZAR3
Ludvik GOLOB4
Coal Mine Velenje, Velenje, Slovenia

1
simon.zavsek@rlv.si 2
sergej.jamnikar@rlv.si 3
jerneja.lazar@rlv.si 4 ludvik.golob@rlv.si
For a rather long period, coal was non-competitive as an energy product in

comparison to oil and natural gas and because of that less interesting. In the
last time it is rising again. Major reasons for that are: energy price per unit,
abundant and geographically dispersed fossil fuel, and relationship between
worldwide supplies and consumption.
Competitive against rivals is development of new coal technologies which
are ecologically friendlier. We called it CCT (Clean Coal Technologies). In
spite of higher use of renewable sources and increasing energy efficiency
and new best available technologies (BAT) it will be possible to keep a considerable share of electrical supply from coal power plants.
CCT will be in future a key submission at assuring sufficient amount of produced electrical energy worldwide, in European Union, and locally. At
Premogovnik Velenje (Coal Mine Velenje) we are aware that greenhouse gases emissions are a problem. Therefore we established research project in
2007.
Its target is the use of best technologies that will contribute to rationalization of processes of production of coal, to assuring of higher safety and humanism, and solving of environmental problems. This paper presents activities for the cleaner production, preparation and utilization of coal. In the
framework of power generation, these actions enable the conditions for the
transfer of knowledge, research results and technologies into working practice. Concept of CCT is much wider in its definition. The research project in
Premogovnik Velenje contains three more important round-off components
in this phase of its development: Lignite Degasification; the CO2 Capture and
Storage (CCS); and Underground Coal Gasification (UCG). We want to reach
our targets with realization of these measures that comprise CCT: improvement of efficiencies and environmental acceptability of production of lignite, its processing, and utilizing.
Keywords
Coal, Degasification, Capture, Storage, CO2, Underground Gasification of Coal
1. INTRODUCTION
Irrespective of growing use of renewable energy resources and better energy efficiency, oil, gas and coal will represent a substantial part in the power supply for the foreseeable future. The importance of coal is growing again after
a rather long period in which it was not competitive against oil and natural gas as an energy resource. There are
some important reasons for this: price per energy unit, the dispersion of global resources and the relation between
global resources and consumption. Clean Coal Technologies are friendlier to environment and their development
also enables the coal consumption for future power generation. Coal-based power generation still represents more
than 40% of global energy production [1]. The author cites many reasons for that. Among these, is the fact that the
coal is often a state's own energy resource, thereby enabling energy security and independence. Another advantage
of the coal lies with the fact that it is a resource widely and more evenly distributed across the globe [2]. The next
reason relates to global coal production and consumption, bearing in mind that, contrary to other primary energy
resources, coal resources are abundant.
205

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Share of global energy demand till 2035

(IEA, 2012)
Figure 1 shows the global energy demand

rises by over on-third in the period to
2035. Coal accounted for nearly half of
the increase, driven mainly by surging demand in Chinas and Indias power and
industrial sector. Stronger uptake of existing clean coal technologies and carbon
capture and storage could boost the longterm prospects for coal use [3].
2. CLEAN COAL TECHNOLOGIES

Clean Coal Technologies (CCT) are tied to technological progress leading to more efficient and environmentally
friendly coal consumption. The plan and explanation of Clean Coal Technologies follow the DTI/IEA standard [4]. As
seen in Fig. 2, the concept is very wide and includes:
Coal production, preparation, transport and coal yard;
Unconventional coal production through Underground Coal Gasification (UCG) or extracting methane from
underground coal seams, i.e., Coal Bed Methane Extraction (CBME);
Power generation through combustion of pulverised coal, i.e., Pulverised Fuel Combustion (PC);
Power generation through coal gasification, i.e., Integrated Gasification Combined Cycle (IGCC);
Other possible advanced technologies, such as hybrid combined cycles, heat engines, fuel cells;
Industrial and domestic use of coal in steel production, cement industry, heating plants;
Other technologies that turn coal into energy, such as liquefaction or briquetting;
Combustion remains use: fly ash, clinker, gasification remains, gas cleaning remains (gypsum);
other clean CCT possibilities including co-combustion of natural gas, biomass, co-generation and capture,
transport and storage of CO2, i.e., Carbon Capture and Storage (CCS).
Figure 2. Diagram of CCT (adapted after methodology of DTI/IEA

1999)
The process of lignite production at the Velenje

Coal Mine includes the activities of coal extraction,
coal preparation, coal transport, coal yard (A), combustion remains use; in the nearby thermal power
plant TE-otanj the process of power generation
with pulverized coal combustion is mastered (C). According to the Clean Coal Technologies Project, we
are incorporating some other fields, including underground coal gasification possibilities and coal
bed methane (B), power generation through coal
gasification (D) additional clean possibilities (I).
206

PROCEEDINGS
3. DEVELOPMENT PROJECT CCT AT VELENJE COAL MINE

According to long-term production plan of lignite in Velenje Coal Mine, projected to 2054 and presently assuring a
30% share of Slovenia's power production, we decided to follow global trends and founded a project group to deal
with these problems at the end of 2007. Fig. 3 shows the Clean Coal Technologies project's three sections: Lignite
Degasification, CO2 capture and Storage and Underground Coal Gasification [5].
Figure 3. Scheme of Clean Coal Technologies Project (Zavek, 2009)
Lignite degasification
Lignite degasification is obtaining methane in the process of lignite degasification. As the coal gas of the Velenje
mine contains methane in addition to CO2, we plan to capture both and therefore the part section of the project is
referring also to activity I, i.e., other clean possibilities (CO2 capture and storage). Regarding the fact that degasification of thin coal seams has long been an understood and practiced procedure, the Velenje Coal Mine will focus on
the degasification development of a very thick coal seam. We plan to degasify the excavation pillars before coal
excavation with the longwall method.
One of the goals of the degasification project should be the development of a statement on the development and
application of the best technologies that contribute to the rationalization of the coal extraction process. Degasification diminishes the amount of gas at the active longwall face and positively affects production. Reduction of gas
amounts in the excavation pillar contributes to better safety and working conditions, as the reduced gas concentrations allow reduced air volumes and, in consequence, ventilation that is more rational and has fewer problems
with coal dust.
Lignite degasification started three years ago with the R&D project launch named as CoGasOUT. Project that will
be finished in the middle of the year 2013 was funded by the European Commission Research Fund for Coal and
Steel. Project group combines multiple scientific and industrial partners from UK, Poland, Germany, Slovakia and
Spain. Key aspect of CoGasOUT project is design and development of novel techniques for safer underground mining concerning coal gas hazards. Project work is divided into theoretical background set-up and revision of existing
data, followed by experimental design, digital model creation and its calibration. Over projects three years duration time, several research campaigns, experiments, tests, analyses and revision have been performed. Coal Mine
Velenje was the key partner for the field work and underground in-situ measurements. On the basis of preliminary
and preparation activities we are focused on a final deliverable of Coal Mine Velenjes part of CoGasOUT project
underground gas drainage of excavation pillar [6].
Through the coordination of research projects such as gas component tracking, Velenje lignite petrography, and
the structural model, and through doctoral study education, the research results of other projects were also incorporated into the gas drainage activities.
207

PROCEEDINGS
CO2 capture and storage

In general, the CO2 gas from power plants and industrial units must be captured, compressed and transported to
the areas where sufficiently deep storage is possible. The CO2 source is coal, gas, oil and biomass combustion. The
major part of the CO2 results from power and heat production, from chemical plants, steel and cement production.
CCS technology represents the key to safe fossil fuel use, and therefore remains a real option for transitioning beyond the period of intensive fossil fuel use [1].
The known fossil fuel resources in the world contain a huge amount of carbon that will threaten the atmosphere.
The described technology can help to realize plans for diminished increase of CO2 in the atmosphere. However,
technologies available to employ coal for energy have to deal with in controlling CO2 emissions. This applies both
to new plants and to improving or retrofitting existing power plants [2].
CO2 Capture and Storage technologies are placed at Coal Mine Velenje into the second part of the Clean Coal
Technologies Project complex. Coal Mine Velenje got acquainted with CCS during the execution of the project
called Implementation of the Climate-Energy Package in Slovenian Thermal Energy (ZETe-PO) with the goal of reducing green-house gases (GHG). Project was coordinated by the Holding of Slovenian power plants (HSE).
Further, more specific steps have been done with the application of R&D project called Pilot Methodology Fixation of CO2 using the Fly Ash to public call for raising funds from Slovene Government and EU funds for regional
development which was announced by the ministry of Economy in 2010 [7]. Project started on February 2011 and
will be finished in the end of 2014 [8]. Project is running by the Coal Mine Velenje, other project partners are: RO
GEORIS (Research organisation), IJS (Institute Joef Stefan), NTF (Faculty of Natural Sciences and Engineering), Esotech, HGEM, and TE (Power plant otanj). Design of the project based on preliminary laboratory tests performed
in 2009 in the laboratory of the Coal Mine Velenje [9].
Methodology is based on generally known chemical processes by using materials within the extraction and utilisation of coal. Fixation is based on chemical reaction of CO2 in a basic solution with very high pH value, respectively
the lye. Using the fly ash from the thermo power plant otanj seem to be the most appropriate, the ash being a
waste product of the power generating process, available in large amounts, and its chemical properties makes it an
efficient reactant [10].
Technology will enable CO2 capture from return mine air that blows out of ventilation shafts as a result of the mine
ventilation. It will be upgraded for the use on gas drainage system and for the use of CO2 sequestration from the
power plant exhaust. After coal extraction and energy utilisation the geogenic organic carbon from coal should be
directly and permanently returned back to the geosphere as carbonate [11].
Project plan is divided into preparatory phase, research and development phase, execution phase and pilot testing
phase of the technology. R&D phase is practically finished and we are heading to perform execution phase, therefore it is possible to show some details from the research work that started at the beginning of 2012 in the Laboratory of mechanical processing technics at the University of Natural Science (NTF), at the department of Geotechnology and Mining in Ljubljana.
A) flotation blow cell (NTF)
B) reaction cell testing (IJS)
208

PROCEEDINGS
A1) upgraded fixation cell at NTF
B1) upgraded fixation system at IJS
Figure 4. Execution of laboratory fixation tests during R&D phase at the A-NTF and B-IJS
Figure 4 shows the reaction cell-RC (A) for blowing the CO2 into the lye. Lye was prepared of CaO or fly ash as a mixture with water. Reaction cell needed to be rearranged and additionally equipped with measuring system (A1). Research of the methodology was continued at the IJS at the beginning of 2013, because of better technology conditions (B). We were focused on testing the reaction cells, defying the flow rates, intake gas pressure, preparation of
gas mixture and lye, extraction of carbonate fine grained mud (B1).
During the Execution phase that is going to run till the end of the year 2013, technical solution will be verified and
basic module construction (LabMod) will be finished. Modules testing will enable to define full fixation capacity,
using the full flow of exhaust air and optimizing its efficiency. Construction of second module was planned in order
to test CO2 fixation with modular system as it was designed for pilot testing. Testing site will be moved at the end
of the year to the location of the ventilation shaft otanj that real exhaust mine air could be used.
Execution of CCS activities at the Coal Mine Velenje leads to development and implementation of best available
technologies (BAT) which will contribute to solve environmental problems regarding the mine gases. In the field of
production and conventional and unconventional utilisation of coal, running such R&D project ensures the condition of transference the knowledge, results and new technologies into every day practise. Implementation of R&D
phase of different project parts ensures new knowledge and marketing opportunity.
Underground coal gasification
The underground coal gasification, representing the third part of our project, is an unconventional type of coal
utilization. In general, the procedure is quite simple, as only two boreholes (or two wells) are needed (Fig. 5).
Through the injection well, air and steam are brought under pressure into the coal seam where the combustion
begins. The production well is used to obtain the gas, called synthetic gas or syngas. The main components of
syngas are hydrogen and carbon monoxide. The underground coal gasification (UCG) technology is very complex
and demanding as the most successful tests in the world have shown. UCG needs a multidisciplinary approach of
geology, hydrogeology, chemical engineering, chemistry and thermodynamics.
The most interesting advantage of the UCG will be economic, because minor operative and investment costs are
foreseen. The next advantage should be the flexible use of syngas. Even the environmental view is considered advantageous, as most combustion products remain underground, including heavy metals SOx, and NOx [12]. The
costs for CO2 separation are minor; there may be possibilities for carbon storage in the cavities or adjacent rocks.
The disadvantages of the UCG are the operational risks due to the lack of tested large-scale UCG trials and the frequent problems that have occurred during tests in the USA and Europe. The process can be uncertain considering
environmental impacts and public acceptability. The possible disadvantages may be the ground water pollution
(contamination) and surface subsidence. The UCG product can be used in different ways: co-generation, gas turbine, from coal to liquids etc.
Regarding UCG, the Velenje Coal Mine has a longer history. In the late 1950s, a study on UCG possibilities in the
lignite deposits of former Yugoslavia was completed at the Chemical Institute in Ljubljana (Kemijski intitutu Borisa
Kidria). In the 1980s, some laboratory testing was done on smaller samples as well as bigger samples of Velenje
lignite [13]. In 2002, a feasibility study of UCG in Velenje Coal Mine was not entirely completed, but the finished
component parts comprise the preliminary deposit evaluation, deposit evaluation with analysis of existent data
(general data, geology, hydro-geology), additional resource characterization, technological difficulties of the process, and technological difficulties of deposit preparation. The study did not examine the issues of process product
use, environmental susceptibility, economy and final evaluation [14].
209

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 5. Sketch of the underground coal gasification procedure (UCG)
Through the third section of the Clean Coal Technologies Project at

Velenje Coal Mine, the task force has been revived and the feasibility
study continued with the missing parts. Important factors are discussed include process product use (quantity and quality of the product, product quality oscillation, size of the energetic structure, and
energetic use of the product), economy and final evaluation. In continuation the activities will run to prepare the proposal of project task
for pilot UCG test in Velenje and gain the concession for research of
coal in Goriko (Slovenia)[15].
4. CONCLUSION
Through realization of the goals of the Clean Coal Technologies Project, the way to development and application of
best available technologies is paved. This will contribute to more rational coal extraction, better safety at work,
better working place condition and solving the environmental problems regarding coal gases.
In the fields of coal production and conventional or unconventional coal utilization, the Clean Coal Technologies
Project brings conditions for transfer of knowledge, research results and technologies into practical work. Based on
the realization of the research and development phases of the technologies discussed, we can continue to follow
innovation; the task force's work is aimed at the acquisition of national and European research funds and the opening of market possibilities.
REFERENCES
th
[1]
J. Kessels, 2009. Emission trading; incentive or obstacle to funding of carbon capture and storage demonstration projects, 4
International Conference on Clean Coal Technologies CCT 2009, 18-21 May 2009 Dresden, Germany.
[2]
I. Gulyurtlu, 2013. CCT What roadmap for R&D, 6 International Conference on Clean Coal Technologies, CCT2013, 12-16 May
2013, Thessaloniki Greece.
th
[3]
IEA (2012). World energy outlook 2012: Presentation to the press. International Energy Agency, London, 12 November 2012.
[4]
DTI/IEA 1999. Cleaner Coal Technologies: Options. Department of Trade and Industry. London, England (1999). International
Energy Agency, Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development. Paris, France (1999).
[5]
S. Zavek, 2009. iste premogovne tehnologije na Premogovniku Velenje, 1. mednarodna konferenca:ENERGETIKA IN

KLIMATSKE SPREMEMBE , 1.7.3.7.2009 Velenje, Slovenija.
[6]
S. Jamnikar, J. Lazar, S. Zavek, L. Golob, 2013. Implementation and results of research fund for coal and steel funded project
rd
CoGasOUT at Coal mine Velenje, 3 International Conference Energy Technology and Climate Changes (EnRe), 20-21 June 2013,
Velenje, Slovenija
[7]
Ministrstvo za gospodarstvo, 2010. Javni razpis za pridobitev sredstev EU sklada za regionalni razvoj-ESRR, Razvojni centri,
2010, Ljubljana RS, 9 str., Razpis
[8]
S. Zavek, 2011. Podrobneji nart projekta. Metodologija fiksacije CO2 na elektrofiltrskem pepelu, Razvojno podroje,
Premogovnik Velenje, Velenje, september 2011, 8 strani
[9]
J. Pezdi s sodelavci, 2009. Pilotska metodologija fiksacije CO2 na EF pepelu (RO Georis), CCT in vpliv na zmanjevanje emisij
TGP- rezultati za prihodnost, int. Workshop Velenje, 2009, str.13-19, referat.
[10]
S. Zavek, J. Pezdi, L. Petrinjak, B. Jelen, L. Golob, 2013. CCS aktivnosti na Premogovniku Velenje, 3 International Conference
Energy Technology and Climate Changes (EnRe), 20-21 June 2013, Velenje, Slovenija
[11]
J. Pezdi, S. Zavek, J. ula, J. Uhan.,2010. Geogenic organic carbon after energy extraction permanently back to geosphere as
carbonate, 22nd int.Congress Energy and the Environment Engineering for a Loc Carbon Future, Opatija, roatia, October
2010, 10p., paper
[12]
G. R. Couch, 2009. Progress with underground coal gasification (UCG), IEA Clean Coal Centre, London, 2009. UK.
[13]
E. Eberl, 1986. Nova tehnologija pridobivanja in predelave premoga podzemeljsko uplinjanje, Rudarsko metalurki zbornik, Vol.
33 No. 1-2, str. 7388.
[14]
A. Zapuek, G. Beri, S. Zavek, I. Veber, L. Golob, D. Konovek, 2009. Underground Coal Gasification (UCG) Velenje Coal Mine
Experience. Journal of Energy Technology (JET), Volume 1, Issue 1, October 2009, p.p.1-10.
[15]
D. Konovek, 2013. A preliminary determination of energy utilization process of underground gasification in Velenje Coal Mine,
rd
3 International Conference Energy Technology and Climate Changes (EnRe), 20-21 June 2013, Velenje, Slovenija
rd
210

PROCEEDINGS
USAGE OF EMULSION EXPLOSIVES

ON SURFACE MINE ZELENIKOVEC - SKOPJE
ABSTRACT
MSc Trajche BOSHEVSKI1
Prof. D-r Risto R. DAMBOV2
BSc. Mining engineer, Manager at

Rudproekt, Skopje, R. Macedonia
2
UGD - FTNS, Institute of Mining,
R. Macedonia
This paper describes the advantages of using emulsion explosives on the surface mine Zelenikovec.
A comparison has been made with the other types of explosives regarding
the cost of drilling, blasting, environmental protection and the safety while
using them.
In the estimates, the criteria for using this type of emulsion explosives on the
surface mine Zelenikovec have been met.
Keywords
Explosives, Emulsion, Open Pit Mine, Zelenikovec, Blasting
1. INTRODUCTION
In recent years the emulsion explosives have had a large increase in the usage on surface and underground mines.
The reason for this are the great advantages that emulsion explosives offer compared to other types of explosives
on the market. The advantages of emulsion explosive include safety and security, excellent resistance to water,
increased velocity of detonation, transport, handling and storage, savings in drilling operations and low gas emissions.
From the beginning, the surface mine Zelenikovec uses Ammonium nitrate cartridge explosives with combination
of ANFO, but due to constant growth on gas price, which is an important feature of the final price of the product, a
solution for decreasing the price costs for drilling and blasting is inevitable.
The purpose of this study is to present the theoretical and practical experience reached here and abroad, in order
to use emulsion explosives on the surface mine Zelenikovec, and to present the possibilities for using emulsion
explosives on other surface mines in our country.
2. BASIC FEATURES OF EMULSION EXPLOSIVES

The usage of emulsion explosives has numerous advantages. After the price of the explosive, most important parameter that directly affects for its usage are its blasting characteristics. We will mention the safety, high velocity
of detonation, water resistance, low gas emissions, transport, storage, fast charging time and etc.
Safety
The emulsion is stable and does not explode in the standard striking tests. The emulsion does not explode while
burning, but there is a possibility of an explosion if it is in contact with materials as detonators, dynamites or aluminum powder.
Velocity of detonation
The velocity of the detonation increases by decreasing the size of the particles which are contained in explosives.
Emulsion particles are small, therefore the velocity of blasting is high. Bulk emulsion explosives detonate with a
higher VOD than Ammonium nitrate cartridge and ANFO under the same conditions.
Water resistance
The emulsion has excellent water resistance. Boreholes can be successfully filled with emulsion even if there is water inside.
211

PROCEEDINGS
Gas emission
The structure of the emulsion allows optimal oxygen balance, thus significantly lowers the emissions of carbon and
nitrogen gases.
Transport and storage
The emulsion is classified as an oxidizer, so transport and storage does not lead to danger of explosion. The emulsion becomes an explosive when it is pumped in the borehole. The emulsion can be stored at temperatures between
-20 C to 50 C.
3. COMPARISON BETWEEN AMMONIUM AND NITRAT EMULSIVE EXPLOSIVES

A techno - economic comparison is made on blasting series and blasting 10.000 m3 of material from the surface
mine "Zelenikovec". In the comparison it is only the cost that has been taken into consideration required for the
procurement of explosives and the fuel needed for drilling boreholes. In Table 1 the input parameters required for
the calculation has been shown.
Table 1. Entry parameters
Rock characteristics (limestone)
Value
Seismic wave velocity
4000 (m'/s)
Density
2730 (kg/m3)
Charging parameters
Value
Blast hole diameter
0,089 (m')
Explosive diameter
0,07 (m')
Other blasting parameters
Value
Max. fragmented rock size
0,8 (m')
Bench height
10 (m')
Drill angle
75 (0)
Fuel consumption
1,5 (l/m')
Fuel price
1,14 (/l)
The calculation of drilling and blasting parameters are based on the energy distribution from the explosion in the
rocky massif, thus defining the specific explosive consumption as a basic parameter of the fragmentation degree of
the material that has been blasted.
The calculations of drilling and blasting parameters for ammonium nitrate cartridge explosives are given in Table 2,
and for emulsion explosives in Table 3.
Table 2. Calculated values on drilling and blasting parameters for Ammonium nitrate cartridge explosives
Explosive characteristics
Value
Velocity of detonation (VOD)
3600 (m'/s)
Density
1100 (kg/m3)
Specific energy
4,24 (MJ/kg)
Explosive price
1 (/kg)
Obtained results
Value
Hole depth
11,0 (m')
Sub-drilling
1,0 (m')
Stemming
3,0 (m')
Length of the charge
8,0 (m')
212

PROCEEDINGS
Burden
Spacing
2,8 (m')
3,5 (m')
'
5,0 (kg/m')
Charge for 1 m
Total charge / borehole
40,0 (kg/b.h.)
10
Specific consumption of explosive
0,38 (kg/m3)
11
Blasted volume / borehole
98,0 (m3/b.h.)
12
Number of boreholes
102
13
Fuel consumption / borehole
16.5 (l/b.h.)
14
Fuel price / borehole
18,81 (/b.h.)
15
Total fuel prices / blasting field
1.919 ()
16
Explosive costs / borehole
40,0 (/b.h.)
17
Total explosive costs / blasting field
4.080,0()
18
Total costs / blasting field
5.999,0 ()
Table 3. Calculated values on drilling and blasting parameters Emulsion explosives
Explosive characteristics
Value
Velocity of detonation (VOD)
4200 (m'/s)
Density
1250 (kg/m3)
Specific energy
4,9 (MJ/kg)
Explosive price
1,4 (/kg)
Obtained results
Value
Hole depth
11,0 (m')
Sub-drilling
1,0 (m')
Stemming
3,0 (m')
Length of the charge
8,0 (m')
Burden
4,0 (m')
Spacing
4,5 (m')
Charge for 1 m'
6,0 (kg/m')
Total charge / borehole
48,0 (kg/M.D.)
10
Specific consumption of explosive
0,28 (kg/m3)
11
Blasted volume / borehole
180,0 (m3/M.D.)
12
Number of boreholes
56
13
Fuel consumption / borehole
16,5 (l/M.D.)
14
Fuel price / borehole
18,81 (/M.D.)
15
Total fuel prices /blasting field
1.053,0 (/M.P.)
16
Explosive costs / borehole
67,2 (/M.D.)
17
Total explosive costs /blasting field
3.763,0 (/M.P.)
18
Total costs / blasting field
4.816,0 (/M.P.)
From these calculations, we can see the difference in the geometry of drilling, which is a clear indication for the
potential savings in drilling and blasting. The calculated geometry of drilling Ammonium nitrate is 3,5 x 2,8 m, and
the emulsion is 4,5 x 4,0 m.
Figure 1 graphicaly shows the drilling geometry using Amonium nitrage cartrige and Emulsion explosives.
213

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Comparison between the drilling geometry using Amonium nitrage cartrige
and Emulsion explosives (m)
According to the obtained results, we can see that although the price for 1kg emulsion is 40% more expensive, the
overall cost required to procure explosives is 8% lower, or 317 euros.
The biggest savings are obtained in the fuel consumption for drilling the boreholes. If you use ammonium nitrate
cartridge explosives, it requires drilling 102 boreholes. The required fuel for drilling costs 1.913 euros. If you use
emulsion explosives, we need less than half boreholes otherwise 56, and the price for the fuel costs 1.053 euros.
When you add up the costs for fuel and explosives, the total price of mined material for getting 10.000 m3 of limestone from the mine "Zelenikovec" using Ammonium nitrate cartridge is 5.999 euros, while by using the emulsion
explosives the total price is 4.816 euros. In percentage, the savings using emulsion is about 25%, or in our case
1,183 euros.
Figure 2 . Graphically shows the comparison between the

total costs () with using ammonium nitrate cartridge and
emulsion explosives
The price of the final product will be a few percents cheaper if we take into consideration all the parameters (e.g.,
labor, time, initial funds, etc...).
Figure 3. Blasted material from the blasting field using emulsion explosives on surface mine Zelenikovec.
214

PROCEEDINGS
4. CONCLUSION
The usage of emulsion explosives in mining industry is increasing, especially in surface mines. The features as well
as the advantages, which emulsion explosives have compared to the other explosives on the market, are the reason
for the usage of emulsion explosives in mining.
The usage of emulsion explosives provides better technical and economic indicators of mine surface "Zelenikovec",
which results in increasing the work efficiency.
The usage of emulsion explosives on the surface mine "Zelenikovec", due to increased drilling geometry, allows considerable fuel savings in the drilling process and its duration.
In addition, emulsion explosives meet all criteria for the protection of the environment which is a requirement for
implementing the ISO 14000 standard.
In the estimates, the criteria for using this type of emulsion explosives on the surface mine Zelenikovec are met
and saving a minimum of 25% of the final product is the main reason for its usage.
REFERENCES
[1]
Major mine project for exploitation of limestone on the open pit Zalenikovec, (2012) RUDPROEKT, Skopje, R.
[2]
R. Dambov, (2011) Methods of blasting, Book, University Goce Delcev, FTNS, Institute of mining, Stip, R. Macedonia
[3]
R. Dambov, S. Bosevski (2011) Blasting technique in special conditions, Monograf, SRGIM, Skopje, R. Macedonia
215

PROCEEDINGS
ANALYSIS OF OSCILLATIONS IN THE SLEWABLE SUPERSTRUCTURE

OF THE Sch Rs 1200M BUCKET WHEEL EXCAVATOR
ABSTRACT
Diana TASHEVA1
Zdravko ILIEV2

St. Ivan Rilski, Sofia, Bulgaria
1
decheva@mgu.bg 2 iliev@mgu.bg
The article introduces an approach for determining the operating conditions

and the state of bucket wheel excavators. The approach is based on the assessment of oscillations that occur in the steel construction during operation.
A series of experimental measurements of acceleration along three axes at
six characteristic points in the slewable superstructure of the bucket wheel
excavator have been carried out. The results of the statistical processing of
experimental data are included.
Keywords
Bucket Wheel Excavators, Diagnostic Systems
1. INTRODUCTION
Information about the conditions under which mining equipment operates, if available in real time, is of paramount
importance for the development of diagnostic and control systems. Its deficiency, however, is the fact that it can
not be obtained through direct measurements; instead, it is assessed on the basis of one or several indirect indices.
Measuring the oscillations in the steel construction of bucket wheel excavators is a promising indirect method both
for assessing the conditions under which they operate and for diagnostics of their technical state [1]. This method
is characterised by:
good correlation between measurements and assessed parameters;
the use of relatively simple technical means;
the lack of need to interfere in the electrical and information circuits within the existing control systems.
The use of oscillations in the steel construction of bucket wheel excavators within the control and diagnostic systems of these excavators is connected with the following stages:
special measuring blocks are developed;
characteristic points in the metal construction are determined where it is relevant to install the measuring
equipment;
a database is created that contains the statistical parameters of the oscillations in the steel construction in
the characteristic points of measurement under various modes of work and under various conditions of excavation;
a system is built up that interprets the occurrence of non-characteristic statistical deviations and peaks in
the frequency spectrum of oscillations during the operation of bucket wheel excavators.
The team work within the first two stages has been described in [2] and [3]. This article introduces the results of
examining the variations in the statistical parameters of the measured acceleration in the course of work of a
bucket wheel excavator during mining of a single cut. Analysis is carried out and the trends are determined that
that concern the variations of the slewing angle of the wheel boom during coal excavation.
216

PROCEEDINGS
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF OSCILLATIONS IN THE SLEWABLE SUPERSTRUCTURE
2.
The preliminary research has made it possible to define the following five points in the metal construction of the
bucket wheel excavator that have a very high degree of informativeness and are suitable for fitting the measuring
equipment (Fig.1):
Point 1 receiving gantry of the lower boom tackle of the hoisting;
Point 2 half way along the structure of the receiving gantry;
Point 3 next to the hinge joining the receiving gantry to the slewable platform;
Point 4 mast to the upper boom tackle of the hoisting;
Point 5 switchgear house;
Point 6 operators cabin.
Figure 1. Check Points
These are the points where a series of measurements have been made to check acceleration arising in three directions: along the direction of the lateral slewing of the wheel boom (conditionally marked as axis X), vertically (along
axis Y), and along the direction of wheel boom (axis Z).
In order to examine the characteristic parameters of the oscillations of the metal construction of the bucket wheel
excavator, three parameters have been studied [4]: the mean value of acceleration during excavation in both directions; the mean value of the absolute deflection (through which the dynamics of oscillations can be evaluated); and
the most common value of acceleration at all of the measuring points represented.
The results obtained are presented in the form of tables (Tables 1, 2, and 3), as well as in the form of charts (Figures
2, 3, and 4).
Table 1. Mean value of acceleration during excavation in both directions
Mean value [m/s2]

point
left slewing
right slewing
0.1364
-0.0562
-0.0189
-0.0305
-0.0207
0.1911
-0.0258
-0.0313
-0.1326
-0.0032
-0.0176
-0.1179
0.4578
0.0189
0.0715
0.4581
0.0351
0.1846
-0.1925
-0.0216
0.0113
-0.1442
-0.0121
-0.0263
-0.0236
0.0094
0.1806
0.0340
-0.0017
0.2113
-0.0245
-0.0013
-0.0860
-0.0590
-0.0013
-0.1185
[m/s ] left slewing right slewing
217

PROCEEDINGS
XYZXYZ
Figure 2. Mean value of acceleration during operation at points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Table 2. Mean value of the absolute deflection
Mean value of the absolute deflection /measure of variability/ [m/s2]

point
without motion
X
left slewing
right slewing
0.1015
0.0931
0.0716
0.3718
0.4652
0.2273
0.3870
0.4933
0.2373
0.0856
0.0858
0.0631
0.7428
0.4131
0.2784
0.7644
0.4553
0.2799
0.0814
0.0784
0.0624
0.1447
0.1126
0.1128
0.1319
0.1238
0.1718
0.0756
0.0831
0.0569
0.1600
0.1672
0.2079
0.1670
0.1788
0.2114
0.1056
0.1035
0.0826
0.1152
0.1335
0.0771
0.1521
0.1786
0.0921
0.0936
0.0938
0.0708
0.3160
0.7109
0.4046
0.4351
0.9629
0.5239
[m/s ] without motion left slewing right slewing
XYZXYZXYZ
Figure 3. Mean value of absolute deflection at points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Table 3. The most common value of acceleration at all of the measuring points
The most common value [m/s2]

point
without motion
left slewing
right slewing
-0.025
0.0173
0.0201
-0.025
0.0173
0.0201
0.1041
0.2135
0.0201
-0.019
-0.0271
-0.0129
0.2391
0.0383
-0.0810
0.3036
0.1691
-0.0810
-0.024
0.0146
0.0310
0.4276
0.0146
0.0992
0.4276
0.0146
0.0992
-0.001
-0.0206
-0.0080
-0.195
-0.020
-0.0761
-0.1304
0.0448
-0.0080
-0.005
-0.0290
-0.0225
-0.005
0.0364
0.1819
-0.0053
0.0364
0.1819
10
0.0017
-0.0233
0.0149
0.0662
0.0421
0.0149
-0.0629
0.1729
-0.0532
[m/s ] without motion left slewing right slewing
218

PROCEEDINGS
XYZXYZXYZ
Figure 4. The most common value of acceleration at points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Data analysis shows that the mean values of acceleration during excavation to the left and to he right do not differ
substantially. The measure of variability does not display any significant variations either (except at check point 6).
At the same time, however, the most common values of acceleration with oscillation in the vertical plane during
the left and right slewing of the superstructure of the bucket wheel excavator differ substantially, within the range
of several times.
When determining the excavators conditions of work by employing acceleration, check points 1, 2, and 6 are of the
utmost interest as they are characterised by the largest variation of indices with respect to the dynamics of the
processes involved. Those points have been studied thoroughly. The variation of the statistical parameters of oscillations has been determined as a function of time during operation of the bucket wheel excavator within the
framework of a single coal strip [4].
Figures 5, 6, and 7 illustrate the variation of the mathematical expectation, the variance, and the maximum values
of acceleration along axis X at measuring point 2 in operation mode of the excavator during left and right slewing
of the superstructure. Data processing has been carried out through determining the average values within time
periods of one second each. The B-spline function from Libre Office [5] has been used. The coordinate studied is X
(along the direction of the lateral slewing of the superstructure of the excavator).
Figures 8, 9, and 10 introduce the results reflecting the variation of mathematical expectation, the variance, and
the maximum values of acceleration along axis Y (the vertical plane).
Special attention is paid to the trend of the examined parameters since it takes into consideration all relevant and
regular factors during the operation of a bucket wheel excavator. It has been proved that all measuring points are
characterised by stable processes of rise or fall of mathematical expectations, variance, and maximum values of
impact loading that depend on the excavation direction of the bucket wheel excavator. This fact can be employed
successfully while predicting the loading of the excavation and slewing mechanisms of the bucket wheel excavator
by carrying out a sufficient number of observations, as well as by determining a trend variation zone that is permissible from the point of view of the loading and that is also indicative of the zone of normal operation of the excavating mechanisms.
Tables 4 and 5 show the variations, in times, of the dispersion and maximum values of acceleration at points 1, 2,
and 6 during excavation with left and right slewing. The symbol + indicates the increase, whereas the symbol indicates the decrease.
The results obtained can be employed to form the boundary conditions for determining the safe mode of operation
of the excavator.
219

PROCEEDINGS
left slewing
right slewing
Figure 5. Variation of the mathematical expectation at point 2

left slewing
right slewing
Figure 6. Variation of dispersion at point 2

left slewing
right slewing
Figure 7. Variation of maximum values of acceleration at point 2

left slewing
right slewing
Figure 8. Variation of the mathematical expectation at point 2
220

PROCEEDINGS
left slewing
right slewing
Figure 9. Variation of dispersion at point 2

left slewing
right slewing
Figure 10. Variation of maximum values of acceleration at point 2
Variance
point 1
point 2
point 6
Excavation left, coordinate
+ 1,30
- 1,36
+ 3,86
Excavation left, coordinate Y
+ 1,08
+ 1,20
+ 3,11
Excavation right, coordinate
- 1,17
+ 1,38
- 1,48
Excavation right, coordinate Y
+1,04
- 1,48
- 1,61
Maximum values
point 1
point 2
point 6
Excavation left, coordinate
+ 1,16
- 1,19
+1,91
Excavation left, coordinate Y
+ 1,09
+ 1,05
+1,93
Excavation right, coordinate
+ 1,17
+ 1,22
- 1,20
Excavation right, coordinate Y
+ 1,10
- 1,07
- 1,25
3. CONCLUSION
The indirect assessment of the operating conditions of excavation machines makes it possible to obtain complex
information about the loading of the whole structure. Thus, the action of a number of factors can be considered
that are determined not only by the characteristics of the excavated land mass but also by the technical state of
the separate units of the machine. The applicability of this approach has been proved by the research work carried
out on the Sch Rs 1200M bucket wheel excavator.
The general conclusions that can be drawn from the research carried out are as follows:
there are clearly visible dependencies of the variations of the examined parameters during left and right excavation;
a stable tendency is observed towards an increase and decrease of the maximum values of acceleration during the slewing of the superstructure of the excavator;
221

PROCEEDINGS
analogous to the maximum values, a marked increase of variance of acceleration in the process of slewing
left is observed at point 6;
at point 2, the variation in oscillations along axes X and Y are mutually counter-directional (during left slewing, acceleration along axis Y increases while at the same time it decreases along axis X, and conversely, during right slewing the increase is along axis X, whereas the decrease is along axis Y).
The research made constitutes one stage in the formation of a system for analyzing the loading and the operating
conditions of bucket wheel excavators. This system is based on measuring the acceleration that arises in their metal structures. In future, we expect to carry out further experimental studies and to bind the obtained statistical
results with the variation of the frequency spectrum of oscillations in the course of operation. This will create opportunities for an efficient analysis of the conditions for excavation, for limiting of the loading of the major mechanisms, and for giving recommendations as to the change of the parameters that determine the characteristics of
mining of the slope.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[1]
. , , . ,
54, , , 2012 ., ISSN: 1312-1820.
[2]
. , , SchRs 1200M,
12, . 224227, , 3-5 , 2012 . , ISSN 1313-1869.
[3]
. , ., ., SchRs 1200M,
12, . 167170, , 3-5 , 2012 . , ISSN 1313-1869.
[4]
. , . , , , , 1979 .
[5]
www.libreoffice.org
222

PROCEEDINGS
THE WORLDS LARGEST COMPACT

BUCKET WHEEL EXCAVATOR BY SANDVIK
ABSTRACT
Dr. Stefan HINTERHOLZER
SANDVIK MINING SYSTEMS,

Leoben, Austria
stefan.hinterholzer@sandvik.com
The PE100-1600/1.5x20 Bucket Wheel Excavator made by Sandvik - by virtue

of its design and size the worlds largest compact bucket wheel excavator to
date - with an overall weight of 1,650 tons, is designed to handle 6,700 lm/h
or an annual capacity of 12.0 million fm+t.
The complete supply for Bkkbrny (Hungary) consisted of a bucket wheel
excavator and a belt wagon, as shown in Figure 1.
Keywords
Bucket Wheel Excavator, Mining System, Lignite Mine
1. INTRODUCTION
Figure 1. Sandvik Bucket Wheel Excavator PE100-1600/1.5x20
Sandvik is a global industrial group with advanced products and world-leading positions in selected areas tools for
metal cutting, equipment and tools for the mining and construction industries, stainless materials, special alloys,
metallic and ceramic resistance materials as well as process systems. In 2012 the Group had about 50,000 employees and representation in 130 countries. Sandvik Mining is a business area within the Sandvik Group and a leading
global supplier of equipment and tools, service and technical solutions for the mining industry. The offering covers
rock drilling, rock cutting, rock crushing, loading and hauling and materials handling. Sandvik Mining and Construction Materials Handling GmbH & Co KG is a company within the business area Mining of the Sandvik Group and a
leading global supplier of equipment for bulk materials handling industry mainly in the areas of mining, stockyards
and ports - specializing in open pit mining and handling of bulk materials, offering a wide range of equipment for
mechanical excavation, stacking, reclaiming, loading and unloading as well as conveying.
223

PROCEEDINGS
2. HISTORY AND PROJECT PROGRESS

With some 10 million inhabitants and an area of 93,000 km, Hungary is relatively small European state. With regard
to energy, it is highly dependent on imports. About 70 % of Hungarys primary energy requirements are covered by
imports. Natural gas, mostly imported from Russia, comprises the largest share in primary energy consumption.
Thats why great importance is attached to the extraction and utilization of domestic energy carriers not least for
reasons of security of supply. Mtra Kraftwerk G.AG is currently making a significant contribution to this. Mtra
Kraftwerk G.AG mines some 8 to 8,5 mill. T of lignite each year, most of which is used to generate electricity in the
companys own power plant at the Visonta location. Mtra covers more than 10% of Hungarian electricity requirements, making it the second largest power producer behind the Paks nuclear power plant.
To meet power plant coal requirements, Mtra Kraftwerk G.AG is operating two opencast mine and the Visonta
opencast mine (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Location of Bkkbrny and Visonta open-cast mining sites
The initial plans for expanding the capacities of the Bkkbrny open-cast mining sites were already drawn up in
2005. The overburden equipment used in the mine at that time (3 x SRs/H/-401) was not able to excavate the
required quantities of overburden on its own despite continuous increases in capacity and maximum utilization and
had to be assisted by cost-intensive shovel and truck operation with an annual capacity of 4 to 5 mill. m. The
Bkkbrny Compact Excavator project was initiated to ensure the long-term handling of overburden in all
anticipated coal requirement scenarios, to reduce the costly shovel-and-truck-operation to a technically required
minimum and, finally, significantly improve the productivity of its own large-scale equipment capacities.
3. OPERATING CONDITIONS
Following a work-intensive phase of detailed studies, technical specifications, profitability analyses and contract
negotiations the order for supplying a compact excavator unit (excavator and belt wagon) was awarded to Sandvik
Mining and Construction Materials Handling GmbH in the summer of 2007.
The equipment unit is to be used on the first bench of the Bkkbrny opencast mine. It will have to implement cut
heights of up to 50 m. The compact bucket wheel excavator will implement these cut heights in high cut, in places
on a high bench and low bench, and in exceptional cases in low cut operation. It should be able to implement the
following operating modes: excavator directly onto feed hopper car, excavator via belt wagon onto feed hopper car
dumping operation with/without belt wagon. The device geometry will be dimensioned based on this. Figure 3
shows an example of when the equipment is in use.
224

PROCEEDINGS
Figire 3. Equipment in use
The equipment unit is to achieve a capacity of 6700 Im3/h and an annual effective output of 12 mill. bcm+t. This
output is required to reduce the cost-intensive overburden stripping by subcontractors used in the Bkkbrny
opencast mine today to the technologically required minimum. The compact bucket wheel excavator will mainly be
used in abrasive and partly cohesive materials. Transfer substations, buckets and teeth had to be designed
accordingly to protect them against wear. Optionally, temporary coal extraction is to be possible; this had to be
taken into account as well in designing the excavator. Depending on the future coal need scenarios, the unit is to
be operated for up to 40 years. Thus its fatigue strength was designed according to DIN 22261 specifications.
4. TECHNICAL DATA AND DIMENSIONS

Its design and dimensions make this compact bucket wheel excavator the largest one in the world to date. The
excavators used in the Bkkbrny so far achieve an annual output of approx. 6 mill. bm/a, meaning that the new
device has about double their capacity. With respect to operating weight, driving power at the bucket wheel and
travel gear load, this device enters new, challenging dimensions.
The most important technical data of the compact bucket wheel excavator and belt wagon is listed in Figure 4 and
5.
Figure 4. Compact excavator data
225

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 5. Belt wagon data
The compete calculation of the equipment unit was carried out in accordance with DIN 22261 specifications for the
calculation, design and manufacture of excavators, spreaders and ancillary equipment used in lignite opencast
mines. These specifications were systematically implemented for the first time when constructing compact
excavators. Finite element models (FEM) were used for all supporting structural steel components and main
mechanical components (e.g. the bucket wheel gear). To evaluate fatigue strength, we calculated the
corresponding utilization rates (the ratio between the actual and the admissible stress repetition). As a result, we
were able to prove the required fatigue strength for a service life of 50 years for the most important components.
5. DESCRIPTION OF INDIVIDUAL MAIN COMPONENTS

Bucket wheel
In the course of the design meetings we had to decide on the design of the bucket wheel. A single-disk type bucket
wheel or an open spooked wheel was up for discussion. After all pros and cons had been weighed up, we decided in
favour of the single-disk wheel. Among other things, the main reasons for this decision were higher fatigue
strength, better stress distribution in the bucket wheel body with lower stress peaks, a more defined and improved
connection to the bucket wheel shaft, less danger of spillage and easier access for inspections. In addition, the
calculations showed that about the same weights and deformation of the wheels are to be expected for both
designs, so that they were not crucial in making the decisions. In view of its primary deployment in abrasive
overburden material, tiles were cemented into the discharge chute as wear protection. The Bkkbrny opencast
mine has gathered vary positive operating experience with this kind of wear protection in the past. The bucket
wheel is fitted with sixteen 1.83-m buckets. A striking feature is the design of the buckets with open backs/rubber
strip lining. This design is particularly suitable for the extraction of the material to be worked in the planned mining
field, which in places is cohesive to strongly cohesive. The buckets are equipped with 8 cutting teeth each that
ensure the required high cutting force of at least 1000 N/cm. To ensure the high capacity of the compact bucket
wheel excavator, the bucket wheel drive was designed with a rating of 1100 kW and a variable speed range of
between 600 and 1000 rpm. The resulting high static and dynamic loads were a special challenge. Against this
background, we performed extensive calculations and FEM modelling of the gearbox casing including torque
bracket during the design phase. The drive train consists of a motor, a safety clutch (multiple-disc slip clutch), a
planetary gearing with bevel gear stage and a planetary stage, including load diversion. The wheel of the bucket
wheel gearing is connected to the bucket wheel shaft by an overhung coupling flange. The bearings of the bucket
wheel shaft are arranged directly next to the bucket wheel on both sides if the bucket wheel boom. The bucket
wheel bearings are designed such that either split or unsplit bearings can be used.
Travel gears
The dimensioning of the travel components posed a special challenge due to the overall weight of the compact
bucket wheel excavator of approx. 1650 t, the two-crawler design and the resulting travel gear load. The substructures of the excavator and belt wagon are supported by two crawler frames with one pendulum bogie each. The
travel gear of the excavator consists of two crawlers with two eight-wheel bogies, four four-wheel bogies, eight
226

PROCEEDINGS
twin-wheel bogies and 16 track wheels each. We also used a finite element model for all crawler travel gear calculations. The load case combinations on which the model is based cover all static load situations required by DIN
22261 part 2. The travel gears of the excavator are equipped with two drives each that act on a drive sprocket. The
motors have an installed capacity of 2 x 132 kW per travel gear. We use three-phase squirrel care rotors driven by
frequency converters. Braking is accomplished electrically by braking resistors. Due to the site-specific requirements regarding an admissible soil pressure of 12.1 N/cm max., the crawler pads were designed taking operating
weight, crawler length and travel gear design into account. Thus, the excavator crawler pads were designed with a
width of 4300 mm.
Hoisting gear hydraulic system
On the excavator, both the bucket wheel boom and the discharge boom are lifted into the desired hoisting position
hydraulically by cylinders. Two synchronized cylinders working in parallel are mounted on the bucket wheel boom.
Two axial piston pumps, each driven by 132-kW electric motor, are installed on the bucked wheel boom to generate
the required hydraulic pressure. The discharge boom is fitted with a separate axial piston pump equipped with 30kW motor. Should one of the hydraulic systems of the bucket wheel boom break down, the boom can still be operated by the other system at a lower speed. If the smaller system of the discharge boom fails, it can be operated
with the aid of the large systems of the bucket wheel boom. The hydraulic system is supplied by an oil tank with a
nominal volume 5000 litres. The belt wagon is also fitted with two hydraulic systems for the adjustment movements of the receiving boom and the discharge boom. To ensure emergency operation in case one of the systems
fails, both are equipped with a separate motor/axial piston pump unit. Each system has a motor rating of 45 kW.
The oil storage tank on the belt wagon has a volume of 1200 litres. Redundantly designed pressure sensors serve as
safety devices to allow the booms to be set down and prevent overloading.
Details about other assemblies
The main slewing gear of the excavator has a slewing angle of +290 to -110. The ball bearing slewing rim, which is
equipped with a lifting protector, has a diameter of 7200 mm. The slewing gear has an installed capacity of 2 x 110
kW and enabled a maximum slewing speed of 45 m/min, measured at the middle of the bucket wheel. Independent
of this, the discharge boom of the excavator can be slewed at an angle of 95 degrees, measured at the excavators
superstructure. Both boom of the belt wagon are mounted on the superstructure of the belt wagon and cannot be
slewed separately. The superstructure may be slewed at a 270 angle to the substructure. The superstructure of
the excavator consists of a frame with a firmly attached counterweight boom. The bucket wheel boom is linked
directly to the C frame and discharge boom in connected to it via a revolving platform. The C frame is designed as a
closed case and most parts of it are accessible from the inside for inspection purposes. The main control station of
the excavator is connected to the upper part of the C frame by a jib. Each piece of equipment has two standardized
conveyor belts. The belts are 2 m wide (St 1600) and each belt has a motor rating of 500 kW and speed of 5.0 m/s.
Three-phase slip ring motors, which are started dependent on time and load, are used as drives. The equipment unit
is supplied by a 6-kV trailing cable, which in normal operation is wound on the cable drum of the belt wagon. The
maximum cable length is 475 m at a cross-section of 3 x 240 mm. The excavator has a separate small cable drum
with a winding length of 150 m. The drives for the bucket wheel, the travel gears and the slewing gears are activated by frequency converters. The design of the electrical equipment focused on standardizing it. The excavator and
the belt wagon are linked and controlled by a redundant wireless LAN connection.
6. CONCLUSION
The PE100-1600/1.5x20 Bucket Wheel Excavator made by Sandvik with an overall weight of 1,650 tons is designed
to handle 6, 700 lm/h or an annual capacity of 12.0 million fm+t. This project was of great significance to Sandvik.
It has enabled the company to take another important step into the European open pit mining sector and once
again demonstrated its competence as one of the world's leading suppliers of open pit mining equipment.
REFERENCES
[1]
Hinterholzer, St.: Weltweit grter Kompakt-Schaufelradbagger von Sandvik, 16. Fachtagung Schttgutfrdertechnik 2011,
Magdeburg 2011
[2]
Hinterholzer, St.: SANDVIK PE100-1600/1.5x2.0 Largest Compact Bucket Wheel Excavator in the world, 8th International Symposia
Maren 2010
[3]
Krber, Thomas; Anno, Look; Jrgen Friebe.: The worlds largest compact bucket wheel excavator, World of Mining, Surface & Underground 61(2009) No. 1
227

PROCEEDINGS
PHENOMENON OF STONE THROWING

IN OPEN CAST MINING AND QUARRIES
ABSTRACT
Shaip LATIFI1
Ahmet TMAVA
Ibush JONUZI
Independent Commission for Mines

and Minerals, Prishtina, Kosovo
1
shlatifi@kosovo-mining.org
Kosovo has a dense population, so the facilities starting for housing to the
industrials facilities are in general very near to the mining activities starting
from open pits, metal minerals, construction minerals, extraction site of
rocks for their processing in aggregates for production of concrete, concrete
asphalt, gravel for building the roads, extraction of chrome, bauxite, ferronickel, magnesia.
During the blasting, there is possibility of throwing the stones so the functions are done for reviewing the throwing distance of the pieces caused by
explosive during blasting.
Keywords
Asphalt, Blasting, Function, Magnesia, Mineral
1. INTRODUCTION
Land with high density of the dwellers and the high requests for civil materials within Kosova markets created the
need for the quarrys opening in producing that materials, which are necessary for creating of concrete, asphalt
concrete, gravel and the materials for the upper road construction and houses.
The best smaller class of aggregates till 4mm are usually from the river, but, in this case Kosovo with the 10 000 km2
has the rivers with length of 120 km which dont enable the sand production capacity of such civil material which it
is required in the market after the war of 1999. But the markets value of the produced aggregate doesnt have the
economical power to recover the costs of expropriation of land with houses and other objects in order to create a
security zone in which pieces caused by blasting can be fallen in the quarry. Because we have rivers with totally 417
km length with the average water flowing 8700 lit/sec, we have the lack of sands of the small fractures.
Figure 1. Experimental quarry for the phenomenon rock fracture throwing
Within mines activity in the open cast there are the possibilities of the pieces throwing from the mined places with
the explosives. From that it is dangerous for people to get injured and the objects to be damaged. Many houses are
near vicinity of mine. In those areas where people are living, working, it is necessary to create securities zone for
the people, and civil objects.
228

PROCEEDINGS
From the government was requested to be solved the security zone from the mines activities.
For this solution it is necessary to know the security zone and to predict that zone by the legislation.
We as independent commission response to the Parliament of Kosova, our status is independent, that means we
have only to prepare ourselves to work by the law.
To give such an answer it is necessary to find a solution which is based on the scientific conclusion.
Figure 2. Graph of the throwing stones (Inclined throw )
Using the function of the inclined throw in the mines and the quarries we calculated the horizontally and vertically
oriented components of the starting velocity specified as V0, in the x direction as VX and in the y direction as VY.
Figure 3. Graph of the Angle of the throwing stones, launching angle
Figure 4. Graph of the launching angle
229

PROCEEDINGS
In the above graph the sinus function is approximated in the linear function
Figure 5. Graph of the velocity
Table 1. The falling plato in the function of the throwing distance and the starting velocity oft the stones from blasted material
Y=X*tang
(g/(2Vo*cos^2))*X^2
20
15
10
5
0
5 0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
10
15
20
25
30
Figure 6. Inclined throw, launching point in higher level than falling point
230

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 7. Graph with the numerical values of the throwing distance
2. CONCLUSION
The security zone by the opencast mines is necessary; the pieces of the stones are surveyed from the observing
place. The first is designed the blasting geometry of the quarrys bench, which many times is changed, starting from
3 m of the resistance line toward the free face till the 0.17 m and surveying the distance of stones shooting from 21
m to the line of 3 m and free face within 3m and 376 m to the free with of 0.17 m. The distance from surveying
station to the falling place measured geodetically and the time of the sound reaching from stones falling place to
the surveying station is calculated sound velocity in the air. The starting velocity of the throwing stones is 164 m/s,
but the mid velocity is 82 m/sec. The time for distance passing is 4.65 m/sec. From the video covering is taking the
time of 5.61 cm. The time of arriving from the place of falling stones is 0.975 sec. The geodetically distance from
falling place of the throwing stones to the observation station is 328, 571 m. The knocking force hangs from
elasticity of falling stones and earth body. If the bodys disfiguration is 0 then the knocking force is unlimited, if the
deformation is 0,001 mm the knocking force is 137548 kg. 1 mm the knocking force of the falling body of the 396 gr
is 137 kg. From this case it can be concluded that in the knocking bodies in the earth or with the other body will be
crash or elastics deformation.
REFERENCES
[1]
Orell Fssli Verlag Zrich 4. Auflage 1988, Formeln und Tafeln Mathematik- Physik
[2]
W.Hustrulid and M. Kuchta 2nd Edition 1998, Taylor& Francis Group , Open Pit Mine planning &Design, 2. Software Pckage.
[3]
22nd World MINING CONGRESS 11-16 September Istambull 2011; Hydro Filling Hajvalia mine with waste from the flotation of Mines
and Minerals Prishtina Kosova. Breznica, Latifi, Tmava Indipendent Commision for Mines and Minerals, Kosovo
[4]
10th SGM 2010, Source of explosives force and the projection Methodology of the underground storge. Shaip Latifi, Enver Breznica,
Ibush Jonuzi, Ahmet Tmava, Indipendent Commision for Mines and Minerals, Kosovo
[5]
Taylor & Francis Group 2006, Londom / Leiden/New York / Philadelphia/ Singapore William G. Pa Pariseau, Design Analysis in Rock
Mechanics
[6]
SGEM 2012; The Stability of Sopa slope in the Kaanik Valley; Mr.sc. dipl.eng. Shaip Latifi Dr. Ahmet Tmava ICMM- Prishtin, Mr.sc.
Adil Januzi1 KEK- Prishtin Jahir Gashi, Ibush Januzi ICMM- Prishtin, Republic of Kosova Republic of Kosova;, Republic of Kosova
231

PROCEEDINGS
FGD GYPSUM TRANSPORT AND DISPOSAL

ALTERNATIVES AT SERBIAN THERMAL POWER PLANTS
ABSTRACT
Ivana SIMOVI
Neboja KOSTOVI
Mirko SAVI
Dijana VLAJI
Rudarski institute d.o.o,

Belgrade, Serbia
pms@ribeograd.ac.rs
The paper outlines technological solutions for transport and disposal of the
gypsum generated in the wet limestone flue gas desulphurization process
that will be implemented in the existing thermal power plants Kostolac B,
Nikola Tesla A and B.
As FGD gypsum utilization is presently undefined, it was necessary to evaluate the possibilities of efficient, reliable and safe handling and disposal of
gypsum. In this paper two main alternatives are reviewed and described:
transport and disposal of dry gypsum with 10% of moisture, and gypsum
suspension with roughly 50% of solids.
Keywords
Disposal, FGD Gypsum, Transport
1. INTRODUCTION
One of the most important segments in the ongoing process of harmonization of national legislation with EU directions is environmental protection and overall pollution reduction. Environmental considerations became a restraining factor especially with using fossil fuels, as it is the case in Serbia, where more then 60% of total installed power
generation capacity is coal based [1]. Within the activities carried out to minimize the impact of increased air, water, and solid waste pollutants is implementation of technologies in Serbian thermal power plants (TPP) aimed to
control emissions, especially the generation of sulfur dioxide (SO2) during the combustion of fossil fuels. In order to
meet the new stringent SO2 emission limits, The Electric Power Industry of Serbia (EPS) decided to introduce the
wet limestone flue gas desulphurization (FGD) process in its largest TPPs [2].
In the anticipated wet limestone FGD process, SO2 reacts with calcium carbonate (CaCO3) forming calcium sulfite
(CaSO3), which is being transformed into the hydrated calcium sulfate (CaSO4 x 2H2O) or gypsum, by additional oxidization. Generated gypsum suspension, with approximately 15-20% of solids, is sent to the primary dewatering in
hydrocyclones up to the mass concentration of 50% of solids by weight. Hydrocyclone underflow represents gypsum suspension that can be transported via pipeline to previously prepared disposal site. Gypsum suspension can be
additionally treated by washing and secondary dewatering using belt vacuum filter. "Dry" gypsum, with less then
10% of moisture, can be temporary or permanently stored.
Despite the fact that over 80% of FGD gypsum production in EU-15 countries and 60% in USA is utilized [3], the use
of FGD gypsum in Serbia is presently undetermined and it was necessary to evaluate the possible alternatives for
FGD gypsum disposal covering technical, technological, environmental and economical aspects. Commonly, there
are several possibilities for FGD gypsum disposal that are applied world-wide, briefly described below:
(1)
Mixing of gypsum and ash in different forms (such as "dry" gypsum and ash slurry or gypsum slurry and
ash slurry)
(2)
Disposal of "dry" gypsum (with less then 10% of moisture) on a separate disposal site
(3)
Disposal of gypsum slurry (with concentration of solids 30-60%) in separate disposal site
Serbian legislation in force considers FGD gypsum a secondary raw material that can not be mixed with other waste
or secondary raw materials due to potential utilization [4]. Therefore, the alternative of disposal of FGD gypsum in
mixture with ash is not taken into evaluation at the moment.
232

PROCEEDINGS
Disposal of "dry" gypsum is in practice in some TPPs in Europe. There are no relevant environmental impacts of
waste waters and leachate from the disposal site is mainly from precipitation if the disposal site is prepared according to related legislation.
There is limited experience with disposal of gypsum suspension, but in case the disposal site is in vicinity of TPP this
mean of transportation is relatively feasible as gypsum suspension is conveyed after primary dewatering via pipeline. Waste waters must be either recycled or treated.
2. TECHNICAL APPROACH
The general approach to designing of FGD gypsum transport and disposal was the same for existing and planed
thermal power plants, therefore this paper provides the key issues considered and description of the two possible
alternatives proposed in project documentation prepared for TPP Kostolac B3. Design assessment was based on the
following activities carried out during preparation of general and basic design of FGD process for the new 350 MW
unit [5, 6]:
Reviewing of basic principles and guidelines defined in related Serbian and EU legislation relevant to FGD
gypsum
Setting up FGD inputs and process requirements on the basis of coal quality and consumption, raw flue gas
characteristics, minimal limestone quality, desulphurization performance and FGD gypsum quality
Calculating FGD gypsum production, transport capacity and required disposal site volume
Evaluating FGD gypsum transport and disposal technology with mass balance flow sheets
Evaluating disposal site location, geometry and construction methodology
Environmental impact assessment
3. TECHNICAL DESCIPTION
FGD gypsum production and required quality
FGD gypsum production from TPP Kostolac B3 was determined based on the inputs and proposed FGD process requirements and performances. Basic parameters of gypsum production calculated according to the estimated content of 0.80% of combustible sulfur for equivalent 6800 hours of annual operation are presented in Table 1 for 350
MW unit.
Table 1. Basic parameters of gypsum production
Parameter
Removed sulfur, t/h
6.6 t/h
Limestone consumption
11.0 t/h
36.7 t/h
Quantity of FGD gypsum suspension with 50% of solids
25.8 m3/h
175.440 m3/yr
FGD gypsum density
2.45 t/m3
Density of FGD gypsum suspension with 50%of solids
1.42 t/m3
20.4 t/h
Quantity of FGD gypsum with 10% of moisture
138.720 t/god
Required volume of disposal site
115.600 m3/god
Bulk density of FGD gypsum with 10% of moisture
1.0 t/m3
Volume density of FGD gypsum with 10% of moisture
1.2 t/m3
Source: General design and pre-feasibility study for new TPP unit Kostolac B3 (EP-Entel and Rudarski institute, 2012)
Required quality of FGD gypsum necessary for consideration of gypsum needs and gypsum placement possibilities
to potential manufacturers of gypsum products in Serbian market is presented in Table 2.
233

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2. Required quality of FGD gypsum
Parameter
Limit
Moisture
10 % max.
CaSO4 x 2H2O
95% min.
CaSO3 x H2O
0.50% max.
Chlorides
100 mg/kg max.
Na water soluble salts
100 mg/kg max.
Mg water soluble salts
75 mg/kg max.
pH
5 to 9 max.
Min. particle size
<10 microns 20% max.
Avg. particle size
30 75 microns
Max. particle size
<100 microns 90% min.
Source: Quality Criteria of FGD Gypsum, Eurogypsum, Brussels, Belgium. (www.eurogypsum.org)
Transport and disposal technology of FGD gypsum

Two evaluated alternatives for further handling of the FGD gypsum are illustrated schematically in Figure 1.
Thermal Power Plant Kostolac B3
FGD plant
low density suspension
recirculating water
Primary
dewatering
(hydrociclone)
high density suspension
Filtration
additional water
Covered
gypsum storage
mechanical transport
hydraulic transport
Market
Gypsum
disposal site
Gypsum
suspension
disposal site
open pit Drmno

Figure 1. Schematic illustration of alternatives for FGD gypsum transport and disposal
Alternative I: Transport and disposal of gypsum with 10% of moisture

As presented in Figure 2, "dry" gypsum, as filter cake after dewatering in belt filter with less then 10% of total moisture, gravitationally falls onto the conveyer belt that transports gypsum to the covered daily storage shed designed
to synchronize the continuous operation of the filter unit with the gypsum transport. From this storage, gypsum
will be loaded into the trucks either for consumers or for transport to the disposal site, where it is transferred to
the surge hopper. From the surge hopper, it is disposed at previously prepared disposal area by the belt conveyer
system.
234

PROCEEDINGS
hydrocyclone battery
overflow
hydrocyclone battery
overflow
belt filter
belt filter
filter cake - gypsum with less then 10% of moisture
covered gypsum storage
belt conveyor
Figure 2. Technological process of "dry" gypsum stacking at covered storage
As illustrated in figure 3, the surge hopper and ramp for trucks unloading will be installed on the rim of the disposal
site. Further transport and disposal will be maintained by the belt conveyer system. Gypsum disposal starts from
the higher level of surrounding terrain in front of the stacking system. Stacking conveyer will be frontally moved,
successively with the gypsum disposal dynamics.
surg e
hopper
with belt transfering
feeder conveyer
stationary
conveyer
ramp
linking
conveyer
transfering
conveyer
disposal site
stacking
conveyer
Figure 3. Technological process of "dry" gypsum disposal
Alternative II: Transport and disposal of gypsum suspension with 50% of solids
Gypsum suspension, as hydrocyclone underflow, will be collected from the each unit into the pump sump with agitator, as it is presented in Figure 4. Gypsum suspension transport will be provided by the centrifugal slurry pump
through the pipeline to the disposal site, where distribution pipeline will be mounted on the brim of the disposal
site. Suspension disposal will be from the single discharge pipe. There will be a drainage system at disposal site,
which will collect surplus water that will be returned via separate pipeline to the plant.
Hydrocyclones
transport to
dispoal site
feed
feed
overflow
open pit Drmno
recirculating
water
safty valve
back to process
or
to wastewater
treatment
underflow
centrifugal slurry
pump sump
recirculating water
drainage system
gyspum disposal site
Figure 4. Technological process of gypsum suspension transport and disposal
235

PROCEEDINGS
Disposal site
The selection of the location for FGD disposal was performed considering the following general conditions and criteria [7]:
main characteristics of material to be disposed,
terrain topography;
geological, geotechnical, hydro-geological and seismic conditions,
climate, hydrological and hydrographic characteristics,
land zone, level of land protection and future land use,
traffic and technical infrastructure,
volume and landfill capacity.
Figure 5. Location of FGD gypsum disposal site
In accordance to stated criteria, the disposal site for FGD gypsum suspension is located in the inner overburden dump site at open pit mine
Drmno, as shown in Figure 5. It will be formed during mining works using
overburden excavator conveyer spreader system. Inner slopes will be
inclined with the ratio 1:2.5 and will be constructed with the benches
necessary for anchoring of watertight foil. After terrain leveling, the
bottom and slopes of disposal area will be covered with watertight geomembrane. In case of gypsum suspension, the appropriate drainage system will be installed for collecting excess water and returning to the
FGD process via pump station.
4. CONCLUDING REMARKS
Although beneficial use of FGD gypsum is environmentally and economically preferable over disposal, it is inevitable that disposal will continue to be required in case there is no need for this by-product. Consequently, the best
management practice must be incorporated in all phases, from designing and construction, operation and monitoring, to re-cultivation and post-closure supervision.
FGD gypsum is a by-product generated in the process of removing SO2, which significantly reduces emissions of
harmful environmental pollutants into the atmosphere. Produced FGD gypsum has properties identical to natural
gypsum, it is completely safe for further utilization and can be directly used as natural gypsum substitute in various
areas of application. On the assumption that FGD gypsum can not be utilized, disposal is the only option. Evaluation of the possible options for transport and disposal of FGD gypsum from the future TE Kostolac B3 included all
relevant aspects for environmentally safe transport and disposal, especially to prevent pollution of soil, air, ground
and surface waters.
Both means of FGD gypsum transport and disposal, reviewed in this paper, are environmentally harmless if properly
managed and regularly monitored. Selected location of disposal site is within degraded area of the open pit mine
and designed hydro-technical construction is fully in compliance with environmental protection legislation.
REFERENCES
[1]
Technical report for 2012, EPS
[2]
Strategic and development projects of the Electric Power Industry of Serbia, EPS 2011
[3]
Statistics on Production and Utilisation of CCPs in Europe (EU 15) in 2009, ECOBA, 2009
[4]
Rulebook on conditions and means for separation, packaging and storing of secondary raw materials (Serbian Gazette No.
55/2001, 72/2009, 56/2010)
[5]
General design and pre-feasibility study for new TPP unit Kostolac B3, EP-Entel and Rudarski institut, 2011
[6]
Basic design and feasibility study for new TPP unit Kostolac B3, EP-Entel and Rudarski institut, 2012
[7]
Waste disposal sites directive (Serbian Gazette No. 925/2010)
236

PROCEEDINGS
SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF MINING MECHANIZATION DELAYS

IN SURFACE MINE DEPARTMENT OF BLACK COAL MINE BANOVICI
ABSTRACT
Misad BEI1
Rua ELIKOVI2
RMU Banovii, Banovii, Bosnia and

Herzegivina, mirsadbecic@gmail.com
2
RGGF, Tuzla, Bosnia and Herzegivina,
ruza.celikovic@untz.ba
This paper contains outlook of spatial distribution of mining mechanization

flaws determined from data collected in process of GPS monitoring of mining mechanization which provide selection of information on working locations and mining mechanization flaws for any moment in time or period.
The aim of this data processing collected with GPS in process of mining
mechanization monitoring is receiving of all relevant information on mechanization process. This includes gaining of information on working time and
setbacks according to location for each day or selected periods.
In order to get information on mechanization labour from collected data it is
necessary to adjust source data for extraction of needed information i.e.
determiner of mechanization labour. In that context the short outlook of
characteristics of source data regarding monitoring of mechanization is given as well as model of data processing for getting of information on structure of truck setbacks.
Keywords
GPS Data, Data Processing, Structure Delays
1. INTRODUCTION
Large quantities of data with spacial and time dimension are collected in process of monitoring of mining
mechanisation supported by satelite systems. These systems provide information on mashines operation in realistic
time frame which provides possibility of production process control with purpose of increasment of production
effects. The most important advantage of this system is determination of location in time which can provide
complete information on working space of each mining mechanisation unit.
Continious monitoring of mobile objects gives monitoring oportunity of spacial angagement of certain mashines in
time. Known location can be saved or memorised for every moment in time. This gives opportunity for reconstruction (in space and time) of each mashine operation. This type of data provides both, spacial and time locating of
different operation regime or mashine failour for certain mashines. Since there is continuous log entry of motion,
these type of collected monitoring data can provide new set of information. New data continuouslly collected must
be processed with purpose of receiving of necessary information.
2. CONTINUOUS MONITORING OF MECHANISATION IN COAL MINE BANOVICI

Since september 2009 implementation of ALV equipment for continuous monitoring of mechanisation in surface
mining department of Banovici coal mine is in process. This project involves, in first stage, monitoring of dumpers,
buldozers and graders. ALV units are implemented in these units which use GPS sensors for position tracking. According to producer prospect, implemented GPS sensors have ability of tridimensional position determination and
positioning accuracy is within 2,5 m, and with usage of SBAS corrections accuracy is within 2 meters.
Density of position registering depends on surface characteristics on which vehicles operate. Monitoring data are
saved and storaged on server. The producer of equipment is also creator of monitoring information data base. This
data base containd four related tables. Tabel t_data contains GPS monitoring information of all mashines in this
data base. Structure of data collected by GPS unit and stored in table t_data are shown in tabel 1.
237

PROCEEDINGS
Table 1: Source data collected in mecnanisation monitoring process

id
log_
date
Ugovor_id
utc_datetime
latitude
ns
longitude
ew
Brzina
pravac
inputs
outputs
analog
1
analog
2
15933336
19.11.2009
5:36:54
19
18.11.2009
20:38:10
44,4248
18,4523
35
1000000
0000000
2,08
15933338
19.11.2009
5:36:54
19
18.11.2009
20:38:56
44,4261
18,4559
56
1000000
0000000
2,24
15933340
19.11.2009
5:36:54
19
18.11.2009
20:39:22
44,4266
18,4578
14
1000000
0000000
2,08
Where
Id
log_date
ugovor_id
utc_datetime
latitude
ns
longitude
ew
brzina
pravac
inputs
outputs
analog1
analog2
the number of logged data

date of sending of data from GPS unit on server
the number of mashine &device which collects data
date and time of position registering of mashine/device
geographic latitude (decimal degrees)
direction marking for north and south (north/south)
geographic longitude(decimal degrees)
direction marking for east and west(east/west)
soeed of motion in moment of position registering
motion direction given by azimuth
condition of gigital inputs and outputs (contact)
option for remote controling of certain devices
analog sensor for fuel consumption displaying
According to this structure, each mashine operates undr its unique ID which enables extraction of data for selected
mashine. Encription for time of position registering is given through time frame displayed as date. Position in certain moment of time is encripted as geographic coordinates: latitude i longitude in decimal degrees. Each coordinate is marked in individual colone and hemisphere.
Apart from these data, each encription contains data on direction of motion in given route as well as speed of motion. In egzisting data base of source information values of direction and speed are not realistic and these values
sholuld be calculated from data of coordinates and time interval. However, in table data _t in source data base,
values are displayed for each encription or position registerd by two analogue sensors. Measuring scales of these
sensors are not calibrated according to realistic scale and can not be used for this analysis. Certain fields from described data structure are not necessary in this phase for further analysis. Those fields contain data on hemisphere,
log_date, inputs and outputs as well as speed and direction becouse of nonrealistic values (Bei, 2011).
Data adaptation
Source data from server are updated i.e. adjusted for further processing with purpose of fedback of needed/possible information.
Along with data processing unnecessary colons are eliminated, (log_date, ns, ew, direction, inputs, outputs). Data
adjustment requires adding of new fields that will contain new attributes needed for futher analysis, as well as
calculating of new values for these fields in table. In this way, for each encryption/point he number of data is
increased.
Registered position in source data (data located on server) is described by geographic coordinates in WGS84
system. Since the area of surface mine is presented in flat coordinates (x,y) in Gauss-Kruger projection i.e. in local
geodetic date, transformation in geodetic date was performed and conversion of coordinates on flat coordinate
system in Gauss-Kruger projection. For calculating of new data, it is necessary to chronologicaly organise data/encriptions for each mashine individualy, becouse in this phase data taken from server arent organised. In this
conotation, each collection of encriptions in certain mashine is sorted by date and time.
Regardless the type of myshine/vehicle it is necessary to add the fields/colons necessary for creating of model
which will be used for extraction of important information on mechanisation operation, as follows:
xds, yds - flat coordinates in state coordinate system
dt (dt_s) - the lenght of time interval between two encriptions/points for given vehicle
dd_m - the lenght of rout between two encriptions/points for certain vehicle
brzina_kmh - the speed of vehicle motion on given rout (dd/dt),
sd_km - total path lenght from the beggining of monitoringu (total dd) ,
238

PROCEEDINGS
number of points per day the number of point/encription for each day (in chronological order),
After processing of source data it is possible to do the filtration for elimination with unreal positions /speeds. For
needs of dividing per days, new encriptions/pionts were adaded as necessary, where time momet 23:59:59 was added as final moment for foolowing date i.e. 00:00:00 as new time moment for new following day (Bei, 2011). Data
prepared in this way represent imput data for extraction and analysis of parameters of labour indicators of mechanisation according to model defined for certain type of mechanisation. Structure of data after adjustment is given
in table 2.
Table 2. Structure of data after adjustment
id
utc
datetime
datum
time
dt
s
Y_ds
X_ds
dd
speed
Sd
sum_dt
Number
Points
km/h
km
per day
of days
per day
15937032
40136
19.11.09.
00:00:00
4919877
6535727
0,0
0,000
15937033
40136
19.11.09.
00:01:30
90
4919998
6535487
268
10,7
0,268
0,001042
15937034
40136
19.11.09.
00:02:19
49
4920152
6535263
272
20,0
0,540
0,001609
Data processed in this way along with complexed spatial questionaires, information on truck delays were extracted.
Modelling of data requires information on quality/reliability of data which have imput size of model. Geographic
coordinates are given in form of decimal degrees with four decimals. Decimal number of geographic coordinates
provides accuracy/inaccuracy of given values i.e. 0,99995 degrees.
In linear longitiude units
for geographical latitude (latituda) the value is 5,5 m
for geographical longitude (longituda) the value is 4,0 m
or, total position inaccuracy 6,8 m
This shows that encription of coordiantes should be increased for one decimal what would be compatible with possition accuracy (elikovi et al., 2010).
Since the speed was calculated from distance between two points and time interval from one point to anpther,
such determination of speed would be inaccurate in certain degree. Speed inaccuracy depending on time interval
for mentioned inaccuracy of 6,8 m route is given on graphic in picture 1. As graphic shows, inaccuracy for 1 minute
time interval is 0,41 km/h.
Because of inaccuracy in position determination (positioning accuracy) as well as speed inaccuracy, it is adopted
that each encryption represents encryption/point of machine labour if the speed is higher than 1,0 km/h and time
interval between two positions registering is higher than 5 minutes (300 s). In other words, each encryption
represents the point of machine delay if the speed is less than 1,0 km/h and time interval between two positions
registering is higher than 5 minutes (300 s).
3. DETERMINATION OF DELAYS FROM GPS MONITORING DATA

In this case, the important is the fact that any vehicle can, if needed, be angaged on any surface mine department
of coal mine Banovici, what is of great importance for data modeling. Area of certain surface mining departments
is defined by border coordinate values. Encriptions, i.e. points that are outside of given values are undergoing the
monitoring of vehicles outside those surface mining departments. Regardles to this fact, four locations are defined
surface mine Turija
surface mine Grivice
surface mineubri
others
Regardless the mashine type, delays are being defined according to same principle, and are determined according
to same model for all mashines
Separation on laobor and delay is conducted on term basis
delays:
dt_s > 300 i brzina_kmh < 1
labour (work):
dt_s < 300
239

PROCEEDINGS
where:
dt_s - actual time interval (s) for individual encription/point,
speed_kmh - actual speed (km/h) for individual encription/point.
According to earlier research on surface mine epartment of coal mine Banovici, the time of mashine upload of cargo on dumper is less than 300 s in average so delays aren also included in cycles longer than 300 s (Mai et al.,
2010). For location delay determination GIS programme package MapInfo (licence RGGF) is used. Locations of delay
for every mashine are determined by spatial questionaires according to criteria of speed and time interval /1/ and
in this way each mashine gets new table that contains information on all delays for observed time priod.
Delays were extracted according to two basis :
The first criteria for analysis is the lenght of delay no matter the location, i.e. all extracted delays make one set of
data, which is shared in subcategories of data depending on lenght of delay, i.e. artribute values dt_s.
According to lenght delays are grouped in six classes:
5-10 minutes delays (class 1)
Delays larger than 90 minuta (class 6)
Dividing of delays according to lenght is included in model in a way that structure of delay is determined on daily
basis (according to number and lenght). According to this model, the number and time of delay from each class will
be determined on daily basis. In this way data from delay will be displayed as time series from which periodicity or
cyclicity in variation of time or number of delays in cetain time periods.
For determination of delays according to periods, based on data extracted on daily basis, total and average values
of number and time of delays for each class of delay are determined.
Other criteria for extraction of delays according to delay type. This criteria as well is diveded in three groups:
Service
Repairing
Other
Delays that regards repairment and service are related to preciselly defined location. All delays, except for service
anf repairment are grouped in group others. Service and repairment are locationallt defined by coordinates of
ground positions of field where service and repairment locations are predetermined. Exception of these groups
from data base is conducted on basis of coordinate values, time interval and speed. Since repairment and service
locations are permanent for all mashines, dividing model for delay type is the same for all mashines.
According to this cryteria, precise information on number and time of delays from group of service and repairment
are gained. Location for the most common and the longest delays from group other can be determined.
Determination of delays for speciffic period
Source data are based in access data base. Data adjustment were performed in Access and Excell. In Mapinfo, data
were converted into MapINfo format (tab). After creating of geometrical primitives (points), these data can undergo
spatial questionaires. The result of spatial questionaire is the new table i.e. layer or topic, which can be further processed or combined with other spacial data.
Based on location, date/time, time interval or speed condition, spatial questionaires extract information on labour
and delays with purpose of creation of thematic map (8). From mechanisation monitoring data delays for four
trucks in four periods during the year 2009/10 were determined. Table 3 displays number of memorised encriptions/points, time of monitoring and total path values for these trucks.
Picture 1 displays realised routs of these trucks in given time periods. This picture evidently shows the network of
surfce mine routs as well as routes between surface mines.
This map also shows evident places of trucks cargo upload and download as fields with disproper shape. Picture 2.
displays all locations of these dumper trucks delays during these periods as well as locations of excavator labour for
given periods. Working areas of excavator were taken from measuring service department of coal mine Banovici.
This picture evidently shows that the concetration of delays is on location of upload, service and repairment. Under
240

PROCEEDINGS
the same model locations of buldozer delay with marking 1 were extracted. Picture 3. displays thematic map of
delays location according to time lenght.
Picture 1. Realised dumping truck routes during monitoring period
Picture 2. Dumping trucks delays locations during monitoring time
241

PROCEEDINGS
Picture 3. Bulldozer 1 delay locations during monitoring period
If delays for specific mashines are analysed individualy, than delays according to number and continuum can be
extracted in another table on daily basis. Delays data on daily basis from data base can be statisticaly processed
with purpose of gaining parameters for longer period of time as it is displayed by cyrcle diagram on picture 4. Picture 5. diplays spacial distribution of delays on time continuum basis for dumper truck that was mostly engaged on
surface mine Cubric in form of thematic map.
Table 3: Outlook of dumper truck monitoring data
Truck
Number of points
hours
path_km
path/hour
Belaz8
155377
1824
15119
8,29
Belaz9
170594
1988
16426
8,26
Belaz9
148547
2016
17158
8,51
Terex2
140515
1920
12964
6,75
b)
BELAZ10_NiD- vrijeme zastoja (sati,%)

20,36; 6%
118,64;
37%
BELAZ10_NiD- broj zastoja po klasama (%)

48; 9%
30,98;
10%
69; 12%
163; 29%
56,62;
17%
28; 5%
20,90; 6%
115; 21%
130; 24%
78,19;
24%
5_10 min
10_20 min
20_40 min
5_10 min
10_20 min
20_40 min
40_50 min
50_90 min
vece_90min
40_50 min
50_90 min
vece_90min
Picture 4. Number and continuum of Belaz 10 dumper truck delays
242

PROCEEDINGS
B10_ zastoji > 5 min

19.11. - 21.12.2009.
90 do 448
(48)
50 do 90
(69)
40
20
10
5
do
do
do
do
50 (28)
40 (115)
20 (132)
10 (161)
Picture 5. Spacial distribution of Belaz 10 dumper truck delays according to time continuum
Spatial questionnaires extract all location delays (longer than 5 minutes) in area of certain excavators for all
considered periods. Time distribution of excavator delays is displayed graphically on picture 6. According to type
i.e. location, the structure of delays is displayed in table 4 on basis of considered periods (76 days). Total number of
delays for each dumper truck individually is given along with the delay time continuum for each location. Final raw
of this table displays involvement of delay in total working time of dumper truck in percentage values.
Table 4. Number and time of dumper truck delays according to locations
Location
B10_number
B10_hours
B9_number
B9_hours
B8_number
B8_hours
T2_number
T2_hours
Total
1541
702,9344
1497
689,6744
1396
705,114
1336
723,516
Excavator code
1131
484,1622
876
244,81
649
171,03
642
135,899
Repairment
138
61,401
234
120,808
207
141,81
71
56,2266
Service
167
103,3939
216
158,0747
318
239,826
520
489,902
Other
105
54,36083
171
128,7789
222
149,164
103
41,4883
% of delays
38,54
37,81
38,66
39,67
vrijeme zastoja (sati)
Zastoji kod bagera za 76 dana

20
15
10
5
0
1
10
13 16
19 22
25 28
31 34
B8
37 40
43 46
B9
B10
49 52
55 58
61 64
67 70
T2
73 76
Broj dana
Picture 6. Time distribution of dumper truck delays on excavators location
243

PROCEEDINGS
4. DISSCUSSION
According to official archive and monitoring data basis, contrastive displaying of delays time continuum is given
with purpose of verification of delays gained in process of GPS monitoring data processing.
Table 5 displays working data and delays for all dumper trucks in total period (76 days) as well as differences in time
of delays gained from GPS data and official archive.
Table 5. difference in time of working and delays in total period (76 days).
Dumper truck
Effective hours officialy
Delay_hours
officialy
work_hours
GPS data
Delay_hours
GPS data
Difference in delays (hours)
Difference in delays %
terex2
1319,5
696,5
1139,02
804,74
108,24
15,54
belaz8
1263
555
1121,21
699,1
144,1
25,96
belaz9
1429
584
1227,82
785,21
201,21
34,45
belaz10
1352
664
1215,14
798,79
134,79
20,30
This table evidently shows differences in time continuum delays archive that goes from 15 to 34%.
The largest differences in delays archive are for dumper trucks Belaz 8 and 9 which were engaged mostly on one
surface mine area. This data displaying evidently shows that classic way of archiving does not offer reliable
information on delays.
Processing of data collected in process of monitoring of mining mechanisation based on GPS can provide information on work as well as delays for each unit of mechanisation. Here is goven a short display of information
recieved from GPS data without further analysis. The adventage of usage of GPS data is primarly in fact of possibility of deterimination of delays as well as locations ofa delays i.e. effective working time diring one shift and based
on capacity and achieved results the parameters of mashine usage in real condition can be gained.
The most iportant is the possibility of number determination as well as time continuum of delays along with delay
location. In this way spacial parameters are gained that can be included in spacial analysis in planing and
organisation of technological process.
Information on number and time continuum of delays on certain location help in planning and removimg of causes
of delays with purpose of increasment of effects in mashines work and economy in production.
REFERENCES
[1]
M. Bei: Modeliranje prostorno-vremenskih podataka tehnolokog pocesa i karakteristika radnog prostora PK RMU Banovii, Tuzla
2011.
[2]
M. Bei, S. Mai, R. elikovi: Baza podataka praenja kamionskog transporta, Meunarodna konferencija 'Trendovi u savremenom
rudarstvu', monografija zbornika radova, Tuzla 2006.
[3]
R. elikovi, S. Mai, M. Bei: Prednosti primjene GPS za prikupljanje prostornih podataka na povrinskim kopovima, Zbornik radova
RGGF-a, broj XXXIV, Tuzla 2007.
[4]
R.elikovi, M.Bei, S.Mai: Isitivanje tanosti pozicioniranja runim GPS ureajem GPSV, Zbornik radova RGGF-a, broj XXXV, Tuzla
2010.
[5]
Peter A.Barrough and Rachael A.Mc Donnelli: Principi Geografskih informacionih sistema, Beograd 2006,
[6]
S. Mai, M. Bei, R. elikovi:''Odreivanje pojedinih parametara kamionskog transporta na osnovu podataka prikupljenih runim
GPS prijemnikom''Zbornik radova '38th International October Conference on Mining and Metallurgy'ISBN 86-7827-019-5, strana 147151, Donji Milanovac 2006.
[7]
G. enborn, G. Radivojevi, B. Lazi, M. Ostoji: Primena GPS na povrinskim kopovima: dispeerski centar, RINT, Prijedor 2001.
[8]
User Guide Mapinfo Professional 9.5
[9]
Tehnika dokumentacija RMU Banoviid.d. Banovii
244

PROCEEDINGS
SHAFT SINKING AT VELENJE COAL MINE
ABSTRACT
Duan IMEK1
mag. Ludvik GOLOB
mag. Bojan LAJLAR
Premogovnik Velenje,d.d., Velenje,

Slovenia
1
dusan.cizmek@rlv.si
Velenje coal mine is an underground mine with average annual production

around 4 million tons of lignite coal. Our main conveyance system which
brings whole mine production to the surface is a system of several consecutive belt conveyors. Due to mine development active production fields are
moving to west part of coal deposit and existing conveyance system became
widely spread and distant. In 2009 we started technical and economic studies for new production shaft equipped with skips. After exploration drilling
and geologic research in 2010, we started with operational activities for
shaft sinking in 2011.
In first and second phase of preliminary works we prepared infrastructures
for construction site, we constructed shaft collar and we sank shaft to depth
of 37 m, then we assembled and installed hanging platforms, top cover, temporary headframe and winch hall with nine winches.
Complete set of shaft sinking equipment was ready in September 2012 when
we started with shaft sinking. In first 100 m we crossed several different geologic layers; we had difficult geologic conditions, water and mud irruptions,
gas outburst, but we manage to break through. For such complex and difficult underground construction we implemented extensive geological and
geotechnical surveillance.
Constant monitoring gave us very useful information, which were daily used
th
to make decisions for operative activities. At the moment (12 of July 2013)
we are at depth of 150 m and shaft sinking is in progress. Final shaft depth
will be 505 m and according to our plan we will finish shaft sinking till March
2015. After equipment assembly and commissioning we are planning to start
with regular skip hoisting in February 2016.
Keywords
Production Shaft, Shaft Sinking, Skip, Hoisting, Underground Mining
1. NEW PRODUCTION SHAFT NOP II

Premogovnik Velenje Velenje Coal Mine is an underground coal mine with average annual production around 4
million tons of lignite coal. Existing main conveyance system, which brings whole mine production to the surface, is
a system of several consecutive belt conveyors. Galleries and equipment are well maintained, system runs well and
it suits its need. Despite all this, conveyance system has some weaknesses and disadvantages. It is widely spread
and distant to other mine facilities; it is difficult to ensure its operational reliability; high operating costs, many
kilometres of open underground galleries presents also some safety risks [3].
These were the main reasons for us to start thinking about new transportation system, new technical solution,
which can also be more cost efficient. In 2009 we started technical and economic studies for new production shaft
equipped with skips. New production shaft NOP II is located closer to active production panels underground,
closer to stock deposits and closer to power plant on the surface. Studies [1] [2] confirmed technical feasibility and
return on investment for this project was proven [4]. We continue with engineering, project designing and we made
an investment program. After exhaustive study and revision, at the end of 2010, we got allowance for investment
and approval to start operative activities on our project.
245

PROCEEDINGS
Through technical studies [1] [2] we determined shaft dimensions and we chose double compartment skip with friction hoist (Koepe) as adequate hoisting system. You can find some basic technical characteristic for our new production shaft and hoisting system in Table 1.
Table 1. Technical characteristics for new production shaft and hoisting system
Shaft inner diameter
6,15 m
Shaft depth
505 m
Hoisting distance
490 m
Max. hoisting speed
12 m/s
Payload
23,0 t
Hoisting capacity/hour
964,9 t/h
Hoisting capacity/year
4.081.503 t/year
Preliminary-works have started in January 2011. In first and second phase of pre - works we prepared infrastructures for construction site, we constructed shaft collar and we sank shaft to depth of 37 m using crane at open
shaft collar [5]. In April 2012 we started with assembly and installation of hanging platforms, top cover, temporary
headframe and winch hall with nine winches. Complete set of shaft sinking equipment [6] was ready in September
2012 when we started with shaft sinking.
2. EQUIPMENT AND SHAFT SINKING TECHNOLOGY

On location of new shaft detailed geologic exploration was done and we had some experience information from
shafts which were sunk in the same area years ago. Therefore we knew exactly what will be geological and hydrological conditions for shaft sinking. We decided to use conventional mining shaft sinking method; using hanging
platforms in the shaft, drum hoists, drum winches and temporary headframe on the surface and other auxiliary
equipment for dewatering, ventilation, gas monitoring, etc. Hanging platforms headframe and other steel structures were designed [6] by experts at Premogovnik Velenje and manufactured at our subsidiary companies. Simultaneously with equipment designing technology for shaft sinking was also determined in details [6].
Figure 1. Shaft site - surface
246

PROCEEDINGS
Work site bottom of the shaft

At the bottom of the shaft we installed electrohydraulic loader which can excavate profile of the shaft and load
muck in the kibbles. Loader is small and movable on tracks; it can also rotate 360 around its axis. It can be lifted
from the bottom by the main drum hoist and in few separate parts it can be transported through hanging platforms
up to the surface. At work site you can find signalling and communication equipment, gas monitoring equipment,
dewatering pump and pipelines, pneumatic tools. Fresh air is coming from surface, pushed by ventilator down the
shaft, through 800 mm ventilation tube.
Figure 2. Work site
Working platform
At maximum of ten meters above work site is positioned first hanging platform, so called working platform. Working platform has two levels. First level can be used as platform from which we can execute certain operations, but
at the same time it is protection shield above work site at the bottom. Second level of working platform is construction formwork for final concrete lining.
Tensioning platform
Some 30 up to 50 m above work site is positioned second hanging platform, so called tensioning platform. Its
weight is about 40 t, it has three levels, and its main purpose is tensioning of the guidance ropes. On the first level
we have water container and dewatering pump and there is electric equipment for power supply to the work site.
Tensioning platform is also used for installation of shaft insets including final ladder compartment. Ladder compartment is installed simultaneously as final concrete lining is done. Dewatering pipeline, pipelines for compressed
air and shotcrete are installed at the same time. The rest of shaft insets, including bunton layers and guidance rails
for the skips, will be installed at the end, when shaft sinking is completed. Beneath working platform and tensioning
platforms we are using rope ladders as emergency escape way.
Both hanging platforms have openings to enable kibbles to pass through on their way to the bottom/surface. Kibbles are guided by guiding frame - yoke which slides along guidance ropes to the tensioning platform; beneath tensioning platform kibbles are driven unguided.
Sounding line platform
Sounding line platform is fixed level about 10 m beneath surface. There we have installed bridge platform which
carries the central axis sounding line. This is the most important sounding line used for shaft centering. Additional
on this level we have installed six more sounding lines. Three of them are already used for accurate installation of
main holders of ladder compartment, and the rest of them will be used later at installation of guidance rails.
247

PROCEEDINGS
Top cover
On the surface, on shaft collar, we have top cover with 1,5 m high parapet wall, which protects shaft entry, allows
used air exhaust and enables all infrastructure to enter in to the shaft. Top cover is massive steel construction
which also carries half of load on tensioning platform. Tail ends of guidance ropes are connected to holders of top
cover with special hydraulic system, which enables us to adjust tensioning force in each rope separately. On top
cover we have two openings with pneumatic flaps, entry to inspection platform and to ladder compartment.
Headframe
On surface we have 37 m high headframe with deflection sheaves for all ropes. Headframe has smaller inner frame
with manger slide for muck which is used for emptying kibbles. Particular pneumatic tool in headframe also enables
us to separate kibble from guiding yoke to exchange kibble. We are using three different type of kibbles for manriding and transportation of different material.
Winch hall and winches
We are using two independent drum hoists for man-riding and transportation of material. Then we have four
winches to manoeuvre tensioning platform, two winches to move working platform and one more winch for
manoeuvring main energetic cable. All together nine winches, which are installed on massive foundation in winch
hall. In winch hall we have a special room for electric equipment and separate control room for winch operator.
Safety signalling system and communication system
Modern safety signalling system was designed and installed by our personnel. System also provides digital and analog signals to safety circuit of hoisting winches and to visualization display on operators control panel.
For communication we are using three systems; conventional telephone line, open line communication units and
portable wireless communication units. All three systems are designed to operate in explosive atmosphere (ATEX
M1, Ex ia) [6].
Technology [6]
Electrohydraulic loader on the bottom is used to excavate profile of the shaft and load muck in the kibbles. Profile
is excavated in steps of 0,75 up to 1,5 m, depending on geologic conditions.
For primary support we are using steel arches and shotcrete reinforced with steel mesh, which is installed in two
layers. In difficult geologic conditions we were also using piles, anchors and some draining materials (mesh, geotextile, draining tubes).
Achieved average daily advancing at excavation and primary support is 1,8 m/day.
Every 20 up to 25 m we increase excavation cross section to make intermediate ring foundation with final inner
diameter 6,15 m. Then we continue with shaft sinking and we excavate next 20 up to 25 m. While we excavate next
section, we are surveying upper section (pre-installed extensometers, convergences). If there are no movements or
deformations we can make final concrete lining.
For concreting we must move working platform with construction formwork for final concrete lining to last intermediate ring foundation and fix it in position for concreting. Final monolithic concrete lining is 500 mm thick and
also reinforced with steel mesh; of course steel reinforcement must be installed in correct position before formwork is moved and fixed. Concrete with special characteristics is prepared in local concrete-plant and transported
to shaft site. Further, down shaft, it is transported in kibbles designed for concrete transportation. One step of
concreting final lining is up to 3 m high (which is determined by formwork height) and we are doing it in 24 hour
cycle; so next day we move up working platform with formwork for next 3 m and execute concreting in next section. Depending on distance between intermediate ring foundations, and distance between openings for main
holder for ladder compartment, sometimes we must adjust/reduce height of concreting step. Average efficacy at
concreting final lining is 2,7 m/day.
When final concrete lining is finished, we move working platform in lower position. Then we make manoeuvre with
tensioning platform and simultaneously we install final ladder compartment and all pipelines. Average efficacy at
this phase is 7,5 m/day.
248

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 3. Shaft, ladder compartment
One shift crew is ten up to eleven workers including electrician and mechanic for basic maintenance. Work is running in three shifts, seven days a week. Average efficacy at complete shaft sinking is 0,6 m/day.
Geologic conditions are now much better and according to geologic prospection they will remain good at least for
next 180 m; personnel is now more skilled; all start up troubles with organization and equipment are eliminated;
considering this facts it is reasonable to expect better results in future.
3. GEOLOGY
As already mentioned, geology on location for new shaft was well known even before we started with the project.
Despite this fact we execute additional exploration drilling. Borehole JUG 48/09 (depth 521 m) was drilled in the
profile of new shaft. Core from this borehole was used for exact geologic prospection.
From geologic prospection we knew that in first 100 m we will have to cross three packages of geologic layers
which are containing water (sand, gravel). For more precise hydro-geologic survey another borehole, JUG 49/09
(depth 175 m), was drilled in distance of 35 m from shaft centre. Water affluence was estimated in all three packages, and pressure sensors were installed in separate layers for latter monitoring. According to this hydro-geologic
survey anticipation for water afflux during shaft sinking was 150 up to 320 l/min, from all three packages.
Actual water afflux at excavation in first package (depth 28 - 39 m) was 80 l/min at the beginning and later dropped
to 40 l/min. We were prepared for dewatering and this afflux cause no problem.
In second package (depth 49 60 m) water afflux was much bigger. At depth of 52 m we had water and fine sands
irruption which stopped us for several days. Water afflux was more than 200 l/min at the beginning, later reduced
and stabilized at 80 l/min. Presence of gases was detected. At the time of first irruption concentration of methane CH4 rises up to 7 vol. %. We were pumping water and removing irrupted sand for several days before water pressure
has dropped. We were constantly monitoring gas and water pressure by pressure sensors which were installed in
borehole JUG 49/09.
With experience from second package, we were very careful when we were approaching third package (depth 85
95 m). We execute some additional exploration drilling, but there was almost no water afflux from this layer. Permeability to gas and water in this package was much lower and we crossed it with no problems.
According to geologic prospection geologic conditions will remain good at least for next 180 m. Later we will have
to cross several meters of more solid and hard layers. Excavation will probably be more difficult and slower, but we
do not expect any significant problems.
249

PROCEEDINGS
4. GEOTECHNICAL SURVEILLANCE
For such pretentious underground construction as mine shaft, it is very important to have adequate geotechnical
surveillance. Certain technical parameters about construction itself and its influence to surrounding must be constantly monitored.
To achieve demanded accuracy at shaft sinking geodetic surveillance is very important. Beside sounding and guiding at excavation and concreting the final lining geodetic surveillance also includes ground movement surveillance
on the surface around the shaft. Additionally we have three vertical borehole inclinometers, which are located
around the shaft, to observe possible horizontal movements in top 100 m strata.
Geologic and hydro-geologic observation is done on daily basis.
Geotechnical profiles (extensometers, convergence profiles) are installed in primary support when needed (depending on geologic conditions).
Of course, there are several more technical parameters which are measured and monitored. For instance technical
parameters about concrete quality control, or technical parameters about ventilation in the shaft.
5. CONCLUSION
Shaft sinking project for new production shaft at Premogovnik Velenje, is running well. At the moment shaft depth
is 150 m. We have successfully sunk the shaft through first 100 m, which was geologically most difficult part of
whole 505 m. We are planning to finish shaft sinking till March 2015.
According to project time plan, after equipment delivery and commissioning, regular skip hoisting will start in February 2016.
REFERENCES
[1]
Junge M.: Technical study, P017-09/002, Production shaft - Premogovnik Velenje, STIEPF AG, 2009
[2]
Fuhrmann J., Koch M.: Technical study, O-26234, Velenje Main Shaft Hoisting Installation NOP II, Siemag Tecberg, 2011
[3]
imek D., Golob L., Lajlar B.: A new production shaft at Velenje coal mine, Premogovnik Velenje - IV. Balkanmine Congress,
Ljubljana 2011
[4]
Golob L., Lajlar B., Kamenik M., Rovsnik M.: Investicijski program INVD NOP II ver. 2010/7A Racionalizacija glavnega odvoza,
Premogovnik Velenje, 2010
[5]
Lajlar B. et al.: RP-370/2010BL Izvedba pripravljalnih del za izdelavo jaka NOP II, Premogovnik Velenje, 2010
[6]
Lajlar B. et al.: RP-368/2010BL Izdelava jaka NOP II, Premogovnik Velenje, 2010
250

PROCEEDINGS
EXCAVATION OF OVERBURDEN IN THE WATERED

WORKING AREA ABOVE THE ROOF OF COAL
IN EASTERN PART OF OPEN PIT DRMNO
ABSTRACT
Performing the technical mining solutions given in the GRP operative unit of the mine was faced with two serious technological
problems which are particularly shown in the eastern part of the
OPM Drmno. One of the problems is that the current system of
deep dewatering cannot fully bring down the underwater level and
prepare the tier for digging, so then on contact of overburden with
the roof there is a certain quantity of water which makes the pulp
material during the excavator operation.
This material is very inconvenient when loading, transportation and
disposal at the landfill and in winter conditions due to low temperatures, the material blocks certain functions of mechanization and
operation of the system. Another problem is that the roof of the
coal is not flat so the excavator cannot track on such a surface
without a serious bulldozer work to make a route.
These problems have forced mining operative unit to try out a
number of technical solutions in order to overcome these problems
and allow mechanization to achieve the planned production. The
existing technical solution that is now applied is technologically
acceptable, but there is a disadvantage because the excavators
working directly on the excavation or coal production are being
taken from the other systems.
New technical solution is based on correction of the excavation
technology and digging of discharge ducts at the base of the inner
side of the slope levels, to prevent the flow of water in the excavator block during the overburden digging above the coal roof level.
The proposed technical solution provides the ability to excavate a
part of overburden with the designed machinery, or with an excavator SRs 2000 32/5 and it is not necessary to take the machinery
from another system. And if the effect the excavator is reduced by
the proposed solution, the excavation is far more acceptable, costeffective and efficient than the existing one.
Maan TRIFUNOVI, dipl.in.rud.

Momilo MOMILOVI, dipl.in.rud.
Milan PAVLOVI dipl.in.rud.
1. INTRODUCTION
OCMDrmno was opened in 1983 and the coal production was started in 1987. it is located in the eastern part of
Serbia 100km far from Belgrade. It is placed in the district of Branicevo on the area of fertile plain of Stig, between
river Danube on the north and Mlava on the west side. It takes the area of about 2450ha. About 95% of coal
production is used for the needs of TE-KO (installed power output of about 1000 MW), and about 5 % is
anticipated for citizens and institutions in the Branicevo district. The remaining reserves of coal provide the annual
production of 9 x 106 t to de end of 2054. However, PD"TE-KO " represents the signivicant thermal power capacity
for electric power production in Serbia, because it produces over 14 % of electric power in total balance of EPS.
251

PROCEEDINGS
2. HYDRO-GEOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE COAL FIELD

On the area which is taken by OCM Drmno there are two exploitable coal layers, III and II coal layer. Third layer is
the main one and it is spread on the whole area, with average thicknes about 16m and the second layer is
developed on the limitied space on the west side, close to the surface of terrain has the potential of 3-9 m. Coal is
of woody structure, dark color and average calorific value of about 9.686 KJ/kg. Its deposition goes from east to
north-west with slight slope of 3-5. On a smaller area and in depressed area, coal falls event to 15 but these
disturbances have local character. Depending on the angle of depostion the depth may change. In the east part,
coal is located on the depth to 50m, in the middle it is on about 80 m and on the final north-west to 140 m from the
surface of terrain. The coefficient of overburden is 4,86 m3 m/t.
In terms of hydrogeology, coal field Drmno is considered complex. Exploitation of coal is conditioned by and it is
difficult due to the presence of water in roof layers. In current phase, wells make the most important facilities in
the system of protection against underwater.
At the coal field Drmno extensive hydrogeologic researches have been performed so far. The research works:
drilling of research bores (hydrogeologic-geotechnical-structural) ) found reliable information in terms of spatial
prevalency and mutual position of hydrogeologic collectors aquifers and their relationship towards hydrologic
insulators. By water drainage from just bored and the existing wells we came to representative coefficient values of
filtration and transmission. By chemical analysis of the taken water samples it is possible to monitor the quality of
the water drained by wells.
Aquifer formed in gravel and sand (Drmska izdan)
For coal exploitation the most important is the aquifer formed in sand and gravel. On the east side of the
boundaries this aquifer follows Boevaka greda, and on the west padnoj alluvium of Mlava. In exploitation field,
sand has continuous prevalency while gravel is missing in central part of the field. The thickness of the sand and
gravel is from 5 to 125 m.
Basic feature of the aquifer geometry is continuous fall of floor surface from east to west, that is from south to
north. In natural conditions the level of the aquifer is sub-artesian, and during the dewatering of OCM Drmno it
has free level.
Hydrogeologic parameters of sediments, where this aquifer was formed is in the range:
-7
-3
filtration coefficient (k) m/s
2,710 1,810
transmission ability coefficient (T) m2/s
8x10-9 - 1,110-3
0,04 0,22.
specific efficiency ()
During 2006 and 2007, pumping at the existing well lines and on just made line LC-X was examined. The received
hydrogeologic parameters are within the following range:
filtration coefficient (k) m/s
2,810-6 8,9710-3
2
transmission ability coefficient (T) m /s
1,0410-4 2,4910-2
specific efficiency ()
0,003 0,0997
Condition of underwater
The condition of underwater in the area of coal field Drmno forms under the influence of factors and causes:
Surface flows (Danube,Mlava and Little Danube- Dunavac) which make the natural boundaries of the coal pit
Drmno and the main source for fertilizing of aquifiers formed on the roof gravel-sand hydrogeologic collectors;
Mlava river basin is regulated in the zone of open cut mine Drmno; hypsometrically, it is higher than the
former basin and along the right bank it has the built up embankment sized for 100 annual water;
Vertikal balance (infiltration of rainfall, evaporation, transpiration);
Intensive dewatering of the roof coal deposits by drainage wells
Under the influence of the above mentioned factors and causes, aquifiers of underwater are formed and they vary
at the different depth than the area of terrain. Based on the completed observation of underwater levels in wells
and piezometers during different time period, it may be concluded that the levels of underwater in open-cut mine
Drmno and its close surrounding are mostly found at the roof hydrogeologic collector built from the fine grain size
sand. Gravel hydrologic collector is drained and the underwater level in this collector is found only on the east side
of the mine (along the well SLA). Underwater levels in the immediate roof oscilate in time depending on the
252

PROCEEDINGS
influence of certain mentioned factors. Coefficient of the coal field Drmno drainage at the beginning of operation
(1985) was 15 and now it is 3.5 m3/t which makes Drmno mine a very drained coal field. It is necessary to have
permanent protection from overflows of underwater and surface water during the anticipated operation life of
open cut mine Drmno (31years).
3. DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING TECHNICAL SOLUTION

Concept and technology of the overburden excavation
Excavation of the overburden and coal is made by contiunal BTO and BTD systems. There are five BTO systems
working on overburden and one system BTD operates on coal excavation with two level of excavation. According to
the vertical division the first three BTO systems which have excavators SRs2000 dig the overburden on the
complete width of the area and the remaining two BTO systems excavate overburden on the west side of the mine,
which has the biggest potential.
Digging of the immediate roof deposits in the east side of the mine is performed by BTO 3 system with the
excavator SRs 2000 32/5 . According to the designed solution the overburden is excavated in blocks to the level of
roof and it is not anticipated to use any other machinery except of bulldozers. The height of the tier is about 12m
and the width of block is 55 m. Figure no.1 shows the layout on OCMDrmno.
Figure 1. Layout of OCMDrmno
253

PROCEEDINGS
Technical solution for dewatering

In order to provide normal conditions for mining works, deep and surface dewatering take place. Deep dewatering
consists of the series of drainage well lines put before the zone of excavation and on the edges of the mine. Basic
aim of these wells is to: lower the level of underwater as a precondition for machinery operation and maintenance
of geomechanical stability of tiers during the mining work at the mine.
Purpose of the surface dewatering is to collect water which flows into the the open cut mine due to atmospheric
effects and water that flows to the point where overburden touches coal roof layer, by drainage duct system from
the zone of mining works into water-collectors. By pumps and pipelines it is taken out from water-collectors to the
surface of the mine in OLB and further to rivers Mlava and Dunavac.
Issues during the overburden excavation
The overburden excavation in this area of the mine is made by the SRs 2000 32/5 as anticipated according to GRP
for the capacity of 9 x 106 t per year. Due to the irregular surface of the roof layer and insufficient dewatering of
the terrain (wells can not completely reduce the level of underwater in this part of the mine), it is impossible to
have regular operation of machinery according to the designed technology. Namely, during the excavator's work,
material gets dilluted and pulpous after mixing with water and it is not suitable for load and transport. Such
material is impossible to use at the disposal and to form geometric shape of a tier because there is no geomechanic
stability. Also, irregular roof layer makes the excavator unable to work normally without intervention of bulldozer
to make a route. When realized that SRs 2000 32/5 is unable to operate in such conditions, several solutions were
tried but it did not show the expected results related to the system operation. Now, this part of overburden is being
excavated by the bucket excavator taken from the BTO 1 system, and transport of material is done by belt
conveyor B-1400mm to the conveyor of BTO 3 system.
4. NEW TECHNICAL SOLUTION

Technical solution is based on the excavation technology modification and construction of drainage ducts in the
bottom of inner side slope of a tier. A duct is made in order to prevent water to flows in the excavator's block
during the overburden excavation jus above the roof layer of coal, and the sub-tier is left for the route of
excavator's movement.
Technology of the overburden excavation in altitudinal operation
Technology of digging the overburden out on the east side is executed as follows. The height of a tier is not
excavated to the coal roof layer but a sub-tier of about 2m high is left to the coal roof. In this way it is possible to
make quality route for the excavator's movement from the left material, and this route will be far enough from the
unelvelled and watered area of the coal roof. Figure no.1.
Figure 1. Technological scheme of the overburden excavation
Digging is performed per blocks after the total height of a tier is divided to sub-tiers (cuts) which will then be
excavated from the top to bottom by vertical cuts. Figure no.2.
254

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Technological scheme of the tier excavation
After the completion of the altitudinal block excavation, before the excavator raises its pole and goes to another
block, the excavator makes a trench at the bottom of inner side slope to the coal roof with the cut angle same as
for sub-tier III , figure no.2. Then the trench is cleaned from material by the backhoe and it is deepened on the coal
roof layer to 1m deep, following the natural slope of coal layer. This trench is continued by the excavator's
movement to the east boundary of the mine, figure no.3
Figure 3. Tier on reaching the east boundary of the mine
After reaching the east boundary of the mine (figure no.3) a trench is digged out at the bottom of the tier on the
surface of coal roof layer. In order to set the natural (free) flow of water from east to west, the trench is connected
to already made one at the west side, figures 3 and 5.
In this way water that comes from the north and east of the mine is introduced to these trenches in a controlled
manner and it wil not allow water to dissolve across the coal roof area. Figure no.5
Technology of sub-tier excavation
After reaching the east side of the mine, excavator shall continue to excavates the left sub-tier, figure no.4.
Figure 4. Tehnoloka ema otkopavanja podetae
255

PROCEEDINGS
Excavation is being performed per blocks, figure no.5. the stroke of the excavator's movement suits the reaching
lenght of the bogie wheel pole and it is 27m.
Technology of excavation consists of retracting the excavator for a length of a block and then by cutting the
subtier from up to the coal roof a block is created and it is further excavated toward the east to the end. When the
digging of a block is completed, the excavator returns bac, for next block, figure no.6. cycles repeat until the whole
lenght of the sub-tier is excavated, Figure no.7.
Figure 5. Longitudinal profil of the tier
Figure 6. Cross profile of the tiers block
During the excavation of subtier it has to be paid attention not to previously made discharge duct, along the outer
side slope of the tier. Material left on the coal roof layer after passing over by bogie wheel and in local depressed
area, will be pushed by bulldozer, figure no.7. when the excavation of the tier is finished, area is completely cleared
and protected against the inflow on the point of touching with overbureden, Figure no.8
Figure 7. Technological profile of the subtier excavation
Figure 8. Final look of the coal roof with regulated ducts
256

PROCEEDINGS
5. PREVENTION OF WATER DISSOLVING OVER THE COAL ROOF LAYER

Having in mind that on the touching point between overburden and coal there is certain amount of water, it is
necessary to direct it into ducts and to send it to the main water collector in the shortest way.
Water collected by new made drainage ducts in free (natural) fall shall be sent to other discharge (collector) ducts
connected to the central water-collector. Connection to the main discharge ducst is made by cross ducts on the
coal roof. Construction of ducts and maintenance of the water flow is everyday obligation of the mine operational
department.
In order not to send water from east side of the mine to the west, there should be made a smaller water-collector
at the coal roof or floor to collect all water flowing along the east boundary.
6. CONCLUSION
Techical solution currently applied for overburden excavation in the east part of mine can be continued, but
for the longterm priod it directly affects the reduction of excavated coal reserves..
The proposed technical solution gives the possibility to excavate this part of overburden with the designed
machinery, that is the excavator SRs 2000 32/5 without taking machinery from some other system.
Although the excavator efficiency is being reduced by it, but the overburden excavation by the proposed
technical solution is more acceptable, economic and efficient then the existing.
257

PROCEEDINGS
GEOPHYSICS IN MINING
258

PROCEEDINGS
USING SEISMIC METHODS FOR DEFINING

OPTIMAL PARAMETERS FOR BLASTING
ABSTRACT
Blagica DONEVA1
Marjan DELIPETREV
Todor DELIPETROV
Zoran PANOV
Faculty of natural and technical

sciences, Stip, Republic of Macedonia
1
blagica.doneva@ugd.edu.mk
Mining is basic in the process of exploitation of mineral raw materials,

whether it is a surface or underground mines. Separate section is the special
blasting which must ensure strict, advance superiors conditions. Success in
performed blasting depends on the applied method, the rocky massif and
quantity of explosives.
To determine the method for blasting and the quantity of explosive in the
blast holes, it is necessary to know the mechanical properties of the ground:
direction of foliation, degree of cracking, Jung modulus of elasticity and
other parameters which are used for mathematical modeling to define the
position of the blast holes and the optimal quantity of explosive in them.
As a proper geophysical method for defining the mechanical properties of
the rock complex is seismic method which gave all relevant parameters for
successful blasting. Seismic method could be useful applied in defining the
explosion zones: zone of thermal influence, internal plastic zone and external plastic zone.
In the paper, briefly, will be presented seismic method and the mechanical
parameters derived from investigation.
Keywords
Blasting, Mechanical Properties, Parameters, Seismic Method
1. INTRODUCTION
Mass application of the blasting technique, especially in mining, results from the fact that one blasting replaces
several months of work of many people and machines. Besides time efficiency, economic benefit should be taken
into account. Highly developed blasting techniques, today, allow good control of the seismic action on the rock
masses.
During the explosion of the mine charge, in the first phase, explosive changes into highly compressed gases, than
comes to expansion of the explosive gases in the area and potential energy changes into mechanical work. The energy near the place of the explosion break and crush the rock mass and in the surrounding creates cracks and permanent deformations, than changes into elastic deformation. This elastic deformation, depending of the area, can
cover larger area and could cause side effects on the engineering objects and surrounding settlements in the wider
blasting zone.
Today are used different blasting methods with aim to increase efficiency of the blasting, or much of the energy to
be spent in the zone of breaking and crushing, and a smaller part to be changed in energy of the elastic deformation of the area.
Modern blasting methods give possibility of relative control of the dimensions of pieces of crushed rock mass with
aim to reduce the secondary blasting of the blocks.
2. PHYSICAL BASIS FOR APPLICATION OF SEISMIC METHOD IN THE BLASTING TECHNIQUES

Spreading of the seismic waves in the rocks is related to deformations caused by natural and artificial forces, or
rock masses act as an elastic medium. From that point of view, it is necessary to define the relation between the
deformations D, strain N and parameters of elasticity Pi - D = F(N, Pi)
259

PROCEEDINGS
In the theory are known several parameters of elasticity Pi:

Young's modulus of elasticity E
l
E N
l
where: l - length of the deformation rod
l - length deformation
F
S
F - action force
S - cross section of rod
Poison's coefficient
d l
d l
where: d - diameter of rod

d - deformation of rod's diameter
Shearing modulus G
From the elasticity theory is known that elastic parameters G and E are mutualy dependant, and the depandance is
present with the relation:
E
21
Volume modulus K
If on solid body with voulume V act homogenous compresive force (hydraulic pressure), the body decreasis its
volume. Volume module is given with the relation:
V
KN
V
Relation between seismic velocities of longitudinal Vp and transversal Vs waves
Modern seismic methods can very precisely measure the seismic velocities Vp and Vs. With the following relations
are given connections between the spreading velocity of the seismic waves and the elastic parameters of the medium:
Vp
Vs
E 1
1 1 2
1
- density of medium
3. SEISMICAL EFFECTS OF BLASTING

For successful blasting it is necessary to know physical properties of the rock masses, and in this case, the best is
geophysical seismic method.
Near the mining borehole, during the blasting comes to breaking and crushing of rocks and that is the useful part of
the spent energy of blasting. On the distance from the borehole axes, depending of the quantity of explosive and of
the physical - mechanical properties of the rock mass, elastic - plastic deformations are generated (fig. 1).
The distance on which elastic deformations appear is
d 0.12 3 Q
Q quantity of exp losive in kg
Depending which parameter of the oscilation is registered (displacement, velocity or acceleration), the recording is
called seismogram, velosigram or accelerogram.
Basic factor of the seismic action in blasting is the pressure of the explosive wave , given with the relation:
260

PROCEEDINGS
1
Ev2 10 5 N / cm 2
4
where: - density of medium
Ev - explosive velocity
Velocity of oscilation Vv that occured during explosion is Vv 1 Ev .
4
Problem for defining the action from the blasting is relativeli complex and depend from many parameters, but the
most often is used the speed of vibration of particles, given by
L
U v k 0.5
Q
where: k - parameter of medium

u - parameter of seismic action of the medium
Q - unit explosiv filling
L - radial distance from the unit filling
Figure 1. Time diagrams of pressure P(t) of shock wave of tension
by zone of explosion (Mirakovski, 2007)
Analysing the above stayed for the selection of

blasting method, explosive and assesment of the
destroing action, as well as the seismic affection on
the wider vicinity, the first of all is necesary good
knowing of the physical properties of the rock masses
in situ. For definiton of these parameters of the
medium, it is useful to use seismic method on the
area for blasting with aim to define the parameters of
the rocks necesary to define optimal method for
blasting.
4. CONCLUSION
Blasting is a complex mining - geological process that
depends of many engineering parameters, type of the
explosive, schedule of the mine boreholes, dimension
of unit filling, scheme of ignition and other important
activities which should be implemented in blasting. It
should be known that blasting is one of the most
important processes in mining.
In this paper, attention is paied on the real problem
to define the physical - mechanical characteristics of
the rock mass for blasting, with aim to determine
optimal model of blasting appropriate for that
geological medium.
REFERENCES
[1]
Dambov I.: Analysis of criteria for evaluation of quakes and safety distances in blasting, master thesis, 2011
[2]
Jakosky J.J.: Exploration geophysics, 1960
[3]
Mirakovski G.: Quakes of the ground from explosions with optimization of the seismic action in blasting, doctoral thesis, 2007
[4]
Slimak S., Engineering geophysics, 1996
261

PROCEEDINGS
APPLYING GEOMAGNETIC RESEARCH METHOD

IN ALLUVIAL DEPOSITS OF GOLD
ABSTRACT
Marjan DELIPETREV1
Sanja POSTOLOVA
Blagica DONEVA
Gorgi DIMOV
Todor DELIPETROV
Faculty of natural and technical sciences, Stip, Republic of Macedonia

1
marjan.delipetrev@ugd.edu.mk
Republic of Macedonia, according to current knowledge, have alluvial deposits of gold that were exploited in the past, unfortunately, long time was not
addressed on this tip of deposits. Existence of contemporary geophysical
methods, especially high precision magnetometers, gives relatively easy and
very efficient possibility for defining the area of alluvial terraces, not only on
the existing rivers but, also, in the old riverbed.
To define the most prospective areas for detailed research, bearing in mind
that the gold and accompanying heavy precious metals are non-magnetic,
which are of exploitation interest, almost always, paragenetic, magnetite is
present with them. Magnetite as a mineral have the highest magnetic level,
according to that is easy detectable.
Department of geology and geophysics owns appropriate equipment for geomagnetic profiling and software for analyses of measured data. Areas with
registered anomalies should be investigated with schlich method and core
drilling in order to define depth of alluvium.
Keywords
Alluvial Deposits, Geomagnetic Methods, Gold
1. INTRODUCTION
Geomagnetic method is based on measurements of the geomagnetic field elements on an area. Generally, geomagnetic field can be divided in two components:
Anomalous geomagnetic component that reflects the influence of rock masses on the investigation area,
and
Component that origin from the normal geomagnetic field generated in the Earth's core.
Anomalous component of the geomagnetic field consists of regional part that reflects deep seated magnetic structures and which influence covers larger area; and local anomalous component that is generated from factors which
are seated in the shallow part under the Earth's surface and their influence is feel on a small area.
In exploration of mineral raw materials is essential to separate regional from local component, because the local
anomalous component of the field is directly connected with the mineral raw material.
The depth to which geophysical measurements can be conducted in exploration of ore deposits is defined with the
dimensions and shape of the ore body and measurable differences in the physical properties between the ore and
the surrounding rocks. Generally, it can be concluded that for the need of mining, geophysical explorations can be
conducted to depth of about 120 m.
2. SELECTION OF EXPLORATION METHOD FOR CERTAIN GEOLOGICAL PROBLEM

Selection of geophysical method for exploration of mineral raw material depends of several factors:
Existing geological data (level of geological explorations);
Type of mineral raw material;
Topography of investigation area;
Possibility for solving the problem with appropriate geophysical method;
262

PROCEEDINGS
Economic justification of the geophysical method etc.

Special success in ore regions has application of geomagnetic and geoelectrical method.
Magnetic anomalies caused on the earth's surface from the given ore bodies or structures depend on:
Difference between the magnetic susceptibility of the ore body or structure and surrounding rock masses;
Dimensions, shape and orientation of the ore body or structure and
Depth of the ore body or structure.
Geomagnetic methods, in their recent application, gave good results in exploration of mineral raw materials, especially in iron ores. From prospection point of view, they are applied for limitation of areas with magnetic rocks
which contain increased amount of magnetic minerals (magnetite).
It should be known that gold is not magnetic, so the geomagnetic method is not suitable for its direct exploration.
Investigation of gold - bearing deposits (secondary deposits) is possible with the geomagnetic method only indirectly, knowing that the area of gold deposition is the same with the heavy mineral facies. Here is interesting magnetite
which gives clear local magnetic anomalies.
3. DETAILED GEOMAGNETIC PROSPECTION

To define the geomagnetic prospection of the alluvium in Lakavica ridge, terrestrial measurements of total magnetic field vector were performed (scalar F value). Measurements were made with proton magnetometers type:
Bison model MMP-203-M3;
Bison model MMP-203-M4 and
Portable Magnetometer Geometrics.
Figure 1 shows anomalous values of the magnetic field from factors that are seated on different depth or magnetic
field T gives summary for the investigated area. With aim to separate the reasons for magnetic anomalies that
have local and regional significance, filtering of the values for T was performed:
T = TR + TL
where:
T - total anomaly
TR - regional anomalies
TL - local anomalies
Figure 1. Map of total magnetic field vector on Borov Dol
263

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Map of regional geomagnetic anomalies on Borov Dol
Method of linear regression analysis was used. For this purpose is used Excel program. With these methods, total
value of T is divided on regional TR - values from the linear part and values of TL - residues between the linear
curve and results for T. These results are shown on figures 2 and 3. Method of linear regression analysis is a method which is combined with the recent knowledge for explored area. Linear regression analysis along the measured
profiles was performed in a way of searching linear dependence of the profiles, separate for each of them from the
edge of the depression toward its axes.
Figure 3. Map of local geomagnetic anomalies on Borov Dol
Comparing the obtained maps for TR and TL, with the regression analysis method, it can be seen their compatibility in definition of local and regional anomalous values.
264

PROCEEDINGS
4. ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION

Analysis of the map of total magnetic field intensity value, T (fig. 1) gives possibility for defining the areas with
larger or smaller magnetism. Map of the processed data gives values in range of 1700 to 2700 [nT]. For that reason
were made above mentioned analyses, to obtain clearer picture for existing anomalies in the Lakavica ridge.
Map of regional anomalies TR of the Lakavica depression (fig. 2) shows the influence of magnetic reasons which are
deep seated in the Lakavica depression and their influence is felt on a larger area than the explored terrain. In this
case, those are reasons which are on larger depth than the depth of the depression. In analysis of the map of the
regional anomalies in the Lakavica depression is notable that the intensity of the magnetic field decreases from the
Damjan hors towards the center of the depression and increases rapidly from the center toward the Serta horst.
Map of the local anomalies of the Lakavica depression TL shows existing of the magnetic structures on maximal
depth of 130 m which are clearly shown on the map. In analysis of the map of local anomalies (fig. 3 and 4) clearly
are separated positive and negative anomalies, especially in the area of the locality Borov Dol where is present dipole anomaly with positive picks of 350 nT and negative of -300 nT.
According the selected local anomalies, their depth was calculated with the formula:
M
z2
where:
T - intensity of the local anomaly;
M - magnetic moment of the local anomaly;
z - depth of the geological structure.
The dipole anomaly present on the profile I - I' (fig. 4) with orientation NE - SW, shows positive and negative values
of geomagnetic dipole of about -50 to +50 nT, where the positive part is seated on depth of about 30 m, and the
nagetive part is on 60 m. Geomagnetic dipole II - II' shows positive and negative local anomaly with values from
+150 to -130 nT, depth of the positive part of 40 m, and on the negative part 30 m. This dipole is with orientation
NE - SW. Geomagnetic dipole III - III' has orientation SW - NE with positive and negative values form +250 to -200 nT
and the same depth of 40 m. Dipole anomaly on the profile IV - IV' shows dipole factore for magnetic anomalies on
depth of about 80 m and values for the positive and the negative part of +350 to -100 nT.
On the map of local anomalies of Borov Dol are present two monopole geomagnetic anomalies. Negative local
anomaly 1 - 1' is characterized with magnetic reason of -300 nT on depth of 130 m. Anomaly marked as profile 2 - 2'
gives positive local anomaly with value of +250 nT which is on the depth of 60 m.
Figure 4. Map of local anomalies with profile for calculation the depths of the
Lakavica depression
265

PROCEEDINGS
5. CONCLUSION
The purpose of these investigations is alluvium in the part of the Lakavica ridge, from the point aspect of concentration of magnetic minerals.
Geomagnetic prospection gives possibility for separation of the most perspective areas from the point of view of
this method.
Local magnetic anomalies show areas in the alluvium with increased concentration of magnetic minerals (magnetite).
Knowing the physical properties of the magnetite (its density) and recent global experiences for the alluvial deposits, it is possible in the areas with increased concentration of magnetite to be expected presence of other native
metals and minerals (gold, platinum, etc.).
If there are no presence of metals and minerals of interest in the area of detected magnetic anomalies, it can be
concluded that they are not present in whole area and further investigation are not necessary.
If analyses show presence of useful mineral raw materials, further explorations are necessary.
REFERENCES
[1]
Delipetrov T.: Geophysical explorations (gravity and geomagnetic methods), Faculty of mining and geology, Stip, 1996
[2]
Gorgievska D.: Geomagnetic prospection of the alluvium in Lakavica ridge, Diploma work, Faculty of mining and geology, Stip,
1999
[3]
[4]
Stefanovic D.: Geomagnetic methods of exploration, Belgrade, 1978
266

PROCEEDINGS
APPLICATION OF GEOELECTRICAL RESEARCH

IN WORKING ENVIRONMENT FOR SLOPE STABILITY
IN SURFACE MINES ASSESSMENT
ABSTRACT
In this paper is presented a possible approach for defining the
assessment of slope stability of the working environment. It is
about using geolectrical methods for determination of some
physical - mechanical characteristics of working area.
Determination of the specific electrical resistance of rocks,
reflection and refraction of the ground and deformation of
measurements with the total station of rocks play a major
role in determining the stability of rocks.
Zoran PANOV1
Risto POPOVSKI
Radmila KARANAKOVA STEFANOVSKA
Faculty of natural and technical science, Stip, Macedonia

1
zoran.panov@ugd.edu.mk
Keywords
Geoelectric, Slope Stability, Electrical Resistance, Surface Mines
1. INTRODUCTION
Geophysics is a science that study Earth's physical properties, structure and composition. It can be divided in fundamental - that studies global characteristics of the magnetic, electrical, gravity, thermal and radioactive field and
elastic properties of the matter that composed the Earth and applicative - that explore shallow, sub-surface parts
of the Earth's crust available for exploitation of mineral raw materials.
Basic geophysical laws come from the explorations in physics, and based on them are developed theories and
methods in geophysics. Much of the investigations conducted in scientific objectives gave contribution and direct
application in economic geology.
Intensive development of industry showed the need of mineral raw materials from aspect of metals, non-metals,
energetic materials and water. High demand of mineral raw materials contribute to accelerate and massive exploitation of the ore deposits. New investigations of mineral raw materials today are conducted deeper and deeper
from the surface, as well as in the ocean's and sea's bottom. Knowledge from the Earth's sub-surface is from the
application of geophysical methods.
If exists measurable difference among physical parameters that constitute sub-surface structures and there is appropriate method and measurement technique then, first of all, is made geophysical model, and in the final phase is
made interpretation of geological model of the explored area.
Intensive development of geophysical methods is made with the exploration of oil, and big economic profit made
possible development of many measurement instruments and techniques, especially in seismic methods.
2. ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF GEOPHYSICAL METHODS

During the exploration of a given area, geophysical methods followed after performed detailed geological investigations. Based on the detailed geological map and according the task are determined the methods, measurement
points and profiles. From the obtained results is made map for the observed geophysical parameter. According the
geophysical field are determined points for exploration drilling with aim to confirm the geophysical data.
Methods for direct exploration, such as core drilling, gave the most accurate data. Obtained data with application
of direct methods have three characteristics:
1. direct determination of the terrain structure in the drillhole;
267

PROCEEDINGS
2. correct data for the borders of drilled layers and possibility for mapping of the material from the drillhole and its
further laboratory analysis;
3. precise measurement of the dip of the rocks.
These positive characteristics of the direct method are disadvantages of the geophysical methods and resulted
data. In complex geological conditions, whicih is the most often case, in the regions rech with mineral raw materials, registered geophysical anomalies could not be interpretad uniquely. Solving the inverse task in geophysics,
many of the theoretic solutions are not unique, but there is classes of solutions.
Besides said disadvantages, geophysical explorations are ahead related with drilling, because they give relevant
data for whole area, and the drilling only for one point which is very important especially in complex tectonic conditions on the terrain.
3. GEOLOGICAL AND ECONOMIC JUSTIFICATION OF GEOPHYSICAL EXPLORATIONS

Knowledge that is gained for the sub-surface structure and the possibility to create appropriate model is one of the
basic advantages of the geophysical explorations related to the others. The data from these investigations are used
to define the points for exploration drilling and in that way have direct influence on the direction of more detailed
and more expensive investigations on smaller area and the drilling, as the most expensive method, is minimized.
Based on the geophysical methods an area can be assessed is it of interest or not for further explorations.
Application of geophysical methods in explorations of mineral raw materials depend on:
natural conditions of the occurence of the mineral raw material or type of the structure;
posibility for application of appropriate method and measurement technique;
economic factor - price for the geophysical explorations.
Theoreticaly, application of geophysical methods is possible at any area; for complex geological conditions is recommended to use more geophysical mathods which allows complex interpretation of the obtained data.
Usual classification of the ore deposits is according their creation:
mechanical concentrated deposits and
chemical concentration of mineral raw material.
In determination of applicable geophysical method, shape, dimensions and mineral composition are more important than the creation. Basic condition for application of any geophysical method is possibility for ore body to
generate anomaly in the field of the geophysical parameter that is measured, or the difference (anomaly) to be
measurable.
Gravity method, the most often, is used as prospection method for separation the areas in the Earth's crust according the specific density of the rock masses. From that aspect has great importance in defining the sedimentary basins and estimation of their depth toward the basic rock. This method has successful application in discovering
basic, and especially ultrabasic rocks that have no outcrops on the surface.
Micro gravity method was applied in Russia with aim to find iron ore with higher concentration.
Magnetic method has greatest application in exploration of ore bodies which
usually contain large amount of magnetic and ferromagnetic minerals. Recent
experiences with the application of the magnetic method showed that it is
especially successful in finding metallic mineral raw materials, especially iron
ore. Knowing spatial connection of deposition the heavy fractions in the alluvial deposits, using the magnetic method for alluvial gold is successfully applied,
although the gold is not magnetic. This method is used in wired and layered
deposits if mineralization led to the deposition of magnetic minerals (fig. 1).
Figure 1. Geomagnetic anomaly
268

PROCEEDINGS
Electrical methods are widely used in exploration of mineral raw materials. They have successful application in defining the fault structures, contact between the two rock masses, ore wires, massive ore bodies and especially efficient are in defining the level of the ground waters. If gravity and magnetic methods, theoretically, are defined as
prospection methods, correct application of electric methods can give more accurate data for limiting the ore
body.
Geothermal methods are integral part in exploration of the potential of an area with geothermal energy. In combination with the other geophysical methods they are used for defining the place for exploration drilling. Geothermal
energy as a type of energy with huge period of recovery, in the time of preserving the planet Earth and human environment become more significant.
Radioactive methods are aimed to find places with increased concentration of minerals which contain radioactive
elements. Energy obtained from nuclear plants, today, in some countries, is dominant and the need for materials
for the nuclear plants is huge.
Seismic methods are the most used geophysical methods. These methods allow precise defining of the contact
surfaces of two rock masses which differed by the velocity of spreading of the seismic waves. Successful application
of these methods in oil exploration leads to development of high sophisticated measurement instruments and
software for data analysis. Application of seismic methods in ore regions is difficult because of the complex geological structure.
4. CONCLUSION
Application of the geophysical methods is after the detailed geological investigations;

Any method has its advantages and disadvantages in solving of a problem, so it is very important to select
appropriate method;
Application of a geophysical method is possible if there is a possibility to measure difference of a geophysical parameter which is the base of the method;
Geophysical explorations allow to see the conditions on whole investigation area and to give direction for
further investigations;
Geophysical anomalies define the area for further explorations (usually exploration drilling);
Geophysical methods have physical and economic viability for their application.
REFERENCES
[1]
Delipetrov T.: Basics of geophysics, Faculty of mining and geology - Stip, 2003
[2]
[3]
Slimak S., Engineering geophysics, 1996
269

PROCEEDINGS
RESPONSE OF STRUCTURES TO SEISMIC EFFECTS OF BLASTING

IN THE VICINITY OF SURFACE MINING RMU BANOVICI
ABSTRACT
Munever ERGI
Hamid HUSI
Rasim KOVAEVI
Amira JALMANOVI
Elvedina NUMANOVI
Brown Coal Mines Banovici, 75000

Banovici, Bosnia and Herzegovina
direktor@rmu.ba
In the immediate vicinity of the open pits of the coal mine RMU Banovii,
as well as in the wider area around them, there is a large number of residential buildings which were built in different ways. The projected development
of mining activities is in that direction and it is realistic to expect pronounced seismic effects of blasting on these objects.
According to the researches the vibration of the structure is larger from 1 to
2.8 times than input vibration of the ground and the duration of the vibration of the structure is longer from 1 to 2.2 times than ground motion. The
values of these factors, besides blasting parameters and the properties of
mined rocks, depend on constructive systems of buildings that are exposed
to seismic effects.
The aim of this work is to determine the measures to be taken to mitigate
the adverse effects of seismic blasting on the basis of completed seismic
measurements.
Keywords
Blasting Parameters, Seismic Effects, Seismic Measurements, Residential Buildings
1. GENERAL DATA
The RMU "Banovici", d.d. Banovici deposits of brown coal are located in the northeastern Bosnia, in the Tuzla
Canton and are among the largest coal deposits in Bosnia and Herzegovina. There are two organizational units of
production in this mine: the mine Povrinska eksploatacija uglja (surface mining) and the mine Podzemna
eksploatacija uglja (Underground coal mining). The mine Povrinska eksploatacija uglja is consisted of two active
surface mines Turija and Grivice. Underground coal mining is being done in Omazii pit.
The annual production of the mine is approximately 1.500.000 t of washed coal, which is distributed to the
industry, broad and general consumption, and about 12 million m3 .m. of overburden (waste).
2. DESCRIPTION OF TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESS

At RMU Banovici open pits "Grivice" and "Turija", the longitudinal single-wing system of exploitation with
deepening of immediate roof of the coal layer is applied. The exploitation is done by following works: drilling,
blasting, dredging and transporting of overburden and coal, as well as the disposal of overburden. After the coal is
driven from open pits, it is crumbled and transported by railway to the objects for separation for further treatment.
Coal exploitation in open pits is done with classical discontinuous complex, which includes excavators (bucket and
draglines) and dumper trucks.
The conditions in which the mining operations are performed, especially works on the preparation of the rock for
digging and loading are very complex. Particularly evident problems are at higher benches in humus material and
clayey marl where the seismic restrictions caused by the vicinity of residential buildings additionally complicate
mass blasting work.
The restrictions caused by seismic impact during blasting on the upper benches cause the appearance of oversized
pieces, which complicates the process of excavation and transportation of materials.
270

PROCEEDINGS
3. DESCRIPTION OF DRILLING AND BLASTING OPERATIONS

Hole drilling for mass blasting of overburden and coal is done by drilling equipment GRIPHON 5C and HAUSHER
HBM-120 with a diameter 110-115 mm. Overburden drilling for loading by bucket excavators is done at the height
of a bench H = 12 m, and the length of clean mine holes is 13 m. The width of a dredging overburden block is
determined on the basis of the technical characteristics of an excavator for which mass blasting is done.
The slope of overburden drilling is 70 .
The geometry of drilling also depends on the technical characteristics of an excavator, the type of explosives to be
used for mining and geotechnical properties of rocks intended for blasting.
Hole drilling is done with chess and square layout of holes depending on the "quality" of rock material.
Overburden and coal blasting is done by using ANFO and emulsion explosives. The maximum quantity of explosives
at the mine hole is up to 77 kg for ANFO and 99 kg for emulsion explosives. As an initial explosive highbrizantni
explosive and TNT boosters are used. Explosive charge in the holes is continuous and in conditions where it is
necessary and doable it is discontinuous.
Non-electric initiation system is applied for activating the explosive charge. The filling of blast holes is mechanized.
Rock blasting is done by shaking, while the rejection method is applied only in exceptional cases when the height of
benches exceeds the height of an excavator's range or if the shipping of excavations is done by loaders.
Overburden blasting is done in conditions of open blocks with 3-4 rows of blast holes.
4. GEO-MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF COAL DEPOSITS IN THE COAL MINE RMU BANOVII

The data used in this paper and shown in the table are taken from the coal mine RMU Banovii project
documentation.
Table 1. Display of geo-mechanical characteristics of coal deposits
Litoloki
lan
c
kN/m2
z
kN/m2
C
kN/m2
E
MN/m2
vu
vp
Laporac
sivi
21854
2320
2450
1876
0.16
43,2
2883
1062
v,m/s
Glinoviti laporac
487.5
22.5
Laporac tamno sivi
20280
2127
2573
2234
0.32
31.5
2325
843
Laporac
krenjaki
32604
3110
4433
3155
0.23
47.2
3067
1257
Ugalj
8017
1437
1151
1224
0.41
38
2030
800
Glinoviti
laporac
2068
1630
3171
2328
0.23
27
Serpentin
27185
1894
2080
3270
0.185
26.31
2318
5629
3183
Over the main coal layer, there are deposits of layered roof of marl. There are several predominated marls: filled
marl, layered marl, dark marl, bright spotted marl, clayey marl and calcareous marl.
Overlying sediments, in their different variations, can be observed in the benches of the open pit and their
thickness is around 150 m over the coal layer. All the package of overlying sediments lies concordantly with coal
layer.
It should be emphasized that we can clearly see a very complex structure and a large post-ore (mineral) tectonic
activity on the recently opened benches of the open pits, and in some parts a pre-ore tectonic activity is also
visible. The transition from a coal layer to overlying sediments is clear and sharp, which allows complete separation
of coal from overlying marl rocks during operation. This is not the case when coal layer and substratum sediments
are in contact.
The content of CaCO3 in overlying rocks is about 50%, which reflects favorably on some geo-mechanical properties.
271

PROCEEDINGS
The final part of the overlying rocks has marl-clayey structure with intercalations of pure limestone and clay.
Layers, thinner layers and lenses, which consist of marl and clay, multiply interchange. The sedimentary complex of
the upper overlying rocks has smaller percentage of CaCO3 than overlying sediments with deeper burial.
5. THE DEVELOPMENT OF MINING OPERATIONS

The satellite images of open pits "Grivice" and "Turija" and the disposition of the surrounding residential buildings
are shown in Figures 2 and 3. The direction of the future mining activities is shown by arrows in the figures. Also,
the position of the objects on which seismic measurements are carried out is presented with circles.
Figure 1. Satellite image of PK "Grivice"
Figure 2. Satellite image of PK "Turija"
It can be seen from the images that in the immediate area of the open pits there are buildings. These buildings
were built in different constructive systems.
The following chart shows the share of residential buildings according to their constructive systems.
272

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 3. The share of residential buildings by their constructive systems
Masonry Buildings with Wooden Construction between Floors

Interior and exterior bearing walls of this construction system are made on concrete strip foundation or stone
foundations so called singles, which are placed in the depth of 40-60 cm. The walls are built of full bricks which are
25-38 cm thick, brick blocks or slag-concrete blocks (20-25 cm thick) and cement mortar.
The walls are fixed by concrete horizontal beams in the width of the walls and their average height is 20 cm. The
walls inside the hose are usually built of full bricks (12 X 6.5 cm). They are bounded by cerclage or subsequently built
and attached to bearing walls by iron rods. The construction between floors is made of wood.
Timbered Constructive System
Timbered system is the traditional method of the construction of residential buildings in this area. Most of these
hoses were built before 1970.
These buildings generally do not have the foundation; they were built on four basic wooden beams that rely on
several large pieces of stone called "tower". The cavities beneath the main beam were filled with various materials.
The structural skeleton of the houses was made of wood and it was filled with the mixture of wood, straw and mud
or with bricks, slag and concrete.
a)
b)
Figure 4. Residential buildings: a) with wooden construction between floors b) built in timbered system
Masonry Buildings with Derived AB Horizontal and Vertical Cerclages

This kind of buildings is built on iron-concrete strip foundation or on single foundations which are 60 to 80 cm
deep.
The basic system of these masonry structures are load-bearing walls in both orthogonal directions of the building
made of bricks, blocks or siporex bounded in the height of solid structure between floors by horizontal beams
made of iron rods and concrete which when crossing open spaces act as lintels.
273

PROCEEDINGS
Masonry Buildings with an AB Structure Between Floors

This kind of buildings is built on concrete strip foundation or on single foundations which are 40 to 80 cm deep.
Bearing and inside walls are made of full bricks, brick blocks and slag-concrete blocks, and they are bounded by
horizontal beams and lintels above windows and doors made of iron rods and concrete.
a)
b)
Figure 5. Masonry buildings: a) with derived AB horizontal and vertical cerclages b) with an AB structure between floors
Each of these different structural systems reacts differently on seismic waves created after mass blasting. To
determine the reaction of buildings on negative impact of mass blasting seismic surveys were carried out.
6. THE EQUIPMENT FOR PERFORMING THE SEISMIC MEASUREMENTS

The seismic measurements have been done by using Blast Mate III and MinimatePlus instruments with required
equipment. Blast Mate III and MinimatePlus seismographs are made in Canada and belong to a modern generation
of electronic instruments.
These instruments measure displacements, velocities, acceleration, oscillation frequencies and air shock waves.
They consist of a geophone, a microphone and a recorder. The geophone is made in a standard way, and it consists
of seismic mass and three sensors - electromagnetic coils. The recorder is an electronic device, and it consists of a
microprocessor, memory and a plotter (Blast Mate III). The instruments have the ability of direct connection to a
computer by using its own software Blastware.
The results are presented in a report form, for the transversal, longitudinal and vertical waves. Also, the
instruments measure the time of origin and the value of the summary waves.
a)
b)
Figure 6. Seizmographs a) MiniMate Plus and b) Blast Mate III
7. METHODS OF MEASUREMENT
The measurements of ground vibration were carried out on the buildings constructed in different structural
systems, by placing geophones (sensors) at the foundation, on the ground floor and upper floors of the buildings.
274

PROCEEDINGS
The different conditions in which mass blasting was done were analyzed - on the lower and upper benches, at
overburden and coal mining as well as the different distances of the observed building in relation to the minefield.
The placing of geophones was carried out by sticking pins into solid ground at the building foundation. The
geophones placed on the floors of the upper floors of buildings were covered by heavy objects in order to make
better contact with the ground and to achieve accurate measurement. In this study two eight-channel
seismographs are used which during the arrival of seismic waves registered the speed, acceleration, displacement
and frequency of the waves. The data are reproduced in a software package Blastwere that provides the ability of
interpretation criteria according to different standards.
Figure 7. Interpretation of the seismic data measured at foundation of a residential buildings for minefield 109/12
rd
Figure 8. Interpretation of seismic data measured on the 3 floor of a residential building for minefield 109/12
8. THE MEASUREMENT RESULTS

For the analysis of seismic effects on residential buildings in the vicinity of open pit RMU "Banovii" was used 31
seismic measurements. The measurements were carried out in the vicinity of open pits "Grivice" and "Turija." The
facilities at which the measurements were done, are at the distance of about 400 m. The measurements were
carried out on buildings constructed in different structural systems, from which four-storey primary school
"Banovii Selo" can be set aside. The representative results of seismic measurements on buildings are given in the
following table.
Table 2. Results of representative seismic measurements
Type of construction
Primary school Banovii

Selo
Masonry buildings with
derived AB horizontal and
vertical cerclage
Location of
geophones
Velocity of seismic waves (mm/s); frequencies of seismic waves(Hz)
2nd floor
(mm/s)
4,33;4,74;5,20;3,95;7,12;3,98;4,25;5,91;3,60
T,V,H (Hz)
(5,3;5,6;4,9);(5,3;5,4;5,1);(5,2; ;4,6);(5,3;17;5,1);(5,3;5,3,5,0);(5,3;5,8,5,1);
(5,4;5,0;4,8);(5,6;5,2;4,9);(5,4;6,2;4,8)
3rd floor
(mm/s)
6,61;7,39;7,70;5,82;10,7;5,37;6,41;8,30;5,03
T,V,H(Hz)
(5,4;6,3;4,8);(5,4;19;5,1);(5,5; ;4,6);(5,4,19,5,1);(5,4;20;4,8);(5,4;5,6;5,2);
(5,5;5,1;4,7);(5,4;5,2;4,9);(5,7;21;5,0)
Foundation
(mm/s)
2,57;1,88;3,00;1,71;1,99;2,70;2,01
T,V,H(Hz)
(5,2;4,7;5,6);(6,4;19;6,6);(8,5;5,8;4,8);(3,8;6,6;4,7);(5,6;28;6,2);(4,1;6,2;8,7);
(7,1;26;5,7)
275

PROCEEDINGS
Type of construction
Primary school Banovii

Selo
derived AB horizontal and
vertical cerclages
Lapandi Elvir's house

wooden construction between floors
Administration building
Grivice
Prefabricated buildings
Okai Mustafa's house
Location of
geophones
Velocity of seismic waves (mm/s); frequencies of seismic waves(Hz)
1st floor
(mm/s)
2,26;1,90;3,17;1,80;2,20;2,88;2,04
T,V,H(Hz)
(5,5;5,0;5,7);(6,6;19;4,8);(5,3;5,6;8,1);(6,6;6,3;8,7);(9,0;26;4,9);(3,9;5,9;8,0);(7,0;26;6,1)
foundation
(mm/s)
2,0;2,31;1,69;1,94;1,80;2,42;1,95;1,26;2,09
T,V,H(Hz)
(5,9;19;4,1);(5,5;28;4,5);(21;22;19);(21;23;20);(5,2;37;4,2);(26;39;19);
(11;22;7,1);(5,6;37;14);(4,7;47;4,5)
1st floort
(mm/s)
2,65;2,72;1,84;2,00;2,44;2,69;2,04;1,54;2,10
T,V,H(Hz)
(4,8;20;4,3);(27;24;4,5);(5,0;32;4,4);(5,8;23;4,4);(21;26;23);(5,0;21;4,2);
(5,2;34;5,2);(5,7;30;5,5);(7,0;34;7,3)
2nd floor
(mm/s)
3,23;3,53;1,94;2,43;2,32;2,75;3,21,1,87,2,55
T,V,H(Hz)
(5,3;5,3;4,7);(5,0;18;4,7);(5,1;28;4,3);(5,3;7,9;5,0);(5,0;26;4,4);(5,0;28;4,5);
(5,8;6,2;4,9);(5,3;6,6;4,7);(5,1;56;4,3)
3rd floor
(mm/s)
4,79;4,94;2,81;3,48;3,31;3,70;4,55;2,63;3,60
T,V,H(Hz)
(5,4;20;4,9);(5,2,17;4,8);(5,1;20;4,3);(5,5;20;4,9);(5,1;26;4,5);(5,3;20;4,4);
(5,6;6,7,5,2);(5,8;20;5,1);(5,4;21;5,1)
1st floor
(mm/s)
4,45;4,85;4,14;2,16;1,80;1,67
T,V,H(Hz)
(8,1;27;6,7);(6,4;30;8,5);(37,30;28);(3,7;22;5,3);(3,6;23;5,2);(6,5;21;4,5)
foundation
(mm/s)
2,47;2,90;2,39;1,28;1,09;1,00
T,V,H(Hz)
(24;30;32);(32;34;34);(28,37;32);(27;24;4,7);(24;37;5,3);(5,6;24,28)
foundation
(mm/s)
2,89;3,96;2,12
T,V,H(Hz)
(16;57;12);(10,37;9,7);(19;39;15)
Unutra (mm/s)
3,03;3,46;2,22
T,V,H(Hz)
(16;51;12);(11;43;9,5);(19;37;15)
foundation
(mm/s)
2,95;3,11;2,47;4,42
T,V,H(Hz)
(3,7;4,3;4,7);(4,3;39;5,8);(4,8;5,1;5,8);(39,39;11)
nd
Masonry buildings with an

AB structure between
floors
2 floor
(mm/s)
3,80;6,39;5,16;12,2
T,V,H(Hz)
(4,5;37;6,3);(4,4;37;5,2);(5,0;32;4,9);(39;37;6,9)
1st floor
(mm/s)
3,40;3,21;2,85;4,64;3,40;3,12
T,V,H(Hz)
(4,5;64;5,4);(4,5;4,4;6,5);(4,7;5,7;5,4);(5,2;47;6,4);(4,5;64;5,4);(3,6;4,6;4,5)
T, V, H - transverzal, vertical and longitudinal value of seizmic waves
276

PROCEEDINGS
Table 3. Characteristics of minefiled
The number of
Mine field
107/12
109/12
110/12
14/13
11/13
Bench(m)
336
336
336
240
252
Number of
boreholes
31
28
24
116
113
depth of mines
borehole
(m)
13
13
13
ANFO
(kg)
1641
1120
1180
13
7588
EMULSION
(kg)
Initial
resources
Location
measurement
1641
BD 500/1532
BK 25/7-21
S-10
RK-10
Primary school
Banovii Selo
740
BD 500/1528
BK 42/7-18
S-10
RK-10
Primary school
Banovii Selo
320
BD 500/1525
BK 42/7-15
S-9
RK-9
Lapandi Elvir's house
4315
BD 500/1550
BD 500/1066
BK 25/5-73
BK 42/5-42
S-3
RK-3
Administration
Building Grivice
900
BD 500/15113
BK 17/7-87
BK 25/7-16
S-10
RK-10
Okai Mustafa's
house
BD, BK: non-electric detonators, non-eletrical conectors
9. DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSION

As stated earlier in this paper, blasting operations at the "Banovii" mine open pits are performed in complex
conditions. This complexity is reflected in the heterogeneity of overburden, the appearance of groundwater, the
deposit discontinuity etc. The nearness of residential buildings and marl characteristics additionally complicate the
conditions in which the mining operations are performed, especially works on the preparation of the rock for
digging and loading. Particularly evident problems are at higher benches in the humus material and clayey marl. In
order to overcome the problems and improve the production process the experimental mining and the analysis of
seismic impacts of blasting are performed. This research examines the reaction of surrounding buildings on seismic
impact. These considerations are made on the basis of the seismic measurements and the following observations
are determined:
The different structural systems of buildings differently react on seismic impact. The toughest to seismic effects are masonry buildings with derived AB horizontal and vertical cerclages. Most unstable reaction has
buildings built in timbered structure.
With the increasing in number of floors of the building, regardless of the structural system, seismic impact
increases. This increase essentially reflects on the speed and duration of the seismic waves that meets building. The differences in other seismic parameters (frequencies, acceleration, and displacement) are evident in
the components of a resultant wave. These differences need to be further explored.
277

PROCEEDINGS
The reducing of the negative impact is directly dependent on the amount of explosives currently activated,
and especially of explosives millisecondly activated. The reducing of these amounts is provided by reducing
the height of benches and by discontinuously filling of the mine holes.
The introduction of new scheme of minefield initiation can contribute to the reduction of seismic impacts.
The experimental blasting in order to study the scheme of blasting with discontinuously filling of the mine
holes is still performed. The first preliminary results are favorable.
The analysis of the seismic measurements report indicate that the seismic waves caused by blasting in the
concrete RMU Banovii conditions have mostly predominantly low frequencies.
The dynamic response of structures to ground vibrations is its natural frequency and damping characteristics of the
structure. The natural frequency is the frequency at which any structure vibrates freely after stopping ground
motion, and varies between 8:14 Hz (Siskind and others; Moderis 1978).
The amplification factor is maximized and prevails when the frequency of ground motion reaches the natural
frequency of a structure. The structure at these frequencies absorbs most of the energy and oscillates for a longer
period, which may result in structural damage.
As stated, seismic waves frequencies measured on the ground are dominantly low. Taking into account the above,
one can make a general conclusion that the response of structures based solely on the speed of fluctuations has
shortcomings.
More reliable estimates of seismic impacts can be gained by a combination of the speed and the frequency of
oscillation of the seismic waves.
The most practical way to reduce the negative seismic impact is to, at the upper benches where the clay marl and
humus material predominate, dredge masses by loading units with greater force of digging, without blasting.
REFERENCES
[1]
Project documentation RMUBanovii, d.d. Banovii
[2]
Jovii: Miljkovi: Nui: Ulji: Vuki: Sigurnost i tehnika zatita u rudarstvu, Tuzla 1987.
[3]
Lazar Kriak: Seizmika miniranja, Beograd 2006.
[4]
Uticaj seizmikih efekata miniranja na povrinskim kopovima RMUBanovii, Hamid Husi, Amira Jalmanovi, Mineral 02/2011,
Zagreb 2011.
[5]
Instantel: http://www.instantel.com/newsletters/jfr/jfr_q2_2008.pdf
[6]
Hamid Husi, Munever ergi, Amir Nuhanovi, Mevkudin Avdi, Gabriella Kuris: The analysis
of the seizmic impact of mass
th
International Conference on Drilling and Blasting technology2012,
blasting using mechanized filling of mine holes. 11
Balatonkenese 1921.09.2012. godine
[7]
Ibrahim Lapandi, Hamid Husi, Amira Jalmanovi, Elvedina Numanovi: Optimization technology of drilling and blasting for
surface mining of coal mine Banovici using hydraulic excavator with bucket. Expert advice on the topic of underground and
surface mining of mineral
resources PODEKS-POVEKS 12, tip, 23-24.11.2012. godine.
[8]
Istraivanje uticaja rudarskih radova i naina graenja na oteenja graevina u uem podruju eksploatacione zone PK ubri
(Master thesis, Tuzla, 2006.), Zahid Bai
[9]
Optimizacija seizmikih efekata miniranja na objekte na povrini primjenom numerikih metoda i neuronskih mrea (Doctoral
dissertation, Tuzla, 2012.), Munever ergi
278

PROCEEDINGS
GEO-ELECTRICAL MODELS BASED ON DATA

GAINED FROM THE COAL MINE SUVODOL
ABSTRACT
Geophysics as science is significantly used in different industries such as the mining industry, the geotechnics, engineering geology, hydrogeology etc. In the Republic of
Macedonia the usage of geophysics researches while determining the geological and structural characteristics of
the working environments is not nearly on the level on
which it should be. For these reasons this paper is going to
elaborate the usage and the practicality of the geophysical
examinations in the mining industry.
Vladimir MANEVSKI1
Todor DELIPETROV2
Blagica DONEVA3
Marjan DELIPETROV4
Gorgi DIMOV5
The example elaborated in this paper is based on data

gained from the coal mine Suvodol. Through examination of the parameters from the boreholes and the geological map of the coal mine we determinate the layered
structure of the ore body that provides favorable conditions for applying the method of geo-electrical sounding.
For this purpose, we use a measuring composition made of
two current and two potential electrodes placed inline in
Schlumberger layout.
Synthetic curves for real electrical resistance can be made
while using the processed data from the boreholes. If the
method is solved indirectly from these curves we can determine the specific electrical resistance of the materials
which are present in the examined environment.
The depth of the examined area that is stimulated by the
electrical current directly depends on the distance of the
current electrodes. After every new measuring the current
electrodes are successively drifting away and thereby we
gain values for the apparent electrical resistance for different depths in the examined area. By connecting the
values of the apparent electrical resistance, we create a
curve for apparent electrical resistance of the environment.
A geo-electrical model of the researched environment is
created by connecting all obtained curves. By processing
the geo-electrical model using the data gained from the
curves of the real electrical resistance, a geological image
for the examined environment can be made.
When researching a specific environment with applying
geophysical methods the number of the boreholes which
are necessary for establishing the geological map can be
reduced.
Faculty of Natural and Technical Sciences, University Goce Delcev

Stip, Republic of Macedonia
1
manevski81b@gmail.com 2 todor.delipetrov@ugd.edu.mk 3 blagica.doneva@ugd.edu.mk
4
marjan.delipetrov@ugd.edu.mk 5 gorgi.dimov@ugd.edu.mk
The loss of data that occurs by the reduction of the number of the boreholes is compensated with the data gained
from the geophysical researches and therefore when researching geologically known or unknown environments
with the use of the geophysical methods the costs can
significantly reduce.
Keywords
Geo-Electrical Examination, Geo-Electrical Sounding, Specific
Electrical Resistance, Synthetic Curves
279

PROCEEDINGS
1. INTRODUCTION
In order to obtain the most precise and most concrete results of the researched environment when using
geophysical methods, it is necessary to determine the most appropriate method depending on field conditions,
geological features of the environment and the purpose of the tests. Field conditions in mines and coal deposits
allow obtaining the most precise results in trials using geo - electrical methods. Geo - electrical methods are based
on conduction of electricity in rocks and recording the electrical resistance that they manifest.
While analyzing and processing of data from the geological map of the research area we can conclude that the ore
body in the surrounding is composed of typical rock masses with different specific electrical resistance. Because
the differences in the specific electrical resistance of rocks are large enough to be recorded, analyzed and we can
separate different geological environments based on them, the use of geo - electrical methods in research is quite
reasonable and logical solution. When analyzing the data obtained from mapped boreholes in the research area we
conclude that rocks are horizontally stacked. Because of such layering of the ore body the most suitable geo electrical method to use is the method of geo - electrical sounding.
2. METHODS
Geological modelling
The research area is chosen from the current map situation in the coal mine Suvodol, in distinctive geological
environment with higher levels of groundwater where there is construction of drainage and controlling system of
the level of underground water. The drainage system is composed of a series of wells and piazometers serving in
two different routes across a semicircular line, both with different number of wells and piazometers. All data which
can be obtained for the experimental environment are in favor of detailed design and drafting system. For these
reasons this particular environment is selected as a research area to carry out geophysical surveys covered in the
paper.
Although the level of underground water is not included in the tests that are elaborated in the paper (due to lack
of field testing) it is important to emphasize that in the pursuit of geo - electrical testing underground water has a
major impact on the received data and with its appropriate use the research area can be modeled in further detail.
The whole research area is divided into three main parallel sections and two transverse control sections, processes
a total of 13 mapped boreholes of varying depth which varies from 75 m to 165 m. The analysis of the mapped
boreholes indicates that the investigating area mainly consists of:
Base plate basin gneiss
Sands of varying granularity
Composition of clay and sand
Sands with organic matter
Coal as mineral resource
Geo electrical modeling
Geo electrical modeling consists of preparation of geo - electric models. Geo - electric models show the geological
environments in the research environment through parameters obtained directly from the geo - electrical testing
or indirectly by processing the data obtained in tests. Typically boreholes through which the profile line passes,
represent measurement points of the geo - electrical testing. By examining each measurement point a twodimensional curve is produced, and by the continuation of curves of all measurement points the geo - electrical
models are obtained. In this paper the geo - electrical modeling will be processed through the preparation of two
different models:
Geo - electrical model of curves of real electrical resistance
Geo - electrical model of curves of apparent electrical resistance
3. RESULTS
Geological profiling
Due to the sheer volume of the modeling process in this paper only the modeling of the first Main Profile line will be
processed that extends across the five boreholes: 49 / 52-49 / 56-49 / 60-49 / 64-49 / 68. The boreholes have
280

PROCEEDINGS
different depth that varies in the range of 107.4 m to 159m. The distance between each borehole is 200m hence,
the profiled area has a length of 800m.
The profile line goes directly thorough the drainage system that is already made and starts before the first well and
ends after the last made well in the system. All constructed wells in the system have been tested for verifying the
level of underground water for each well on day 21.08.2012. Using that data the geological profile for the first
profile line is not going to show just the geological features of the examined area. In addition the geological profile
presents the wells their position on the surface area, depth as well as the level of underground water. On figure 1
the registered depth of underground water for each well is shown with red lines and unit of measurement that
represents the depth of the water. All the depths are connected with blue line that represents the level of
underground water through the profile line.
Figure 1. Geological profile
The geological profile is based on data from the mapped boreholes and field tests of the drainage system. Figure 1
represents the first geological profile with all field data with a legend explaining all symbols used. From Figure 1 we
can determine the presence of six different geological environments in the first profile line.
Geo - electrical model from curves of real electrical resistance
The curves of real electrical resistance are two dimensional half logarithmic curves where on the Y axis is marked
the depth of excitation expressed in meters (m) and on the X axis is registered the real electrical resistance that is
manifested by the rock masses presented in . The curves of real electrical resistance can be produced directly
from field trials or synthetically with testing the different geological environments in laboratory conditions [2]. The
curves that are used in this paper are synthetic curves that are formed using the data from the mapped boreholes.
The geo electrical profile is a visual presentation of the geological structure presented thorough the real specific
electrical resistance that is manifested by the different geological environments. On figure 2 is presented the geo
electrical profile for the first profile line made from curves of real electrical resistance.
281

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Geo-electrical profile from curves of real electrical resistance
Since geo - electrical profiles are made according to parameters directly obtained from mapped boreholes we can
conclude that in the process of their creation we do not lose geological data from the examined environment and
the represented geological environments are registered and presented as in the geological profiles.
Geo - electrical model from curves of apparent electrical resistance
Geo electrical modeling from curves of apparent electrical resistance in this paper is produced through the process
of geo - electrical sounding. Geo - electric sounding is usually performed with 4 electrodes (two current and two
potential) placed in line in Schlumberger arrangement. Through the two current electrodes, direct current that
passes through the rocks in the experimental environment is transmitted. The depth of the excitation directly
depends on the distance between the two electrodes and the current is represented by the equation:
/2
[1]
Where:
D is the depth of the excitation
AB is the distance between the current electrodes
With each new repetition the electrodes successively receding and each measurement provides data for different
depths. This data is presented in two-dimensional coordinate system where on the X axis the apparent electrical
resistance is applied which is registered by the potential electrodes and on the Y axis the depth of excitation is
applied that can be obtained via the previous equation from the distance of the current electrodes. With enough
repetition (depending on the depth, the layering of the environment and the number of layers) we obtain a
sufficient number of data which is applied in the coordinate system and the connection of all acquired points
produces a curve of apparent electrical resistance of the environment. By moving the entire measuring disposition
and repetition of the procedure throughout the measurement area, we get a growing number of curves depending
on how many times the procedure is repeated, which depends on the number of boreholes that are present in the
research area, the length of the measuring area, the examined depth etc.
By connecting all obtained curves a geo - electrical model of the research area is produced. The curves of apparent
electrical resistance can be obtained synthetically and the data for apparent electrical resistance that is
manifested in geological environments is obtained by the mathematical formula [1]:
in
i n
i 1
i 1
T h1 1 h2 2 ....... hn n hi i Ti
[2]
Where:
T is the apparent electrical resistance (m)
n is the number layers in the geological complex
i is the real electrical resistance for i layer (m)
Ti is the apparent electrical resistance for i layer (m)
Hi is the thickness of the i layer (m)
282

PROCEEDINGS
According to equation 2, the apparent electrical resistance is determined through layering of the geological
environments, the thickness of layers (h) and their specific electrical resistance (),values which are known. The
curves are presented in two-dimensional semi-logarithm coordinate system where on the Y axis the excitation
depth is applied, expressed in m, while on the X axis the apparent electrical resistance is applied registered for the
depth expressed in m.
Before going in a stage of modeling, for this type of curves, it is first necessary to interpret the registered values.
First, the number of turns of the curve is determined which indicates the number of different geological
environments. Any turns are sized according to X and Y and thus data on the thickness of the geological
environment is obtained as well as the apparent electrical resistance that is manifested. Using equation 2 and
starting from the first geological environment, the specific electrical resistance of each geological environment is
calculated inversely and according to that value the rock mass is identified. Once you have completed the process
of interpretation of all curves the process of modeling is initiated.
Figure 3. Geo-electrical profile from curves of apparent electrical resistance
Figure 3 represents the geo electrical profile made of curves of apparent electrical resistance. The image shows
that in this type of modeling certain geological environments are lost or are impossible to identify. Rock masses
that are often impossible to determine at this kind of modeling are masses with relatively small thickness and low
specific electrical resistance, at greater depth from the surface of the ground. If we compare the resulting geo electrical profile with the geological profile we are able to conclude which geological environments are lost in the
modeling process. However, if there is not enough information to work out the geological profile, we can determine
the geological environments that are composed of two or more rock masses by the geo - electrical model itself.
Such areas are displayed on the image by a text that according to the received data indicates which geological
environment is dominant throughout most of the thickness of the rock composition.
4. DISCUSSION
Past researches clearly shows that the geo-electrical sounding and mapping are effective methods for defining
subterranean structure of rock masses and especially the level of underground water. This paper presents the
development of geo electrical models that can be used as standards for research of similar environments. Although
the processed tests are not based on field research and the processed data does not pay enough attention to
underground water, still, the procedures discussed in this paper are a good basis which, by further development,
can be supplemented to obtaining a complete geophysical elaborate on this type of environments. Geophysical
surveys can significantly reduce the cost in defining the geological structure of the rock masses.
REFERENCES
[1]
Delipetrov T., Basics of geophysics, University of Sts. Cyril and Methodius - Skopje, Faculty of mining and geology, 2003
[2]
Doneva B, Correlation between the real geological medium and the geoelectrical model. Master Thesis, University of Goce Delcev,
Faculty of natural and technical sciences - Stip, p. 98, 2009
283

PROCEEDINGS
APPLICATION OF GEOPHYSICAL METHODS

IN EXPLORATION AND EXPLOITATION
OF MINERAL RAW MATERIALS
ABSTRACT
Todor DELIPETROV1
Krsto Blazev
Blagica DONEVA
Marjan DELIPETREV
Gorgi DIMOV
Faculty of natural and technical

sciences, Stip, Republic of Macedonia
1
todor.delipetrov@ugd.edu.mk
Opening of a mine is complex procedure dependent on more parameters,

but as the most important are: deposit with sufficient concentration of useful material which can be extract with appropriate technological process and
economic working. Anyway, for possible opening of a mine, first and necessary factor is determination of deposit area and defining the space distribution and concentration of mineral raw material.
Intense exploitation of mineral raw materials which were base for future
development of the industry, especially in 20-th century, caused many mines
to finish their life. Deposits which were easy detectible and near to the surface, for a short time were depleted. The need for metals and non-metals,
and especially energetic mineral raw materials increases, so the investigation
from the Earth's surface went deeper in its interior.
If geological explorations were carriers of the discovery of sub - surface deposits of mineral raw materials, today there is a wide range of geophysical
methods that gives possibility to expand the our knowledge deeper under
the Earth's surface. Importance of geophysics should be underlined in exploration of seas and oceans which covered 3/4 from the Earth's area.
Geophysical methods are divided into: gravity, geomagnetic, geoelectrical,
seismic, geothermal, radioactivity and radar methods with wide range of
radiation.The paper, briefly presents the basic physical parameters characteristic for given methods.
Keywords
Gravity, Geomagnetic, Geoelectrical, Seismic,
Geothermal, Radioactivity, Radar Methods
1. INTRODUCTION
Geoelctrical methods are used for exploration of horizontal and vertical changes of the electrical resistance of the
rocks, from which it can be obtained data for geological composition, structure of the rocks, their layers and possibility for fracture from self - loading or coercive effect of load. The result is a clearer picture of the rocky massif and
its position in space.
Electric measurement of specific resistivity of rocks is used to identify existing or potential sliding plane. Sliding
plane that occurs often can't be accurately defined and possible errors in the calculation of stability on the ground
are present. Using shallow geo-electrical and 2D profiling can successfully make models that can be used to determine the site of the sliding plane.
In time the development of geotechnical models are made with geomechanical and geophysical methods in order
based on certain physical characteristics of the soil to determine the stability of rock slopes in each case separated.
Stability of slopes (natural or artificial) in the solid rock massifs is very complex process and depends of many factors. The most important are the following:
the strength of unchanged rocks is much larger than the strength of shearing along the discontinuity,
284

PROCEEDINGS
problems often occurs in three - dimensional static system for which only simplest calculation schemes are
appropriate,
water affection is manifested in the discontinuities and can have size and direction of the influence that depends on situation and direction of the discontinuity striking.
Knowing these specific characteristics of static behavior of the rock masses, classical methods for stability that
were developed on the problem of soil mechanic will be limited. Because of that limitation, it is important to see
the main difference between the methods in rock mechanics and soil mechanics, because on some parts that difference could not be expressed.
2. USED GEOELECTRICAL RESEARCHES

On the terrain, is conducted profiling and sounding of places where occurred deformations and sliding on the
ground. For the measuring is used geoelectrical instrument for measuring specific electrical resistance TERAMETER
SAS 1000s.
Applied is a 2D-electrical tomography representing surface geo-electrical method that explores the specific electrical resistance of the geological environment. It is usually one of the methods of apparent electrical resistance. 2D
surveys produce more precision models from one dimensional research, because there are taken vertical and horizontal changes of the electrical resistance.
On fig. 1 are shows examples of different collinear configurations of electrodes in use: Wenner ( , , ), Schlumberger, dipole-dipole and pole-pole.
You may have noticed that Wenner configuration is a special case where four electrodes are placed at equal distance a.
For Schlumberger ratio l / L will vary during normal measurement, and similarly the factor k will vary in the measurements dipole-dipole.Different configurations of electrodes provide advantages and disadvantages compared to
each other in terms of logistics and resolution. In measuring
the apparent resistance and collection of data, combinations of connecting two methods for setting the electrodes
were used: Schlumberger and Wenner array of electrodes.
Profiling and mapping of the terrain was made where it was
assumed that deformation and shearing on the ground has
occurred. The results are calculated by the program IPI2win
which allows presentation of the results in 2D electrical
tomography. The profiles are made according to the needs
and conditions of the terrain. This program performs the
interpolation of sounding of each profile so you can see the
measured value of the apparent specific resistance and calculated, ie modeled value of specific resistance .
Figure 1. Examples of different schedules of electrodes
(A B are electrical electrodes, M N are potential electrodes)
3. EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH
The experimental measurements were performed at three locations in eastern parts of the Republic of Macedonia.
Specific areas were selected on the ground where it was assumed that there is a change in the stability of rocks.
Due to the limited ability to present, in this paper are presented the results of only one measuring point located on
mountain Plackovica. For the purpose of modifying the stability of the ground special attention is paid to the
change in apparent electric resistance which was monitored continuously by the end of 2010 up and early 2013.
Here are just a preview of 3 measurements.
285

PROCEEDINGS
Table 1. Data: 21.09.2010
Measured apparent geo-electrical resistance,
m)
H=AB/2 (m)
S-1
S-2
S-3
S-4
S-5
87,9
73,1
90,5
78,8
70
85,1
85
76,2
86,4
80
90,4
95,9
85,2
101
89
102
93,3
123
11
174
100
130
13
95,8
110
141
Table 2. Data: 14.09.2011
m)
H=AB/2 (m)
S-1
S-2
S-3
S-4
S-5
68,84
87,96
76,48
75,2
30,5
84,99
78,31
82,19
84,8
30,1
89,92
86,5
88,86
88,9
31,7
95,29
103,1
103
11
102,2
112,6
99,5
13
103,6
118,4
109
able 3 . Data: 18.03.2012
m)
H=AB/2 (m)
S-1
S-2
S-3
S-4
S-5
74,68
76,86
67,02
65,75
53,91
88,25
82,23
72,82
72,74
70,42
100.2
81,76
87,89
78,97
77,64
92,57
84,12
81,51
11
96,16
88,12
85,02
13
98,82
91,13
88,43
Table 4 . Displacement (deformation of the terrain)
Coordinates
Displacement (m)
X-1
Y-1
H-1
DX-1
DY-1
DH-1
-0
7604364,760
4622920,760
610.57
-1
7604457,802
4622831,192
611,91
0,001
-2
7604454,379
4622849,972
608,56
-0,008
-0,011
-3
7604439,113
4622856,581
604,539
-0,013
-0,021
-0,009
-4
7604461,784
4622876,634
604,682
-0,015
-0,026
-0,012
-5
-0,007
-0,005
-0,003
-6
7604483,801
4622851,667
613,81
-7
7604495,251
4622868,29
613,77
-0,001
-8
-9
7604478,137
4622891,134
604,823
-0,022
-0,024
-0,003
286

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2 . Geoelectric profile
4. DISCUSION
Model of the specific elecrical resistance on the profiles PR-1 and PR-2 is given on fig. 3 layers are separated according the calculated resistance.
On the given calculated model of the specific resistance is made the model for calculation of the stability of the
ground. On the profiles is defined sliding plane where it could exist, which is critical place where sliding occurs.
Thus assign sliding plane and where groundwater appears if any. The defined parameters are important and play an
essential role in the stability of the rock formations. The calculation of this case is made using a part of the package
program Geostudio, Geo Slope (student version).
Table 5. Factor of stability
Ru=0
Safety factors
F
Bishop
1,378
Janbu
Spencer
Ru=0.2
F
1,019
1,253
1,289
1,253
0,920
0,971
0,974
Minimum value (Fs)
1,253
0,920
Mean value
1,293
0,971
Condition for stablity (Fs>1.3)
NO
NO
287

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 3. Models of the specific electrical resistance
The results shows that it is unstable terrain where may have been the appearance of water, and with that was reduced the electrical specific resistance of the material. If there is no water, apparent electrical resistance of the
medium is higher and the slope is stable, then the stability factor would be greater than 1, F > 1.
5. CONCLUSION
From the exploration for the stability of rock masses, performed on three micro locations in Eastern Macedonia, it
was made a multiyear research and measurements in places where there is an appearance of sliding rock mass.
Method of geo-electrical sounding with 2D profiling was conducted. Measurements were made many times on the
same profile with aim to define sliding plane depending on the weather changing.
From the obtained data of geo-electrical sounding can be concluded that specific electrical resistance of the rock
masses decreases in the period of increased amount of rainfalls, and in dry periods appear relatively high values of
specific resistance, especially in the surface layer.
We recommend placing a measuring instrument for continuous monitoring of deformations (displacement), pore
pressure, complete voltage condition on the ground, specific electrical resistance, etc. If there is more information
about the condition of rocks there will be more reliable models for the calculation of stability and determination of
288

PROCEEDINGS
the safety factor. The places which are of capital importance (mines, dams, hydropower and other geotechnical
structures), which threatened the stability of the ground it is recommended continuous monitoring of multiple parameters.
We recommend placing a measuring instrument for continuous monitoring of deformations (displacement), pore
pressure, complete voltage condition on the ground, specific electrical resistance, etc. If there is more information
about the condition of rocks there will be more reliable models for the calculation of stability and determination of
the safety factor.
REFERENCES
[1]
, ., , ,
, , 2013
[2]
Ting, J.M., "Geometric Concerns in Slope Stability Analyses." Journal of Geotechnical Engineering, Vol. 109, No. 11, November 1982.
[3]
Duncan, J.M. "Factors of safety and reliability in geotechnical engineering." J. Geotechnical & Geoenvironmental Engineering, April,
pp. 307-316. 2000
[4]
Griffiths, D.V., Fenton, G.A., 2004. Probabilistic slope stability analysis by finite elements. Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, 130(5):507518. [doi:10.1061/(ASCE)1090-0241(2004)130:5(507)]

[5]
Yaramanci, U., Geoelectric exploration and monitoring in rock salt for the safety assessment of underground waste disposal sites,
Journal of Applied Geophysics, Vol. Issues 2-3, pp, 181-196, 2000
289

PROCEEDINGS
THE KINETIC MODELING FROM DOMESTIC ORES

USING SOFTWARE TOOLS
ABSTRACT
1
Aleksandar KRSTEV
Boris KRSTEV2
Blagoj GOLOMEOV2
Mirjana GOLOMEOVA2
Afrodita ZENDELSKA2
Zivko GOCEV3
Jordan ZIVANOVIK1
1
Goce Delcev University, Faculty of Computer Sciences, 2000 Stip,

The Republic of Macedonia, aleksandar.krstev@ugd.edu.mk
2
Goce Delcev University, Faculty of Natural &Technical Sciences, 2000 Stip,
The Republic of Macedonia, boris.krstev@ugd.edu.mk
2
The Republic of Macedonia, blagoj.golomeov@ugd.edu.mk
2
The Republic of Macedonia, mirjana.golomeova@ugd.edu.mk
2
The Republic of Macedonia, afrodita.zendelska@ugd.edu.mk
3
Bucim Mine, 2000 Radovis, The Republic of Macedonia, gocevz@yahoo.com
To improve kinetic models, many first order flotation kinetics models with distributions of flotation rate constants were
redefined so that they could all be represented
by
the
same
set
of
three model parameters. As a result, the
width of the distribution become independent of its mean, and parameters of
the model and the curve fitting errors, became virtually the same, independent of
the chosen distribution function.
In our case, investigations of the chalcopyrite ores are carried out using the existing
or mixed model. According to the experimental results obtained in laboratory, the
Classical model is most appropriate for
presentation of kinetic flotation, especially
by means of MATLAB modeling.
Keywords
Flotation, Kinetic, Chalcopyrite,
MATLAB, Modeling
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
With the increasing application of computers in the mineral industry, physical and mathematical models of each
operational circuit in the mineral processing plant become elegantly needed. Flotation, as an important process of
mineral processing has attracted much attention from researchers, and flotation models have been used as early as
the 1930's and todays in XXI century. However due to the complexity of the flotation process and the limitations of
the technology required to obtain the necessary information, most of the existing flotation models are still far from
perfect.
Although the fundamentals of flotation models, i.e. the first order kinetics, have been developed, detailed information about the factors which affect flotation kinetics has still not been exact obtained. Remaining problems not
only include the effect of factors, such as reagent type and concentration, air flow rate and impeller speed etc., on
the parameters of flotation models, but also the flotation model itself, since most of the models are not well constructed in representing true flotation behavior.
In general, the models should follows the rules that the parameters in the model should have physical significance
and the values of the parameters for one set of flotation conditions should be consistent. Flotation can be affected
by many factors. Because of limited time, this research work is only devoted to a small area of flotation kinetics. In
order to obtain an applicable flotation model.
291

PROCEEDINGS
2. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT KINETIC FLOTATION MODELS

In the existing equations for flotation kinetic the assumption is such that velocity coefficient for anyones sulphide
minerals is the constant k. The number of investigators, as A. Gupta, D.S. uan had calculated the of group models
cumulative flotation from first order considering the following models:
Classical kinetic model, I=Io[1-e-kt]
Klimpel kinetic model, I=Io[1-
Kelsal kinetic model, I = (io-)(1-
Modified Kelsal kinetic model Gama model from Loveday, Innou, I=Io(1-(
)]
)+ (1-
)
)P)
The mentioned kinetic models are appropriate for presentation the flotation kinetic, very important for everyone
project solution or assumption for good and sure flotation performance. According to the previous kinetic investigations for kinetic flotation (Classical kinetic model) for different sulphide minerals for copper mineral will have the
following equation (chalcopyrite):
I = Io [1-e-kt] = 89.25 [1 e- 1.025xt]
According to previous kinetic investigations for kinetic flotation (Classical kinetic model) for different oxide - sulphide minerals constant k for copper mineral will have the following equation (65% chalcopyrite and 35% oxide
minerals as cuprite, azurite, malachite):
I = Io [1-e-kt] = 73.5 [1 e- 0.56xt]
According to the existing kinetic investigations for kinetic flotation (Clasical kinetic model) for different oxide sulphide minerals constant k for copper mineral will have the following equation (65% chalcopyrite and 35% oxide
minerals as cuprite, azurite, malachite), but with application of process of sulphidization with Na2S, (NH4)2SO4,
NH2SO4 :
I = Io [1-e-kt] = 74.2 [1 e- 0.61xt]
3. KINETIC FLOTATION MODELING OF CHALCOPYRITE USING SOFTWARE TOOLS

The software packets for kinetic flotation modeling in MATLAB(R) GUI, was enabling appropriate tabular or graphic presentation for Classical kinetic model (I. Brezani, F. Zelenek), determining the constant k in the function of the
time frequency of the useful reagent addition.
Figure 1. Kinetic presentation by Matlab
292

PROCEEDINGS
4. CONCLUSION
According to the experimental results obtained in laboratory and industrial conditions, for investigation of the applicable of the existing kinetic equations or models, the Classical model is most appropriate for presentation of
kinetic flotation, especially by means of MATLAB modeling.
REFERENCES
[1]
Brezani, I. Zelenak, F., (2010). MATLAB tool for determining first order flotation kinetic constants., Institute of Montanneous Sciences and Environmental Protection. Technical University of Kosice,BERG Faculty,
[2]
Brezani, i. Zelenak, f., (2010). Matlab tool for modeling first order flotation kinetics., Institute of Montanneous Sciences and Environmental Protection. Technical University of Kosice,BERG Faculty,
[3]
Evgun L., Ekmekci Z., Glsoy ., Benzur H., (2004). Modelling and Simulation of Grinding Circuit in Magneuli Copper Concentrator,
Physicochemical Problems in Mineral Proceding, 38(2004), 231-240, USA.
[4]
Krstev A. PhD Thessis, 2012.
[5]
Herbst, J. A. (1982). The Application of Modern Control Theory to Mineral Processing Operations, Proceedings 12 CMMI Congress.
H. W. Glen, Editor, South Africa Inst. Min. Metall., Johannesburg, 779-823.
th
293

PROCEEDINGS
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL SYSTEM

FOR OPTIMIZATION OF ORE-GRINDING PROCESS
IN SEMIAUTOGENOUS MILL
ABSTRACT
T. PENZOV1
H. NONCHEV2
I. LALOV3
TRAPEN Company j.k.Lyulin, bl.717/B,

Sofia, Bulgaria 1324, trapen@abv.bg
2
Chelopech mining AD, Chelopech,
Bulgaria 2087
3
University of mining and geology,
Sofia, Bulgaria 1700
As a result of recent scientific and experimental study improved technical

means for monitoring and control of the grinding process in semiautogenous
(SAG) mill have been developed. The short description of two kind of sensors
for measuring of impact pulses provoked at the grinding as well as modernized microprocessor module MILLCONT 2M for control of the mills loading is
given in the paper.
The structure of the automatic system for optimization of the process in
SAG mill with above mention technical means and the loops for measuring
and control of the basic technological parameters are presented in the paper.
The aim is to be increased productivity of the grinding aggregate as well as
to be improve the quality characteristics of the ready pulp at minimal interference of the operator. The nowadays achieved economical results from
exploitation of control system implemented on SAG mill in ore-dressing factory of Dundee Precious Metals Inc.- Chelopech (Bulgaria) are given as well.
Keywords
Mill Loading, Impact Pulse Sensors, Microprocessor Module, Control Loops
1. INTRODUCTION
The grinding of the ore in Dundee Precious Metals Inc.- Chelopech (Bulgaria) is performed on SAG mill working in
close cycle with hydrocyclone battery. In the control channels the mill aggregate can present with the structure
shown in Figure 1, where:
Control actions
O flow rate of the ore sent to the mill;
Wm flow rate of the water sent to the
mill;
Ws flow rate of the water sent to the
sump;
Vm revs of the mill;
Vp revs of the pump aggregate
Figure 1. Schematic diagram

of the SAG mill
Indirect regulable parameters

W weight of the mill;
L1 impact pulses vibration of the casing
of the mill;
L2 impact pulses vibration of the gear
of the driver motor
Disturbances
of the technological process
fg grindability of the ore;
fb quantity of the ball charge;
fw wearing out of the mill lining;
fs quantity of the sands
Regulable parameters
pulp density at the mill outlet;
fineness of grinding of the pulp
As a result of the resent scientific and experimental studies improved variant of microprocessor control system
MILLCONT 2M for optimal loading of SAG mill has been developed the brief description of which is given here below.
294

PROCEEDINGS
2. NEW MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM MILLCONT 2M

The system MILLCONT 2M contains two sensors for measuring of impact pulses and microprocessor module.
The sensibility of the developed new remote pulse sensor SRIP (Figure 2) and direct pulse sensor SDIP (Figure 3) is
increased in comparison with the acoustic sensor (Golder & Hagenbach, 1994) and nowadays used magneto - electric sensor (Penzov et al., 2006).
Figure 2. Remote sensor SRIP
Figure 3. Direct sensor SDIP
The sensors consist of two sensitive elements differentially connected for elimination of parasitic signals. They are
generator type and do not need additional power supply. Output voltage signals from the sensors are up to 1V with
amplitudes proportional to impact pulse slope, i.e. the sensors differentiate the impact pulses without distortion.
The signals are transmitted through double-core armoured cable to 500 m without further amplification. The sensors are covered with special compound reducing the parasitic signals and protecting against outside influences:
spattering water, dust, explosion-hazardous mixtures, etc. They are resistant to impacts and rough handling as the
sensors have not driving parts and do not need maintenance as well as they are in practice everlasting. The sensors
resist to temperature from 40o to +100o C.
The microprocessor module of the system MILLCONT 2M (Figure 4) consists of
two solo control loops (Marinov & Penzov, 2006). Each loop has analogue differential amplifier with controlled amplification factor, digital component with
adjustable parameters for shaping factor of grinding FG, special digital PID regulator, which can be adjusted to work in different mode at mill loading and discharging. Both loops are free configuring, as they can operate with input signals
from the sensors or with unified signals from other sources. The module is with
standard current inputs and outputs, which can be programmed as normal or
inverse and also with serial communication channel RS 485 programmed to
MODBUS. The module is for panel mounting.
The special regulators of MILLCONT 2M are with analog outputs given by the
formula (Penzov & Marinov, 2008):
T
Yn Pr X n
Ti
Figure 4. Microprocessor module
K 0
Td
X n X n 1 100 % bo
T
fr
(1)
where:
n - output control value;

X n , X n 1
- disbalance between set point (SP) and factor of grinding (FG);
Pr - gain coefficient; Ti - time constant of integration; Td - time constant of deviation;
T - tact of the control law ;
- range of the input signal ; bo - initial output control value
295

PROCEEDINGS
The module is built in PVC box with dimensions 65 x 135 x 165 mm, inserted in aperture with dimension 67 x
137mm. The sensor SRIP is installed on the stand hardly connected to the foundation as its adopt part is directed
from over 200mm under 30 - 40against the waterfall side of the mill. The sensor SDIP is fixed on the casing of the
gear by means of incorporated magnets. In order to escape a disturbances the armoured cables, connecting the
sensors with the module are transmitted on the cable shelf a far from high voltage cables and high frequency tyristor or transistor motor drivers. The cables are withdrawn in steel pipes for protection from disturbances and outer
intervention.
3. INFORMATION CONTROL STRUCTURE OF THE SYSTEM FOR OPPTIMIZATION OF THE GRINDING

PROCCES
The automatic system for ore grinding control in semiautogenous mill with above mention technical means has the
structure diagram given in Figure 5. The aim is to be increased productivity of the SAG mill as well to be improved
the quality characteristics of the ready pulp at minimal interference of the exploitation personnel.
The purpose of the automatic system is:
to measure the loading (feeling level) of the mill with ore;
to stabilize the set loading by change of the flow rate of the inlet ore;
to measure and stabilize the flow rate of the water sent to the mill and the sump as well;
to keep up the set ratio material-water at the control of the mill loading;
to stabilize the set density by change of the water sent to the sump;
to correct the set density by the water sent to the mill.
At such way the control system of the wet ore grinding process stabilizes the outlet parameters (fineness of grinding and density) of the ready product and provides optimal throughput of the grinding aggregate.
Figure 5. Schematic diagram of the control system
The system realizes the following measuring and control loops:

Measuring loops of technological parameters
F1, F4 the flow rate of the water sent to the mill and the sump respectively;
F2 the weight flow rate of the ore sent to the mill;
296

PROCEEDINGS
F3 the flow rate of the pulp sent to the hydrocyclone;

V the revs of the band feeder;
W the weight of the mill;
L1, L2 the loading (filling level) of the mill;
L3 the pulp level of the sump;
D the pulp density of the ready product.
Control loops of material flow rates and technological parameters
The weight flow rate of the ore sent to the mill by the weight feeder (signals V, F2) with effect on the transistor frequency inverter 12, changing the revs of the band feeder 2;
The flow rate of the water F1 sent to the mill in set ratio with the weight flow rate of the ore with effect on
the actuator 11 of the water tap;
The weight of the mill. The loop includes the sensor W and regulator configured from control system SIMATIC S7-400 and connected in cascade with the loop for weight flow rate of the ore;
The loading (filling level) of the mill. The loop includes the sensors L1 and L2 connected by weight coefficients
to the microprocessor module MILLCONT 2M. The sensor L1 is remote sensor SRIP installed on stand against
the waterfall side of the mill. The sensor L2 is direct sensor SDIP installed on the casing of the gear. The regulator of MILLCONT 2M acts by the control system on the frequency inverter 8 corrected the revs of driver
motor of the mill 9;
The pulp level of the sump by the signal L3 with effect on the transistor frequency inverter 6, changing the
revs of the pump 5. The signal for flow rate of the pulp F3 is sent as a position feedback to the regulator of
the loop configured from the control system;
The density of the pulp for flotation. The loop contains the densimeter D, the regulator configured from the
control system and the actuator 14 of the water tap. The flow rate of the water F4 is sent as a position feedback to the regulator of this loop. Also the signal of the density is used for correction of the water flow rate
sent to the mill.
The obtained parameters at the identification of the SAG mill as a object of automation (gain coefficient K0,
transport delay 0, time constant T0) are used in the developed algorithm for the choice of the type of regulator
and the optimal adjustments of its parameters.
The trends of the regulable parameters L1 and L2 after optimal adjustment of the filling level control loop with effect on the revs Vm of the mill are given in Figure 7.
Figure 7. Trends of the main regulable parameters
297

PROCEEDINGS
4. CONCLUSION
The nowadays achieved economical results from exploitation of automatic system implemented fractionally on
SAG mill in ore-dressing factory of Chelopech mining (Bulgaria) are following:
The mill output grows over 15 %;
The specific energy consumption is reduced approximately to the same percentage;
The durability of the lining and grinding bodies extends with 3 4 months;
The mean square deviations of ready product by fineness of grinding and pulp density are reduced with an
average of 1,3 times in comparison with those at manual control of grinding process;
The average time for system buying back is under 6 months.
Besides these good economic results the system eliminates subjectivism at the control of grinding process and improves the overall labor organization of the workshop.
REFERENCES
[1]
Godler F., Hagenbach J. (1994). Neues akustisches Verfaren zur Mesung des Mahlgutfllungsgrades in Rohmlen, ZKG International,
2/1994
[2]
Penzov, T., Vragov, I., Lalov, I. (2006). New microprocessor system for control of ore grinding process, XXIII International Mineral Processing Congress, Volume 1, Istanbul.
[3]
Marinov D., Penzov T. (2006). New sensor and microprocessor modules for optimum loading of separator ball mills , ZKG International,
6/2006
[4]
Penzov, T., Marinov, D. (2008). Automatic system for ore grinding control in single-stage ball mill, XXIV International mineral processing congress, Beijing, China
298

PROCEEDINGS
COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS AS THE RESEARCH

TOOL FOR MINERALS SEPARATION PROCESSES
ABSTRACT
V. F. SKOROKHODOV
M. S. KHOKHULYA2
A. S. OPALEV3
V. V. BIRUKOV4
R. M. NIKITIN5
The composition, movement and distribution of components

accumulations as well as interaction of the phases of heterogenic environments in the working volumes of magnetic-gravity,
gravity and flotation cells have been studied by methods of
computational fluid dynamics.
Numerical modelling of separation processes has resulted in
graphic and numerical data acquisition which characterise their
particularities. The method has been suggested for estimation
of surface energy of minerals particles during modelling flotation process.
Mining Institute KSC RAS, Apatity, Russia

1
skorohodov@goi.kolasc.net.ru 2
mike@goi.kolasc.net.ru 3 opalevAS@rambler.ru
4
birukov@goi.kolasc.net.ru 5 remnik@yandex.ru
Keywords
Computational Fluid Dynamics,
Numerical Modelling, Separation Process
1. INTRODUCTION
Achievement of high processing results as well as increase of environmental safety level and resource-saving at
treatment of ores with fine dissemination of valuable components and complex mineral composition requires improvement and development of new equipment and technologies. Creation of modern processing equipment is a
scientific and engineering problem related to design-and-engineering, technological and managerial and engineering operations. It is a numerical modelling based on the multi-iterative numerical methods applied for solution of
the equations of computational fluid dynamics which investigates the processes of minerals separation contributing to design of modern separation equipment [2, 5, 6, 10].
Nowadays computational modelling technologies are developed rapidly following to trends of computing. They are
integrated into modern CAD/CAM/CAE systems and allow decreasing the costs from design and technological operations and increasing verification of engineering solutions.
Improvement of study of mineral separation processes by applying the methods of computational fluid dynamics
allows obtaining information which can be used at new methods creation for improvement and development of
processing equipment. Firstly, these are regularities of movement of short-range fractions separated from minerals
components and distribution of their bulk concentrations. Secondary, these are effects of influence of exterior
force impacts with different physical origin and intensity. And thirdly, these are effects of influence of transient
work regimes of processing equipment on disperse mineral particles located in the investigated area of separation
process.
The known analytical models of mass transfer in the systems of substantial equations dont take into account particularities of fluid dynamics of multi-phase flows at the zones with complex geometry. The problem given for separation processes occurring under certain spatial and physical conditions can be solved by applying numerical methth
ods (e.g., finite elements method) and the theory of multi-phase multi-speed continuum developed in 20 century
[8].
Use of differential equations of mass, momentum and energy conservation specifies their separate record for every
pseudo phase. A pseudo phase is considered by the authors as a short-range mineral fraction created according to
belonging of values of magnitudes of physical-chemical properties of its particles to the range selected of those
properties. A medium is considered as superposition of interpenetrating continua, and each of them refers to its
pseudo phase [1, 3]. This allows creating models of specific apparatuses, investigating kinetics of separation of pro-
299

PROCEEDINGS
cessed materials, as well as drawing up guidelines for improvement of the main concentration equipment, and optimising its technological working methods.
One of the effective methods to model heterogenic media by applying computational fluid dynamics (CFD) methods is widely used software ANSYS Fluent. This software solves tasks for the areas where hydrodynamic and metathetical processes are occurring.
A model developer understands a research object as a physical system with its own distinctive properties and being
in a certain connection with environment, but the software Fluent operates with a geometrical image of this system divided on a limited set of elementary volumes united into the models computational grid. Accuracy and informativeness of a computational experiment mainly depend on discreteness, quality and structure of the computational grid. So, representation of an area where the separation process takes place as a system with limited
number of degrees of freedom allows unlimited approaching to the characteristics of similar in-situ experiment
during a computational test. Formulation of conditions of the model uniqueness and possibility to extrapolate the
current calculation results into values of technological processing parameters are set in the software Fluent. They
allow assessment of a level of the model adequacy to a real physical process and prediction of the modelled process results.
The paper presents the results of application of the methods of computational fluid dynamics for research and
analysis of gravity, magnetic-gravity and flotation processes of minerals separation.
2. STUDY OF THE SEPARATION PROCESS IN THE HYDRAULIC SEPARATOR

The CFD method was applied for the study of the separation process of non-magnetic iron ores fractions in the
upward fluid flow. The object of the study is a problem related to gravity processing methods applying prior operations of fine screening or hydraulic classification. Those methods dont provide for effective separation of material
consisting of fine grains of weak-magnetic minerals. Hydraulic classes are obtained by classifying minerals according to the density and particles shape. They differ from grades by the fact that the fine part in a hydraulic class is
presented by minerals of larger density, and the coarse part is presented by minerals of lesser density. As the grains
grade lessens the equal settling factor decreases, but the module of hydraulic classification scale increases [7, 12].
This problem can be solved if non-magnetic products of iron ore separation are preliminary separated by screening
prior to gravity concentration; fine classes are separated by hydraulic classification. Hydraulic classification can be
optimized by creating at the separators different parts a specific structuring of suspension having required viscosity and density of environment due to change of structural and hydrodynamic parameters of the separator. To verify
this conception there was developed a CFD model of a hydraulic separator with inclined plates (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Inclined plates of the hydraulic separator
Formulation of conditions of the model uniqueness takes into

consideration adequacy of pseudo phases properties to those
of real material. The models pseudo phases are formed from
two hematite fractions and two amphiboles fractions. The first
ones have diameter of particles of 8.5105m and 1.5104m,
and density of 5200 kg/m3. The latter have the same diameter
of particles and 3000 kg/m3 density.
The most significant characteristics of the process to be modelled are distribution of bulk concentrations of pseudo phases
and change of velocities of hindered-settling particles with different size at different parts of the flotation cells. Figure 2
shows axial cuts of distribution fields of pseudo phases concentrations as a result of the computational experiment.
300

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Axial cuts of distribution fields of pseudo phases concentrations

5
a hematite, d=8.510 m; b hematite, d=1.510 m;

5
4
c amphiboles, d=8.510 m; d amphiboles, d=1.510 m
The analysis of the modelling results has established that the disperse pseudo phases are liquefied at the vertical sections of the separator model and form the layers with high velocities of liquid filtration. As suspension enters the zone of inclined channels, segregated
particles in the pseudo phases accumulate on upper outer surfaces
of the plates and form the sediment layer. These sediments move
into the separators lower zone with reduced velocities of liquid filtration. Number of particles is precipitated into the zone of the separators unloading, and grains which remain in suspension are carried
into the separators upper part along inclined channels. Then they
are transported into the receiver of floating fraction. Data concerning outflow of pseudo phases into the separators outlet indicate predominant carrying of fine amphiboles grains into the floating fraction. Minimal outflow
4
values are seen for hematite grains with 1.510 m grade. At the initial stages they are considerably less than am5
phiboles grains outflow values with 8.510 m grade.
The studies of separation of materials from two different grades were made by CFD method. They allow us make a
conclusion that in the suspension the particles are classified against the principle of equal settling. But on the
working surface of plates they are ranged against the principle of segregate foliation of minerals along an inclined
plane. Due to combination of two separation types, hydraulic separation of initial material and following fractional
concentration take place simultaneously. As a result negative reciprocal influence of particles with different hydraulic grade can be excluded.
So, the process modelled demonstrates a possibility to optimize hydraulic classification and acceptability of a hydraulic separator with inclined plates. The mechanism of separation of fine classes of iron-containing ores has been
revealed, which consists in primary action of principle of segregate floating of minerals on the inclined plane.
3. DESIGN AND IMPROVEMENT OF MAGNETIC-GRAVITY SEPARATORS

The study carried out of separation processes concerned a problem of design and improvement of magnetic-gravity
separators. The aim was to increase selectivity of separation of fine-grain strong magnetic ores which particles
have a low contrast of properties.
Contrary to traditional magnetic separation, magnetic-gravity separation is more selective separation process [13],
and it allows us to recover more qualitative concentrates (no more than 2.5% SiO2 and about 70% Fetotal) during
treating finely disseminated ferrous quartzite. In addition, flexible control for separation parameters (magnetic
field intensity, upward flow velocity) ensures efficient response on change of material composition of ores treated
and stabilization of ferrous concentrates quality.
However, some shortcomings of magnetic-gravity separators result in losses of iron with fine ferrous-magnetic particles. To understand causes of such losses there were carried out studies and analysis of current of multi-phase
ferrous-magnetic suspension in the working volume of a magnetic-gravity separator by the methods of computational fluid dynamics.
At the first stage there was created a CFD model for the process of ferrous-magnetic suspension current which was
in the zone of impacts of the upward swirling fluid flow and homogeneous magnetic field. The computational test
has found out that at the separator a precessing swirl and recirculation currents occur, which change a velocity of
the upward fluid flow in a wide range. It has a negative impact on selectivity of the separation process.
At the second stage it was proposed to make some changes in the model. It was proposed to set an additional cylinder-conical section with an internal solenoid along the vertical axe of the magnetic-gravity separator with an aim
to stabilize velocities of the upward fluid flow and level fields of suspension components concentration.
The computational test has shown that an additional solenoid which lines of force are codirectional with lines of
force of the main solenoid allows us to decrease heterogeneities of a final magnetic field in the separation zone.
And the use of the additional section with a solenoid eliminates recirculation currents and pulsing of velocities in
the separation space. Figure 3 shows fields of a vertical component of water velocity in a magnetic-gravity separator without (a) and with the section installed (b).
301

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 3. Fields of Z-component of water velocity (m/sec) in the

magnetic-gravity separator without (a) and with the section installed
(b)
As a result of computational tests an empiric equation

(1) was derived. It determines a minimum value of intensity of magnetic field H (kA/m), at which the particles with maximum diameter d(m) transfer to the drain
fraction at the velocity set of the upward fluid flow V
(m/sec), grade ranging from 0 to 104m, and magnetite
content C (%) in a particle [9]:
10
-4
-5
-8
Where a = 0.932410 ; b = 0.124210 ; s = 3510 empiric coefficients.
4. FORMULATION OF CONDITIONS OF UNIQUENESS FOR CFD MODEL

The authors carry out studies and analysis of minerals flotation separation by CFD method with the aim to find a
comprehensive numerical model for flotation process. Such model must take into account the factors having an
influence on floatability of particles of one or another mineral in consideration of degree of minerals release, as
well as possibility to obtain separation characteristics for different flotation equipment in a wide range of its working regimes [11]. The CFD model for minerals flotation separation process has to be designed to solve issues of improvement of used flotation equipment in a cycle of nepheline concentrate recovery from current tailings of apatite flotation during apatite-nepheline ores concentration.
Due to the technology of nepheline concentrate recovery (applied by Apatit JSC) from raw materials from the
Khibiny deposits, Al2O3 losses in the main nepheline flotation are more 36%. But its technological parameters can
be improved due to optimization of parameters of flotation separation inside of a working chamber of the flotation
cells OK-38, used for this extraction. The using of activated water dispersion of air (AWDA) during flotation is one of
optimization methods. Using AWDA ensures keeping of contrast of properties of particles surfaces of different
minerals and allows ranging a degree and topology of a working zone aeration.
During further studies there was designed a CFD model of separation of short-range fractions on the grounds of
floatability. The main task for this study was to verify a possibility to apply the method for quantitative estimation
of surface energy of mineral grains to formulate the conditions of uniqueness of mathematical model for flotation
process. There was established a link between surface energy value and values of energy on ionic interaction in the
minerals crystal lattice. This approach is based on A.E. Fersman theory of geo-energy [4] and studies of V.V. Zuev
[14] which concerned themes of minerals crystal energy.
The equation proposed by A.E. Fersman is the following:
1071,5
volume energy of ionic interaction in the minerals crystal lattice; 1071,5 correction for contribution
Where
; mineral's molar mass, /
; number
of ions into energy of mineral's lattice; mineral's density, /
energy constant of class ion; number of ions of class.
of ions classes constituent the lattice;
The major part of the physical and chemical properties of minerals can be described quantitatively in terms of specific energy values of ionic interaction in the crystal lattice. The studies performed [14] allow calculating minerals
surface energy by linear empirical dependence:
0,0025
302
0,3052

PROCEEDINGS
With sufficiently high reliability of approximation R2=0,8919.

The model was created in software environment ANSYS Fluent with using the software Gambit as a network code
generator. The geometrical image of a chamber in the flotation cells OK-38 was created on the basis of design documentation developed by Outokumpu Company.
The geometrical image includes:
area of pulp to the lower level of capture of foam-removing mechanisms,
area of hatches for pulp loading and for chamber product discharge,
mobile area of impeller, and
area of stator.
The computational network of the models finite elements contains about 106 cells for the mobile area of the impeller, and ~ 4106 cells for the immobile zone of the stator and chamber. The model has four pseudo phases: water
solution of surface-active reagents, dispersed air, and two solid granulated phases. Dynamic characteristics of the
model according to consumption of pulp and air corresponded to the process flow chart, which regulated nepheline concentrates recovered by the Apatity Nepheline-Processing Factory-2 (ANPF-2). The computational test took
into account that during interaction of pseudo phases the surface forces must predominate over volume ones.
Such interaction of pseudo phases took place due to application of the method for quantitative estimation of surface energy of mineral grains.
Therefore the conditions of the model uniqueness and parameters of effects of particles dual interaction are determined in such a way that solid pseudo phases differ by density and grade, except values of surface energies calculated in accordance with apatite and nepheline properties. A hydrophobic disperse pseudo phase has a higher
density at larger grade compare to a hydrophilic phase. So, if during the computational test the method proposed
and formulation of the uniqueness conditions had failed, the result of the test would have been contrary to the
expected one. But the test results have shown strongly pronounced separation of solid pseudo phases with the
thicker and larger hydrophobic phase being carried to the surface of foaming, and an increase of concentration of
the hydrophilic phase in the lower bottom layers of the chambers model.
Figure 4 demonstrates distribution of bulk concentrations of floated and non-floated short-range flotation fractions on the vertical section of the chamber from the flotation cells OK-38 after 100 sec of the process.
Figure 4. Distribution of volume
accumulations of floated and nonfloated narrow flotation fractions
floated phase; b non-floated
phase
So, running mathematical

models can be created for
flotation separation of mineral components on the basis
of equations of computational fluid dynamics and statements of the theory of geoenergy and crystal energy
with formulation of conditions for models uniqueness correspondent to the modelled process.
The advantages of the CFD model of short-range flotation fractions separation on the grounds of floatability in the
chamber of the flotation cells OK-38 are as follows:
possibility to take into account flotation properties of each pseudo phase and behaviour of interphase interactions;
analysis of mass balance of pulp and its components in every time moment;
interpretation of computational results in terms of technological parameters of flotation.
303

PROCEEDINGS
5. CONCLUSION
Application of computational fluid dynamics methods substantially extend tools of engineers-designers and researchers who develop new processing equipment. Information obtained at the computational tests cannot be
compared to results of direct physical modelling of processes of separation according to amount of details and
information. It means possibility to obtain the values of physical parameters of each component in the multicomponent system presented in a form available for perception and treatment.
Data about components velocities and concentrations in heterogenic environments in any point of the plants
working volume and at any time moment allow revealing the regularities for processes of separation and design of
new equipment. They also solve the problem of optimization of existing processing equipment on the basis of
knowledge received concerning processes of separation of mineral components.
REFERENCES
[1]
Bowen R.: Theory of mixtures, Continuum Physics, New York: Academic Press, 1976.
[2]
Doroodchi E. et al.: The influence of inclined plates on expansion behavior of solid suspensions in a liquid fluidized bed a
computational fluid dynamics study, Powder Technology, 2005, Vol.156, No.2
[3]
Drew D., Lahey R.: In particulate two-phase flow. Butterworth-Heinemann, Boston, 1993.
[4]
Fersman A.E.: Geochemistry, Moscow-Leningrad, Chimteoret, 1936
[5]
Hedvall P., Nordin M.: Plant Designer: A crushing and screening modeling tool. Mineral processing plant design, practice
and control: Proceedings, Society for mining, metallurgy and exploration, Inc., 2002, Vol.1
[6]
Leeuwner M.J., Eksteen J.J.: Computational fluid dynamic modeling of two phase flow in hydrocyclone, The Journal of the
Southern African Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, 2008, Vol.108, No.4
[7]
Lyashchenko P.V.: Gravity methods of concentration, Moscow, Gostopizdat, 1940
[8]
Nigmatulin R.I.: Dynamics of multi-phase environments, Moscow, Nauka, Vol.1, 1987
[9]
Patent 2387483 RF Concentration method of disperse ferrous-magnetic materials //Melnikov N.N., Gershenkop A.Sh.,
Skorokhodov V.F., Biryukov V.V., BI, 12, 2010
[10]
Shukla S.K. et al.: Evaluation of numerical schemes for dispersed phase modelling of cyclone separators, Engineering Applications of Computational Fluid Mechanics, 2011, Vol.5, No.2
[11]
Skorokhodov V.F. et al: Study of fluid dynamical characteristics of a column flotation plant on the basis of computational
fluid dynamics methods, Issues and trends of rational and safe development of georesources, Proceedings of Russian scientific and technical conference, Apatity, 2011
[12]
Todes O.M. et al: Movement and displacement of particles from the solid phase in the pseudo liquefied layer, chemical
industry, 6, 1966
[13]
Usachev P.A., Opalev A.S.: Magnetic-gravity concentration of ores, Apatity, KSC RAS, 1993
[14]
Zuev V.V. et al: Crystal energy as a basis of estimation of properties of solid materials. St-Petersburg, 2006
304

PROCEEDINGS
THE CONVEX PROGRAMMING
ABSTRACT
1
Elena GELOVA
Aleksandar KRSTEV2
Jordan ZIVANOVIK3
Aleksandra STOJANOVA4
Convex programming is the simplest and

best processed area of nonlinear programming. Many properties of linear programs
are transmitted to the convex programs.
In this paper properties of convex programs
and methods for their solution like gradient
method and method of convergence are
listed, also an example of solving convex
program is given.
1
Assistant, UGD-Stip, Faculty of Computer Science, Macedonia,
elena.gelova@ugd.edu.mk
2
Assistant Professor, UGD-Stip, Faculty of Computer Science, Macedonia,
aleksandar.krstev@ugd.edu.mk
3
Full Professor, UGD-Stip, Faculty of Computer Science, Macedonia,
jordan.zivanovik@ugd.edu.mk
4
Assistant, UGD-Stip, Faculty of Computer Science, Macedonia,
aleksandra.stojanova@ugd.edu.mk
Keywords
Convex program, Convex set,
Minimum, Target Function
1. PROPERTIES OF CONVEX PROGRAMS

The problem in which we need to find the minimum point of a function
at a specified set , is called program
(or mathematical program).
When there are convex function and a convex set, then it is a convex program. A set in convex program is usually
given implicitly in this way:
0,
0, ,
0
:
where , , , are convex functions. In this case convex program can be formulated as follows:
(K)

w. l
0

(1)
0.
The function
is called target function, while , , ,
are limiting functions. ("Min" means the required minimum point of the function, while the "w.l" is short for the words "while limiting".) The set of allowed solutions can
be written as:
0,
1, ,
:
in which case the program (K) has the form
()

w. l
0,
1, , .
We say that a point is allowed solution of the program (K) if
If
1, , are convex functions, then the set
305
is part of .
:
0,
1, ,
is convex.
PROCEEDINGS
2. METHODS FOR SOLVING CONVEX PROGRAMS

Gradient method
Gradient method is a modification of the Cauchys method with most steep decline for programs with constraints.
For simplicity, assume that you need to solve convex program with linear constraints.
w. l
0
(2)
where
is a convex continuous differential function. We denote with the set of allowed solutions
:
,
0.
The method is iterative, i.e. the optimal solution of the program (2) is the limit point of the sequence with apis obtained by solving a linear program and one-dimensional
proximation , 0,1,2, Any approximation
search.
Algorithm
. The gradient
is calculated and the stopping rule is
Initial allowed approximation is selected
specified. Example, "sufficiently small" number
0, with capacity to stop the algorithm when:
(3)
for 0,1,2, :
The linear program is solved.
w. l
0
(4)
The optimal solution is denoted by .

The one-dimensional program is solved.
w. l
0
1.
and ).
(here is searched on linear segment that spans
The optimal solution is denoted by .
The new approximation is calculated.
.
is permissible approximation of the optimal solu If the stopping rule is satisfied, the process is halted,
is calculated and the algorithm continues with
tion. Otherwise, the process is backed to step 2,
.
new
The method is graphically described in figure 1.1 Since (4) is a linear program, its solution
can be taken as extreme point of the set of permissible solutions .
Method of convergence
The proof that some method really converges to its solution is not usually simple. This assertion will be demonstrated on the gradient method. We want to prove the following result:
Let
is convex continuous differential function and if the set of allowed solutions is limited, than every limit
of calculated Gradient method is a global minimum program (1).
point from the sequence
306

PROCEEDINGS
Since is a limit point of the sequence, and the set

with property:
sequence
lim
is limited (and closed), there is a subsequence
of
Figure 1.1. Gradient method
For each
, the method determines as solution of the linear program (4). Without loss of simplicity we assume
are convergent. Their limit point are denoted as and . Since
minimizthat sequences and
, , and is continuous, than minimizes on the interval , . So
es on the interval
for each
Specially,
and (5) becomes
. But
for each
,0
1.
is impossible because
,0
1.
(5)
can only decline, so
(6)
Now we write the well-known Taylors formula for point :
where
lim
(7)
is the "residual function" of property

0.
(8)
This formula, due to (6) pulls
0.
After splitting with 0 and 0 have
0.
(9)
Inequation (9) used only for two specific points and . In order to join the inequation allowed arbitrary decisions, first need to apply that
for each .
(This is true because a minimal solution of program (4).) For a continuous differential function, in border case
when , the above expression gives for each :
optimality of point
(10)
is now imminent: For all
have:
307

PROCEEDINGS
because the convex function
and
by (10). So is the global minimum.

We will look an example in which will use Kuhn-Tucker conditions and to enumerate them.
Primary Kuhn-Tucker condition of optimality.
We denote by
the set of active constraints for point , i.e
:
0.
The primary condition for optimality of programs (K) can be defined as follows:
The accepted solution is optimal if and only if, the system of linear inequation
0,
(11)
no solution .
Dual-Kuhn Tucker condition of optimality. Dual conditions of optimality are derived from primary conditions of
optimality. Without loss of completeness (and to avoid the introduction of double indices) we can assume that the
first constraints are active at the point . The accepted solution is optimal if and only if, there are nonnega
0,
such that
tive numbers

0.
Example 1. You need to solve the program
2
. .
0
1.
0
1.
First we show that the target function
is convex on set of allowed solutions .
Heseos matrix of function is
1
2
2
.
2
1
Minor diagonal of that matrix are nonnegative on , because it is
0
1
1
0
1
1
3
0.
1
4
Matrix
is a positive samidefined on . This drew to be a convex function on .
If you start the iteration for example from
1,1 , the optimal solution is found after only three iterations
shown in Table 1.2.
Table 1.2.
308

PROCEEDINGS
Approximation
shown on Figure 1.3
Figure 1.3.
Optimality of point
you can check using the Kuhn - Tucker condition.
First, constraints are written in a manner that meets the program (K):
1 0
0
1 0
0.
In the point
only the first limit is active, i.e
1 . Therefore Kuhn-Tucker dual system has the form
0
0.
(12)
,2
,0
1, 0
Kun- Tucker system (12), after the transposition of the vector will look like this:
1
0
0
0
0.
Obviously, this system has a solution
. Conclusion:
1,
is really optimal solution.
3. CONCLUSION
When solving convex programs differentiation continuous target functions and arbitrary convex set of permissithat is not in
ble solutions, convex of set must not be ignored, because otherwise we ran the approximation
the set . Important properties of Gradient method is to all approximations of the optimal solution is found in the
set of allowed solutions. Gradient method is slow but generally reliable method.
REFERENCES
[1]
Dantzing G.B., Linear programming and extensions, Princenton University Press,
[2]
Princenton, New Jersey, 1963[2] Dr. Jovan J.Petri , Operaciona istraivanja, Nauna knjiga, Beograd 1989
[3]
Sanjo Zlobec, Jovan Petri, Nelinearno programiranje, Nauna knjiga, Beograd, 1989
[4]
P.Venkataraman, Applied Optimization with Mat lab Programming, John Wiley and Sons,inc. 2002
309

PROCEEDINGS
APPLICATIONS OF MS PROJECT FOR CREATION

AND MANAGEMENT SCHEDULES OF MINING ACTIVITIES
ABSTRACT
Yordanka ANASTASOVA1
Nikolay YANEV2
Kantcho IVANOV3

1
dani@mgu.bg 2 niki@mgu.bg 3 kivanov@mgu.bg
This article discusses the problems of creation, visualization, control and

management of schedules for various mining activities. Emphasis is placed
on MS Project - a software product designed to create plans, projects and
schedules as well as control and management of their implementation. It is
discussed in a practical manner its ability to analyze the amount of work, the
spent finances, the invested time and the risks about implementation both
of a specific activity and all activities performed simultaneously in a mining
company.
The activities performed in the mining sector include large amount of tasks
and resources which have strictly fixed time for their completion.
Here are investigated three typical examples of creating and managing
schedules in different types of mining activities, namely:
- Schedule for driving a new mining working;
- Schedule for introduction of new equipment and technology;
- Schedule for cyclic-recurrent mining activities.
The activities, the resources, the duration and the opportunities for controlling them are described in a summarized way. The relations between the
activities, the resources and the time for their implementation are defined.
The effectiveness of the use of different types of calendars - standard and
continuous - 24 hours that is specific to the continuous mining activities is
evaluated.
The effect from using the resources for adequate managerial decisions in
case of critical situations that MS Project provides is illustrated through the
examined examples.
Keywords
Creation, Management, Mining Activities, MS Project, Schedules
1. INTRODUCTION
The development and operation of any company in the mining industry requires the development and implementation of various activities and respective schedules for planning, controlling and management.
According to the summary definition they represent "a series of activities aimed at achieving clearly defined goals
within a specified period of time and within the limits of the fixed budget" [1]
One of the main tasks in the planning and management of various activities is the balance of the ratio between the
time, the volume of work and the value. The trio of time, money and the volume of work is often called a triangle of
activity (fig. 1). A change in any one of the items in the trio naturally leads to a change in the other two, which is an
important element in tracking and reporting on those activities.
310

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Triangle of activities (tasks, time, price)
MS Project is a software product designed for planning, controlling and management of the various project activities that take shape in the form of schedules. The product allows all project activities (schedules, respectively) to be
published on the MS Project Server within the company, which assists in the organization of work. With the help of
MS Project Server, team members receive from the Project Manager, the actual tasks, report on the progress of
their performance and communicate with each other. [2]
In accordance with the data received from the team, the head tracks and monitors the progress of the work and
makes the necessary management decisions.
The product gives you the ability to analyze the amount of work, finances spent, the time invested and the risks of
implementation both for an individual and for all the activities performed within a company.
MS Project can be successfully applied in various mining activities, which can be both long and repetitive cycle.
On the basis of 3 specific examples are explored the possibilities of the product when creating, managing and reporting on various project activities in the field of mining.
2. APPLICATION OF MS PROJECT FOR DRIVING OF A NEW MINING WORKING

From the perspective of MS Project each activity consists of three main elements: tasks, necessary resources and
assigning resources to tasks (assignment). [3]
MS Project offers several different options for the visualization of tasks under an activity through various chart
views, which are:
The Gantt chart is one of the most popular ways of graphical representation in MS Project. In MS Project charts are
not only a means for planning an activity. The charts allow you to bring new data and/or to edit existing under the
changes.
The diagram represents the schedule on which the horizontal timeline are located (Duration), start and end date
(Start, Finish), preceding tasks (Predecessors), and on the vertical is the list of tasks (Tasks) divided into the stages of
implementation (Fig. 2). The length of the segments indicating tasks is proportional to their duration. (Fig. 3).
311

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. The Gantt chart (of mining working)-description of activities
Figure 3. The Gantt chart (of mining working)-a graphical view
312

PROCEEDINGS
MS Project allows the entering of activities with constant length (Fig. 4) and activities that can be interrupted for a
period of time due to certain reasons, the duration of the interruption can be defined.
Figure 4. The Gantt chart definition and management of activities
There is an opportunity for the introduction of the so-called repeated tasks (Recurring Task). These are activities
that are repeated many times, but in a different period of time (for example during a specific day of the week,
month, etc.), as you can accurately determine the number of replays, the exact time for the start and completion
(Fig. 2).
The product allows you to set the unit of time for the duration of the activities, and it can be selected from minutes
to months. In this particular example the duration for each activity is accepted to be in days.
Since there is a specific order in the activities, there is a possibility to set up such that start after the completion of
another activity (Start-to-Finish), that start at the same time (Start-to-Start) or close simultaneous (Finish-to-Finish)
regardless of their different duration (Fig. 5).
Figure 5. Gantt chart - set of activities, starting or ending at the same time.
313

PROCEEDINGS
Activities, as a result of which an interim aim is achieved, are called finishing. In MS Project they are called milestones. Usually, the result is reaching an intermediate target and for this reason the last task of the stage is indicated by a benchmark, as a result of which the desired result is achieved. They are depicted with a rhombus and a
date on them, to accentuate the deadline for the task. It is characteristic for their duration to be usually zero. (Fig.
2).
3. APPLICATION OF MS PROJECT FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF NEW EQUIPMENT AND TECHNOLOGY

MS Project can effectively be used in the development of projects for implementation of new technologies and the
selection and commissioning of new mining equipment and machinery.
The realization of this type of activity is shown in Fig. 6, the study of the situation and all the necessary steps for
the introduction of new equipment and technology are considered from their selection, contracting, financing,
staff training to their introduction into service.
Figure 6. The introduction of a new technique fragment of chart
Another important element of the planning of any activity is the definition of the so-called resources. Under resources in the MS Project is the staff and equipment necessary for the performance of the tasks of the activity (Fig.
7)
Figure 7. The definition of the resource-fragment
314

PROCEEDINGS
Both material resources, such as machinery, equipment, etc., and human resources can be defined, and the charge
for each hour, day, month, or a minute can be set up.
An important characteristic of the resource is the value (Costs), as in MS Project, it translates as "expenses". The
product offers two types of resources: time-work rate, and value to use.
Payment for time (so-called Rate) is expressed as a value for the resource used per unit time. In this case, the full
value of the resource in an activity shall be determined by the time during which he has worked multiplied by the
corresponding type of fee. Usually the payment per period of time is used for reporting the value of intangible
(Work) resources.
When compilating the list of human resources the so-called role planning is used. For example, it is initially determined that for the implementation of the activities ten miners and a manager are necessary, then, when the plan is
an established, the specific employees for participation in these roles are chosen.
Material resources (Materials) are set as the value for the unit, and the unit can be specified in number, litre,
square meter, tone, etc.
The resource may have a value from one or both types. When determining the total costs for using the resources
MS Project determines the cost of time and the cost of using and sums them up.
For each activity, it is important to monitor both the estimated value (Cost) and the real settled cost (Actual Cost).
4. APPLICATION OF MS PROJECT FOR CREATING AND TRACKING SCHEDULES FOR CYCLIC RECURRENT MINING ACTIVITIES
There are multiple repetitive activities in mining that can be planned and tracked. In the example given, the schedule for mining processes for one cycle of production is elaborated, the duration of each activity being in hours.
The appointment of resources (Assignment) is the link between a specific task and the resources required for its
implementation. A number of both tangible and intangible resources can be assigned for one task. (Fig. 8)
Figure 8. Assign resources to a specific activity
The Tracking Gantt chart is used in tracking the implementation and allows you to see what percentage of a given
task is fulfilled, and consequently the percentage of completion of the stage in which it is included (Fig. 9).
315

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 9. Tracking Gantt chart in the performance of a cyclical process
MS Project offers a large set of so-called Reports, with the help of which different aspects of the performance of
each activity can be traced. For example, tasks under implementation, tasks which havent started (Fig. 10), intermediate and final deadlines for tasks and stages, who does what, various financial crosscuts, costs exceeding the
specified values, the volume of work carried out by each participant or for each task (Fig. 11), the critical tasks to be
performed and many others can be seen in the reports.
Figure 10. Report for non started activities at a specific date
316

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 11. Volume of work for each task
5. CONCLUSIONS
The activities in the mining sector are usually complex and resource-intensive, and for the most part have strictly
fixed deadlines for completion. Due to the nature of the activities starting from the planning and going through
their control and enforcement various contractors are involved who are responsible for the completion of a given
activity and stage, and the next part of the works usually depend on this.
On the basis of examples, it can be concluded that the planning and tracking of the work with the help of the
schedules provided by MS Project, there is a good opportunity for adequate control and management decisions in
the event of critical situations that are part of each activity.
REFERENCES
[1]
[2]
[3]
European Commission EuropeAID, Volume 1: Project Cycle Management Guidelines, 2004

Carl C. Chatfield, Timothy D. Johnson: Microsoft Office Project 2007 step by step, Sofia, SoftPress, ISBN: 9789546855930,
2007
http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/project-help
317

PROCEEDINGS
ANALYSIS OF STATE OF STRESS AND DEFORMATION

OF THE MASSIF TAKING INTO CONSIDERATION
PROBABILISTIC NATURE OF MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
ABSTRACT
Prof. Georgi MIHAYLOV1
Assoc. Proc. Georgi TRAPOV2
Mariana TRIFONOVA3
University of Mining and Geology, Sofia,

Bulgaria
1
mihayg@mgu.bg 2 trapov@abv.bg 3 trifonova.m@gmail.com
A digital model for analysis of state of stress and deformation of the

massif using Finite Element Method (FEM) is presented. Geomechanical
features in developing ore bodies using Stope and Pillar Mining and Cut
and Fill Stoping are reviewed. Algorithms for assessment of state of
stability in solving elastic and elastoplastic problems are developed.
Index called Factor of Safety (FS) is introduced as a quantitative indicator describing massifs stability. Its calculation is based on failure criteria of Hoek-Brown, Mohr-Coulomb and modified stability criterion developed by the writers team.
Substantial element in the report is probabilistic approach deployment
in modeling basic input models parameters values: coefficient of elasticity (Youngs modulus), Poissons ratio, uniaxial compressive strength,
rock mass friction angle, mediums density. This leads to calculation
process organizations alteration. This approach uses accumulated
through observation data, describing experimental parameters distribution. Calculation process starts with statistical modeling of every one
of input parameters and then FEM is applied. Thus a complexity of the
survey combining differential equations describing massifs behavior
calculations and simulation of input parameters is achieved. This approach offers opportunity for probabilistic nature of failure zones to be
determined using appropriate topographic surfaces.
Practical realization of this complex procedure offers the opportunity
for relevant methods for failure zones neutralization to be applied at
optimal human and material resources consumption.
Keywords
Open-pit, Underground Ore Mining,
Finite Elements Method, Stress Analysis, Monte-Carlo Method
1. INTRODUCTION
Combined (open-pit underground) excavation schemes feature not clearly fixed order of mining works fulfillment.
Schemes when underground extraction start after open cast mine works has been finished are mostly applied. Simultaneous open-pit and underground extraction works fulfillment are rarely applied. Schemes when mining works
start with underground extraction are very rarely applied. The factor time is of a great importance both for calculation of mine's operation period and technological scheme of extraction alternatives. Three are the features that
are to be taken into consideration about combined excavation schemes application.
First: Open cast mine's boundaries contour is designed according to a given deposits' amount and expected cost
effectiveness. Chances these two values to remain constant during whole mine's operation period are minimal.
Thus overall extraction technological scheme should be changed since it couldn't be foreseen initially.
Second: The stability coefficient of the board as well as slipping surface are calculated at open cast mine design
without taking into consideration of underground works. But they weight down in addition kinematically and statically the calculation scheme. So that stability must be re estimated especially with regard to locations of underground uncovering, preparatory and extraction works.
319

PROCEEDINGS
Third: There's great variety of rocks' composing the real rocks massif properties. It's so because of a number of natural factors most important of which are the cracks in the massif, area tectonics, surface lay, aquiferous horizons
existence and others.
It's hard to determine the input data necessary for compilation of calculation schemes. Determined approach for
introduction of indices characterizing massif properties leads to considerable deviations that finally reflect on results' accuracy.
Geomechanical aspects are the most important when technological schemes for combined extraction are to be
analyzed and optimized. Specificity involving consecutively the stages of open-pit and underground works' progress
makes the application of superposition principle for calculation of movements in different points of the massif a
must. Time is an inevitable element in the list of arguments in the functionals (for example the functional of common potential energy) because of the durability of mine development.
Subject of this study are deposits, represented by robust but cracked rocks with fragile behavior during their destruction. This means that for studying stress and deformation state (SDS) around open cast and underground extraction mines contour an elastic problem is to be resolved. The complex configuration of ore bodies makes almost
impossible differential equations of theory of elasticity to be resolved analytically [6, 7]. The vigorous evolution of
computing from the end of 50s last century gave the means for calculation of these equations including calculation of systems of linear equations comprising great number of unknowns corresponding to the number of the
points of mediums discreditation. One of the methods that is largely applied for mine massifs SDS study is finite
elements method (FEM).
2. CHARACTER OF FEM APPLIED TO GEO-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF COMBINED EXTRACTION

SCHEMES STUDY
For study of SDS of the massif around mine workings is applied FEM. Its one of frequently used numerical methods
based on calculus of variations.
The main problem of calculus of variations is finding of function for which the functional W reaches the extremum.
The prerequisite to this end is functionals W first variation to be equal to zero, i.e. W 0 .
Sufficient conditions for extremum existence should be studied, which usually means developing of complicated
and voluminous proofs [7].
Practically often the problem character allows identification of extremums type, too. If W stands for total potential energy of elastic system, which represents a functional, then equation W U A will be in force [6] where U
stands for deformation's potential energy and A stands for external forces' work.
Then functional W reaches its minimum when
W (U A) 0
Variational problems solution usually is to be numerical, i.e. through so called direct methods [2] (Courant and Hilbert, 1951). Ritz (1878 1909) is deemed the inventor of classic direct method [5]. In accordance with Lagrange
principle the functionals minimum of systems total potential energy W is usually seeked through Ritz method.
Pursuit of medium sampling and its treatment as composed of separate interconnected simpler elements leads to
nascency, fast development and widespread application of FEM.
A feature of FEM is that the medium is treated as composed of finite number of separate elements.
Of course each medium decomposed into elements would have considerable malleability, which would lead to considerable errors when stresses and deformations are to be identified. Thats why introduction of some principles
and prerequisites which would allow the problem to be calculated with acceptable for the practice accuracy after
medium sampling is necessary.
According to the variational principle the calculation of systems total potential energys minimum needs calculation of the basic equation of FEM which in matrix form is as follows:
[ K ]{u} {F } ,
where {F } stands for matrix column of the effective forces; [K ] stands for generalized matrix of system's rigidity. Its elements are defined by the geometry of the nodes (their coordinates) and deformation characteristics of
the medium; {u} stands for matrix column of the displacements.
320

PROCEEDINGS
Upon differentiation the result is the deformations vector
B
where
B stands for deformations matrix; stands for nodes displacement.
The needed stresses functions are represented the means of Hooks law
DB
An algorithm based on this formulation is developed and an own program system FEMEL aimed to solve problems
applying FEM is compiled. It was applied in practice for calculation of Room-pillar Mining Methods parameters for
various types of deposits: Plakalnitza, Koshava, metasomatic mineralizations at Gorubso (Krushev dol, Petrovitza),
Chelopech and others.
A substantial difficulty in the use of computer programs calculating under FEM is to render an account of mediums
unhomogeneity when geo-mechanical problems are to be solved. Practically the automatic generation of sampling
scheme in the compilation of calculation scheme offers a number of advantages but sometimes human intervention is desirable. Thats why FEMEL uses human-machine procedure. Upon introduction of separate lithological
types the step that follows is automatic generation of network in a particular subarea. The condition for continuity
of the medium must be observed.
3. GEOMECHANICAL ASPECTS OF COMBINED EXTRACTION SCHEMES

Combined extraction scheme is applied in order a mining enterprises existence period to be extended through extraction part of deposits beyond pits boards and/or on the bottom of the open cast mine [1, 10]. Worldwide experience shows that about one third of ore deposits are extracted using combined extraction scheme. The most essential difference between the combined scheme and the other extraction methods is the entirely different design
approach. A zone called undermine of open cast mine boards zone is to be fixed. The steps of design and realization
of open cast mine project predetermine massifs limiting state within this zone. This means that the coefficients of
stability values are close to one. Hence the first studys problem is regularities of the processes of massifs SDS alterations around the open cast mine contour to be analyzed again. This massif is the material medium where underground extraction works are to be done.
The models for geomechanical aspects study are based on multitude natural, mining and technical factors. The
following of them are taken into consideration here [9]:
open cast mines board height;
open cast mines board slope angle;
undermining height;
radius of open cast mines curved sections (in the horizontal plane).
The calculations envisage an elastic medium with fragile demolition behavior which means that basic input parameters characterizing the calculation scheme are the module of elasticity E; Poissons ratio ; rocks volume density
.
The calculation scheme takes in consideration unhomogeneity of the medium. The program system FEMEL has got
practically unlimited capacity to enlist areas with various physical and mechanical properties. Here the unhomogeneity of the medium is represented in three varieties:
disseminated texture cooper ore;
rocks composed of granodiorites;
fractured rocks near the contour of open cast mine resulting from drilling-and-blasting works.
The calculation schemes use two regimes of stress:
stress due to volume forces arising from geostatic load;
stress arising from horizontally oriented tectonic forces.
Its ore deposits of minerals feature that their massifs structure is clearly impaired. In the reality there are two to
four (most frequently three) system cracks that form the size and form of the elementary structural blocks. The
elementary structural block impacts most of all on the parameters of drilling-and-blasting works and in particular
on the size of the normal size piece under the conditions of an open-pit excavation. During underground extraction
321

PROCEEDINGS
in addition to aforesaid factors the size of the normal size piece impacts as well as on ore and rocks stability. The
massifs stability is critical for optimal extraction technology choice. The long practice of FEM usage shows that for
assessment of constructions geometric dimensions and general nature of physico-mechanical properties appropriate calculation schemes are the ones that use isotropic massif [6]. Geomechanical processes depending on spatial
characteristics of each system of cracks could be studied using detailed calculation schemes related to the concrete parameters of forehead supporting and rock pressure management. In this case the first postulate is in force
the more that currently theres no enough practical experience in the field of detailed calculation schemes for
combined extraction study.
Its considered an example of combined scheme application for extraction under a virtual mine conditions [3]. After
completion of extraction works in the open cast mine extraction of the deposits beyond the open-pits board is to
be done [9]. Rocks and ores indices allow chamber-pillar scheme of extraction. Depillaring district is divided into
primary and secondary chambers. Primary chambers are to be worked out as a fist stage. They are filled back afterwards with aggregate featuring certain strength and deformation properties. Upon primary chambers backfilling secondary chambers start to be worked out as a second stage.
The study scheme is shown in Table 1. It comprises four variants study.
Table 1.
Stages of study
Study aims
Features
Stage I
Study of SDS around open cast mine
contours
Determination of stress distribution character at the moment when extraction works in

the open cast mine are over
Study of shear stress XY , principal
Stage II
Study of SDS upon extraction of
primary chambers
Determination of stress distribution character according to chambers geometric dimensions, undermining height, open-pit
depth
Stage III
Study of SDS massif upon backfilling of primary chambers and extraction of secondary chambers
Determination of stress distribution character according to strength and deformation

properties of backfilling material at the
moment when normative strength is
achieved
Stage IV
Study of SDS massif upon backfilling of primary chambers, backfilling
of secondary chambers and assessment of joint work of real massif
and backfilling material
Determination of stress distribution character according to strength and deformation

properties of backfilling material; analyze of
chambers featuring lower strength properties of back filling
stress 1 and 2
Study of shear stress XY , principal
stress 1 and 2 according to the minimal
distance of underground mining works to
the open-pit board and the number of
primary chambers
Study of shear stress XY , prcipal stress
1 and 2 at a secondary chamber extraction
Identification of the moment of deformations damping in chambers arches
when filled back massif turns in real supporting element the rocks lay down on
the backfilling
The real rocks massif features great variety of physic and mechanical properties. This reflects on the results obtained by using FEM. For example the movements, stresses, deformations in each point of the calculation scheme
are characterized not by determined values but by relevant probability laws of distribution. Standard statistic input
data processing is not enough strong problem solving tool. Determination of statistic laws of physic and mechanical properties distribution allows application of probability approach for obtaining and analyze of the results. In
this case imitation procedure and more precisely the Monte-Carlo Method is applied for solving of the given calculation schemes. To this end calculating module FEMEL is included in the own program system dealing with MonteCarlo Method. Variations intervals of the three basic parameters , and are shown in Table 2.
322

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2.
Rock variety
Determined characteristic
Youngs modulus
E, GPa
Poissons ratio
Density
, kg/m3
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
30
60
0,28
0,35
2500
3400
rocks composed of granodiorites
22
45
0,31
0,35
2200
3000
fractured rocks
3,5
0,4
0,45
2000
2500
disseminated texture cooper ore
The program used for calculation according to Monte-Carlo Method allows calculation of great number (tens of
thousands) of combinations of input parameters values according to their probability of distribution laws.
State of stress and deformation at various stages of the combined scheme of extraction is analyzed in accordance
with Table 1 structure. Fig. 1 shows the diagrams of shear stresses XY distribution (Fig. 1a) and principal stresses
1 and 2 distribution (Fig. 1b and Fig. 1c) at the first stage SDS study around open-pit contours. The highest gradient that shear stresses XY show follows the imaginary line p, parallel to open-pit board. So it's of great importance to note that within the zone close to open-pit board where strength properties are reduced (due to blasting impact) absolute values of shear stresses in the upper part of calculation scheme are too hight XY =-3MPa.
This leads to local landslides of the benches (mainly in the higher parts of the mine) which visual observations in
operating open-pits for extraction of ore minerals definitely proved [8, 9]. Here particular role plays massif's structural brokenness. When the crack systems are pronounced and dip angle is within the interval 45 , where
2
stands for massif's angle of internal friction the rate of stability entirely depends on the cracks nature: width, backfilling type, cracks contacts type.
Figure 1a.
Figure 1b.
Principal stresses 1 and 2 distribution shows that there are zones with tension stress which could lead to local
loss of stability if the massif is structurally broken. It could perform as landslip or roll-over of blocks of rocks which
would accumulate considerable kinetic energy moving down on the bench slope. The line p concurs with the contour of the rocks with strongly changed properties. This is to say that its location in the space must be studied in
advance. The approach is based on recorded micro seismic events, information about which is systemized and
transferred via contemporary GPS systems [4].
323

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1c.
Figure 2a.
Figure 2b.
Figure 2c.
On Fig. 2 are shown the diagrams of distribution of the shear stresses XY (Fig. 2a) and of principal stresses 1 and
2 (Fig. 2b and Fig. 2c) at the second stage mining of underground primary chambers. It's general estimation that
the type of stresses distribution is analogical to the one at the first stage see Fig. 1. Theres no changes in the
peak values for XY , 1 and 2. This is to say that the probability for local failures occurrence due to shear stresses
XY
and minimal principal stress 1 is all the same. Theres no considerable stresses redistribution upon extraction
of the primary chambers. Theyre located relatively not far away from the open-pit board and thus chambers massif has got not enough potential to form highly intensive force field. This conclusion is of great practical importance. During not so valuable deposits development (in this case low concentration of useful component) extraction of 50% of the deposits i.e. primary chambers extraction only could be found more cost effective.
Figure 3a.
Figure 3b.
2 (Fig. 3b and Fig. 3c) at the third stage extraction of a secondary chamber upon primary chambers backfilling
with consolidating aggregate. A feature in this case is that a fourth medium, describing physical and mechanical
properties of the backfilling is introduced into the calculation scheme (see Table 2). There are separate zones where
both minimal principal stresses 1 and maximal principal stresses 2 are concentrated. It's due to primary and sec-
324

PROCEEDINGS
ondary chambers geometric parameters as well as to backfilling materials properties, this material for sure is more
malleable compared to the natural massif. The zone of tension stresses keeps its dimensions the same. In combination with the shear stresses XY in the upper part of calculation scheme the probability of local landslips occurrence is the same. There's a zone near the chamber that's under extraction where maximal principal stress 2 is
concentrated. Its due to intensive deformation process in the rocks closely above the chambers where backfilling
material becomes supporting element.
Figure 3c.
Figure 4a.
Figure 4b.
Figure 4c.
2 (Fig. 4b and Fig. 4c) at the fourth stage extraction of a second secondary chamber. Here in the calculation
scheme is introduced a fifth medium (see Table 2). Its supposed that backfilling material in the primary chambers
has got higher strength properties compared to the normative. Tension stresses zone remains practically unchanged. A disadvantage of this calculation scheme should be reported here elastic problem solving cant take in
consideration stresses relaxation. This is to say that the more detailed study using FEM should treat non linear
problem solving i.e. variable values deformation properties are to be introduced. Zones of relief above primary and
secondary chambers are silhouetting. This means that deformation process slackens and the rocks in the chambers
ceiling are lying down on backfilling material which already plays the role of supporting element. Practice shows
that the deformation process could develop in the height. In such case kind of subsidence craters are formed on
open-pit platforms, which means that the extraction benches lie within influence area of underground works [9].
Hence, one of the compulsory conditions for providing effective and safe work during combined system extraction
is detailed study of influence areas both in open-pit and underground works. During development in the time they
could be combined which is precondition for considerable troubles.
4. CONCLUSION
The analyze of SDS during combined extraction scheme application shows that geo-mechanical aspects of this
technology are the main limiting condition for optimal variant choice.
The own program system FEMEL reacts adequately to the specific conditions of development of ore deposits
represented by sound but cracked rocks with fragile demolition behavior.
325

PROCEEDINGS
The great variety of input data is taken in consideration in the calculation scheme through relevantly developed procedure based on imitation modeling in particular Monte-Carlo Method.
As result of geo-mechanical processes study in the course of four stages of combined scheme application is
found out that demolition, respectively stability loss occurs mainly due to shear stresses.
FEM application is based on elastic problem solving. It was found in the study process that for more detailed
calculation schemes use of non linear problem is appropriate. Thus behavior of real cracked massif, back fill
massif and in particular stresses relaxation close to mine workings could be rendered in account more adequately.
Just next beyond open pit boards is formed zone with lowered strength properties. This phenomenon is
caused by drilling-and-blasting works. Identification of the real depth of weakened zone is of great importance. The strong shear stresses there are precondition for local landslips at open-pit benches.
Chamber-pillar system of development is an effective method for deposits extraction beyond open-pit
boards. The calculation schemes based on FEM allow identification of basic laws in influence zones resulting
from underground and open-pit mining.
This study should be considered as first step toward solving of the problem for combined scheme of extraction
choice. The problem is complex. The studies in the future should be focused on instrumental observation of rocks
behavior around underground and open-pit mines. This approach would provide opportunities for continuous improvement of calculation schemes adequacy with a view to actual assessment of the processes during various
stages of combined schemes of extraction application.
REFERENCES
[1]
Abdollahisharif J., Bakhtavar E. & Shahrir K.: Open Pit to Underground Mining Where is the Optimum Transition Depth. 21
WMC 2008 New Challenges and Vision for Mining. Krakow, Poland, 07-11.09.2008.
[2]
Courant R., Hilbert D.: Methods of Mathematical Physics, Berlin, Springer Verl., 1924.
[3]
Hartman H. L.: Introductory mining engineering, Jhon Wiley&Sons, 1987.
[4]
Leslie I.: Microseismic management for macro-scale benefits. Mining magazine, 2013, April, pp. 38-40.
[5]
Ritz W.: ber eine neue Methode zur Lsung gewisser Variations Probleme der Matematischen, Physik, 1908, 135, H. 1.
[6]
. ., . .: , ., , 1975.
[7]
.: , , , 1976.
[8]
. .: . , .
, 2005.
[9]
. ., . ., . .: . ,
, 2003.
[10]
. ., . ., . ., . .: . , ,
2009.
326

PROCEEDINGS
THE FALL OF THE EMBANKMENT IN BEJAR

GEOLOGICAL PHENOMENA ANALYSIS (Case Study)
ABSTRACT
MSC, Ing. Ylli KOTEMELO1
dr. Edmond GOSKOLLI2
Ing. Arjo LULE3
Faculty of Geology and Mining, Tirana, Albania, kotemelo@gmail.com

2
National Agency of Natural Resources,
Tirana, Albania, e.goskolli@akbn.gov.al
3
Albanian Development Fund, Tirana,
Albania, arjol_lule@yahoo.com
In February 2012 in Bejar sector, building project of Levan -Tepelen road

The North - South, Albania-Balkans corridor, there has been a slide in the
embankment construction, trapeze-shaped measuring height 13m, width
48m under the main perceived 13 m at the top.
First opinion: Slip, disconnect the embankment body, due to poor quality of
work and quality of materials not appropriate compression. Later it was concluded that: 1 Embankments was sunk on earth, in water saturated clay, 2fall of the embankment occurred in an equal space where realized: building
an artisan well, supporting channels, a culverts, space where the works were
digging and rebuilding the embankment.
This paper will analyze the reasons that led to the demolition of balancing
natural formations in the structure, resulting in collapse:
Reducing Shear zone geological formations, the perimeter of the excavation, during excavation for construction of embankment above.
The action of forces on vertical incision from above, during the compression process with vibration, as in the formations below the embankment,
as well as the material that formed it, during restoration works,
Change the mode of work and out of formations under (forward) embankment from: further speculate clay formations with water, groundwater movement, swelling and freezing processes.
Passing the plastic lying, the current, soon to become the area where the
work, swelling of soils in the area outside, increasing the pressures that
brought down just at the culvert and swelling of its formations.
Commonwealth of physical, physico-chemical, varying the composition,
condition and properties of formations.
Analysis of the phenomena and the use of hindsight in determining the physico-mechanical characteristics of the formations, and hydro-geologicals
conditions, which led to the collapse of the embankment, is the subject of
this study.
Keywords
Slide, Embankment, Trapeze-Shaped, Groundwater Movement, Collapse
1. INTRODUCTION
The Ministry of Public Works Transport and Telecommunications of the Republic of Albania, represented by the
General Roads Directorate, has entered to an agreement with Alpine Construction S.A. and nominated subcontractor AEGEK Albania, to improve the existing main road from Levan to Tepelene, which is part of the North South
Corridor. Although the road alignment was modified in order to avoid as much as possible the areas of active or
potentially active instabilities, it was impossible to escape from instability cases. The segment of interest concerns
the Bejar sector (Figure 1).
327

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. View of Bejar sector and the road instability
In February 2012 in Bejar sector of project Levan-Tepelene, North South Corridor, happened a sliding of the road
slope in km 1+435. The slope has a height of 13 meters a width of 48 m in the base and a width of 13 m in the upper
part. The analysis resulted that there has been a fall of embankment and the culvert placed in it. Geological Engineering experience has proved that as a result of continues process of denude, many formations change their balance state. According to analysis, construction processes such as: Embankment excavation, low level of formations,
culvert placement on it, well excavation- existing or new one, as well as channel reinforcement for pipeline supply,
lead to a change of physic-mechanical parameters of formations. These changes of formations were the cause of
the fall of embankment.
The methodology used in this paper
Concepts that will support this: the study of geological processes of rock formations in this object, changing physico-mechanical parameters of formations during and after construction, which led to the collapse of the embankment. Detailed analysis of engineering-geological factors that changed the physical and mechanical properties of
formations, with the result that inside the basilica will be the core of this study. Concepts, based on relevant literature will be compared with the practice, in case of Bejar collapse. Considering that, in areas that have problems of
stability is necessary to provide additional analysis and calculations, in order to minimize the final cost, which in the
case being analyzed, could reignite the cost of the project, with hundreds of thousands of euros.
Geological data
Geologically, the area of the embankments under study (Bejari alternative alignment road corridor) is made of
overburden superficial materials (alluvial and eluvial formations) and sound sandy-silty-argillaceous flysch formations of the bedrock (Geodata, 2011).
No thorough ground investigations works have been carried out apart from some exploratory trenching and all the
data used for the project came from the experience of the wider area formations and the general experience of
flysch materials form the designer. (Geodata, 2011).
Geological materials
In general, the embankments foundation area consists of weathered flysch (w) (mostly eluvial and locally colluvial
materials of flysch origin). It is the weathered part of overconsolidated formations. The thickness of this material is
expected to vary between locally 0.5m (upslope of the embankments) and 9.0m in the flatter part of the slopes.
3.
Effective cohesion: c=5kPa, Effective angle of friction: =27, Unit weight: = 20.5 kN/m
Below the weathered mantle of flysch lies the flysch bedrock (F), which consists primarily of fresh siltstones and
sandstones of rocky character. The compact flysch bedrock of the study area can be practically considered as immune to slope instabilities, since its bedding orientation is unfavourite for instability.Thus, the sliding surfaces analysed by the software, in the positions where they intersect the flysch weathered mantle boundary, are specified
to follow the boundary, not entering within the flysch bedrock (Geodata, 2011).
The embankments will be constructed of limestone rockfill (formation R), with materials excavated out of the nearby limestone road cuts. Eff. cohesion: c=2 kPa, Eff. angle of friction: = 42, Unit weight: = 19.5 kN/m3
Downslope of the embankments, in the flat areas of the plain located north of the Bejari village, there occur alluvial
formations (al) mostly of silty clayey character and of low plasticity.
The alluvial materials (al) are of silty clay character and can be considered (conservatively) as normally consolidated.
Their plasticity is, generally, low. As with the eluvial colluvial materials (w), due to the complete lack of data from
laboratory or in situ tests, it was absolutely impossible to specify the undrained cohesion of the soil with any practically acceptable accuracy. Thus, again the stability checks was based on the effective shear strength parameters
328

PROCEEDINGS
of this formation. Thus, the following mechanical parameters are considered for the alluvial materials: Eff. cohesion: c=0 kPa. Eff. angle of friction: = 24, Unit weight: = 20.5 kN/m3
2. CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENT
The embankment construction and demolition
Embankment was constructed initially : 13m height. 48m width. and 13m in the upper part. Later, excavated up to
the foundations of a part of it, in order to place the culvert, according to the design. Originally excavated cone finials in the form of an ellipse with half core from above, until the emergence of basic geological formations under
the embankment
Construction of the culvert and pit-source
First excavations were made for the opening of their foundations, compressed by vibration machine, and then was
put a drain of 20cm and sand, which was been compressed again. After their construction, only a few days after the
consolidation of concrete, sand compression was applied, by realizing an area relatively context, which passed in
the compression process. Under normal procedure, to establish embankment filling with crash stone layers of 30 40cm, and their consecutive compression.
Portal building
Portal (Figure 2), Portal culvert, was applied in a later stage, the construction of culvert and embankment filling
space, up to the existing embankment. The only part where there was no dynamic forces, ie no compression with
the rolling machine, was "culvert outer portal". In the following pictures are shown the portal culvert construction,
after construction of embankment and filling the space above the material, with "eskavtor.
((The above routine works, were mentioned because exactly at the space where the above processes were performed the embankment collapse happened a few months later, almost to the same place. The embankment excavation, re-filling , had to the same position and the same size).
Figure 2. Portal construction
3. PRESENTATION OF INSTABILITY OBSERVED

The zone during the field audit results with a high content of water, crumbly clay and the groundwater level near
the ground surface (Figure 3). From the observation it can be concluded that :
Figure 3. Water flow from the the lower part of the embankment and pilon
In the lower part of sliding area there is a groundwater flow. The height of the water outlet is at the base of the
excavation, the part where the geo-textile is posed and above which began the filling. So we found the underground water output at this level.
329

PROCEEDINGS
A source of water in the foot of the high voltage pylon (110 Kvolts). At a distance of 50m from the axis of the road it
is installed a new high voltage pylon. During the excavation for the erection of the pylon, it was found that up to a
depth of 4.5m it was not able to find a basic land (clay shale), but only a friable clay material, soil deposited by surface runoff. During the in situ observation it is noted a flow of water at the foot of the pylon.
- The well. The underground water level is at the ground surface. At 5m from the pylon of high voltage line, about
55m from the axis of the road, it is dug by locals habitants an artisanal well. According to the owner, the well depth
is around 20 m. During the inspection of the well it was observed that the water level in the well was about 70cm
from the entrance, thus practically at the ground surface.
The culvert. The culvert is composed form 48 pieces of tubes 1500mm, therefore represents a length of 50m by
calculating also the portals of water collecting. The observation noted that 26 pieces of tubes of the culvert in the
right side of the road in the direction of Tepelena were in good conditions. 2 tubes had cracks and open joints,
while 20 other tubes were seriously damaged (plugged in mud) and there was no continuity.
Figure 4. The raise of ground level
The lowering of the slope the raise of the ground level: As already stressed above, 20m of the slope, including the
culverts are plugged in mud at least 1.5 under the right level (Figure 4). This is explained by the fact that the loading was relatively high and the terrain little resistant. This is accompanied with a rise of soil in both sides of the
area of culvert. The observation showed that the ground level is raised from 1.2 to 1.8m in consequence of submersion of culverts. A year before, from the designers, a team wanted to study the ground for the foundation and for
that to take soil samples through drilling, but it was impossible because they were prevented by the villagers. In
April 2012, a new project was realized and started the excavation in the segment of the road having the instability.
4. ANALYSIS OF GEO-MECHANICS FACTORS WHICH CAUSED COLLAPS

Analysis of dynamic actions
Geological formations under the embankment soil in the excavated, especially under culverts, passed under the
action of dynamic loads, as defined above, as action-compress vibration during operation of the formations described above). They had had different dynamic load times, as well as in three different countries embankment,
which later collapsed. 1. They did the formations within the limits of the excavation of the raised embankment, 2.
on construction made (culvert, well), 3. the cast material to rebuild the embankment filling-excavated.
Collisions have acted as the cutting force. The work was conducted in mid-December, in terms of gradual increase
of moisture. Realization of the above works, classified as dynamic actions on the foundation soil formations, but
also in filling embankment formations (gravel), and operated at a time when resistance formations tangentially, so
sit exponential due to moisture in when the work was performed, (December 2011-January '12). So dynamic processes, operating in contacts between 2 "limestone formations" of the embankment, between existing raised previously and those who rise gradually.
Above processes, with dynamic action, saw the establishment of a vertical sliding mirror, selectively. This area, in
the sections above, the building was named as skid cone. Practically limit the embankment excavation and collapse, the rest of it. Just create "vertical sliding mirror", selectively, one of the reasons that resulted in the sinking
of the embankment.
This is explained by the fact that both of these processes, such as filling and compaction, and collapse took place in
the same position in space, in the same positions, with the works mentioned above.
330

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 5. Embankment during construction and after its collapse
This area, named that in the sections above was as skid cone, is practically, the limit of excavation and
embankment collapse, with the rest of it. Just create vertical sliding mirror, selectively, is one of the reasons that
resulted in the sinking of the embankment
This is explained by the fact that both of these processes, such as filling and compaction, and collapse took place in
the same position in space, in the same positions, with the works mentioned above.
The portal of the culvert, which as above underwent dynamic actions of the compression process, the building was
in position and not sunk in the ground. Photos made after confirm the discovery of this space. In the Figure 6 we
can see the portal and the culvert in the initial position and in the center the submerged part of culvert.
Figure 6. Culvert view after collapse
Analysis of the swelling action

During the period being analysed, there were changes in meteorological processes: From several months of drought
in the months of December, January and February, there was torrential rain and snow, water flow resulting below
the embankment, (described above, the entire area before flat part of the embankment was over saturated with
water).
The area analysed is the lower part of a water-collection area, there gushed all quantities of water, the precipitation. In making the layout designer, cutting B-B1 made perpendicular elevation lines, belongs to the management
of surface water flow sub-terrestriald (Figure 7).
Figure 7. Plan and cross sections of the embankment
Having associated with, the surface "mirror , analysed above, the pressure from the swelling, have acted as the
cutting forces at a time on the back, the bottom-up action, but in this" mirror "formations.
331

PROCEEDINGS
The impact of groundwater movement

Yet the flowing of groundwater pressures as a result of their movement, along with swelling that accompanies the
underground formations, have acted as the axis of the work, also acted as a force in the horizontal plane, brought
deformation axis culvert.
The analysis of photographs, seen not only decrease, diving, compared to the rest of the culvert, but also distortions: 1). the axis of the "pipes" absorbed, 2). We dislocations of the "tube" of the opposite end of the culvert in
height (position). (see Figure 8)
Figure 8. The displacement of culvert axis
Analysis of the impact of the freeze

In clay minerals appear to freeze the swelling phenomenon. They can rise their volume up 30%, associated with
increasing the swelling pressure to 10 kg/cm2. In Bejar, taking into account the above concepts, it is assumed that
before the embankment formations, formations clay saturated with water to work in two modes: a. In formation
under the embankment, had thus showing a pressure to push the former company because of an increased humidity, b. In the area adjacent to the landing had soil resistance embankment mechanics parameters due to frost. Soil
mechanical parameters: dynamic elasticity module, module and the odds Puason slide in the area before culvert,
sat, due to an increased swelling from moisture and freeze, resulting in reduction of resistance to cutting formations. The consequence was diving under the embankment material, and by the formations blowing-up with
them!.
The destruction due to the natural pressures
According to Theory: The process of destruction of the natural state of strain and fragmentation of rocks is characteristic of sedimentary rocks are more apparent when detected clays, which are considered as large rocks with deformities plastic. In these cases, the removal of the superimposed load, swelling occurs, to consequently, deformation rites, rituals measures volume, decreases resistance to cutting.
In case Bejar: Embankments were raised to a height of 13m. In a second phase was digging, removal, removal of a
portion of the embankment, where has been placed the culvert.
So, the entire length of the excavated as noted above, the removal of the superimposed load swelling occurred,
and consequently, the deformation is increased, decreased volume measures, with consequent reduction in cutting
resistence formations under the embankment at the perimeter of the excavation.
This is a cause that brought more precisely embankment immersion in place of excavation, and simultaneously with
the blowing of formations before embankment . In pictures: Comparison of the culvert construction zone - the area
of the collapse. As shown, the area excavated and filled the culverts is the same, with the collapse area.
5. CONCLUSIONS
The execution of a work in situ, particularly in conditions of the absence or incomplete initial data, must be in accompaniment with the integration of the data we get on the ground in the calculations and the modification of the
initial project.
In areas representing instability problems it will be necessary to anticipate works and additional calculations for the
completion of the road works, in order to minimize the final cost, which in the case of a landslide may costs a hundreds of thousands of Euros.
Geological processes such like dynamic and, swelling action, impact of groundwater movement and the freeze, and
the destruction due to the natural pressures, have brought collapse of the embankment in the Bejar.
332

PROCEEDINGS
Projects of significant infrastructure works must be accompanied with qualified assessments, which could possibly
highlight defects and might minimize changes to these projects in order to avoid a high cost and increase the duration of the projects.
REFERENCES
[1]
Terzaghi, Peck, Mesri,Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice, 1996.
[2]
Hough B.K., Basic Soils Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, New York.
[3]
Greek Code for Seismic Resistant Structures - EAK2000 (2000), Organization for Earthquake Resistant Planning and Protection,
Ministry of Environment Planning and Public Works, Greece (in Greek).
[4]
Geodata Greece: Design of embankments in road section between chs. 0+775 - 2+810 of the Bejari alternative alignment, Final
design, 2011
[5]
Recommendations for the Design of Highway Projects OMOE (2001), Ministry of Environment Planning and Public Works, Greece
(in Greek)
[6]
Rocscience (2004) SLIDE 2-D Users Manual (version 5.0), Rocscience Inc., Toronto
[7]
Kazilis N., Papadopoulos C., Papantonis D. (2012) : Application of detailed engineering geological-geomorphological evaluation
towards a viable and safe road alignment and detailed design of the slope stabilization works of the landslide-prone road subsection Memaliaj-Tepelen, of the North-South Albanian corridor. The first Albanian Congress on Roads, 27-28 September 2012,
Tirana, Albania, pp.382-389
[8]
Konomi. N. Engineering geology. (Elements of the construction geology and physical-mechanical properties of rocks and soils).
(2006). Tirana, Albania,
333

PROCEEDINGS
CORRELATION BETWEEN SEISMIC VELOCITIES

AND GEOTECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF CARBONATE DEPOSITS
ABSTRACT
Gorgi DIMOV1
Blagica DONEVA1
Marjan DELIPETROV1
Todor DELIPETROV1

1
gorgi.dimov@ugd.edu.mk
2
blagica.doneva@ugd.edu.mk
3
marjan.delipetrev@ugd.edu.mk
4
todor.delipetrov@ugd.edu.mk
This paper presents the research of several carbonate deposits with seismic
measurements and assessment of their geotechnical parameters on the field
and in the laboratory.
The importance of this type of geophysical exploration should be seen by the
fact that these methods cheaper the process of defining the real model of
the rock complex and getting on parameters that are relevant for the whole
investigation area.
Geotechnical measurements on the samples conducted in laboratory are
very important, but received data are relevant only for certain point, not for
the whole area.
Real model for the area will be made if geophysical data are combined with
the data from the investigative drilling and laboratory geotechnical research.
This paper will have important impact in the interpretation of the carbonate
complexes if velocities of the seismic waves are known and according to
them to be defined geotechnical parameters, without laboratory investigations. Also, vice versa, if geotechnical parameters are known, the seismic
velocities could be defined.
Keywords
Carbonate Deposits, Geophysical Exploration, Geotechnical Research
1. INTRODUCTION
For resolving the correlated parameters defining the model of the rock mass quality of the geological, geotechnical
and geophysical data, applied a method of regression analysis. Wishing to discover, define and analyze the relationship between two or more parameters must at the same time be sent simultaneously and compare variations of
both parameters and to measure the relationship between these variations. Therefore this method is called the
correlation method (method of exploring the mutual relations).
With the detailed analysis of all parameters it is possible to adopt correlation models which further will be used in
the process of modeling of the environment. Until now commonly in geotechnical were made correlative dependencies between the values of the parameters of the static tests (conducted with different methods), with speeds of
propagation of elastic waves Vp. In this paper we will try to work out correlation dependencies between the values
of rock mass quality (RMR, RQD and ERMR) the speed of elastic waves Vp.
2. CORRELATION BETWEEN SEISMIC VELOCITIES AND GEOTECHNICAL PARAMETERS

In this particular case results are taken from the geophysical surveys finds the limestone Sloestica - Demir Hisar and
Rasanec - Ohrid and are correlated with the results of a survey of qualitative parameters of rocks.
In figures 1 and 2 shows the dependence of RQD parameter (parameter by cracking) with velocities of elastic waves.
There is a logarithmic dependence of the parameters and the factor of determination R2 is quite high. Factor of
determination in Sloestica is 0.79 and in Rasanec even 0.84 which suggesting a strong connection to the examined
parameters.
334

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Correlation between RQD parameter and

speeds of the elastic waves Vp RQD = f (Vp) in the
site Sloestica
Figure 2. Correlation between RQD parameter and

speeds of the elastic waves Vp RQD = f (Vp) in the
site Rasanec
The images 3, 4, 5 and 6 are shown the dependencies of the quality of the rock mass classification defined by
Bieniawski - RMR and Jovanovski (2001) - ERMR, as the sum of points with velocities of elastic waves Vp. From the
displayed can see that in the first two cases (Sloestica) is established logarithmic dependence of the parameters,
and the second two (Rasanec) polynomial dependence, whereas factor determination of parameters R2 is high (0.81
or 0.83 in the site Sloestica and 0.72 and 0.74 in Rasanec), suggesting a strong connection to the examined parameters. Moreover displayed logarithmic and polynomial dependence also good results are obtained and during establishment of linear or exponential dependence, giving you nearly identical curves and very close values of factor determination.
Figure 3. Correlation between RMR parameter and

speed of elastic waves Vp RMR = f (Vp) for Sloestica
335

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4. Correlation between ERMR parameter and

speed of elastic waves Vp RMR = f (Vp) for Sloestica
From the upper images for the site Sloestica we can conclude that occur two groupings of values. The first group in
principle refers to the values of RMR of 61-69 and ERMR by 51-61 points and speeds lower than 2000 (m/s) that are
specific to the category of favorable rock mass, and the second set of values and the parameters corresponding to
good rock mass (70-74 RMR and 65-72 ERMR with speeds of elastic waves greater than 2150 (m/s)).
Figure 5. Correlation between RMR parameter and

speed of elastic waves Vp RMR = f (Vp) for Rasanec
Figure 6. Correlation between ERMR parameter and

speed of elastic waves Vp RMR = f (Vp) for Rasanec
The above mentioned which largely applies to the site Rasanec in that grouping the values is much stronger here
because here there are two elastic environments. It should be noted that both elastic environments refer to the
same lithological environment - limestone, but with varying degrees of cracking (damage), which can be attributed
to the effects of massive mining in the upper elastic zone.
336

PROCEEDINGS
That is why we have two groups of qualitative values. The first group refers to the RMR values of 58-69 and ERMR by
50-61 points and speeds lower than 2900 (m/s) which are specific to the category of favorable rock mass, and the
second set of parameter values corresponding to good rock mass (68-80 RMR and 65-81 ERMR the speed of elastic
waves greater than 4700 (m/s)).
3. CONCLUSION
From the data presented in this paper, where the main goal was to define the correlation depending on the speed
of seismic waves and geotechnical parameters of rock mass, we can extract the following findings:
from the theoretical point, higher speed of seismic waves in principle implies greater compactness of the
rock mass for the same type of rocks;
the obtained degree of correlation ranges (R2) is from 0.74 to 0.84;
high index of correlation confirms the theoretical dependence;
The application of seismic methods is the representative parameter for determining the quality of the rock
mass
Due to extensive blasting in parts of carbonate surface complex registered significant reductions in speed of
seismic waves in terms of speeds of fresh parties are in the deeper parts of the field.
REFERENCES
[1]
Barton N. (1994): Physical and discrete element model of exvation and failure in jointed rock, NGI, Oslo,
[2]
Bieniawski Z.T. (1993): Classification of Rock Masses for Engineering: The RMR System and future trends. Comprehensive Rock Engineering, 1993
[3]
Delipetrov T. (1991): The relationship between crust and subcrust structures on the territory of Macedonia and seismicity. Doctoral
dissertation. University "Ss. Cyril and Methodius "- Skopje, Faculty for Mining and geology - Stip.
[4]
Jovanovski, M., Gapkovski, N., Ilijovski, Z., (2002): Correlation between Rock Mass Rating and deformability on a profile for arch dam
Sveta Petka. 10-th International Conference of the DGKM, Ohrid.
[5]
Terzaghi K. (1943): Theoretical soil mechanics, John Willey and sons, New York, (1943)
337

PROCEEDINGS
FUNCTIONAL REHABILITATION OF THE DISRUPTED

NORTHERN SLOPE OF THE OPEN PIT MINE IRIKOVAC
IN THE COAL BASIN OF KOSTOLAC, REPUBLIC OF SERBIA
ABSTRACT
Dragan M. MILOEVI1
eljko PRATALO
Simeun MARIJANAC
Zoran MILANOVI

1
dragan.milosevic@ribeograd.ac.rs
The disrupted northern slope of the open pit mine of coal irikovac, at
which exploitation was terminated, in the coal basin Kostolac of the Republic of Serbia, is the subject of designing and spatial planning. The goal is the
rehabilitation of the landslide and shaping of the slope for a planned purpose.
Main influences on the project solution were: lithology and work environment tectonics, engineering-geological and hydro-geological conditions, the
position of mining objects and roads, planned usage of space, limitations and
environment influences, technical-technological capabilities of the mechanization at disposal for construction work, protection of the environment,
work costs etc.
This paper describes the problem. Influential and limiting factors were listed
and the solution for the disturbed slope of this open pit mine is displayed.
Keywords
Kostolac, irikovac, Open Pit Mine, Slope, Rehabilitation, Landscaping
1. INTRODUCTION
According to the decision of the expert council of EIS, the location of the depot for the flying ash and bottom ash
from the thermal power plant "Kostolac B" into the dugout space of the OPM "irikovac". In the spring of 2007,
construction on the future flying and bottom ash depot at the open pit mine "irikovac" began. After termination
of the coal exploitation at the open pit mine "irikovac" (April 2009.), construction on preparation and landscaping
for installation of objects for ash disposal was continued. With the goal of repurposing the space of the existing
OPM "irikovac" a limit on the internal deposit was determined, as well as on the northern slope up to the altitude
of 92 m, the future depot of flying and bottom ash.
After coal exploitation was terminated at the open pit mine "irikovac" a landslide was formed. The first cracks
were noted on 21.04.2009. On 24.04.2009. The area engulfed by cracks had spread and firs shifting of masses appeared. Significant movements - terrain cracking and significant mass movements happened in 01.05.2009, when
movements at the height of 7 to 10 m happened in the north area and in the direction NW-SE and N-S around 5 to
10 m, so that the affected areas around the floor of the second coal layer are up to the terrain surface. Appearance
of cracks and mass movement is shown in the slide sub vertical and vertical surfaces, in cascade. The landslide is
still active, so that the maximum altitude of cracking and sliding in the north part is cca 25m while in the horizontal
direction in the south area of the landslide movement of 30 m was noted. Surfaces encompassed by the landslide
are around 30 ha.
338

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Situation plan of the OPMirikovac in states before and

after the landslide appeared and the position of the geo-mechanical profiles and displayed photographs
Figure 2. (08.04.2009.god.) 1
Figure 3. (28.04.2009.god.) 2
Figure 4. (01.05.2009.god.) 3
339

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 5. (01.05.2009.god.) 4
Figure 6. (01.05.2009.god.) 5
Immediately after the landslide was formed, a survey of the terrain was conducted in order to update the existing
charts, with the goal being to gain proper data on the amount of masses which are moving. In the meantime three
exploration wells were made in order to obtain results which would determine the glide plain. In order to preserve
the area in which rehabilitation is being performed, objects and safety measures from surface waters were determined. After obtaining the preliminary results of the exploration wells and the sample laboratory testing, following
of the situation in the field and the decisions being made, further work progress at the OPM "irikovac" determined
the priorities of digging with the available equipment with realistic capacities, and after that, verification of the
stability of the floor was made on the open pit mine as well as on the depot after the area had been leveled. Work
priority at the open pit mine "irikovac" is firstly the construction of all objects that pump the ash from the thermal
power plant "Kostolac B" into the dug area. Time factor of the technological procedure of ash pumping conditioned
the urgency in resolving the rehabilitation of the zones, which are a priority for construction of the objects which
pump the ash.
With the goal of general review and creation of the best possible solution, it was necessary to secure the proper
geodetic base, as well as constant watch on the construction being done. The technological procedure of resolving
the rehabilitation of the northern slope was defined in two stages for several reasons. The first stage encompassed
the rehabilitation of the landslide at the excavation front from the northwest slope of OPM "irikovac" to the central profile 8 - 8'. Construction in stage I are connected to the devices of the north cassette II for disposal of flying
and bottom ash. The second stage of the landslide rehabilitation encompasses the zone from the 8 - 8' profile to
the eastern border of the OPM "irikovac".
2. ANALYSIS OF THE AREA AFFECTED BY THE LANDSLIDE

Based on the available data, orientation quantities of the masses affected by the landslide were calculated. The
status of the field before the appearance of the landslide was updated in 05.04.2009, while the situation after its
appearance was updated in 19.05.2009. It should be mentioned that movements continued even after this period.
340

PROCEEDINGS
On the displayed profiles can be seen that the terrain settling affects from 6 - 6' on to 16 - 16' profile. The settlement of the 14th floor is displayed in the table provided below, because most of the vertical movement occurred in
that part of the OPM "irikovac".
Figure 7. Field display before and after the landslide was formed at the profile line 8 - 8'
Movement of the masses at the OPM "irikovac" besides vertically, also occurred in the horizontal direction. Based
on the processed data, the most intense translator movement can be noticed from the 9-9' zone to 14-14' profile
with the calculated medium value of the translator movement of masses being 23.5 m. Comparing the calculated
parameters of mass movements by x-y axis, at the OPM "irikovac" the most unstable zone appears to be the middle part of the zone i.e. the area from 9-9' to 14-14' profile.
3. CHOICE OF CALCULATION PARAMETERS

Calculation parameters used to calculate stability in the zone which has been affected by a landslide were obtained
by feedback analysis, and afterwards used to calculate rehabilitation measures. In order to determine the angle of
the slope, which satisfies the safety factor of F=1.30 a feedback stability analysis was conducted. All of the calculations were made on the profiles where the largest masses were moving (profile lines from 6 to 16). The feedback
analysis was conducted based on visitation and geodetic review of the terrain before and after the slide, as well as
based on the available data from the drilling. The spatial position of the profile is displayed on figure 1.
The movement occurred along multiple sliding surfaces, and feedback analysis defined the parameters of solidity at
the deepest and most critical sliding surface (depth of over 100 m), and which satisfy the condition of borderline
balanced state of F=1.0. In the feedback analysis the influence of water was taken into account through the pore
pressure of ri=0.2. The stability calculations were conducted using the Jumbo method because the slide surface
defined suffered mass movement.
Feedback stability analysis
The goal of this kind of calculations is to simulate
the conditions which existed at the slope at the
moment the mass movement occurred. Based on
the feedback analysis the value of the angle of
internal friction is defined because the cohesion at
2
the glide surface is C= 0 kN/m .The following table
displays calculations done on profile 8-8' (figure 8),
in order to define the glide surface(Kr -1 to Kr -4)
based on data obtained through exploration wells.
For further stability calculations the = 11
and cohesion of C= 0 kN/m2
341
Table 1. Results of the feedback analysis calculations
Glide surface
2
= 16
= 12
Angle of internal friction

= 14
= 16
2
Cohesion C = 0.00 KN/m
Calculated safety risk factors

Fs
ru
Fs
1.27
0.0
1.14
0.1
1.02
0.2
1.04
0.2
1.10
0.2
0.95
0.2
0.90
0.3
0.93
0.3
0.98
0.3
0.87
0.3
ru
Fs
ru
Fs
ru
1.27
0.0
1.33
0.0
1.13
0.0
1.16
0.1
1.21
0.1
1.04
0.1

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 8: 8-8' profile Feedback stability analysis
4. CALCULATION OF THE STABILITY OF THE ZONE OF THE NORTHERN SLOPE

AFFECTED BY THE LANDSLIDE
When the landslide appeared on the northern slope, the biggest terrain shifts were in the 8-8' profile. To achieve
the required factor it is necessary to construct a support beam to the altitude of 72 m and soften the slope angle to
11. The achieved minimum safety factor is F=1.29.
Figure 9. Profile 8-8'
For the stability calculation in the 6-6' profile zone for the existing condition, a safety factor of F=1.02 was calculated, which means that the slope system is in a relatively stable condition. In order to satisfy the set criterion of
the minimal safety factor F=1.50, it is necessary to plan the slope at an angle of a general sloping of = 14. For
such slope geometry a minimal safety factor of F=1.57 was calculated. In order to achieve the required safety factor in the 11-11' profile, it is necessary to build a support beam to the altitude of 72 m and soften the slop to an
9.5. By forming the pre-level,the height of the slope is decreased from the original 94 m to 67 m. The achieved
minimal safety factor is F=1.31. In order to achieve the required safety factor in the 14-14' profile, it is necessary to
construct a beam to the altitude of 72 m and soften the slope to 10. With the formation of the pre-level the height
of the slope is decreased from 84 m to 51 m. The resulting minimum safety factor is F=1.35. In order to achieve the
required safety factor in the 16-16' profile, it is necessary to construct a beam of an elevation of 72 and soften the
slope to 11. By formation of pre-level the height of the slope is decreased from the original 58 m to 43 m. The
achieved minimum safety factor is F=1.39.
5. CONCLUSION
Based on the aforementioned research results and laboratory test, safety calculations, as well as data analysis from
the existing geo-technical documentation related to the subject location, the following can be concluded:
Stability check of the north zone of the slope affected by the glide was conducted using the Jumbo method,
along the predisposed glide surface (feedback analysis), on profile 8-8' where even the largest masses were
moving.
Since this zone was affected, the solidity parameters were adopted based on the feedback analysis of stability on the 8-8' profile, and the checking of the proposed manner of rehabilitation on the 6-6', 8-8', 11-11', 1414' and 16-16' profiles.
342

PROCEEDINGS
In profile 8-8' glide surfaces (Kr - 1 to Kr - 4) were defined based on the data received through exploration
wells. Calculations were conducted for different pore pressures and internal friction angles under which the
mass movements occurred, for a cohesion value of C=0.00 kN/m2. For further geo-static calculations the internal friction angle of = 11 was adopted.
The following rehabilitation measures are proposed:
1. Drainage of the pre-level and slope (drainage trenches and drainage carpet)
2. Unburdening of the slope (softening of the tilt angle)
3. Strengthening of the foot of the slope (formation of a support beam pre-level)
The selection of equipment for work within and outside of the landslide zone, was conducted based on the results
of allowed load capacity, from the geo-mechanics laboratory Ri-a.
The characteristic profile 8-8' with displayed iso-lines of the field before, after the slide and the projected state of
the terrain with surfaces to be dug, extruded and built in the ballast in the foot of the northern slope is displayed
on figure 5.
Figure 10. Technological procedure of a support beam formation
6. PLAN OF THE NORTHERN SLOPE

Mining on the open pit mine "irikovac" are meant to prepare the base for foil installation i.e. realization of the
capacity to unload flying and bottom ash, which is set based on the requirements of the investors. It is practically
necessary to complete the terrain preparation in the given deadline - the surface to install the foil in. The construction after the coal exploitation had ceased at the open pit mine irikovac, began by repurposing the function of
the internal depot. Through preparation and planning of the internal depot as well as rehabilitation of the northern
slope after the landslide appeared, the conditions for purposeful use of space are created.
First of all, in the space of the internal depot of the open pit mine irikovac an area was arranged to place the foil
in cassette 2 to the elevation of 66 amsl (above the mean sea level). After which it is planned to proceed with the
arrangement of the remaining part of the internal depot, as well as the space of the northern slope, which is affected by the landslide, because the reserves for unloading of flying ash and bottom ash in this area require that
the conditions for foil installation be created. By reviewing all of the important parameters, a dynamic plan was
defined to prepare the base and create rehabilitation conditions of the northern slope to the elevation of 92 amsl.
Work development on unloading of flying and bottom ash in the internal space of the OPM "irikovac" is projected
to the elevation of 92 amsl. It is necessary to complete the preparations on the base to the elevation of 92 amsl as
intensely as possible, because they are directly linked to the operation of the thermal power plants. Work on arranging an area of the northern slope above the mentioned elevation is in the function of the geo-mechanical landslide stability, but also a condition for creation of a safe base in the final slope.
For verification of the construction parameters of the open pit mine it is necessary to calculate the safety factors
of work and final slopes of the final open pit mine. The base construction parameters of the open pit mineirikovac
are defined based on physical-mechanic characteristics of the work environment. Arrangement of the northern
slope has affected the rationality of the floor formation, which in given circumstances should provide safe work on
terminating the open pit mine, a high capacity of excavation and transport equipment, minimal assistive work and
smaller expenses. The front of mining operations with the schedule and dimensions of the floor is in the function of
geo-mechanical stability, for the needs of the future purpose of the dug depot of the open pit mine irikovac.
Vertical division of the open pit mine into floors was done based on the geo-mechanical parameters of the work
environment, i.e. the geo-mechanical stability of the landslide rehabilitation, purpose of the area of the internal
depot, technically-technological capabilities of the chosen base equipment, projected capacities of the equipment
and the period in which the construction will be completed. Through geometrical space analysis in the limited open
pit mineirikovac the position of the floor plains was set. The floor plains were determined using a reference sur-
343

PROCEEDINGS
face, which is constructed on the basis of mining - geological conditions, which dominate the northern slope and
the technical - technological capabilities of the projected equipment, which was previously used by the investor.
The angles of the final slopes of the open pit mine were determined based on the geo-mechanical analysis of stability of the final slopes with the proper coefficients of safety according to the terrain objects. The conditions inside
the zone and outside the zone affected by the landslide were independently analyzed. In the area affected by the
landslide for the height of the work floor of 10 m and angle of 22, the width of the berms in the final slope is
changeable and is around 55 m, so that the angle of the final slope would be in geo-mechanical value of 11. In areas not affected by the landslide, floor heights are 10 m, and angles 30, while the minimal value of a berms 20 m
and it is also conditioned by the angle of the final slope of 14. The projected vertical division into floors at altitudes of 72, 92, 100, 110, 120, 130 and 140 amsl requires formation of the floors depending on their purpose (figure
10). The formation of the floor 72 in the base of the northern slope is predicted to be done by extrusion of the
masses from higher floors to the lower, and after that their installation into the projected ballast.
The exploitation system encompasses several
types of operation, which consist out of individual technological processes which are: excavating and extrusion of waste rock into the
projected support beam with dragline dredges,
flattening, planning of the material with bulldozers and its compression with a vibration
roller. Operations on excavating the waste
rock will be done selectively, in accordance
with the projected development dynamics of
work development at the excavation of waste.
During excavation and extrusion of the waste
rock from the northern slope a formation of
plateaus was planned from which the extruded
masses would be lowered. During formation of
the floor plains it is necessary to mention that
in the function of draining the projected drop
of the same from east to west is 1.
The front of the operations on formation of
floor plains, is projected from east to west,
with a drop of the same 3% towards south.
Figure 11. Technological procedure of a support beam formation
This would complete the technical reclamation of the northern slope as well. On floors prepared like this, objects
with drainage function will be built.
344

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 7. Technological procedure of the northern slope arrangement
7. CONCLUSION
Surfaces of the disrupted northern slope of the open pit mine are around 30 ha. Mass movement occurred along
multiple glide surfaces. Based on the research so far, it can be predicted that the landslide will still be active with
predominantly slow movements. In favor of this prediction is the experience so far at the northern slope area. From
these reasons it is necessary to continue observing and because of the magnitude of the occurrence conduct constant observations and tracking during operations.
Rehabilitation of the disrupted northern slope of the open pit mine is in functional correlation simultaneously with
the permanent mining termination and construction of the flying and bottom ash depot at the location of the internal deposit of "irikovac". The task in question analyzed circumstances describing the area of the open pit mine,
and defined the dynamic description of the activities by multifunctional means. The technological procedure of
arrangement of the subject space is subjugated to the geo-mechanical parameters and the dynamic factor of preparation conditionality of the future depot.
REFERENCES
[1]
Additional mining project of the pipeline of thick hydro-mixture and depositing of flying and bottom ash of TP "Kostolac B" into
the dug space of OPM "irikovac", south variant (in Serbian).
[2]
Additional mining project of permanent operation termination at the open pit mine "irikovac" Kostolac (in Serbian).
[3]
Simplified mining project of landfill rehabilitation ate the excavation front OPM "irikovac" (in Serbian).
345

PROCEEDINGS
DETERMINATION OF SLAKE DURABILITY INDEX

ON SATURATED SPHERICAL SAMPLES
ABSTRACT
Huseyin ANKARA1,
Mehmet AKSOY2
Suheyla YEREL3
Yasar KESER4
Zeynep CICEKCI5
Eskisehir Osmangazi University,

Department of Mining Engineering,
Eskisehir, Turkey, hankara@ogu.edu.tr
2
Eskisehir, Turkey, maksoy@ogu.edu.tr
3
Bilecik University, Department of Civil
Engineering, Bilecik, Turkey,
syerel@gmail.com
4
Turkey, ykeser@ogu.edu.tr
5
Eskisehir, Turkey
In literature, there are several parameters effective on the results of Slake

Durability Index Test which is used to assign quantitative durability values to
weak rocks abrasiveness and degradability. One of these parameters is the
geometrical shapes of the rock chunks used in test. Although it is offered in
the ASTM and ISRM standard that the shapes of rock chunks should be close
to spherical as much as possible, the preparation of the samples having this
geometrical shape is quite hard with the current applied technique of sample preparation.
In this study, to minimize the difficulties encountered in the preparation of
the equivalent sized spherical samples, a new sample preparation method
which is called as Pasha Method is proposed.
In this method, firstly, samples were cut in the form of cube whose dimensions were determined according to the density of the rock to be subjected
to the slake durability index test. Secondly, cubic samples were cut in such a
special way called as Pasha cut that the twelve sides and eight corners of
cubic samples are cut to obtain the geometrical shape (pre-spherical form)
which is closest to spherical form.
Finally, these samples having pre-spherical form are placed into sphere preparation instrument in order to obtain the equal-sized spherical test samples.
In order to apply this new sample preparation method, white tuff samples
were collected at the tuff quarry located at the Eskisehir region in Turkey.
The collected samples were brought to rock mechanics laboratory. In the
laboratory, white tuff samples were prepared. Equal-sized spherical samples
are prepared according to the new method, Pasha Method.
Then, slake durability index test have been applied to saturated spherical
samples. The index values of saturated spherical samples have been compared with the results of another study performed on the same tuff samples.
Consequently, the decrease in the slake durability index values were observed as a result of physical effects of saturation on spherical samples.
Keywords
Slake Durability Index, Spherical Sample, Pasha Method
1. INTRODUCTION
The slake durability test (SDI) was firstly developed by Chandra (1970) and then improved by (Franklin and Chandra,
1972). The slake durability test was suggested as a standard test for rocks by ISRM (1981) and also became an ASTM
standard in 1990. The aim of the slake durability test is to provide an index that is related to resistance of rock
against degradation when subject to two standard cycles of wetting and drying (Franklin and Chandra, 1972; Kolay
and Kayabali, 2006; Sharma and Singh, 2008).
The slake durability index can be considered to be one of the most important properties for shales, clay-bearing
rocks and similar weak rocks. The results of slake durability test are affected by the following factors (Franklin and
Chandra, 1972).
Porosity and permeability of the rock tested,
Nature of the testing fluid,
346

PROCEEDINGS
Resistance of rocks against swelling and disintegration,

The shape of sample pieces,
Properties of testing equipment,
Conditions of sample storing,
The number of wetting-drying cycles.
Tests omitting any of the factors listed above would lead to erroneous results (Kolay and Kayabali, 2006). One of
these parameters is the geometrical shapes of the rock samples used in test. Although it is offered in the ASTM
(1990) and ISRM (1980) standard that the shapes of rock samples should be close to spherical as much as possible,
each having a mass between 40 to 60 grams. Nevertheless, preparation of nearly spherical samples could be time
consuming or sometimes be very difficult (Kolay and Kayabali, 2006). For this reason, some researchers had to use
samples that could not be rounded in their slake durability index tests. Also, some studies were performed to
investigate the effects of sample shape and irregularities on the slake durability index test. Different shapes
displayed different mechanisms in the slaking processes. Irregular shapes tended to have a lower Id2 compared to
samples that had rounded shapes (Agustawijaya, 2003). It was determined that differences from 3% to 25 % were
observed in Id2 values of rounded and angular samples taken from massive rocks, not showing any lamination or
bedding planes (Kolay et. al., 2004).
In two studies performed by Kolay and Kayabali (2004; 2006), different types of rocks were broken into chunks and
were intentionally shaped as angular, subangular, and rounded and tested for slake durability. Before testing the
aggregate pieces of each rock type, their surface roughness was determined by using the fractal dimension The
variation between the lower and upper extremes of the slake durability indices ranges from 3 to 26% for the losses
between the first and fourth wetting/drying cycles of different group of aggregate shapes (Kolay and Kayabali,
2006).
The aim of this study is to perform slake durability index test on the saturated spherical tuff samples prepared
according to the pasha method proposed by Ankara et al (Ankara et. al., 2011; 2012; 2013a; Ankara et. al., 2013b) in
order to determine whether full saturation of samples will make any difference on the results of Slake Durability
Index test or not.
2. MATERIALS AND METHODS

Rock Samples
Tuff and ignimbirites type rocks were used to build historical monuments, and are being used as decorative
material, nowadays in Turkey because of their softness and easy processability. For example, some important
natural and historical monuments of Turkey such as Phrygian valley, Phrygian monument and chimneys of
Cappadocia were formed of these type rocks. The tuffs on other regions are produced as decorative material.
One of the tuff production places is near to Derbent village of Eskisehir province. Tuff extracted in this place is
called as Derbent white tuff. The mineralogical structure of white tuff consists of Quartz, K-Feldspar, biotite and
phenomenon crystals of opaque minerals. Besides, various metamorphic rock and white pumice pieces can be
observed. Phenomenon crystals, rock pieces and white pumice are buried in the structure of slightly decayed tuff.
In tuffs, the existence of volcanic glass pieces is very common(Sozmen, 2000; Dalolu, 2008). The samples used in
this study were collected from Derbent white tuff quarry.
Spherical Specimen Preparation Method
The preparation of equal-sized spherical test samples consists of three stages. First stage is to cut cubes whose size
is accord with final spherical sample diameter from collected rock samples. At this stage, the length of cube edge is
calculated as follows; the final sample weight is required to be 50 g by standards. Therefore, the diameter of the
spherical sample is calculated from volume and dry density of the rock. After the determination of diameter, the
edge length of the cube is set to be the diameter plus 2 mm.
Second stage is to cut cubes to form a pre-spherical shape which is called as Pasha Cut. Pasha cut is performed in
two steps. In the first step, the edges of cube are cut. The newly formed corners of the samples after first step are
cut in the second step. The shape of the sample after this step can be seen in Figure 1 as top and front view.
347

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. The top and front view of the sample after edge and corner
cut
The final stage is to obtain equal sized spherical samples

from pre-spherical shaped samples by means of an
instrument modified for this purpose. After pasha cut
step, samples are placed into sphere preparation
machine (Covington brand). Special cutter cups having a
diameter of 35 mm were designed and manufactured.
Abrasive type used in these cups is diamond. This whole
sample preparation process is called as Pasha Method,
and the details and calculations of this method can be
found in the studies of Ankara et al (Ankara et. al., 2011;
2012; 2013a; Ankara et. al., 2013b).
Slake Durability Test
In the present investigation, the test was conducted on the tuff samples in accordance with ISRM standard by using
a Standard slake durability test apparatus. However, test procedure was slightly modified. This modification can be
explained as follows; samples were placed in the drums and dried in the oven for 6 hours. Then, samples were
cooled down to room temperature in desiccator. The weight of samples and drum were measured. After measuring,
samples with drum were submersed in the container filled with distilled water and kept under vacuum pressure less
2
than 800 N/m for one hour to saturate the samples. This procedure was repeated between each cycle. Two
different equal sized spherical sample sets were prepared according to pasha method. The weight of specimen for
the test is about 50 g each. The sample sets are shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2. The prepared sample sets
3. EXPERIMENTAL STUDY
The slake durability tests were performed on these sample sets according to ISRM test procedure and modification
explained above. Tests were repeated for forth cycle. The condition of samples at the end of forth cycle is shown in
Figure 3. The test results were summarized in Table 1.
348

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 3. The condition of samples at the end of forth cycle

Table 1. Slake Durability Index Test results
Sample Set No
Id1
%
Id2
%
Id3
%
Id4
%
Set 1
94,93
91,68
88,89
85,46
Set 2
95,39
91,77
88,68
84,90
These results were compared to the results of the study of Ankara et al (2012) in which spherical derbent tuff
samples were subjected to slake durability index test (Figure 4).
Figure 4. The comparison of SDI test results
As it can be seen this figure, the results of the saturated samples were lower than the non-saturated samples.
4. CONCLUSIONS
In this study, slake durability tests were carried out on the equal sized spherical samples taken from Eskisehir
Derbent white tuff quarry. During the tests, a slight modification was done to the standard test procedure, and this
modification was the saturation of samples. The reason for this modification is to let samples be saturated in order
to see the effect of water on the samples. Because it is thought that the 10 minutes test period is not enough to
determine the effect of water on the slaking behavior of the samples.
According to the test results, the index values of saturated samples were lower than the non-saturated samples. It
can be thought that Slake durability Index values of saturated samples can be very close to the real conditions.
Finally, it should be also stated that The SDI values of saturated samples were very close to the results of rounded
samples prepared according to the ISRM standard.
349

PROCEEDINGS
REFERENCES
[1]
Chandra, R., Slake durability test for rocks. Unpublished M.S. thesis, Department of Mining, Imperial Collage, England, 1970.
[2]
Franklin, J.A. and Chandra, R., The Slake Durability Test, International Journal of Rock Mechanics and Mining Sciences, 9 (1972) 325341.
[3]
ISRM Suggested Methods: Rock Cracterization, Testing and Monitoring. E. T. Brown (ed.), Permagon Press, London, 1981.
[4]
ASTM Standard test method for slake slake durability of shales and similar weak rocks (D4644). Annual book of ASTM standards, vol 4.
08. ASTM, Philadelphia, 1990, pp. 863865.
[5]
Kolay, E. and Kayabali, K., Use of the fractal dimension method for determining the angularity and surface roughness of aggregates,
Yerbilimleri, 26(2) (2004) 49-61.
[6]
Sharma P. K. and Singh, T. N., A correlation between P-wave velocity, impact strength index, slake durability index and uniaxial compressive strength Bull Eng Geol Environ, 67 (2008) 1722.
[7]
Kolay, E. and Kayabali, K., Investigation of the effect of aggregate shape and surface roughness on the slake durability index using the
fractal dimension approach, Engineering Geology, 86 (2006) 271284.
[8]
Agustawijaya, D. S., Modelled mechanism in the slake-durability test for soft rocks, Dimensi Teknik Sipil, 5(2) (2003) 87 92.
[9]
Kolay, E., Kayabal, K. and Beyaz, T., The effect of sample shape on the slake durability of some argillaceous rocks, ROCKMEC2004VIIth Regional Rock Mechanics Symposium, Sivas, Turkey, 2004.
[10] Ankara, H., Aksoy, M., Yerel, S. and Keser, Y., "A New Sample Preparation Method for Slate Durability Index Test", 4th Balkan Mining
Congress, Ljubljana-Slovenia, 2011, pp. 571-576.
[11] Ankara, H., Aksoy, M., Yerel, S. and Keser, Y.,"The Determination of Slake Durability Index Test with Spherical Samples", Global Stone
Congress, Borba-Portugal, 2012, pp. 1-7.
[12] Ankara, H., Aksoy, M., Yerel, S. and Keser, Y.,"The Determination of Slake Durability Index Test with Spherical Samples ", Key
Engineering Materials Vol. 548, 2013a, pp 247-252
[13] Ankara, H., Aksoy, M. and Yerel, S. " Preparing Equivalent Sized Spherical Shaped Samples From Rocks For Slake Durability Test",
Scientific Research Project Commission of Eskiehir Osmangazi University, project number 201015013, 2013b, p. 78.
[14] Sozmen, B., Investigation of detoration mechanism of Yazilikaya Tuffs in Midas Monument, MSc. Thesis, METU, Ankara, Turkey, 2000.
[15] Daloglu, G., Assessment of Eskisehir-Derbent tuffs as a natural building stone material, MSc Thesis, Eskisehir Osmangazi University,
Turkey, 2008.
350

PROCEEDINGS
RESULTS OF RESEARCH OF STRESS STRAIN STATE

WITHIN DEEP OPEN PITS UNDER TECTONIC STRESSES
ABSTRACT
1
KOZYREV A. A.
SEMENOVA I.E.2
RYBIN V.V.3
AVETISYAN I.M.4
Mining Institute of the Kola Science

Centre of the Russian Academy of
Sciences, 24 Fersman st., Apatity,
Murmansk region, Russia
1
kozar@goi.kolasc.net.ru 2 innas@goi.kolasc.net.ru 3 rybin@goi.kolasc.net.ru 4 ivanavetisyan@yandex.ru
The paper presents the results of numerical modelling of stress strain state
in the rock mass within designed deep open pits in the Zhelezny mine owned
by Kovdorsky GOK JSC and the Tsentralny mine owned by Apatit JSC on
the basis of in situ stress measurements. Hazardous areas in the wall rock
mass have been identified. The conditions of maintenance of deep pit walls
stability with vertical benches have been determined.
For modelling calculations there was applied a method of successive approximations supposing formation of nested numerical models with different
detail level. They range from small-scaled which study a total view of a deposits stress strain state, to large-scaled which study stress strain state within separate elements of mining technology. The calculations were carried
out by the finite element method with the software SigmaGT designed by
the Mining Institute KSC RAS.
The research results were applied for development of the regulations for the
mining operations at the apatite-nepheline Plateau Rasvumchorr deposit
(the Tsentralny mine) and the apatite-magnetite-baddeleyite Kovdor deposit
(the Zhelezny mine).
Keywords
Mathematic Modelling, Open Pit Mining,
Pit Walls Stability, Rock Mechanics, Stress State
1. INTRODUCTION
For the some last decades the world mining industry demonstrates a stable tendency to increase the depth of mining operations at mineral deposits. One of ways to mine deeply occurring reserves is to deepen the existing open
pits by increasing dip of angles of walls, but it requires geomechanical substantiation. It means that it is necessary
to determine regularities of redistribution of stresses in the vicinity of open pit excavations with design parameters. Understanding high relevance of correct determination of dip of angles of walls in the ultimate position, Mining Institute KSC RAS carries out investigations in this area taking into account an actual stress-strain state of host
rock mass in the vicinity of the open pit of the Zhelezny mine, Kovdorsky GOK JSC and the open pit of the Tsentralny mine, Apatit JSC [1]. Stress strain state of the host rock mass depends on complex of geological and mining-and-technical factors, which joint account can be possible if modelling stress strain state by numerical methods.
2. METHODS
Numerical models for calculation of rock mass stress strain state in the vicinity of those open pits on several scale
levels have been designed on the basis of analysis of mining-and-geological and geomechanical information. The
calculations were made by the finite element method in the volume setting with use of software SigmaGT, designed by Mining Institute KSC RAS.
351

PROCEEDINGS
Modelling calculations applied the method of successive approximation which supposes creation of nested numerical models with different detail level. They range from small-scaled which study a total view of a deposits stress
strain state, to large-scaled which study stress strain state within separate elements of mining technology.
To substantiate a physical model of the environment there was carried out an analysis of the data on strength and
other characteristics of ores and rocks which compose rock masses in the Khibiny apatite deposits and the Kovdor
apatite-magnetite-baddeleyite deposit. Analysis of absolute values and their changing under a loading for the major part of the rocks allows us to make conclusion about their elastic deformation right up to destruction. That is
why an elastic model was accepted as an environment model. Finite conditions were set on the basis of data of insitu measurements of stresses by the stress-relief method. The values of stresses measured in the open pits of the
Zhelezny and Tsentralny mines indicate correspondence of stress strain state of the rock masses to a gravitytectonic type.
3. RESULTS
Results of calculations of the rock mass stress strain state in the vicinity of the open pit at the Zhelezny mine
Lets consider the results of numerical modelling of the rock mass stress strain state in the vicinity of the open pit
at the Zhelezny mine. The object has the following particularities:
High design depth of an open pit excavation (1000m);
Elongated shape of an open pit along one of its axes;
Tectonic stresses in the rock mass;
Presence of weakness zones and fault structures of different orders.
The model designed calculated several variants of task of distribution of the parameters of stress strain state at the
rock mass. They can be divided into two groups by limit conditions: gravity stress state (1 = , 2 = 3 = ,
where , and - volume weight, depth and ration of lateral stress); and gravity-tectonic stress state. The variants
which take into account tectonic forces were calculated for conditions of acting of forces' maximum component
(F) both along the short and long axes of an open pit excavation [2].
At F acting along the short axis of the open pit the m values exceed 80 MPa along all the short wall of the designed open pit and reach 120-150 MPa into its lower part (fig. 1). Such high values of the compressing stresses can
cause destruction of a wall in the dynamic form. When F acts along the long axis of the open pit, m values are
20-45 MPa being considerably lower and reach 60 MPa on connection with the open pit bottom (fig.2).
Figure 1. Distribution of max vectors for an open pit with 1000m depth at F
acting along the short axis: a) section in the short wall; b) section in the long wall
352

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Distribution of max vectors for an open pit with 1000m depth at F
acting along the long axis: a) section in the short wall; b) section in the long wall
Figure 3. Distribution of min vectors for an open pit with 1000m depth at F
acting along the short axis: a) section in the short wall; b) section in the long wall
353

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4. Distribution of min vectors for an open pit with 1000m depth at F
acting along the long axis: a) section in the short wall; b) section in the long wall
Tension stresses min occur in the long walls of the open pit during F acting along the short and long axes of the
open pit (fig. 3 and 4). The values of the tension stresses are low and don't reach 1 MPa. Stresses vectors are directed adversely as possible fractures of rupture can cut down a pit wall. It should be noted that when F acts along
the long axis of the open pit the high compressing stresses m of 45 MPa act in the tensions zone and they prevent opening of fractures of rupture. But when F acts along the short axis of the open pit the zone of tensions
coincides with zone of unloading of compressing stresses, valuesm being 17-25 MPa. It can be concluded that
possibility of fractures of rupture to open with following wall failure is higher than when F acts along the short axis
of an open pit.
It should be noted that the results of investigations on deviations of long exploratory boreholes at the Kovdor deposit indicate a vector of tectonic forces along the long axis, which is more favourable in terms of stability of open
pit walls.
Two large-scale local models have been created on the basis of one small-scale model. They represent a part of a
wall of a designed open pit with vertical benches. The first model is located in the short wall of the open pit, and
the second one is in the long wall. Boundary limits were set in terms of displacements from the small-scale model. It
has been established that tension stresses in the walls benches dont exceed 1.5 MPa, which is several times lower
of ultimate tensile strength of rocks. The benches are under influence of moderate compressing stressesm
(3550 MPa), therefore creation of fractures and the following opening is of low probability (fig. 5).
Figure 5. Distribution of min in a vertical bench: a) along a short wall;

b) along a long wall (direction of potential fractures of rupture is marked by white colour)
354

PROCEEDINGS
Results of calculation of the rock mass stress strain state in the vicinity of the Tsentralny mine
Lets consider results of numerical modelling of the rock mass stress strain state in the vicinity of an open pit, the
Tsentralny mine. The calculations were carried out for a designed open pit with an angle of the northern wall of 45
and with steeping of the northern wall to 60. Distribution of prognostic magnitudes of stresses with geometry of
open pit excavation at the end of mining is shown in the figure 6. An angle of slope was 45.
Figure 6. Distribution of stresses along the section 3b at 45 angle of slope: a) max; b) min
Below +400m mark the most part of the wall is in a zone with magnitudesm 35 MPa. Under the open pit bottom
a zone of concentrations of m with magnitudes of 6080 MPa is formed. The analysis of wall rock mass state has
shown that the higher level of m is typical for the rock mass at the northern part of the open pit. At its lower part
(below +300m) in some parts of the wall compressing stresses reach to 70 MPa. Dynamic rock pressure can be registered under such compression level. In the design zones ofm concentrations are related to the most overhung
parts of the wall.
Analysis of the minimum component of the principal stressesmin shows that tension stresses act at the rock mass
of the upper benches and at the local parts of the southern wall. Magnitudes of the tension stresses are close to 0.
Ultimate tensile strength of host rocks is =10 MPa. If a rock mass is considerable destructed, the value of is
about 5 MPa. Therefore we can conclude that open pit walls are in general stable, but occurrences of rock pressure
at the lower benches of the northern wall are possible as well as formation of fractures of rupture at the parts of
the upper benches in the case of multiple decrease of rocks tensile strength under strong natural and mininginduced fracturing.
The modelling of stress strain state with maximum steeping of the northern wall to 60 is shown in the figure 7.
355

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 7. Distribution of stresses along the section 3b at 60 angle of slope: a) max; b) min
In general, distribution of the principal stresses is similar to stress strain state for the previous variant. Its necessary
to note that the level ofm is higher at 5% at the bottom of the pit excavation; at that the zone of m with the
magnitudes more than 60 MPa has a smaller area in the design. Such feature is connected with the fact that the
northern wall is less overhung in this case. Significant differences in distribution of the minimum component and
areas of tension are not observed.
Geomechanical analysis of the rock mass state under different variants of open pit excavation allows us to state
that the level of stresses m in the vicinity of the designed open pit Tsentralny ranges from 15 to 75 MPa, and increases from the day surface to the pit bottom.
The zones of concentrations of compressing stresses are related to the bottom of the pit and the lower part of the
northern pit wall part. In the plan they refer to the wall parts the most jutting out into the rock mass. The minimum
component ranges from -1 to 15 MPa; the zones of tension stresses refer to near-surface areas of mountainous relief and upper benches of a pit wall. Location of the concentration zones m is firstly connected with particularities of the surface relief, in particular, with valleys in the north-eastern and south-eastern parts of the pit wall. So,
the rock mass hosting the open pit excavation is influenced by high tectonic stresses directed along the long axis of
the open pit. Therefore, the more elongated by strike the shape of the open pit is, the more stable its wall. A field
obtained of stresses and displacements was used as boundary conditions for the second stage of the modelling
(large-scale modelling).
The main tasks for the second modelling stage:
To determine influence on stability of the southern wall at the weakness zone (main fault);
To specify parameters of stress strain state at the northern wall.
356

PROCEEDINGS
Simulation of the open pit excavation with the southern wall located in the weakness zone shows that if the level of
m doesnt exceed 20 MPa the minimum component can be in the area of tensile stresses. The latter is clearly
determined at constructing the section parallel to the southern wall. The values of the tensions min reach to -5
MPa, which can cause formation of fractures of rupture and destruction of pit wall parts, especially taking into account a low level of tensile strength of weakened and spreustein-containing rocks. If we consider the similar section
at the variant of the weakness zone mined we will find out that the areas of tensile stresses considerably decrease
and absolute values of tensions dont exceed 0.5 MPa. In this case a reflected layer of rocks goes along the rock
mass with ultimate tensile strength about 10 MPa and the level of compaction of the rock mass wall is 30 50 MPa.
Taking these facts into account we can make a conclusion about pit wall stability.
The most hazardous state of the walls benches is predicted, as expected, in the situation when the weakened zone
cuts its benches (fig.8). In this case the area of tensile stresses covers practically the whole cut part of the wall (below +400m), the weakened zone itself and a part of the host rock mass.
Figure 8. Distribution of stresses in the vicinity of the southern wall along the section 7b: a) max; b) min
In the cut part of the wall the level of compressing stresses decreases to 20-25 MPa, and conditions are created for
fractures of rupture to be formed and open and for destruction of an extended part of the cut wall. Besides, it
should be taken into account that watering of rocks during snowmelting and raining is an additional factor impacting negatively on stability of a wall destroyed by fractures.
So, a geomechanical state of the walls southern part is characterised by lower magnitudes of stresses if compare
to the northern part. This is connected with a large height of the wall and presence of the main fault in the rock
mass. The most dangerous state of the wall parts is predicted in the case when it is cut by a weakened zone. In this
357

PROCEEDINGS
situation the area of tension stresses covers actually all the cut sector of the wall, and conditions are created for
fractures of rupture to be formed and open with the following loss of stability. At that, to the date we dont have
data which could let us consider cohesion along the main fault different from zero. The main requirements to keep
stability at the southern part of the pit wall are the first, to dispose it out of the zone of influence of the main fault
so that a probable location of the pit wall wouldnt intersect the main fault, and the second, absence of large structural destructions with angles of dip more than 25 at the rock mass. On the basis of information obtained it is reasonable to form the southern part of the pit wall from the side of the footwall of the ore body in the rock mass out
of the zone of influence of the main fault.
To specify parameters of stress strain state of the northern wall there were calculated variants with different angles of slope. Lets consider in detail the variants where angles are 45 and 60. Position of zones of concentrationm is connected first of all with particularities of day surface relief. They are the most expressed under the
valleys at the north-eastern and south-eastern parts of the wall; at that, under a valley with a large elevation difference (north-west) is observed a larger gradient of compressing stresses.
The zone of concentration of tension stresses with =45 covers a sector of the northern wall, with a shape concave into the pit space. After formation of a design excavation practically the all northern wall is located at the
area m with magnitudes more than 60 MPa. At this situation the minimum component is close to zero in the immediate vicinity of the wall, but it is much less than the ultimate tensile strength of rocks. So, the north-western
part of the pit wall can be place of occurrence of rock pressure.
Modelling of analogous variant but with the northern wall steeping has shown the following results. In this situation
the shape of the open pit is more elongated by strike, which is a positive factor, if take into account existing direction of tectonic stresses. As a result the area of the zone of concentration m decreases at the north-western part
of the wall, so do absolute magnitudes of tensile min. The level of the maximum component of compressing stresses falls at 15-20%. Therefore the variant with the steeper northern wall is more preferable according to the results
of modelling of the rock mass stress strain state. And it can be recommended for specifying geological particularities of the rock mass at the northern wall.
4. DISCUSSION
So, analysis of the results of calculations for stress strain state at the part of the deep open pit wall, the Zhelezny
mine, allowed making conclusion that the vertical benches of the open pit will be in general stable. Formation of
fractures of spalling is possible in the edge part of the bench at the short wall under multiple decreases of strength
characteristics of rock mass due to blasting and weathering impact. In the central part of the benches at the long
wall mining-caused fractures can occur, but their opening is unlikely due to compressing stresses preventing it.
Analysis of the results of calculations for stress strain state in the vicinity of the Tsentralny mine has shown that the
geomechanical state of the walls northern part is characterised by action of high compressing presses (35-50 MPa)
in the intact rock mass. When the pit wall is formed with 45 slope, magnitudes of acting stresses increase to 75
MPa. If the pit wall is constructed with 60 slope, the level of compressing stresses doesnt exceed 60 MPa, which is
connected with diminution of dimensions of an open pit excavation along the short axis. Taking into account that
defined hazardous ranges of angles of slope of fracture systems on the basis of the data obtained are not revealed
in the northern part of the pit wall, its formation can be recommended to be constructed at 60. Detailed study of
the rock mass where construction of a pit wall is supposed is required.
REFERENCES
[1]
Conception of construction of non-working walls for deep open pits at the Kola Zapolyarye / N.N.Melnikov, A.A.Kozyrev,
S.P.Reshetnyak, E.V.Kasparian, V.V.Rybin, V.S.Svinin, A.N.Ryzhkov // Gorny Journal, 2004, 9, pp. 45-50.
[2]
A.A.Kozyrev, I.E.Semenova, V.V.Rybin, I.M.Avetisyan. Study of stress strain state of rock mass on the basis of data from in-situ
measurements in the vicinity of a large open pit excavation. GIAB, 2011, 11. pp. 78-89.
358

PROCEEDINGS
FIELD-SCALE INVESTIGATIONS OF THE STRESS FIELD

AND THE EXCAVATION DAMAGED ZONE EXTENT,
THE KOLA PENINSULA, RUSSIA
ABSTRACT
A. A. KOZYREV1
V. V. RYBIN2
K. N. KONSTANTINOV3
Mining Institute of the Kola Science

Center of the Russian Academy of
Sciences (MI KSC RAS), Apatity, Russia,
kozar@goi.kolasc.net.ru
2
MI KSC RAS, Apatity, Russia,
rybin@goi.kolasc.net.ru
3
MI KSC RAS, Apatity, Russia,
const@goi.kolasc.net.ru
The open pit slope stability and the stability of separate benches depend on
the state of stress, properties and structural disturbance of the intact rock
mass, as well as on a secondary anthropogenic rock disturbance due to the
effective static and dynamic stress fields in open-pit mining and ore breaking. It is these parameters that are first taken into account in justification of
critical angles of benches and pit slopes in rock masses. The state of stress of
a rock mass is determined by a doorstopper stress-relief technique in the
Zhelezny open-pit benches, the Kovdorsky iron-ore deposit, as well as in the
Tsentralny and Njorkpakhksky apatite-nepheline deposits, the Khibiny massif,
outside the disturbed zone.
Within the open-pit benches, the excavation damaged zone (EDZ) extent was
determined by ultrasonic logging, by coring, and also by the televiewer survey data. It has been established that, depending on the blasting techniques,
rock properties and fracturing, the EDZ extent ranges from 0 m to 12 m deep
into the surrounding rock mass. Outside the EDZ, determination of stress
state of rock masses hosting the open pits said was carried out, and effective
horizontal stresses exceeding 3 to10 times gravitational stresses resulting
from the dead weight of rocks () have been determined.
Lateral pressure, parallel to pit walls, increases cohesion between blocks in a
block medium, which should be taken into consideration in calculations
made in substantiating the angle of open pit slopes. One of the necessary
measures to increase the pit walls stability is to decrease the depth of the
EDZ extent to 1 m in benches by a smooth blasting technique applied in
formation of the final pit outline.
Keywords
Rock Mechanics, Open Pit Wall, Stress-Strain State,
Geophysical Methods, Mining Safety
1. INTRODUCTION
To increase the open-pit wall slope angle is one of the most radical ways of minimization of the expenditures on the
development of mineral deposits by surface mining. Though the costs in this case are inevitable and significant, pit
wall steeping should not be taken as a rising-in-cost and complicating-the-production factor. These costs are actually the investments into the development of a mining operation. Steeping the general slope angle to its ultimate
may result even for a medium-sized open pit in a rather significant economic benefit due to the pit deepening and
to reduction of the stripping operations amount.
Taking no account of the particular properties and the state of rocks in rock masses studied, and of the mining
method applied, the most general approach to assess the stability of excavated rocks is to focus on the conditions
under which an induced stress field is formed in the contour area of a rock mass, and several rock zones are formed
whose properties and state differ from the initial ones and from the state of rocks located beyond the miningeffect zone. The excavation damaged zone is characterized by various parameters, in particular, by its extent from
the contour into the rock mass, and it is this parameter that characterizes the degree of stability of rocks in the
elements of a pit wall.
359

PROCEEDINGS
Taking into account the great significance of the correct determination of the pit wall slope angles in the ultimate
position, Mining Institute, KSC RAS started in the early 1990s the research in this field, with consideration given to
the actual stress-strain state of the host rock mass and the EDZ parameters in the open-pit surrounding rock mass
(Kozyrev et al., 2001, Melnikov et al, 2004). The research were carried out at ore mines (open pits) shown in Fig. 1.
Figure 1. Ore mines (open pits) where researches were carried out.
2. METHODOLOGY
Measurements of the stress-strain state of a rock mass by stress-relief method
Figure 2 shows the stress distribution obtained by a stress-relief (door-stopper) method in the open pit of the
Tsentralny mine, Apatit JSC from one of the stress-strain state measuring stations located in one of the measuring
holes.
It should be noted that the stress-strain state of a rock mass has been studied by a stress-relief method by the authors from the open-pit benches for the first time.
b)
Figure 2. The measuring station designed to determine stresses by a stress-relief (door-stopper) method (a); stress distribution along the length
of one of the exploratory holes: the lower, middle and upper plots are, respectively, the maximum, minimum and maximum tangential components of the quasi principal stresses distributed along the measuring hole (b).
Data, Results
To the date, a great number of experimental detections of geomechanical situation have been carried out in the
Zhelezny mine, Kovdorsky GOK JSC. Figure 3 shows the results of analysis of stress strain state of the rock mass
and zoning of the open pit in the Zhelezny mine in terms of acting stresses and taking into account geological-andstructural particularities of the rock mass.
The locations of observation stations are marked by red points. The rock mass in the mine is divided on 8 sections
on the basis of preliminary engineering and geological zoning.1
The division has been carried out by Zhirov D.V., Geological Institute KSC RAS and according to data of Murmanskaya geological-and-prospecting expedition.
360

PROCEEDINGS
max=527
min =314
max=1322
m in=49
max=831
m in=-225
m ax =1122
min =0,512
max=624
m in=49
m ax =810
m in=69
max =828
min=47
max =312
min=-13
Figure 3. Zoning of the Zhelezny mine by the magnitudes of acting stresses and with taking into account geological and structural particularities of the rock mass structure. I-VIII engineering and geological sectors; red points locations of observation stations; green colour areas the
most favourable zones in terms of acting stresses; yellow colour areas less favourable zones; pink colour area the least favourable zones
On the basis of analysis of studies carried out of the contour rock mass stress strain state we can make a conclusion
that the most favourable zones in terms of acting stresses are the northern and north-western sectors marked in
green colour. Within these zones the rock mass is moderately compacted and the maximum component of the
principal stresses, max, is subhorizontal. The south and south-eastern sectors of the pit wall are less favourable
zones marked by light-green and yellow colours. Within these zones the stress strain state of the rock mass is characterised by less values of the acting stresses; max value is subvertical in the half of measurements, and minimum
component of the principal stresses min ranges from 0.5 to 9 MPa. Pink colour areas are the least favourable sectors in terms of acting stresses (there are local tension zones) and presence of geological-and-structural heterogeneities of high range which occurrence parameters relative to the ultimate mines contour can be hazardous for
benches stability. The stress-relief method is the most effective when studying the rock mass stress strain state and
is used at other open and underground mines of the Kola Peninsula [5].
The generalized measuring data on the parameters of the state of stress of the rock mass in the open pits of Apatit
JSC, are given in Table 1. The parameters of the state of stress of the rock mass are calculated based only on the
dead weight of rocks (Table 1).
Table 1. The parameters of the stress state of rock masses in large open pits of Apatit JSC.
Station number, absolute level of measuring

stations, time of measuring, place of measuring.
Depth,
Hav, m.
+500, 2002
+470, 2003
The stress-relief (door-stopper) measuring data
Inclination to
the horizon,
max
Calculated parameters of the state

of stress of a rock mass based only
on the dead weight rocks.
Maximum
component
max, MPa
Minimum
component
min, MPa
vertical component () veraver,

MPa.
horizontal component horaver

MPa
200
18
12
-16
230
24
10
-18
6.9
2.3
+470, 2005
230
22
12
106
6.9
2.3
+440, 2004
260
33
20
56
7.8
2.6
+580, 2005
320
17
41
9.6
3.2
+595, 2004
305
26
19
37
9.15
3.05
+610, 2003
290
-3
36
8.7
2.9
The Njorpakhksky open pit of the Vostochny mine
The open pit of the Tsentralny mine
Where Hav., m = depth (average) from the initial relief at which a measuring station is placed.
361

PROCEEDINGS
The calculated and the measured data on stresses in the rock masses have been compared to show that the values
of the effective maximum components of principal stresses at the majority of the measuring stations exceed the
maximum calculated values of stresses induced by the dead weight rocks. Low effective stresses on horizon +610m
in the open pit of the Tsentralny mine are the result of the measuring stations being located in an abnormal zone
(a working zone of the open pit, a fractured rock mass). The same data were obtained at 7 from 25 stations in the
open pit of the Zhelezny mine where low values of max and local tension zones with the max / veraver > 2 ratio being
observed in most cases. This situation allows us to make a conclusion that the stress state of the rock masses in the
deposits studied corresponds to a gravitational-tectonic type. As for the Vostochny and the Tsentralny mines, Apatit JSC, this conclusion is confirmed by the similar regularities of stress distribution revealed earlier in the Khibiny
apatite-nepheline deposits (Kozyrev et al., 1996, Turchaninov et al., 1978).
The effective high horizontal stresses differently influence the stability of open-pit benches and slopes. On the one
hand, there occurs an extra load which is normal to the edges of the blocks which are perpendicular to the open-pit
outline, increasing the frictional force along the contacts of rock blocks, and, as a result of it, the stability of separate benches and open-pit walls, as a whole. On the other hand, considering the forecasted level of effective stresses in the open pits bottom zone, which is comparable with the uniaxial compression strength for rocks, one can
predict dynamic forms of rock pressure, which can be similar to those observed in a number open pits (Kozyrev et
al., 2005, Stacy, 2007, Kozyrev et al., 2007).
The determination of the excavation damaged zone extent
Another significant parameter determining the stability of benches is the excavation damaged zone (EDZ).
A set of methods such as ultrasonic logging, televiewer surveying, hole fracturing monitoring were applied to assess
the EDZ extent. Fracturing (the amount of fractures per meter) and the disturbed zone extent have been determined by the data from the holes and core. Over 50 holes have been drilled and studied during the field-scale investigations.
While analyzing the data on the EDZ extent, it is necessary to take into account the fact that its extent depends on
the hole orientation. The EDZ achieves its maximum depth in the vertical and horizontal holes, and minimum - in
the inclined ones. It is explained by that the vertical and inclined holes, within the better part of their length, are in
the zone of influence of the overlying bench (a horizontal hole) and the underlying bench (a vertical hole) due to
overdrilling of holes whereas the inclined hole reaches rather fast the zone of a relatively undisturbed rock mass. At
the same time, it is necessary to be aware of the EDZ extent determined by horizontal boreholes, because of the
risk of probable rock fall-outs into the open-pit space.
In Njorkpakhksky open pit of the Vostochny open pit, the wall rock mass investigations and the EDZ extent determinations were carried out by televiewer surveying of the horizontal holes. In borehole drilling, a door-stopper
method was applied to measure in situ stress. The depth of damage determined in horizontal holes varied from 3 m
to 4.5 m.
In the Zhelezny open pit, Kovdorsky GOK JSC, all the investigation methods were applied, at that one bore was directed vertically, two boreholes were oriented in an inclined position, and the rest were directed horizontally. Figure 4 shows the analysis results. The most favourable zones in terms of contour rock mass disturbance are marked
by green colour. There an average magnitude of an excavation damaged zone depth in each engineering-andgeological sector doesnt exceed 3m. The less favourable zones are marked by yellow colour; and there an average
depth of the damaged zone in each sector reaches to 4m. The seismic tomography method determined the thickness of the excavation damaged zone in a range of 0-10m (5m at average) [8]. As a whole, the depth of the EDZ extent from the open-pit outline is 0-5m.
362

PROCEEDINGS
600
600
II
400
400
200
200
VIII
-200
-200
-400
-400
III
-600
-600
VII
+ 40
-800
-1000
-1000
-2000
-800
IV
-1200
-1200
-2200
-1200
-1400
-1400
VI
V
-1600
-1600
Figure 4. Zoning of the open pit in terms of disturbance of contour rock mass.
The most favourable zone are green coloured; less favourable zones are yellow coloured.
Intensive ground water exchange was observed between the boreholes studied, water was drained through the
fractures at different depth to the near-field disturbed zone (Fig.5), with no visible exit of water from the holes to
the day surface observed. The holes are drilled in the area of a sudden collapse of a part of the open-pit bench taken place earlier, the reason of which is attributed to the loss of stability along the glide plane due to intensive water inflow through fractures.
The data on fracturing obtained from televiewer surveying and from the core of the control hole (Fig. 6) has been
compared to reveal non-correlation of fractures density within the first analyzed 13 meters [9]. The fracture density
determined from the core turned out to be higher. This fact speaks for that either microcracks compressed in the
rock mass are not visible in the hole walls in televiewer surveying and so are impossible to be detected, or that the
core has been fractured in coring.
a)
b)
Figure 5. The frames of televiewer surveying in the flooded holes in Zhelezny open pit, Kovdorsky GOK JSC a) disturbance of the wall of hole
2715, horizon +166m, depth 5.9m, b)- the radial disturbed zone with ferruginization of hole 2849, horizon +238m, depth 27m.
363

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 6. Comparative analysis of fracturing intensity by data of televiewer

surveying and data of core from a horizontal borehole, +10 level, the Zhelezny mine.
The depth of the EDZ extent and the rock mass structure in the pilot site of the open pit, the Tsentralny open pit,
patit JSC, were determined by two ways in the 35-36m horizontal holes at horizon +595, +610m. The peculiarity of
the pilot site located in the open pit of the Tsentralny open pit is its being located in the working area where there
are no benches formed as a final outline and there are no abnormal zones (Figs. 7, 8). Under these conditions the
depth of the EDZ extent within the pilot site of the open pit of the Tsentralny open pit accounted for 4m to 12m.
The depth of the EDZ extent and the rock mass structure in the pilot site of the open pit, the Tsentralny open pit,
patit JSC, were determined by two ways in the 35-36m horizontal holes at horizon +595, +610m. The peculiarity of
the pilot site located in the open pit of the Tsentralny open pit is its being located in the working area where there
are no benches formed as a final outline and there are no abnormal zones (Figs. 7, 8). Under these conditions the
depth of the EDZ extent within the pilot site of the open pit of the Tsentralny open pit accounted for 4m to 12m.
It is necessary to note that televiewer surveying of three horizontal investigations on a vertical bench, with application of smooth blasting in the Zhelezny mine pit wall has not revealed the EDZ extent (the EDZ extent is 0m). In
addition, at horizon +470m and +440m of the Njorkpakhksky open pit, after the vertical benches had been formed,
the depth of the EDZ accounted for 3m, whereas at horizon +500m of the same open pit, after the bench with an
angle of slope of 75 had been formed, the depth of the EDZ accounted for 3-4.5m. The facts said can mean that
when vertical benches are being formed in transition to blasting operations with application of the special technique to decrease the dynamic effect on the wall rockmass, the EDZ extent would decrease.
Table 2 presents the summary data on the EDZ extent in the wall rockmass in the open pits of Kovdorsky GOK JSC
and Apatit JSC.
a)
b)
Figure 7. The frames of televiewer surveying in the open pit Tsentralny, patit JSC: a) with zeolite dykes, depth of 12.3m, b) with obliquely intersecting fractures, depth of 23.2m.
364

Fractures in m
PROCEEDINGS
10
8
6
4
2
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
Distance along hole, m

Figure 8. Fracture density (fr/m) by the televiewer surveying data along the stress-relief
(door-stopper) borehole, horizon +595m, the open pit of the Tsentralny mine.
In analyzing all the data set on the EDZ extent, it is necessary to note the following. Firstly, the least depth of the
EDZ extent is determined in the Njorpakhksky open pit and in the Zhelezny open pit of the Kovdorsky GOK JSC, the
greatest depth in the open pit of the Tsentralny mine. It can be explained by the fact that in the first two open
pits the depth of the EDZ extent was determined in the benches in their final outline, and in the third open pit - in a
working zone. Secondary, thickness of the EDZ exceeding 3m indicates insufficient stability of the benches. Thirdly,
when vertical benches are being formed with application of the special blasting technique to decrease dynamic
effect on the rock mass, the EDZ extent would decrease to 1m, and less.
3. CONCLUSIONS
Having carried out the investigations mentioned above we can make the following conclusions:
1. The stress-strain state of rocks in the study deposits is characterized as a gravitational-tectonic, which suggests
the effective horizontal stresses in the rock mass which exceed the vertical ones even in the small-scale open pits.
2. Thickness of the disturbed zone exceeding 3m indicates a low quality of drilling-and-blasting operations, which,
in its turn, leads to insufficient stability of benches. However, when vertical benches are being formed with application of the special blasting technique to reduce the dynamic effect on the pit wall rock mass, the EDZ extent would
decreases to 1m, and less.
3. High stresses acting in the rock mass can increase the rock mass stability due to fractures closure. This allows
considering the possibility to increase angle of dip of pit walls.
REFERENCES
[1]
Kozyrev A. A., Reshetnyak, S. P., Maltsev V. A.,Rybin V. V. Analysis of Stability Loss in Open-Pit Slopes and Assessment Principles for
Hard, Tectonically Stressed Rock Masses // Slope stability in Surface Mining / edited by William A. Hustrulid, Michael K. McCarter, Dirk
J.A. Van Zyl. - Littleton, Colorado, USA. -, 442 p. hapter 27 in Section 2, 2001, p.251-256.
[2]
Kozyrev A.A., Lovchikov A.V., Savchenko S.N. On Tectonic Stresses Occurrence in Rock Masses Near the Day Surface // Proceedings of
the International Geomechanics Conference The Role of Geomechanics in the Stability of Development of Mining Industry and Civil
Engineering, 11 - 15 June 2007, Nessebar, Bulgaria, Publ. by Scientific and Technical Union of Mining, Geology and Metallurgy -,
2007, pp. IV-11 - IV-19.
[3]
Kozyrev A.A., Panin V.I., Ivanov V.I., Savchenko S.N., et al. Rock pressure control in tectonically stressed rock masses / A- Apatitys,
1996, 159p. (Part I); 162p. (Part II).
[4]
Turchaninov I.A., Markov G.A., Ivanov V.I. and Kozyrev A.A. Tectonic stresses in the Earths crust and mine workings stability / - L.:
Nauka, 1978. 256p.
[5]
Kozyrev A.A., Maltsev V.A., Kasparian E.V., Rybin V.V., Reshetnyak S.P. Mining Indued Earthquakes in the Open Pits of the Kola Peninsula // Proceeding of 6-th International Symposium on Rockburst and Seismicity in Mines, Perth, Western Australia, 2005, pp. 575577.
[6]
Stacy T.R. (2007) Slope Stability in High Stress and Hard Rock Conditions // Slope Stability 2007. Proceedings of the 2007 International Symposium on Rock Slope Stability in Open Pit Mining and Civil Engineering, 12-14 September 2007, Perth, Australia, Publ. by
Australian Centre of Geomechanics -, pp. 187 - 200.
[7]
Melnikov N. N., Kozyrev A. A., Reshetnyak S. P., Kasparian E.V., Rybin V. V. Methodical approach to value of an optimal open pit slope
angle in hard rocks //Proceeding of the ISRM International Symposium 3rd ARMS, Ohnishi and Aoki (eds); Millpress, Rotterdam, 2004,
pp. 509-513.
[8]
Kasparian E.V., Rybin V.V., Startsev Yu.A. Application of seismic tomography investigations for geomechanical monitoring of an open
pit wall part // Vestnik, KSC RAS. 20113(6). pp. 30-33.
[9]
Konstantinov K.N. Assessment of disturbance and fracturing of near-wall part of a large deep open pit by borehole televiewer surveying method. Proceedings of the first youth tectonic-physical school and workshop, Moscow, IFS RAS 2009. pp. 81-86
365

PROCEEDINGS
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS
IN THE DAM 2 FLOTATION TAILINGS
VELIKI KRIVELJ (SERBIA)
ABSTRACT
1
Sladjana KRSTIC
Vesna LJUBOJEV
Milenko LJUBOJEV
Dusan TASIC
Ivana JOVANOVIC
Mining and Metallurgy Institute,

Bor, Serbia
1
sladjana.krstic@irmbor.co.rs
This paper is the result of the Project no. 33021 Research and Monitoring
the Changes of Stress-Strain State in the Rock Massif in-situ Around the
Underground Rooms with a Development Model With a Special Review of the
Tunnel to the Krivelj Pit River and Pine, funded by the Ministry of Education,
Science and Technological Development of the Republic of Serbia. Geotechnical remediation activities on the flotation tailings Veliki Krivelj during
2011/2012 were carried out on the dam 2.
Three geotechnical boreholes[5] consist entirely of fine-to medium-fine sand
to the maximum depth reached 93.0 m below the surface. Grain size composition cyclone sand (about 75% fine sand and 25% silt) showed a sustained
decrease in grain size with depth. In the upper layers of fine content was
found (dust and clay) of about 25 percent, while in the deeper layers of this
amount increases to 75%.
Geotechnical parameters of the dam 2 (tests were performed on nine samples from dams) are: permeability k = 5x10 6 m/s, angle of internal friction
= 25 0 and cohesion (triaxial) c = 0.5 kPa.
Keywords
Geotechnical Remediation Activities, Grain Size Composition, Dam 2, Geotechnical
Parameters, Permeability, Angle Of Internal Friction, Triaxial Cohesion
1. INTRODUCTION
Degradation of soil by mining activities includes forms of economic, environmental and aesthetic degradation. Degraded areas can retain or change their original appearance.
Byproduct of flotation of copper ore from large open pit Veliki Krivelj is flotation tailings, deposited in a special
place near flotation plnat, in the valley of Krivelj River (Figure 1). Disposal of waste materials (tailings) from the flotation Veliki Krivelj formed a degraded area of flotation tailings dump. New degraded surface (flotation tailings
dump Veliki Krivelj) consists of areas where the flotation tailings (i.e. overflow from hydrocyclon) is landfilled (Field 1
and Field 2) and 3 dams (inner and outer embankments), i.e. dams 1A, 2A and 3A, which are the boundaries of the
degraded area.
Reclamation which is performed in several stages so far has included dams 1A and 2A. Cyclone sand from dam 3A
has unfavorable soil properties due to the lack of clay particles and organic matter, and thus an activation process
of the flora is not possible in this type of soil.
Geotechnical investigation of the flotation tailings dump Veliki Krivelj was conducted at the dam 2 (during the
2011/2012) and will be presented in this paper (Figure 2).
366

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Log The position of the flotation tailings Krivelj large compared to the basin Timoc
Figure 2. Situational map of sampling Dam 2
367

PROCEEDINGS
2. PREVIOUS RESEARCH
Samples of material (dam 1 and dam 3) from the flotation tailings dump Velikiat Krivelj[5] for laboratory testing of
physical properties were taken in undisrupted and disrupted state, labeled and preserved in order to preserve a
mechanical and hydro-physical stability.
Among the other examinations of the physical properties[3] of samples from tailings dump Veliki Krivelj (samples
from pond and embankments of the tailings dump) the sieve test was carried out (Table 1).
Particle size of a material is (among other things) important, because of the dust raising and its transmission by
wind (magnitude of pollution depends on speed and wind direction).
The material was sampled from the surface at a depth of 20 cm[3]. This is a real depth of soil layer that can be expected to rise through eolian erosion of degraded material.
Table 1. Results of the sieve test cyclone sand which formed the dam 1 and dam 3
Granulometric content
Material cyclone sand
on the dam 3
Material cyclone sand on the dam 1

Sieve (mm)
Content
K%
Cumulative content
K%
Content
K%
Cumulative content
K%
0,417
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,295
16,47
16,47
0,00
0,00
0,208
23,17
39,64
12,98
12,98
0,147
23,91
63,55
24,77
37,75
0,134
15,60
79,15
10,43
48,18
0,074
7,83
86,98
10,67
58,85
0,034
6,54
93,52
10,75
69,60
<0,034
6,48
100,00
30,40
100,00
The composite samples used for investigations of particle size distribution of flotation tailings have shown a very
good natural moisture which is very important for good physical-mechanical characteristics of dum. The moisture
content of the composites from the dum is different, but varies in the narrow range around the optimum content
of 10%. As it can be seen from the table 1, maximal grain size in the samples does not exceed 0.5 mm. The largest
amount of filling material is in the range of sand.
3. RESEARCH METHODS OF THE DAM 2

Complete geological research [5] and testing of flotation taillings, in the area of ecological inactive mining field, are
related to remediation activities in the period of 2011/2012 year. This paper contains the geotechnical review only.
Investigation of geotechnical parameters of dam 1 (2007) and dam 2 (2011/12) included the 9 samples from the
each dam, or a total of 18 samples. Samples were taken at lithology changes in the depth, with average distance of
about 3.0 m.
Geotechnical investigation included the sieve test of hydrocyclone underflow which formed the dam, permeability,
the unit weight, internal friction angle, triaxial cohesion and groundwater level.
4. GEOTECHNICAL TEST RESULTS

Groundwater level[8] was about 6 m in boreholes BH1 and BH2 and about 17.0 m in the borehole BH3. Boreholes are
placed in cross section perpendicular to the dam 2.
Piezometers for groundwater[7] level measurement are not raised more than 342.5 m elevation. Piezometer levels
are within the limits of the criteria for the stability of the dam.
Groundwater levels show a hydraulic gradient of about 1:20.
Review of geotechnical parameters of the dam 2 (tests are done on the 9 samples) is given in the Table 2.
368

PROCEEDINGS
Geotechnical investigation which include partical size distribution of the cyclone sand which formed the dam 2 are
performed on 9 samples. Results of geotechnical tests of average sample are given in the Table 3 and in the Figure
3.
Table 2. Review of geotechnical parameters to the dam 2
1.
Grain size distribution
About 75% fine sand (> 0.05 mm) and 25% silt (<0.005 mm)
2.
Permeability
k=5x10 6 m/s
3.
The unit weight
1.6 g/cm3=16 kN/m3
4.
Internal friction angle
9=25 0
5.
Triaxial cohesion
c=0,5 kPa
6.
Groundwater levels
hydraulic gradient=1:20
Table 3. Results of the sieve test cyclone sand which formed the dam 2
Average sample
sand
%
silt
%
clay
%
1.
80.50
18.33
1.10
2.
76.60
21.60
1.80
3.
23.40
69.30
7.40
4.
85.50
13.50
1.10
5.
84.00
14.20
1.80
6.
81.10
17.50
1.40
7.
83.60
15.20
1.20
8.
56.10
38.00
5.90
9.
30.40
61.00
8.60
Figure 3. Ternary diagram contents cyclone sand in the Dam 2 (flotation tailing Veliki Krivelj)
5. CONCLUSION
Flotation tailings dump Veliki Krivelj is one of many sources of pollution, due to the rising dust which pollutes the
air and being delivered to the surrounding soil. Pollution is also possible throw the leaching of the flotation material by the rain, through contaminated water and its discharge into waterways.
One of the types of pollution (Figure 2) from the flotation tailings dump Veliki Krivelj is air pollution (apart from
water pollution and soil). Air pollution is greatly influenced by climatic environment.
The dominant winds in the flotation tailings are towards the northwest and northeast. Northwest wind blowing
perpendicularly to the northeast side of tailings dump. Dam 1 and 2 are reclaimed in terms of prevention of dust
lifting from their surface. Exact amount of daily or annual dust emission, originating from the flotation tailings
dump Veliki Krivelj, have never been measured.
Hydrocyclone underflow (sand) from dam 2 has adverse soil properties [9], due to the lack of clay particles and organic matter. Therefore, activation of soil micro flora and soil processes is disabled. For these reasons, it is necessary to add the layer of fertile soil with thickness at least 10 cm [10]. Entering organic and mineral substances in the
flotation tailings allows the continuous flow of plant assimilation for the development of grass cover and trees, but
that belongs to the biological reclamation.
All sample are comprised of completely fine to medium fine sand to a researched depth of max 93.0 m below the
surface.
Grain size distribution shows a general downward trend in grain size with depth. It was found that the upper layers
contents around 25% of fine particles (silts and clays). Amount of fine particles increases up to 75% in in the deeper
layers.
Piezometers for groundwater level measuring are not surpass the elevation of 342.5 m. Piezometers levels are
within the limits of the criteria for the stability of the dam.
369

PROCEEDINGS
Remediated tailings ponds have been monitored for a long time. Sampling and onsite monitoring is carried out in
accordance with the annual monitoring program approved by the authorities. Monitoring is the permanent process
within the flotation tailings dump Veliki Krivelj.
REFERENCES
[1]
Assessment of Existing Environmental Monitoring Capacities in Bor, UNEP, 2002
[2]
Environmental Monitoring Plan (EMP) for RTB Bor Complex During and After the Privatization ProcessSource: Municipality of
Bor, 2005
[3]
Lekovski R. i saradnici: Glavni rudarski projekat rekultivacije brane 3A i Polja II flotacijskog jalovista V. Krivelj na zivotnu
sredinu, Institut za bakar Bor, 2002 godine
[4]
Integrated treatment of
www.labmet.ntua.gr/intreat
[5]
Krsti S., Ljubojev M., Ljubojev V., Bugarin M., Development of a New Tunnel under the Flotation Tailing Dump Veliki Krivelj,
Proceedings, 10th International Multidisciplinary Scientific Geo-Conference (SGEM 2010), Albiena, Bulgaria, 21-26 June 2010,
pp. 227-23
[6]
Krsti S., Ljubojev M., Ljubojev V., Petrological Characteristics of Rocks on Tunnel for Relocation the Krivelj River, 15th Congress
of Geologists of Serbia with International Participation (Extended Abstract) Belgrade, ISBN 978-86-86053-08-4, pp.40, 2010
[7]
Krsti S., Ljubojev M., Bugarin M., Lithological Types of Rocks along the New Tunnel Route for Relocation of the Krivelj River,
th
Abstracts Book, 4 Croatian Geological Congress with International Participation, ibenik 14- 15 October 2010, pp 167
[8]
Krsti S., Ljubojev M., Ljubojev V., Bugarin M., Massif Rock and Effect of Clivage on the Tunnel Stability of the Krivelj River in
th
Bor, Proceedings, 9 International Multidisciplinary Scientific Geo-Conference (SGEM2009), , Albiena Bulgaria, 14-19 June 2009,
pp 65-71
[9]
Miodrag Miljkovic, Zoran Stojkovic: Monografija Uticaj povrsinske eksploatacije ruda metala na ekoloske faktore zivotne
okoline, Bor,1998
industrial
waters
towards
prevention
[10]
Spalevic, B. (1997): Konzervacija zemljita i voda
[11]
Roger J.A., YouthP.A.: Mineral Production in Europe, 2010, pp 82-82.
[12]
Smith W., Malone P.K., Barkley C.: Development of Mining, Mine Invest, 2010
of
regional
water
resources
contamination,
370

PROCEEDINGS
METHODOLOGY FOR GEOMECHANICAL LOGISTICS

OF DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF A TRANSPORT TUNNEL
AT ELATZITE COOPER MINE, BULGARIA
ABSTRACT
Vladimir VUTOV1
Ventsislav IVANOV2
M Eng., President GEOSTROY JSCo,

Sofia, Bulgaria
2
Prof. Dr., University of Mining and
Geology St. Ivan Rilski,
Sofia, Bulgaria
This paper describes the methodology for logistics of the design and construction of a tunnel for ore transportation by belt conveyor from Primary
Crushing Unit 3 to Primary Crushing Unit 2 that are located in the NE part of
the mine.
The rock massif in the project area comprises granodiorities of the same
lithological type differing in terms of rate of secondary alterations and disturbance.
The transport tunnel is 560 m long, is horseshoe shaped and has 10,6 m2 light
cross section. It has a north oriented axis and a gradient of 9 in the SN direction. Sections of the tunnel from 0 to 280 m and from 440 to 560 m cross
a natural rock massif. The middle part of the tunnel crosses a technogenic
embankment of highly compacted rock lumps.
The study started with an evaluation of the rock massif stress state in the
region of the Elatzite ore deposit and in the area of the tunnel using diagnostical methods and in situ measurements.
The mechanical properties of lithologies have been assessed on the basis of
laboratory testing of borehole samples taken from the surface above the
area. The evaluation of geomechanical conditions and behaviour of the hosting massif is based on results obtained through classifications RMR, Q and
GSI method. The results of the above determinations have been used to create a multi-index database for providing a pro-active logistics of the project.
On the basis of the database and of the rock mass classes, the project zone
was divided into five sections and a geomechanical model of the Host Massif
Transport Tunnel system was constructed. Numerical investigations of this
system were carried out to determine the efficient methods of construction
and support of the tunnel.
Finally, practical recommendations were given.
1. INTRODUCTION
The opencast mine for copper ore production of the Elatsite Med JSCo has a capacity of more than 12 million
tones and thus it is one of the largest in Bulgaria.
In addition to copper and molybdenum the ore practically contains significant quantities of gold and silver, selenium, tellurium, germanium and gallium.
The construction of a transportation tunnel has been planned according to the strategy for development of the
mine, in order to provide opportunity for substantial optimizing of the transportation scheme, efficiency of the
company and improve environmental conditions in the area.
According to the concept design the tunnel has been envisaged to connect U 2 and U 3 - the installations for
primary coarse crushing of ore by a belt conveyer. The transport tunnel is 560 m long, it is horseshoe shaped and
has 10,6 m2 light cross section. It has a north-oriented axis (357) and a gradient of 9 in the S - N direction. The
tunnel is positioned at a small depth, but its alignment goes through various geological media. Sections of the
tunnel from the entrance (at PCU 3) to 280 m and from 440 to 560 m cross a natural rock massif. In the middle part
of 130 m the tunnel crosses a technogenic embankment of highly compacted rock lumps.
371

PROCEEDINGS
Location of the tunnel in the layout of the mine is shown in fig. 1 and the geological cross-section of the project
zone in fig. 2.
Figure 1. Location of the transport tunnel
Figure 2. Geological cross-section of design zone and ore transport tunnel
2. METHODOLOGY
The rock massif and the envisaged tunnel form together a complicated nature-technogenic system (HM-TT), subjected to technological impacts (blasting, excavation) caused by external energy. The major characteristic of that
system is its stress-strain-state (SSS). Key factors, defining the SSS and the long-term stability of the HM-TT system
are the structure, properties (mechanical and structural) and stress state of host rock both natural and induced
due to driving of the tunnel. The geomechanical methods are the only ones to provide quantitative evaluation of
the above factors. The multitude of methods for geomechanical logistics of design and construction of a transport
tunnel at the Elatsite Med mine, applied in this study is shown in fig. 3.
372

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 3. Flow chart of the general methodology for the logistics of the project
3. PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF THE METHODOLOGY

Brief geological description of the project zone
The rock massif in the area of the tunnel is composed of intrusive rocks amphibole and amphibole-biotitic granodiorites [1, 3]. The detailed geological survey has indicated that nevertheless of generic similarity, rocks of the
massif may be distinguished according to the rate of secondary alterations and fracturing (fig. 2). Granodiorites,
from the tunnel portal to the technogenic embankment, have medium granular structure, slightly altered, colored
in grey to dark-blue and slightly fractured. A 20 - 30 m thick zone has been formed round the technogenic embankment, made of highly weathered, medium fractured granodiorite, colored in yellow due to the iron hydroxides.
From the technogenic embankment to the tunnel exit at the PCU 2, the rock massif, in depth, consists of two clearly differentiated layers. A layer composed of weathered, secondary altered granodiorites of 15 20 m thickness
occurs near the surface, and unaltered, medium-granular, but highly fractured granodiorites occur beneath.
The zone of the tunnel is fractured by systems of steeply dipping tectonic faults, appearing mainly in the tunnel
section up to the technogenic embankment. Two are the problematic systems those of 85-120 orientation and
those of 150-170 orientation, which are thicker (1 2 m), and represent a zone of tectonic attrition and silt filling.
The rock massif has been fractured by systems of fractures of different appearance, and the most intensive systems
in the area of the tunnel are those of NE and SE orientation.
The rock massif has been considered as slightly watered [2], however rocks are full of moisture due to waters flowing along certain faults and fracture in the project zone, from tunnel entrance portal to the technogenic embankment.
The technogenic embankment consists of granodiorite lumps, porphyry granodiorite, small quantities of hornfels
and slates. Among the rock lumps there are also gravel, sand and products of weathering. The embankment was
formed 15 years ago; it is consolidated, however watered due to the rainfall, flowing into underlying weathered and
fractured granodiorites.
Characteristics of the rock massif
The stages of geotechnical studying of the rock massif in the project zone have been performed as follows:
Existing texts and graphical information has been studied, data about tectonic composition, lithology and
structure of the host rock have been selected and required additional laboratory and in-situ investigations
have been planned;
Locations of additional exploratory core boreholes have been specified and boreholes have been drilled
from the surface along the tunnel alignment for obtaining detailed geological cross sections in the scope of
the tunnel;
Representatives series of samples have been selected for determining the density, strength and deformation
properties of rock types, according to the requirements of ISRM [5];
373

PROCEEDINGS
Characteristics of structural fracturing and mechanical status of the rock massif have been determined
systems of fractures, RQD, geomechanical classifications RMR and Q, and the GSI geological index, introduced by Hoek for determining the stress-strain characteristics of the rock massif.
Results of the above studies have been summarized in table 1.
Classification characteristics
Laboratory testing
Table 1. Mechanical properties of rocks and geomechanical classification of the massif
Lithologic type
Parameter
Unaltered granodiorite
Altered granodiorite
Fractured granodiorite
Bulk density,
[MN/m3]
0,025
0,026
0,026
Specific density,
[MN/m3]
0,026
0,028
0,027
Porosity, [%]
2,9
6,6
3,0
Uni-axial strength,
ucs [MPa]
12
40
49
Tensile strength,
t [MPa]
12
7,4
9,5
Cohesion [MPa]
20
8,6
10
Angle of internal
friction, []
35
33
32
Fracturing
Two systems, favorable orientation
Three systems fractures and one

non-system
Four and more systems

fractures
RMR [4]
68, II
62-60, III-II
64, III
GSI [12]
63
57
59
Q [4]
14,39
category
7,3
category
9,23
category
Results of laboratory tests of the types of granodiorite, characteristics quality of the host rock, obtained by the
systems for classification have been used for determining the strain and post failure state by the method and software of RockLab, based on the general criterion of Hoek-Brown [3].
All the laboratory and in-situ geomechanical characteristics have been used for preparing a multi-dimensional data
base, providing detailed characteristics of the properties rock massif along the alignment of the transport tunnel
[4].
Based on the above geomechanical characteristics, the rock massif, in the scope of the tunnel, has been divided
into five sections [4], which are indicated in fig. 2, as follows:
Section M I natural massif, from the entrance portal of the tunnel to m 280 m. The granodiorites that compose it
are unaltered, of category R5 [3], the most compacted and the lowest porosity. However, in this section almost all
of the faults in the project zone are located. Two systems of fractures also exist. The fractures not filled up with
direct contacts, JRC = 8-10 [ISRM].
Section II from 280m to 300m and M IV from 420m to 440 m of the alignment natural massif of weathered
granodiorites, category R 3/4, RQD = 50-55%, disturbed by three systems of fractures and one non-systematic fracture. The fractures are rough, slightly watered, some of them opened to 1,5 mm, with JRC = 4-6.
Section III technogenic embankment, comprising 130 m of the alignment, made of rock lumps of 0,3 to 0,6 m
size, enlarging with the depth. The angle of natural slope in dry condition is 45, and the angle of internal friction is
40.
Section V natural massif, from the embankment to the exit portal of tunnel, length nearly 120 m, made of fractured granodiorites, category R3. The massif has been fractures by five systems of fractures, RQD 43-50%, not
directly contacting walls and low strength of the walls, JRC = 4-6.
Stress state of the rock massif
The natural stress state of the massif has been studied at two levels the deposit and the project zone. Diagnostic
and experimental methods [6] have been used, as follows:
The Elatsite deposit
374

PROCEEDINGS
The diagnostics of the natural field has been prepared based on the analysis of dependence between characteristics (size, orientation and kinematics) of all the tectonic faults in the deposit and orientation of stress, which had
formed them [7, 8]. The reconstructions have shown existence of tectonic components and the orientation of the
maximum tectonic pressure is sub-meridian, with 300 70 - range of changes during the geological history.
Project zone
Two diagnostic and one experimental method have been applied to that investigation. In the beginning the local
field of stress has been determined as above, i.e. by the tectonics of shearing. The orientation of the maximum tectonic stress is in the range of 280-30.
The second diagnostics has been performed according to data of inclinometric survey on the boreholes. The relative homogeinity in the lithology of project zone allowed the application of a method [9] for diagnostics, based on
the dependence between azimuth deviation of boreholes and direction of maximum tectonic pressure. The results
of the above investigations have been shown in fig.4.
The quantitative evaluation of magnitudes, orientation and ratio of components of the field of stresses has been
performed by the stress relief method. The experiments have been planned and performed at two measuring stations, on the tunnel walls, in the zones of sections and V. Results reveal that the major stresses 1:2:3 have
the ratio of 3:2:1, and the major maximum stress has a horizontal orientation in NS direction and varies in magnitude from ~5 Ma (in section I) to 2,6 in section V.
Figure 4. Orientation of tectonic components

in the zone of transport tunnel
a) Tectonics of shearing)
b) Inclinometry of boreholes
Figure 5. Configuration of resulting field of stresses
Distribution of resulting field of stresses in the project zone is shown in figure 5. It has the shape of an ellipsoid with
axis 1, 2 and 3. Its configuration in the scope of tunnel alignment varies due to variations of the magnitudes of
main tresses and properties of rocks in the specific sections [6].
Analytic investigations
The summarized results of the above investigations of lithology, structure, properties and stress state of the host
massif, combined with the geometry of the tunnel have been used for preparing an adequate geomechanical model
[4], providing opportunities for analytical studies of the HM/TT system. The objective of the study is a parametrical
analysis of the stress-strain-state of the system by numerical modeling. The analysis was based on a 2D numerical
model according to the method of finite elements [10].
Results of numerical modeling are shown in figure 6.
The driving of the tunnel has been modeled for every typical section. The following has been calculated for each
calculative cross-section: distribution and type of induced stresses, the 13 ratios, zones of concentration. The
375

PROCEEDINGS
magnitude and direction of induced displacements and strains of the contour have been estimated for different
types of support, depending on the classification quality of the massif. The coefficient of local stability has been
studied for each section.
MI
M III
M II=M IV
MV
Figure 6. Numerical modeling of stress-strain-state of rock massif after driving the transport tunnel
The stress path approach has been applied for assessment of geomechanical risk and analysis of failure mechanism
[11]. The measured natural and forecasted by the model (induced) stresses have been situated in the stress medium,
13, determined by the failure ratio of Hoek-Brown [12].
Figure 7. Stress path approach
376

PROCEEDINGS
The stress path approach, shown in figure 7 has been applied for sections and V, indicative for the range of
changing of the magnitudes of maximum (1) and minimum (3) major stress in the project zone. The intensity, orientation and location of zones with maximum difference between 1 and 3 determine the stress states for possible failure without exceed of strength [11].
In that case, the geomechanical risk for stability of HM/TT system will depend on characteristics of fractures, determining their shear strength orientation, density, roughness, strength of walls, filling, occurrence and effect of
water [4].
4. CONCLUSION
The objective of the study is to demonstrate the opportunities of mechanics to be applied to logistics of engineering designs in the field of tunnel construction. The application of selected multitude of methods and approaches
allows identification and quantitative estimation of geomechanical key factors for each of the stages: design, construction and operation of tunnels of different designation. The above method has been successfully tested at the
driving of a transport tunnel at the mine of Elatsite Med JSCo.
Geomechanical substantiation of decisions with respect to design, driving and construction of the tunnel has been
provided for each phase of project implementation [4]. The data base has been updated and supplemented with the
advance of tunnel works. The last fact has been used for applying the design during construction method in some
of the sections of the transport tunnel.
REFERENCES
[1]
. . - . , vol.
LV.
[2]
- . .
[3]
RocLab. Rock Mass strength analysis using HB failure criterion.
[4]
Vutov V., V. Ivanov. Geomechanical Logistics of the construction of a transport tunnel at the Elatsite Mine, Bulgaria. I
Symp.TIORIR11, 2011, Zlatibor, Serbia.
[5]
ISRM Suggested Methods. Rock Characterisation Testing and Monitoring. Pergamon, Press, 1981.
[6]
., . . 2-3 .
, .55, ., 2012.
[7]
Scheidegger A. Correlation Between Joint Orientation and Geophysical stresses in a Test Area on the Canadion Shield. Rock
Mechanics, 8, 23, 76.
[8]
.. . ,
1981.
[9]
1208237. . 1986, 4
N4.
[10]
Roc science Inc, Phase , Version 8,2.
[11]
M. Board et al. Use of numerical modeling for safe and cost-effective Mine Design, Stability assessment and support
dimensioning, Rev Min 12/2005.
[12]
Hoek E.T. Rock Engineering AA Balkema. Rotterdam, 2001.
377

PROCEEDINGS
GEOMECHANICAL STABILITY MONITORING

IN THE REK BITOLA MINES
ABSTRACT
Ljupcho DIMITRIEVSKI1
Darko ILIEVSKI2
Ljubisha KOSTADINOV2
Ljube IVANOVSKI2
Dragan MILENKOVSKI3
1
Ss. Cyril and Methodius University,

Faculty of civil engineering, Skopje,
Macedonia, dimitrievski@gf.ukim.edu.mk
2
GEING Krebs und Kiefer International
and others Ltd, Skopje, Macedonia,
rudar@geing.com.mk
3
AD ELEM, REK Bitola, Bitola, Macedonia, dragan.v.milenkovski@elem.com.mk
Exploitation of coal in Coal mines in REK Bitola: in the Suvodol mine, in the
Brod-Gneotino mine and in the PJS (subbase coal serial) mine have a great
meaning for the energetic system in Republic of Macedonia.
In order to provide safe exploitation of mines in REK Bitola, the geomechanical stability conditions of the excavation blocks in the mines in REK
Bitola, were being followed each month and from the analyses, the received
data for stability conditions of the excavation blocks and the current and
planned stability conditions for the following month for all three mines in
REK Bitola.
The analyses of stability were made with licensed geotechnical software GALENA, simulating the stability conditions by profiles. Calculations of stability
were made by Spensers method and Bishops method based on limit equilibrium state. Based on the obtained results, recommendations are being made
for the way of exploitation in the next period in order to ensure satisfaction
of stability of the surface mines.
Keywords
Exploitation, Coal, Factor of Safety, Operating Slopes
1. INTRODUCTION
The production of electricity by REK Bitola satisfy the needs of the Republic Macedonia with about 70%, and as a
basic raw material for the power plants is coal. The coal is excavated from three mines, which has complex engineering-geological, geomechanical and hydrogeological conditions. From Suvodol mine the coal is exploited since
1982, from Brod-Gneotino mine is exploited since several years ago, while the PJS mine is in the process of opening.
The most important thing in mining activities in the mines is how safely to perform excavating of the waste material layers and productive coal layer. The analyses of stability are performed based on the existing fund of data for
geomechanical and hydrogeological characteristics and profiles updated by geological and mining department of
REK Bitola. With terrain prospecting permanently is monitoring the conditions in the zones of excavation blocks as
for stability with registering of incurred appearance.
2. METHODS
The calculation of the slopes of open pit mines Suvodol, Brod-Gneotino and PJS has been done based on the existing fund of data from the investigations and laboratory trials for geomechanical and hydro-geological condition in
mines in accordance with complexity and specificity of the problem. The calculation of the stability was made after
the method of Spencer and method of Bishop (with the software package GALENA 2.0), methods based on the limited equilibrium condition.
The coefficient (factor) of reliability has
Conditions (slopes)
Fs
been adopted in compliance with the RuleWorking slopes that change once a month
from 1,0 to 1,1
book on Technical Norms on Surface ExploiWorking slopes which range machinery and transport
from 1,1 to 1,15
tation of Mineral Raw Material Deposits
System of working slopes when mechanization is operating
from 1,15 to 1,20
(Stability of Slopes of Open Pit Mines and
and when it transporting
Landfills) and they are:
Slopes that have a longer service life, sidelong and final slopes
1,3
378

PROCEEDINGS
Analysis of stability after border equilibrium is considered as planes problem, assuming that deformations in the
direction of the camshaft perpendicular to the plane are considered zero. With this approach the sliding planes are
projected on the slip lines in the considered planes. On principle, the stability of the slope is considered disrupted if
the strength of shear is exhausted of a particular sliding surface. In fact, in analyzing the stability of slopes
determines the coefficient of reliability - Fs, which is a number that should reduce the strength of shear to satisfy
the requirement for destruction of the line or zone of destruction, that the stability analysis is reduced to
determining the coefficient of reliability, which is non dimensional number and reflects the relation between the
strength of shear of the material and the mobilized strength of shear.
Bishops Method. Analysis for the stability after this method is performed for characteristical circular- cylindrical
plains of slipping.
The coefficient of reliability is determined by the following method:
F
sec
1
c b W 1 ru tan tan tan
W
sin
1
F
where:
W

h
b

c
ru
(1)
weight of lamella;
slope of the basis of the lamella toward the horizontal;
height of lamella;
lamellas basic;
angle of internal friction;
cohesion;
coefficient of pore pressure;
Other sections of the expression are shown in Figure 1.
x
O
F
E
b
n
F
W
n+1
E
h
B
P
D
S C
Figure 1. Simplified scheme of the method of Bishop
In addition, conditions of equilibrium of the forces in x, or in the y direction must be satisfied:
Q cos 0 ; Q sin 0
(2)
and the condition to balance the moments around O pole:
Q R cos 0
(3)
379

PROCEEDINGS
Spensers method. The calculation of the stability after this method is similar to the method of Bishop, except that
this method takes consideration impact of strength between the lamellas acting under a specified slope along the
height of lamellas. With this method it is possible to analyze potential sliding plains with arbitrary geometric shape.
In this case, the coefficient of reliability reflects relation between the strength of shear of the material S and the
mobilized strength of shear Sm:
F = S/Sm
(4)
the resultant of strength between the lamellas is determined by the expression:
tan
c b
W cos u b sec W sin
sec
F
F
Q
tan
cos 1
tan
F
(5)
and she must satisfy conditions of equilibrium of forces in x:
Q cos 0
(6)
in the y direction:
Q sin 0
(7)
and the conditions for equilibrium of moments around O pole:
Q R cos 0
(8)
Thereby coefficient of reliability F and slope of strength between the lamellas are selected and calculated to be
satisfied all three conditions for balance. Sections of the expression F or Q are presented on the following Figure 2.
O
b
F
Zn+1
n+1
E
A
h
F
n+1
E
n
S/F
Zn
h
D
C
W
Figure 2. Simplified scheme of the method of Spencer
380

PROCEEDINGS
3. RESULTS
In the regular monthly analysis for the stability of the excavated blocks is analyzing the current condition of mines
with profile presentation and analyze the condition of the mines planned for next month. In cases where the stability condition of the terrain not satisfactory, is performing the analysis of stability with simulation for required minimum decrease. In some cases is performed analysis of stability and for final condition of mines and for parts of
mines that will remain longer period. Geomechanical parameters of materials are shown on the analyzed profiles.
Presentation of stability condition in the Suvodol mine
Working slopes for Suvodol mine need to satisfy the condition Fs 1,15 to ru=0,1, except for the disrupted parts
(appeared sliding) where condition is Fs 1,15 to ru=0,2. So, for expectation is the value of ratio of pore pressure to
move within the ru=0,2 for disrupted parts and ru=0,1 for the rest of the mine. The analysis shows and stability for
ru=0,4, how will conclude the condition of increased presence of water. Figure 3 and 4 shows the characteristic profile 57 for which is performed analysis of stability of the method of Spencer and Bishop for existing condition for
May 2013 and for the planned condition for June 2013.
Figure 3. Geomechanical analysis of the stability of Suvodol mine - existing condition
381

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4. Geomechanical analysis of the stability of Suvodol mine - planned condition
The coefficients of reliability for existing and planned condition it can be concluded that in the zone of this profile,
the global stability is satisfactory but are possible local instabilities in the upper zones of the profile where the layers steeply inclined. Because the terrain after this profile has steeply sagged over its entire length, especially in the
upper peripheral zone, need to follow the stability condition of the terrain and progress in peripheral zones to be
higher as for the foot part. On the basis of reliability coefficients, the departments of Suvodol mine take
appropriate measures to secure the performance of exploitation.
Presentation of stability condition in the Brod-Gneotino mine
For Brod-Gneotino mine is performed analysys of the stability for planned condition as for the final condition (a
condition that will remain longer period, or until perform filling of the area with internal stock pile) for Profile 2
(figure 5). The analysis of stability is performed with 5 plains of the sliding by Spencers method.
382

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 5. Geomechanical analysis of the stability of Brod-Gneotino mine - planned condition
Figure 6. Geomechanical analysis of the stability of Brod-Gneotino mine - final condition
383

PROCEEDINGS
Considering that the planned condition of slope of the seams of Profile 2 does not satisfy the requirement for final
slopes for ru=0,1, is performed an analysis of stability with simulation of slopes for final condition (figure 6).
The data obtained from the analysis of stability, the departments of the Brod-Gneotino mine can timely to plan
excavation in this area of the mine.
Presentation of stability condition in the PJS mine
Working slopes for PJS mine need to satisfy the condition Fs 1,15 to ru=0,2 for system of work slopes and Fs
1,10 to ru=0,2 for work slopes on one seam. The figure 7 shows characteristically profile 49 for which is performed
analysis of stability by Spencers method for existing condition in May 2013.
Figure 7. Geomechanical analysis of the stability of PJS mine - existing condition
Considering that the existing condition of certain planes of sliding obtained reliability coefficients less than the
prescribed, the analysis of stability is performed with simulation for required minimal decrease (Figure 8). From this
analysis arise that to satisfy the stability condition for treated zone, it is necessary to perform decrease to the
masses that affect unfavorably (masses of the upper zones of terrain).
384

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 8. Geomechanical analysis of the stability of PJS mine condition with minimal required decrease
4.
CONCLUSIONS
The analyses of geomechanical stability in REK Bitola are used in the last 15 years, whereby being taken current
mining activities for satisfying of condition of stability. According to the legal provisions and regulations, its necessary monthly monitoring of mining activities in mines, and prepare and annual plans, which simulate the planning
of mining activities for a longer period of time.
With use of geomechanical stability, professional departments and people have data in the mines and for the
planned activities, thereby it making easy for managing and satisfying the requirements of coal for Termal plant
Bitola 1, 2 and 3.
REFERENCES
[1]
GEING Krebs und Kiefer International and others Ltd: Report for geomechanical analysis of the slope stability of the excavated
blocks of Suvodol mine, May 2013
[2]
blocks of Brod-Gneotino mine, May 2013
[3]
blocks of PJS mine, May 2013
385

PROCEEDINGS
PHYSICAL-CHEMISTRY CHARACTERIZATION
OF THE MODIFIED LIMESTONE
ABSTRACT
1
Slavica MIHAJLOVI
Duica VUINI5
ivko SEKULI2
Vladimir JOVANOVI3
Dragan RADULOVI4
This paper presents comparative results of physicochemical

characterization of limestone Venac Arandjelovac before
and after modification of its original minerals calcite stearic
acid. Modification of calcite was carried out with two different
procedures and a wet and dry.
In order to monitor the change of the calcite surface modification that directly affect the properties of limestone as raw material, following methods were used: the determination of the
degree of coverage achieved hydrophobicity as an indicator
minerals, X-ray powder diffraction analysis (XRPD), infrared
spectroscopy (IR), and microscopic analysis.
The results showed that the total hydrophobicity is achieved at
a concentration of stearic acid 1.5% in wet process, and 3%
for dry with the results microscopic analysis in accordance
with the obtained degree of coating. On the basis of the infrared spectra, it was concluded that there was no change in the
position and intensity of most strip of modified calcite relative
to the base. Also, X-ray powder diffraction analysis showed that
the calcite after modifying stearic acid retains its basic structure.
Institute for Technology of Nuclear and Other Mineral

Raw Materials, 86 Franshet d Esperey St., 11000 Belgrade, Serbia, s.mihajlovic@itnms.ac.rs
2
Raw Materials, 86 Franshet d Esperey St., 11000 Belgrade, Serbia, z.sekulic@itnms.ac.rs
3
Raw Materials, 86 Franshet d Esperey St., 11000 Belgrade, Serbia, v.jovanovic@itnms.ac.rs
4
Raw Materials, 86 Franshet d Esperey St., 11000 Belgrade, Serbia, d.radulovic@itnms.ac.rs
5
Faculty of Mining and Geology - University of Belgrade,
7 uina St., 11000 Belgrade, Serbia, dvucinic@rgf.bg.ac.rs
Keywords
Calcite, IR, Limestone, Microscopic Analysis, XRPD Analysis
1. INTRODUCTION
The limiting factor in the application of limestone as a filler in the polymer industry is its hydrophilic surface, as
such incompatible with the hydrophobic polymer surface. Recent development trends polymer industry are aimed
at increasing the limestone which is the most abundant mineral calcite surface-modified procedures surface modification of calcite as the main mineral in limestone, organic modifiers types of surfactants, can significantly improve the quality of limestone as a filler for use in polymer industry (Papirer et al., 1984, Shmitt et al., 1988, Fekete,
Pukanszky, 1997, Osman et al., 2000, Osman, Suter, 2002, Mihajlovi et al., 2012).
2. EXPERIMENTAL
Material
For experimental studies are presented in this paper is determined using a sample of limestone deposits "Venac"Arandjelovac (Serbia). The modification of calcite as the main minerals in the limestone used is stearic acid
CH3(CH2)16COOH.
Methods
Modification of calcite. The process of "wet" and "dry" modification of calcite, and the method of determining the
degree of coverage the authors described in the previously published work (Mihajlovi et al., 2009, Mihajlovi et al.,
2005).
X-ray powder diffraction analysis. The samples were recorded on a diffractometer brand "Philips", model PW-1710,
with a curved graphite monochromator and a scintillation counter. The intensities of diffracted X-ray radiation Cu
386

PROCEEDINGS
(=1,54178 ) were measured at room temperature at intervals of 0,02o 2 (diffraction angle ), for 2.5 s, and the
range of 2 from 4o to 65o. X-ray tube is loaded with a voltage of 40 kV and a current of 30 mA, slotted for routing
the primary and diffracted beam of about 1 and 0.1 mm.
Infrared spectroscopy. The subsamples were recorded in 4000-250 cm-1 on the device "Perkin Elmer 983 G" and prepared in the form of KBr pill by mixing 1% of the sample with 99% KBr.
Mineralogical analysis. The polarization was performed under a microscope for transmitted light rebound made by
"Jenapol-in" company of Carl Zeiss Jena, immersion method, to identify the minerals present. For the initial sample
of limestone immersion liquid is xylene and the samples modified stearic acid water. Zoom lens is 3,2 to 20X.

The chemical composition of the starting sample
The chemical composition of the starting sample is shown in Table 1
Table 1. Chemical composition of limestone "Venac" Aranelovac
Component
CaO
Fe2O3
Al2O3
MgO
SiO2
Na2O
K2O
IL*
Content, %
54.77
0.084
0.035
0.79
0.24
0.027
0.0036
44.05
*ignition loss
Based on the CaO was obtained by chemical analysis (54.77%), and assuming that all the MgO (0.79%) associated
with dolomite, was obtained by calculation that the sample is 95.84% CaCO3.
Degree of coating
By determining the degree of coverage as a measure of hydrophobicity achieved samples, it was found that the
impregnation of 99.9% for "wet" the modification process gets stearic acid at a concentration of 1.5% (sample CS1.5), and in "dry" procedure in stearic acid concentration of 3% (sample CD-3). Comparative diagrams of the degree
of coverage of calcite modified "wet" and "dry" process shown at Figure 1.
99.9
100
93
90
96.5
99.9 98
99.9
99.9
90
80
Coating degree, %
70
60
65.5
55.5
50
40
30
20
Wet process
Dry process
10
0
0.5
1.5
Concentration of stearic acid , %
Figure 1. Coating degree modification of calcite samples
XRPD analysis
At baseline and calcite samples of the modified samples in which there was full hydrophobicity of both procedures
CS-1.5 and CD-3 X-ray analysis was performed. Diffraction patterns are shown at Figure 2.
387

PROCEEDINGS
C - calcite
D - dolomite
100
Intensity
CD-3
CS-1.5
D,C C C C
C C
calcite
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
2 ( )
Figure 2. Comparative X-ray diffraction patterns of the sample flow and calcite samples modified CS-1.5 and CD-3
The XRPD analysis showed that there was no violation of the crystal structure of calcite in the process of modification, which is expected given that the adsorption process whose place at the phase boundary. The analysis of the
main diffraction peak of calcite was noted that there was no change in their diffraction angles and intensity. In
fact, there has been no systematic displacement reflection and amorphization after adsorption of stearic acid as in
the "wet" and in the process of modifying the "dry".
Infrared spectroscopy
At baseline and calcite samples of the modified samples CS-1.5 and CD-3 was performed infrared spectroscopy and
infrared spectra are shown at Figures 3 and 4.
16000
12000
2977 2873
Transparency, %
8000
4000
2955
2917
-4000
2851
2
2873
-8000
4000
3500
3000
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
-1
Wave numbers, cm
Figure 3. Comparative infrared spectra of: 1) the initial sample of calcite, 2) sample CS-3.
388

PROCEEDINGS
Infrared spectroscopic analysis showed that the "wet" calcite modification of stearic acid at a concentration of 3%
(sample CS-3) do not change the positions and intensities of the fundamental bands, characteristic for the mineral
calcite. In the area of 3000 cm-1 to 2800 cm-1 there are more bands and more tape on the neg of the initial sample,
due to the symmetric and asymmetric valence vibration of CH bond of the hydrocarbon chain of the adsorbed organic compounds. In doing so, calcite treated with stearic acid (CS-3), bands shifted to slightly higher wave numbers
compared to the bands of crystalline stearic acid, indicating a greater presence of vertical orientation (trans conformation of the hydrocarbon chain) and denser, "packing" of hydrocarbon chains on the surface of minerals.
Transparency, %
2977
2950
2873
2852
2873
2918
4000
3500
3000
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
-1
Wave numbers, cm
Figure 4. Comparative infrared spectra of: 1) the initial sample of calcite, 2) sample CD-3
Compared to the typical flow of calcite bands (spectrum 1) notes that there has been no change in the position and
intensity of most strip of modified calcite CD-3 (spectrum 2). Of modified sample CD-3 (spectrum 2), as well as sample CS-3 (Fig. 3, spectrum 2), in the 3000 to 2800 cm-1 bands are observed at 2950, 2918, 2873 and 2852 cm-1, originating from the valence vibration of CH bond in -CH3 and-CH2 - groups of the hydrocarbon chains of adsorbed organic compounds [3,5]. However, it can be seen that the bands of valence vibrations of CH-CH3 group less pronounced than in the sample CS-3, obtained by "wet" modification. When the wave number IR CH vibration band in
the spectrum of 2 compared to lanes that Osman and Suter [5] observed in the spectrum of crystalline stearic acid
(2954, 2916, 2872 and 2849 cm-1), we see that the bands in the calcite treated with stearic acid in the "dry" process,
(CD-3), slightly shifted towards higher values, except for bands corresponding to the asymmetric CH vibration of CH3 group (2950 cm-1). This shift to lower wave numbers and valence bands are small, CH vibration-CH3 group, indicating better representation of hair (Gauch) conformation and orientation of the hydrocarbon chain of hair at the
surface of calcite, and the less dense "packing" of hydrocarbon chains the adsorbed layer of CD-3.
Microscopic analysis
At baseline samples of calcite and calcite coated completely received "wet" process (CS-1.5) and "dry" process (CD3) was performed microscopic analysis. Micrographs of these samples are shown at Figure 5.
389

PROCEEDINGS
a)
b)
c)
Figure 5. Micrographs: a) the initial calcite, b) CS-1.5 (magnification 20X), c) CD-3 (magnification 10X)
On micro flow pattern of calcite (Fig. 5a). become apparent free calcite grains which have characteristic interference colors of a high order which is characteristic of fair-faced mineral calcite. On micro sample CS-1.5 (Figure 5b)
are observed in the presence of water as a means of immersion, aggregates coated with hydrophobic particles of
calcite. In order to determine the degree of coverage indicated that the high hydrophobicity of mineral calcite
achieved with stearic acid concentration of 1.5% (the level of coverage of 99.9%), the occurrence of calcite aggregates in the sample CS-1.5 confirms the hydrophobicity of the sample. On micro photograph of the sample CD-3
(Fig. 5c) are very strong form aggregates coated grains of calcite, which is expected since the degree of coating of
the sample is very high at 99.9%.
4. CONCLUSION
Based on the results presented in this paper can be concluded as follows:
Full-calcite impregnation with "wet" the modification process was obtained at a concentration of stearic acid 1.5%
(sample CS-1.5), and in "dry" process of stearic acid at a concentration of 3% (sample CD-3).
X-ray diffraction analysis of modified calcite samples showed that the modification does not violate the
crystal structure of minerals.
The infrared spectroscopic analysis and the "wet" and "dry" modified calcite showed that modification does
not change the positions and intensities of the fundamental infrared band characteristic of calcite, but in
the area of 3000 cm-1 to 2800 cm-1 bands appear symmetric and asymmetric valence vibration of CH bond of
the hydrocarbon chain of the adsorbed organic compounds.
The presence of stearic acid-modified of calcite was confirmed by microscopic analysis, since they occur very
strong form aggregates which are coated grains of calcite, while in the starting sample clearly differentiating characteristic of a high order interference colors belonging to the calcite that exists in the form of free uncoated
beads.
390

PROCEEDINGS
Acknowledgment
This paper is the result of research on the Project TR34013 titled " Development of technological processes for obtaining of ecological materials based on nonmetallic minerals", and the Project TR34006 titled "Mechanochemical
treatment under insufficient mineral resources,", funded by the Ministry of Education, Science and Technological
Development of the Republic of Serbia for the period 2011-2014.
REFERENCES
[1]
Papirer E., Schultz J., Turchi C.: European Polymer Journal, 1984, 20, pp 1155-1158.
[2]
Shmitt P., Koerper E., Schultz J.,Papirer E.: Chromatographia, 1988, 25, 9, pp 786-790.
[3]
Fekete E., Pukanszky B.: Journal of Colloid and Interface Science, 1997, 194, pp 269-275.
[4]
Osman M.A., Seyfang G., Suter U.W.:Journal of Physical Chemistry, 2000, 104, pp 4433-4439.
[5]
Osman M.A., Suter U.W.: Chemistry of Materials, 2002, 14, pp 4408-4415.
[6]
Mihajlovi S., Sekuli ., Vuini D., Jovanovi V., Kolonja B.: Chemical Industry, 2012, 66, 5, pp 787794.
[7]
Mihajlovi S., Sekuli ., Dakovi A., Vuini D., Jovanovi V., Stojanovi J.:Ceramics Silikty, 2009, 53, 4, pp 268-275.
[8]
Mihajlovi S., Sekuli ., Petrov M.: Chemical Industry, 2005, 1-2, 59, pp 32-35.
391

PROCEEDINGS
SLIDING PARTS WEAR INFLUENCE TO DRIVE UNIT

LOADING OF LONGWALL SHEARERS
ABSTRACT
Ing. Petr TOMEK
VSB - Technical University, Ostrava,

Czech Republic
petr.tomek.st1@vsb.cz
This paper focuses on the analysis of the influence of sliding parts and their
wear level to performance characteristics of the longwall shearers at low
seams thickness conditions and to driving units loading especially.
Author processed real data measured at concrete mining conditions of
longwalls in real underground mines.
The results of this work will be used at engineering designs of longwall
shearers, in low seam thickness conditions especially.
Keywords
Mining Machinery, Mining Equipment,
Sliding parts, Longwall Shearers, Driving Units
1. INTRODUCTION
The wear level of external parts or structural components of mechanical equipment and machinery ultimately determines the service life and reliability of these mechanisms. It is often the chief reason for taking the equipment
out of service and one of the primary causes of down-time during coal mining operations, not to mention the associated financial losses.
This paper addresses the issue of longwall shearer loading, or rather the effects the level of wear of shearer sliding
parts have on their performance, as well as the performance of the driving units (motors).
2. THE METHOD OF OBTAINING THE DESIRED RESULTS

The study is based on real data obtained from mining operations performed with longwall shearers designed to
mine low-thickness coal seams and on in situ measurements carried out to determine the actual wear of the sliding
parts. The acquired data have largely been evaluated and processed via Cyril SW 1.04 software, which facilitated
the monitoring of all measured and recorded values in real time, both graphically and on line. In addition to displaying the recorded parameters directly, the software allows for fast and easy calculation of average and maximum
values of selected parameters, operating times of the shearer and the occurrence rate of selected operating
modes. The frequency of on-site wear measurements made on the shearer sliding parts had to be limited to once
every 10 days due to mining operation restrictions. On account of the immense quantity of the acquired operating
data (all shearer operating parameters are recorded at one-second intervals), only data most relevant to the study,
obtained on individual monitoring days, were selected: only values measured at every tenth section (powered roof
supports, top guards, hydraulic chocks) were monitored. The value of a given parameter used for further processing
of data related to a given section is expressed as the arithmetic mean of all values measured during a single passing
of the shearer along this section. In order to avoid distortion of the resulting data, values acquired while the shearer stood still or moved at a speed below 0.5 m/min. were filtered out. All data acquired in this manner were subsequently graphically processed and assessed. The experiment was conducted on a relatively unused face scraper
conveyor with only slightly worn rack-and-pinion tracks. The new pin gear of the shearer showed only slight wear at
the end of the experiment.
392

PROCEEDINGS
3. PROPOSED SOLUTION
The following perimeter values were obtained based on the shearer operating records and graphs produced for
each day of monitoring (see Graphs 1 and 2): the level of current protection of the left motor, M1 [%], the level of
current protection of the right motor, M2 [%], and the shearer travelling speed [m.min-1]. Additional parameters:
section number [-], longitudinal tilt of the shearer [], transverse tilt of the shearer [].
The average longitudinal tilt of the monitored long wall was 1 degree, while the transverse tilt of the wall (block
cave-in direction) was 8 degrees during the reference period.
Graph 1. The process of working shearer 20.3.2010
Graph 2. The process of working shearer 30.4.2010
Graphs 3, 4 and 5 show individual values of relevant parameters of the measured data sample divided based on the
number of conducted measurements.
393

PROCEEDINGS
Graph 3. The distribution of measured values of the level of protection M3
Graph 4. The distribution of measured values of the level of protection M4
Graph 5. The distribution of measured values of the speed shearer
394

PROCEEDINGS
The sliding elements of the shearer's travelling components are exposed to adhesive wear caused by their direct
contact with the rack-and-pinion conveyor and by the action of extraneous siliceous particles (stone or band reaming during coal mining) which tend to get between friction surfaces and thereby contribute to abrasive wear as well.
Components monitored during the reference period included the sliding parts, the pin gear in particular, which has
proved to be the most stressed and the fastest to wear out sliding component of the monitored shearer. At the
same time, this part has the greatest impact on the overall performance of the shearer. The acquired values are
presented in Graph 6, which shows the resulting wear curve (the wear-level to time ratio at an average coal production of 1,700 t.day-1). The graph clearly displays individual stages of wear: the running-in period, normal operation
as well as excessive wear periods. Graph 7 shows the same curve, less the running-in period. As the curve indicates,
a significant increase in the level of wear occurred between the 40th and 50th day of operation (after having mined
about 80,000 t of coal).
Graph 6. The curve of wear level of sliding parts
Graph 7. The part of the wear curve with the exclusion of the running part
Values recorded in Graph 8 driving unit load clearly suggest that the wear of sliding parts, as is the case with new
or slightly worn racks of the rack-and-pinion conveyor, does not substantially affect the resulting load put on the
motors and the working speed of the shearer; its immediate impact on mining output is therefore negligible.
395

PROCEEDINGS
However, the distance between the driving gear components (the pin gear and the rack) increases as the wear progresses, which in turn adversely affects the gear engagement, resulting in excessive wear and tear of the entire
rack-and-pinion system.
Even though most manufacturer's instructions normally specify maximum permissible wear of shearer sliding parts,
the above-mentioned minimum impact of worn out sliding parts on mining output constitutes one of the main issues in terms of timely replacement of worn out parts in order to optimize the service life of pin gears and especially the conveyor racks. Although both manufacturers and users have access to shearer operating data, obtaining
conclusive evidence of an alleged failure to adhere to maintenance instructions may prove to be rather difficult
and will require an in-depth analysis of the acquired data.
Graph 8. The graph of drive units loading and the speed shearer
4. PROPOSED SOLUTION
As has already been mentioned, the on-site measurements and the subsequent analysis conclusively prove that the
impact the sliding parts wear had on the load put on longwall shearer motors was within a 10% range during the
reference period. Timely replacement of the sliding parts will extend the service life of the pin gear and especially
the racks of the rack-and-pinion conveyor and can substantially lower the costs associated with the production of
spare parts and the down-time required for their replacement. It is, therefore, in the best interest of both the manufacturer and the user of longwall shearers to periodically monitor and evaluate the aforementioned parameters.
Continual data analyses based on real operating values have recently become an important source of information
leading to substantial savings, as has been demonstrated in the analyses presented in this paper.
REFERENCES
[1]
User Manual of Software Cyril, TMachinery Ratkovice, Ratkovice 2010, 53 s.
[2]
User Manual of Longwall Shearer MB444P, TMachinery a.s. Ratkovice
396

PROCEEDINGS
WORKING AND FINAL SLOPES STABILITY ANALYSIS

IN SURFACE EXCAVATION MINE R'ZANOVO
ABSTRACT
1
Ljupce KULAKOV
Zoran GJORGIEVSKI2
Zlatko ILIJOVSKI3
1
Drezdenska 52, Skopje, R. Macedonia,

ljupce.kulakov@gim.com.mk
2
zoran.gorgievski@gim.com.mk
3
geozlatko@gim.mk
As a result of the continuing process of exploitation of Fe-Ni ores in the surface excavation mine of R'zanovo, there was a need developed for conducting a continuous analysis for the stability of the operational and final slopes,
thus achieving a high level of safety in the excavation.
For this purpose, continuous monitoring was introduced with the most modern methods and techniques for calculation and analysis of the operational
and final slopes of the mine.
Keywords
Mapping, Analysis, Stability, Safety
1. INTRODUCTION
Surface Excavation Mine for Fe and Ni R'zanovo is situated 50 km south of Kavadarci. Considering the present situation in the mine, and the need of safety and ratability during excavation, in longer time period, sidelong competent representatives, adequate intensive activities are assumed in order to define optimal conditions for its exploitation. For that, (besides else) it is necessary to know information about the conditions for stability of excavation
for working and final slopes. Based upon this, the need for production of this kind of technical documentation has
occurred.
For defining necessary geological and geotechnical characteristics of terrain, methodology of terrain and laboratory investigations is implemented, during which detail engineering-geological mapping of 60ha was performed, as
well as () - point load tests, to different types of stone samples that re present on terrain.
2. BASIC GEOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF S.E.M.R'ZANOVO

The open pit mine Rzanovo is a part of the ore zone of nickel bearing iron Rzanovo, Studena Voda. By means of the
field prospection, it can be concluded that the open pit mine is distinguished with rather heterogeneous and complex geological structure.
In general, the open pit mine has been composed of Triassic limestones, ultrabasic rocks serpentinites, most
probably from the Jurassic age, series of schists, most probably from the Cretaceous age, laterite ferro nickel ores
from the Cretaceous age and alb.-cenomanian limestones. All lithology units at this site have orientation NW - SE
and variable dip amount toward NE (mainly they are leaning and rarely sub horizontal or sub vertical) (Figure 1).
From tectonic aspect, the open pit mine Rzanovo is located in the western part of the Vardar zone, in other word it
is a part of the ore region which is found in the southern parts of the republic of Macedonia, in the Kozuf Mountain.
Actually, this area is a zone of overthrusting which is manifested with a series of parallel thrusts in which there is
alternating interchange of serpentinites, limestones and schists. The intensive tectonic structure of this area has a
significant influence upon the state of the rock masses.
As a result of the complex tectonic processes, the foliation and the bedding as well as the mutual boundaries of the
lithological units have got steep inverse position.
Within the explored area of the open pit mine Rzanovo, the following rupture forms are domonant:
Reverse faults with NW SE strike, with steep dip of around 60 90. They actually have the same direction of
strike as the lithological members of the ore body. These reverse faults present the tectonic boundaries between the lithological members along which the over thrusting of the older lithological members happened
397

PROCEEDINGS
(the Triassic limestones, serpentinites and the schists) above the ore body and the Cretaceous platy limestones.
The gravitation faults with major strike directions NE-SW are sub vertical to vertical and along with the previously described create the tectonic structure of this terrain.
Fractures which have been developed in several joint sets which condition distinguishing of the rock masses
to many blocks with different forms and sizes. The major joint sets within the Cretaceous limestones (322)
have dip elements of 133/85 and 242/24 (appendix 3.2), while the major joint sets within the Triassic limestones and the Cretaceous schists occur with dip elements of 137/81, 180/83, 217/58 and 259/73 (appendix
3.4).
Figure 1. North - western part of the mine
Considering the hydrological occurrences, the precipitation is the most significant and it has a certain influence
upon the state of the watering of the terrain. Namely, through the infiltration of the surface water within the underground, undermine of rock cohesion is appearing, during which total disorder of total stability in the mine is
occurring.
Analyzing all terrain investigation works, it can be concluded that geological and structural-tectonic characteristics
in some parts of the mine are very complicated by which thay have big meaning for excavation condition and state
of stability. Namely, great lithological heterogeneity is present, as well as other parameters, while anisotropy is
separately expressed at schist formation, by which from this aspect the situation is very complex.
3. GEOTECHNICAL CLASSIFICATION OF THE ROCK MASSES

On the basis of the engineering-geological mappings of the terrain in the current phase and the obtained results of
the latest PLT (point load test) laboratory tests, reinterpretation of the inputs for geotechnical classification of the
represented major types of rock masses was made.
The changes primarily refer to the UCS parameter (one axial strength), where the extreme values of the statistical
analyses were not considered, as well as the values obtained from the examinations of cores from the exploratory
398

PROCEEDINGS
boreholes selected from greater depths. In this context, all the results of that were analyzed from which, the values
for the UCS parameter were achieved through empirical correlation dependence.
Also, corrections were made of the RQD (rock quality designation) parameter, where the surface mapping of the
terrain and the quality of the core from the exploratory boreholes at the upper zones were taken into consideration, with a supposition that the critical slide surfaces will not go into deep in the massif. At the remaining inputs
for the geotechnical classification, more significant variation of the values was not carried out.
In this way, parameters for real estimation of the strength parameters of the rock masses was provided, while their
categorization was performed according to the RMR system of Bieniawski (1989). After that, the empirical generalized criterion of failure after Hoek and Brown (2000) was applied. After this criterion, the shear strength parameters
of the massif (cohesion - cm and the angle of internal friction m), are defined in accordance with the following
formula:
a
1 3 ci mb 3 s a 1 1 (eGSI /15 e 20 / 3 )
ci
2 6
GSI 100
s exp GSI 100
mb mi exp
28 14 D
9 3D
where:
GSI
mb, s
D
1, 3
c i
- quality of the rock after Hoek connected to the categorization of Bieniawski;

- empirical constants dependent on the quality of the rock GSI and RMR;
- coefficient of disturbance of the massif;
- major normal stresses;
- shear strength.
The following table presents the parameters for defining the class of certain types of rocks (RMR) with the appropriate approved values.
It can be concluded from the table that the rock masses are mainly categorized into the III and IV class, while the
altered serpentinites, being the most problematical from the aspect of stability of the slopes are characterized into
the V class. The low rating of the Cretaceous platy limestones is due to a relatively less favorable orientation of the
fractures in relation to the remaining rock masses.
ble 1. Categorization of rock masses after RMR system of Bieniawski (1989).
Massive
serpentinites
Se
Altered
serpentinites
Se'
Quartzsericite
carbonate
schists T1
2
Triassic
marble
limestones
T12'
Dark gray to
black Cretaceous
schists 1K22
Cretaceous
banded
limestones
1K22
Brown
friable
Cretaceous
schists
1K22'
Ore
body
2K22
Cretaceous
platy
limestones
3K22
Monoaxial
strength
RQD (core
quality)
13
13
13
13
Spacing
among
fractures
10
15
10
10
10
State of
fractures
10
10
20
10
20
10
10
20
Ground
water
10
10
10
10
10
10
Fractures
orientation
-5
-5
-5
-5
-5
-5
-5
-5
-25
RMR (rock
mass rating)
37
15
35
57
25
52
25
42
32
Class of
rock
IV
IV
III
IV
III
IV
III
IV
Type of
rock
Parameter
399

PROCEEDINGS
Selected profiles and parameters for analyzing

As a particularly important during data input for calculation of stability is the degree of availability of the information which are curtail for adequate interpretation of actual condition of rock mass. Besides these conditions,
heterogeneous of materials is also important, which is prerequisite for variation in physical-mechanic parameters.
This fact shows that the choice of input parameters for analysis is very important step and basic prerequisite for
real simulation of state of stability, for which detail analysis for all available calculations is done. In that context, it
is important to note that authenticity of data received by engineering-geological mapping is most important for
real description of calculated total stability during further calculation. According to that, it is very important to
have adequate optimal coverage of terrain with profiles for stability analysis of the slopes. Parts of terrain where
bigger number of faults and different lithological formations appear, are caunted as most problematic zones for
analysis.
Having in mind the geological and geotechnical conditions within the open pit mine, for analyzing the stability of
the slopes, 7 (seven) representative profiles were selected from the review of the appendixes 2.1 2.7, it is obvious
that there are specific geological and geotechnical conditions for exploitation, where the heights of the general
slopes are within the diapason of 160 to 225 m
As representative profile for analysis of stability of working and final slopes, profile 1-1' is chosen.
Figure 2. Analysis of slope stability profile 1-1'
400

PROCEEDINGS
The following table shows the definitive approved parameters which define the non line at criterion of failure according to Hoek and Brown.
Table 2. Parameters of non linear criterion of failure after Hoek and Brown.
Type of rock
Compressive strength
UCS [MPa]
GSI
(geological
strength index)
const.
const.
const.
const.
mi
mb
Massive serpentinites
40.0
42
20
0.826
2.236E-4
0.510
Altered serpentinites
12.5
20
15
0.185
9.219E-6
0.544
Quartz-sericite schists
45.0
40
0.333
1.673E-4
0.511
Triassic marble limestones
75.0
65
1.315
6.267E-3
0.501
Dark gray Cretaceous schists
25.0
30
0.150
3.927E-5
0.522
Cretaceous banded limestones
60.0
60
0.888
3.036E-3
0.503
Brown friable schists
15.0
30
0.107
3.927E-5
0.522
Ore body
35.0
47
0.381
4.614E-4
0.507
Crtetaceous platy limestones
70.0
60
0.999
3.036E-3
0.503
The parameters shown in the above table are defined for cases of slopes where the so called coefficient of disturbance of the massif (D) corresponds to the application of mass blasting as well as to the machine excavation by rippering (D = 0.7 1.0).
Applied software and methods of analyzing
The principals of analyzing the stability of hard and soft rock masses necessitate the selection of the calculating
(analitical) model to be in accordance with the so called physical model of the terrain. In this case, by analyzing the
lithological and tectonic relations of the rock masses, it may be ascertained that in separate parts of the open pit
mine, different mechanisms of failure are possible. However, because of the position of the layers and the effect of
scale (size of blocks in the massif in comparison with the heights of the open pit mine), it is justly to analyze the
state of stability in most part of the open pit mime by using the classical methods of limit sate.
In the remaining part of the open pit mine (the zone of Cretaceous platy limestones) there are classical precondition for failure along the surfaces of bedding, regarding the fact that their dip (statistical value of about 68) also
forces the gradient of the working slopes in these rocks. The fact that along the discontinuities effects of hydrostatic action of ground water occurs and this ground water has an impact on the state of stability, this was simulated in the analyses by means of the coefficient of pore pressure (ru). For the first type of analysis, the licensed software package SLIDE was used, which is a product of the company RocScience - Canada. It enables parallel calculations with all known methods of analyzing the stability according to the principals of state limit (Bishop, Spencer,
Janbu et all.). At the same time, we may include cases of static and quazi-static analysis, as well as a large number
of possible combinations of outside loadings or effects of remedial measures undertaken. The principals of these
methods are illustrated shortly only for the methods of Spencer and Bishop. The method of Spencer belongs to the
group of so called accurate methods of the limit sate which takes into consideration all equilibrium conditions
and besides circular-cylindrical, it is also possible to analyze slide surfaces with unspecified geometrical shape. The
method is suitable for analyzing different problems with regard that the analysis could include outside loadings,
ground water influence etc. The safety coefficient, according to this method, reflects the relation between the
shear strength of the material and mobilized shear strength Sm:
S
Sm
The resultant of the interlamilar forces is determined according to the expression:
c b
tan
sec
(W cos u b sec ) W sin
F
F
Q
tan '
cos( ) 1
tan( )
F
And it must satisfy the equilibrium conditions of the forces in x, in other words in y direction:
401

PROCEEDINGS
Q cos 0 ; Q sin 0
And the equilibrium condition of the moments around the pole O:
Q R cos( ) 0
At the same time, the safety coefficient F and the gradient of the interlamilar forces are selected, in other words,
they are calculated so that all three equilibrium conditions can be satisfied. The members of the expressions for F,
in other words for Q are presented in the figure 3.
Figure 3. Simplified scheme for the conditions and the applied members in the expressions of the method of Spencer.
The method of Bishop is presented with the following basic formulas:
c b (G u b) tg m
(G sin M x )
Where for each slice:
G W W Wz Ry p b a y (W Wz )
M x Rx yr / R k x (W Wz ) y z / R
m
1
cos sin tg / F
The simplified scheme for the method of Bishop is presented in the figure 6, while the symbols in the formulas refer
to:
c'
cohesion;
'
angle of internal friction;
b
width of a slice;
u
pore pressure;
G
weight of a slice;
Mx
moment of horizontal force around the center of the slide surface;
Rx
resultant of the horizontal force at the level of the slice base;
Ry
resultant of a vertical force at the level of the slice base;
p
uniform load;
ax
horizontal seismic coefficient;
ay
vertical seismic coefficient.
402

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4. Simplified scheme for the method of Bishop.
4. CONCLUSION
During perennial active exploitation in S.E.M. R'zanovo, numerous terrain, laboratory and office examination and
investigation works were performed in order to continuously follow and analyze working and final slopes of the
mine. For that purpose, en optimal number of 7 (seven) representative profiles for analysis of stability of the slopes
are chosen which are adequately disposed in whole surface excavation mine. During calculation of slope stability
"Slide v 5.0" program was used, which enables wide range of data input which is very important for adequate interpretation of real situation of the rock mass on terrain. Using this software, all characteristic potential unstable
zones of the slopes are established, and adequate way of disburdening is calculated.
USED LITERATURE
[1]
, ,:
, 2013
403

PROCEEDINGS
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF LIMESTONE BRIQUETTES

WITH BENTONITE FOR CALCIFICATION OF ACID SOIL
ABSTRACT
Vladimir JOVANOVI1
ivko SEKULI
Branislav IVOEVI
Slavica MIHAJLOVI
Milan PETROV
Dragan RADULOVI
Vladan KAI
Institute for Technology of Nuclear and

Other Mineral Raw Materials, Belgrade,
Serbia
1
v.jovanovic@itnms.ac.rs
This paper presents results of preliminary investigations of mechanical properties of briquettes for agricultural purposes (calcification of acid soil) obtained from limestone dust from Dobrilovia Brdo deposits limestone
grinding plants in the briquetting process in laboratorial roll briquette press.
Bentonite in various mass fractions to limestone (1-10%) was used as the
binding agent, while pressure between press rolls as well as other parameters were constant for all the samples.
Impact resistance, resistance to pressure, abrasion resistance and solubility
in water of the obtained briquettes were investigated. Results presented
demonstrate that there is no need to produce briquettes containing more
than 5% of the binding agent since it does not cause any significant improvement of mechanical properties.
Keywords
Limestone, Briquetting, Roll press, Mechanical properties, Soil pH
1. INTRODUCTION
Over 60% of cultivable soil in the world can be classified as acidic as a consequence of industrial development as
well as irresponsible attitude towards environment in highly developed and in developing countries [1].
Over 50% of soil in Serbia is acidic. Such soil is one of the important causes of low accumulative herbal production
[2].
The desired results are often not obtained because of the decreased fertility caused by lack of calcium, despite the
increased investment into standard agrotechnical measures.
Adding limestone induces reaction with carbon dioxide and water from soil, thus creating calcium and magnesium
carbonates. Reaction with acid colloidal complexes also occurs during which calcium and magnesium replace hydrogen and aluminum. These reactions produce carbon dioxide and cause raising of the soil pH value to the satisfying level. Alkaline soil with pH over 7 can also benefit from adding limestone since nitrate fertilizers, which induce
acid reaction with soil, are better utilized when combined with limestone [3].
Application of limestone is very wide to all acid soils in agriculture, fruit growing, viticulture, horticulture and
silviculture for increasing yield and product quality.
Application of limestone can be a one time process (full dose once) or it can be repeated several times, every three
to five years. The aim is to achieve optimal soil pH value (pH of normal KCl solution from 5 to 5.5) [4].
Since limestone waste is mainly used for this purpose, and most frequently limestone powder from various filter
plants, the biggest problem occurring in its application is its fineness, i.e. small size class, because of the transportation and manipulation losses as well as the loss due to wind force from soil surface. It is also important for the
limestone particles to be small enough in order to be dissolved under the influence of weathering and evenly distributed in soil. [1] In order to satisfy these two seemingly opposite demands, agglomeration was used primarily in
the USA (relatively new process, dating from the early 1980s), and it was most often performed by pelletizing or
briquetting. [3] These processes give material of appropriate size, suitable for transportation, manipulation and
application to soil, and at the same time small enough so as to be dissolved under the influence of weathering and
thus evenly distributed in soil.
404

PROCEEDINGS

Equipment and briquetting process
Briquettes were produced in a laboratorial roller briquetting press Komarek B050. Limestone waste from the
Dobrilovica Brdo deposits was used as the material for briquetting, while bentonite was the binding agent. The
pressure, i.e. the force necessary to move press rolls away from each other was constant- 10kN, spin speed of the
rolls was 30r/minute, spin speed of the screw feeder was 70r/min and the gap between rolls was 0.9mm. These values were constant for all samples, while content of the binding agent was being changed (0.1; 2.5; 5.0 and 10.0%).
After coming out of the press fresh briquettes were left in the air for 24 hours, after which time their mechanical
properties were tested, i.e. impact resistance, pressure resistance, abrasion resistance and solubility of the briquettes in water.
Impact resistance results
Impact resistance is observed in a lot of 10 briquette samples, where average number of falls that briquettes survived after falling from 457mm onto a steel plate is studied. In practice, this test is performed by dropping the lot
of briquettes for 25 times in the above mentioned conditions and after each time sifting samples through a 2mm
sieve and measuring the sifted mass, which should not exceed 5% (less often 10%) of the total sample mass. [3]
Figure 1. graphically presents dependence of briquette impact resistance on the fraction of the binding agent.
Figure 1. Impact resistance of briquette depending on the mass

fraction of binder
The results presented show that briquettes impact resistance increases with the increase of the mass fraction of
the binding agent and that these samples show the lowest values of the masses sifted on 2mm sieve, while the
highest values of the sifted mass show the samples with the lowest content of binding agent (1%).
Figure 2. Content of -2mm class depending on the mass fraction of

the binder
Figure 2. presents values of impact resistance of the

limestone briquettes measured by class -2+0mm content obtained after dropping briquettes for 25 times
from a height of 457mm onto the steel plate. The results presented in Figure 2. show that the class -2+0
mm content of the briquettes containing 10 and 5%
bentonite is in the range from 2.25% to 8.79%, while in
the briquettes containing 2.5 and 1% bentonite it is it
is from 14.68 to 26%.
405

PROCEEDINGS
Pressure resistance results of the briquettes

Pressure resistance is studied in a sample of 10 briquettes on the standard hydraulic laboratorial press in order to
investigate the maximum pressure a briquette can endure in kg without crashing. The results obtained from the
company Mars Minerals, which has been dealing with limestone agglomeration for quite a number of years so that
they can be relied upon, indicate that larger briquettes should endure minimum 3.6kg, and the smallest ones, which
were not subjects to tests this time, minimum 0.5kg, which is considered to be satisfying for further manipulation.
[3]
Figure 3. presents the results of pressure resistance tests of the briquettes, depending on the mass fraction of the
binding agent.
Figure 3. Dependence of pressure resistance of the briquettes on the mass fraction of the binder
The results (Figure 3.) show that certain deviations in the pressure values particular samples were subjected to during testing occurred, but otherwise an evident general tendency of rising of pressure resistance with the increase of
the mass fraction of the binder, which is best observed in the sample containing 5% bentonite.
Since the investigation of pressure resistance of a particular sample is evaluated according to the average value
obtained after testing 10 briquettes, Figure 4. shows dependence of the average pressure resistance values on the
mass fraction of the binding agent.
Figure 4. Dependence of the average pressure resistance

values of the briquettes on the binder content
Results presented in Figure 4. show that the

average value of pressure resistance of the
briquettes almost linearly rises with the increase of the mass fraction of the binding
agent, and is in the range from 21.9kg in the
sample containing 1% bentonite to 31.4kg in
the sample containing 10% bentonite.
406

PROCEEDINGS
Abrasion resistance results

Investigation of abrasion resistance of the briquettes is important for deciding on the possibility of storing the briquettes in sacks. The test is performed by sifting a sample of 100g briquette on a 2mm sieve. After sifting during 5
min on a laboratorial mechanical sieve, the content of the new -2mm class is measured. [3] Figure 5. shows dependence of abrasion resistance on the mass fraction of the binding agent by means measuring the -2 mm class content
(which should not exceed 5%), expressed in % related to the briquettes mass.
Figure 5. Abrasion resistance of the briquettes depending on

the binder content
The results presented in Figure 5. show that

abrasion resistance of the limestone briquettes
almost linearly falls with the decrease of the
mass fraction of bentonite, and is in the range
from 2.14% of -2mm class in the sample containing 10% bentonite to 18.4% of -2mm class in the
sample containing 1% bentonite.
Results of investigation of solubility of the briquettes in water
The solubility in water of the briquettes was tested by immersing three briquettes from each group containing the
same binder fraction into the water and measuring time needed for complete disintegration of the briquettes.
Table 1. Dependence of the solubility in water on the binder content
Briquette
Binder content, %
Time for disintegration of the briquettes in water in minutes
1,0
>24h
>24h
>24h
2,5
20
13
22
5,0
22
35
55
10,0
50
41
>60
The results presented in Table 1. show that the longest time is needed for complete disintegration of the briquettes
containing 1% and 10% binding agent, while that period is significantly shorter for the samples containing 2.5% and
5% binder, so it leads to conclusion that the disintegration time in the sample containing 5% binding agent is satisfactory.
3. CONCLUSION
This paper presents results of investigation of mechanical properties of limestone briquettes for agricultural purposes, i.e. for the purpose of improvement of pH value of acidic soil.
Investigation of impact resistance of the briquettes showed that the sifted masses on the 2mm sieve openings (after sifting on the mechanical sieve), after 25 drops (which is an equivalent to impact resistance of briquettes), decrease with the increase of the mass fraction of the binding agent. The presented values are 26%
in the sample containing 1% bentonite, 14.68% in the sample containing 2.5% bentonite, 8.79% in the sample containing 5% bentonite and 2.26% in the sample containing 10% bentonite.
Investigation of resistance to pressure of the briquettes demonstrated that it generally rises with the increase of the mass fraction of the binding agent. The obtained values are 21.9kg/briquette in the sample
containing 1% bentonite, 22.3kg/briquette in the sample containing 2.5% bentonite, 24.7kg/briquette in the
sample containing 5% bentonite and 31.4kg/briquette in the sample containing 10% bentonite.
407

PROCEEDINGS
Investigation of abrasion resistance demonstrated that class -2mm content after sifting on the mechanical
sieve (which is an equivalent to abrasion resistance) increases with the increase of the mass fraction of the
binding agent. The obtained values of the -2mm mass fraction are 18.4% in the sample containing 1% bentonite, 11.26% in the sample containing 2.5% bentonite, 4.62% in the sample containing 5% bentonite and
2.14% in the sample containing 10% bentonite.
Overall results of testing of the mechanical properties of limestone briquettes indicate that values of the indicators
of mechanical properties of limestone briquettes rise with the increase of the mass fraction of the binding matter
in samples. It can also be observed that the rise is not linear, i.e. the samples with mass fraction of 5% of the binding agent show almost linear rise, while in the samples containing more than 5% of the binding agent that trend is
minor. This leads to conclusion that there is no need to produce briquettes with over 5% of binding agent content
since it does not result in significant improvement of the mechanical properties.
Note:
The results presented in this paper were obtained during realization of the Technology development project No. TR-34013 financed by the Ministry of Science of the Republic of Serbia.
4. REFERENCES
[1]
Vladimir J.: at al. The possibility of getting pellets from fine ground South Korean Ca carbonate sample. In Papers from the VIII Balkan
Conference. Belgrade. 1999.
[2]
Mihajlo C., Dejan S., Ivana S., Stevan . Investigation of conditions for producing pellets from grinded limestone for ground calcification. Report. Institute of Mining and and Xilia. Belgrade. 2002.
[3]
Albert K.B., Langford D. Pelletizing limestone fines. Pennsylvania. Mars Mineral, Mars. 1998.
[4]
Nyle B.C. . The Nature and Properties of Soils. Macmillan Publishers Ltd. 232-235. London. 1998.
408

PROCEEDINGS
EVALUATING THE NOISE FROM BLOCK CUTTING MACHINES

USING THE PHYSICO-MECHANICAL ROCK PROPERTIES
ABSTRACT
1
Sair KAHRAMAN
M. Suat DELIBALTA2
Ramazan COMAKLI3
Mining Engineering Depart., Hacettepe

University, Ankara, Turkey
1
sairkahraman@yahoo.com 2 msdelibalta@nigde.edu.tr 3
rcomakli@nigde.edu.tr
Millions of employees in the World are exposed to noise at work. Noise affects humans both physically and psychologically, whose impacts vary from
person to person. Block cutting machine is one of the most important noise
sources in the stone processing factories. In this study, the assessability of
the noise from the block cutting machines in the stone processing factories
using the physico-mechanical rock properties was investigated.
The noise levels of some block cutting machines were firstly measured during the cutting of the three different rocks. Then, core samples of the same
rocks were cut by an automatic cutting machine in the laboratory and noise
levels were measured. A conversion factor was obtained by dividing the site
noise levels by the laboratory noise levels.
Then, fifty six different rocks were cut by an automatic cutting machine in
the laboratory and noise levels were measured. The physico-mechanical
properties of rock samples were also measured in the laboratory. The rocks
properties and the laboratory noise level were evaluated using the regression
analysis.
Strong correlations were found between the laboratory noise level and the
physico-mechanical rock properties. The noise level increases with increasing
rock strength, P-wave velocity, and density. However, increasing porosity
decreases the noise level. It was concluded that the laboratory noise level for
a new rock type to be cut can be estimated using the reliable relations derived. Then, the laboratory noise level can be converted to the site noise
level using the derived conversion factor.
Keywords
Block cutting machines, Noise level,
Physico-mechanical rock properties, Regression analysis
1. INTRODUCTION
About 20% of European labors are exposed to noise so loud that they would have to raise their voice to talk to other people. Exposure to noise is especially common in the construction and manufacturing sectors [1]. Noise affects
humans both physically and psychologically, whose impacts vary from person to person. Exposure to excessive
noise for a short time can cause temporary hearing loss, while long-term exposure to loud noise, or short exposures
to very loud noises, can cause permanent hearing loss. In addition to hearing loss, exposure to noise in the workplace can cause a variety of other problems, including chronic health problems.
The level of noise allowed by most countries' noise standards is generally 85-90 dB over an eight-hour workday.
Block cutting machine is one of the most important noise sources in the stone processing factories. The noise levels
of these machines during cutting the rock are generally higher than the allowable level of noise.
In the literature, there are some studies on the formation characterization by analyzing the noise or acoustic waves
during drilling oil and gas industries [3-7]. On the other hand, some researchers [8-12] indicated that there are correlations between the rock properties and the noise produced by coal miner and drilling machine.
Estimating the noise level of the block cutting machine during the cutting a new rock type is useful for the noise
management in the stone processing plants. In this study, the assessability of the noise from the block cutting machines using the physico-mechanical rock properties was investigated. Since the limited types of rocks were cut in
409

PROCEEDINGS
the factories, to assess the site noise is very difficult using the physico-mechanical rock properties. For this reason,
a methodology to be explained following was applied.
2. FIELD STUDIES
Noise measurement in the field
Two stone processing plants located in Kayseri City of Turkey were visited for the site studies. The site noise levels
of block cutting machines were recorded during cutting the three different limestone blocks. The measurements
were carried out at a distance of two meters from the machine. The levels of site noise are given in Table 1.
Table 1. The site noise levels.
Factory name
Rock Type
Rock Location
Site Noise Level (dB)
Stonex
Limestone
Yahyali
99.0
Toros
Limestone
Amasya
98.3
Toros
Travertine
Bogazliyan
96.8
Sampling
Block samples of rocks were collected from natural outcrops, stone and marble quarries, and stone processing
plants in Nigde, Kayseri, Konya, Antalya and Afyon areas of Turkey for the laboratory testing. Block samples were
inspected for macroscopic defects to provide test specimens free from fractures, partings or alteration zones, A
total of 56 different rock types were sampled, 14 of which were igneous, 14 of which were sedimentary, 12 of which
were metamorphic, and 16 of which were pyroclastics.
3. EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES
Uniaxial compressive strength test
Rock blocks were cored perpendicular to any visible bedding or weakness plane in the laboratory. Uniaxial compressive strength (UCS) tests were conducted on trimmed core samples, which had a diameter of 38 mm and a lengthto-diameter ratio of 2-2.5. The stress rate was applied within the limits of 0.5-1.0 MPa/s. The tests were repeated at
least five times for each rock type and the average value was recorded as the UCS.
Brazilian tensile strength test
Brazilian tensile strength (BTS) tests were conducted on core samples having a diameter of 38 mm and a height to
diameter ratio of 0.5-1.0. A tensile loading rate of 200 N/s was applied until the failure occurred. At least five samples were tested for each rock type and the results were averaged.
Point load test
The samples cored perpendicular to any visible weakness plane and the samples having weakness plane were discarded. The diametral point load test was carried out on the cores having a diameter of 38 mm and a length-todiameter ratio of 1.2. The results were corrected to a specimen diameter of 50 mm. The tests were repeated at
least seven times for each rock type and the average value was recorded as the point load strength (Is).
Ultrasonic test
P-wave velocities (VP) were measured on the samples having a diameter of 38 mm and a length of 76 mm. End surfaces of the core samples were polished sufficiently smooth plane to provide good coupling. In the tests, PUNDIT 6
instrument and two transducers (a transmitter and a receiver) having a frequency of 1 MHz were used. A good
acoustic coupling between the transducer face and the soil surface is necessary for the accuracy of transit time
measurement. Stiffer grease was used as a coupling agent in this study. Transducers were pressed to either end of
the sample and the pulse transit time was recorded. The tests were repeated three times for each rock type and
average value was taken as the P-wave velocity value.
Density test
Trimmed core samples were used in the determination of dry density. The specimen volume was calculated from an
average of several calliper readings. The dry weight of the specimen was determined by a balance, capable of
weighing to an accuracy of 0.01 of the sample weight. The density values were obtained from the ratio of the spec-
410

PROCEEDINGS
imen weight to the specimen volume. The density tests were repeated three times for each rock type and the average value was recorded as the density value.
Porosity test
Porosity values were determined using saturation and calliper techniques. Pore volumes were calculated from dry
and saturated weights and sample volumes were obtained from calliper readings. The porosity values were obtained from the ratio of the pore volumes to the specimen volume. Three samples were tested for each rock type
and the results were averaged.
Noise measurement test
NX core samples were cut using an automatic cutting machine with a diamond saw of 300 mm (Figure 1). The rotational speed of the saw was 2750 rpm and the advancing rate of the saw was 10 mm/min. The noise level was continuously measured by a sound level meter during cutting of the core sample. The measurements were repeated
three times (two times for some samples) and the results were averaged for each rock type.
Figure 1. The automatic cutting machine used in the tests.
4. RESULTS AND EVALUATION

The noise level, UCS, BTS, Is, VP, density and porosity values have wide ranges. The noise level values range from
74.7 dB for the Nevsehir Rosa to 89 dB for the Porrino/Spain Granite. The UCS values range from 5.2 MPa for the
Aktas/Nigde Pyroclastics to 210.6 MPa for the Kilavuzkoy/Nigde Serpentinite. The BTS values range from 0.9 MPa
for the Aktas/Nigde Pyroclastics to 18.1 MPa for the Kilavuzkoy/Nigde Serpentinite. The Is values range from 1.0
MPa for the Aktas/Nigde Pyroclastics to 14.4 MPa for the Unknown Granite. The VP values range from 1.3 km/s for
the Aktas/Nigde Pyroclastics to 6.3 km/s for the Amasya Limestone. The density values range from 1.17 g/cm3 for
the Aktas/Nigde Pyroclastics to 2.92 g/cm3 for the Uckapili/Nigde Metagabro. The porosity values range from 0.06
% for the Altintas/Kutahya Marble to 41.8 % for the Aktas/Nigde Pyroclastics.
411

PROCEEDINGS
As stated above, to assess the site noise from the rock properties is very difficult because the limited types of rocks
were cut in each stone processing plant. For this reason a conversion factor which converts the laboratory noise
level to the site noise level was developed. The explaination of the development of the conversion factor is given
following: As shown in Table 1 the site noise levels of block cutting machines during the cutting of the three different limestones is already measured. The laboratory noise levels of the same rocks are also given in Table 2. The site
noise levels were divided into the laboratory noise levels and the results were averaged. The average value of 1.16
was described as conversion factor. This means that the site noise level is 16 % higher than the laboratory noise
level. The derivation of conversion factor is clearly given in Table 2.
Table 2. The derivation of conversion factor.
Factory
name
Rock Type
Rock Location
NLS -Site Noise Level

(dB)
NLL- Lab. Noise Level

(dB)
NLS/
NLL
Stonex
Limestone
Yahyali
99.0
84.1
1.18
Toros
Limestone
Amasya
98.3
84.8
1.16
Toros
Travertine
Bogazliyan
96.8
84.2
1.15
Average NLS/ NLL

(Conversion Factor)
1.16
The test results were analyzed using the method of least squares regression. The UCS, BTS, Is, VP, density and porosity values were correlated with the noise level. Linear, logarithmic, exponential and power curve fitting approximations were executed and the best approximation equation with highest correlation coefficient was determined for
each regression.
The UCS, BTS, Is values strongly correlated with the noise level (Figures 2-4). The relations follow a power function.
Increasing rock strength increases the noise level. The equations of the curves are:
NL 68.52UCS 0.047 r = 0.84
(1)
NL 74 .80 BTS 0.056 r = 0.83
(2)
NL 75.95I S0.058 r = 0.83
(3)
where NL is the noise level (dB), UCS is the uniaxial compressive strength (MPa), BTS is the tensile strength (MPa), and Is is the point load strength
(MPa).
The relation between the noise level and the VP has a moderate correlation coefficient. The relation follow a power
function (Figure 5). Increasing rock strength increases the noise level. The equation of the curve is:
NL 74.34VP0.081 r = 0.73
(4)
where NL is the noise level (dB) and VP is the P-wave velocity (km/s).
A strong linear relation between the density and the noise level was found (Figure 6). Increasing density increases
the noise level. The equation of the line is:
NL 7.42 65 .93 r = 0.89
(5)
3
where NL is the noise level (dB) and is the density (g/cm ).
As shown in Figure 7, a strong relation between the porosity and the noise level was found. The relation follows an
inverse linear function. Increasing porosity decreases the noise level. The equation of the line is:
NL 0.31n 85.57 r = 0.87
(6)
where NL is the noise level (dB) and n is the porosity (%).
412

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. The relation between the noise level and UCS.
Figure 3. The relation between the noise level and BTS.
Figure 4. The relation between the noise level and Is.
Figure 5. The relation between the noise level and Vp.
Figure 6. The relation between the noise level and density.
Figure 7. The relation between the noise level and porosity.
413

PROCEEDINGS
5. CONCLUSIONS
Noise measurements were performed on site and in the laboratory during cutting fifty six different rock types in
order to evaluate the noise from the block cutting machines in the stone processing factories using the physicomechanical rock properties, The site noise levels were divided into the laboratory noise levels and the results were
averaged. The average value of 1.16 was described as conversion factor. Statistical analysis indicates that there are
strong correlations between the noise level from cutting and the physico-mechanical rock properties. The noise
level increases with increasing rock strength, P-wave velocity, and density. However, increasing porosity decreases
the noise level.
It was concluded that the laboratory noise level for a new rock type to be cut can be estimated using the reliable
relations derived. Then, the laboratory noise level can be converted to the site noise level using the derived conversion factor.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The automatic cutting machine used in the study was financed by Alexander von Humboldt Foundation.
REFERENCES
[1]
ESWC: The third European survey on working conditions. European Foundation for the Improvement of Living and Working Conditions. 2000.
[2]
ILO. http://actrav.itcilo.org/actrav-english/telearn/osh/noise/nomain.htm. January 2011.
[3]
Asanuma H, Niitsuma H.: Triaxial seismic measurement while drilling and estimation of subsurface structure. Geothermal Science &
Technology, 1995, 5(1-2), pp. 31-51.
[4]
Hsu K.: Sonic-while-drilling tool detects overpressured formations. Oil & Gas Journal, 1997, 95(31), pp. 5967.
[5]
Aleotti L., Poletto F., Miranda F., Corubolo P., Abramo F., Craglietto A.: Seismic while drilling technology: use and analysis of the drillbit seismic source in a cross-holesurvey. Geophysical Prospecting, 1999, 47, pp. 2539.
[6]
Hand M., Rueter C., Evans B.J., Dodds K., Addis T.: Look-ahead prediction of pore pressure while drilling: Assessment of existing and
promising technologies. Doc GRI-99/0042, Gas Research Institute, Chicago; 1999.
[7]
Tsuru T., Kozawa T.: Noise characterization in SWD survey. Society of Exploration Geophysicists of Japan, Tokyo, Butsuri-Tansa; Geophysical Exploration, 1998, 51(1), pp. 45-54.
[8]
Roy S., Adhikari G.R.: Worker noise exposures from diesel and electric surface coal mining machinery. Noise Control Engineering
Journal, 2007, 55(5), pp. 434-437.
[9]
Vardhan H., Murthy ChSN.: An experimental investigation of jackhammer drill noise with special emphasis on drilling in rocks of different compressive strengths. Noise Control Engineering Journal, 2007, 55(3), pp. 282-293.
[10] Vardhan H., Adhikari G.R., Raj M.G.: Estimating rock properties using sound levels produced during drilling. Int. J. Rock Mech. Min. Sci.,
2009, 46, pp. 604-612.
[11] Kumar B.R., Vardhan H., Govindaraj, M.: Sound level produced during rock drilling vis--vis rock properties Eng. Geol., 2011, 123, pp.
333-337.
[12] Kumar B.R., Vardhan H., Govindaraj, M.: Prediction of uniaxial compressive strength, tensile strength and porosity of sedimentary
rocks using sound level produced during rotary drilling. Rock. Mech. Rock Eng., 2011, 44, pp. 613-620.
414

PROCEEDINGS
POSSIBILITY OF USING LIMESTONE FROM

VOLUJICA- ULCINJ DEPOSIT AS FILLER
IN VARIOUS INDUSTRY BRANCHES
ABSTRACT
Dragan S. RADULOVI1
Slavica R. MIHAJLOVI1,
Vladimir D. JOVANOVI1
Duica R. VUINI2
Institute for Technology of Nuclear and Other

Mineral Raw Materials, 86 Franshet d Esperey St.,
11000 Belgrade, Serbia, d.radulovic@itnms.ac.rs
1
11000 Belgrade, Serbia, s.mihajlovic@itnms.ac.rs
1
11000 Belgrade, Serbia, v.jovanovic@itnms.ac.rs
2
Faculty of Mining and Geology - University of
Belgrade, 7 Djusina St., 11000 Belgrade, Serbia,
dvucinic@rgf.bg.ac.rs
This paper presents results of investigations of the possibility of using Volujica-Ulcinj limestone (Republic Montenegro) as filler in various industry branches. Micronization methods, granulometric composition, oil and water absorption and degree of whiteness were investigated, and chemical and thermal analyses (DT/TG) were performed.
Physico-chemical properties of this limestone classify it among high
quality carbonate raw materials with high CaCO3 content of 97.87%,
as well as MgO content of 1.04% (2,18% content of MgCO3) and low
silicate content (SiO2 0.40%).
Its quality satisfies requirements of standards on using of calcium
carbonate as filler in industry of paints and coatings; paper industry;
rubber and PVC industry; glass industry; production of mineral fertilizers; foundry industry; sugar industry and metallurgy.
Due to the low degree of whiteness (81.65%) Volujica limestone
cannot be used in pharmaceutical and cosmetics industry. Due to
relatively high content of heavy metals, Pb (55 ppm), Cu (10 ppm), Ni
(23ppm) and Cd (5 ppm), Volujica limestone cannot be used, in production of cattle feed and for neutralization of acidic soils.
Keywords
Filler, Industrial use, Limestone, Standards
1. INTRODUCTION
Republic of Montenegro has big reserves of limestone in coastal area and in south of the territory [1]. Even though
deposits are huge, limestone is mainly used in construction as construction stone, and to some extent as
architectural stone [2]. Since calcium carbonate as filler is much more expensive than construction stone, relevant
institutions of Montenegro initiated investigations of the possibility of using limestone as filler [3]. On the basis of
the obtained results it was evaluated whether it can be used as filler in accordance with standards (SRPS) in various
industry branches [3-6].
Volujica-Ulcinj deposit consists of carbonate sediments, mostly limestone ones, and less dolomitic sediments. Ore
reserves are estimated at about 5,000,000 t of limestone [1]. The aim of investigations presented in this paper was
to determine the possibility of using raw material as filler in various industry branches.
2. EXPERIMENTAL
Materials and methods
Starting limestone sample used in investigations was from Volujica - Ulcinj deposit. First, its specific volumetric
weight (density) and granulometric composition were determined. Its density was measured by pycnometer with
xylol as fluid, granulometric composition was determined by Tyler screen [7]. Granulometric composition of the
micronized sample was determined by sieve size 63 m, classification on Cyclosizer and Bach elutriator. Limestone
filler quality was determined by chemical analysis. Thermal (DT/TG) analysis of the sample was performed using Ne-
416

PROCEEDINGS
tzsch-Simultaneous Thermal Analysis- STA 409 EP device, with heating speed of T= 10 0C/min, in temperature
interval from 20 to 1000 0C. Degree of whiteness was determined by whiteness meter, according to MgO 100%
standard.
Investigation of physical properties of starting sample
Specific volumetric weight of the starting sample is = 2,673 g/cm3
Table 1. Granulometric-composition of the initial sample Volujica- Ulcinj
Size classmm
M, %
M, %
+ 22,2
-22,2 + 19,1
M, %
- 19,1 + 15,9
1,99
1,99
100,00
- 15,9 + 12,7
9,53
11,52
98,01
- 12,7 + 9,52
23,57
35,09
88,48
- 9,52 + 7,93
9,11
44,20
64,91
- 7,93 + 5,0
15,99
60,19
55,80
39,81
- 5,0 + 3,36
14,53
74,72
- 3,36+ 2,38
5,77
80,49
25,28
- 2,38+ 1,6
5,96
86,45
19,51
- 1,6+ 1,19
4,13
90,58
13,55
- 1,19+ 0,63
5,36
95,94
9,42
- 0,63 + 0,4
1,85
97,79
4,06
- 0,4 + 0,3
1,14
98,93
2,21
- 0,300 + 0,200
0,82
99,75
1,07
- 0,200 + 0,000
0,25
100,00
0,25
Feed
100,00
Based on data from the table is drown a diagram of particle size distribution shown in Figure 1, for samples of limestone Volujica. In Figure 1, shows the direct curve of particle size distribution and cumulative curves and average
sample of outflow and flow limestone deposits "Volujica"-Ulcinj. From the intersection of cumulative curves average outflow and flow determined that the average diameter of the sample of limestone dsr = 6.89 mm, and upper
size limit of the sample was 14.46 mm.
Granulometric composition"Volujica"
100
90
80
Mass, %
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0
10
15
20
25
Grain size class, mm

Direct curve
Cumulative curve undersize
Cumulative curve oversize
Figure 1. The curves of particle size-composition of the starting sample "Volujica- Ulcinj [1]
417

PROCEEDINGS
Technological investigations
For investigations of the possibility of using limestone as filler in various industry branches limestone was
micronized, and thus obtained product were subjected to the following physico-chemical characterization:
chemical analysis, thermal (DT/TG) analysis, determination of granulometric composition, degree of whiteness and absorption of oil and water.
Determining granulometric composition of micronized sample
Size class m
M, %
M, %
M, %
+ 63
33,61
33,61
100,00
-63+44
2,06
35,67
66,39
-44+33
5,57
41,24
64,33
-33+23
5,84
47,08
58,76
-23+15
3,92
51,00
52,92
-15+11
3,06
54,06
49,00
-11+5,7
29,40
83,46
45,94
-5,7+0
16,54
100,00
16,54
Feed
100,00
Table 2. Granulometric composition of grinded sample Volujica
Granulometric composition of the micronized products showed that

the finest class -5.7 m content is around 16,5%.
Determining the degree of whiteness

No
mark of the sample
whiteness according
MgO 100%
1.
Volujica-1
81.85
Volujica -2
81.20
Volujica -3
81.90
Average value
81.65
Table 3. The degree of whiteness the limestone samples
Whiteness was assessed on three samples of the limestone from

deposit "Volujica", and the result is shown in Table 3.
Determination of absorption water and oil

In order to determine absorption water and oil are also used three samples of the limestone from deposit
"Volujica", and the results are shown in Tables 4 and 5.
Table 4. Absorption of the oil of samples of limestone
No.
mark of the sample
absorption of the oil, %
1.
Volujica-1
13,22
2.
Volujica -2
13,55
3.
Volujica -3
13,28
Average value
13,35
Table 5. Absorption of the water of samples of limestone
No
mark of the sample
absorption of the water, %
1.
Volujica-1
18,31
2.
Volujica -2
18,56
3.
Volujica -3
18,48
Average value
18,45
418

PROCEEDINGS
Thermal (DT/TG) analysis

Results of thermal (DTA/TG) analysis of the micronized sample Volujica limestone are presented as a diagram in
Figure 2.
Figure 2. DTA/TG diagram of Volujica limestone sample [1]
In Figure 2 are presents the TG and DTA diagrams of the initial sample of limestone. DTA diagram (Figure 2.) shows
endothermic peak with maximum at 868 0C, which is attributed to phase transformation of calcite (CaCO3) into
CaO, according to the following reaction:
CaCO3 CaO CO2
(1)
This phase transformation is accompanied by weight loss of 43.32% (TG diagram, Figure 2) in the temperature
range from 650 0C to 900 0C.
Chemical analysis
Results of chemical analysis of the micronized limestone Volujica with contents of main components and
damaging components are presented in Tables 6. and 7.
Table 6. Chemical composition of main components of limestone sample
Comp.
CaO
CaCO3
CO2
MgO
Fe2O3
Al2O3
SiO2
K2 O
Na2O
TiO2
P2O5
R2O3
LOI
Content, %
54,84
97,87
43,38
1,04
0,031
0,085
0,40
0,0096
0,032
<0,02
<0,005
0,092
43,46
Table 7. Chemical composition of damaging components of limestone sample

Comp.
Cu
Mn
Ni
Cr
Mo
Sb
Pb
Cd
pH
Fe rast.
As
Hg
Content,
%
13ppm
10ppm
<0,01%
<0,005
23
ppm
3
ppm
<50
ppm
<25
ppm
55
ppm
5
ppm
9,14
0,024%
Results of physico-chemical characterization of Volujica limestone sample and the required filler quality
(Standards) lead to conclusion that this limestone is of good quality. Namely, its CaCO3 content is high- 97.87%, and
MgCO3 (2,18%) and silicates (SiO2 0.40%) content low. However, relatively high content of heavy metals was found,
above all Pb (55 ppm), Ni (23 ppm), Cu (13 ppm) and Cd (5 ppm).

Limestone filler quality for each industry branch is defined by appropriate standards or requirements of
manufacturers who use limestone as raw material in their production cycle. Limestone quality requirements are
defined as content of useful and damaging components, i.e. as chemical composition, as well as the necessary size
class.
419

PROCEEDINGS
Evaluation of Volujica-Ulcinj limestone filler quality based on chemical composition

According to the results presented above, limestone from Volujica Ulcinj deposit can be used in the following
industries:
in industry of paints and coatings; it is among high quality raw materials in accordance with market and
standard requirements (SRPS B.B6.032);
in paper industry; it is among A quality, while for the highest B, C i D quality classes its whiteness degree is
not satisfying (SRPS B.B6.033);
in rubber and PVC industry; it satisfies the highest quality standards and market requirements (SRPS
B.B6.031);
in foundry industry; it belongs to the highest class I in accordance with market requirements imposed by
standard (SRPS B.B6.012);
in sugar industry; it is among the II class (due to the increased MgO content) in accordance with market and
standard requirements (SRPS B.B6.013);
in metallurgy; it is in the highest class I in accordance with market requirements imposed by standards (SRPS
B.B6.011);
in production of glass; due to the increased Fe2O3 and MgO content it is in quality category IV and V in accordance with market requirements imposed by standards (SRPS B.B6.020);
Limestone from Volujica Ulcinj deposit cannot be used:
in pharmaceutical and cosmetics industry because its low whiteness degree and increased content of heavy
metals Pb and Cd relative to market requirements defined by standard (SRPS B.B6.034);
for production of mineral fertilizers because of the increased MgO content, which is strictly defined by manufacturers requirements (Azotara Panevo).
in production of cattle feed because of the increased content of heavy metals Pb, Cu and Cd, which is very
strictly defined for this use (Official Gazette of the Republic of Serbia 31/78, 6/81, 2/90, 20/00);
for neutralization of acidic soils; because of the increased content of MgO as biogenic element and heavy
metals Pb, Ni and Cd, the contents of which are very strictly defined (Official Gazette of the Republic of
Serbia 60/2000).
Evaluation of Volujica-Ulcinj limestone filler quality based on users requirements for the necessary raw material
size (fineness)
Some industries require finely micronized limestone, while others require raw material of larger particle size,
sometimes even coarse. Following industries use ground and micronized limestone:
for paints and coatings industry; A quality 99.5% of - 20m, B quality 97% of -20m and 0.01% of + 44m;
for paper industry for quality categorie A the required fineness is 100% of -45m, and 75% of -10m; rubber
and PVC industry requires for A and B quality raw material to be 99.5% of -45m, while for C and D quality
upper limit limestone size is 45m;
for glass industry, since Volujica limestone corresponds to quality IV and V according to its chemical composition, there is predefined granulometric composition for these quality classes, subdivided into six subclasses in size range from -1+0.1mm;
Following industries demand larger sizes and coarse limestone:
for foundry industry, raw material should be size -50+30 mm, with class 30 mm content up to 5%<;
for sugar industry, limestone is to be classified into six subclasses in size range from -215+63mm, with maximum fine content in each subclass up to 8%;
metallurgy uses limestone consisting of five subclasses in size range from -70+0.1mm.
4. CONCLUSION
Limestone from Volujica-Ulcinj deposit according to its physico-chemical properties belongs to high quality
carbonate raw material with high content of CaCO3 of 97.87%, and low content of MgCO3 of 2.18% and silicates
(SiO2 0.40%). It meets the requirements of standards for using calcium carbonates as fillers in industry of paints and
coatings; paper industry, rubber and PVC industry; production of mineral fertilizers; foundry industry; sugar industry
420

PROCEEDINGS
and metallurgy. According to market demand and standards it belongs to high quality raw material in industry of
paints and coatings, rubber and PVC, foundry industry and metallurgy. However for paper and sugar industry and
glass production it does not conform to standards. Because of increased MgO content Volujica limestone cannot
be used in fertilizers industry. Due to low whiteness degree and increased content of heavy metals Pb (55 ppm) and
Cd (5 ppm) Volujica limestone cannot be used in pharmaceutical and cosmetics industry. Due to high content of
heavy metals Pb (55 ppm) Cu (13ppm) and Cd (5 ppm), Volujica limestone cannot be used in production of cattle
feed. Due to high content of heavy metals Pb (55 ppm), Ni (23 ppm) and Cd (5 ppm), as well as biogenic elements
MgO (1.04%), Volujica limestone cannot be used for neutralization of acidic soils
Obtaining of wide range of fillers for various industry branches would provide products which are more expensive
per mass unit than products that have been used until now up to 10 times.
Acknowledgments
This paper is a result of investigations under projects TR31003:Development of technologies and products based
on mineral raw materials and waste biomass for protection of natural resources for safe food production, and TR
34013 :Development of technological processes for obtaining of ecological materials based on nonmetallic
minerals, financed by the Ministry of Education and Science of the Republic of Serbia from 2011-2014.
REFERENCES
[1]
Izvetaj o ispitivanju krenjaka sa podruja Crne Gore, za primenu kao punioca u razliitim granama industrije, Arhiva ITNMS,
Beograd, 2011.
[2]
http://geology.com/usgs/limestone/
[3]
Slavica Mihajlovi:Fiziko-hemijsko modifikovanje kalcita stearinskom kiselinom, doktorska disertacija, Rudarsko-geoloki fakultet
Beograd, 2011.
[4]
ivko T. Sekuli: Kalcijum karbonatne i kvarcne sirovine i njihova primena, Monografija, ISBN 978-86-82867-24-1, ITNMS, Beograd,
2011., str. 21-75.
[5]
www.patentgenius.com/patent/4026762Use of ground limestone as a filler in paper
[6]
http://minerals.usgs.gov/minerals/pubs/commodity/stone_crushed/mcs-2010-stonc.pdf
[7]
Radica Milosavljevi:Metode ispitivanja mineralnih sirovina u pripremi mineralnih sirovina, Rudarsko-geoloki fakultet Beograd,
1974.
421

PROCEEDINGS
LENDAVA
- THE FIRST GEOTHERMAL CITY IN SLOVENIA
ABSTRACT
Ass.prof. eljko VUKELI1
Marijan KRALJI2
Ass.prof. Evgen DERVARI1
UL, Faculty of Natural sciences and

Engineering, Department of Geotechnology and Mining, Akereva 12,
LJUBLJANA
2
NAFTA GEOTERM, Mlinska ulica 5
LENDAVA
Corresponding Author's E-mail: zeljko.vukelic@ntf.uni-lj.si
In 1994, however, the construction of the production of geothermal wells

Lendava-2g (Le-2g) in Lendava started to build the geothermal system for
heating of residential and commercial premises. Since then continual upgrading and the extension of the geothermal system and the geothermal
district heating Lendava city has been done.
Thus, Lendava became the first geothermal city in Slovenia where all the
major users will be gradually connected to the geothermal heating system. In
2007 after determining the optimal location and the construction of relevant projects, a geothermal reinjection well Le-3g was built in Lendava, the
first of this kind and purpose in Slovenia. Project was finished in 2011.
In Lendava the geothermal heating system for residential and commercial
premises is in the construction phase. Currently consumers are connected to
2
the system of 45000 m total heating. In view of the large energy potential
available, at least 50000 MWht/year (in the t - 30C) gradually new consumers will be connected to the system.
At the same time, with the expansion of the district heating system network,
a low temperature system is being built as well. This will significantly increase the efficiency of the entire system and thereby improve the economics of exploitation of geothermal energy.
Keywords
Geothermal Energy, Heating, Well, Reinjection, Thermal Water
1. INTRODUCTION
The 2nd half of the century marks a period when in NE Slovenia the research of hydrocarbon deposits has been undertaken and a number of ground bed thermal thermo-mineral water has been discovered. Thus, in this part of
Slovenia sports and recreational and health centers in Moravske Toplice, Radenci, Ptuj, Banovci, V. Nedelja, Lendava and Petiovci have been built in which the thermo mineral water was mainly used for balneological, sports and
recreational purposes. Only a few years later the discovered thermo mineral water started to apply for other purposes namely, for heating greenhouses and heating of hotel premises.
In 1994, however, the construction of the production of geothermal wells Lendava-2g (Le-2g) in Lendava started to
build the geothermal system for heating of residential and commercial premises. Since then continual upgrading
and the extension of the geothermal system and the geothermal district heating Lendava city has been done. Thus,
Lendava became the first geothermal city in Slovenia where all the major users will be gradually connected to the
geothermal heating system.
2. BASIC FACILITIES OF THE GEOTHERMAL SYSTEM IN LENDAVA

The geothermal system in Lendava consists of the following facilities:
Geothermal production well Lendava-2g (Le-2g)
geothermal boiler room
hot water surface pipe system
422

PROCEEDINGS
Geothermal reinjection well Lendava-3g (Le-3g)

In the construction phase are the following:
Surface reinjection system
The system for monitoring the production aquifers.
A simplified technological scheme of the geothermal system in Lendava is shown in Fig. 1.
Figure 1. A simplified technological scheme of the geothermal system in Lendava is shown in
The geothermal production well Le-2g

The geothermal production well Le-2g was built in 1994 to a depth of 1503.6 m in the narrow center of Lendava.
The accompanying geological drilling discovered that in the short-range center of Lendava to a depth of 800 m
sediments of sand and clay in the interval from 800 m to a final well depth of sandstone and marl sediments are
present. The mentioned geological litological composition of underground layers was also confirmed by well-log
measurements that were made after the completion of drilling wells. Based on the monitoring data of drilling and
geological data obtained in well-log measurements, the deposits of thermo mineral water-aquifers (sand and sandstone, saturated with water) have been identified in the interval from 800 - 1200 m. In the interval from 1200 m to
the final depth of the well sandstone, saturated with water, but with weak collector characteristics have been identified on certain locations. Therefore, steel pipes have been installed into the well, which are in the aquifer intervals
from 800 m to a final depth was slotted (pipe with cut side holes) with which the thermo mineral flow of water from
aquifers in the drill hole is enabled.
After the casing of the borehole followed the initiating of influx of water into the well and the activation of wells in
a way that it reduced the hydrostatic pressure column of fluid in the well through the replacement of mud with
water and air lift. With this a relatively large influx of thermo-mineral water was achieved from the well in the quantity of 10.7 l/s/bar. After the activation of the well and by subsequently carried out pumping tests found the water
temperature at the well head from 62C to 69C (depending on the pumping quantities), and that the pouring thermo mineral water is of low mineralization with small amounts of dissolved gas (mainly CO2).
Geological (litological), technical and production profile of well Le-2g are shown in figure 2.
423

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Geological (litological), technical and production profile of well Le-2g
Proizvodnost vrtine q (l/s)
h1
q1
h2
q2
Temperatura na ustju vrtine t (C)
Proizvodnost vrtine (l/s)
Znianje nivoja vode v vrtini h (m)
The productivity of well Le-2g depending on the reduction of water level in the well (depression) is shown in the
diagram in Fig. 3 and the water temperature at the well head depending of well productivity in fig. 4.
t1
t2
q1
q2
Figure 3. Productivity of well Le-2g
Figure 4. Temperature at the well head Le-2g
x axis: well productivity

y axis: reduction of water level
x axis: water temperature

y axis: productivity of the well
424

PROCEEDINGS
On the basis of the productivity of the well and the temperature of water an energy capacity or the thermal power
of the well was found as follows:
by cooling of water for 30C; Pt = 6, MWt = 48 l / s, which can provide 50000 MWht/year and replaces annually
4.75 million Sm3 of natural gas;
by cooling of water for 50C, Pt = 10 MWt, which can provide 84000 MWht/year and replaces annually 7.92
million Sm3 of natural gas.
With respect to the observed large energy potential of the well, immediately after the construction of the well the
planning and the implementation of the geothermal district heating systems in Lendava were underway.
Geothermal-gas boiler room
The geothermal-gas boiler room was built nearby the geothermal production well Le-2g.
Boiler room is equipped with the following equipment:
reservoir with thermo-mineral water with the capacity of 50 m3;
heat exchangers: 1 x 2.70 MWt, 1 x 0.45 MWt, 1 x 0.17 MWt and at the consumers of heat: 1 x 1.0 MWt and 1 x
0.5 MWt;
gas boilers: 2 x 1.32 MWt;
primary and secondary circulation system with computer-driven regulation.
The system is configured so that the necessary heat is assured by the thermo-mineral water from Le-2g well and the
gas-boilers are initiated only in the event of failure of the geothermal system or in the case of additional heat at
peak consumption (in the case of extremely low external temperatures).
In the assembly phase, the high-temperature heat pump power of 0.5 MWt, with an input temperature to 50C and
the output temperature of 70C.
The high-temperature heat pump is installed in the system with the intention that the cooled water below 50C
that comes from the system, is re-raised to a higher level of temperature (above 70C) and is re-used for heating.
This will improve the overall efficiency of the geothermal system.
The schematic diagram of the geothermal-gas-boiler room is shown in Fig. 5 and the photographs of individual
parts of gas boiler room are shown in Fig. 6, 7 and 8.
SHEMATSKI PRIKAZ KOTLOVNICE
Figure 5. Schematic diagram of geothermal-gas-boiler room
425

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 6. Heat exchanger 2,7 MWt
Figure 7. Gas boilers 2 x 1,32 MWt
Figure 8. High temperature heat pump
Surface heat system

For the heat transfer (flow of thermo-mineral water) from the geothermal production well Le-2g to geothermal-gas
boiler room, and the transfer of heat from geothermal-gas-boiler room to individual consumers plastic heat insulated piping is used as follows:
Connecting pipeline from the well to the geothermal-gas boiler room of diameter 150 mm and a length of
100 m,
The pipeline of primary circuit of the geothermal gas boiler room to individual consumers with supply and
drain pipes of a diameter 150 and a total length of 2000.
The pipeline of secondary circuit from the geothermal-gas boiler room to the individual consumer with supply and drain pipes of diameter 150 mm and total length of 1200 m.
In the construction phase, an additional pipeline for the secondary circuit of the geothermal-gas boiler room
to the new consumers, with supply
and drain pipes of diameter 150 and
the total length of 2400 m.
The constructed surface heat system allows
the transfer of heat from the geothermalgas-boiler room to consumers and heating
2
of 45000 m of private and commercial
facility.
After upgrading the surface heat system,
which is in progress, it will be able to heat
additional 20000 m2 of private and commercial facility.
In the photograph of Lendava (Fig. 9) are
already identified the connected and future users of geothermal heat in Lendava.
Figure 9. Current users of geothermal heat (marked in

yellow) and future users of geothermal heat (marked in
red) in Lendava
426

PROCEEDINGS
Geothermal reinjection well Le-3g

A Geothermal system in which the heat is transmitted to the surface by pumping water from underground layers
(hydro-geothermal system) is renewable and ecologically only in case that the acquired thermal / thermo-mineral
water from the underground layers, following the heat transmission from the heat exchanger, returns back into the
underground layers.
With this system we:
maintain the energy potential of the production layer (aquifer) on the same level throughout the period of
exploitation and
prevent the pollution of surface aquifers with ecologically contaminated thermo-mineral water and air with
natural gases, which are often separated from the thermo-mineral water.
For the return of water back into the production aquifer it is necessary to build a reinjection system, which consists
of the geothermal reinjection well and the surface reinjection system.
The geothermal reinjection well is the most complex part of the reinjection system, which must be built so that it
has extremely good injection characteristics and so that the total quantity of water supplied is continuously being
pressed through the production aquifer with the lowest possible pressure.
To achieve this condition, it is necessary to determine and prepare: the optimal location of the reinjection well, the
drilling technology, well-log measurements, and the technical characteristics of the well and the drilling operations
of activation.
To determine the optimal location of the reinjection well in Lendava (well Le-3g) a few hydro geological studies,
hydrodynamic and thermodynamic models have been produced. Thus the optimal location of the Le-3g well was
determined; around 700 m north from the geothermal production well Le-2g.
The projected distribution of pressures and temperatures in the affected area of the geothermal system in Lendava, after the stabilization of pressure and temperatures at production and reinjection of thermal water in the quantity of 25 l/s, is shown in Fig. 10 and Fig. 11.
Figure 10. Provided distribution of pressure in the affected area of

the geothermal system in Lendava at production (from Le-2g) and
reinjection (to Le-3g) of thermo-mineral water in the quantity of 25
l/s.
Figure 11. Provided distribution of temperature in the affected are of

the geothermal system in Lendava at production (from Le-2g) and
reinjection (to Le-3g) of thermo mineral water in the quantity of 25 l/s
In 2007 after determining the optimal location and the construction of relevant projects, a geothermal reinjection
well Le-3g was built in Lendava, the first of this kind and purpose in Slovenia.
Although the litological composition of the drilled sediments of Le-2g well and Le-3g well are approximately the
same, the construction of Le-3g well was significantly more demanding due to the use of advanced drilling techniques and larger well diameter, complex geological monitoring and well-log measurements, installation of special
filters (slotted pipes) and the installation of sand filter and intensive separation activation of the well.
Geological (litological) and the technical profiles of Le-3g well are shown in Fig. 12.
427

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 12. Geological (litological) and technical profile of Le-3g well.
After the construction and the activation of the Le-3g well, pumping test and a test of injectivity was performed.
The injectivity of the well was found as shown in Figure 13.
I n je k t iv n o s t v r t in e q
0
10
20
30
40
( l/ s )
50
60
Tlak injektivnosti (bar)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 13. Injectivity of Le-3g well

x axis: injectivity of the well
y axis: injectivity pressure
Based on the given data, it is possible to stamp the cooled thermo mineral water in the quantities up to 25 l/s at
the pressure of 4 bars in the Le-3g well.
428

PROCEEDINGS
Surface reinjection system

For pressing the energy spent water (water that emitted the heat in heat exchanger), it is necessary to build a surface reinjection system, which consists of:
a collection tank for the return of thermo mineral water
filter system
injection pump
connecting pipes and
mesure-regulation system.
In fig. 14 the surface reinjection system at one geothermal location is shown.
Figure 14. Surface reinjection system
In Lendava, the surface reinjection system is in the phase of construction and it is the only remaining set which
must to be built so that the fully closed primary circuit is established:
the production bed,
production well,
the surface production-reinjection system
reinjection well,
the production layer.
This will enable the exploitation of renewable geothermal energy in accordance with the highest environmental
standards, that is, without a negative impact on the environment.
Monitoring system for production aquifers
For the monitoring of the production aquifers during the exploitation of the geothermal system in Lendava the
whole system is also in the construction phase. The monitoring system is consist of:
observation (monitoring) well,
depth measurement equipment,
a system for collecting and processing the measured data.
As observational (monitoring) wells 3 abandoned oil-gas research wells will be used which are at the appropriate
distance from the production-reinjection system (Fig. 15).
429

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 15. The position of production, reinjection and monitoring wells in Lendava
Observation (monitoring) wells G-1, DV-1 and PT-114 will be perforated in intervals of production aquifers, activated
and equipped with deep pressure and temperature gauges. With continuous monitoring of pressures and temperatures in the observation wells, continuous measurement of pressures, temperatures and flow rates in the production well Le-2g and the reinjection well Le-3g at the time, and with the periodic sampling and chemical analysis of
the pumped thermo-mineral water, the state of production aquifers with the intention of optimizing the exploitation of aquifers which is the basis for the optimal long-term exploitation of the entire geothermal system will be
accompanied.
3. CONCLUSION
In Lendava the geothermal heating system for residential and commercial premises is in the construction phase.
Currently consumers are connected to the system of 45000 m2 total heating. In view of the large energy potential
available, at least 50000 MWht/year (in the t 30C) gradually new consumers will be connected to the system.
At the same time, with the expansion of the district heating system network, a low temperature system is being
built as well. This will significantly increase the efficiency of the entire system and thereby improve the economics
of exploitation of geothermal energy.
In the construction phase is also the reinjection system as well as the monitoring system of production aquifers.
All this is necessary for the geothermal system in Lendava, which will provide unconventional, renewable and ecologically sound energy and thereby Lendava will become the first geothermal city in Slovenia.
LITERATURE
[1]
GeothermalThe Energy Under Our Feet Geothermal Resource Estimates for the United States: Bruce D. Green and R. Gerald Nix,
National Renewable Energy Laboratory, November 2006
[2]
Small geothermal power plants: Design, performance and economics: Ronald DiPhippo, Ph.D., University of Massachutts, june 1999
[3]
The geothermal power plant at Nesjavellir, Iceland: Claus Ballzus, Hreinn Frimannson, Gunnar Ingi Gunnarsson and Ingolfur Hrolfsson;
Proceedings World Geothermal Congress 2000 Kyushu - Tohoku, Japan, May 28 - June 10, 2000
[4]
Geothermal Power Generation: Dr. Burkhard Sanner; Renewable Energy Europe 2007 Madrid, June 26-28, 2007
[5]
Reinjection Technology - Process and Applications, Including Disposal of Coal Bed Methane Product Water: Nikos Warrence and
James W. Bauder; Department of Land Resources and Environmental Sciences Montana State University - Bozeman
[6]
Reinjection experiments in the basement geothermal reservoir, Tianjin, China: Wang Kun; International Geothermal Conference, Reykjavk, Sept. 2003
430

PROCEEDINGS
GREEN ENERGY FROM THE NIKOLA TESLA

THERMAL POWER PLANTS IN OBRENOVAC
(Cooling Water System Hydropower Plant)
ABSTRACT
1
Bozica SANDIC
Jelena MILOSEVIC2
Radmilo GLISIC3

Belgrade, Serbia, bozica.sandic@eps.rs
2
Belgrade, Serbia, jelena.milosevic@eps.rs
3
Energoproject Hydroengineering,
Belgrade, Serbia, rglisic@ephydro.com
Nikola Tesla B Thermal Power Plant is part of the installed thermal power
capacities operated by Elektroprivreda Srbije. It was built on the right bank
of the Sava River, some 50 km upstream from Belgrade. To generate electricity it uses coal, while the water required for cooling of two installed units
(each 625 MW) comes from the Sava River. In addition to the existing two
units, there are plans to build a third one with the capacity of over 700 MW.
According to the existing solution, cooling water, some 20 m3/s per thermal
power plant unit gravitationally flows back to the Sava River via overflow
chambers.
Substantial water amount and available head of some 5 m provide realistic
potentials to use water power to generate electricity in a small hydropower
plant. Installed capacity of Small hydropower plant is 1,85 MW, and energy
production is 16,19 GWh per year. This will make possible the use of two
types of energy, thermal and hydro energy, and achievement of a common
objective - electricity generation.
This paper presents a technical-economic analysis of electricity generated in
the above manner, i.e. by using two types of energy sources, coal and clean
water power.
Keywords
Green Energy, Small Hydropower Plant
1. INTRODUCTION
Nikola Tesla B Thermal Power Plant (TPP) has been constructed nearby Belgrade abac road - on its 60th kilometre, on the left bank of the Sava River. It is located in the area of Ue and Skela villages, at the altitude of 78 m asl
(Figure 1). Two Units have been constructed so far the first Unit B-1 was connected to the grid in 1983 and the
Unit B-2 - in 1985.
Water from the Sava River has been envisaged for cooling of the Units, in the quantity of 20.3 m3/s per unit, which
gives a total discharge of cooling water of 40.6 m3/s. Downstream from the cooling condenser, cooling water collects in the overflowing chamber, wherefrom, by means of the outlet collector, it gravitationally returns into the
water course.
Electric Power Industry of Serbia EPS plans to construct the third Unit as well, and so, a total available discharge of cooling water of 60.9 m3/s can be expected.
432

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Macro Location of Small Hydro Power Plant (SHPP)

Source: Preliminary Design and Feasibility Study for SHPP Nikola Tesla B
Having in mind the available delevelling between the elevation of water in overflowing chamber and the average
water level of the Sava River (which amounts to about 4.5 m), as well as a considerable discharge of cooling water,
the activities related to elaboration of technical documentation for utilization of hydro potential of cooling water
from this Thermal Power Plant, have been initiated.
2. LAYOUT SOLUTION FOR SMALL HYDRO POWER PLANT (SHPP)

Cooling water for the TPP requirements is taken from the pump station located on the bank of the Sava River. By
means of two in-parallel coupled pumps, water is transported through two pipelines, to the condenser of the turbogenerator. Two more pipelines branch from there, for cooling of the condenser of turbine feed water pump. After passing through the condenser of turbogenerator, as well as through the condenser of the turbine of turbine
feed water pump, heated cooling water is conveyed to the overflowing chamber. Overflowing chamber is
connected with the Sava River by means of the underground gravity collector. Each Unit of the Thermal Power
Plant has a separate chamber and a separate collector.
Figure 2 presents the hydraulic scheme of cooling water flow within the Unit of Thermal Power Plant.
Figure 2. Cooling water flows within one Unit of Thermal Power Plant Hydraulic Scheme
433

PROCEEDINGS
The highest point of water chamber of the condenser of turbogenerator is at 83.25 m asl, the highest point of
water chamber of the condenser of the turbine of turbine feed water pump is at 81.20 m asl and the top of
overflowing wall at the overflowing chamber is at 76.25 m asl. The level of the overflowing nappe at the
overflowing chamber is at 76.86 m asl. The difference of heights between the highest point of water chamber of
the condenser of turbogenerator and the wall of overflowing chamber amounts to 7 m.
The main criteria for designing of small hydro power plant at the location of the existing Thermal Power Plant are:
not-endangering of the Thermal Power Plant operation; utilization of already existing structures to the maximum
extent; utilization of already existing infrastructure; fitting-in of the new facility into already constructed as well as
the planned structures of the Thermal Power Plant; as well as satisfying of the environmental protection conditions
for the Sava River, as well as in the immediate vicinity of the plant.
Having in mind almost uniform and constant discharge of cooling water, in the amount of 20.3 m3/s per each Unit
of the TPP, three generating units have been adopted at the SHPP, each with the installed discharge of 20.0 m3/s.
Two generating units would be installed immediately (Phase I), whereas the third generating unit would be installed
after construction of the third Unit of the TPP (Phase II).
Head water of SHPP will be formed by the overflowing chamber - the height of which is located between the
elevation of 70.10 m asl (bottom of the chamber) and 78.5 (upper slab of the chamber). Water from the chamber
overflows at 76.25 m asl elevation. During overflowing of the quantity of water of 20 m3/s, the elevation of 76.86 m
asl forms inside the chamber.
Elevation of water inside the overflowing chamber of 76.86 m asl represents a possible condition for selection of
head water elevation of SHPP. Namely, the following two possible solutions have been considered:
1) Level of water inside the overflowing chamber represents the upper boundary for head water elevation of the
SHPP; and
2) Water level elevation of SHPP to be determined so that optimum quantity of energy would be generated at the
SHPP, regardless of increased quantity of water pumping at the pump station. Increased pumping costs have been
taken into account.
According to the first option, head water elevation at SHPP would be 75.00 m asl and according to the second
option, it would be 77.50 m asl.
Tail water of SHPP is created by the water level of the Sava River, which ranges from minimum 70.30 m asl to
maximum 77.67 m asl and the average value for the period from the year 1931 to 2006, amounts to 72.38 m asl.
Synthetic average multi-year duration curve of the daily water levels has been represented on the Figure 3.
SINTETIKA PROSENA VIEGODINJA KRIVA TRAJANJA DNEVNIH NIVOA VODE
period 1931-2006 godina
reka: Sava
profil:TENT "B"
78
77
76
NIVOI VODE ( m.n.m )
75
reim "do 70,30 m.n.m kod ua Nere"

(period 1931-2006 god.)
74
73
Hsr = 72.38 mnm

72
71
70
69
PRILOG 5
68
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
TRAJANJE ( % )
Figure 3. Synthetic average duration curve of daily water levels of the Sava River, at the section of SHPP
On the basis of the above given conclusions, the average gross head of the hydro power plant amounts to 2.62 m
and 5.12 m, respectively.
434

PROCEEDINGS
Construction of Small Hydro Power Plant has been envisaged at the location which enables normal operation of
the existing energy facility (Thermal Power Plant), in the area which belongs to the Thermal Power Plant, at the
shortest distance between the overflowing chamber and the Sava River, with maximum utilization of the existing
structures overflowing chamber, on one side and the concrete collectors, on the other side. This would provide
the shortest connection between the head water (overflowing chamber) and the tail water of the SHPP (the Sava
River). The Figure 4 shows plan view of the scheme of cooling water flow, as well as the location of future SHPP.
Figure 4. Cooling water flow from intermediary chamber to the Sava River - future situation
Intake for SHPP has been envisaged by deviation from the existing collector, within the boundaries of TENT B estate, at the distance of about 60m from the Sava river, in order to be able to situate all necessary facilities. The
area for the intake and the power house is limited by the Sava River from one side, by the drainage channel from
the other side, as well as by the road - from the third side and it occupies the area of about 34 ares. The terrain at
this location is located at the elevation of 78.50 m asl, which corresponds to the elevation of protection against
floods of the Thermal Power Plant complex.
The Figure 5 presents key plan of SHPP.
Figure 5. Key plan of SHPP Nikola Tesla B

Legend: (1) Concrete collectors with cooling water; (2) Intake for diversion of cooling water with gate valves; (3) Compensation basin; (4) Powerhouse; (5) Tail race; (6) Lateral overflow; (7) Collection channel; (8) Transition stretch; (9) Chute; (10) Stilling basin; (11) Rip-rap; (12) Existing waterdischarge structure; (13) Existing channel; (14) abac Obrenovac road; (15) Access road to SHPP; (16) Bridge; (17) Outlet for melting of ice on
trashracks.
435

PROCEEDINGS
3. GEOTECHNICAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SHPP

Based on the analysis of existing technical documentation, it has been concluded that in geological composition of
wider area of the location of SHPP Nikola Tesla B, participate Neogene sediments of Belgrade Posavina basin and
northern part of Kolubara basin, over which Quaternary covering, of mainly alluvial origin, has been formed.
Geotechnical investigation works have not been performed for the requirements of elaboration of the Preliminary
Design of SHPP Nikola Tesla B, but the results of previous investigations performed at the subject location, have
been used. For construction of concrete collector and the bank protection, 8 boreholes were drilled in 1979 and
they practically cover the area on which the structures of SHPP have been envisaged.
For the requirements of elaboration of the Final Design for SHPP, geotechnical additional investigations have been
performed within the investigations for the Preliminary Design for construction of new Unit B3. The investigation
works comprised drilling of four boreholes - from the water and two boreholes - from the land, along with appropriate laboratory tests, as well as preparation of two seismic profiles for the purpose of defining the aseismic construction of SHPP. Locations of the investigation works has been shown on the Figure 6.
Figure 6. Locations of investigation works for SHPP

Hydrogeological cross-section of the terrain in the area of SHPP structures has been given on the Figure 7.
Figure 7. Hydrogeological cross-section of terrain in the area of SHPP structures

436

PROCEEDINGS
4. ENERGY PRODUCTION, INVESTMENT VALUE OF STRUCTURES AND ECONOMIC EFFECTS

Installed capacity of both Phases of SHPP construction amounts to 2.77 MW, whereas the average annual energy
generation has been assessed to 24.3 GWh. Additional pumping energy amounts to 15.1 GWh, which means that net
energy generation amounts to 9.2 GWh/year.
For construction of both Phases of SHPP Nikola Tesla B, according to the prices from January 2011, it is necessary to provide 9.39 million . Specific investments amount to 3,382 /kW and the investment quotient amounts to
1.02 /kWh of net accomplished energy production. According to the type of investment, within the structure of
total investments, the share of civil works amounts to 3.67 million (39.1 %), the share of equipment amounts to
4.86 million (51.8 %), whereas the other investments and the working capital amount to 0.86 million (9.1 %).
Construction of SHPP has been envisaged in two Phases. The Phase I of construction of SHPP (which implies 85% of
the total value of works or 8.0 million , would be executed within the period of one year. Implementation of the
Phase II is tied with construction of Unit 3 at TPP Nikola Tesla B and it reduces to installation of the equipment
for the Unit 3 at SHPP.
Revenues from sale of electricity (in accordance with the Directive on Preferential Prices of Energy from the Renewable Energy Sources and in compliance with the Law on Energy), for the initial 12 years of operation and for
each of SHPP Phases, has been calculated applying Feed-in Tariffs in the amount of 7.35 c/kWh and annually, on
the average, it amounts to 1.8 million .
Within the basic analysis - applying the permanent prices and excluding the realistic growth of electricity prices,
the obtained economic price (for the discount rate of 8% and for the operating period of 25 years) amounts to 5.93
c/kWh.
For the above mentioned conditions of financing (20% own assets-equity and 80% of bank loan), the average production price of 1 kWh of electricity, in the period before including the Phase II into operation, would range from
7.37 c/kWh to 7.43 c/kWh. It can be concluded that during the initial five years of operation, the production prices would be somewhat higher than the Feed-in Tariff, and during this period the Project would face moderate illiquidity.
After including the Phase II into operation and in the period of loan repayment, the production price, excluding
realistic growth of pumping costs, would range from 6.31 c/kWh to 3.55 c/kWh,whereas after repayment of the
loan, it would amount to 3.27 c/kWh.
5. CONCLUSION
Permanent demand for increasing of electric power generation has been directed towards investigation and development of new energy resources, but also towards rational utilization of still unused energy sources, in particular
renewable energy sources.
Utilization of hydro power as the most rational and the purest renewable source for electric power generation (socalled green energy), represents one of foundations for sustainable development of energy sector, due to stability
of energy supply, as well as due to indisputable contribution to environmental protection.
During execution of the works on construction of SHPP Nikola Tesla B, disturbing of environment might potentially occur, but it will mainly have a temporary character. The applied technical solution for the plant design, installing of the state-of-the-art equipment and strict control of turbine oils handling, will provide strict preservation
of the environment in the vicinity of small hydro power plant, during its operation.
Exploitation of so-far unused potential of the existing cooling system of TPP Nikola Tesla B - for generation of
high-quality, pure electric energy, fits into the objectives of energy policy of the Republic of Serbia and accomplishing of energy efficiency within the technological process of obtaining the electric energy from the thermal power
plants. Utilization of energy potential of cooling water from the thermal power plant, in the small hydro power
plant, provides a high degree of ecological suitability and that is why such technical solution should be applied at
the rest of the thermal power plants within the system of Electric Power Industry of Serbia EPS.
REFERENCES
[1]
Preliminary Design and Feasibility Study for SHPP Nikola Tesla B, Energoprojekt Hidroinenjering, Beograd, 2011;
[2]
Design of Additional Geotechnical Investigations of Terrain for the requirements of founding and seismic micro-zoning of TPP
Nikola Tesla B in Obrenovac (Geoalfa, 2012).
437

PROCEEDINGS
MINIMIZATION OF BUSINESS RISKS

IN MINING COMPANIES THROUGH
LOADERS-TRUCK EQUIPMENT SELECTION
ABSTRACT
Milena POPOVI1
Marija KUZMANOVI2
Mirko VUJOEVI3
Aleksandar MILUTINOVI4
1
University of Belgrade, Faculty of Organizational Sciences, Serbia,

milena.popovic@fon.bg.ac.rs
2
mari@fon.bg.ac.rs
3
mirkov@fon.bg.ac.rs
4
University of Belgrade, Faculty of Mining And Geology, Serbia,
amilut@gmail.com
This paper deals with loaders-truck equipment selection problem for surface mines. In the case of
surface mine of mineral resources, the economic
success of a mining company depends mostly on
the planning and control of transport costs. So far,
many methods are used for finding a compatible
set of trucks and loaders such that the overall cost
of the mining companies is minimised.
The aim of this paper is to define an integer linear
model for finding optimal solution set of trucks and
loaders. A numerical example is given to illustrate
its application to solving the real problems.
Keywords
Integer Linear Model, Loaders-Truck Equipment,
Surface Mines
1. ORE RESERVES THE ONLY ASSETS OF A MINING ACTIVITY

Ore reserves are the only asset where a mining activity is based. A collection of detailed and correct information
about the geology of ore bodies and the geological medium surrounding the ore bodies (mineralogy, distribution of
useful components, size of the ore bodies, geology of the surrounding rocks, presence of tectonic faults, etc.) creates a unique database to support the engineering solution about methods of mineral extraction, ore enrichments
technologies and fulfillment of market requirements for minerals.
With all improved methods of geological researcher and by wider use of geophysical works, the database on the
geology of a mineral deposit can not be comprehensive, especially when mineral deposit located in greater depth.
The cost of construction of drill holes for intercepting ore bodies, located in large depths, is relatively greater, so
the number of drilling and other geological works (the only way to intercept ore bodies) can not be unlimited. Consequently geological information gathered in the phase of geological work serves as the basis for economical evaluation of ore body reserves and undertaking a mining activity. The geological reports of exploration information,
resources and reserves are summary statements that require prior evaluation of a considerable range and amount
of information.
With the start of mining works and their contact with ore bodies, the geological information must be completed
and provide fulfill and accurate database to support any further activity for the extraction of mineral deposits. Under the preparation stage of levels, exploitation blocks and extraction units, geological services, together with mining surveying service in mines, continue to collect data about form and size of the ore bodies, their spatial position,
mineralogy of ore, distribution of useful components in the ore bodies and in the surrounding rocks, the stability of
ore bodies and the surrounding rocks, underground water network, and many other factors to be taken into account in other stages of the exploitation of the mineral source. The lack of full geological information, or even
worse not correct geological information, can lead to wrong decisions for the planning and development of mining
and engineering solutions for blocks, levels or even for all mine.
Geological information must be reflected accurately in the plan, in 3D format, cross sections and longitudinal profiles in hard copy and in electronic format. Programs that are used today in geology and mining, create multiple
439

PROCEEDINGS
strengths for analytical calculations and graphical construction, giving a fuller picture of the spatial position of ore
bodies and all other elements in geological medium to be taken into account in the preparation of a successful
mining project. Such presentation in electronic formats promotes the ideas of engineers designer to realize a mining project that will provide a more complete extraction in quantity and quality of mineral reserves.
2. MANAGEMENT OF ORE RESERVES

Based on the large and accurate geological information, mining projectors have as main objective the design of
mining technologies that ensure safe working and full extraction in quantity and quality of ore reserves for a given
deposit. The process of selecting a mining method begins with a compilation and evaluation of the information
already known about the geology of ore deposit and continues with the information update from underground
workings. Nowadays when the requirements for environmental protection can not be passed sideways, mining project should take into consideration and:
Promoting all the expected impacts on the environment in the phase of mining activity and after mine closure
Continuous improvement of the techniques of working in the mine for a good performance as the environment.
Preventing all irreparable damage to the environment during mining activity and use of environmental
friendly technologies
Optimal use of all the waste that is generated by the extraction and processing of minerals
The expected impacts on the environment after the end mining production activity.
Preparation of environmental project as an integral part of the mining project is being done nowadays a necessary
requirement (1). Under these conditions, for calculation of total production costs (CT) for mining 1 ton of ore are
used:
CT = Ce + Cen + Dlo + Ddi,
Where: Ce the costs for mining operation
Cen the environmental costs includes the expenditures necessary for compensation of all negative impacts of the
mining project to the environment,
Dlo damage from loss of 1 ton of reserves,
Ddi - damage from dilution of 1 ton of ore
An ideal scheme of mining stages in a mine would be the one shown in Figure 1. In this scheme the deposit mineral
offers three kinds of resources (2). Main ore resources with a potential tonnage and grade calculated from geological information. This part of ore resources should be mining with the lowest parameters of waste dilution and ore
losses. Ore losses and waste dilution are drawbacks that cannot always be accepted. In order to optimize these factors, an extensive research program has been undertaken, involving both model and full-scale tests. The experience
gained from these investigations, combined with a follow up of practical results, now has developed sublevel caving
into a method with high technical standards.
440

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1 . Stages and technological processes in a mining activity.
The second resources are the potential ore reserves in mineralization zone surroundings the main ore body. These
reserves can be successfully extracted from the mine and treated as a reserve for the ore averaging, or can be sent
directly to the enrichment factory. When the mineralized zone is host of the main mineral bodies it can be extracted together with the main ore. In these cases we can realized a higher ratio of mining recovery (note: mining recovery = 1 mineral losses). Such a situation is at the copper mine in Rehova. Rocky mass surrounding the ore bodies
have a low content of copper ore, about 0.35 % Cu, creating a mineralized zone. Mining of the main bodies together with the mineralized zone has increased the mining recovery for the reserves of main ore body to 90 % (3).
The third resources are rocky mass that extracted out of the mine during the performance of mining processes. If
this rocky mass can processed and used for different purposes, it brings not only a modest profit, but reducing the
rocky mass that will be treated as waste with a negative environmental impacts.
In a mining activity will highlight these key moments:
1. Mineral reserves and surrounding rocks as the only resource of a mining activity
2. Stages of mineral extraction from underground to the surface, and
3. Processing of ore and rock mass for the preparation of the final product.
The mineral reserves with geological indicators and mining criteria, including those for grade, quality, thickness and
depth, are a key to the development and planning of a mining operation. They are very important but can not directly influence the increase or decrease of the final product for sale.
Even the processing and preparation of final product, for a given mineralogical indicators and enrichment technology, will have a sustainable impact on the quantity and quality of prepared product, although improvements in this
stage are always possible.
In the second stage, the opening and preparation of the mine and extraction of ore from underground to the surface, although we follow an approved mining project, there are always opportunity for improvement mining processes according to new level of geological and mining information. These improvements will be achieved by taking
concrete measures in concrete deposits, as each mineral deposit in its geological and mining complexity is unique.
Improvements are possible as we reduce the cost for the extraction of 1t mineral, as well as the improvement of
quantity and quality parameters of the product being sent for further processing at enrichment plants. Mining recovery and waste dilution are mining parameters which can be used to evaluate the efficiency of a mining method.
Widely exists the opinion that a mining method characterized by a high mining recovery and a low waste dilution
can be considered an efficient mining method.
441

PROCEEDINGS
3. MANAGEMENT PARAMETERS OF QUANTITY AND QUALITY LOSSES

Increased productivity and efficiency of a mining enterprises, connects directly with more complete extraction of
the mineral reserves of the ore deposit given for mining. Despite achievements in enhancing of the mechanization
of mining processes and improvement of management of mining operations, not all mining reserves can be extracted. Parts of mineral reserves losses in mining blocks in the form of ore columns or broken ore, other parts losses in underground loading point and transports route and a few broken ore losses in averaging process of ore extracted. The totality of these reserves constitutes quantity mineral losses, and calculates with the difference of ore
reserves in-situ, with extracted ore reserves and sent for further processing.
At the same time, the quality losses, or waste dilution, are the contamination of ore by no ore material during the
mining process. The average metal content (component or useful components), to the extracted mineral is generally lower than that of the estimate in-situ grade of deposits.
The presence of quantity and quality losses of useful mineral in the production process is inevitable, but their sizes
are the result of the simultaneous action of a number of objective and subjective factors. Without denying the
dominant role of objective factors, related to geological and mining conditions, mining activity affects quite well in
these sizes. To make the most effective a mining activity, should be recognized types of quantity and quality losses
that occur in the production process, and then should grouped these according to the main causes that brings and
to define mining measures to minimize them (4).
Management of quantity losses
Quantity losses grouped into (A) general mineral losses and (B) production mineral losses. General mineral losses are
inherent in the very nature of occurrence of ore deposits and consist mainly or ore left in place for stability purposes. These losses are divided into two groups:
1. Losses for the protection of underground opening works and other objects related to the mining activity,
2. Losses that are not related to the mining activity.
With the introduction of the mining works in greater depth, impact of mining subsidence on the surface is negligible. In these cases it is not necessary to leave mineral columns for the protection of the surface from subsidence, so
we have not the mineral losses of point 2. While losses related to the protection of objects related to mining activity, mainly the underground opening of mine, vertical shafts, or ramps should be avoided. These works should be
opened outside the cone of rocky massif movements towards spaces created by mineral extraction. Such a position
of the opening of the mine workings, increased costs for the preparation of mine, but avoids losses of ore in columns that should be left to protect these. Mining experience in our country recognizes some cases that position of
the underground opening (mainly vertical shafts) have brought considerable quantity losses in mineral columns left
to protect the shaft by the movement of the rocky strata. The worst example we meet in coal mining in Mborje
Drenove, open with a central vertical shaft, where a large coal column is left to protect the central shaft from mining subsidence.
Production mineral losses (mining losses) are made up of all other ore losses during the mining process. They relate
to the accepted methods and technology of ore extraction. The causes that bring these losses are very complex
and relate nor only with strict implementation of mining methods, but also with conditions of geological medium
where the mining work take place.
Ore losses included in this group are divided according to their conditions in (a) losses in-situ ore, and (b) losses of
broken ore. Subgroup losses (a) are mainly present in room and pillar mining methods where parts of ore are living
as pillars to support the hanging wall. In these mining methods there are also losses of broken ore in small quantities spread on the floor. To reduce these kinds of losses should be carefully considered sizes of protective columns,
or to consider the possibility of replacing them with artificially constructed columns. So in the iron - nickel mine in
Skroske, where the room and pillar mining is successfully used, ore losses are not greater than 10%, mainly by losses
in columns and much less (about 0.5%) of broken ore losses.
Losses of subgroup (b) are present in sublevel and block caving methods and their management is complex. These
methods are characterized from rigorous technical requirements on the parameters of a regular network of drifts,
parameters of voids, position of drilling in a fan shaped pattern, size of ore fragmentation, amount and order of
mineral extraction from every finger raise, and other requirements. The dilution of the broken ore with waste can
very from 10 % and 35 %, with the ore losses varying 10% to 20%.
We had a negative example in iron nickel mine in Prrenjas where a classical block caving methods is used. The
hanging wall in this mine is an unstable rocky stratum called Seria e Prrenjasit. After the block blasting this strata
442

PROCEEDINGS
broken in finer size than the ore and penetrate very fast in broken mineral bringing a higher dilution (5). In cases
when the thick of ore body was less than 12 meter the losses of mineral varying 30% to 35 %.
Despite the improvements made time after time in the parameters of this mining method, mineral losses for thickness of ore body less than 12 meter were still high. This forced staff of mining specialists to make changes in the
system of drilling pattern. The position of drilling long holes change from vertical to horizontal direction, living unattached a slice of ore body on contact with Seria Prrenjas. After block blasting the ore is crushed to a fragmentation that allows removal at draw points or through other arrangements. The extracted volume of broken ore from
different position of finger raises must be controlled and must follow a planed schedule. With these changes in the
drilling system we had an increased quantity of pure ore extracted from each funnel and reduce mineral losses to
18 %.
In the copper mine in Munelle, where is in used sublevel caving methods, when thickness of ore bodies are more
than 30 meter, the amount of ore extracted from a mining sublevel was very small and the parameters of mining
losses is growing while the mining going to the lower sublevels. This happened as a result of growing pressures and
penetration of waste rock to broken mineral. The dilution reaches soon such a proportion that the loading is
stopped and the next long holes fan is blasted. To increase the amount of ore extraction in this mine were realized
some change to the preparation of mining blocks. Using the ramp it was possible to realize the extraction of the
mineral with cut cad fill mining methods from bottom to upper sublevels. The space generated from mineral extraction was filled as completely as possible with hydraulic fill. Changes in the methods of mining was associated
with increased direct costs, but at the same time we have a significantly increase of mining recovery parameters.
Management of quality losses
Quality losses (dilution) come mainly from contamination of ore by no ore material in the mining process and a less
rate dilution comes from losses of ore particles, very rich in metal, in the spaces generated from mineral extraction.
The dilution has several consequences. Firstly the grade of metal in extracted mineral will be lower than that estimated in ore massive bodies. Secondly the volume of material extracted from a mining block will be larger than
that strictly necessary to obtain the same equivalent metal content. So when the parameter of dilution rises, it is
normal to increase the expenditure for haulage, transports and processing of the large volume of mineral extraction. Quality losses are inevitable in the extraction process and vary significantly depending on the mining method
employed in working deposits, and the geological condition of ore bodies and surrounding rock.
Keeping the parameter of quality losses in minimum limits will directly affect the reduction of costs for transport
and processing the extracted mineral mass, but it will not help direct in increase of amount of ore extraction in a
given block. Parameters of mineral losses, dilution and mining recovery, as shown in Figure 2, have a significant
impact on each other and often reduction of waste dilution is not recommended.
Figure 2. (left) Relations between parameters of ore extraction (Tn), losses (Th) and dilution (Tv); (right) relations of ore extracted and dilution in
copper mine Rehova, extraction of (a) pure ore, (b) contamination ore and (c) waste rock.
In mining operations with sublevel caving and block caving, overlying caved waste rock flowing in and dilution the
broken ore. Referring to Figure 2, we see that the dilution curve starts after an amount of pure mineral is extracted
(Tn = 0.6) and then increases steadily as the waste rock in extracted mineral continue to increase. Extraction of
broken ore-waste rock mixture interrupted when the parameters of dilution reaches a certain size. How is this size?
The answer to this question is very complex as it is connected with the geology of ore bodies, mining methods, processing technology and the market demand for that mineral. All these indicators are specific to each deposit and
change over time.
443

PROCEEDINGS
Today in copper mining practice in our country is working in two directions. Firstly to increase the production of
pure mineral extracted from a mining unit, and secondly, to increase the amount of contaminated ore, allowing an
increase of waste dilution parameter. Thus in the copper mine in Munella and the iron-nickel mine in Prenjas the
changes in mining methods have increased the amount of clean ore extracted by a sublevel, block and all mine.
In the second direction, working with a high dilution figure, related with geological situations where the host rocks
causing dilution does contribute to useful mineral or metal production. That is when the metal content in waste
rocks is not zero, and the processing technology is capable to rich the contamination ore-waste with a moderate
profit. Such a situation is at copper mine in Rehova where the host rocks contained copper metal with an average
amount 0.35 %, creating a mineralization zone. Extraction of mineral from ore body and mineralization zone has
decreased the mineral losses. As we show in figure 2 (left) the parameters of dilution in the second stage of mineral
extraction, after we have extracted more than 60% of ore reserves, was more than 50 %. The mineral extracted in
this stage includes parts of broken ore, parts of mineralization zone and a small part of waste rock. So a high dilution figure may not necessarily mean a low mining recovery.
4. CONCLUSIONS
The process of realization a successful mining activity begins with a compilation and evaluation of geological information already known about he ore deposits and information from actual underground workings. A combination
of geological information and detailed study of underground condition is necessary to avoid mistakes in early stages of mine development.
Ore losses and waste dilution are drawbacks that cannot always be accepted. In order to optimize these factors, an
extensive research program has been undertaken, involving both model and full-scale tests. The experience gained
from these investigations, combined with a follow up of practical results, now has developed mining methods with
high technical standards.
The mining parameters useful for evaluating the efficiency of a mining methods are mining recovery, waste dilution
and mineral losses. Optimal realization of these parameters request a scientific combination of geological condition of deposit, mining methods employed and proper conduct of the relevant mining operations when mining the
deposits.
In geological situations where the host rocks does contribute to useful mineral or metal production, working with a
high waste dilution figure may not necessary mean a low mining recovery.
REFERENCES
(1)
Lipo S., E. Hoxha. : The environmental impact of the closed copper mine in Rehova, pp(399-404), 22 World Mining Congress, Istanbul
2011
(2)
Drebenstedt C. : Responsible mining approaches and realization, pp(135-147) 22 World Mining Congress, Istanbul 2011
(3)
Grup Autoresh.: Menaxhimi I humbjeve sasiore dhe cilesore ne minieren e bakrrit Rehove, pp (62), Miniera Rehove, 1982
(4)
Horsten J. : Recovery and dilution research report No. 1, School of Mines, Lusaka 1977
(5)
Lipo. S. : Menazhimi I humbjeve sasiore dhe cilesore ne minieren e hekur nikelit Prrenjas, rruget per permiresimin e tregusit te
nxjerrjes se mineralit. 1989, Tirane, Albania
444

PROCEEDINGS
CYCLIC FLOW CONVEYOR SYSTEMS

- PRESENT AND FUTURE AT THE ASSAREL MINE OPERATIONS,
ASSAREL-MEDET SC - BULGARIA
ABSTRACT
Eng. Lachezar TSOTSORKOV PhD1
Eng. Delcho NIKOLOV2
Eng. Michail MICHAILOV3
Assarel-Medet JSC Mining and Processing Complex is the first, largest and
leading Bulgarian mining company for copper ore mining which provides
more than 50% of the national and about 0.5% of the world production of
copper, a metal vital for human existence and development.
The Assarel-Medet Joint-Stock Company boasts with its 48-year old history.
It was created in 1991 based on the Medet Mining and Processing Complex
which started its activity on December 29, 1964 and was operational until
1994 and the Assarel Mining and Processing Complex which was commissioned on December 6, 1989.
The strategic aim of our company is to achieve low cost price and high quality per unit of produced copper, respectively high quality of produced concentrates and associated products and services - utilizing the available mineral resources to a maximal extent and in a most efficient manner, ensuring
occupationally safe and environmentally friendly operations.
Guided by this objective, the company is traditionally a pioneer in the country in implementing state-of-the-art mining equipment and new technologies being a paragon of high corporate culture.
As a part of the production circuit, technological transportation is a separate unit which greatly predetermines open pit mining efficiency. This is the
most dynamic, energy consuming and costly technological process in any
open pit.
Considering the past experience with the used types of technological
transport in open pits such as trucks, conveyors and cyclic flow conveyors
and their advantages and drawbacks, it was established that a sufficiently
high efficiency cannot be achieved for the entire life of the mine if only one
of these transportation types is used.
When reaching a certain depth in the pit, it becomes obvious that applying
combined transportation schemes is most effective. This is most often a
combination of trucks and conveyor transportation which form the basis of
the so called Cyclic Flow Conveyor System (CFCS).
The experience at the Assarel Mine proves that combined cyclic flow conveyor transportation arranged based on the truck-conveyor technological
structure is the most efficient way to haul mining loads.
Assarel-Medet JSC
Panagyurishte 4500, Telephone: (0357) 602 10
Fax: (0357) 602 50
pbox@asarel.com, asarel.com
1
Executive Director
2
General Director, dnikolov@asarel.com
3
mmichailov@asarel.com
The analysis of delays, throughput, availability (Av.) and usability (Us.) during
the various periods of the complex mechanical system operation related to
truck transportation and cyclicl flow conveyor technologies demonstrates a
good stability.
The results achieved throughout the 12-year-old operation of the devices
provide the best evaluation of the efficiency of the joint operation of the
trucks and the Cyclic Flow Conveyor System for waste haulage at the Assarel
Mine. The decision to continue applying these technologies in the future are
the based on these results.
Keywords
Cyclic Flow Conveyor System, Assarel-Medet JSC, Availability, Usability, Truck Fleet,
Productivity, Production Efficiency, Open Pit Mining, Waste Haulage, Ore Haulage
445

PROCEEDINGS
1. TECHNOLOGICAL TRANSPORTATION DEVELOPMENT IN OPEN PIT MINES

Due to the adaptability to the mining conditions which are getting increasingly complex, haulage of mining loads at
long distances using truck fleets has been wide spread in open pit mining and truck transportation has been differentiated as one of the main transportation types.
On the back ground of the significant advantages which are ensured by truck transportation such as universality,
adaptability, flexibility, autonomy, selectivity, there is a number of drawbacks, including high consumption of fuel
and lubrication materials and truck tires, large number of maintenance personnel, insufficient ergonomics and environmental friendliness.
All over the world, trucks in open pit mining are widely used in the countries with a developed mining where this
type of transportation is used to deliver about 80% of mined ore and waste.
Technological transportation involved KrAZ-222B, Tatra and MAZ-525 trucks from the early start of large-scale
open pit mining. Later, those low productive machines were replaced with the first modifications of the BelAZ
trucks.
The construction and the early mining in the two largest open pit mines at the moment Elatzite and Assarel
were also performed using 27-tonne BelAz 540 and 40-tonne BelAZ 548 trucks. After 1990, the truck fleet at the
Assarel Mine as replaced with 110-tonne BelAZ 7519 trucks. Trucks manufactured by West European and American
th
companies were used in the last decades of the 20 century and mostly after the privatization as follows: after
1997 85-tonne K-95 and CAT 777C trucks and after 2000 90-tonne O&K Terex TR-100, 777D and 120-tonne
BelAZ 75125 trucks. After 2005, the trucks at the Assarel Mine were replaced with 130-tonne BelAZ 75131 trucks
and at the Elatzite Mine with 130-tonne BelAZ 75131 and 95-tonne Hitachi 1700-3 trucks.
The other most frequently used transportation in open pit mining is conveyor transportation which enables a continuous flow to be created. Belt conveyors are widely used in open pit mining as a transportation unit in Cyclic Flow
Conveyor Systems (CFCS) since they restrict the use of trucks and form continuous load flows of mined ore or
waste.
The main advantages which are typical for conveyor transportation in open pit mining are the following: continuous flow and high productivity, less maintenance personnel, overcoming gradients of up to 16 which is twice as
high than truck transportation capacities, solidity, full automation and high safety and high ergonomics since they
do not produce hazardous substances and do not threaten the environment.
Weather conditions and the significant duration for building/relocation preparation are considered as major drawbacks since they restrict mining works development in the respective areas.
Since none of the considered herein transportation types cannot ensure a sufficiently high efficiency for the entire
life of open pit mines which are depleted in depth, it becomes clear that after reaching certain depth, the use of
combined transportation schemes is most cost effective.
One of the main types of combined transportation is the truck-conveyor transportation which lies in the basis of
Cyclic Flow Conveyor Systems (CFCS).
World practice has proven that combined cyclic flow conveyor transportation arranged on the basis of truckconveyor technological structure is the most efficient way to haul mass mining loads from open pits with a high
capacity of load flows and reserve depth below 200-250 meters.
Cyclic flow conveyor systems are most widely applied at the open pits in the USA, Chile, China, Australia, Sweden,
etc.
This transportation type was introduced for the first time to the Bulgarian mining complexes at the Assarel Mine
for waste haulage in 2000 by commissioning CFCS .
2. EVALUATION OF PRODUCTION EFFICIENCY

The production efficiency enhancement at open pit mines is associated with the used of state-of-the-art mining
equipment and complexes arranged according to defined structure schemes within the technological flow. The
efficient operation of this system depends on a number of conditions and factors as the correct choice of technology and equipment is one of the most important factors.
The Assarel Mine is an open pit mine which develops the porphyry copper deposit which has the same name. The
deposit is of altitudinal-bathyal type. The adopted development system is a transportation system with waste haulage to externally located dumps.
446

PROCEEDINGS
The complex mechanization structure applied at the Assarel Mine is digging-transportation-dumping structure. It is
characterized with the use of shovels and trucks with cyclic operation and conveyor rubber belt transportation with
stacking. The interaction between the cyclic and conveyor units is immediate as no intermediary stock is available.
Prior to introducing combined transportation the first Cyclic Flow Conveyor Line at the end of 2000, waste from
the Assarel pit was hauled to an externally located bulldozer dump using 40-tonne to 120-tonne mining trucks. The
gradual increase of haulage distances (more than 4,000 meters) due to going indepth into the pit and dump development under the heavy-duty mining conditions made truck transportation inefficient. Tire, fuel and spare parts
consumption was significantly increased.
This led to the necessity for the company to consider more highly efficient transportation systems which are to
replace the classical and used at the time being truck transportation in order to reduce transportation costs.
The technical and economic studies carried out by specialists from Assarel-Medet and leading Bulgarian experts
demonstrated that it is cost effective and environmentally friendly to haul waste using Rubber Conveyor Belts
(RCB) applying the Cyclic Flow Conveyor System (CFCS).
More than 137.7 mln tonnes of waste were hauled using the first CSCF-I from the Assarel pit. On May 2, 2010, the
operation of the complex was discontinued for its decommissioning and building a new complex with a capacity of
5, 000 tonnes per hour.
The Cyclic Flow Conveyor System for waste crushing, transportation and stacking commissioned in March 2011
includes a semimobile crushing sector, a receving bin with capacity of 500 tonnes, metal ramps for trucks access,
apron feeded, gyratory crusher of capacity of 5,000 tonnes per hour, take-up belt, metal detector, metal collector,
water sprinkling and anti dusting systems as well as a belt electronic scales, five rubber belt conveyors of a total
length of 5,000 meters and belt width of 1,600 mm, movement speed of 3.0 m/sec. and a track stacker with a discharging crate with a 50-meter-long receiving bridge and a 70-meter-long boom, manufactured by KRUPP
FOEDERTECHNIC, Germany.
The transportation scheme under continuous (all day long) mining at the Assarel Mine includes all technological
haulage roads from the Loading Location (LL) to Dumping Location (DL). Their length exceeds 20 km within the pit.
The loading locations are the loading units which are in a periodical movement. The dumping locations are four and
are determined based on the material type which is hauled. Process ore is hauled to the Receiving Bins at the
Coarse Crushing Sector Dumping Loaction. Waste is hauled to the Receiving Bin at the Cyclic Flow Conveyor System Dumping Location after which it is hauled using the Cyclic Flow Conveyor System to the West Dump where
trucks are also used for haulage under certain conditions. Leach ore which contains more than 20% copper oxide
and is not subject to processing with flotation is hauled to the Leach Dump.
447

PROCEEDINGS
Transportation communications and mining fleet traffic organization are an important part of truck operation using automated control systems.
Mine planning and mine dispatch systems are included in the technological flow for waste haulage at the Assarel
Mine. Using state-of-the-art achievements of GPS technologies, wireless communication systems and computer
systems, most efficient real-time management, control and reporting of mining processes are ensured.
The waste haulage technological scheme at the Assarel Mine is characterized with the following:
The Mine Planning Unit provides the mine dispatcher with a schedule for waste mining by levels, blocks and
loading units.
Using the Mine Dispatch System, the mine dispatcher manages and controls production. The Dispatch System itself contains three major modules:
- A positioning system with a mapping application of the mine and mining equipment status where the position
of all the operational equipment within the pit can be seen. The systems helps follow mining equipment
movement for a fixed period using the playback records with GPS coordinates of truck dumping locations,
loading locations of loading units and trucks location when travelling along the mine roads.
- Fleet control application. Using this application, the mining dispatcher manages and controls mining processes
following the equipment state, the status of the different units, reasons for delays, truck loading,
tonne/kilometers, travel routes and dumping location.
Fleet management and control window
Reports and references application. This application provides information about the delays, technical
availability, time in operation, engine hours etc which are subject to different analyses.
More than 20 specialists form the company obtain information and time line of the system data which enables
them to prepare daily analyses for sustainable planning and successful management of mining activity.
3. ANALYSIS OF THE RESULTS

Short research and analysis of the complex mechanization is made in the report associated with the operation of
the truck fleet and the cyclic flow conveyor systems (CFCS I and CFCS II) for waste haulage and the relation between them for six randomly chosen periods - the months of November and December respectively in 2005 and
2007, April 2010, August 2011 the entire 2012. The analyzed periods are related to the stages of the Technical and
Technological Improvement Program which started in 2005 and after its first implementation stage in 2007 as well
as the period after the construction and commissioning of the new Cyclic Flow Conveyor System for waste haulage
in March 2011.
The main technological indices which measure the efficiency of technological transport, i.e. productivity, availability and usability, were determined.
448

PROCEEDINGS
Analysis of the delays and usability of the complex equipment

For analytical purposes, data from the report and reference application of the mine dispatch system was used as
the major indices related to the efficiency of the complex transport mechanization for waste haulage at the Assarel
Mine were determined and analyzed. Delays, productivity, availability (Av) and usability (Us) were also determined.
Trucks
The upgrade and extension of the truck fleet significantly improved the indices of truck usage when operating together with the Cyclic Flow Conveyor System.
The constant increase of the average transportation distance due to the entering of the mining activities deeper
into the pit has a negative impact upon the average productivity of a truck. The significant delay which occurs due
to the crews change between two separate shifts was reduced by introducing the requirement crew change on
place within the pit. The delivery of oil trucks equipped with fast fuelling systems allowed to reduce the fueling
time which is performed at certain fuelling bays within the pit. The fleet maintenance servicing was significantly
improved. A scheduled replacement of assemblies was introduced which complies with the equipment service life
as stated by the manufacturer which reduced delays due to breakdowns.
Cyclic Flow Conveyor System

The productivity improvement and dispatching of loading units and trucks had the greatest impact on the two systems, CFCS-I and CFCS-II.
The data presented in Table No. 1 and Graphs No. 1, 2 and 3 show that the trend for the hourly load and usability of
the CFCS is preserved.
The improvements made to fix the bottlenecks of the CFCS-I operation contributed to reducing the delays while
performing a number of planned repairs and technological activities. Our experience gained throughout the years
also had its positive impact. It contributed when building the new CFCS for a number of improvements to be made
and allowed CFCS-II to reach its design parameters during the first year after its commissioning.
Table No. 1
Parameters of the Cyclic Flow Conveyor System
NNo.
Considered period, month, year
Parameter
November 2005
December
2005
November
2007
December
2007
CFCS-I
CFCS-II
April
2010
August
2011
Planned delays , hour
269.55
76.44
97.62
89.77
97.62
89.00
Breakdown and technological delays, hour
92.51
150.37
171.70
158.84
171.70
93.04
Total delays, hour
362.06
226.81
269.32
248.61
269.32
182.04
Net time in operation, hour
357.94
517.19
450.68
495.39
450.68
561.96
Mined waste, tonnes
982,620
1,384,550
1,272,220
1,430,400
1,136,382
2,744.278
Hourly load, tonnes/hour
2,745
2,677
2,823
2,887
2,823
4,883
Usability, %
49.71
69.51
62.59
66.58
62.59
75.54
449

PROCEEDINGS
Graph No. 1 . Mined waste with CFCS-I and CFCS-II, tonnes

3000000
2500000
2000000
1500000
1000000
500000
0
1
Period
November
2005
December
2005
November
2007
December
2007
April
2010
August
2011
Tonnes
982,620
1,384,550
1,272,220
1,430,400
1,136, 382
2,744,278
CFCS-I
CFCS-II
Graph No. 2. Hourly load of CFCS-I and CFCS-II, tonnes/hour

6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
1
Period
November
2005
December
2005
tonne/hours
2,745
2,677
November
2007
December
2007
April
2010
2,823
2,887
2,823
CFCS-I
August
2011
4,883
CFCS-II
Graphic No. 3. Usability of CFCS-I and CFCS-II, %

80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
1
Period
November
2005
December
2005
49.71
69.51
November
2007
December
2007
April
2010
62.59
66.58
62.59
CFCS-I
450
August
2011
75.54
CFCS-II

PROCEEDINGS
Analysis of the joint operation of the technological truck transportation with CFCS - at the Assarel Mine in 2012
Using the data base from the Mine Dispatch System, engineering analysis of the technological truck transportation
when operating jointly with the CFCS-II was made for the year 2012.
In 2012, 25 BelAZ 7513 trucks were used for waste haulage from loading locations to dumping locations. 209, 990
cycles were made to the two dumping locations and a total amount of 26, 275, 140 tonnes of waste was hauled.
A reference for the haulage to the dumping locations is presented in the following table:
Dumping location
Total
West Dump
CFCS Dump
Total number of cycles

Quantity(tonnes)
Number of cycles
3, 936
206, 054
209, 990
Quantity (tonnes)
492, 283
25, 782, 857
26, 275, 140
The following was established based on the truck transportation together with the concentrator plant and CSCF-II:
Each truck completed 13, 052 cycles hauling 1,641, 000 tonnes of mined material at an average haulage distance of 2.103 km and average load of 125.73 tonnes/cycle average for the year. The average time which a
cycle took was 24.78 min.
Average availability of 91.27% was achieved versus the forecasted and planned availability of 90%.
Average usability of 80.91% was achieved versus the forecasted and planned usability of 80%.
The average travel speed of a loaded truck was 15 km/hour which is within the permitted speed range at the
company.
Evaluation of the results from the study
The results achieved during the 12-year-long operation of the facilities are the best evaluation of the efficiency of
the Cyclic Flow Conveyor System for waste haulage at the Assarel Mine.
137, 166, 000 tonnes of waste were hauled and dumped using CFCS-I during the period from 2000 to 2010 while 60,
511, 000 were hauled using trucks. In 2011 and 2012, 50, 365, 953 tonnes of waste were hauled and dumped using
CFCS-II while only 3, 498, 185 tonnes were hauled using trucks or only 6.49%.
The following was found out when the waste haulage costs where compared when using CFCS and trucks:
The ratio in the price cost excluding depreciations when hauling waste with the CFCF and trucks and respectively
with CFCS to the dump is as follows throughout the years:
2005 with CFCS - reduction of 1.42 times
2007- with CFCS - reduction of 1.64 times
2010 - with CFCS - reduction of 1.46 times
2011 - with CFCS -I reduction of 1.89 times
2012 - with CFCS -I reduction of 2.28 times
Approximately 70 mln. tonne kilometers less were made using the new CFCS-II for the hauled planned volume of
waste for 2011 and 2012 versus the haulage of the same volume but using CFCS-I plus the needed additional haulage with trucks.
The difference is due mainly to the increased average transportation distance when hauling with trucks to the
dump from 3, 351 km in 2005 ; 4, 731 km in 2010; 5, 025 km in 2011 and 5 078 km in 2012.
Based on the provided data, it becomes obvious that the price cost of hauled waste with trucks is significantly
higher and this difference increases with time when increasing the haulage distance. Moreover, truck haulage necessitates maintaining a larger number of operational trucks which requires additional costs for road maintenance
(auxiliary equipment), larger personnel number (operation and maintenance) and last but not least it has an adverse
impact upon the environment.
451

PROCEEDINGS
4. SUMMARY, CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

A company is capable of maintaining low price cost by controlling production costs, by increasing the usability of
the existing capacity, by controlling deliveries and minimizing any other costs.
Assarel-Medet JSC has been constantly implementing technological and technical innovations in order to reduce
and control costs. It has also been increasing the usability of the existing capacity which would allow more efficient
mining and ore processing, including low grade ores.
In order to maintain the operations at a world class level and in conformity with the latest achievements of science
and technology, including the achievements in transportation activity, Assarel-Medet JSC envisions the following in
the future:
1. The share of Cyclic Flow Conveyor Systems for mined material haulage versus trucks will be increased.
It was found out when analyzing waste haulage costs with CFCS at the Assarel Mine that the price cost of a tonne
of waste hauled with trucks is with 50% higher than the same hauled with CFCS. It was also found out that this difference increased with time due to the extended transportation distance.
New scenarios for ore and waste haulage which are substantiated from economic and technical point of view were
developed. Their implementation started simultaneously in 2011 with the commissioning of the new CFCS-II for
waste haulage with capacity of 5,000 tonnes per hour and the relocation of CFCS-I the operation of which was discontinued and it was reequipped for the purposes of ore crushing and transportation with capacity of 3,000 tonnes
per hour.
The following will be achieved with the accepted design, needed redesign, construction and installation activities
and commissioning of CFCS-III for ore when mining activities go indepth in the pit:
Economic result due to shortening haulage distance and significant reduction of the tonnes per kilomenter
volume produced by the trucks.
Economic result due to a significant investment costs reduction for purchasing new trucks.
Environmental result due to reducing exhaust gases produced by the trucks and the risk from unexpected
discontinuing of the operations at the mine due to its difficult ventilation.
Result due to reducing construction and road maintenance costs.
The completed feasibility study demonstrated that if this option is selected, the investment return period is expected to be about 5-6 years.
The project for relocation and reequipment of CFCS-III for ore is expected to be finalized at the end of 2014.
2. Improvement of the automated system for mining management and control
The further development includes upgrade of the mine dispatch system with a high precision GPS system and covering all units pertaining to the complex mechanization.
The implementation of these projects will result into increasing the mining equipment usability and productivity
thus reducing the costs and the price cost of the produced final product, i.e. copper pyrite concentrate.
Due to the impossibility to influence directly its incomes, Assarel-Medet JSC as a company from the sector strives
to reduce total costs per unit of production. Thus, high efficiency and sustainable development of the company is
ensured.
REFERENCES
[1]
. I. Arsentiev et al., Intensification of Mining Works and Querries, Nedra Publishing House
[2]
Geotechmin et al., Preparation of a Written Technology for Ore Mining at the Assarel Mine, 2000
[3]
Eng. L.Tsotsorkov, PhD, Fundamentals of Corporate Culture, 1996
[4]
Corporate reports of Assarel-MEdet JSC, 2000-2012
452

PROCEEDINGS
METHODOLOGY FOR INVESTMENT DECISIONS

IN ACTIVE MINES
ABSTRACT
Prof. Dushan NIKOLOVSKI Ph.D.
International Slav University

G. R. Derzavin- Sveti Nikole - Bitola
dusan.nikolovski@slavinst.edu.mk
The mining industry in the process of development has been facing to

numerous uncertainties and risks having internal or external features
which refer to the new as well as to already established active mines
for ore production. Development and strategy planning of mining production of semi-metal mines for lead and zinc are directly connected
to the amount of money invested, the methodology for making an
investment decision and carrying out the process of the management
investing.
The investments as a determinant of the restart of the active mines
coincide with the investment decision. Decision theory makes difference between the independent and risky factors compared to the usual economic conditions. Solution of the problem investments of the
active mines referring to the conditions of market working is performed by simulation of activities using the methodology for making
an investment decision.
The conceptual model is into a phase of development, it has been being developed by using our general knowledge as well as built up by
the discussions of other experts. The presented methodology for making an investment decision through realization of business of the mining companies has recognized developing strategies having long-term
success and overcoming of the risks in an optimal way.
The development of the presented model represents a system of qualitative and quantitative expression of the conceptual knowledge model
by the author, which is supplemented by other experts opinions referring to the investment area.
1. INTRODUCTION
In conducting business activities in active mines, mining companies face with many achievements, risks and uncertainties. Uncertainty in mining projects and the need for flexibility stems from the influence of numerous internal
and external factors. The cases of uncertainty in active mines are directly related to the challenges of management
and strategy planning of mining production. On the other hand, the strategy of planning in active mines is directly
related to the amount of cash. On the other hand, they create the methodology for making the investment decision. The theory of decision makes a difference in solving various investment activities, by using a special model for
making investment decisions.
Development model is a description of how the system should act: first quantitative (through conditions, events,
mechanisms and procedures involved in the conceptual model) and then qualitatively (through algorithms that describe the conceptual model as a mathematical model). Conceptual model is the product of the author's
knowledge, coupled with discussions with other experts, as a kind of contribution to the development of methodology for decision making necessary to achieve the overall stimulation of mining production.
2. MODEL FOR INVESTMENT DECISION-MAKING

The projects Research that Has Been Performed So Far. Planning the level of mining output (in this case, lead-zinc
ore) is usually analysed, compared and optimized basing on the realized productivity versus the sum of measurable
453

PROCEEDINGS
parameters such as cost of production per ton ore excavated, as well as the parameters that can quantify, such as
the net present value of the project.
Referring to the previous analyses, the mining sites are treated as a homogenous whole, contrary to the actual requirements of the market economy in which the site can be divided into zones with different size, quality and location or to be zoned. This "theory of real option" largely borrows the basic principles of the theory of financial performance. Copeland and Keenan (1998) "real option" generally classify it as an option to increase (increasing production and moving or expanding the scope of the project), the option of delaying the operation (by acquiring new
knowledge), and the option of abandonment, which means reduction and termination of production or reduction of
the project activities scope. The procedure for valuing the real option of utmost importance for management of
mining companies is the ability to identify risks , to determine their probabilities, to investigate their effects. Such
methods include closed form equations, spread sheet simulation of cash flows, monetary models depending on
movement of simulations, partial differential equations and other computational methods (Moon, 2002; Trigeris,
1998; Chapel Antikarov, 2003, Winston, 1998, Davis and Samis 2004).
Setting a Model for Decision Making. Strategic management decisions are decisions that directly affect the operation of the mining company. These key decisions are primarily related to the level of organized mining production
or its planning. Basically, there are three basic guidelines on strategies for strategic planning of mining production:
Organizational increase the existing level of production;
Organizational maintenance of the existing level of production and
Organizational decrease of production to closure.
Strategic planning of production ore is directly related to the size of the funds needed for its implementation. Considering the previous factor, it can be seen that the greatest risk for the mining companies in strategic contains
increased levels of production, because it largely requires the greatest sum of money to be invested (finances).
The simplest solution would be to retain the existing level of production, so as to eliminate all risks of operations.
However, every company as well as the mining companies are looking to expand because it allows a better chance
for survival in the world market. Perhaps, the simplest approach to mining is focusing on non-renewable reserves,
therefore revenues are derived from partial excavation of the main good of the project i.e. already defined quantities of ore reserves at the primary site. On the other hand, the reality of geo-characteristics indicates that all mines
have limited longevity of exploitation, some depending on the size of the ore deposit and the capacity of mining
production.
Scheme 1. Methodology for deciding
454

PROCEEDINGS
After defining the goal of the problem and accession criteria for decision making, the conception underlying model
or methodology for deciding.
These management factors of the mining company tell that there must be a clear strategy for the development of
mining production (capacity of mine) i.e. to have developed a procedure for making decisions about operating in
uncertain economic conditions.
3. DEFINING CRITERIA FOR DECISION MAKING

Criteria Determination for Deciding Making. Net present value (Net present value - NPV) is one of the oldest and
best perceived as well as the most respected methods for ranking the financial feasibility of the project. This method is known as a method to discount the cash flow (Discount Cash Flow - DCF): the calculation of the net present
value, the annual difference between revenue and costs are discounted back to the time at which it is calculated
and then cumulatively it is collected. The net present value is defined as the difference between the sum of the
discounted cash flows expected from the investment and initial size of invested capital. This relationship is calculated according to equation defined.
Uncertainty in the Mining Projects. Uncertainty in mining activities require introducing flexible alternatives in the
implementation of mining projects and business activities. Generally, uncertainty of mining projects is estimated
basing on the internal (endogenous) and external (exogenous) conditions. The internal factors are conditions resulting by the sites characteristics and excavation methods, such as the content of useful components, physical and
mechanical characteristics of the working environment, management of enterprise, planning, mining equipment
and infrastructure. External factors are determined by external equivalents, such as the market price of the raw
mineral material (product) requirements for environmental protection, political risk, government policy, the requirements of stakeholders, social and industrial relations.
The main contribution to the investment decision-making is seen by introducing flexible alternatives in mining projects through simulations with realistic task to describe the environment in which business decision is made by
management.
Simulation - Quantification of Risk. Models containing variables are not known as satisfactory level of accuracy
called stochastic methods. When decision should be made referring to some of the input parameters with a strong
influence on the decision requires assessment to be realistic situation. Simulation approach largely reflects the real
situation or environment where the decision should be made and the holders job is easily performed. In a simple
way, the simulation "Monte Carlo" uses artificial values for certain parameters thereby generating thousands, but
sometimes analysing their predominant characteristics, even several hundred thousand outcomes.
The triangular distribution is used for quantification of the indefinite parameters for capital costs or investments.
While it usually takes into account the unfavourable situation, which means that costs are always higher than desired therefore the likelihood of the appearance of low cost is significantly reduced. The same distribution for
quantification of the indefinite parameters for use of metal is applied. While it usually takes the value of phenomena within the framework of any of the values are equal. Normal distribution is used for quantification of the uncertainty of the parameters for the content of useful components i.e. the quality of the ore. Taking into consideration
the possibility that the occurrence is usually higher quality and poor ore alike to decline comparing to the average
quality of the ore.
Determine the Value of the Concentrates. Primary asset which has a mine ore (in this case, lead and zinc). Its value
is inconsistent size, or change depending on current metal prices of lead and zinc market and the content of useful
components (metal lead and zinc) in the ore and the use of metal. In many cases, companies have only a mine and a
flotation, making their final product - concentration of lead and zinc, that is marketed and obtained by processing
exploited ore.
Defining the input parameters, such as the characteristics of the ore (metal content of lead ore and the metal content of zinc ore), the terms of the contract of lead concentrate (metal content of lead in concentrate, using the
metal lead, smeltery use the metal lead, smeltery processing costs per tonne of concentrate defined base price of
the metal on the lead content of bismuth metal in concentrate), conditions of contract for the zinc concentrate
(metal content of zinc in concentrate, use the metal zinc costs smeltery work per a ton concentrate base price of
the metal zinc and iron content of metal in concentrate), market prices i.e. the price of the lead metal and the price
of the zinc metal, that are part of the application of the methodology of lead-zinc concentrates.
Analysis of the Option Value. Early start is often estimated by calculating its net present value (NPV). Therefore, a
simulation approach is proposed to incorporate independence and net present value calculations, thus creating
455

PROCEEDINGS
stochastic model that describes the behaviour of both risk factors with the greatest impact on the independence of
the net present value. By simulating the risk over the duration of the project (production) we get the probability to
distribute the risk factors. When this distribution will be included in the net present value calculations, we get the
probability to distribute the net present value. Given the available standing full distribution of net present value,
you can select parameter "measure of uncertainty" as the interval for reliability or value at risk . The value of the
project or production is a complex function consisting of a number of risk factors that affect earnings (Pt - Rt) annually. The value of the project for production per year (t) is defined by equations. On the basis of the obtained
simulations of MPV, all statistical parameters for net present value in uncertain economic conditions are determined.
4. DECIDING ON THE LEVEL OF PROJECT

As already stated, the decision to increase the level of production or mining capacity can be treated as an investment decision. Raising the level of production, which is a necessary part of the site to be prepared for work, involving the appropriate number of mining objects or facilities. It is necessary to supply the proper mining equipment
that will be engaged in the process of exploitation as well as equipment to expand the capacity for processing of
ore flotation. If there are no reserves in the capacity of existing facilities to process additional ore quantity for the
realization of the above activities, there is necessity of appropriate funds (finance) i.e. an adequate amount of investment assets. Based on the afore mentioned factors pushed a logical question is imposed for justification of the
investment. The final decision is made based on the parameters of the investment justification. Criteria is the net
present value MPV used for decision:
1. MPV > 0,02 - 0,05* investment: to make a positive decision on the proposed increased production capacity and
technological solutions that provide the capacity;
2. 0 < MPV 2* investment: delayed decision and recommended adjustments to the proposed capacity to increase production and improve the technical and technological solutions;
3. MPV < 0: negative decision is made to increase the capacity of the mine i.e. increased production to be
achieved and current production to keep the levels.
Theoretically viewed, it is sufficient criteria of the net present value to meet the requirement of MPV>0 to a positive decision. However, taking into consideration the foregoing peculiarities in the mining industry and investment
environment. It is a little more rigorous criteria in order to increase the reliability of the developer in terms of making the final decision.
5. CONCLUSION
Taking into account numerous factors mentioned in this paper, it is necessary to create a model of decisionmaking, whose main role will be covering the relevant variables, defining their impact on the decision and, in accordance with the definition of criteria, finding a solution, i.e. the determination of strategic direction of the decision. The precise model of decision-making is a precondition for successful decision making. Conceptual model
should include simulation approach in order to include uncertainties in the calculation of net present value. Stochastic model also analyses the adoption of risk factors that have the strongest influence on the uncertainty of the
net present value of the project. The simulation results into a distribution of the probability of these risk factors
over the duration of the project, current research, setting the model etc.. By including greater number of uncertain
and risky conditions in the calculation of net present value which results into a developed model of appropriate
decision to invest in actively producing mines.
REFERENCES
[1]
Dushan Nikolovski, Strategic planning of ore production in uncertain conditions of economy, Economy and Business, Skopje, 2009
[2]
Brennen, M E.Schwartz, Evaluating natural resourse investment, Journal for Business 58 (2), 135-157,1995
[3]
Copeland, T.E. Keenan, P.T.Making Real Options real, The Mc Kisey Quarerly No, 3 128-141, 1998 b
[4]
yer. Z. Kazakidis. V., Decision Making in Flexible Mine Production System Design Using Real Options, Submitted to ASCE journal of
Constructions Engineering and Management on March 19, 2005
[5]
Dushan Nikolovski, Methodology for investment decision in active mines, Mining and Geology No. 19, 2011
456

PROCEEDINGS
ON-LINE ASH-ANALYZERS
AND SCALES IN OPEN COAL MINES
- Coal Quality Management System
ABSTRACT
Dr. Ari ARTINYAN1
Luben DIMOV2
Institute for Nuclear Research and

Nuclear Energy, Sofia, Bulgaria
2
ANALIX Ltd., Sofia, Bulgaria
A new generation of on-belt ash-meters and scales was designed by Analix,

Bulgaria. Accuracy, reliability, and stability are improved by a new high-tech
electronics design and software.
A Coal Quality Management System (CQMS) based on seventeen on-belt ashanalyzers (and belt scales in same time) BCA-6 was built in the biggest Bulgarian coal open pits - Maritza East Mines. The on-belt instruments are
mounted directly on the twelve coal excavators and at the end of the all five
conveyor lines transporting coal to the three Thermal Power Plants working
in the same area. The analyzers are connected in radio net and information
is transferred on-line to the pit dispatchers and the staff in charge.
The benefits of using the CQMS come from meeting the requirements for a
constant quality of the coal delivered to TPP and from making use of the
high ash-content coal. Anticipated decrease of production costs for 1t of
coal is 2-3%.
Keywords
Ash-meters, Coal quality control, On-belt analyzers,
On-belt Scales, Radioisotope Instruments
1. ASH ANALYZER BCA-6

Principles
Analix Belt-Conveyor Ash-analyzers (BCA) use the well-known and common physical principle attenuation of two
gamma-energies (low and high), cross passing the coal.
Figure 1. Principle diagram
The attenuation of the gamma-energy is calculating by the formula:

( E , Z ). . d
I I o .e
ln(I o ) ln(I ) ( E , Z )..d
(1)
or:
(2)
457

PROCEEDINGS
where:
- I intensity of the passed radiation, sec-1;
- Io intensity at empty belt, sec-1;
- specific weight of the coal, g/cm3;
- d thickness of the coal layer, cm;
- (E,Z) the factor characterizing the attenuation of a -radiation depending on its energy, cm2/g.
When we have two different energies and divide their attenuations, we cancel the specific weight and the
thickness:
ln I ln I
ln I L o ln I L
H
L
f ( Z eff )
H
(3)
Zeff is the effective atomic number of the coal, which is determined by the ratio between two components of the
coal or lignite: organic (Zeff 6) and mineral (Zeff 12) i.e. by the ash content.
But in theory as well as in the practice the things are not so simple as it could seems. There are a lot of factors,
influencing this dependence:
the variable chemical composition of the coal ash we could obtain the same Zeff when the ash content is
different;
the variable moisture and grain size could cause significant mistakes, if not accounted;
climate changes;
electrical and electro-magnetic interferences, etc.
What helped us to account all these factors and to measure coal ash-content directly at the Bucket Wheel and
Chain Excavators? It was our high speed Gamma-spectrum Multichannel Analyzer that made possible on-line
registration and developing of the full gamma-spectrum of the passed-trough radiation.
Figure 2. Gamma Spectrum of the Ash Analyzer
We use five spectral areas for accounting the varying chemical composition of the coal mineral phase (so called
ash) and the varying physical parameters of the coal. Trough an original algorithm and respective mathematical
mode we achieve results with highest reliability regardless changes in the coal origin, chemical composition, humidity and size.
Our software for spectrum stabilization trough every second pick localization and respective HV correction was
proved as the best by practice. Cs-137 (661 KeV) gamma spectral line was used for this spectrum stabilization 7
years ago in our first instrument applied in coal mines (-05). Besides the good results during the first years of
working in Maritza East Mines some problems occur, unknown in the routine spectral analysis in not so hard and so
variable conditions.
458

PROCEEDINGS
In the generally applied way for gamma spectrum registration the intensities of the lines of Cs-137 and Am-241 are
measured in fixed regions of interest. As rule this is a hardware adjustment.
We changed this routine approach and so significantly improved the sensitivity and the precision of the method.
Our on-belt ash-meters were the first instruments of this type using on-line full spectrum processing and respectively software determination of the line edges in the spectrum. The exact localization of these edges allows applying of the background subtraction and respective improving of the signal-noise ratio. But here is another problem
following from the great variety of the spectrum depending on the quantity of the material over the belt. The spectrum line areas change up to 500 times from empty belt to fully loaded belt. Respectively the lines amplitude and
wide changes all the time and the edges dont stay at one place. Our software enables current fixing of the line
edges and exact calculation of the background in every single second.
Together with changing the lines shape the great variety of the intensity during changing of the loaded coal causes
a total change of the detector non-linearity. The dependence between the energy of the gamma-quanta and the
height of scintillation detector outgoing pulses changes in different way for the low and for the high energy. That
means the localization only of the high energy pick, which is enough in the routine spectral analyses is not enough
for the ash-meters in the mines. So we develop an independent localization of the low-energy pick also. So we account the breathing of the spectrum in wide as well as in height.
These innovations introduced by us allow the Analix on-belt ash-analyzers to become the first successfully working
directly at the excavators in the open pit coal mines. The large and very variable size of the coal, the hard meteorological conditions, the vibrations and the dust are not problem anymore due to our new design and software.
Construction and installing of BCA-6
Figure 3. Block-Scheme of BCA-6
The Ash Analyzers are mounted directly on the Belt-Conveyors without changing the construction of the Conveyor.
Figure 4. Ash-analyzer on the belt conveyor
459
Figure 5. Ash-analyzer on the chain excavator

PROCEEDINGS
At the Bucket Wheel and Chain Excavators the on-belt weight and ash analyzers are installed on the discharge
boom also without changing the belt construction.
The supporting structure of the on-belt ash analyzer is a rectangular frame vertically mounted and embracing the
belt. On the top crossbeam is mounted the detector unit registering irradiation cross passing the coal.
Under the belt is mounted the shielded container with two sources of radiation. Due to heavy lead protection
covering sources no radiation could be obtained at any point around the instrument. There is only one narrow collimator letting a pencil type beam to go out vertically across the coal to the detector where this beam is totally
absorbed. You can see the mechanics of this unit opening and closing the collimator. It could be made automatically, or by remote control, or locally during the service works.
In waterproof side mounted boxes are housed supplying units for low and high voltage, specialized electronics processing the detector signal, high speed spectral analyzer controlled by a local processor, and the computer. The
computer controls the measurements, calculates the load and the ash content and supports the connection with
the server.
The construction of the instrument is module-based and allows service and maintenance works in almost any conditions and usually without stopping the belt.
The computer of the instrument is installed in the control room.
In the operator cabin a terminal unit shows to the operator the current load and ash content as well as the respective values preset by the dispatcher. Also there are shown the position of the excavator, the disk thickness, the excavating regime, etc. A full history of the quantity and quality of the excavated coal is available. This on-line information helps much the operator to control the excavator work all the time and especially in the contact zones between the coal and overburden or between the coal and clay. Our instrument is user friendly so the excavator operators easy become familiar with the new features.
Trough a radiomodem on the top of the excavator the measurements are continuously transmitted to the server.
From the data processed and stored there we have a full information and accounting about the excavated coal,
overburden and clay, and respective ash content for all excavators.
Accuracy of BCA-6
The standard error for ash content:
- 0.5% for the range 5.0 10.0%
- 1.0% for the range 10.0 20.0%
- 1.5% for the range 20.0 35.0%
- 2.0% for the range 35.0 50.0%
For the measured weight the accuracy is about 2 % for quantities more than 500 t.
Radiation safety of BCA-6
Our instruments are permanently checked and licenzed by the Bulgarian Agency for Nuclear Regulation.
All measurements done last 7 years by all kind of regulatory officials (Agency for Nuclear Regulation, Ministry of
Health, Ministry of Internal Affairs, etc.) confirm the complete radiation safety of our radioisotope on-belt ashanalyzers.
The staff passing by, or working around as closed as possible, do not obtain any irradiation. Only on the way of the
beam bellow the detector is a dangerous place when the collimator is open. But we cant be there when the belt is
running. And when the belt is stopping, the collimator is closing. When collimator is open, the beam is 100% absorbed by the detector unit, so over it there is also no radiation.
There is no one case the radiation for people working there or passing by to be higher then the native radioactive
background for that area.
460

PROCEEDINGS
2. COAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (CQMS)

In 2005 in the biggest Bulgarian Lignite Open Pits - Maritza East Mines started building of a System for Coal Quality
Management (CQMS).
The goals of the System
The goals of the System were as follows:
On-line Coal Quality Management and Control meeting both customers requirements and own benefits;
Optimization of the whole coal extraction, transportation and delivery process;
Provision of reliable data for current state of mining excavators, diggers and transportation machinery;
Administering of coal flow output;
Central and local supervision and management of mining.
History of building the System
In the beginning the on-line coal quality and quantity measurement was introduced only at the end of the all five
belt conveyor transport systems in the three open pits of Maritza East Mines. In two of these pits coal is carried by
trains to the TPP stations and in the third one the belt conveyor transports the coal directly to the TPP. The ash
analyzers installed at these 5 points measure the belt load and the coal ash content, so we have on-line information
about the coal quantity and quality in the loaded trains as well as at the belt loading coal in the TPP store.
Dispatcher has on-line information about the quality of outgoing coal so he can control it trough changing the output of each excavator to meet the desired value of the common coal quality. But if he had information for the ash
content only at the end points of the 3-4 km long conveyor systems, than in case of big quality deviation and respective dispatcher decision to change the load of some excavators, the result would come with too big delay because there is a lot of coal already loaded on the conveyors.
It was the reason for us to design and built ash analyzers working directly at the Bucket Wheel and Chain Excavators. Nobody could do it before in any coal pit because of the serious fear that the extremely hard conditions as
well as the large coal size right after excavating will obstruct the necessary accuracy and reliability. But we took
the challenge and the practice of last 6
years showed that we successfully solved
that seemed insoluble task. In 2006-2007
we successfully install on-belt ashanalyzers at all 12 coal excavators in Maritza East Mines.
Studding all the exploitation problems in
next 2 years allow us to designing a next
generation on-belt ash analyzers (BCA-06).
Last two years all 17 on-belt ash-analyzers
were renewed.
Structure and functions of the Coal Quality Management System (CQMS) and
transmitting data from the measurement
points to the servers
All 17 analyzers and the 3 servers are connected in a radio net which includes their
own radio modems as well as some intermediate modems ensuring connections
between the basic points in the hard for
radio connection mine conditions.
Figure 6. CQMS in Troyanovo-1 & 2 Coal Pits
461

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 7. Radio connections in one of the pits
Permanent on-line measurement of the coal quantity and ash content

The first and basic level of the CQMS is the on-line measurement of the coal quantity and quality at 17 points in the
three open pits of Maritza East Mines. These points are all 12 coal excavators (4 in each pit), and the ends of the 5
conveyor transport lines carrying the coal out to the three TPP working in that region. The measurements are done
at every second.
Processing the collected information and using it by Pit Chief Dispatcher
All the information concerning coal excavation and transportation and the status of all excavators and conveyor
belts for each of the three pits is processed and stored in the respective servers (third level of the System). These
servers are installed in the Dispatcher posts of the three pits where trough their working stations the Pit Chief Dispatchers control all the excavation and transportation process and the coal quantity and quality. Besides the
measurement data these servers store full data base for coal deposits including the general geological maps and all
current data from geological samples. Special software helps the pit chief dispatcher to make the shift tasks for
each excavator and generally for the pit. By means of the System during the shift he controls the realization of
these tasks and could develop or change them.
At his display dispatcher can see all the time, or when necessary at several screens the next information:
the current values of the coal quality and ash content at each working excavator and at the pit outgoing
points;
location and status of the excavators, belt conveyor system and trains;
current quantity and ash content of the coal loaded at every 50 meters of the each belt conveyor from the
pit transportation systems;
daily (shift) tasks for each excavator, for all the pit and for each client;
detailed shift history of the excavating process as graphics or as table for each excavator, for each client
and for all the pit;
geological map, graphically showing by color scale the vertical projection of technologically split mining layers to be excavated and location of the excavators.
462

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 8. Main screen of the dispatchers display
Figure 9. Geological map the first mining layer
Delivery of information to the Mines Management

The highest level of the CQMS is the information delivery to the head office of Maritza East Mines. All kinds of reports could be taken of these servers trough the Maritza East Mines Internal Net. Depending on the level of access
every specialist and manager can receive real time information concerning excavation process and coal deliveries
to the TPP and reports for any period of time and by any criteria. So the System helps to the leading managers to
make the best decisions for the current and for the general mines exploiting.
3. BENEFITS OF USING COAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Meeting customers requirements
The on-line management of quality significantly improved the meeting customers requirements. For example the
biggest Bulgarian TPP Maritza East-2 receiving coal from Maritza East Mines requires the mean coal ash content
to be in 2% wide diapason and not more than 5% difference for a single shift. Before introducing CQMS the difference between the annual mean values of the ash content analyzed by coal lab in TPP Maritza East-2 and given by
Maritza East Mines certificates is 2.6%. This difference decreased to 1.2% after putting CQMS in operation. In same
time the number of penalties because of exceeding 5% difference decreased from 90 to 10 annually.
Improving coal/overburden ratio
On-site blending of coal during the excavation trough the CQMS allows the usage of high-ash coal, which is up to
15% in some parts of Maritza East Mines. It brings additional annual income of millions euro to the Mines.
Optimization of the mining processes
The System provides reliable data for current state of mining excavators and transportation machinery which allows the staff in charge to have a full view over all the processes and a fast reaction when necessary. CQMS has
become an indispensable device for the mining process management.
Supervision and management improvement
Benefits given by improving the control of processes, machinery and staff is difficult to be calculated. But they are
easy visible - at the computer screens, during the production conferences, and in almost every information transfer
- data, obtained by CQMS are in permanent use.
Decrease of production costs
The general estimation of the CQMS using in last years shows decrease of production costs for 1t of coal of 2-3%.
463

PROCEEDINGS
DETERMINING RELEVANT ATTRIBUTES

AND CORRESPONDING INDICATORS IN
A DECISION MAKING CONCEPT FOR SITE-SELECTION
OF COAL FIRED THERMAL POWER PLANTS
ABSTRACT
Daniela MLADENOVSKA1
Ana M. LAZAREVSKA2
JSC Macedonian Power Plants, Skopje,

Macedonia
2
Faculty of Mechanical Engineering,
Ss Cyril and Methodius University,
Skopje, Macedonia
daniela.mladenovska@elem.com.mk
Each investment decision is followed by risks and uncertainties which depend on

its complexity. In particular, when it comes to construction of electricity generation facilities, there is a variety of relevant factors significantly influencing the
price of the generated electricity, as well as the environment in general. In the
case of coal-fired thermal power plants, the problem is even more complex, especially when, due to lack of space, lack of transportation infrastructure, unsuitable terrain, water supply issues etc., situating the potential thermal power plant
in the vicinity of the mine is questionable, or even impossible. In such cases,
while the construction of a new power plant near the mine shall result in higher
capital costs, possible selection of a more distant location with already existing
infrastructure, shall often lead to increasing operational costs due to the increased coal transportation costs.
Improved and objective cognition of such complex systems from a risk assessment perspective is a must, in parallel with the notion to deliver rational and
objective decisions regarding levelized electricity costs and minimized environmental impact, whereby preserving safety and reliability in-situ.
In the herein presented paper, the main goal is to identify the crucial factors (i.e.
attributes) and the corresponding indicators for delivering decisions relevant for
site-screening and optimal site-selection of a coal-fired thermal power plant. In
particular, we focus on the mine specific factors and their functional interdependence as part of a more generalized multi criteria decision making (MCDM)
concept for enabling selection of optimal alternatives for coal-fired thermal
power plant site selection, with minimized levelized electricity costs, while maintaining minimal environmental impact.
Keywords
Decision-Making Indicators, Thermal Power Plants, Site Selection, Coal Mining
1. INTRODUCTION
Selecting an optimal site for a coal fired thermal power plant (TPP) is vital for its long term sustainability. variety
of criteria come into play when deciding where to install the plant. Operating a thermal power plant has the ultimate target to make business profitable. Hence for optimizing the profit, the location of the plant is a significant
factor.
The First International Conference on Sustainable Construction in 1994 defined sustainable construction as the
creation and responsible maintenance of a healthy built environment, based on ecological principles and by means
of an efficient use of resources.[1][2] Existing studies and practices referring to selecting an optimal site location
for thermal power plants in the region confirm that the most important categories in the process of the related site
selection decision making are legal, economic, environmental, social and spatial and technical issues. [3] [4] Moreover, very often, complex, nonlinear and conflicting aspects affect this process.
E.g., in terms of minimal fuels transportation costs, it is obvious that the best location for a new coal fired power
plant is always the immediate vicinity of the coal mine. But is it always feasible? There are many obstacles on this
way: lack of space, water supply issues, lack of infrastructure (roads, transmission lines), seismic activity, etc. Simi-
464

PROCEEDINGS
larly, conflicting and complex aspects arise when considering the multifaceted issue of water supply and water
energy nexus, as the demand for both water and energy increases. [5]
On the other side, if we assume that erecting a new unit within an already existing thermal power plant is a better
option, then a precise evaluation of the costs should be done (share of the existing infrastructure into the total
costs of the new unit per installed MW, transportation costs, etc.). In addition, there is a variety of criteria (qualitative/quantitative) that are necessary to be taken into consideration in terms of personnel availability, contribution
to the economic growth (in region and beyond), new direct jobs, environmental impact.
Ash disposal, air, soil and water pollution contributes to serious ecological and environmental imbalance. Sustainable design applies good design practices and good business principles in addition to preserving the natural environment.
The reform of electricity markets has affected the decision making in the power sector and led investors to take
into account the financial risks associated with alternative options, as well as, their economic performance. In view
of the risks they are facing in competitive markets, investors tend to favor less capital intensive and more flexible
technologies.[6] When considering the flexibility, possibility for using imported coal is also an option, and in that
case the distance from the nearest seaport can significantly increase its weight.
The main focus of this paper is to set up the decision making hierarchy regarding the optimal site selection for a
coal fired thermal power plant, primarily in relation to the mine location, and accordingly, to define relevant sets of
decision making attributes and corresponding indicators as per a set of potential alternatives. As presented in the
proposed decision making hierarchy, the solution of the presented problem involves a spectrum of nonlinear correlations among the separate hierarchy categories and sub-categories (see Figure 1). However, since the herein presented approach represents a pioneer step, involving those non-linear complexities in the first instance has been
deliberately omitted, and the authors assume linear independence among the category and sub-category attributes.
2. MULTICRITERIA DECISION MAKING: THEORY AND BACKGROUND

Multicriteria Decision-Making (MCDM) can be perceived as a process of evaluating real-world situations, based on
various qualitative and/or quantitative criteria in certain, uncertain, and/or risky environments to suggest a suitable course of action, choice, strategy and/or policy among the available options.[7] The problem becomes even
more complex with conflicting and non-commensurable criteria and involvement of a bigger number of decisionmakers.[7]
Established recently as a mathematical science, the decision making formalizes the thinking process and contributes towards making better decisions which shall be transparent in all its aspects. We need to have certain fundamental understanding of this most valuable process in order to deliver a final and reliable optimal decision. [8]
Decision making involves many criteria and sub-criteria used to rank the alternatives of a decision.[8] In accordance
to this, the main components of a MCDM process are the resources (atributes, alternatives, criteria), the process of
transformation (operators, mappings) and the final state (decision). The amount of existing knowledge related to
each component defines the rank of a well or bad defined decision making problem. (Figure 1)[9]
Figure 1. Relations between components of the

multi-criteria decision making process.
Source: (Lazarevska et al.,2009)
465

PROCEEDINGS
During the decision making process, not only it is necessary to create priorities for the alternatives with respect to
the criteria or subcriteria in terms of which they need to be evaluated, but also for the criteria in terms of a higher
goal, or if they depend on the alternatives, then in terms of the alternatives themselves. The criteria may be intangible, and have no measurements to serve as a guide to rank the alternatives, and to create priorities for the criteria themselves in order to weight the priorities of the alternatives and add over all the criteria to obtain the desired
overall ranks of the alternatives is a challenging task. [8]
Alternatives
The alternatives represent the decision makers possible choices. When the alternatives are to be constructed, the
starting point is usually a small number of ideas from the (pool_of) decision maker(s). These ideas must then be enriched to arrive at a respectable choice set. This enrichment is twofold: firstly, the choice must be enlarged, and
secondly each alternative must be clothed with information.[10] Mintzberg (1975) clarified that actual decision
makers very quickly eliminate large number of possible alternatives to limit their choice to a very small number of
alternatives that later are to be examined in details. This may be related to the cost and difficulty involved in analyzing all alternatives[10],[11]
Criteria and Indicators
Criteria has been defined as a feature on which each alternative can be evaluated.[7] The involved criteria and subcriteria use to rank the alternatives of a decision. [8] There are many definitions for indicators, but in fact they are
information tools. Indicators summarize the data for complex and very often conflicting problems, with objective
to determine the actual condition, as well as to create a forecast for the future trends. In the context of policy
making processes, indicators represent key signals for the necessary legislation improvements. Indicators serve to
four main functions: simplification, quantification, standardization and communication, and usually contain assessments and analyses in the context of the defined goals. [12]
Figure 2. Information pyramid. Source: (Nopal, Lazarevska, 2009)
Mathematical Definition of the decision making model

As stated in the Introduction Section, the main goal of this paper is to solely define the decision making hierarchy
regarding the optimal site selection for a coal fired thermal power plant, primarily in relation to the mine location
of and the corresponding indicators. The decision-making hierarchy is defined in accordance to the MCDM theory
which is elaborated in detail by Hwang and Masud (1979), Keeny and Raiffa (1993), Belton (1999), Belton and Stewart (2002) [7],[9] and the Analytic Hierarchy Process (AHP) technique proposed by Saaty, T. L. (2008) [8], whereby the
minimum and maximum values of the utility function determining the best alternative, is defined in accordance
to
466

PROCEEDINGS
max/ x min U ( f ) wi u i ( f j ( x))
(1)
where U(f) is the overall utility function, and wi and ui are the weight and utility related to a particular criteria and
the corresponding alternative.[9]
i 1
3. DEFINITION AND STRUCTURE OF THE ANALYZED PROBLEM

Since the overall goal in case of a site selection for a coal fired thermal power plant is to provide future sustainable
operation, it is obvious that the triple bottom line of sustainability areas (economy, environment, social) must be
analyzed. All legal constraints must be taken in consideration, and also spatial and technical consideration as well
as for micro location, and beyond for the region. As well, economic implications have a great influence due to the
significant share of fuel costs in the power plant operational costs (OPEX). One of the crucial topics in this analysis
is the fact that many of the factors are interdependent. E.g. site location specifics (ambient air temperature, air
humidity, elevation) affect plant efficiency. Environmental costs are related with the power plant location, in terms
of the distance from the nearest settlements, etc. Land property (acquisition) is interdependent with economic
implications and social influences. Environmental requirements, and site location specifics have significant impact
on investment costs (CAPEX). In many regions, the amount of water withdrawn by the power sector has a significant
effect on the overall water supply and on the ecological health of surface water bodies. Unlike the emission of
greenhouse gases, which is intinsically a global problem, the water energy nexus is a regional problem. The regional
variations in water recources, water demand, electricity demand and energy mix, create hot spots where the
water-energy nexus is more crucial than elsewhere. The implementation of carbone capture technology and flue
gas desulfurisation equipment, besides the increasing in investment costs, can significantlly increase the amount of
water used per MWh produced.This equipment also has a negative impact on the overall plant efficiency. [13] [14]
Nevertheless, involvement of
nonlinearities in the decision
making process implies unnecessary problem complexification
which might lead to misinterpretation of the hierarchy. Thus,
as a first instance to our study,
linear independence among
category variables in the hierarchy is assumed in this paper,
while nonlinearity aspects are to
be examined in future studies.
Hence, the first instance hierarchy is presented in Figure 2.
Figure 2. Defining problem hierarchy for

site-selection of coal fired thermal power plants
467

PROCEEDINGS
It can be concluded that economic implications, and spatial and technical considerations have more dominant influence in site selection due to their complexity, and closer dependency with the site features. These attributes,
with the corresponding indicators are presented as follows.
Site location specifics and proposed indicators:
geomechanical soil properties
- unit weight (N/m3)
- porosity (fraction between 0 and 1)
- void ratio e (-)
- shear strength (Pa)
seismic factor: number (-)
all relevant distances (as in Figure 2): km
area for TPP: m2/KW
water:
cooling technology
- water availability (m3/h)
- inlet water temperature (0C)
- water withdrawal (m3/MWh)
- water consumption (l/kWh)
- dry bulb air temperature (0C)
- cooling tower efficiency
- cooling approach (0C)
- cooling range (0C)
heat rate (kJ/kWh)
plant efficiency (%)
flue gas temperature (0C)
boiler make up (l/h)
In cases when erection of a new unit has been proposed on the site of an already existing thermal power plant
(TPP), the decision maker should have available, ready and reliable indicators to evaluate the existing infrastructure
and, optionally, to decide which portion is justified to be utilized in the new settings. No alternative should be under- or overestimated in advance.
Existing infrastructure:
water supply installation, plant for chemical water treatment, waste water treatment plant, switchyard
- cost share in total CAPEX (%/MW)
- obsoleteness (years of operation (-))
qualified personel
- number of vailable key staff (-)
- age (years)
- experience (years)
Economic implications:
CAPEX (mio/MW)
OPEX
- fuel costs (/tkm)
- other O&M cost (/KW a)
Contribution to economic growth (Gross Domestic product/capita)
468

PROCEEDINGS
For the purpose of determining corresponding weights of each indicator, a pool of expert and stakeholders will be
identified and questionnaires will be distributed among them. For calculating the weights, the AHP will be utilized.
The weights in the utility function (Eq.1) correspond to the elements of the normalized principle eigenvector of a
matrix, derived by aggregating stakeholders opinions/judgments. It should be emphasized that the research is ongoing, and as a result of further analyses the importance of each indicator will be quantified
4. CONCLUSIONS
In this paper introduced was a MCDM conceptual approach to site screening and optimal site selection of a coal
fired TPP. This concept aims at including optimal nuber of parameters affecting/contributing the sustainable plant
construction and operation. The hierarchy of the defined problem has been presented. The further study shall
determine whether the presented atributes and the optimal ones, thus the criteria shall be re-examined and
corresponding indicators shall be adopted. The herein presented concept is a solid base for modeling optimal site
selection and thus it can be used in further case studies in this field. Since in this paper the nonlinear correlations
between main parameters affecting the TPP site selection have been omitted, the differentiation and definition of
interdependancies shall be a subject to future research.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMES
AHP
CAPEX
MCDM
OPEX
O&M
TPP
Analytical Hierarchy Process

Capital Expenditure
Multicriteria Desicion-Making
Operating Expenditure
Operation and Maintenance
Thermal Power Plant
REFERENCES
[1]
udi V., et al.: Ash from thermal power plants as secondary raw material, Arh Hig Rade Toksikol 2007; 58:233-238.
[2]
Canadian Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute. Introduction [displayed 9 September 2006]. Available at
http://www.cpci.ca/?sc=sustainability
[3]
AF Mercados: ELEM, FYR Macedonia:Tecgnical and economic review of lower carbon alternatives for power capacity
increase, 2012
[4]
Gruji M., Ristovi I., Gruji M.:Model for selectionof the optimal location of a thermal power unit according to the external
coal conveyance criterion, 2010
[5]
National Conference of State Legislatures: Water Energy Nexus Overview, november 2009. Available at
http://www.ncsl.org/issues-research/env-res/overviewofthewaterenergynexusintheus.aspx (5)
[6]
http://www.iea.org/textbase/npsum/ElecCostSUM.pdf (6)
[7]
Srinivasa Raju K., Nagesh Kumar D.: Multicriterion analysis in Engineering and Management, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2010
[8]
Saaty T.L.:Decision making with the analytic hierarchy process,Int.J.services Sciences, Vol.1, No.1, 2008 :83-98
[9]
Lazarevska et al.: A multi-criteria decision making conceptual approach to optimal landfill monitoring, Springer science+Business Media B.V. 2009
[10]
Pomerol, J. Ch and Romero S.B.: Multicriterion Decision in Management, Principles and Practice; Kluwer Academic Publishers, Netherlands, 2000.
[11]
Mintzberg, 1975 sited in: Pomerol, J. Ch and Romero S.B.: Multicriterion Decision in Management, Principles and Practice;
Kluwer Academic Publishers, Netherlands, 2000.
[12]
Birkmann J.: Indicators and criteria for measuring vulnerability,Theoretical bases and requirements, 2006:55-77
[13]
Martn A.D.: Water Footprint of Electric Power Generation;Modeling its use and analyzing options for a water-scarce future,
2008.
[14]
US Environmental Protection Agency: Available and emerging technologies for reducing greenhouse gas emissions from
coal-fired electric generating units, 2010.
[15]
Nath R.: Standard technical specification for main plant package of sub-critical thermal power project 2x(500MW or
above);Government of India, 2008.
469

PROCEEDINGS
COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS IN LIMESTONE DEPOSIT,

REPUBLIC OF KOSOVO
ABSTRACT
Ahmet BYTYI1
Edmond GOSKOLLI2
Idaver HISEINI3
Nexhmi KRASNIQI4
KEK, Prishtin, Kosov, ahmet_ing@hotmail.com

2
AKBN, Tiran, Albania
3
UT, Tetov, Macedonia, idaver_edi@yahoo.com
4
KEK, Prishtin, Kosov, knexhi_ing@hotmail.com
Substantial reserves of limestone and limestone dolomites are used as materials in construction and industry can be found everywhere throughout the
territory of Kosovo, but also have to show dolomites which occur mainly in
the western areas of the country. These deposits have an economic importance for the Republic of Kosovo, which is under Mining Strategies year
(2012-2025) have been researched and documented more than 276 areas of
limestone with 7.69 billion m, 120 marbles areas with 2.18 billion m and
two dolomite areas with about 1.4 billion m.
In this paper a functional model in the deposits of carbonate rocks is presented. One such model is applied to mineral deposit limestone Astrazub
which uses the company Geo Mineral. So for a fair assessment of investment in technology to acquire a cubic meter of useful minerals, should question the analysis of costs and benefits (B/C) for these mineral resources in
Kosovo.
Keywords
Limestone, Reserves, Cost benefit
1. INTRODUCTION
Kosovo is rich in deposits of carbonate rocks (Fig.1), which include limestone, dolomite and marbles. Total deposits
of carbonate rocks in Kosovo are 396 (Table 1) behave geological reserves 11,27 (bilion.m3). These resources, together with geological deposits of silicate rocks represent a good basis for development economic of Kosovo
(Barth, et. al., 2006). Therefore for these geological resources necessary planning and evaluation exploitation of
these row mineral.
Figure 1. Spatial Distribution of Mine ability of Carbonate Hard Rocks.

1: 1,000,000 (Beak, 2006, modified))
470

PROCEEDINGS
Therefore, for evaluation of capital investment in this segment of economy should be taken into the current level
of scientific achievement and technological possibilities of production, applying method called Cost Benefit Analyses (B/C). Cost benefit analysis during the implementation of projects using limestone provides a more appropriate
basis for assessing the perspective of deposit exploitation through implicit forecast costs and.
Table 1. Geological Reserves of Carbonates Hard Rocks and Silicate Hard Rocks
Commodity
Group
Deposit
(Total)
Geological
Reserves
bilion (m3)
Area
(km2)
Silicate Hard Rocks
10
2.5
262
Carbonate Hard Rocks
396
11.27
199
Sum
406
13.77
486
2. ASSESSING THE COST OF OPENING AND USE OF THE LIMESTONE DEPOSIT

Given the analysis of economic evaluation of the process of surface exploitation of mineral deposits useful addition
to technological and technical indicators to analyze the level of investment and production costs as the main evaluation factors extraction and processing costs and selling price 1[m3] of limestone rock. In determining the cost of
extraction and processing of 1 [m3] limestone usually have to take into account all the necessary actions that enable exploitation and processing and therefore also in this context the building structure of the sale price that 1 [m3]
should be based on the costs that are made during production (exploitation). Income from carbonate rocks fractions benefit can be filed on the basis of the relation (1) who expresses the amount of product between annual
production and selling price per unit product:
(1)
R S Qv Ps
Where : R = Revenue from the sale of production
Qv = Annual production
Ps = Product selling price per unit
Selling price of a unit of limestone fractions (Ps) said the amount of the cost of expenses (Cp)
and profit planning (P).
Ps C p P
(2)
Where : Cp = cost price

P = planned profit
The cost of gaining 1 [m3] factions carbonate rocks is determined by the amount of expenses
directly (Dc) and indirect (Ic).
Ps D c I c
(3)
Where :
Dc = direct costs (these are the costs of labour, materials and equipment costs)
Ic = indirect costs
Operating costs (Oc): submit expenses for engaging the workforce in the manufacturing process (Mp)
Oc M p
(4)
Material costs (Mc): represent the costs necessary for the implementation of certain operations technological process: drilling-blasting, loading, separation, etc. To carry out these operations in the process of using beneficial minerals needed: fuel, explosive etc. (Mcfe)
(5)
M c (M cfe )
471

PROCEEDINGS
In the realization of every technological process during the development of mining activity inthe utilization of useful minerals, different materials are needed, such as: fuels, explosives, oils etc. Therefore, it is of course that in this
case to determine the amount necessary to other materials used consumables normative act production work. Operating costs of equipment (Oce): represent the commitment costs of the equipment necessary for carrying out the
process (Oce):
(6)
O ce Occp
Indirect costs (Ic) - represent expenses that are not made directly from the working process, in other words these
expenses belong to nature: deposit geological research, drafting technical documentation technology, infrastructure construction, various compensations properties that will be included in mining activity and royalties (Hyseni,
et.al., 2012). Drafting of technical documentation: it includes these expenses shown in Table 2.
Table 2. Drafting of technical documentation
Item
Expense
Exploration
10 000
Elaboration of geological reserves
5 000
EIA (Environmental Impact Assessment)
5 000
Project design of exploitation limestone
5 000
Total
25 000
Compensation: Any company that uses any useful mineral reserves is regulated by legal acts to compensate the
damage caused to the environment and the community in the form:
Royalties: The holder of the license for the use of mineral raw material is obliged to pay 2% of the value of revenues
from the sale of limestone products.
The Water: The holder of the license is obliged to pay 0.5% of the value of revenues from the sale of limestone
products.
Forests: The holder of the license is obliged to pay 1% of the value of revenues from the sale of limestone products
when using field was previously forested.
Environment: The holder of the license is obliged to pay 1.5% for emission of gas and dust from the value of revenue from the sale of limestone products.
Depreciation of equipment: Mining Equipment has investor have value 312000 where the depreciation is annual
estimates of 12% (Table 3).
Table 3. Equipment which are necessary for the realization of the utilization
No
Measuring
units
No Type of equiment
Time (h)
Quantit
Value ()
Total ()
30000
Drilling machines
150 kW
9000
30000
Hydraulic excavat. with hammer
180 kW
9000-14000
30000
30000
Auto truck
348 kW
12000
20000
80000
Charger
180 kW
13000
50000
50000
Mobile separation
200 kW
14000
90000
90000
Transformer
250 kVA
20000
20000
Container
6X2 m
1250
5000
Plateau for row material
5X8 m
2000
2000
Fences
1800 m
5000
5000
312000
Table 4. Cost of loading the fragmentation and transfort 1[m ] limestone

No
Item
Time capacity [m /h]
Cost of 1 hour [/h]
Specific costs [/m ]
Uploading
120
170
1.25
Crumbling
100
350
3.5
Transport
41
54.12
1.32
472

PROCEEDINGS
According to the data (Table 4) is presented a summary of the cost of 1 [h] job mining equipment, which are
engaged for loading, transport and crumbling, and drilling costs-blast 1.50 /m3 (Bytyi. A, 2010). While detailed
estimates of expenditure for earning 1 [m3] limestone fractions is given in the following Table 5.
3
Table 5. The costs of production of 1 [m ] carbonate rock with separation

Type of costs
Unit measuring
Personal income
Salaries
Unit
3
Anual costs
Total
[/m ]
[/y]
[/10y]
0.50
27000
324000
Tailing
Random 3% Qy
1.50
2430
24300
Drilling -blasting
54000 m /y
1.55
83700
837000
Secondary Crumbling
Assump. 6% for Qy
1.40
4536
45360
Uploading
54000 m /y
54000
540000
Crumbling and separation
And other activities
2.50
135000
1350000
Transportation
54000 m /y
Countable value of spending
1.23
66420
664200
9.18
346086
3460860
9.68
373086
3730860
Royalties
2% carrying value of expenditure
0.19
104544
108540
Forestry
1% annual income value
0.10
52272
54270
Waters
0.5% annual income value
0.05
26136
27135
Environment
1.5% annual income value
0.15
78408
81405
0.48
26136
261360
10.16
399222
3992220
Determining the cost of using 1 [m3] carbonate rocks based on annual costs by the use of 54.000 [m3], so in this case
the cost is around 10.16 /m3. Economic evaluation is pick up the cost of producing 1 [m3] of fractions 0/90 mm, for
which the annual costs are calculated according to the formula (1) and expression (2) which can be formed selling
price fractions produced by the company, Geo Mineral if we arrange in advance the rate of margin (profit) that
usually ranges between (20-30)% of the value of spending where our case is taken 26%, then the dot have K = 2.1
[/m3].
Ps = 10.16+2.1
Ps = 12.26 [/m3]
Given this calculated sales price fractions 0/90 mm, and annual production of 54000 m3, revenues are:
P=10x 54000 x 12.26

P= 6620400 [/y]
After determining the revenue from the sale of products carbonate rocks should be compared with the costs that
are created in order to have an overview about which usually gross profit represents profit excluding VAT (value
added tax). So the company, Geo Mineral its production plan has these factions the carbonate rocks (Table 6).
3
Table 6. Sale price 1 [m ] limestone rock

No
Item
Unit
Crushed rock fractions 0/90 mm
/m
12.36
Rock without separation
6.50
Buffer (0-60) mm Class II
6.35
Annual degree production costs (by tab.3) are 399222 , in addition to the cost of production also have to add the
cost of marketing, sales, financial management and control and other administrative costs, such costs typically
range (5-6.5) % where the case will be 12.36 .
Therefore, gross profit could be:
Pg = P (P10+0.05 P)
(7)
Pg = 2297160
473

PROCEEDINGS
While neto profit is determined after deduction of 16% VAT
Pn = Pg 0.16 Pg
(8)
Pn = 1929614
3. COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS OF OPENING AND EXPLOITATION DEPOSIT

Methods used for the evaluation of Cost-benefit analysis of almost all projects in mining activity and other works
are: Method return deadline invested assets Pay-Beck (PB), net present value (NPV) and the internal rate of return
(IRR). Today such assessments there are software packages such as the Xeras, Runge mining co, Enginea etc. To
have a fair and objective estimations on the use of limestone deposit "Geo Mineral Company where above is laid
out in detail the analysis of benefit costs 1 [m3] of the rocks so. Therefore, direct investment, according to data
from the deposit are districts Pd1 = 312000 .
Opening deposit is associated with a phase advance called administration-bureaucratic, which must be performed a
variety of procedures ranging from research license, wide legal property procedures drafting of technical
documentation. All of these have a cost that our case in question have not been affected, so the investments made
for this phase amounted
Pd2 =25000 .
Total investment in this field can be determined by:
Pt = Pd1 + Pd2
(9)
Pt = 337000
So the decision on such investments in this deposit will be based on the calculation of the Net Present Value (NPV),
which could be based on the service of this project as well as production costs. Benefits from investment in the
future in this deposit will be compared with the cost of the project generated:
Pn
Pt
NPV
n
1 r
(10)
NPV = 847615
Where : Rn = Income
Pt = Total investment
r = The interest rate (discount rate) by (FTSE Euro top 300) proposes 5%
n = Exploitation time deposit (n = 1, 2, 3, , 10) years
As NPV value > 0, the project may qualify as both profitable and acceptable. From the above analysis, we believe
that the same important role plays the interest rate, r in the profitability of the investment project.
Internal rate of return (Pohl, 2011) for the project of opening and using limestone rock deposit "Geo Mineral" can be
assigned according to the expression:
Pn
IRR
Pt 0
n
1 j
(11)
Or in the form of explicit:

Pn
Pt
n
1 j
(12)
Where : n = time use of deposit (n = 1 year)

j = marginal efficiency of investment
474

PROCEEDINGS
IRR calculation period one year deals n = 1, then the expression (12)
Pn Pt
Pt
(13)
j= 5.97
Efficiency limit value is higher than the interest rate (discount rate) (j> r).
The B/C ratio of a cash flow is the ratio of the present worth of benefits to the present worth of costs. This is
defined as:
B/ C =1.19
(14)
If the B/C ratio is greater than one, then the investment is acceptable. If the ratio is less than one, the investment is
not acceptable (Baritu & Omitaum 2007). Calculation of B/C is 1.19 exploitation project of limestone deposits
Astrazub Geo Mineral Company, may qualify as profitable because revenues are greater than the value of the
expenditure.
4. CONCLUSION
This form of exploitation project evaluation through the limestone surface Cost benefit analysis is an argument to
justify the capital investment in this branch of the economy. The bases for this assessment are superficial
exploitation costs, while respecting the environment. In this case is necessary to use norms that arise from the
current legal acts in compliance with the directives of the European Community (EU) and the current broad
experiences of many companies involved in this activity in relation to costs that are needed to perform the whole
technological process in the production of 1[m3] fractions of carbonate rocks. Economic assessments according to
the calculated data show that the deposit has perspective and the positive business.
REFERENCES
[1]
Barth, A. (2006):The Kosovo Quarry Plan Final Report (ICMM), Prishtin.
[2]
Baritu, B. A., & Omitaum, O. (2007), Computational Economic Analysis for Engineering and Industry. Francis Group, LLC-USA.
[3]
Bytyi, A. (2010), Projekti kryesor i shfrytezimit te shkembijve karbonatik nga vendburimi Astrazub Prishtine.
[4]
Pohl. L. W. (2011), Economic Geology, Principles and Practice, Stuttgart, Germany.
[5]
Hyseni. S. & Bytyi. A (2012), Vleresimi ekonomik i vendburimit te gelqerorve ne gurethyesin Baice Kosma K.K Drenas, Mitrovice
475

PROCEEDINGS
TECHNICAL-ECONOMIC FEASIBILITY OF THE EXECUTED

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS FOR THE NIKOLA TESLA B UNIT 3
AND SMALL HYDROPOWER PLANT CONSTRUCTION IN OBRENOVAC
ABSTRACT
Marko BABOVIC M.Sc.1
Branislav BABIC, B.B.A.2
Electric Power Industry of Serbia, Belgrade, Serbia

1
marko.babovic@eps.rs
2
branislav.babic@eps.rs
Building of a small hydropower plant (Phase I - 1.85MW and Phase II 0.92MW) is planned at the available cooling water outlet to supply the Nikola
Tesla B TPP Unit 3 as part of Elektroprivreda Srbije strategic projects and
the Nikola Tesla B TPP Unit 3 Construction Preliminary Design (700MW)
aimed at improved energy efficiency of the Obrenovac thermal power plants.
To this end, adequate field and laboratory investigations were carried out in
late 2012. Investigations were based on the Additional Geotechnical Investigations Project targeting the Nikola Tesla B TPP Unit 3 founding and seismic
micro-regionalisation in Obrenovac. The Project analyses both technical and
economic parameters of the necessary investigations.
This paper compares designed and executed works both from the technical
and economic aspect. Finally, it analyses investigation results effects, their
value and importance in view of the future energy facilities: new B3 unit and
a small hydropower plant at the cooling water outlet of the Nikola Tesla B
TPP Unit 3 in Obrenovac.
Keywords
Geotechnical Investigations, Hydropower Plant
1. INTRODUCTION
Thermal power plant Nikl sl B is a part of Electric Power Industry of Serbia and represents significant
thermal generation capacity for the Republic of Serbia as well. Thermal power plant is constructed on the right
bank of the river Sava, about 15km west from the city Obrenovac. Electricity generation is performed in 2 units, B1
and B2, 620W capacity each, and the basic energy resource - coal is provided from open-cast mines of Kolubara
mine basin.
In accordance with National Sustainable Development Strategy of the Republic of Serbia, s well as the
Development Startegy of Electric Power Industry of Serbia, within the existing thermal power plant, phase II of
construction is foreseen, i.e. the construction of third unit, called unit B3, with 800W capacity total.
For the construction of new unit B3 Electric Power Industry of Serbia formed special project team which as a
baseline is obliged to provide relevant investment-technical documentation, according to Legislation of the
Republic of Serbia in the field of planning and construction as well as in the field of geological survey.
After development and adoption of Preliminary Design for unit B3 construction, for the needs of Basic Design with
Feasibility Study, the main prerequisite for further development of necessary documentation is execution of
required geological, i.e. geotechnical investigations in the area of designed future facilities of TPP Nikl sl
B3, as follows:
main facility of the Unit in PP Nikl sl-B3;
coal dump, PP Nikl sl B3;
flue gas desulphurization plant for units B1 and B2;
wastewater treatment plant and
476

PROCEEDINGS
SHPP (small hydro power plants) within N B.

In 1976, at N B location, during designing of phase I facilities, according to regulations valid at the time, seismic
micro-regionalisation of terrain was carried out, for the needs of seismic construction of designed facilities. Steps
of correction of seismic parameters (seismic intensity level) used at the time have not been used for 20 years,
therefore new seismic micro-regionalisation of PP Nikl sl B was required, according to currently valid
technical standards of the Republic of Serbia for the construction in seismically active areas, as well as European
standards C -8 -1.
For the aforementioned needs, in accordance with adopted Terms of Reference at the session of EPS Expert
Council dated 21.12.2011, the Additional Geotechnical Investigations Project for TPP Nikola Tesla B brnvc
founding and seismic micro-regionalisation was executed in the first six months of 2012.
During the development of this project, designer acted in accordance with valid legislation: Law on Mining and
Geological Explorations (Official Gazette of RS no. 88/2011), Law on Planning and Constructions (Official Gazette of
RS no. 72/09, 81/09 and 24/11) and Rulebook on content of geological exploration project and elaborate on
geological exploration results (Official Gazette of RS no. 51/96).
2. PROJECT SOLUTIONS
Review of previously executed investigations of phase I of units B1 and B2 construction
For the needs of phase I of units B1 and B2 construction, Gzvd, Bgrd executed first specialist geological
investigations in 1976 as follows: total of 23 exploration boreholes were made, out of which 21 with manual and
only two with mechanical equipment. Beside that, 38 complete geomechanic investigations were executed and 140
granulation tests and testing of chemical composition of the groundwater for 7 samples.
Ksvprkt, Bgrd continued with these investigations in 1977-78, 67 exploration boreholes were made.
Piezometer constructions were built-in in 5 boreholes. 28 static penetration tests (CP) were executed. When it
comes to laboratory geomechanical investigations the following was executed: 301 analysis of granulometric
composition, 34 direct and 31 triaxial shear tests, 13 uniaxial strength tests, 88 oedometer compressibility tests
etc. Chemical analyses for 10 samples of groundwater were also performed.
Gphysical investigations of the wider area were performed in 1974, using dvdv method, when the zoning of
the location of the site was performed. Basic seismic level for the location is VII CS and total correction of
intensity for soil and groundwater presence is +/-0.17. For the needs of the application of the method, 9 refraction
profiles were performed with the calculation of speed of longitudinal waves up to 15 m depth.
Additional geotechnical investigations for phase II Unit B3 construction
According to the design of additional geotechnical investigations, geotechnical investigations for the area of the
new Unit B3 facilities and the area of cooling water outlet for small hydro power plant into the river Sava were carried out.
Investigation area is of almost rectangular shape and the situation of TPP Nikola Tesla B with the position of small
hydro power plant is shown in Figure no.1.
477

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Investigation area of TPP Nikola Tesla B

Source: Additional Geotechnical Investigations Project Faculty of Mining and Geology, Belgrade, 2012.
Lgnd:
DP-8: Exploration borehole according to the project of additional investigation
B --- B Seismic profiles
At the location of main facility of the Unit, 18 30m-deep-boreholes were made, thus entering 5 (m) minimum into
tertiary marls, in which it is assumed that the facilities shall be founded.
At the locations of desulphurization plant and waste water treatment plant 15 boreholes were made, 15 (m) deep
each, since it is assumed that the corresponding facilities shall be founded shallow.
Even though hydrogeological conditions are known in general, since the groundwater is in direct hydraulic connection with the river Sava water, in addition to one existing, 3 additional levels of piezometer in the area of main facility of the Unit were planned, in order to determine the level of aquifer and monitor its fluctuation for the purpose of water level in the river.
At the location of small hydro power plant 4 boreholes were made, 2 from land and 2 from water, 15 (m) deep, i.e.
20 (m) and 1 borehole 25 (m) deep, which is about 5-10 (m) deeper than the elevation of facility founding.
For determining physical and mechanical characteristics of rock a significant number of tests in situ was performed. Static penetration tests (CPTU) with seismic cone in the place of main facilities of the Unit, as well as in the
place of small hydro power plant. Afterwards standard penetration tests were performed (SPT), presiometric tests
at the location of main facilities. Plate load tests were carried out at the location of future coal dump.
Lithological surroundings in which the third Unit shall be constructed are presented by tertiary marls, complex of
dust and sand clay and sand and gravel complex. Main focus was on the area for main facility of the Unit, i.e. determining characteristics of tertiary marls, so in this working area mainly presiometric investigation were per-
478

PROCEEDINGS
formed, as well as static and dynamic penetration tests, complex laboratory tests and seismic refraction profiles.
For surface complex of dust and sand clay in addition to penetration tests, complete laboratory tests for the needs
of defining conditions of shallow facility founding were carried out. In sand and gravel sedimentary complex, due to
its nature was primarily treated according to static and dynamic penetration methods.
For the needs of reliable definition of parameters of aseismic construction, in order to define the reaction of local
soil to seismic impacts, geophysical tests were performed (measurement of P and S waves).
Overview of performed investigations is shown in Table no 1.
Table 1. Performed investigations
INVESTIGATION AREA
INVESTIGATION TYPE
MAIN FACILITY OF UNIT
COAL
DUMP
SMALL
HPP
+
INVESTIGATION DRILLING (LAND)
1H
20=20
(m)
2h
18=36
2h
25=50
18 H 30 =540
3 H 15 =45
4 H 15 =60
4 H 15=60
3H
15=45
2H
15=30
INVESTIGATION DRILLING (WATER)

GEOPHYSICAL CAROTAGE HOLE
12 km
STANDARD PENETRATION TESTS

(SP)
135
PIZER CONSTRUCTION
4 H 30 =120
SAMPLING
72 km
PRESIOMETRIC TESTINGS IN
BOREHOLES
4 km
PLATE LOAD TESTS
10
FIELD INVESTIGATION MONITORING, SAMPLE SELECTION, CORE

MAPPING
40 dn
11
STATIC PENETRATION TESTS

(CPTU) WITH SEISMIC CONES
10 km
12
GEOPHYSICAL TEST
1200 m
13
GEODETIC MARKING OF INVESTIGATION WORKS
15
WATER TREATMENT PLANTS
ANALYSIS OF THE RESULTS OF

PREVIOUS INVESTIGATIONS
14
DESULPHURIZATION
PLANT
5
10+15=25
12
30
1H
20=20
9+12=21 K
10
10
1+1=2
36
10
90
21
12
14
- mechanical strength and deformability
36
14
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF WATER
LABORATORY TESTS
- granulometric, identification and
classification tests
Source: Additional Geotechnical Investigations Project Faculty of Mining and Geology, Belgrade, 2012.
479

PROCEEDINGS
3. TECHNICAL AND ECONOMIC ANALYSIS OF THE EXECUTED

INVESTIGATIONS AND THEIR VALORIZATION
All presented works, that were listed in Additional Geotechnical and Micro Seizmic Investigations Project (Geoalfa,
2012) were mostly executed. Results of the executed investigations are input for development of the Basic Design
with Feasibility Study , where apart from technical conditions for construction, investment value of construction of
new unit B3 shall be precisely determined.
Analysis of the economic indicators of the value of the new unit from developed Preliminary Design for
construction of new unit B3 shall be used in this paper since Basic Design with Feasibility is yet to be developed.
Value of the executed investigations
Value of the executed additional geotechnical investigations that are related only to new unit B3 and adequate
reports and Elaborate on results of exectued investigations amounts to RSD18,692,000 i.e. EUR 165 000. The
highest price is for field works for investigation drilling, geotechnical investigations and geophysical surrveys. Out
of the total value of the executed investigations, the value of field works amounts to 64%. Laboratory works
amount to 12% of total value, whereas for the development of necessary documents for this investigations
amounts at 24% of the total value of the works.
Value of construction of new thermal unit
Executed geotechnical investigations shall be used as an input for development of Basic Design with Feasibility
Study TPP Nikola Tesla B3, installed capacity of 800 MW whose estimated value of construction under Preliminary
Design with Pre Feasibility Study (nrgprkt ntl, Bgrd, 2006) amounts at EUR 873.5 mil. Construction of
this thermal capacity shall enable generation of 5 100 GWh/year electricity.
Value of construction of small hydro power plant Nikl sl B
By construction of TPP Nikl sl B3, as well as at existing PP Nikl sl B1 and B2, construction of small HPP
at the cooling water outlet shall be enabled. In accordance with developed Basic Design with Feasibility Study for
SHPP Nikl sl B (nrgprkt Hidrinnjring, Bgrd, 2011) of 2.77 W installed capacity, it is
necessary to invest EUR 9.4 mil. Designed generation of green electricity out of this SHPP amounts at 24,29
GWh/year.
Vlrisation (effects) of exploitation of new thermal unit
Average annual income gained by the construction of TPP Nikola Tesla B3 with estimated electricity price of EUR
4,45 c/kWh amounts EUR 241,5 mil.
SHPP exploitation effects
Average annual income gained by the construction of small hydro power plant Nikl sl B applying privileged
electricity prices according to the feed-in tariffs of UR 7,35 c/kWh (for the validity period of the first 12 years of
exploitation) amounts EUR 1,8 mil.
Comparative Analysis
For the purpose of technical and economic analysis i.e. economic feasibility analysis of investing carried out investigation works, total required investments for the construction of TPP Nikola Tesla B3 and the construction of
small hydro power plant Nikola Tesla B shall be analyzed, and later spent funds for carried out investigations shall
be analyzed. According to these data the evaluation and economic efficiency of the invested funds into geological
investigations against the total investments into construction of TPP Nikola Tesla B3 and construction of small
hydro power plant Nikola Tesla B should be obtained.
The funds invested into the execution of all designed investigation works that refer to the construction of new unit
TPP Nikola Tesla B3 amount to EUR 165.000.
The realized funds for carried out geological works shall enable to consider the conditions for the future construction of TPP Nikola Tesla B3 minimizing factors of surprise and risks of the construction as much as possible. Participation of these investments in total investments for the construction of TPP Nikola Tesla B3 and small hydro power
plant Nikola Tesla B amounts to 0.0002%, is such insignificant part compared to total funds. Such small funds invested so far into investigation works compared to total investments that can even get higher in the next phase,
fully justify the invested funds into their execution.
480

PROCEEDINGS
4. CONCLUSIONS
1) Execution of additional geotechnical investigations, i.e. results of these investigations, according to the Law on
Planning and Construction and Law on Geological Investigations, are necessary, as a baseline for the preparation of
Basic Design for the construction of the third unit B3 in Thermal Power Plant Nikola Tesla B.
2) Complete field and laboratory investigations were carried out based on the Additional Geotechnical Investigations Project targeting TPP Nikola Tesla B founding and seismic micro-regionalisation (Glf 2012), based on
which the Elaborate on carried out investigations was prepared.
3 ) Carried out investigation works with supporting documents were EUR 165,000 of total planned investment for
construction of TPP Nikola Tesla B3 and small hydro power plant Nikola Tesla B, i.e. 0.0002%. Such small investigation costs for the needs of Basic Design in total investments which enable reliable basis to minimize future activities, risks and contingency during the construction as much as possible, lead us to the conclusion that the presented invested funds were fully justified.
REFERENCES
[1]
Basic Design and Feasibility Study of SHPP Nikola Tesla B, nrgprkt Hidrinnjring, 2011
[2]
PP Nikl sl B II Phase Construction of Unit B3, total capacity up to 800 W, nrgprkt-Entel, 2006
[3]
The Additional Geotechnical Investigations Project targeting the Nikola Tesla B TPP Unit 3 founding and seismic microregionalisation in Obrenovac (Glf 2012)
481

PROCEEDINGS
MODERN MINING INDUSTRY MANAGEMENT

- SYNERGY OF QUALITY AND RISK BASED APPROACH
ABSTRACT
Sneana KIRIN1
Aleksandar SEDMAK2
Tamara SEDMAK2
Vesna DAMNJANOVI3
Innovation Center, Faculty

of Mechanical Engineering,
University of Belgrade, Serbia, snezanakirin@yahoo.com
2
of Mechanical Engineering, Serbia
3
of Mining and Geology, Serbia
Effective and integrated risk management sits at the heart of true business
sustainability. In the literature more and more papers are related to the synergistic effect of integrating risk management and quality management
while improving the performance of both systems. The core of the new approach is the consideration of risk management as key activity, associated to
all decisions, the goal being to prevent negative risks and exploit opportunities at all levels from strategic management and project management, to
the support of basic processes.
Quality is the measure of satisfying the requirements and achieving the
goals, whereas risk measures the weight of undesirable situations, i.e. deviations from the requirements. Based on these premises, the study presented
in the paper has specific objectives to analyze the current state of the approach of relationship quality risk and to develop the methodological
framework to integrate the risk management into the quality management.
Evolution of organizations today is characterized by rough competition, rapid changes and uncertainty, so they are enforced to apply new concepts in
management, where quality and risk are considered to be key factors, being
approached in various ways in all areas. Management of risk is not only a
necessity; it could be a strategic advantage.
Keywords
Risk Management, Sustainability, Quality, Methodological Framework
1. QUALITY MANAGEMENT AND RISK MANAGEMENT

Effective and integrated risk management sits at the heart of true business sustainability. In the literature more
and more papers are related to the synergistic effect of integrating risk management and quality management
while improving the performance of both systems.
Quality is the measure of satisfying the requirements and achieving the goals, whereas risk measures the weight of
undesirable situations, i.e. deviations from the requirements. Quality management and risk management are not
mutually exclusive but rather complement each other, as components of the indicators system which measure organization performance. Today there is an increasing tendency to present an integrated approach to risk management that sets:
Requirement for integration of risk and quality management in the organization
Requirement for integration of risk and quality management and business process
Requirement for integration of tools for risk and quality control
Based on these premises, the study presented in the paper has specific objectives to analyze the current state of
the approach of relationship quality risk and to develop the methodological framework to integrate the risk management into the quality management.
Quality defines the degree to which a set of inherent characteristics fulfills requirements of stakeholders (customers, employees, employers, society, and government). Approach to quality has taken a systematic character since
the 70s of twentienth century when guidelines concerning quality assurance for specific industries appeared for the
first time.
482

PROCEEDINGS
In 1987 the international standards for quality systems have started to develop, from ISO 9000 series, which introduced uniform principles and rules of action, generally applicable.
In this regard, it should be noted that the risk lies in the quality management systems (QMS), whose philosophy is
based on the principle of risk prevention. Thus, effective implementation and operation of the ISO 9001 QMS model provides the opportunity for organizations to consistently make product and process using defined parameters
and existing mechanisms and tools to prevent and reduce risk.
The most important levers of quality management to perform the risk prevention and management are:
The quality objectives and processes upon which depends meeting the requirements are planned and controlled;
Quality management systems include processes with key role in achieving quality. Its configuration setting is
based on international experience and best practices, which means that it provides risk identification, assessment and control through the implementation of appropriate working and control methods, especially
in critical areas;
Operation of quality systems involves designing of databases on quality and systematic analysis of deviations from the requirements processes which allow risk identification and measurement;
Quality management requires that in each process to be determined both corrective action to prevent recurrence of errors or nonconformities and preventive action to prevent potential problems.
Risk approach in quality management is a component of an effective quality management system. Explicit formulation of the risk assessment requirements included in clauses relating to the quality management system through
the latest edition of ISO 9000 is part of that approach, and in particular ISO 9004: 2009 emphasizes the need to use
risk management for organization development and sustainability.
The core of the new approach is the consideration of risk management as key activity, associated to all decisions,
the goal being to prevent negative risks and exploit opportunities at all levels from strategic management and project management, to the support of basic processes. Such a system has proactive and systematic tools of identification, assessment and control of organizations quality problems and has as its purpose the continuous improvement of quality and performance. It can be said that the integration of risk management methodology contributes
to increasing the effectiveness of quality management, by emphasizing on the preventive nature of the decisions
regarding strategies and measures for improvement.
1
The integrated approach of quality and risk management is facilitated by the fact that ISO 9001 and ISO 31000
standards have elements and common principles, most important being the following:
Quality and risk are associated to management, which involves conducting systematic planning and controlling processes;
In both cases problems are treated from the perspective of the organization being integrated into specific
management systems. Quality management system and risk management system ensure consistency of activities undertaken at the senior management level and at the key processes of the organization; Focus on
continuous improvement in performance, which involves continuously repeating the cycle plandocheckact (Deming Wheel), both in terms of quality and risk;
High level coordination is essential in both cases. Leadership is the acknowledged term that summarizes the
involvement of top management, establishing policies and objectives, communication and especially the
concern for creating a culture that integrates the principles and requirements for quality and risk;
The use of specific and measurable indicators regarding quality and risk, to allow the substantiation of business decisions of improvement and organizational performance.
1
The generic approach described in ISO31000:2009 provides the principles and guidelines for managing any form of risk in a systematic, transparent and credible
manner and within any scope and context.
483

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Risk management process- ISO31000:2009
Risk is now defined in terms of the effect of uncertainties on objectives. The new standard highlights a set of principles that organizations must follow to achieve effective risk management. For risk management to be effective,
organizations at all levels need to ensure that their risk management program:
Creates and protects value;
Is an integral part of all of the organizations processes;
Forms part of decision making;
Explicitly expresses uncertainty;
Is systematic, structured and timely;
Is based on the best available information;
Is tailored to the organization;
Takes human and cultural factors into account;
Is transparent and inclusive;
Is dynamic, iterative and responsive to change; and
Facilitates continual improvement of the organization.
2. RISK MANAGEMENT IN MINING INDUSTRY

Mining is an industry with great importance from an economic point of view, and from the aspect of protecting and
preserving the environment and regional development. At the European level, mining and related industries generate about 10% of raw materials for other industries. Mine industry of Europe has a total annual production of about
3 billion tons of material, which put emphasis on the quantity of material produced. The process of quality improvement can be seen as a series of steps necessary to achieve quality improvement in an organization.
In the countries of Central, Eastern and Southern Europe, the mining industry has significant effect on society at
large, because in these countries in the mining industry work a total of about 900,000 employees. Although the
mining industry in Europe is steadily declining, it remains an important economic factor. Compared with other regions of the world, mining European countries lose their significance, partly due to the geological characteristics of
the remaining mineral deposits, and because of smaller producers of minerals that are specific for the European
market, they lose competitiveness at the global level, but partly because of the extensive and strict regulations.
The mining industry is a heterogeneous structure in both the environmental and technical sense and in terms of
international connectivity. However, having all this in mind, all segments of the mining industry expect similar challenges in the future, as a result of the internationalization of markets and increased expectations from the standpoint of environmental and economic standards.
484

PROCEEDINGS
Technological advancement and progress in the field of management systems can greatly affect the capacity of
professionals when in terms of development and implementation of standards for the safe and efficient management of the system and operation of mining equipment and machinery. According to the systemic concept, the
ideal working environment would have the right equipment, competent staff, functional and control systems in
fully familiar environment. In real systems, threat to the smooth functioning of the mining unit, connected to the
basic characteristics of mining with incomplete or insufficient precision of a determination parametric data or uncertainty about future activities and events, as a result of the impact of complex and stochastic nature of geological, technical, technological, market, economic, political, environmental and other factors.
3. SURFACE COAL MINE

Risk analysis of this economic-business system is of particular importance considering the need for continuous and
reliable electricity supply of economy and population (defined voltage, frequency and other characteristics and
thermal energy (appropriate characteristics), as well as in terms of the rational and efficient use of natural resources.
Excavated coal is used for combustion in power plants. For continuous operation of power plants that are supplied
with coal from this deposit, the annual need is about 6 millions of tons of coal, and an additional 500,000 t / y. of
bulk lime of coal for household consumption.
Limitation for this capacity of surface mine is derived based on the following criteria:
Supply of thermal coal in the amount of 6 x 106 tons per year,
The supply of consumer carbon amount of 0.5 x 106 tons per year,
Geological reserves and coal quality,
Full exploitation of geological reserves in the deposit,
Geological boundaries bearings, and
Achieving optimal length of working the mine floor and the dump.
In addition to these basic criteria for the restrictions of the open pit, one should pay attention to influence of the
position of existing infrastructure: power plants, protected natural areas, rivers and settlements.
4. HAZARD IDENTIFICATION DIAGRAM OF SOURCES

In our mining companies risk is mainly accessed by organizational units partially. For the systematic review of the
sources of risk, we can use causal diagram shown in Figure 3. These diagrams are used to identify the causes of potential or existing problems. From the diagram it can be seen that the risks are divided into categories:
The risk to the safety and human health where the main risks are identified: coal dust, noise, working the night
shift, inexperience in manipulation with machinery and equipment. It should also be noted that working in extreme
temperature conditions can affect the safety and health of people. If health effects arise from exposure to coarse
particles, such as from mining activities, the following symptoms are likely to be: cough, wheeze, or worsening of
asthma, increased need for medications (egg: puffers, antibiotics), increased breathlessness. Some recent research
suggests that heart problems, such as angina and heart attacks may also be associated with coarse particle pollution.
Risk of equipment - it can be said that the risk associated with the equipment is managed by maintenance. On the
surface coal mining expensive equipment and machinery are used, and depending on the type of machinery and
their specifications planning and preventive maintenance model is defined. The model includes maintenance, service maintenance and overhaul maintenance (usually once a year). It should be noted that the maintenance is expensive; especially overhaul which is performed once a year and therefore is called capital maintenance. Durability
and safety equipment in extreme temperatures should also be taken into account.
Specific activities are performed by one or more persons on the machine or near the machine during its life cycle.
Risk management includes the following:
1) Determining the limits of machines;
2) Identification of hazards;
3) Risk assessment;
485

PROCEEDINGS
Economic risk - the risk of research is present, but not very pronounced as for example in the oil industry. Economic
risk is related to the amount of geological reserves and coal quality, as well as the maximum utilization of geological reserves in the deposit.
When we talk about the economic category of business, it should be emphasized that energy is a strategic resource,
and the current price determined by the state externally making influence on it. Internal organization can achieve
some cost savings.
Electrical energy risk: since it is a major consumer of electricity and the high voltage power, it should take care of
setting electrical cables and providing their safety.
Organizations: mostly in terms of the risks of internal character. Since mining industry use very expensive equipment and machinery, of which the entire business depends, it should take care to establish operating procedures
and proper training of end-executors. Also, the question arises about the age structure and qualification of employees who operate with expensive equipment. Statistically, more accidents happen in night shifts, so one should
take care of adequate planning of shift-work from the point of view of maximum safety of people and equipment.
Figure 2. Relation of risk management and quality management
The risk to the environment is reflected in the first place as a risk for contamination of waterways and the risk due
to the proximity of protected areas. It should also be noted that the coal dust in certain circumstances is selfheating and the often leads to the ignition.
Geostatic risk is significant because of the height difference while digging which can cause collapse of the field.
Also statics and dynamics of machinery for digging depends on the device for lifting and lowering scaffold of a
point, and loss of equilibrium poses a threat to people and causes major damage.
486

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 3. Sources of Risk - surface coal mining
After identification, the risk analysis and risk assessment should be performed in order to understand their causes,
probabilities and consequences. A risk assessment is carried out in order to set priorities for follow-up, including:
The choice of risk which, if avoided, will result in the largest benefit,
Setting criteria for prioritization of risk,
Prioritization is the basis for the selection of appropriate actions.
That is followed by classification of risks and prioritizing actions. The most important elements in the classification
are:
Time of creation risk situations,
The main factors that caused the a dangerous situation,
The nature of the impact of factors
The nature of the consequence,
The area of risk occurrence.
At the end it is defined response to a dangerous situation in terms of planning and initiative in operations, engineering and management. Operational actions can be:
Adjusting Strategy
Personnel actions
Adaptation of the process,
Adaptation of the system.
5. THE ATEX DIRECTIVE

The ATEX Directive 94/9/EC sets out the Essential Safety Requirements for products and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres and the respective conformity assessment procedures. ATEX
is the acronym for ATmosphereEXplosive, i.e.,explosive atmosphere. An explosive atmosphere is a mixture of
flammable gases, vapours, mists or dusts with air, under specific atmospheric conditions in which, after ignition has
occurred, combustion propagates to the flammable mixture. The subsequent Legislative Decree 81/08 of 9 April
2008 (particularly Title XI- Protection from explosive atmospheres) and its update (Lgs.D. 106/2009 of 3/08/09, in
effect as of 20 August) have since surpassed Lgs.D. 233/03. The figure 3 provides a schematic overview of the ATEX
Directives and their correlation.
487

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4. ATEX Directives and their correlation
In order for a potentially explosive atmosphere to form, the flammable substances must be present in a certain
concentration. If the concentration is too low (lean mixture) too high (rich mixture), no explosion occurs; instead
there is just a slow combustion reaction or no reaction at all. The ATEX Directive 99/92/EC, on the other hand, defines minimum health and safety requirements for workplaces with a potentially explosive atmosphere; in particular, it divides the workplaces into zones according to the probability of having an explosive atmosphere and specifies the basic criteria by which the equipment is selected within these zones. Equipment and Products in each
Group are divided into Categories based on the level of protection required.
ATEX Zones
In addition to the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC, which covers the safety requirements for equipment to be used
in potentially explosive atmospheres, there is an additional European ATEX Directive, 99/92/EC. This is also known
as the 'ATEX Workplace Directive' or 'ATEX 137' and highlights what employers must do to minimise the risk to
workers from explosive atmospheres.
ATEX 137 also classifies hazardous areas where an explosive atmosphere could form, by type of hazard, into the
following 'Zones'.
Hazard - Gas, Mists or Vapors
Zone 0 - A place in which an explosive atmosphere consisting of a mixture with air of dangerous substances in the
form of gas, vapor or mist is present continuously or for long periods or frequently Zone 1 - A place in which an explosive atmosphere consisting of a mixture with air of dangerous substances in the form of gas, vapor or mist is
likely to occur in normal operation occasionally.
Zone 2 - A place in which an explosive atmosphere consisting of a mixture with air of dangerous substances in the
form of gas, vapor or mist is not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for a short period only.
Hazard - Dusts
Zone 20 - A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air is present continuously, or for long periods or frequently.
Zone 21 - A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air is likely to occur in normal operation occasionally.
Zone 22 - A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form or a cloud of combustible dust in air is not likely to
occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for a short period only.
People living near mine sites often ask about the effects of dust emissions in the air as a result of mining activities.
Commonly called "dust," scientists and regulators refer to the term particulate matter (or PM) to describe the range
of particles that exists in the air we breathe.
488

PROCEEDINGS
Routes to ATEX Compliance

The ATEX Directive stipulates that products within its scope must satisfy the relevant essential health and safety
requirements (EHSRs), and there are three methods of compliance. Equipment must be manufactured in conformity
with either:
1. European harmonized standards, or
2. National technical standards and specifications, or
3. Essential health and safety requirements
In every case the standards, specifications or EHSRs applied by a manufacturer must be applicable and relevant to a
product's intended ATEX Group & Category and the Zone in which it is to be used.
Where a Harmonized Standard is applied it must cover all essential health and safety requirements and must be the
latest version.
The European Union, regarding the hazard caused a potentially explosive atmosphere, has adopted two harmonized directives on health and safety, known as ATEX 94/9/EC (also ATEX 100a) and ATEX 99/92/EC (also ATEX 137).
Thus the explosion can occur only in the presence of an ignition source and when the concentration is within the
explosive range of the substances, i.e., between the lower explosive limit (LEL) and upper explosive limit (UEL). The
explosive limits depend on the ambient pressure and thepercentage of oxygen in the air.
The ATEX Directive 94/9/EC was implemented in Italy with Legislative Decree 126/98 and applies to products
placed on the market and/or in service after 1 July 2003. The ATEX Directive 99/92/EC was implemented in Italy
with Legislative Decree 233/03 and came into effect on 10 September 2003.
6. CONCLUSIONS
Evolution of organizations today is characterized by rough competition, rapid changes and uncertainty, so they are
enforced to apply new concepts in management, where quality and risk are considered to be key factors, being approached in various ways in all areas. Management of risk is not only a necessity; it could be a strategic advantage.
LITERATURE
[1]
Sneana Kirin, Milena Josipovi Pejovi, Aleksandar Petrovski: Integralni pristup upravljanju rizicima u rudarstvu; 39. Simpozijum o
operacionim istraivanjima, SYM-OP-IS 2012, Tara, 2012, septembar 2012;
[2]
Slobodan Vuji, Sneana Kirin, Igor Miljanovi, Milena Josipovi Pejovi: Upravljanje rizicima u rudarstvu-povrinska eksploatacija uglja, 39.
Simpozijum o operacionim istraivanjima, SYM-OP-IS 2012, Tara, 2012, septembar 2012;
[3]
Sneana Kirin, Tatjana Janovac, Prednost primene standarda ISO 9004 u sektoru visokog obrazovanja
[4]
Maria Popescu, Adina Dascalu, Considerations on Integrating Risk and Quality Management, Annals of Dunarea de Jos University of Galati Fascicle I. Economics and Applied Informatics, Years XVII no1/2011, ISSN 1584-040
489

PROCEEDINGS
PHASES AND FIRST RESULTS OF SHAREHOLDING

AND PRIVATISATION IN PRODUCTION ENTERPRISES
OF THE COAL INDUSTRY - EXPERIENCES OF OTHER COUNTRIES
ABSTRACT
Svetomir MAKSIMOVI1
Igor MILJANOVI2

Belgrade, Serbia, svetomir.maksimovic@eps.rs
2
Mining and Geology, Belgrade, Serbia,
So far in a series of countries the transformation of the economy was actively followed by measures of reorganization and restoration of state enterprises, with the central point being shareholding.
The specificity of the coal industry means great dependence of the work
results on natural conditions, increased dangers of mining production, low
profitability and subventions. Shareholding and privatization in integrated
production enterprises of the coal industry has been gradually introduced in
many countries and it has gradually deepened and expanded on account of
appropriate accumulated experiences and reduced resource support from
the state.
Different models of shareholding and privatization which have been applied
in former socialist, developed and countries in development, can be a solid
basis for the coal industry of Serbia which is at the very beginning of the
process.
Keywords
Globalization, Coal Industry, Shareholding, Privatization
1. INTRODUCTION
Modern theory of economics confirms that the state and private properties can be equally efficient which is partially the answer to a decade old question - which property is more efficient, private or state. Since monopoly in private properties proved to be a very bad thing, it was considered that such enterprises should be in state property
considering the benevolence of the state. Henceforth a general nationalization ensued after World War II.
However, practice has shown that the advantages of state ownership withered away in time, bringing to question
the benevolence of governments, being closed to the world market, non-existence of competition etc.
The next issue to be brought up is the question of supervision. Practice has showed that state supervision over
managers is considerably weaker than that of private owners, which influences the ability of the enterprise to efficiently do business. This issue is also present in the matter of obligation payments as well as evasion of bankruptcy.
Quite often state enterprises are poorly managed because of certain political influences if we have in mind that
state enterprises have certain undeserved benefits and are subjugated to political goals, with excess of employees
and poor organization, obsolete technologies, and are uncompetitive, often dependent on government aid and
subventions (in the coal industry those are mostly enterprises with underground coal exploitation).
In the 1980's a wave of privatizations had been started across the globe. Two methods of sale were implemented. In
the first, the state sets the price of shares and offers them for sale, while in the other method, the state organizes a
collection of offers in a competitive manner (tender) or negotiates directly. A large number of enterprises have
been privatized through voucher privatization, especially in countries which were in the transition process (the
Czech Republic, Poland, Lithuania, Latvia, Slovenia, Armenia, and Kazakhstan etc.). In the aforementioned countries
voucher privatization had been organized in a centralized fashion for a larger number of enterprises while in Russia
it was organized in a decentralized manner for each enterprise individually.
Employee shareholding is a privatization model which is widely implemented in the former republics of Yugoslavia.
Serbia has accepted the employee shareholding model which has taken root as a very slow method of privatization.
490

PROCEEDINGS
Russia started a different method of privatization and ended it with employee shareholding, during which the managerial layers have succeeded to become the majority shareholders in most of the enterprises. This paper presents
the stages and first results of shareholding and privatization in the production enterprises of the coal industry of
the Russian Federation.
2. STAGES AND FIRST RESULTS OF SHAREHOLDING

AND PRIVATIZATION IN THE PRODUCTION ENTERPRISES OF THE COAL INDUSTRY
A shareholding society is the most progressive form of management, which enables an enterprise to create new
structures, and the state to control the enterprise's activities. In such a case there can be no word of a sale of an
enterprise. Shareholding is sometimes viewed as an indirect method of privatization ("fund method or capital privatizations").
The process of shareholding and privatization in the coal industry is based on a bill of the Russian Federation
"About enterprises and entrepreneurial activities" (25.12.1990.) and "About privatization of state and municipal
enterprises in the Russian Federation" (03.07.1991.).
Up until the aforementioned laws were instituted, the status of state enterprises in the coal mining sector referred
only to production enterprises. By passing the law in the Russian Federation "About enterprises and entrepreneurial
activities" only the meaning of the term enterprise has been changed - the accent from production was shifted to
specific production. This law has determined the type of enterprises and entrepreneurial activities, the system and
deadlines for founding an enterprise. There has been a structural reform in a production - technical sense as well as
in entire sectors of industry.
The choices in management have led to an uneven level of professionality in the managerial corpus. This reflected
negatively on discipline and worker safety. The law "about privatization..." was essential for smaller organizational
groups to gain greater independence within an enterprise especially in the matters of deciding about the results of
their own work (although the state remains the owner of the property of an enterprise).
In such conditions, in 1991 the first stage of privatization began for enterprises in the coal industry. In the first
stage, a state enterprise is transformed into shareholding, or a group with limited responsibility i.e. it changes its
legal form. It becomes a shareholding group in which 100% of the shares belong to the state, securing a clear managing structure. The newly formed enterprises take on all of the rights and responsibilities of the former state enterprise, and maintain, except in some cases, the existing work collective.
In the first stage eight shareholding groups of a closed type were founded (SCCT) based on the most modern and
profitable coal production and production enterprises. However, founding of SCCT based on the most profitable
coal production enterprises, did not accomplish the tasks it was supposed to, especially if we take into consideration that a part of those enterprises went through lease and repurchase of property.
Considering the necessity to solve the problems that arose due to indetermination and vagueness of the privatization and shareholding processes in the coal sector, work began on developing a sector shareholding and privatization program. This program helped determine the mechanisms of the privatization process which referred mostly
to departments which are integrated in an enterprise but operate in different production, technological and economic conditions.
The mechanism of the privatization and shareholding process was meant to be implemented for production enterprises (production and refining), as well as organizations which built dig sites, and institutes for machinery making
which procure services in production as well as project design and scientific research institutes.
Passed in July 1992. the state program for privatizing state and municipal enterprises entirely determined the tasks
and order in which privatization took place, particularly the order of the sector program, as well as requested that
certain production - technological enterprises be preserved.
The mass process of privatization began after the Presidential Decree of the Russian Federation No 721 " About
organizational measures for transformation of state enterprises, voluntarily integrated state enterprises into
shareholding groups" (July.01.1992) and the Presidential Decree of the Russian Federation No 1720 " About transformation into shareholding groups and privatization of integrated enterprises and organization in the coal industry" which defined the mechanisms of the aforementioned majority stakes of the enterprises which are being privatized with the goal to maintain unity of production - territorial complexes' and sector management.
In the beginning, in the coal industry, the shareholding process had created different organization and production
management forms: independent enterprises, voluntarily formed enterprises, production integrated enterprises,
491

PROCEEDINGS
concerns etc. What had to be done here was to realize their specificities while enabling them for mass shareholding. It was necessary to create a legal and normative base supplement, a law of ordered deadlines, order and mechanism for every separate enterprise (of those which were integrated) or their groups. In collaboration with the sector program, designed based on the active normative - legal base, shareholding and privatization in the coal industry in this stage, is accomplished in the following phases.
In base production
Production integrated enterprises for production and cleaning of coal are transformed into open shareholding
groups. Enterprises which are a part of production integrated enterprises, are shared off as daughters of those
shareholding groups: coal production enterprises which become part of concerns and other voluntary integrations
are transformed into open shareholding groups. The agreement about the formation of these voluntarily integrated enterprises is finalized here. The formed shareholding groups can form territorial shareholding groups based on
consolidating their share packets.
The majority stakes of shareholding groups are based on production integrated enterprises, as well as voluntarily
integrated enterprises, with government ownership of three years. Coal production enterprises are converted into
open shareholding groups alone and have four organizational - legal differences: shareholding group (SC) built on
the basis of state enterprises, enterprises which are not a part of production - integrated, enterprises which hold
within themselves daughters of shareholding groups and enterprises - structurally small formations, SC formed on
the basis of voluntarily integrated state enterprises through consolidation of share packets.
In machinery making enterprises for coal mining purposes
Machinery making institutes for coal production purposes are transformed into shareholding groups with no less
than 38% shares confirmed in the ownership of the government for the period of one year. In mine construction
(pits), mine construction organizations are transformed into shareholding groups with no less than 38% of shares
confirmed in government ownership for a period of two years. For the purpose of constructing important objects in
the Kemerovskaya region, a shareholding group Kuzbastinvestugol with a confirmed majority stake of the group
in ownership of the government for two years.
In science and project designs
Scientific - research, project - construction and projection institutes are converted into open shareholding societies
with participation no less than 51-38% of shares in government ownership for a period of three years.
Determined conditions of SC transformation of other enterprises and coal industry organizationes
Dynamics of enterprise conversion in the coal sector into shareholding groups is displayed in table 1.
Table 1. Dynamics of enterprise conversion in the coal sector into shareholding groups
Years of transformation
Production
Type
1991.
1992.
1993.
1994.
Base production (coal production)
17
39
Machinery making
13
18
Building of mines with undergrnd. exploatation
Misc.
10
13
32
64
SCs in total
For enterprises in machinery making for coal mining purposes, the process of shareholding began and was
practically over in the beginning of 1994. Eighteen shareholding enterprises were established out of which one was
a closed enterprise (Anerskij institute of machinery making).
Shareholding in enterprises for building mines with underground exploitation had been finished as well - seven
open shareholding groups were established. On the basis of integrated basic production enterprises 39 shareholding groups were formed, out of which eight were SCCT, established in 1991. at the very start of shareholding.
In the state program of privatization basic goals of shareholding and privatization were formulated out of which
the most important are: formation of a layer of private owners, increasing the effectiveness of enterprise activities,
help the stabilize and improve the financial standing of enterprises, social protection for the populace and construction of objects of social infrastructure.
Analysis of the first results of the aforementioned goals for the coal enterprises, after shareholding was introduced,
allows us to conclude, that in the first stage after the reorganization not a single goal was achieved in its entirety. It
492

PROCEEDINGS
was expected that in 1993. on account of changing the form of ownership over enterprises there would be an increase in worker productivity. However, that did not happen because of several reasons. In the first stage of shareholding neither the economic situation nor stabilization in production activities had improved. Negative process
which occurred in the first eight SCCT, founded in 1991 are characteristic for all SCs which were founded in the last
couple of years.
It was characteristic that all shareholding groups in the first stage would have a drop in production, increased
spending, lack of investments in reconstruction and modernization of production, an increase in employee numbers, mostly at the dig site and other negative factors.
Changes in the activities of an SC can be linked to the "adjustment" of the work collective to the responsibilities
during the implementation of the solution, new working conditions, seeking a way to "survive" in the market at the
expense of profitable parallel production. This influence can also be seen in the legislature: law of the Russian Federation "About bankruptcy of enterprises" and a presidential decree "About measures of support and stabilization
of endangered state enterprises (bankruptcy) and application of special procedures on them etc."
For the coal sector, at the beginning of 1994. the first stage of the shareholding and privatization process had practically ended. The last stage of introducing the coal sector into the market required reduction of production costs
which mostly referred to equipment modernization, introduction of new technologies, increase in scientific - technical and production potential, including unorthodox solutions for sector development during its restructuring.
In the process of enterprise shareholding in the coal sector (in the first stage from 1991. to 1994.) basic goals of
those shareholding groups were achieved: all production integrations in production and coal processing enterprises
have been reformed, organization of mine building, institutes of machinery making, scientific - research and project
- construction institutes. New organizations were formed in the sector.
Geological - research trusts and several others remained in state ownership.
The distribution was as follows: enterprises an organizations of the coal sector according to the form of ownership
and state on 01.05.1995.
Number of shareholding groups of the coal complex (total)
154 (100%)
Out of those:
-
Completely privatized SCs
12 (8%)
SCs with partial state ownership
86 (56%)
Enterprises in direct state management
41 (27%)
- Organizations with market infrastructure (SCs and companies)

14 (9%)
In the second stage shares of the state shareholding group are subject to sale, which can be realized in various
ways: through public offering of shares, sale of a share packet to strategic investors etc.
Privatization of large companies through initial public offering of shares at the stock market has special significance (Initial Public Offering - IPO). Advantage of this method is mainly in the fact that it proved to be the most
transparent and opened method of privatization which is not available to the majority of people, as well as to foreign investors.
Shareholding can be viewed as a mechanism for realization institutional transformations in economy. With expansion of reproduction comes a contradiction between the necessity of great capital investments for the purpose of
organizing big enterprises and limited personal capital. This contradiction is solved with the development of a new
form of ownership - shareholding. According to this, shareholding groups are formed for the purpose of concentrating capital, i.e. the proportions of individual capital are not suited to the needs of conquering new or expansion of
existing production. In the basis of shareholding lies a corporate structure (vertically integrated structure is the
most effective in our economy).
Special attention was drawn by the effective implementation of the second stage of coal production enterprise
privatization. The established principal plan relies on the same deadlines from the first stage of privatization and
refers to the confirmed government ownership of the majority stakes of the enterprises (3 years).
The tendency to preserve management of the coal sector and secure introduction into the market while including
state blocks of shares has been confirmed. However, the general economic situation created in this sector, unfavorable in this time of complete privatization had led to: great dependence on state support, not entirely developed mechanism of effective control over usage of subsidized resources; great proportions of loan-taking, decreasing debt of enterprises; limited scale of capital constructions due to absence of investments etc.
493

PROCEEDINGS
In order to correct this, the following steps were taken into consideration for the final stage of privatization in the
coal sector:
Increasing the deadline of confirmed majority stakes of shareholding groups and companies with the state
until the sector is stabilized (approximately until 1998-2000).
Transfer of property of a fond through share blocks which are owned by the government. Realization of this
program was adjusted to the manner of privatization, determined by the " State program of privatization of
state and municipal enterprises in the Russian Federation", and confirmed by the presidential decree of the
Russian Federation from 24.12.1993. No 2284. The program allowed for a part of the shares in state ownership to be sold in an auction after a merchant tender with a limited number of participants.
It is possible that, in the final stage of privatization, most or all of the shares of a coal production enterprise have
been bought. After a certain deadline has passed, the question of non-liquid shares arises - they are either given for
free to the work collectives or sold to them with certain payment benefits, and besides these, there are some other
methods of dealing with this issue.
In the case of privatization of profitable coal production enterprises an option for workers to buy additional
amount of shares owned by the government (up to 51% of the established SC capital) in such enterprises was considered, as well as the possibility of conversion of previously received privileged shares into common shares.
In collaboration with the presidential decree from 9th of February 1996. "About measures of further improvement
of the structure of the coal industry of the Russian Federation", a decision was passed about the transformation of
a state coal production company "Rosugol" into an open shareholding group "Rosiskaja ugolnaja kompanija" with
100% of state owned shares transferred to it and a management deadline of three years - until December 1998.
This, principle activity of the final stage of privatization in the coal industry does not include the possibility of, in
practice, very different methods of privatization of certain enterprises. Privatized coal production enterprises can
in the future, act as shareholding groups (holding companies) with a considerable share of state capital, i.e.as a
shareholding - state groups and companies.
This solution allows for an effective state regulation of all activities in the coal industry - one of the most elaborate
sections of the energy - economic complex of the country and oversee the proper use of state support resources
through existing representatives of the central organs of the government executive branch and the board of directors of the shareholding groups through OAP "Rusugol".
What makes the state regulation of the coal sector effective is the fact that the coal does not receive funding from
the state budget (almost all countries with coal production where coal production enterprises receive funding are
in a similar position).
The degree to which the government interferes in the functioning of shareholding groups in coal production depends on the scale of state subventions. The state should not interfere directly with the functioning of completely
privatized shareholding groups. In this case, enterprises are obligated to organize their own management branch
on the basis of an agreement and in the bounds of legislation.
Basically, the measures of interference from state funding and the shift of a sector to profitable and competitive
production has to be altered as well as the form of state management. In complete sector privatization, state regulations of the coal industry should be exclusively based on legislative - normative acts: in the areas of energy policy,
taxation, use of mineral wealth, loans, as well as control functions in the area of safety at work, ecology etc.
In the functioning of the coal industry of Russia, in the final stage of privatization, positive experiences from other
countries which are great coal manufacturers such as Germany, France etc. were used.
3. CONCLUSION
The purpose of state enterprises is to reach the best possible solutions of important state and socio - economical
tasks in relation to achieving its interests, as well as securing national security of the country. Therefore, work of
state enterprises should not be viewed solely in a market sense, concentrated exclusively on achieving maximum
profit.
In a practical sense it is important to optimize the number of unitary enterprises. This creates the possibility of improving their real management as well as increase the effectiveness of property use.
Shareholding groups are the most progressive form of management which enable an enterprise to create new
structures and the state to regulate all enterprise activities.
494

PROCEEDINGS
When we talk about the coal industry of Serbia, it is largely integrated in the "Electric Power Industry of Serbia" and
shares the fate of such an integration. In a case like this, the enterprise cannot be sold and separated from the integrated system. This does not mean that "Electric Power Industry of Serbia" and a great part of the coal industry
integrated within it, will always be a closed shareholding group. Because of an overwhelming influence of political
parties on the government, the states inability to solve the issue of unemployment and low wages of its citizenry by
intensifying production, the cost of basic products of "E.P.S." (Electric energy, heat and coal) are adjusted according to the very modest capabilities of the citizens, and not business and market strategy of "E.P.S.".
If we add to that the prolonged delays in restructuring of "E.P.S" (coal sector), inadequate use of personnel (dominated by political parties), equipment at disposal, uneven development of certain manufacturing companies, a serious question of a introducing a strategic partner i posed. Introduction of a strategic partner with a minority share
would in good part eliminate these problems, reduce negative influences, increase investments, introduce better
logistics and realize greater competitiveness.
In the coal industry of Serbia a minor part consists of pit exploitation. They are all properties of the Republic of
Serbia. Shareholding would encompass mines that are at least at the verge of profitability. One should bear in mind
that the mines which do not have effective production and are in danger of being closed, should have an adequate
substitute and adequate amount of work. One should also bear in mind that economic business conduct should not
have greater priority over the economic and other problems.
REFERENCES
[1]
Ju.N.Maliev, idr.Restrukturizacija ugolnoj promiljennosti. Kompanija Rusugol, 1996.
[2]
A.B.Janovskij, Osnovnije principi formirovanija sistem upravlenija ugolnoj promilennostju v uslovijah akcionirovanija
Ekonomika ugolnoj promilennosti. CNIEI ugol, 1994.
[3]
S.Eremukina, Akcionirovanie v kontekste institucionalnih preobrazovanij ekonomiki: voprosi metodologii, Akcionirovanie, 2008.
[4]
B.Mijatovi, Privatizacija realnog sektora, u etri godine tranzicije u Srbiji, CLDS, 2005.
[5]
Prowse, S. Corporate Governance in an International Perspective //Financial Markets, Institutions and Instruments. 1994.
4.
495

PROCEEDINGS
THE MINING INDUSTRY FUTURE
ABSTRACT
Krastu DERMENDJIEV1
George STOYANCHEV2
Mining and Geology University
1
krderm@mgu.bg 2
g.stoyanchev@mail.bg
The society and the economy put increasingly complex requirements for the
mining industry.
To give the right answers of these requirements is necessary to be created
and inculcated, improved and in some special cases in principle making a
new mining technological, technical and ecology decisions. Some of these
possible decisions are discussed in the paper.
Keywords
Mining industry, Future, Mining technological, Ecology decisions
In order to determine the future of the mining industry is very important to answer the following key questions:
what are the needs of the humanity and the world economy for underground natural resources, is there and will it
be enough and will be the mining industry capable of extracting and processing enough natural resources?
History, associated with the use of mineral resources, shows a continuous upward trend in the number of used mineral quantities and qualities [1]. There is, however, a tendency to replace natural materials with artificial ones. In
the energy sector could be seen an increased use of energy from renewable sources such as wind, solar, biomass,
thermal waters, tidal waves, ocean currents, etc...
It could be expected that the humanity will find and establish a certain balance between mining and processing
new quantities mainly metal, (primary) metals and the one reused by recycling metals. A balance will be found between the different types of energy sources: coal heating companies, uranium nuclear power, gas heating
companies, renewable energy - wind, solar, etc. When searching for that balance, energy will actively influence all
decisions in industry and everyday life of the people, leading to the reduced power consumption - energy-saving
techniques and technologies.
Historically, it appears that the overall socio-economic development of human society is ascending. Therefore, given the forecast growth in industrial production, even reaching current levels of development of developing economies to develop, will be linked to consuming enough raw materials.
Indirectly, the need for minerals can be judged by the development and interest in the development of underwater
- sea mining and cosmic one, although the latter may be associated with the depletion of natural resources on the
land. Indicator is the continued expansion of the number and type of mineral resources in the expanding fields of
material production.
Therefore the answer to the first question is that the global economy in its progressive development will require
more and more mineral resources.
The history of mining shows that at every stage of human development on a global scale, it has sufficient quantities
of mineral resources. This sufficiency is provided by: conquest and mastery of new lands; penetration into the subsurface (into the depths and also in size) and improving technique and technology.
At this stage due to the development of technology, new knowledge and technological improvements it could be
considered that the natural resources are conditionally "inexhaustible - renewable." This thesis is mainly supported
by a number of prominent geologists based on the dynamics of "conditions." We believe that this view can be supported even more so with the development of subsea production and future management of space resources, humanity will have enough minerals for its upward development.
Developed the principle demand - supply the mining industry has always been addressing societal expectations. At
every stage of the development of the human society, within the years of progress and decline, the mines and mining have satisfied the needs of society (direct and through other industries) with sufficient quantity and quality of
mineral resources.
496

PROCEEDINGS
Although with much inertia mining has evolved in time and space. The time has came and passed, and mines and
mining communities have been liquidated all around the world and have remained large settlements, the basis for
the creation of which has been mining. Whole regions are developed, and they continue their developing even now,
based on their natural resources, mining activities and its processing.
Over the time, the mining industry has been developed based on experience and in parallel - correlated with education, science and mining engineering. The developing of technique and technology, human resources and logistics,
on the base of which were created the modern technological schemes for the extraction and primary processing of
increasingly large type, quality and quantity of natural resources. Currently using different methods and technologies of extraction [2]: open, underground, underwater, geo-technological (melting, dissolving, leaching, steam distillation, gasification), yet the development of space technologies is to be applied in a variety of natural and climatic
conditions. At the current stage of development of the mining equipment and technology, we believe that mining
can extract and process the necessary and sufficient quantity and quality of natural resources and has the opportunity to extend its production.
In order to fulfill this task there is need to be resolved, in the most efficient way, the following issues: science and
service in various fields of mining, design, construction, management, ecology and economy and the formation of
modern technologies, the creation of advanced and new technical tools, training of highly qualified personnel to
achieve the objectives of the mining industry.
Effective and modern mining industry is impossible without serious research and development services. Such services must be thematically linked to: assess the conditions of the deposits and mines, to assess the elements of
mining technology scheme: production, transport and lifting, ventilation, draining, energy, processing, planning,
and ecology with economy, safety and conditions labor, training of manpower. It may be tied to the use of modern
information systems used by the mines.
At this stage, the outlook for global growth in industrial production is positive and range from 2 to 14 points. Along
with this favorable for mining fact, however, there are numerous problems which hinder and restrict the development of the mining industry [3]. Before mining companies face the task of finding a solution to these problems, it is
believed that successful will be those mining companies who maintain and operate their enterprise solutions,
adapting to current and future conditions of mining. Most of the problems that the companies have are of social,
economical and political nature, and also ecology and management.
Advanced technical possibilities of using renewable energy sources such as solar, wind, hydro power generation,
recycling of many products, including metals, strict restrictive measures in environmental protection and the attitude of modern society to the mining industry and especially coal and ore that are used for nuclear power or weapons are the reasons for a decline in the coal-mining industry.
Compression of the mining is performed also by the industrial end-users who constantly insist on reducing production costs and product prices.
The modern society requires the mining industry to comply strictly with higher requirements on health and safety
at work. Particularly serious are the European directives regarding the protection of protected areas, biodiversity
and the many obligations of the mining operators in waste management.
The formation of a public perception of negative attitudes towards mining and mining labor discourages young
people from the mining profession, which requires specific - specific decisions on hiring, training and promotion of
staff in the industry, affecting not only individual companies, but also regions within some countries and the whole
world.
It could be expected that the humanity will find and establish a certain balance between mining and processing
new quantities mainly metal, (primary) metals and the one reused by recycling metals. A balance will be found between the different types of energy sources: coal heating companies, uranium nuclear power, gas heating
companies, renewable energy - wind, solar, etc. When searching for that balance, energy will actively influence all
decisions in industry and everyday life of the people, leading to the reduced power consumption - energy-saving
techniques and technologies.
In recent years, in the world, including Europe and the Balkans, there is a redistribution of the share of the energy
resources. In this distribution the most oppressed is mining, due to the expected compression of energy in heating
companies, respectively, the production of coal. To save the current participation rate of coal in the power generation, joint action with the power utilities to improve the technology of extraction and utilization will be required.
497

PROCEEDINGS
For the formation of a credible assessment and acceptance of the mining industry in society, in the future, it must
be consistent with the preservation of the natural environment, socio-political state of society, the public interest,
and the health and safety of the people.
To meet those requirements to the mining industry will need to seek and apply:
mining technological schemes with low environmental impact, which can be pinned by small volume reclamation works;
mining and processing schemes, ensuring full internal water cycle, in which to achieve zero impact on irrigated agriculture and off any confrontation with the public on water issues;
mining and process, flow diagrams with near zero waste, threatening human health and the environment;
technologies for complex processing and utilization of mineral resources with highly efficient technological
systems;
modern energy saving and environmental technical means with the possibility of remote controlling;
modern "state of the art" technology and conventional geo-technologies with the possibility of a complete
liquidation of the consequences of mining activities;
technologies and equipment for full cycle (mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic, pastes) of seized spaces to improve the order and sequence of the seizure of all reserves and resources in the field.
solutions for the protection of technical results, reducing plume in mining areas and securing arrays treated
with chemical and biological solutions to yield.
Based on increasing the efficiency of extraction and expansion in the number of metal mineral resources for the
extraction of which is expected strong growth and an increasing use in the mining practice of physic-chemical and
chemical-biological technology schemes.
To be made more efficient and attractive the labor in the mining industry modern tools and technologies are used.
For the purposes of research, design, management and ecology were created and used a lot of resources and technology of surveying and mine surveying such as a 3D Lasersmining, Slim Borehole Scaner; Core Scan; Radarinterferometer and others. Best mining companies have the necessary technical equipment, software and trained professionals to provide their own service or benefit from the experience and capabilities of companies specializing in the
extraction and primary processing of mineral raw materials.
Alternative to coal companies and world production is the application of new and improved techniques and technologies to achieve high productivity, safety and ecology. These are mechanized mining technologies with limited
or no human presence in mining processes. In the development of thin and medium layers lathes complexes will
have strong presence. Mechanized management systems will most often performed remotely in the underground
conditions or surface mining in intelligent mining systems. At this stage, such technologies have been applied and
have achieved excellent results [4].
The extraction of soft, non-abrasive minerals in the future will only be done by mechanical means-harvesters. Harvesters technologies will be used in the preparatory works and in the extraction.
The energy of the blast will maintain its relatively high participation at weaning healthy minerals and rocks. In all
likelihood, drilling and blasting works, in the future widening of mines will be supplanted by modern harvesters.
These harvesters based on cutting and demolition can wean rocks and ores with a tensile uniaxial pressure up to
180-200 MPa. The share of energy utilization staring at the mass production of ores and underground way will remain the same.
In connection with the needs for minerals, mining industry has focused its attention into marine mining (surface
mining). Now that most of the deposits, which made effective mining are at depths of 10 to 40 m and they are at
the bottom of rivers, lakes, and coastline. There are projects for yield in the ocean at depths of 150 to 400m for the
extraction of diamonds, metals from the group of gold and platinum, phosphate and others [5].
A bolder project foresees an expansion in the group of minerals mined at the bottom of the ocean and increasing in
depth from 1000-2500 to 4000-4500m. Object of the yield will be sedimentary rocks and nodules containing Mn,
Cu, Zn, Pb, Ag, Au, etc...
Solutions exist and the corresponding transportation, communication systems and mining equipment are created
and with which will be implemented effective, safe and environmental extraction of minerals from the seabed. [6].
Extraction and utilization of mineral resources from space is not just a fantasy, but a fantasy bordering with a reality [7]. The authors reach such a conclusion after a thorough analysis of the mineral resources of the Moon, Mars and
asteroids, and cosmic bodies and the possibilities of modern advances in aerospace equipment and technology.
498

PROCEEDINGS
According to prominent space explorers is quite possible in the period 2015-2020 a utilization of space mineral resources to start. As a confirmation of this thought is seen the company "Planetary Resources", founded by
J.Kameron, which main objective is utilization of space resources. Serious intentions in Moon mining were also declared by "Shackleton Energy" with the active help of Penguin Automated Systems [8].
Computer simulations will allow replaying various mining scenarios. Usually in these scenarios there are combinations of: basic and auxiliary mining equipment and technologies; freight transport schemes with various ways and
means of transport (road, lane, gravity, hydraulic, pneumatic) a primary processing of mined in mining any face,
crushing-hopper loaders, mobile hopper-crushing and screening plants; modern dump complexes and others.
Current and in the future the heavy mining machinery is open to advanced and new mining and processing flow
diagrams and it is able to create the necessary equipment, components, and to take its service(with or without warranty) [9].
Due to the expected complexity of mining and geological conditions and increased demands of the mining industry
in the future increasingly will apply logistic engineering (Logistics construction), in which technological design intent is solved in parallel with the decisions for logistics insurance, parallel with the producers of the technology
equipment. Broad principle would apply that technological thought is based and cultivated by the technology rate,
but it anticipates the emergence of new and improved equipment necessary for the implementation of the technology.
Modern manufacturers of mining equipment have the capability and experience to serve all mining, transportation
and processing schemes, in order to create the necessary high-tech and efficient equipment.
For specialists in the field of mining technology will remain a challenge to improve their knowledge and skills for
integrated assessment of mining and geological conditions, the selection of high-technology and technical resources and the creation of innovative and new technical and technological solutions.
The European Union attaches high importance to the sustainable development of the mining industry to provide
the necessary raw materials. In this respect, promote and subsidize the main programs creating international technologies of mining companies, with focuses on innovative technologies and concept for the intelligent deep mine
of the future [10].
The image of the mining industry of Bulgaria up to 2030 [11], defines it as the leading sector and a key driver of the
economy. Strategy for development of the sector creates the necessary conditions for mutually beneficial cooperation between the public and the mining industry for sustainable development of the country and the European Union in accordance with the Madrid Declaration of raw materials from 2010.
On this basis and due to the technological and technical innovation in the mining industry will be build the future
of the mining industry in the Republic of Bulgaria.
CONCLUSION
World mining industry is doomed to develop. Its future is associated with the creation and the use of new and improved technologies and technical equipment, some of which were discussed above.
As part of the global mining industry, that in the Balkan region will be developed in the above manner. In contrast,
however, the regions and the developed countries who are able to balance and ensure its sustainable development,
based on resources around the world, the Balkan countries will have the most rational to develop, consume and
export their minerals to make the most of them. For that purpose, and to improve their technologies and technical
means mining companies must have the support of the state government, through strategic solutions in all areas of
the economy, industry and agriculture.
REFERENCES
[1]
, . I- . ,
. . , .2/3, 2012.
[2]
, ., ., . Proceedings of III National Scientific

and Technical Conference wit international participation, 8-11 October, 2012, Devin, Bulgaria
[3]
Murray, H., Tracking the trends, 2013, Mining Magazine, April, 2013.
[4]
Goodbody, A., Back to school, Mining magazine, April, 2013.
[5]
Nishikawa, Y., Marini mining: Potential for Seafloor resources, Mining Magazine, March, 2013.
[6]
Scott Steven, Mining the oceans, Mining Magazine, December, 2012
499

PROCEEDINGS
[7]
, ., . . : , . . ,
. 6, 7, 2006.
[8]
Lovejoy, C. Mining on the Moon, Mining Magazine, July/August, 2012.
[9]
Lovejoy, C. The future of mining, Mining magazine round table, A supplement to Mining magazine, December, 2012.
[10]
Goodbody, A., Mining: 2020 and beyond., Mining Magazine, November, 2012
[11]
.. www.mi.goverment.bg/../proekt
500

PROCEEDINGS
ANALYSIS OF THE TRANSPORT DISTANCES

IN DEFINING THE EXPLOITATION COSTS
OF DEPTH OPEN PITS OF METALS
ABSTRACT
1
Zoran PANOV
Radmila KARANAKOVA STEFANOVSKA2
Risto POPOVSKI3
Kirco MINOV4
Blagica DONEVA5
In this paper is given an analysis of the

transport distances for several variants
of open pits for the same ore body. The
basic criterion of optimization is to minimize the costs of exploitation. The analysis gives an opportunity to define the
approach for determining the optimal
solution - possible surface mine.
1,2,3,5
Faculty of natural and technical science, Stip, Macedonia

4
Mine for cooper Bucim - Radovis
1. INTRODUCTION
One of the main conditions for the selection of optimal solution in the design of surface mines is certainly the analysis of transport distances in defining the exploitation cost especially in depth open pits. It is known that in depth
open pits, exploration costs represent around 40% from the total exploitation costs.
This fact implies the need for the introduction of detailed analysis of transport distances. In this paper is used the
data from the design of depth open pits.
Normally there are used only information for public character, without prejudice to the economic policy of mine.
2. EXPLOITATION COSTS RELATED TO TRANSPORT DINTANCES

Is analyzed a new designed open pit of copper, gold and silver. It is depth open pit with depth of 255 meters and 17
benches from E915 to lowest E675.
The input data are given in Table 1.
Table 1. Input data
Waste
Reserves(B+C1)
Ore
Cu
Cu
Au
Au
Ag
Ag
kg
g/t
kg
g/t
915
112139
12050
95.09
0.789
3.71
0.31
1.51
0.13
9.31
900
1318583
14007
21.68
0.155
2.92
0.21
1.44
0.10
94.14
Bench
Kot
885
3598147
89020
90.15
0.101
2.70
0.03
1.23
0.01
40.42
870
6289007
145100
145.52
0.100
37.22
0.26
78.65
0.54
43.34
855
8089482
323000
545.91
0.169
85.47
0.26
313.66
0.97
25.04
840
7674662
700515
1594.24
0.228
306.42
0.44
503.43
0.72
10.96
825
6324665
1067000
2721.78
0.255
372.48
0.35
790.67
0.74
5.93
810
5083154
1273000
3525.69
0.277
526.51
0.41
919.63
0.72
3.99
795
4064807
1420100
3397.43
0.239
490.85
0.35
1239.52
0.87
2.86
780
3003098
1603550
4396.72
0.274
597.26
0.37
1697.64
1.06
1.87
765
1997468
1710040
3982.25
0.233
530.00
0.31
1330.91
0.78
1.17
750
1080337
1920500
4998.03
0.260
656.15
0.34
1808.30
0.94
0.56
501

PROCEEDINGS
630976
1701205
4236.41
0.249
703.53
0.41
1752.40
1.03
0.37
720
427989
1215980
2993.69
0.246
548.77
0.45
1343.18
1.10
0.35
705
293457
805020
2740.18
0.340
394.68
0.49
1124.33
1.40
0.36
735
690
77619
634010
1844.55
0.291
299.28
0.47
779.69
1.23
0.12
675
38364
239015
503.48
0.211
91.48
0.38
565.09
2.36
0.16
50103954
14873112
37832.78
0.96
3.37
Average
5649.44
0.254
14251.28
0.38
According to the presented input data, it can be concluded that it is a polymetalic deposit of copper, gold and silver, with a given amount of development of open pit at 15 meters, identical with the possible bench height.
In addition, the average content of cooper is 0254%, gold 0.38 g / t, silver, 0.96 g / t.
According to the basic geometry, it is a depth open pit, with a total depth of 255 meters, with an average ratio of
overburden 3.37.
3. ANALYSIS OF TRANSPORT COSTS

The transport distance are calculated from the open pit model, and we get following values:
Table 2. Transport distance
Transport distance
Bench
Waste
Ore
Waste distance
Ore distance
Cumulative
Cumulative,
t km
cumulative, t km
t km
123353
21088
144441
km
km
915
1.1
1.75
900
1.273
2.023
1801909
49424
1851333
885
1.466
2.181
7076793
243576
7320370
870
1.641
2.361
17397054
586157
17983211
855
1.812
2.53
32055195
1403347
33458543
840
1.989
2.707
47320097
3299641
50619739
825
2.168
2.858
61031971
6349127
67381098
810
2.321
3.032
72829972
10208863
83038835
795
2.508
3.192
83024507
14741823
97766329
780
2.706
3.357
91150891
20124940
111275831
765
2.882
3.551
96907593
26197292
123104885
750
3.08
3.724
100235030
33349234
133584264
735
3.263
3.901
102293906
39985635
142279541
720
3.43
4.066
103761908
44929809
148691717
705
3.599
4.219
104818060
48326189
153144249
690
3.788
4.415
105112079
51125343
156237422
675
3.952
4.59
Average
2.10
105263695
52222422
157486117
105263695
52222422
157486117
3.51
502

PROCEEDINGS
Costs for transport distance are calculated according to the length of road transport of ore and waste. It is made
an analyses for each bench separately.
Table 3. Costs calculating for transport distance
Bench
915
Waste distance
Ore distance
Suma
Suma
Cumulutive
/(t km)
/(t km)
/(t km)
/(t km)
48107.68
11598.13
59705.80
59705.80
900
654636.94
15584.89
670221.83
729927.63
885
2057204.82
106783.94
2163988.76
2893916.39
870
4024901.48
188419.61
4213321.09
7107237.47
855
5716675.30
449454.50
6166129.80
13273367.27
840
5953311.72
1042961.76
6996273.48
20269640.75
825
5347630.74
1677217.30
7024848.04
27294488.79
810
4601220.32
2122854.80
6724075.12
34018563.91
795
3975868.56
2493127.56
6468996.12
40487560.03
780
3169289.86
2960714.54
6130004.40
46617564.43
765
2245113.82
3339793.62
5584907.44
52202471.87
750
1297700.50
3933568.10
5231268.60
57433740.47
735
802961.68
3650020.39
4452982.07
61886722.54
720
572520.52
2719296.07
3291816.59
65178539.13
705
411899.46
1868008.66
2279908.12
67458447.25
690
114667.52
1539534.78
1654202.30
69112649.55
675
59130.06
603393.37
662523.43
69775172.98
41052840.97
28722332.01
69775172.98
69775172.98
If we calculated the costs for transport distance separately for cooper, gold and silver we get values independently
when mine will be exploited only for one kind of metal in depth. Below are two tables of costs for metal copper,
gold, silver and monometal copper independently.
The costs calculation for cooper exploitation is made on the basis of transport distances only in cooper exploitation. So, in the calculation were taken only cost exploitation of copper, other quantities of gold and silver are neglected or are calculated as waste.
able 4. Cost calculating for Cu exploitation
Cu
Cost for 1 t Cu in open pit
Bench
cumulative
the bench
/t
/t
US$/t
915
95.09
627.89
627.89
828.81
900
116.77
6251.13
6251.13
8251.49
885
206.92
13985.86
13985.86
18461.34
870
352.44
20165.76
20165.76
26618.80
855
898.35
11295.22
14775.33
19503.43
840
2492.59
4388.47
8131.97
10734.20
825
5214.36
2580.98
5234.48
6909.52
810
8740.05
1907.17
3892.26
5137.78
795
12137.48
1904.09
3335.75
4403.19
780
16534.20
1394.22
2819.46
3721.69
765
20516.44
1402.45
2544.42
3358.64
503
cumulative
cumulative

PROCEEDINGS
750
25514.47
1046.67
2251.03
2971.35
735
29750.88
1051.12
2080.16
2745.82
720
32744.57
1099.59
1990.51
2627.48
705
35484.75
832.03
1901.05
2509.39
690
37329.30
896.80
1851.43
2443.89
675
37832.78
1315.90
37832.78
1844.30
2434.48
1844.30
2434.48
The costs calculation for gold exploitation is made on the basis of transport distances only in gold exploitation. So,
in the calculation were taken only cost exploitation of copper, other quantities of cooper and silver are neglected
or are calculated as waste.
Table 5. Cost calculating for Au exploitation
Au
Bench
Cost for 1 kg Au in open pit
cumulative
the bench
cumulative
cumulative
kg
/kg
/kg
US$/kg
915
3.71
16106.61
16106.61
21260.72
900
6.62
110190.42
110190.42
145451.35
885
9.33
310267.24
310267.24
409552.75
870
46.55
152683.61
152683.61
201542.36
855
132.02
72143.83
100541.53
132714.82
840
438.44
22831.94
46230.90
61024.79
825
810.92
18859.85
33658.68
44429.45
810
1337.43
12770.94
25435.71
33575.13
795
1828.28
13179.17
22145.12
29231.56
780
2425.55
10263.48
19219.40
25369.61
765
2955.54
10537.66
17662.57
23314.59
750
3611.69
7972.68
15902.17
20990.87
735
4315.23
6329.45
14341.48
18930.75
720
4864.00
5998.48
13400.19
17688.25
705
5258.68
5776.55
12828.01
16932.97
690
5557.96
5527.32
12434.89
16414.06
675
5649.44
7242.49
12350.81
16303.08
5649.44
12350.81
16303.08
The costs calculation for silver exploitation is made on the basis of transport distances only in silver exploitation.
So, in the calculation were taken only cost exploitation of copper, other quantities of cooper and gold are neglected or are calculated as waste.
Table 6. Cost calculating for Ag exploitation
Ag
Bench
Cost for 1 kg Ag in open pit
cumulative
the bench
cumulative
cumulative
kg
/kg
/kg
US$/kg
915
1.51
39486.75
39486.75
52122.51
900
2.95
247676.17
247676.17
326932.54
885
4.17
693531.99
693531.99
915462.23
870
82.82
85811.96
85811.96
113271.79
855
396.48
19658.89
33478.07
44191.06
504

PROCEEDINGS
899.91
13897.24
22524.11
29731.83
825
1690.57
8884.73
16145.10
21311.54
810
2610.21
7311.70
13032.91
17203.44
795
3849.73
5218.95
10517.00
13882.44
780
5547.36
3610.91
8403.56
11092.69
765
6878.27
4196.30
7589.47
10018.10
750
8686.58
2892.92
6611.78
8727.55
840
735
10438.98
2541.07
5928.43
7825.52
720
11782.16
2450.76
5531.97
7302.20
705
12906.49
2027.79
5226.71
6899.25
690
13686.18
2121.60
5049.81
6665.75
675
14251.28
1172.41
4896.06
6462.80
14251.28
4896.06
6462.80
The analysis is performed at the monometal copper. For this purpose, are used the adopted values of the prices of
metals from table 7.
Table 7. Calculating costs for monometal Cu exploitation
Monometal of Cu
Bench
cumulative
915
cumulative
cumulative
/t
/t
US$/t
115.06
0.95
115.06
518.90
518.90
684.95
900
37.43
0.27
152.49
19502.13
4786.74
6318.50
885
104.73
0.12
257.22
27632.41
11250.81
14851.06
870
354.53
0.24
611.74
20047.17
11617.99
15335.74
855
1043.57
0.32
1655.31
5908.71
8018.66
10584.63
840
3295.63
0.47
4950.94
2122.89
4094.10
5404.21
825
4813.74
0.45
9764.68
1459.33
2795.23
3689.70
810
6456.38
0.51
16221.06
1041.46
2097.19
2768.28
795
6180.56
0.44
22401.62
1046.67
1807.35
2385.70
780
7808.47
0.49
30210.10
785.05
1543.11
2036.91
765
6986.34
0.41
37196.44
799.40
1403.43
1852.52
750
8738.60
0.46
45935.04
598.64
1250.33
1650.43
735
8222.24
0.48
54157.28
541.58
1142.72
1508.39
720
6099.58
0.50
60256.86
539.68
1081.68
1427.82
705
4995.07
0.62
65251.93
456.43
1033.82
1364.64
690
3544.66
0.56
68796.59
466.67
1004.59
1326.06
621.10
675
1066.70
0.45
69863.29
69863.29
0.47
69863.29
Table 8. Metal prices
Metal prices
Cu
7500
US$/t
Au
40000
US$/kg
Ag
1000
US$/kg
1.32
US$
Cost of 1 t Cu in open pit

The bench
998.74
1318.34
998.74
1318.34
Values of metals and the ratio / US $ in the calculation are taken from the following Table
8. The analysis was made with average prices of metals in the last 3 years.
Normally, the change in stock prices of metals have great impact on the definition of total
cost of exploitation. Therefore, you should pay particular attention to selecting and determining the same.
After the calculation of transport distances is made a diagram of the dependencies of the
transport distance of the total cost of exploitation of one ton of copper or 1 ton of monometal copper for the particular model of depth open pit metal.
505

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Price cost dependance of cooper exploitation at transport distance
According to the analysis of transport distances (see diagram in Fig. 1), we can conclude the following:
The least favorable is area A, where there is a major change in the value of the price of the cost of cooper
exploitation (and copper monometal) in function of the deepening of the surface mine or transport distances. With a little change of the transport distance from 1.75 to 3.1 km, ie with enhancement from E900 to
E810, comes a change in the cost price of 1 ton exploitation of copper from 5000 till 24000 US $.
The most favorable is zone B, where there is negligible change in the value of the cost of cooper exploration
(monometal copper) in function of the deepening of the surface mine or an increase in the transport of ore.
The change of the transport distances from 4.25 to 5 km, a causing minimal changes in the price of the exploitation costs of 1 ton of copper from 1300 to 1600 US $. With that is possible an enhancement of surface
mine from E735 to E660.
The rest of the surface mine covered between zones A and B, is possible exploitation only under conditions
of controlled costs for exploitation: without big jumps in stock prices of metals, the cost of equipment
(which is relatively stable) and the cost of labor.
4. CONCLUSION
Given depending on transport distances and costs of exploitation of depth open pits of metals provides an opportunity to make strategic decisions in mines management in order to find the optimum solutions with minimum
cost.
In fact, it is necessary for each new and existing open pit to develop a model, where from transport solution will
define the true value of the cost of exploitation of useful mineral resource - in this case the metals copper, gold and
silver. Logically, polymetalic useful mineral resource is converted at the monometal.
REFERENCES
[1]
Schofield D D. Advanced computer techniques: developments for the minerals industry towards the new millennium[A]. Proceedings
of Mining Science and Technology[C]. Beijing, 1999.
[2]
CHEN Jian-hong, DEN Shun-hua, WANG Li-guan. Development of open-pit mining and planning CAD software based on integrated
graphic environment[J]. China Mining Magazine(in Chinese), 1996, 5(3):7377.
[3]
HU Fu-xiang. Optimization of open-pit mining boundary in the combined mining horizontally of surface and underground[J]. Metal
Mine, 1997, 252(6): 2731.
[4]
CHEN Jian-hong. Design and development of automatic creation software for surface mine boundary drawings[J]. Technology for
Chemical Mines, 1998, 25(3):1721.
[5]
Colou, T., Technical Parameterization for Open Pit Design and Mine Planning, in : Proc. 21 APCOM Symposium of the Society of
Mining Engineers (AIME) (1988), pp. 485-494.
[6]
Tolwinski, B., and Underwood, R., A Scheduling Algorithm for Open Pit Mines, IMA Journal of Mathematics Applied in Business and
Industry 7 (1996), pp. 247-270.
[7]
Thomas, G., Optimization of Mine Production Scheduling - the State of the Art, in Proceedings IIR Dollar Driven Planning Conference
(1996).
st
506

PROCEEDINGS
MANAGEMENTS OF MINING RECOVERY
ABSTRACT
Prof. As. Dr. Skender LIPO1
Dr. Arben BAKIU2
Geology and Mining Faculty,

Tirana, Albania
1
liposkender@yahoo.com 2 bakiua@yahoo.com
In recent years mining designers, along with the challenge of managing mining activities that are going always deeper and deeper, are faced with the
challenge of adapting the mining technologies with minimal impact to the
environmental. Facing these challenges requires a careful management of
mining activities to fulfill the increased demand for minerals and to achieve
a successful mining activity.
This paper gives some opinions about mineral resources management as the
only assets of a mining activity. With some examples taken from our mines
noted that the improvement of parameters of mining recovery and quantity
and quality losses is one of the targets to be aimed for the realization of successful mining activities.
Keywords
Mining Management, Mining Recovery, Waste Dilution, Mineral Losses
1. ORE RESERVES THE ONLY ASSETS OF A MINING ACTIVITY

Ore reserves are the only asset where a mining activity is based. A collection of detailed and correct information
about the geology of ore bodies and the geological medium surrounding the ore bodies (mineralogy, distribution of
useful components, size of the ore bodies, geology of the surrounding rocks, presence of tectonic faults, etc.) creates a unique database to support the engineering solution about methods of mineral extraction, ore enrichments
technologies and fulfillment of market requirements for minerals.
With all improved methods of geological researcher and by wider use of geophysical works, the database on the
geology of a mineral deposit can not be comprehensive, especially when mineral deposit located in greater depth.
The cost of construction of drill holes for intercepting ore bodies, located in large depths, is relatively greater, so
the number of drilling and other geological works (the only way to intercept ore bodies) can not be unlimited. Consequently geological information gathered in the phase of geological work serves as the basis for economical evaluation of ore body reserves and undertaking a mining activity. The geological reports of exploration information,
resources and reserves are summary statements that require prior evaluation of a considerable range and amount
of information.
With the start of mining works and their contact with ore bodies, the geological information must be completed
and provide fulfill and accurate database to support any further activity for the extraction of mineral deposits. Under the preparation stage of levels, exploitation blocks and extraction units, geological services, together with mining surveying service in mines, continue to collect data about form and size of the ore bodies, their spatial position,
mineralogy of ore, distribution of useful components in the ore bodies and in the surrounding rocks, the stability of
ore bodies and the surrounding rocks, underground water network, and many other factors to be taken into account in other stages of the exploitation of the mineral source. The lack of full geological information, or even
worse not correct geological information, can lead to wrong decisions for the planning and development of mining
and engineering solutions for blocks, levels or even for all mine.
Geological information must be reflected accurately in the plan, in 3D format, cross sections and longitudinal profiles in hard copy and in electronic format. Programs that are used today in geology and mining, create multiple
strengths for analytical calculations and graphical construction, giving a fuller picture of the spatial position of ore
bodies and all other elements in geological medium to be taken into account in the preparation of a successful
mining project. Such presentation in electronic formats promotes the ideas of engineers designer to realize a mining project that will provide a more complete extraction in quantity and quality of mineral reserves.
507

PROCEEDINGS
2. MANAGEMENT OF ORE RESERVES

Based on the large and accurate geological information, mining projectors have as main objective the design of
mining technologies that ensure safe working and full extraction in quantity and quality of ore reserves for a given
deposit. The process of selecting a mining method begins with a compilation and evaluation of the information
already known about the geology of ore deposit and continues with the information update from underground
workings. Nowadays when the requirements for environmental protection can not be passed sideways, mining project should take into consideration and:
Promoting all the expected impacts on the environment in the phase of mining activity and after mine closure
Continuous improvement of the techniques of working in the mine for a good performance as the environment.
Preventing all irreparable damage to the environment during mining activity and use of environmental
friendly technologies
Optimal use of all the waste that is generated by the extraction and processing of minerals
The expected impacts on the environment after the end mining production activity.
Preparation of environmental project as an integral part of the mining project is being done nowadays a necessary
requirement (1). Under these conditions, for calculation of total production costs (CT) for mining 1 ton of ore are
used:
CT = Ce + Cen + Dlo + Ddi,
Where: Ce the costs for mining operation
Cen the environmental costs includes the expenditures necessary for compensation of all negative impacts of the
mining project to the environment,
Dlo damage from loss of 1 ton of reserves,
Ddi - damage from dilution of 1 ton of ore
An ideal scheme of mining stages in a mine would be the one shown in Figure 1. In this scheme the deposit mineral
offers three kinds of resources (2). Main ore resources with a potential tonnage and grade calculated from geological information. This part of ore resources should be mining with the lowest parameters of waste dilution and ore
losses. Ore losses and waste dilution are drawbacks that cannot always be accepted. In order to optimize these factors, an extensive research program has been undertaken, involving both model and full-scale tests. The experience
gained from these investigations,
combined with a follow up of practical results, now has developed
sublevel caving into a method with
Figure 1. Stages and technological processes in a mining activity.
508

PROCEEDINGS
The second resources are the potential ore reserves in mineralization zone surroundings the main ore body. These
reserves can be successfully extracted from the mine and treated as a reserve for the ore averaging, or can be sent
directly to the enrichment factory. When the mineralized zone is host of the main mineral bodies it can be extracted together with the main ore. In these cases we can realized a higher ratio of mining recovery (note: mining recovery = 1 mineral losses). Such a situation is at the copper mine in Rehova. Rocky mass surrounding the ore bodies
have a low content of copper ore, about 0.35 % Cu, creating a mineralized zone. Mining of the main bodies together with the mineralized zone has increased the mining recovery for the reserves of main ore body to 90 % (3).
The third resources are rocky mass that extracted out of the mine during the performance of mining processes. If
this rocky mass can processed and used for different purposes, it brings not only a modest profit, but reducing the
rocky mass that will be treated as waste with a negative environmental impacts.
In a mining activity will highlight these key moments:
1. Mineral reserves and surrounding rocks as the only resource of a mining activity
2. Stages of mineral extraction from underground to the surface, and
3. Processing of ore and rock mass for the preparation of the final product.
The mineral reserves with geological indicators and mining criteria, including those for grade, quality, thickness and
depth, are a key to the development and planning of a mining operation. They are very important but can not directly influence the increase or decrease of the final product for sale.
Even the processing and preparation of final product, for a given mineralogical indicators and enrichment technology, will have a sustainable impact on the quantity and quality of prepared product, although improvements in this
stage are always possible.
In the second stage, the opening and preparation of the mine and extraction of ore from underground to the surface, although we follow an approved mining project, there are always opportunity for improvement mining processes according to new level of geological and mining information. These improvements will be achieved by taking
concrete measures in concrete deposits, as each mineral deposit in its geological and mining complexity is unique.
Improvements are possible as we reduce the cost for the extraction of 1t mineral, as well as the improvement of
quantity and quality parameters of the product being sent for further processing at enrichment plants. Mining recovery and waste dilution are mining parameters which can be used to evaluate the efficiency of a mining method.
Widely exists the opinion that a mining method characterized by a high mining recovery and a low waste dilution
can be considered an efficient mining method.
3. MANAGEMENT PARAMETERS OF QUANTITY AND QUALITY LOSSES

Increased productivity and efficiency of a mining enterprises, connects directly with more complete extraction of
the mineral reserves of the ore deposit given for mining. Despite achievements in enhancing of the mechanization
of mining processes and improvement of management of mining operations, not all mining reserves can be extracted. Parts of mineral reserves losses in mining blocks in the form of ore columns or broken ore, other parts losses in underground loading point and transports route and a few broken ore losses in averaging process of ore extracted. The totality of these reserves constitutes quantity mineral losses, and calculates with the difference of ore
reserves in-situ, with extracted ore reserves and sent for further processing.
At the same time, the quality losses, or waste dilution, are the contamination of ore by no ore material during the
mining process. The average metal content (component or useful components), to the extracted mineral is generally lower than that of the estimate in-situ grade of deposits.
The presence of quantity and quality losses of useful mineral in the production process is inevitable, but their sizes
are the result of the simultaneous action of a number of objective and subjective factors. Without denying the
dominant role of objective factors, related to geological and mining conditions, mining activity affects quite well in
these sizes. To make the most effective a mining activity, should be recognized types of quantity and quality losses
that occur in the production process, and then should grouped these according to the main causes that brings and
to define mining measures to minimize them (4).
Management of quantity losses
Quantity losses grouped into (A) general mineral losses and (B) production mineral losses. General mineral losses are
inherent in the very nature of occurrence of ore deposits and consist mainly or ore left in place for stability purposes. These losses are divided into two groups:
1. Losses for the protection of underground opening works and other objects related to the mining activity,
509

PROCEEDINGS
2. Losses that are not related to the mining activity.

With the introduction of the mining works in greater depth, impact of mining subsidence on the surface is negligible. In these cases it is not necessary to leave mineral columns for the protection of the surface from subsidence, so
we have not the mineral losses of point 2. While losses related to the protection of objects related to mining activity, mainly the underground opening of mine, vertical shafts, or ramps should be avoided. These works should be
opened outside the cone of rocky massif movements towards spaces created by mineral extraction. Such a position
of the opening of the mine workings, increased costs for the preparation of mine, but avoids losses of ore in columns that should be left to protect these. Mining experience in our country recognizes some cases that position of
the underground opening (mainly vertical shafts) have brought considerable quantity losses in mineral columns left
to protect the shaft by the movement of the rocky strata. The worst example we meet in coal mining in Mborje
Drenove, open with a central vertical shaft, where a large coal column is left to protect the central shaft from mining subsidence.
Production mineral losses (mining losses) are made up of all other ore losses during the mining process. They relate
to the accepted methods and technology of ore extraction. The causes that bring these losses are very complex
and relate nor only with strict implementation of mining methods, but also with conditions of geological medium
where the mining work take place.
Ore losses included in this group are divided according to their conditions in (a) losses in-situ ore, and (b) losses of
broken ore. Subgroup losses (a) are mainly present in room and pillar mining methods where parts of ore are living
as pillars to support the hanging wall. In these mining methods there are also losses of broken ore in small quantities spread on the floor. To reduce these kinds of losses should be carefully considered sizes of protective columns,
or to consider the possibility of replacing them with artificially constructed columns. So in the iron - nickel mine in
Skroske, where the room and pillar mining is successfully used, ore losses are not greater than 10%, mainly by losses
in columns and much less (about 0.5%) of broken ore losses.
Losses of subgroup (b) are present in sublevel and block caving methods and their management is complex. These
methods are characterized from rigorous technical requirements on the parameters of a regular network of drifts,
parameters of voids, position of drilling in a fan shaped pattern, size of ore fragmentation, amount and order of
mineral extraction from every finger raise, and other requirements. The dilution of the broken ore with waste can
very from 10 % and 35 %, with the ore losses varying 10% to 20%.
We had a negative example in iron nickel mine in Prrenjas where a classical block caving methods is used. The
hanging wall in this mine is an unstable rocky stratum called Seria e Prrenjasit. After the block blasting this strata
broken in finer size than the ore and penetrate very fast in broken mineral bringing a higher dilution (5). In cases
when the thick of ore body was less than 12 meter the losses of mineral varying 30% to 35 %.
Despite the improvements made time after time in the parameters of this mining method, mineral losses for thickness of ore body less than 12 meter were still high. This forced staff of mining specialists to make changes in the
system of drilling pattern. The position of drilling long holes change from vertical to horizontal direction, living unattached a slice of ore body on contact with Seria Prrenjas. After block blasting the ore is crushed to a fragmentation that allows removal at draw points or through other arrangements. The extracted volume of broken ore from
different position of finger raises must be controlled and must follow a planed schedule. With these changes in the
drilling system we had an increased quantity of pure ore extracted from each funnel and reduce mineral losses to
18 %.
In the copper mine in Munelle, where is in used sublevel caving methods, when thickness of ore bodies are more
than 30 meter, the amount of ore extracted from a mining sublevel was very small and the parameters of mining
losses is growing while the mining going to the lower sublevels. This happened as a result of growing pressures and
penetration of waste rock to broken mineral. The dilution reaches soon such a proportion that the loading is
stopped and the next long holes fan is blasted. To increase the amount of ore extraction in this mine were realized
some change to the preparation of mining blocks. Using the ramp it was possible to realize the extraction of the
mineral with cut cad fill mining methods from bottom to upper sublevels. The space generated from mineral extraction was filled as completely as possible with hydraulic fill. Changes in the methods of mining was associated
with increased direct costs, but at the same time we have a significantly increase of mining recovery parameters.
Management of quality losses
Quality losses (dilution) come mainly from contamination of ore by no ore material in the mining process and a less
rate dilution comes from losses of ore particles, very rich in metal, in the spaces generated from mineral extraction.
The dilution has several consequences. Firstly the grade of metal in extracted mineral will be lower than that estimated in ore massive bodies. Secondly the volume of material extracted from a mining block will be larger than
510

PROCEEDINGS
that strictly necessary to obtain the same equivalent metal content. So when the parameter of dilution rises, it is
normal to increase the expenditure for haulage, transports and processing of the large volume of mineral extraction. Quality losses are inevitable in the extraction process and vary significantly depending on the mining method
employed in working deposits, and the geological condition of ore bodies and surrounding rock.
Keeping the parameter of quality losses in minimum limits will directly affect the reduction of costs for transport
and processing the extracted mineral mass, but it will not help direct in increase of amount of ore extraction in a
given block. Parameters of mineral losses, dilution and mining recovery, as shown in Figure 2, have a significant
impact on each other and often reduction of waste dilution is not recommended.
Figure 2. (left) Relations between parameters of ore extraction (Tn), losses (Th) and dilution (Tv);
(right) relations of ore extracted and dilution in copper mine Rehova, extraction of (a) pure ore, (b) contamination ore and (c) waste rock.
In mining operations with sublevel caving and block caving, overlying caved waste rock flowing in and dilution the
broken ore. Referring to Figure 2, we see that the dilution curve starts after an amount of pure mineral is extracted
(Tn = 0.6) and then increases steadily as the waste rock in extracted mineral continue to increase. Extraction of
broken ore-waste rock mixture interrupted when the parameters of dilution reaches a certain size. How is this size?
The answer to this question is very complex as it is connected with the geology of ore bodies, mining methods, processing technology and the market demand for that mineral. All these indicators are specific to each deposit and
change over time.
Today in copper mining practice in our country is working in two directions. Firstly to increase the production of
pure mineral extracted from a mining unit, and secondly, to increase the amount of contaminated ore, allowing an
increase of waste dilution parameter. Thus in the copper mine in Munella and the iron-nickel mine in Prenjas the
changes in mining methods have increased the amount of clean ore extracted by a sublevel, block and all mine.
In the second direction, working with a high dilution figure, related with geological situations where the host rocks
causing dilution does contribute to useful mineral or metal production. That is when the metal content in waste
rocks is not zero, and the processing technology is capable to rich the contamination ore-waste with a moderate
profit. Such a situation is at copper mine in Rehova where the host rocks contained copper metal with an average
amount 0.35 %, creating a mineralization zone. Extraction of mineral from ore body and mineralization zone has
decreased the mineral losses. As we show in figure 2 (left) the parameters of dilution in the second stage of mineral
extraction, after we have extracted more than 60% of ore reserves, was more than 50 %. The mineral extracted in
this stage includes parts of broken ore, parts of mineralization zone and a small part of waste rock. So a high dilution figure may not necessarily mean a low mining recovery.
4. CONCLUSIONS
The process of realization a successful mining activity begins with a compilation and evaluation of geological
information already known about he ore deposits and information from actual underground workings. A
combination of geological information and detailed study of underground condition is necessary to avoid mistakes
in early stages of mine development.
Ore losses and waste dilution are drawbacks that cannot always be accepted. In order to optimize these factors, an
extensive research program has been undertaken, involving both model and full-scale tests. The experience gained
from these investigations, combined with a follow up of practical results, now has developed mining methods with
511

PROCEEDINGS
The mining parameters useful for evaluating the efficiency of a mining methods are mining recovery, waste dilution
and mineral losses. Optimal realization of these parameters request a scientific combination of geological
condition of deposit, mining methods employed and proper conduct of the relevant mining operations when
mining the deposits.
In geological situations where the host rocks does contribute to useful mineral or metal production, working with a
high waste dilution figure may not necessary mean a low mining recovery.
REFERENCES
(1)
Lipo S., E. Hoxha. : The environmental impact of the closed copper mine in Rehova, pp(399-404), 22 World Mining Congress, Istanbul
2011
(2)
Drebenstedt C. : Responsible mining approaches and realization, pp(135-147) 22 World Mining Congress, Istanbul 2011
(3)
Grup Autoresh.: Menaxhimi I humbjeve sasiore dhe cilesore ne minieren e bakrrit Rehove, pp (62), Miniera Rehove, 1982
(4)
Horsten J. : Recovery and dilution research report No. 1, School of Mines, Lusaka 1977
(5)
Lipo. S. : Menazhimi I humbjeve sasiore dhe cilesore ne minieren e hekur nikelit Prrenjas, rruget per permiresimin e tregusit te
nxjerrjes se mineralit. 1989, Tirane, Albania
512

PROCEEDINGS
IMPORTANT ECONOMICAL INDICATORS

OF MODERN MINING PRODUCTION
ABSTRACT
Prof Dr Shyqri KELMENDI1
Fehmi AZEMI2
Qazim JASHARI3
Faton KELMENDI4
University of Prishtina, Prishtina,

Kosovo, shkelmendi@yahoo.com
2
GLOBUS College, Prishtina, Kosovo,
fehmi.azemi@gmail.com
3
Trepa minine, Mitrovica, Kosovo,
qjashari@yahoo.com
4
IOM, Prishtina Office,Prishtina, Kosovo, kelmendi.faton@gmail.com
Mining economy, and spatially the economy of base metal ore production, is
very specific. Globally, the mining industry is followed by uncertainty, what
differs from other industries. Cannot have in the world, two same mines.
Economic parameters for any mine are very specific, so their quantification
and categorization cannot be made easier. Data acquisition and their processing usually are an expensive process and require in-depth knowledge
related to mining production.
Mining economy should always be the main decision making factor regarding
what parts of orebody should be mined, and what parts should consider
temporary like a waste that will remain in situ, while not changing economic
condition in the market.
Economic conditions inside mine are in permanent changes. On the other
hand, the mineral amount inside orebody does not change, but can only
change ore quantity with metal content more than economic grade, defined
as cutoff grade. Ore quantity with sufficient economic value (or, calculated
cutoff grade, depends on many factors, which should be considered in the
calculation. Mine production, except that should be over cutoff grade,
must realize the amount of ore which, after sales, would provide monetary
income, sufficient to cover total production costs. This point which determines limiting the level of ore production (at covers the production costs), is
called break-even.
For assessment of mining projects and operating mining economic parameters, actually are developed several methods. Leading evaluation quantitative indicators are NPV, IRR, Investment repayment time, Break - Even and
qualitative indicator Cutoff-grade. In this paper, will be treated some of
evaluation methods, to contribute on the scientific and professional approach to the modern underground mining management.
Keywords
Mining Economy, Cutoff Grade, Break - Even, Production Costs
1. INTRODUCTION
Mining industry products are the main ingredients in all the products that today uses developed societies. However
mineral products still under-appreciated and their assessment in the market are often speculative. The mining industry in developed countries is almost extinguished as a result of emerging discrepancies: workforce and extraction technology is the high cost and mark downs permanent, while the selling price of mineral products not properly mark the growth index. Mines as economic entities, in addition to classic and natural obstacles to make a profit,
often encounter difficulties in political, social, as well as various difficulties and environmental constraints. All
these make the mining economy very specific and with high sensitivity, both in terms of the economy, both in terms
of economy of investment.
Mines as economic entities, have also their own specifics which differ significantly from other economic entities.
The main differences can be specified:
1. The opening of mines requires large capital investments, which are usually followed up with a certain degree of technical and economic risk. Technical risk usually is associated with the uncertainty of ore re-
513

PROCEEDINGS
serves estimation, the uncertainty deriving by rock structures and mineralization, as well as many other
natural factors. On the other hand the economical risk, has to do with the impact of inflatory factors, the
global and local financial crises, with fluctuations of market price and usually with productivity achieved in
the development work and in production, compared to the competition. On the other hand, besides mines
initial capital investments, sometime during their lives, mines need short time capital investments.
2. In-depth analysis of operating costs per unit, shows that in the case of two similar mines, with similar ore
bodies and with approximately the same mining production level, almost every time we acknowledged the
difference in total operation cost. That made mines very specific by the economical indicators, by profit
and interesting to continue with mining production. For this reason, today's modern mining special attention paid to labor productivity (how many tons of ore per 1 employee) and what is the cost of labor share in
total operating costs.
Considering these specifications, the mines are in use by various economic methodologies which assesses the important parameters that reflect the long-term effectiveness of capital investments in mining and subsequent econometric methodologies which indirectly control production costs and the level of required performance of mining
production. All calculated economic indicators, usually presented to the management boards often in face of
shareholders for the purpose of decision making important for operational and / or strategic planning. As each
mine has its own distinctive from other mines, however, some particular economic indicators can serve adequately
for comparisons. The main purpose of this paper is to highlight the relevant economic indicators and how to calculate them, considering the specifics of mining production.
2. ESTIMATION OF CAPITAL INVESTMENTS

Opening of mine requires large capital investments, which are followed by a certain degree of technical and economic risk. Technical risk usually is associated with the uncertainty of reserve estimation, the uncertainty of rock
structures as well as many other natural factors. On the other hand the economical risk has to do with the impact
of inflator factors, the global and local financial crises, with fluctuations of market price and usually with productivity achieved in the development work and in production, compared to the competition. In every case, except initial
capital investment, mines need capital investment in short periods, several times during their lifetime.
Decision on capital investment coincides with assets that are essential to mining production. These assets should
provide sufficient effects of capital investment return within a specified time. Return time of capital investment for
mining projects usually stripped from 3 to 15 years, depending on the amount of funds invested and production
capacity of the mine to be realized in the future. To make a full evaluation of this system, requires simultaneous
treated for significant technical economic parameters: (1) capital investments realized in the mine, (2) the revenues derived from the sale of mining products, (3) the expenses incurred in the performance of that product, and (4)
evaluation of return on investments. During the simultaneous evaluation of these four parameters, care should
always be sure also an appropriate profit that will satisfy the expectations of shareholders (dividends) but will create a material basis for the development.
The main features of capital investment in the mining industry are:
1. The expected benefits are relatively high and varied, ranging from high settlement of investment, benefits
and impacts on the monetary system, impacts on the country's export balance, and benefits to the community;
2. Capital investment in mining is usually accompanied by a higher risk than average in other industries;
3. Investments in mining have a longer repayment from the moment accomplished the initial cost and until
investment return one day as a whole;
However, capital investment in the mining has special importance to regional economic development, but often
their importance and influence can extend to the level of the national economy. The best example of this in the
Kosovo capital investment in the mining sector. Programs are planned to be executed ("Power Generation from
lignite" and "high purity base metals production"), in no way denying that the overall macroeconomic position of
Kosovo would be more convenient, recording a growth rate above the regional average. Capital investment in the
field of minerals, directly determines the fate of the resource, will be put on the development, or will remain unused. Only as mineral resource which is mined (taken out from underground, becoming the market accepts the
product and sold), presents a real wealth, by the rapid technological developments in the world today has few resources impaired completely, and some are being replaced with new materials. Thus, capital investment in the mineral sector, give positive effects, unless extended in right time. Capital investments realized in mine, either in out-
514

PROCEEDINGS
going or in its later stages (expansion, modernization, etc.), should generate the expected revenues for a longer
period, so that expectations for return on investment and profits occur closer to the predictions made. Since many
mining companies have not sufficient own capital for investment, decision-making in this area should be well
thought out, professionally defensible and "cover" economically depth studies. Capital investment appraisal methods in mining are shown in Figure 1.
Metoda e vlersimit
Tradicionale
Periudha
e shlyerjes
DCF
ARR
NPV
IRR
Shlyerja
Index
profit.
Figure 1. The structure of capital investment evaluation parameters
Traditional methods (Payback method or payoff method) are simple and often used to estimate capital investment.
These methods are quantitative assessment based on the fundamental principle - that each capital investment
should pay themselves (to return the invested money) of additional revenue that will be generated by new assets,
within a specified period of time. With this method of assessing the investment repayment, calculated the appropriate period of time (months, years), which will gain a sufficient amount of cash to repay the investment.
The traditional methods, the simplest way is evaluating the investment repayment schedule, which can be determined by the relation:
Tshl
KP
, (year)
HV
(1)
Here you will have:

Tshl Repayment investment time
KP - Initial investments
HV - Annual revenues generated by the project
It may be noted that this method of assessment, as it is simple and easy to calculate, but also provides a guiding
assessment as to managerial decision - whether to proceed further with the project evaluation, or to is withdrawn
at the start.
Another evaluation method which became part of the group of traditional methods, the method called Accounting
Rate of Return ARR. ARR method takes into account the expected revenues to be generated by the project over
its entire life. This method seems to be acceptable for evaluating investments in mining. Ore reserves and production capacity determine the mine life and with certain methods to forecast prices and costs, can be assessed expected revenues for various levels of exploitable reserves and different capacities. This approach naturally provides
the opportunity to search for optimal solutions to various circumstances affecting the pattern.
ARR method uses the accounting concept of profit. Profit, which is calculated after payment of taxes and after
calculating the depreciation of fixed assets and investments. This profit is calculated for each year and in same
time calculates average profit by mining life. Also is calculated average of investment.
Calculation of ARR is based on:
ARR
PN
x100
Invmes
(2)
Here you will have:

PN Net profit after tax and depreciation (annual average)
Invmes Average annual investment
As can be seen, the ARR method represents a step towards more advanced evaluation of the expected mining production, which allows to derive appropriate conclusions and take decisions based on professional arguments. This
method is relatively simple and easy to understand, easily calculated by the notion that deal with accounting profit,
taking into account all investments and all profits expected to be realized throughout the life of the mine. Howev-
515

PROCEEDINGS
er, this method has several drawbacks, among which the most important is that the method does not take into account the depreciation of money over time, as mining projects are multi-year in nature - up to forty years. In other
words, the ARR method is static and not very efficient for evaluating the mines.
To eliminate all weaknesses and shortcomings of the traditional assessment methods developed more sophisticated methods - Discounted Cash Flow or DCF method.
The method considers the fact that money which you will receive in the coming years, can have a nominal value less
than it would have in the present moment. In the case of application of the DCF method, the whole turnover of the
company is discounted ("depreciated") by a discount factor, which essentially represents an annual loss of nominal
value of cash money.
DCF method offers 4 key relevant indicators for assessing the quality of project and investment depositions.
DCF method offers 4 key indicators and relevant for assessing the quality of project and investment depositions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Indicator NPV or Net Present Value

Indicator IRR or Internal Rate of Return
Profitability Index
Time investment settlement or Return of Investment
NPV Indicator.- Evaluation criterion that is based on the present value of money, and as the main qualitative indicator use the calculated value labeled NPV. NPV value can be defined as the sum of the present values of cash inflows each year, less the amount of the present value of all outflows (expenses) available. So, expressed through a
relationship, we will have:
n
n
Hv
Kv
v
(
1
p
)
(
1
p) v
v 0
v 0
(3)
NPV
Or in developed form:
H1
Hn
H2
NPV
...
1
2
(1 p ) n
(1 p ) (1 p )
K1
Kn
K2
...
1
2
(1 p ) n
(1 p ) (1 p )
(4)
Here are:
NPV Net Present Value of cash,
Hv revenues in the period v;
p Discount rate (as a decimal number);;
Kv The total expenses (costs) for the period v;
v Periods of time (months, years)
n The last time period;
To calculate the NPV for an investment that has ramifications for several years, usually prefer creating spreadsheet
tables, and in this manner, EXCEL software has been successful for this purpose. For more details, see [2].
IRR Indicator. - When the evaluation is made by a dynamic DCF method, another important indicator for evaluating
investments in mining is IRR (Internal Rate of Return) - interest rate or internal return on equity. This technique,
which as a result has the qualitative estimator of return on investment, was applied in the past few decades in
many assessments of projects in different fields. In the mining economy, the DCF techniques with relevant indicators are becoming standard practice of project evaluation, and are supported by the World Bank. Method, inside
professionals are known as methods for assessing "investment fertility" or as methods for assessing the marginal
efficiency of investment.
Mathematically, the estimator IRR is the interest rate p, which in the reconciliation (3) takes the value 0 of NPV.
So, if the condition:
n
Hv
Kv
1 p 1 p
v 0
v 0
(5)
Then Bill discount interest rate affecting in completing the equation (5) is p = IRR. In other words, IRR present one
calculated interest rate, for which value NPV done 0.
516

PROCEEDINGS
Profitability index.- This is one of the qualitative indicators that can be calculated and in a way that provides an
overview about the planned investment. This indicator, sometimes termed the ratio cost - benefit or desired factor,
represents the relationship between the present value of cash inflows and the present value of cash expenditures
or outflows, which can be expressed:
IP
(6)
NPV
Kv
Where are:
IP Profitability index
NPV - Net present value of inflow
KV - Net present value of outflows (expenditures)
Repayment of investments.- Repayment of investment is one of the most commonly asked in the investment decision making process. An investment which has the longest duration of returning the money, usually not considered
attractive by the business or by banks and other financial institutions. However, projects in the field of exploitation
of mineral resources and other mining projects are characterized by longer repayment investment. The reasons for
this are many, but among the most one would be: mining projects have limited its capacity, the opening and construction of mining facilities requires physical time which cannot be narrowed beyond allowing technical parameters, parallel engagement the mechanization and labor is limited, etc. Even in cases where repayment time is long,
usually other indicators of mining projects (NPV, IRR, IP) can be good and attractive for investors.
3. COST CONCEPT AND BREAK-EVEN

The term cost means the total amount of expenses incurred in the production and sale of mining products. In other
words, "cost" is a monetary expression of the amount of monetary resources used to produce one unit (usually 1 ton
of ore and / or 1 ton of concentrate) of mining production.
Cost is one of the most important indicators in the economy of a company. The cost level determines the effectiveness and profitability of each company. For these reasons, mining companies train engineers to collaborate
with economists, in order to have analytical and professional approach to the cost estimation. The calculation of
cost, their classification into main groups (fixed operating costs and variable operating costs), is crucial for their
control, but also considered for determining the level of economic output (production) of the mine (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Ore production costs Trepa mine
About the costs associated with the mining company, trained engineers and mining economists should be aware
and responsible for the prediction, for operational monitoring of costs, and for proposing of measures necessary to
realize the continued reduction them. All these actions with operational requirements and production costs make
it necessary to be classified according to their types into different groups, based on professional criteria. It should
be noted that some of the classification criteria of cost, are designed with the accounting plan therefore defines
the ways of their registration in the respective accounts of expenditure.
Given the cost impact on all elements of business and manufacturing, has developed a technique for determining
the point extremely important for mining companies - "Break-Even Point", which represents the amount of productive units that should be sold in order to cover the cost of production.
517

PROCEEDINGS
Point "Break - Even" in the mining company calculated at least once a year to determine the appropriate minimum
level of ore production, which will not result in losses in business. In some cases, this calculated point requires the
mining company to make efforts to raise the ore grade (with this to increase the amount of produced concentrates)
and to make production profitable.
Break-even analysis technique is widely applied by production managers with the right help coming from the accountants. The basis for the application of the method is a preliminary classification of all production costs in two
categories:
1.
Variable costs represent all those costs that vary with increasing or decreasing the production of ore and
usually specified as variable expenses that are expressed in the unit / ton.
2. Fixed costs which grouped all those costs that do not vary in proportion to the amount of produced ore.
These two cost categories compared with revenues from sales of products, in order to determine the level of production on which the mining company realizes a profit, not loss. This fixed point is called "point of death" or "Break
- Even Point". Understanding "" Break - Even Point is explained graphically in Figure 3.
Break even Point is calculated according to the relation:
BEP
(7)
fixi
H sp C var
Here we have:
BEP Break Even Point (ton)
Cfix The total amount of fixed costs ()
Hsp Calculated the sale price of 1 ton of ore (/ton)
Cvar Specific variable costs (/ton)
ra
hy
Pika Break-Even
Humbje
Profit
t
to
Kos
Kosto
variabile
Kosto
fikse
Prodhimi (t/vit)
Figure 3. Understanding Break - Even Point or "Dead Point"
In any case, the estimated Break-Even point is a great help for operating staff, for mining management and shareholders board of directors. This indicator provides all these arguments necessary to take appropriate action in each
of its domain, so that the mining company works with profit.
On the other hand, it should be noted that Break - Even analysis has some drawbacks and constrains, which, however, did not lose value and practical importance has in managing mining methods as an economic entity during its
lifetime.
When the mining company produces several products sold in the market (the case Trepca mining company that
produces zinc concentrate and lead concentrate), the method assumes that the ratio (production vs sales) will be
maintained. In some cases, to eliminate this effect, mineral products calculated on the basis of "Metal equivalent",
i.e. is counting all metallic products through a financial equivalent (e.g. Zn equivalent).
Break Even method has many apply to mining projects, from that with a quick analysis, comparing the total cost
and difference between fixed income and unit variable cost, determined the lower limit of viable mining production. Producing under the "dead point", mine leads to bankruptcy and social problems.
518

PROCEEDINGS
Case Example
To emphasize the importance of the method "Break - Even" will analyze specific case of Trepca mine. Calculations
are made for the production assumed parameters summarized in Table 3:
The market metal prices: Pb = 1.620 /t; Zn = 1.506 /t
Ore production:
Ore grade:
Metal Recovery
300.000 t/year
Pb = 4.05 %
Pb = 89.5 %
Zn = 3.80 %
Zn = 85 %
Ag = 67 g/ton
Ag = 83 %
Metal amount in conc.
Concentrate grade
Concentrate quantity
Pb n K/Pb = 10.874 t
Pb n K/Pb = 72.5 %
K/Pb = 14.999 t
Zn n K/Zn = 9.690 t
Zn n K/Zn = 49.3 %
K/Zn = 19.655 t
Ag n K/Pb = 16.655 Kg
Ag n K/Pb = 1.112 g/t
The selling price of concentrates:

- Pb concentrate:
CK / Pb 0.95 Cm K k K Ag C Ag 0.16 Cm K k K Ag C Ag
0.95 ((1619.4 72.5% 1112 0.976) 0.16 (1619.4 72.5% 1112 0.976))
1803 Euro/ton
Zn concentrate:
CK / Zn ( K k / Zn 8) CZn TCh (49.3 8) 1506 235 387 Euro/ton

Revenue from the sale of concentrates:
K/Pb = QK/Pb*CK/Pb = 14.999*1803 = 27.037.788
K/Zn =QK/Zn*CK/Zn = 19.655*387 = 7.605.324
Total revenue from sales = 34.643.112
Specific revenues Hsp = 115.48 /tone of ore
Fixed costs calculated for the production of 300.000 t/year are Cfix = 8.801.000
Total variable costs are 16.396.583 , or Cvar = 54.66 /ton.
Calculated Break - Even:
BEP
C fix
H sp Cvar
8.801.000
144.706 tons of ore
115.48 54.66
From the results obtained, formed appropriate tables, and consequently diagrams (4 and 5)
Prod UnitX1000
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
Fix C
8801
8801
8801
8801
8801
8801
8801
8801
8801
8801
8801
Var C
1093
2186
3279
4372
5466
6559
7652
8745
9838
10931
Total gost
8801
9894
10988
12081
13174
14267
15360
16453
17546
18639
19732
Income
2310
4620
6930
9240
11550
13860
16170
18479
20789
23099
Profit
-8801
-7585
-6368
-5151
-3934
-2717
-1500
-284
933
2150
3367
519

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4. Break-even of mining company
Figure 5. All Break-Even elements
4. CONCLUSIONS
Mines as economic entities, in addition to natural barriers to produce a profit, often encounter difficulties in political, social, as well as various difficulties and environmental constraints.
The opening of mines requires large capital investments, which are usually followed up with a technical and economic risk. Because of the specific nature, in mining investment decision should be preceded by a thorough analysis of the technical - economic indicators which will be an important issue to economize for a longer period.
Mineral production is specific in terms of the economy, profits and interest continues with mining production. In
modern mining particular attention paid to labor productivity, and what is the participation of labor cost in total
operating costs. Production realized from mining, rarely sold in raw form, but also requires additional treatments
to produce acceptable products from the market.
Investment projects in mining can be assessed by analyzing a series of economic indicators, but indicators derived
from the DCF analysis - NPV, IRR, repayment of investments and profitability index, considered more deserving and
more are becoming world standard.
In terms of the actual economy, calculation of Break - Even Point is noted as one of the important management
tools in order to advance the protection of the mining economy from no recoverable declines or from bankruptcy.
REFERENCES
[1]
Kelmendi Sh.: Project Management. University Globus. Prishtin. 2011
[2]
Kelmendi Sh.: Bazat e gjeostatistiks. Universiteti i Prishtins, 2012
[3]
Trepa mine - Stantrg,: Feasibility study, 2007
[4]
Telsang M.: Production cost concept and Bak-Even analysis. Industrial engineering and production management. Chp.23.
S.Chand.2006.
[5]
Runge I.C.: Costs; Mining economics and strategy. SME. London, New York.1998.
[6]
http://www.experiencefestival.com/canadian_shield_-_mining_and_economics
520

PROCEEDINGS
THE PRESENTATION OF LEACHING AND BIO-LEACHING

FROM DIFFERENT ORES USING SIMPLEX EVOP
ABSTRACT
2
Boris KRSTEV
Aleksandar KRSTEV1
Mirjana GOLOMEOVA2
Zivko GOCEV3
Goce Delcev University, Faculty of Computer Sciences, 2000 Stip, The

Republic of Macedonia, aleksandar.krstev@ugd.edu.mk
2
Goce Delcev University, Faculty of Natural &Technical Sciences, 2000
Stip, The Republic of Macedonia, boris.krstev@ugd.edu.mk
3
Bucim Mine, 2000 Radovis, The Republic of Macedonia,
gocevz@yahoo.com
2
Goce Delcev University, Faculty of Natural &Technical Sciences, 2000
Stip, The Republic of Macedonia, mirjana.golomeova@ugd.edu.mk
The refractory or low grade lead/zinc domestic ores

in Republic of Macedonia are investigated by conventional separation technology or flotation separation. In the meantime, investigations are directed to
the new possibilities of leaching by microorganisms bioleaching.
The paper is result of these technologies and investigations carried out for recovery of in the mentioned
ores. Using Simplex EVOP and computer program
Multisimplex performances are appropriate and most
acceptable and excellent way for presentation of the
leaching and bioleaching.
Keywords
Bioleaching, Evolutive Operativity,
Leaching, Simplex, Software
1. GENERAL PRINCIPLES
Simplex EVOP was proposed as an alternative to the original Box EVOP. The Simplex requires much less experimentation and reaches the optimum of a process much more quickly. Instead of factorial experimentation, Simplex
EVOP uses a succession of experimental designs in the form of a regular Simplex.
The regular Simplex is the first-order design which requires the smallest number of experimental points; for n factors (n-dimensional), (n+1) experimental points are required. Thus for two factors the regular Simplex design is an
equilateral triangle requiring three points; for three factors the design is a regular tetrahedron requiring four
points. As in other forms of EVOP, more than three factors can be handled but the designs cannot be shown diagrammatically. Fixing the number of measured intervals of each factor to the unit length of the Simplex side is important for all moves from the initial cycles. The regular Simplex design permits estimation of the first order effects
in any number of factors. The direction of steepest ascent leading out of the Simplex is through the side or face (or
hyper-plane) opposite the lowest value of response. The deletion of one old point and the introduction of one new
point in this most favorable direction of movement leads to the formation of a new Simplex.
Advantages of Simplex EVOP
The advantages of Simplex EVOP are: 1. in many processes the optimum tends to move with time. Responses may
indicate a moving optimum even though the true optimum does not change. It is unrealistic, and may be useless, to
make process changes on the basis of out-of-date and irrelevant information; only the most recent observations
should be used. 2. Simplex provides a rigorous definition of the frequency and extent of the changes to be made.
Each move is from one Simplex to the adjacent Simplex. The least acceptable set of operating condition and is replaced by its mirror image in the plane (hyper-plane) of the remaining points. 3. When the real effects are small
compared with the observational errors they may be obscured and a false move may be made. As long as the
change made is small compared with the changes in the basic design, no great harm will result. In any case, since
any decision taken is reviewed and corrected continuously, the greater any adverse effect may be then the more
rapidly will it be detected and eliminated. 4. The use of such a precise pattern of experimentation eliminates the
need for statistical analysis of the data. The arithmetic involved is trivial and at no stage is it necessary to calculate
the direction of steepest ascent. Although this procedure is ideal for control by means of a digital computer, plant
supervisors optimizing a process with Simplex EVOP are under no disadvantage without a digital computer, an ap-
522

PROCEEDINGS
propriate worksheet can be made. 5. The direction of advance depends only on the ranking of the responses and
not on their scalar values. Thus Simplex EVOP may be used when a response can be arranged in order of preference
for a combination of responses, and the least preferable combination dropped every time.
Disadvantages of Simplex EVOP
The disadvantages of Simplex EVOP are: 1. All factors must be quantitative, 2. In order to minimize wrongful elimination of points due to imprecise measurement of response, either the measurement techniques must be precise,
or the Simplex points chosen must be far enough apart to outweigh the imprecision of measurement.
2. FUTURE TECHNIQUES DEVELOPMENT AND RECOVERIES OF METAL BEARING ORES

Future sustainable development requires measures to reduce the dependence on nonrenewable raw materials and
the demand for primary resources. New resources for metals must be developed with the aid of novel technologies,
in addition, improvement of already existing mining techniques can result in metal recovery from sources that have
not been of economic interest until today. Metal-winning processes based on the activity of microorganisms offer a
possibility to obtain metals from mineral resources not accessible by conventional mining. Microbes such as bacteria and fungi convert metal compounds into their water-soluble forms and are biocatalysts of these leaching processes. Generally speaking, bioleaching is a process described as being the dissolution of metals from their mineral
sources by certain naturally occurring microorganisms or the use of microorganisms to transform elements so
that the elements can be extracted from a material when water is filtered through it. Worldwide reserves of highgrade ores are diminishing at an alarming rate due to the rapid increase in the demand for metals. Another major
problem is environmental costs due to the high level of pollution from these techniques. Environmental standards
continue to stiffen, particularly regarding toxic wastes, so costs for ensuring environmental protection will continue to rise.
Biotechnology is regarded as one of the most promising and certainly the most solution to these problems, compared to pyro metallurgy or chemical metallurgy. It holds the promise of dramatically reducing the capital costs. It
also offers the opportunity to reduce environmental pollution. Biological processes are carried out under mild conditions, usually without addition of toxic chemicals. The products of biological processes end up in aqueous solution which is more amenable to containment and treatment then gaseous waste. Bacterial leaching is a revolutionary technique used to extract various metals from their ores. Traditional methods of extraction such as roasting
and smelting are very energy intensive and require high concentration of elements in ores. Bacterial leaching is
possible with low concentrations and requires little energy inputs. The process is environment friendly even while
giving extraction yields of over 85-90%.
For the metallurgical calculation nickel in the oxide-silicate minerals may be shown by means of the general formula:
NiSiO3. m MgSiO3 . n H2O
(Si2O5)2-
(SiO4)2- (SiO3)2-
NiO.2SiO2 2NiO.SiO2 NiO.SiO2
Olivine Piroxen
The amorphous crystal structure is transformed to the stable crystal structure. The iron in the Ni- bearing minerals
and ores is appeared as Fe2O3.nH2O and as a nontronite (Fe/Al)2(Si4O10)(OH2).nH2O. The oxide-laterite ores are with
low Ni-content. The generally, nickel and iron are as Ni-Fe- limonite (Fe, Ni)O(OH).nH2O, garnierite or in the talc
form (Mg, Ni, Fe)3Si4O10(OH)2.nH2O.
Laterite ore is one of the mineral resources containing several kinds of metal elements, such as nickel, cobalt, iron,
silicon, aluminum and chromium. It is widely distributed in the equatorial region, such as Indonesia, and is mainly
used as a nickel resource. However, the utilization is limited to only the laterite containing Ni more than two
percent. While the Ni-less laterite ore has never been used effectively, in spite of its huge deposit, it sometimes has
high content of iron of about 50 mass%.
As Indonesia has no deposit of high-grade iron ore, the high-grade Fe laterite is quite attractive as a domestic iron
resource. When the highgrade Fe laterite is used for iron and steel industries, the complicated chemical structure
brings about some difculties. The high amounts of nickel, cobalt and chromium contents result in the low quality
of the iron product and the high content of aluminum oxide, so that the reduction and smelting process need large
supply of energy. Therefore, an additional process is necessary to reduce the above components.
523

PROCEEDINGS
Experimental part
Its fact that the hydrometallurgy processes are more applicable to the limonitic laterites or garnierite's. Although
the saprolit laterites are often richer in nickel than the limonitic ores, the high Mg content results in higher acid
consumption. The theory confirmed that primary hydrometallurgy processes are the Caron process, HPAL (highpressure acid leaching) or atmospheric-pressure acid leaching process.
In the investigated HPAL, limonitic mixture ores are leached at high pressure (33-35 bars) and temperature (240270oC) in autoclave, with slurry densities of about 20%, and acid consumption or acid to ore ratio of 200-500 kg/t
ores. The (temperature 250-270 oC interaction effect of one factor on the response of another, generally A (temperature 250 oC) by B (or acid to ore ratio of 200-500 kg/t ores) effect is the change in the effect of A as B goes from
to + values (plan of experiments 23. The bio-hydrometallurgy, especially bioleaching, bacterial leaching or microbial
technology is a promising novel technology for recovering the nickel from nickel bearing laterites (valuable minerals traditionally difficult-to-process ores) using chemolithotrophic microorganisms.
Table 1. Investigation by HPAL process
Table 2. Investigation by bioleachiing process
SAMPLE
RNi%
SAMPLE
Adding %
Days
RNi%
250
O.24
78,50
1.50
30
83.50
250
0.40
91,10
1.50
45
92.90
270
0.24
82,35
1.70
30
90.35
270
0.40
94,55
1.65
45
93.55
260
0.32
91.50
1.65
30
91.09
260
0.40
92.75
1.70
45
92.75
255
0.32
82.10
1.60
30
93.30
255
0.40
92.00
1.60
40
94.55
265
0.24
90.50
1.60
50
91.10
10
265
0.28
90.80
10
1.60
60
92.70
11
265
0.32
91.70
11
1.65
40
93.00
12
265
0.36
91.90
12
1.65
50
93.50
13
270
0.35
92.30
13
1.70
30
92.50
14
270
0.40
93.30
14
1.70
40
92.75
15
270
0.45
94.75
15
1.70
50
93.35
16
270
0.50
95.10
16
1.70
60
94.70
Table 3. Investigation by HPAL process
Table 4. Investigation by bioleachiing process
SAMPLE
RNi%
SAMPLE
Adding %
Days
RNi%
250
O.24
70,00
1.50
30
85.50
250
0.40
90,00
1.50
45
92.90
270
0.24
80,50
1.70
30
92.50
270
0.40
93,50
1.65
45
93.50
260
0.32
90.50
1.65
30
91.50
260
0.40
92.50
1.70
45
92.50
255
0.32
80.10
1.60
30
94.00
255
0.40
92.00
1.60
40
94.50
265
0.24
90.00
1.60
50
91.00
10
265
0.28
90.50
10
1.60
60
93.00
11
265
0.32
92.50
11
1.65
40
93.00
12
265
0.36
92.00
12
1.65
50
93.50
13
270
0.35
92.50
13
1.70
30
92.50
14
270
0.40
93.00
14
1.70
40
93.50
15
270
0.45
95.75
15
1.70
50
94.50
16
270
0.50
96.50
16
1.70
60
96.00
524

PROCEEDINGS
There have been many attempts to develop processes known as alternative processes which have included: Nitric
Acid Leaching, Chlorine Leaching, Acid Pugging and Sulfation Roasting, especially Segregation Process with combination of Flotation, Magnetic Separation or Leaching etc.
The experimenting between leaching and bacterial leaching have showed the following results: leaching with HPAL
process and recoveries from RNi% (78-95%) and bacterial leaching with chemolithotrophic microorganisms recoveries from RNi% (70-96,5%).
The experimenting between leaching and bacterial leaching for Indonesian ores have showed the following results:
leaching with HPAL process and recoveries from RNi% (70-96,5%) and bacterial leaching with chemolithotrophic
microorganisms recoveries from RNi% (85-96%).
The ores as Ni-Fe limonite (Fe, Ni)O(OH).nH2O contain 1.0-1.2% Ni and recoveries by HPAL or bioleaching are from
78%-95%%.
The ores of garnierite or in the talc form (Mg, Ni, Fe)3Si4O10(OH)2.nH2O contain 1,5-2,0% Ni and recoveries by HPAL
or bioleaching are from 70%-96.5%%.
Figure 1. Graphic display leaching
Figure 2. Graphic display
Figure 3. Graphic display
525

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4. Graphic display bacterial leaching
Figure 5. Graphic display bacterial leaching
LITERATURE
Journals:
[1]
A.D. Dalvi, W.G. Bacon and R.C.Osborne, The past and future of nickel laterites, PDAC 2004 International Convention, March 7-10,
2004, pp 1-27
[2]
D. Gerorgiou and V.G. Papangelakis, Sulphuric acid pressure leaching of a limonitic laterite: chemistry and kinetics, Hidrometallurgy, 49, 1998, pp 23-46
[3]
D. Gerorgiou and V.G. Papangelakis, Sulphuric acid pressure leaching of laterites speciation and prediction of metal solubilities at
temperature, Hidrometallurgy, 58, 2000, pp 13-26
[4]
S. Stopic, B. Friedrich and R. Fuchs, Kineteics of sulphuric acid leaching of the Serbian nickel lateritic ore under atmospheric pressure, 2001, MJoM, Erzmetall, pp 235-244
[5]
S. Stopic, B. Friedrich, N. Anastasijevic and A. Onjia, Experimental design approach regarding kinetics of high pressure atmospheric
leaching, 2002,MJoM, Erzmetall, pp 273-282
Patents:
[6]
J.C. Arroyo and D.A. Neudorf, Atmospheric leach process for the recovery of nickel and cobalt from limonite and saprolite ores, US
Patent 6, 680, 035, Jan 20, 2004
[7]
W.P.C. Duyvesteyn, D.A. Neudorf and E.M. Weeniink, Resin-in-pulp method for recovery of nickel and cobalt, US Patent 6, 350, 420,
Feb 26, 2002
526

PROCEEDINGS
THE OPTIMIZATION AND MATHEMATICAL MODELLING

- THE PRECONDITION FOR INCREASING OF RECOVERIES
FROM DOMESTIC MINES
ABSTRACT
2
Boris KRSTEV
Aleksandar KRSTEV1
Mirjana GOLOMEOVA2
Afrodita ZENDELSKA2
Zivko GOCEV3
Goce Delcev University, Faculty of Computer Sciences, 2000 Stip,

The Republic of Macedonia, aleksandar.krstev@ugd.edu.mk
2
Goce Delcev University, Faculty of Natural &Technical Sciences,
2000 Stip, The Republic of Macedonia, boris.krstev@ugd.edu.mk
3
Bucim Mine, 2000 Radovis, The Republic of Macedonia,
gocevz@yahoo.com
2
Goce Delcev University, Faculty of Natural &Technical Sciences,
2000 Stip, The Republic of Macedonia, mirjana.golomeova@ugd.edu.mk
The increasing in the chalcopyrite copper Bucim mine

are gone forward to renewed reagent regime, including
and involving new reagents for increase d recovery of
copper and gold. The optimization and mathematical
linear are good example for improvement of industrial
recoveries in flotation circuit. Nevertheless, the choice
between flotation and new leaching or bioleaching
method are challenge for future.
The optimization techniques, formatting the mathematical model and adequate model for carried out investigations, by means of tables and figures will show the
optimal quantity in reagent regime (collectors), particle
size, flotation time, rougher flotation, conditioning time
etc.
Keywords
Collectors, Flotation Time,
Optimization, Reagent Regime, Particle Size
1. GENERAL PRINCIPLES
The previous carried out laboratory investigations with application of the new collectors CYTEC and frothers confirmed that there is possibility for significantly improvement of the gold recovery with same copper quality and
decreasing of the CaO consumption. The investigations with reagents Aerophine 3404, Aero XD 5002 and frother
-F49 in the previous period (2010) were very short because of the low quality and variations of the ores. Variations of the ore from 0.15-0.22%Cu, instability of the flotation and other problems in the flotation process. The
combination of the Aerophine 3404, KEX:KBX= 1:1, NaIPX, SKIK Bz 2000, in the different points of the flotation
process gave significantly better results that early. The process was prolonged with pH=10.5 and the point of addition of CaO was at the hydro cyclone (70%) and 30% in the flotation process. The conclusions of these investigations were very heavy for sure confirmation, bur the obtained results were close to the previous results by standard
conditions (specially for Au), may be better but not significantly. The Au content in the ore was 0,19-0,29 gr/t, in
the concentrate 8-12,3 gr/t, with Au recovery from 45-55% (some appearances up to 60%), but the copper recovery
in the standard interval. Considering these investigations in laboratory and industrial real conditions may be concluded that:
The instability and relative short period of investigations in the real conditions have contributed for obtaining the technological parameters closed to the standard conditions,
As a result of the good regrinding, it was very heavy to clean the rough concentrate Cu/Au,
Using higher pH, higher than standard in the rougher flotation (elimination of pyrite flotation) by Aerophine
3404, it will be expected higher quality and content of Cu/Au,
In the existing real conditions of flotation at 11,0-11,6 and consumption of Aerophine 3404 (3404)
from 18-22 gr/t, together with change of adaptive changeable reagent regime by different collectors (the
combination from Aerophine 3404, KEX:KBX, NaIPX),
527

PROCEEDINGS
The prolonged changes of the reagent regime with contemporary addition of new reagents (Bz 2000 = 4-8
gr/t + KEX:KBX=1:1 = 8-4 gr/t, total 12 gr/t) in the grinding cycle, together with addition of NaIPX in the
condiotioner with 8-10 gr/t, in the flotation process (rougher and controlled flotation) with 2-4 gr/t, or total
addition of 14 gr/t NaIPX,
The tests R1-R6 are related to the ore grindibility in the presence of the BZ2000 (7 gr/t), conditioning time (6 min.)
with BZ2000 (5 gr/t) + DowF (10 gr/t) after 4 min., rougher flotation (4 min.), and scavenging flotation (4+4 minutes)
(NaIPX 6+4 gr/t + DowF 5+5 gr/t). The tests R7-R10 are related for the ore grinding in the presence of the
KEX:KBX= 8 gr/t, conditioning time of (6 min.) with BZ2000 (4 gr/t) + DowF (10 gr/t) after 4 minutes, rougher flotation (4 min.), and scavenging flotation (4+4 minutes) (NaIPX 8+4 gr/t + DowF 5+5 gr/t). The tests R11-R18 are related
for the grinding ore in the presence of KEX:KBX= 6 gr/t, conditioning time of (6 min.) with KEX:KBX= (4 gr/t) + DowF
(10 gr/t) after 4 minutes, rougher flotation (4 min.), and scavenging flotation (4+4 minutes) (NaIPX 8+4 gr/t + DowF
5+5 gr/t). and variants with condition 6 minutes with BZ2000 (4 gr/t) + dispergator (50 gr/t), or variant with BZ2000
in all existing phases: conditioning, rougher and control flotation. The tests R19-R26 are related for grinding ore in
the presence of BZ2000 = 7 gr/t, conditioning time (6 minutes) with BZ2000 (5 gr/t) + DowF (10 gr/t) after 4 minutes,
rougher flotation (4 minutes), and control flotation (4+4 minutes) (NaIPX 6+6 gr/t + DowF 5+5 gr/t), with variants
with conditioning (6 minutes) with BZ2000 (4 gr/t) + dispergator (100 and 150 gr/t), or variant with BZ2000 in all
existing phases: conditioning, rougher and control flotation.
Table 1. Investigated conditions for flotation for copper - plan experiments (DOE)
Test
Collectors, type
Collector,
gr/t
-200#, %
Time, min.
R-1
BZ 2000+BZ2000+NaIPX
22
11.75
42.90
15
R-2
22
11.75
44.90
15
R-3
22
11.75
48.10
18
R-4
22
11.75
49.10
18
R-5
22
11.75
54.30
21
R-6
22
11.75
55.60
21
R-7
KEX:KBX + BZ2025+NaIPX
24
11.80
50.00
R-8
24
11.80
50.00
R-9
24
11.80
50.00
R-10
24
11.80
50.00
R-11
KEX:KBX +KEX:KBX+NaIPX
22
11.80
R-12
22
11.80
R-13
22
11.80
R-14
22
11.80
R-15
22
11.80
R-16
22
11.80
R-17
BZ 2000+BZ2000+BZ2000
22
11.80
R-18
BZ 2000+BZ2000+BZ2000
22
11.80
R-19
24
11.75
R-20
24
11.75
R-21
BZ 2000+BZ2000+NaIPX+d
24
11.75
R-22
24
11.75
R-23
20
11.75
R-24
20
11.75
R-25
20
11.75
R-26
20
11.75
d dispergator
100gr/t
d dispergator
150gr/t
528

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2. Tests with a plan experiments on copper
Tests
Content, Cu%
r
Recovery, Cu%
k
R-1
0.190
2.40
0.038
81.29
18.71
R-2
0.175
3.42
0.043
76.42
23.58
R-3
0.186
2.16
0.034
83.34
16.66
R-4
0.194
2.22
0.027
87.12
12.88
R-5
0.211
3.38
0.022
90.14
9.86
R-6
0.237
3.82
0.024
90.45
9.55
11.75
R-7
0.249
4.00
0.031
88.25
R-8
0.251
6.40
0.031
88.06
11.94
R-9
0.250
4.60
0.031
88.21
11.79
R-10
0.247
4.82
0.029
88.79
11.21
R-11
0.282
8.60
0.077
73.31
26.69
R-12
0.308
8.40
0.075
76.34
23.66
R-13
0.292
8.00
0.070
76.70
23.30
R-14
0.290
8.40
0.069
76.82
23.18
R-15
0.297
7.60
0.075
75.49
24.51
R-16
0.301
8.40
0.072
76.74
23.26
R-17
0.301
5.40
0.083
73.56
26.44
R-18
0.297
8.20
0.082
73.13
26.87
R-19
0.180
3.40
0.025
86.77
13.23
R-20
0.178
3.46
0.023
87.67
12.33
R-21
0.187
4.88
0.023
88.14
11.86
R-22
0.187
4.22
0.025
87.14
12.86
R-23
0.184
2.10
0.031
84.41
15.59
R-24
0.196
3.30
0.030
85.44
14.56
R-25
0.194
3.52
0.032
84.27
15.73
R-26
0.203
3.64
0.033
84.54
15.46
Table 3. Investigated conditions for flotation for gold - plan
Tests
Collectors, typ
-1
BZ 2000+Naskol+NaIPX
22
11.75
-2
BZ 2000+Naskol+NaIPX
22
11.75
-3
KEX:KBX +NaIPX
18
11.75
-4
KEX:KBX + NaIPX
18
11.75
-5
KEX:KBX +NaIPX
22
11.80
-6
KEX:KBX + NaIPX
22
11.80
-7
KEX:KBX+BZ 2000 +NaIPX
22
11.80
-8
KEX:KBX+BZ 2000 + NaIPX
22
11.80
-9
Naskol+NaIPX
22
10.60
-10
Naskol+NaIPX
22
10.60
-11
KEX:KBX + Naskol
22
11.80
-12
KEX:KBX + Naskol
22
11.80
-13
KEX:KBX + NaIPX
16
11.80
-14
KEX:KBX + NaIPX
16
11.80
-15
KAX + NaIPX
22
11.80
-16
KAX + + Naskol + NaIPX
22
11.80
Coll.,gr/t
529

PROCEEDINGS
The group of tests (R1R-6), (R7R-10), (R11R-18) and (R19R-26) are carried out in the laboratory conditions showing the satisfactory results with increasing of the grinding time, but other results are at the level of the industrial
obtained result (application of the different collectors and combination of the different types of collectors at the
standard pH value). The tests 1-16 are carried out in the different conditions and different reagent regime and
collectors, conditioning, rougher and control flotation with the reagent regime shown at the tables.
Table 4. Tests with a plan experiments on gold
Tests
Content, (k ,r, j), Au(gr/t)
-1
5.700
Recovery (K,J), Au(gr/t)

0.281
0.170
59.37
40.63
-2
4.200
0.279
0.170
40.67
59.33
-3
4.800
0.278
0.160
43.98
56.02
-4
5.200
0.264
0.150
44.38
55.62
-5
5.500
0.320
0.110
66.99
33.01
-6
5.800
0.390
0.120
70.68
29.32
-7
4.300
0.308
0.100
69.13
30.87
-8
4.200
0.261
0.090
66.89
33.11
-9
4.000
0.303
0.100
68.69
31.31
-10
4.000
0.339
0.120
66.62
33.38
-11
3.600
0.269
0.110
60.94
39.06
-12
4.200
0.272
0.110
61.09
38.91
-13
4.900
0.335
0.120
65.80
34.20
-14
5.100
0.391
0.130
68.49
31.51
-15
3.400
0.165
0.025
85.48
14.52
-16
3.700
0.242
0.050
80.39
19.61
Table 5. Investigated conditions for flotation - plan experiments (DOE) 2011/12
Tests
Collectors, type
Collector,
gr/t
T1
BZ+KEX+KBX+NaIPX
22
T-2
BZ+KEX+KBX+NaIPX
22
O-1
Aerophine (3404+5002) (1:1) 50%
16
11.0
O-2
Aerophine (3404+5002) (1:1) 50%
16
10.0
O-3
Aerophine (3404+5002) (1:1) 50%
18
11.0
O-4
Aerophine (3404+5002) (1:1) 50%
18
10.0
O-5
Aerophine (3404+5002) (1:1) 50%
20
11.0
O-6
Aerophine (3404+5002) (1:1) 50%
20
10.0
O-7
Aerophine (3404+5002) (1:1) 50%
22
11.0
O-8
Aerophine (3404+5002) (1:1) 50%
22
10.0
O-9
Aerophine (3404+5002) (1:1) 50%
16
10.5
O-10
Aerophine (3404+5002) (1:1) 50%
22
10.5
Froth type
Froth,
gr/t
11.8
DowF
20
11.8
OP 549
20
DowF
20
Table 6. Standard conditions for flotation in Bucim mine
Tests
Collectors, type
Collector,
gr/t
Froth type
Froth,
gr/t
T1
BZ+KEX+KBX+NaIPX
22
11.8
DowF
20
T-2
BZ+KEX+KBX+NaIPX
22
11.8
OP 549
20
530

PROCEEDINGS
Table 7. Investigated conditions for flotation - plan experiments (DOE) 2011/12
Tests
Collectors, type
Collectors,
gr/t
Froth type
Froth,
gr/t
T1
BZ+KEX+KBX+NaIPX
22
11.8
DowF
20
T-2
BZ+KEX+KBX+NaIPX
O-1
Aerophine 3404 (70%)
22
11.8
OP 549
20
16
10.5
O-2
16
9.5
O-3
18
10.5
O-4
18
9.5
O-5
20
10.5
O-6
20
9.5
DowF
20
O-7
22
10.5
O-8
22
9.5
O-9
20
11.5
O-10
22
11.5
Table 8. Tests with a plan experiments on copper 2011/12
Tests
Content, Cu%
r
Recovery, Cu%
k
T1
0.29
2.3
0.053
83.4
16.6
T-2
0.31
2.8
0.050
85.6
14.4
O-1
0.21
20.54
0.025
88.20
11.80
O-2
0.20
20.68
0.025
87.60
12.40
O-3
0.19
20.85
0.024
87.46
12.54
O-4
0.20
20.98
0.022
89.09
10.91
O-5
0.22
20.77
0.019
91.45
8.55
O-6
0.21
20.90
0.020
90.56
9.44
O-7
0.20
21.21
0.020
90.08
9.92
O-8
0.22
21.44
0.017
92.34
7.66
O-9
0.23
21.10
0.017
92.68
7.32
O-10
0.22
20.46
0.017
92.39
7.61
Table 9. Tests with a plan experiments on gold 2011/12
Tests
Content, (k ,r), Au (ppm)
T1
1.40
Recovery (K,J), Au (%)

0.26
56.1
43.9
T-2
1.49
0.29
49.8
50.2
O-1
2.20
0.22
38.83
61.17
O-2
2.45
0.24
44.20
55.80
O-3
1.95
0.23
46.60
53.40
O-4
2.50
0.19
33.46
66.54
O-5
2.80
0.18
40.07
59.93
O-6
2.25
0.20
34.60
65.40
O-7
1.90
0.23
51.05
48.95
O-8
2.45
0.20
42.06
57.94
O-9
1.95
0.19
36.54
63.46
O-10
2.75
0.21
35.11
64.89
531

PROCEEDINGS
Table 10. Tests with a plan experiments on copper 2011/12
Tests
Content, Cu%
Table 11. Tests with a plan experiments on gold 2011/12
Recovery, Cu%
T1
0.29
2.3
0.053
83.4
16.6
T-2
0.31
2.8
0.050
85.6
14.4
O-1
0.22
20.55
0.021
90.55
9.45
O-2
0.22
21.25
0.020
89.72
10.28
O-3
0.23
20.70
0.018
92.25
7.75
O-4
0.22
21.30
0.020
90.99
9.01
O-5
0.20
21.70
0.023
88.59
11.41
O-6
0.23
20.40
0.024
89.66
10.34
O-7
0.22
20.75
0.018
91.90
8.10
O-8
0.22
20.55
0.021
90.54
9.46
O-9
0.21
22.80
0.020
90.55
9.45
O-10
0.21
22.50
0.018
91.73
8.27
Tests
Content, (k ,r), Au (ppm)
Recovery (K,J), Au (%)
T1
1.40
0.26
56.1
43.9
T-2
1.49
0.29
49.8
50.2
O-1
1.56
0.19
39.91
60.09
O-2
1.49
0.25
58.52
41.48
O-3
1.47
0.22
48.58
51.42
O-4
1.49
0.23
52.03
47.97
O-5
1.55
0.24
52.13
47.87
O-6
1.78
0.20
40.33
59.67
O-7
2.55
0.17
30.86
69.14
O-8
2.15
0.19
39.01
60.99
O-9
2.15
0.20
31.77
68.23
O-10
1.95
0.19
33.82
66.18

According to the previous investigations and obtained results from these investigations and tests for the Bucim
mine ores, these particular investigation are carried out by means of experiment plans, laboratory investigations
etc. These investigations show advanced approach for eventual optimization of the flotation process from useful
raw material or chalcopyrite ores with possibility of obtaining the optimal results.
3. CONCLUSION
In this paper is shown practical applicative optimization techniques with formatting the model for adequate reagent regime for carried out investigations. Obtained tabular results will show the optimal quantity in reagent regime (collectors), particle size, flotation time for rougher flotation, conditioning time, some addition of special reagents etc.
REFERENCES
[1]
Mular, A. L., (1980). Empirical modeling and aptinusation of mineral processes, Mineral Science and Engineering, 4, No 3. Pp 30-42.
[2]
Napier-Munn, T. J., Morrell, S., Morrison, R. D., and Kojovic, T., (1996). Mineral comminution circuits: their operation and optimization. JKMRC., pp. 413.
[3]
Plitt, L. R., (December, 1976). A mathematical model of the hydrocyclone classifier, CIM Bull. 69, 114.
[4]
Povarov A. I., (1978). Gridrocikloni na obogatitelnyh fabrikah, Nedra. Moskva, Russia.
[5]
Renner, V. G., and Cohen, H. E., (June, 1978). Measurement and interpretation of size distribution of particles within a hydrocyclone,
Trans. IMM., Sec. C, 87,139.
[6]
Rowland C. A., (1986). Ball Mill Scale-up-Diameter Factors., Advances in Mineral Processing, P. Somasundaran Editor Society of Mining Engineers/AIME, 34, 605.
[7]
Svarovsky, L., (1984). Hydrocyclones, Holt, Rinehart & Winston Ltd, Eastbourne.
[8]
Wiegel R. L., and Li K. A., (1986). Random Model for Mineral Liberation by Size Reduction, Trans. AIME, 238, 179.
[9]
Wills, B. A. (1988). Mineral Processing Technology, 4 edition
th
[10] A.Krstev,(2012), PhD Thesis, 2012 UGD-Stip, Macedonia
532

PROCEEDINGS
TREATMENT OF Fe(III) IONS FROM LEACHING SOLUTIONS

WITH NEUTRALISATION AND PRECIPITATION
ABSTRACT
1
Milena DANOVSKA
Mirjana GOLOMEOVA2
Dejan KARANFILOV1
Afrodita ZENDELSKA2
Bucim Mine, Radovis, Macedonia,

mimeluka@gmail.com
2
University Goce Delcev,
Faculty of Natural and Technical Sciences, Stip, Macedonia
The results of the study of leaching solutions (in the further text: productive
solutions) from BUCIM mine treated with various neutralizing agents and
combinations of two or a number of neutralizing agents are presented in this
work.
Leaching of copper with sulfuric acid is forwarded with the leaching of many
other elements which are present in the ores. Among the elements is Fe (III)
which abuses the Cu2+
Ions in further processing in production of cathode copper. The main objective of the researches is the elimination of Fe(III) ions from the solutions by
precipitation in Fe(OH)3.
So, this creates the positive effects in the cathode copper production.
With suitably chosen neutralizer, following effects are achieved:
- Raising the pH value to 4.0-4.5; and improving condition on the solutions for further processing;
- Removal of Fe (III) ions from the solutions to a concentrations of less
than 0.1 g/L;
- Economic effects.
In doing so, found the optimum pH, which allows maximum precipitation of
the iron3+ ions, and simultaneously the persistence of Cu2+, in productive
solutions.
Keywords
Copper Leaching, Neutralization,
Cathode Copper, Fe(OH)3
1. INTRODUCTION
The composition of the leaching solutions from BUCIM mine is a variable quantity in terms of several parameters,
such as: the composition of the ore, concentration of sulfuric acid, temperature, pH value, etc. The invention relates to a method for the removal of iron (III) as Fe(OH)3 sludge, from a copper(II)sulfate solution, in atmospheric
conditions, during the electrolytic preparation of copper. Several copper ore types are included in the leaching
processes with sulfuric acid, as the starting material in the electrolytic preparation of copper, such as: CuO, Cu2O,
CuS, CuFeS2-where copper is also bound to iron in sulphidic form concentrations. The presence of FeS2 is also inevitable. The amount of it is usually so considerable that recovering the Cu from it is unavoidable. CuO is easily soluble
even at pH=2-2.5 values, whereas Fe has to be leached at a higher acid content to encourages the leaching of the
sulfide copper ores, as further process. This separate stage both copper and Fe are dissolved. Therefore the iron has
to be precipitated from the solution obtained before the solution can be included in copper(II)sulfate concentration
and purification and in the end for electrolysis. In industrial processes copper(II) sulfide leaching, an acid leach, is
generally carried out at a pH 1.5-2 and iron leaching at an acid content between 30-100 g H2SO4/L. The solution
formed, which contains the dissolved copper and iron, is very acidic, and can be neutralized before the iron is precipitated from it. Copper leaching can also be combined with the iron precipitation stage.
Nowadays, the leaching of copper ore is also combined with leaching of slug in even greater amounts. Depending
on the process conditions, and the concentration of pyrite, and a chalcopyrite, as a side mineral, the amount of
trivalent ferric iron in leaching solutions varies from 0.1 to 0.35 g/L, and the concentration of copper (II) ions from
533

PROCEEDINGS
0.3 to 1 g/L. Also, there are many other metal ions present in the solutions (traces) such as: Se, Te, Si, Ni, Zn, Co, Ag,
Bi, Mn, Cr, Sb, Cd, As, P, Pb, Sn, etc.
2. METHODS
Acid neutralization on an industrial scale is usually accomplished by the treatment of acidic solutions by the manual or automatically controlled addition of a basic (alkaline) compound. Depending upon the characteristics of the
individual base, bases are added as solids, solutions, slurries, or in the case of anhydrous ammonia, as a liquid or a
vapor. Table 1 provides a comparison between equivalent weights of various bases:
Table 1. Pounds of chemical equivalent to one pound of the following acids
Chemical
Chemical formula
CH3COOH
CrO3
C6H8O7*H2O
HCl
HNO3
H3PO4
H2SO4
NH3
0.28
0.34
0.24
0.47
0.27
0.52
0.35
Aqua ammonia 29.4%
NH4OH
0.95
1.16
0.82
1.60
0.92
1.77
1.19
Calcium carbonate
CaCO3
0.84
1.00
0.72
1.38
0.80
1.53
1.02
Caustic soda
NaOH
0.67
0.80
0.57
1.10
0.64
1.22
0.82
Slaked (Hydrated) Lime
Ca(OH)2
0.62
0.74
0.53
1.02
0.59
1.13
0.76
Soda Ash
Na2CO3
0.88
1.06
0.76
1.45
0.84
1.62
1.08
Anhydrous
ammonia
Three iron precipitation processes are in use and in them the iron is precipitated as Fe(OH)3. As the most compatible reagent for iron precipitation is ammonia. It is proved in laboratory conditions using precise volume of productive solution, 3% ammonia solution, pH meter- instrument, AAS for quantitative analysis of metal ions present
before and after the neutralizing process. The equation of the reaction between Fe and ammonia is:
Fe3+(aq) + 3NH3(aq) + 3H2O(l) <==> Fe(OH)3(s) + 3NH4+(aq)
(1)
The reaction of anhydrous ammonia neutralisation of sulfuric acid is shown below:

2NH3+H2SO4(NH4)2SO4
(2)
Ammonia, by now, is used to increase pH in segments of the following industries

Pharmaceutical
Ore flotation
Food
And in this work it is proposed as most suitable reagent for the treatment of leaching solutions and to precipitate Fe(III) in Fe(OH)3.
Equipment for acid neutralization with ammonia
Equipment requirements for acid neutralization for industrial uses with ammonia can vary from a very simple manual system to a more complex, fully automatic electronic system. If neutralization is done on a batch basis, a manual system with a portable pH meter should be adequate if proper records are kept. The design of a neutralization
system should be approved by all concerned regulatory agencies.
The following type of control systems can be used for acid neutralization:
Pneumatic System-control valve actuated by air pressure; control range plus or minus one pH unit;
On-Off System-control valve actuated by electricity;
Time Proportioning System-control valve actuated by electric timer;
Position Proportioning System-position of control valve seat actuated by electricity.
534

PROCEEDINGS
System advantages of using ammonia for neutralization and precipitation
Ammonia systems are simple. Since ammonia is stored under pressure, no transfer equipment is necessary
and no external agitation is required in the neutralization pit
Ammonia systems are reliable. With its own built in pressure system, no outside power source is required
to operate transfer pumps, etc. high reliability is the result of system simplicity and minimum manpower requirement for the system operation.
Ammonia systems are inexpensive; minimum equipment requirement, minimum handling and labor requirement, minimum maintenance due to reduced corrosion of piping, controls etc.
Minimum space requirement for total system.
Ammonia systems are flexible. Equipment layouts can be simple and inexpencive for manual operation, or
completely automatic electronic systems can be installed.
Figure 9. Ammonia neutralization system
535

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 10. Neutralization system using bulk ammonia
Figure 1 shows a basics system layout for an acid neutralization system using anhydrous ammonia cylinders. Figure
2 shows a basic acid neutralization system using bulk anhydrous ammonia. Each system should be designed to fit
the requirements of a specific situation. The Sparger design is dependent upon the size and shape of the neutralization pit. It is generally desirable to locate the pH electrode near the neutralization pit outlet.
Other alternative neutralizers
Under controlled conditions, productive solutions can be neutralized using CaCO3, as opposed of lime. Limestone
can remove acidity and precipitate iron. Limestone dissociates and CO2 gas evolves, as shown below:
CaCO3(s) + H2SO4(aq) CaSO4(s) + H2O + CO2(g) (3)
CaCO3(s) + Fe2(SO4)3(aq) + 3H2O 3CaSO4(s) + 2Fe(OH)3(s) + 3CO2(g)
(4)
Released CO2 gas forms carbonate ion which acts as a buffer and sets an upper limit on pH (max pH=6.5) and also
affects the rate and amount of lime consumption. The precipitates may settle very slowly because of their small
particle site. Removal of a board range of metals can be achieved at higher pH levels than 6.5. Therefore, pH must
be continuously monitored and kept in ranges optimized for precipitate only Fe3+ ions.
Figure 11. Range of pH suitable for metal hydroxide precipitation
536

PROCEEDINGS
Sodium hydroxide (NaOH); this is expensive reagent and the resulting sludge does not settle well, requiring filtering
in most cases. But it has high reactivity and results in less voluminous sludge.
10
NaOH
Ca(OH)2
MgO
pH
7
6
5
CaCO3
4
3
2
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
Alkaline chemicals added, g/L
Figure 12. Titration curves for synthetic AMD with various alkaline reagent

For the experiments 100 ml volume of productive solution is used and measured on pH meter and its pH1 =2.43.
Copper (II) and total ferrous and ferry ions are analysed on AAS before and after treatment with NH4OH, 3% solution. Neutralization process with ammonia is limited to optimum pH range of 4.5. As a result, a yellow sludge of
Fe(OH)3 is present in the solution. Then the solution is filtrated and the sludge is drought and its mass is measured.
By the end another amount of productive solution is treated with ammonia, and then with 180g/L H2SO4. The obtained sludge of Fe(OH)3 re-dissolves. Therefore here we have so called homogeneous precipitation where the precipitate ions on determined pH, return back to solution with decreasing of pH with sulfuric acid. The results from
experiments are given in table 2:
Table 2. Dependence of concentration of Cu and Fe with neutralization with 3% NH4OH and increasing of pH
pH1
1(Fe)/[mg/L]
1(Cu2+)/[mg/L]
V(NH4OH)/mL
pH2
2(Fe)/[mg/L]
2(Cu2+)/[mg/L]
2.53
295
532
3.10
290
532
3.10
290
532
3.45
290
532
3.45
290
532
4.01
153
532
4.01
113
532
1.5
4.43
521
4.43
521
0.1
4.52
520
pH1- pH value before treatment with neutralizer

pH2- pH value after treatment with neutralizer
The ammonia solution is added slowly in small amounts. During that time the solution is mixed with glass rod and in
the solution the electrode from pH meter is immersed. This reaction of neutralization is fast and lasts a several
minutes. Also, creating sediment is quickly and easy.
From the results, on pH value 4.52 concentration of Fe reduces from 290 to 1 mg/L, and on the other hand the
mass concentration of Cu2+ is practically not changed. Opposite process, decreasing of pH, by lowering the pH to
values less than 3 pH units, with sulfuric acid, gives the ions of Fe back in the solution.
Table 3. Efficiency of Fe removal from leaching solutions
pH value
The efficiency of Fetotal removal/%
4.01
47.24
4.43
97.24
4.52
99.65
537

PROCEEDINGS
The sludge is filtrated and dried in a dryer on 105C for a half an hour. Then the mass of the sludge is measured on
analytical Libra together with filter paper. Before that the filter paper is measured empty. The mass of the pure
sludge is 1.365g.
If 100 mL productive solution are receiving 1.365g sludge, from 11000m3 solutions 150t sludge. Therefore the
sludge must be simultaneously treated. The application requires large tanks and separators. However, the main
achievement is that the production of cathode copper will increase for 20-25%, so that the investment is worthwhile.
4. CONCLUSION
With the application of this experimental laboratory experiments in industrial processes of leaching solutions in
BUCIM mine can be very useless with the application of simple neutralizing systems given above. The following
benefits can be obtained:
Removing iron from the leaching solutions
Increasing of pH (more suitable for adsorption of copper in the first phase of concentration of copper ions)
Increasing concentration of copper in regenerate (product of the first phase of processing electrolysis of
copper) that much as it is the concentration of Fe in primary solutions, because in the first step ion changer
adsorbs trivalent ferry ion with the same selectivity as adsorption of copper 2+ ions.
Increase the percentage of utilization of copper ions, and achieving better economic effects in all production of cathode copper
Removing of sludge of Fe(OH)3 can be performed in two ways:
With well known vacuum filter or centrifuge, because of very high fluidity of sludge, or
With their re-dissolving in solution and return back on irrigation fields, where they can support the leaching
of the sulfide copper ores.
REFERENCES
[1]
Hiroshi HAYASHI (2009), Overview of Technologies for treatment of mine wastewater, Technical training course Mine wastewater
treatment, part 1, 14-18 december 2009, Sofija, Bulgaria
[2]
Bratty, M. Lawrence, D. Kratochvil, and B. Marchant, 2006. Applications of biological H2S production from elemental sulfur in the
th
treatment of heavu metal pollution including acid rock drainage. 7 ICARD Leadership: Gateway to the future, St Louis, Missouri,
USA, March 27-30, 2006
[3]
Gusek, J.J., T.R. Wildeman, K.W. Conroy, 2006. Conceptual Methods For Recovering Metal Resources From Passive Treatment Susth
tems. 7 ICARD Leadership: Gateway to the future, St Louis, Missouri, USA, March 27-30, 2006
[4]
Kuyucak, N.,Chavez, J. R. del Castillo, and J. Ruiz, 2004. Potential use of treated Acid Mine Drainage at Kingsmill Tunnel, Peru
th
Technical and economic feasibility studies. 5 Intl Symposium on Waste Processing and Recycling in Mineral and Metallurgical Industries, (CIM Conference), August 2004, Hamilton ON Canada
[5]
AT Stone and JJ Morgan, Reductive dissolution of metal oxides, In: W Stumm, ed. Aquatic Surface Chemistry, New York: Wiley, 1987,
pp 221-254.
538

PROCEEDINGS
CONCEPT OF SECONDARY AND TERTIARY CRUSHING PLANT

FOR PROCESSING LIMESTONE AND PRODUCTION OF ROCK AGREGATES
FROM SUVO DO JOINT-STOCK COMPANY - JELEN DO DEPOSITS
ABSTRACT
Dragan S. RADULOVI1
Velimir ANTANASKOVI
Slavica R. MIHAJLOVI
Branislav IVOEVI
Vladimir JOVANOVI

and Other Mineral Raw Materials
86 Franshet d Esperey St., 11000
Belgrade, Serbia
1
d.radulovic@itnms.ac.rs
This paper presents a concept of secondary and tertiary crushing plant for
processing of limestone from Suvo Do deposits. It is based on Main Mining
Project of the new plant for limestone processing and production of limestone rock aggregates from Suvo Do Joint-Stock Company Jelen Do.
The basic problem which occurred while preparing the project of this plant
was separation of tailings which occur in useful limestone component during
excavation. This problem was solved within primary crushing on the grounds
of analyses performed in laboratories of the ITNMS (Institute for Technology
of Nuclear and Other Mineral Raw Materials), and after that in plant itself.
The paper presents equipment installed into secondary and tertiary crushing
plant, as well as the way to obtain final products of rock aggregates according to size classes.
Keywords
Aggregates, Limestone, Secondary and Tertiary Crushing, Tailings
1. INTRODUCTION
Increased needs for stone and stone aggregates used in construction industry, in Republic of Serbia, have brought
to the opening of a larger number of small quarries, which together with big stone mines and Jelen Do as one of
them, have tried to fulfill market demands by the increase in production. After privatization of Jelen Doa.d., carried out by the Croatian Nexe group, new owner wanted to increase the processing capacity and to modernize
the production taking into account commercial reserves and market needs. In order to meet those demands, the
already existing plant has been reconstructed, while completely new equipment has been purchased for the new
production plant for crushing and sizing of limestone at Suvodo deposit. Project planning of the new processing
plant and elaboration of the Main Mining Project with the previous capacity of 250 t/h have been confided to ITNMS. Thus total capacity of the processing plant with the reconstructed part amounts about 500 t/h. Limestone
processing involves primary crushing and removal of waste rock, secondary and tertiary crushing and sizing of the
finished products [1-3].
Processing equipment has been connected by the system of conveyor belts, thus enabling transfer of products
through process phases as well as transfer of finished products to the appropriate dumps. According to working
regime, scheme projected this way enables production of aggregates of the following class sizes: 63+32 mm; 32
+16 mm; 16+ 8 mm; 8+ 4 mm and 4+ 0 mm [1-4]. Related to market placement of finished products, the scheme
includes possibility for coarser classes to be transported back at the primary crushing which increases the share of
class 4+ 0 mm up to 100 % related to entry mass of secondary crushing. Having terrain configuration in view,
technical solution should be provided to overcome the height distinction of 155 m, i.e. loading of raw material at
primary crushing elevated on 480 m above sea level while secondary crushing and sizing at 325 m above see level.
539

PROCEEDINGS
2. DATA ON LIMESTONE DEPOSIT SUVODO - JELEN DO

Deposit location
Limestone deposit Suvodo near Jelen Do, lies in the central part of Serbia by the highway Beograd CaCak Uzice. It is 28 km far from Cacak and 12 from Pozega. In administrative view it belongs to Pozega Municipality. Morphologically, terrain is hilly with steep slopes and mountainous horsts with the highest peak of 710 m and the lowest of 305 m. Besides deposit itself flows river Zapadna Morava with its tributaries Moravica, Djetinja, Bjelica and
Skrapez. From the southeast the deposit is confined by Zapadna Morava, from the southwest by stream Suvodo and
from the northeast side by Papratiska river. Communication and transport conditions are very good, while the asphalt road Cacak-Uzice is only 200 m far, likewise railway Cacak-Uzice which is connected to Beograd-Bar railway
[1-4].
Geological data
Complexity of geological structure within wider area of the limestone deposit Suvodo near Jelen Do, is presented
by the Paleozoic schists of the zone Krstac-Cestobrodica, the rocks of Mesozoic complex , sedimenary Neogene and
Quaternary complex. Medium Triassic sediments appear in more facies as limestones stratified in thick beds and
stratum rocks, massive and dolomitic limestones and limestone with cherts. Facies of massive and dolomitic limestones presents bearing series of the limestone deposit Suvodo. Steep slopes are thick with breccias and debris of
limestone.
Geological structure of the deposit itself is rather simple. Productive series floor is presented by shaly, marllimestone facies which belongs to WerfenianCampil substage. Its tickness varies from 300 m , declining towards
the south board, thus it amounts about 15 m in places. Limestones are of uniform quality i.e. with an even distribution of basic components.
In hydrological view, there is no danger from breakthrough of underground waters. In engineering-geological view,
limestones from the deposit Suvodo are worthwhile working area in regards to stability of slopes. Only limestone
debris could present small and local unstable masses which could be moved by cutting.
Limestone quality and application
On the basis of chemical, mineral, petrologic, physical, mechanical and technological quality analysis, limestones
from the deposit Suvodo could be used in industry of [1]:
lime,
sugar refining,
building material (aggregates for producing of concrete and asphalt concrete)
On the basis of the laboratory analysis, in accordance with the valid SRPS Standards, limestone from the deposit
Suvodo fulfills the quality conditions for the aggregates production used for:
1. production of under-supporting mechanically compressed (tampon) layers SRPS.Y.E9.020,
2. production of under-supporting road layers of bituminous material by hot-treatment - SRPS.Y.E9.028,
3. production of over-supporting layers of bituminous material by hot-treatment for all road categories SRPS.Y.E9.021,
4. production of weary asphalt-concrete by hot-treatment for roads with light and very light traffic-loadSRPS.Y.E4.014,
5. production of cement-concrete mixtures:
massive concrete,
reinforced concrete,
pre-stressed concrete,
concrete with surface quality - SRPS.B.B2.009.
6. production of under-layer of cement-concrete road base- SRPS.Y.E3.020.
Chemical composition of limestone Suvodo
Chemical composition of limestone from the deposit Suvodo has been determined in the Laboratory for Chemical
Analysis of ITNMS, at twelve different samples. The samples were without presence of waste material as per determination of the quality of the finished products and their further application according to the composition of certain elements.
540

PROCEEDINGS
Table 1. Chemical composition of limestone
Table 1. shows high percentage of CaO in certain parts of limestone deposit, up to 55,5% (56% theoretically), which is high quality limestone [1].
No.
Compound
Composition (%)
1.
CaO
53,5-55,5
2.
MgO
1,0-2,0
3.
SiO2
0,3-0,5
4.
R2O3
<1
5.
K2O+Na2O
<0,3
Mean values of physical-mechanical properties of limestone Suvodo

These values are taken from the elaborate done by Geozavod-Nemetali- Belgrade. Mean values of physicalmechanical properties are given at the following table:
Table 2. Mean values of physical-mechanical properties of limestone Suvodo
No.
1.
Physical-mechanical properties
Compression strength ( Mpa)
Mean value
In dry state
124
In water saturated state
105
After freezing
92
2.
Resistance to wear by scraping cm3/50 cm
22,66
3.
Water absorption %
0,20
4.
Freezing resistance
Resistant
5.
Bulk density with cavities and voids t/m3
2,69
6.
2,72
7.
Bulk volume coefficient
0,989
8.
Porosity %
1,00
Bulk density without cavities and voids t/m
Geological reserves
Calculation of limestone reserves Suvodo as technical-building stone and carbonate material has been evaluated
with the use of, parallel vertical profile method as basic method and block method as a control one
Total geological reserves of limestone Suvodo amount about 26 million m3 i.e. about 70 million t (calculated with
bulk density =2.69 t/m3). Within open workings contours lies about 23 million m3 of limestone i.e. balance reserves
amount about 60 million t. Contour coefficient of waste removal for draft solution of open workings equals Kk=0,2
m3/m3. By year capacity of limestone exploitation of 400.000 m3, the exploitation period is about 50 years.
3. EXPERIMENTAL WORK
Experimental work was carried out in order to determine the method for waste removal from the raw material ,
limestone, otherwise it could spoil the quality of the finished products when chemical and physical mechanical
properties are of concern. Share of waste could be minimized at the very start by appropriate working method and
its loading on dump tracks, but it wouldnt guarantee thorough elimination of waste. Therefore, it should be done
at the operating plant. While waste rock is consisted of clay components with different impurities and soil with
varied organic ingredients, and as the plant operates almost entire year in all weather circumstances, the solution
of the problem must be very effective. Specifically problematic was the period of the year in which the moisture
was higher, when it came to agglomeration of clay components and adhesion of finer pieces of limestone and
waste at the useful component.
To prevent this and to bring down negative aspects at the lowest dimension possible, it has been decided to put
vibrating screen in front of the primary crusher. Vibrating screen aperture has been determined experimentally, by
taking starting sample at the open works after mining, both samples, smaller classes of limestone and waste sample. Starting sample taken at the open works and composed this way (smaller classes and waste), was delivered to
ITNMS , with mass weight m= 220 kg, and tested on the series of sieves, then chemically analyzed on CaO and waste
content. On the basis of size distribution of the sample and chemical analysis of class sizes, it is determined that
class -30+0,0 mm should be removed from the raw material as it presents waste by its chemical composition. This
541

PROCEEDINGS
problem is solved by installing of vibrating screen with aperture of 30 mm, undersize which presents waste is conveyed to special bin.
4. PLANT OPERATING DATA

According to project task and Investitors requests, facility for secondary and tertiary crushing of limestone and
stone agreragates production is projected for the following conditions:
Capacity of primary crushed limestone class 200+32 mm
250 t/h
Capacity of limestone that comes to secondary crushing max
338,75 t/h
Capacity of limestone that comes to tertiary crushing max
202,50 t/h
Technological scheme
On the basis of the previously shown data and experimental results (under points 3 and 4) the following technological scheme of secondary and tertiary crushing with the mass flow-sheet (in the two different variants) has been
adopted (Figure 1.).
Figure 1. Technological scheme of mass flow of secondary and tertiary crushing at the deposit Suvodo [1-3]
Description of work of plant for secondary and tertiary crushing

Calculation and selection of equipment were executed on the basis of the technological scheme and mass flowsheet (Figure 1.), according to given capacity. Short description of technological scheme of secondry and tertiary
crushing and material flow of Limestone from deposit Suvodo is given bellow:
Secondary and tertiary crushing plant is on a plane at 325.0 meters above sea level. It is connected via asphalt road
to the railway and trunk road aak Uice. The primary crushed material (size class -200+0 mm) is transported to
silo (pos. 100) by horizontal belt conveyor (pos. 100) of L=15.0 m length, and B=800 mm width. Secondary crusher is
protected from metal objects on horizontal belt conveyor (pos. 100) by a metal detector (pos. 105) type DDMP800.
Silo (pos. 110) is on the coordinates Y=29,299.50; X=60,994.50; Z=325.00, total height H=17.9 m, useful height
H1=10 m, of D =4.4 m diameter, V=114 m3.
From the silo (pos. 110), limestone is fed into the horizontal Nordberg crusher (pos. 120) type NP1213SR over vibrating feeder (pos. 119) type EME-53U. Crushed limestone is transported by belt conveyor (pos. 130) to the two-level
vibrating screen (pos. 140). Length of the belt conveyor (pos. 130) type TC 800x38 is L= 38.38 m, width B=800, angle
of inclination " - 17. Length of the vibrating screen (pos. 140) type CVB1845II-2 is L=4.5 m, width B=1.8 m, screening surface P=8 m2, upper mesh openings n=63 mm, lower mash openings n1=32 mm. Products not passing through
the upper mash (class +63 mm) are transported back by belt conveyor (pos. 105) to the impact crusher (pos. 120).
Length of the belt conveyor (pos. 150) type TC 650x39 is L= 39.5 m, width B=650 mm, inclination " - 1145'. Products which pass the first mesh of the vibrating screen pos. 140 (products not passing the second mesh size 63+32
mm) are transported by belt conveyor (pos. 160) to the storage (pos. S3), the capacity of which is 500 m3, and if
542

PROCEEDINGS
crushed stone is required (class 63+32 mm), these products are returned by belt conveyor (pos. 150) to secondary
crushing (impact crusher pos. 120). Length of belt conveyor (pos. 160) type TC 650x27 is L= 27, width B=650 mm,
inclination " - 163'.
Products which pass the second mesh (class 32+0 mm) of the vibrating screen (pos. 140) are transported by belt
conveyor (pos. 170) to the three-level vibrating screen (pos. 180). Length of the belt conveyor (pos. 170) type TC
800x32 is L= 32 m, width B=800 mm, angle of inclination " - 19. Three-level vibrating screen (pos. 180) type TS3033 has three screening surfaces, the length of which is L= 6,1 m, width B=1.835 m, surface P=11 m2. The first mesh
has screen openings n=16 mm, the second n=8 mm, and the third n=4 mm. This screen provides aggregates size
32+16 mm; 16+8 mm; 8+4 mm and 4+0 mm.
If more class 4+0 mm is required, it is possible to return large size classes (32+16 mm; 16+8 mm and 8+4 mm) to
tertiary crushing. For this work mode products are transported by belt conveyor (pos. 190) to the storage bunker
(pos. 200). Length of the belt conveyor (pos. 190) type TC 650x19 is L= 19 m, width B=650 mm, inclination " - 17.
The bunker (pos. 200) has steel construction, its volume is V = 20 m3. Vibrating feeder type EME 42U (pos. 209) is
installed under the storage bunker. It feeds limestone onto the belt conveyor (pos. 210) type TC 650x25, length L=
25 m, width B=650 mm and inclination 16. There is a metal detector (pos. 215) type DDMP650 on the belt conveyor
(pos. 210) for protection from metal objects. The belt conveyor (pos. 210) transports limestone to tertiary crushing
into the vertical impact crusher (pos. 220) type Nordberg Barmac VI 300. The crushed products are transported to
the vibrating screen (pos. 140) by the belt conveyor (pos. 130), which completes the crushing screening cycle. Diagram of the secondary and tertiary crushing technology and diagram of mass ranges are presented in Figure 1.
Draft solution for secondary and tertiary crushing of limestone and stone agreragates production
Draft solution for secondary and tertiary crushing was done on the basis of the following elements:
Location conditioned by the open works development,
Previously built transport facilities for crushed limestone, from primary crushing to secondary crushing
(shaft, tunnel under shaft, tunnel for transport to silo for secondary crushing),
Silos and bins, on behalf of Investitor.
After taking into consideration a number of proposed solutions , expert teams form Jelen Do (Investitor), MiningGeological Faculty - Belgrade (Technical control of project documentation) and ITNMS - Belgrade (Projectants) have
adopted the technical solutions.
Equipment disposition on the terrain, Figure 2., has been presented as draft solution with adopted Investitors requests in the view of capacity, plant location, products assortment, technological needs and technical possibilities
of the selected equipment.
Figure 2. Disposition of equipment for secondary and tertiary

crushing
543

PROCEEDINGS
Equipment disposition is given in six sections , with two most significant, from the point of showing operations by
projecting, Figures 3. and 4.
Figure 3. Section H-H disposition of equipment for secondary and tertiary crushing [1-3]
Figure 4. Section J-J disposition of equipment for secondary and tertiary crushing [1-3]
5. CONCLUSION
This paper gives elementary data on raw material quality and quantity from deposit Suvodo- Jelen Do, conditions
and draft solutions for projecting of secondary and tertiary crushing at the plant, which are the part of the Main
Mining Project Limestone nad stone aggregates processing plant from deposit Suvodo, Jelen Do. a.d. - Jelen
Do.
This project has been positively evaluated by the side of verification commission, equipment adopted and partially
shown in the paper (only secondary and tertiary crushing) has been installed and the plant operates and successfully
distributes its products on the market.
LITERATURE
[1]
Main technological project of limestone and stone aggregates processing plant from deposit Suvodo, Jelen Do. A.D.- Jelen Do, Archive ITNMS-a, Belgrade, 2005.
[2]
Main mechanical engineering project of limestone and stone aggregates processing plant from deposit Suvodo, Jelen Do. A.D.Jelen Do, Archive ITNMS-a, Belgrade, 2005.
[3]
Main construction engineering project of limestone and stone aggregates processing plant from deposit Suvodo, Jelen Do. A.D.Jelen Do, Archive ITNMS-a, Belgrade, 2005.
[4]
Main electro-engineering project of limestone and stone aggregates processing plant from deposit Suvodo, Jelen Do. A.D.- Jelen
Do, Archive ITNMS-a, Belgrade, 2005.
[5]
Vasilije Pavlovi Transportation and export in mines, Editor Civil engineering book, Belgrade 1963.
[6]
Ranko Borovic Transportation equipment in Mineral Processing, Editor Faculty of Mining and Geology, Belgrade, 1985.
[7]
Boidar Brankovi, Velimir Antanaskovi, Milosav Adamovi and the others Mobile plants for recycling of construction waste material, Editor ITNMS, Belgrade, 2002.
[8]
Mechanic engineering Aleksinac, production catalogue 2005.
[9]
Metso minerals, production catalogue 2004.
544

PROCEEDINGS
POSSIBILITY OF BARITE CONCENTRATION

FROM POLYMETALIC SULPHIDE-BARITE ORE USING
GRAVITY AND FLOTATION CONCENTRATION METHODS
ABSTRACT
Ivana JOVANOVI1
Srana MAGDALINOVI1
Daniela UROEVI1
Igor MILJANOVI2
Sanja BUGARINOVI1
Dragan MILANOVI1
1
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor,

Serbia, ivajo7@gmail.com
2
Mining and Geology, Belgrade, Serbia,
The polymetallic barite ore is technologically very complex raw material

from which is possible to extract more useful components using the complex
technological schemes. This paper presents the technological testing of two
samples of the polymetallic sulphide barite ore, in order to obtain a barite
concentrate as well as a collective concentrate of sulphides. The testing is
performed using the gravity and flotation concentration methods.
Gravity concentration was carried out on a shaking table, as a pretreatment
of flotation concentration method. The results have shown that gravity concentration is not suitable method for the processing of this type of ore. Flotation concentration gave better results, but additional optimization of
technological parameters is still required.
Keywords
Barite, Concentration, Sulphides
1. INTRODUCTION
According to the literature and empirical data, it is known that polymetallic barite ore presents technologically
very complex raw material from which it is possible to extract more useful components, but using the complicated
technological schemes [1, 2]. These schemes usually involve multiple processes of concentration, such as flotation
concentration as well as physical and chemical methods [2, 3]. In addition to containing a numerous useful mineral
components, this type of ore is characterized by their very complicated intergrowing, because the minerals occur in
the form of fine grained aggregates. Therefore, it is difficult or almost impossible to separate them into separate
concentrates [4,5].
As barite has high density (about 4.4 - 4.5 g/cm3), it is reasonable to expect that its separation from the usual present waste minerals (quartz, calcite, shale, whose average density range of 2.5 - 3.1 g/cm3) would be successful.
However, it should be emphasized that this is a massive sulphidebarite ore. Therefore, there is a logical assumption that sulphide minerals (whose average density ranges from about 4-8 g/cm3) will concentrate together with
barite, using the gravity concentration method on a shaking table [2].
Flotation concentration can be applied in two basic ways:
direct flotation of barite (applicable for relatively simple barite ores)
depressing of barite and flotation of easy flotable minerals (applicable for complex sulphide-barite ores) [2].
The second method is used in this testing.
2. EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE
Raw material
Raw materials used in this testing were samples 1 and 2, which represented the polymetallic barite ore. Table 1
shows chemical composition of samples.
545

PROCEEDINGS
Table 1. Chemical composition of samples 1 and 2
Sample
Cu
(%)
Zn
(%)
Pb
(%)
Au
(g/t)
Ag
(g/t)
Ba
(%)
BaSO4
(%)
SiO2
(%)
S
(%)
Fe
(%)
MgCO3
(%)
1.35
6.76
4.28
1.7
90.2
9.59
16.30
5.12
37.10
25.85
0.10
0.90
5.61
5.00
1.6
112.5
14.01
23.80
2.39
35.05
26.61
0.096
Qualitative mineralogical analysis of the sample 1 has indicated the following mineral content: pyrite, sphalerite,
galena, marcasite, luzonite, enargite, tennantite, chalcopyrite, covellite, chalcocite, bornite, silver minerals, native
gold, barite, quartz and carbonates. The content of sulphide mass is 79.6%. Qualitative mineralogical analysis of
the sample 2 has indicated the following mineral content: pyrite, galena, sphalerite, marcasite, luzonite, enargite,
tennantite, covellite, chalcopyrite, silver minerals, native gold, barite, quartz and carbonates. The content of sulphide mass is 72.8%.
Particle size analysis of samples, separately crushed to 3.35 mm, is determined by a combination of wet and dry
sieving on a series of standard laboratory sieves. The results of grain-size analysis are shown in Figures 1 and 2.
Figure 1. Particle size analysis of sample 1
Figure 2. Particle size analysis of sample 2
Test procedure
Gravity concentration
In order to accomplish preconcentration of barite and sulphide minerals from polymetalic ore, gravity concentration method is performed. In the aim of that, three classes of coarseness are formed: 100% -3.35 mm, -3.35 + 1.18
mm and -1.18 + 0 mm, and each class is treated separately on a shaking table. Schematic view of the gravity concentration on a shaking table is shown in the Figure 3.
Figure 3. Shematic view of the shaking table
546

PROCEEDINGS
Flotation concentration
After a number of flotation experiments, the basic technological parameters were determined on both samples and
the final experiments were carried out with the final treatment of barite concentrate. Final experiments are performed according to technological schemes presented in Figures 4 and 5.
Figure 4. Technological scheme of the flotation concentration (sample1)
Figure 5. Technological scheme of the flotation concentration (sample2)
547

PROCEEDINGS

The results of gravity concentration testing are presented in Tables 2 7, while Tables 8 and 9 show the achieved
technological results of flotation concentration.
Table 2. Sample 1; class -3,35+0 mm
Product
M
(%)
Cu
(%)
RCu
(%)
Zn
(%)
RZn
(%)
Pb
(%)
RPb
(%)
Au
(g/t)
RAu
(%)
Ag
(g/t)
RAg
(%)
BaSO4
(%)
RBaSO4
(%)
C*
25,17
1,47
26,82
64,67
1,39
65,16
5,15
27,43
3,27
27,74
1,6
26,23
101,1
30,51
15,08
25,56
4,75
65,02
2,96
64,52
1,5
63,18
74,1
57,45
14,34
62,46
10,16
1,09
8,02
3,51
7,55
2,26
7,74
1,6
10,59
98,9
12,04
17,50
11,98
100,00
1,38
100,00
4,72
100,00
2,97
100,00
1,53
100,00
83,41
100,00
14,85
100,00
RZn
(%)
Pb
(%)
*C- concentrate, I intermediate, T tailings, F - feed

Table 3. Sample 1; class -3,35+1,18 mm
RCu
(%)
Zn
(%)
RPb
(%)
Au
(g/t)
RAu
(%)
Ag
(g/t)
RAg
(%)
BaSO4
(%)
RBaSO4
(%)
3,12
22,59
1,8
31,12
121,8
38,72
15,32
25,50
3,43
75,09
1,2
62,73
56,3
54,12
14,24
71,65
6,15
82,2
7,16
6,26
2,85
100,00
73,19
100
13,98
100,00
RAu
(%)
Ag
(g/t)
RAg
(%)
BaSO4
(%)
RBaSO4
(%)
Product
m
(%)
Cu
(%)
20,27
1,55
26,10
4,88
25,71
70,36
1,39
70,77
4,41
70,24
6,37
0,68
3,13
2,81
4,05
1,17
2,32
1,3
100,00
1,38
100,00
4,42
100,00
3,21
100,00
1,35
Table 4. Sample 1; class -1,18 + 0 mm
Product
m
(%)
Cu
(%)
RCu
(%)
Zn
(%)
C
I
RZn
(%)
Pb
(%)
17,78
1,30
17,14
67,52
1,40
70,10
14,70
1,17
100
1,35
RPb
(%)
Au
(g/t)
4,08
16,61
3,58
20,47
1,7
19,50
113,2
19,61
15,44
17,44
4,21
65,08
3,12
67,76
1,5
65,33
99,5
65,46
14,30
61,34
12,76
5,44
18,31
2,49
11,77
1,6
15,17
104,2
14,93
22,72
21,22
100,00
4,37
100,00
3,11
100,00
1,55
100,00
102,63
100,00
15,74
100,00
Table 5. Sample 2; class -3,35+0 mm
Product
m
(%)
Cu
(%)
RCu
(%)
Zn
(%)
RZn
(%)
Pb
(%)
RPb
(%)
Au
(g/t)
RAu
(%)
Ag
(g/t)
RAg
(%)
BaSO4
(%)
RBaSO4
(%)
21,41
0,86
23,33
4,55
22,45
3,74
24,00
1,5
21,56
112,7
21,24
19,76
20,08
68,04
0,77
66,38
4,35
68,21
3,27
66,68
1,5
68,52
114,7
68,69
20,28
65,49
10,55
0,77
10,29
3,84
9,34
2,95
9,32
1,4
9,92
108,4
10,07
28,82
14,43
100
0,79
100,00
4,34
100,00
3,34
100,00
1,5
100,00
113,61
100,00
21,07
100,00
Zn
(%)
RZn
(%)
Pb
(%)
RPb
(%)
Au
(g/t)
RAu
(%)
Ag
(g/t)
RAg
(%)
BaSO4
(%)
RBaSO4
(%)
Table 6. Sample 2; class -3,35+1,18 mm
Product
m
(%)
Cu
(%)
RCu
(%)
24,80
0,87
25,94
4,21
23,82
3,74
26,60
1,6
26,00
112,7
24,75
20,12
24,15
73,29
0,82
72,24
4,48
74,89
3,43
72,08
1,5
72,00
113,1
73,42
20,82
73,84
1,91
0,79
1,82
2,97
1,29
2,41
1,32
1,6
2,00
108,4
1,83
21,80
2,01
100
0,83
100,00
4,38
100,00
3,49
100,00
1,53
100,00
112,91
100,00
20,66
100,00
548

PROCEEDINGS
Table 7. Sample 2; class -1,18 + 0 mm
Product
m
(%)
Cu
(%)
RCu
(%)
Zn
(%)
RZn
(%)
Pb
(%)
RPb
(%)
Au
(g/t)
RAu
(%)
Ag
(g/t)
RAg
(%)
BaSO4
(%)
RBaSO4
(%)
18,77
0,79
18,07
4,15
18,83
3,43
18,60
0,9
13,79
43,6
8,88
20,24
17,15
61,04
64,90
0,85
67,21
4,35
68,26
3,58
67,11
1,3
68,88
103,5
72,93
20,84
16,33
0,74
14,72
3,27
12,91
3,03
14,29
1,3
17,33
102,6
18,19
29,60
21,81
100
0,82
100,00
4,14
100,00
3,46
100,00
1,22
100,00
92,11
100,00
22,16
100,00
RAg
(%)
BaSO4
(%)
RBaSO4
(%)
Table 8. Realized balance of concentration in the experiment on sample 1
Sample
1
m
(%)
Zn
(%)
F*
100.0
6.03
CS
83.04
7.16
TS
16.96
0.51
1.44
0.90
5.67
3.13
1.40
0.73
1.40
1.63
RCBa
13.83
0.31
0.71
0.78
4.04
ITBa I
1.37
0.56
0.13
1.95
0.99
Pb
(%)
RPb
(%)
100.0
2.68
100.0
98.56
3.05
94.33
RZn
(%)
Cu
(%)
RCu
(%)
Au
(g/t)
RAu
(%)
Ag
(g/t)
1.31
100.0
1.55
98.00
1.44
100.0
109.71
100.0
13.69
100.0
1.6
92.07
127.7
96.65
6.4
38.81
0.16
2.00
0.24
0.57
0.67
7.93
21.65
3.35
49.41
61.19
0.2
0.44
29.7
0.85
3.30
0.75
0.14
1.43
0.22
0.23
0.78
7.48
19.83
2.49
59.84
60.44
0.3
0.28
84.4
1.05
3.66
0.37
CBa I
12.46
0.28
0.59
0.66
3.04
0.13
1.20
0.83
7.20
12.73
1.44
66.02
60.07
ITBa II
1.41
0.62
0.14
2.18
1.14
0.28
0.30
0.3
0.29
32.9
0.42
7.00
0.72
CBa II
11.05
0.24
0.44
0.46
1.90
0.11
0.91
0.90
6.91
10.16
1.02
73.55
59.35
ITBa III
1.46
0.84
0.20
2.18
1.18
0.35
0.39
2.9
2.93
35.5
0.47
26.57
2.83
CBa III
9.59
0.15
0.24
0.20
0.72
0.071
0.52
0.6
3.98
6.3
0.55
80.70
56.52
*F-feed, Cs concentrate of sulphides; Ts tailings from sulphides flotation; T tailings (final); RCBa rough barite concentrate; ITBa I, ITBa II, ITBa III
Intermediate tailings from the first, second and third cleaning of barite concentrate, respectively; CBa I, CBa II, CBa III barite concentrate after
the first, second and third cleaning, respectively
Considering the achieved results of gravity concentration (Tables 2 - 7), it can be noted the impossibility of adequate valorization the useful components, primarily barite and sulphide minerals, which is the result of structuraltextural characteristics of raw materials, in terms of coalescence the sulphide minerals with waste minerals. A very
low presence of free grain as well as high presence of complex intergrowths and impregnations, affected the separation and concentration of sulphide minerals with barite in concentrate and intermediate product. Generally, all
products (concentrate, intermediate and tailings) have approximately the same quality (i.e. very similar content of
the analyzed elements). It practically means that physical sharing of masses was occurred during the ore processing
on a shaking table. This fact indicates the disadvantages of application of peconcentration of barite and sulphide
minerals from this type of ore.
Table 9. Realized balance of concentration in the experiment on sample 2
Sample
2
m
(%)
Zn
(%)
RZn
(%)
Pb
(%)
RPb
(%)
Cu
(%)
RCu
(%)
Au
(g/t)
RAu
(%)
Ag
(g/t)
RAg
(%)
BaSO4
(%)
RBaSO4
(%)
100.0
4.76
100.0
3.08
100.0
0.80
100.0
1.43
100.0
110.04
100.0
21.69
100.0
CS
69.21
5.21
75.82
3.74
83.99
1.06
91.64
1.6
77.54
135.4
85.16
9.10
29.03
TS
30.79
3.74
24.18
1.60
16.01
0.22
8.36
1.04
22.46
53.04
14.84
50.00
70.97
10.68
8.38
18.82
3.51
12.16
0.45
6.01
0.8
5.98
109.2
10.60
10.32
5.08
RCBa
20.11
1.27
5.37
0.59
3.84
0.09
2.35
1.17
16.49
23.22
4.24
71.07
65.89
ITBa I
1.18
7.01
1.74
2.93
1.12
0.33
0.49
5.3
4.38
78.1
0.84
17.39
0.95
CBa I
18.93
0.91
3.63
0.44
2.72
0.08
1.86
0.91
12.11
19.80
3.40
74.42
64.94
ITBa II
1.01
4.99
1.06
2.01
0.66
0.25
0.31
2.0
1.41
55.0
0.50
17.39
0.81
CBa II
17.92
0.68
2.57
0.35
2.06
0.07
1.55
0.85
10.70
17.81
2.90
77.63
64.13
ITBa III
2.65
2.03
0.22
1.13
0.97
0.15
0.50
1.15
2.14
39.2
0.94
53.38
6.52
CBa III
15.27
0.73
2.34
0.22
1.09
0.055
1.05
0.8
8.56
14.1
1.96
81.84
57.61
549

PROCEEDINGS
The experimental data presented in the Tables 8 and 9 have shown that it is possible to obtain the barite
concentrate, beside the sulphide concentrate, from the samples 1 and 2. However, this concentrates of barite have
lower contents of barite than required by the market. Reacher and purer concentrates can be obtained by another
2-3 stage of cleaning.
4. CONCLUSIONS
Polymetallic barite ore is technologically very complex raw material from which is possible to extract more useful
components, but using the complex technological schemes. These schemes usually involve multiple processes of
concentration, such as the flotation concentration and physical and chemical methods. In addition to containing a
numerous useful mineral components, this ore is characterized by very complex mineral intergrowth. Therefore, it
is difficult or almost impossible to separate useful components into separate concentrates. Samples 1 and 2 represent the polymetallic barite ore.
Considering the possibility of preconcentration of barite and sulphide minerals, it can be concluded that this type
of ore is not suitable for their preconcentration on a shaking table.
Based on the experimental data of flotation concentration, the following conclusions were made:
Both samples are technologically very similar. Therefore the ore, presented by them, could be processed using the same schemes,
Sulphide mass is dominant in the samples as shown by mineralogical analysis. This is reflected in the mass of
sulphide concentrate which mainly varied of 75-80% over the entrance in the flotation,
Large amount of sulphide concentrate has significantly affected the low concentration of valuable metals,
Barite content in the sulphide flotation underflow is low, so it is necessary to concentrate it by flotation,
BaSO4 content of 80% was obtained by three treatments of barite concentrate, what is lower than the requirements for use. Two to three additional concentrate treatments would lead to the quality of concentrate with appropriate market value.
Slightly better results in the barite concentration would be probably obtained by optimization of technological
parameters. Finally, on the basis of this investigations, it can be concluded that the samples 1 and 2 are complex
raw mineral resource, massive sulphide with high content of copper, zinc, lead, silver, gold and barite. Such complex mineral raw meterial requires a detailed laboratory testing with the aim to determine the technology for the
most optimum evaluation the all useful mineral components.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This work has resulted from the Project TR 33023, entitled "Technology Development of Flotation Processing of
Copper Ore and Precious Metals in Order to Achieve Better Technological Results" and Project TR 33007, entitled
"Implementation of sophisticated technical, technological and ecological solutions in the existing production
systems of Copper Mines Bor and Copper Mine Majdanpek ", for which we would like to thank to the Ministry of Education, Science and Technological Development of the Republic of Serbia for funding.
REFERENCES
[1]
Bulatovi S. M.: Handbook of Flotation reagent: Chemistry, Theory and Practice: Flotation of Sulphide Ores, ISBN: 0444530290,
Publisher: Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 2007
[2]
Pavlica J., Draki D.: Preparation of Non-metallic Mineral Resources, ISBN 86-7352-012-6, RGF Belgrade, 1997 (in Serbian)
[3]
Mining Chemical Handbook, Cytec, 2010.
[4]
Magdalinovi S., Marjanovi V., Uroevi D., Stanujki D.: Flotation concentration of polymetallic barite ore (Flotacijska koncentracija polimetaline baritske rude), Rudarski radovi 2012/2, 2012, pp. 93-104
[5]
Uroevi D., Milanovi D., Magdalinovi S.: Research the possibility of treatment the polymetallic barite ore by gravity concentration method (Istraivanja mogunosti tretiranja polimetaline baritske rude gravitacijskom metodom koncentracije) Rudarski
radovi 2012/4, 2012, pp. 197-224
550

PROCEEDINGS
AUSCULTATION OF FLOTATION TAILINGS

VELIKI KRIVELJ WITH EMPHASIS ON THE CURRENT
STATE OF KRIVELJS RIVER COLLECTOR, SERBIA
ABSTRACT
Miomir MIKI
Daniel KRANOVI
Milenko LJUBOJEV
Radmilo RAJKOVI
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bor,

Bor, Serbia
miomir.mikic@irmbor.co.rs
Flotation tailing Veliki Krivelj is formed in the vicinity of open pit Veliki Krivelj, near Bor in Serbia, and it is in function since the begining of open pit
exploatation. Field1 of flotation tailings was formed at first and it matached
the required capacity. For water evacuation of the Krivelj River, a tunnel was
built through the rock massif with the route from the left bank of the original watercourse.
The tunnel has diameter of 3 m, and its length is 1414 m. In 1990 the flotation tailings expand by building Field 2, as an additional space for dumping,
formed in the bed of the Krivelj River. To regulate the Krivelj river flow in the
tailings area, was built the collector length of 2075 m, which is a continuation of the existing tunnel.
Long years of exploitation affected on state of current collector, which is
presented in this paper. In addition, the appearance and impact of seepage
water at dams, have affected their stability. All this indicates that the constant monitoring of flotation tailings dams and collector needed because the
consequences of flotation tailings dam overflow and destabilization collector can cause large-scale environmental disasters.
This paper describes the current state of collector under the flotation tailing
dump Veliki Krivelj, and state of flotation tailings dams, based on monitoring program auscultation between June 2011 and June 2012.
Keywords
Auscultation, Collector, Dam, Flotation Tailing
1. INTRODUCTION
Near the open pit Veliki Krivelj, near Bor, is the Flotation tailing dump Veliki Krivelj, which has been in operation
since the beginning of exploitation at the open pit. Flotation tailing dump Veliki Krivelj is a tailing dump of a valley
type and occupies space in the former bed of the Krivelj River[6]. Downstream of the tailing dump is the village
Otrelj and upstream the belt conveyor system to waste transport from the open pit Veliki Kriveljs to the Old open
pit in Bor and open pit Veliki Krivelj[7].
Since the beginning of its work in 1982 until 1989, the Flotation plant Veliki Krivelj has dumped tailings in the old
tailing dump - Field 1. Field 1 is formed by closing the valley of the Krivelj River by two dividing sand dams, an
upstream dam 1 and downstream dam 2. For water evacuation of the Krivelj River, a tunnel was built through the
rock massif with the route from the left bank of the original watercourse. The tunnel has diameter of 3 m, and its
length is 1414 m.
In 1990, the Flotation tailing dump Veliki Krivelj was extended downstream taking an additional space in the bed of
the Krivelj River. Thus was formed a new tailing dump, which was called the Field 2. Construction of only one dam
Dam 3 was enough for contouring the new tailing dump. For drainage the Krivelj River water, a collector, diameter
of 3 m and 2075 m in length, which is a continuation of the existing tunnel, was constructed at the bottom of the
Krivelj River.
551

PROCEEDINGS
Considering that the current state of the collector is threatened, as it is shown in this work, and that overflow
effects of the dam and collector destabilization are the ecological disasters of great proportions, a constant
monitoring is necessary for the Flotation tailing dump dams and collector [1].
The importance of such monitoring is enormous, both for the local population of the Bor municipality and
population of neighboring countries in the Danube Basin, in which the Krivelj River flows[2].
2. STATE OF THE EXISTING COLLECTOR

Program of monitoring the existing collector includes the monitoring of collector state by visual observation and
measurements along the entire route of the collector. Visual observation monitors any changes on collector.
Measuring monitors the temperature, flow rate of air, oxygen amount and concrete brand. Monitoring program
performed between June 2011 and June 2012.
Auscultation of the collector chainage
The complete collector is divided into chainages, which were repaired depending on the rehabilitation phase: with
the phase of restoration: a stable outlet of the collector from chainage 0+0.00 to the chainage 0+200, rehabilitated
part of the collector from chainage 0+200 to the chainage 0+903, from chainage 0+903 to the chainage 1+457 is
the collector zone in which the first phase of rehabilitation was carried out by chainages 1+012 to 1+097 and 1+160
to 1+172, and chainage from 1+320 to 1+457, and the other parts to 2+026 is a zone which requires rehabilitation.
The starting chainage of the Veliki Krivelj collector is below the dam Veliki Krivelj 3A, where the zero chainage is
defined, Figure 1.
Figure 1. Start of the collector route below the Flotation dam 3A and Flotation tailing dump of the Field 2
Damages were observed along the entire route of collector. These damages are manifested in the form of: breaking
up of concrete to the reinforcement and large cracks, Figure 2a, concrete cracks in larger number of places, where
the aggressive flotation water comes out under pressure, Figure 2b, chemism that occurs as the effect of
aggressive flotation water and concrete, Figure 2c shows large number of cracks through which, in addition to the
water outflow under pressure, the chemism of this water occurs that sprays onto concrete.
According to the visual observation of collector concrete, there are large number of aggressive water penetrations
from the Flotation tailings, as well as chemism of aggressive water and concrete. Based on the measured concrete
brand by sclerometre, it can be concluded that the concrete construction of collector is stable and secure in terms
of functionality.
552

PROCEEDINGS
a)
b)
c)
Figure 2. The appearance of concrete damages to the reinforcement in the side part of calotte (a), a set of cracks on the left side of campade
through which water comes out under pressure (b) and chemism of concrete and aggressive water
Figure 3. a) Damages at 76m of colector b) damages and visibal reinforcments and garbage that river collect and
Winter period was characterized by high rainfall. This has affected the level of water in the collector is high. Due to
this, all measuring and recording the collector in this period was difficult.
These weather conditions have caused a significant drop in air temperature in the collector (Table 1).
Based on recordings and measurements observed a significant increase in the level of water and also the Krivelj s
water clearing appear despite turbulent motion.
State of the atmosphere in the observed part of the collector is satisfactory, there is the toxic gases that would
have a negative impact on human health.
Due to the rapid melting of snow in the spring there was a massive influx of water at the entrance portal. This
situation has caused damage in the form of pulling and major damage to metal cladding panels.
Analyzing the results, we can see that there has been no significant damage other than loss calotte tin lining.
Significant damage to the concrete does not exist, and therefore the concrete structure is stable and safe in terms
of functionality.
At the exit part of the portal in the spring of 2012 it was noted that in the previous period, there was a serious
approach of flotation dump material from the dam 3A. This material has totally closed the access road. There is still
visibal movment of this material, and it coming dangerously close near the exit, it hreatens to close the exit of
portal collectors. (Figure 4).
Quantity of flotation dump material is very large. This is consequence due to bad weather conditions that were
filled with rainfall and strong winds, so huge amount of material flod this area.
553

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4. Flotation tailing material closing access road
The measureed values on the collector are given in Table 1.

Table 1. The measureed values on the collector in the observed period
Year
2011
Month
Flow rate of air, m/s
Oxygen amount
O2 %
Temperature
C
Concrete brand MB
Mpa
June
July
1.10
21.0
15.85
30/35
August
1.70
21.0
16.20
30
September
1.82
20.8
15.80
30
October
1.84
20.3
9.70
30
November
1.67
20.1
7.50
30
December
1.10
21.0
6.50
30
january
1,26
20,9
-0,3
30/35
0,43
20,8
14,85
30/35
1,12
20,8
17,3
30/35
february
2012
march
april
may
june
Figire 5. The measured values during period of June 2011- June 2012
554

PROCEEDINGS
3. AUSCULTATION VISUAL OBSERVATION OF THE FLOTATION TAILING DUMP VELIKI KRIVELJ

In the area of the Flotation tailing dump Veliki Krivelj, the observation - auscultation was carried out in the period
June 2011-June 2012.
The aim of these observations is to monitor the movements and deformations of all structures at this site.
Auscultation was conducted at the following locations (monthly):
1. Dam 1A
2. Dam 2A
3. Dam 3A
Auscultation had the task to monitor the occurrence of seepage water, newly-formed sources, because these
phenomena negatively affect the stability of dams.
The level of sediment lake of the flotation tailingdump. By monitoring the level of the lake it is possible to
determine the lake volume as well as the ratio of lake height in relation to the dam crest of tailing dump.
Constant monitoring of seepage water levels was also performed in piezometers as well as pH value, chemical
composition and content of sand particles in the leachate sources. All this is an important factor in monitoring the
stability of dams.
Auscultation of the Flotation tailing dumpVeliki Krivelj
Dam 1A
Tailing dump Veliki Krivelj consists of two fields: Field 1 is limited by upstream Dam 1A and downstream Dam 2A,
and Field 2, which is limited by upstream Dam 2a and downstream Dam 3A (Figure 6).
a)
b)
Figure 6. Flotation tailing Veliki Krivelj (a - Jun 2011, b) june 2012
Monitoring the condition of Dam 1 and Field 1 in the period from June 2011 to June 2012 has resulted into several
conclusions.
At the beginning of recording the situation, it was concluded that there was an increase of seepage water and
newly-formed springs through the body of Dam 1. This negatively affects both the stability of dam itself and
additional pollution of the Krivelj River flow. Therefore, the constant monitoring of seepage water levels was
adopted in the piezometers as well as pH value, chemical composition and content of sand particles in the leachate
sources.
Analyzing the state in winter (December 2011) - a developed geometry of dam, it was observed that the crown of
dam took the position that there should be at the end of the project, when it would reach the design level K +385 m
of altitude.
Inaugural method is designed for upgrading of dam 1A and related to that is designed and constructed drainage for
the evacuation of storm water from the dam body. Changing methods of upgrading the dam 1A by the Investor
directly affects the stability of the dam as well as the functionality of all the objects on it. The current method of
building dams is the central method, which completely changes the overshoot tehnology as well as geomechanical
characteristics of the dam in the overshoot area.
The formed storage lake in Field 1 has several times larger surface area and volume than the technology of
dumping and processing requires in the Krivelj Flotation, i.e. it deviates significantly from design contour of the
555

PROCEEDINGS
precipitation lake. Elevation of the storage lake in Field 1 is 359.80 m altitude, which directly leads to the increased
depth of the storage lake near Floating Pump Station (FPS), so that it is about 3.8 meters.
Reducing the level of storage lake will directly reduce the inflow of seepage water as well as its level in the installed
piezometers[1]. This directly increases the coefficient of Dam 1A stability, which is at present close to the limit
value[2].
Some parts of dam are not reclamated. Due to the effects of wind and water in these places, there is erosion,
resulting in ravines that affect the dam stability.
Dam 2A
Sand dam 2A limits the Field 1 with a downstream side in the direction of inactive Field 2. The position and
geometry of Dam 2A is shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7. Dam 2A of the Flotation tailing dump Veliki Krivelj view from the road, December 2011
In the observed period June-December 2011, several conclusions were derived by auscultation:
Super elevation of Dam 2A was constantly progressed by identical geometry in the observed period,
The resulting discrepancies between the designed and constructed geometry of Dam 2A geometry, but they
are far smaller than on Dam 1A,
In the observed period, seepage water extended the front. The appearance of this water further destabilizes
Dam 2A which is up to this point in far better condition than Dam 1A.
Dam 3A
Dam 3 is the ending downstream dam, which limits Field 2 from downstream side in direction of the village Otrelj.
As it can be seen from Figure 8, this dam is eroded in its large part, especially its crown, so that its height in many
places is below 345 m altitude.
Since the water elevation in the storage space is 349.60 m altitude, the severity of current situation is great. As the
result, monitoring was performed continuously on Dam 3A crown and its outer slope. In this way, it can be affected
due to the negative impacts of this tailing dump on the village Otrelj, located downstream from Dam 3A.
Figure 8. Erosion effect on Dam 3A, may 2012
556

PROCEEDINGS
4. CONCLUSION
Flotation tailing dumps present a constant threat to the ecological environmental factors both theu are in
operation, or after termination of dumping and filling the landfill space. The causes of accidents in the flotation
tailing dumps are technical defects and natural catastrophic disasters[2].
This paper presents the auscultation of dams of the Flotation tailing dump and chainages of collector. Based on
the presented situation and measuring results, it can be concluded that there is a problem of preservation the
Flotation tailing dump in operation.
Several conclusions were made in the observed period:
upgrading of Dam 3A is needed for maximum utilization the existing landfill space
it is necessary to utilize completely the landfill space as the new areas would not be occupied and pollute
the new water courses of rivers
it is necessary to construct a new tunnel; below Field 2 of the flotation tailing dump Veliki Krivelj to drain
water of the Krivelj River
construction of a new tunnel would change the flow of the Krivelj River and bypass the existing collector
that is in a very poor condition
it is necessary to remediate the dams of flotation tailing dump
further monitoring of flotation tailing dump is needed to minimize the possibility of any accident.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
This work has resulted from the Project No. TR33021, funded by the Ministry of Science and Technological
Development of the Republic of Serbia.
REFERENCES
References in the text should be numbers in square brackets [1], and then there should be a key to such numbers at
the end, as shown below.Please use table in template; numbering is automatically. NOTE: You can sort second column with word alphabetically. These examples also show the expected reference format:
[1]
Miomir Miki, Daniel Kranovi, Milenko Ljubojev: uscultation and zone monitoring of current collector of the rivelj river
below flotation tailing dump "Veliki Krivelj", Serbia. 12th Scientific Geoconference SGEM 2012, proceedings volume I, Geology
Exploration and Mining. Proceedings,17-23th June, Albena Bulgaria. pp.465-472.
[2]
Miomir Miki, Daniel Kranovi, Milenko Ljubojev: Overview of zone monitoring of current collector of the Krivelj River below
flotation tailing dump "VELIKI KRIVELJ", SERBIA. XV Balkan mineral procesing congress, proceedings, 12-16th June, Sozopol
Bulgaria.
[3]
M. Ljubojev, D. Ignjatovi, L. Djurdjevac Ignjatovi, V. Ljubojev, Preparations for Investigation the Tunnel Route and Field
Surveying, Mining Engineering Journal, No. 1, 2011, pp. 135-166.
[4]
S.Krsti, M.Ljubojev, M.Miki, V.Ljubojev: ,,Methods of geotechnical investigations for rehabilitation and remediation the
flotation tailing dump Veliki Krivelj (Serbia). XIV Balkan mineral processing congress, proceedings, Jun,2011, Tuzla, BIH (851853).
[5]
Slaana Krsti, Miomir Miki, Milenko Ljubojev, Omer Musi, Vesna Ljubojev:,,Conditions of drainage of flotaion tailing of "Veliki
Krivelj. 43rd International october conference on mining and metallurgy, proceedings, Octobar 2011, Kladovo, Srbija. (221-238)
[6]
Miomir Miki, Daniel Kranovi, Slaana Krsti: ,,Overview of the current situation of major facilities of the flotation tailing
dump Veliki Krivelj near Bor with special review to the collector of the Krivelj River. 43rd International october conference on
mining and metallurgy, proceedings, Octobar 2011, Kladovo, Srbija. (303-306)
[7]
Daniel Kranovi, Miomir Miki, M.Ljubojev:,,Analysis the spatial position of mining facilities of the Veliki Krivelj mine to the
proposed tunnel route for relocation the Krivelj River. Mining engineering 3/2011, 2011. (95-100)
[8]
Daniel Kranovi, Miomir Miki, M.Ljubojev: ,, Analysis of development effects of the Veliki Krivelj mine on construction the new
facilities for deviation the Krivelj River. Mining engineering 4/2011, 2011. (57-65)
[9]
S.Krsti, R.Lekovski, M.Miki: ,, Environmental protection from dust from flotation tailings Veliki Krivelj. Air protection 2011,
proceedings, Zrenjanin Hotel Vojvodina 7.-9.11. 2011. (200-206).
557

PROCEEDINGS
MINING PRODUCTION OF CONCENTRATES

AND BASE METALS IN THE REGION
ABSTRACT
Shyqri KELMENDI1
Halil QELA2
Bajram MUSTAFA3
Prof Dr, Prishtina, Kosovo, shkelmendi@yahoo.com

2
Dipl. Eng, Prishtina, Kosovo,
halil_qela@hotmail.com
3
Dipl. Eng, Prishtina, Kosovo,
ibm55kos@yahoo.com
Base metals like lead and zinc are the fourth respectively the fifth in the
world talking about their use. In two last years, the relation supply/demand
of these metals is obviously disordered in favor of raising demand, and this
has caused an enormous variety of prices for base metals in the market.
From the other side, the region of Balkan is relatively rich with ore deposits
of these metals. Changes and transitions which happened through 90-ties
destroyed the mining production which still is not erected.
The European Union after year 2000 approved some regulations with which
are prescribed the framework of sustainable development of the mining sector. Besides, in the past there were built metallurgy capacities for Pb and Zn,
which today but also in a certain future will not easily face with European
frameworks, but will also not have sufficient concentrates for their own processing capacities.
In this paper there has analyzed the actual situation in primary ore and concentrate production and is estimated the expected perspective of ore and
metal production, always seen from the point of view of European requirements for sustainable development.
The need for a closer cooperation in between ore-processing and metallurgy
units in the region, with the purpose of full rationalization, to effectively
solve the environmental problems and better financial circulation, appears
as one of the potential and acceptable options.
Keywords
Lead, Zinc, Concentrate, Smelters, European Standards, Sustainable Development
1. INTRODUCTION
Lead and zinc ores in the western Balkans region are extracted and are smelted since ancient roman time. These
ores, except base metals may contain also other metals (Cu, Ba, Ni, Bi, Cd), precious metals (Ag, Au) and the rare
ones (In, Se, Te Ge, Ga, Ta, W, Va, etc.). Presence of metals Cu, Ba, Ni, Bi, Cd, Hg in ores, causes difficulty in further
technological processing, but, on the other hand some of these metals (Bi, Cd, Cu, Ni, Ag, Au), if extracted, increase
the economic value of the ore.
Generally, geological structure of the Balkans Peninsula has given the possibility of formation of many metalogenic
fields, rich with base metals, with a precious metal and rare metals. Starting from the ridges of Carpates, and continuing with Rodopes, and in their contacts with tectonic zone of Vardar and with Dinarides, there can be identified
some locations in which the mineralization and ore deposits of lead zinc, are important and with eligible economic potential.
At the regional level, there can be distinguished some ore deposit localities with local and wider importance, which
are opened mines and flotations, for processing the lead zinc ores. Also the region has inherited from the past
some metallurgic plants for treatment of concentrates and producing pure metals: in Bulgaria (KCM.S.A Plovdiv,
Pb-Zn Complex Ltd. Kerdjali), in Rumania (Sometra Mytelineos S.A), in Macedonia (smelter Zletovo Veles), in Kosovo (lead smelter - Zvean and zinc Electrolyze Mitrovica) and in Serbia (zink Electrolyze Zorka/Binani Shabac).
558

PROCEEDINGS
Ore production and production of selective concentrates of Pb and Zn, is not in concordance with installed metallurgical capacities, and unavoidably will result in a high cost of treatment charges (T/C). Changes and transformations which are happening in the global mining level and also in regional level, are not appropriate for mines and
metallurgies in the region. Such a huge concentration of mines and flotations, and in particular metallurgical processing capacities, hardly can resist the competition, if there have not opened processes of professional and business cooperation in between all these factors. Intensive cooperation in this field is seen as a chance for increasing
the economic effects, increase of profit and expected impact on the region in the overall European production of
Pb, Zn and other metals.
2.
METAL PRODUCTION STAGES FOR PB AND ZN
In most cases, minerals of lead and zinc found jointly in nature and usually followed with Ag. Also the main production of antimony (Sb), cadmium (Cd) and bismuth (Bi) in the world comes as a byproduct during treatment of Pb and
Zn ores.
Pb grade of ore in a consolidated ore deposit, may have values from the lowest economic limit (Cut-off-grade)
until to 15 %, whereas zinc may take values up to 20 %. In most common cases, existing ore deposits in the world,
balance their reserves with average Pb + Zn = 8 % - 14 %. Of course, changes in market metal prices and changes in
ore and concentrate production cost, effect on changing this calculated grade and on balancing the total reserves
in the deposit.
Commonly, the lead concentrate contains 5078% Pb and in cases when produced by sulfide ores, it contains 15
20% S. Zinc concentrate contains 4060% Zn, and usually 2634% S. The collective concentrate contains Pb from
5% - 35%, Zn from 5% - 38%. Generally, the process from mine to pure metals, are long, complex and sequential (fig.
1).
Inputs
Mine
Ore
T
Flot
K
W2
W1
Met
Metals
Figure 1. Sequ entional production process
In any case, the extractive technology of Pb and Zn has these characteristics:

Pb-Zn mines usually are underground mines, whereas surface mines are rare for these two metals. Ores in
most cases are found in sulfide form, and their processing in separate concentrates (selective) of Pb and Zn
are the usual step to be followed. In some cases, the mineralogy of the ore determines to derive only collectively concentrate with high content of Pb and Zn. Metallurgical treatment of these two types of concentrates is different.
The material balance of processing is distinguished with the low quantity of the ore which will be separated
in concentrate (about 10% 12 %). The other mass of ore material treated as waste. The historic waste or
produced from an actual process, according to the EU directives, must be treated according to the regulations of IPPC (Integrated Pollution Prevention Control). That means, recycling and/or return it in the mine as
backfilling material. In each case, the mineral waste must to cover, and precipitated water must to isolate
and to clean.
Smelting of selective Pb/K, in 10 last years have advanced a lot, so that today it is attempted to use integrated technologies, without prior roasting of the concentrate. This new technological way of lead extracting, makes possible obvious reduction of sulfide gas emission and at the same time metallurgical recycling of
slag, those remained from the past, and also those which come out of the process. Recycling of slag and re-
559

PROCEEDINGS
cycling of dust makes possible economic extraction of rare metals which usually are found in ore in trace
forms, whereas their concentration is found in by products during metallurgical treatment. In this direction,
all smelters in the region have many problems which collide with European regulations for sustainable development;
Hydro-metallurgical processes with which are treated nowadays the zinc concentrates are quite modern and
those require only additional engineering training in order to avoid accidents, and to minimize impact to environment.
In principle, the high amount of sulfur acid from the Pb and Zn processes, and limited its use, become an obstacle for metallurgical treatment of sulfide ores.
The metallurgical process of Pb and Zn, is characterized with a high number of closed cycles (hydro-filling,
recycling of dusts, water recycling, treatment of slag with fuming, hematite process, jarosite process or pyrite calcinations process, etc.).
Raw metals derived from metallurgical processes, undergo also a final purification process (refining), benefiting
metals with required commercial purity, but at the same time are derive the precious metals (Au, Ag);
Deponimi
Thermimi &
klasifikimi
Grinding
Hidrombushja
K/FeS2
K/PbS
K/ZnS
H2SO4
Aglomerimi
ISP
Fjuming
Furra
shahte
Finjizimi
Rafinimi
Elektroliza
Ausmelt
Figure 2. Pb & Zn production stages
Final product refined lead and high grade zinc, has a wide usage in different fields and products.
3. METAL PRICES, WORLD PRODUCTION AND CONSUMPTION

Prices of lead and zinc historically have shown a periodic oscillation, marking the average period 10 to 12 years.
Viewing the situation in the last decade, since the beginning of 2005, lead and zinc prices marked rising trend, making a change of lead value from 750 $/t to 3800 $/t and zinc from 870 $/t to 4200 $/t. Increasing trend of price
(with short oscillations) has lasted till the end of the year 2007, whereas in 2013 is noticed the tendency of price
stabilization for Pb about 2200 $/t and Zn about 1850 $/t. This situation with the price has influenced that many
lead-zinc mines, to review their position. Besides, positive change of prices has influenced on increasing the interest of private capital to invest in industry of extraction and production of these metals.
Forecasting of price trends for 10 coming years is impossible. Increase of demand, decrease of metal stock and
propulsive development of the metal processing industry in China and Southeastern Asia, are indicators which increase the reliability of the prognosis for stabilization of Pb prices in level of 2200 $/t and for Zn in level of 2000
$/t, in the future period of 10 years. This prognosis is hopeful for reactivation of existing mines in the region, for
opening new mines in explored ore deposits, and for increasing of geological and mining exploration, with the purpose of determining the resources and reserves, in full compliance with accepted standards (CIMM, JORK).
Price of metals in the market, also in the past has been a strong regulator of ore and metal production in mines of
countries which are new in the market economy. This should not be neglected problems which may result from
widespread trend of "economic neoliberalism" and phenomenon "resource curse, which can include the Western
Balkan countries.
{Presently, the biggest Pb producer in the world is Australia (23 % of the total world production). Other big producers are China, USA, Peru,
Canada and Mexico. Total production of Pb from ores in the world actually is at level of 3,31 x 106 t Pb metal in concentrate, that is approximately 67 x 106 t of ore with average Pb 5.5 %. It is estimated that world reserves of Pb are 64 x 106 t Pb in concentrate, or the equivalent (with
560

PROCEEDINGS
5.5 % Pb), total world reserves are 1.16 x 109 t of ore [6]. With the mining production level of year 2005, the total world reserves of Pb ore will be
finished in 17 coming years if not invested in exploration and discovering new ore deposits.
The biggest metal producers based on zinc concentrate are China, Australia, Canada, Peru and USA. World production of Zn for year 2007,
reaches the quantity of 4.88 x 106 t of zinc concentrates. The total world reserves of Zn are estimated to be 190 x 106 t metal in concentrate}.
4. PRODUCTION OF PB AND ZN IN THE REGION

The Balkans region since 1989 faces different difficulties. All transformations which have happened or are still happening in the region, have left huge consequences in the mining production sector and in the production of base
metals.
Almost all mines of Pb and Zn in the region have had a long period of crisis in production and particularly in development, what has influenced that the greatest number of these mines remains behind with the dynamic of developing mining and remain behind on modern trends of technological development in the world. The situation and
the possibility for production of Pb-Zn ore in the region are:
Kosovo, before the year 1989, with annual production of 90 to 100 thousand tons Pb, with 50 thousand tons Zn,
with 200 t Bi, with the 120 t Cd, with 120 t Ag and with about 300 Kg gold, was the biggest producer in the region.
The known events during the last 20 years practically have destroyed the big producing system Trepa.
Trepa mines formally are under Kosova Privatization Agency.
[There are 9 mines which can produce ore: Mine Trepa Stantrg with flotation in Tuneli, mines Cernac, Belo Berdo and Zhuta Perla with
flotation in Leposaviq, mines Kizhnica, Hajvalia, Badovc and Artana with flotation in Kizhnica. On the other hand, in the mineral belt from
Leposaviq to Gjilan, there are given at least four explored ore deposits and ready sites for opening and exploitation].
Estimations carried till now, show that in the existing mines would have to be invested on worker training, on preparatory works and on new mining equipment. Each of the mines requires an investment of 20 to 40 Mil , in order
to achieve the full capacity. Also, the two existing flotation plants require investment for modernization.
Particular issues are the Pb smelter in Zvean and Zn Electrolytic plant in Mitrovica. The smelter has stopped operating because of enormous pollution of the environment (August 2000). Estimations are that a new smelter
(Ausmelt) with production capacity of 65.000 t/year of refined Pb, would have full technical and economic justification. On the other hand, based on merit estimations [5], reparation and elimination of damages in the Zinc Electrolyze, would influence positively in business indicators of the mines around.
Figure 2 and 3. Pb and Zn concentrate production in the region countries
Bulgaria is taken as a stable producer of ores and metals of Pb and Zn. Bulgarian mineral belts of Pb Zn is mainly
found in Rodope Mountains, in central-southern part, near the Greek-Bulgarian border. In this part are the large
mines Gorubso - Rudozem, Madan - Rudozem, Laki, Dimov Dol, Kerdjali, Magjarovo, Erna Reka, Mir, Gueshevo, Rud-
561

PROCEEDINGS
metal A.D, etc. Mines have their own flotations with a total ore processing capacity of 5.1 Million t/y. All these
mines, have suffered from political changes in the country and region.
Though internal stability was not good during 1990, the Bulgarian Government made liberalization and licensing of
exploration and exploitation of the mines, has relatively quickly arrived to stabilize this sector. This Government, in
1998 approved the National Program for Sustainable Development of the Mines, a thing which motivates local and
foreign private capital investment, by emphasizing that underground mineral resources are state owned property,
but gives the opportunity to local and international companies to take the right for development and exploitation
of the mines and deposits for 35 years, with possibility for extension for 15 years more.
Local managements, first became owners (80%) of two smelters in Plovdiv (KTZM2000) and in Kerdjali (Pb-Zn
Complex PLC Kardjali), whereas later privatized mining complexes Gorubso Rodozem, Rudmetal A.D, etc.
The smelter in Plovdiv, except that has fulfilled the European criteria minimizing the emissions and harmful discharges in the environment, has also installed the Fuming technology for slag treatment, and in this case produces
metal oxides (Zn, In, Ge, Te Se, etc).
Some of the big world corporations also have obtained the right for exploration and exploitation (Navan Resources
- Ireland, Hereward Ventures - UK).
Metallurgies in Plovdiv and in Kerdjali, today face lack of concentrates for filling their production capacities.
Greece has some ore deposits of Pb Zn. Important ones can be considered here Olympias, Stratoni (with mines
Madem Lakos and Mavras Petras), Polykastron and Molaoi (Peloponnese).
Multinational company European Goldfields Ltd as owner of (65%) of the mining complex Olympias /Stratoni and
flotation in Stratoni, had proclaimed that Stratoni will start ore production in 2006 (170.000 t/y), by increasing it in
2010 up to 400.000 t/y, whereas for the mine Olympias, the company is working to gain the license for exploitation,
as it has problems with the position of ore deposits against to the city.
Since 1999, Stratoni mines have produced ore which has been processed in flotation Stratoni.
Geological reserves in this deposit are considerable (16 Mt, Pb = 4.4%; Zn =5.84% and Ag=136 g/t).
Ore deposit Polykastron-Skra is not in exploitation and there is no plan currently for opening it. Estimated reserves
are 2.5 Mt with Pb = 3.03%, Zn = 3.85% and Ag = 15 g/t.
Identified mineralization Molaoi (Peloponnese) is not yet explored completely, so that the expected reserves are 3.8
x 106 t, Pb = 1.76%, Zn= 8.27%, and Ag = 55 gr/t. However, the companies engaged at geological exploration in
Greece, do not yet are sure that will be equipped with exploitation license. Particularly, the environmental problems can be present for ore deposits of Olympias, from the point of view of endangering the archeological values.
This fact makes more costly the Greek production in the region and in a way that keeps it even out of the competition.
Macedonia in the past has been one of the stable producers for base metals. Pb-Zn deposits are laid mainly in the
north-eastern part of Macedonia, in the province of Kratova Zletova. Within these ore holding fields, there have
been opened three underground mines: Mine of Zletovo with selective flotation in Probishtip, mine Sase (Kamenica)
with collective/selective flotation, and mine Toranica with collective/selective flotation in Kriva Palanka.
In 2003, the Macedonian Government and interested parties proposed to study development and modernization of
the mines so that they produce quantities of concentrate with which there will be fulfilled the requirements up to
about 78% of the Lead-Zinc smelter in Veles (ISP technology). This means that mines must produce about 38000
t/year Pb metal and about 30000 t/year Zn metal from selective or collective concentrate. Smelter in Veles, with
the ISP technology, has the capacity of 44000 t/year Pb, about 32000 t/year Zn and a quantity of other metals like
(Cd, Au, Ag, Sb, As, Mn and Ni).
Except from financial difficulties, the mines and the smelter in Veles, until in the end of the year 2005 faces also
with other problems mainly related to environmental protection, lack of necessary supplies, miners strikes and other problems, so that the Macedonian Government decided to temporarily close the smelter in Veles, and chemical
industry nearby, whereas the mines (Zletovo, Sase and Toranica), are put in the list of national privatization program.
Currently, only the mine Sase is privatized. The new owner of this mine became the Russian-Caribbean company
Romtrade for the purchase price of 3.020.000 ., and with obligation to employ 920 employees and to invest (26
Million $) on improvement of the mining technology and the flotation so that it reaches production of 600.000 t of
ore or 35.000 t C/Pb and 45.000 t/year C/Zn. Modernization of the flotation to produce selective concentrate, with
extraordinary success achieved the company Metco Minerals and this has raised the aspirates of the new owner to
562

PROCEEDINGS
increase the mine production up to 800000 t/year and necessary extension of the flotation. The daily produced
concentrate is loaded in special trucks and transported to the smelter of Plovdiv. The mine and flotation Sase are a
success story in this field for the whole region, and represents an encouragement for other mines.
Mine Zletovo with flotation in Probishtip is before the privatization process, but is currently facing miners strikes
and low ore reserves.
Mine Toranica with flotation in Kriva Pallanka is not yet privatized as there is believed that there is low chance that
this mine achieves the required production level.
The important issue remaining unsolved is privatization of the Pb and Zn smelter in Veles. Historical pollution and
non safety at production or even buying the quantity of concentrates which would ensure production and profit for
the smelter, these are the main obstacles for what this process is not yet finalized.
Serbia has several Pb and Zn deposits. Mines which are active or which could quickly start production are Rudnik
G.M (already privatized), Blagodat (before privatization process), Lece (privatized already), Bobija /Tisovik and Suva
Ruda. These mines, at 1999 have been a part of the Trepca complex or have sent concentrate for smelting in
Trepca. However, mines in Serbia have undergone one huge crisis from which they are not yet recovered.
All mines to be returned in production have the primary interest that their concentrates of Pb to process in Trepa,
whereas the Zn concentrates may be in Zorka/Shabac (for what Zorka has the capacity and fulfills environmental
requirements). Zorka since 2005 was borroved to the company MDIL Binani Group London with a production capacity of Zn of 32,000 t/y, what requires quantity from cca 80.000 t C/Zn. Serbian governments after two years operation of the company Binani has obtained the right of privatization and currently Zorka is under limited operation.
Rumania is distinguished with low grade ore deposits of Pb and Zn (Pb = 0.4%-1% and Zn = 0.6% - 1.2% and Cu =
0.35%, with traces of Sb, Bi, Cd, AU, Ag). Main mines are Baia Mare, Borsa, Certej, and province Rodna. Recovery of
metals from concentrate is reported to be low (between 50% and 75% for Pb and Zn). Smelting and refining of Pb
and Zn from local concentrates and from the imported ones was done in ISP smelter Sometra S.A (since 1999,
property of Mytelanois), with a capacity of 42,000 t/year Pb and 66,000 t/year Zn.
Rumanian mines do not seem to have perspective, though the European company Goldfields Ltd is investing on
exploration works in the Certej mine.
5. EXPECTED PRODUCTION
The smelters built in the region, seems that have huge capacities and it is difficult for them to be supplied with the
needed quantities of concentrate from their own countries, but also balancing in the level of the whole region
shows an evident lack of concentrates. Taking into consideration current situation and real possibilities of the
mines in the region, is given a production prognosis with the reliability of about 65% to be achievable (fig.4), in order to calculate the level of filling the metallurgical capacities, but also to come to the proper conclusions. Metallurgical capacities are shown in the Tab.1.
Company
Location
Pb (t/a)
Zn (t/a)
Ag (t/a)
Trepa
Mitrovica/ Kosovo
83000
50000
105
KCM S.A.
Plovdiv/ Bulgaria
44000
60000
60
Pb- Zn Complex Ltd
Kardjali/ Bulgaria
33000
27200
45
Veles
Macedonia
50000
60000
65
Sometra (Mytelineos S.A)
Romania
30000
60000
45
Zorka
Serbia
32000
TOTAL
240000
289200
Needed concentrate (t)
380952
680471
320
It is a fact that Pb smelters in the region have a capacity of 240000 t/year refined Pb, and 289200 t/year pure Zn.
This means that mines in the region needed to produce 381.000 t/year Pb concentrates and 680.000 t/year Zn concentrates. Current production capacity in the mines of the region is 163.000 t C/Pb and 216.000 t C/Zn. Noticed
the lack of concentrates with which soon will face the metallurgical capacities. This is one of the main reasons for
setting closer and amicable contacts in between the producers (mines and metallurgies) in the region, with the purpose of short term and long term harmonization of supply and demand of the concentrates and services of smelters
and electrolysis.
563

PROCEEDINGS
The real possibility of producing Pb concentrate is quite limited. An optimistic estimation would determine the
maximal Pb/K in the region of 195.000 t/year (Trepa -65.000, Gorubso 30.000, Others BG 12.000, Sase 30.000,
Toranica 20.000, Stratoni 18.000, Rumania 20.000). For filling the smelter capacities, the region must import
186.000 t C/Pb.
Figure 4. Expected concentrate production at next 10 years
Also needs for Zn concentrate in the region reach the quantity of 680.500 t (Tab.1), whereas the region will have
the possibility to produce (optimistic prognosis), 233.000 t Zn/K, so that the region would have to import about
448.000 t Zn/K (Fig.4).
Concentrate deficit given in current market prices, reach the amount of 700 Million $. This high value is a sufficient
reason for a closer cooperation between interested parties in order to minimize expenses for raw material and for
transportation.
6. SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT?
Taking into account statements, regulations and relevant documents of EU, all mining companies which dealing
with Pb and Zn ore production and processing, would need to identify European policies which consist on following
principles [7]:
A production which must be in function of saving resources and their efficient exploitation;
Reduction (minimizing), return and recycling of mineral wastes;
Applying cheap and friendly environmental methods which are mainly related with wastes;
Effective rehabilitation of abandoned mines or flooded ones
EU has identified the mining sector as a branch of industry with high percentage of employment opportunities with
high risk and with high level of accidents. EU recommends that solution must be found at:
Increasing the automatic operation in mines, in flotations, in metallurgies and on good management of mine
waste and metallurgical slag;
Enhancement of personal protective equipment in mines and other treatment and mineral processing facilities;
Transfer of information technology, high technologies and robotics in all stages of extraction, treatment
and processing of minerals.
This requires that all mines with flotations in the region and all metallurgies to become members of NESMI (Network on European Sustainable Minerals Industries), an organization formed by the European Commission, in order
to bring to the attention of the EU the problems of the mining sector and to develop necessary initiatives toward
full application of the strategy RTD (Research Technologies and Development).
7. CONCLUSIONS
The South-Western Balkans region is rich with resources of Pb and Zn ore. In the past there have been opened
mines, there had been built flotations and smelters of Pb and Zn, attempting to keep the autonomy of producers
and states.
With the essential changes which still happening in the region, there are being created conditions of globalization
of this sector, by increasing the impact of multinational companies on profit exploration from quick exploitation of
resources and by leaving aside the needs for investment on exploration and opening of new ore deposits.
564

PROCEEDINGS
Taking into account the geographical short distance of Pb-Zn mines in the region, locations and metallurgic capacities, railway and road infrastructure, labor force and other advantages, is proposed as a main advantage the need
for a more intensive cooperation in the region. Cooperation would be concentrated at the beginning in the following crucial issues:
The research of most optimal solutions, with which would be rationalized the production cost and would be
increased efficiency at work.
Minimization of environmental impact; in this way establishing a suitable climate for economic development.
Cooperation on increasing attention for a safe and healthy work of the miners;
To discuss the balance of concentrate production capacities and metallurgical processing capacities, in order to increase the efficiency and bilateral or multilateral economic aspect.
Close cooperation with NESMI and full application of RTD strategies, with the purpose of protecting the
trade companies with mineral resources and supporting the engagement of world known companies for real
investment in the mining sector, by maximizing economic effects for the country in which are exploited the
mineral resources.
REFERENCES
[1]
http//www.egoldfields.com/Annual Report 2007,
[2]
Smith, R.G, Lead 2000, U.S. Geological Survey Minerals Yearbook, Washington D.C, 2000.
[3]
Dushi,. M, Trepa, Academy of Sciences and Arts of Kosova, Prishtina, 2005.
[4]
Steblez G.W. The mineral industries of the North Balkans, USGS, Washington D.C, 2006.
[5]
Kelmendi Sh. Trepa mine with concentrator, Feasibility Study, Mitrovica, 2007.
[6]
Hejny Horst Dr, Mining Industry Research Book, NESMI Network, 2005.
565

PROCEEDINGS
GOLD GRAIN MORPHOLOGY AND COMPOSITION

IN SOME LOCALITY IN R. MACEDONIA
ABSTRACT
During the water transport alluvial gold is affected by various physical and
chemical factors. It was selected three locality where was studied changes in
chemical composition and morphological forms of gold aggregates: Borov
Dol, Plavica and Alshar where is carried schlich prospection.
Studies have shown that the size of the tested gold aggregates ranges from
30 microns to 1 mm., usually present form of gold aggregates is isometrichirregular shape.
Flakes-flattened shape also quite prevalent as elongated for Gold aggregates
in a Borov Dol as a whole is characterized by constant chemical composition,
more exactly, it is homogeneous and high grade almost everywhere with
purity that ranges from 834 to 981st In Alshar despite the presence of gold in
chemical analysis, with schlich prospection were not discovered gold aggregates.
Violeta STEFANOVA1
Vojo MIRCOVSKI2
Violeta STOJANOVA3,
Gose PETROV4
Zoran PANOV5
Faculty od natural and technical sciences, Stip, R. Macedonia

1
violeta.stefanova@ugd.edu.mk
2
vojo.mircovski@ugd.edu.mk
3
violeta.stojanova@ugd.edu.mk
4
gose.petrov@ugd.edu.mk 5
Keywords
Schlich Prospection, Placer Gold, Morpology, High-Gold Grain
1. INTRODUCTION
In Macedonia known many metallic and non-metal minerals, including gold. Studies of gold in Macedonia have a
long history. There are many areas in which established the presence of endgenic gold. Elluvial-alluvial gold undoubtedly bears the marks of the endogenic gold. The physico-chemical characteristics of such gold affect many
factors among which are: the nature of the primary gold, water power, the morphology of the river and along the
transport and chemical composition of river water.
The importance of these factors varies depending on the climate, the intensity of erosion etc.. As a result of these
processes, the characteristics of primary gold change. The most characteristic morphological and chemical changes (dissolution and precipitation), and the chemical changes are usually represented by forming parts rim offsets
that are enriched with gold.
The large number of occurrences of gold, about thirty,
are more or less studied and provide further impetus for
serious research ([17], [12], [3], [4], [5], [15],
[16],[20],[21],[25],[8], [27], [28], [9], [34], [29]).
Most of these appear economically not interesting but
because of genetic aspect can be quite interesting.
Figure 1. Geological map with placer gold occurrences in R. Macedonia
566

PROCEEDINGS
The main objective of this research was to study the gold aggregates were found with schlich prospection in three
locality wich were selected as representatives of different genetic types of deposits: Borov Dol, Alshar and Plavica
(Figure 1).
2. GEOLOGICAL SETTING
The territory of Macedonia is located in the central belt of Cu-Pb-Zn-Au-Ag mineralization and can distinguish three
different types of gold deposits: 1. carline type; 2. epithermal deposits of gold and silver 3. prophyry deposits of
copper with gold ([22]). The first type belongs Alshar locality, second type Plavica and third type belongs locality
Borov Dol. In all these localities ore mineralization is related to Tertiary magmatizam.
Borov Dol deposit is part of the Bucim-Damjan-Borov Dol ore district and occupies the southern regions. Metallogeny of this area is closely related to the evolution of the Tertiary magmatizam presented with subvolcanic-faces of
volcanic andesite, latite, kvarclatite, trahiriolite etc.. which are the product of intermediate to acidic calc-alkaline
magmatism. For this magmatism are related numerous interesting mineralization of Cu, Fe, Pb-Zn mineralization
and Au ([2], [33], [24], [26]).
At Borov Dol set is over 60 minerals of which the most common are: pyrite,chalcopyrite, magnetite, molibdenite,
hematite, native gold ([19], [32], [33]).
The deposit Plavica affecting eastern parts of Kratovo-Zletovo volcanic area or rather it is located in the central
parts of Plavica volcanic apparatus ([7]). Ore mineralization in Plavica is located in the central part of a large blighted caldera. It is characterized by a complex structure construction and extensive hydrothermal changes ([18]). At
the locality Plavica discovered a rich and varied mineralization represented by: pyrite, chalcopyrite, pirotine, magnetite, chalcopyrotine, shelit, hematite, martite, molibdenite, sphalerite, galena, bornite, tenantite, native gold etc.
([18], [12], [25]). Silificate zones (so-called secondary quartzite) are particularly important as carriers of gold with
average content ranging around 1.29 ppm ([20]).
Alshar locality geotectonic belongs to Vardar tectonic zone, which stretches north from Belgrade to Thessaloniki2
Greece to the south. Specifically Alshar locality, with an area of 21 km belongs to Kozuv district. Kozuv area is a
large volcanic complex located in the southern part of the Republic Macedonia and has been developed in the area
of the mountain Kozuf. Pliocene magmatizam wich is important for geology of Alshar is related to Sb-As-Tl-Au-CuPb-Zn mineral association.
3. METODOLOGY AND SAMLPING

Shlich method during fieldwork was applied. For this method was taken material from 15-20 kg depending on the
availability of material. Then it approached to flushing material and received shlih undergo further processing laboratory which includes magnetic separation and then determination of minerals under stereomicroscope. Aggregates of gold allocated manually.
To determine the morphological characteristics of gold applied scaning electron microscopy in the laboratory for
electron microscopy in Chemistry Faculty of Sofia University. Tests were performed on skaning JMS-electron microscope JEOL-5510. For this method first forms is covered with a thin gold layer in an inert environment using cathode rasprashuvach-JFC-1200Fine Coater.
Quantitative analysis of gold grains do with electronic microprobe. This analyses were conducted in: EvrotestControl-Inc-Lab Analysis X-ray microanallyser X-TRACTOR NORTHERN TN-2000 energy dispersive system as part of
an electronic microscope JEOL LMS 35 CF. Microprobe analyses also were performed in the laboratory at the Institute for photoprocesses the BAS-Sofia. It was used for energy dispersive systems electron microscope Philips CEM
505 firm model EDAX 9100/60 with tension of 20 kV.
4. RESULTS AND DISCUSION

When grains of gold will get rid of the parent rocks, physically and mechanically deform depending on the length of
transport. Measuring the shape of gold grains mostly circular form, the degree of curvature and folattness may indicate the type of source and length of transportation ([11], [10]). According to Styles, ([30]), measuring the size and
shape of the gold aggregates provide little information about the origin of alluvial gold. Many angular and irregular
shapes, show that alluvial gold is near its primary source as abrasive and circular forms suggest the transport of
several kilometers.
567

PROCEEDINGS
The size of the found gold aggregates at the Borov Dol locality ranges from 150 microns up to 1 mm. The morphology of the aggregates is different. Commonly occur: an elongated shape, isometric form, scaly and globular shape
(Figure 2). These forms indicate the proximity of primary mineralization. If gold is subjected to secondary processes,
then there was curvature of the edges and smoothing the surface and increases the flattness of grains. Flattened
form of gold due to the significant transport of gold and primarily due to the small fortress and malleable of gold as
a mineral.
Morphology of gold aggregates in Borov Dol locality is relatively preserved and roundness indicates that it was subjected to seconary processes. Such characteristic suggests that this gold probably has similar characteristics as the
primary gold ([13]) and it has long undergo because transport form of gold depends on the length of transport.
Taking into account these data we can say that the gold from Borov Dol belongs to the group of high grade gold
([35]) with a purity that ranges from 834 to 981. As impurities in the composition of gold Borov Dol, contains silver
which varies from 0.82-15.87% and average content is about 7%. Low content of silver may indicate a higher temperature mesotermal deposits, ([30]). It may have noticed an increase of finesse of gold over transportation. In a
number of aggregates is common zonality where the central parts of the grains are richer in gold and peripheral or
peripheral parts are richer in silver. ([28]).
Figure 2. Morphological forms of appearance and details of gold aggregates from theBorov Dol locality
- general appearance of elongated spindly gold aggregate
B- detail of previous aggregate-layered structure
C- detail of larger crystals of the same aggregate
D- general appearance of the loaf, gold round aggregate
Table 1. Medium Golden aggregates content in samples from Borov Dol
BD-4
From these tests for chemical composition is determined that

it is native gold which is characterized by high purity (Table 1).
568
Au
Ag
Cu
Fe
91.60
7.62
0.46
0.026
BD-5
90.79
8.47
0.47
0.048
BD-6
98.15
0.99
0.46
0.056
BD-9
88.44
10.55
0.60
BD-10
87.04
11.73
0.48
0.052
medium content
91.20
7.87
0.49
0.036

PROCEEDINGS
Studies on the relationship between the composition of gold and length of transportation, have shown that there is
no change in microchemical entry od alluvial gold during transport, which is not the case with morphological forms
or form of aggregates of gold ([6]). Taking into account the fact that gold aggregates in general have a homogeneous composition (measurment performed in the center of the aggregates) can be assumed that the gold aggregates
come from one source.The composition of gold and its morphological forms can be used as a direct prospecting
indicator for porphyry copper mineralizations ([23]).
The deposit Plavica is epithermal system of high sulfidenization type of mineralization ([20]). Polymettalic ocurrences in this system have been studied since Roman times for the remaining of the old mining - slag, old undermine etc. Research in this area is conducted with larger or smaller cuts until today and can say that this is one of
significant copper deposits with polymetallic character.Our investigations were aimed at egzogenic gold and for
that purpose from Plavica locality were taken 15 schlich probe and found a total of 44 gold grains of different sizes.
In order to examine the morphology of the gold aggregates were found, tests are performed on scaning electron
microscope in which was reported that the size of the grains is different and varies from about 50 to 200 microns.
Grains are mostly characterized by irregular shape-isometric form. In general form can be distinguished: isometric
elongated shapes that can be deemed to have beads that are suspended near the roots sources. Then there are
irregular shapes dendritic, flakes forms probably postpone away from primary sources and also can be transported
at considerable distances, ([31]) (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Morphological forms of appearance and details of gold aggregates from Plavica locality
A-isometric form of aggregate gold
B-gold sets with irregular shape
C-isometric form of gold aggregate
D-Druze of crystals-tiny detail from Fig. C
The ability to transfer or transport among others depends from the thickness of the grains. Gold grains fromPlavica
by size fall into the class of very small grains. ([13]). Almost all grains of gold were observed stratified construction
of gold aggregates. In the gold aggregates are observed small crystal forms. In general basic feature of alluvial gold
are characteristic different morphological forms. Near the primary deposit, prevailing elongated and dendritic
forms while octaedral crystal forms are very common. With increasing length of transport, prevail flakes forms.
To determine the chemical composition of gold aggregates analyses of microprobe are made (Table 2).
569

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2. Medium Golden aggregates content in samples from Plavica locality
Au
Ag
Cu
Fe
Pl - 1
96.08
2.94
0.45
0.073
Pl -3
93.79
5.52
0.44
0.052
Pl - 4
93.56
5.81
0.42
0.095
0.113
Pl - 5
79.01
20.47
0.40
Pl - 11
97.56
1.76
0.44
0.073
Pl -12
86.51
12.74
0.40
0.123
Pl - 13
95.35
3.78
0.42
0.073
Pl - 14
94.38
4.75
0.55
Medium content
92.03
7.22
0.44
0.075
The accompanying results show that gold from Plavica is high grade (842-994). Chemical analyzes of gold aggregates show that silver is an element that is commonly found as admixture and can sometimes be found copper and
iron content in a few %. The content of silver ranges between 0.18% to maximum 21.7%. Average silver content in
Plavica is 7:22%. In alluvial gold, silver content can vary from 32 to 50 weight percent (with an average of 630 finesse ) and other elements not spend a 1 wt.%. ([1]). Taken as a whole aggregates of gold are characterized by constant composition, ie it is homogeneous and visokoprobno almost everywhere.The other impurities found in gold is
copper with content between 0.25 - 0.68%. Iron is much smaller content ranging from 0:08 to 0:28%.
The third locality on which conduct schlich prospetion is Alshar which is a deposit of arsenic and antimony as well
as significant quantities of gold content. Gold mineralization was first mentioned in the 1974th The analysis of the
results showed that the geological, mineralogical and chemical characteristics and hydrotherm alteration suggest
similarities with carline type of gold in the U.S. ([14], [16]) by the Alshar mineralization gold is stored not only in sediments but also in volcanite. Alshar deposit is divided into three parts: northern part dominated mineralization of
talium, central part of Sb-As mineralization with interesting content and gold, south which is characterized as carline type of mineralization.
Despite the established presence of gold with schlich prospection not found gold aggregates. Probably for this reason submicorscopic size of gold (<0.2 m) wich is one of the features of carline types of gold deposit ([36]).
Taking into account all previous findings and the results we can say that gold aggregates were examined according
to the size of grains form, indicate the proximity of primary mineralization from which originated the gold.
REFERENCES
[1]
Bahna B., Smirnov A., Chovan M. & Bakos F.: River transport induced hanges in chemical composition of alluvial gold
(documented on localities of Western Carpathians).In: Geol. Carpath. (Bratislava), 53 (spec. iss.), 2002,105 107.
[2]
Bogoevski K., Denkovski G., Bandilov L.,: Studija za zlato vo Makedonija so poseben osvrt na rudniot reon Bucim-Damjan-Borov
Dol, Strucen Fond Geoinstitut, Skopje, 1990, pp. 125
[3]
Bogoevski, K., Denkovski, G., Georgiev, D.,: Geological features of gold occurences in the Strumica area, Republic of Macedonia.
Geologica Macedonica, Stip, Vol. 10, 1996, 47-56.
[4]
Bogoevski K.: Zlatoto vo Makedonija. Naucno-istrazuvacki proekt, Rudarsko-geoloski fakultet Stip, 1997, pp. 358
[5]
Bogoevski K.: Gold in Macedonia-geology, metalogenic, features, ore occurrences, gold ore deposits and their evaluation. Special Issue No. 7, 1998, pp. 249
[6]
Chapman R. J., Leake R. C., Moles N.R., Earls G., Cooper C., Harington K., Berzins R.: The aplication of Microchemical Analysis od
Alluvial Gold Grains to the Understanding of Complex Local and Regional Gold Mineralizaction: A case Study in the Irish and
Scottish Caledonides, Economic Geology, Vol 95. 2000, pp. 1753-1773
[7]
Ivanov T., Denkovski G.: Geologija na metalogenetskiot jazel Plavic-Zlatica vo Kratovsko-Zletovskata metalogenetska oblast.
Zbornik Radova IX Kongres geologa Jugoslavije, , Sarjevo, 1978, pp 767-777
[8]
Kovacev V, Stefanova V., Boev B., Mladenov V.: Stream Sediments and Bleg Analysis by Prospecting of Gold in Alshar (Carlin
th
Type Deposit), Macedonia.Proceedings XVIII Congress of the Carpathian-Balkan Geological Association, Belgrade, Serbia, 2006,
pp. 281-285
[9]
Kovacev V., Stefanova V., Nedelkov R., Mladenov V.: Eluvial-alluvial gold from gold-copper occurrence Borov Dol (R. Macedonia).
Part I: Geochemistry of stream sediments and their relation to the source rocks and ores. Review of the Bulgarian Geological
Society, vo. 68, part 1-3, 2007, pp. 66-76
570

PROCEEDINGS
[10]
Knight J.B., Morison S.R. and Mortensen J.K.: The relationship between placer gold particle shape, rimming, and distance of
fluvial transport as exemplified by gold from the Klondike District, Yukon Territory, Canada; Economic Geology, v. 94, 1999, p.
635648
[11]
Mudaliar G.G., Richards J.P., Eccles D.R.: Gold, Platinum and Diamond Placer Deposits in Alluvial Gravels, Whitecourt, Alberta,
EUB/AGS Special Report 089 (May 2007), 2007, pp 35
[12]
Mudrinic S.: Retki i plemeniti metali u Cu-polimetalicnom lezistu Plavica Zletovo (Istocna Makedonija) XI kongres geologa Jugoslavije, Tara; 1986, str.193-204
[13]
. .: . . , , 1973, . 347
[14]
Persival T. J.: Preliminary Geological report on the Alsar District, Macedonia-Nassau Ltd., Inter. Report, 1990, 44 p.
[15]
Persival T. J., Radke A., Jankovic S., Diskinson F.: Gold Mineralization of the Carlyn type- in the Alshar district, SR Maceodonia,
Yugoslavia.,- in Y.T. Maurice, ed. Proc. the Eight IAGOD symposoium Ottawa, Canada Proceeding., E. Schweizerbaritcshe Verlag,
Stuttgart, 1992, 637-646
[16]
Persival T. J., Radtke A.: Sedimentary Rock-hosted disseminated Gold Mineralization in the Alshar District, Macedonia-The Cand.
Mineralogist, 32, 1994, 649-655
[17]
Serafimovski T.:Prognoza aluvijalnih lezista Istocne Makedonije. Rudarsko-geoloski fakultet Beograd, Diplomski rad, 1978, pp. 34
[18]
.: -, , , 1990, . 380
[19]
Serafimovski T., Tudzarov N., Mitevski G.: Mineralen sostav I paragentski odnosi vo porfirskoto bakarno naogaliste Borov Dol.
Geologica Macedonica, Vol. 6, 1992 pp. 87-98
[20]
Serafimovski T., Rakic S.: New geochemical data concerning gold related to silification zones in The Plavica volcanic structure,
Eastern Macedonia. Mineral deposits: Processes to Processing, Vol. 1 , 1999, pp. 585-588
[21]
Serafimovski T., Boev B., Tasev G.: New interpretation of the lithogeochemical data from Alshar epithermal Au-mineralized
area, Geologica Macedonica, Vol. 13, 1999, pp. 1-11.
[22]
Serafimovski T., Volkov V. A. and Tasev G.: Types of gold deposits in Macedonia. Prv Kongres na Geolozite na Republika Makedonija-Ohrid, Zbornik na trudovi, 2008, str. 187- 192.
[23]
Serafimovski V., Stefanova V., Volkov A. V.: Dwarf Copper-Gold Porphyry Deposit of the Buchim-Damjan-Borov Dol Ore District,
Republic of Macedonia (FYROM). Geologiya Rudnykh Mestorozhdenii, Vol. 52, No3, 2010, pp 203-220.
[24]
Stefanova V. Nedelkov R., Moritz R.: Magmatizam of the Borov Dol copper occurrence. Annual Scientific Conference of the
Bulgarian Geological Society, Proccedings, 2004, pp.75-77
[25]
Stefanova V.: Eluvijalno-deluvijalni pojavi na zlato povrzani za tercieren magmatizam vo R. Makedonija. Doktoska disertacija,
2005, pp.198
[26]
Stefanova V., Serafimovski T., Nedelkov V., Kovacev V.: Petrological and Geochemical characteristics of the volcanic rocks in the
Buchim District. Geologica Macedonica, Vol. 20, 2006, pp. 1-11
[27]
Stefanova V., Serafimovski T., Nedelkov R.: Mineralogical and chemical characteristic of the most important minerals in the
volcanic rocks of the Kratovo-Zletovo volcanic area, Geologica Macedonica, Vol. 21, 2007, pp. 1-10
[28]
Stefanova V., Kovacev V., Mladenov V., Stanimirova C.: Eluvial-alluvial gold from gold-copper occurrence Borov Dol (R. Macedonia). Part II: Mineralogy of gold and stream sediments. Review of the Bulgarian Geological Society, vo. 68, part 1-3, 2007, pp. 7791
[29]
Stefanova V., Serafimovski T., Tasev G. and von Quadt A.: Placer gold prospecting around the Tertiary occurrences in the Republic of Macedonia. (Eds. A. von Quadt & T. Serafimovski) Diversity of copper and gold deposits in the Eastern Europe Balkan, Carpathian and Rhodopean belts: tectonic, magmatic and geochronological investigations; SCOPES Project-International Conference, May 29 - June 02, 2012 - Izgrev Hotel, Stip, Macedonia, 2012, pp. 33
[30]
Styles M. T.: Alluvilal Gold Caracterisation in Exploration Planning:Project Summary Report BGS Technical Report WC/95/38,
1995
[31]
. .: - .
. , . 1990
[32]
Tudzarov N.: Metalogenija na naogalisteto na bakar Borov Dol, doktorska disertacija, Stip, 1993, pp. 195
[33]
Tudzarov N.: The zonality of suplphide minerals and geochemical association in the Borov Dol deposit. Geologica Macedonica,
Vol. 8, No. 1, 1994, pp.35-38
[34]
Volkov A.V., Stefanova V., Serafimovski T., Sidorov A.A. R.: Native Gold of the Porphyry Copper Mineralization in the Borov Dol
Deposit (Republic of Macedonia). Doklady Earth Sciences, Vol. 422, No. 7, 2008, pp. 1013-1017
[35]
Zaharova E. M.: Mineralogia Rossipei, Nedra, Moskva, 1994, pp 191
[36]
Zhou Y., Wang K.: Gold in the Jinya Carlin-type Deposit: Characterization and Implications, Journal of Minerals & Materials
Characterization & Engineering, Vol. 2, No.2, 2003, pp 83-100
571

PROCEEDINGS
IMPACT OF THE WORKFLOW FROM QUARRYS

ON THE SURROUNDING ENVIRONMENT
CASE STUDY - SC CUPRUMIN S.A. ABRUD
ABSTRACT
Angelica DRGHICI1
Gheorghe GHEIE2
Lorand TOTH3
Marius KOVACS4
Cosmin ILIE5

angela.draghici@insemex.ro 2 gheorghe.ghetie@insemex.ro 3 lorand.toth@insemex.ro
4
marius.kovacs@insemex.ro 5 cosmin.ilie@insemex.ro
In quarries in which exploitation and capitalization of useful mineral resources is carried out, as in stone quarries, the most used blasting techniques are the ones that use auger holes or bore holes.
The general concept of a blasting plan or of a blasting monograph has to
take into account several factors regarding the adaptation of the explosive
to the type of rock massif, respectively the development of a maximum
number of free surfaces in order to facilitate the reflexion of shock waves
that lead to the fissuring or displacement of the rock massif. The blasting of
an explosive charge located in the drilled hole into the massif has a lot of
productive effects, but others are non-productive.
Before starting the drilling of holes for blasting operations in an open-pit
mine, or stone quarry, the blasting is required to be designed, fact that has
to be based on a good knowledge of the field in which the work shall be carried out.
The quarry exploitation of useful mineral substances deposits by using the
power of explosives has an important negative impact on the environment.
Blastings have a solid impact on the environment, reflected by:
- Air pollution with dust and gases;
- Disposing of material;
- Achievement of an over-pressure in the aerial shock-wave front;
- Seismic effect development;
- Powerful phonic pollution.
Each of these elements has impact on the environment and there have to be
developed specific measures for mitigating the impact, so that the influence
parameters to range between acceptable limits.
In this paper work, there are analysed the negative effects on the air environmental factor due to blasting works carried out in quarries and there are
examined the prevention, protection and restoration techniques, which can
and have to be taken into account according to legislation in force, as well
as the serious negative influences on the adjacent area.
Keywords
Blasting, Air Pollution, Dust, Gases, Safety and Health at Work
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
Quarrying of minerals using explosives - especially if we apply blasting technology for ore extraction, has a strong
negative impact on the environment and on workers' health.
Impact intensity is dependent on the amount of explosive used in blasting, the worst situation occurring in the use
of heavy blasting with the use of large quantities of explosives.
573

PROCEEDINGS
Their presence is felt in the front during the blasting and the action of atmospheric factors, gas dispersion is
achieved in time.
The gases are accompanied by dust resulting from detonation of explosives and rock displacement.
Operating activities of the quarry area (drilling, ore loading, transport, crushing, grading) in turn generates respirable dust in the atmosphere in high concentrations.
2. ASPECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS OF THE USE OF EXPLOSIVES

2.1 Air pollution by dust and gas
Technology and equipment used in quarry work must satisfy hygienic and security personnel (by limiting concentrations of particulates and gases released into the operating area) and in addition shall entail no adverse effects on
surrounding areas.
The literature shows that quarry, blasting a load of explosives placed in a drilled hole in massive has a multitude of
effects of some productive and therefore desirable, but some unproductive.
Effects of unproductive blasting refer to following problems:
excessive throwing of rocks at distant operating perimeter;
excessive crushing from blasting of a part of rock direct effect on the level of pollution (dust and gas) of adjacent protected areas;
deformation and cracking in massive rock behind the working face by the shock wave propagation in the
form of elastic vibrations;
vibrations induced in the surrounding massif;
Air overpressure - the effect of the massive earthquake as well as the construction of the adjacent areas;
Basically, blasting the massive impact on the environment is reflected by:
air pollution by dust and gas;
throwing of the material;
creating a positive pressure in the air shock wave front;
producing a seismic effect;
strong noise and vibrations.
Each of these elements have an effect on the environment and require specific measures to mitigate the impact, so
influence parameters to join the acceptable limits.
Massive shooting from quarries as a source of air pollution, forming a cloud throughout the blasting containing
dust and toxic gases moving over longer distances or smaller neighborhood territory polluting the working area.
Another source of air pollution is the release of gases. Each explosive is characterized by the release of a volume of
gas in the atmosphere, gases represented by CO2, CO, NOx. Volume of water vapor is not taken into account because they condense time and influence positively the degree of dusting.
Environmental pollution occurs both gas resulting from blasting, as well as the gas evolved from the ore.
Reduce the amount of toxic gases can be achieved only by improving recipe explosives to get the balance of oxygen as small.
Quarry blasting leads to a rapid release of the products of explosive atmosphere (gases), characterized by a specific
energy, which develops a pressure wave (shock wave) represented by air. This shock wave is characterized by an
excess, or a sudden increase in pressure above atmospheric pressure, causing air vibrations.[1]
Overpressure wave front and the dynamic air pressure have negative effects on buildings located at a certain distance from the explosion. Destructive effect of atmospheric overpressure depends on the value of this overpressure.
Given the effect of air shock wave is necessary to establish a safe distance between the use of explosives and any
construction in the area.
Seismic effect on the environment
Perform blasting in quarries, using large quantities of explosive causes a seismic effect of ground shaking, with direct implications on the stability objectives in the area (fig. 1).
574

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Influence of blasting on buildings in the area
Oscillations sensing elements are varied terrain, such as civil and industrial works of art (surface or underground). In
some cases, they are also affected by natural areas and steep slopes especially the surrounding landscape.[2]
Detonations of explosive charges in a homogeneous unlimited distinguish four different areas of activity effects
explosion phenomenon.
In the first three areas generated by the explosion wave propagation leads to crushing, breaking, throwing and tear
massif and in the fourth the occurrence of elastic deformations, ie land of oscillations whose main parameters can
be determined by direct measurement or math.
Design parameters of shootings must take into account the danger caused by vibrations induced field, the main
parameter that characterizes the seismic effect is the oscillation speed particles.
Gases resulting from the explosion is accompanied by dust driven by detonation, but quantities of dust are difficult
to quantify the influence of various parameters such as:
degree of fracturing of the rock displaced;
petrographic nature of the material in rock fractures;
natural moisture of the rock;
atmospheric humidity;
free front of the blasting surface;
schedule and placement method of mine holes;
stemming methodology of the mine holes.
Apart from the direct influence of seismic effect of explosions caused massive quarry goals surface stability may
occur negative influences on land expressed by:
reactivation of ground movement;
generation of landslide;
Diving phenomenon of liquefaction products made of rocks less consolidated land;
breaking of the steps of quarry.
Reducing seismic effect can be achieved by:
establishing a proper safety distance;
limiting the explosive charge;
front orientation perpendicular to the blasting;
sequential blasting performance with a time delay set correctly;
creation of surfaces of discontinuity.
575

PROCEEDINGS
3. ASPECTS OF THE INFLUENCE OF EXPLOITATION FROM SC CUPRU MIN S.A. ABRUD OVER THE SURROUNDING ENVIRONMENT
Description of the activity
The main objective of S.C. CUPRU MIN S.A. Abrud is copper ore exploitation in Rosia Poieni deposit (Fig. 2),
transport, preparation and delivery cuprifer ore.
Useful substances are obtained after processing include copper, gold, silver and sulfur. These elements are found in
cuprifer concentrate, which is the final product of the process plant.
As a secondary activity of S.C. CUPRU MIN S.A. Abrud is industrially andesite resources exploitation from the roof
of cuprifer ore deposit Rosia Poieni namely the Poieni andesite (Fig. 3) of Hill Jgheabului quarry (quarry northeast
Rosia Poieni) and limestone from Quarry Prul Romneasa.
Finished products derived from this third-party mining activity are: crushed stone, chippings, sand, limestone,
rough stone and limestone for lime.
The preparation work are done by excavation pit tailings both steps in which ore is extracted, and the top quartile.
Figure 2. Overview of Roia Poieni quarry
Figure 3. Processing platform for andesite of Dealul Jgheabului quarry
Quarry technology work includes the following phases:

drilling of the blasting holes;
blasting with explosives;
uploading unrocked material;
material transport from the working front.
Drilling boreholes drilling is done with SBS - 250, drilling establishing the network so that the volume drilling for
mining mass to be minimal amount.
At Rosia Poieni applicable technologies blasting holes with explosives or mine boreholes. Boreholes technology
differs from the normal level only by the number of points of initiation and the number of threads that detonating
fuse for each borehole.
Activity in the Quarry Rosia Poieni, is a source of air pollution with particulate matter mainly, released during the
drilling, blasting, transport ore from front to crusher, ore conveyor flow and storage of this.
Potential environmental impact maintained throughout the period of operation of the mine, manifested by high
concentrations of particulate matter and extreme weather situations such as periods of drought and high winds,
they can be transported long distances involved and the relatively large negative effects both on the environment
and on the adjacent settlements quarry household.
Figure 4. Working tront of Dealul Jgheabului quarry
Figure 5. Unrocked material uploading from Dealul Jgheabului quarry
576

PROCEEDINGS
In the research conducted by INCD INSEMEX in 2012 were made determinations of respirable particulate matter at
the workplaces of SC Cuprumin S.A. Abrud.
By Government Decision 1/2012 amending and supplementing Government Decision no. 1.218/2006 are set minimum safety and health at work to ensure the protection of workers from risks related to chemical agents.[3]
Methodology for determining respirable dust working environment
Determination of respirable dust in the work environment is in accordance with the test procedure for determining
dust PM4 accredited by RENAR. Respirable dust concentration was determined gravimetrically according to STAS
10813/76.
The principle is to retain the dust on a filter by passing a specified volume of air. The method consists of air aspiration from atmosphere of the workplace and retaining dust on the type FM filter.
Sampling equipment used in powder retains overall roughly dust, leaving only filter to deposit the respirable fraction.
For determination of the respirable dust INCD INSEMEX used sampling pump equipment that was APEX type respectively TUFF type (fig.6, fig.7).
Figure 6. APEX collection assembly
Figure 7. TUFF collection assembly
Presentation of determinations that were made

The results of the measurement of powders were reported in accordance with legal provisions in force, Government
Decision 1/2012.[4]
Particulate matter concentrations measured at SC Cuprumin S.A. Abrud workplaces are shown in Table 1.
Table 1.
No.
crt.
Section
Roia Poieni Quarry
Workplace
Occupational
hazards determined
* The average concentration of respirable dust

determined at 8 h
3
[mg / m ]
The concentration of
respirable dust according
to G.D. 1/2012
3
[mg / m ]
Observations
Bench 880 (ore)

3
EKG-18 (8m )
0,189
SiO2= 24,1 %
Bench 895 (ore)Drill nr 10
0,32
SiO2= 24,1 %
0,48
SiO2= 24,1 %
Respirable particulate matter
1,451
0,1
SiO2= 24,1 %
Bench 895 (ore)between Drill no 8

and 10
1,55
SiO2= 24,1 %
Bench 880 ore

transport
0,998
SiO2= 24,1 %
Bench 1014
(ore+baring)
0,38
SiO2= 24,1 %
577

PROCEEDINGS
No.
crt.
Section
Workplace
Occupational
hazards determined
* The average concentration of respirable dust

determined at 8 h
3
[mg / m ]
The concentration of
respirable dust according
to G.D. 1/2012
3
[mg / m ]
Observations
Drill no 17
Transport sector
Crusher KKD Relay
strip and ore storage
Dealul Jgheabului
Quarry
ofu Platform
Dealul Piciorului
Processing plant
Bench 1060 (baring)

Drill no 7
0,42
SiO2= 24,1 %
Bench 1000
(ore+baring)
0,47
SiO2= 24,1 %
Bench 1045 (baring)
0,26
Drive head B1,

Head back B2
0,38
SiO2= 24,1 %
Drive head B2,

Head back B3
0,67
SiO2= 24,1 %
Drive head B3,

Head back B4
0,58
SiO2= 24,1 %
Drive head B4
Gyratory crusher
loading / unloading
on B1
SiO2= 24,1 %
0,382
0,1
0,199
SiO2= 24,1 %
Ore crusher surface (KKD)
0,38
SiO2= 24,1 %
Ore crusher drive

head KKD
2,89
SiO2= 24,1 %
Near the
vibrating sieve no.
2
2,49
SiO2=53,45
%
Gyratory crusher
3,16
SiO2=53,45
%
Excavator EKG 4,5

3
m
0,1
0,311
SiO2=53,45
%
Primary crushing
Platform
0,322
SiO2=53,45
%
Drill
1,62
SiO2=53,45
%
Workshop platform
4,28
Ore deposit EKG
0,29
Feeders + power
strip mill
Concentrate
transport depot
0,1
2,82
0,1
0,25
578
SiO2=53,45
%
SiO2=24,1 %
SiO2=24,1 %
SiO2=9,2 %
Whitewash Prepa0,38
ration Station
* Concentration was calculated at 8 hours weighted by the exposure of the worker and the content of free crystalline SiO2
SiO2= 24,1 %
0,1
SiO2=7,85 %

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 8. Graphical representation of respirable dust concentration is shown
From the analysis and the results of measurements, it is found exceeding the maximum permissible concentration
of respirable dust in suspension in all workplaces analyzed, they exceeded the permissible limit of 0,099 4,18
mg/m3.
4. MEASURES TO MINIMIZE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT

Technical measures to reduce the amount of dust are the stemming use of water, land surface watering, water injecting massive extent of a chemical foam carpet on the steps, use of explosives and zero oxygen balance etc.
Although these measures are known, they were not widely applied because they lead to a substantial increase in
the cost of blasting.
Optimal solutions for implementing the decrease environmental pollution must meet minimum criteria in terms of
cost efficiency. This can be done by certain technical parameters influence the formation and distribution of dust
and toxic gas cloud. In addressing the issue is based on the idea that cloud of dust and gas parameters differ from
the surrounding atmosphere by temperature and molecular weight.
Temperature and molecular weight difference between the two environments (cloud-to-air) cause a buoyant force,
whose magnitude is dependent on the concentration and size of dust particles. Reducing the influence of the dust
cloud can be achieved by changing parameters of the cloud gas by choosing the type of explosive that factors influencing the gas molecular weight and temperature.
Due to the temperature difference between the cloud and air products, water vapor condenses, providing a reduction in the amount of dust in the cloud, by wetting dust cloud and thus reduce pressure.
Global use of explosives is an important source of atmospheric pollution of various kinds of gas, pollution influenced by the types of explosives used.
It is important to note the fact that the degree of "dusting" of gas depends on temperature gas cloud. Distribution
range depends greatly on the degree type of explosive used and this are basically indicate explosives containing
water in their structure, which causes the greatest amount of vapor.
579

PROCEEDINGS
In such situations over rock displaced phase transition provides a "steam-water" resulting in the appearance of vacuum inside the cloud, its compression, wet dust by vapor condensation and deposition thereof.
Highest acceleration lift the cloud of dust and gas is recorded when using dynamite or TNT, which leads to cloud
moving over longer distances, while explosives based on ammonium nitrate causes a lower acceleration up to 5-7
times.
Using different methods of annihilation or reduction of harmful emissions of dust and gas (using emulsion explosive
initiation modern systems, means of treatment and the annihilation of the cloud of dust and gas, water tamping
holes, massive irrigation water etc.). allow lower dusting with 55-60%, and 35-50% nitrous oxide.
Consequently, it appears that mitigate the negative effects of the quarry explosions by reducing dustiness of the
atmosphere can be achieved by proper choice of the explosive.
5. CONCLUSIONS
Making massive career blastings by using large amounts of explosive has a strong impact on the environment by polluting the air with dust and gas, high pressures in the front air, shock waves, seismic effect (vibrations) with negative influence on the stability of objectives in the area.
Reducing air pollution is achievable only through proper choice of the explosive, an explosive or release any
amounts as small as toxic and pollutant gases (CO2, CO, NO) and provide a "removal of dust" as soon as possible in the gas cloud. Analysis of six categories of explosives commonly used in Romania lead to the conclusion that the increased pollution is caused by the use of dynamite and TNT, and the most favorable situation
is obtained for explosive emulsions.
Activities taking place in the SC CUPRUMIN SA are a source of air pollution with particulate matter mainly,
released during the drilling, blasting, (ore) transportation from front to crusher, conveyor flow and storage
of it.
Potential environmental impact maintained throughout the period of operation of the mine, manifested by
high concentrations of particulate matter and extreme weather situations such as dry periods and high
winds, they can be transported long distances involved and the relatively large negative effects both on the
environment and on the adjacent settlements career household.
Quarrying adversely affect the state of the environment - soil, water, air - and the restoration of initial state
require large expenses firstly the degraded and covered surfaces for the reintegration into the economic
circuit.
To assess occupational hazards were conducted measurements at the SC CUPRUMIN S.A. Abrud work places
to assess the exposure to occupational risk factors during working time.
By analyzing the results, we observed exceeded the maximum permissible concentration of respirable dust
3
in suspension of all workplaces with 0.099 4.18 mg/m , a situation which requires improving the technical
and organizational measures to reduce the level of pollutants and disease prevention for the workers occupational diseases caused by harmful agents.
In order to reduce the concentration of respirable dust in suspension from the workplaces at SC CUPRUMIN
SA, is recommended primarily evaporation retardant solution application for automobile routes or crusher
working fronts and technical solutions to combat dust from drilling holes in quarry and the area of the KKD
crusher.
REFERENCES
nd
[1]
Fodor Dumitru BLASTING engineering materials and working techniques, 2 volume., Publishing House. Namaste Timioara and,
Corvin Deva, 2007
[2]
INCD INSEMEX Petroani - Technical expertise for revaluation of special conditions workplaces under Decision nr.1284/2011 SC CUPRUMIN S.A. Abrud, 2012
[3]
Resolution 1 of January 4, 2012 - amending and supplementing Government Decision no. 1.218/2006 for setting minimum requirements for safety and health at work to ensure the protection of workers from risks related to chemical agents and amending Government Decision no. 1.093/2006 establishing minimum health and safety requirements for the protection of workers from risks related to exposure to carcinogens or mutagens at work and the Government Decision no. 355/2007 on the supervision of health workers.
[4]
SR EN 689:2003 - Workplace air. Guidance for assessing exposure to chemical agents for comparison with limit values and measurement strategy.
580

PROCEEDINGS
ARSENIC IN MINE WATERS FROM ABANDONED

BASE-METAL AND GOLD MINING SITES IN SERBIA
ABSTRACT
Neboja ATANACKOVI1
Veselin DRAGII
Vladimir IVANOVI
Jana STOJKOVI
Marina UK
Petar PAPI
University of Belgrade, Faculty of Mining and Geology, Belgrade, Serbia

1
n.atanackovic@rgf.rs
Arsenic is a toxic element recognized as one of the main contaminants of

mine waters and ultimately can cause deterioration in the quality of
groundwater and surface water bodies in the vicinity and downstream of the
mining facilities. Serbia has a long history of mineral resources exploration
and mining. Many of these historical mining sites are affected by the AMD
(Acid Mine Drainage) processes which lead to uncontrolled discharge of the
mine waters enriched with arsenic and other metalloids and heavy metals. In
a period 2009-2012, regional scale sampling campaign was conducted as a
part of a Study of possible negative influence that these waters may have on
the environment.
Mine waters from Cu, Pb-Zn, Fe, Au, Sb, Bi, and Mo deposits were sampled at
41 abandoned mining sites. Total of 60 mine water samples were analyzed.
According to the pH values, 60% of mine waters are in range of 6 - 8, while
around 40% are acid waters with pH below 5. pH value is significantly corre2+
lated with TDS and metal content. In cation composition, dominant are Ca
2ions, while in anion composition highest content have HCO3 and SO4 ions.
Arsenic concentrations in the analyzed waters cover wide range of values,
with 40% of samples having concentration above 10 g/l. Highest arsenic
concentration (up to 4 200 g/l) were measured in mine waters tracing from
abandoned copper open pit mine. Analyzing the relation of arsenic with the
content of heavy metals and pH value, no significant correlation can be established. This points that the concentration of this element is not strictly
related to the mining sites affected by AMD, but mainly controlled by local
mineralization paragenesis, especially presence of arsenopyrite, enargite and
other As bearing minerals within the ore body and surrounding rock.
Keywords
Mine waters, Arsenic, Abandoned mines, Serbia
1. INTRODUCTION
For the past few decades, arsenic has been recognized as one of the most toxic element in water environment. Depending on pH-Eh conditions, inorganic arsenic can be found as water compound in the form of arsenite As (III) or
as arsenate As (V). Provisional guideline value for the concentration of As in drinking water is 10 g/l [1], which has
been adapted in many countries as maximal allowable concentration in water intended for daily consumption. Elevated As concentration in groundwater were detected in parts of Argentina, Mexico, USA, Hungary, Serbia, Romania, Bangladesh, India, Nepal, Burma, Cambodia, Pakistan, China and Vietnam, mostly related to aquifers in unconsolidated Quaternary sediments [2].
Arsenic is a part of many minerals, primarily from the sulfide group, which represent or are part of the main ore
minerals of the metallic mineral deposits. Processes of oxidation and dissolving of the sulfide minerals, mainly arsenopyrite, lead to the increase of arsenic concentration in mine waters. Arsenic may also be mobilized in aqueous
environments where cyanide has been used to leach gold ores, resulting in increase of water pH [3]. Elevated arsenic concentrations in mine waters (maximum As value of 72 mg/l, recorded at Iron Duke mine, Zimbabwe) were re-
581

PROCEEDINGS
ported at many active and abandoned mining sites [4]. Numerous studies point out the relation between As and Fe
(oxide) hydroxides through adsorption/desorption processes, that are strongly controlled by pH-Eh conditions [5],
[6].
The objective of the research reported in this paper was to identify the abandoned mining sites with presence of a
mine water discharge and to assess the quality of mine waters originating from historical mining operations. The
paper describes the hydrochemistry and distribution of arsenic in mine waters at abandoned mining sites in Serbia,
featuring different types of sulfide ore deposits.

Water samples for chemical analyses were collected at the points of discharge of mine waters from adits and pools
formed at the lowest stages of open-cast mines. The study included 60 mine water samples from 41 abandoned
mining sites. The study encompassed mine waters from Cu, Pb-Zn, Fe, Au, Sb, Bi, and Mo deposits in central, eastern, western and southern Serbia (Fig. 1). Measurements of pH, electrical conductivity (EC) and temperature were
performed in the field with a Mi805 instrument fitted with an MA851D/1 multiparameter probe. The mine water
samples were generally stored and transported in 1.5 and 0.5 liter polyethylene (PET) bottles, without filtration of
the samples. A smaller portion of each sample was acidified with HNO3 solution (down to pH<2) to prevent the sedimentation of metals. Sample dry residues after drying at 180C, total hardness and KMnO4 demand were tested in
the laboratory. Gravimetry was used to determine TDS and volumetry to test for hardness and KMnO4 consumption.
With regard to macrocomponents, Na+, Ca2+, Mg2+, K+ were
determined by the AAS (Atomic
Absorption Spectrometry), CO32-,
HCO3-, Cl- by the volumetric
method, while SO42- was determined by the turbidimetric
method. The concentrations of
NH4+, NO3-, NO2- and P were established by means of UV-VIS
spectrophotometry, and silica
concentrations by ICP-OES spectrometry. The concentrations of
metals and metalloids (Fe total,
Mn total, Cr total Al, Zn total, Cu
total, Pb total, Cd total, Ni total,
As total) were determined by
AAS, as were the specific elements depending on the types of
deposits (Mo total, F, Sb total, U
total). The concentrations of
+
NH4 , NO2 , Cr, Cd, Ni and Pb in
most of the samples were below
the detection limit, so these elements were not considered further
Figure 1. Groundwater sampling location
582

PROCEEDINGS
3. RESULTS AND DISSCUSION

Hydrochemistry of mine waters
Based on the median value for concentration of total dissolved solids, analyzed mine waters belong to a group of
low mineralized waters (table 1). According to the pH values, 60 % of mine waters are in range of 6 8, while around
40 % are acid waters with pH below 5. One of the characteristics of examined group of mine waters is that analyzed
parameters covered wide ranges of values. Based on the descriptive statistics shown in Table 1, the concentrations
of most of the parameters did not follow normal distribution (distribution histograms are skewed to the right). In
addition to the recorded high concentrations of arsenic in the analyzed mine water there are also increased contents of iron, manganese, zinc, copper and strontium.
Calcium cations are dominant in analyzed mine waters, while magnesium and sodium cations are significantly less
frequent. On the other hand, the contents of sulfates and hydrocarbonates are nearly equal, while the chlorides
contents are much lower. Dominant water types are Ca-(Mg)-SO4 and Ca-(Mg)-HCO3.
Table 1. Descriptive statistics of the mine water samples
Range
Min.
Max.
Mean
Median
Std. Dev.
Variance
Skewness
Kurtosis
pH
6.05
1.95
8.00
5.95
6.5
1.699
2.89
-0.974
-0.252
EC (S/cm)
14900
100.00
15000
1706
745
2401.093
5765245.42
3.480
15.877
TDS (mg/L)
14920
80.00
15000
1777
740
2634.270
6939376.80
2.974
10.961
Dry Res. (mg/L)
15930
70.00
16000
1578
530
2676.590
7164134.94
3.573
16.027
Ca++ (mg/L)
727.4
2.60
730.0
165.0
106.1
157.541
24819.28
1.487
1.928
Mg (mg/L)
1429
1.30
1430
86.83
36.7
249.508
62254.12
5.162
26.145
Na+ (mg/L)
1480
0.20
1480
62.22
9.25
239.918
57560.75
5.295
27.957
++
K (mg/L)
42.00
0.10
42.10
3.62
1.8
6.307
39.78
4.686
25.400
HCO3- (mg/L)
3180
0.08
3180
264.5
170.8
514.808
265026.83
4.716
23.643
17.454
Cl (mg/L)
226.0
1.00
227.0
19.09
42.311
1790.25
4.170
SO4-- (mg/L)
13593
6.60
13600
1095
217.6
2281.096
5203396.99
3.739
16.489
NO3-
430.0
0.04
430.0
16.62
1.5
66.949
4482.17
5.418
30.143
(mg/L)
P (mg/L)
2.00
0.00
2.00
0.12
0.015
0.316
0.10
4.564
24.048
SiO2 (mg/L)
151.8
3.20
155.0
33.91
20.65
30.151
909.06
1.878
4.181
Fe (mg/L)
2000
0.00
2000
102.3
1.01
366.558
134364.54
4.179
17.459
Mn (mg/L)
45.00
0.00
45.00
3.40
0.5
7.120
50.69
4.071
20.903
Sr (mg/L)
8.60
0.02
8.62
0.99
0.52
1.504
2.26
3.132
12.370
Li (mg/L)
2.30
0.00
2.30
0.11
0.015
0.388
0.15
4.938
24.745
Zn (mg/L)
142.0
0.00
142.0
8.00
0.275
25.266
638.36
4.345
19.538
Cu (mg/L)
1120
0.00
1120
27.72
0.003
150.351
22605.51
6.946
50.315
As (mg/L)
4.20
0.00
4.20
0.19
0.007
0.673
0.45
4.901
25.443
Significant statistical correlations cannot be determined between As and pH values, TDS and heavy metals values
(Table 2, Figure 2). The exception is a moderately higher degree of correlation between the concentrations of arsenic and zinc (Spermans rho: 0.302, p<0.05). However, this correlation is severely biased by outliers (samples with As
concentrations of 4.2 and 2.8 mg/L). After removal of these outlying samples, correlation coefficient decreases
(Sperman's rho: 0.230) and the correlation is no longer statistically significant (p>0.05). It can be concluded that
lack of correlations is due to the large diversity of the analyzed mine waters, originating from different types of
deposits.
583

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2. Spermans correlations coefficients for selected parameters

(** Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level; * Correlation is significant at the 0.05 level).
pH
TDS
Fe
Mn
Zn
Cu
As
pH
1.000
-0.476**
-0.718**
-0.664**
-0.652**
-0.587**
-0.037
-0.476**
1.000
0.591**
0.510**
0.496**
0.525**
0.044
Fe
-0.718**
0.591**
1.000
0.869**
0.681**
0.656**
0.149
Mn
-0.664**
0.510**
0.869**
1.000
0.731**
0.623**
0.175
Zn
-0.652**
0.496**
0.681**
0.731**
1.000
0.699**
0.302*
Cu
-0.587**
0.525**
0.656**
0.623**
0.699**
1.000
-0.033
As
-0.037
0.044
0.149
0.175
0.302*
-0.033
1.000
Figure 2. Correlations between arsenic and pH values, TDS and heavy metals content.
Distribution of arsenic in mine waters

Based on the cumulative frequency diagram of arsenic (Figure 3) it can be noted that about 40% of mine water
samples contain more than 10 g/L of arsenic, and the median concentration of this element was 7 g/L.
584

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 3. Cummulative frequency of arsenic concentrations
Analyzing the samples originating from different types of mineral deposits, it was concluded that the highest concentrations of arsenic occur in waters that are related to abandoned mines of copper (up to 4200 g/L). The median
of arsenic concentrations for this type of deposit is 2 g/L. Lead-zinc deposits are also characterized by elevated
arsenic concentrations (up to 2800 g/L), with a median of 7.5 g/L. The lowest arsenic contents are found in mine
waters originating from gold deposits (maximum measured concentration is 500 g/L).
Elevated arsenic content in the analyzed mine water is mainly related to deposits which, according to general genetic type, are classified as group of hydrothermal deposits of different temperature levels. This was expected, taking into consideration that the main arsenic minerals are formed from hydrothermal solutions related to granitoide
and intermediate volcanic-plutonic igneous complexes [7]. Extremely high concentrations of arsenic were recorded
in samples of mine water related to an abandoned copper mine "Lipa" (4200 mg/L) and lead-zinc mine "Bobija"
(2800 g/L). One of the main ore minerals in the mineral assemblages of copper deposit "Lipa" is enargite, the dissolution of which increases concentrations of arsenic in water. Similar situation is with the mineral composition of
"Bobija" deposit where arsenic minerals are occurring as side components.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
This research was supported by the Ministry of Education, Science and Technological Development (as a part of the
Project No. 43004) and Ministry of Environment, Mining and Spatial Planning.
REFERENCES
[1]
WHO: Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality, Fourth Edition, 2011, World Health Organization, Geneva
[2]
Pauline L.S.: Sources and distribution of arsenic in groundwater and aquifers, Arsenic in Groundwater A World Problem,
Utrecht, 2006
[3]
Vladimir S., Robert E.M.: Environmental Occurrence and Impacts of Arsenic at Gold Mining Sites in the Western United States,
1990, Int. J. Mine Water, 9 (1-4), pp 181-191
[4]
Williams M.: Arsenic in mine waters: an international study, Environmental Geology 40 (3), 2001, pp 267-278
[5]
Yinian Z., Broder J. M., Ingrid S., Kurt B.: The Hydrogeochemistry of Arsenic in the Clara Mine, Germany, Technical article, 2004
[6]
Alvarez R., Ordonez A., Loredo J.: Geochemical assessment of an arsenic mine adjacent to a water reservoir (Leo n, Spain), Environmental Geology (50), 2006, pp 873-884
[7]
Rade J.: Metallic ore deposits, Faculty of Mining and Geology, Belgrade, 1999
585

PROCEEDINGS
HEAVY AND TOXIC METALS AND NUTRIENTS

IN SEPARATE PLACES IN THE RIVER BREGALNICA
(EASTERN MACEDONIA)
ABSTRACT
Orce SPASOVSKI
Daniel SPASOVSKI
Faculty of Natural and Technical Sciences, University Goce Delchev - Stip

Goce Delchev 89 MK-2000, Stip, Repubilc of Macedonia
orce.spasovski@ugd.edu.mk
Through a small scale of geochemical and geoecological research through

the flow of the river Bregalnica, this paper will present the information
about the character of the waters of the river, the level of presence of hard
and toxic metals, nutrients and the amount of organic contamination.
These researches will define the condition and the presence of Fe, Mn, Pb,
Zn, Cd, Cr, Co, Cu, cyanides, detergents, organic contaminators in separate
measurement locations through the flow of the river Bregalnica.
During the realization of these researches, the first thing was the approach
to determine the required geochemical monitoring through the flow of the
river Bregalnica.
When the conditions of the waters of the river Bregalnica are considered
from the aspect of presence of hard and toxic metals, it can be stated that
all the measured parameters are under the allowed concentrations with the
exception of Arsenic and Manganum which showed higher concentrations in
separate measurement locations.
Keywords
Heavy and Toxic Metals, Cyanides, Nutrients,
Organic Contaminators, River Bregalnica
1. INTRODUCTION
The river Bregalnica flows through the valley in Kocani and after leaving Stip it enters the river Vardar (figure 1 and
2). The quality of the river is classified with class 3. In its flow under the town Stip, there are disrupted physical and
organoleptic properties of the water with a high level of suspended substances and microbiological contamination
is on a maximum level. This is a result of the drainage of sewage from the households, the collection system and
the industry.
The main industrial capacities from the territory of the town Stip are the textile factories, the meat processing industry, factory for production of edible oil, poultry farm, pigs farm, etc.
The industrial sewage is partly released in the collection system and partly in directly into the rivers.
2. METHODOLOGY OF RESEARCH
In order to achieve the desired goal, the initial approach was to establish the required geochemical monitoring
through the flow of the river Bregalnica and geochemical points were established on the bank of the river Bregalnica in several points: close to the village Istibanja, under the village Orizari, under the town Kocani, at the point of
river Zletovica in Bregalnica, under the village Karbinci, at a point where it enters Stip, at a point where it leaves
Stip, at the approximate proximity of the entrance of the river Bregalnica at the river Vardar. (figure 2)
586

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Map of the Republic of Macedonia with location of investigated area.
Samples of the waters were collected at the pointed measurements points for performing further laboratory researches.
The samples that were collected were divided into two parts, one of which was preserved in a place with HNO3, and
the other part was not preserved and was treated immediately in a laboratory from an aspect of determining the
elements of the organic contamination.
During the laboratory researches several methods were used: the method of inductively coupled plasma (ICP-AES),
then spectrophotometric methods (UVE-VIS), volumetric and gravimetric methods.
Figure 2. Typographic map with specified places of the taken samples
587

PROCEEDINGS
3. RECEIVED RESULTS AND COMMENT

From the received results it can be stated that the value of BOD in the waters of Bregalnica is between the range of
3.8 to 5.8 mgO2/l and the value of COD is between the range of 17.2 to 21.2 mgO2/l. If we compare these results to
the values of BOD and COD in the rivers in Europe we can come to the conclusion that these values integrate with
the 75% of the values from the rivers of Europe which have values of BOD of 4.7 mgO2/l and values of COD of 25
mgO2/l. From this perspective we can conclude that the river Bregalnica is among the rivers which are relatively
polluted with organic contamination substances and as such is integrated in the percentage of contamination present in 75% of the rivers in Europe. These contaminations are primarily caused by the urbanization of the towns
that are situated near the flow of the river Bregalnica and they are a product of the industrial and urban waste
which come from the industrial and city zones of the towns.
Table 1. The concentration of heavy and toxic metals in separate places in the river Bregalnica and the presence of organic contaminators and
nutrients (in mg/l)
Elements
Sample
1
62.53
60.11
60.28
58.5
65.31
48.56
48.65
31.25
Mg
17.89
16.32
15.87
14.56
15.21
13.25
14.52
8.95
Na
23.65
19.54
17.65
17.85
15.32
14.52
18.65
6.54
Ca
3.21
2.85
3.65
2.65
2.85
1.65
2.54
1.45
Al
0.421
0.451
0.421
0.431
0.465
0.356
0.354
0.254
Fe
0.385
0.421
0.235
0.231
0.256
0.589
0.265
0.05
Mn
0.264
0.021
0.254
0.324
0.178
0.487
0.028
0.023
0.185
0.065
0.042
0.065
0.035
0.065
0.051
0.05
Sr
0.354
0.381
0.365
0.387
0.398
0.254
0.381
0.187
Ni
0.003
0.006
0.041
0.007
0.002
0.005
0.003
0.001
Co
0.0068
0.0054
0.003
0.001
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.003
Cr
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.003
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
Zn
0.005
0.006
0.005
0.005
0.006
0.009
0.006
0.005
Cu
0.005
0.007
0.007
0.008
0.001
0.001
0.006
0.03
Pb
0.005
0.005
0.001
0.002
0.004
0.005
0.005
0.005
Cd
0.002
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
As
0.058
0.038
0.035
0.001
0.032
0.065
0.051
0.045
Mo
0.021
0.001
0.001
0.0354
0.008
0.0187
0.0004
0.0232
0.0421
0.0154
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.0256
0.0187
0.005
0.05
0.048
0.065
0.045
0.052
0.025
0.032
0.031
Ag
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.002
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
NO3-
6.2
4.8
6.8
1.5
2.5
3.2
4.5
1.1
NO2-
0.1
0.5
0.05
0.05
0.06
0.09
0.08
0.9
NH4+
0.05
0.21
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.08
0.04
0.06
SO42-
46.2
38.6
36.2
68
45.2
45.2
56.3
38.5
cyanide
Detergent
pH
7.7
7.8
7.8
7.8
7.8
7.8
7.7
7.8
BOD
4.2
4.5
4.4
5.8
4.4
3.6
5.1
3.8
COD
19.8
19.3
17.5
17.5
18.3
21.2
20.3
17.2
The cyanides and detergents have not been found in the researches of the waters of river Bregalnica and in relation
to the pH values of the character of the waters it can be stated that there are no phenomena of acidity in the environment and the waters of the river are with standard pH values. From the presented data in the Table it can be
588

PROCEEDINGS
stated that almost all analyzed elements in the waters are within the allowed concentration ranges with the exception of phosphorus which is increased in all analyzed samples in the scale of its allowed concentration of 0,1 mg/l
and the increased content of Arsenic in the samples from the localities 1, 3, 4, 5 in the scale of its allowed concentration of 0,05 mg/l.
4. CONCLUSION
Taking into consideration all the researches in respect of the conditions of the waters of the river Bregalnica from
the aspect of presence of heavy and toxic metals, it can be stated that all measured parametars are under the allowed concentrations with the exception of Arsenic and Manganum which appeared to be present in increased
concentrations in certain measuring places.
The condition of the organic contaminators and nutrients basically prescribe the need of more detailed researches
of this problem through maintaining a permanent monitoring of the running waters of the river Bregalnica as well
as the permanent monitoring of the waste waters in the town places through the flow of the river Bregalnica.
It should be mentioned that it would be advisable some finances to be provided for establishing automatic control
stations for the quality of the running waters of the river Bregalnica and in the shortest period of time a cadastre/register to be prepared for the contaminators of the waters of river Bregalnica with detailed acts for the waste
materials which go into the river from the industrial objects and the communal field.
REFERENCES
[1]
Apepelo, C.,A., J., Postma, D.: Geochemistry, groundwater and pollution, Rotterdam, 1994.
[2]
Deutsch, W., J.: Groundwatr Geochemistry, Lewis Publ., Boca Raton, 1997.
[3]
Driscoll, F., G.: Groundwater and Wells, pp 1089, Johnson, St. Paul, Minnesota, 1989.
[4]
Halle, R.: Chemistry and water processing, Sveuciliste in Zagreb, MGS Faculty, Zagreb, 2004.
[5]
Mircovski, V., Spasovski, O.: Contamination and protection of ground waters in the alluvial sediments of the Bregalnica River in the
Delcevo region, depending on their hydrogeological characteristics. Geologica Macedonica, 2009, N,22. Pg 49-57.
[6]
Spasovski, O., Doneva B.: Heavy metals in sediments and soills along the river Bregalnica in the part of hydroacumulation Kalimanci
to Kocani Geologica Macedonica, 2007. Vol. 21, pp 75-86.
[7]
Spasovski, O., Mitev, T.: Heavy metals in waters along the river Bregalnica in the part oh hydroacumulation Kalimanci to Kocani XI
YUCOR International Conference, Cooperation of researches of different branches in the fields of corrosion, materials protection
and invironmental protection, 2009.Tara, Srbija, PROCEEDINGS., 273-277
[8]
Spasovski, O., Dambov, R.: Heavy metals and the River Kalnistanska and Vicinty. 3 Balkan mining congress, Izmir, Turkey, 2009, pp
667 670.
rd
589

PROCEEDINGS
CONTRIBUTION TO CONSTRUCTION, REMEDIATION

AND RECULTIVATION OF SECONDARY MINING AND ENERGY
FACILITIES IN ORDER TO ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
ABSTRACT
Dragoljub UROSEVIC1
Branimir ANDELIC2
Uros UROSEVIC3
Rasa DJUROVIC4
1
Mining Engineer, Pro Voding Ltd.,

Belgrade, the Republic of Serbia,
dragan.urosevic@sbb.rs
2
Civil Engineer, Pro Voding Ltd.,
djurovic_bg@yahoo.com
3
Hydrogeological Engineer, Belgrade
Waterwork and Sewage, Belgrade,
the Republic of Serbia,
uros.urosevic@bvk.rs
4
Deputy Manager at Pro Voding Ltd.,
djurovic_bg@yahoo.com
Kiril Dimitrov, Manager at
Ekoininering Ltd., Kocani,
the Republic of Macedonia,
ekoinzinering@t-home.mk
For many years of application of BAT-TMT technology (technological and

technical solutions "Trisoplast", "Multriwell" and "TerraCottem") in the construction, rehabilitation, closure and reclamation of the facilities that can
adversely affect the environment, a high level of quality has been shown in a
number of cases around the world. This technology, in the case of the secondary facilities in mining and energy sector (flotation tailing dumps, ash
and slag landfills, large coal storage, disposal sites for different types of
wastes, relocation of the riverbeds, construction of canals, construction of
roads, construction of flood embankments, etc..) is defined by the following
basic elements: (1) safe and/or highly efficient waterproofing of disposed
material in terms of leakage of fluid in both directions by creating an impermeable mineral barrier provided by Trisoplast, (2) long-term protection in
terms of leakage of harmful substances into the subsoil, soil and groundwater pollution, as well as in terms of impact of weather conditions, flooding,
etc., for a extended period of time, also provided by Trisoplast, (3) a possibility of using the disposed waste, which includes economically efficient utilization of landfill gas from disposed municipal waste as an energy source, which
is also provided by using Trisoplast and Multriwell and (4),
landscaping and/or usable space design through a high-quality biological
reclamation resulting in the reduced need for fertilizers and water which is
provided by the use of Trisoplast and TerraCottem.
Keywords
BAT-TMT Technology, Secondary Mining and Energy Facilities, Municipal Solid
Waste Landfills, Construction, Remediation, Reclamation, Trisoplast, Multriwell,
TerraCottem
1. INTRODUCTION
A modern approach to the construction of the new and rehabilitation of the secondary facilities in mining and energy sector, as well as in the construction of the new and existing municipal waste landfills (and other types of
waste) consists of the analysis of the conditions for rational and sustainable management in order to reduce environmental pollution and degradation of the area. This means a controlled managing of any facility, from a design
and construction through the use of the technology which is safe and effective for the environment and human
health, to the efficient and economical use of the facilities using technologies that do not pollute the environment.
This strategic principle is also an indicator of the standard in each country. The described approach, in this paper,
refers to the flotation tailing dumps, ash and slag landfills, large coal storage, disposal of different wastes, relocation of the riverbeds, canal construction, road building, construction of embankments against flood, and remediation works and reclamation of the mentioned existing facilities in the context of the closure and/or capacity expansion. Implementation of the described approach is inextricably linked with good technical solutions (BAT technology) for all the problems regarding construction or rehabilitation of such facilities. In the developed countries, the
BAT technology has been applied for a long time but in countries in transition and developing countries, for various
reasons, the application of BAT technology is put off or the old technology is applied.
590

PROCEEDINGS
By applying adequate technological and technical solutions (BAT-TMT technology) during construction, remediation and reclamation of the secondary facilities in mining and energy sector (flotation tailing dumps, ash and slag
landfills, large coal storage, dumps for different wastes, relocation of riverbeds, canal construction, road building,
construction of flood embankments, etc..) are defined by the following basic elements: (1) safe and/or effective
waterproofing of the disposed materials to prevent leakage of fluid in both directions, creating an impermeable
mineral barrier which is provided by the use of Trisoplast, (2) long-term protection against the leakage of hazardous
substances into the soil and groundwater, as well as against the impact of weather, flooding, etc., which is also provided by the use of Trisoplast, (3) possibility of economically efficient utilization of the landfill gas from the disposed waste as an energy source which is provided by the use of Trisoplast and Multriwell and (4) and increasing the
above and below ground biomass, lowering the need for fertilizers and water, which is ensured by the use of Trisoplast and TerraCottem.
The information collected on the application of the BAT-TMT technology in the developed countries during the
rehabilitation works on existing facilities, for the closure and/or capacity expansion and developing of new capacities of local or regional significance, influenced the authors of this paper to present to the public this technology
which has been applied for several years and which would be suitable for any construction, remediation and reclamation of the secondary facilities in the mining and energy sector and in the Balkan region.
2. METHODOLOGY
Reference system
The modern approach to the secondary facilities in the mining and energy sector defines these areas as spatially
and urbanistically planned along with the specific technological and technical features that protect the environment. They are characterized by the safe storage and use of various materials and all types of waste, with the possibility of re-use, and protection (environment) from the adverse effect of the disposed material on air, water (particularly groundwater), soil and biosphere. This implies: (1) safe storage i.e. safe disposal and later at the end of the
life cycle effectively closing of facility ensuring a long-term safety in terms of leakage of harmful substances and
pollution of soil and ground water (flotation tailing dumps, ash and slag landfills, landfills for gypsum from flue gas
desulphurization, municipal waste landfills, etc..), (2) safe construction and exploitation i.e.: safe use of facilities in
terms of potentially high water levels and flooding (roads, canals, defensive embankments, plateaus for industrial
facilities, etc.). , (3) possibility of use i.e..: economically efficient use of the disposed material (flotation tailing
dumps, ash and slag dumps, dumps for different types of municipal waste, landfill gas in municipal waste to obtain
fuel as an energy source, etc..) and (4) environmental protection i.e.: long-term protection of environment, both
from the impact of disposed material and from the external influences (groundwater, flood waves, weather, etc..)
along with the safe and fast landscaping with autochthonous plants (facilities for recreation, sports, etc.. ).
These needs are complex and can be fulfilled using BAT-TMT technology i.e. providing joint effect of three technological and technical solutions: "Trisoplast ," "Multriwell " and "TerraCottem " along with the adequate management process, which is not the subject of this paper. In this complex of technological and technical solutions
the Trisoplast has the most important role therefore more attention will be given to it.
Thus, the BAT-TMT technology is applicable for both new facilities and existing ones, except that in the case of new
buildings which are still in the design stage (and during the construction) the installation of Trisoplast is planned
and then built into the base, sides and coverings (in the existing landfills for ash, slag, gypsum, only in coverings),
and Multriwell is built into alternatively (if the use of landfill gas is possible).The application of TerraCottem is recommended for the closure of the facility or its parts. In that moment TerraCottem makes an integral part of the
process of biological reclamation of coverings and in a vegetative soil layer.
What is Trisoplast
Trisoplast is mutually impermeable mineral barrier based on natural materials. It was developed in the Netherlands
and patented as "extremely tight and long-lasting mineral insulating barrier", Figure 1. Use of this flexible mineral
barrier prevents the penetration of contaminated water from the facility into the ground water or springs and also
prevents penetration of the ground water in the building which is particularly important in the process of disposal
of hazardous waste, as it has many advantages over other types of "impermeable layers" of natural or artificial
origin (CCL, GCL, BES, etc.)..
Trisoplast is composed of natural materials: sand or similar material (adequate stone aggregate), and bentonite and
synthetic material - polymer with the addition of water (for a relatively dry sand: send-1000 kg, or 87.1%, bentonite130 kg or 11, 3%, polymer-2,6 kg or 0.2%, and water 15,6 kg or 1.4%) and has an unlimited lifespan. In the system of
591

PROCEEDINGS
impermeable barriers this product is classified within the group of polyelectrolyte gels (PG) with a coefficient of
leakage greater than 3x10-11 m/s, Table 1. Before installing the components bentonite and polymer should be
mixed, and then this mixture is mixed with the local mineral material - sand (or an adequate stone aggregate). This
part of work takes place in a mobile unit that has a special construction, Figure 2, which is mounted close to the
location where Trisoplast should be applied. The presence of polymers provides a greater chemical resistance of
barrier.
Figure 1. Trisoplast (a purple colored layer)
Figure 2. Mobile plant for Trisoplast productionat site
Trisoplast is installed as a solid layer which is covered with a layer that provides the necessary additional burden,
often draining layer. Important characteristics are obtained after the installation when Trisoplast absorbs the water
from the environment with which comes in contact. In that moment the bentonite swells and creates a tight network of chemical bonds which with the molten polymer forms a sort of the thick gel between the grains of sand.
The sand provides the mechanical strength and bentonitepolymer gel provides the necessary elasticity and hydraulic impermeability which is up to 1000 times higher than that found in the other traditional mineral barriers (i.e. the
best quality clay 10-9 m/s), Table 1. Mechanical properties, high angle of internal friction and extreme cohesion
enable the use on steep slopes (up to 45 inclination) without additional stabilization. Due to the gel structure of a
thin insulating layer of Tiroplast, 7-9 cm thick, substitutes up to 5 m (according to EU directives and regulations in
some countries) thick layer of high quality clay. This is a great advantage, because in addition to quick and easy
installation also provides: significantly more rational use of clay resources (for example, production of ceramics), a
more rational use of space planned for disposal which extends the lifespan of the facility, as well as substantial savings in material, invested work, consumed energy and therefore is more economical. Extremely small thickness of
the protective, waterproof layer, increases the useful volume of the landfill, thereby extending the length of disposal (especially in case of municipal waste which is very important for the regional landfills).The advantages of this
material over traditional mineral barriers are: extreme tightness, cost-effectiveness, longer lifespan, robustness in
application, excellent self-healing ability in case of damage, ability to adapt to subsidence, no antifouling, chemical
and physical stability, extreme ability to retain moisture (high resistance to dry), easy installation, long-term stability of slopes, etc..The ability to hold moisture, high plasticity and jelly properties (due to the polymer) prevents
cracking.
Table 1. Comparison with the other mineral barriers.
Trisoplast (PG)
GCL
BES
Geological barrier / CCl
0.01
0.25
1.00
1.00
5.00
1 x 10 -10
1 x 10 -7
1 x 10 -9
1 x 10 -9
Barrier Thickness
d[m]
0.07
0.09
Filtration coefficient
k [m/s]
3 x 10 -11
1 x 10 -12
3 x 10
1 x 10 -12
Hydraulic gradient
i[-]
14.3
15.3
11.3
12.1
94.0
4.7
1.9
1.9
1.2
Infiltration
q[mm/a]
14
0.5
11
0.4
89
15
6,086
61
37
-11
3 x 10
-11
Source: Trisoplast Manual, ver.2.0.,
592

PROCEEDINGS
The application of Trisoplasta, Figure 3-6 (source: Trisoplast Manual, ver.2.0. - Trisoplast is shown as a purple colored layer) has been present to date in Europe, Asia, America and Africa on a number of landfills for municipal, industrial, mining and other waste, embankments, highways, plateaus for industrial facilities, refineries, terminals for
storage of chemicals, contaminated soil disposal sites, sites where revitalization of contaminated soil and groundwater is preformed, sites for remediation and reclamation, sites for remediation of excavated untreated sediments
from rivers and the sea, waterways, canals and artificial lakes, dams, warehouses containing biological waste from
farms, protection of roads and plateau, building lots and buildings from groundwater or surface waters, etc..
Figure 3. Hazardous and non-hazardous waste landfills
Figure 4. Protection from all industrial facilities
Figure 5. Protection at all kinds of infrastructure facilities
Figure 6. Protection for all kinds of recreation facilities
Trisoplast is produced in a small mobile unit, Figure 2, for dosing and mixing. For loading, transportation to the site
and spreading, the loaders, trucks and hydraulic excavators are used and for compaction (obtaining the required
degree of compaction) the standard light self-propelled rollers.
What is Multriwell
Multriwell is a product developed in the Netherlands and patented as "extremely efficient and long lasting technical solution for degassing of municipal waste."The technology provides extraction of significantly more gases
compared to the traditional use of the bio turns. Multriwell system consists of two components: (1) flexible V-type
of vertical gas wells-drains (strips of plastic, 100x5mm cross section, consisting of a large number of capillary tubes,
Figure 7 left), installed in the landfill body at a short distance in a dense latticed way, and (2) flexible H-type of horizontal collectors (strips of plastic, 200x10mm cross section, Figure 7 right), connected through the system with
vertical wells in order to collect gases from the V-type and drainage to the main sewer pipe collector, Figure 9 . The
gas through these collectors reaches the control points where using the main sewer further leads to the thermal or
electric energy plant, or a cheaper option, burning flares (but..).V-type wells are injected into the landfill body using
a special machines, Figure 8.The density of vertical wells is greater than in the bio turns (network is 2,5x2,5m). In
this way the bio-reaction is improved as well as a gas carrying capacity of the landfill. The leachate is much better
spread in the waste and the landfill body, causing greater production of biogas which contributes to faster
achievement of inertia - reducing landfill.
593

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 7. V-type, vertical gas well and H-type horizontal gas well
Figure 8. Vertical gas well installation equipment
Figure 9. Graphical representation of the BAT-TMT technology.
What is TerraCottem
TerraCottem is a multi-component mixture of: precursor of growth hydro absorbing materials, nutrients and supporting materials (volcanic lava stone), which synergistically participate in the growth and development of plants
enhancing soil quality. Polymers in contact with water quickly absorb it, swell up and turn into a form similar to the
gel and are relatively insensitive to electrolytes, which allows the numerous wet-dry cycles, Figure 1 0 Mineral fertilizers dissolved in water absorb the water gel and become a classic NPK mixture which is particularly necessary in
the first stage of the plant growth because provides nutrients to the soil for months, and the organic fertilizer enhances microbial activity and soil quality because releases the oxygen and other elements necessary for further
growth of a plant. Plants become more resistant to disease, better able to withstand transportation shock and replanting process, enabling a smooth growing process of seedlings after replanting. TerraCottem as a stimulator of
growth is particularly important at the beginning of plant development because enhances the development and
lengthening in root cells, Figure 11, development of leaves, and later the development of biomass. This feature is of
great importance for the growth of plants, in the first as well as in the later stage.
Figure 11. A grass root 2 months after planting in a sandy soil with
TerraCottem
Figure 10. Formation of TerraCottem gel
594

PROCEEDINGS
When TerraCottem is in the soil, plants need less watering and fertilizers since the polymers absorb water from the
soil, which also reduces contamination of soil and groundwater. In nutrient-poor soil limits the contamination of
root. TerraCottem has the ability to absorb and keep the water and fertilizer up to 10 years because it allows the
plant to use water absorbed in TerraCottem (100-g of TerraCottem absorbs 5l of water) when needed, in such a way
the frequency of watering is reduced by 50 % while the amount of water remains the same. TerraCottem is used in
bioremediative works in agriculture, horticulture, landscape architecture, erosion protection, even in the reclamation of devastated areas either by planting trees and shrub species or planting perennial grasses and when planting
in pots, buckets, flower pots, boxes and various packaging.

Given the effectiveness of the described technology and technical solutions Trisoplast, Multriwell and TerraCottem,
we propose the application of the BAT-TMT technology in the construction and/or rehabilitation, closure and reclamation of existing secondary facilities in mining and energy sector and municipal solid waste landfills (and other
types). The following examples show how this technology actually can be used.
Disposal of ash and slag, flotation tailings and gypsum
During the construction of space for disposal of ash and slag from the thermal power plants, flotation tailings from
non-ferrous metals mining and gypsum from the desulphurization system, as well as in the process of covering after
the completion of disposal, the lining the bottom, sides and foil cover with a waterproof layer is necessary which in
the exploitation and after the closure of a landfill (along with the systems for detection, collection and removal of
leachate) must provide effective protection of groundwater, soil and air against dust emissions. This is an opportunity for Trisoplasta application, as its most important two features are waterproofness (1x10-12 m / s <k <3x1011 m / s) and durability (up to 100 years).
With regard to financial investments it is possible that the use of Trisoplasta in the construction could slightly increase the initial costs of construction , but after closing the maintenance costs are lower. Trisoplast has an economic advantage in locations where it is possible to obtain sand and bentonite at local prices. Price-quality ratio or
durability of Trisoplast technology is very favorable. Using the principles of this impermeable barrier offers a
chance, because through the use of relatively thin layers (from 0.07 to 0.09 m) permanent sealing of the bottom
and sides of the landfill can be achieved, as well as creation of overlays on large areas with a huge amounts of (it is
possible to permanently isolate and more 25 m high layers) ash and slag.This is the most economically efficient and
the most durable way to prevent the infiltration of elements, ash scattering by wind and excretion of harmful substances into the groundwater and surrounding soil.
Large coal storages
When a coal in the large storage (in thermal power plants) comes into contact with atmospheric water this results
in leaching of harmful and pollutant substances from the coal, also with the leachate significant amounts of polycyclic aromatic carbons (PAH), trace metals and other suspended materials are transported into the soil. In order to
prevent pollution of groundwater and soil, it is recommended to provide waterproofness of base - surface on which
the storage, collection and disposal of leachate with further treatment. Building a waterproof barrier for storage of
coal is based on the application of multi-layer barrier. In accordance with the above characteristics of Trisoplasta,
its incorporation into the base of coal storage, completely prevents groundwater pollution and safe control of further treatment of leachate.
Relocation of riverbed and construction of canals
Sometimes the opening of new coal deposits or new surface mines in the same deposit is associated with a temporary or final relocation of the parts of a riverbed. In such case, in order to ensure the conditions for survival of the
river, riverbed and environmental protection by engineering methods the conditions for "track bed of the river"
have been sought. However, adequate solutions to ensure these conditions drastically increase the costs of exploitation. Application of the Trisoplast mineral barrier as a waterproof layer on the newly formed river canal, does not
require setting the route of the riverbed according to the geological characteristics of the rock material in the
field, so that the overall scope of work, implementation of Trisoplasta can drastically reduce the costs.The application of Trisoplast allows relocation of rivers (river beds) across the location - terrain on which the old waste rock
dumps are, which in some cases may also be a determining factor in terms of costs and deadlines for building a new
river bed.
595

PROCEEDINGS
The use of Trisoplast for building a network of canals for irrigation of the area in which procedures are taken in
order to achieve remediation, reclamation and soil improvement after mining operations. Also the possibility of
building waterways should be emphasized.
Construction of roads and embankments
The application of ash and slag in road construction as a filling material in the road infrastructure, enables substitution of the stone material or sand. In some cases, the application of Trisoplast reduces the costs by half. The role
of Trisoplast is to isolate - encapsulate the ash and slag from the environment. A particularly interesting aspect in
the application of Trisoplast is reflected in the utilization of ash and slag for the construction of flood embankments by the principle of encapsulation of the embankment body of ash and slag by Trisoplast.
To date, only in two sites (Kolubara and Kostolac) in Serbia there are accumulated vast amounts of this material but
there are only few examples of the use of electric filtering (fly) ash mostly. It should be noted that, the substitution
of stone, gravel and sand by ash and slag from coal combustion, it is best implemented by Trisoplast because it allows encapsulation of ash and slag in the installation site (road, embankment, etc..) which solves the problem of
disposal of significant quantities of ash and slag.
4. CONCLUSION
The described BAT-TMT technology (Trisoplast+Multriwell+TerraCottem) is applicable in the construction of new
ones, as well as in the expansion, rehabilitation, closure and reclamation of the existing secondary facilities in mining and energy sector and municipal solid waste (and other types) landfills. However, only in the construction of the
new facilities all the elements of BAT-TMT technology can be planned, because then the system Trisoplast is built
into the base, sides and coverings in a planned way and following the technological and technical conditions, while
in the rehabilitation/closure of the existing buildings the installation of the Trisoplast system is possible only in
coverings. The Multriwell system is built into the solid waste landfill alternatively, if landfill gases are to be used,
taking into account the economic justification. TerraCottem system is a technology that is primarily intended for a
quick and highquality biological reclamation of devastated land. The basic characteristics of this system, in terms
of the pace of growth and development of leaf and biomass, as well as considering the lower need for fertilizers and
water, have included TerraCottem in the BAT-TMT technology, because the above is important for reclamation. The
combined effect of the components of the BAT-TMT technology is reflected in the complexity presented as the
best (among the existing) methods in the construction and/or rehabilitation, remediation and/or reclamation of the
secondary facilities in mining and energy sector and all other types of facilities because it provides good environmental protection.
Exclusive representatives for Trisoplast and Multriwell in Serbia, Montenegro, Bosnia and Herzegovina are
"Provoding" Ltd. Belgrade, and in Macedonia "Ekoininering" Ltd. Kocani, while "GREENSOIL" Ltd. from Belgrade is
for TerraCottem.
REFERENCES
[1]
Christensen T.C. Cossu and R. Stegmann R. (eds.): Barriers, waste mechanics and groundwater pollution; Eighth international waste
management and landfill symposium, Proceedings, Vol. 3 Etc. Italy, Sardinia 2001, pp. 45-54
[2]
Scottish EPA: Framework for Risk Assessment for Landfill Sites The Geological Barrier, Mineral Layer and the Leachate Sealing and
Drainage System, 2002.
[3]
Boels D.: Comparing performance of Trisoplast with different mineral liner materials, 2003.
[4]
Franz-Georg S. and Mller W.W.: Standard and alternative landfill capping design in Germany, Environmental Science & Policy 7
(2004), pp. 277290
[5]
Trisoplast Manual, ver. 2.0., Trisoplast Mineral Liner, August 2010.
[6]
D.urovi, D.Uroevi, M.Jovanovi, A.Spasi: Power plant coal storage design: prevention of water pollution, 43th International October Conference on Mining and Metallurgy, Kladovo Serbia (2011), Proceedings, pp. 449-452
[7]
D.Uroevi, B.Aneli, U.Uroevi, M.Karanac, M.Jovanovi: Experiencein the application of geosynthetic linings polyelectrolyte gels
in landfill construction, International conference-Waste waters, municipal solid wastes and hazardous waste, Subotica, 10-12 April
2013. Proceedings, pp.156 160.
596

PROCEEDINGS
THE SEMI-INDUSTRIAL TEST OF THE EXPERIMENTAL

SYSTEM FOR RESEARCH OF THE FLYING ASH
AND BOTTOM ASH HYDRO-TRANSPORT
ABSTRACT
Dragan DRAOVI
Pavle STJEPANOVI1
Klara KONC-JANKOVI
Jasmina NEGROJEVI

1
pavle.stjepanovic@ribeograd.ac.rs
At the Mining Institute in Belgrade, a system for semi-industrial testexperimental research was designed and built for the purpose of research of
flying ash and bottom ash hydraulic transport.
The actual experimental tests in this system were performed with the hydraulic mixtures of flying ash and bottom ash from the Kostolac and Obrenovac thermal power plant. Excellent consequential results were achieved.
The paper presents the testing system and its functional properties.
Keywords
Hydraulic Transport, Pulp, Flying Ash, Bottom Ash, Thermal Power Plant
1. INTRODUCTION
Great lengths of hydro-transportation require a careful approach in the prediction of losses in a selected pipeline
which directly reflects the choice of pumps and the power of the electro motors which will be installed. Because of
this, the manufacturers recommend tests of the particular ore, which would confirm the results of the empirical
calculations, which are conducted for the purposes of projecting and equipment choices.
In order to improve the service quality and meet the market requirements, the Mining Institute designed and tested
the installation for determining the conditions of hydraulic transport, which is located in the Institute. The main
reason for the formation of this installation was to determine the transport conditions of dense hydro mixtures of
the flying and bottom ash from the thermal plant Kostolac B. In the previous period, the Mining Institute conducted
these tests in the field, under industrial conditions, at the ash depot of the thermal plant Obrenovac.
Projecting, obtaining of the necessary equipment, system parts and their installation as well as testing, were done
in thirty days.
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE TESTING INSTALLATION

The testing installation, which is schematically displayed in figure 1, consists of the following parts: preparation of
the hydro mixture, pumps, transport lines, measurement and regulation equipment and computer systems. The
following equipment can be found in these parts:
Conditioner, with the total volume of 5,7 m3 (working volume 4 m3), with a mixer with an electromotor of 5.5
kW,
A casket for flow control
Centrifugal slurry pumps HPHZ 200/150 of the FOD Bor manufacturer, with an engine of 37 kW and a nominal rpm of 1,470 min-1
Pipeline of 190 m in total
Measurement-regulatory equipment
597

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. The testing facility schematic
The steel platform for feeding the conditioner with materials, flying and bottom ash, is placed immediately next to
the conditioner at an appropriate height for manual feeding. The conditioner of a circular cross section with a cone
bottom and an impeller is made out of steel i.e. steel tin, as well as the casket for flow regulation, cylindrically
shaped and installed above the conditioner whose overflow is gravitationally led into the conditioner. The controlled flow measurement is done with two manual sealers DN 150.
The pipeline is made out of HDPE pipes 220 x 11.5 mm, 72 m in total, leveled steel pipeline 219.1 x 6.7 mm, 110
m in total out of which the testing part of the route is 80 m long and a part of the pipeline 159 x 5 mm, 8 m long
at the thrust section of the centrifugal slurry pump, with appropriate arches r = 1.5D. At the beginning and the end
of the testing section of the route multiple vents for pressure counters are installed. The counter is installed at a
vertical steel return pipe 159 x 5 mm immediately in front of the conditioner. The installed flow meter is a
KROHNE OPTIFLUX 4000F, DN 150 precisely intended for flow measurement of the hydro mixture with a high content of the solid phase.
The beginning of work requires a filled pipeline and a cone part of the conditioner with water of a start volume of
about 7 m3 after which material is gradually added up to the tested density. The maximum quantity of the materials which can be used for the pulp preparation is about 7,000 kg depending on material thickness. Total system
volume is 10.2 m3 out of which the pipeline is 6.2 m3 and the operating volume of the conditioner is 4.0 m3.
Density control of the hydro mixture with a pycnometer is done with an electric scale SARTORIUS, with a range up
to 7,000 g with a rate of 0.1 g.
3. MEASUREMENT REGULATION EQUIPMENT

In order to regulate the work and conduct necessary measurements, the following measurement-regulation equipment is installed on the testing facility:
Frequent rpm regulator of the centrifugal slurry pump engine SIEMENS - MIDIMASTER Vector, for engines 37
kW in power. It manages the process, determines the speed in the pipeline and desired flow.
Mechanical manometer with a CMT type membrane, ranging from 0 to 6 bar, installed at the discharge of
the pump in order to follow the pressure at the beginning of the test pipeline, and its role is a control one.
Absolute pressure measurers type SIEMENS Transmitter SITRANS P Serie 2, 7MF 1563-5BD00, measuring
range 0 2.5 bar, 4 - 20 mA and 10 - 36 V, installed at the testing part of the pipeline. The measurement accuracy of these counters is 0.25% off on the measuring scale (2,5 bar). The pressure transmitter attachments
are placed immediately under the horizontal axis of the pipeline. The first transmitter is placed 21 m after
the curve.
598

PROCEEDINGS
Electromagnetic flow meter KROHNE OPTIFLUX 4000F, DN 150 NP 25, with an IFC 300 transmitter, installed
at the end of the transport line at the vertical section immediately before the entrance in the conditioner.
Measurement accuracy of this counter is 0.2% off out of the measured value.
PLC with 8 analog entrances of SIMATIC S7-300 type. Processing and recording of the measurement data is
done with a software package SIEMENS SIMATIC Win CC.
The range of the flow speeds of the hydro mixture which were measured up until now is from 1.8 to 2.5 m/s.
In accordance with the diameter of the tested pipeline, range of the speeds tested and expected resistances in the
pipeline, the aforementioned pump and electromotor were selected. The system has work adjustment capabilities
for work with different types of pumps with different characteristics.
4. MEASUREMENTS
At the testing facility simultaneous monitoring and recording of the following parameters was done:
Flow of the hydro mixture (m3/h) - directly
Flow speed through the testing pipeline (m/s) - indirectly through the flow
Pressure in the pipeline at the P1 (bar) - directly
Pressure in the pipeline at the P2 (bar) - directly
Differential pressure (bar/m') - indirectly the difference P1-P2 through the distance between the transmitters
displayed in meters
Consumed power of the electromotor kW - directly
Rpm of the pump electromotor (min-1) - directly
Rpm of the pump (min-1) - indirectly through a transmission ratio of pulleys
The program package for processing and data recording enables direct reading of statistical data at certain times:
the length of the observed period, number of measurements in the period of observation, maximum and minimal
amount of recorded data, average value and standard deviation.
5. CONCLUSION
As was mentioned before, the reason for the formation of this half industrial, experimental facility was to test the
transport conditions of a dense hydro mixture of flying and bottom ash from the thermal plant Kostolac B.
Considering that in the previous period the Mining Institute conducted these types of research in the field, in industrial conditions, at the ash depot of the thermal plant Obrenovac, a facility formed like this in the confines of the
Institute has made easier the further testing related to the conditions and means of transport of the dense hydro
mixture (pulp).
REFERENCES
[1]
Document on testing of the conditions of hydro transport of flying and bottom ash from the thermal plant Kostolac-B at the
testing facility of the Mining Institute, Belgrade, May 2008.
[2]
Eli I. Robinsky - Thickened Discharge - A New Approach to Tailings Disposal - CIM Bulletin, 1975.
[3]
Eli I. Robinsky - Tailing Disposal by the Thickened Discharge Method for Improved Economy and Environmental Control - Tailing
Disposal Todao, Denver 1978.
[4]
R.J. Jewell, A.B. Fourie, E.R. Lord - Paste and Thickened Tailings - A Guide - The University of Westwrn Australia, 2002.
[5]
T.C. Aude, N.T. Cowper, T.L. Thompson and E.J.Wasp - Slurry Piping Systems: Trends, - Chemical Engineering, 1971.
599

PROCEEDINGS
CONCEPTUAL SOLUTION FOR THE PERMANENT

CLOSURE OF FLY AND BOTTOM ASH DISPOSAL
SITE AT TPP KOSTLAC A AND B
ABSTRACT
Dijana VLAJI
Mirko SAVI
Ivana SIMOVI
Lazar ANELI
eljko PRATALO
Rudarski institute d.o.o, Belgrade,

Serbia
projektovanje@ribeograd.ac.rs
This paper gives an overview of conceptual solution for permanent closure of

fly and bottom ash disposal site Srednje kostolako ostrvo (SKO) according
to relevant EU and domestic legislation.
The detailed design is elaborated on the basis of the selected technical reclamation options and the results of the site investigations and previous studies, taking into account identified local conditions and common international engineering standards. Technical re-cultivation includes earth works
aimed to achieve designed levels and to spread soil cover over the impermeable mineral layer, as well as the construction of the internal and external
system for collection and evacuation of surface waters.
Keywords
Disposal Site, Hydro-technical Structures, Permanent Closure, Re-cultivation
1. INTRODUCTION
Disposal site SKO was built and put in exploitation in 1977 and was receiving ash generated in TPP Kostolac A and B
in the form of low density hydromixture until 2010, when ash collecting, transport and disposal system was
changed from low to high density in TPP Kostolac B, for which a new disposal site was constructed within excavated area in the open pit mine Cirikovac. As the high density ash hydromixture system proved to be technologically
more acceptable, environmentally safer and less expensive, it was decided to implement the same technology in
the TPP Kostolac A and to use the disposal site Cirikovac. Introduction of the novel technology enabled the permanent closure of the existing disposal site SKO according to requirements of Serbian and EU legislation providing
minimal environmental impacts.
2. TECHNICAL APPROACH
Waste management legislation
Evaluation of technical solutions for remedy and closure of fly and bottom ash disposal site SKO is based on the
main principles defined in Serbian and EU legislation and international practice related to waste management:
Serbian legislation
Law on Planning and Construction Act (Serbian Gazette No. 72/09, 81/09, 64/10, 24/11)
Law on Waste Management (Serbian Gazette No. 36/09, 88/10)
Law on Environmental Protection (Serbian Gazette No. 135/04, 36/09, 72/09)
Law on Air Protection (Serbian Gazette No. 36/09)
Law on Waters (Serbian Gazette No. 30/10)
Law on Mining and Geological Exploration(Serbian Gazette No. 88/11)
Corresponding legal acts and regulations
Law on Waste Management was adopted on the basis of the National Strategy for Waste Management, which is
harmonized with EU legislation. The Law regulates types and classification of wastes, planning and organizing of
waste management, means for handling of waste during its collection, transport, storage, reuse, treatment and
600

PROCEEDINGS
disposal, management of specific kinds of waste, supervision, monitoring and other questions important for waste
management According to the Article 30, operator is obliged to provide adequate closure and re-cultivation of disposal site, as well as professional supervision and monitoring for the period of at least 30 years after its closure
Prema lanu 30 Zakona o upravljanju otpadom obaveza operatera je da obezbedi rekultivaciju deponije posle
njenog zatvaranja i vrenje strunog nadzora nad deponijom, odnosno lokacijom, u periodu od najmanje 30 godina,
to reduce the risk to human health and the environment.
EU legislation
Waste Management Policy of the European Union is defined by the resolution of the European Council on the
thematic strategy on waste management, which is based on the Waste Framework Directive (75/442/EC), the new
Directive on Waste (2008/98/EC) and other regulations on waste management.
From the point of disposal (ash and slag) the most important is Landfill Directive (99/31/EC). The aim of this
Directive is to reduce the negative effects of waste disposal on the environment, particularly in soil, groundwater,
surface water, and the health of the population by introducing stringent technical requirements Directive contains
a number of criteria to determine the environmental portection measures for water, land and air by implementing
the means of collecting and treating of seapage and surface waters and installing impermeable layers (natural and
artificial barriers) to the bottom and sides of the dispsoal site.
The origin, nature and categories of fly and bottom ash
According to the Regulation on the Classification, packaging and storage of secondary raw materials (Serbian Gazette No. 55/01) waste is classified according to its origin, character and category. Appendix 1 of this rule contains
a directory to which the fly and bottom ash generated by coal combustion are listed under index number 10 01 01
and 10 01 02. According to the "List of waste" (Annex 2), fly and bottom ash to which ash and slag from coal power
plants are so-called. green waste, which mainly consists of inorganic constituents containing metals and organic
materials and are labeled GG 030 - bottom ash and slag from coal fired power plants and GG 040 - fly ash from coal
fired power plants. Characterization of fly and bottom ash from TPP Kostolac and SKO disposal site was performed
by the Institute for Occupational Safety and Health from Novi Sad and issued certification have categorized the fly
and bottom as non-hazardous waste with the assigned index number 100102 from the catalog of wastes.
3. TECHNICAL DESCIPTION
Location description
The most of the area occupied by fly and bottom ash at SKO disposal site is located on the abandoned riverbed of
Dunavac created by its relocation. The site was prepared with the overburden layering and construction of the peripheral embankments. Northern boundary is towards the Danubes safety dike, southern is in the direction of peripheral banks of Dunavac next to the village Stari Kostolac, eastern is parallel to the cooling water channel and
regulated watercourse of the river Mlava and western boundary is towards the hot water channel that goes to Danube, as illustrated in Figure 1.
The base terrain was mostly flat and mainly consisted of was mainly gravel material with the elevation ~70.0 m
above sea level, with the exception of the part of cassette A where terrain levels range from 73.0 to 80.0 m above
sea level. Disposal site was divided into three cassettes A, B and C and separated by partition dikes,
representing technologically separate units in
which ash was alternately disposed. Disposal area
was formed by the construction of the peripheral
embankment at ~73.0 m above sea level. The current height of the initial perimeter dike landfill was
determined up to the level of 74, 4 m above sea
level, in terms of the century coincidence of water
levels and extremely strong winds.
Figure 1. Location of the ash disposal site SKO
601

PROCEEDINGS
The projected quantity of waste

For an equivalent 6.000 working hours of TPP and consumed quantities of combusted coal the following data on
hourly production of fly and bottom ash from TPP Kostolac A and B were generated:
TPP A1 + A2 = 437.181 m3/yr + 748.426 m3/yr = 1.185.607 m3/yr
TPP B1 + B2 = 899.550 m3/yr + 899.550 m3/yr = 1.799.100 m3/yr
The size of the disposal site
Based on situational final contour map of ash disposal site SKO and cross-section profiles of the part with deposited material the following data are determined:
Base area: 2.529.037 m2
Surface of the slope: 665.535 m
Final contour area: 1.976.285 m
The total volume: 45.220.519 m3
4. CONCEPTUAL SOLUTION FOR REMEDY, CLOSURE AND RE-CULTIVATION

The selection of means, technology and method of closure is necessary to meet, in addition to legal, the technological, technical, environmental, urban and economic conditions. [1]. The objectives of the optimal technical solution
for remedy, closure and re-cultivation are as follows:
To prevent ash scattering induced by wind and thus reduce contamination of the environment by technical
and biological re-cultivation;
To stabilize the disposal site, reduce the ash scattering and prevent erosion of slopes by placing the soil layer that will allow the growth of vegetation
To prevent the penetration of atmospheric waters into the zone of disposed ash and further infiltration of
ground waters by placing a protective layer in the form of bentonite foil;
To control the runoff waters
To achieve a natural appearance of the area by integrating with the organic- natural assemblies of the surroundings
To enable the future use of the reclaimed area
Upon reaching the final level of disposal in all three cassettes, the ash will, after initial consolidation and settling,
form the general slope of ~ 3 towards the central overflow collectors located in each cassette. After leveling and
planning of the surface area using construction machinery, geo-synthetic bentonite barrier will be placed on to
2
padded base. The total area covered with watertight barrier is 2.641.820 m and spans over all three cassettes and
the slope of the disposal site. The existing overflow shafts will be strengthened and reconstructed for the reception
and evacuation of the atmospheric waters from the disposal site surface to the Danube and Mlava, for which collection channels are designed around the site. [2].
A geo-synthetic clay (GCL), made of composite geo-textile with bentonite powder connected by sewing, is implemented as watertight barrier. After placing the overlay construction, technical re-cultivation is performed by application of the 0.5 thick soil layer and construction of collecting channel around the perimeter of the site. Technical
reclamation includes a number of technical measures which will provide environmentally beneficial integration of
the area into the existing environment and create conditions for biological reclamation. The material from the
nearby old overburden dump will be used for as the borrow material for the re-cultivation layer. In the final stage of
closure, after completion of technical reclamation, biological reclamation will be performed with selected plant
species .
602

PROCEEDINGS
Overlay construction
The overlay construction is design in accordance to waste disposal legislation and upper cover layer will meet the
technical conditions highlighted in the Table 1.
Table 1. Technical conditions for overlay constructio
Class of waste disposal site

Applied measures for overaly construction
For non-hazardous waste
For hazardous
waste
For inert
waste
Drainage layer for gas generated in the disposal site 0,3 m
Required (if applicable)
Not required
Not required
Artificial watertight foil
Not required
Required
Not required
Inpermeable mineral layer 0,5 m
Required
Required
Not required
Re-cultivation layer 0,5 m
Required
Required
Not required
The main goals of the overlay construction are to prevent the following:
Direct contact with waste,
Generation of dust, and
Seapage of atmospheric waters into the waste.
Active area of SKO disposal site, presented in Figure 2, is 112.734 m2, from which cassette A covers 805.754 m,
cassette B 574.948 m, and cassette C 595.583 m2. Designed overlay construction consists of two different layers.
The first layer is mineral barrier made of geo-synthetic clay (GCL) 7 mm thick with the filtration coefficient of k=
310-11 m/s, which effectively replaces a required 0.5 m thick clay layer having filtration coefficient of k= 10-9 m/s.
Among verified advantages of this material, the most important are simple and fast installation, resistance to mechanical damages, it is placed on the slopes without anchoring, does not require the specific base or base preparation and installation is inexpensive.
Figure 2. Final contour of the SKO disposal site after installation of the overlay construction
603

PROCEEDINGS
Technical reclamation
Technical reclamation will be carried out by implementing a series of planned operations such as the removal and
transport of the material from the borrowing site, disposal and planning of the material, forming a surface with a
drop of 0.3% for controlled drainage of surface water, and applying a re-cultivation layer 0.5 m thick. Drainage bank
is designed to be constructed at the bottom of the peripheral embankments and it will be made of gravel and the
inner slope will be covered with the geo-textile (Figure 4).
Final recultivation layer will be made by discontinuous technological process, as presented in Figure 3.
Figure 3. Technological scheme of the operation of main mechanization
This primarily involves the use of the following machines, divided into main and auxiliary machinery:
Main machinery:
Bucket excavator (digging and loading of material at borrow site, rough planning at the disposal site),
Truck (transport of material from the borrow site), and
Bulldozer (spreading of the re-cultivation layer and flattening of the surface in coordination with bucket excavator).
Auxiliary machinery:
Grader (fine flattening of material on re-cultivated surfaces), and
Tractor (loosening of disposed material as a final stage of technical re-cultivation).
The required volume of 0.5 m thick layer of material for technical re-cultivation for cassette A amounts 420.000 m3,
for cassette B 305.000 m3 and for cassette C 315.000 m3.
Hydro-technical structures
After the closure and reclamation of ash and slag landfill SKO it is necessary to design a system for the collection
and evacuation of runoff from atmospheric precipitation, which is formed on the surface of the landfill. Part discharges formed on the surface of each cassette evacuation through existing overflow shafts reconstructed for this
purpose. [7].
With landfill slope surface runoff collector sewers are projected along the perimeter landfill and over the side of
the effusion evacuate the Danube (Cassette A and B) and Mlava (Cassette C). To collect runoff from the slopes of
ash and slag dumps SKO projected channel around the landfill divided into a total of ten sections, each of which
consists of eight sections of doubly decline, while the remaining two sections of the one-way downward, towards
the shaft assembly, where the distance across the lateral drains flow into the recipient. The position and dimensions of the channel are determined to collect contact of rainfall with the slope of the landfill elevation 73.0 m altitude to elevation 91.0 m altitude.
Channels are trapezoidal cross section of hydropower concrete MB25 with sloping sides 2:1, the width at the bottom of 0.5 and a depth of 0.4 m below the bottom plate of the channel sets up a buffer of gravel thickness of 10
cm. Detail of the channel is shown in Figure 4. Where there are projected lateral drains shares to the Danube (D1,
D2, D3, D4), Mlava (M1, M2, M3) and sections K1 and K4 on the route of sewers, at the bottom, it is anticipated the
construction of the circular chamber of inside breaking opening 0.5 m of precast reinforced concrete rings, the wall
thickness of 10 cm. Shining through the hole shaft mounted grille.
604

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4. Detail of sewers and lateral drain
Side drains are designed like PVC sewer pipes DN 350, which is leading through the steel protection tube below the
road.
Rehabilitation of overflow shafts
With project for closure of ash and slag landfill its planned that existing overflow manholes (A;B;C) be utilized like
vertical collectors for precipitation from grass surface of the former ash and slag landfill. [2].
In the radius of 5,0 m around overflowing manholes it will be incorporated filter, which consists of two zones. Immediately arround overflowing manholes will be backfilled stone with larger grain than overflow hole, respectively
dmin > 50 mm in the radius of 1,5 m. Next filter zone consists of gravel, granulation d=16 - 64 mm.
It is adopted sollution that one of the collectors remain unchanged to the elevation to which piles can carry the
load, and the lower part to strengthen with the setting of steel pipe 914x6.3 mm inside of overflowing manholes,
and the space between pillars and piles and steel pipe will be filled with concrete. In upper part of overflowing
manholes will be made concrete wall, with perforation with little pipes 50 mm at a distance 100 mm in the area of
60 cm from final elevation of landfill, to allow drainage. In this area arround collector will be backfilled stone larger
granulation all in accordance with hydro-technical design. At a free end, overflowing manholes will be closed with
concrete cover with thickness 15 cm with inlet opening which will be provided with steel cover. At horizontal
collectors, manholes with slide gates, in places of collectors outputs to the river, the protective steel lattices are
added.
Figure 5. Overflow shafts with details
605

PROCEEDINGS
Biological remediation
1. Performing agrochemical meliorations on the planed surface and slope cassettes, mineral fertilizer NPK at
a rate of 300-400 kg / ha, .
2. Sowing a mixture of legumes and grasses mechanical and manual (300 kg / ha);
3. Sealing
4. Mowing (twice a year, in order to eliminate spontaneous implanted species of trees and shrubs)
Figure 6. Outline landfill SKO after biological recultivation
Landfill SKO after 2040.

Urban Plan of the General Regulation ash landfill on the island of Kos, "Medium", among others, the following topics
in the newly reclaimed landfill space:
Forest Park
Golf Course
Aqua park
Sports and Recreation Centre
Jogging trails and extreme sports
Viewpoint
These facilities are acceptable from the point of view of stability of landfill, but in their design and implementation
must take into account the fact that it does not disturb the conditions that have been established through the
main project closure and reclamation of landfill.
606

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 7. Landfill SKO 2040.
5. CONCLUDING REMARKS
Choice of technical solutions for the remediation and closure of the landfill ash and slag SKO is based on the basic
principles defined in national and EU legislation, using the possibility that part of the structures that had been operational during exploitation landfill find their application after the closing.
REFERENCES
[1]
Urban Plan General regulation ash landfill at the location SKO
[2]
Major project of rehabilitation, closure and reclamation of landfill ash and slag SKO
[3]
Law on Planning and Construction Act (Serbian Gazette No. 72/09, 81/09, 64/10, 24/11)
[4]
Law on Waste Management (Serbian Gazette No. 36/09, 88/10)
[5]
Law on Environmental Protection (Serbian Gazette No. 135/04, 36/09, 72/09)
[6]
Law on Air Protection (Serbian Gazette No. 36/09)
[7]
Law on Waters (Serbian Gazette No. 30/10)
607

PROCEEDINGS
CONCEPTUAL SOLUTION OF DISPOSAL

THE OPEN PIT WASTE ROCK AND DEWATERING SYSTEM
IN A FUNCTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
IN EXPLOITATION THE COPPER DEPOSITS
KRAKU BUGARESKU - CEMENTACIJA AND CEROVO SERBIA
ABSTRACT
Daniel KRANOVI1
Zoran VADUVESKOVI2
Nenad VUOVI3
Miomir MIKI4
Miodrag IKI5
1
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bor, Bor, Serbia, daniel.krzanovic@irmbor.co.rs

2
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bor, Bor, Serbia,
zoran.vaduveskovic@irmbor.co.rs
3
Technical Faculty Bor, University of Belgrade, Bor, Serbia, nvusovic@tf.bor.ac.rs
4
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bor, Bor, Serbia, miomir.mikic@irmbor.co.rs
5
Technical Faculty Bor, University of Belgrade, Bor, Serbia, mzikic@tf.bor.ac.rs
This paper presents a technical solution with the

objective of finding the optimal location and
method of disposal the waste rock and dewatering
system of open pits at the site Kraku Bugaresku Cementacija and Cerovo, which operate within the
company Mining and Smelting Basin Bor Group, in
a function of environmental protection.
The present solution considers integrally the management of balance the surface and groundwater
in this area, such as the controlled management of
water was predicted from the catchment areas
around landfills and transfer to the treatment
plant.
Keywords
Waste Rock Disposal, Dewatering, Environmental Protection, Mining and Smelting Basin Bor Group
1. INTRODUCTION
The ore field Mali Krivelj-Cerovo is located ten kilometers northwest of Bor in the in Krivelj River basin. Within the
ore field, there are several copper deposits, including the deposits Cerovo and Kraku Bugaresku - Cementation (at
distance of about 13 km by air from the town of Bor).
Figure 1. Traffic - geographical map of the Eastern Serbia with a review of geographical position of Serbia
The main problem of mining at the

site of Mali Krivelj - Cerovo is the
environmental protection. During
development
of
technical
documentation for the mine Cerovo
Cementation 1, both for open pit
and flotation plant for processing, a
large
number
of
technicaltechnological
solutions
was
prejudiced
precisely
by
the
influence of mining activities on the
environment. Thus, drainage was
conceived at the open pit that
would prevent the impact of mining
water on the Cerovo River that
608

PROCEEDINGS
flows nearby by construction of ecological dam and accumulation near the plant for flotation processing as the
waste water from the open pit could be used in the flotation process.
Ore from the existing open pit Cerovo Cementation 1 from the site Kraku Bugaresku is processed to the level of
pulp, and then transported by hydrotransport of underground pipeline, length about 10 km, to the Flotation Plant
in Veliki Krivelj (originally in Bor and then it was diverted to Veliki Krivelj sue to the sophisticated technology). The
main purpose of this is not to form a tailing dump in Cerovo and thus devastate the environment. The transport of
ore by rail was also considered, since the railway Bor-Majdanpek passes near open pit, an alternative transport by
conveyor belt was also discussed, but all of these options were rejected because of their potential impact on the
environment.
2. PROBLEMS OF DEVELOPMENT THE MINING ACTIVITIES

Problems of current mining activities at the site Kraku Bugaresku Cementation and future at the site Cerovo,
which according to the strategy of RTB is planned during 2016, is reflected in the environmental protection of the
mine water from the open pits and waste rock dumps. Since the waste rock is deposited on waste dumps,
conditionally speaking, which is at the present time from the economic point of view, and as the DGS 0,15% Cu, it is
obvious that this waste rock also contains mineralization that will be leached in overtime and deposited by
atmospheric water in waterways. So, the problem is mine wastewater and location of future waste dump from the
open pit (CPD). The solution, applied to the mine Cerovo Cementation 1 - C1, is not applicable to the entire
complex, because it is impossible to collect all water from the areas of the existing and future open pits and waste
dumps and transfer to the ecological dam. In addition to finding the new solutions is the fact that in the past there
was an accident and pollution of the river Valja Mare due to the technical problems at re-pumping of water from
the existing "ecological" dam.
3. DESCRIPTION OF CONCEPTUAL SOLUTION

To overcome the existing problems, a solution is proposed that provides a drainage system so that the mine water
and water from the catchment areas of waste dump are collected in one place, where a treatment plant will be
built for water treatment and treated water of category II, which may be a habitat of flora and fauna usual for this
area, will be released to the recipient - the river Cerovo. On that way, the water quality of this area will be
preserved, and also the water balance because the same would be returned to the river. Water balance is just as
important for the village of Krivelj through which the krivelj River flows with its tributary the river of Cerovo,
downstream of the mining field of the mine, and whose residents use water for their existence in this locality, in
agriculture and households.
Deposition of waste rock from the open pits Cementation 1 and 2 will be made at the existing landfill in the south
of the open pit Cementation 1.
Previous considerations, when a disposal of waste rock from the open pit Cerovo is in question, have gone in a
direction that some part of waste rock is deposited in the excavated area of the open pit Cementation 1 after its
closure, i.e. ending of operation, a part in the excavated area of the open pit Cementation 2, also after ending of
operation and this open pit, and the majority part of waste rock in a valley of the Bigar stream in a direction Krs in
the southeast of the open pit.
After analyzing the above-mentioned sites, the following solution was designed (Figure 2):
1) Disposal of tailings from the open pits Cementation 1 and 2 will be made at the existing waste dump, next
to the open pit Cementation 1,
2) For waste rock from the open pit Cerovo (CPD), a landfill will be formed in a valley of the Cerovo River,
downstream from the border of open pit on the left side of the river, i.e. inthe east side of the valley. This
landfill was called "Waste dump 1".
3) After the completion of work at the open pit Cementation 2, the excavated area of the open pit will be
filled with waste rock from the open pit Cerovo, and it is the "Waste dump C2".
The explanation of solution is the following:
A. Location of the open pit Cementation 1, and after finishing the exploitation at this open pit, is still a
potential one in terms of the ore existence in the deeper parts of the ore body below the level of designed
open pit bottom. So, the ore body extends downward, and at present this part of the ore body will not be
609

PROCEEDINGS
mined, but there are prospects of exploitation. After consultation with geologists, it was abandoned of
this solution due to the given facts.
B. Location of the open pit Cementation 2 will be used for formation of waste rock dump from the open pit
Cerovo, considering that there are no significant amounts of ore below the excavation level - the bottom
of the open pit Cementation 2. This location is needed because at the Waste Dump 1 there is not enough
space to accommodate the entire mass of waste rocks from the open pit CPD.
C. It was abandoned from location in the valley of the Bigar stream due to t high costs of disposal at this site
since the height of materials would be more than 200 m. Another reason is of the ecological nature, i.e. a
potential danger of pollution the Cerovo River and downstream from the site Cementation 1.
On the right side of the valley of the Cerovo
River there the ore bodies Cementation 3
and 4, which are limiting to form a dump in
the whole area of the valley. These are
generally ore bodies with the oxide ore that
will not be mined for now, but the balance
ore reserves are potential in the future, and
the same must not be covered with waste
rocks.
Figure 2. Locations of waste dumps in the ore field
Cerovo Kraku Bugaresku and plants for waste water
treatment
4. CONCLUSION
The proposed conception of disposal and drainage allows to solve a very important issue, equally important for
both population of this area, as well as for the company Mining and Smelting Complex Bor Group in terms of costs
of production (compared to the previous solutions that are bandied about in various considerations and insights
related to Cerovo, where the proposal of disposal was in the valley of Bigar stream). Locating the waste dumps in
the valley of the Cerova River, there is a possibility that the water from waste dumps are gravitationally directed
towards the lowest elevation of the ground, i.e. to the location of the future plant for water treatment. Water to be
pumped from the open pits will be also directed to the same elevation.
The proposed method of drainage by collection of all mine water in one place at the exit of the mining field, and
water treatment in the plant for treatment and, then as the second-class water discharging into the recipient and
further into downstream watercourses, the problem of the impact of mining activities on the environment is
solved. More specifically - the quality and water balance of the Cerovo River are preserved, hence the quality of life
of the villagers in Mali Krivelj, the water quality of the Krivelj River is preserved, which flows into the Cerovo River,
and thus the impact on the village of Veliki Krivelj, which has already been suffering from the impacts of the open
pit Veliki Krivelj.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The authors would like to thank the Ministry of Education and Science for financial help in realization the Project
TR33038, from which the results presented in this paper were ensued.
REFERENCES
[1]
Z. Vaduveskovi et all.: Feasibility Study on Combined Mining the Deposits Kraku Bugaresku-Cementation and Cerovo, Mining
and Metallurgy Institute Bor, 2011 (in Serbian: Studija izvodljivosti kombinovane eksploatacije leita bakra Kraku BugareskuCementacija i Cerovo)
[2]
Daniel Kranovi, Miodrag iki, Radmilo Rajkovi: Application the Software Packages Whittle and Gemcom for Calculation the
Balance Reserves of Copper Ore in the South Mining District Deposit Majdanpek, Mining Engineering, 2011
[3]
Daniel Kranovi, Radmilo Rajkovi, Miomir Miki: Application of Software Packages Gemcom and Whittle for Design in Mining
Aimed to Rational and Cost-effective Utilization the Copper Deposit Veliki Krivelj Near Bor, Serbia, Mining Engineering, 2012
610

PROCEEDINGS
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ACCORDING

BEST AVAILABLE TECHNIQUES FROM IMPACT
AT TAILING DAM TORANICA
ABSTRACT
Msc Aleksandar LAZAROV
Environmental engineer
Indo Mineralas and Metlas mine Toranica - Kriva Palanka and Zletovo Probistip, R.Macedonia
a.lazarov@imm.eu.com
Indo Minerals and Metals environmental policy are focus on ongoing improvement of environmental management, to minimize the impact of mining
activity on the natural world, and on developing initiatives to enhance the
natural environment and quality of life.
Indo Minerals and Metals mine Toranica cares for the environment and continuously undertakes investments in facilities and equipment that will provide high level of measure and activity for protection and improvement of
Environmental protection.
For that purpose according BREFs BAT documents for the management of
tailings and waste-rock in mining activities Indo Minerals and Metals mine
Toranica started with large investment in the fields of Environmental protection on already existing Tailing Dam Toranica with upgrading on Tailing
Dam Toranica and extension on life time for exploitation of tailing.
Operational phases on tailing dam Toranica-kriva Palanka was with construction new drainage carpet on the sand dam, installation new piozometars,
construction on side channel OK-1, construction drainage geocomposite and
drainage pipe on retension dam, construction gabions and installation sprinklers on sand dam, Study for consequences by the flood wave caused by
crashing of tailing dam Toranica, recultivation on retension dam.
Keywords
Environmental, Drainage Geocomposite, Gabions, Drainage Carpet, Drainage Pipe
1. INTRODUCTION
Membership of the European Union is a strategic interest of the Republic of Macedonia, ever since the countrys
independence and one of the conditions to become member of the European Union is to implement environmental
law. Macedonian Law on Environment requires implementation on integrated environmental permits for operation
of installations with an environmental impact with Best Available Technologies (BAT) which to be implemented till
31 March 2014 year. The IPPC Directive dates from 1996 but has only been actively implemented in many countries
in Europe since 2001, with a final deadline of 2007. Already it has proved to be one of the more controversial and
expensive Directives prepared. The IPPC Directive seeks to impose the latest standards of industrial practice,
monitoring and regulation as well as the use of the latest equipment and processes on most industrial sectors, in an
effort to reduce industrial emissions.
2. METHODS
The location of the hydro tailing dam is in the valley of Kriva Reka, located between the profile "Varosani" and
"Cepen kamen" which is located next to the estuary of river Toranica into Kriva Reka and 24 km from Kriva Palanka
Municipality. On the upstream side there is an earth fill retention dam for redirecting the water from Kriva Reka
into outlet tunnel, and on the downstream side there is a dike constructed of tailing material. The transport of the
611

PROCEEDINGS
flotation tailing as pulp to the flotation dump is performed with resistant acid-abrasive thick-wall PVC pipes with
diameter of 315 mm. For that purpose according BREFs BAT documents for the management of tailings and
waste-rock in mining activities Indo Minerals and Metals mine Toranica started with large investment in the fields of
Environmental protection on already existing Tailing Dam Toranica.
Major concern in the recent years was the capacity issue of the deposing material. In order to overcome this problem, a design on upgrading of the impoundment was prepared. Several preliminary solutions were prepared. Some
of the solutions foresee upgrading with local soil material but some of them upgrading using tailing material as
construction material. Adopted solution foresees upgrading of the impoundment using tailing material as a dambuilding material.
Tailing dump Toranica, in its so far exploitation is functioning without a drainage carpet, but with further exceeding of the hydro tailing dump to elevation of 990 m, it is necessary a drainage system that will serve for reception of the discharged water from the (cyclone) sand to be constructed, than for reception of the spring water
from on the sand dam, as well as ensuring of geo-mechanical stability of the sand dam of the hydro tailing dump.
The drainage carpet is designed by one main leg that is parallel to the collector with length of approximately 50 m
and two legs, left one (with length of app. 28 m) and right one (wit length of app. 15 m). The drainage carpet is approximately in shape of flipped letter Y The main and the right leg is completely designed in excavation, while
one part of the left leg is above earth while the other part is in excavation. The left leg is positioned higher because
of the pass of drainage pipe above the collector. In one part of the left leg, it is designed that gabions in length of
12 m with height of 1 m should be positioned. For this purpose the utilization of gabions with dimensions of 2x1x1
with 810 cm shafts, and electroplate with thickness of 2,70 mm can be good practice, as a filling of the gabions
100200 mm hard fractions. For draining of the drained waters of the flotation dump, system of drainage polypropylene (PP) pipes, DN 250 mm, SN16 with 5 mm slot, in total length of around 100 m has to be placed. The propylene is a high class raw material that has proved its high quality in many years in complicated areas of the industry.
The roll of the geo-membrane is not to allow passage of spring water in the subsoil as water impermeable barrier,
retaining the water and then lead the water out of the tailing dump with drainage pipes. The role of the geotextile
that is placed around the geo-membrane is to protect the rough geo-membrane from damage, from subsoil as well
as from the filter material, while the role of the geotextile placed above the filter layer, is to prevent bigger penetration of smaller fractions from the flotation tailing dump.
Figure 1. Drainage carpet
Figure 2. Gabions
612

PROCEEDINGS
For upgrading of the tailing dam a most economical construction method is chosen, a construction using tailing
material. The concept of construction of the dikes (upgrading) is based on hydrocycloning. This is the same method
which is used for everyday disposal of the tailing material. The first stage of construction is positioning the hydrocyclon on 40 m from retention dam parallel to the dam's crest. After positioning the hydrocyclon, the construction
of the first dike starts with controlled disposal of tailing material. After completion of the first section of the dike,
the hydrocyclon is moved a few meters towards the opposite side of the tailing pond (figure 3)
Next step is disposal of new quantities of tailing material and completion of the current section of the dike. During
the construction the water in the tailing pond flows away from the retention dam. This is practically a dewatering
of the area where the dikes are foreseen to be built. The construction shall proceed until all dikes are completed.
Figure 3. View on retention dam and tailing pond during the construction of first dike
Before the construction of first dike starts, it is necessary to install the geotextile. The main reason for installation
of the geotextile is stabilization of upgrading. Also, for increasing drainage capabilities of the dikes, a drainage system is foreseen. This drainage system shall be constructed of drainage geocomposite and a drainage pipe. The
properties of the geotextile foreseen for increasing the stability of the upgraded retention dam are adopted on a
base of conducted stability analyses. During the analyses, different types of geotextile were applied to the software
model. This means variation of strength parameters and length of the geotextile. Also, an important aspect was the
chemical resistance of the geotextile. Considering all these facts, the adopted geotextile have to meet the following criteria: Ultimate tension strength:
Longitudinal: >100 kN/m'
Transversal: >50 kN/m' Tension strength at 6% strain
Longitudinal: >60 kN/m' Strain at nominal tension strength
Longitudinal: <10 kN/m'
Transversal: <20 kN/m' The overlap between adjacent panels has to be >1.0 m due to high settlements which are expected after
construction of each dike.
As one of the first phase of the extension with the exploitation of the tailing dump Toranica is preparation of slide
channel with the aim of preventing coming of large quantities of
water in tailing dump. Rainfall which will fall
on catchment areas outside tailing dam will be accepted by slide channel OK-1 that gravity will transport water to
the Kriva River. OK-1 is constructed on the left side of tailing dam and has effect to accept rainfall water from
slopes that are above tailing dam. Catchment area that is accepted by this channel is 25.90ha.
Channels are a trapeze shape and because of the large catchment area OK-1 channel is divided and sized for different flows and slope m = 1:1 and m = 5:1 (height: horizontal), with dimensions of b / h = 0.6/0.6 with slope of sides
1:1 . The slide channel OK-1 has length 629.59.6m. With installing sprinklers on sand dam will prevent dispersion of
dust and also prevention from erosion. Study for consequences by the flood wave caused by crashing of tailing dam
Toranica modeling will be simulation on movement flood wave along a downstream Time of first arrival of flood,
Time of peak tailing level Duration of flooding maps of point etc.
IMM Toranica take over preventative measures on tailing dam Toranica from erosion and dust with covering with
soil and plantation different vegetation systems depending upon the nature of the growth medium on sand dam.
613

PROCEEDINGS
3. CONCLUSION
The positive impacts of these projects will have long-term environmental effect, to prevent possible instability of
sand waves and extended lifetime of safe exploitation of tailing dump. The drainage carpet has environmental impact, because with its implementation it is solved the process of capturing of the filtrate and spring water in the
toe of the dam, hence the stability of the sand dam will be improved, i.e. it will have positive impact on the environment. Another aspect of using a cover system with soil and plantation different vegetation is the protection
against erosion.
The IPPC Directive lays down measures designed to prevent or, where that is not practicable, to reduce emissions in
the air, water and land from the above-mentioned activities (installations), including measures concerning waste,
promoting energy efficiency and ensuring accident prevention and damage limitation, in order to achieve a high
level of protection of the environment taken based on the application of Best Available Techniques (BAT).
Indo Minerals and Metals environmental policy are focus on ongoing improvement of environmental management,
to minimize the impact of mining activity on the natural world, and on developing initiatives to enhance the natural environment and quality of life.
Indo Minerals and Metals mine Toranica cares for the environment and continuously undertakes investments in
facilities and equipment that will provide high level of measure and activity for protection and improvement of
Environmental protection.
REFERENCES
[1]
GEING Krebs und Kiefer International and others Ltd: Anex to the main drainage project on the carpet in the sand dam of tailing
dump Toranica
[2]
Aleksandar L. ; 2011: Contemporary trends and practices for final disposal Hazardous waste comply with current European
standards. Masters work, Stip
614

PROCEEDINGS
GEOCHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND SIGNIFICANCE

OF TAILING DUMP FROM POLYMETALLIC Pb - Zn
DEPOSIT ZLETOVO (REPUBLIC OF MACEDONIA)
ABSTRACT
Orce SPASOVSKI1
Daniel SPASOVSKI
Faculty of Natural and Technical Sciences, University Goce Delchev - Stip

Goce Delchev 89 MK-2000, Stip, Repubilc of Macedonia
orce.spasovski@ugd.edu.mk
The paper will show the results of the geochemical tests on composite samples and samples taken from boreholes made in the last few years.
Old inactive waste dumps occupy an area of about 0,39 km2 and contain
about 10 million tons of sterile mass, the mean depth of these dumps is 9,2
m. While in recent active dumps are deposited around 4 million tons sterile
mass.
The elements show different concentrations in grain - size different parts of
the deposited material. Pb, Zn and Mn show maximum concentrations in
sandy part and slightly lower in the clay part of the old inactive waste dumps
Probistip.
Average content of Pb and Zn in sterile mass deposited in tailing dumps of
mine Zletovo is 0,37% Pb and 0,32% Zn, so in the not too distant future exploitation could be done the of these valuable components of this removed
material with the proper technique.
The concentration of Fe in all composite samples from the boreholes is high,
average Fe content is 8.32% (from 7.09 to 9.54%). The concentration of Mn
in sterile mass is also high, ranging in the interval from 3.52 to 5.60%.
Also within the sterile mass deposited in the mine tailing dumps Zletovo
some accompanying metals such as Ge, Ga, Cd and In are present, whose
application in the course of history was not known so they were not exploited and concentrated in the sterile mass.
Keywords
Polymetallic Deposit Zletovo, Tailing Dump, Average Content,
Pb, Zn, Fe, Mn, Heavy Metals, Value Assessment
1. INTRODUCTION
The remains of the old mining suggest that the lead ores from Zletovo deposit and its immediate surroundings have
been used since the Middle Ages or even earlier. The first significant research started in 1928 by the English firm
Selection mines limited and the deposit was investigated continuously until 1939.
In this period, the deposit was prepared for exploitation with capacity of 120 000 t per year. Modern mining started
after the World War II, when the deposit Zletovo was built as modern mine with capacity of 400 000 t per year. The
mine is still active and product lead - zinc concentrates.
Ecological problems increased in the last 30 years with the accumulation of tones of tailings in the mine tailing
dumps. Big part of these tailings now is a source of drainage waters with low quality. The dumps are located along
the river Kiselnica and it is a reason for the high concentration of heavy metals (Pb, Zn, Cd, Mn, Cu, As etc.) in its
flow. Because of that, the interest for studying and utilization of the mine waste increased. Knowing the mineral
and geochemical composition of the tailing is basic indicator for managing the mine tailing dumps (Zlatev,
Mladenova, 2004).
615

PROCEEDINGS
Large quantities of material were deposited in the old inactive tailings Probistip and the newer active dump Ozren
in the mine Zletovo. Material was deposited in the old dumps I, II, III, IV and V on the increasing distance from the
processing facilities; newer dump (in use since 1975) is on the south.
It is very important that large quantities of lead and zinc are in the mass deposited in the tailing dump of the Zletovo mine, and as a result there can be considered a special type of deposit, so - called technogenic Pb - Zn deposit.
Recent mining hydro - dumps and their immediate environment from chemical and geochemical aspect were studied by Mirchovski et al. (2004) and Spasovski et al. (2007, 2009).
2. DESCRIPTION OF STUDIED AREA

Old inactive tailings Probistip and the newer active tailing Ozren are locate in ore district Kratovo - Zletovo, northeastern Macedonia (Fig. 1).
Figure 1. Position of the surveyed area
Tailings occupy naturally negative relief (Fig. 2). Old inactive waste dumps occupy an area of about 0,39 km2 and
contain about 10,5 million tons of sterile mass, the mean depth of these dumps is 9,2 m. While in recent active
dumps are deposited around 4 million tons sterile mass.
In old inactive tailings Probistip and in the newer active tailing Ozren is stored slag which is product of processing
of lead - zinc ore from the Zletovo mine.
The slag is transported and deposited as aqueous suspension and in that way, in the recent tailing Ozren, becomes
to a natural granulometric separation of the material from the slag. In the part of the tailing Ozren, surface water
produced swamp with large quantities of acid mine waste water with volume which is variable depending on the
seasone (Fig. 2).
616

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Satellite displaying of mining hydro - dumps formed by Pb - Zn deposit Zletovo

Chemical composition of the gangue from the old inactive tailings is shown in table 1 and illustrated on fig. 3, 4 and
5. Fe concentration in all composite samples of boreholes is high. Average content is Fe = 8,26% (from 7,09 to
9,54%). Presence of Fe in the sterile mass is due to the significant Fe minerals in the ore deposit Zletovo (siderite,
pyrite, pyrotine, marcasite, magnetite, etc.).
Concentration of Mn in the waste is also high (fig. 5), ranging in the interval from 3,52 to 5,60 %. This is because of
the fact that this element has important role in the hydrothermal solutions, and as a result, it contaminated almost
all minerals in the mineral paragenesis. Mn is present primarily in sphalerite, galena, pyrite and Mn - siderite.
Table 1. Contents of elements in composite samples of boreholes (%)
Boreholes
Pb
Zn
Mn
Fe
Cu
Cd
As
Bi
Ag(g/t)
0,53
0,84
3,52
7,09
0,02
4,11
race
0,05
0,003
18
0,42
0,83
3,69
7,71
0,02
4,38
race
0,06
0,004
21
0,38
0,94
4,54
8,17
0,04
3,62
race
0,06
0,004
14
0,52
1,10
5,79
9,54
0,05
3,73
race
0,05
0,005
24
0,49
1,35
5,60
8,05
0,06
3,32
race
0,04
0,006
11
Average content
0,47
1,01
4,73
8,26
0,04
3,84
race
0,05
0,004
17,6
Pb and Zn have relatively constant concentrations, very high contents are determined only in individual samples
(fig. 3, 4). Cd in the sterile mass occurs in traces, its presence there is due to fact that Cd, basically, is concentrated
in sphalerite.
Content of Cu in all composite samples from the boreholes is constant, and it is because of the presence of significant copper minerals in the ore from Zletovo mine and presence of Cu as admixture in other ore minerals (sphalerite, pyrite, Mn - siderite etc.).
Content of Ag in all samples is within 11 - 24 g/t (average 17,6 g/t). these values are due to determined presence of
various sulphosalts in the ore and also presence of Ag as admixture in the main ore minerals sphalerite and galena.
617

PROCEEDINGS
As is present in all borehole samples with relatively constant contents within 0,04 to 0,06%. Basic mineral is arsenopyrite, which is present in the ore from Zletovo mine. Also tennantite is present. Presence of As is because it occures as trace element in many sulfide minerals.
Bi is found in all composite samples of sterile mass from the old inactive dumps. Basic mineral carrier of Bi is the
galena. Also, Bi appears in sphalerite, Mn-siderite and other minerals.
During formation of old inactive dumps Probistip only tailing from mine Zletovo was deposited there. Therefore
mining activities and processing facilities directly affect the chemical composition of sterile mass. In addition, major factors affecting the lack of zonality regarding the deployment of useful components in the formation of inactive tailings are:
First, number of boreholes and their spatial distribution are limiting factors to give a complete overview of
the tailing.
Second, polyphase disposal of the material in old inactive dumps and manner of entry of material from two
directions as pulp contributes to mixing and homogenization of sterile mass during its release in hydro dump.
Third, the streams in the area contribute to mixing and homogenization of the material at the surface of the
dump.
Figure 3. Diagram of lead concentrations in the samples of sterile mass from five boreholes in old inactive dumps
However, some zones can be separated. Moreover, the composition of the ore, probably marks the zone due to particle size and weight difference in present minerals. Lead shows minor enrichment on the depth of 2 to 9 m (fig. 3),
and zinc also shows enrichment in the depth (fig. 4), especially in the deepest parts of the dump. It is because during the Second World War, when the site Zletovo was exploited by the Germans, they produced only Pb - concentrate, and Zn went in the waste. Manganese has similar concentrations in all samples (fig. 5).
Figure 4. Diagram of zinc concentrations in the samples of sterile mass from five boreholes in old inactive dumps
618

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 5. Diagram of manganese concentrations in the samples of sterile mass from five boreholes in old inactive dumps
The elements show different concentrations in granulometric different parts of the deposited material. Pb, Zn and
Mn show maximum concentrations in sandy part and slightly lower in the clayey part of the old inactive tailings
Probistip.
It can be seen that geochemical data for the old inactive mining tailings Probistip reflect the type of flotation ore
and tailing deposited in the time during some sedimentation processes and climatic factors heavy rains like and
flows of surface and underground waters.
It can be conclude that over the time in old inactive tailings Probistip was developed oxidation zone of variable
thickness. Areas with very thin oxidation zone were likely characterized by the cementation of the pore space with
secondary minerals, making the oxidation zone strong and compact; this zone is called the cement zone.
The formation of cement zone results in the generation of gas diffusion barrier, which prevents the infiltration of
oxygen and carbon dioxide in depth. This is the reason for reducing oxidation kinetics, resulting in a thin oxidation
zone. Past findings suggest that the main parameters that promote the formation of cement zone are combination
of high content of sulfides, grains of small size and presence of carbonates.
Experimental tests of the petrogenic minerals that make up the ore shows that minerals placed in the hydro dumps of the mine Zletovo are very sensitive to air and water - ventilation minerals. Although the development of
models for predicted models for the description of the oxidation processes is a separate (specific) for each hydro dump, some natural factors and laboratory results can help in modeling of these complex processes.
Exposure of surface conditions and decomposition these minerals present in the tailing causes pollution of waters
and soils in the region.
Exploitation and flotation of lead - zinc ore is followed with the creation of large amounts of waste rock and dump
waste. Wastewater contain metals / contaminants such as Pb, Zn, Cd, Cu, Mn, As and others, depending on the nature of the ore.
4. VALUE ASSESSMENT OF TEHNOGENIC PB - ZN DEPOSIT

RELATED TO TAILING OF HYDRO - DUMP IN THE MINE ZLETOVO
It is important to say that large amounts of lead and zinc are present in the waste deposited in the hydro - dumps of
mine Zletovo, and as a result it can be a word of formation of new type of deposit, so - called technogenic Pb - Zn
deposit. This shows that such type of deposits refers to dump that is sterile or poorly mineralized rock mass in contact with the mineral deposit or is intercalated in it. Within this waste material is present small content of Pb and
Zn (average content of lead and zinc in the sterile mass deposited in the hydro - dump of mine Zletovo is 0.37 % Pb,
0.32 % Zn), so these useful components in the near future, can be exploited with proper technique.
Also, within the sterile mass deposited in the hydro - dumps of mine Zletovo are present some accompanying metals such as Ge, Ga, Cd and In whose application in the course of history was not known so they are not exploited and
concentrated in the dump. But, with time and development of industry and technology was established that accompanying components have unique application, so in the future they can be use. However, their complex obtaining, primarily the rare metals (Ge, Ga, Cd and In) in the form of rare - metal ore concentrates rather impedes their
industrial applications and increases the cost to obtain.
619

PROCEEDINGS
In the old inactive tailings Probistip were deposited 10 497 900 t sterile mass (table 2), and in the new one 4 000 000
t. The total amount of deposited sterile mass must be reduced for the various dispersing of the dump (water, air,
etc.), which are valued at about 500,000 t. So basically, the total amount of dump deposited in the flotation tailings
of the Zletovo mine is about 14 million t.
Prices of Pb, Zn, Mn, In, Ge in USD/t for 25.11.2008 were (London Metal Exchange):
Pb 2 210 USD/t
Zn 1 891 USD/t
Mn 2 060 USD/t
In 700 USD/kg
Ge 1 344 USD/kg
Value of technogenic Pb - Zn deposit related to tailing of hydro - dump in mine Zletovo in that moment was:
- Production:
Pb = CPb x Ee x Eo x Em = 0,37 x 0,92 x 0,95 x 0,96 = 0,31%
Zn = CZn x Ee x Eo x Em = 0,32 x 0,90 x 0,82 x 0,85 = 0,201%
where:
C average content of useful component
production due exploitation
Eo production due enrichment
m production due metallurgy
- Total value of technogenic deposit:

Pb = 2 210 x 0,0031x14 000 000 = 95 914 000 USD
Zn =1 891 x0,00201x14 000 000 = 53 212 740 USD
TOTAL: 149 126 740 USD
It should be noted that this total value of the tailings is not final, since there is increased concentrations of Mn, In,
Ge, Ga and other metals which are not taken in consideration in the calculation.
Table 2. Parameters of old inactive dumps
Field
II
III
IV
L (m)
200
250
300
300
450
S (m)
200
230
200
250
350
P (m2)
40 000
57 500
60 000
75 000
157 500
H (m)
10
10
11
V (m )
28 000
460 000
600 000
750 000
1 732 500
Vt
2,75
2,75
2,75
2,75
2,75
Qt (t)
756 000
1 265 000
1 650 000
2 062 500
4 764 400
5. CONCLUSION
Geochemical data for the old inactive mining tailings Probistip reflects the type of flotation ore and sterile mass
deposited in the time range under certain sedimentation processes and climatic factors.
Exploitation and flotation of lead - zinc ores are followed with formation of large amounts of waste rocks and sterile mass. Wastewaters contain metals / contaminants such Pb, Zn, Cd, Cu, Mn, As etc. depending of the ore character.
620

PROCEEDINGS
There are 10 497 900 t of sterile mass deposited in the old inactive tailings Probistip and about 4 000 000 t in the
new one. The total amount of deposited sterile mass must be reduced for the various dispersing of the dump (water, air, etc.), which are valued at about 500,000 t. So basically, the total amount of dump deposited in the flotation
tailings of the Zletovo mine is about 14 million t.
Average content of lead and zinc in the sterile mass deposited in the hydro - dump of mine Zletovo is 0.37 % Pb,
0.32 % Zn.
The total value of the mining hydro - dumps Zletovo is 149 126 740 $. It should be noted that this total value of the
tailings is not final, since there is increased concentrations of Mn, In, Ge, Ga and other metals which are not taken
in consideration in the calculation.
REFERENCES
[1]
Mircovski, V., Spasovski, O., Paneva, V.: The disaser at the tailing pond of the Sasa lead and zinc mine and contamination of surth
face and underground waters. 5 International Symposium on Eastern Mediterranean Geology, Thessaloniki, Greece, 2004.
[2]
Spasovski, O., Doneva, B.: Heavy metals in the water of the river Zletovska and the vicinity. 2 Balkan mining congress, Belgrade, Serbia, 2007.
[3]
Spasovski, O., Dambov, R.: Possibilities for ground surface water pollution from the lead and zinc ore processing in the Zletovo
mines. Annual of University of mining and geology St. Ivan Rilski Sofija. Part II: Mining and mineral processing. Publishing
House St. Ivan Rilski, Sofija, 2009, pg. 175-178.
[4]
Spasovski, O., Dambov, R.: Heavy metals and the River Kalnistanska and the Vicinty. 3
2009, pp. 667-670.
[5]
Spasovski, O.: The influences of exploration of coloured metals on the environment. Proceedings of X jubilee conference with
international participation of the open and underwater mining of minerals, Varna, Bulgaria, 2009, pg 507-511.
[6]
Spasovski, O., Mitev, T.: Heavy metals in waters along the river Bregalnica in the part oh hydroacumulation Kalimanci to Kocani.
XI YUCOR International Conference, Cooperation of researches of different branches in the fields of corrosion, materials protection and invironmental protection.Tara, Srbija, 2009, PROCEEDINGS, 273-277.
nd
rd
Balkan mining congress, Izmir, Turkey,
621

PROCEEDINGS
GENERAL VENTILATION FANS USED FOR THE AERATION

OF HARD COAL MINES IN JIU VALLEY COAL FIELD
ABSTRACT
Ion GHERGHE1
Doru CIOCLEA2
Constantin LUPU3
Corneliu BOANT4
Florin RDOI5
Vlad Mihai PSCULESCU6

1
ion.gherghe@insemex.ro 2
doru.cioclea@insemex.ro 3 constantin.lupu@insemex.ro
4
cornel.boanta@insemex.ro 5 florin.radoi@insemex.ro 6
vlad.pasculescu@insemex.ro
In a mines ventilation process, a critical role is held by the main ventilation

station which ensures the continuous supply of the coal faces with fresh air,
as well as the exhaust of return air resulting from technological operations
carried out underground.
The exploitation of coal from the Jiu Valley coal field is carried out by seven
mining units, namely: Lonea mining unit, Petrila mining unit, Livezeni mining
unit, Vulcan mining unit, Paroseni mining unit, Lupeni mining unit and
Uricani mining unit. The general ventilation of these mines is provided by the
main ventilation stations which are equipped with axial fans type VOD 3.0,
VOD 2.1, VOKD 1.8 made in Russia, respectively with VAD 2.1 fans made in
Romania.
Following the carried out analysis, it is highlighted that the ventilation of
each mine is insufficient ensured, in some instances the main fan operating
at maximum inclination angle of the blades, with low air flows.
This paper work presents in detail the results obtained, as well as the required measures that have to be applied in order to improve the ventilation
of these mines.
Keywords
Fan, General Ventilation, Main Ventilation Station
1. INTRODUCTION
In the mining ventilation process, the leading role is held by the main ventilation station which ensures the continuous supply with fresh air of the work faces, as well as the exhaust of return air from the network of mine workings.
The management of the mining ventilation in case of the existence of high concentrated production units as well
as of enhanced requirements in the occupational health and safety field has entailed the necessity for developing
new types of fans which are proper for these purposes. These main ventilation fans are of axial and centrifugal
types [2; 5]:
Axial fans, into which air enters directly in the fan and it is centred on the rotation axis of the engine. Due to
rotation velocities which are relatively high in comparison with the ones of the centrifugal fans, the axial
fans make more noise;
Centrifugal fans, into which air enters axially, forms a right angle and after that radially moves outside under
the action of the centrifugal force. The blades of the rotor may be straight or curved forward or behind, depending on the rotation direction.
In Germany, Poland and Africa there are frequently used vertical axial fans for which the cost of the foundation and
of the connection channel is 2-3 times lower, and the efficiency of the installation is higher [4].
The modern concept related to the operation of fans has provided the possibility to automate their adjustment
depending on the necessities. There have been developed fans with adjustable blades into operation, which so ensure the proper permanent ventilation.
The adjustment through the variation of the rotation velocity of electrical engines may decrease power consumption by 30-50 %, the possibility/control of the velocity variation of the engine providing their increased lifetime,
and being the most advanced electrical engine protection method.
622

PROCEEDINGS
2. TYPES OF FANS USED FOR THE VENTILATION OF ROMANIAN HARD COAL MINES
The exploitation of coal from the Jiu Valley coal field is carried out by seven mining units, namely: Lonea, Petrila,
Livezeni, Vulcan, Paroseni, Lupeni and Uricani. The general ventilation of these mines is provided by the main ventilation stations which are equipped with axial fans type VOD 3.0, VOD 2.1, VOKD 1.8, respectively with VAD 2.1 [3].
Description of the Main Ventilation Stations
Lonea mining unit
The general ventilation is carried out through the JIE main ventilation station, equipped with two similar ventilation units, of VOD 2.1 axial type.
Petrila mining unit
There is used CENTRE main ventilation station, equipped with two similar ventilation units, of VOD 2.1 axial type.
Livezeni mining unit
There are used two main ventilation stations, namely: Ventilation shaft no.2 station, equipped with two identical
ventilation fans type VOD 2.1 and the EAST Ventilation shaft station equipped with two similar ventilation fans of
axial type VAD 2.1;
Vulcan mining unit
The general ventilation of Vulcan mining unit is carried out by the main ventilation station SHAFT 10 CAROLUS,
equipped with two engine-axial fan aggregates of VOD 2.1 type;
Paroeni mining unit
In order to achieve the general ventilation of Paroseni mining unit the NO.18 main ventilation station is used,
which is equipped with two identical ventilation aggregates of VOD 3.0 axial type;
Lupeni mining unit
For the ventilation of Lupeni mining unit there are used two main ventilation stations, namely: CENTRAL RISING
station equipped with two identical ventilation aggregates of VOKD 1.8 type and the 1 EAST station which is
equipped with two identical ventilation aggregates of VOD 3.0 type;
Uricani mining unit
There are used two main ventilation stations: EAST VENTILATION SHAFT station, equipped with two ventilation
aggregates of VOD 2.1 type and WEST VENTILATION SHAFT station, equipped with two VAD 2.1 ventilation aggregates.
The nominal parameters of these types of fans are presented in table 1.
Table 1. Nominal parameters of the fans
NO.
CHARACTERISTICS OF FANS
1.
2.
3
VAD. 2.1
VOD 3.0
VOKD 1.8
Diametre of the rotor (mm)
2100
2100
3000
1800
Number of gears
Fan rotation speed (rot/min)
735
750
600.0
minimum
20
20
50-60
22
minimum
110
110
240-270
93
4.
Flow in the work area (m3/s )
5.
Depression (pressure) (Pa)
6.
Required power (kw)
minimum
785
800
800-1200
1668
minimum
3335
3400
3000-4000
4758
minimum
100
100
600
100
minimum
430
430
1250
450
Installed power (kw)
500
500
1250
500
8.
Installation efficiency
0.6 - 0.8
0.6 - 0.8
0.8
0.77
9.
Power required by the engine PM (kw)
500
500
1250
450
10.
Engine rotation speed nM (rot /min.)
750
750
600
1000
11.
Supply voltage U (v)
6000
6000
6000
6000
12.
Power factor: cos
0,9
0,9
0,9
0,9
FAN TYPES
VOD 2.1
623

PROCEEDINGS
3. ANALYSIS OF THE OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS OF MAIN VENTILATION STATIONS

From the analysis of parameters achieved by the main ventilation stations operating in Jiu Valley coal field, there
may be highlighted the following [3]:
Mines from Jiu Valley coal field are ventilated either by one main ventilation station (Lonea, Petrila, Vulcan,
Paroeni), or by the main ventilation stations (Livezeni, Lupeni, Uricani);
The main ventilation stations equipped with axial fans operate with the blades of the rotor between 15
(East Ventilation Shaft Station Livezeni mining unit) and 45 (Central Rising StationLupeni mining unit);
Air flows achieved by these fans, depending on the inclination angle of the blades varies between large limits, having the following values:
= 15 - East Ventilation Station Livezeni mining unit- Qv = 35,32 m3/s;
= 20 - Shaft no. 10 Karolus station Vulcan mining unit - Qv = 53,11 m3/s;

West ventilation Shaft station Uricani mining unit - Qv = 48,83 m3/s;
= 25 - Ventilation Shaft no. 2 Livezeni mining unit - Qv = 43,20 m3/s;

No. 18 Shaft Paroeni mining unit - Qv = 101,78 m3/s;
Shaft 1 East station Lupeni mining unit - Qv = 99,20 m3/s;
West Shaft station Uricani mining unit - Qv = 45,11 m3/s;
= 35 - Jie Shaft station Lonea mining unit - Qv = 53,20 m3/s;

Centre station Petrila mining unit - Qv = 62,83 m3/s;
= 45 - Central Rising station Lupeni mining unit - Qv = 61,23 m3/s;
Power adsorbed from the power network by the electrical engines of the fans ranges between 17,6 % (Shaft
no. 10 station Vulcan mining unit) and 82,22 % (Central Rising station Lupeni mining unit), from their
nominal power;
The efficiencies at which the main ventilation stations currently operate range between 0,23 (East Ventilation station Livezeni mining unit) and 0,59 (Centre station Petrila mining unit);
Air losses through short-circuiting with the surface have values ranging between 1,7 % (No. 18 station
Paroeni mining unit) and 56 % (Jiet Shaft station Lonea mining unit);
Following the carried out analysis, there is highlighted that there is not totally ensured the aeration capacity at the
level of each mine, existing cases in which the main fan operates at the maximum inclination angle of the blades
from the rotor (Central Rising Station Lupeni mining unit)
In order to establish the performances of the fans from the main ventilation stations, at least once every two years
the characteristic curves of the fans are determined [1; 2; 3].
These curves are the following:
Pressure curve, hv = f(Q);
Power curve, Pa = f(Q);
Efficiency curve, = f(Q).
Figure 1. Characteristic curves of the fan
The descendant part from the right area of the

pressure-flow curve marked in Figure 1 as static pressure indicates that this fan may provide
175 m/s at a very low pressure, namely when it
operates without having piping attached.
624

PROCEEDINGS
If the resistance of the mine increases, the fan will produce less air but at a lower pressure, fact which may be observed from the A-B part of the figure. This is the throttle area of the curve.
The fan power curve, marked with adsorbed power, shows the power required by the axis of the fan for various
developed air flows. The engine of the fan could develop higher power if there werent any losses.
The efficiency curve derives from the other two curves, the efficiency of each machinery is defined as the ration
between the useful mechanical work and the adsorbed energy, being generally expressed in percentage. The useful
mechanical work generated by a fan is represented by the air displacement, this task being measured in terms of
circulated air and the pressure which it imprints to this air. By determining the characteristic curves in operation,
there are obtained the real characteristics required for the proper management of the general ventilation of hard
coal mines.
4. CRITICAL ANALYSIS OF THE PERFORMANCES OF FANS FROM MAIN VENTILATION STATIONS

Because the ventilation is the basic manner for ensuring safety, health and comfort conditions in underground, the
problem of achieving the optimum ventilation is of permanent interest.
In order to characterize the ventilation regime related to a mine, there have been used the following indicators:
General depression of fans;
General depression of the station/mine;
Total circulated air flow;
Efficiency of the main ventilation station;
Power adsorbed from the network;
Percentage value of air losses through short-circuiting with the surface, in relation with the flow of the
mine.
These indicators which are specific for each main ventilation station are relevant only when analysing the simultaneously. From this reason, for the analysis of the mines with complex ventilation networks like the ones from Jiu
Valley, each being equipped with one or two main ventilation stations, this paper work highlights the critical analysis of the efficiency of main ventilation stations from each mine [1 ; 5].
In this regard, the following indicators have been taken into account:
General depression of the fans (ventilation system);
Total air flow related to the fans (ventilation system);
General depression of the mine;
Equivalent aerodynamic resistance at the level of the fan (ventilation station);
Total air losses by short-circuiting with the surface;
Specific power consumption related to the general ventilation;
Usage coefficient of the fans;
Coefficient of the mass air flow at the level of the fans, in relation with the extracted production;
Coefficient of the mass air flow at the level of the mine, in relation with the extracted production;
Coefficient of the volumetric air flow at the level of the fans, in relation with the extracted production;
Coefficient of the volumetric air flow at the level of the mine, in relation with the extracted production;
Carried out calculations for each mine are presented in table 2. The calculation elements are the ones which derived from the characteristic curves of the fans, taking into account the parameters related to fan no. 1 from each
main ventilation station and the planned production levels, the specific efficiency indicators for the general ventilation system being also presented.
625

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2. Efficiency indicators of the ventilation system
EFFICIENCY INDICATORS
MINING UNIT
Lonea
Petrila
Livezeni
Vulcan
Paroeni
Lupeni
Uricani
32,16
35,73
45,25
48,36
77,88
69,80
59,98
Fans related flow, Q(m /s)
53,20
62,83
70,65
57,43
101,78
151,2
93,94
Total mine flow, Qst (m) (m3/s)
34,15
55,90
61,41
45,26
100,11
136,9
85,99
Mine flow Qm nec (m3/s)

3
General depression of fans, hv (Pa)
1413,0
2305,0
1662,03
1118,0
2600,0
3133,6
1212,7
General depression of the mine hst (m) (Pa )
1099,0
1226,0
1349,33
471,0
2502,0
2895,6
1105,4
Equivalent aerodynamic resistance,

Rv (Ns2/m8)
0,499
0,588
0,3329
0,330
0,245
0,138
0,1374
Total air loss with the surface, Ks (%)
55,78
12,39
15,04
26,88
1,66
8,91
8,46
Specific power consumption PU (Kwh/tons coal/day)
5,54
9,03
5,20
2,22
5,99
4,36
4,55
Fan usage coefficient, Ku (%)
13,48
27,92
19,73
20,90
52,05
38,14
37,89
Coeff. of the mass mfan air flow,

av (t air/t coal/day)
4,58
9,99
8,46
5,41
5,48
6,70
13,64
Coeff. of the mass mine air flow,

am (t air/t coal/day)
2,94
8,89
7,35
4,27
5,39
6,06
12,49
Coeff. of the volumetric fan air flow,

bv (m3air/t coal/day)
3815
8326
7049
4511
4571
5584
11368
Coeff. of the volumetric mine air flow, bm (m3air/t

coal/day)
2449
7408
6127
3555
4496
5055
10406
Coal production, T (t/day)
1.205
652
866
1100
1.924
2.340
714
By analysing these results, there may be highlighted the following [3]:
Fans usage coefficient ranges between 13,48 % (Lonea mine unit) and 52,05 % (Paroeni mine unit). The usage level of the fans considered to be proper, with values higher than 30% is highlighted for Lupeni mining
unit (38,14 %) and Uricani mining unit (37,89 %). The differences between the highlighted values are due to
the combined action of the values for the following parameters:
- Different value of the aerodynamic resistance of the general network of underground mine
workings, including the ones used for exhausting return air, involved in the size of the depressions for each station, respectively for each fan (hsti , hvi);
- Different value of air flows and air flows short-circuited with the surface;;
- Different value of efficiencies specific for each main ventilation station.
The specific power consumption related to the general ventilation ranges between 2,22 kwh/tons coal/day
(Vulcan mining unit) and 9,03 kwh/tons coal/day (Petrila mining unit).
The total air loss with the surface ranges between 55,78 % at Lonea mining unit and 1,66 % at Paroseni mining unit. The high value of the air loss from Lonea mine is due to high short-circuiting achieved over Jiet
Ventilation Shaft.
The av coefficient has values ranging between 4,58 13,64 (tons air/tons coal/day), the minimal value being
characteristic for Lonea mining unit, and the maximum for Uricani mining unit;
The am coefficient ranges between 2,94 12,49 (tons air/tons coal/day), the minimal value being characteristic for Lonea mining unit, and the maximum for Uricani mining unit;
The bv coefficient ranges between 3815 5584 m3air/tons coal/day for Lonea, Vulcan, Paroseni and Lupeni
mining unit and 7049 11368 for Petrila, Livezeni and Uricani mining units;
The bm coefficient ranges between 2449 m3air/tons coal/day and 10406 m3air/tons coal/day, the minimal
value being characteristic for Lonea mining unit, and the maximum for Uricani mining unit; These values are
influenced by the following:
- Size of relative methane flows;
- Daily achieved production level;
626

PROCEEDINGS
Total value of the air flow resulting from other criteria (number of coal faces and opening
and preparation mine workings);
- Size of underground short-circuited air flows;
- Value of the air flows short-circuited with the surface.
The fan usage coefficient directly depends of the mutual influence level of the exercised action by each fan,
in the case when there are more ventilation stations.
The influence of the usage coefficient is especially highlighted in the equivalent aerodynamic resistance which has
low values when the sectoring of the ventilation is relatively well done (e.g. Lupeni mining unit - Rv = 0,1381 Ns2/m8
and Uricani mining unit - Rv = 0,1374 Ns2/m8) [3]. The above presented indicators might be used until choosing the
optimal type-dimensional fans usable in current and prospective conditions for the ventilation networks, for two
situations:
In the evolution in time analysis of efficiency indicators specific for each mine (for previous phases and the
predicted ones);
In the comparative analysis of the ventilation state for all mines from Jiu Valley.
Also, these efficiency indicators of the general ventilation may allow the establishment of measures and actions
required to be performed for each individual case, until choosing the types of fans characteristic for each mining
unit, namely:
Reduction of aerodynamic resistances of mine workings and the ones for exhausting return air, including
through the improvement of the ventilation network;
Intervention for improving the technical state of machinery from main ventilation stations until their replacement with more advanced ones;
Increase or decrease of air flows in mines in which this is advisable.
The results of this type of analysis may represent an additional manner for grounding the technical solutions for
increasing the efficiency of the general ventilation of Jiu Valley coal mines with the currently used ventilation stations, until their replacement with new ones which have superior parameters.
5. CONCLUSIONS
This paper highlighted the following:
In a mines ventilation process, a critical role is held by the main ventilation station which ensures the continuous supply of the coal faces with fresh air, as well as the exhaust of return air from underground mine
workings.
Depending on the complexity of the underground ventilation networks, the general ventilation of hard coal
mines from Jiu Valley coal field is currently achieved through one, two or more main ventilation stations,
each station being equipped with two ventilation aggregates, of which one is in operation and the other one
is for backup.
The ventilation fans from operational main ventilation stations related to Jiu Valley mining units are of axial
type. These fans are of type VOD 3.0, VOD 2.1, VOKD 1.8 made in Russia, respectively with VAD 2.1 fans
made in Romania.
In order to characterize the ventilation regime related to a mine, there have been used the following indicators: general depression of fans and of the mine; total circulated air flow; efficiency of the main ventilation
station; power adsorbed from the network; percentage value of air losses through short-circuiting with the
surface, in relation with the flow of the mine.
For the critical efficiency analysis of main ventilations stations from within each mine, the following efficiency indicators have been taken into account:
- General depression of the fans and mine;
- Air flow related to the fans and mine;
- Equivalent aerodynamic resistance at the level of the fans;
- Total air losses by short-circuiting with the surface;
- Specific power consumption related to the general ventilation;
- Usage coefficient of the fans;
627

PROCEEDINGS
Coefficient of the mass air flow at the level of the fans and of the mine, in relation with the
extracted production;
Coefficient of the volumetric air flow at the level of the fans and of the mine, in relation with
the extracted production.
Fans usage coefficient ranges between 13,48 % (Lonea mine unit) and 52,05 % (Paroeni mine unit). The usage level of the fans considered to be proper, with values higher than 30% is highlighted for Lupeni mining
unit (38,14 %) and Uricani mining unit (37,89 %).
The specific power consumption related to the general ventilation ranges between 2,22 kwh/tons coal/day
(Vulcan mining unit) and 9,03 kwh/tons coal/day (Petrila mining unit).
The total air loss with the surface ranges between 55,78 % at Lonea mining unit and 1,66 % at Paroseni mining unit.
REFERENCES
[1]
Bltreu F., Jurca L., Gherghe I., Sicoi D.: Study on the possibilities for increasing the efficiency of main ventilation stations
from mining units, (in Romanian), Mining Magazine, INSEMEX Study 1993.
[2]
Bltreu R., Teodorescu C.: Ventilation and work protection in coal-mines, (in Romanian), Technical Publishing House, Bucharest, 1971.
[3]
Gherghe I. Modernization of main ventilation stations related to hard coal mines, taking into account their current state and
the prospective evolution of the ventilation networks which they serve, (in Romanian), INSEMEX Study 2011
[4]
Patterson A. M.: The Mine Ventilation Practitioners Data Book, M.V.S. of South Africa 1992
[5]
Teodorescu C., Gontean Z., Neag I.: Mining Ventilation, (in Romanian), Technical Publishing House, Bucharest, 1980.
628

PROCEEDINGS
PROBLEMS OF STUDY PREPARATIONS ON EVALUATION

OF INFLUENCES ON THE ENVIRONMENT
FROM THE LEGAL REGULATIONS PERSPECTIVE
ABSTRACT
Milinko RADOSAVLJEVI1
Sinia STOJKOVI2
Mihajlo GIGOV3
1
Mining Institute d.o.o. Belgrade, Serbia, zastita@beograd.ac.rs

Department of energy, development and protection of the
environment, Belgrade, Serbia, sinisa.stojkovic@merz.gov.rs
3
Mining institute d.o.o. Belgrade, Serbia,
mihajlo.gigov@ribeograd.ac.rs
2
The purpose of this paper is to point out the most common problems which appear in preparations of the studies
on the evaluation of the influence on the environment.
The most common problems are defined from a legal perspective and suggestions for overcoming them. The consideration encompasses the most significant parts from
the content and range of the study and their interpretation in practice.
Keywords
Study, Environment, Influence
1. INTRODUCTION
The preparation of the study on the influence of objects on the environment is the first and preventive measure in
preserving the quality of the environment. The study preparation is preceded by a series of activities with the participation of the general public, analyzing of alternative technologies i.e. technical solutions, determination of the
possible harmful influences as well as measures for their reduction and removal. The purpose of every study on influence assessment is to gather data, predict harmful influences of specific projects on the life and health of people, flora, fauna, soil, water, air, climate, landscape, as well as on the material and cultural goods as well as to evaluate the interaction of the mutual factors. The end result of the study is determining and defining the necessary
measures in order to prevent, decrease or fully remove the harmful effects depending on the type of the project.
The developer cannot start the project realization without the assessment of influences and consent of the proper
authority on the study of influence assessment. These are the provisions of article 5 of the law of the assessment of
the influences on the environment (Official Gazette of the Republic of Serbia no. 135/04). Influence assessment
relates to the projects which are planned and conducted, every change in technology, reconstructions, capacity
expansion, work termination and project removals which might impact the environment.
The assessment study is part of the project documentation for a specific object. All of the foreseen protection
measures which might come from the study must be implanted in the plan and project documentation and must be
followed in the process of exploitation of the observed project. Influence assessment is conducted of projects from
the areas of: industry, mining, energy, traffic, tourism, agriculture, forestry, water industry, waste disposal and
communal services as well as for all projects which are planned on a protected natural good and in protected environments of an immobile cultural good.
2. THE PROCESS OF STUDY PREPARATIONS

The influence assessment procedure of the project on the environment is regulated by the law on influence assessment on the environment (Official Gazette of the Republic of Serbia no. 135/04 and 36/09)
There are three stages in the conduction of the influence assessment on the environment, and depending on which
list the project is located, one, two or multiple stages are required:
I stage: determining the requirements of the influence assessments of the project on the environment
II stage: determining the scope and content of the influence assessment study
629

PROCEEDINGS
III stage: the study of influence assessment on the environment

The subjects which participate in the assessment of the influence on the environment are: the developer, the proper authority, the study processor (the proper authority is the department which has the jurisdiction over protection
of the environment).
The procedure of the assessment of the influence on the environment and issuing the consent for the study on the
assessment of the project influence on the environment in case of mining projects, are conducted by the republic
organs in charge of protecting the environment. Without the consent for the study about the project influence on
the environment, the developer cannot start the project realization.
While conducting the assessment of the project influence on the environment, the proper authority: determines
the study requirement, determines the scope and study contents and gives his consent to the study.
3. THE METHODOLOGY OF THE STUDY ON INFLUENCE ASSESSMENT

The methodology and study contents are determined in the rulebook on the content of the study on the assessment of the influence (Official Gazette of the Republic of Serbia no. 69/05). The goal of every study is to qualitatively define the existing condition of the environment at the area in which the subject project is performed, as well
as to define and determine protection measures, and all of this should be followed by an appropriate monitoring
plan of the endangered elements of the environment. The most important elements of every study can be divided
in several entities, and those are:
The display of the existing condition of the environment at the location of the project in question (zero condition)
Defining the possible sources of pollution depending on the planned technology
Protection measures
Monitoring plan
From the environment preservation perspective, each of the entities, and all of them together are of great importance in the process of preparation of the study on the influence, and most importantly, they determine every
subsequent monitoring of the quality of the environment, once the project realization begins. This is why the existing or, zero status, is important, because it is the basis of every other analysis and monitoring of eventual changes
i.e. endangerment of the environment by realization of the project in question. By analyzing the potential harmful
influences of the projected technology it is necessary to identify and quantify the characteristic polluters of all
elements of the environment. Based on defining the potential harmful influences of the project on the environment, adequate protection measures are issued. Throughout the monitoring plan, the accent is on those dangers
which have the greatest influence and which should be monitored.
The monitoring plan should be done according to the present legal regulations, and measurements should confirm
that the environment will not be adversely affected by the project realization.
4. PROBLEMS IN THE PROCESS OF PREPARATION OF THE STUDY ON THE INFLUENCE ASSESSMENT

The question of how thorough should a study be in order to fulfill the requirements of the rulebook is often posed,
i.e. in what measure should each point be processed. Depending on what institution is doing the study, even for the
same objects, studies are sometimes too broad and written on several hundreds of pages, and still not give the
right answer to the most important questions. On the other hand, the preparation of each study on assessment has
many issues, and different interpretations of what and how certain should be arranged. Further on a short display
of the more important parts of the study which should be paid attention to is given.
Location description and a description of the existing condition of the environment
This chapter is an important part of the study on influence assessment contents. There is often not enough data on
the condition of the environment at a specific location of the project in question.
Pedological terrain qualities must be analyzed separately, having in mind that with every intervention in an
area, terrain leveling, surface exploitation (mining of mineral ores) etc. an irreversible terrain degradation
occurs in the surface layer of the soil. In the process of the preparation works, regular exploitation and accidents the soil can be contaminated and as such become a source of pollution of surface and underground
waters and air. The significance of such an approach is even greater if a part of the area is being reclaimed
or the surrounding area is being used for agriculture. The project influence in these cases is viewed from the
630

PROCEEDINGS
aspect of agricultural production endangerment, where certain emitted pollutants can affect the food chain
an directly endanger the people's health
Hydro-geological characteristics also have a significant place in cases when the underground water levels
are high.
From a geo-morphological (orographic) aspect the study author cannot neglect those environment factors
such as: altitude above medium sea level, terrain exposition, exposure to the meteorological and other influences, erosion and landslides, visual obstruction etc.
Location description - geological characteristics must be displayed through at least one geological profile.
In order to display the geological characteristics, authors often use data of previous research papers, or data
which can be obtained on the characteristics of a wider area, which exists for the larger part of Serbia. However, depending on the specificity of a location, sometimes it is necessary to conduct special hydrogeological studies on the project influence on the underground waters.
The study should contain data on the water supply sources (distance, capacity, endangerment, zones of sanitary protection) and basic hydrological characteristics for projects conducted in the zones which should be
protected from potential pollution of underground and surface waters, especially where water sources can
be found. Considering that in Serbia only a small fraction of local water supplies and central water supply
systems have defined zones of sanitary protection and conditions of conduct in them, during study preparations regulations on this matter should be applied, obtain the opinion of the authorities in charge of the water supply, and in situations where there is not enough data, it should be obtained in the field.
The description of the climate characteristics with proper meteorological indicators was, until now, burdened with unnecessary data, which could not be linked to the specific project. Because of that, besides the
general characteristics and indicators, it is necessary to display the micro climate specificities of the area, as
well as which factors influence them: the proximity of the waters and a high level of underground waters,
dominant wind direction, insulation etc. During this the meteorological parameters important for area distribution of polluting materials must be minimally shown, for continuing pollution sources as well as for accidents: inversion condition occurrences, quiets and atmospheric stability classes.
The flora and fauna description; natural goods of special value (protected), immobile cultural goods, rare
and endangered plant and animal species and their habitats and the vegetation is necessary and must be
given in the frame of the location description. Basic data at this point is obtained from the institutions in
charge: department of environment protection and the department of cultural monument protection. Data
and limitations - conditions for exploitation are especially important for projects which are constructed in
areas which are protected, especially sensitive areas, nature parks, archeological sites etc. The part of the
necessary data can always be found in the planning acts, especially area plans, plans of special purpose, general urban plans or documents of a lower level. Besides this, it is always expected from the authors to identify the elements from this paper in the field, on the very location, as well as the surrounding area, if a certain
impact is expected.
In the location description it is necessary to provide data on population density, concentration and demographic characteristics in relation to objects and activities. The necessary information on this point is gathered from the area and urban plans, with which a document (location information) is obtained from the department in charge on area purpose and urban conditions or quotes a valid document from which it can be
noted what the subject in charge of the area is planning at the subject location.
The biggest part of the data on the existing industry and housing objects, infrastructure is collected by the
authors in the field, during which the information on the existing and planned infrastructure objects and installations are gained officially from the communal enterprises in charge.
The improvement of the content of the study on project influence assessment on the environment can be achieved
by adjusting the contents of the study with the specificities of the specific project (certain chapters should be of
greater importance while some should be left out if this is in accordance with the location specificities and the
technological process).
Project description
The content of the required previous papers is largely done according to other regulations (the law on detailed geological exploration) and includes the research papers at the basin of the mineral ore which encompasses geological
surveys, exploration wells, laboratory examinations and technological tests of the mineral ore.
631

PROCEEDINGS
The project description should be concise and yet comprehensive and should provide enough elements in order to
evaluate the influence. The developer must be acquainted with the possible effects of the project on the environment. It is necessary to provide the situation map in a proper scale with all of the mining works, roads, accessory
objects, installations, mechanization and objects in the function of protecting the environment, as well as objects
in the environment with a scale slider in order to assess the distance of the nearest objects in the environment
from potential pollution sources.
Main alternatives display
The developers mostly do not consider alternative solutions on any account. Because of this, the analysis authors
have to theoretically consider this problem, which is not the purpose of this chapter. In cases of larger interventions in an area and conduction of projects which are of greater importance, in all stages of plan and technical
documentation preparation, alternative solutions should be considered, where participation of those charged with
protecting the environment is necessary.
Description of possible important project influences on the environment
The description of the possible important project influences on the environment encompasses the qualitative and
quantitative display of possible changes in the environment during preparation works of the project, regular work
and accidents, as well as evaluation on whether the changes are temporary or permanent.
This chapter is key for study preparation on influence assessment. The analysis of possible significant influences
requires significant knowledge on the part of the author and consideration of each individual or combination of all
influences. In this chapter an evaluation of the influence of the project on the basic substrates of the environment,
including the noise and vibration levels, heat and radiation is conducted. This is a complex task which can be conducted only
if the authors are provided with the data on the condition of the environment i.e. the data on the burden and capacities of the environment. In most cases because the data necessary does not exist, the authors first must assess
the condition of the environment and then as part of the same chapter the possible influence is assessed which
means duplication and an increase in the scope of the study. In the procedure of assessing the influences of certain
harmful effects measurement results, generally accepted models for prediction of aerial pollution, level of noise
etc. can be used as well as literary data, analogy with similar objects for which there are exact indicators of harmful
influences. Any technique used must be mentioned in the study.
Where meteorological and climate parameters and characteristics are concerned, there are not many projects
which can influence the meteorological and climate parameters, but because of the importance of these parameters which directly affect distribution, mostly aerial pollution, it is necessary to obtain them from the nearest meteorological station, and if necessary, measure them at the immediate location of the mining complex.
Ecosystems. Ecosystem influences can be assessed only in situations when the projects are being conducted in the
areas where natural ecosystems exist or where such ecosystems can endure changes due to exploitation or accidents during the project.
The remaining points of this chapter are clear and probably will not pose a problem for the authors of the studies
to describe them in an adequate manner.
Description of prevention measures, decrease and where possible, removal of any significantly harmful influence
on the environment
As the study on the influence on the environment in the area of mining is conducted based on the study of conductibility, the general opinion is that protection measures based on the regulations, location information, technical regulation etc. should be separated from those protection measures which should be implemented in the
main or suppositional mining exploitation project, because only then the study on the influence assessment on the
environment would fulfill its purpose and finally systematize them through a resume in the common technical vernacular in order to make the study more available to wider audiences.
The study should analyze all of the protection measures given in the project and regulate new measures if it is
proved that the existing are not enough - additional measures become binding for the developer. The required
measures of protection which should be implemented in the study on the assessment of influence must be strictly
implemented and controlled during project realization.
632

PROCEEDINGS
5. CONCLUSION
Improvement of the study content quality can be achieved by adjusting the study content to the specificities of the
project in question (certain chapters should be of higher importance and some should be left out if that is in accordance with the location specificities and technological process). The idea of this paper was not to describe in
detail the complete problem in the preparation of the study of assessment, but to determine it according to the
essence which should be the goal of each study. This is why the opinion is that not all points in the study are of the
same significance, and therefore should not be treated equally. In order for a study to be important in the entire
procedure from the projected documentation, through gaining a consent and finally work approval, it must have
measurable indicators in the environment protection system, from the existing condition display, through identification and quantification of possible dangers, measures of protection required by law and finally, suggested monitoring. These are the entities which should get most of the attention and which any study must relate to fully.
Therefore, if there is no adequately reviewed state of the environment, there is no possibility of tracking the harmful influences when the project realization begins, because the measured parameters cannot be compared to anything.
Proper identification and quantification of certain harmful influences determines adequate protection measures,
and from their efficiency the monitoring scope depends as well. It is clear that all of the aforementioned entities
are tightly connected and should get the most attention.
REFERENCES
[1]
Stojkovi S., Radosavljevi M. Obradovi T., Actual problems of study preparations on assessment of environmental influences
for exploitation of mineral ore projects: II Symposium with international participation "Mining 2011", Vrnjaka Banja, 2011
[2]
Law on assessment of influences on the environment, ("Official Gazette of the Republic of Serbia", no 135/04, 36/09) (in Serbian).
[3]
Rulebook on demand contents on the need for influence assessment and request contents on determining the scope and contents of the study on assessing the influence on the environment (Official Gazette of the Republic of Serbia, no. 69/05) (in Serbian).
[4]
Rulebook on the contents of the study on assessing the influence on the environment (Official Gazette of the Republic of Serbia, no.69/05) (in Serbian).
633

PROCEEDINGS
SPECIFICITIES OF OPEN PIT TAMNAVA

- WEST FIELD REMEDIATION
ABSTRACT
1
Grozdana NEI
Miodrag IKI2
Saa STOJADINOVI3
Sneana VUKOVI4
Nenad VUOVI5
Radoje PANTOVI6
1
RB Kolubara, Lazarevac, Serbia, grozdana.nesic@rbkolubara.rs

University of Belgrade, Technical faculty in Bor, Bor, Serbia,
mzikic@tf.bor.ac.rs
3
sstojadinovic@tf.bor.ac.rs
4
RB Kolubara, Lazarevac, Serbia, snezana.vukovic@rbkolubara.rs
5
nvusovic@tf.bor.ac.rs
6
pan@tf.bor.ac.rs
2
Mining basin Kolubara is the largest coal producer

in Serbia, with coal being mainly used for electricity production in thermal power plants. Surface
mining operations on coal extraction degrade vast
areas of land by open pit development, waste
dumps and infrastructural facilities.
Specificity of the remediation lies in the future use
of op en pit cavity for various material disposals.
Available space will be used for overburden disposal, regional communal waste dump, ash from the
power plant disposal and disposal of excess gypsum
from the process of desulphurization of flue gasses
from the power plant.
Since the open pit cavity is the disposal location for
various materials remediation must be adequate.
Keywords
Remediation, Open Pit, Tamnava, Kolubara
1. INTRODUCTION
Intensive development of the human society is based on the raw materials, energy and food production with
minimum negative impact to environment.
Primary emergent are fossil fuels despite the efforts to lower their use by utilization of nuclear, alternative or renewable sources of energy. Studies show that fossil fuel will still remain dominant energy source. Nuclear power
plants are efficient from the technical point of view but the recent events in Japan showed that they represent
serious environmental threat. Economic effects, stability and productivity of alternative and renewable energy
sources, despite they are desirable as clean, are still at low levels and these cannot be considered as appropriate
substitute for fossil fuels. Because of all this coal and oil, and in the case of Serbia just coal, will remain the
dominant energent in the next fifty years.
Coal is the far most important energetic potential of Serbia and incorporates 85% of total primary energy reserves.
With annual production of 37 million tons the lignite from surface mining in Kolubara and Kostolac basin represents
dominant energetic source [1].
Large scale coal production demands large surface mines and overburden dumps which degrade significant areas of
land and violate local eco-systems. Reference example of land degradation is Tamnava West field surface coal mine
within the Kolubara mining basin, central Serbia (Fig.1).
634

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 13. Kolubara basin
The main features of Kolubara basin are:

Largest coal producer in Serbia (about 80% of total coal produced);
Annual production of 30 million tons of coal;
Employs 10 000 workers;
Occupies an area of 600 km2;
Has four active surface mines
Field B+C
Field D
Veliki Crljeni and
Tamnava west field;
The main coal consumers are Serbian thermal powerplants Kolubara A, Nikola Tesla A and B and Morava.
2. TAMNAVA WEST FIELD SURFACE MINE

The main features of Tamnava West field are:
the most important surface mine within the Kolubara,
mining operations started in 1994,
137 million tons of coal and 278 million cubic meters of owerburden were extracted/stripped up to date,
remaining reserves are estimated to 328 million tons of coal,
presently installed technical production systems annual capacities are 12 million tons of coal and 24 million
tons of overburden,
capacity designed for the period of 2013 2017 is 13 million tons of coal,
coal deposit is shallow and has two good quality coal seams,
the final size and configuration are still not achieved and will grow in time,
overburden is stripped using two excavation systems,
three excavators extract coal,
the cavity of the pit will have multifunctional purpose.
635

PROCEEDINGS
3. THREATMENT OF THE TAMNAVA WEST FIELD SURFACE MINE EXCAVATED CAVITY

The cavity created by coal and overburden excavation will have several purposes. It will be used for overburden
disposal from the pit itself but also for the disposal of ash from the powerplant and gypsum by produced in the
power plant smoke treatment process.
According to the State strategy for waste management one part of the cavity, in Kalenic, will be used for regional
communal waste dump.
Parts of the excavated cavity which will be used for ash, gypsum and communal waste disposal were operationally
named cassettes (Fig.2).
Technical design of Tamnava west field surface
mine remediation for the period 2003 2007
defined areas of ash and gypsum cassettes (Tab.
1)
OE
OJ
Ogh
Olm
OO
Oqr
Pbc
PE
Pgh
PJ
Plm
PO
LEGENDA
Table 1. Individual and total area of ash and gypsum

cassettes
Object
Plato ,, A ,,
Plato ,, B ,,
Kosina ,, a,,
95
b
A
Kosina ,, b,,
povr{ina planirana
za rekultivaciju
Area
110
Individual
2
Gypsum cassette
12 ha 38 a 07 m
Ash cassette I
87 ha 81 a 47 m
Ash cassette II
36 ha 33 a 84 m
Ash cassette III
64 ha 56 a 42 m
Ash cassette IV
64 ha 56 a 42 m
Ash cassette V
64 ha 56 a 42 m
Total
95
12 ha 38 a 07 m
110
2
2
2
2
2
317 ha 84 a 57 m
70
Total
330 ha 22 a 64 m
70
109
95
95
109
109
94
80
94
80
" "
98

97
109
109
94
74
94
74
94
74
109
109
95
47
28
109
22
109
48
28
17
52
28
14
76
52
29
11
76
56
32
11
74
109
94
109
74
109
74
94
= 1075m
72
74
SU3,
87
88
60
89
109
76
56
32
11
56
32
11
74
60
74
60
74
60
74
60
74
60
74
60
74
60
90
76
Figure 2. Tamnava west field surface mine with cassettes in

the excavated cavity
94
109
94
109
SU4 =1095.4m
95
100
76
56
32
11
102
78
58
38
18
109
SU4, = 1400m
109
104
86
66
46
36
16
104
92
72
62
42
32
12
94
109
2
109
109
109
109
109
109
109
109
A2Rs-B 8500x60
72
104
62
42
32
12
2
87
80
74
74
73
66
60
60
37
37
37
39
22
22
22
24
74
74
74
74
60
60
60
60
60
40
47
54
25
32
46
53
74
74
92
104
92
72
62
42
32
12
60
A2Rs-B 8500x60
SU5, = 1063m
69
104
72
62
42
32
12
39
60
69
mrs1
32
42
42
42
20
13
U4=1600m
13
32
U2=1500m
42
62
62
72
72
41
42
47
52
42
47
52
57
62
62
54
56
72
72
76
62
U6=1272m
34
37
48
17
0
5
+
28
62
72
0
0
16
s
R
B
+
/6
25
0
3
6
s
R
h
c
S
62
72
27
32
7
1
0
5
+
28
12
32
7
1
0
5
+
8
2
12
32
0
0
16
s
R
B
+
/6
5
2
0
3
6
s
R
h
c
S
72
12
0
0
6
1
s
R
B
+
/6
5
2
0
3
6
s
R
h
c
S
55
62
M1=1417m
69
mrs2
U5=1134m
M2=1473m
58
60
76
70
62
70
69
/3
5
2
0
60
1
s
R
h
c
S
A draft design of regional communal waste

dump and recycling centre in Kalenic near Ub
was made on December 2011 (Fig.3). This 20
million euro worth investment by EU, Serbia
and interested municipalities should provide
solution for disposal, destruction and recycling
of the communal waste for the next 30 years.
The dump would serve 11 municipalities from
Kolubara macva region and three Belgrade
municipalities.
92
88
104
R
V
+
/5
32
0
0
0
2
s
R
S
104
636
102
102
102
102
102
102
102

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 3. Recycling facilities and waste dump
According to plans four transfer stations will be formed: Valjevo, Obrenovac, Barajevo and Lazarevac, which will
collect and primary select waste. The waste will further be directed to incineration plant and recycling center built
in the area of former Tamnava west field surface mine. It is estimated that daily amount of waste originating from
Valjevo, Ub, Lajkovac, Ljig, Mionica, Oseina, Vladimirci, Koceljeva municipalities and peripheral Belgrade
municipalities Lazarevac, Obrenovac i Barajevo will yield 330 t.
All this means that the cavity of Tamnava west field surface mine will be used to form inner overburden dump, to
dispose ash and gypsum from the thermal power plants and for collection, destruction and recycling of communal
waste from the region.
4. RECLAMATION OF THE TAMNAVA WEST FIELD SURFACE MINE

Having in mind that the cavity of Tamnava surface mine will be utilized as a dump for various material its
reclamation must be adapted to the material disposed.
The part of the cavity used as the inner overburden dump will be reclaimed according to standard procedure RB
Kolubara carries out since 1997. Table 2 is an example of biological reclamation performed up to 1997 [2].
Table 2. Overview of the reclamation performed up to 1997.
Reclamation type
Exploitation fields
A and B
Tamnava-East
Total
ha
Forestry
Forests
301
610
60
971
Nursery
15
20
74,7
1,8
Total
301
625
65
991
76,5
Arable land
40
235
23
Agriculture
298
22,2
Orchards
11
17
1,3
Total
46
246
23
315
23,5
Total biological reclamation
347
871
88
1 306
100
637

PROCEEDINGS
Ash cassette reclamation considers appropriate order of disposal and appropriate moistening to prevent dusting.
Ash is disposed in layers and the layer thickness depends upon ash composition and machinery applied. Upon the
achievement of the designed elevation the cassette is covered by inert material which is also a base for final
biological reclamation. Ash disposal technology will be in accordance with European legislation and will be an
integral part of the design documentation for thermal powerplanr Kolubara B.
Gypsum is a byproduct of the process of desulfurization of the power plant flue gases. Its quality and utilization
value depend upon the coal quality regarding sulfur content and the quality of applied limestone [3]. Since gypsum
has significant applicability in construction industry the disposal cassette can be used as temporary storage.
Gypsum cassette reclamation will be performed in a similar manner as the ash cassette and will be defined during
the thermal power plant design.
Once the final elevation is reached the dump will be closed from the top using impermeable materials and buffer
layer which will become a foundation for biological reclamation.
The cavity of Tamnava surface mine will be remediated using different procedures at different times but will finally
be rationally and fully recultivated which is the purpose of reclamation.
5. CONCLUSION
Despite the global need to replace fossil fuels as primary energetic source they will be dominant in the next 30
years. Serbian perspective, since there is no oil, for the next 50 years is coal production from the Kolubara and
Kostolac coal basins. Extracted coal is used mainly for electricity production.
The reclamation of any area must be planned, multifunctional and processed from various aspects in spatial
planning of municipality, region or country. That is why the project of Tamnava surface mine reclamation is so
important. It treats time in which mining operations are seized and the cavity is used as overburden dump. Long
term planning must consider improvements in environmental protection. Thermal power plant Kolubara B will be
designed and constructed according to European legislation on air pollution. As a byproduct it will produce large
amounts of ash and gypsum which will be disposed in the Tamnava west field surface mine cavity.
The specificity of remediation of the mine cavity lies in the various materials that are to be disposed. Different
materials such as overburden, ash, gypsum and communal waste will be disposed into formed cassettes.
Appropriate reclamation process will be performed in accordance with the type of material disposed meaning that
the cavity of Tamnava surface mine will be remediated using different procedures at different times but will finally
be rationally and fully recultivated which is the purpose of reclamation.
REFERENCES
[1]
Pavlovic V, Mitrovic S, Jakovljevic M, Perspectives of development and the strategy of surface lignite mining in Serbia, (In
Serbian: ), Lazarevac, 2011.
[2]
Tamnava west field design, Tchnical project of remediation, JP EPS, PD RB Kolubara DOO, Branch PROJEKT, Kolubara.
[3]
Stojiljkovic D, Zivotic D, Milovanovic Dj, Jovovic A, Manic N, Jovanovic V, The importance of referent coal characteristic
definition for the ODG system design, (In Serbian:
), , , 2011.
638

PROCEEDINGS
THE IMPACT OF THE TAILING DAM

OF THE SASA MINE ON SOILS IN THE KOCANI VALLEY
ABSTRACT
Afrodita ZENDELSKA1
Mirjana GOLOMEOVA1
Boris KRSTEV1
Blagoj GOLOMEOV1
Aleksandar KRSTEV2
University Goce Delcev, Faculty of

Natural and Technical Sciences, Stip,
Macedonia, afrodita.zendelska@ugd.edu.mk
2
University Goce Delcev, Faculty of
Computer Sciences, Stip, Macedonia
Flotation tailing dams affect the environment through the soil, water and
air, and in that way they affect the plants and the animals as well as the
people.
This paper shows the quality of the soil according to the concentration of
heavy metals in the surroundings of Sasa mine, more precisely, the Kocani
valley which uses water from the dam Kalimanci. The dam receives water
from the tailing dam of the Sasa mine.
The results indicate the occurrence of two geochemical associations: association As, Cd, Cu, Mn, Pb, Zn, which is directly related to anthropogenic impact that comes with problems associated with the exploitation of Pb-Zn
polymetallic ore, which are exploited in the area of Sasa - Makedonska Kamenica and in the region of Zletovo, and association and Ni, Co, Cr, which is
basically defined by the lithology or present geological formations in this
area.
From the examination of soils taken from the Kocani valley, it can be concluded that the increased concentration of heavy metals in the western
parts of the investigated area, near the Zletovica, is not a consequence from
the water from Lake Kalimanci but it is the result of the influence thru
Zletovo lead and zinc mine have on the surface and underground water
system Zletovica.
It can be concluded that the water of Lake Kalimanci are still not contaminated to the extent that may endanger the soil system in the region of
Kocani valley.
Keywords
Heavy Metals, Kocani Valley, Soil, Flotation Tailing Dam
1. INTRODUCTION
Heavy metals are common and significant contaminants of environmental and many of these metals present in
higher concentrations can be harm on the health of humans and animals. Thus recent years there have been numerous studies on the origin and level of contamination in the environment of these elements. Particularly endangered areas are mining areas, especially polymetallic ore mines, which are represented as natural and anthropogenic sources of pollution.
The largest mining environment pollution with heavy metals comes from flotation tailing dams which with the longterm discharge of contaminated water into natural streams comes to the accumulation of harmful substances on
the sides of the bed and around it, which comes to contamination and the surrounding land.
The soil can be naturally rich with heavy metals, but the bigger problem is anthropogenic pollution. The high content of heavy metals adversely effect of the quality of the soil, which is manifested by blocking the reaction ability
of humic acid and disturbance of the process of formation of humic substances. When heavy metals react with humic substances, their relations with the mineral part of the soil are break and that leading to destruction of soil
structure and partial loss of humus, and to reduce the ability of anti-erosion of the soil.
639

PROCEEDINGS
Through polluted soil, heavy metals penetrate in to the plant, as well as in to the agricultural products. Many of
these plants showed high resistance to heavy metals, and so successfully survive such metallic substrates. Resistance of certain agricultural products is a special danger since they are used for human consumption.
The regions around flotation tailing dams should be made analysis of contamination of soil. If it is found that some
soils are contaminated should be banned agricultural production of such lands and to take measures for recultivation and restoring the solvency of those affected soils.

The purpose of this paper is to perform testing of soil from Kocani Valley as one of the largest basins in the region
which are irrigated by the water from Lake Kalimanci, which is the natural reservoir of the total anthropogenic factor that has occurred in the exploitation of Pb-Zn polymetallic ores from the mine Sasa - Makedonska Kamenica.
The basic idea for the collection and processing of samples from these soils was to determine the possible impact
of anthropogenic water from the irrigation system Kalimanci on soils of the region of Kocani Valley.
The points that have taken samples for testing the quality of the soil is defined according to the method for network sampling positions defined by GPS.
Hundred samples are taken in the area of Jakimovsko field - near the village Istibanja and along the river Bregalnica
to the village Krupiste. Specifically in the vicinity of villages: Krupiste, Ularci, Cesinovo, Ciflik, Obleshevo, D. Podlog,
G. Podlog, Mojanci, Grdovci and Pribacevo, and to: Orizari, Kocani, Trkanje, Banja, Spancevo and Sokolarci. These
hundred samples are marked with blue signs from T1 to T100 (Fig. 2).
Sampling is carried out with a shovel, using a standard procedure - five points of mixing (Fig. 1).
Figure 1. Sampling models with mixing five points
Figure 2. Grid with hundred sample point
640

PROCEEDINGS
The preparation of samples is according ISO 11464 which includes the following steps: drying, crushing, sieving,
reduced and grinding.
First the soil is dried at room temperature or in an oven at a temperature of 40C. Drying lasts until the loss in mass
of soil is not greater than 5% for 24 hours. From the dry soil removed all impurities (stones, glass, garbage) and
sieved through a sieve - 2 mm. Fraction >2 mm are crushing, and the fraction <2 mm is reduced by using a Jones
splitter or manual by method of quartering. Reduction of the sample is repeated several times depending on the
weight of the sample.
To make a chemical analysis, which requires soil from 2g with size finer than 250m, the sample have to be grinding. Processing procedure is schematically shown in figure 3.
Figure 3. Schematic representation of procedure for processing of samples
The concentration of heavy and toxic metals (Pb, Zn, Cd, As, Ni, Cr, Fe, Mn, Cu) in the samples were determined by
ICP-AES, ICP-MS.
641

PROCEEDINGS

The results of tested soil samples are shown on the figures of 4-12:
Figure 4. Content of Zn
Figure 5. Content of Pb
Figure 6. Content of As
642

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 7. Content of Cr
Figure 8. Content of Ni
Figure 9. Content of Co
643

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 10. Content of Cd
Figure 11. Content of Fe
Figure 12. Content of Mn
644

PROCEEDINGS
According to the results of tests on the quality of the soil can be concluded:
The results indicate the occurrence of two geochemical associations of elements that actually have different geochemical affinities in supergene cycle of mobility of elements. These are the following geochemical associations
which have different anthropogenic source and impact:
Association As, Cd, Cu, Mn, Pb, Zn, which is directly related to anthropogenic impact that comes with problems associated with the exploitation of Pb-Zn polymetallic ore, which are exploited in the area of SasaMakedonska Kamenica and in the region of Zletovo.
Association Ni, Co, Cr, which is basically defined by the lithology or present geological formations in this area.
The displayed geochemical distributions can be concluded that the association that is related to anthropogenic
impact (As, Cd, Cu, Mn, Pb, Zn) is spatially located in the western parts of the investigated area near the river
Zletovica while in remainder researched area have not some important geochemical accumulation of which could
be conclude consequential distributions. This clearly indicates that these anthropogenic influences due to the irrigated these areas with water from the river Zletovica.
This anthropogenic impact is not a consequence of water of the Lake Kalimanci, it is the result of the influences
that have Zletovo lead and zinc mine on system of surface and underground water on the river Zletovica. The
content of these elements, in most cases, far exceed those adopted in the Netherlands for the content of heavy
metals in soils for intervention (incident) cases. The value of zinc exceeds the recommended maximum allowable
concentration in Macedonia that is 200 mg/kg. Exceeds even the intervention value according Netherland allowed
concentrations and at some points it is 1986 mg/kg. The content of lead increase up to 1319 mg/kg, and the recommended maximum allowable concentration in Macedonia is 100 mg/kg. Arsenic increase up to 77 mg/kg and the
recommended is 30 mg/kg.
Geochemical distributions of Ni, Co, Cr association clearly indicate that there is a very high correlation of these
geochemical distributions of the geological structure of the area (a large amount of vulcanoclastic and pyroclastic
materials and appearance of flysch formations). These geochemical distributions have not related with the Lake
Kalimanci, and thus neither anthropogenic impact that comes from flotation tailings in the region of Sasa mine.
From the examination of soils taken from the Kocani valley, it can be concluded that the water of Lake Kalimanci
are still not contaminated to the extent that may endanger the soil system in the region of Kocani valley
4. CONCLUSION
From the examination of soils taken from the Kocani valley, it can be concluded that the increased concentration
of heavy metals in the western parts of the investigated area, near the Zletovica, is not a consequence from the
water from Lake Kalimanci but it is the result of the influence thru Zletovo lead and zinc mine have on the surface and underground water system Zletovica.
It can be concluded that the water of Lake Kalimanci are still not contaminated to the extent that may endanger
the soil system in the region of Kocani valley.
REFERENCES
[3]
Zendelska, Afrodita (2010) Evaluation of the quality of water, soil and sediments in the vicinity of the tailing dam of Sasa mine
and its impact on the environment. Masters thesis, University Goce Delcev Shtip.
Krstev, Boris and Mitrev, Sasa and Boev, Blazo (2010)
,
, 2009-2010, .
Ministry of Environment (1999), Protocol For The Sampling and Analysis of Industrial/Municipal Wastewater, Ontario
[4]
Soil Sampling Methods, MIDWEST LABORATORIES, INC. Omaha
[5]
Quality Assurance Systems Requirements (2009), Chapter 7- Soil and Sediment Sampling Procedures
[6]
Golomeova, Mirjana and Golomeov, Blagoj (2012) .

.
[7]
Krstev, Boris and Golomeov, Blagoj (2008) . - .
[8]
Krstev, Boris and Boev, Blazo and Golomeov, Blagoj and Krstev, Aleksandar and Golomeova,
Todor (2006)JICA Project for investigation of the soil quality in Macedonia.
[1]
[2]
Mirjana and Delipetrov,
645

PROCEEDINGS
TECHNICAL RECLAMATION OF THE FLYING ASH AND

BOTTOM ASH DEPOT IN THE COAL BASIN KOSTOLAC
ABSTRACT
eljko PRATALO1
Simeun MARIJANAC
Dragan M. MILOEVI
Branka JOVANOVI

1
zeljko.prastalo@ribeograd.ac.rs
The flying ash and bottom ash from thermal power plants in the coal basin
Kostolac is disposed of at the Middle island of Kostolac location (further on
MIK) on right side of the bank of the Danube, near the town of Kostolac. In an
area of 200 ha, three cassettes were built (A, B and C) for flying ash and bottom ash disposal. The surface of the levee along the rim of MIK is 59 ha.
According to the project, upon cessation of flying ash and bottom ash disposal, the area of MIK is to be reclaimed. Multiple stages of reclamation are
foreseen, the first stage being the reclamation of the cassette A followed
by reclamation of the remaining two. In this paper the reclamation technology with implementation of an impermeable foil and placement of fertile
soil is displayed as preparation for biological reclamation.
Keywords
Kostolac, Deposit, Flying Ash and Bottom Ash, Deposition, Land Reclamation
1. INTRODUCTION
Flying ash and bottom ash deposit "Middle island of Kostolac", which is the subject of this paper, is located on the
north side of the town of Kostolac and at a distance of 2.5 km by air from the thermal power plant "Kostolac A".
From the west is the Danube River, and from the north side is the new bank of the Mlava river. The south side is an
uninhabited area, and from the east side is the Old Kostolac settlement, figure 1.
It was designed for the deposition of flying and bottom ash from the TEKO - A blocks and intensely exploited since
the 1980s when the 210 MW TEKO - A block was put into operation. Since blocks B1 (1998) and B2 (1991) were put
in operation the depot is used for storing flying ash and bottom ash for TEKO B as well [2].
Because of the climate that dominates the area, with special focus on the wind frequency, it can be concluded that
the largest ecological problem is the scattering of flying ash. Frequency of wind from certain directions as well as
the calm periods for the Veliko Gradite and Poarevac area is displayed in table 1.
Figure 1. Picture of the terrain in the "Middle island of Kostolac" [1]
646

PROCEEDINGS
Table 1. Frequency of wind at the Veliko Gradite and Poarevac area
NE
SE
SW
NW
V.Gradite
Area
Direction
46
13
105
224
10
33
116
124
329
Poarevac
81
62
181
101
36
35
229
232
43
As can be seen from the table the predominant direction of the wind in this area is NW (232%), also winds from the
W (229%) are quite frequent. It is clear that the Old Kostolac settlement is occasionally endangered by the scattered flying ash from the depot. With the goal of finding a permanent solution of the flying ashscattering from the
depot issue, the systems of collection, transport and depositing of flying ash and bottom ash were altered using the
method of thick hydro-mixture in both of the thermal plants. With this method, the flying ash and water are mixed
in 1:1 ratio, which leads to such bonding of flying ash that scattering during transport has practically been reduced
to zero. However, as the filling of the projected depot was nearing the end, a permanent sanitation project was
created i.e. reclamation so that the aforementioned area would be adjusted to the environment without the possibility of pollution. Special attention in this paper was paid to the specificities having to do with technical reclamation of large areas with a layer of humus 0,5m thick all the while taking care not to damage the impervious foil
which sits on top of the flying ash, and on which the layer of humus is being placed. In accordance with the projection of the dynamics of the work on filling the cassettes A, B and C of the flying ash and bottom ash depot "Middle
island of Kostolac", conditions for the technical phase of reclamation will be created on the formed slopes of the
rim levee as well as on the surfaces which were created with the final batch of the deposited flying ash. When observed in general, all of the steps that were determined for the reclamation have the goal of improving the existing
condition i.e. improving the object area.
2. TECHNICAL RECLAMATION
Technical reclamation encompasses a series of technical measures with which the as depot and dug out areas are
shaped in such a way that will secure an ecologically favorable fitting in of these surfaces in the existing environment and create conditions for biological reclamation. In accordance with the projected dynamics of flying ash
depositing conditions for technical reclamation will be created, in stages, on fully formed surfaces. Based on the
actual dynamics of flying ash deposition and analysis of possible procedures of technical reclamation, as well as
logically, rationally and efficiently, technologically conditioned, the solution is that the technical reclamation
should be realized through a series of planned operations. Those are stripping and transport of materials from the
borrowing pit, its disposal, planning, formation of surfaces with a mild drop for the purpose of controlled drainage
of surface waters and placement of the reclaimed soil (0,5 m thick).
Figure 2. Areas for technical reclamation [4]
647

PROCEEDINGS
Reclamation areas are, cassette A around 85 ha, cassette B around 58 ha, cassette C around 60 ha and slopes of the
depot around 59 ha. In figure 2 can be seen the order of reclamation areas. Light brown are cassettes A, B and C,
while light yellow are surfaces of roads and slopes of the depot [4].
The technological process of formation of the reclaimed layer is in accordance with the document "Declaration of
the government of Serbia about waste disposal on depots" in the official Document No. 92 from 5.12.2010, which
states that with the purpose of closing a depot with nonhazardous waste placed on an impervious mineral layer (in
this case concrete foil) a layer of soil 0.5 m thick should be placed in order to create conditions for the process of
biological reclamation.
With the goal of urgently resolving the problem of flying ash scattering the most important thing was to find the
most favorable techno-economical solution for the borrowing pit of materials for reclamation. It was established
that it is more favorable that for these purposes the material stationed along the east slope of cassette A should be
used, in the frame of depot Dunavac, and the most important reasons are as follows:
1. Relatively small distance of the flying ash and bottom ash deposit, the borrowing pit is located immediately along the east slope of cassette A.
2. Developed road network
3. No private properties are endangered (farms or settlements)
4. Amounts of materials required for reclamation;
5. Preservation of the electrical conduit which goes through the body of the borrowing pit.
Based on the review of the aforementioned criteria a location of the borrowing pit was determined as presented in
figure 3.
Figure 3. Contour of the borrowing pit in relation to cassette A
In order to form the finished reclaimed layer the discontinuous technological process was adopted.
This foremost means the use of the following mechanization which is divided into the main and auxiliary mechanization. In the structure of the main mechanization are:
Spoon excavators (digging of materials at the borrowing pit and loading on the trucks, planning of masses at
the reclamation position)
Trucks (transport of materials)
Bulldozers (planning of the surface humus layer, projected work in correlation with the spoon excavator,
spreading of the reclaimed layer)
648

PROCEEDINGS
Structure of the auxiliary machines consists of:

Graders (fine planning of masses at the reclaimed surfaces) and
Tractors (spreading of stamped masses as the final stadium of technical reclamation).
Figure 4 displays the work schematics of the main mechanization in the process of forming the reclaimed layer.
Figure 4. Schematic display of work of the main mechanization in the process of forming the reclaimed layer [5]
Work on the mining of the materials at the chosen borrowing site begin with the material exploitation from the
depot Dunavac. The technological process which takes into account digging of the materials, loading, transport
and deposit would be done in stages while respecting the dynamics of cassette filling with flying ashes. Digging is
done with the spoon excavator which would go in the NE - SW direction while excavating materials above the floor
plain at the elevation of +86 m, combining the high and deep mining. The excavator would go along the line of +89
m. The material would be loaded onto trucks which would use partially the road at the very work site of the internal
character along the +86 m line and would after go lower via ramp to the alignment of +83 m, from where the material would be transported to its final destination. Excavated and transported masses are deposited in the priority
zone of reclamation, i.e. cassette A. The reclamation of the layer 0,5 m thick starts from the rim levees of the cassette with a drop of 0,3% towards the middle of the cassette where a collector is located which will serve for draining the surface water and possibly water which could pass through the reclaimed area and via impervious foil go
into the drainage collector. Spreading of the reclaimed layer will be conducted in the following manner, cassette A
is divided into two surfaces, north and south as in figure 5.
Figure 5. Schematic display of technology spreading the reclaimed layer on the north side of cassette A
In order to avoid eventual damage to the foil with mechanization, a solution which predicts the formation of the
reclaimed layer was used. The layer is formed through formation of a levee 2 m in height, 12 m in width (because of
two-way traffic and truck maneuvering) with a side slope of 34 and the average length of the levee of 485 m. The
predicted technology for layer placement includes combined operation of trucks (materials transport) and levelling
the transport ramp with a bulldozer. After the levee is formed and mechanization withdrawn from the same, the
649

PROCEEDINGS
excavator would start digging the formed levee and the material would be spread along the edges of the levee
where it would form surfaces of 21 m in width along the left and right edge of the levee. Total width of the surface
after spreading one of the levees is 60 m. In order to reclaim the entire north side of cassette A, construction of 16
levees at a distance of 60 m was predicted.
The formation of the reclaimed layer on the south side of cassette A, is planned to be conducted by forming a levee
of 2 m in height, 12 m in width (because of the two-month traffic and truck maneuvering), with a side slope of 34
and the average length of the levee of 370 m. The planned technology for layer installation predicts combined operation of trucks (materials transport) and levelling the transport ramp with a bulldozer. After the levee is formed
and the mechanization withdrawn from the same, the bulldozer would start digging the formed levee and spread
the material along the levee edges where it would form surfaces of 21 m in width along the left and right edge of
the levee. The total width of the surface after the spreading of one levee is 60 m. In order to reclaim the entire
south side of cassette A, a construction of 15 levees was planned at a distance of 60 m [4], figure 6.
Figure 6. Schematic display of technology spreading of the reclaimed layer on the south side of cassette A
Figure 7 illustrates a cross section of levee formation, and in figure 8 is the principle schematic of the technological
process.
Figure 7. Cross section with the technical details of levee formation
650

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 8. The principal schematic of formation technology of a levee and spreading the reclaimed layer
The formation of the reclaimed layer on B and C cassettes are different than the formation of cassette A. Because
their surfaces are smaller, it is not necessary to form levees with on two sides like in cassette A, instead they should
be placed so that they would connect the neighboring sides of cassettes. The levee formation on cassette B would
begin from the east side towards the western border of cassette B. The levees on cassette C would be formed from
the south side of cassette C towards the north side of cassette c. It is important to take care that the levee layer is
poured with a drop of 0.3% towards the middle of the cassettes. The material required for reclamation of the
aforementioned cassettes if produced by digging a deep floor from the elevation +86, at the material borrowing
site. The excavator would progress due southwest-northeast. With the assistance of a bulldozer it would dig up
masses up to the projected contour while taking care that material extrusion will not be longer than 60 m. During
operation it is necessary to take care that the projected drop be towards the middle of the cassettes i.e. towards
the drainage collector which is located towards the middle of each cassette. The drainage collector has a direct link
with the Danube River through a drainage pipe of 1200. Also, drainage of cassettes B and C will be conducted in
the same manner as in cassette A. The surface water from the slopes of the levees of the depot will go into the rim
canal. Drainage of the surface water from the surface which is formed after the digging of material is done will be
through a canal witch will be constructed down the lower part of the terrain and which remains after exploitation is
complete.
Land reclamation of the slopes of the levees and roads through which transport of masses was conducted comes in
the end. Reclamation of slopes of the levees is technically the most complex part of the project because it is done
on a sloped terrain and spreading of materials alone in a layer of 0.5 m is very complicated. The technology through
which reclamation could be done plans for a combined operation of trucks which bring the material along the
crown of the levee and pour it down the slope, on the placed foil, a buldozer which extrudes the material down the
slope forming a layer 0.5 m thick, with an allowed deviation of +15%, because it is a complex operation. The technology plans for construction of reclamation "zippers", spreading of a foil 9 m wide from the top of the slope to the
bottom and filling of the foil through a previously described procedure. Masses required for levee slope reclamation
would be produced at the borrowing site, the excavator would dig up masses which it was previously unable to dig
up because of the technical limitations, from the position of the projected contour of the terrain. The slopes of the
terrain are such that a spoon excavator can safely dig up and load materials into trucks which would move on secondary roads until arrival to the spot where they connect to permanent road and transport the materials in the
goal of reclamation of the rim slopes of the levees [4].
651

PROCEEDINGS
In figure 9 the schematic display of operation on spreading the reclaimed layer on slopes of the levees is shown.
Because the materials on the depot Dunavac have estimated (through experience) geo-mechanical characteristics,
the angle of internal friction = 20, cohesion C = 2 - 5 kN/m2 and = 20 kN/m3, the predicted technological procedure can be used to reclaim the slopes of the levee.
Figure 9. The schematic display of the spreading technology of the reclaimed layer at the slopes of the levee
In order to achieve the desired cohesion it is necessary for the reclaimed layer at the bottom edge of the slope to
be compressed through bulldozer stamping in the width of 3 m. The stability of the reclaimed layer increases the
leaning of the same on the drainage belt, which will be formed in the goal of draining the slopes of the levees of the
depot. In figure 10 the principle of drainage belt formation out of granulated gravel is shown.
Figure 10. Model cross section of a canal with a drainage belt
3. CONCLUSION
In order for the process of reclamation to proceed without fears of damaging the HDPE foil it is necessary to apply
a system of material pouring in levees and spreading in layers of 0.5 m, with machines with the least possible specific pressure on the ground in order to prevent a too great layer stamping which will be used for biological reclamation. A bulldozer and a grader will be used for these purposes. For final terrain processing i.e. spreading the potentially stamped shares, a tractor equipped with spreading and soil fragmentation tools will be used.
REFERENCES
[1]
Image downloaded from the Google Earth Software
[2]
http://recnaroda.co.rs/arhiva/arc/avg07/21/1.htm
[3]
Miloevi D., Radosavljevi M., and Koprivica O., Concept project of the additional construction for the flying and bottom ash
depot Middle Island of Kostolac by new technology, Book 1, Concept Project, Sheet 5.Land reclamation of the flying and bottom ash depot Middle Island of Kostolac, RI Beograd 2011, (in Serbian).
[4]
Marijanac S., Cveji J., Main project for closure and land reclamation of the flying ash and bottom ash deposition site Middle
Island of Kostolac,Book2 Main project of the deposition location land reclamation, RI Beograd 2012, (in Serbian).
[5]
Makar N., Miloevi D., Supplemental mining project for a permanent cessation of operations at the Open pit mine irikovac
Kostolac, Book 2.1 Excavation and deposition of the pit waste, Sheet 2.1.2 Technical Project of the technological process for
transport and waste disposal, RI Beograd 2011, (in Serbian).
652

PROCEEDINGS
OPPORTUNITIES FOR UTILIZATION OF FLY ASH

FROM THERMAL POWER PLANT, REPUBLIC OF MACEDONIA
ABSTRACT
Tena SIJAKOVA-IVANOVA1
Zoran PANOV2
Vojo MIRCOVSKI3
Faculty of Natural and Technical

Science, University Goce Delcev, Stip,
1
tena.ivanova@ugd.edu.mk
2
3
Fly ash is a potentially important raw material which can be extensively utilized. Numerous studies have been performed in order to find out application areas for the waste fly ash. In all of them highlight the widespread use of
fly ash as raw material for production of ceramic tiles, glass industries, as
additive in cement construction, in composite materials and sintered material, in acidic spoil and coalrefuse revegetation, as a soil amendment etc.
Every year in Macedonia 900 000 1 100 000 t of coal fly ash are produced.
Only 10% of coal fly ash is used in cement products which are far below the
global utilization. The restis disposed into ash dumps or landfill which is an
inconvenient solution both from the environmental and economical point of
view. The use of fly ash contributes to preserve the natural resources and
saves environment.
Keywords
Fly Ash, Environment, Waste
1. INTRODUCTION
The industrial revolution changed the world; it generated the great humanity progress. But, the industrialization is
accompanied by the generation of wastes, which could be negative to the natural environment. Unfortunately,
environmental issues were not remembered, as should be.
The current state of manufacturing processes consume enormous tons of different forms of natural resources like
raw materials, energy, water, etc.
The giant amount of waste generated is still far from being used in its totality as a productor by-product, making
technological alternatives needed in order to reduce its possible environmental impact. There are many reasons to
increase the amount of waste being utilized or re-utilized. Firstly, disposal costs are minimized; secondly, less area
is reserved for disposal, thus enablingother uses of the land and decreasing disposal permitting requirements;
thirdly, there maybe financial returns from the sale of the by-product or at least an offset of the processing and
disposal costs; and fourthly, the by-products can replace some scarce or expensive naturalresources [1].
In recent years, becomes extremely clear the importance of renewable resource for industrial applications with
increasing emphasis on the environmental issues and waste disposal.
One major by-product is coal fly ash, landfill, which is unsatisfactory solution both from ecological and economic
point of view. Therefore, there is continuing interest in establishing suitable processes in which fly ash can be
efficiently reused.
Fly ash was recognized as a suitable pozzolanic material in the United States as early as 1914 [2]. Engineers found
that they were able to control the temperature and increase the overall strength of the Damby replacing some of
the portland cement with fly ash.
Over 120,000 metric tons of fly ash was used on the Hungry Horse Dam in Montana in 1948, [3].
Throughout the 1970s and 1980s, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) issued guidelines on fly ash and
encouraged its use as a green material.
The fly ash is generated during the combustion of coal in thermal power stations. Its colour is generally grey and it
depends on the proportion of unburnt carbon. The ash is composed of tiny and almost spherical particles.
The major constituents of fly ashes are silica, alumina, iron oxides, unburnt carbon etc. The principal group of
minerals found in fly ashes are mullite, magnetite, haematite, quartz and glass.
653

PROCEEDINGS
The properties of fly ash depend on several factors which include: nature of coal; temperature of combustion;
extent of pulverisation etc.
2. DISCUSSION
Every year in Macedonia 900 000 1 100 000 t of coal fly ash are produced. Only 10% of coal fly ash is used in
cement products which are far below the global utilization rate (25%) [4]. Concentrations of heavy metals and physico chemical properties on fly ash from thermal power plant from Republic of Macedonia was investigated by [5].
The obtained results are given in Table 1 and Table 2.
Table1. Data for the chemical analysis of coal fly ash samples from termal power plant of Macedonia
ppm
SiO2
40.49-48.61
Sr
471 -993
TiO2
0.516-0.621
Ba
715 833
Al2O3
23.2-25.9
Cr
93-114
FeO
8.04-9.49
Zn
163-192
CaO
0.190-0.376
Cu
61-80
FeO
8.04-9.49
Pb
43-50
MgO
2.64-3.99
Ni
58- 68
Na2O
1.20-1.50
Co
22 -26
K2O
1.87-2.56
Cd
0,91-1.42
P2O5
0.343-0.410
As
5.75- 14,14
Table 2. Properties of fly ash from termal power plant, Republic of Macedonia
Cation exchange capacity (CEC
0.19-0.28 meq/ g
ammonium exchange capacity (AEC
0.17-0.33 meq/g
Ec
0.13-0.15mmhos/cm
Organic carbon
3.17-3.85
specific gravity
2.04-2.37g/cm3.
pH
7.8-9.1
The obtained results were compared with the World standard value. It was concluded that they are within the limits
of the World standard value. The concentration of heavy metals was comparated with concentration of havey metals in fly ash from Spain, Greece, India, Filipini and UK, given in literatures [6] [7][8] [9]. The concentration of As in
the fly ash from thermal power plant in Macedonia is lower than the contents of this element in the fly ash in
thermal power plants of Philippines and UK. The contents of other heavy metals is in range same as their.
According to ASTM C 618, two major classes of fly ash are classified on the basis of their chemical composition
resulting from the type of coal burned in thermal power plants. It can be classified as Class Fproduced from burning
of bituminous and anthracite coal. It has CaO less than 10%. Class C is generally produced from burning of sub
bituminous or lignite coal. It has CaO greater than 10%.
Fly ash from Macedonia belongs to the class F because the contain of CaO is less than 10%.
This property of fly ash can be exploited to neutralize acidic soils. [10] [11] reported that while addition of fly ash
improves soil pH on one hand, it simultaneously addsessential plant nutrients to the soil on the other hand. [12]
observed that experiments with calcareous and acidic soils revealed that fly ash addition increased the pH. The use
of excessive quantities of fly ash to alter pH can cause increase in soilsalinity especially with un-weathered fly ash
[13]. In the present study, pH of fly ash sample was measured as 7.8-9.1; it indicates that fly ash was alkaline in
nature and can be used for reclamation of acidic soil.
Electrical conductivity was measured from 0.13 to 0.15mmhos/cm. Thus it was found that this fly ash could be used
as an additive / amendment material inagriculture applications. Many physical and chemical parameters of fly ash
may benefit plant growth and can improve agronomic properties of the soil [14].
654

PROCEEDINGS
Fly ash application to acidic soils in coal mine areas increased the yields of different vegetation. Fly ash alone and
in combination with press mud showed favorable conditions for growth of tree species.
Fly ash is an effective agent for chemical and mechanical stabilization of soils. It provides the following benefits
when used to improve soil conditions: expedites construction by improving excessively wet or unstable subgrade;
by improving subgrade conditions, promotes cost savings through reduction in the required pavement thickness;
eliminates need for expensive borrow materials; can reduce or eliminate the need for more expensive natural
aggregates in the pavement cross-section. Fly ash serves as a good fertilizer. It provides the uptake of vital
nutrients/minerals(Ca, Mg, Fe, Zn, Mo, S and Se) to crops and vegetation, and can be considered as a potential
growth improver [15].
The results obtained by [16] indicate that fly ash, when mixed with traditional raw materials, has the necessary
requirements to be used as a raw material for production of ceramic tiles. The studies of [17] [18] are examples of
the glassceramics obtained using fly ash. Various ceramics systems have been shown to be suitable for producing
products that are thermally and mechanically stable and exhibit good chemical durability [19].
The principal group of ceramic products having the possibility of development from fly ash are pottery products
like glazed tiles, refractories including insulating materials, glass and ceramics, ceramic fibers and foams, iron
exchangers etc.
[20] has developed a unique new process that can make building products, such as bricks, from fly ash. [21] gives a
glimpse of various emerging global techniques for the production of different value added ceramic materials from
fly ash glassy materials, porcelains, refractories etc.
Fly ash can be used as one of the raw material for wear resistant ceramics for ambient temperature applications.
Fly ash in the range of 10-60 wt% has been used to replace calcined alumina in a wear resistant ceramic
composition. The development of physical and mechanical properties is related with the formation of new phases
such as corundum and mullite, and compact microstructure [22].
[23] [24] [25] [26] developed a glass-ceramic tile from fly ash. [27] developed another variety of glass ceramics from
fly ash. [28] [29] [30] studied on the feasibility of formation of glasses and glass ceramics from fly ash.
New products have been developed, such as glass fibres and glass ceramics for potential architectural and
decorative applications which have chemical and mechanical properties comparable to, if not better than
commercialones [31].
Overall obtained results have indicated that the glass and the heat-treated glass samples produced from coal fly
ash have several desirable properties that would make them attractive to industrial use in the construction sector.
Microstructural, physical, chemical and mechanical properties of the produced glass-ceramic samples from fly ash
are better than those which are the produced only from glass and ceramic samples [32].
The fly ash is proved to be a potential source for the production of low cost mullite glass ceramics when mixed with
alumina at very high temperatures produced by plasma [33].
Porous ceramic samples containing the coal fly ash have excellent mechanical properties, making them feasible for
use in water absorption and retention of porous ceramic applications [34].
[35] used binary mixture of fly ash and plastic clays to manufacture ceramic products with up to 50 wt% mullite and
16 wt% feldspar. The properties of mullite synthesised from fly ash and alumina mixtures were studied by [36].
Fly ash can be used as an insulating material due to its availability and low cost. In addition, creating insulating
material from fly ash provides a productive use for an ordinarily undesirable by-product.
Two major sectors of fly ash utilization across the globe are cement and concrete. A number of engineering and
environmental benefits are also gained by using the ash instead of multiple ingredients for construction works.
Fly ash is used in concrete admixtures to enhance the performance of concrete. The many benefits of incorporating
fly ash into a PCC have been demonstrated through extensive research. Benefits to concrete vary depending on the
type of fly ash, proportion used, other mix ingredients, mixing procedure, field conditions and placement. Some of
the benefits of fly ash in concrete are: produces a high strength concrete that accommodates the design of thinner
sections; reducing the risk of thermal cracking in large concrete applications; reduced heat of hydration; reduced
permeability; improving concrete resistance to sulphate attack; increasing durability of concrete in high chloride
environments; preventing alkali-aggregate reaction in concrete; permits design flexibility accommodating curves,
arches and other pleasing architectural effects; ensures that the concrete will qualify as a durable building material; contributes to the aesthetic appearance of the concrete; increased durability; lowered costs.
655

PROCEEDINGS
According to [37] fly ash can be used in flowable fill. Flowable fill is a mixture of coal fly ash, water, and portland
cement that flows like a liquid, sets up like a solid, is self-leveling, and requires no compaction or vibration to
achieve maximum density. Flowable fill is also referred to as controlled low-strength material, flowable mortar. It is
designed to function in the place of conventional backfill materials such as soil, sand, or gravel and to alleviate
problems and restrictions generally associated with the placement of these materials. The benefits of using
flowable fill include: allows placement in any weather, even under freezing conditions; achieves 100 percent density
with no compactive effort; fills around/under structures inaccessible to conventional fill placement techniques;
increases soil-bearing capacities; increases the speed and ease of backfilling operations; decreases the variability in
the density of the backfilled materials; improves safety at the job site and reduces labor costs; decreases
excavation costs.
Fly ash can be used as a borrow material to construct fills and embankments [38] [39] [40] [41]. When fly ash is
compacted in lifts, a structural fill is constructed that is capable of supporting highway buildings or other
structures. Fly ash has been used in the construction of structural fills/embankments that range from small fills for
road shoulders to large fills for interstate highway embankments [42]. When used in structural fills and
embankments, fly ash offers several advantages over soil and rock, for exemple: cost-effective where available in
bulk quantities; can be placed over low bearing strength soils; ease of handling; compaction reduce construction
time; equipment costs.
Fly ash also can be used in grouts for pavement. Grouts are proportioned mixtures of fly ash, water, and other
materials used to fill voids under a pavement system without raising the slabs, or to raise and support concrete
pavements at specified grade tolerances by drilling and injecting the grout under specified areas of the pavement.
Fly ash grouts can be used to correct undermining without removing overlying pavement; be accomplished quickly
with minimum disturbance to traffic; develop high ultimate strength. Fly ash grout is also cost effective when alternative suspension emulsion or solution materials are considered.
3. CONCLUSION
Fly ash from coal-fired thermal power stations is an excellent potential raw material.
Using fly ash has several beneficial impacts on the environment, some of which include: saving energy, reducing
solid waste disposal, reducing air pollution and greenhouse gas, and mitigating global warming. Other benefits
include the reduction of fly ash waste going to landfills or being stored in a retention pond, which can be hazardous
and potentially dangerous. The bulk of fly ash generated, many hundred million tons a year, is disposed of in slurry
ponds or reservoirs, causing environmental problems. Therefore, most nations encourage increased use of fly ash.
Overall fly ash utilization in Republic of Macedonia stands at a fairly low level of about 10 per cent of the quantity
generated.
Main factors contributing to the low level of utilization on fly ash are: lack of reliable quality assurance for fly ash
products; absence of standards and specifications for fly ash products; poor public awareness about the products
and their performance; lack of proper coordination between thermal power stations and ash users.
With the fly ash helping to preserve the environment through all its utilisations and the huge potential it has for the
society and country, it can rightly be termed as an environment saviour.
The government has also a vital role to play by encouraging the entrepreneurs providing fiscal and other benefits
for the adoption of the different developed technologies for the commercial production.
The fly ash is a resource, which should be utilised to maximum possible extent. Applications on fly ash helps to
improve the quality of product, economise on the cost and saves environment. Fly ash products have several
advantages over conventional products.
In general, after summarizing all the facts, we could say that, coal fly ash in Republic of Macedonia contains
moderate quantities of heavy metals and its effects on ground water, soil health and uptake by plants are probably
negligible. The fly ash in Macedonia can be used in agriculture for conjunction with chemical fertilizer to increase
the yield of various agricultural crops, the dose of which will depend on the types of crops as well on the types
ofsoils.
Also, this coal fly ash may be used as structural fill material in constructing high way embankments and roadbases
as ingredient in an ultra high strength concrete (portland cement) that is almost as strong as steel, in waste
stabilization, or in mining applications, for manufacturing concrete bricks and blocks.
Fly ash is now recognized as valuable substances which confers certain desirable characteristics in its many applications.
656

PROCEEDINGS
We hope that the these paper will contribute to increase the interest for the greater utilization of fly ash in Republic of Macedonia, because the use of fly ash contributes to preserve the natural resources and saves environment.
REFERENCES
[1]
Ahmaruzzaman, M., 2010. A review on the utilization of fly ash. Prog. Energy Combust. Sci., 36: 327-363.
[2]
Aggarwal et al: Concrete durability through high volume fly ash Concrete, Internacional Journal of Engineering Science and Technology Vol 2(9), 2010
[3]
(FHWA, 1999).
[4]
Rai UN, Pandey K, Sinha S, Singh A, Saxena R, Gupta DK. (2004). Revegetating fly ash landfills with Prosopis julifera L:
impactofdifferent amendments and Rhizobium inoculation. Environ Int;30(3):293300, 2004.
[5]
Tena Sijakova-Ivanova et al. Investigation of fly ash heavy metals content and physic chemical properties from thermal power plant,
Republic of Macedonia. International Journal of Engineering Science and Technology (IJEST)Vol. 3 No.12 December 2011
[6]
Fytianos K, Tsaniklidi B, Voudrias E. (1998). Leachability of heavy metalsin Greek fly ash from coal combustion. Environ Int
(1998).24(4):477486, 1998.
[7]
Llorens JF, Fernandez-Turiel JL, (2001). Querol X. The fate of trace elements in a large coal-fired power plant. Environ Geol2001;40(4
5):40916, 2001
[8]
Liao HC, Jiang SJ. (1999). Determination of cadmium, mercury and lead in coal fly ash by slurry sampling electrothermal
vaporizationinductively coupled plasma mass spectrometry. Spectrochim Acta Part B;54(8):12334, 1999.
[9]
Wadge A, Hutton M, Peterson PJ. (1986).The concentrations and particlesize relationships of selected trace elements in fly ashes
fromUK coal-fired power plants and a refuse incinerator. Sci Total Environ;54:1327, 1986.
[10] Elseewi, A.A., Binghman, F.T. and Page, A.L. (1978). Growth and mineral composition of lettuce and Swiss chard grown on fly
ashamended soils, in Environmental Chemistry and Cycling processes, Conf.760429, Adriano, D.C. and Brisbin, I.L.,Eds.,
U.S.Department of Commerce, 1978.
[11] Jastrow, J.D., Zimmerman, C.A., Dvorak, A.J. and Hinchman, R.R. (1979). Comparison of lime and fly ash as amendments to acidiccoal
mine refuse: Growth Responses and Trace Element Uptake of Two Grasses. Argonne National Laboratory, Argonne, IL, 43,1979.
[12] Page, A. L., A. A. Elseewi and I. R. Straughan. (2005). Physical and Chemical Properties of Fly Ash from Coal-FiredPower Plantswith
Reference to Environmental Impacts. Residue Reviews 71:83-120, 2005.
[13] Sharma, S. (1989). Fly ash dynamics in soil-water systems. Critical Reviews in Environmental Control 19(3), 251-275, 1989.
[14] Chang, A.C., Lund, L. J., Page, A.L. &Wameke, J. E. (1977).Physical properties of fly ash amended soils, Journal of Env.Quality, 6,267,
1977.
[15] Scott M Mackiewicz, E. Glen Ferguson Stabilization of soil with self cementing coal ashes World of coal ash (WOCA)Lehington , Kentucky SAD, 2005
[16] Zimmer, A.; Bergmann, C. P. Fly ash of mineral coal as ceramic tiles raw material.Waste Management (Elmsford), v. 27, 2007, pp. 5968.
[17] Barbieri, L., Lancellotti, I., Manfredini, T., Queralt, I., Rincon, J.M. & Romero, M. Design, obtainment and properties of glasses and
glassceramics from coal fly ash,Fuel, Vol. 78, No. 2, 1999, pp 271276,
[18] Leroy, C., Ferro, M.C., Monteiro, R.C.C. & Fernandes, M.H.V.. Production of glassceramics from coal ashes, Journal of the European
Ceramic Society, Vol. 21, No. 2, 2001, pp195202;
[19] Palomo, A., M.W. Grutzeck, and M.T. Blanco (1999b), Alkali-activated fly ashes, a cement for the future, Cement and Concrete
Research, Vol. 29, pp. 1323-1329
[20] Liu H: Compacting fly ash to make bricks Final technical report NSF-SBIR Phase 1 Project No DMI -0419311, 2005
[21] Saikat MAITRA Ceramic products from fly ashGlobal perspectivesFly Asia Utilisation for Value Added ProductsEds. B. Chatterjee, K. K.
Singh & N. G. Goswami, NML, Jamshedpur, pp. 32-37 1999
[22] S. K. Nath and Sanjay KumarWear Resistant Ceramics from Fly Ash, National Metallurgical Laboratory Council of Scientific &
Industrial Research
[23] Bocaccini AR, Kopf M, Stunpfe W. Glass-ceramics from filter dustsfrom waste incinerator. Ceram Int 1995;21:2315.
[24] Boccaccini, A. R., Bcker, M., Bossert, J., Glass and Glass-Ceramics from CoalFlyash and Waste Glass, Tile and Brick International 12
1996 515-518.
[25] Boccaccini, A. R., Glass and Glass-Ceramic Matrix Composite Materials: AReview. J Ceramic Soc Japan 109(7) (2001) S99-S109.
[26] Boccaccini, A. R., Rawlings, R. D., Glass and Glass-ceramic Matrix Composites:Academic Curiosity or Useful Materials?, Glass Technol.
43C, 2002 191-201.
[27] Barbieri, L., Corradi, A., Lancellotti, I., Thermal and Chemical Behaviour ofDifferent Glasses Containing Steel Flyash and Their
Transformation into GlassCeramics, J. Europ. Ceram. Soc. 22 (2002) 1759-1765.
[28] Erol, M., Kucukbayrak, S., Ersoy-Mericboyu, A., Ovecoglu, M. L., Crystallisationbehaviour of glasses produced from fly ash, J. Europ.
Ceram. Soc. 21 2835 -2841. 2001
[29] Kim, H. S., Kim, J. M., Oshikawa, T., Ikeda, K., Production and Properties ofGlass-Ceramics from Incinerator Fly Ash, Mater. Sci. Forum
439 (2003) 180-185.
[30] Kim, J.M., Kim, H.-S., Glass-Ceramic Produced from a Municipal WasteIncinerator Fly Ash with High Cl Content, J. Europ. Ceram. Soc.
24 (2004) 2373-2382.
657

PROCEEDINGS
[31] Karamanov, A., M. Pelino and A. Hreglich,Sintered glass-ceramics from municipal solidwaste-incinerator fly ashes-part I: The influence
ofthe heating rate on the sinter-crystallisation. J. Eur.Ceram. Soc., 23(6), 827-832 (2003).
[32] Sheng J, Huang BX, Zhang J, Zhang H, Sheng J, Yu S, et al.Production of glass from coal fly ash. Fuel 2003;82:1815.
[33] Suriyanarayanan,N.,Kanan Nithin,K.V.,Enrico Bernardo:Mullite glass ceramics production from coal ash and alumina by high temperature plasma, ournal of Non-Oxide Glasses, Vol. 1, No. 4, 2009,p. 247- 260
[34] Niyazi Ugur Kockal: Properties and microstructure of porous ceramic bodies containing fly ash Journal of Building Physics, vol. 35,
2012; pp. 338-352.,
[35] Queralt. I. Use of coal fly ash for ceramics: a case study for a larg Spanish power station pp 786-791, 1997
[36] X. Huang, "The Final Report of Fly Ash Processing and Utilization, Section-4 Ceramic Products Technology Development," Michigan
DNR SWAP project, MDRD-1-31-20025. 1993
[37] Christopher Swan Gerald Topping,Moshen Kashin Flowable fills Developed with high volumes of fly ash World of coal ash
(WOCA)Lehington , Kentucky SAD 2007
[38] DiGioia, Anthony M., Jr. and William L. Nuzzo. "Fly Ash as Structural Fill," Proceedings of the American Society of Civil Engineers,
Journal of the Power Division, New York, NY, June, 1972.
[39] Lamb, D. William, "Ash Disposal in Dams, Mounds, Structural Fills and Retaining Walls," Proceedings of the Third International Ash
Utilization Symposium, U.S. Bureau of Mines, Information Circular No. 8640, Washington, DC, 1974.
[40] Martin, Joseph P., Robert J. Collins, John S. Browning, III, and Francis J. Biehl. "Properties and Use of Fly Ash for Embankments,"
Presented at the 22nd Annual Mid-Atlantic Industrial Waste Conference, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, 1989.
[41] Kinder, D.L. and R.E. Morrison. "An Engineering Approach for Using Power Plant Ash in a Structural Fill," Proceedings of the Fifth
International Ash Utilization Symposium, U.S. Department of Energy, Report No. METC/SP-79-10, Atlanta, Georgia, February, 1979.
[42] Ayse Pekrioglu, Ata G. Doven, d Mehmet T. Tumay, Fly Ash Utilization in Grouting Applications,Proceedings Grouting and ground
treatment, pp 1169-1179,2003.
658

PROCEEDINGS
A CRITICAL REVIEW OF PROBLEMS ASSOCIATED

WITH THE REACTIVATION OF ABANDONED AREAS
OF BULQIZA CHROME MINE
ABSTRACT
Gafur MUKA1
Thoma KORINI2
Vasil JORGJI3
Ramiz BALLA4
Faculty of Geology and Mining,

Tirana, Albania
1
gmuka@yahoo.com 2 korini@yahoo.com 3 vjorgji@yahoo.com 4
ramizballa@yahoo.com
The abandoned areas, in chrome mine of Bulqiza in Albania, are created as

result of an underground exploitation of more than 60 years by open stopping mining exploitation methods (Sublevel Open Stopping). During the prior
underground exploitations in the area of Bulqiza chrome mine, the abandoned areas are considered as technological waste, mainly in relation with
the need to abandon pillars of ore in order to guarantee the stability of entire underground structure or as result of low content of Cr2O3. Another reason was the impossibility of exploitation of such areas as result of difficult
geological and mining conditions. The identification is realized by the mapping of the entire area by the mine survey of the Bulqiza mine, mainly in
scales 1:200 and 1:500.
The resumption of mining of abandoned areas is related to the better conjuncture concerning the price of chrome ore in the international market. In
these conditions, it was necessary to verify the existing graphical documentation and development works and to prepare the new project of mining
exploitation taking into accounts not only the existing underground infrastructure, but also the possibilities offered by the application of new technologies. The solution of problems encountered requires the commitment of
technical and engineering staff in an attentive study of all the factors influencing the resumption of the exploitation in order to design more rational
projects for the exploitation of the remaining ore reserves.
In reference to an experience of 4 to 5 years of use of these methods in the
Bulqiza mine, in this paper we intend to present the current situation and
the recommendations for future improvements.
Keywords
Abandoned Areas, Existing Workings, Reactivation,
Chrome Mine, Rock Pressures, Rock Mass Stability
1. ABANDONED AREAS IN BULQIZA CHROME MINE

From 1948 to 2001 it has been extracted about 13 million tons of chrome ore in Bulqiza chrome mine (Fig. 1) The
exploitation system has been that of open stopping mining exploitation (Sublevel Open Stopping) (Fig. 2). This
system, used in terms of a simple technology, was however characterized by high extraction rates and efficiency.
Specifically, in conditions of a ore body dip of about 550, with the absence of developed tectonics, with a block
length of 40 to 60m and a block height of 40m, sublevel height of 8m and body thickness of 5 to 7m, the extraction
productivity was 80 to 100 tons per working day ([2], Draft exploitation programs 1981-83, [3], Gurra 2011). Since
geological conditions of chrome bearing structure in this mine varied considerably, its technical and engineering
staff has tested several variants of this system in order to reduce ore losses, increase safety at work and ensure
higher extraction efficiency.
660

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Longitudinal profile of Bulqiza chrome mine
Figure 2. Mining method Sublevel Open Stopping in Bulqiza mine
Until 2001 the mine was owned by the state, so the payment of workers was low and the exploitation costs
therefore did not constitute a problem. In a current analysis of the volume of work performed for exploitation it is
easily concluded that their volume is very large compared to the necessary volume in terms of a rational
exploitation.
The Bulqiza chrome structure is characterized by:
High-developed tectonics in both strike and dip directions.
quite large fluctuations of the wings dip of the structures (180 to 800)
variation of the thickness of mineral bodies (1 to 12 m)
661

PROCEEDINGS
Under these conditions during exploitation the following problems were faced ([1], Ceci&Borici 1986, [4], Muka
1989):
uncontrolled collapses of exploitation ceiling rocks
blocking of workers way outs
immediate reductions of body thickness
declining of ore quality below the beneficial use
Inability to managing the mining pressures with existing technology because of tectonic slides, etc.
All these reasons forced the technical and engineering personnel to leave a significant amount of mineral reserves
and classifying them as losses (Fig. 3).
A-A
A
Raise
Short Crosscut
(6 -8 m)
Figure 3. Abandoned ore reserves
According to the statistics given by the mine itself these losses amounted to 9-13% (Draft exploitation programs
1981-83). Although, due to the large number of preparation and extraction workings, as well as a continuous
monitoring of the dynamics of exploitation by geological-surveying service, the regionalization of these areas and
the calculation of reserves left made with high precision, this indicator should be taken with caution because each
mineral quantities left was subject of a political judgment.
Because of this interpretation this indicator happened to be much lower. The area where these deposits were left
was considered an abandoned area. Taking into consideration the amount of ore extracted from about 13 million
tons, as well as factual losses up to 30% (this figure actually is confirmed by calculations made in reactivation
conditions of exploitation) it results that the quantity of reserves in abandoned areas is about 400 thousand tons.
2. WHY WAS THE EXPLOITATION REACTIVATED?

The dissolve of the socialist political system in Albania in the early 90's led to profound economic transformations.
The state began to lose economic monopoly meanwhile the market economy started to configure. In the mining
sector state monopoly continued until the early 2000s. So, Bulqiza mine was taken by concession from a foreign
investor in 2001. This investor continued exploitation of opened and almost elaborated ore reserves. While in 20062007 the sale price of chrome ore increased substantially. It was in this period when mainly domestic investors, who
were previously informed about the existence of the mineral in abandoned areas, expressed an interest to take
them with concession. State, put under the pressure of these requirements and interested in the economic revival
of the region did not hesitate in giving a considerable number of licenses. Actually the number of licenses has
arrived at 136. Part of the technical and engineering personnel the new holder of licenses employed were mainly
former engineers who worked in the mine up to 1990, because they knew the situation related to geological and
technical conditions of abandoned mining areas.
662

PROCEEDINGS
3. PROBLEMS EMERGED BY THE REACTIVATION
Reactivation of exploitation required:

Providing the existing geological, surveying and mining documentation
the inventory of transportation and ventilation workings
reinstatement to working condition of these workings
the correct regionalization of remaining reserves
exploitation project design in terms of reactivation
Figure 4. Drawings of opening, preparation and extraction workings
Providing the existing geological, surveying and mining documentation

During normal exploitation of chrome reserves in Bulqiza mine graphic documentation included ([2], Draft
exploitation programs 1981-83, [3], Gurra 2011):
The drawings of preparation and extraction openings at scale 1:200.
The drawings of opening, preparation and extraction workings at scale 1:500 (Fig. 4).
Vertical projections and profiles in scale 1:500 (Figs. 5,6).
Geological documentation of preparation and extraction workings at scale 1:200. (geological elements such
as body thickness and tectonics presented on surveying drawings at scale 1:200)
Mining project for block exploitation.
Figure 5. Vertical projection of workings
663

PROCEEDINGS
All this documentation was created by starting with surveying measurements, which in opening and preparation
workings were performed with polygonal method using angle measuring instruments and tape meter, while at exploitation works was used the polygonometry with compass. Closed polygons were used to compute and correct
the compass measurement errors. Taking into account the relatively small size of exploitation blocks as well as the
use of closed polygons for each block, it was estimated that the accuracy in determining the position of elements in
plan and in height was within the limits allowed.
Figure 6. General view of mine workings
All documentation of the scale 1:500 and that of smaller one it was based on 1:200 scale documentation ([3], Gurra
2011). During the exploitation mining surveying service revealed the limit of space in all sublevels. Measurements
should be carried out every 2 weeks. These measurements served for the calculation of exploited reserves. If the
technical and engineering staff decided to block the front of exploitation, cession protective columns to manage
the pressures or waiver of exploitation due to poor quality of the ore, then mining surveying service performed
measurements to specify and highlight the exact amount of reserves left. This situation in documenting of all mining activity was preserved and, at the end of the year, it was reviewed again to justify the fairness of the method
used. Then the material was stored to be available for studies (Draft exploitation programs 1981-83), mainly geological, related with the orientation of exploration works.
In conditions of reactivation of the exploitation this documentation was necessary, because on its basis it is
estimated the reserves existing situation and the reactivated exploitation projects are oriented. Now, it is owned by
subjects that have received concessionary licenses of abandoned areas. Although there are legal obligations
regarding the keeping up of the documents, it is difficult to judge today if it is kept in conformity with these
obligations. This behavior poses problems especially for the gap it creates to foresee potential massif movement up
and down exploited as well as the mining damages.
Inventory of transport and ventilation workings. Restoring their work.
Considering the fact that the reactivated blocks for exploitation are away from transportation and ventilation
workings, these workings should be inventoried and put in working conditions, in order to develop the activity.
Under these conditions it is needed to solve problems related to:
Support of workings.
Putting in place the rail road and transport vehicles.
Putting in place the ventilation pipes.
It should be noted that the solution of these problems, due to the required investment is not up to the technical
requirements, what has caused injury to employees.
Inventory of preparation and extraction workings. Restoring their work.
The preparation and exploitation workings are the most damaged ones because they are under the influence of
exploited spaces. Although the distribution of pressures is normalized over the years (Muka 1989), it is found that
preparation workings in Bulqiza mine, especially those of exploitation, are damaged. Reactivation of exploitation
requires putting these workings into function by solving in this case:
Stability problem (support)
Ventilation problem (placement of pipelines
Transportation problem (mainly the movement of material)
664

PROCEEDINGS
To prevent the movement of up and down exploited massif ([4] Muka 1989).
Even in this case, it is concluded that the solution to these problems does not conform to the technical and law
requirements. The result is an increase in the number of accidents. What is expected to do is the engagement of
monitoring units to identify the non-fulfillment of the conditions and take not only disciplinary measures, but
technical ones in the development and approval of projects that will lead to a more rational exploitation.
Correct regionalization of remaining reserves.
This problem is almost solved in terms of possession of graphic documentation. However, an update of the
situation is necessary due to the impact of the massif movement areas (Muka 1989). Mining surveying service, using
the same methodology, the simple measurement of existing workings, redefines the boundaries of the abandoned
space. If the situation results different from what it is in existing documentation then the remaining reserves are
recalculated and then we move on exploitation project design.
Exploitation project design in terms of reactivation.
Five or six years of experience in exploitation of abandoned areas in Bulqiza mine has shown that the efficiency of
exploitation has been low. The safety at work has also been in very low levels. This is due to the lack of investments
and because working operations hasnt been done according to an adequate exploitation project that would take
into consideration all the influencing factors.
4. CONCLUSIONS
Abandoned areas in Bulqiza mine constitute a specific phenomenon which relates to the completeness and
accuracy of existing graphic documentation.
Reactivation of exploitation requires the creation of a database to take into account the current state of
transportation, preparation and extraction workings.
Mining surveying and geological service need to update the existing mining workings positioning situation,
in plan and elevation as well as the current state of reserves.
Under the conditions of re-placing in operation of the existing workings it should be taken into consideration their stability regarding the state of mining pressures.
The documentation of reactivated exploitation should be drawn up on the basis of legal and technical requirements in order to serve not only for accurate coverage of mining activity but also as a basis for prediction and computing of mining damages.
REFERENCES
[1]
Ceci L., Borici, M. (1986): Album of the exploitation systems of the useful mineral deposits. Tirana (In Albanian).
[2]
Draft exploitation programs of Bulqiza mine (1981, 1982, 1983). Tirana (In Albanian).
[3]
Gurra H.: Bulqiza a mine with history, Tirana, 2011 (in Albanian)
[4]
Muka G. (1989): The estimation of the amount of exploitation impact to reduce and avoid mining damages Doctoral thesis,
Tirana, (In Albanian).
[5]
Kratzsch H. (1983): Mining Subsidence Engineering, Springer Verlag, Berlin, Heidelberg, New York.
665

PROCEEDINGS
REENGINEERING OF OLD RAILWAY TUNNELS LEEKI,

JURGOVSKI AND KRIIKI ON THE MAIN RAILWAY LJUBLJANA-KOPER
ABSTRACT
Marko RANZINGER1
Marjan HUDEJ2
The main railway Ljubljana-Koper is a part of railway Vienna-Trieste which was build
before 150 years ago. Today is a double-track railway with a next base data of the
reconstruction tunnels:
2
A tunnel Leeki is 285m long with a surface near 4560m
A tunnel Jurgovski is 360m long with a surface near 5760m2
A tunnel Kriiki is 326m long with a surface near 5700m2
All the tunnels are made of a limestone stone blocks. Before the reconstruction and
reengineering work started in September 2009 in all tunnels we had a lot of problems
with a trickle of the water. Because of that during the winter we had a lot of ice from
the roof and the side of the tunnels which mean high maintain cost. Oldness of the
tunnels was the reason of unsteady of the stone blocks who in the past fell out. The
rock movement around the tunnels in the past was the reason of many damage on
the primary support.
The Slovenian Railway Company invests in reconstruction of that railway tunnels. The
RGP company made this reengineering works. The first part of the project finished in
December 2010 the second part finished in 2012.
This paper resume the main reconstruction works in the tunnels, special is a use of
new waterproofing material masterseal 345 who was use the first time in Slovenia.
The main aim was the prevention of dripping water on the rails or overhead wires.
The requirement of the client was a solution with a minimum reduction of the free
space inside. As solution the above described sandwich construction consisting of:
-
a smoothening layer of shotcrete
masterseal 345
thin layer of fibre reinforced shotcrete was applied. This measures where only
used in the roof area down to the vertical sidewalls.
All works where executed during the time when one railway track was closed. The
rehabilitation projects Leeki, Jurgovski and Kriiki rail tunnels demonstrate the
cost-effectives and technical versatility of the technical solution consisting of a double bonded waterproofing membrane in combination with sprayed concrete.
RGP d.o.o., Velenje, Slovenia

1
marko.ranzinger@rlv.si 2 marjan.hudej@rlv.si
In a rehabilitation context, flexibility and versatility often represent decisive factors

for the feasibility of a project. This system for rehabilitation involves the use of relatively thin layers of high performance elements like durable and mechanically contributing sprayed concrete combined with a spray-applied membrane. The quality of
the workmanship and quality control measures are therefore of significant importance.
Keywords
Reengineering of Old Railway Tunnels, Waterproofing Membrane, Masterseal 345
1. GENERALITIES
Tunnel rehabilitation and reengineering works are necessary due to a range of problems, mostly involving water as
the damaging agent. Water ingress in existing tunnels in many cases leads to restricted access and usage of the
tunnel. Water ingress also indirectly leads to deteriorating mechanisms, affecting the tunnel contents, as well as
the lining structure itself. Waterproofing together with structural stability and long term durability is a critical
aspect and must be considered in almost all rehabilitation projects.
666

PROCEEDINGS
A lot of the railway tunnels in Europe where built during the beginning of the last century. These old tunnels where
built with the traditional tunneling methods and have mostly a brick or stone masonry lining as final support. The
space between the lining and the rock is usually backfilled.
Figure 1. Typical design of an old tunnel
2. EXAMPLE OF USE: REENGINEERING OF OLD RAILWAY TUNNELS LEEKI, JURGOVSKI AND KRIIKI
The Leeki, Jurgovski and Kriiki tunnels are double track railway tunnels with total length 971m. The total
thickness of the old lining is approximately 80cm. The three tunnels had to be refurbished for several reasons:
Structural damages which affect the integrity of the lining:
a. Cracks
b. Loss of strength in the mortar
c. Weathering of the lining
Damages which affect the usability:
a. Water ingress
b. Formation of ice in the winter
Figure 2. Situation during the winter in the tunnel and the portal of the tunnel Leeki
667

PROCEEDINGS
The main aim was the prevention of dripping water on the rails or overhead wires. The requirement of the client
was a solution with a minimum reduction of the free space inside. As solution the above described sandwich construction consisting of:
a smoothening layer of shotcrete
masterseal 345
thin layer of fibre reinforced shotcrete was applied. This measures where only used in the roof area down to
the vertical sidewalls.
All works where executed during the time when one railway track was closed.
Technical solution
The alternative technical solution for the rehabilitation of old tunnels reported here, utilizes a spray-applied double
bonded waterproofing membrane in combination with sprayed concrete. The double bonded waterproofing
membrane is applied to a structurally contributing part of the system, like a sprayed concrete lining, an old
masonry structure or an old concrete structure.
A final inner sprayed concrete lining is applied onto the bonded waterproofing membrane. This essentially
represents a composite waterproof lining in which the waterproofing membrane is embedded between the existing
structural lining (outer layer of the composite section) and the newly applied sprayed concrete inner lining. Due to
the mechanical properties of this system, one can consider both the inner and outer linings as one continuous
structural lining.
Figure 3. Reconstruction works in the tunnels
If the available space is limited only very thin constructions may be used. A thin sandwich construction consisting
of a spray able waterproofing membrane and a shotcrete layer was used for the repair of a Leeki, Jurgovski and
Kriiki railway tunnels. In special cases the broken backfill of the masonry lining was injected. Masterseal 345 is a
waterproofing membrane which is spray applied by a small rotor machine as used for shotcrete. The bond strength
between membrane and shotcrete is as good as between shotcrete layers. Therefore the sandwich construction
shotcrete membrane shotcrete is acting like one layer.
668

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 4. Detail of sandwich construction
The main advantage of this solution in a rehabilitation context is the possibility to utilize thin high-performance
linings. In many cases old linings typically only require an improvement in appearance and waterproofing system
but are structurally sound. In these cases it is feasible to improve old tunnel linings simply by injecting the cracks or
via backfilling. Hence, the need for demolishing the old structure and subsequently reconstruct is left to a
minimum. This system is also highly versatile and is compatible with other systems and solutions. It also offers
flexibility with the construction programmed allowing short shifts and a smaller team working inside the tunnel.
The main difficulty in rehabilitation work is often to resolve water ingress problems in a sustainable manner. The
combination of a sprayed double-bonded waterproofing membrane combined with an inner fibre reinforced
sprayed concrete lining handles this issue in a very elegant manner.
Figure 5. Smoothening layer made by sprayed concrete
669

PROCEEDINGS
Sprayable waterproofing membrane

In the last years increased emphasis was put in the development of sprayed waterproofing membranes. Masterseal
345 fulfils the requirements of the tunneling industry in a sprayed water-proofing membrane. The powder based
product is sprayed by using conventional dry mix (rotor type) machines and is hardening quickly. With a powder
consumption of 3 4 kg/m an average thickness of the applied layer of about 4 mm may be achieved, depending
on the surface roughness. The sprayed output is over 50 m/ hour. The product bonds well on both sides of the substrate, has a high elasticity and is easy to apply. Sandwich structures (shotcrete membrane shotcrete) and single
shell linings are a key application. Water pressure build up may be prevented by systematic drainage measures. Typical fields of application are complex underground structures, single shell linings and minor structures like emergency tunnels with partial waterproofing. A connection of the sprayed membrane to conventional waterproofing
can be achieved easily.
Figure 6. Application of Masterseal 345 in the tunnels Leeki, Jurgovski and Kriiki
The composite waterproof tunnel lining based on double bonded spray applied membrane and sprayed concrete
consists of the following main elements:
Primary lining
Surface of the primary lining
Waterproofing membrane with bonding properties to both the substrate and the inner lining
Inner lining based on fiber reinforced sprayed concrete
Figure 7 below illustrates the main elements of this system.
Figure 7. Composite waterproof lining for the rehabilitation of tunnel linings. Close-up of section through the waterproofing membrane.
The surface of the existing lining was an essential part of this system. After the system has been completely
established, this surface becomes the bonding interface between the waterproofing membrane and the primary
lining.
The surface of the primary lining (application substrate for the membrane) must consist of intact and nondeteriorated material of the primary lining itself. During the rehabilitation works this involves the removal of
weathered and degraded surface material, as well as all remains of dust, soot and loose particles from the surface
670

PROCEEDINGS
of the primary lining. This is usually achieved by high-pressure cleaning (jet-washing) of the surface before the
waterproofing membrane is applied.
The technical and mechanical properties of the composite waterproof tunnel lining system are shown in table 1
below.
Table 1. Main technical properties of composite waterproof lining, based on sprayed concrete and Masterseal 345.
Property
Typical value
Waterproof at minimum membrane thickness
4 mm
Shear strength of composite structure, planar interfaces (existing lining - concrete)
1,2 MPa
Interface tensile bonding strength (membrane concrete)
0,5 MPa
The effect of the waterproof membrane with a lining of fiber reinforced sprayed concrete we can see in the
pictures below.
Figure 8. The main aim was the prevention of dripping water on the rails or overhead wires.
In the photo we can see the waterproof in the roof of the tunnel after reengineering works.
3. CONCLUSION
The rehabilitation projects Leeki, Jurgovski and Kriiki rail tunnels demonstrate the cost-effectives and technical
versatility of the technical solution consisting of a double bonded waterproofing membrane in combination with
sprayed concrete. In a rehabilitation context, flexibility and versatility often represent decisive factors for the
feasibility of a project.
This system for rehabilitation involves the use of relatively thin layers of high performance elements like durable
and mechanically contributing sprayed concrete combined with a spray-applied membrane. The quality of the
workmanship and quality control measures are therefore of significant importance.
REFERENCES
[1]
Meier, W., Holter, K.G. and Husermann, S. (2005): Waterproofing of an emergency escape tunnel by employing an innovative
sprayable membrane: The Giswil highway tunnel project, Switzerland. ITA World Tunnel Congress, Istanbul, 2005
[2]
Lamhauge, S., Holter, K.G., and Kristiansen, S: (2007): Waterproofing of a Sub Sea Tunnel with a Unique Sprayable Membrane. The
Nordy Road Tunnel, Faroe Islands, RETC Toronto, 2007
[3]
Holter, K.G. and Tappy, O. (2008): Modern composite sprayed concrete waterproof tunnel linings; design system layout and technical
th
properties. 5 International Symposium on Sprayed Concrete, Lillehammer, 2008
[4]
Makhlouf, R. and Holter, K.G. (2008): Rehabilitation of Concrete Lined Tunnels Using a Composite Sprayed Liner with Sprayed
Concrete and Sprayable Waterproofing Membrane; The Chekka Road Tunnel, Lebanon. ITA World Tunnel Congress, Agra, 2008
[5]
Modetta, F., Holter, K.G. and Loser, P. (2009): Cost-Effective Rehabilitation of Masonry Lined Rail Tunnels with Sprayed Concrete and
Sprayable Waterproofing Membrane. ITA World Tunnel Congress, Budapest, 2009.
671

PROCEEDINGS
MINING WASTES IN ALBANIA

- LEGISLATIVE FRAME AND THEIR STATE
ABSTRACT
Msc. Jorgaq THANAS1
Eng. Bardhyl SHUSHKU2
National Agency of Natural Resources,

Head of Mining Department1 Tirana,
Albania
jorgo.thanas@yahoo.com
The Mining Wastes are managed on the basis of European Parliament&Council Directive 2006/21/EU, of the date 15 March 2006, for management of extractive industries wastes.
General Objective of the Directive is to predict or diminuish, as much as possible, every possible negative in the environment, and also any hazard in the
human beings health as consequence of mining wastes management.
First Reason is connected with great environmental damages and human
lifes losses as consequence of accidents due to the waste tailings deposing
dams breakdowns and cracks (deposing structures), (as in Aberfan (Wales
1966), Stava (Italy, 1985), Aznalcollar (Spain, 1988), Baia Mare and Baia Borsa
(Romania, 2000), etj.). In Stava, Trento, by cracking (subsidence) of thickening
basin for fluorite tailings, were poured about 200 000 m3 waste rocks. The
accident caused 268 dead persons and breaking of several buildings. In Baia
3
Mare, breaking (cracking) of a thickening basin enabled that 100 000 m discharged waters containing up to 120 tons cyanides and heavy metals to be
poured in the River Lapus and after to be passed in the Rivers Some and Tisa
in Hungary, before entering in the River Danube. In the Baia Borsa 20 000
ton wastes were poured in the Novat. The heaviest accident in the history of
Great Britain happenned in the Aberfan (Wales), at 1966, as consequence of
collapsing of wastes stockpiles extracted from a coal mine (colliery), causing
the dead of 144 persons, in most part of them children.
Second Reason is connected with ascertaining of an insufficiency in the control of environmental hazards due to the mining wastes management in the
member countries.
One of the great disquieties belongs to the future extension of EU by the
canditate countries of Eastern Europe (where makes part also Albania) where
are met a great number of mining zones where is lacking a proper environmental protection.
Extractive industries wastes represent a waste flux in great quantities in the
EU. According to the European Environment Agency is calculated that such
wastes constitute about 29% of the total amount of wastes produced yearly
in the EU countries (about 400 million tons per year).
1. APPLYING FIELD OF THE DIRECTIVE

The Directive is applied in the mining wastes management that result from prospection-exploration, extraction,
treatment and collecting of the minerals and from the open-pit mining (quarrying).
Decisions of Commission in applying of the Article 22 of the Directive
Article 22 of the Directive seeks from the European Commission the approval of necessary provisions for
application of particular elements of the Directive.
Until now the European Commission-EC has taken (based on their priority) the decisions as follows:
The decision for Definition of criteria of wastes structures classification: Commission Decision of 20
April 2009 on the definition of the criteria for the classification of waste facilities in accordance with Annex
III of Directive 2006/21/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council concerning the management of
waste from extractive industries (2009/337/EC);
673

PROCEEDINGS
The Decision for Technical Guidelines for financial Guarantees: Commission Decision of 20 April 2009 on
technical guidelines for the establishment of the financial guarantee in accordance with Directive
2006/21/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council concerning the management of waste from extractive industries (2009/335/EC)
The Decision for transmission of information: Commission Decision of 29 April 2009 on the harmonisation,
the regular transmission of the information and the questionnaire referred to in Articles 22(1)(a) and 18 of
Directive 2006/21/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council on the management of waste from extractive industries (2009/358/EC)
The Decision for completing of definition of inert waste: Commission Decision of 30 April 2009 completing
the definition of inert waste in implementation of Article 22(1)(f) of Directive 2006/21/EC of the European
Parliament and the Council concerning the management of waste from extractive industries (2009/359/EC)
The Decision for completing technical requirements for waste characterisation: Commission Decision of
30 April 2009 completing the technical requirements for waste characterisation laid down by Directive
2006/21/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council on the management of waste from extractive
industries (2009/360/EC).
Albanian Mining Law

Mining (extractive industry) wastes management in the Republic of Albania is regulated by the Law No. 10 304, date
15.07.2010 For mining sector in the Republic of Albania and some other sublegal acts following its application.
This Law has brought fully closer the Directive 2006/21/EU. After official appearing of the Albanian Mining Law,
from the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Energetics (METE), have been prepared other sublegal acts to follow its
application that are connected directly with the mining wastes management, as:
Order No. 414, date 3.6.2011, of Minister of Ministry of Economy, Trade and Energetics (METE) The form
and content of management plan and the informations that are held from the owner of mineral mining
permit for the works carried out, for mining wastes deposing, treatment and their analyzing;
Order No. 302, date 12.04.2011 For the approval of base principles for compilation of the environment rehabilitation plan, the closure activity plan for mining activities, the way of definition of hazards zones of the
mineral mining right and the mining wastes management plan;
Order No. 383, date 20.05.2011 For the approval of the form and content of closure activity plan for mining
activities;
Order No. 388, date 20.05.2011 For the approval of the form and content of the postmining monitoring
plan;
Decision of Council of Ministers No. 232, date 23.03.2011 For the approval of the functions of responsible
structures in the mineral mining sector in the Republic of Albania.
National Agency of Natural Resources-NANR (AKBN) is the responsible structure for application of requirements of
the Law No. 10 304, date 15.07.2010, for applying and submission of mineral mining permits, for supervision and
monitoring of mining activity, for exploitation and prospection-exploration-exploitation permits. In this context
the National Agency of Natural Resources-NANR (AKBN) is remained the main responsible structure for most part of
requirements of the Directive 2006/21/EU.
National Agency of Natural Resources-NANR (AKBN), in accordance with the Decision of Ministers Council No. 232
date 23.03.2011 For the approval of the functions of responsible structures in the mineral mining sector in the
Republic of Albania, among other it has the duty for:
The compilation of the hazards zones maps for mining areas in the Republic of Albania.
The assessment of mineral mining zone rehabilitation including the project of closure activities, the project
of mining wastes management, the project of progressive rehabilitation of mining zone;
The supervision and monitoring of deposing (stockpiling) of mining wastes in the mines with exploitation activity, abandoned, closed and in the conservation regime;
The assessment of the financial guarantees values for realizing the investment program and realization of
rehabilitation plan of mining zone;
The compilation of the periodic reports for every mineral mining activity, where are contained also the data
for carrying out of operations, mine workings and deposing of mining wastes or for carrying out of mining
operations in accordance with mining environment protection norms;
674

PROCEEDINGS
Mining and postmining monitoring for mines in closure and in conservation state.
The definition of Mining Waste

The wastes caused by the operations of prospection-exploration, mineral extraction, treatment and stockpiling
and also from quarrying are called mining wastes article 2, point 1); for the goal of the Directive 2006/21/EU,
the waste is every substance or object, which is thrown, is in the mind to be thrown or is requested to be thrown
(article 3, point 1, the Directive 2008/98/EU of European Parliament and Council regarding the wastes).
In accordance with the article 2, point 38, of Mining No. 10304, Mining activity wastes are all solid wastes, pulps
that result from different processes as beneficiation, leaching or further metallurgical, chemical, thermal,
bacteriologic processing and other methods or their combinations, that could be used for the production of ready
product, solid wastes during the mine workings, overground or underground, including here all the wastes created
from the prospection-exploration or exploitation activity, and also the soils of the area of mineral exploitation
permit zone, that is displaced during the mineral mining activity and that is deposed in stockpiles, dams or other
deposing.
2. MINING WASTES SITUATION IN ALBANIA

The greatest development of Mining Industry in Albania has been observed in the years of 1950-1996. During these
years the figures of mineral extraction & processing and wastes deposing are presented in the Table No.1.
Table 1. The amounts of ores production and waste deposing at the years of 1950-1996.
PRODUCTION (ORES)
26.37 million tons chrome
20 million tons copper
40 million tons coal
18.7 million tons iron-nickel
some million m limestones, clays, etc.
PROCESSING
12 million tons copper
5 million tons chrome
1.5 million tons chrome
6 million tons iron-nickel
MINING WASTES (INERTS)

12 million m
10 million tons or 6.5 million m
10 million tons
2 million m
WASTES
11 million tons wastes
2.5 million tons wastes
125 000 tons wastes
350 000 tons wastes
The wastes are deposed in the mines surface, close to the drifts entrances, in the hill and mountains slopes, seizing
so the afforested areas.
It is necessary to be mentioned and clarified that from this period is inherited about 98% of the mining wastes
presented in the above table.
In the Chrome Mine Bulqiza have been deposed, in the ground surface, huge quantities of wastes from the year of
1948 up to 1996. In the surface of this mine continues the wastes deposing but now by lower quantities. In the Fig.
No.1 are presented the most part of mining wastes deposed in this mine surface.
675

PROCEEDINGS
Here are deposed about 5 million m3, wastes, seizing considerable areas.
The deposed wastes are not treated according to
the Mining Law, causing so landscape panorama
pollution.
The areas of wastes stockpiles is deforested.
The wastes stockpiles are permanently under the
impact of atmospheric factors, causing the movements in great quantities of wastes from up down.
Mining wastes are mixed also with small amounts
of chrome ores.
Figure 1.
The same situation is presented also for the mining wastes in the copper mines. These mines are located close to
drifts mouths, near to the rivers and torrents. The stockpilings of mining wastes in a mine is given in the Fig. No. 2.
The wastes are deposed near to the drifts

mouths, seizing considerable areas.
Deposed wastes are not treated according to
Mining Law, causing landscape panorama pollution.
The wastes stockpiles area is deforested.
The wastes stockpiles are permanently under
the impact of atmospheric factors, causing the
movements in great quantities of wastes from
up down.
Mining wastes are mixed also with small
amounts of copper ores.
Figure 2. Mining wastes stockpiling in the copper mine Qaf Bari Puka district.
In the inherited mining wastes make part also those wastes of the Gjegjan copper ore open-pit mine Kukes district.
In this ex-open-cast mine are deposed about 10 million tons of mining wastes with the average content of copper
ores up to 0.2 %. A view of these stockpiles is given in the Fig No. 3.
676

PROCEEDINGS
The mining wastes have been deposed in the openpit mine territory.
Deposed wastes are not treated according to Mining Law, causing landscape panorama pollution.
The wastes stockpiles area is deforested.
The wastes stockpiles are permanently under the
atmospheric factors, causing the pollution of waters.
The mining wastes have e content of copper ores
about 0.2%.
The waters discharged from this open-pit mine are
acidic with pH 3-5
Figure 3. View of mining wastes stockpiles in the ex-copper open-cast mine Gjegjan-Kukes.
In the mining wastes make part also the tailings which are as result of minerals processing. These tailings have been
deposed near to the beneficiation plants of chrome, copper and iron-nickel minerals.
These tailings dams are out of control due to the reason that they are not subdued to a programed process of
maintenance from the year of 1996. This brought to the situation that the main elements of dam have been
damaged up to a total break-down. The elements as the high waters channel, frontal part of dam, etc., have a great
importance for dam stability, because are in the influence of atmospheric agents.
As result also of non-maintenance and erosion activity from surface waters, in the dams bodies are created the
canyons and holes which are continually enlarged. In the Fig. No.4, No.5, is presented the situation of ex-copper
dressing plant tailings dam-Kurbnesh.
Figure 4. Breaking of frontal part of dam
Figure 5. Holes created in the tailings dam body
Tailings of chrome ore concentrator now are recycled due to their content of Cr2O3 that is up to 18%. After the
recycling the content of Cr2O3, goes to 3-4%. In the Fig. No 6 are presented the old dam of Bulqiza concentrator
and new dam as result of recycling.
677

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 6. Bulqiza Chrome ores Concentrator tailings.
Due to the reason that in the mining wastes there is a certain percentage of ores, particularly in the chrome ores
tailings, now they are recycled at the same beneficiation plant.
Figure 7. Mining Wastes in the Chrome Mine - Bulqiza.
In some mining wastes, which are extracted mainly from the coal mines, the rehabilitation could be made naturally.
This happens at almost all mining wastes of coal mines. In the Fig. No. 8 is given an example of the mining wastes of
coal mine Memaliaj.
Figure 8.
678

PROCEEDINGS
The rehabilitation of mining wastes is a disturbing question not only from environmental viewpoint, but also for the
fact that their non-management creates premises for massive accidents, because these wastes are located near to
the roads and dwelling centers.
Their rehabilitation already have started and the tailings dam of Rreshen copper dressing plant is fully
rehabilitated, meanwhile continues the rehabilitation of tailings dam No. 3, of copper dressing plant Reps.
The dam before rehabilitation
The dam after rehabilitation

Figure 9.
A quite enough successful way to reduce the mining wastes is the re-examination of mining methods, giving the
priority to filling and selective mining methods.
In the Munella copper mine, the Turkish company Beralb has started the application of the filling mining method.
3. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Almost all mining wastes are out of control

Considerable amounts of mining wastes are deposed near to rivers and torrents.
The mining wastes have create landscape pollution
The mining wastes have deforested and seize considerable areas.
The mining wastes from minerals processing cause the pollution of surface waters.
Their situation creates premises for an ecological collapse and massive accidents.
679

PROCEEDINGS
FEATURES OF TURKISH MINING LAW

AND ITS IMPLEMENTATION
ABSTRACT
Turkish mining sector produces more than 50 different
types of minerals and some of them are found in considerable amounts in the country. The share of the sector within
nations economy has always been in restricted level. The
mining law of 2010, numbered 5995 was enacted to promote accerelated mineral exploration and development for
local and export markets with a commitment to attract
foreign and private investment into Turkish mining sector.
In Turkey, the State both acts through its own exploration
and production establishments and as a regulatory body to
grant the permissions to explore and exploit minerals and to
supervise the activities in this field.
The new mining law, contains a number of improvements
with respect to the internationally accepted requirements
for a modern mining law. It minimizes the duration, simplifies the procedure of obtaining licences and provides additional supports for the investors.
The Law No. 5995 amending Mining Law and Certain Laws,
came into force in 2010 and brought legislation unity to the
mining sector, secured mining licenses, removed preliminary
operating license period and also removed certain obstacles
and restrictions of other legislations on the mining operations.
In this paper; the important aspects of the recently enacted
pieces of mining legislation, especially, mining law numbered 5995 will be discussed.
Nevzat KAVAKLI (Mining Engineer Ph.D)

Sadi CIVELEKOLU (Mining Engineer)
Serdar ULHA (Mining Engineer M.Sc.)
kr AFAK (Mining Engineer M.Sc.)
Ankara, Turkey
ssafak68@gmail.com
Keywords
Mining Law, Mining Legislation, Turkey
1. INTRODUCTION
Geologically, Turkey is located on a very active and complex zone, and this complexity leads to a wide range of
geological occurrences bringing on a rich inventory of minerals. Boron minerals, marble and natural stones,
chrome, feldspar, pumice, calcite and thorium reserves are the most significant.
Turkey is one of the few countries that have considerable and diverse mineral resources. There are about 4400
known resources of various minerals in Turkey. The availability of this wide range of minerals has contributed to
Turkeys industrial development through the supply of materials for its manufacturing industries.
Regarding the types of minerals produced in Turkey, Turkey ranks the 10th throughout the world in terms of mineral
variety and 28th for its production of underground resources among 132 countries.
Only 15 years ago, 85% of mining operations in Turkey were controlled by government and public organization. This
ratio is now reversed.
680

PROCEEDINGS
Major players are private mining companies in the Turkish mining industry. Today, Most of the production is carried
out by the private sector in the Turkish mining sector. The public sector is dominant in coal production and while
the private sector is engaged mostly in industrial minerals and metallic ores.
2. TURKISH MINING LAW

The mining law of 2010, numbered 5995 was enacted to promote accelerated mineral exploration and development for local and export markets with a commitment to attract foreign and private investment into Turkish mining sector.
The mining policy is regulated by the General Directorate of Mining Affairs (GDMA), which is the central unit of the
Ministry of Energy and Natural Resources in Turkey. Local administrations also (such as governorship or municipality) have a level of authority in relation to licensing and regulation of mining facilities [1][2][3].
Other mainly legislations related to mining are; Labor Law, Environmental Law, Occupational Health and Safety
Law.
The main objective of Turkish mining law is to attract more domestic and foreign private investors in mining exploration and operation activities.
Key Features of the Turkish Mining Law
According to the Turkish Mining Law, minerals are under the ownership and sovereignty of the state and are not
considered to be the property of the landowner who finds them. Moreover, licenses are granted for a defined period
of time, they are transferable but not divisible.
Mining rights are granted to Turkish citizens that are qualified to enjoy civil rights, companies that are legal entities
established in accordance with the laws of the Republic of Turkey and may conduct mining activities as part of
their operations defined in their articles of incorporation [2].
Local and foreign investors can get the same mining rights but foreign investors need to establish a Turkish company which has 100% foreign capital to do. The law guarantees equal treatment to all investors without differentiating between local and international investors.
Classification of Minerals
The Turkish Mining Law classifies resources in six different groups, the classes are as follows [2];
(I)
(a) Sand and Gravel,
(b) Clay Raw Material for Cement and Ceramic Industries
(II)
(a) Aggregates
(b) Marble and Natural Stones,
(III)
Dissolved Salts and CO2,
(IV)
Metallic Minerals, Energy and Industrial Raw Materials,
(V)
Precious/Gem Stones,
(VI)
Radioactive minerals.
Source: Turkish Mining Law (No:3213, amended as 5995 in June 2010)
Licensing and types of licenses in Mining

Mining licenses are granted to anywhere as long as they are deemed suitable by the relevant institutions. Different
licenses may be granted for different mines located in the same area. But they are evaluated according to the type
of groups and granted based on the priority of the applications.
Available portion of the requested area shall be notified to the applicant on the date of application and the exploration license shall be granted if the preliminary search report and the mineral exploration project (including the
financial capabilities required for fulfilment of the exploration term activities) are submitted and the related fee
and guarantee are paid within two months.
The licensing procedure for each class is slightly different and licenses are granted separately for exploration and
operation stages.
681

PROCEEDINGS
Before exploitation, license holder has to get necessary permissions by applying to GDMA or governorship where
the mine occurs or directly to the related government office. Exploitation can only be done after obtaining all necessary permissions.
Exploration stage has been divided into three distinct phases to provide the effectiveness of the exploration licences [3][4].
In pre-exploration period (1 year), the operator has to complete exploration activities stated in the exploration
project within a year. The pre-exploration period for the relevant classes is the first year after application for an
Exploration Licence. Before the end of the period the operator must submit an activity report to GDMA for consideration, detailing financial investment made and demonstrating that the activities indicated for the exploration
license have been completed. This report will include data on the resource/reserve and information relating to the
adequacy of the project and activity plans.
In General Exploration Period (1 year for group 2b,group III and group IV, 2 years for group IV and group VI), the
operator has to prepare a detailed report about the mineral resources till the end of the exploration period. Operators fulfilling pre-exploration obligations are granted a general exploration. Before the end of the period the operator must submit a further activity report detailing investment made into exploration activities during this period.
The general exploration activity report must also include data on the resource/reserve and updated information
about the adequacy of activity being carried out for the project.
In Detailed Exploration period (4 years for group IV and group VI), The operator has to give detailed information
about proven mineral reserves every year. Class IV and VI license holders satisfying their obligations are granted a
detailed exploration period of a further four years. During this period, an exploration activity report must be produced and submitted annually, including a resource/reserve report and details of activities conducted during the
year. Each year, within two months of the report submission, GDMA decides whether the detailed exploration period will be extended for another year.
It is required both to realize the exploration activities and prove the resources and also to document all related
minimum financial expenses for all activities at the end of the pre-general-detailed exploration periods.
Until the end of the exploration license term, the license holder shall apply for the operation license with the exploration activity report including the reserve information of the detected minerals and the restoration plan of the
mining area. Areas with exploration license shall be granted an operation license over the proved, probable and
possible reserve area detected during the exploration term, and operating permit shall be granted for the temporary facility area and proved reserve area. The term of the operating license may be extended, if the proven reserve
is still available [2][3].
Table 1 summarizes the periods and the areas of the exploration or operating licences according to the licences
groups.
Table 1. Mining licence periods and areas according to the licence groups
682

PROCEEDINGS
Permissions for Mining Activities

Permissions must be taken before the beginning of the mineral production. These permissions are shortly explained
as in the following [2][3];
Environmental Impact Assessment ( EIA) : The EIA regulation requires that an EIA report shall be prepared and submitted to the Ministry of Environment and Urbanization for the process of operational permissions.
Certificate to Start Business : The certificate is an essential document for starting mining activities and mineral
production.
Land Access : The operator should get permission from the landowner.
Fees, Guarantees and Royalities
Annual license fees are determined by the Ministry of Finance each year and are based on the mineral type and
stage of the mine. Upon application for the licence, an application fee is payable at a rate announced annually by
the Ministry of Finance; for example the 2013 rate for class 4c is nearly 1000 US Dollar, for an exploration application [4].
Upon grant of the licence, a security deposit is required to be put in place for the duration of the licence equal to
1% of the total annual licence fee per licensed hectare. The Environmental Friendly Guarantee is provided annually
and is equal to the annual licence fee.
Turkish Mining Law stipulates royalty rates payable to the Ministry of Energy and Natural Resources varying
between 2-4% of total annual sales from the mine dependant on mineral class and sub-class. (Table 2).
Table 2. Mining licence periods and areas according to the licence groups
Incentives for the Mining Sector

There are various incentives available, mainly incentives are ;
If the mining operators create additional added-value by processing minerals in the country, they pay 50%
less royalty.
If the production takes place underground, the mine operator pays 50% less royalty.
In addition, there are certain incentives for mining investments, commonly defined by the Cabinet Decree.
Basic obligation for operation licence's owner:
The licenses that do not involve in production activities for more than three years within a time frame of five years,
except for force majeure reasons and unexpected cases, are cancelled.
In addition to that, for the license areas where operation has not started within this period, royalty shall be collected, on annual basis, over 10% of the production amount specified in the project for each no-operation year.
The license holder shall be obliged to submit till the end of April of each year to the GDMA the technical documents, sales information form and activity information form related to the operation activities of the previous year
as well as the information regarding the operation, if any, performed in the operation area in the same period. If
the obligation is not fulfilled, the guarantee shall be registered as revenue. The activity shall be suspended until the
fulfilment of the obligation.
General Directorate may decide on a temporary suspension of the activities at the operation license areas due to
force majeure or unforeseen events, upon application of the license holder. Date of application by the license holder shall be deemed commencement date of the temporary suspension.
License holder is obliged to resume activity within three months following the elimination of the event which gives
raise to the temporary suspension.
683

PROCEEDINGS
All activities for the production of minerals shall be made under the supervision of a mining engineer.
License Nullification and The Measures To Be Taken:
The license holder may apply for withdrawal by taking the required security measures at the field by submitting
production map showing the latest status of the field and the mine geology map to the General Directorate.
Holders of licenses that have been nullified for any reason are also obliged to take the required security measures
within six months and to ensure the compatibility of the operation area with the environment in line with the operation project and to submit the technical documents showing the latest status of the field to the General Directorate.
License holders that do not take the measures prescribed above in due time, except for force majeure reasons will
be granted an additional three-month period. In the event the required measures are not taken in this additional
period as well, the Office of Governor will take these measures. Expenses incurred by the Office of Governor shall
be compensated from the environmental guarantee deposit. In the event the guarantee deposit will not be adequate, the expenses shall be collected from the operator.
Tender of licenses
The areas which have been invalidated, abandoned or neglected shall be opened up to exploration activities via
tendering. Tender notice shall be published in the Official Gazette.
If no application is made during the notice period, the area shall become available for the exploration activities
without need for a further procedure. However, this provision shall not apply to the areas, legal regulations related
to which terminate during the operation licence term, and to the areas where proved reserve has been identified by
the General Directorate of Mineral Research and Exploration and which are then transferred to the General Directorate.
Revenues generated via area tenders shall be registered as special revenue to the government budget and as special appropriation to the Ministry budget.
3. CONCLUSION
The mining law of 2010, numbered 5995, contains a number of improvements with respect to the internationally
accepted reqirements for a modern mining law. It minimizes the duration, simplifies the procedure of obtaining
licences and provides additional supports for the investors.
The mining law was enacted to promote accerelated mineral exploration and development for local and export
markets with a commitment to attract foreign and private investment into Turkish mining sector.
This latest amendment aims to provide a more investment friendly environment, particularly for exploration projects, alongside bringing aspects such as environmental protection and health and safety more in line with international expectations.
REFERANCES
[1]
Turkish Mining Law No:3213, Official Gazette No:18765, Ankara, 15.06.1985
[2]
Turkish Mining Law No:5995, Official Gazette No:27621, Ankara, 24.06.2010
[3]
Regulation on the implementation of The Mining Law (Official Gazette No:27751 Ankara, 06.11.2010)
[4]
www.bener.av.tr
684

PROCEEDINGS
TECHNO-ECONOMICAL ANALYSES OF THE METHODS

FOR PRODUCING OF DIMENSION STONE BLOCKS
ABSTRACT
Prof. d-r Risto DAMBOV1
Goran STOJKOSKI2
Dimitar HRISTOV3
Nikola RZANIKOSKI4
DSc., University Goce Delcev, Insitute

of Mining, Stip,R. Macedonia
2
MSc., Head Mining engineer, Larin
Mramor Company, Bela Pola Qurry
mine, Prilep
3
Executive manager, Larin Mramor
Company, Skopje, R. Macedonija
4
MSc., Mining engineer, Larin Mramor
Company, Bela Pola Qurry mine, Prilep
The Modern way of exploitation of dimension stone is offering possibilities,

technologies and methods for economical and high effective production of
the final product into quarry with surface exploitations. It is very important
during projecting of mine for exploitation of dimension stone to determine
parameters of machines and technologies which may be used for final definition which technology is going to be used.
Until now known methods for exploitation of dimension stone are offering
many varieties for making choice of technology and machines which can be
used for exploitation of dimension stone. Technical characteristics of the
chosen machines given by the manufacturers, but also and experience data
from using those machines in other mines are offering possibilities during
determining of technology and machines for exploitation of dimension
stone.
During the process of deciding which technology is going to be used, there is
appropriate usage of multi criteria methods for optimization.
Keywords
Dimension Stones, Exploitation, Methods, Production, Drilling Machine
1. INTRODUCTION
The choice of technology and methodology for stone blocks and reduce their costs and optimizing them has always
posed a major problem.
This paper will be analyzed the factors that affect the choice of technology and methods for getting the stone
blocks using the information and parameters from machines that will be used, the cost of energy at the present
time, spare parts, normative materials associated with their exploitation and technical characteristics of machinery
and equipment for mining of stone blocks.System optimization consists in choosing a solution that would be
optimal in comparison with other alternatives offered. Calculation parameters are determined based on researched
data and performed statistical analysis of the results of tests of capacities of machines and equipment.
Multi criteria optimization provides the ability to optimize not only major function (e.g. minimum cost for stone
blocks), but also including other features with a different character.
The optimization of the offered variants of exploitation for stone blocks are made by the method of PROMETHEE I
and PROMETHEE II.
2. METHODS FOR EXPLOITATION OF THE ARCHITECTURE - DECORATIVE STONE BLOCKS (AUK)

Getting the stone blocks with drilling blasting works
Drilling blasting works are apply from the start of opening a mine for AUK. Structural features and thickness of
the overburden (decomposed mass) depends of the method of removal.
For removal of waste stone, commonly used the method of drilling blasting works.
If the place for exploitation is in compact rock mass for separate of productive stone massif commonly used and
apply the following procedure (Figure 1).
686

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Productive primary block with specified dimensions, preparation for

separation from the massive with drilling and blasting.
1 slow burning cord, 2 - detonating cap no.8, 3 millisecond detonator cap, 4 detonating cord, 5 - horizontal holes, 6 - vertical holes.
Method of Receiving productive plate with a combination of diamond wire saw and stonecutting chainsaw
To start normal operation of productive floor, it is need of the to have two free vertical sides on the floor. The
places where the forehead is with one free area, the second free area must be to gain by making the cut section.
With preparation of the cut section the floor will progress left and right, when it gets to the intensity of the work.
Good productive floor to prepare for more cutting sections which would give higher production of commercial
blocks.
The use of diamond wire sawing and diamond chain saw, the procedure for opening new cut section is more
simplified and accelerated, and the height, length and width of the cut section is determined by the technical
needs of quarry mine. The position of the cut section of productive floor in practice to be compact stone blocks,
because with the opening of the cut section are obtained and productive plate, and thus the cost of opening cut
section would be equal to the cost in normal operation and is a model for getting productive plate.
The cut section is made perpendicular to the forehead of floor and should be wide enough for at least 4 - 4,5m to
ensure smooth entry and operation of machinery, and sufficiently long length of excavation front to provide a
smooth regular exploitation. Apply different methods for constructing the cut section depending of the technology
used.
Schematic figure for preparation of cut section in stages with a combined application of diamond wire saw and
stonecutting chainsaw is shown in Figure 2.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Figure 2. Stages of making a cut with combining of stonecutting chain saw and diamante wire saw.
687

PROCEEDINGS
Receiving productive plate with a combination of diamond wire saw and stonecutting chain saw is very productive
methods because can combined advantages of either (two) machines.
Thus in principle can be applied two schemes work on both machines as follows:
Cutting vertical cuts with stonecutting chain saw and horizontal cutting with diamond wire saw,
Cutting horizontal cuts with stonecutting chain saw, and a vertical cutting with diamond wire saw.
Figure 3. Optimum usage of the diamante wire saw and

stonecutting chain saw during cutting of the larger cuts
in order to get primary blocks.
Figure 4. Combined usage of diamante wire saw

and stonecutting chain saw into depth floor
Method of Receiving productive plate with stonecutting chain saw

This method is most productive in terms of getting the stone blocks. But here there are some flaws and limitations
in the use of this machine.
There are high-tech machines of stonecutting chain saw for exploitation of AUK. One of these machines is stonecutting chain saw show in figure 5. It is highly productive machines and have high speed cutting stone table. Can
used from the beginning of the exploitation of floor or for removal of overburden, opening the first floor, as well as
underground mining of AUK.
Figure 5. Stonecutting chain saw.
Figure 6. Getting of primary block combining two stonecutting chain saws.
Preparation of cut section just with stonecutting chain saw is justified if in further exploration productive floor are
used diamond wire saw, which need two free vertical sides of floor for easier cutting productive plate of compact
rock massifs.
The application only with stonecutting chain saw no need of making the cut section, because the exploitation of
productive floor only with stonecutting chain saw for productive plate is no problem cutting the closed rear section
of productive plate.
This method is general and can be modified, it would be made vertical cutting (incisions) with greater length
according to the needs and possibilities of quarry mine for AUK.
688

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 7. Opening a deep cut using stonecutting chain saw.
3. PROCEDURE FOR SELECTING THE OPTIMAL METHOD AND TECHNOLOGY

FOR THE EXPLITATION OF STONE BLOCKS
The modern way of exploitation of AUK (architectural decorative stone) offers opportunities, technologies and
methods for economical and highly productive getting finished in quarries in surface or underground mining.
It is very important when designing the mine exploitation AUK to see parameters of machines and technologies
that could be considered the final definition which technology is applied.
The previous known methods for exploitation of AUK offer a wide range in the choice of technology and machinery
which may be used for exploitation of AUK. More apparent necessity of involving complex engineering calculations,
modeling, monitoring and management of the work process. Given that the process of planning and design are
made a number of alternative solutions, that leads to more alternatives, and as a solution is imminent choice of
only one, it is necessary to introduce a process of decision making.
Deciding how the procedure is a choice between several possible alternatives from a set of predefined alternatives
or choice between several possible alternatives to the present problem as optimal to obtain commercial stone
blocks. The optimization of the proposed three alternatives (methods) will be made using the methods of
Multifactor optimization. This optimization give opportunities for optimizing not only one function as the lowest
price for cut 1 (m2) stone table, but also including other features with a different character.
The process of optimization is directly related to subjective decision-maker. Most of the criteria have their
advantages, but it has its drawbacks. The disadvantages are caused by a number of criteria, how their definition,
defining their influences or weights in the model, which in turn makes the process complex mathematical
modeling. Even in today's development of mathematics as a science there is no one method would be
characterized by generalization and power in solving the model.
This optimization methods are quite complex, however, they have some common features, such as:
A lot of number of criteria that create an engineer-decision maker
Existence of conflicts between criteria,
Each criterion has its own unit of measurement and weight
Subjectivity in optimization, i.g. the influence of the decision maker
Identification of factors that have influence on the setting and problem solving
Based on extensive research on the criteria that influence the choice of technology and the method to be applied
for the stone blocks are grouped and allocated to the following factors would have a significant impact on setting
and solving the problem:
Cost for 1 (m2) cut surface
Loss of useful stone table in the process of cutting or cleavage,
Scale and speed of preparatory work,
Degree of utilization of applied equipment
689

PROCEEDINGS
Capacity of applied equipment for cutting or division of 1 (m2) surface of the stone table
Getting a sufficient amount of exploitation floor,
Level of training available to the operating personnel involved,
Tectonic framework of discontinuities in the rock mass,
Work in winter and hot conditions in the open pit mine,
Safety at work of effective equipment,
Environmental aspects and environmental impact,
Degree of real fulfillment of the option decision.
The application of the theory of ranking using Multifactor optimization is performed for several known alternative
solutions. The Multifactor optimization will get a list of variant solutions, sorted according to the criteria under
which the optimization is performed.
It makes sense that the cost of 1 (m2) cut or cleft area is main criteria function, but not unique, but it would get the
greatest weight in deciding. Therefore there is a need to introduce Multifactor optimization in determining the
selection of optimal technologies and methods for obtaining commercial stone blocks.
The application of the theory of ranking using Multifactor optimization is performed for several known alternative
solutions. The Multifactor the optimization will get a list of variant solutions, sorted according to the criteria under
which the optimization is performed.
In this paper methods of getting separated as described above and are commonly used in obtaining the stone
blocks which are
Method of drilling blasting works
Method with combination of diamond wire saw and stonecutting chain saw and
Method with stonecutting chain saw
Selection and identification of criteria
Taking into account the previously defined factors that affect the installation and problem solving , are selected
and identified criteria that have the greatest impact in solving the model. Selected criteria that have the greatest
impact in solving the model based alternatives are given in Table 1.
Table 1.Criteria
No
Criteria
Mark
Costs of 1 (m ) cut, separated surface
Lost of useful stone component
Capacity of the used equipment
Usage of the mining equipment for working with cracked stone mass
Working discipline or precision during preparation for work
Cost of the additional training and education of the engaged

operative workers
Ecological consequences of using the equipment
Working in winter conditions
Safety aspects of the used equipment
Identification of impacts (weights) of the criteria

Each of the criteria has its effect (weight) on alternative solutions. To make the definition of weights of functions
for alternative solutions were made:
Techno - Economic Analysis for the three alternatives (methods) ,
Consultation and survey of experts in the field of surface mining for stone blocks
Calculation of mean values of the weights obtained from the above procedures.
In this way are obtained the following weights of functions of criteria (Table 2).
690

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2. Importance of criteria functions.
No.
Criteria
Mark
Importance
Target
Costs of 1 (m2) cut, separated surface
10
Lost of useful stone component
Capacity of the used equipment
min
min
max
Usage of the mining equipment for working with

cracked stone mass
max
Working discipline or precision during preparation for

work
max
Cost of the additional training and education of

the engaged operative workers
min
Ecological consequences of using the equipment
Working in winter conditions
Safety aspects of the used equipment
min
max
max
Solution of multi criteria model

Table 3. Transformed multi criteria model.
Criteria
Alternatives
Costs of
2
1 (m )
cut,
separated surface ()
Lost of
useful
stone
component (mm)
Capacity
of the
used
equipment
2
(m /h)
Usage of
the mining equipequipment for
working
with
cracked
stone
mass
Working
discipline
or precision during
preparation
for work
Cost of
the additional
training
and education of
the engaged
operative
workers
Ecological
consequences of using
the equipment
Working
in winter
conditions
Safety
aspects of
the used
equipment
Target
min
min
max
max
max
min
min
max
max
Alternative I
10,7
40
4,3
Alternative I I
1,5
11
11
Alternative I I I
5,37
40
Weight
0,2
0,08
0,16
0,1
0,08
0,1
0,08
0,1
0,1
Figure 8. Graph for ranking of the alternatives under PROMETHEE II method.
691

PROCEEDINGS
The final order of ranking of the three alternatives under multi criteria optimization method PROMETHEE II will be
presented in table 4 as following:
Table 4. Final order of ranking according to the method PROMETHEE II.
Alternative (Method of producing)
Mark
Rank
Producing of stone blocks using drilling-blasting works,
- 0,3
Producing of stone blocks using diamante wire saw

and stonecutting chain saw,
0,47
Producing of stone blocks using stonecutting chain saw.
- 0,17
The final ranking of the three alternatives is: A2 A3 A1. According to the results obtained by solving multicriteria model as the optimal solution for the stone blocks is the alternative A2, i.e. getting the stone blocks using
diamond wire saw and stonecutting chain saw.
4. CONCLUSION
Based on the results obtained by analyzing the proposed alternative solutions, defining and solving this optimization model, and the results of optimization can obtain the following conclusion:
The analysis suggested three alternative solutions:
A1 - getting the stone blocks using drilling blasting works;
A2 - getting the stone blocks using diamond wire saw and stonecutting chain saw;
A3 - getting the stone blocks using stonecutting chain saw.
The proposed three alternative solutions have their advantages and disadvantages.
Alternative solution A1 is characterized in that it can be run throughout the year without any major problem on
weather conditions, but the high cost of diesel fuel and explosives materials, makes this alternative less competitive than the other two alternatives.
However given the long and cold winter this alternative would have its own success because we know that in conditions with temperatures is below 0 C the option A2 is not possible to apply because the process of cutting the
stone massif is closely connected with the use of potable water.
Alternative A2 solution is characterized by a much lower cost cutting 1 (m2) surface of the stone table, compared
to the other two alternatives, making it competitive alternatives before A1 and A3. Alternative A2 is characterized
by higher cutting speed, less weight loss during cutting stone because it cut the minimum width, minimum environmental impact, low cost training and re-training of operating personnel.
The criteria to evaluate please note that all three alternatives and applying multicriteria method of optimization,
alternative A3 is ahead of alternative A2. The cost of elements in present circumstances, make this option less
competitive than the option A2. However, this alternative has its advantages. Stonecutting chain saw, can work
independently without the use of other machines in combination with it, like opening overburden floor, and the
exploitation of productive floor.
By applying the methods of optimization PROMETHEE I and PROMETHEE II for the given three alternatives are getting that the alternative A2 is the optimum solution for the exploitation of AUK, i.e. the combined application of
diamond wire saw and stonecutting chain saw.
REFERENCES
[1]
Costa C. (1988) MODERN TREND OF TECHNOLOGY FOR MARBLE QUARRYING AND PROCESSING, Associazione costruttori italiani
machine per il marmot e affini
[2]
Cotman I. (2001), Podzemna eksploatacija arhitektonsko gradjevinskog kamena u Istri, Magisterski rad (pp 100) Rudarsko- geoloskinaftni fakultet, Zagreb, Hrvatska
[3]
Cotman I. Damijanic A. (1991), Nova otkopna metoda u eksploataciji slojevitih lezista arhitektonskog kamena, Rudarsko- geoloskinaftni zbornik, Vol. 3 (69-76), Zagreb, Hrvatska
[4]
Calvin J. Konia, (1995) Phd, Rock Blasting and overbreak Control, IDC Montville
[5]
DIREKTORY 2009 (2009), Confindustria marmomachine, Verona, Italy
[6]
Major mine project for exploitation of marble stone on the quarry mine Bela Pola, s. Nebregovo, Prilep, R. Macedonia
692

PROCEEDINGS
[7]
MODERN TECHNOLOGY AND MACHINERY FOR MARBLE QUARRYING, Benetti machine S.R.L 96 Avenza, Italy
[8]
N. Rzanikoski, (2012) T
, , , , .
[9]
R. Dambov, (2011), Methods of blasting, Book, UGD-FNTS,Institute of Mining, Stip, R. Macedonia
[10] R. Dambov, S. Bosevski (2011) Blasting technique in special conditions, Monograf, SRGIM, Skopje, R. Macedonia
[11] Sinisa Dunda (1995), Tehnolski proces povrsinske eksploatacije arhitektonskog kamena karbonatnog podrijetla, Cleantech d.o.o. Zagreb, Hrvatska
[12] Sinisa Dunda, (1990) Tehnologija dobijanja arhitektonsko gradeznog kamena, RGNF Zagreb, Hrvatska
[13] STONE 2010 (2010), World Marketing Handbook, Business media, Milano, Italy
693

PROCEEDINGS
AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR THE WELL DRAINAGE SYSTEM

AT COAL MINE UNDERLYING SEAM SUVODOL,
MINING POWER COMPLEX BITOLA
ABSTRACT
Goran BLAZESKI1
Vladimir DILEVSKI2
Power production in Macedonia is largely dependent on coal. Thereby, discovering

new coal resources is not only a state necessity but a crucial ingredient in the process
of power production in MPC Bitola. In that respect, a viable example of system
which will provide coal reserves for future exploitation is the Drainage System of 19
wells equipped with submersible pumps and 9 wide-area subterranean water measuring stations located at the coal mine Suvodol, which is a part of the Mining Power
Complex Bitola.
It has been noticed that the existing remote aspect of such a system has been making
difficulties in its continual exploitation and troubleshooting. Therefore, a custom
made automation system has been made for remote control and monitoring of the
drainage system (SCADA).
In order to fully satisfy the new requirements, a complex electronic system for control and monitoring on each of the well stations has been installed consisting of frequency inverters for variable speed control of the pumps, programmable logic controllers, wireless communication devices and process instrumentation: ultrasonic
clamp-on flow-meter, water level transmitter and water quality analyzer.
The technology of lowering the sub-terrain water level imposes applying a cascade
PID regulation which provides the needed flow and constant sub-terrain water level
for a longer period; by means of constant adaptations of the pump-motor frequency.
The water level monitoring on the whole radius of influence of the well stations is
made by 9 piezometer stations equipped with wireless device, PLC and water level
transmitters.
All of the important signals which give information for the actual state of well stations and the water level in the surrounding area are being transmitted to the main
dispatching center in the coal mine by means of wireless link at a 5 GHz band.
The SCADA system is custom made and purposely developed for the need of this
system. The drawings represent the actual geologic profiles depicted in proportion of
the terrain which is subject of drainage and its coal layers position underground. The
pictures are dynamic and change in real-time. All of the states, as technology events,
real-time measurements, warnings and critical alarm states are displayed to operators, which is of a great advantage in the continuous well exploitation.
Siskon Systems Engineering, Skopje,

1
goran.blazeski@siskon.com.mk 2 vladimir.dilevski@siskon.com.mk
This system as a whole is of great significance for the future lifespan and exploitation
period of the coal mine Suvodol.
Keywords
SCADA, Wireless, Wi-Fi, PLC, Frequency, Inverter, Well, Ultrasonic, PID, Regulation, Flow, Level, PH, O2, Pump, Coal, Mine, Power, Plant, SIEMENS, SIMATIC, S7, SISKON
1. INTRODUCTION
The location of the underlying coal series is in MPC Bitola and as coal mine it is of great significance for electricity
generation in Thermal power plants 1, 2 and 3 with installed capacity of 233 MW, each. Thermal power plants in
MPC Bitola operate with full capacity and participate in total electricity generation in Republic of Macedonia with
70-80%.
Surface mine Suvodol is situated 15 km east of Bitola and it spreads on area of 9 2. Exploitation of mine Suvodol
has started in 1977 with excavation of waste and coal excavation has started during the middle of 1982. Mine Su-
694

PROCEEDINGS
vodol is opened according to accomplished research works in 1972-1974 and accomplished Elaborate for coal reserves from 1975 which determined and verified geological reserves of cca 175.000.000 tones and use of 95% of
mineral raw materials respectively 5% losses, exploitation reserves of 161.000.000 tones are calculated with average proportion of coal and waste 1:3,9. Coal layer has average thickness of 19,8 meters and it is situated at depth
of 30-100 meters.
The area of the deposit is situated under the main production layer of exploitation field of mine Suvodol and it
spreads over approximately 3 km2. Main mining design for opening and exploitation of this coal reserve was elaborated and geological reserves of 55.000.000 tons of coal were determined out of which there are exploitable reserves of 50.000.000 tons of coal with overburden coefficient 1:4,7 cubic meters for ton. The exploitation technology of the Under-stratum series Suvodol consists of continuous ETS systems.
Planned annual capacity of around 6,5 million tons of coal, which are necessary for operation of the three units in
TPP Bitola, should be obtained with combined excavation and homogenization of coal on three sites: Main coal
seam in SM Suvodol, SM Brod Gneotino and SM Deep underlying coal seam. This is, first of all, due to decrease of
coal reserves in SM Suvodol and necessity for their completion with coal from other sites respectively coal mines.
Through analysis and interpretation of performed investigations and research for the underlying coal series, only
two coal seams are selected as economically interesting: underlying coal seam I and underlying coal seam II, respectively, located under Major productive coal seam.
The first underlying coal seam is characterized with relatively small thickness of 4.5 meters and lies directly beneath the area of the Major productive seam in Suvodol, which is already excavated or is in progress of excavating,
(nearing its end of coal reserves) and is located atdepths between 2.535.0 metersfrom the surface.The second coal
seam (the major coal seam of the underlying coal series) is located at 50100 meters from the surface, separated
from the first seam with series of dusty sands. The main difference here is is that this one has continuous extension,
with variable thickness and in certain locations is subdivided in several thinner seams.Major challenge before the
excavation of the coal is successful dewatering of the sub-terrain waters. The first step was appropriate positioning
of the wells in order to achieve efficient dewatering of the area affected.
In the first phase of this major investment there were drilled 19 wells and 9 piezometers with different depths according to the major geological and mining project. There are installed 19 submersible pumps in each of the wells
with different power on different depths, according to the tests and effectiveness estimations.
Positioning of the wells is in two lines:
First line: consisting 12 wells, well 1 to well 12 and 5 piesometer stations
Figure 1. First well line
695

PROCEEDINGS
Second line: consisting 7 wells, well 13 to well 19 and 2 piesometer stations
Figure 2. Second well line
The piezometers are positioned in such a manner to give relevant information on the sub-terrain water level in the
whole area imposed by the influence of the well system.
Due to the nature of the dewatering process and expected radius of underground dewatering, and solidity and
structural integrity of the well construction, there have been imposed technological constraints of pump work.
2. AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Each pump has asynchronous 3-phase motor. The power of the motors in different pumps and wells varies among
5.5 KW to 18.5 KW on 400 VAC. Each motor has a nominal frequency of 50 Hz.
The preconditions of a successful functioning of monitoring and control systems are:
adequate hydrogeological observation, and
properly configured optimized system consisting executive, process instrumentation and communications
equipment
Each well station has installed:
1. PLC SIEMENS Simatic S7-1200 with Profibus DP communication module
2. Frequency inverter SIEMENS Micromaster 430 with Profibus DP communication module
3. Operator panel SIEMENS Simatic KP300
4. Wireless communication device SIEMENS Scalance IWLAN W700
5. Directional antenna with strong directional efficiency on 5GHz SIEMENS IWLAN
6. Electrical energy analyzer SIEMENS Simeas P50 with Profibus DP communication module
7. UPS System PHOENIX CONTACT Quint with 12Ah battery
8. Surge and lightning protection PHOENIX CONTACT Trabtech
9. Current transformers PHOENIX CONTACT
10. Inverter protection SIEMENS Sirius 3RV
11. Enclosure RITTAL CM, IP54 protection
696

PROCEEDINGS
12. Transmitter for water level measurement SIEMENS SITRANS P MPS

13. Ultrasonic clamp-on flow meter SIEMENS SITRANS FST 020
14. Water quality analyzer SEKO 502
Each piesometer station has installed:
1. PLC SIEMENS Simatic S7-1200
2. Operator panel SIEMENS Simatic KP300
3. Wireless communication device SIEMENS Scalance IWLAN W700
4. Directional antenna with strong directional efficiency on 5GHz SIEMENS IWLAN
5. UPS System PHOENIX CONTACT TRIO with 7.2 Ah battery
6. Enclosure RITTAL AE, IP66 protection
7. Transmitter for water level measurement SIEMENS SITRANS P MPS
Pump regulation
The desired effect of dewatering is equal and steady lowering of the sub-terrain water level in the whole area affected by the well system. In this manner the pump should be able not to empty the well in a short period of time,
in contrary, the water should be pumped out in a slow fashion, achieving the desired underground level and to be
able to maintain that level.
These technology demands impose the application of the pump speed regulation which is conditioned by few factors:
Underground water level maintaining the level
Pumped water flow maintaining constraint flow for moderate emptying of the wells
Underground water input < Pumped water output as a condition for lowering the level
Another constraint is the pump vendor recommendation of speed regulation range of the submersible pump which
is, in this case, from 30 Hz to 50 Hz in order to avoid mechanical stress and damage of the pump.
Considering these technological issues, there has been designed an integrated, custom made, automation system
for a pump regulation, supervisory control and data acquisition.
The speed regulation of the pump is done by a variable speed drive. The frequency which is applied to the motor, by
the frequency inverter of the manufacturer SIEMENS type MICROMASTER 430, is calculated on a programmable
logic controller (PLC type SIEMENS SIMATIC S7-1200) and transferred as a set-point to the inverter by means of
PROFIBUS DP industrial serial communication protocol.
Frequency calculation demands a regulation technique of two cascade PID controllers - which is executed on the
PLC. The output of this algorithm gives the frequency of the pump which will satisfy the constraints and desired
values of the underground water level and desired flow.
This concept requires two feedback signals. One signal is from the water level measuring transmitter SIEMENS
SITRANS P MPS, which works on the principle of hydrostatic pressure, and the second one is the flow signal which is
calculated from the ultrasonic clamp-on flow meter SIEMENS SITRANS FST 020.
The first PID controller is master controller for the closed loop system. The set-point in the master controller is the
desired level of underground water which is given by a geology engineer from the operator panel locally or from the
SCADA interface in the dispatching center. Feedback is a current signal of 4-20 mA from the transmitter for water
level.
The second PID controller is slave controller and inner control loop from the cascade PID controllers. Set-point for
this controller is the desired flow also given by the geology engineer from the operator panel locally or from the
SCADA interface in the dispatching center.
Feedback for the inner loop is a current signal of 4-20 mA from the ultrasonic clamp-on flow meter. The output of
the regulation structure gives the set-point frequency to the variable speed drive which is transferred by means of
industrial serial bus protocol.
There is a situation when the frequency of the pump is low as 30 Hz, and because of the low underground water
input the pump is still emptying the well below the desired set-point level. In this point the regulation transits from
cascade PID to hysteresis control. When the water level is high enough above the desired level set-point, the pump
again starts with continual regulation, and so on.
697

PROCEEDINGS
Regulation algorithm is described with the following control structure:
Figure 3. Control structure of pump regulation
SCADA
To provide functions of remote control, monitoring the operation and management of dewatering system, it is
necessary to secure, in real time, the signalization and acquisition of measuring data:
visualization of the ground profiles displayed with appropriate ratio,
geometry of current field that changes with the progress of mining works,
piesometric levels of ground waters real-time dynamic change,
flows l/s and total cubic meters,
ground water quality (temperature, ph value, dissolved oxygen),
consumption of electric power (U, I, cos, active and reactive power, total power)
temperature of pump and frequency inverter and

online trends and archiving for the continual values
warning and alarm of the minimum water level in the well,
transmitters malfunction detection
signal system of pump engine in operation, status and alarm messages of the frequency inverter
UPS alarm, voltage failure detection
wireless and wired connection status
protection of dry work is ensured by the water level measurement the pump stops when minimum level
level is reached, with a capacitive probe for empty pipe detection and with monitoring of the pump temperature and monitoring the pump torque.
Each of the well and piesometric stations are equipped with a wireless communication devices SIEMENS SCALANCE Industrial WLAN, type W700. The wireless communication is according to IEEE 802.11h standard for industrial
applications on the free frequency band of 5 GHz. This type of wireless communication ensures fast and reliable
mean of data transfer with bandwidth of 20 Mbit/s average.
For the wireless signal to travel distances of 1 km and more, there has been installed an antenna tower which acts
as a main node for the successful wireless data transmission to the main dispatching center in the Coal Mine Suvodol.
The data is accepted by the SCADA server. There has been developed a visualization, control, monitoring, reporting
and alarm logging application for the purpose of this system in SIEMENS Simatic WinCC SCADA software.
SCADA visualization is made user friendly as simple as one mouse click functionality and intuitive command and
monitoring for the operators is possible without special knowledge on the technology thanks to the fully automated operation and design of the displayed screens.
698

PROCEEDINGS
Monitoring, alarm and event notifications are of enormous help to the maintenance personnel for prompt and easy
fault detection and continuous work of the system.
There has been made extensive report generating functionality. The reports are daily; weekly and annual information of the most important parameters for the monitoring and analysis of the well drainage system. Reports give
the geology and mining engineers concrete data for the behavior, dynamic and static characteristics of the subterrain waters which are basis for decision making in further excavation, as well as general acknowledgment and
picture of the behavior of the sub-terrain water useful for the future activities in the coal mine.
SCADA Figures:
Figure 4. SCADA Main Display 1 System Overview
Figure 5. SCADA Main Display 2 Profile Line Well 1 Well 12
699

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 6. SCADA Display Profile Line Well 13 Well 19
Figure 7. SCADA Display 1 Well Station Selection, Command and Monitoring
3. RESULTS
Based on the experience gathered so far, a series of useful effects have been accomplished:
Continual regulation and maintaining of steady state underground water level

Lowering the energy consumption with the use of frequency regulation and increase in energy efficiency;
reliability and safety of system work;
efficient monitoring, diagnostics and lowering downtimes in system operation and decrease of operational
costs;
700

PROCEEDINGS
Surveillance of equipment, prevention of faults and damage of equipment which prolongs its exploitation
life, malfunctions and maintenance derived to minimum, prevention of limit line situations;
Efficiency of the technological process (technological process guided at the assigned level and work regime;
Efficient utilization of resources available (operation deployment depending on operation conditions);
Minimization of subjective role of human factor, particularly in condition of sudden and critical disturbances
in equipment and plant operation;
The gathered results from the extensive reporting system are of main significance in future planning and the
dewatering systems analysis for the coal mine Suvodol.
REFERENCES
[1]
Siemens Industry and Automation: Configuring a Cascade PID Control PCS7, SIEMENS AG 2010, with related literature
[2]
B. Vujic S., Adaptive Computer Supported Surveillance-Management Model of dewatering system at coal open pit mine, Original scientific paper, 2006, pp 33-42
[3]
www.elem.com.mk
[4]
SISKON company profile
701

PROCEEDINGS
LIMESTONE EXCAVATION TECHNOLOGY OF LIEBHERR

R 984 C EXCAVATOR AT THE SURFACE MINE MUTALJ
ABSTRACT
Branka JOVANOVI1
Miodrag PRIBIEVI2
eljko PRATALO3
Simeun MARIJANAC4
1
Mining Institute, Belgrade, Serbia, povrsinska@ribeograd.ac.rs

Lafarge BFC, Beocin, Serbia, miodragm.pribicevic@lafarge.com
3
Mining institute, Belgrade, Serbia, zeljko.prastalo@ribeograd.ac.rs
4
Mining institute, Belgrade, Serbia, simeun.marijanac@ribeograd.ac.rs
2
Limestone Surface Mine Mutalj makes part of Lafarge

Beocin Cement Factory and is located in the southern hillsides of Fruska Gora (Serbia) at 19 km from
the Factory in Beocin city.
This paper present Limestone excavation technology
of Liebherr R 984 C Excavator, part of Supplementary mining desing of Mutalj limestone surface mine
made in Mining institute from Belgrade.
Keywords
Limestone, Mutalj, Lafarge, Excavator
1. INTRODUCTION
Cement production at Fruska gora, along the Danube and next to Novi Sad, thanks to the existence of the cement
mineral ores, had started at the beginning of the 19-th century, at first in a primitive manner and later in the cement factory in Beoin - the oldest cement factory in the Balkans.
Since 2002., based on the Sales of national capital contract, Lafarge became the majority shareholder of the
Beocin cement factory and LBFC became a part of the Lafarge group with the main office located in Paris, one of
the world leaders in the construction materials industry which employs 83.000 people in 75 countries.
LBFC consists of, besides the factory in Beocin, two active open pit mines in which it exploits the basic ores for
making cement:
1. Limestone open pit mine "Mutalj"
2. Marl open pit mine "Filijala"
Mutalj Limestone Deposit is situated in southern hillsides of Fruska Gora. A mine road is the main connection line
between quarry and the asphalt road, which is 19 km long and leads to Lafarge-BFC at Beocin.
Figure 1. Communication Map with the Geographic

Location of Beocin and Mutalj Deposit.
702

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 2. Surface Mine Mutalj
Geological exploratory works have determined large quantities of Laitovac limestone in the Mutalj deposit. The
colour of this limestone ranges from whitish, light grey to grey-yellowish and red.
Overburden defined as loam and loess with 22,1-m average thickness.
Mining operations in the "Mutalj" deposit have taken up the surface of about 30 ha so far with the maximum digging depth of about 65 m in relation to the terrain.
2. LIMESTONE EXCAVATION TEHNOLOGY OF LIEBHERR R 984 C EXCAVATOR
Figure 3. Hydraulic Excavator LIEBHERR R 984 C at the Surface Mine Mutalj
703

PROCEEDINGS
Main features of LIEBHERR 984 C excavator are:

Excavator weight
115 t
Bucket capacity
4,7 m3
Bucket width
1,65 m
Bucket height
2,25 m
Bucket length
2,9 m
Bucket arm length
3,4 m
Boom length
7,8 m
Crawler track width
0,75 m
Engine power
504 kW
Hydraulic pumps
3 pc.
flow rate
472 l/min
pressure
320 bar
Digging depth max
8m
Digging radius max
14 m
Tearing force
56,1 t.
Figure 4. Digging Flowchart of the Excavator LIEBHERR R 984 C
The excavator performs deep-digging in bench blocks. Deep-digging is selected because in this case the digging
force of the hydraulic excavator is two times larger than in case of high-digging. The largest digging force appears
immediately below the level on which the excavator is standing at distance smaller than 3/5 of the digging radius.
The force increases with the digging depth. With LIEBHERR R 984 C excavators the digging force is 37.51 t at 4.5 m
of digging depth and 4.5 m of digging radius.
The block width is 11,2 m and the excavator advance 1,8 m. To heap the bucket the cutting depth should be 0,67 m,
which means that the excavator advances 1,82 m with every 3 cuts and digs up 100 m3 of limestone.
During trial operations at the surface mining Mutalj it was possible to determine that 4 m is the optimum digging
depth, which was adopted as the sub-bench height. (Figures 5 and 6).
R1
A = 11,20 m
.2 m
=6
R2
7m
4,
=
R3
1,8 m
-4,00
0,00
0,00
1.8 m
H=4m
0,00
-4,00
704
A - block with
R1 - max. digging radius
R2 - middle digging radius
R3 - min. diging radius
H - sub-bench height
D - cut thickness
G - crawler track length
- crawler track width
11,2 m
8,0 m
6,2 m
4,7 m
4,0 m
1,8 m
6,5 m
0,75 m
Figure 5. General Flowchart of Excavator in Block Operation

PROCEEDINGS
The excavator divides 12-m benches into three 4 m sub-benches. This digging height offers better possibilities for
selective limestone excavation but on the other hand reduces the possibility of homogenization, more convenient
in case of higher benches and very significant for cement factories.
As a rule, whenever possible, during loading the truck is positioned at the level below the sub-bench, which is safer
(figure 6) or at the level of excavator standing plane, so that the angle of its rotation does not exceed 90.
Figure 6. Flowchart of Final Limestone Slope Construction conclusion
3. CONCLUSION
The "direct" excavation technique of limestone (without mining or other ways of limestone separation from the
basin, before it is loaded on trucks) with a hydraulic dredge LIEBHERR R 984 C was introduced as the best solution
in terms of cost reduction in 2004.
It has been determined that the applied technology of digging limestone was well adjusted to the conditions in the
basin and that it is efficient in satisfying the criteria which the ore for cement production should fulfill (homogenized and with the least amount of moisture possible).
REFERENCES
[1]
Mining institute Belgrade: Supplementary mining design of Mutalj limestone surface mine, 2008
705

PROCEEDINGS
ARRANGEMENT OF SURFACE EXCAVATIONS

OF NON-METAL MINERAL RAW MATERIAL
ABSTRACT
Dragica STOJILJKOVIC1
Snezana KOMATINA-PETROVIC2
Biserka DIMISKOVSKA3
Jelena STETIC1
Jelena NINIC-TODOROVIC1
University of Novi Sad, Faculty of Agriculture,

Novi Sad, Republic of Serbia,
dragica@polj.uns.ac.rs, stetica86@gmail.com
2
University Union-Nikola Tesla, Faculty of Ecology
and Environmental Sciences, Belgrade, Republic
of Serbia, komsne@yahoo.com
3
Ss. Cyril and Methodius University, Institute of
Earthquake Engineering and Engineering Seismology, Skopje, Republic of Macedonia, biserka@
pluto.iziis.ukim.edu.mk
According to valid legal regulations, during closing of a surface excavation, the owner is obligated to prepare a project on surface excavation closure, i.e., arrangement of the terrain and change of its purpose. The design solution depends on the location of the excavation,
the extent of degradation as well as the natural geomorphological
and climatic conditions. The purpose of the terrain also depends on
the age and social map of potential users of the re-cultivated area.
The paper contains a few original solutions for the quarry location on
Frushka gora. The abandoned quarry is situated within a national
park. Each solution is original according to design, paths and plant
material. During the arrangement of the terrain, care for the proper
use of design of structures, construction and plant material and their
fitting into the landscape was not always taken.
A comparative analysis provides general criteria for the arrangement
of the surface excavation of non-metal mineral raw materials. The
specific criteria refer to surface excavations in the national park
Frushka gora and application of landscape arrangement.
Keywords
Design, Plant Material, Quarry
1. INTRODUCTION
Frushka gora is located in the northwestern part of Serbia, on the southern edge of the Pannonian lowland.
Mountain range is limited on the Danube in the north, the western boundary ends on the hill Telek at Sid and
gradually goes into lower loess plateau extends to Croatia.
Eastern border of the right bank of the Danube from Surduk to Novi Banovaci. Southern boundary is the ground
elevation 100 m.a.s. which gradually descends into the Sava tectonic Jadar. The trachyte quarry is located on the
northeast slopes of Frushka gora at about 400 m.a.s. It is about 3.5 km south of the village Ledinci
Frushka gora trachytes, because of the relatively small distribution, specific occurrence and economic potential,
were the subject of many geologists studies. Trachytes build a zone length of about 4.5 km from Veliki Gradac over
the Liajev vrh and Kamenjari to Ikonice.
They occur as breaches of east-west, stamped between serpentinite in the south and flysch in the north. Trachytes
are 165 m thick underlain and overlain with sandstone and siltstones. They fall toward the north at an angle of 600.
After impression of rock mass is tectonically crushed and hydrothermally altered. Tackle secretion is stepped up
incorrectly. On the composition of the two streams Lukin Svetac and Srebrni potok in the last century there was
opened a pit mine for trachytes exploitation [1,2,3].
The mine is at an altitude of 400 m.a.s., and the bottom is at an altitude of 250 m.a.s. Meanwhile, in 1960. there was
formed a protected nature park "Frushka gora" and so the open pit was found in the park. Exploitation of trachyte
was further damaged and degraded the environment.
706

PROCEEDINGS
During 1999. with the exploitation stone cessation, the pit depth of 50 m began to be filled with groundwater and
surface water from the higher parts of the field and from the stream. There was formed a lake kidney bean-shaped,
approximately 400 m length and 100 m wide.
In summer, by the lake there was formed a wild unregulated beach. In June 2006 there was a landslide stone into
the lake on the west wall of the pit. Because of the risk of further landslides, the lake is now closed and inaccessible
to visitors The access road to open pit - lake "Silver" is on the north side.
On the south side there is a waterfall through which there are two streams flowing into the lake. The west side is a
shallower part of the lake - with the initial descent into pit floors. The east side is inaccessible, steep terrain with
elevations of indigenous approximately 400-300 m.
Figure 1. Ledinci Lake satellite image of the field

Source: (Google Maps included)
2. METHODS
Landscape rehabilitation of areas disturbed during a long operation period, seeks to re-establish the natural balance of the expansion content. Restoration of nature in these areas should be supported by different methods of
technical and biological rehabilitation with anti-erosion and biological function.
Technical remediation: alleviating the vertical sides of the quarry, ensuring the stability of steep slopes (gambioni,
raising retaining walls, terraces and cascades of trachytes, capturing of new layers of humus), stabilization of unstable slopes can be technical and biological. Biological remediation: selecting and planting various crops that will
allow further succession, return and resettlement of various plant and animal species.
Prior to biological remediation there is necessary to access the technical reclamation including terracing, cultivation and ensuring the edges of the quarries etc. Biological remediation involves depositing humus layer on the substrate to terraced cultivation herbs and planting of indigenous trees and shrubs. Biological remediation resulting
from a detailed analysis of the quarry and is aimed at breeding new vegetation integration with the surrounding
natural landscape and accelerate the natural process of spontaneous overgrowing denuded areas.
3. RESULTS
The future use of this type of reconstructed space is based on a complementary tourist services in different age
groups: fishing, hiking, mountain biking, paragliding, family weekend - day trips, school trips, environmental workshops, etc.
This conceptual solution the space would be promoted on several levels. First, with biological remediation of
exploited field, then expanding the content and aesthetically. There are fullfilled all the demands of the National
Park "Frushka gora" for the repair and maintenance of habitats for native flora and fauna.
The first conceptual design of the surface trachyte mine "Silver" recultivation
The first conceptual design assumes walking and recreation as the basic form of use and preservation of natural
habitats for endangered native plant and animal species. Also there is anticipated arrangement of a motel with a
707

PROCEEDINGS
restaurant and viewing platforms as points of concentration of users. They also open the main point of view and
provide conditions for daily rest. In Figure 2 shows the contents of the legend from 1 to 13.
The access to the sanitized area is on the north side and is secured by the existing roads (12) that has been
upgraded parking (10) with 50 parking places (provided the required percentage of disabled and buses). Connected
to this road there is a pedestrian path that leads to the hotel-restaurant (8), and more. By the lake there is a beach
that comes withcascades (13) that contribute to the promenade - with open views to the lake and its surroundings,
and end-extensions viewpoints. Lookouts (7) are enchanted (5), and lower cascades that connect them, allowing
users to stay comfortable in these areas, and the entire area achieve balance with the vertical walls of the terrace.
The walls are vertical cascade with climbing plants on (4) and other related plant species. At From the beach there
is an access to cascade (5) on the north, east and south side over the lake. Cascades have paths that contribute to
the promenade - with open views to the lake and its surroundings, and end-extensions viewpoints. The pathways
and cascades are grass, planted perennial plant material, which allows users to stay comfortable in these areas, and
the entire area achieve balance with the vertical walls of the terrace. Vegetation has been carefully selected for
specific ways of planting the terraced field. Biological reclaimed strip mine ground gradually lost in the indigenous
forest of beech and lime in the national park "Fruska worse." Of construction materials for the hotel and bungalows
used trachyte, concrete, wood, brick, glass. Parking and access roads to the buildings and walls for climbing
concrete and reinforced concrete. Beach furniture, beach umbrellas, beach bar, paths used to quarry stone, wood,
cane, plastichigher cascades there are native deciduous tree species (1) and shrubs (3) in combination with
coniferous trees (2), adequate to the climate conditions and terrain. Vegetation has been carefully selected for
specific ways of planting the terraced field. Biological reclaimed strip mine ground gradually lost in the indigenous
forest of beech and lime in the national park "Fruska worse". The main used building material are trachyte rocks as
broken or hewn stone retaining walls, patios, fences, benches, paths and a stone cube for parking and access roads
to the hotel. Another important building material is processed differently from beech timber used for hotel and
restaurant furniture arranged along pedestrian paths, beach and scenic views.
There ia designed the lighting from renewable energy sources - solar lying and standing lamps along trails, access
roads, beach and scenic views. Energy for hot water is obtained through solar panels. Projected reclamation of
quarries is not envisaged intensive use at night.
Figure 2. The first conceptual design of the Silver surface mine reclamation
Legend: 1 Deciduous trees. 2 Softwoods, 3 Shrubs, 4 Climbing-vines, 5 Grass, 6 The indigenous forests of beech and lime,
7 Lookout, 8 Hotel, 9 Ground floor, 10 Parking, 11 Paths, 12 Access road, 13 sustaining wall
708

PROCEEDINGS
The second conceptual design of the surface trachyte mine "Silver" recultivation
Preliminary design understands organiyation of tourism - hunting, recreation, rural with different kinds of content
for different age groups. Figure 3 shows the contents of the legend from 1 to 7.
Access to the sanitized area is from the north and has the existing road upgraded with parking (4), with 50 parking
places (required percentage of places for disabled and buses is provided). Connected to this road there is a
pedestrian path leading to the ground level bungalows and mountain houses arranged in a semi-circle (3), and the
restaurant on the lake with a semicircular glass terraces overlooking the water (2). Paths continue west to the
climbing wall (1) and along the east shore of the lake. Preliminary design stipulates that by the lake there is a beach
(6) with coffee bar.
Figure 3. Other ideas for the solution of reclamation of surface

mine "Silver"
Legend: 1 Climbing wall, 2 Restaurant with a terrace overlooking the lake, 3 bungalows, 4 Parking, 5 Terraced vertical walls
of the pit, walking trails, 6 Beach with coffee bar, 7 Plant material: Deciduous trees, Softwoods, Shrubs, Climbers-creeper
According to the design of the plant material

there are introduced many perennial vines such as
acacia-"yellow and blue rain". Lighting tracks and
parking resolved standing lamps 6 m high. The
lighting area and access roads to the resort with
bungalows and a restaurant with terrace overlooking the lake with stylized neon lights that
represent the male and female figures. As underwater floodlights illuminated the lake is a waterfall on the south side of the lake and the glass
floor terrace restaurant overlooking the lake.
4. DISCUSSION
In this paper, there are proposed two good solutions of the surface mine "Silver" reclamation, that is located in the
national park "Fruska Gora".
With the first solution there is maximally respected site according to criteria of land use in national parks. The project primarily takes in account the restoration of the habitats of endangered plant and animal species in the national park. The project has made a modest plant material native perennial species. There are anticipated daily activities of the user space and in accordance with it there is designed the solar lighting. Construction materials are
natural and appropriate for the location.
Another option is more meaningful in terms of day and night programs for users. There is designed a night light
show on the lake. Along the walking paths there is designed diverse plant material. Lighting anticipates energy
waste and construction of infrastructure. Construction materials are diverse and may not be appropriate setting.
Projected work does not respect sites in the national park. Such beautifully designed objects, light show and more
stylized neon lights would match the location in an urban setting on the banks of the Danube, as well as the city of
Novi Sad.
REFERENCES
[1]
Matovic V., Milovanovic D.: Petrologija latita Kinjeva glava ( Fruka gora), 1998, pp 133-146.
[2]
Sojiljkovic D., Stanic S.: Geologija Fruke gore, 2007,pp 107-107.
[3]
Vujkovic Lj., Neak M.,Vujii D.: Tehnika pejzanog projektovanja, 2003, pp
[4]
http ://sr.wikipedia.org/wiki
709

PROCEEDINGS
EXPLOITATION OF SOLID MINERAL RESOURCES

IN PAKA QUARRY
ABSTRACT
Roman ROER1
Marjan HUDEJ2
Marko RANZINGER3
RGP d.o.o., Velenje, Slovenia

1
roman.roser@rlv.si 2 marjan.hudej@rlv.si 3 marko.ranzinger@rlv.si
Paka quarry is located on the left bank of the river Paka, at the foot of
mountain Paki Kozjak by the regional road Velenje-Slovenj Gradec. The location of the quarry does not represent a major disruption to the surrounding area with the impact of mining. The largest negative impacts on the environment are dust, noise and vibration. These negative impacts from mineral
excavation in the quarry Paka we successfully minimized with the use the
best drilling and mining machinery, use of appropriate types of explosives
and sophisticated means of initial NONEL.
Mineral extraction in the quarry Paka is carried out by massive blasting. The
exploitation solid mineral we transport with a trucks to filling the bunker of
primary crusher at the processing plant. The total extraction area is divided
into 12 terraces of excavation. Basic plateau is located at the altitude of
+460, the highest point is on the bench +625. Overall height is 180m. Ranges
of terraces are between 15 and 20 meters.
The basic activity of the Paka quarry is the acquisition of stone aggregates
for the production of all types of concrete and mortar (even the most demanding), ballast gravels in road construction for high loads and stone for
coatings in acquatic buildings or other construction works. The main services
comprise: acquisition of stone aggregates from 0 to 1000mm, deep drilling
and blasting, demolition and recycling of waste building materials.
This paper resume an exploitation works of solid mineral resources in Paka
quarry.
Keywords
Mineral Resources, Blasting, Extraction and Transportation
1. INTRODUCTION
Paka quarry is located at the foot of the slopes Pakega Kozjaka on the left bank of the river Paka and the regional
road Velenje - Slovenj Gradec. On the north side, directly on the border of quarry takes place the local road on the
Paki Kozjak. Through the ravine at the foot of the slopes, run Punikov creek in direction south north and empties into the river Paka.
Mountaineering club Velenje in 1963 began to organize the construction of a road to link mountain hut on Paki
Kozjak to regional road Velenje Slovenj Gradec. In May 1968, first 2.2 kilometer section of the road was build,
which has linked Primary School Paka with with homestead Blai. Beside the newly constructed road at k +547,
was urban craft center from Velenje began with opening of quarry Paka. At the end of 1970, Mining school Velenje
(RC) took over the management of quarry. Since 1982, the quarry Paka is owned by Rudnik lignite Velenje (RLV).
Originally quarry Paka acted as subsidiary company of Rudnik lignite Velenje. By setting up subsidiary company RGP
Ltd., which is now integral part, has been reorganized. At the time of reorganization quarry Paka is represents an
organizational unit RGP Ltd. Company.
Works on the obtaining aggregates are carried out in accordance with the standards ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and
OHSAS 18000.
Activities carried out in quarries Paka are as follows:
Acquisition of stone aggregates from 0 to 1000 mm,
710

PROCEEDINGS
Deep drilling and blasting,

Demolition,
Recycling of waste building materials.
Figure 14. Quarry Paka, entrance
2. GEOLOGY OF MINERAL RESOURCES

First analyzes have confirmed that the mineral, which consist mainly of dolomite transitions in some places
limestone dolomite, a wide range of uses.
Based on the research borehole length of 150 meters, the company ZAG (institute of Construction Slovenia), on the
basis of geological survey and visual inspection of wells, depriving composite sample for laboratory examination in
order to determine the quality of the material.
The results of the study showed that there is a gray, slightly cracked dolomite, which is at the core, dense and solid.
Cracks are partly secondary cemented with coarse calcite in the form of light gray and white veins. Based on the
samples, it was found that the texture of the rock was heterogeneous.
Dolomite has a homogenous, uniform grain structure. Dolomite grains are large, on average, up to 150 micrometers
in various parts up to 200 micrometers.
Estimated quantitative composition of the sample taken (in vol. %)
Table 3. The composition of the sample taken (vol. %)
Value (average)
Dolomite
97,00
Calcite
2,00
Quartz, clay and org. component
1,00
Table 4. The average values of sample borehole (quarry Paka)
Value (average)
Compressive strength (MPa) - water saturated condition
58,20
Compressive strength (MPa) - dry state
98,30
Abrasion (cm3/31, 35 cm2)
9,20
Density without pores and cavities (kg/m3)
2780
The average open porosity (%)
0,7
711

PROCEEDINGS
3. MINERAL EXTRACTION
Mineral extraction in a quarry Paka runs massive outpouring mining and excavation of floors in the floor assembly,
which takes place from truck transport to the receiving hoppers primary crusher at the processing plant.
Total exploitation is divided into 12 floors excavation. Floors are marked with elevation. Basic plateau is located at
the corners of +460, the highest floor on the corners +625. Overall height of excavation is 180 miters, ranges
between 15 and 20 meters.
Working banks of floor slope is between 60 and 65, final floor slope is 70.
Total amount of mineral reserves are 1,888,834 m3, with amount of mining losses up to 5%. These stocks are
considered as total stocks and were established on the base of difference between the 3D surveying tracks the
status quo in which we entered the spatial coordinates of finished floors.
The average annual production of mineral resources is approximately 127,650 m3/year.
Technology of production
Mineral extraction takes place in broad horizontal floors of the upper limit of excavation to the base plateau.
All work from drilling wells to mine blasting process itself and the subsequent transport of the mineral separation
to conduct ourselves. To this end, the quarry is equipped with its modern drilling, blasting, loading and transport
equipment.
Figure 15. Hammer - rotary drilling machine 115 BPI
For mine drilling is used hammer rotary drilling machine. Is the most widely used system for mine drilling, based
on the principle of impact piston on steel rod. Length of drilling holes are approximately 10 to 12 meters, at the
distance of 3 to 3,5 meters, depending on the material structure which we drill. The diameter of the drill is 90
millimeters.
Figure 16. Geometry mine drilling
712

PROCEEDINGS
At the shoot, we use the latest technology of initiating explosives NONEL. Non-electric NONEL initial type system
consists of the following elements:
NONEL detonators
Connectors
Terminals
Igniters,
Low energy detonating cord (if necessary).
Figure 17. Nonel detonator and an interface connector 1
Figure 18. Nonel detonator and an interface connector 2
Non-electric system NONEL used for safety, environmental and technological benefits. This initiating system has
been developed primarily because of the inadequacy electric mode kindling in the construction of underground
facilities in urban areas (tunnels, subway), where there are intensive stray currents. The system is completely
insensitive to those Stray streams, as well as other sources of power, which can cause premature ignition minefield
(electrical power lines, storm ...). The NONEL detonators can accurately determine the firing order mine loads and
thus minimize the negative effects on the environment (air shock, earthquake, throw). This system has the
advantage over other methods of initiating the minefield and to minimize noise, as for example caused by
detonating cord placed on the surface. By linking NONEL detonators could theoretically reach an unlimited number
of delay intervals between charges, which is impossible with the electric mode.
The system also allows a very important factor, namely that the selected direction of initiating in the well (from the
top, from the bottom or from the center), thereby achieving the planned technological and safety effects. Exploit
this advantage especially in mass mining.
In combination with the system NONEL also use the cord (C-12), particularly in wells that have a lower resistance,
which may lead to failure in filling.
Type and amount of explosives was used in demining depends primarily on the properties of minerals and the
desired grain size that we want to achieve.
We mainly use powder explosives AMONAL, ANFEX explosives (a mixture of ammonium nitrate in respect of
granular and liquid and solid fuels) and plastic explosives ECODANUBIT.
Blasting is carried out once or twice a week, depending on the needs of the material, depending on the length of
the mine wells.
Table 5. Technical characteristics of explosives
Manufacturer
Type
of explosives
Diameter
of the patron
Weight
of patron
Length
of the patron
AMONAL
KIK Kamnik d.o.o
Powder
60,00
1500,00
500,00
ANFEX
KIK Kamnik d.o.o
Granulated
70,00
1500,00
480,00
ECODANUBIT
ISTORCHEM Explosives
Plastic
60,00
2000,00
470,00
713

PROCEEDINGS
Annual quarry Paka spend approx. 25,000 kg of explosives, 200 pieces MSED (millisecond electric detonators), 3000
meters of detonating cord, 100 pcs connecting connectors and 1500 NONEL detonators.
Approximately 1,500 holes drilled in other words, approx. 10000 meters per year.
In demining, there are also adverse effects on the environment. These effects are particularly vibration, noise and
dust. These negative effects of the blasting is eliminated mainly through the use of NONEL in demining, as well as
with the correct geometry of the mine drilling wells.
After every blasting we make seismic surveys measurements. Before blasting at a predetermined location puts
seismograph BlastMate mark III. It represents the most advanced control technology of seismic waves. Events
(ground vibrations and air shock) recorded by the probe microphone and it is very easy to use. Enables various
settings and can be programmed to control a variety of events in accordance with our wishes.
Figure 19. Seismograph BlastMate III
Transport of mineral raw materials to the manufacturing plant

Transportation of minerals to the processing plant is carried out by one or several times outpouring from the higher
parts of the quarry to quarry at the lowest part of slides. Apply two conveyor slides, after the first slide conveyor
transported material from the angles of +625 to collecting area at angles of +550. Another slide has similar dimensions as first one, it serves us to transport material from the angles of +550 to +480 angles. The collecting area of
another slide runs transport minerals to the processing plant using front loader. To transport the mineral to the
processing plant is also used dumper. Dumper enables transported to a processing plant to a specific type of material, which in transport by slides is not possible (there is a mixing of materials).
4. CONCLUSION
The process of extraction and processing of mineral raw materials in the quarry Paka trough the implementation of
mining operations to ensure safe, rational and environmentally friendly as possible exploitation on mineral resources. Mineral extraction takes place on the upper floors excavation limits to the basic plateau on broad horizontal excavation floors. By using state of art drilling and excavation machinery and explosives and initiations of appropriate resources NONEL, provide minimal negative effects on humans and environment.
REFERENCES
[1]
porin Jurij: Rudarski projekt za pridobitev koncesije za izkorianje tehninega kamna dolomita in apnenca v kamnolomu Paka,
Projekt t.: 005/2011, oktober 2011
[2]
Makovek Bogdan: Miniranje v rudarstvu in gradbenitvu, olski center Velenje, ubenik, Ministrstvo za olstvo in port Republike
Slovenije, Velenje 2008
[3]
Poroilo Zavod za gradbenitvo Slovenije (ZAG), poro. t. P 485/07-420-1-int. K 92/07
[4]
Interna navodila t. 018-RGP za izvajanje meritev s seizmografom Blastmate III
714

PROCEEDINGS
HIGH UNDERGROUND COAL PRODUCTION, BY MEANS

OF POWERFUL AND HIGH PERFORMANCE SHEARER LOADERS
ABSTRACT
Wolfgang SCHROTH
Eickhoff Bergbautechnik GmbH,

Bochum, Germany
wschroth@eickhoff-bochum.de
The recent decades brought a huge boost in the development of the Shearer
Loaders, which resulted in a high level of production and therefore an improvement in productivity. Furthermore, the safety of this particular working
area has been increased as well.
The following paper will deliver an update on the increase of coal production
output with the example of Shearer Loaders while the important high developed further Longwall Machinery that forms the other part of a Longwall
system is not in the focus of this consideration.
Nowadays production outputs of 10 Mt per year out of one Longwall unit are
not very seldom.
1. INTRODUCTION
Coal is one of the major recourses for the huge increasing demand of energy. Global consumption of commercial
energy totaled 18 billion tons of coal equivalent (Gtce = Giga tone coal equivalent) in 2010. Coal, with a 28% share,
ranked second after oil as one of the major sources of primary energy. World coal production reached 7.2 billion
tons in 2010: 6.2 billion tons of hard coal and 1.0 billion tones of lignite. In turn, the production of hard coal comprised 5.3 billion tons of steam coal and 0.9 billon tons of coking coal.
Over the last decade, from 2000 to 2010, coal use has grown more strongly than any other primary energy source (+
28%) while the trends in coal use differ by region. In OECD countries, coal consumption remained stable over the
last decade; in the EU, there was a 14 % drop. In contrast, coal demand in developing countries increased dramatically. Growth in non-OECD countries amounted to 1.7 Gtce over the decade; a 94 % increase.1
There is no doubt; all published statistics and figures are showing that the world coal production until 2035 will stay
on a similar level.2 Only the coal producing countries have some different production rates in their prognosis rates.
The OECD countries will decrease and the Non-OECD countries will increase their production of coal.
Very often, the coal layers are too deep that a production with the open cast method will not be economical
enough. The producers of open cast mines are forced to decide whether to change from open pit mining to underground mining methods as the ratio between the overburden und the coal layer is just to too big. This so called
Punch Longwall, has the advantage that the coal seam is already open and known. A lot of investment can be
saved because it not requires to sink a new shaft or a main hauling drift. The entire logistics are easier to handle
and the investor is already close to the coal.
Those Pictures are only for explanation.
http://www.euracoal.org/pages/layout1sp.php?idpage=427
Quelle: IEA WEO 2011 1 Durchschnittswerte der jhrlichen Wachstumsrate, Jahresbericht 2012 Verein der Kohlenimporteure
http://www.uow.edu.au/eng/longwall/html/punch.html, University of Wollongong Australia
http://www.uow.edu.au/eng/longwall/html/punch.html, University of Wollongong Australia
715

PROCEEDINGS
The following description shall give an idea that underground production is also effective if the scheduled production output meets the calculated investment.
2. UNDERGROUND COAL PRODUCTION

There are basically two favourable mechanised systems; the Room and Pillar and the Longwall mining method.
1. The Room and Pillar mining is done by a Continuous Miner and some other backup transport systems with a limited output but also on the other hand a relatively lower initial investment. A big portion of coal remains standing
as pillars. The roof condition must be suitable and is mostly roof bolted.
2. The longwall mining method needs a higher investment but on the other hand the output is even higher and the
excavation factor is much higher as well.
Plough systems, needs homogenous coal seams, undisturbed and suitable for thin seam thicknesses. The
plough slaps the coal in a series of slices. Thickness of the slices are round 15-20 cm and the height is around
1.8 m.
3. Shearer loader systems can cut the coal in a variety of different ways:
Cutting the coal along the coal front in slices between 1,6 to 7,0 m. The cutting web differs between 800mm
and 1000mm, This cutting range can be achieved in one horizon cut by a double ended ranging drum shearer
loader so called DERDS.
Sub-level systems. In some mines a big portion of coal comes out by a so called sub-level caving. The shearer
loader cuts the coal front only and the rest of coal flows out over the rear shield on the second AFC. Those
systems need a special rear shield. Another concept is a special window opening in the rear shield and chute
guides the coal in the main AFC.
A further concept so called Velenje method5 is a very successfully running system which is already producing coal for decades in Premogovnik Velenje, Slovenia.
All these different concepts are dependin g on the geological conditions therefore each mine has several challenges for selecting the right one.
The continuously increased demand for coal promoted coal mines to increased production. Coal mines have become independent enterprises, assuming sole responsibility for profits and losses.6
During the recent decades, the Longwall technology has found a dramatical improvement in regards to the capability of the equipment involved. Not only higher installed power, bigger dimensions and weights also the automation,
data transmission, data monitoring and safety aspects have been improved in such modern longwalls.
The figure below shows a cutaway diagram of a typical longwall mine. The longwall face is indicated by the number
8 in the diagram.7
Developed and owned by Premogovnik Velenje Slovenia.
Presentation on Retrospective Assessment of Indian Longwall Mining, by V:N:S: Prasad.M. UM (SCCL India)
Mine Subsidence Engineering Consultants Level 1 / 228 Victoria Avenue Chatswood NSW 2067
http://www.minesubsidence.com/index_files/files/Intro_Longwall_Mining_and_Subs.pdf.
716

PROCEEDINGS
3. SHEARER LOADER
The development of coal cutter started when Eickhoff manufactured the first coal cutter on the European continent in 1914.
The Coal Cutter Type S25 made by Eickhoff Maschinenfabrik 1914. Power 15 kW worked in Colliery Recklinghausen
II in Germany.8
After some improvement steps, the first shearer loader with inboard drums was installed in 1961. The installed
power of this EDW 130 L was almost over 9 times higher. The production output was approximately 1500 t per day.9
10
Eickhoff first double ending ranging drum shearer EDW 130-L, hydraulically driven.
The development did not interrupt and further important steps followed in 1976, when the first all electrical shearer in the world with an installed power of 325 kW was introduced. Radio control, data transmission, Microprocessor
controlled, frameless shearer SL 300 with tie rod system, AC controlled winches and many improvements were integrated in the shearer loader system. Nowadays all shearers are driven by AC motors frequency controlled and
more capable IPC systems. The installed power can be up to 2,5 MW at a Voltage of 3.300 VAC.
11
First 7m Shearer loader delivered in 2009. SL1000 produced and developed by Eickhoff for a Chinese costumer.
Picture belongs to Eickhoff Bergbautechnik
Production figures from that time are unfortunately not available. Most probably 3 shifts production.
10
11
717

PROCEEDINGS
4. AVAILABILITY OF A LONGWALL SYSTEM

The total output of a production unit called Longwall depends on the different involved machinery. To get a total
figure about the availability of such unit, the calculation is still difficult. The basic understanding is the production
time (up time). The up time multiplied by the production per time unit is the production output. This is not comparable with the availability of a production unit. The availability can be 100 % and the output is still zero.
This is the case on vacation days for instance. Many tender specifications fix the availability figure as a value in percentage, but the meaning behind is the production output itself. That is a misunderstanding und therefore not
clear. A supplier for an involved machinery will never give a production guarantee, he can give an availability guarantee if all the required maintenance done by the operating company. Each single supplier gives a relative high
percentage for his machine but in total the percentage of a entire longwall is smaller. For example availability of
AFC 95%, Roof support 95%, Shearer 95% and supply of water, ventilation, electricity 85% and further results in a
total factor of 72% availability. General it is said that a longwall system has factor between 50 and 65%, a figure
that has shown to be a good estimate in production sites worldwide.
5. PRODUCTION OUTPUT CALCULATED ON AN EXAMPLE OF A SHEARER LOADER

The calculation of the production output of a shearer is based on the face data and the cutting conditions. Those
figures given by the coal producing company are mostly not 100% exact. The reality gives often a different picture in some cases better than calculated and in few cases worse. But nevertheless mining worldwide based on special
circumstances and the user needs those figures to go forward in this project.
The calculation is based on the face data, the shearer data, the planned mining cycles and as well the availability of
the system.
The following explanation gives a view because of the cutting cycle. Cutting into a new web begins from the face
end. 5 passes are shown below only to give an idea what it means.
718

PROCEEDINGS
Picture below: Double ended ranging drum shearer loader in an underground coal face
12
Data given as a sample

Face data:
Shearer data
Face length:
200 m
Nominal Cutting Power
2 x 300 kW
Seam height:
2.4 m
Haulage power
2 x 80 kW
Inclination max:
10,0
Machine weight
48 t
Coal density:
1.35 t/m
Friction value
0.33
Specific cutting energy
0.3 kWh/m
Drum diameter
1500 mm
Volume coefficient
1.5 loose/solid
Cutting web
800 mm
Max Haulage force
558 kN
Max haulage Speed
37.1 m/min
Voltage
3.3 kV
The process cycle capacity per shear is 1.200t/h. That means in one shift of 8 hours a total production of 9.600
tones can be achieved. This is of course a theoretical value based on the capability of this shearer loader SL 300 as
a sample.
6. HIGH PRODUCTION UP TO DATE

During the last 10 years also the production outputs of shearer loader have been increased dramatically. That is the
result of the constant development of shearer loaders in more and more power as well in quality of the manufactured components. The calculation is before based on a smaller type of shearer. In the nineties the biggest machine
had 1.200 kW nowadays 2.5 MW installed power are common. Even the cutting height has been increased of up to 7
m. This development concerns not only the shearer also the AFC, the powered roof supports and many others are in
this game, because the entire Machinery has to fit to each other.
12
Picture courtesy of Eickhoff Bergbautechnik
719

PROCEEDINGS
The stress on the machinery is tremendous therefore the maintenance is a much more important factor than in the
past. The cycle duration between the brush ups or major maintenances is not based on the time this is based now
more or less on the output capacity. A portion of wear and spare parts should be at site to reduce the down time
and that keeps the shearer available. First brush up after 10 million tones for instance is almost standard. And that
production will be achieved in 10 months only.14 A lifetime of approximately 10 to 12 years of a shearer brings a
total production of around 100 Million tones of coal. That figure brings a good benefit to the coal producer.
The recent success has shown that the coal production underground has its solid standing regarding the production
figures as well as the profit for the coal producer. Also the idea to start an underground coal production from an
existing open cast mine is an alternative to reduce the cost for the further coal production.
The author is member of international sales department of the Eickhoff Bergbautechnik GmbH in Bochum in Germany.
This paper based on the experiences of the author and is an extract only.
There is no demand to claim the completeness of the paper.
720

PROCEEDINGS
CONSTRUCTION OF HORIZONTAL MINING

FACILITIES THROUGH SCHIST`S MASSIVE
ABSTRACT
This paper presents cost analysis for horizontal mining facilities
through schists massive. Two variables, headings cross section
and rock-quality designation (RQD) were considered. Based on a
real data analyses we were able to define two parameters functional relation between costs and cross-section. Examples and
clasifications are elaborated in details.
Nikolinka DONEVA
Marija HADZI-NIKOLOVA
Dejan MIRAKOVSKI
Stojane MIJALKOVSKI
University Goce Delev, Faculty of Natural and Technical Sciences, Mining Institute, tip, R. Macedonia
eywords
Cross-section, Scientific research, Rocks
1. INTRODUCTION
Mining practice were found that within the same type of rock material exist zones with different structural
features, such is the schist. Various features create different stability of rock material during different operations,
such as the exploitation and the construction of underground facilities.
The determination of structural features means assessment of all weakening and damage planes, given that cracks
and their sets have significant impact on the physical, mechanical, technological, hydrological properties and
deformability of the rock mass.
The impact of jointed underground facilities on its stability, depends of the orientation on jointed planes in terms
of the excavation direction, the cross-sectional size, the degree of rock material separateness with cracks and
cracks sets and stability of each block adjacent to the underground facilities.
Most disadvantaged case in terms of underground facilities contours stability is that the direction of the cracks and
cracks sets is parallel to the advancement of underground facilities direction [1]. While the blocks instability around
underground facilities is proportional to the mining facilities cross-section.
2. ANALYSIS OF THE HORIZONTAL MINING FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION

As already discussed, in this paper horizontal mining facilities constriction with different cross-section, in schists
massive with varying degrees of jointed is analyzed.
Table 1 shown physical and mechanical properties obtained by laboratory tests that are required for this survey as
follows: bulk density [MN/m3], uniaxial compressive strength c [MPa], tensile strength t [MPa], cohesion C [MPa],
angle of internal friction [], Poisson`s coefficient and modul of elasticity E [MPa].
Table 1. Physical and mechanical properties of the anticipated rocks type
DESCRIPTION
[MN/m3]
c
[MPa]
t
[MPa]
C
[MPa]
[ ]
E
[MPa]
schist
0,0270
98
6,10
14,00
32,0
0,120
32000
Three sizes of the mining facility cross-section and three degrees of jointed in schists massive is anticipated (Table
2).
721

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2. Variants of horizontal mining facilities in model
Rock
type
schist
Uniax. compr.
strength of intact
rock c[MPa]
98
Spacing of
joints l [m]
Number of
joints per 1m
Jn[br./m]
Factor
of joints
Jf
Uniax. compr.
strength of rock
mass cm[MPa]
0,40
2,50
80,07
52
0,30
3,33
0,25
4,00
106,75
128,11
42
35
Anticipated
cross-section
[m2]
Tag in
model
10,10
13,73
16,68
10,10
B1
13,73
B2
16,68
B3
10,10
C1
13,73
C2
16,68
C3
To obtain data that can be compared, other influential parameters in the mining construction system is needed to
be the same in all mining facilities [3].
Construction system includes these fixed parameters:
cross-sectional shape of the mining facilities horse shoe shaped;
the average depth of the same route - 500 m;
usage of the mining facility - a relatively long;
mechanization level of the production process - relatively equally;
method for excavation the mining facilities drilling and blasting operations;
capability of working personnel - relatively well trained;
one shift duration and number of shifts per day - in the calculations 6 effective hours per shift and 3 shifts
per day were applied.
3. PARAMETERS OF INDIVIDUAL WORKING OPERATIONS

In all variants, holes with diameter of 45 mm, except central, with a diameter of 64 mm were applied.
Prismatic cut type with empty central hole were applied. Explosive AMONEKS-3, produced by "Trayal" Corporation
of Krusevac, Serbia were used for blasting. Cartridge with diameter of 38 mm are used for auxiliary and cut holes,
while cartridge with diameter of 28 mm are used for flanking blast holes. Calculations for required drilling and
blasting parameters are performed by the same formulas and reviewed by experienced data (for all working
operations) for all variants.
After drilling and blasting, a break of 30 minutes follows (adopted time for all variants) when compression LVS are
used for released of the workplace from dust and noxious gases from blasting.
At the loading and transportation as input data the quantity of material from one blasting are used.
Elastic support will be apply (sprayed concrete + steel mech + bolts + steel ribs) [2]. The share of individual support
elements depends of calculations for required support loads, bearing in mind rock type features.
4. COSTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF 1 M HORIZONTAL MINING FACILITIES

Based on established parameters, individual prices for operating supplies, purchase prices of mechanization and
the cost of wages, in all variants of horizontal mining facility, costs of individual working operations are determined
(Table 3).
The cost analysis, given in Table 3 for individual working operations shows that the supporting has greatest
percentage in the total construction costs and it ranges from 54 to 55.6%, at the very strength rock type, variant A
and from 57.7 to 58. 4% in the highly broken rock mass, variant C. The percentage increase because in the poor
rock, this working operation requirements are larger. Within the rock mass by the same degree of jointed, the costs
are increase with the cross section increase, so the costs of supporting at the largest cross-section "3" are 22%
higher than the same smallest cross-section "1".
722

PROCEEDINGS
Next in percentage share of total costs are drilling and blasting costs. In the most compact rock type they range
from 17.2 to 17.7% of total costs, to reduce at the heavily jointed environment from 15,5 to 16%. Within the rock
type with the same degree of jointed, costs of drilling and blasting grow up with the room profile growth, so at the
largest profile drilling and blasting costs are larger about 17% than that of the lowest profile.
Loading and transportation costs have roughly the same percentage of the total costs as costs of drilling and blasting.
Ventilation costs grow up with the facilities profile growth and in total construction costs accounted of 3% at the
smallest profile, and 5.7% for the largest one.
Given the foregoing it can be concluded that at the schists massive, supporting costs present the biggest costs,
about 56% of total costs of 1m' horizontal mining facilities constructed.
Table 3. Total construction costs of 1 m horizontal mining facilities
Variants
Ord.num.
Construction costs [/m]
Drilling and blasting costs
Ventilation costs
Loading and
transport. costs
Supporting costs
Sub-variants
Sub-variants
Sub-variants
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
C1
C2
C3
Costs for materials and energy
80,05
84,69
89,63
78,86
82,05
87,95
76,76
80,14
85,47
Costs for wages
26,17
27,65
32,52
26,17
27,65
32,52
26,17
27,65
32,52
Costs for
maintenance
0,44
0,54
0,62
0,44
0,54
0,62
0,44
0,54
0,62
Cost for amortization
8,76
10,73
12,34
8,76
10,73
12,34
8,76
10,73
12,34
Costs for insurance
0,09
0,11
0,12
0,09
0,11
0,12
0,09
0,11
0,12
Equipment
costs
Total
115,57
123,71
135,23
114,32
121,08
133,55
112,22
119,16
131,06
18,91
24,52
41,25
19,09
24,71
41,66
19,44
25,10
42,49
Costs for wages
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,00
Costs for
maintenance
0,08
0,09
0,17
0,08
0,09
0,18
0,09
0,09
0,18
1,62
1,71
3,47
1,65
1,74
3,54
1,71
1,80
3,68
Costs for insurance
0,02
0,02
0,03
0,02
0,02
0,04
0,02
0,02
0,04
Equipment
costs
Total
20,63
26,33
44,93
20,84
26,56
45,41
21,26
27,01
46,40
77,24
77,24
77,24
77,24
77,24
77,24
77,24
77,24
77,24
Costs for wages
13,72
14,37
10,55
13,72
14,37
10,55
13,72
14,37
10,55
Costs for
maintenance
0,44
0,61
0,53
0,44
0,61
0,53
0,44
0,61
0,53
8,85
12,27
10,53
8,85
12,27
10,53
8,85
12,27
10,53
Costs for insurance
0,09
0,12
0,11
0,09
0,12
0,11
0,09
0,12
0,11
Equipment
costs
Total
100,33
104,62
98,96
100,33
104,62
98,96
100,33
104,62
98,96
240,74
276,11
304,40
251,06
288,04
317,57
275,00
315,71
348,13
Costs for wages
94,35
99,53
103,53
97,26
102,64
106,81
102,90
108,89
113,52
Costs for
maintenance
1,06
1,20
1,31
1,10
1,25
1,36
1,22
1,39
1,51
21,20
24,00
26,16
22,04
24,97
27,24
24,42
27,72
30,27
Equipment
costs
Costs for insurance
0,21
0,24
0,26
0,22
0,25
0,27
0,24
0,28
0,30
Total
357,57
401,08
435,67
371,68
417,15
453,26
403,79
453,98
493,74
594,09
655,73
714,78
607,18
669,41
731,18
637,60
704,78
770,16
Costs of auxiliary work operations
57,65
63,58
68,50
59,03
65,01
70,24
62,33
68,90
74,49
Total construction costs of 1 m

horizontal mining facilities in rock type schist
651,74
719,31
783,27
666,21
734,42
801,42
699,93
773,68
844,64
Total costs for the main work operations

5
723

PROCEEDINGS
5. FUNCTIONAL DEPENDENCY
Based on the calculated construstion cost of horizontal mining facilities, using a computer program OM Explorer,
upgrade on the Excel program, a functional dependence at the construction costs from the rock type and the profile size are established in the following form:
z=c+ax+by
(1)
Where as:
x uniaxial compressive strength of rock mass [MPa];
y profile size of facility [m2],
are independent variables,
while
z construction cost of horizontal mining facility [/m],
is dependent variable
c constant;
a, b constants before independent variables.
Following values of coefficients are obtained:
c = 594,346
a = - 3,103
b = 20,789
594,346
3,103
20,789
(2)
This functional dependence is graphically presents on Figure 1.
Figure 1. Functional dependence of the construction costs of horizontal mining facilities

depending from the rock type and profile size in the schist`s massive
From Table 3 and Figure 1 can be observed that for same-cross section size, with an increase of schist`s massive
uniaxial compressive strength, construction costs are reduce. The percentage of reduction between the weakest
and strongest schist`s massive at all profiles given in the table ranges from 14.4 to 17.8%. While at the schist`s massive with the same strength, costs rising with the profile growth among the smallest and largest profile, the percentage of increase ranges from 23.8 to 29% [3].
724

PROCEEDINGS
6. CONCLUSION
From scientific research results can be concluded that different structural features at the same rock material type,
as different profile size, leads to differences in the construction costs of 1 m' horizontal mining facilities.
Therefore, during construction of mining facilities is necessary to choose optimal route and optimal cross-section
size, which means if exploitative conditions allow, the route is going through stronger rock type, and the crosssection size to match on the mine capacity.
Any deviation in terms of these two crucial factors leads to unnecessarily increase of construction costs.
REFERENCES
[1]
Brady B., Brown E.T., Rock mechanics for underground mining, University of Western Australia, Queensland, Australia, e-book.
[2]
., ., .:
. II : 08, , . , 2008.
[3]
.,
, , ,
2011.
725

PROCEEDINGS
NEW UNDERGROUND COAL MINE MARIOVO
ABSTRACT
The energy requirements of primary energy in everyday life of
todays world are climbing up by steep trend line. It is the tax we
pay to live normal life in a world where everything is dependent
and rely on some sort of energy source, and on every step of the
way there are more and more consumers of energy. In order to
meet the requirements of this tendency of increased energy requirements, especially of electrical energy, opening new capacities for generating the most needed energy is a must.
In Macedonia, it is well known fact that the production of electric
energy, in percentage approximately 80% comes from incineration of the coal within the thermal power plants from the mines
in active exploitation, which are coming to an end of their coal
resources.
As a solution to this problem comes into view the opening of new
coal mines. One such a solution is offered by opening the underground coal mine Mariovo, in the region of Mariovo, some 40
km southeast of Prilep, which is planned with annual capacity of
2.000.000 t of coal, and life cycle of approximately 33 years (30
years of active exploitation).
Pece MURTANOVSKI1, grad. min. eng.

m-r Bojan LAJLAR2 grad. min. eng.
m-r Janez MAYER2, grad. min. eng.
pegel BOO2, grad.min.eng.
Marijan LENART2 grad. min. Eng
JSC ELEM Skopje, R. Macedonia,

pece.murtanovski@elem.com.mk
2
Premogovnik Velenje DD, Velenje, R. Slovenia
Keywords
Coal, Mine, Velenje Method for Excavation
1. INTRODUCTION
The opening of the underground coal mine Mariovo will be carried out with adits which are going to be connected
with permanent pit facilities - facilities for opening (main transport roadways, main roadways for haulage/export of
the coal, drainage roadways etc.).
It is envisioned firstly to open underground pit-East, then the pit-Middle and at the end, pit-West. During the excavation of the first pit, it is planned to simultaneously prepare for mining the second pit. During the excavation of
the second pit, the miners will prepare the third pit (Figure 1). The method used for exploitation of coal in Mariovo
is the modified Velenje Mining Method, which belongs in the larger group of longwall mining methods for coal exploitation.
726

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Scheme of the mining area divided into pit-East, pit-Middle and pit-West
Source: Main mining design for opening, preparation and coal exploitation
with underground mining technology in the Mariovo coal mine, Macedonia
2. MAIN FACILITIES FOR OPENING THE UNDERGROUND MINE MARIOVO

The facilities for opening (permanent pit facilities) of the separate pits will be constructed in the solid rock area
adjacent to the coal seams (outside the seam of coal).
In areas where conditions will allow, the facilities will be prepared with mechanization by using machines for advancement (roadheaders), while in the harder parts (in the solid rocks) blasting will be used. They will be supported
with steel bow retaining system, wired mesh, anchors and if needed - with injected concrete (Figure 2).
The main transport, ventilation and export facilities of the pit (the main roadways) will have a bright cross section
of 14 m2, while the drainage roadways will have 12 m2.
Figire 2. Example of construction on the permanent pit facilities
727

PROCEEDINGS
3. PREPARATION FACILITIES FOR THE EXCAVATION FIELDS (COAL PANELS)

For the preparation of every panel, firstly it shall be prepared the level roadways (which are connected with the
permanent pit facilities), and the assembly chamber (level facilities). All level roadways and assembly chambers will
be made within the coal seam. Their construction will be made by using mechanized machines for advancing, while
blasting is to be used only when making junctions, and eventually throughout the crushed zones. As a roof support,
steel bow retaining system and wooden timbering will be used (Figure 3). These underground facilities will have a
bright cross section of 17 m2.
Figure 3. Preparation of level roadways and supporting with steel beams
4. SPECIFICATIONS OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES AND BASIC TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF MINING

For the opening of the three pits, it will be necessary to develop permanent pit facilities in length of 25.765 m (main
transport roadways, main roadways for coal haulage and drainage) and 95.739 m level roadways (roadways for delivery and export, assembly chambers).
Table 2. Specifications of underground facilities at Mariovo coal mine
Permanent pit facilities
Level roadways
Pit
Transport
roadways
Haulage
roadways
Drainage roadways
Roadways for delivery and export
Assembly chambers
East
3.417
4.057
1.687
32.695
3.060
Middle
2.541
3.315
2.227
32.404
2.160
West
3.291
3.867
1.363
22.900
2.520
Total:
9.249 m
11.239 m
5.277 m
87.999 m
7.740 m
Source: Main mining design for opening, preparation and coal exploitation with underground mining technology in the Mariovo coal mine, Macedonia
Width of the coal panel

Length of the coal panel
Height of excavation(coal seam thickness)
Step of advancing (at the coal face)
Daily production (from 1 coal face)
Total losses
180 m
308 1385 m
3,5 9,6 m
1,9 m/day to 4,8 m/day
4.000 t/day
4%
728

PROCEEDINGS
Table 3. Basic technical parameters of the Mariovo coal mine
Pit
Number of coal panels
Coal production [t]
East
18
19.124.655
Middle
12
25.252.680
West
14
16.882.665
Total:
44
61.260.000
Source: Main mining design for opening, preparation and coal exploitation with underground mining technology in the Mariovo coal mine,
Macedonia
Figure 4. Basic layout of the production equipment (shearer) and the hydraulic roof supports at the coal face
In order to meet the requirements given in the TOR by the Investor, and to yield the targeted annual production of
approximately 2.000.000 t of coal, the following terms will be fulfilled:
Two coal faces will be productive simultaneously, while another two will be in preparation and development
Three sets of production equipment will be available at all time
Every month will have on average 21 working days with 3 shifts per day
The daily coal production will be around 8000 t per day (from two separate coal faces)
Average daily advancing on the development works during construction of the opening facilities will be 2.0
m/day, and during construction of drainage tunnel is 4.0 m/day
Average daily advancing on the development during construction of the level facilities will be 4.5 m/day
To carry out the opening and development scope of works, for the first three years it is necessary to provide
five development work faces, while until the opening of the pit West six preparatory work faces shall be required (and after the pit West is open, only four development work faces shall be needed)
5. CONCLUSION
Based on the previous experience of the mine planners and analysis during the mine planning, it was decided to go
with 180 m as the most optimal width of the coal panels in the coal mine Mariovo, as it also fits the needs of the
electro-mechanical equipment in the best manner. The height of excavation at the coal face depends from the
height between the horizontal levels and from the predicted electro-mechanical equipment for excavation and roof
support. Here that height is planned at 4 m.
729

PROCEEDINGS
With all of previously mentioned technical parameters, and with 8.000 t of coal per day, it is real to expect
2.000.000 t of coal annually, thus providing a life cycle of over 30 years of active exploitation in the underground
coal mine Mariovo (based on 61.260.000 t of coal as proven certificated exploitation reserves out of 96.000.000
geological reserves).
This coal is planned to be incinerated in the new TPP unit of approximately 300 MWel installed power, but that is
subject of further detailed studies and planning, which are undergoing at the moment.
REFERENCES
[1]
Main mining design for opening, preparation and coal exploitation with underground mining technology in the Mariovo coal
mine, Macedonia; Premogovnik Velenje d.d. Slovenia 2012
[2]
SME Mining Engineering Handbook, 2nd Edition, Volume 1&2; Howard L. Hartman
730

PROCEEDINGS
MINING BASIN KOLUBARA - A VARIANT

OF THE OPENING OF THE NEW OPEN PIT MINE
ABSTRACT
Zoran ILIC1
Rajko STOJAKOVIC2
Zvonko BELACEVIC3
Mining Basin Kolubara, Lazarevac,

Serbia
1
zoran.ilic@rbkolubara.rs
2
rajko.stojakovic@rbkolubara.rs
3
zvonko.belacevic@rbkolubara.rs
Opening and building up of the new coal mines, construction of the new
thermo blocks is a big investment project and represents an imperative and
turn over in the development of Electric power industry of Serbia.The condition for the maintenance of the present level of coal production and capacity enlargement of the new thermo blocks is opening and building up open
cast mines Veliki Crljeni, Field E, South Field and Radljevo.
The future open cast mines will have considerably bigger and more complex
problems for opening and building up in comparison to all the other open pit
mines which have been opened in Kolubara open mines up to now. First of
all, bed separation of coal seams series, great depth of occurrence, significant hydro geologic ground water,with the important infrastructure object
which occupy the area, are the only basic parameters which show the real
problems of new open pit mines. Open pit mine South Field itself with all the
problems it comprises, is the biggest challenge for the designers and the
executors of work.
The limitation of open pit mine South Field has been carried out based on
the consideration of the complete coal layer ( geological fields E, F, G, opi,
Veliki Crljeni and Tamnava East Field ), and also based on the position of the
important infrastructure objects and coal quantities required for the supplying of electric power plant.
By analyzing of the front development on the overburden and coal, as well as
stockpile capacity for waste in two variants of vertical division, it has been is
decided to excavate only overlaying and coal groundmass, while the substratum is not going to be dug out. The main reason for defining of the open pit
boundary depth in such a way is the lack of stockpile capacity for overburden
dumping.
Keywords
The Limitation Of Open Pit, Optimum Variant
The choice of the concept for the opening of the OPM depends on the geomorphological features of the deposit,
morphological features of the terrain, waterway position, as well as on the position of the important infrastructural
facilities.
Perceiving the geomorphological features of the coal deposit (geological fields G and F), it is logical to conclude
that the most favorable opening of the new open pit mine South Field is from South towards North. Namely, the
coal series rises and thins out toward South, so that with the development of the operations, from South to North
in the early days of the operation, the minimum ratio of the overburden is achieved, and along with the favorable
angle of the fault-furrow opening the third floor seam is also seized. However, looking at the othercircumstances,
this concept has no advantages. Bearing in mind the chosen mine construction, the position of the rivers Pestan,
Lukavica and Kolubara, the amount of the overburden, interburden and coal, possible external dump sites, possible
directions for the road transport of the overburden and coal, the opening of the mine from South to North could
cause the irrational engineering solutions for the transport of the overburden and coal. In addition to the possible
landfill, the disadvantage of this variant is also the position of the rivers Pestan, Lukavica and Kolubara, which
should be immediately relocated to the final locations. (Picture no. 1).
731

PROCEEDINGS
Picture No. 1. Limitation of open pit mine
Picture No. 2. Characteristically geological vertical cross-section
As the optimum variant of the opening of the new OPM, the version of opening on the north side was chosen. Width
of the inner opening fault-furrow is extremely important for creating the possibilities for all the systems to reach
their operating levels i.e. that through the ramps, made by the fault-furrow, achieve the necessary level.
Because of the extreme sliding of the coal-bearing series in this part, taking into account the technological possibilities of the selected equipment, with the fault slope of 10%, the regular fault-furrow width of 790 m has been defined. The fault-furrow expands towards the West; all the systems respectively excavate the bent coal in the northern final pit slope and thus, this ensures the stability of the slopes.
The defined parameters of the fault-furrow opening and chosen concept of opening and development of the mine
imply that the river Kolubara should be relocated to the final position (third phase), as well as the river Pestan and
Lukavica and all the other infrastructure facilities within the open pit mine.
In this paper, a variant of making an internal fault-furrowopening is elaborated, when the river Kolubara is displaced
in the so-called second phase (Picture no. 3). Total length of the relocated riverbed of Kolubara in the second phase
is 2,578 m, out of which 1,800m is within the limits of the open pit Tamnava-East Field or of the inner landfills and
778 m of the unaffected ground. Also, it is necessary to perform the relocation of the part of the river Pestan trace
in length of 1,686 m. Main road M-22 has been moved to East along Belgrade-Bar railway trace, which is the main
conditionfor opening of the mine, apart from the relocation of the transmission line of 110 kV and 35 kV.
732

PROCEEDINGS
Picture No. 3. Opening fault-furrowof the open pit mine (Kolubara II phase)
Minimal distance of the opening fault-furrowfrom the edge of the upper embankment of the Kolubara Riverrelocated to the second phase is 200 m, and the same minimum distance is adopted up to relocated main road as well.
When the river Kolubara is relocated to the second phase, it would be not possible to achieve a regular width of the
fault-furrow. While developing the benches towards the South, the upper edge of the western slope of the openingfault-furrowis, in the South part, relocated towards the East, regarding the direction of the regular opening of the
mine. Creating an internal opening fault-furrow of the open pit mine starts from the profile line 23000 in the width
of 750 m.
Creation of the opening fault-furrow includes the main and the floor seam of coal which gently dips towards the
South (Picture no. 3 ). There is a sudden drop of the coal-bearing series below the profile line 21 500, while the roof
coal seam in the zone of the opening fault-furrow is developed under the profile line 21 250.
Picture 3 show the maximum improvement of the front coal works towards the South, in the case when the river
Kolubara is relocated to the second phase. With the irregular width of the fault-furrow it could be possible to activate the operation of I ETS, I ETC and II ETS system s, but it is not possible to extend further operation with the
following system. Coal-bearing series bends under the profile line 21 500, and in that zone the roof coal seam is not
developed and all system would be found in the overburden or in the floor seam and there would be an interruption
of the coal production.
Calculation for the cubic capacity for maximum progress of the three systems towards South has been performed
and shown in the following table.
733

PROCEEDINGS
Table No. 1. Cubic capacity of the opening fault-furrow
OVERBURDEN
46 376 000
( m3)
INTERBURDEN
23 365 000
( m3)
COAL
31 664 000
( m3)
INTERLAYER TAILINGS > 1 m
885 800
( m3)
INTERLAYER TAILINGS < 1 m
1 794 000
( m3)
FLOOR SEAM TAILINGS
13 824 000
( m3)
TOTAL OVERBURDEN
1+2+4+6
66 450 800
( m3)
COAL
38 000 000
(t)
Making of the inside fault-furrow of the OPM South Field opening, in the variant when the River Kolubara has
been relocated to the second phase, it is possible to excavate 38 x 106 tons of coal with the average LHV of 7500
KJ/kg.
CONCLUSION
In order to provide regular wideness of the inclined inside fault-furrow that would enable construction of the ramps
for lowering all system to the operational levels, it is necessary to relocate the River Kolubara to the so called third
phase i.e. to its final position. If the River Kolubara is not the obstacle, appropriate wideness of fault-furrows, that
enables the lowering of the construction of lowering ramps for all the systems, can be formed. Five years after the
opening of the OPM, when the River Kolubara would have been relocated to the final position, the fault furrow
would be extended from the profile line 22750 towards West.
With the necessary wideness of the opening fault-furrow, every system with the extension direction towards South,
bench conveyors are transferred further towards West up to the final slopes of the OPM. Coal production continuity is achieved by excavation of the bend coal seam located in the north-western final slope. All systems ( with exception of the first ECS ) would selectively excavate overburden and coal until the beginning of operation of the V
and II ECS is enabled at the operational levels, when sliding main coal seam is excavated.
It can be concluded that the wideness of the opening fault-furrow is extremely important for creating the possibility to lower the new systems to the lower levels. Starting width of the fault-furrow is 790 m and it is determined in
the way that it enables lowering of the II ECS system to the level 103 in the manner that minimum quantity of
overburden is excavated from the dumpsite of the OPM Tamnava East Field, located at the northern OPM border
by the fault-furrow opening.
REFERENCES
[1]
Vladimir Lepojevic: Cutting parameters and bucket wheel excavators capacity, experts elaborate, 1982.
[2]
Nemanja Popovic: Scientific facts about projection of open cast mines, 1984.
[3]
Kun Janos: Open pit exploitation of lignite, 1981.
[4]
Zoran Ilic: Selective work at the open pit mine Tamnava West, 1983.
[5]
Zoran Ilic: Cutting height influence upon the output of bucket wheel excavators engaged the open pit mines
[6]
coal basin Kolubara, 2005.
[7]
Zoran Ilic: Limitation factors of floor coal bed exploitation in South Field, 2007.
[8]
Zoran Ilic: Characteristics of open and development for the open cast mine South Field, 2008.
[9]
Zoran Ilic: Characteristics of open for the open cast mine South Field, 2009.
[10] Zoran Ilic: Selective work influence upon the output of bucket wheel excavators, 2010.
[11] Zoran Ilic: The new open pit mine in mining basin Kolubara, 2011.
[12] Zoran Ilic: The change of the exploitation coal amounts in the open pit mine Field D, 2011.
[13] Zoran Ilic: New deep open pit lignite mine with new complex problems in mining basin Kolubara, 2011.
[14] Technical documentations Open cast mines "Kolubara"
734

PROCEEDINGS
OPPORTUNITIES FOR REPAIRING THE UNLOADING

BUNKER ON SHAFT GOLEMA REKA - SASA MINE
ABSTRACT
Zoran DESPODOV1
Dejan MIRAKOVSKI1
Stojance MIJALKOVSKI1
Adjiski VANCHO1
Borce GOCEVSKI2
1

Republic of Macedonia,
zoran.despodov@ugd.edu.mk, dejan.mirakovski@ugd.edu.mk,
stojance.mijalkovski@ugd.edu.mk
2
SASA Mine, Makedonska Kamenica, Republic of Macedonia,
b.gocevski@sasa.com.mk
The paper presents a repairing strategy for the

damaged unloading bunker in the Golema Reka shaft hoisting system, including technology,
equipment materials and work organization
with special concern for workers safety. Several
possibilities are reviewed and optimal approach
is defined. Such works are of crucial importance
for proper functioning of the Sasa Mine hoisting system and could serve as example for similar operations in underground mines.
Keywords
Repairing, Unloading Bunker, Hoisting System
1. INTRODUCTION
The Sasa Mine for lead and zinc in his long exploitations has passed through different developmental stages. In its
two zones Golema Reka" (where exploitation is completed) and "Svinja Reka" are applied different modes of
transportation and hoisting, and it was usually with combined transport systems. At this point the current conception of exporting ore is through the system involving the hoist-heading shaft and its associated facilities, in zone
"Golema Reka".
To lead the operational hoisting system except the shaft repairs it was necessary for repairs and for its accompanying facilities that include bunker unloading on the horizon 950th. During the previous exploitation of this hoisting
system damage occurred on the sloping part of the bunker because of abrasive pieces of ore and on vertical - prismatic part of the bunker where there was damage to the reinforced - concrete support from the unloading ore
from trucks.
These deformations on the bunker support significantly affect its stability and preventing further exploitation in
zone "Golema Reka".
The purpose of this paper is to point out the possibilities for recovery and repairs of the unloading bunker for heading shaft "Golema Reka" and how could it effectively and safely be used to hoist the ore. In this paper a technical
solution is presented for repairing the bunker. For the development of this paper materials were used , project documentation and experience of the firm Vstavba dol Ostrava (VDO) and Banske projekty Ostrava (both of Czech
Republic), which designed and conducted the repairs for the bunker.
2. DEFINING THE CONCEPT OF REPAIRING WORK ON THE UNLOADING BUNKER

Repairing work on the unloading bunker (Fig. 1), involves two independent activities:
Repairing of the sloping floor on the bunker ring (fig. 2);
Connecting the rest of the vertical part of circular bunker with the rectangular part of unloading bunker for
belt conveyor (fig. 3).
Repair of the sloping floor of the bunker will be performed within the scope of the damaged lining on the floor of
the bunker. Assume that the damage is up to a third of the size (perimeter) of the bunker. The floor in the specified
735

PROCEEDINGS
range will be covered with steel rails welded to the console, which will be fixed by gluing anchors in the rock mass.
Open space under the tracks will be filled with concrete.
Figure 1. Vertical section and situation of unloading bunker
The technical solution for repairing the vertical part of the circular bunker will create a technological complex for
unloading the ore from the concrete ring of heading shaft, on belt conveyor on elevation 940 m. To repair the damaged parts of the bunker we propose the intact parts to be preserved and more to avail free spaces without the
need to add ore (ie embed clasp).
First you build a steel frame that will rely the preserved part of the reinforced coating of vertical circular bunker
beneath the concrete ring. The framework will also serve to form a protective layer for providing safe working
space in the concrete ring of the bunker, at elevation 955 m.
Figure 2. View of the technical solution for repairing the sloping part of the bunker
The process of repairing the bunker consists of closing the space between the existing damaged circular bunker
and rectangular unloading bunker on belt conveyor. We suggest connecting of both bunkers to be technically resolved in the width of the circular bunker towards the sloping bunker axis (direction of the ore), so the building
structures is out of the trajectory of movement ore.
736

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 3. View of the technical solution for the repairing on prismatic part of the bunker: a) top view, b) front view
We recommend that the connection of the lower rectangular bunker and vertical part of the circular bunker to be
resolved with vertical walls. The walls are tangential attached to the reinforcement of the bunker and ended up in
the plane of the walls of the lower bunker. The walls are grounded to the cerclage on levels at lower bunker (955,1
m). They are made to height of 6,2 m, from which there are placed on steel framework that supports the preserved
part of the reinforced layer on the vertical part of the circular bunker under the supporting concrete ring. The walls
of the lower bunker in the space limited by tangential walls of circular bunker are constructing to a height of 3 m
above the existing floor. From level of +3 m, space of the bunker closes with slanting wall connected to a steel
frame that supports the preserved part of the reinforced layer on the vertical part of the circular bunker. The sloping wall is attached on a steel girder, placed perpendicular to the axis of the sloping part of the circular bunker.
3. SPECIFICATION OF THE REQUIRED MATERIALS

To perform the repairing work for the unloading bunker is necessary to supply the following materials:
repairs of the sloping floor of the bunker:
glued anchors L = 1,5 m, 90 pieces
console 5800x200x20, 14 pieces
console 5800x400x20, 2 pieces
steel rod 7500x150x20, 6 pieces
steel rod 7500x50x30, 6 pieces
rail S49 l = 7500mm, 60 pieces
concrete C25/30 (B30) 15 m3
protected floor
embed carriers
UPN300, l = 4500 mm, 2 pieces
timber 3700x100x100 mm, 26 pieces
concrete C25/30 (B30) 0,3 m3
737
carriers of foundation
embed carriers
IPN300, l = 3900 mm, 2 pieces
IPN300, l = 4300 mm, 2 pieces
concrete C25/30 (B30) 0,3 m3
demolition of existing structures
concrete-reinforced structure 1,3 m3
vertical walls of the lower bunker
lower frame UPN300, 1 piece
glued anchor l = 0,5 m, 8 pieces
upper frame UPN300, 1 piece
carrier of sloping wall UPN300, l = 3200 mm, 1 piece
carrier of sloping wall IPN300, l = 3200 mm, 1 piece
S49 bus 31 kom., total length 101 m
UPN160, l = 2000mm, 2 pieces
concrete reinforcement 12 pieces.

PROCEEDINGS
slanting wall
rail S49, 21 pieces, total length 75 m,
UPN160, l = 2600mm,
concrete barriers
vertical shuttering for suport, 8,0 m2, 2 pieces
concrete C25/30 (B30) 25 m3
walls between the columns
concrete C25/30 (B30) 9,5 m3
steel for control input 165 kg.
vertical north wall

UPN160, l = 3600mm, 1 piece
Rail S49, 16 pieces., length 94 m
UPN160 l = 2000mm, 3 pieces
Concrete reinforcement 18 pieces
south vertical wall
rail S49, 21 pieces, total length 116 m
concrete buffer above 988 m elevation

concrete C25/30 (B30) 12,5 m3
lower roof of the bunker
U100, l = 3300 mm, 3 pieces
U100, l = 2800mm, 1 piece
sheet with a thickness of 10 mm, 4,5 m2.
4. ORGANIZATION OF THE WORK

Transportation of the materials
The place for handover between the developer and the contractor will be in bypass of the heading shaft, on elevation 988 m. Steel materials will be delivered to the site in the purchase length. On the level 988 contractors will
process the steel material into the desired dimension. In the workplace, on level 955 m the material will be delivered through the sloping bunker with ropes and crane. During transportation with ropes, workers are removed in
the transition pit on that level. Fine material can also be transported through the workplace short passage coupled
to the bunker floor on level 955 m. The concrete will be produced on the surface. On level 988 m the concrete will
be delivered by the loader. In the bypass on the level 988 m filled funnel will be installed to transport the concrete
through the sloping bunker through pipelines.
Movement of workers during the time of repairing the sloping bottom of the bunker will run from level 988 m using
metal stairs with insurance. On the workplace during the repairing stadium of the vertical part of the bunker workers are transported on level 955 m through the shaft.
Supplying the workplace with energy
The developer will provide a connection to electricity, including lighting near the shaft on level 988 m and 955 m.
Consumers of compressed air will be joined on the similar way (drilling machines, etc..) on the levels.
Ventilation of the workplace
Work performed during the repairing of the bunker concrete ring on elevation of 955 m are performed in flowing air
flow. Taking into account that the repairing work on the floor of the sloping bunker will be performed from the
level of the filled bunker that will interrupt ventilation air flow. In order to provide appropriate working conditions
on the workplace it is necessary to install fan with ventilation pipe diameter of 315 mm. The fan is located in the
bypass of the heading shaft on level 988 m.
Management with working group
Before each shift a person responsible for technical supervision of the workplace should be appointed as head of
the working group. The head of the working group has the following duties:
Organize and manage the work group,
Communicate with the control authorities of the mine,
Provides communication with the crane operator,
Control the equipment of the working group in terms of personal safety.
738

PROCEEDINGS
Signaling and communication equipment

For the transportation of materials in the bunker between elevation +988 m and +954 m crane is used, set on elevation +988 m. Signaling equipment for handling the crane is provided with air gig, set on the same level with the
crane on elevation +988 m and with signal cable set across on the entire length of the bunker.
For the signaling cable user manual is used . Tables with instruction manual signs are placed on the crane and
workplace in the bunker. Regardless of cable signaling, work unit communicates with the crane operators with
portable radio connection (Motorola), supplied by the manages of the mine. Besides STOP signal the handling with
crane is conducted in accordance with the signal communication that is always confirmed in advance with radio
communication.
During the transportation of materials in the bunker elevation at 955 m workers are removed and placed in the
shaft passage of the elevation.
5. CONCLUSION
Repairing of the unloading bunker on heading shaft "Golema Reka" in "Sasa" mine is necessary in order to put in
function the hoisting system. To successfully solve this problem it is necessary to perform repairs of damage from
sloping (ring) and prismatic part of the unloading bunker. Manufactured technical solution in this paper guarantees
that unloading bunker will be stable and the same object can be exploited a longer period of time without any special damages.
REFERENCES
[1]
., .: , , , ,
, , 2008
[2]
., .: - , Banske projekty Ostrava, 2013.
739

PROCEEDINGS
THE TIMOK COPPER-GOLD PROJECT

- GEOLOGY AND MINERALIZATION
(TIMOK MAGMATIC COMPLEX - EASTERN SERBIA)
ABSTRACT
Miodrag BANJEEVI1
Duncan LARGE2
Balkan Exploration and Mining, Belgrade and Technical Faculty Bor, Bor,
Serbia, miodrag@reservoirminerals.com
2
Technical Advisor to Reservoir Minerals Inc., Braunschweig, Germany,
duncan@reservoirminerals.com
Timok Copper-Gold Project in Serbia comprises seven exploration permits in

the highly prospective Timok Magmatic Complex, eastern Serbia. A coppergold discovery within this prolific copper-gold mining district was announced
during 2012.
The ukaru Peki exploration area is a blind target covered by Miocen sedimentary rocks that unconformably overlie the Late Cretaceous postmineralized sequence of epiclastic and sedimentary rock units, and hornblende andesite volcanics and volcaniclastics that host high-sulphidation
copper-gold massive sulphide.
Mineralization consists of covellite with bornite, enargite and chalcocite in
zones, blebs and veins, hydrothermal breccias and replacements hosted by
strongly altered andesite in the upper part, and porphyry style chalcopyritepyrite veins with rare molybdenite in the deeper sections.
Keywords
Timok, ukaru Peki, New Discovery, Copper, Gold
1. INTRODUCTION
The Timok Project comprises the Jasikovo-Durlan Potok, Brestovac-Metovnica and Leskovo Exploration Permits
that are held by Rakita d.o.o., a Serbian company in which Freeport-McMoRan Exploration Corporation and Reservoir Minerals Inc hold 55% and 45% indirect ownership interests respectively. The Timok Project Exploration Permits cover an area of 245 square kilometres in the highly prospective Timok Magmatic Complex (TMC), eastern Serbia. The TMC belongs to the Tethyan Eurasian Metallogenic Belt [2] and is the location of the important active BorMajdenpek copper mining districts. The Brestovac-Metovnica permit is located in the eastern zone of the TMC, and
the ukaru Peki exploration drill target area is located approximately 7.5 kilometers south from the Bor cluster of
copper-gold deposits. The area is a blind target covered by Miocene sedimentary rocks that unconformably overlie
Late Cretaceous sedimentary packages coarse grained clastites (Bor conglomerate and sandstone), fine grained
sediments (reddish and grey marl and siltstone), volcaniclastic-epiclastic rock and hornblende andesite volcanics [1].

Drilling in ukaru Peki area has returned mineralogy and alteration typical of both epithermal high sulphidation
systems and porphyry style mineralization. High sulphidation copper-gold massive sulphide mineralization consists of covellite with bornite, enargite and chalcocite in zones, blebs, veins, hydrothermal breccias and replacements hosted by strongly altered (advance argillic and argillic) andesite. Porphyry style chalcopyrite-pyrite veins or
blebs with rare molybdenite have been intersected in the deeper intervals (e.g. FMTC 1210). Strongly altered (potassic) andesite is replaced by an argillic alteration overprint with covellite.
The discovery drill hole FMTC 1210 intersected the base of the Miocene sedimentary covers at a depth of 135m,
and then penetrated Upper Cretaceous volcano-sedimentary package before intersecting the target andesite and
volcaniclastic unit at 464m. From 494 to 1400m, the andesite are locally brecciated, and variably altered (advance
argillic to argillic) and mineralized with covellite, enargite, chalcocite, bornite and pyrite occurring as disseminations, breccia matrix fill, veinlets and locally massive sulphides. Chalcopyrite is the dominant copper sulphide min-
741

PROCEEDINGS
eral in the deeper 500m section, and is indicative of porphyry copper mineralized system typical of the TMC. The
FMTC 1210 drill hole intersected 266m grading an average of 1.07% copper and 0.28 g/t gold from 598 to 864m.
FMTC 1213, which was the next drill hole to be reported, intersected the Miocene sedimentary and Upper Cretaceous volcano-sedimentary rocks before intersecting the target andesite and volcaniclastic unit at 432m. From 461
to 633m, moderate to intense mineralization of covellite, enargite, locally bornite, and pyrite occurring as disseminations, breccia matrix fill, veinlets in strongly altered andesites. The interval from 633m to the end of the hole
consists of brecciated andesite with a lower intensity of sulphide mineralization, and degree of alteration decreasing with depth. The FMTC 1213 drill hole intersected 160m grading an average of 6.92% copper and 5.40 g/t gold
from 461 to 621m.
Drill hole FMTC 1214 includes 204m with an average grade of 1.49% copper and 0.24 g/t gold from 1082 to 1286m,
and drill hole FMTC 1217 includes 100m, with an average grade of 3.17% copper and 1.91 g/t gold from 584 to
684m.
Drill hole FMTC 1223 intersected the copper-gold mineralized andesite volcanics from 428 to 719.3m (291.3m with
an average grade of 5.13% copper and 3.40 g/t gold) beneath the covering Miocene sediments and volcanosedimentary package. Massive sulfide mineralization (pyrite, covellite, enargite and bornite), interpreted to be highsulphidation epithermal in type, occurs from 428 to 551m. The section from 551 to 719.3m consists of altered andesite pervasively mineralized with abundant disseminations, veinlets and occasional massive sulfide aggregations
of pyrite, covellite and enargite. At 719.3m there is an abrupt transition to altered and brecciated andesite with
disseminated pyrite and occasional covellite that continues to the end of hole at 1060.4m.
REFERENCES
[1]
Banjeevi M., Vuovi N., Vaduveskovi Z.: Geological setting of Eastern part of the Timok Magmatic Complex: pre-, sin- and
post-mineralization units. 44th International October Conference on Mining and Metallurgy. Eds: V. Truji, M. Ljubojev, A. Kostov, M. Bugarin. Proccedings, October 1-3, Bor, Serbia, 2012, 45-48.
[2]
Jankovi S.: The Copper Deposits and Geotectonic Setting of the Tethyan Eurasian Metallogenetic Belt. Mineralium Deposita,
12, 1977, 3747.
742

PROCEEDINGS
CONTRIBUTION TO THE KNOWLEDGE

OF THE METALLOGENY IN ORE FIELD KOSMAJ-BABE
ABSTRACT
Vojislav MRDJA
Balkan Exploration and Mining,

Belgrade, Serbia
vojislav@reservoirminerals.com
The Kosmaj-Babe ore field area lies within the Vardar Zone of Neogene carbonate-replacement and epithermal Pb-Zn-Ag and porphyry Cu mineralization.
Host rocks comprise Upper Jurassic to Lower Cretaceous sandstone, siltstone, marl and limestone overlain by an Upper Cretaceous flysch sequence.
Sedimentary rocks are intruded in the north by granitic stocks and dykes and
in the south by rhyolitic to quartz latite dykes and sills.
Historical works within this area dates back to Roman times and is recognised at surface by shallow, circular pits and slag deposits. A numerous
(5,000) ancient mining shafts are recognised within the area.
The mineralization occurs as veins and stratabound replacement of the Cretaceous carbonates and is spatially associated with intrusive quartz-latite
dykes and dacitic volcanic breccias. The mineralization proximal to the breccias is enriched in gold, and marked by arsenopyrite and intense silicification
of the host marls and limestones.
Lead and zinc sulphides together with pyrite occur distally from the intrusive
contact, but are also associated with intense silicification of the host carbonates. The ore mineralogy includes argentiferous galena, sphalerite and
pyrite with accessory chalcopyrite, arsenopyrite, tetrahedrite, marcasite and
gold.
Remodelling of the historic drilling data and validation drill holes indicate
that the tonnage and grade of the historic resource are about 6Mt (with 4%
Pb, 2% Zn, 0.2% Cu, 131g/t Ag and 0.15g/t Au). These data show the potentiality of this area for future exploration and discovery of new deposits.
Keywords
Metallogeny, Kosmaj-Babe, Lead-Zinc, Ore field, Flysch
1. INTRODUCTION
Parlozi exploration permit is 100% owned by Reservoir Minerals and covers 96km2. Within the permit area most
explored locality is Parlozi prospect. The polymetallic ore deposit Parlozi is situated at the north slopes of
Kosmaj mountain in Babe village, about 40 km south from Belgrade, and is part of the ore field Kosmaj-Babe. The
main mining activity was in Roman time as well as during medieval, mainly focused in Babe village, with a lot of
remains of surface mining and processing works (pits, shafts and slags).
2. GEOLOGY
The project area lies within the Vardar Zone of Neogene carbonate-replacement and epithermal Pb-Zn-Ag and
porphyry Cu mineralization. The Pb-Zn-Ag mineralization occurs within the umadija metallogenic district. KosmajBabe ore field bears many similarities with the mineralization in the famous Kopaonik district (Trepa mines) which
is also situated in the Vardar Zone. The geology of the Parlozy permit area is dominated by Cretaceous flysch sediments (clastics and carbonates), Tertiary igneous rocks (volcanic breccias and quartz-latite intrusions), and locally
Upper Miocene sediments. Deformation has occurred during the late Miocene alpine orogeny. Sediments have been
743

PROCEEDINGS
intruded by igneous rocks with significant magma differentiation. Quartzlatite bodies were formed at the north
and south part (Parlozi locality) of the ore field. Sedimentary package was intruded by dacitic magma and formed
different types of lavabreccias. Last phase of breccias as well as sediment package are cut by dykes and sills of aplitic riodacites. Igneous rocks have a major metallogenetic significance because they are considered to be related
to polymetallic ore (mineralization) genesis.

According to the reached level of exploration and collected data (lithology, structural characteristics , magmatism
and their genetical connection with processes of forming and areal distribution of polimetalic Pb-Zn-Cu-Ag ore
deposits), the central part of Kosmaj ore field (where is situated Parlozi deposit) was formed within Neogene subvolcanic dome which roof part was not destroyed. Collapsed part of the domes roof is of almost circular form,
about 3 km diameter. It is marked by its drainage characteristics and by intensive magmatic-ore manifestations in
peripherial parts. Parlozi hill is located next to this central part, bordered by waterways, where irregular masses of
igneous breccia (rhyodacite - quartzlatite matrix and fragments of upper cretaceous flysch) are intruded.
Mineralization:
The mineralization occurs as veins and thick lenses or stratabound replacement of the Cretaceous carbonates and
is spatially associated with riodacitic volcanic breccias. The ore mineralogy includes argentiferous galena, sphalerite and pyrite with accessory chalcopyrite, arsenopyrite, tetrahedrite, marcasite and gold. Systematic measurements in validation drill hole PA-1 approved that all ore bodies are parallel to the bedding and lamination in siliciclastites and limestones. The mineralization proximal to the breccias is enriched in gold, and marked by arsenopyrite and intense silicification of the host marls and limestones. Typical mineralization in a shallow part of drill
hole PA-1 is represented with arsenopyrite, pyrite, pyrothite, chalcopyrite, sphalerite, galena, tethraedrite, native
gold, electrum, casiterite, bizmuthinite, native bizmuth, bizmuth sulfosalts, rhutile, quartz and silicates. Characteristic of the deeper part of PA-1 drill hole is that the lead and zinc sulphides, together with pyrite, occur distally
from the intrusive contact, but are also associated with intense silicification of the host carbonates. Mineralization
in deeper part is presented by pyrite, arsenopyrite, chalcopyrite, bornite, sphalerite, galena, tenantite, freibergite,
native silver, rhutile, casiterite, cerusite, quartz and silicates.
4. CONCLUSION
Carbonate lead zinc- silver replacement mineralization formed in Kosmaj - Babe area is comparable to Trepa
type of mineralization. Historical mining was limited to shallow depths up to water table level. Previous exploration
done in the period 1960 1990 was focused on base metal resources, while the precious metals were analysed occasionally. 3D modelling of historical data with additional data from validation PA-1 drill hole approved former Yugoslav resource estimations: 6.5 Mt @ 4.1% Pb, 2.1% Zn, 0.3% Cu and 130 g/t Ag. Company validation drilling identifies high silver (max 1175 g/t Ag, and 434 g/t over 11.5 meters) and gold (2.81 g/t over 6.15 meters) contents, and
confirms base-metal grades. This presents excellent base for potential further exploration in adjacent sediment
blocks close to volcanic dome, with possibility of enhancing resource tonnage and silver content [1].
REFERENCES
[1]
Radulovi P.: Izvetaj o istraivanju olova i cinka u leitu Babe u 1982. godini. Fondovski materijal Geoinstituta, 1982, Beograd.
744

PROCEEDINGS
GEOLOGY CHARACTERISTICS AT TORANICA DEPOSIT
ABSTRACT
Site Toranica began with surface drilling and pit investigation
in 1974 to 1980. The same is developed with ten horizons with
distance between heights 50 m and bottommost horizon is
made on level 1405m, and top level is 1855m and all are connected with main gate which entrance is at level 1450 (or under hole 2). Ore body is placed quartz graphite shale which are
powerful 150-180 m, and floor imprint volcanic rocks. In floor
and roof on quartz graphite shale are found that represent
most common litolotical members in this part of field.
The biggest part of geological ore reserves on site Toranica
are connect to floors underground ore bodies which appear in
the form of layers, and elongated forms, and located at the
contact of quartz graphite shale with bottom metamorforic
series (floors gneisses) with intrusions quartz-latitite. Ore bodies with average power of 8-12m (Block 2 and up to 30 meters)
and slope of 35 - 40, and most common minerals are: galena,
svalerit, pyrite halkopirit etc.
Msc Rade STANKOVSKI, Eng. Geologist
Indo Mineralas and Metlas mine Toranica, Kriva Palanka, R.

Macedonia
r.stankovski@imm.eu.com
Keywords
Geological Composition, Minerals, Ore Bodies
1. GEOLOGY CHARACTERISTICS AT TORANICA DEPOSIT

Site Toranica began with surface drilling and pit investigation in 1974 to 1980. In this period are calculated new ore
reserves, which are increased related to previous made elaborate because of more exploration work like diamond
drilling and mining work. The same is developed with ten horizons and height finding distance of 50 m and
bottommost horizon is made on level 1405m, and top level 1855m. According to pitch, ore bodies are exploring up
to length of 450m, spread of 1000m has a gentle inclination of 30-40.Level access is with main excavation ramp
and vertical ore transport executes by ore passes. Waste is transporting outside of each level or on main transport
levels. Condition of climate at Toranica area is unfavourable. The deposit is on sea level of 1400m to 2000 m.
Toranica ore occurrence is located in the northern part of the Sasa Toranica area and northern part of the Ruen
Sulten Tepe. According to structure geological, lithostratigraphic and metallogenetic structure are reflect the
main metallogenetic handles on ore area Sasa Toranica. According to area manifestation of magmatism and mineralization, this ore body has tract of over 30 km, and mineralization is in interval between 1300 1800 m.
2. GEOLOGICAL COMPOSITION
Toranica ore occurrence is located in the northern part of the Sasa Toranica region within Osogovo ore region.
Exploration on this ore region was started during 1974 to 1988 when was Toranica put in probationary operation.
Basic structure geology and metallogenetic characteristics of the ore deposit are presented jobs of Bogoevski and
Gashteovski (1990), Gashteovski and Stankovski (1984), Stankovski (1997).
In The geological content at Toranica ore deposit and the vicinity there are rocks of metamorphic origin and tertiary volcanic rocks. Most frequent representatives of metamorphic rocks are the gneisses and quartz graphitic
schist. In quartz graphitic schist very often appeared layers and lens of cipolin, which are prosperity lithologic area
for Pb-Zn mineralization.
745

PROCEEDINGS
On same places in this productive series are perforate with sub volcanic volcanic cross cuts of quartz latite
which are characteristic for magmatic control for mineralization of this area.
To got a more insight into the geological composition a complete geological characteristics in mine Toranica, hereinafter will briefly look in most important features of the main and most common types of rocks involved in the
construction of this important lead-zinc deposit
Gneiss is representing dominant litho logical members within the site Toranica, and much wider. According to their
spatial distribution and relationship with other members of metamorphic series, they are separated as underground
and bottommost gneisses
Based on data from previous studies conclude that roof gneisses are much more common, and they are more
known and recognized. Generally, observation these rocks are heterogeneous. In a series of roof gneisses often
comes to removing between gneiss, phyllite and cerrusite-chlorine phyllite and cerrusite - chlorine schist, and the
places and lenses of quartz-graphite schist. This Switching lithological member in certain intervals is very short distances of 1-2 m. However according to present knowledge it is up to 300m. It should be noted that the contact roof
gneisses with quartzgraphite schist is usually tectonic, but also very sharp.
Floor gneisses in mine Toranica are far less analyzing from roof. They are more places are drilled in their contact
with schist and parts since this info on their composition. It is a completely homogenous types of rocks but with
different spatial distribution in the vertical column of metamorphic this area. Underlying gneisses are fresher (they
are not exposed to atmosphalerite) are poorly mineralized and certainly less tectonic.
Quartz graphite schist: - A series of quartz-schist in mine Toranica has special significance because it is most ore
deposit of lead and zinc in mine Toranica. Spatial these rocks are placed between floor roof and gneisses. Color is
black to dark gray. They are intra stratified layers and cipoline (marble) cipoline (marble) schist, quartz lenses with
different size from a few centimeters to one meter. This schist tectonic quite damaged. Because plasticity, they
encountered a number of micro folds with amplitude of 5 cm to meter size. The cracks are filled and sealed with
mylonite substance and which is regularly attended with water, so they are special areas of difficulty performing
mining. The average thickness of the schist ranges from 150-200 meters. After a series of deep-quartz schist graphitic sent to the 1200m level
Cipoline and cipoline schist These types of rocks are placed inside of quartz - graphitic series. The best parts of this
rock are made of carbonate, primarily calcite. In addition, very often is containing mica and other minerals. Color is
grey white, grey and light brown. Cipoline and cipoline schist in quartz graphitic schist are placed on different
levels. Generally are placed in floor part. The cipoline bodies have shape of layers thickness of 30 m. At Toranica
deposit the cipoline and cipoline schist are scarnitisation, epidotisation and chlorinitisation.
In terms of localization of ore mineralization this type of rocks are especially interested because are easily subjected on metasomatic process, which basically brought to making of skarns and other types of contact metasomatic
works, and later come to disposal of ore mineralization. Against previous knowledge most of the productive mineralization in Toranica ore occurrence is located within this lithological members. For marking is that high temperature postmagmatic solutions, in most of the series of rocks are first created contact metasomatic and letter in
there are disposal of mineralization.
Scarn- Are the youngest lithological members in created noted types of rocks at Toranica ore occurrence. There
genesis, by time and physical are related with the fist stadiums of creation of ore mineralization and especially for
lithological suitable area for there formation and formation of metasomatic mineralization. At Toranica ore occurrence this area are with cipoline and cipoline schist. From there is the fact that scarns and other related metasomatic at Toranica ore occurrence are noted in main along cipoline bodies. Morphological, the scarns are followed
by cipoline and ore bodies are followed by scarn bodies or are in the same. This is the result of action of metasomatic process, which in some phases is making the scarns, and in others are ore bodies. There are the same processes only the difference is in the different action. The scarn work are not studied at Toranica mine but however is
concluded the contain: ilvaite, bustamite, johansenit, actinolite, and very often appearance of epidote, calcite,
chlorite and etc. According to localization of lead zinc mineralization at Toranica ore occurrence those type of
rocks are especially important.
Tertiary volcanic rocks Despite different types of metamorphic rocks at Toranica ore occurrence are existing and
volcanic rocks, but of course with far less representations. Main there are sub volcanic sub volcanic facies of tertiary magmatism which are intruded in metamorphic complex, often in type of dikes, sills and etc. The power is
variable is move up 50 m. According to spreading, they can be several hundred meters length and the same are parallel with foliation of the schist and gneiss. For typical representative of tertiary volcanic rocks at Toranica ore oc-
746

PROCEEDINGS
currence is quartz latite, and due to mineralogical and chemical tests is determined the presence of dacites and
andesite dacites.
In terms of localization of ore mineralization, those rocks are interesting for this area. Namely, with current excavation and exploration is confirmed contain of lead zinc mineralization at sub volcanic dikes at Toranica ore occurrence and the same are interest for exploration.
Figure 1. Longitudinal geology profile at Toranica ore occurrence
3. TYPES OF ORE DEPOSIT AND MORPHOLOGY OF ORE BODIES

Ore bodies at Toranica at form and size are closely related to pre ore, intra ore and post ore tectonics. Based on the
data obtained by exploring mine Toranica set aside several types of matching ore bodies.
a) According connection with certain litho logical members:
roof gneisses Ore bodies
Ore bodies of quartzgraphite schist
Vulcan ore bodies
b) According shape ore bodies can be:
layered ore bodies
layers lenses -layered ore bodies
wire-impregnated ore bodies
Ore bodies in the quartz-schist graphite have the greatest economic meaning for mine Toranica. According to the
spatial layout of ore bodies in the quartzgraphite schist can distinguish four groups of ore bodies, such as:
Floor ore bodies
Centre ore bodies
Ore bodies are found on the contact of quartz-schist with graphite roof gneisses,
Ore bodies roof gneisses.
Ore bodies in the quartzgraphite schist can be distinguished in relation to specific lithological members:
Ore bodies connected cipoline (marble), cipoline -schist,
Ore bodies created within the quartzgraphite schist.
The major reserves in the mine Toranica tied to floor ore body. This ore body is near the quartzgraphite schist and
underlying gneisses.
747

PROCEEDINGS
Underground ore bodies - Underground ore bodies are main ore (spine) at Toranica ore occurrence, which are 80 %
of total ore quantity. This type of ore is placed on the contact with quartz graphite schist and down part of metamorphic series (underground gneisses) ie cross cut on quartz latite.
Underground ore bodies are occurring in the form of layers, layers lenses bodies, elongated forms. There are ore
bodies in the form of layers elongated from NS-EW and slope against ES. Their greater axis go to north south with
angle of 40. The highest part of this pseudolayer is placed on pits from 1800 m, thickness of exploration work is cut
on pits 1300m. Along length can be followed from 500 to 1000 m in dependence of which level belongs. Thickness
of ore zone varies in very broad limits as per spreading and as per inclination. From the results obtained from exploration drilling and mining work follows that thickness of this ore zone between 0,2 to 4,0 m, and average thickness
is between 8 to 12 m. Important for this ore zone is occurring like one compact entirety and other parts (cross cuts)
are represented in more ore zones.
Middle ore bodies - Middle ore bodies are occur in the middle of quartz graphitic series. These types of ore bodies
are less important related to underground ore bodies. There are ore bodies with less durability as the spreading and
inclination. Dimension of this type of bodies are smaller then dimension of underground ore bodies. The thickness is
between 0,2 to 5 m, and rarity over 5 m, and according to slope of spreading can go up to 250m.
Contact ore bodies This type of ore bodies are located in the roof of quartz graphitic series of the same line with
roof gneisses. The ore bodies have elongated shape in the form of layers lenses bodies and there durability by slope
and spreading are quite limited. Can be found compact ore bodies with length over 200m, and according to spreading and slope the thickness is variable (up 15m).
Ore bodies in roof gneisses These ore bodies are occur in roof gneisses and have similar characteristics with contact ore bodies. These types of ore bodies are occur along crack zone parallel with foliation of gneisses.
Shape of ore bodies are like elongated layers lenses bodies. There dimension are between 150 m according to slope
and spreading. Common for all ore bodies is the elongated shape, in the form of pseudo layers and layers lenses
bodies, whereas are almost parallel with foliation of main rock with the exception of same ore bodies in the upper
part of the complex which laying cross.
Ore bodies in tertiary volcanic rocks - Most of the exploration done in Toranica Mine, wherever in phase of exploration or before, are main directed for better exploration and cognition of mineralization in productive quartz graphitic series. The exploration show that whole area is mineralized with lead - zinc polymetal mineralization almost
in all lothologic areas. In that contexts also mineralization of volcanic rocks represents of this area is unusual. This
mineralization is with far less scale, but existing. It is basically cracked or vein mineralization follow with impregnated mineralization with no economic importance.
4. OVERVIEW OF IMPORTANT MINERALS

In the lead-zinc site in mine Toranica, quantitative intensity and extension most common ore minerals are galena
and Sphalerite regularly accompanied by pyrite, and pyrite chalcopyrite. Further text will export primary will bring
out the basic features of the most important ore minerals Toranica the site, and will be briefly their closest companions.
Galena is the main mineral together with Sphalerite holds the ore deposit. It is quantitatively the most frequent
and occurs in association with minerals from medial temperature phase, Sphalerite, pyrite, chalcopyirite, arsenopyrties, tetrahedrite, marcasite etc. Galena performs in all morphological types in ore deposit and has seen in all
levels of ore deposit in the site or in all horizons ever made. Usually galena occurs in allotriomorphic grains and
granular aggregates of mineral grains of other minerals create larger fields of ore substance. Often in galena and
pyrite, itself fits pyrrhotite in the form of relics, thus creating relict structure. As later, created mineral galena out
metamorphic suppression sphalerite, pyrite and chalcopyrite. Also we encounter and chalcopyirite, sphalerite i pyrite and galena embedded in the. Galena besides carrying metasomatic suppression of previously created stem
minerals that perform metasomatic suppression of previously created petrogen non-metal minerals, ie suppress
silicate of scarnitisation. In coarse-grained galena, aggregates clearly see his directions of cleavage.
Galena is crystallize in many generations. First generation of the galena is in association with the mesothermal
phase minerals, i.e. pyrite II generation, sphalerite II generation, chalcopyrite II generation, arsenopyrite tetrahedrite, marcasite
This galena is demonstrated with allotriomorphic caliber and caliber aggregates, which with the calibers of the
enumerated minerals are creating bigger fields in the ore substance. It is pressuring the older minerals and it is in-
748

PROCEEDINGS
cluding its calibers. Galena II occurs in bigger size calibers aggregates and very rare in calibers with aright crystal
form. It is genetically connected with the epidermal phase minerals.
The third generation galena is less represented in relation with previous two generations, mostly in the impregnation zones and cracked areas with the carbonate group of minerals.
Sphalerite - sphalerite less frequent than galena, occurs in various different shapes and sizes, and often forms allotriomorphic grainy structure. Determined to three generations of sphalerite. The first generation of sphalerite is
characterized by high iron content and providing chalcopyrite in the form of tiny droplets (emulsions), building
emulsion structure where emulsion drops are variably oriented and quite often occur in the form of chains. Rarely
in sphalerite stands and pyrrhotite. After the color is dark brown sphalerite, dark gray to black. Sphalerite suppresses pyrrhotite metasomatic and replaces the silicate scarnitisation and carbonate works.
Second generation sphalerite also has separation chalcopyrite but this sphalerite contains much less iron than the
previous sphalerite. The third generation of sphalerite without iron and contains or does not contain separation of
chalcopyrite. After the color is yellowish-brown and is used frequently. Characteristic of all three generations of
sphalerite it be suppressed and often corroded by other minerals, primarily of galena.
Pyrite - The community with sphalerite and galena is most abundant mineral and it occurs in three generations. The
first generation of pyrite occurs in the form of well-developed crystals and fits some minerals. There is a possibility
that he is the oldest mineral that was created as a product of metamorphic and crystal schist in coming to re crystallization of pyrite. This first generation of pyrite often good at crackling in which cracks are infiltrated crystallization and other minerals, the second generation of pyrite is less than the previous and usually occurs as a relic in
sphalerite and galena. The third generation of pyrite, which we think is the youngest occurs in well developed and
forms nearly idiomorfni mostly cubes, and rhombohedra. This pyrite is probably younger than the rest metallic minerals because it usually fits inside.
Chalcopyrite - Chalcopyrite is much less frequent than sphalerite and galena. Determined to three generations of
chalcopyrite. Chalcopyrite and sphalerite first generation and first generation probably had similar weather, conditions close to creating. When creating the conditions are changed (the drop in pressure and temperature) led to
disintegration of solid solutions and structures separating the mineral individuals, and from there the chalcopyrite
allocations come in the form of emulsions in sphalerite and providing stellate and skeletons of sphalerite in chalcopyrite. Grains of chalcopyrite, which is incorporated sphalerite, have different size from a few to 40 microns. Chalcopyrite of third generation is in association with the minerals and mesothermal epithermal stage and occur in individuals allotriomorphic and thin vein.
Pyrrhotite - At least present ore mineral has been described pyrrhotite. Commonly occurs with pyrite, while building mineral bodies that reduce lead-zinc mineralization. He is the main ore mineral in the metasomatic ore bodies
occur alone as a relic of galena, and sphalerite chalcopyrite that leads to the conclusion that it is older than the
above mentioned ore minerals. Pyrrhotite often repressed by galena. Most often occurs in the form of larger or
smaller grains of 0.08 to 0.20 mm, with various different shapes and scattered on the underlying table.
5. CONCLUSION
Space in the geological sense belongs to the old complexes of rocks that enter into the composition of the
Serbo-Macedonian massif and reflect on all of its features. However, the general conclusion is that there exists a structural-geological specifics that the treated area, or within Osogovski area can be defined as follows: a) Underground gneisses, b) a series of schist (of which should be especially noted productive quartzgraphite series of intercalary cipoline) and c) roof gneisses.
Executed tests dikes subvolcanic rocks Intrusion in mine Toranica clearly suggests several important conclusions. In fact, they are essentially the product of tertiary magnetism. Absolute age it ranges from 29 - 18.5
million years (Oligo-Miocene). Belong to the calc-alkaline magma with pronounced acidic character (60-74%
SiO2) which classifies the group of quartz latites, dacites and rhyolite.
In metalogene sense Toranica the site belongs to Osogovski ore area ie metalogene zone Enraged mareOsogovo-Thassos. It is a regional metalogene unit, which by extension can send over 700 km. With an average width of 20-30 km.
Lead-zinc ore deposit Toranica in the site is localized mainly in quartz-graphitic series, which intercalated
layers of cipoline. The morphology of ore bodies (pseudo-layers, lenses, thin strips, etc.). Fully reflect the
morphology of cipoline. However standard morphological shape of the ore bodies Toranica the site is retained and the ore deposit in gneisses (though far smaller) and volcanic rocks.
749

PROCEEDINGS
Mineralogical investigations at the site Toranica showed up this level of examination at the site resulted in
over 60 mineral and accessories non ore minerals that make complex mineral association. Take place predominantly galena and sphalerite, often accompanied by pyrite, chalcopyrite in places pyrrhotite, arsenopyrite etc. Special specifics mineral association cost bismuth minerals identified from among: bismuth, bismuthinite, treserite, gustavite etc.
REFERENCES
[1]
Aleksandar M.; 1962: etallogenetic characteristics on mine field - astern Macedonia. Doctoral dissertation, Stip
[2]
Bogoevski K.; 1962: Geological lead zinc deposit Sasa. Work on Geological Institute Skopje
[3]
Boev B.; Serafimovski T.; Lepitkova S.; 1962: Isotopes in strontium in tertiary volcanic rocks of Macedonia
[4]
Bogoevski K.; Gastevovski V.; 1990: Concentration of useful metals Pb-Zn floor ore zone site Toranica XII Congress of geologists
Jugoslavia, Ohrid.
[5]
Gasteovski V.; 1984: Elaborate for calculation of geological ore reserves of the ore deposit Toranica.
[6]
S.; 1970: Directions for searching at new lead zinc in Ruenski mine field
[7]
S.; 1970: Ruenski mine field in lead zinc ore occurrence Bulgaria.
[8]
Penzerkovski J.; 1968: Short review on geological structure of the area Sasa-Toranica
[9]
Serafimovski T.; 1968: Metalogene on zone Lece-Xalkidik, Doctoral dissertation, Stip
750

PROCEEDINGS
QUARTZ RAW MATERIALS

IN THE REPUBLIC OF MACEDONIA
ABSTRACT
Krsto BLAZEV1
Blagica DONEVA
Marjan DELIPETREV
Gorgi DIMOV
Faculty of natural and technical sciences, Stip, Republic of Macedonia

1
krsto.blazev@ugd.edu.mk
This paper presents registered reserves of primary and secondary quartz raw
materials, or quartz and quartzite on the territory of the Republic of Macedonia. Analyses of the reserves showed balance and out of balance reserves
of quartz raw materials.
Mineral raw materials are not only geological term, but they are technical
and economical category with known economic dimensions and specificity
manifested in the fact that they are specific recourse. The nature created
them in the ore deposits, with limited quantities and naturally nonrenewable and could not be reproduced.
Their specificity is expressed in the way of their finding, the risk and the procedure of their exploitation, as well as the preparation for further industrial
processing and application, i.e. their final valorization.
Keywords
Quartz, Quartzite, Reserves
1. INTRODUCTION
The geological - economic assessment of silica raw materials in Macedonia, actually, is that explored reserves of
silica raw materials are defined by the quality, quantity and location of where they are located. Based on this data
are obtained basic economic parameters expressed through natural indicators as starting points for economic importance of these resources and their final evaluation. In such a procedure should be taken into account predicted
and partially explored sites and perspective areas to find them. In this particular context specificity is determined
by the fact that determined reserves in the deposit will not be exploited and evaluated at once, but it depends on
the capacity for exploitation, as well as their consumption or market need.
From the economic point of view, it should be said that Macedonia has relatively good base of silica raw materials
in which are invested significant funds for their research. But very small number of them is in exploitation and processing of the materials into final product or material for the market. This requires new investments. Nowadays,
finding of investment assets is especially difficult. It is needed, possible investments to be in such objects where for
shorter time will be reproduced and the effects of investment justified.
Because natural conditions in the deposit, exploitation and market factors are changeble, and the realization
should be realized in different period, longer or shorter, depending on the quantities of the raw material,
exploitation capacity, or the market need should imply the action of the time factor, or not to refer to the time
when valuation was made.
Geological - economic evaluation of the mineral resources, besides natural, should display value indicators necessary for long-term planning of their development and determination of optimal economic potential. To make full
economic - value assessment of silica raw materials, it is necessary to analyze at least one decennial period in which
the economy operated in relatively normal conditions. Unfortunately, in the last decade we have witnessed an extremely unfavorable economic situation in our country where is seen a great reduction in the production of silica
raw materials. For the movement of prices, current conditions can make a real implementation in terms of annual
indicators and unrealistic data from the annual accounts of companies that are producers of silica raw materials.
For these reasons, full economic - value assessment of silica raw materials in Macedonia is very difficult to give, and
any assessment of these materials was not made. It is an attempt, using the known data, to present the status of
these resources which would be a basis for understanding their geological - economic importance.
751

PROCEEDINGS
Methodology procedures for evaluation of the mines and deposits of mineral raw materials are different around the
world and basically, depends on social - economic systems. Generally, two methodologies are accepted:
Methodology of H. D. Hoscold in the western industrial countries where economic evaluation is based on the
annual profit which is discounted with accumulative and speculative interest rate. With aim to obtain lover
value of the mine, it is applied high speculative rate which allowed significant lowering of taxes. With some
modifications from more authors, this methodology is the most used in many developed industrial countries.
Methodology of B. Milutinovik is complex methodology and reffers to the economic assessment of the deposits wather are in exploitation or not. In addition, it is started from the conditional profitability of the deposit, which is, or will be achieved by exploiting the same. The value of income increases with increased volume of production. The total revenue decreases the value of the gross wages of workers, and depreciation of
fixed assets and reproduction of the site. In this methodology, in addition to the normal, is inserted and corrective interest rate tied to the natural factors of the deposit and changing conditions of the exploitation.
In this case, from the previously stated reasons, there is no real value indicators, so the geological - economic assessment would only consisting of natural, i.e. quantitative and qualitative indicators of mine works in terms of
annual capacity for exploration and production. Basically, it started in the assessments of reserves of silica raw materials in terms of exploration of the deposits, i.e. deposits with determined and suspected reserves. The group of
deposits of quartz could be found two special economic categories as primary and secondary deposits as significantly differ in their economic value or cost of exploitation.
The results from this assessment will be useful factor in selection of indicators and selection of the most
perspective deposits of silica raw materials when defining long term and perspective economic variants which will
be define in social and economic develeopment plans.
2. BASIC NATURAL INDICATORS OF THE DEPOSIT OF SILICA RAW MATERIALS

A qualitative review of the reserves of silica raw materials is a synthesis of the results of the overall knowledge, field
observations and detailed research and would be a basis for their economic potential, or economic significance.
Quartz reserves
Quartz deposits in Macedonia, related to the exploitation conditions and their quality, are different. Basically, primary deposits are characterized with especially high quality in relation with secondary deposits, but primary quartz
deposits are limited in reserves and very difficult for exploitation (drilling, blasting, selection etc.). Their economic
justify exploitation would be only in case of higher valorization of the mineral raw material.
From the other side, secondary deposits of quartz are with more reserves, better conditions for exploitation,
possibility for full use of the deposit and its by - prodicts, and as a result are more efficient. In relation with the
quality, they are with lower quality, excluding some localities where the quartz is with extremely high quality.
Considering that primary goal is to show the economic importance of these resources, and starting from the above,
is made separation to their economic value under conditions of exploitation and their quality as primary and secondary deposits, and the extent of excavation with specified and assumed reserves.
Primary deposits of quartz with total determined reserves by 199 022,00 tons are find in the three specific locality Umlena, Beluce and Preseka, and primary deposits with assumed reserves of quartz have more and the total reserves are defined as 624 500.00 tons.
From the above said can be concluded that primary quartz deposits are very little or insufficiently explored. It is
based on the expensive exploration and exploitation and their uneconomical related to the secondary deposits.
Due to their high quality, interesting sites were explored.
In the group of primary deposits should be highlighted occurences and deposit of pieso - optical quartz Budinarci Berovo. Due to their high quality (dimensions and clearness of quartz ctystals), and the knowledge about their use,
in the future should be paid attention to their detail exploration. Recent knowledge of its occurence on these
terrains and field observations of the wider vicinity of Budinarci - Mitrasinci, give possibility to expect econimicaly
interesting concentrations.
Secondary quartz deposits, different from the primery, are more investigated due to their compatibility and
economic justification for detailed investigations. As with previous investigations have identified large amounts of
balance reserves of 12,187,115.00 tons, assumed reserves are not taken into account.
752

PROCEEDINGS
Quartzite reserves
Quartzite deposits are widespread on the territory of the Republic of Macedonia. As primary deposits are found in
Paleozoic complexes. They have relatively high level of exploration, some deposits where reserves are prognose.
Total determined balance reserves of quartzites are 24.808.550,00 tons, and total assumed reserves are
16.308.000,00 tons. Regarding the conditions of exploitation, there are almost no significant differences, if neglected infrastructure so that there are no reasons for their classification as the deposits of quartz.
Assessment of quality of quartzites as a useful raw material depends on their application or the physical mechanical properties, and in particular the chemical composition and the presence of harmful components which
condition the quality. There is an important difference in the quality of the raw material from one deposit to
another, so for some is characteristic very high quality, and some extremely poor quality. The content of SiO2, at
various deposits, is in the range of 92-99%.
3. CONCLUSION
Reserves of silica raw materials in Macedonia are balanced based on the total current knowledge and research and
are not tied to a particular period, because the current exploitation in terms of total reserves is almost neglect. For
those deposits which are in exploitation, simultaneously with the exploitative works is conduct further research and
supplement of exploited quantities, a given that research were conducted on much larger areas and in large volumes, it is possible today with very high reliability and accuracy accept reserves of silica raw materials in Macedonia.
Undoubtedly, despite the extent of the investigation of silica resources is relatively low, displayed reserves of these
raw materials are quite large. Given the opportunities and prospects for research on the territory of Macedonia, the
fields in which it is possible to expect deposits of quartz and quartzite, further explorations will surely give positive
results both in quantities sufficiently investigated categorization of reserves, and the quality making sure that base
on these mineral resources will increase significantly.
REFERENCES
[1]
Adjigogov L.,: Final report for regional investigation of quartzite in Vardar zone, 1971
[2]
Blazev K.,: Minerageny of silica raw material in Macedonia and their economical importance, Doctoral thesis, Faculty of mining anf
geology, Stip, 1991
[3]
Geological institute Skopje: Report for geological investigations of secondary quartz Golozinci - Gutin, 1987
[4]
Paskalev P.: Quartz and quartzite in SRM, 1990
[5]
Serafimovski T., Aleksandrov M.: Report for calculated ore reserves on the part of the quartz deposit Lakavica, 1990
[6]
Trajanov G.: Report for geological investigations of quartzite near Orlov Kamen - Kavadarci, 1982
753

PROCEEDINGS
GEOLOGICAL AND CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS

OF DIATOMACEOUS EARTH FROM THE DEPOSIT
VESHJE NEAR NEGOTINO - R. MACEDONIA
ABSTRACT
Violeta STOJANOVA1
Goe PETROV2
Violeta STEFANOVA3
Blazo BOEV4
Faculty of Natural and Technical Sciences, tip, R. Makedonija

1
violeta.stojanova@ugd.edu.mk 2
gose.petrov@ugd.edu.mk 3 violeta.stefanova@ugd.edu.mk 4 blazo.boev@ugd.edu.mk
This paper presents the results of the geological and chemical research of
Diatomaceous earth in the deposit Veshje near by Negotino.
The deposit - Veshje belongs to Tikvesh basin which is situated in the central
part of Vardar zone. This rich and numerical representation of diatomaceous
flora and conditions that were present in the upper lake basin during Pliocene are actually the major factors for the formation of productive layer of
Diatomaceous earth.
Productive diatomaceous horizon appears in a form of a layer, with a length
of 1-2 km and a thickness of 0,6 - 1,25 m, tending to form a spike towards the
peripheral parts of the basin. Immediate layers above and below of the productive horizon are the andesite tuffs and agglomerations.
Based on chemical analyzes made done on Diatomaceous earth from Veshje,
it resulted in the following content: SiO2 - 78.40%, Al2O3 - 6.40% CaO - 2.20%
and Fe2O3 - 2.60%. Under this structure, Diatomaceous earth is a quality
mineral resource which can be applied for filtration, thermal insulation and
many other uses in industry and construction.
Keywords
Diatomaceous flora, Diatomaceous Earth, Tikvesh basin, Pliocene
1. INTRODUCTION
Diatomite represent siliceous, sedimentary rock consisting principally of the fossilized skeletal remains of diatom, a
unicellular aquatic plant related to the algae, during the tertiary and quaternary periods ( [1] [12]).
Diatomaceous earth (DE), r diatomite, typically consists of 8691% silicon dioxide (SiO2), with significant quantities
of alumina (Al2O3) and ferric oxide (Fe2O3) [5].
Amorphous silica, is the main component of diatomite, although variable quantities of other materials (metal oxides, clays, salts - mainly carbonates and organic matter) may also be present, chemical precipitation and atmospheric contact, together with the prevailing environmental conditions, are determinant factors in the nature and
importance of the impurity content of a deposit [11]. Due to its specific properties (porous structure, high silica
content, low density, low conductivity coefficient, etc.) [5], DE has extensively been applied in many ways, such as
filter aid, adsorbent, insulating material, catalyst support or carrier [15]. Diatomaceous earth recently represents
and effective natural inert powder that is used as an insecticide.
Geological structure of the wider surrounding area of the deposit Veshje
The deposit of Diatomaceous earth Veshje is located 2.5 km SW of the village Veshje, or about 14 km south of the
city Negotino and at territory it lies on the northeastern slopes of the volcanic plateau Vitacevo. In geological
terms the deposit Veshje belongs to Tikvesh basin situated in central Vardar zone on the territory of the Republic of
Macedonia.
The wider surroundings of the site are characterized by heterogeneous lithological structure, dominated by tectonic elements of Vardar direction (Fig. 1).
754

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Geological map of the vicinity of the deposit of Diatomaceous earth Veshje
1. Deluvium, 2. Lower river terrace, 3. Breccious tuff, 4. Stratified pelite tuff, 5. Aglomeratic and breccious tuff, 6. Sands and gravels,
7. Travertine limestones, 8. Sands, 9. Sandy series, 10. Series of marls and claystone with layers of coal, 11. Series of variegated clays,
12. Conglomeratic flysch
Heterogeneous lithological structure is represented by metamorphic rocks of Precambrian complex, rocks of

Paleozoic complex, and Mesozoic rocks. The highest prevalence in the vicinity of Veshje is at tertiary sedimentary
rocks of the Paleogene (Upper Eocene) and Neogene (Pliocene) and quarterly sediments and volcanite.
Upper-Eocene sediments - are represented in the area of so-called basal lithozone (1E3), and they are found in the
eastern regions of Veshje, specifically in the area of the village Vesvica. The basal lithozone is constructed of thick
conglomerates around 600 m, built boulders of diabases, gabbro, and quartzite, and the upper part of Upper Jurassic limestone, rarely shale, diabases and gabbro.
Upper-Pliocene sediments - are represented by a sandy series Pl3, which also have the highest prevalence in the
basin. This series is made of sands and gravels with mostly yellowish color, and it is rarely seen and sub-layers of
sandy clays, shales and poorly bonded sandstone. This series contains weak upper bound conglomerates, down to
the southwest angle 3-5. These sediments are found as containing fossil remains of Mastodon arvernensis, upon
which the age of the sediments is defined as intermediate - Upper Pliocene [6].
Sediments of the Upper Pliocene-Pleistocene (Pl, Q) - are represented by limestone chalks and sand, and as the
youngest occur at pyroclastic quaternary vulcanite constituting immediate construction of the site Veshje.
Travertine limestones (with sub-layers of gray sandstone) occurs in the form of two well layered plates south
and southeast of Kavadarci (rare in the villages Disan and Veshje, which are most probably eroded). This series falls under the SW corner 3-5, and the thickness of the plates is 3-8 m. Over the limestone chalks there
are yellow sands lying, similar to those of the upper Pliocene.
755

PROCEEDINGS
Pyroclastic quaternary vulcanite represent a part of the lake plateau Vitacevo and an end to the northern
parts of Kozhuf quartzlatite massive volcanism [2]. They lie on older but different geological formations, and
at the examined area they lie on Upper-Pliocene series. At the site of diatomaceous soil Veshje pyroclastic
lie directly above the productive layer. Within these pyroclastites distinguished are: agglomerates, tuffs and
stratified breccia.
Geological structure of the deposit Veshje

At the geological structure of the deposit Veshje there are lithological members volcanogenic-sedimentary complex of Pleistocene plateau Vitacevo or lower-quarterly age participating. The most represented pyroclastic creations presented with andesite agglomerates and volcanic andesite breccia, less stratified pelitic tuffs, diatomaceous earth, rarely limestone chalks and quaternary (diluvial) sediments.
The Upper Pliocene sediments (sand series) are presented in the northeastern and southeastern brim of the site
(between Popovec- Pesokot and Osojot) and by stratigraphy they lie at the site shelf. Built from poorly clay bonded
sands, rarely layered with marley and sandy clay, and rarely created as well of thin plates of grey-white limestone
chalk. Generally these sediments have a NNW-SSE stretching and gently sink to the SW angle 2-3.
Andesite pyroclastites lie directly on sandy series and are a product of quarterly Kozhuf volcanism. These creations
lie at shelf and overlain the site, i.e. they occur in multiple stages of volcanic activity. For the most part, at the shelf
of the locality there are andesite grainy gray tuffs lying with thickness of about 2 m, and below them almost everywhere there are andesite agglomerates or agglomerate tuffs occurring. The emergence of grain andesite tuffs can
be considered as the beginning of a quieter phase, when freshwater lake where diatomite could be developed,
which later on produced the material to create a layer of Diatomaceous earth.
Deposition of Diatomaceous earth is interrupted by starting a new volcanic activity, with more explosive nature,
characterized by a series of andesite agglomerates, andesite agglomerative tuffs, rarely andesite breccia.
Andesite agglomerates almost everywhere lie directly over the layer of diatomaceous soil, and they occur in many
of sub-layers of andesite agglomerative tuffs, and in some places and medium-grain andesite tuffs.
Visible signs of stratification of the series indicate that it was created (deposited) in the aquatic environment. Andesite agglomerates prevail with rounded fragments - volcanic bombs with diameters of 0.5 m. By contrast, in andesite agglomerative tuffs these fragments are no larger than 0.5 cm.
The total thickness of the pyroclastic complex of the examined locality is about 160 m, and probably the same in
the vicinity (in higher areas) is not greater than 200 m.

Material for studying the chemical composition of Diatomaceous earth represent 16 samples from the productive
layer of the core 11 investigative drill-holes (D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D8, D9, D10, D15, D16 and D19). Chemical characteristics of the mineral resource - Diatomaceous earth are determined by classical complete chemical analysis of 12
elements.

The rich and numerical representation of diatomite flora and the conditions that were present at the lake basin
during the Upper Pliocene, constitute major factors in the formation of the productive layer of diatomaceous earth
at the deposit Veshje.
Diatomaceous productive horizon in the deposit Veshje has a shape of a layer that lies betweenthe andesite tuffs
and agglomerates. The thickness of diatomaceous layer is variable, from 0.35 m in the peripheral parts up to 1-1.25
m at the central parts.
The color of the diatomaceous earth is different, depending on its composition or quality. There are varieties with
white to gray-white, light gray and violet, and light beige etc. There are frequent sub-layers of clay-sandy sediments
tuffclay material of tufa and opal sub-layers and fossil flora at certain places in the productive layer. The thickness
of these is 2-20 cm.
The layer of Diatomaceous earth is sub-horizontal with the general decline towards SW angle of 2-3, which in many
places has frequent wedging as a result of erosive action of waves in relatively shallow lake environment. This diatomaceous wedging is associated with a relatively short period of shallowness of the lakes basin, as well as explo-
756

PROCEEDINGS
sive volcanism, which has probably put an end to the development of microorganisms - diatoms and other wildlife
in the lake.
Determining the quality of mineral resource-diatomaceous earth is done by the method of classical chemical analysis of 12 elements of samples taken from the productive layer of the core of the drill-holes.
The data obtained by chemical analysis of diatomaceous earth of 16 samples of investigative drill-holes presented
in Tables 1 and 2 show that the minimum content of SiO2 in some blocks of the site Veshje in the drill D9 is 62.07%
and the drill D8-2 65.70%. Maximum content of 87% was observed in the drill D19, and in the space of the old
goldmine where the SiO2 content is 90%.
Table 1. Chemical composition of Diatomaceous earth from the deposit Veshje Negotino
D1-1
D1-2
D2
D3-1
D3-2
D4
D5
D8-1
SiO2
80.00
66.64
77.78
67.54
80.21
86.05
80.24
79.30
TiO2
0.25
0.35
0.20
0.62
0.22
0.07
0.25
0.15
Al2O3
4.60
9.43
5.60
15.54
4.59
1.78
5.10
5.60
Fe2O3
1.43
3.77
2.14
6.86
1.72
0.86
2.14
2.08
MgO
0.93
3.35
0.72
2.02
0.77
0.34
0.74
0.81
CaO
1.40
2.36
2.05
2.60
1.41
2.00
1.70
1.66
Na2O
0.70
1.65
0.65
2.25
0.70
0.28
0.80
0.80
K2O
0.50
1.25
0.62
2.70
0.58
0.25
0.70
0.40
Loss of ignition
10.02
10.95
10.10
8.50
9.70
8.05
8.40
9.35
Total
99.83
99.75
99.86
100.13
99.90
99.78
100.06
100.15
Table 2. Chemical composition of Diatomaceous earth from the deposit Veshje - Negotino
D8-2
D9-1
D9-2
D10-1
D10-2
D15
D16
D19
SiO2
65.70
62.70
42.62
85.70
85.20
75.88
85.00
87.02
TiO2
0.50
0.45
0.45
0.10
0.10
0.35
0.16
0.10
Al2O3
13.00
12.50
11.22
3.31
3.06
6.88
3.31
2.24
Fe2O3
4.29
3.72
3.86
1.43
1.14
3.00
2.19
3.07
MnO
0.12
0.06
0.05
MgO
1.98
3.30
1.86
0.50
0.52
1.61
0.65
0.88
CaO
2.73
5.04
19.04
1.68
1.46
3.36
4.40
3.70
Na2O
2.10
3.30
2.70
0.80
1.10
0.90
0.64
0.37
K2O
1.60
2.50
1.80
0.50
0.40
0.80
0.39
0.31
P2O5
1.48
0.40
1.18
SO3
Loss of ignition
7.98
6.80
16.25
5.85
6.80
5.23
3.06
1.47
Total
99.88
99.60
99.80
99.87
99.78
99.61
100.26
100.39
Based on the analyses the average SiO2 content of the entire site was 78.40%, Al2O3 6.40%, CaO 2.20%, Fe2O3 2.60%
and loss during ignition 7.50% (Table 3).
Table 3. Chemical composition of the essential components of Diatomaceous earth in the deposit Veshje - Negotino
SiO2
Al2O3
Fe2O3
CaO
Loss of ignition
Thickness (m)
D1-1
80.00
4.60
1.43
1.40
10.0
0.25
D1-2
66.64
9.43
3.77
2.36
11.0
0.20
D2
77.78
5.60
2.14
2.05
10.0
0.40
D3-1
67.54
15.54
6.86
2.60
6.5
0.30
D3-2
80.21
4.59
1.72
1.41
9.7
0.50
D4
86.05
1.78
0.86
2.00
8.0
0.90
757

PROCEEDINGS
SiO2
Al2O3
Fe2O3
CaO
Loss of ignition
Thickness (m)
D5
80.24
5.10
2.14
1.70
8.4
0.40
D8-1
79.30
5.60
2.08
1.66
9.3
0.20
D8-2
65.70
13.00
4.29
2.70
8.0
0.30
0.45
D9
62.07
12.50
3.72
5.00
7.0
D10-1
85.70
3.31
1.43
1.68
5.8
0.85
D10-2
85.20
3.06
1.14
1.46
6.8
0.40
D15
76.00
6.90
3.00
3.30
5.2
0.50
D16
85.00
3.31
2.20
3.36
3.0
0.60
D19
87.00
2.24
3.07
3.70
1.5
0.50
Undermine
90.00
1.60
0.90
0.50
Total
78.40
6.40
2.59
2.20
7.50
0.58
Generally it could be claimed that the area with the best quality of Diatomaceous earth in the deposit Veshje running east-west on the section between the drills D4 and D10, i.e. in the central part of the investigated area. The
quality gradually decreases to peripheral parts of the deposit.
Under this structure, the diatomaceous earth from the deposit Veshje a quality mineral resource that can be used
for filtration, thermal insulation and many other uses in industry and construction.
Based on geological researches and chemical investigations the average content of useful substances (SiO2) in Diatomaceous earth at the deposit Veshje is 78.40%, with an average thickness of the productive layer 0.60 m.
In future detailed geological surveys in this region that will define the continuity of the productive layer of the wider area, which will increase ore reserves, should continue. It will also answer the question in a former basin of sediment, where the space in which the productive layer thickness appears with its most thickness.
REFERENCES
[1]
Arik, H.,: Synthesis of Si3N4 by the carbo-thermal reduction and nitridation of diatomite. J. Eur. Ceramic Soc., 23: 2005-2014,
2003.
[2]
Boev B.,: Petrology, geochemical and volcanic features of volcanic rocks of the Kozuf Mountain. PhD Thesis, Faculty of Mining
and Geology, tip, 195, 1988.
[3]
Bundevski N.,: Elaborat za istraznite raboti na dijatomejska zemja na objektot Vesje Negotinsko so presmetka na rudnite
rezervi vo 1967 god. Geoloski zavod, Skopje, 1987.
[4]
Elden H., Morsy M., Bakr M.,: Diatomite: Its Characterization, Modifications and Applications. Asian Journal of Materials Science
2 (3): 121-136, 2010.
[5]
Engh K.R., in: Howe-Grant M. (Ed.), KirkOthmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology. vol. 8, fourth ed., Wiley, New York, p. 108,
1993.
[6]
Garevski R.,: Neuer Fund von Mastodon in Diatomeen - schechten bei Barovo, Mazedonien. Fragm. balcan, T. No 7, Skopje, 1960.
[7]
Hristov S., Karajovanovi M., Strakov M.,: Tolkuva za Osnovna Geoloka karta na SFRJ, 1:100 000, List Kavadarci, Geoloki
Zavod, Skopje, 1973.
[8]
Izmajlov N.,: Tikveki ugljenosni basen (sa narocitim osvrtom jezerskog stanja Povardarja). Trudovi na Geoloski zavod NRM, sv. 6,
Skopje, 1958.
[9]
Jenko K.,: Izvestaj (dijatomejska zemja). Struen fond, Skopje, 1946.
[10]
Maksimovi B., Sikoek B., Markovi O., Veselinovi M.,: Geoloki sastav i tektonska struktura jednog dela Oveg Polja i Tikvea
sa paleontolokom dokumentacijom. Geoloki Zavod na NRM, Skopje, Trudovi, sv. 4, pp. 1-177, 1954.
[11]
Mendioroz, S., et al.,: Thermogravimetric study of diatomites. J. Thermal Anal. Calorimetry, 35: 2097-2104, 1989.
[12]
Paschen S.,: Diatomaceous earth extraction, processing and application. Erzmetall, 39: 158-161, 1986.
[13]
Poli A., Jenko K., Joji D.,: Izvetaj za geolokoto kartiranje na poirokata oblast Demir Kapija. Trudovi na Geoloki Zavod na
NRM, Skopje, , sv. 3, 1952.
[14]
Stojanov R.,: Izvetaj za dijatomejskata zemja kaj s. Veje Negotinsko. Struen fond, Skopje, 1955.
[15]
Tsai W.T., Hsien K.J., Lai C.W.,: Chemical Activation of Spent Diatomaceous Earth by Alkaline Etching in the Preparation of Mesoporous Adsorbents. Ind. Eng. Chem. Res. 43, 7513-7520, 2004.
758

PROCEEDINGS
DRAINAGE WELLS CONSTRUCTION

AS PART OF S.E.M. SUVODOL, REK BITOLA
ABSTRACT
The drilling of the wells and the results obtained as well as
the results that will be obtained in the future by drawing
water from the wells will serve as a basis for the development of a Drainage Design at the surface excavation of Suvodol, REK Bitola. Especially important are the results obtained from the individual and group testing of the well,
which helped us get data on the yield of the wells, based on
which corresponding submersible pumps were chosen and
later installed in all of the wells.
Based on the capacity of the wells, the future Designer is
recommended to take into consideration and analyze the
possibility for drilling of drainage wells with somewhat
smaller technical performance compared to the already
drilled ones.
This study will present the hydro geologic characteristics of
the formed aquifers, the scope of the on-site work, the well
drilling methodology and a corresponding conclusion.
Msc Zlatko ILIJOVSKI, grad.eng.geol.1

Stojan MIHAILOVSKI, grad.eng.hydrogeol.2
Dragan NASEVSKI, grad.eng.mine3
Ljupce PETREVSKI, grad.eng.geol.4
Blagoj GJORGIEVSKI, grad.eng.mine4
Mirjana TRPCEVSKI grad.eng.geol.4
Civil Engineering Institute Macedonia,

Skopje, R. Macedonia, geozlatko@gim.com.mk
2
Skopje, R. Macedonia, stojan.mihailovski@gim.com.mk
3
Skopje, R. Macedonia, dragan.nasevski@gim.com.mk
4
ELEM, REK Bitola, Bitola, R. Macedonia, rekbitola@elem.com.mk
Keywords
Drainage, Construction of Wells, Testing Of Wells
1. PREVIEW
The contract obligations predicted construction on part of the structures from Main Mine Project for opening and
exploitation of coal for SE mine Suvodol, part from book 5 protection of the surface exploitation mine from surface and underground waters, partly construction of drainage constructions for performance of cut for opening the
SE mine Suvodol.
Piesometers
Completely were constructed 12 piesometers, PVC casings, and total depth of 1106m.
Wells
Completely were constructed 19 exploitation wells with total depth of 1762 m, with pipes with sand filter, airlifted,
tested and equipped with submersible pumps, electric and hydromechanics equipment. Arround the well pipes, on
terrain surface, there are concrete slabs constructed, on top tinplate houses constructed, for protection of the
equipment for automation of the drainage system. All the wells have the chosen pumps installed, based on the testing.
The wells from the cut are connected in singular surface pipeline, carrying the water to single main water
discharge, and the water from the other wells, with own pipeline, is directed to the existing drainage canal.
Automation of the drainage well system is performed, for water level monitoring and the water level lowering at
the wells and piesometers, and thus providing opportunity for system management form unique dispatch center.
759

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 1. Layout of the projected and constructed wells and piesometers as part of SEM REK Bitola
2. H.G. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SEPARATE AQUIFERS IN SEM, SUVOODOL

The area that the coal SEM affects is located inside the exploitation field of the mine Suvodol and approximates
area of 3 km2, or clearly 1/3 of the total spread area of the main coal layer. Analyzed from geology point of view the
Suvodol mine catches areas from the eastern bordering parts of Pelagonia Neogene basin.
Based on the previous and newest hydro geological investigations and explorations, performed in several phases in
different time period, separation and determination of the types of aquifers is done in regard to the structural
characteristics of the mine Suvodol.
Therefore, as part of the BCS (from higher to lower altitude) are present:
Shallow aquifer
Interlayer aquifer
Bedding aquifer
Shallow aquifer
Shallow aquifer (S) as part of the BCS(Bedding Coal Series), actually represents remaining (part) from the bedding
aquifer from the Main Coal Serial. This aquifer has the largest spread and is detected even out of the borders of the
BCS. The thickness of this aquifer is relative, and is with greatest thickness in the central (synclinal) part, some 60
m, while at the borders the thickness is lowered and then totally depleted.
Occurrence and ground water table level, as part of the shallow aquifer, is registered at all the constructed wells
and piesometers and generally is characterized as non limited water table aquifer. As of the hydro geological function it act as collector, and the bordering parts of the BCS the shallow aquifer acts like hydro geological conductor.
Interlayer aquifer
According the lithology and spatial layout, at this part of the terrain, generally there is separated one interlayer
aquifer (I), and this one is developed from well B-1 to B-3, and at SE it depletes.
760

PROCEEDINGS
The spreading is limited in between the first (upper) coal layer from BCS and the second (lowermost) coal layer. The
thickness of this aquifer occasionally reaches up to 40 m. Generally, underground water under pressure is registered
(sub artesian level), defined by the existing and newly formed piesometric network. Interlayer aquifer, regarding the
lithology is represented as complex of sands and silts, similar to the shallow aquifer.
In regard to the hydro geological point of view, the interlayer aquifer (I) represents underground water collector.
Bedding aquifer
The bedding aquifer is continuously developed in the basal faction, is present and spread in the central (synclinal)
part of the BCS, with greatest thickness under the last bedding coal layer. Regarding the lithology this aquifer is
represented from coal clays, sands and silts. In the lowermost parts of the Miocene-Pliocene basin is detected
(drilled) gruss material with bedrock pieces (gneiss).
This type of aquifer has the underground water under pressure, locally accompanied with gasses, while the newly
constructed bedding wells and piesometers are with sub artesian level.
3. VOLUME OF THE PERFORMED TERRAIN WORKS

In the cut area the first row of exploitation wells is constructed: B-1 to B-12, while the second row of wells B-13 to
B-19 is constructed perpendicular of the feeding direction, on the expected water inflow from north west side to
the part of BCS where the mining activities are present. Total of 19 wells are constructed.
For spatial monitoring of the UWL(UndergroundWaterLevel), as part of this contract are also constructed total of
12 monitoring piesometers (P-1 to P-12). According the project all the piesometers were defined as complete, or
they connects all the types of aquifers. For better monitoring of the influence of the discharge of the wells of the
shallow, interlayer and bedding aquifers,rearrangement of the piesometers is done as shallow, bedding and complete, with goal to separately monitor the water lowering in each aquifer separately (shallow, interlayer and bedding).
Total of 12 piesometers are constructed, with casing with PVC pipes or total length of pipes at 1106m.
Table 1. Performed works
No.
Well symbol
Well
characte-ristics
Depth
by project
(m)
Y of the wells
of the wells
z on top of the wells
Final constructed depth

()
B-1
SIB
109
7 544 158,54
4 545 003,73
566,35
116
B-2
67
7 544 207,76
4 544 978,69
564,54
61
B-3
SIB
126
7 544 258,36
4 544 966,71
563,24
122
B-4
81
7 544 310,53
4 544 944,55
562,03
72
B-5
SB
134
7 544 331,61
4 544 916,48
560,98
121
B-6
88
7 544 358,21
4 544 890,69
560,03
72
B-7
SB
143
7 544 382,81
4 544 879,74
559,63
116
B-8
93
7 544 407,11
4 544 854,87
559,74
73
B-9
96
7 544420,07
4 544 829,70
558,95
74
10
B-10
SB
95
7 544 445,09
4 544 816,75
558,75
72
11
B-11
139
7 544 470,92
4 544 803,22
558,46
93
12
B-12
79
7 544 494,34
4 544 779,10
557,71
66
Second row of wells
BD-1(13)
81
7 544 105,02
4 545 132,39
576,39
BD -2(14)
105
7 544 210,61
4 545 168,36
564,60
125
BD -3(15)
91
7 544 317,09
4 545 203,87
559,87
115
BD -4(16)
80
7 544 421,85
4 545 238,81
563,73
108
BD -5(17)
90
7 544 527,69
4 545 273,25
564,75
101
B -6(18)
90
7 544 635,89
4 544 312,28
567,22
87
BD -7(19)
90
7 544 739,80
4 545 344,74
569,91
66
Designed depth:
1787
Total constructed depth:
1762
761
102

PROCEEDINGS
4. METHODOLOGY OF CONSTRUCTION OF THE EPLOITATION WELLS

The construction of the exploitation wells is consistent of several phases (preparatory works, drilling, casing, filter
material insertion, airlifting and development, and wells testing). Each phase from the construction of the wells is
performed chronologically as previously noted.
Preparatory works
Necessary preparatory works on filed have been done in order to maintain successful, fast and quality construction
of the exploitation wells. Firstly the terrain attributes were analyzed and access roads were planned and work platform at the marked locations for construction of the wells. Then digging for technical water basins was done and
securing of sufficient amounts of technical water, as drilling fluid, and later for airlifting and development in phase
of filter granulate insertion. Knowing the hydro geological terrain constitution, actually the types of the aquifers,
the underground water level character, previously manual digging of wells up to depth of 5m was done, diameter of
1100mm, and preliminary steel columns were inserted with diameter of 1000mm and thickness of 5mm.
Digging of the wells
Knowing the hydro geological terrain constitution, actually the types of the aquifers, the underground water level
character, previously manual digging of wells up to depth of 5m was done, diameter of 1100mm, and preliminary
steel columns were inserted with diameter of 1000mm and thickness of 5mm.
The area between the preliminary steel column and the well is filled with cement milk with water cement ratio of
0,7.
From the preliminary steel columns bottom, to the required depth, machine drilling is introduced with drill head
diameter of 820mm.
Conditioned on the project demand, hydro geological characteristics of the lithology formations, the wells purpose,
as well as from guaranteed functionality of the same, the drilling of the wells was performed only with usage of
clean water, rotary reverse drilling (in the whole depth). The reverse drilling system was as inner airlift. The drilling
3
rig was equipped with compressor of 14 bar 12m /min. The drilling rig used was ,FRASTE 300(Figure 2).
Figure 2. Technical water basin
Casing of the wells

In the wells, after the drilling well filter pipes are incorporated, in the full length of the well with sand filter, with
diameter 320/250 mm.
PVC pipes are with wall thickness of 15mm, perforated with parallel openings (slices), with width of 2,5mm and min
perforation of 15%. The PVC pipes are cased with layer of 18 of quartz granulated sand with sand granules from
762

PROCEEDINGS
0.8 to 1.2mm, exception at B-8 where filter with granules of 1,2mm to 1,6mm is used. Between the granules and
the surrounding well construction the granules are glued with epoxy resins.
The quartz sand filter porosity is 20-25%. The flow capacity of the sand filter pipes, with several field
measurements, showed 16 - 20 l/s for piece of L=2m (pipe).
The well pipes are positioned in the central part of the well, therefore equal amount of filter material is secured
around the well construction.
With that purpose along the full length of the well construction, in intervals of 10m, four sided centralizers from
zinc-steel are installed, with diameter of 720mm.
Figure 3. Quartz/sand-filter pipes
Granulated gravel filter insertion

After well construction is lowered, the space between the wall of the well and the well construction is filled with
granulated sand and gravel, with -granules of 1-3mm. With granulated gravel is filled the space some 5m below terrain line to final depth of the well, and the remaining part is filled with clay tampon and surrounding material.
Cleaning and development of the wells
The process of cleaning of the well is started when the filter material is inserted, in which the well is cleaned with
water pumping inside the pipe construction.
After the performed cleaning, with clean water, chronological development is done (separation) of the wells with
method ,airlifting with compressed air insertion inside the well.
The cleaning was performed for several hours, until clean water appeared, or sand content in water of less than 100
g/m3.
Testing of the wells and choice of pumps
For definition of the hydro geological and hydro dynamic parameters of the wells, as well as the correct choice of
the submersible pumps, single well testing is performed for all 19 (nineteen) wells, as well as group testing.
Single well testing was done with so called step-test, with three or four different pump capacities, for 24 hours
per well, with maximum well capacities, Figure 4.
763

PROCEEDINGS
Table 2. Results from individual(single) and group well testing
Figure 4. Single well testing B-4, with 35 l/sec
Group testing is done for two groups of neighboring wells, adequately B-1, B-2 , B-3 B-4, B-5, B-6. The testing duration period was 72 hours, per group of wells. The group testing daily books is shown as table Appendix No.11/1 11/6. From the acquired results from the group testing conclusion was drawn that the simultaneous work of group
of wells results in lowering of their yield for 20 30%.
764

PROCEEDINGS
5. CONCLUSION
Analyzing the data from the performed field works at BCS, mine Suvodol, the following can be summarized and
recomended:
In accordance with Contract from 11.08.2011 between Civil Engineering Institute Makedonija JS Skopje,
as Contractor and ELEM, as Client, in SE BCS REK Bitola, mine Suvodol, total of 19 wells are constructed
(surface and bedding) with total depth of 1762m and 12 monitoring piesometers with total depth of 1109m.
With the present scope of performed hydro geological constructions in the zone of the cut in BCS REK Bitola, great part from the hydro geological problematic is solved, but still there is to be mentioned that there
are still hydrological problems for which purpose of solving additional hydro geological constructions are
needed for complete draining of the exploitation field, jointly with additional design documentation for
drainage of the BCS for certain period, recommended five year period.
Based on the capacity of the wells it is recommended that the future designer to consider and analyze variant for performance of drainage wells with some lower performances than the already constructed ones.
LITERATURE
[1]
Report from the performed hydro geological reinvestigations for the bedding coal series in Suvodol Civil Engineering Institute
Makedonija, September 2006
[2]
Elaborate for hydro geological characteristics of the coal basin Suvodol- Bitola, Geoloski Zavod Skopje, 1975
[3]
Coals in Macedonia, Andreevski B.
765

PROCEEDINGS
RESULTS FROM THE MOST RECENT GEOLOGIC

INVESTIGATIONS OF THE COAL MINE MARIOVO
ABSTRACT
Laste IVANOVSKI1
Zlatko ILIOVSKI2
Elizabeta RALEVA3
Civil Engineering Institute Makedonija

JSc, R. Macedonia
1
laste.ivanovski@gim.com.mk
2
geozlatko@gim.com.mk
3
elizabeta.raleva@gim.com.mk
Studies of coal mines and their preparation for exploitation is an extremely

complex task that requires a multidisciplinary approach. In the research
phase of particular importance are drilling, geological, geomechanical and
hydrogeological investigations. These studies are based on the following
principles: gradation, completeness, smoothness and cost-effectiveness.
This paper shows the results of the performed calculations for quality and
coal reserves in the Mariovo coal deposits. The type and the scope of investigations in this site comprehensively treats all the geological and geotechnical aspects.
The deposit is a potential coal mine, which in future could be opened by underground mining method.
Keywords
Coal, Deposit, Mineral Resource
1. INTRODUCTION
General characteristics
The coal-lignite mine is located at around 30 km, as the crow flies, southeast of the city of Prilep in the region of
Mariovo between the villages of Vitolishte, Polchishte, Bezishte and Manastir, where substantial geologic, engineering-geologic, hydrogeologic and geomechanic investigations and tests were conducted.
The terrain which was subject of investigations and tests is an area of around 15 km2. This investigated terrain is in
fact a part of the Mariovo Neogene basin.
The investigations so far have revealed that this is a lignite and coal-bearing layer, developed in the east and central part of the Neogene Mariovo basin. From a morphologic point of view the terrain represents a hilly plateau surrounded by mountains.
Figure 1. Orientation map of the wider region
766

PROCEEDINGS
Geologic composition of the mine

In terms of the geologic composition of the mine, these are the existing lithologic formations:
Floor formation of gravels, sands and clays (GP-M3 )
Coal-bearing formation coal layer (J-M3 )
Formation of siltstones, siltstone marl, claystones (TR-M3 )
Formation of sands, siltstones, loams and gravels (AL-P - Pl )
Volcanogenic - sediment formations (Pl,Q )
Quartz latite agglomerates and tuffa (
Quartz latite breccia (

Tufaceous limestones, tufa, travertine and onyx (Bi- Pl,Q )
Proluvium (pr )
Diluvium ( d )
Alluvium (l)
Figure 2. Characteristic longitudinal profile of the mine
Previous investigations and tests

In the past the Mariovo Neogene basin was subject to many different geologic investigations, as well as some mine
work.
The beginning of the first coal investigations in the region of Mariovo dates as back as 1974. The investigations
were conducted by the Institute of Geology in Skopje in four stages. There were a total of 55 investigation boreholes drilled, of which 36 were positive and 19 were negative with a total length of 6730 meters. As a result of the
investigations, the following was obtained:
one coal layer, situated in the east and central part of the Pliocene basin
the layer is generally of mild inclination towards west
the coal layer is of NNE-SSW orientation
the thickness of the coal layer is between 1.3 and 14.9 m or an average of 8.1 m
The low average caloric value is 1.824 kilocalories
Established age Mid-Pliocene
Established reserves - B + C1= 111.264.840 tones of coal at an area of 13.86 km2
Average coal bearing capacity - 8.025.300 tones of coal at an area of 1 km2
In 1984 Mines and the factory Partizan in Prilep conducted their own investigations, but this time in the section of
the mine Mariovo, i.e. in Revir Manastir and around the Vitolishte village. An area of 340 ha was investigated and 56
structural boreholes were drilled in Revir Manastir of which 39 were positive and 7 were negative (this refers to the
767

PROCEEDINGS
46 boreholes for which there are actual records) with a total depth of 4780.4 m (referring to the 56 boreholes). The
results from these investigations are the following:
The average thickness of the coal layer is 8 12 m
The reserves established are A+B+C1= 21.695.472 tones of coal, of which 20.635.160 tones of coal belong to
Revir Manastir while the Vitolishte surface excavations SE1 and SE2 are not cost-effective
In terms of the hydrogeology, the mine has been investigated very little and those few results that remain are just
general indicators of the hydrogeologic conditions in the mine.
Table 1. Table of the reserves from the investigation works conducted in the past
2. TYPES, SCOPE AND METHODOLOGY OF THE ADDITIONAL INVESTIGATIONS, 2009 - 2010 STAGE
Concept and methodology of investigations
The existing mine issues deserve a comprehensive approach from all aspects. In that regard, the additional investigations and tests in this stage have been methodologically chosen to obtain relevant parameters for rational and
safe design of the technology of the underground excavation. The concept applied in these investigations is based
above all on the following principles: gradation, completeness, smoothness and cost-effectiveness. According to
these principles, the type and scope of the investigation works in this mine have treated all of the geologic, hydrogeologic and geomechanic aspects. Complex on-site, laboratory and desk work was carried out.
768

PROCEEDINGS
Type and scope of geologic investigations and tests

Table 2. Table overview of the scope of some of the more important investigation works
Item
Description of Works
Unit
Measure
Qty per
Measure
DRILLING WORKS
Geologic, hydrogeologic and geomechanical investigation drilling of 90 investigation boreholes with a depth of 50-260 m
m'
10 620
GEOLOGIC WORKS
Mapping (reambulation) of the wider region in a scale of 1:10,000 from a geologic point of
view
km2
20
Geologic mapping of the core and sampling
m'
10 500
GEOLOGIC LABORATORY WORKS
Technical analyses of coal
analysis
170
Elementary analyses
analysis
55
Composition and solubility
analysis
30
Grindability
analysis
20
Petrographic tests
analysis
15
Petrographic analyses of the surrounding rocks
analysis
20
Speciments for defining radioactivity
analysis
10
HYDROGEOLOGIC AND ENGINEERING-GEOLOGIC WORKS
Hydrogeologic and engineering-geologic mapping of the terrain
km2
20
Installation of piezometers in 64 structural boreholes and in 11 barren boreholes, a total of

75, overlying, floor and intermediary.
m'
7 800
Testing of the water permeability in the field per Le Francs method in the overlying soil,
floor and the intermediary layer.
test
35
ENGINEERING-GEOLOGIC AND LABORATORY TESTS
Compressive strength of coal, tufa, Tuff etc;
test
70
Tensile strength per the Brazilian method;
test
70
Strength index of coal, tufa, Tuff etc;
test
150
Shear strength of contacts or along joints;
test
12
Cutting strength of coal;
test
10
Coal durability.
test
10
GEOMECHANICAL LABORATORY ANALYSES
GAS BEARING CAPACITY AND IMFLAMMABILITY
Defining the inflammability of coal;
samples
22
Flammable and explosive characteristics of coal dust;
samples
22
Aggressive characteristics of coal dust;
samples
22
Defining the gas bearing capacity on coal specimens
samples
22
3. QUALITATIVE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE COAL

Technical analysis of coal
The technical analysis of coal comprised of a detailed inspection of all of the protocols from past investigations, i.e.
analyses in order to give a better insight into the results obtained from the technical analyses of the coal for 132
positive boreholes with a total of 288 specimens.
As criterion for a positive specimen weve taken the caloric value of 1.000 ccal/kg, i.e. 4.170 kJ/kg.
769

PROCEEDINGS
Table 3. Table overview of the calculation of the quality of coal
4. COAL RESERVES
The ultimate goal of every investigation, among other
things, is to also calculate the quantity of the useful substance which represents the basic parameter in assessing
the value of the mine, defining the investment funds
needed for opening the mine as well as establishing the
annual capacity of production. An estimate of the total
ore reserves in the mine has been made without taking
into account their usability potential. These are in fact
geologic ore reserves. If the reserves are regarded from a
technical-economic aspect, it is clear that one part of
the geologic reserves will stay unused from various reasons (excavation method, technical-technologic conditions, low caloric value, processing method etc.). These
are off-balance ore reserves whereas the reserves that
can be used are balance ore reserves.
Table 4. Table overview of the calculation of coal reserves
In the calculation of the geologic ore reserves of coal

from the Mariovo mine, except for the results from these
investigations, weve also taken into account the results
from previous investigations and tests. When classifying
the ore reserves in this study, LHV (lowest heating value)
770

PROCEEDINGS
of coal is the crucial parameter. Coal with a caloric value higher than 4170 kJ/kg has been taken into account when
calculating the so-called geologic ore balance ore reserves whereas coal with a caloric value higher than 6500 kJ/kg
makes the so-called balance ore reserves. The ore reserves have been calculated per the block method and the control method of parallel profiles.
The method of parallel block profiles, which uses the transversal geologic profiles from 6-6 to 36-36 has arrived at
the following values:
Total geologic reserves +B+C1= 99.100.843 t, the difference compared to the block method is 2.39%.
Total balance reserves (LHV > 6500kJ/kg) +B+C1= 73.324.068 t, the difference compared to the block method is
4.16%.
5. TECHNICAL-ECONOMIC ASSESSMENT
When coming up with the technical-economic assessment, all of the major factors and indicators characteristic of
the Mariovo mine were taken into consideration. The calculations of the economic (value) assessment have been
made based on the following indicators:
The balance reserves of 70.269.039 t have been reduced by 10%; these are in fact the exploitable losses;
The time (deadline) for exploitation has been calculated at 38.7 years obtained based on the geologic ore reserves of 96.727.876 t and an annual capacity of 2.500.000 t.
When making the economic appraisal, the exploitation time of 25.3 years was taken into consideration, arrived at from the exploitation ore reserves (balance reserves reduced by 10%) of 63.242.135 tones and an
annual capacity of 2.500.000 t.
The profit calculated at 3.16 euro/tone, obtained from the sales price and reduced by the exploitable and
other costs;
The calculation of the value (economic) assessment has been made based on Hoskolds formula and amounts
to 73.831.776 euro, which gives the current value (economic) assessment and paints a better picture of the
size of the upcoming profits from the Mariovo mine.
6. CONCLUSIONS
The additional investigation works in the 2009-2010 stage were of complex character. When they were conducted,
the designers of the main mine design had an insight into the very investigation process and in some stages gave
their own suggestions. More precisely, the on-site, laboratory and desk geologic, hydrogeologic, engineeringgeologic and geomechanical investigations and tests have provided thorough analyses of the given issues. The
results obtained are a good-quality basis for the development of a main mine design for opening an underground
excavation in the exploitation of the coal mine Mariovo.
REFERENCES
[1]
Proekt za geoloshki i geomehanichki istrazhuvanja, doistrazhuvanja i ispituvanja na jaglenovoto naogjalishte Mariovo-Univerzitet

Sveti Kiril i Metodij-Gradezhen Fakultet Skopje, maj 2009;
[2]
Zavrshen izveshtaj za istrazhuvanjata na jaglen vo Mariovo 1974-77 Kniga 1- Geoloshki zavod- Skopje,1977;
[3]
Izveshtaj za postignatite rezultati pri istrazhuvanjeto na lezhishteto Mariovo so pregled za ponatamoshnite aktivnosti-Rudnici i f-ka
Partizan Prilep, septemvri 1984;
[4]
Dokumentacija od tekovna analiza i obrabotka na podatocite vo ramkite na realizacijata na dopolnitelnite istrazhuvanja i ispituvanja
faza 2009-2010 god.
771

PROCEEDINGS
RESULTS FROM NEWEST GEOLOGICAL

INVESTIGATIONS OF COAL DEPOSIT ZIVOJNO
ABSTRACT
Elizabeta RALEVA1
Zlatko ILIJOVSKI2
Laste IVANOVSKI3
Trifun MILEVSKI4
1
Civil Engineering Institute MACEDONIA A.D. Skopje, R. Macedonia, elizabeta.raleva@gim.com.mk

2
Civil Engineering Institute MACEDONIA A.D. Skopje, R. Macedonia, geozlatko@gim.com.mk
3
Civil Engineering Institute MACEDONIA A.D. Skopje, R. Macedonia,
laste.ivanovski@gim.com.mk
4
J.S. ELEM Skopje, R. Macedonia, trifum.milevski@elem.com.mk
During 2011 and 2012 in the coal deposit

Zivojno were conducted extensive research in order together with previous
research and testing to provide a satisfactory level of exploration of this important site. These studies represent a
starting point for developing the mining
project and design investments for opening the mining capacity and coal mining,
which for us is a strategic mineral resource.
Keywords
Coal, Deposit, Mineral Resource
1. INTRODUCTION
Coal deposit "Zivojno" was known long time ago. With short breaks, it was exploited with small capacity during and
after first world war (1917 - 24), as well as during and after second world war (1942 - 51). Exploitation was done in
several pits near w.Zivojno. In that period numerous geological investigations ware done also.
More organized and more intense investigations ware done during 1966-67, 1973, 1982,1983-1984, as well as newest during 2011-12 year.
Figure 1. Coal outgrowth
Figure 2. Terrain morphology
Till now, on area of over 20km2 160 investigation boreholes ware done, with total lenght of 16482m from previous
investigations, and 141 investigation boreholes with 15707m with newest investigations from 2011-12. Purpose of
these investigation was to define qualitative - quantitative parameters of the coal, genetic, geological, structuraltectonic, hydro-geological, engineering-geological, and geomechanical characteristics of coal and surrounding rock
masses.
772

PROCEEDINGS
In text that follows, all of the parameters that resulted from these investigations will be shown with its parameters
which are very important for its economic evaluations and possible exploitation.
2.
DISCRIPTION OF THE DEPOSIT
The deposit that is object of detail geological investigations "Zivojno" is situated in SW part of r.Macedonia, and it
is section of Pelagonian Basen. This deposit is situated around 30 km south-east from Bitola, and 10 km from
deposit Brod-Gneotino and 20km from thermoelectrical power plant REK "Bitola".
Figure 3. Overview map of coal deposits in "Pelagonija"
This investigation area is situated in district of w.Zivojno, Bac and Germijan, near Macedonian - Greeg border.
In former documentation numerous names for this deposit is given: "Zivojno", "Zivojno-Germijan", "Germijan-Brod"
althea it concerns one same deposit with same geological characteristics.
The Borders of the deposit is not totally defined. The deposit continues towards south and south-west continues in
Greece, while towards NW it continues towards deposit Brod-Gneotino. From west side the deposit is not limited,
and as result of preliminary investigations it sinks in bigger depths.
3. GEOLOGICAL FACTORS
With analysis of coal deposit area, as well as results from present investigations we can conclude the following:
In coal mine "Zivojno" in upper layer of the productive horizon there is coal layer (main coal layer), while in
the bedding part coal is divided in 1 to 5 lairs with interlayer's of charts material (glay dust, sand, coal clay
and else).
The border between bedding sediments and coal layer is sharp and clear, while in bedding is divided in to interlayer.
773

PROCEEDINGS
The thickness of the main coal layer is vitiating from 0.4m to max.9.05m. It has continuous spreading on surface of around 20km2, while bedding coal layers are with smaller more variable thickness, and with frequent
inclining (they don't have continuous speeding as the main layer).
Coal layers are sub horizontal and a little billow with dip from 0 to 900. They are overtaken with intense tectonics by whish they appear as discontinuous blocks with vertical denivelations up to 30m.
Depth of spreading of those coal layers is dependable from morphology of terrain, as well as post ore tectonics. Coal layer near w.Zivojno in eroded parts is appearing at the surface (Figure 2), while in some parts it is
established on max. depth of 176.8m. If concerning calculated middle depth from 94.8, in that case deposit
Zivojno can be defined as middle depth deposit.
Coal from this mine belong to the group of lignite type, like all of other coal appearances in our country.
There is thigh connection between geological and genetic factors. They actually define the way and condition of
creation of coal deposits. In coal deposit Zivojno there is one productive coal layer in upper horizon, and several in
bedding part which are formed in continental conditions, in sweet water lake environment, which development
goes parallel to accumulation of the organic material. Parallel with sedimentation of the organic material, significant amount of clay and sandy material was sloping, especially in bedding part, which inflicted inter layering of the
coal deposit.
Figure 4. Longitudinal and transversal profiles of "Zivojno" deposit
4. QUANTITY AND METHODOLOGY OF PERFORMED INVESTIGATION WORKS IN THE DEPOSIT

Table 1. Quantity and methodology of performed investigations
Pos.
Description of accomplished works
SURVEY WORKS (Geodetic)
Geodetic works (survey and locating of research works)
II
DRILLING WORKS
Unit
Tot.quantity
Quantity
141
Geological drilling with excerption of the core 80 - 100%, starting diameter 146 mm, and
finilized 86 mm
m'
15.375
4.602
1a
Up to 100 m
m'
101 - 150 m
m'
8.431
151 - 200 m
m'
2.342
Ineffectual drilling (Expanding drilling) part from hydrogeological drillings for underfloor piezometers
m'
2.316
Ineffectual drilling for overlying piezometers
m'
2.067
Drill Control
m'
332
774

PROCEEDINGS
Pos.
Description of accomplished works
III
GEOLOGICAL WORKS
Mapping (re-ambulation) scale 1:10.000
Tot.quantity
20
Geological mapping of the core, sampling and shortening
m'
15.707
Technical analysis of the coal
analysis
545
Basic analysis
analysis
48
Composition and melting
analysis
24
km
Grinding
analysis
24
Petrographic researches
analysis
10
Petrographic analysis of the surrounding bedrocks
analysis
10
Chemical analysis of the surrounding bedrocks(rarely elements)
analysis
30
10
Sample for definition of radioactivity
analysis
22
11
Geophysical Karotage
2.157
IV
Unit
HYDROGEOLOGICAL AND ENGENEER-GEOLOGICAL WORKS
Hydrogeological and geological engeenering mapping
m'
7.923
Research of the waterproof in field conditions using Le Franc method
test
42
Abbreviated chemical analysis from underground water
piece
10
Complete chemical analysis form underground water samples
piece
10
Radiological analysis form underground water samples
piece
10
Strength of pressure on coal, limestone, tuff and other petrified bedrocks
test
40
Strength tightening using Brazil method
test
40
Index of the coal strength, limestone, tuff and other petrified bedrocks
test
100
Strength the shear along the contact or cracks
test
15
10
Strength of burning coal
test
15
11
Durability of coal
test
10
GEOMECHANICAL WORKS
Geomechanical mapping of core
m'
7.564
Granulometric test
test
303
Borders of consistency
test
23
Specific Weight
test
132
Natural moist and compactivity ( "in situ")
test
132
Volume weight in natural form
test
130
Triaxial examinations of non porous soil materials
test
43
Direct shear test
test
42
Residual strength
test
30
10
Compactivity
test
42
11
Pervious test
test
34
12
Proctor test
test
15
13
Examination of composite materials
test
10
14
Swelling
test
20
VI
GAS CONCENTRACION AND SELF INFLAMEING
Examination for self flaming
test
25
Flaming and explosive characteristics of coal dust
test
25
Aggressive characteristic of coal dust
test
25
Defining gas capacity
test
25
775

PROCEEDINGS
5. QUALITY AND RESERVES OF COAL

Quality of mineral deposit
As main parameter for defining the quality of the mineral resource (coal), Lowest Heating Value was taken. During
calculation of quality, criteria for LHV > 4170kJ/kg was taken. During which middle pondered value of 8558kJ/kg for
main coal layer was attained, and 7.901kJ/kg LHV fro all layers in total. During calculation of the quality, all result
from total investigations ware taken in consider (66; 73; 82-83; 2011/12).
Table 2. Calculation of the quality of coal by investigated borehole
All layers
S - sulfur
Year of performed
thickness
(m)
moist
(%)
1966/67
33.67
41.24
1974
76.4
48.24
1982
128.85
49.33
1983/84
393.2
2011/12
1006.20
overall average of all years
1638.32
ash
(%)
Heat value
burn.
mater.
(%)
upper
(kJ/kg)
lower
(kJ/kg)
31.66
49.07
12977
10683
24.21
40.99
10932
9371
17.57
19.36
37.03
12332
7868
30.57
16.02
21.37
37.46
10111
8537
32.80
13.71
19.94
33.73
8883
7452
31.84
14.83
20.68
35.54
9629
C -fiks
(%)
evap.
mater.
(%)
29.23
19.61
27.55
16.80
0.69
31.47
0.20
0.72
0.26
0.61
0.26
0.63
total
S
(%)
S in
ash
(%)
burned
S
(%)
koks
(%)
9.63
0.74
0.35
0.38
10.75
0.68
0.19
0.49
13.58
1.09
0.45
47.62
14.64
0.89
46.57
19.14
0.83
47.01
17.04
0.85
7901
General layer
S - sulfur
Year of performed
thickness
(m)
moist
(%)
ash
(%)
1966/67
33.67
41.24
1974
76.4
48.24
1982
96.05
50.52
11.81
1983/84
256.6
48.56
2011/12
636.00
48.06
1098.72
48.20
Heat value
burned
S
(%)
koks
(%)
Cfiks
(%)
evap.
mater.
(%)
burn.
mater.
(%)
upper
(kJ/kg)
lower (kJ/kg)
10683
total S
(%)
S in
ash
(%)
9.63
0.74
0.35
0.38
29.23
19.61
29.46
49.07
12977
10.75
0.68
0.19
0.49
27.55
16.80
24.21
40.99
10932
9371
1.02
0.43
0.59
29.76
17.80
19.96
37.78
9800
8087
11.40
0.86
0.21
0.73
28.29
16.99
22.91
39.84
10893
9284
15.06
0.74
0.22
0.52
29.88
14.82
21.36
36.31
9698
8136
13.45
0.79
0.24
0.57
29.32
15.87
22.05
37.98
10172
8564
Rest of layers
S - sulfur
Year of performed
thickness
(m)
moist
(%)
ash
(%)
total S
(%)
S in
ash
(%)
burned
S
(%)
koks
(%)
Cfiks
(%)
evap.
mater.
(%)
Heat value
burn.
mater.
(%)
upper
(kJ/kg)
lower (kJ/kg)
7226
1982
32.8
45.83
18.78
1.30
0.53
0.99
36.50
16.90
17.61
34.83
8841
1983/84
131.4
46.19
21.17
0.95
0.18
0.78
35.25
14.13
18.52
32.65
8652
7125
2011/12
354.95
44.06
26.49
1.00
0.35
0.79
38.20
11.83
17.57
29.43
7515
6161
519.15
44.71
24.66
1.00
0.32
0.80
37.34
12.73
17.81
30.59
7887
6472
Table 3. Calculation of quality of coal (in reserves)
S - sulfur
ash
(%)
burn.
mater.
(%)
Suma
blocks
124
48,04
14,06
0,71
0,23
0,52
29,11
15,01
21,58
36,79
9868
8346
87
47,59
12,91
0,81
0,23
0,67
29,24
16,26
22,54
38,92
10389
8830
C1
53
51,08
14,36
1,04
0,29
0,75
37,01
21,67
27,25
48,92
11108
9298
+B
211
47,89
13,68
0,75
0,23
0,57
29,15
15,42
21,90
37,49
10040
8506
+B+C1
264
48,36
13,78
0,79
0,24
0,59
30,31
16,34
22,69
39,17
10197
8623
Total
S
(%)
776
S in
ash
(%)
burned
S
(%)
koks
(%)
evap.
mater.
(%)
Ctegory of reserves by blocks
moist
(%)
Heat value
Cfiks
(%)
upper
h.v.
(kJ/kg)
lower
h.v
(kJ/kg)

PROCEEDINGS
Coal reserves
Coal deposits in Zivojno ware calculated by two methods: method of blocks (calculative), and and paralel profiles
(as controlled one). During calculation of ore deposits, all calculation from previous investigation ware taken in
consider. By method of blocks only coal deposit for coal vith LHV > 4170 kJ/kg was considered. calculations ware
made separatli for the main coal layer, and all together. For main coal layer, 74075850 tons of (A+B+C1category)
ware calculated. While total geological ore reserves for all reserves coal layers are calculated on 101,684,408 tons
(+B+C1 category).
Figure 5. Coal fron main coal layer
Average thickness of the ore body and the average thickness of slag
The thickness of the general coal layer in the Zivojno ranges between 0.5 to a maximum of 9,05 m. The average
thickness of the main coal layer is 4,25m. The minimum thickness of tailings at this deposit over the main coal layer
is 12m, while the maximum 176m, or is obtained by averaging 104m. The thickness of the stripping material over
the coal seam depends on the morphology of the terrain and structuraltectonic activity . The stripping coefficient
is calculated as the ratio of the mean thickness over coal slag and the average thickness of the main coal layer, and
is k=24.88.
Table 4. Calculation of coal reserves by method of blocks
Table for calculation of ore deposits by meth of blocks

- Coal deposit "Zivojno" (phase 2011/12)
A reserves (t)
B reserves (t)
A+B reserves (t)
C1 reserves (t)
A++C1 reserves (t)
26.508.036,90
38.738.004,66
65.246.041,56
36.438.366,01
101.684.407,57
Main
layer
16.605.843,15
29.464.515,48
46.070.358,63
27.987.491,89
74.057.850,52
Rest of layers
9.902.193,75
9.273.489,18
19.175.682,93
8.450.874,12
27.626.557,05
All layers
Table 5. Calculation of coal reserves by method of paralel profiles
Table for calculation of ore deposits by meth of parallel profiles

- Coal deposit "Zivojno" (phase 2011/12)
All layers
Total reserves +B+C (t)
103.082.579,54
Main layer
74.153.441,58
Rest of layers
28.929.137,96
777

PROCEEDINGS
6. ECHNO-ECONOMIC EVALUATION
The technical-economic assessment is an important part of the investigations and the tests for this mineral resource. The assessment is a methodological procedure which consists of the very important geologic, technicalexploitation, economic and other factors, which produce the indicators used to define the possibility for exploitation of the coal resource from this mine. The technical-economic assessment of the coal mine Zivojno depends on
the following factors: geologic, genetic, technical-exploitation (mining), technological, regional, market and social
economic factors.
In the coal mine Zivojno, in the uppermost productive horizon there is one coal layer (main coal layer), whereas in
the floor section the coal is divided into 1-5 layers, with interbeds and layers of stripping material (clayey silt, sand,
coal clay etc).
The thickness of the main coal layer ranges from 0.5 to up to 9.05 m with an average thickness of 4.25 m. It is evenly distributed on an area of around 20 km2 whereas the floor coal layers are of smaller and more variable thickness
and frequently wedge out (are not as evenly distributed as the main coal layer).
With the sedimentation of organic material, unclean clay and sand silty material also started to deposit, especially
on the floor, which has brought about the delamination of the coal.
If we take into account the depth of the coal layer/layers, their thickness and the quite high stripping coefficient,
we can come to a general conclusion on the exploitation method in this mine. The most acceptable method would
be the underground (pit) exploitation of the coal.
With all this in mind and by taking into account the experience from similar mines, the most acceptable method for
excavation of layered ore bodies with these characteristics is the method of wide open cut of the overlying cover.
The minimum thickness of the stripping in this mine over the main coal layer is 12.8 m whereas the maximum 177
m, or an average value of 104 m while the stripping coefficient k=24.88 m.
If we take into account the exploitation ore reserves only from the main coal layer and the estimated annual capacity of 2.500.000 t, the exploitation time is estimated at 25.18 years.
In the calculation of the economic assessment of the Zivojno mine, the following parameters were taken into consideration: anticipated annual income (A) of 6.000.000 euro, annual capacity of 2.500.000 t coal and income of 2.4
euro/ton; the normal accumulative rate (r) has been adopted at 3 % (according to Hoskold it is most commonly 35%, the speculative rate (r1) has been adopted at 8% and the exploitation time (n) was estimated at 25.18 years.
All calculations were made by using Hoskolds formula, which helps paint a better picture of the size of the upcoming profits from the Zivojno mine, which in conditions of today is estimated at 55.995.950 euro.
7. CONCLUSIONS
These investigations are in fact a continuation of the investigations and tests which were conducted in 1967, 1973
and 1981-1984.
The coal-lignite mine is located on the peripheral southeastern part of the Pelagonija basin between the villages of
Zivojno, Bach and Germijan and the investigations were conducted at area of around 20 km2.
In the course of the investigations, the designers of the main mine design had an insight into the very investigation
process and in some stages gave their own suggestions. More precisely, the on-site, laboratory and desk geologic,
hydrogeologic, engineering-geologic and geomechanical investigations and tests have provided thorough analyses
of the given issues. The results obtained are a good-quality basis for the development of a main mine design.
REFERENCES
[1]
Andreevski.B.: Jagleni vo Makedonija;
[2]
Elaborat za klasifikacija, kategorizacija i presmetka na rudnite rezervi od jaglenovo naogjalishte Zhivojno Skopje - GIM 2011-12
god.
[3]
Elaborat za rudni rezervi Skopje -Geozavod- 1984 god. (Kniga I, II, III)
[4]
Izveshtaj za rezultatite od prethodnoto istrazhuvanje na lignit vo lignitonosniot basen Zhivojno-Germijan- Bitola Geobiro - 1967
god.
[5]
Izveshtaj za geoloshkite istrazhuvanja na jaglenoto lezhishte Germijan - Brod Skopje Geozavod- 1982 god.
778

PROCEEDINGS
ORE MICROSCOPY ANALYSIS METHODS

IN MINERAL CONCENTRATION PROCESSES
ABSTRACT
Rudolf TOMANEC1
Predrag LAZI
Radmila GAINA
Sanja BAJI
Faculty of Mining and Geology, Belgrade University, 11000 Belgrade,

Serbia
1
tomanec@rgf.bg.ac.rs
Differential behaviour of Pb-Zn-Cu ore in milling and consequent of these

minerals are confirmed in this work. The characterization of textural properties of minerals is closely related to the process of their respective liberation.
Relative milling properties of minerals in the given ore are determined during the comminution, and the optimum liberation degree is established for
each mineral.
The result of tests aimed to improve the recovery and the grade of galena,
marmatite and chalcopyrite concentrate in flotation plant Rudnik are presented in this paper. The Rudnik deposit is made of the complex Pb-Zn-(CuFe) ore that becomes poorer and of more and more complex texture depth
of exploitation increase.
The methods of ore microscopic analysis were used during the realization of
technological (and laboratory) tests. The data collected from certain processing phases in the flotation plant served as an explanation for the causes
of certain behaviour patterns.
By using the method presented, the assumption that the chemical analysis
as a tool for raw material monitoring during the flotation concentration is
simply not sufficient was confirmed, especially for very complex texture and
poor sulphide-oxide ores.
Keywords
Applied Ore Microscopy, Milling Properties of Minerals, Selective Mineral Liberation,
Modal Analysis, Flotation Concentration
1. INTRODUCTION
The study of particles aggregated crystals of the fragmented raw material is particularly complex, relatively long
lasting procedure that demands well educated staff in applicative ore microscopy and the appropriate equipment.
The aim of the modal mineralogical analysis methods is that in an immediate style by ore microscopy methods
analysis, micrometrical methods and statistical data acquisition, provide the researcher or an engineer in the plant
with necessary data on aggregate size, habit and types of intergrowth, degree of liberation and the whole series of
other data in all processing phases (grinding, classification, concentration) and for all concentration products
(crude ore, concentrate, middling, tailings). [2, 5]
Just one segment from the large scale project carried out for the Rudnik mine company, aiming to enhance the
recovery and the concentrate grade, for predominantly poorer ore parties is presented here. The procedure of the
method and the way for solution of these tasks by modal mineralogical analysis (ore microscopy analysis) as the
only possible and straight method are presented (Figure 1).
779

PROCEEDINGS
10
Zinc-Pyrite selective flotation
Zn
concentrate
4
Zinc circuit
Zn flotation
underflow
11
12
Tailings
Copper circuit
Cu flotation
underflow
Cu
concentrate
Lead circuit
Pb
concentrate
Figure 1. The simplified flowchart of the flotation circuit with marked points of sampling for microscopic research. [5]
The basics of the research methods

The mineralogical analysis method in applicative ore microscopy can offer the basic parameters predominantly for
the benefit of mineral processing in predictive and investigative research. [4]
The predictive modal research consists of rock material tests (of the source ore) or the mineralized raw material samples collected in the field (drill core, rock fragments and other types of samples collected at the
deposit) in order to provide an overview on the mineralogical characteristics of the prospect material. These
tests provide a whole series of useful information required for the process of the concentration, mineral
processing plant design, together with information needed by the mineral processing engineer before the
beginning of any laboratory tests [4].
The results of the work of process mineralogist on predictive characteristics are used by mineral processing engineers in order to establish the conditions for technological treatment of crude ore, the expected results and, above
all, to direct the plan of the research programme of laboratory tests in definite direction.
Therefore, even just one laboratory test of the sample grindability, with the analysis of modal mineral composition,
provide determination of the key processing parameters, indicates the general guidelines for the flowsheet development and also provide the data on borderline values concerning the mineralogical properties.
The investigative modal research are the most commonly accomplished on the series of (summary, collective
i.e. composite) samples, grounded raw material collected in the plant from different phases of processing
(comminution, classifying, cleaning, regrinding, concentration etc.) or on systematically collected samples
from the recording of the whole plant. By joining all of the data collected by the modal analysis, collected at
appropriate recording points, in accordance with the existing flowsheet, the behaviour of all monitored
minerals by types and size distribution. The results of this analysis can be presented through mineral balances for appropriate designed concentration flowsheet [4].
By using the data from mass balances and the calculations on the overall sampling conducted, the parameters (performance) for flotation of all mineral grains from within any size interval can be monitored both qualitative and
quantitative. Thus, the observed difficulties caused by flowsheet can be easily identified, and appropriate corrections applied. The procedure for correction consists of parameter changes (while processing the ore), the changes
780

PROCEEDINGS
in existing equipment (machines and other equipment) or an installation of the new equipment. Laboratory tests on
the closed flotation circuit are used in simulation and working out of the whole line of different processing options
(the change of conditions) planned with the aim of solving the problems determined.
Investigative research of modal analysis conducted on a series of samples from the industrial plant are providing
the essential information on the behaviour of every mineral and by all size intervals. This data can be used as the
parameters for possible treatment changes in the flowsheet. The parameters of modal composition investigations
are primarily used in deciding the initial values of variables in the simulation cycle preceding the changes in the
flowsheet at the plant.
2. EXPERIMENTAL WORK
Raw material. Within the tested series of samples, galena ratio ranged from 1.47 to 1.65%; marmatite from 2.00%
to 2.30%, and chalcopyrite in somewhat broader interval of 0.49% up to 0.95%. The content of the analysed samples and appropriate grinding fineness are given in table 1.
Table 1. Raw material characteristics for the series of samples with different grinding finenesses
Grinding fineness
Grinding fineness of the ore, %
Pb, %
Galena, %
Zn, %
Marmatite, %
Cu, %
Chalcopyrite, %
Rough
51.20
1.43
1.65
1.54
2.30
0.22
0.64
Normal
59.84
1.27
1.47
1.40
2.09
0.33
0.95
Fine
66.01
1.32
1.52
1.34
2.00
0.17
0.49
Mean
1.55
2.13
0.69
Due to considerable size of the material, only research related with galena will be presented here. The same method of analysis was used for other minerals, too.
Three series of mean representative samples and concentration products from the plant were prepared for these
tests. The series are formed on the basis of different grinding fineness of the material in order to achieve appropriate optimal liberation degree. Samples labelled with N are made of normally ground raw material (corresponding to conditions in the plant), samples labelled with R are that of roughly ground ore and the third series of samples, labelled with F for fine ground raw material, i.e. for the material ground for much longer time than the first
sample with normal grinding fineness. Sampling points of certain products of mineral processing within the
plant are displayed at the diagram of the simplified flowchart, with appropriate changes in grinding fineness.
Samples for each series of appropriate grinding fineness (rough, normal and fine) were classified in narrow intervals
(size fractions) on standard series of screens, each size fraction was chemically analysed and polished sections were
made by briquetting (one or more) for ore microscopy research. The modal mineralogical analysis was accomplished, with all mentioned elements, and the results are presented as mineral balances, or as diagram.
In order to determine the causes for failure in reaching the appropriate galena concentrate grade (with significant
part of copper and zinc and sulphur to some extent) and also the causes of lead loss through lead flotation underflow, the large scale mineralogical research were accomplished. Namely, size intervals were joined as follows: the
first, united size interval was the interval of +0.074 mm, the second was -0.074+0.018 mm, and the third 0.018+0.00 mm. Thus, by joining the particles into these intervals, three intervals were acquired (with relatively
wide margin of size interval) for each product of the processing the feed, the galena concentrate and lead flotation underflow. The same procedure was accomplished for all three initial samples ground to different fineness.
Polished sections of briquetted ore (size fractions) were made, and microscopic research accomplished: identification of mineral individuals, measurements, phase relations and appropriate characteristic occurrences were photographed.
Galena liberation was analysed for all three grinding finenesses, i.e. it was analysed in the feed, in the galena concentrate and in the lead flotation underflow. Particular attention is dedicated to the size above 0.074 mm, i.e. size
below 0.018 mm. Namely it can be showed that galena portion (largely in intergrowth grains) is significant already
by mineral balance. Hence, we have obtained a diagram presented on figure 2, which shows the mass distribution of
the galena in the oversize of 0.074 mm screen in relation to grinding fineness of the tested samples.
781

PROCEEDINGS
Distribution of PbS
in oversize of 0.074 mm screen (%)
50
40
30
N
20
F
10
0
20
30
40
50
W eight distribution
oversize of 0.074 mm screen
Figure 2. Galena distribution in the oversize of 0.074 mm screen vs. grinding fineness (Ffine, Nnormal, Rrough).
Differential grindability of minerals and liberation. The previous research shows that the paragenetic minerals of
this deposit behave differently during the grinding stage. [1, 2, 4, 5]
Figure 3 shows the selectivity in mineral grinding velocity that is previously known, for three analysed grinding
finenesses. The tests served as a simple overview of the behaviour of certain minerals in the grinding process.
The data on zinc, lead and copper distribution achieved through mineral balance for three chosen grinding finenesses are presented on Figure 3. As the only lead carrier in the ore is galena, for zinc marmatite, and nearly whole
copper is completely bound in chalcopyrite, the metal distribution corresponds to mineral distribution: distribution
of lead to galena, zinc to marmatite and copper to chalcopyrite. The lowest grinding fineness of the mineral for G
sample was 56.15% of 0.074 mm screen undersize for marmatite, 70.29% for galena, and 61.28% for chalcopyrite.
The highest grinding fineness of the mineral, for the F sample was 73.34% of 0.074 mm screen undersize, 85.53%
for galena and 77.42% for chalcopyrite.
90
Distribution of PbS
in oversize of 0.074 mm screen
PbS
80
CuFeS2
ZnS
70
60
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
Grinding fineness of ore, % -0.074 mm

Figure 3. Differential mineral grindability for three tests of ore grindability.
Grinding fineness of the ore was set in relation with mass distribution of minerals in the undersize of 0.074 mm screen (mineral distribution).
782

PROCEEDINGS
Therefore, as expected, the galena was comminuted much faster than marmatite, both with low and high finenesses, but it must be noted that the grindability difference is more distinct at the beginning of the grinding process.
Grinding fineness was monitored for the crude ore too. The lowest fineness was 51.20%, and the highest 66.01% of
0.074 mm screen undersize.
The ground samples were subjected to flotation concentration of galena under identical conditions. All of the concentration products the galena concentrate, galena flotation underflow and the raw material itself (the ore
ground to certain grinding fineness) were classified to narrow size intervals, every interval was analysed for Pb, Zn
and Cu content, and appropriate distributions for the elements, i.e. minerals were calculated. The data acquired
metal balances in the feed, in the galena concentrate and in lead flotation undersize were showed in appropriate
tables.
3. TESTS RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

In these tests, the attention was dedicated primarily to the galena, as stated before, i.e. to the galena concentrate
grade. On the basis of microscopic tests, in relation with identification of all the present minerals, determination of
manner and the habit of joining, monitoring of liberation degree of galena vs. changes in crude ore grinding fineness, illustrated by microphotographs and appropriate measeurements accomplished, the following was recognized:
The intergrowth grains of galena in the concentrate of the fine ground sample, can be found most often
with marmatite (when marmatite is the most common phase), then with pyrrhotite, and at last with chalcopyrite and silicate gangue. The most often case is that the intergrowth are trimineral [6, 7]. The occurrences
of joints with tetrahedrite, cubanite or bismuthite are less often.
The size of the grains in the undersize of 0.074 mm screen ranged from 10, i.e. 72 m from up to 112 m
with mean of 92 m. Also, the observation that the galena ratio is relatively small in joints of all types (up to
25% of the particle) is interesting. The ratio of galena in the oversize of the 0.074 mm screen is 14.47%, according to the calculated distribution. (Fig. 2, Table 2).
The intergrowth grains of galena in the concentrate of the normally ground sample are the most common
with pyrrhotite, afterwards with chalcopyrite and off course with marmatite. The mean grain size in the
tested size interval the oversize of the 0.074 mm screen is 148 m (Table 2).
The intergrowth grains of galena in the concentrate of the roughly ground sample are the most common
with silicate gangue, then with pyrrhotite and at last with marmatite. Galena ratio in intergrowth ranges
from 20 up to 60%, while grain size range from 48 to 320 m, with mean of 289 mm (Table 2). At the same
time, galena ratio in the oversize of the 0.074 mm screen, with this size, is 29.71% (Fig. 2).
Table 2. Changes in grinding fineness and the distribution of galena in size interval -0.018+0.000 mm
Mean
grain
size in
oversize
of 0.074
mm
screen,
m
PbS
ratio in
oversize
of 0.074
mm
screen,
%
Grinding
Ore
grinding
fineness,
undersize
of 0.074
mm
screen
Rough
51.20
289
29.71
Normal
59.84
148
22.66
Fine
66.01
92
14.47
Mass ratio of
0.018+0.000
mm size
interval
Crude ore,
PbS ratio in
0.018+0.000
mm interval
PbS concentrate, mass

ratio of 0.018+0.000
size interval
Lead concentrate,
PbS ratio in 0.018+0.000
mm size
interval
Lead flotation underflow, ratio

of 0.018+0.000
mm size
interval
Lead flotation underflow, PbS

ratio in 0.018+0.000
size interval
48
35.61
41.17
10.15
11.32
34.02
44.12
35
42.68
45.83
7.23
6.86
37.57
52.03
22
42.92
46.47
3.96
3.80
41.11
52.91
Mean PbS
ratio in
intergrowth
grains, %
Micrometric characteristics of grains
Behaviour of grains from finest size interval: -0.018+0.000 mm. The special attention was dedicated to the finest
size interval -0.018+0.000 mm, acquired by joining of intervals after accomplishing the Bicker decantation analysis.
Supported by calculated metal balances, i.e. mineral balances for three different grinding fineness, the following
may be concluded:
Very high liberation degree of galena in the finest size interval (nearly 100%);
Insignificant ratio of galena intergrowth grains are predominantly with marmatite or chalcopyrite;
783

PROCEEDINGS
As the grinding fineness grows, the increment intensity of size interval -0.074+0.000 mass ratio is not followed proportionally by the increment of the mass ratio of -0.018+0.000 interval;
The increment of this size interval is increasing from 35.61% up to 42.68%, afterwards it stagnate at 42.92%
with high grinding fineness;
With the change of grinding fineness, the galena ratio (according to mineral distribution) is increasing constantly, from 41.17% and 45.83% up to 46.47%;
As the grinding fineness change, the behaviour of galena in the concentrate is quite unexpected; the galena
ratio is the highest in the roughly ground ore, according to mineral distribution, in normally ground sample
6.86%, while the lowest galena ratio is when the ore is fine ground; only 3.80% (which is the probable consequence of the galena particle flow through the underflow);
Galena ratio in the galena flotation underflow is also increasing constantly, with very high values, from 44.12
to 52.91%, which is, regrettably, a significant galena loss.
These results with basic numerical parameters are presented in Table 2, together with means of appropriate mineral balances. The graphical representation of grinding fineness (data in Table 2) vs. galena ratio (distribution) in the
feed, galena concentrate and galena flotation underflow is presented on Figure 4.
In addition, by accomplishing the microscopic tests, the answers for basic questions that could not be answered
solely by doing a chemical analysis, asked at the beginning of the research were given in an evident manner.
50
The mass rate of

size fraction -0.018 +0.0 mm
Distribution of PbS
in size fraction -0.018+0.0mm (%)
50
40
D
C
F
G
E
B
30
20
40
30
20
10
10
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
Grinding fineness, % -0.074 mm
Figure 4. Relation of ore grinding fineness and galena ratio in -0.018+0.000 mm size fraction, and by mass ratio of the finest interval for: the
crude ore, galena concentrate and galena flotation underflow (at grinding fineness of ore 51.20 %, 59.84 % and 66.01 % -0.o74 mm).
Legend: C-Ground crude ore: distribution of PbS in size fraction 0.018 +0.000 mm; D-Ground crude ore: the mass rate of size fraction 0.018
+0.000 mm; B-Lead flotation underflow: distribution of PbS in size fraction 0.018 +0.000 mm; E-Lead flotation underflow: the mass rate of size
fraction 0.018 +0.000 mm; F-Lead concentrate: the mass rate of size fraction 0.018 +0.000 mm; G-Lead concentrate: acoding to distribution of
PbS in size fraction 0.018 +0.000 mm.
4. CONCLUSION
As a conclusion, it is interesting to point out that already in the feed ore there is a significant amount of liberated
galena grains that should be separated from further processing in order to avoid the overcomminution. By increasing the grinding fineness, a larger quantity of galena, located in intergrowth grains, is starting to crumble by the
edges, thus producing only fine grains of liberated galena, while at the same time the remaining part of the intergrowth (made of hard minerals, because in this association, except for galena and chalcopyrite, they all are harder)
is being comminuted during the following stage of grinding, but initial intergrowth still remains intergrowth. As the
result of this, there is a constant increment of fine grains and galena particles, and on remaining particles (whose
quantity is not decreasing proportionally) we have less and less (but still present) galena (on microphotographs the
galena edges, veins or seizures and embedded zones). The effect of this occurrence is reflected in: low, insufficient
784

PROCEEDINGS
galena liberation degree in concentrate, and on the other side the constant galena loss in lead flotation underflow
in the form of intergrowth with other sulphides.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors gratefully acknowledge the support of the Serbian Ministry for Science, Technology and Development
to the Project TR 33045 Optimisation of Ore Processing from Prlovi Opencast Mine in Rudnik Separation Plant,
sector technological development, under which this work was carried out.
REFERENCES
[1]
Tomanec R.: Diferential milling properties of minerals used in a mineral liberation model at real multiphase systems. Proceedings of the III. International Mineral Processing Symposium, Istanbul, Turkey, 1990, pp 39-49.
[2]
Tomanec R.: "Complex ore modelling, texture and mineral liberation", Physicochemical Problems of Mineral Processing, 25,
Wroclaw, 1992, pp 55-163.
[3]
Tomanec R.,: Metode ispitivanje mineralnih sirovina u pripremi mineralnih sirovina. RGF. Beograd, 2000, p. 315.
[4]
Tomanec R., Marin ., Vuini D.: Selective Pb-Zn mineral liberation - a strategy of mineral saving during comminution Proceedings of the International Conference New Trends in Mineral Processing II, VB-Technical University Ostrava-Poruba,
Czech Republic., 1997, pp. 143-150.
[5]
Tomanec R., Vakanjac B., Miljanovi I., Vuini D.: The Methods Of Modal Mineralogical Analysis In Solving The Problems Of
th
Flotation Concentration Proce-Sses. Proceedings of the 6 Conference on Environment and Mineral Processing, VBTechnical
University of Ostrava, Czech Republic. 2002, pp. 619-628.
[6]
Tomanec R., Lazic P.: Mineral composition of sulphide-oxide Pb - Zn ore from Rudnik mine (Mineralni sastav oksidno-sulfidnih
ruda rudnika Rudnik Underground Mining Engineering 21 (Podzemni radovi XXI), Faculty of Mining and Geology, University of
Belgrade, Belgrade, Serbia. 2012, pp. 151-159.
[7]
Tomanec R., Lazic P., Bajic S., Gacina R.: Characteristics and the possibility of concentration of low grade oxide Pb - Zn ore from
th
Rudnik mine. - Proceedings of 16 International Conference on Waste and Recycling, VB-Technical University of OstravaPoruba, Ostrava, Czech Republic. 2012, pp. 179-185.
785

PROCEEDINGS
UTILIZING GABBRO OF SITES PANTELEJ

AS CONSTRUCTION-TECHNICAL STONE
ABSTRACT
Vojo MIRCOVSKI1
Violeta STEFANOVA2
Tena SIJAKOVA-IVANOVA3
Gorgi DIMOV4
Vasko MIRCOVSKI
Faculty of Natural and Technical Sciences, University Goce Delcev Stip, R.

Macedonia
1
2
violete.stefanova@ugd.edu.mk
3
tena.sijakova@ugd.edu.mk
4
gorgi.dimov@ugd.edu.mk
This paper presents the results of the detailed field and laboratory investigations of gabbro from the locality Pantelej. These investigations are conducted in order to determine the mineralogical-petrographic and technical characteristics of gabrro in order to use as construction stone.
The main minerals that build rock are plagioclase and pyroxene.
Pyroxene is the dominant mineral in this sample, and it is represented by
about 80%. In most pirochsene crystals are occupied with the process of
metamorphosis - uralitisation where they transform to amfibol type: actinolite- tremolit and uralit.
Plagioclase in terms of pyroxene is present in smaller quantities and represented approximately 20%. It occurs like allotriomorphic to hypidiomorphic
crystal belongs to basic plagioclase.
For the determination of the possibilities for the exploitation of this gabbro
as constructing- technical stones, were carried out mineralogical - petrographic and chemical research, as well as, determine the physical - mechanical characteristics of the samples of these rocks. These performance show
that they be able to find wide application in the construction as crushed
stone for constructing for making of all types of concrete and asphalt.
Keywords
Pantelej, Gabbro, Yurasic, Construction-Technical Stone, Mineralogical - Petrographic Features, Physical Mechanical Properties
1. INTRODUCTION
Pantelej locality is located in the eastern part of the Republic of Macedonia near the monastery of St. Pantelej 15
km southeastern from city Kocani (fig.1).
Figure 1. Geographical location of the site Pantelejmon

Geological data for gabbros from site Pantelej and its wider
environment can be found in interpreter for basic geological map of
the Republic Macedonia in the scale of 1:100 000 sheet Stip (T
Rakicevic., N. Dumurdzanov., P Petkovski., 1969).
Further research on gabbros from site Pantelej carried out by (V.
Mircovski and Nauaf Baara 2013).
786

PROCEEDINGS
2. GEOLOGICAL FEATURES
The geological structure of the wider environment of the investigated site is presented according to data from OGK
1:100 000 sheet Stip. (T Rakicevic., N. Dumurdzanov., P Petkovski., 1969). (Fig. 2).
In geological structure of the rocks participate Precambrian, Paleozoic, Mesozoic, Tertiary and Quarter old age.
Precambrian rocks are represented by two-mica stripped gneisses (Gmb), micaschists (Sm), gneisses, and amphibolite micachists (GSm).
Paleozoic rocks are made of quartz-chlorite-sericite schist (Sco), epidote-quartz -sericite-chlorite schist (Sep), amphibolic gabbro (am), Amfibol-chlorite- sericite shale (Samco), quartz-schist and graphitic phylites (Sgr).
Mesozoic rocks are represented by Jurassic gabbro () which are the subject of research in this paper.
Figure 2. Geological map of the surrounding terrain to investigate
787

PROCEEDINGS
Gabbro from this locality occur in the form of a large irregular mass between village Stalkovica and Nivicani village
and penetrate paleozoic chlorite - sericite and quartz - graphite shale. In the area of the monastery Pantelej
through gabbro lie eocene sandstones and limestones, while in other parts they are get trought with quartzmonconite or covered with hornblenda augit biotitic andesites. The age of these gabbro defined as jurasic because
they penetrate paleozoic shale, and upper eocene sediments accumulated through them.
Tertiary rocks are represented by the upper limit of flish (4E3), andenzite tuff (), hornblenda - augit-biotit andesite
(hb), andenzite brachia (), and quarter is present with the old river terraces (t3), proluvia (pr) , lower river terrace
(t1) and aluvium (al).
At the surface gabbro in some parts of the field are heavily modified with very poor physical-mechanical characteristics, and the rest of the field they are fresh and compact with good physical-mechanical characteristics (Fig. 3).
Also gabbro from the northeastern parts of the investigated area of some parts go directly to the surface and is
fresh (Fig. 4), and other parts that are covered with proluvial material mixed with humus (Fig. 5). The thickness of
the cover material and humus is different and it ranges from 0,5-3 m. The average may be taken that the exploitation of gabbro in the investigated area to be removed this material with a thickness of about 1 m.
Figure 3. Fresh gabbro covered with altered gabbro with poor physical-mechanical characteristics
Figure 4. Fresh gabbro that appears on the surface of the ground
788

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 5. Fresh gabbro covered with proluvial material mixed with humus
The formation of ground ie structural forms is conditioned by tectonic movements that occurred during the prePaleozoic, Hercin and Alpine orogeny.
According geotectonic regionalization of Macedonia (M. Arsovski 1997) the investigated field located at the contact
between the Serbo-Macedonian Massif and the Vardar Zone. These two units are separated by a fault structure of
regional character, which on NW is losing in the kratovo-zletovo volcanic area, and the SE in Kocani valley. Gabbro
as a result of the tectonic processes is intensely crushed in decametric blocks.
3. MINERALOGICAL-PETROGRAPHIC FEATURES
By color gabrro is gray greenish, they have grainy compact massive texture and allotriomorphic to hypidiomorphic
grainy structure with homogeneous size of crystal grains. The size of the mineral grains ranging up to 2 mm.
Mineralogical petrographic investigations were performed of the representative samples of core from bore holes
which are perforated in gabbro. Microscopic investigations and microphotographs were made with Polarization
optical microscope with light missed mark LEICA DM 4500 P from Swiss production.
Under the microscope gabbro has allotriomorphic to hypidiomorphic grainy structure with homogeneous size of
the crystal grains which usually moves to 0.5 mm (Fig. 6 and 7). The main minerals that build up the rock are plagioclase and pyroxene.
Pyroxene is the dominant mineral in gabbro and its amount ranges from 60-80%. In most piroxene crystals are
occupied with the process of metamorphose ie uralization where they pass into amfibol like aktinolit - tremolit and
Uralit (Fig. 8 and 9). These minerals occur in the form of fineleaf and needle crystals. Also appear fresher diopside
crystals in the shape of fine leaf form or as relics in rectangular shapes in less affected by metamorphose piroxene
primary crystals. Typical for diopside that in most crystals comes to separating the Fe - component in the form of
the fine black aggregates found in the crystal (Fig. 8).
Plagioclase in terms of the pyroxene is present in smaller amounts (20-40%) It occurs to allotriomorphic to hypidiomorphic crystal and belongs to the basic plagioclase. The size of the grains typically range up to 0.5 mm (Fig. 6
and 7) a rarely occurring crystal size reaching up to 2 mm. Plagioclase also is occupied with the process of metamorphose when he goes in fine aggregates of the small chalk sosirite (Fig. 9). The individual crystals larger and
cooler in plagioclase appear polisintetical plate ie lamellar twining (Fig.10).
789

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 6. Allotriomorphic-hypidiomorphic grainy structure (Pir - pyroxene, Pl - plagioclase). N
Figure 7. Allotriomorphic-hypidiomorphic grainy structure (Pir - pyroxene, Pl - plagioclase). N
Figure 8. Process of uralization of the pyroxene where he spends in amfibol the type of actinolite - tremolite and uralite., (Pir - pyroxene). N
790

PROCEEDINGS
Figure 9. Metamorphosis of plagioclase into fine grains of the epidote-coesite and calcite. (Pl - plagioclase, Pir - pyroxene). N .
Figure 10. Lamellar twining in plagioclase. (Pl - plagioclase). N +
Figure 11. Calcite thin wire with a thickness of about 1 mm and separation
of the Fe - component in pyroxene in the shape of the black fine aggregates. (Cc - calcite, Ural - uralization in pyroxene). N-.
791

PROCEEDINGS
4. CHEMICAL TRAILS
The chemical composition of gabbro is determined at the three samples at the Faculty of Natural and Technical
Sciences from Stip with a method of inductively connected plasma (I-). The obtained data are shown in table
1.
From the analysis we can conclude that the most common is SiO2 which ranges is between 44.89 - 45.25 %, then
the representation have been Al2O3 with content of 23.95 - 24.67 % and CaO content from 15.10 to 15.40 %. The
other components are represented in smaller amounts. The content of SiO2 and other components indicates that it
is a basic magmatic rocks.
Table 1. Chemical analyzes of the gabbro from the site Pantelej - Kocani
P-1
P-2
P-3
Oxide
(%)
(%)
(%)
SiO2
45.01
44.89
45.25
iO2
0.24
0.21
0.25
l2O3
24.02
23.95
24.67
Fe2O3
3.10
2.90
3.35
Fe
4.55
4.90
4.40
Mn
0.20
0.23
0.19
MgO
2.85
2.98
2.95
15.40
15.70
15.30
N2O
0.69
0.73
0.72
K2O
0.67
0.69
0.68
P2O5
2.30
2.10
2.50
H2O-
0.04
0.01
0.02
99.07
99.29
100.05
H2O
5. PHYSICAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Physical - mechanical characteristics of gabbro been studied in Civil Engineering Institute in Skopje, Macedonia.
The survey methodology has been applied to laboratory tests according to existing standards for this kind of stuff.
The results of physical mechanical tests are shown in table 2.
From physical mechanical parameters especially should be noted the strength of pressure in dry condtion which
ranges from 215-240 MPa. The results of the examinations of physical - mechanical, mineral - petrographic and
chemical features of the the gabbro from site Pantelej can conclude that gabbro has extremely high strength of
the mole fracture pressure, resistance to the action of frost, extremely high abrasion resistance and scraping, minimal or blip water absorption and high volume weight.
The mineral - petrographic and chemical analyzes are not determined harmful mineral and chemical components.
According to the established features gabbro can find wide application in building for preparing all types of concrete, asphalt and other purposes.
Table 2. Results obtained from tests performed on same physical - mechanical parameters
Tested parameter
Unit measure
Label
Result
Strength of pressure in dry conditions
MPa
p sred
230.2
Strength of pressure in wet conditions
MPa
p sred
199.8
Water absorption
0.02
Resistance to abrasion by scraping
cm3/50cm2
Ab
3.85
Volume mass with pores and cavities
kg/m3
3000
Porosity
0.7
792

PROCEEDINGS
6. CONCLUSION
Based on completed mineralogical - petrographic, chemical and physical - mechanical tests can say that the gabbro
from site Pantelej are characterized by high quality and they can find wide application in the construction industry
as a raw material for technical-building stone for preparing all kinds concrete, asphalt, etc.
REFERENCES
[1]
Arsovski M., 1997: Tectonics of Macedonia. RGF - Stip.
[2]
Blazev K., and Naunov J., 2002: Monography of Kocani and area of Kocani: Basic structure - geological features of Kocani region.
[3]
Vakanjac B., 1992: The Geology of nonmetallic minerals, Faculty of Mining and Geology, Belgrade.
[4]
Kovacevic M. Petkovski P., Temkova V., 1973: interpreters of basic geological map of R. M. 1: 100 000 shit Delevo. Geological Survey
of Skopje.
[5]
Mirchovski V., Stefanova V., Sijakova-Ivanova T., 2012: Project for detailed geological surveys of mineral gabbro on the site "Pantelej"
- Kocani. Geohidroinzhenering - consulting Tetovo.
[6]
Rakichevikj T., Dumurdzhanov N., Petkovski P., 1969: Interpreter for basic geological map of the Republic. M. 1: 100 000 sheet Stip.
Geological Institute Skopje.
[7]
M. Stojanovic., 2005: Deposits of non-metallic minerals in Macedonia.
[8]
Law on Mineral Resources. (Official Gazette of RM no. 24/07, 88/208, 52/2009 6/2010 and 158/2010)).
[9]
Rulebook on geological documentation of detailed geological research.
[10] Rulebook for the classification and categorization of reserves of solid minerals and keeping records of them (SFRY Official List of
19th 10 1979)
793

PROCEEDINGS
CONCEPT OF THE MINING MUSEUM

IN KOSTOLAC, REPUBLIC OF SERBIA
ABSTRACT
Jovica NIKOLI1
Nenad MAKAR
Dragan MILOJEVI
Saa MITI

1
jovica.nikolic@ribeograd.ac.rs
At the surface dig site Klenovnik in the coal basin Kostolac mining operations are being shut down.
The projected solution of reclamation, revitalization and landscaping of the
area degraded through exploitation, plans for natural function restoration agriculture and foresting. As a part of this complex a mining museum is
planned in the northwestern area on a surface oh 4.4 ha. According to the
concept solution, the museum complex encompasses three set-ups: in the
open, in the pavilion and underground set-up.
Estimates are that the museum will be very attractive for visitors not only for
its contents, but also for its proximity to the archeological-museum complex
Viminacijum, an excellent geographical position in relation to cities like
Poarevac, Smederevo, Belgrade, Panevo, Sremska Mitrovica, Novi Sad etc.
and for its proximity to a large tourist river road of Danube. This paper displays the concept solution of the museum.
Keywords
Kostolac, Mining Museum, Klenovnik, Landscaping
1. INTRODUCTION
In the far away 1870. the first mining effort began in the coal deposit of Kostolac and it is going on today still, with
the perspective of coal exploitation for the next coule of decades.
The first mining effort was started in 1870, by Franjo Veteka in the pit "Old Kostolac", and the first registered
official production was in 1873, and came to 752,5 t.
In continuation of mining ore Vajfert bought in 1881, the mine "Old Kostolac", and invested vast resources. He
also hired an experienced mining expert Franja istek, whose contribution in development of mining in Kostolac
was great.
Mining in the Kostolac coal basin in the beginning and for some time later, was done through pit exploitation first
in the "Old Kostolac" pit and then in 1883, the mine "Klenovnik" is opened which consisted out of three pits. In
1954, the pit "irikovac" is opened where pit exploitation continued in this region. When the "irikovac" pit was
closed in 1973, pit exploitation ends in the coal basin of Kostolac.
Based on the existing exploration of the deposit of coal in Kostolac, in 1943. the Germans opened the first surface
dig site "Kostolac", which was then the first surface dig site in our country. The surface dig site "Kostolac" operated
until 1979. In order to maintain a certain production of coal level, in 1973, the surface dig site "irikovac" is opened
and has operated uninterrupted until 2009. In 1983, the surface dig site "Klenovnik" is opened, and in 1984. the surface dig "Drmno" is opened, which is at this time the only location where coal is being exploited in the Kostolac coal
basin complex.
Since 1948. until today the coal produced in the Kostolac dig sites is largely spent in existing thermal power plants
of a 1.000 MW capacity, and in lesser quantities for the needs of the general public and miscellaneous.
From the previously stated, as well as based on 140 years of mining in the Kostolac area, an initiative was set in
motion that on the jubilee preparations for formation and construction of the Mining museum of Kostolac should
begin.
795

PROCEEDINGS
Base guidelines for museum construction:

The Mining museum represents the display area on which
the development of mining as well as work and lives of the
miners since the beginning of mining until today is to be
displayed. In the same area all of the archives would be
kept and displayed, as well as objects and minin machines
which display the mining era at the Kostolac coal dig site
areas.
Location of the museum
For the proposed location of the museum is the management building, as well as the area around the management building of the surface dig site "Klenovnik" which
has ceased coal production.
Figure 1. The position of the museum in

the Republic of Serbia
Figure 2. Wider area of the museum location
796

PROCEEDINGS
2. LOCATION OF THE MINING MUSEUM

The proposed location of the museum is the management building of the surface dig site "Klenovnik"
with its surroundings, which has ceased coal production. The surface of the area is 4.4 ha.
The location of the future museum is connected by
an asphalt road 428 m long with a regional road
which connects Poarevac - Kostolac and further archeological site "Viminacijum", dig site "Drmno" and
Ramu.
The museum is located at a 1000 m from Kostolac.
Figure 3. Mining museum location
The display area consists of:

An internal exhibition, in the construction framework, (mining houses and management buildings with a
conference room)
Open exhibition (area around the management building) and
Underground exhibition (on the inside of the newly built underground areas)
3. INTERNALL EXIBITION
Miners house
The miners house has the following areas: room; kitchen ; storage ; porch ; in total 56 m2.
Figure 4. Miners house
Management building with a conference room
Figure 5. View on the management building
797

PROCEEDINGS
4. EXTERNAL EXHIBIT
Artifacts of larger dimensions such as busts, info panels, mining equipment and mechanization, would be displayed
in an open area on the plateau around and in front of the pavilion.
Figure 6. Area of the mining museum of Kostolac
Artifacts which will be displayed on the external exhibit of the pavilion (figures 7)
Busts, (Franjo Vetaka, ore Vajfert and Franjo istek)
Educational contents:
Mining house,
Geological pillar,
Geological profile etd.
ore Vajfert
Equipment and devices (figures 8, 9 and 10)
Rotor excavator SchRs 300 12/1
Console disposer ARsB-3000 x 50
798
Steam locomotive UNRA

PROCEEDINGS
Equipment and devices to be placed on the external exhibit of the museum

1. Basic mechanization
Dragline E 45/5;
Spoon excavator "EKG-4,6".
Rotor excavator SchRs 300 12/1;
Rotor excavator SchRs 250 12/1;
2. Locomotive transport
Rotor excavator "LWK-102 (boy);
3. Equipment for crushing, classification and coal
measurement
Disposal unit for small coal disposal on depots
"LWK-102 (girl);
4. Pit exploitation
Rotor excavator SRs 470 14/2 (internal no. 4);
5. Auxiliary mechanization
Bandvagen BRs 1200 29/32 (STT Trbovlje);
6. Equipment and mechanization for geological and
hydro-geological operations
RLT 6 cable winder 5,3 - 5,8 (TAKRAF DDR);
Dragline excavator E-2503
The display of the external exhibit is on the following figure:
Figure 11. Display of the external exhibit
5. UNDERGROUND EXHIBIT
Besides the aforementioned exhibit areas, the construction of an underground area was planned with the purpose
of presentation and coal exploitation simulation in pit conditions.
The area for pit presentation, will be constructed along with the construction of a new area of a tunnel type with a
concrete construction 60 m in length, with seven cross corridors 70 m in length which have different cross section
dimensions. The concrete construction will be created by digging into the nearby cam. The interior of the concrete
construction will be coated with different types of support units which were used in the underground coal mines in
Serbia during the last couple of centuries. The underground area has more kverova which have a specific purpose,
so that in each there is a depiction of a certain scene or scenario from the life and work of the miners in the coal
mine pits.
Figure 12. Underground structure with characteristic cross section profiles
799

PROCEEDINGS
Artifacts in the underground exhibition

Through text and pictures below some of the proposed scenes and scenarios which would be displayed in this part
of the museum are depicted.
Depiction of scene no. 1

A multimedia tale of the beginning as
well as the method of mining in the
Kostolac pits told by a doll sitting at
the pit table with old mining lamp
and adequate lighting.
Depiction of scene no. 2.

Represents the oldest method of
mining and coal transport in the pits
of Kostolac depicted through a multimedia story (up to 5 min). A miner
(doll) at the dig site using his tools to
mine for coal. The other miner with a
carrier pours the coal in the pit wagon with wooden sides.

Depiction of the blasting in the Kostolac pits - with a blasting simulation at
the dig site with sound, visual and
smoke effects.

Multimedia depiction of pit mining in
the Kostolac pits with a display of a
combine for creation of rooms in the
pit, with adequate lighting.
800

PROCEEDINGS

Display of an old pit corridor supported by wood support with a track and a
pit wagon.
Depiction of scene no.6

Display of mechanized creation of pit
rooms with a combine (PK-3) with
adequate lighting
6. DYNAMICS AND VALUE OF CONSTRUCTION

The construction of the museum according to the plan will take at least 4 years, while the cost will be the highest in
the first year of construction. Upon completion, constant efforts on perfecting the museum will be required, adding
new artifacts, modernizing the multimedia presentations and scenes etc.
7. CONCLUSION
At the area of the terminated surface dig sit, construction of a mining museum Kostolac is being planned. The
choice of location was made for the following reasons: proximity to the town settlement of Kostolac, proximity to
the archeological site "Viminacijum", proximity of the surface dig sites and old pits of the Kostolac mining basin, at
the location there already exists an infrastructure; asphalt roads, power lines, water and sewage networks.
At the museum area artifacts will be displayed from areas of underground and surface exploitation as well as educational contents of everything that represents coal exploitation and the life of miners at the Branievo county
area.
REFERENCES
[1]
Investor Documentation (in Serbian).
[2]
Spatial plan for the special area of the Kostolac coal basin (Institute for Architecture and Urbanism of the Republic of Serbia,
2012), (in Serbian).
[3]
Case study on the environmental influence assessment for the desulfuring smoke gasses processing plant, TP Kostolac B (Consortium, 2010), (in Serbian).
[4]
Project organization Documentation, Mining Institute, Belgrade (in Serbian).
801

PROCEEDINGS
REFORMING THE EDUCATIONAL SYSTEM

- BUILDING QUALITY WORKFORCE
ABSTRACT
Valentina MANEVSKA1
Roze ARSOVSKA2
The dynamic changes in the society and the complexity of the problems which the
employees face every day are causing changes in the knowledge, the skills and the
competencies of the employees and the professionals, that necessarily reflects in the
vocational education and training. The development of the society and the economy
requires educational system that will provide knowledge, skills and competencies
that are needed or required on the labor market.
The work in this paper pays special attention to the specific knowledge and skills that
the students in the high school vocational education will gain, specifically the students studying the mining geology and metallurgy vocation. Until now, the high
school vocational education was working with teaching programs that were 20 years
old, and were mainly focusing on educating the teachers how to convey the teaching
material for the students to gain the necessary education as a main priority.
This paper is an addition to the old teaching programs and the main priority in the
elaborated reforms are the students and what they should learn at the end of each
class. The studying results from the teaching programs are defined and they are clear
record of the knowledge, the skills and the professional values which the student
must possess and acquire for successful completion of the teaching program for the
specific subject.
The elaborated reforms represent the transformation towards more modern educational system. In this paper they are presented through several major concepts [2]:
1
Vocacional school Taki Daskalot,
Bitola, Republic of Macedonia valevalentinam007@gmail.com
2
CSOO, Skopje, Republic of Macedonia
roze.perusoska@yahoo.com
Changes in the concept of knowledge that is defined as a complicated structure

from theoretical knowledge (declarative and metacognitive), skills, procedural
knowledge and human attitudes;
Changes in the concept of learning where more important is the development of

the knowledge at the student instead of the way that the teacher conveys the
teaching material;
Emphasizes the active role of the student;
Introduction of the mentoring role of the teacher;
Inserting tasks including solving problems, project works etc.;
By using funds from the twinning project Support to the modernization of the vocational education and training system in cooperation with the Slovenian partner, the
reforms in the high school vocational education have started. A total of 13 vocations
for the second and third degree of education are covered with a total of 47 profiles.
Using the reforms elaborated in this paper new curriculums have been developed for
the profile mining machines operator.
Keywords
High School Vocational Education, Mining Geology and Metallurgy Vocation, Teaching Programs, Twinning Project
1. INTRODUCTION
Why this paper and why here? In R. Macedonia vocational education aims to prepare professionals to meet the
needs of the labor market, but also for continuing education. The first objective allows, graduated professionals to
employ and demonstrate acquired competencies, ie effectively and efficiently complete their tasks and
responsibilities. But for many years employers have closed their doors for students to acquire the skills required for
a job, and constantly complain that the schools have students who have acquired quite a good theoretical
802

PROCEEDINGS
knowledge but are not sufficiently prepared to meet the needs of the workplace and should be additionally
invested in, ie be trained for appropriate working places. The same story is heard daily for students who graduate
from higher education institutions.
In this paper I would like to present the recently completed pilot reform in three-year vocational education and
two-year professional training that provide more practical training for students (40% and 50%) in schools and the
employer and meeting the needs of their requirements for qualified labour force.
The twinning project started implementation in October 2011 until June 2013.It is a project to reform the
educational profile of a total of 14 vocations, 13 vocations in the three-year vocational education and an
educational profile in two-year vocational training. The project offered a new process and a way of planning and
development of educational programs. To get to the new curriculum, first we had to develop a profile of
occupation, occupational standards, standards of professional qualifications, educational program, curriculum and
exam programs of practical work.
What were the reasons for introducing the changes? In this paper we tried to single out the most important
reasons for introducing changes in the three-year vocational education and two years of training, including:
outdated curricula (since 1989);
qualifications do not meet the needs of the labor market and the modern tendencies;
lack of flexibility and poor horizontal and vertical transfer;
a large number of professions and narrow educational profiles;
qualifications are not suitable for SMEs and qualifications in the field of service and craftsmanship; weak
program functional continuity with primary, high and higher education;
incompatibility with vocational education in developed European countries.
What has the reform brought? The change and the realization of the objectives of reforms have been implemented
at three levels:
Program-new educational programs (targeted, competency-oriented, learning outcomes);
Methodical-didactic-application of modern approaches to teaching and learning (collaborative learning and

teaching, individualization of instruction and the use of modern technologies);
Performing-organizational -to allow better development and achievement of competencies among students, to overcome the fragmentation of the traditional subjects.
What are the innovations in the new curricula? APPLICATION OF PRACTICAL TRAINING: 40% in three years and
50% in two years of education;
OBLIGATORY PRACTICL TRAINING WITH AN EMPLOYER: at least 1/3 of the total number of classes of practical
instruction in the three years have to be implemented in real business processes in relevant firms.
OPENNESS OF PROGRAMS: 10% to 20% are left to the teacher to program the content according to the needs of
the environment (only the special vocational courses of vocational-theoretical part are opened and that part is not
included in the external evaluation);
FLEXIBILITY OF HOURS REQUIRED FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF THEMATIC UNITS: the annual number of classes is
defined, and the teacher determines how many classes will be programmed to achieve the objectives for each
thematic unit
EXAM PROGRAM: Making a test program for the final exam which defines the performance of the examination,
learning outcomes and student assessment
DEFINED LEARNING RESULTS (EDUCATIONAL OUTPUT) define the learning outcomes that are a clear record of
knowledge, skills and values that the student has to express for the successful completion of the curriculum of the
subject
What are the results of learning (learning outcomes)?
Learning outcomes are what students should be able to do after they finish the classes,
the focus is on the students and not on the teachers as to date, ie. from tha individual to the process;
participants in education are drawn to what they are expected to know, to be able to do, teachers to what
to teach, and parents and employers, what the students will be able to work when they successfully complete the educational program.
The new curricula begins application on 1st September 2013.
803

PROCEEDINGS
Why this paper at this conference? In order to successfully implement innovations in curricula, mutual cooperation
of employers and schools with their full support is required. The school alone can not prepare the student for the
labor market. So, students need to realize most of the practical training in companies and business organizations.
In order to realize this, we need to have open doors in companies and accept the students and with their help to
create a professional and trained staff, who immediately after graduation could be directly involved in the labor
market.
2. METHODS
Starting points for reform in three-year vocational education and two-year of professional training?
The Centre for vocational education and training, in anticipation of these reforms has prepared the backgrounds
for successful implementation, namely [3]:
PROTOCOL FOR SOCIAL PARTNERSHIP: On 15 October 2010 a protocol was signed between CVET with 11
social partners for the first time.
MEMORANDUM FOR UNDERSTANDING separate memorandums of understanding between CVET and the
social partners were signed
METHODOLOGY FOR DEVELOPMENT OF OCCUPATIONAL STANDARDS The Center for Vocational Education
and Training in collaboration with the British Council have prepared the manual Methodology for the development of occupational standards
PREPARATION OF PILOT OCCUPATIONAL STANDARDS: With the support of the British Council and the
USAID project to improve institutional operations, implemented by World Learning 28 pilot occupational
standards were developed (14 occupational standards in 2010 and 14 occupational standards in 2011).
STANDARDS FOR STUDENTS PRACTICAL TRAINING FOR EMPLOYERS: The Center for Vocational Education
and Training has developed the standards.
Based on the professions needs expressed by the Employment Agency and active occupations in three-year
vocational training, the center for vocational education and training have determined which educational profiles
should be a priority in the reform.
For this purpose, teams (working groups) were formed ho were working on determining the competencies for each
profile, ie the skills and knowledge the students need to have after completing their education.
25 standards for vocational qualifications were reformed with defining of expert and key competencies that are
basis for making instructional plans and programs, and which suit the labor market.
The Chamber of commerce is involved in the teams to identify the market needs i.e. which educational profiles are
missing in the Republic of Macedonia not to generate unnecessary workforce.
Based on the methodology for the development of occupational standards (2009), 51 occupational standards for 13
professional areas have been developed [1].
The standard of occupation determines the content of professional qualifications (knowledge, skills and
competencies), and is a link between the labor market and education. The development of occupational standards
must be based on the principle of social dialogue and their preparation should systematically include all key
partners at national level in defining the content of occupations and qualifications, their complexity and market
needs for future years. More important is the cooperation between advanced entities in the industry, craftsmanship
and service activity so as to have early detection of the need for new skills and growing trends.
During the project, through working with employers in all working groups, it has been ensured that standards
contain all their requirements for knowledge, skills and competencies for specific qualifications.
The diagram No. 1 shows the involvement of the social partners in the development of educational documents
804

PROCEEDINGS
Diagram No. 1. Involvement of the social partners in the working groups
For preparation of Standards for vocational qualifications a Methodology for developing standards for vocational
qualifications has been developed based on which 25 standards of professional qualifications in 13 vocational areas
have been developed. The standards for vocational qualifications are an important tool that connects education
and the labor market and provides information about the competencies acquired and proven by the person and
what needs employers have.
Methodology for development of educational programs
The diagram No. 2 shows the structure of the methodology for the development of educational programs.
Diagram No. 2. Methodology for development of educational programs
805

PROCEEDINGS
This methodology develops all components of an educational program for certain educational profile. The first
component of the educational program is a general part wich includes:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Identification data of the educational program

General and special conditions for entry into the educational program
Description
Educational process
Curriculum
Infrastructure for performance
Terms of execution and completion
Composition of the working group
The second component is a separate part of the program that includes curriculum consisting of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Title of the educational program

Title of the curriculum for the subject
Year of study and number of lessons
Competencies
Aims and results of learning
Operationalization of competence
Didactic guidance
Forms of evaluation
Norms for teachers
Composition of Working Group
Program approval
The third component of the educational program is an exam program which includes:
1. Title of educational program
2. Title of unit
3. Exam objectives / learning outcomes
4. Test performance
5. Learning Outcomes
6. Assessment
7. Turning of points into a grade
8. Composition of working group
We developed educational programs for the following occupational standards by professional areas:
operator of mining machinery
gypsum constructor / fitter
printer
electrician and fitter
gardener florist
hairdresser
mechanic
operator of material transmitting machinery
clothes maker (confection)
waiter
butcher
carpenter
seller (shop assistant)
806

PROCEEDINGS
What preparations need to do to start implementing the new curriculum? First, you need to plan the teaching
process. New programs which are based on the competencies require push-start from programs that were targeted
to content (what is learned?) to programs aimed at targets (how to learn?) for the purpose of planning the
development of competencies and achievements of learning outcomes.
The planning should be at school and teacher level.
1.
Planning at school level requires:

Team decision of teachers to deliver certain parts of the program that can be connected and thus achieve
greater teaching quality (connecting theory and practice, correlation between subjects);
Decision, which should be taken at the level of school as a whole (organization, material conditions, practices with the employer).
2.
Planning at teacher level requires:

professional and independent decisions of teachers who teach certain programs (methods and work strategies, achieving goals, evaluation criteria, etc.)
Preparation for full execution of curriculum through planning the teaching requires:
1. Plan for the lessons of the whole program and a detailed plan for each school year
2. lesson planning for the whole program includes:
division of lessons of vocational theoretical subjects and practical training for the adoption of specific competencies;
the open part of the curriculum;
plan for practical training in the workplace
3. The annual plan includes:
Adjustments to achieve objectives;
Correlation between subjects;
methodical-didactic planning;
Organization;
Integration with teachers of general-education courses
4. Creating the content in the open part of the professional teaching programs in cooperation with the social
partners in the local government.
3. DISCUSSION
In order to implement these reforms as mentioned we must have full cooperation with employers.
However, to realize all this it is necessary to have:
capacity to present style of leadership and organization of the school employees, to implement the main
ideas of the reformed educational programs;
capacity to present the culture of self-evaluation and quality assurance in schools;
capacity for ongoing collaboration between schools and employers to reduce the spacing between the sector of vocational education and the labor market.
But the flexibility of the programs in which practical instruction is represented by a greater number of lessons
requires extensive cooperation with principals, who will allow greater freedom in making the schedule for teaching
in general. Only in this way, with full cooperation of schools and employers our staff can meet the needs of the
labor market.
REFERENCES
[1]
CSOO Methodology for development of ocupational standards, Republic of Macedonia, 2009.
[2]
CSOO Conception for vocational education professions, Skopje 2009.
[3]
Law for vocational education and training official newspaper of Republic of macedonia no.71 08.06.2006.
807

www.siming.eu
032 / 635-976 637-007 637-008
MARKOVSKI COMPANY

th
5 JUBILEE
BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

18th-21st September 2013
PROCEEDINGS
Publisher
Association of Mining and Geological
Engineers of Macedonia
For the Publisher
Ljupcho TRAJKOVSKI
Graphic Design
Dejan D. NIKOLOVSKI
nikolovski2004@t-home.mk
www.balkanmine.mk
contact@balkanmine.mk
CIP -
". ",
622(497)(062)
PROCEEDINGS [ ] : 5th jubilee Balkan mining
congress : 18th-21st September 2013, Ohrid, Republic of Macedonia. PDF , .. - Skopje : Association of mining
and geological engineers of Macedonia, 2013. - 1 - ; 12
(URL): http://www.balkanmine.mk. -
. - 30.10.2013.
ISBN 978-608-65530-2-9
) - -
COBISS.MK-ID 94936330

BALKANMINE 2013 - Eproceedings (FULL)

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

BALKANMINE 2013 - Eproceedings (FULL)

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

This page intentionally left blank.

5th JUBILEE BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

This page intentionally left blank.

BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

18th-21st September 2013

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

Macedonia, Ohrid, 2013

INTERNATIONAL BALKANMINE CONGRESS COORDINATION COMMITTEE

BALKANMINE CONGRESS SCIENTIFIC REVIEWERS

President of the BALKANMINE

M.Sc. Sasho JOVCHEVSKI

MINE SURVEY ........................................................................................................................ 27

Slobodan VUJI, Marjan HUDEJ, Igor MILJANOVI

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

Vujadin ALEKSIC, Srdjan BULATOVIC, Ljubica MILOVIC

MINING AND SAFETY ....................................................................................................... 171

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

GEOPHYSICS IN MINING .................................................................................................. 258

COMPUTER INTEGRATED SYSTEMS ................................................................................ 290

ROCK MECHANICS, MASSIF CONTROL AND SLOPE STABILITY ...................................... 318

FUNCTIONAL REHABILITATION OF THE DISRUPTED NORTHERN SLOPE

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

Ing. Petr TOMEK

BALKAN MINERAL INDUSTRY .......................................................................................... 415

SYSTEM ENGINEERING .................................................................................................... 431

MANAGEMENT AND MINING ECONOMICS ...................................................................... 438

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

MINERAL PROCESSING.................................................................................................... 521

ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING .................................................................................... 572

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

eljko PRATALO, Simeun MARIJANAC, Dragan M. MILOEVI, Branka JOVANOVI

RESTRUCTURING AND REENGINEERING ........................................................................ 659

LEGISLATION, NORMS AND EDUCATION ........................................................................ 672

EXPLOITATION OF SOLID MINERAL RESOURCES ........................................................... 685

MINERAL RESOURCES AND MINE GEOLOGY .................................................................. 740

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

HISTORY AND MINE EDUCATION .................................................................................... 794

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

MULTI-VARIABLE ASSESSMENT OF RISK IN SELECTION

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

2. PROMETHEE METHOD PRINCIPLES

Linear preference for the indifference area

P(a, b) (d - q)/(p - q), if q d p

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

3. AN EXAMPLE OF MULTICRITERIA SELECTION OF OPEN PIT MINE OPENING LOCATION

K2[min] - Quantity of the pre-production overburden (m3);

K3[max] - Rate of reaching the designed coal production capacity;

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

Opening cut alternative

Table 3. Initial matrix

Table 4. Evaluation flow

Table 5. PROMETHEE ranking

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

Premogovnik Velenje d. d., Velenje,

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

1. PRESENTATION OF VELENJE COAL MINE

Coalmining as a process of underground

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

5th BALKAN MINING CONGRESS

2. DEVELOPMENT OF VELENJE MINING METHOD AND EQUIPMENT

The entire longwall excavation process is based on the